CORNELL 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 GIFT OF 
 AnorQrmous 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
DATE DUE 
 
 gg^rBTTf^ 
 
 PRINTED IN U.S.A. 
 
 Cornell University Library 
 PA 258.K95 1872 
 
 Grammar of the Greeli languaaeJor the us 
 
 3 1924 021 601 160 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
This book was digitized by Microsoft Corporation in 
 
 cooperation with Corneii University Libraries, 2007. 
 
 You may use and print this copy in iimited quantity 
 
 for your personai purposes, but may not distribute or 
 
 provide access to it (or modified or partiai versions of it) 
 
 for revenue-generating or other commerciai purposes. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archi^9^.grg/,^^J^il§^u31 924021 601 1 60 
 
E^•TEl:ED, according to Art of Congress, in the year 1852, 
 
 By D. APPLETON & CO., 
 
 In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the United Stntcs 
 
 for the'Southern District of New York. 
 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE 
 
 Raphael Kuilner, the author of the following Grammar 
 was born at Gotha, in 1802. From 1812 to 1821, he 
 studied at the celebrated gymnasium in his native city. 
 Among his classical teachers were Doring, Rost and Wiiste- 
 mann. From 1821 to 1824, he enjoyed, at the University 
 of Gottingen, the instructions of Mitscherlich, Dissen and 
 Ottfried Miiller. While there, he prepared an- essay on 
 the philosophical writings of Cicero, which received a 
 prize. Since 1824, he has been a teacher in the Lyceum 
 at Hanover. The principal works from the pen of Dr. 
 Kiihner are the following : 
 
 1. Versuch einer neuen Anordnung der griechischen Syntax, 
 
 mit Beispielen begleitet. 1829. '' Attempt towards a 
 new Arrangement of the Greek Syntax," etc. 
 
 2. M. Tull. Ciceronis Tusculan. Disputationum libri. 1829 
 
 ed. altera 1835 ; ed. tertia 1846. 
 
 3. Sammtliche Anomalien des griechischen Verbs in Attisch. 
 
 Dialecte, 1831. " Anomalies of the Greek Verb, etc. 
 
 4. Ausfiihrliche Grammatik der griechischen Sprache, in 2 
 
 Theilen, 1834, 1835. " Copious Grammar of the Greek 
 Language, in two Parts." The second Part of this 
 - ' grammar, containing the Syntax, translated by "W. E. 
 Jelf, of the University of Oxford, was published in 
 1842; the first Part in 1845. A second edition of 
 Jelf s translation of this work was published in 1851. 
 This 'ft'wik is, however, only in part a translation, Mr. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 Jelf being the author of the remarks on the CascE, the 
 particle av, the compound verbs, etc. 
 
 5. Schulgrammatik der griechischen Sprache, 1836 ; zweite 
 
 durchaus verbesserte u. vermehrte Auflage, lo4£j; 
 dritte verbesserte und vermehrte Auflage 1851, 
 "School Grammar of the Greek Language, third 
 edition,, improved and enlarged." The present vol- 
 ume is a translation of this Grammar, from the 
 sheets, furnished for this purpose by the author. 
 
 6. Elementargrammatik der griechischen Sprache, neuiite 
 
 Auflage 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Greek 
 Language, containing a series of Greek and Eng- 
 lish exercises for translation with the requisite vocab- 
 ularies." This Grammar, translated by Mr. S. H. 
 Taylor, one of the translators of the present volume, 
 has passed through eleven editions in this country. 
 
 7. Xenophontis de Socrate Commentarii, 1841. 
 
 8. Elementargrammatik der lateinischen Sprache, siebent 
 
 Auflage, 1850. " Elementary Grammar of the Latin 
 Language with Exercises." This Grammar, trans- 
 lated by Prof. Champlin, of Waterville College, has 
 passed through several editions in this country. 
 
 9. Lateinische Vorschule nebst eingereihten lateinischen 
 
 und deutschen Ubersetzungsaufgaben, vierte Auflage, 
 
 1849. 
 10, Schulgrammatik dei lateinischen Sprache, dritte sehi 
 
 verbesserte Auflage, 1850. " School Grammar of 
 
 the Latin Language, third edition, greatly improved." 
 Dr. Kiihner has also published in the Bibliotheca Graeca 
 the first part of his edition of Xenophon's Anabasis. 
 
 From the above statements, it will be seen that Dr. 
 Kiihner has enjoyed the most favorable opportunities for 
 preparing the work, a translation of which is now pre- 
 sented to the public. The names of his early instructors 
 are among the most honored in classical philology. For 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PKEPAOE. Vll 
 
 ■ nearly thirty years, he has been a teacher in one of tin- 
 principal German gymnasia, and has thus had ample facili- 
 ties for testing in practice the principles which he has 
 adopted in his Grammars. At the same time, he has pur- 
 sued the study of the classical authors with the greatest 
 diligence, in connection with the productions which his 
 learned countrymen are constantly publishing on the differ- 
 ent parts of Latin and Greek grammar. Of course, his 
 works might be expected to combine the advantages of 
 sound, scientific principles with a sldlful adaptation to prac- 
 tical use. The " School Grammar of the Greek Lan- 
 guage," being his latest publication, contains the results of 
 his most mature studies. Its chief excellences, it may be. 
 well, perhaps, briefly to indicate. 
 
 First, The grammar is based on a profound and' accurate 
 knowledge of the genius and principles of the Greek lan- 
 guage. The author adopts substantially the views which 
 are maintained 'by Becker, Grimm, Hupfeld and others, and 
 which are fuUy unfolded in the German grammars of 
 Becker. According to these views, the forms and changes 
 of language are the result of established laws, and not of 
 accident or arbitrary arrangement. Consequently, language 
 may be subjected to scientific analysis and classification. 
 The multitude of details may be embraced under a few 
 comprehensive principles, and the whole may have some- 
 what of the completeness and spirit of a living, organic 
 system. Dr. Kiihner's grammar is not a collection of de- 
 tached observations, or of rules which have no connection, 
 except a numerical one. It is a natural classification oi' 
 the essential elements of the language, an orderly exhibi- 
 tion of its real phenomena. It is, at the same time, a tru] \ 
 practical grammar, fitted for its object, not by a theorist in 
 his closet, but by an experienced instiuctor in his school. 
 
 Second, The author has adopted a clear and satisfactory 
 arrangement of his materials. This can be seen by an 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE 
 
 examination of the table of contents. To those, indeed, 
 who are familiar only with the common distribution of 
 subjects in our Greek grammars, the an-angement of Dr. 
 Kiihner may appear somewhat obscure and complicated. 
 A slight acquaintance, however, with the plan on which 
 the Syntax, for example, is constructed, will show that he 
 has followed the true and logical method. Abundant 
 proofs of the justness of this remark may be seen in the 
 exhibition of compound sentences. The particles are 
 treated, not as isolated, independent words, but as a com- 
 ponent and indissoluble part of discourse. 
 
 Third, Fulness and pertinence of illustration. The cor- 
 rectness of. every principle advanced, especially in the Syn- 
 tax, is vouched for by copious citations from the classics. 
 If, in any case, a principle is stated in an abstract form, or 
 if a degree of obscurity rests upon .the enunciation of it, 
 its meaning may be readily discovered by reference to the 
 illustration. The paradigms contain much more complete 
 exemplifications of conjugation and declension than are to 
 be found in the grammars in common use in this coun- 
 try. In this connection, it may be stated, that Dr. Kiihner 
 has chosen a pure verb as the model of regular inflection. 
 He can thus exhibit the stem unchanged, throughout the 
 entu-e conjugation. 
 
 Fourth, The perfect analysis to which the forms of the 
 language, especially of the verb, is subjected, may be men- 
 tioned as another excellence of the grammar. In learning 
 a paradigm, in the manner which the author points out, the 
 [)upil first resolves the verb into its elements, and then 
 ri'/drranges these elementary parts into a complete form. 
 I;i this method, and in no other, can he attain a mastery 
 ol' this most difficult portion of the subject. 
 
 Fifth, Every part of the gi-ammar is equally elaborated. 
 Tlie closing pages exhibit the same fulness and conscien- 
 tious aocm-acy, which characterize the forms, or the first 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
portions of the Sjntax. No part can be justly charged 
 with deficiency or with superfluous statement. The view 
 of the Third Declension, the scientific list of Irregular 
 Verbs, the Dialectic peculiarities, the observations on the 
 Use and Position of the Article, on the Middle and Passive 
 V^erbs, on the delicate shades of thought indicated by the 
 Modes and Tenses, and on the difference between the use 
 of the Participle and Infinitive, may be referred to as spe- 
 cimens of careful observation and nice analysis. 
 
 The Appendix on Versification has been supplied by the 
 translators, the grammar of Kiihner containing nothing on 
 that subject. The materials were drawn from a variety of 
 sources. A more full view is less necessary, as the excel- 
 lent work of Munk on Greek and Roman Metres, trans- 
 lated, by Profs. Beck and Felton, is now accessible. 
 
 Much pains have been taken in verifying the almost in- 
 numerable references to classical authors. The very few 
 exceptions are those cases where the author made use of 
 an edition of a classic not accessible to the. translators. In 
 this verification, the following editions of prose authors 
 were used : Kiihner's edition of the Memorabilia ; Weiske's 
 and Tauehnitz's editions of the other works of Xenophon ; 
 Schafer's and Tauehnitz's editions of Herodotus ; Becker's 
 and Tauehnitz's editions of Thucydides ; Dobson's edition 
 of the Oratores Attici ; and Stallbaum's Plato. There are 
 slight variations in numbering the lines of poetry in differ- 
 ent editions, particularly in the tragedians. 
 
 The present edition has been prepared from the thii'd 
 German edition, in which the author had made many im- 
 portant improvements, particularly in the Syntax, having 
 availed himself of the con-ections or remarks of his learned 
 friends and his reviewers.' This the translators have en- 
 deavored to put into such a form as would best meet the 
 wants of American scholars. They have not aimed merely 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 at a translation ; it has been their object to state in as clear 
 and concise a manner as possible the principles contained 
 in the original, without reference to the particular form in 
 which the statements were there made. The translators 
 have also added principles and illustrations of their own, 
 where it seemed desirable. 
 
 The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed 
 in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and 
 Remarks are the same as in the former edition. The 
 changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not 
 been thought necessary to indicate them. 
 
 The labor of preparing the first edition cf this work was 
 shared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second 
 edition as far as the 210th page. At this point in the 
 progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards's 
 health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in 
 connection with it, for the purpose of seeking a milder 
 climate. After a few months' residence in one of the South- 
 ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, 
 deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of 
 friends to whom his character presented so many attractive 
 qualities. His loss will be extensively felt also in the cause 
 of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- 
 ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he 
 contributed with great zeal and success the rich stores of 
 his elegant and varied learning. 
 
 The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. P. 
 S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to 
 whom special acknowledgments are due for these services^ 
 as well as for many valuable suggestions. 
 
 Andover, July 15, 1852. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 SECTION I. — SOUNDS OF THE -'.ANGUAGE. 
 Chapxeb I. — Letiebs and Sounds of the Langdaci,. 
 
 Alphabet § 1 
 
 Sounds of the Letters 2^ 
 
 History of the Alphabet 2b 
 
 Organs of Speech 3 
 
 Vowels 4 
 
 Consonants 5 
 
 Breathings 6 
 
 Changes of Letters 7 
 
 Changes of the Vowels 8 — 16 
 
 Hiatus 8 
 
 Contraction of Vowels 9 
 
 Crasis 10, U 
 
 Synizesis 12 
 
 Elision 13, 14 
 
 N Paragogic (^^cAki/o'ti/ci!;') ; 
 
 oVtoj{s) ; ^1 and iK ; ov and ouk 15 
 Strengthening and Weakening 
 
 of Vowels 16 
 
 Prolongation, Shortening. In- 
 terchange and Variation, . . . 
 
 Influence of a Vowel or Coii- 
 sonant on another vowel. . . . 
 
 Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 
 
 Euphonic Prothesis 
 
 Changes of the Consonants 
 
 Mutes 
 
 Liquids 
 
 Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and 
 Mutes 
 
 Sibilant o- with Mut. and Liq... 
 
 Change of separated Consonants 
 
 Metathesis of Liquids 
 
 Doubling of Consonants 
 
 Strengthening and Addition of 
 Consonants 
 
 Expulsion and Omission of 
 Consonants 
 
 U 
 
 16 
 16 
 16 
 17—25 
 17 
 18 
 
 19 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 Chapt. II. — Syllables. 
 
 Nature and Division of Syllables 
 
 Quantity of Syllables — 
 
 Quantity of the Penult 
 
 Accents 
 
 Change and Removal of the 
 Accent by Inflection, Compo- 
 sition and Contraction 
 
 Change and Kemoval of the Ac- 
 cent in connected Discourse 31- 
 
 30 
 
 -35 
 
 I. Graveinstead of the acute 31 
 
 II. Crasis 31 
 
 in. Elision 31 
 
 IV. Anastrdphe 31 
 
 V. Atonies or Proclitics ... 32 
 
 VI. Enclitics 33 — 35 
 
 •Division of Syllables 36 
 
 Punctuation Marks — ^Diastole. 37 
 
 SECT. IL — GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 
 
 Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection. 
 
 Chapt. I. — The Sbbstautive. 
 
 Different kinds of Substantives ... 39 
 
 Gender of Substantives 40 
 
 Number, Case and Declension ... 41 
 
 First Declension 42 
 
 I. Feminines 43 
 
 II. Masculines 44 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
X PREFACE. 
 
 at a translation ; it has been their cfaject to state in as cleai 
 and concise a manner as possible the principles contained 
 in the original, without reference to the particular form in 
 whicli the statements were there made. The translators 
 have also added principles and illustrations of their own, 
 where it seemed desirable. 
 
 The numbering of the paragraphs has not been changed 
 in the present edition, and most of the subdivisions and 
 Remarlcs are the same as in the former edition. The 
 changes in this respect have been so few, that it has not 
 been thought necessary to indicate them. 
 
 The labor of preparing the first edition c [ this work was 
 shared equally by the translators ; so, also, in the second 
 edition as far as the 2l0th page. At this point in the 
 progress of the work, the state of Professor Edwards's 
 health made it necessary for him to relinquish his labors in 
 connection with it, for the purpose of seeldng a milder 
 climate. After a few months' residence in one of the South- 
 ern States, he was called away from his labors on earth, 
 deeply lamented by his associate, and the large circle of 
 friends to whom his character presented so many attractive 
 qualities. His loss will be extensively felt also in the cause 
 of Biblical and Classical literature, for which none cher- 
 ished a deeper interest, and for the promotion of which he 
 contributed with gi-eat zeal and success the rich stores of 
 his elegant and varied learning. 
 
 The proofs of the Grammar have been read by Mr. l\ 
 S. Byers, an associate Instructor in Phillips Academy, to 
 whom special acknowledgments are due for these servicesv 
 as well as for many valuable suggestions. 
 
 Andover, July 15, 1852. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 SECTION I. — SOUNDS OF THE '.AN&UAGE. 
 Chapter I. — Letters and SonirDS of the LANonAci. 
 
 Alphabet ^1 
 
 Bounds of the Letters 2^' 
 
 History of the Alphabet 2b 
 
 Organs of Speech 3 
 
 Vowels 4 
 
 Consonants 5 
 
 Breathings 6 
 
 Changes of Letters 7 
 
 Changes of the Vowels 8 — 16 
 
 Hiatus 8 
 
 Contraction of Vowels 9 
 
 Crasis 10, 11 
 
 Synizesis 12 
 
 Elision 13, 14 
 
 N Paragogio {i<pe\KuirTM6i>) ; 
 
 oihu(s] ; 4^ and ^k ; oii and oi/k 15 
 Strengthening and Weakening 
 
 of Vowels 16 
 
 Prolongation, Shortening. In- 
 terchange and Variation, . . . 
 
 Influence of a Vowel or Cou- 
 Eonant on another vowel .... 
 
 Syncope, Omission of a Vowel 
 
 Euphonic Prothesis 
 
 Changes of the Consonants. 
 
 Mutes 
 
 Liquids 
 
 Mutes and Liquids, Liquids and 
 Mutes 
 
 Sibilant o- with Mut. and Liq.. . 
 
 Change of separated Consonants 
 
 Metathesis of Liquids 
 
 Doubling of Consonants 
 
 Strengthening and Addition of 
 Consonants 
 
 Expulsion and Omission of 
 Consonants 
 
 16 
 
 16 
 16 
 
 16 
 
 17—25 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 20 
 21 
 22 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 Chapt. II. — Syllables. 
 
 Nature and Division of Syllables 26 
 
 Quantity of Syllables 27 
 
 Quantity of the Penult 28 
 
 Accents 29 
 
 Change and KemOval of the 
 Accent by Inflection, Compo- 
 sition and Contraction 30 
 
 Change and Kemoval of the Ac- 
 cent in connected Discourse 31 — 35 
 
 I. Grave instead of the acute 31 
 
 II. Crasis 31 
 
 in. Elision 31 
 
 IV. Anastrdphe 31 
 
 V. Atonies or Proclitics ... 32 
 
 VI. Enclitics 33—35 
 
 -Division of Syllables 36 
 
 Punctuation Maries — ^Diastole . 37 
 
 SECT. IL — GEAMMATICAL POEMS. 
 
 Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection. 
 
 Chapt. I. — The Substastivb. 
 
 Different liinds of Substantives. . . 39 
 
 Gender of Substantives 40 
 
 Number, Case and Declension ... 41 
 
 First Declension 4a 
 
 I. Peminines 43 
 
 II. Masculines 44 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
xu 
 
 CONTENTS 
 
 Quantity and Accentaatioc . ^ 45 
 
 Second Declension 46 
 
 Contraction ofthc second Dec. 47 
 Attic second Declension .... 48 
 
 Accentuation 49 
 
 Kemarks on Gender 50 
 
 Third Declension 51 
 
 Remarks on the Case-enilin{.'s 52, 53 
 
 Paradigms 54 — 03 
 
 Quantity 64 
 
 Accentuation 65 
 
 Gender • _ 6^ 
 
 Anomalous Nouns CV, 63 
 
 Defective Nouns 69 
 
 Interchange of Forms in the 
 
 Declensions '0 — 72 
 
 I. Redundant Nouns 70 
 
 II. Heteroclites 71 
 
 III. Metaplasts 73 
 
 Indeclinable and Defective 
 
 Nouns 73 
 
 Chapt. II. — The Adjective ind Pakiiciple. 
 
 Nature, Gender and Declension 74 
 
 Accentuation 75 
 
 Summary of the Adjective and 
 
 Part. Endings 76—80 
 
 I. Adjectives and Partici- 
 ples of three Endings.. 76,77 
 II. Adjectives of two Endings 78, 79 
 III. Adjectives of one Ending 80 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives 81 
 
 A. -repay, -Tooa, -Tc/joy; -TaTos, 
 
 -TaTTjj -Tar. iiv 82 
 
 33. -'kuv., -toy, -ojf, -oy\ -kttos, -7J, 
 
 -ov 83 
 
 Anomalous forms of Comparison. 84 
 
 Comparison of Adverbs 85 
 
 CiiAPT. III. — The Pkojtoun. 
 
 Nature and Division of Pronouns 86 
 
 I. Personal Pronouns 87-90 
 
 II. Demonstrative Pronouns 91 
 III. Relative Pronouns 92 
 
 IV. Indefinite and Interrogative 
 
 Pronouns 93 
 
 Correlative Pronouns 94 
 
 Lengthening of the Pronoun 95 
 
 Chapt. IV. — The Numeeals. 
 
 Nature and Division of Numerals 96 
 Numeral Signs 97 | 
 
 Principal classes of Numerals 98 
 
 Remarks on the Numerals 99 
 
 Chapt. V. — The Adterh. 
 Nature and Division of Adverbs 100 I Formation of Adverbs 101 
 
 Chapt. VI. — The Vekb. 
 
 Nature and Division of the Verb 102 
 
 Classes 102 
 
 Tenses 103 
 
 Modes 104 
 
 Infinitive and Participle 105 
 
 Persons and Numbers 106 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs in -a 107 
 
 Stem, Augment, Reduplication 
 
 and Characteristic 108 
 
 Inflection-endings 109 
 
 a. Tense-characteristic and 
 
 Tense-endings 110 
 
 b. Personal-endings and Mode- 
 
 vowels 111—114 
 
 Full Paradigm of a Regular Verb 1 1 5 
 Remarks on the Inflection-endings 116 
 Remarks on tlie Foimation of the 
 Attic Future 117 
 
 Accentuation of the Verb 118 
 
 Further view of Aug. and Redup. 119 
 
 (a) Syllabic Augment 120 
 
 (b) Temporal Augment. . 121, 122 
 
 Reduplication 123 
 
 Attic Reduplication 124 
 
 Aug. and Redup. in Compounds 125-6 
 Formation of the Tenses of Verbs 
 
 in -to 127—167 
 
 Division of Verbs in -w according 
 
 to the Characteristic 127 
 
 Derivation of Tenses 123 
 
 I. Formation of the Tenses of 
 
 Pure Verbs 129 
 
 a. With a short Characteristic- 
 
 vowel 13C 
 
 b. WitlKrinAor.Pass. andPerf. 
 
 Mid. or Pass 131 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Paradigms of Pure Verbs § 132 — 137 
 
 A. Uncontracted Pure Verbs. . 132 
 
 (a) Without (T in the Mid. or 
 
 Pass 132 
 
 (b) "With o-in the Mid. and 
 
 Pass 133 
 
 B. Contract Pure Verbs... 134 — 136 
 Remarlis on contract verbs... 137 
 
 II. Formation of the Tenses of 
 
 Impure Verbs 138 
 
 Strengthening of the Stem 139 
 
 Variation of the Stem-vowel. . . . 140 
 Remarlis on the Secondary Tenses 141 
 
 A. Formation of the Tenses of 
 
 Mute Verbs 142—144 
 
 Remarlcs on the Characteristic 143 
 Paradigms of Mute Verbs 145 — 148 
 
 B. Formation of tlio Tenses of 
 
 Liquid Verbs 149 
 
 Paradigms 150 — 153 
 
 Peculiarities in the Formation of 
 
 Single Verbs 1 54 
 
 Syncope 1 55 
 
 Metathesis 1 56 
 
 Verbs in -to with Stem of the Pros. 
 
 strengtiiened .' 157 
 
 I. Verbs with v inserted 158 
 
 11., Verbs with the syllable ye 159 
 
 III. Verbs with av or aiv ... 160 
 
 IV. Verbs in -ff/cw, -itrKoj 1 Gl 
 
 V. Verbs in -»w 162 
 
 VI. Verbs with Reduplication. 163 
 VII. Verbs whose Pure Stem- 
 vowel a is sti-engthened by i 164 
 
 VIII. Verbs which assume e 165 
 
 Verbs which assume an e in form- 
 ing the Tenses 166 
 
 Verbs whose Tenses are formed 
 
 from different Roots 167 
 
 Conjugation of Verbs in -/m . . . . 168 
 Division of Verbs in -fii 169 
 
 Characteristic-vowel and Strength- 
 ening of the Stem of the Pres. j 170 
 
 Mode-vowels .'^ 171 
 
 Personal-endings 172 
 
 Formation of the Tenses. . . 173, 174 
 
 Paradigms 175 
 
 Remarks on the Paradigms 176 
 
 Summary of Verbs in -fu. . 172 — 190 
 
 I . Verbs in -fit which annex the 
 
 Personal-endings immediate- 
 ly to the Stem- vowel 177 
 
 (a) Verbs in -o 177 
 
 *w' , 178 
 
 Deponents 179 
 
 (b) Verbs in -e 1 80 
 
 (c) Verbs iv -1 : ET/u. — Elfil. .. 181 
 
 II. Verbs in -ij.i which annex i/yv 
 
 or vu to the Stem- vowel . . 182 
 
 Formation of the Tenses 1 82 
 
 Summary of this class of Verbs 183 
 —188 
 
 A. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 
 
 Vowel 183—186 
 
 (a) in -a 183 
 
 (b) in-e 184 
 
 (c) in-i 185 
 
 (d) in-o 186 
 
 B. Verbs whose Stem ends in a 
 
 Consonant 187,188 
 
 (a) in a Mute 187 
 
 (b) in a Liquid 188 
 
 Inflection of KeT/iai and ti/uu 189, 190 
 
 Verbs in -to analogous in Forma- 
 tion to those in -;mi . . 191 — 196 
 I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid- 
 dle ..• 191, 192 
 
 II. Perf. and Plup. Act.. . 193, 194 
 
 OlSa and eoiKa 195 
 
 III. Present and Imperfect 196 
 
 Summary of Deponent Passives. 197 
 Summai-y of Active Verbs with a 
 Mid. Fut 19S 
 
 Chapt. VII. — Peepositions, Conjonotions akd Interjections 199 
 
 PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. 
 
 A. Orthogkapht. 
 Digamma or Labial Breathing F. 200 
 
 Interchange of the Vowels 201 
 
 Interchange of the Consonants 202-204 
 
 Chainge of the Vowels 205-207 
 
 Contraction, Diaeresis 205 
 
 Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Par- 
 
 agogic. Hiatus 206 
 
 Lengthening and Shortening of 
 
 the Vowels. — Syncope. — Apo- 
 
 COJ/C 
 
 207 
 
 Prothesis and Insertion of Vowels 207 
 
 Changes of Consonants 208 
 
 Quantity . ; 209 
 
 B. Dialectic Forms. 
 
 Declensions. .. ■ 210- 214 
 
 Homeric Suffix (pt or <j)iy 210 
 
 First Declension 211 
 
 Second Declension , . 21£ 
 
 Third Declension 213 
 
 Anomalous and Defective 
 Words. Me taplasts ...... . 214 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
XIV 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 The Adjective § 215 
 
 Comparison 216 
 
 Pronouns 217 
 
 Numerals 218 
 
 The Verb 219-230 
 
 Augment and Reduplication . . 219 
 Personal-endings and Mode- 
 vowels 220 
 
 Epic and Ionic Iterative Form 221 
 Contraction and Resolution in 
 Verbs 222 
 
 Formation of the Tenses . . . ^ 223 
 
 Conjugation in -(Ht 224 
 
 El/ii and Ef/j< 225, 226 
 
 Verbs in -u with a Sec. Aor. an- 
 alogous to Verbs in -/«... . 227 
 
 Verbs in -w with a Perf. and 
 Plup. Act. like Verbs in -/« 228 
 
 Verbs in -a with a Pres. and 
 Impf. Act. like Verbs in -^i 229 
 
 List of Dialectic Verbs 230 
 
 SECT. III.— FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 Radical Words, Stems,Derivatives 231 
 
 A. Derivation 232-235 
 
 I. Verbs 232 
 
 n. Substantives 233 
 
 III. Adjectives 234 
 
 IV. Adverbs 235 
 
 B. Compounds 236 
 
 Formation of Compounds 237 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 SECT. I. — SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
 
 Chapt. I. — Pakts op a Simple Sentence. 
 
 Nature of a Sentence. — Subject 
 and Predicate 238 
 
 Comparison. Attribute and Ob- 
 ject 239 
 
 Agreement 240 
 
 Exceptions to the general rules of 
 Agreement 241 
 
 Agreement when there are several 
 Subjects 242 
 
 Remarks on Peculiarities in use of 
 Number 243 
 
 The Article 244 
 
 Position of the Article 245 
 
 Use of the Article with Pronouns 
 
 and Numerals 246 
 
 The Article as a Demon, and 
 Rel. Pronoun 247 
 
 Classes of Verbs 248 
 
 A. Active form 249 
 
 B. Middle 250 
 
 C. Passive 251 
 
 Remarks on Deponents 252 
 
 Tenses and Modes 253 
 
 A. Particular View of the Tenses 254 
 
 (a) Principal tenses: Pres., 
 Perf., Fut 255 
 
 (b) Hist. Tenses : Aor., Impf, 
 
 Plup 256 
 
 Tenses of the Subord. Modes 257 
 
 B. Particular ViewoftheModes 258 
 Useofthe Subj.,Opt.andImp. 259 
 
 The Modes with &v 260 
 
 Position and Repetition of &y 251 
 
 Chapt. II. — Attributive Constkuction. 
 
 Ellipsis of the Substantive . 
 (a) Attributive Adjective . 
 
 263 
 
 264 
 
 (b) Attributive Genitive .... 265 
 
 (c) Apposition 266 
 
 Chapt. III. — Objective Constkuction. 
 
 I. The Cases 268 
 
 Nominative and Vocative . . . 269 
 (1) Genitive 270 
 
 A. Local Relation 271 
 
 B. Causal Relation 272 
 
 (a) Active Genitive 273 
 
 (b) Causal Genitive 274 
 
 (c) Gen. denoting mutual re- 
 lations 275 
 
 (2) Accusative 276 
 
 A. Local Relation 277 
 
 B. Causal Relation 278 
 
 (a) Ace. denoting effect . . . 278 
 
 (b) Acc.ofthe Object on whicli 
 
 the action is performed . 279 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
C0NTKNT9, 
 
 XV 
 
 Two Accusatives '.'.'.... ^ 280 
 Remarks on the Ace. with the 
 
 Passive 281 
 
 (3) Dative 282 
 
 A. Local Dative 283 
 
 B. Dative as a personal Object 284 
 
 C. Dative of the thing 285 
 
 11. Construction of Prepositions . 286 
 
 (1) Prepositions with the Gtu. 
 
 only § 287, 288 
 
 (2) With the Dative only .... 289 
 
 (3) With the Accusative only . 290 
 
 (4) With the Gen. and Ace. 291-294 
 
 (5) With the Gen., Dat. and 
 
 Ace 295-299 
 
 Bemarks on peculiarities of the 
 
 Prepositions 300 
 
 Chapt. IV. — The Pkonoun as Subject, Pkedicate, Aitkibbte akd 
 
 Object. 
 
 I. Personal Pronouns 302 1 Prospective and Retrospective 
 
 II. Remaining Pronouns 303 | Use of the Pronoun 304 
 
 Chapt. V. — The Infinitive and 1»akticipi.e used as an Attribute 
 and Object. 
 
 A. The Infinitive 305 
 
 (I) Inf. as an Object without 
 
 the Article 306 
 
 Nom., Gen., Dat. and Ace. 
 with the Inf. 307 
 
 (II) Inf. with the Article .... 308 
 
 B. The Participle 309 
 
 (I) The Part, as the Comple- 
 ment of the Verb .... 310 
 
 Remarks on the Inter- 
 change of the Part, and 
 
 the Inf. 311 
 
 (II) Part, used to express Ad- 
 verbial Subordinate Re- 
 lations 312 
 
 Special Peculiarities in the 
 Participial Construction 313 
 
 Chapt. VI. — The Advekbial Objective. 
 
 A. A^, SrJTa, S^y, S^&ey, B^iroi/atv, 
 
 Sal 315 
 
 B. Confirmative Adverbs 316 
 
 C. Emphatic Sufiixes, yi, irip, to'i 317 
 
 D. Negative Particles 318 
 
 SECT. II. — SYNTAX OE THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
 Chapt. VII. A. — Coordination. 
 
 Different Forms of Coordinate III. Disjunctive Coordinate Son- 
 Sentences 320 tences . , 323 
 
 I. Copulative Coordinate Sen- IV. Causal Coordinate Sen- 
 tences 321 tences 324 
 
 II. Adversative Coordinate Sen- Remarks on Asyndeton 325 
 
 tences 322 
 
 Chapt. VIII. B. — Subordination. 
 
 Principal and Subordinate Sen- 
 tences 326 
 
 Sequence of Subjunctive Tenses 
 
 in Subordinate Sentences 327a 
 
 Use of Modes in Subordinate 
 
 Clauses 327b 
 
 I. Substantive Clauses 328 
 
 A. Introduced by Sti or ws-, that 329 
 
 B. Introduced by ?ra, so that, etc. 330 
 
 II. Adjective Clauses 331 
 
 Agreement of the Rel. Pron. . . 332 
 Modes in Adjective Clauses . . 333 
 Connection of several Adjective 
 
 Clauses 33.t 
 
 Interchange of the Subordinate 
 
 Clause with the Adj. Clause 334 
 III. Adverbial Clauses 335 
 
 A. Adverbial Clauses of Place 336 
 
 B. Adverbial Clauses of Time 337 
 
 C. Causal Adv. Clauses . 338—34* 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 I. Denoting Ground or 
 
 Cause ^338 
 
 II. Denoting Condition 339, 340 
 III. Denoting Consequence 
 
 or Effect 341 
 
 D. Adverbial Clauses denoting 
 
 Manner and Quantity 342, 343 
 I. Comparative Ad v.Clauses 
 
 denoting Manner 342 
 
 II. Comparative Adv.Clauses 
 denoting Quantity 343 
 
 Chapt. IX. — Intekeogative Sentences. 
 
 I. Interrogatives 344 
 
 II. Oblique Discourse 345 
 
 III. Special Peculiarities in tlie 
 Construction of Words and Sen- 
 tences 346, 347 
 
 Ellipsis, Brachylogy, Zeugma, 
 
 Contraction, Pleonasm 346 
 
 Anacoluthon 347 
 
 Chapt. X. — Position of 'Words 
 
 348 
 
 Appendix A.-— Versificatipn Page 574 
 Appendix B. Abbreviations 
 in writing 587 
 
 Index of Subjects Page 589 
 
 Greek Index 602 
 
 Index for the Forms of Verb.'! 614 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 Aesch. Aeschylus, A^. Agamemnon, S. Septem adv. Th. — Ar. Aristop!ianes.—~ 
 Dcm. Demosthenes, 01. OlynlL, Ph. Philipp., Cor. Corona, Chers. Chersones., Aph. 
 Aphobus. — Eur. Euripides, M. Medea, C. Cyclops, H. Heaiba, O. Orestes, H. F, 
 Hercules Fnrens, Hipp. Hippolytus. — Her. Herodotus, — Isae. Isaeus. — Lys. Z^- 
 tias. — PI. Plato, Cr. Crito, L, Leges, Th. Theages, Men. Meno, Soph. Sophista, 
 Crat. Oratylus, Prot. Protagoras, Phil. Philebus, Kp. Respublica. — Soph. Sopho- 
 cles, O. C. Oedipus Coloneus, 0. R. Oedipus Rex, Ant. Antigone, Ph. Phihdeles, 
 Aj. Ajax, El. Electra. — X. Xenophon, C. Commentarii, An. Anabasis, H. Hdlen 
 tea, S. Symposium, R. Ath. Respublica Alheniens., R. L, RespuU. Lacedaem., O. 
 OtoBiumiicus, Ag. Agesilaus, R. Equ. R. Equestris, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
GREEK GRAMMAR. 
 
 DIALECTS OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE. 
 
 1. The Greek language was divided into many differoat 
 dialects, the most highly cultivated of which were the 
 /Eolic, Doric, Ionic, and Attic. The ^olic prevailed in 
 Boeotia, Thessaly, and in the ^olian colonies in Asia 
 Minor ; the Doric, throughout the Peloponnesus, and in the 
 Dorian colonies in Asia Minor, Italy, and Sicily ; the 
 Ionic, in the Ionian colonies in Asia Minor ; the Attic, in 
 Attica. 
 
 2. The ^olic and Doric dialects are characterized by 
 harshness and roughness, being the opposite of the Ionic, 
 which is distinguished for delicacy and softness. The 
 Attic dialect holds a beautiful medium between the two 
 former and the Ionic, as it skilfully combines the soft and 
 pleasant forms of the Ionic with the strong and full-toned 
 forms of the Doric. 
 
 S. The Ionic dialect is divided into the Older and the 
 Later Ionic. The older Ionic is the language of Hom^ 
 and of his school, although these poets were not satisfied 
 with their own dialect merely, but were able, in accordance 
 with the true principles of art, to select, from all the 
 dialects, those forms which corresponded to the nature of 
 their poetry; and to employ — since the regular laws of 
 versification had much influence in forming the language 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
14 GEEEK DIALECTS. 
 
 — a peculiar and definite poetic language, called the Epif, 
 I'lr Homeric. This had a great effect on the language of 
 all the Greek poets even to the latest times. We find the 
 later Ionic in the works of the historian Herodotus, born 
 484 B. c, and of Hippocrates, b. 460 b. c. 
 
 4. The Attic dialect is divided, in accordance with cer- 
 tain peculiarities, into the Older, the Middle, and the Latei 
 Attic. The older is used by Thucydides, b. 472 b. c. ; the 
 tragic poets ; ^schylus, who died 456 b. c. ; Sophocles, 
 b. 497 B. c, d. 405 b. c; Euripides, b. 480 b. c; and the 
 more ancient comic writers, e. g. Aristophanes, d. 390 b. c. , 
 by several orators, e. g. Antiphon, b. 479 b. c, and An- 
 decides, b. 467 b. c. The middle Attic is used by Plato, 
 b. 430 b. c. ; Xenophon, b. 447 b. c. ; and the orator Iso- 
 crates, b. b. c. 436. The later Attic is employed by De- 
 mosthenes, b. 385 b. c, and other orators, the later comic 
 writers, and the prose authors in more recent times, who 
 sought to preserve in their works the language of the earlier 
 writers. 
 
 5. After the freedom of the Greeks had been destroyed 
 by Philip, king of Macedon, the Attic dialect came to be 
 the common written language. As it extended, not only 
 over all Greece, but also over the Macedonian provinces of 
 Syria and Egypt, it lost much of its peculiar stamp by the 
 introduction of foreign forms and words, and it then 
 received the name of the Common, or Hellenic language, 
 fi Koivf), or ' EWrjVLKrj S(.aXe«Tos. It was used, e. g, by ApoI< 
 lodorus, Diodorus, and Plutarch. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 CHAPTER L 
 Letters and Sounds of tjic Laivguage 
 § 1. Alphabet. 
 The Greek Alphabet consists of twenty-foiu- letters. 
 
 FOEM. 
 
 Sound. 
 
 Name 
 
 ;, 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 'AX^a 
 
 Alpha 
 
 B 
 
 /3 
 
 b 
 
 Bfjra 
 
 Beta 
 
 r 
 
 7 
 
 g 
 
 rd/JrfjM 
 
 Gamma 
 
 A 
 
 S 
 
 d 
 
 AiXra 
 
 Delta 
 
 E 
 
 6 
 
 e short 
 
 *jE yjrlTUiv 
 
 Bpsilon 
 
 Z 
 
 ? 
 
 z 
 
 ZrJTa 
 
 Zeta 
 
 H 
 
 V 
 
 elong 
 
 ^Hra 
 
 Eta 
 
 
 
 ^fl 
 
 th 
 
 OrJTa 
 
 Theta 
 
 I 
 
 ( 
 
 i 
 
 ^I&ra 
 
 Iota 
 
 K 
 
 K 
 
 k 
 
 Kdirtra 
 
 Kappa 
 
 A 
 
 \ 
 
 1 
 
 Adfi^Sa 
 
 Lambda 
 
 M 
 
 /* 
 
 m 
 
 Mv 
 
 Mu 
 
 N 
 
 V 
 
 n 
 
 Nv 
 
 Nu 
 
 B 
 
 r 
 
 X 
 
 ni 
 
 Xi 
 
 
 
 
 
 o short 
 
 U fUKpOV 
 
 Omikron 
 
 n 
 
 IT 
 
 P 
 
 m 
 
 Pi 
 
 p 
 
 P 
 
 r 
 
 'PS, 
 
 Rho 
 
 s 
 
 0-? 
 
 s 
 
 Svyfia 
 
 Sigma 
 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 t 
 
 Tav 
 
 Tau 
 
 r 
 
 V 
 
 u 
 
 "T^l-Kov 
 
 Upsllon 
 
 # 
 
 <A 
 
 ph 
 
 m 
 
 Phi 
 
 X 
 
 X 
 
 ch 
 
 XI 
 
 Chi 
 
 w 
 
 '\!r 
 
 ps 
 
 Wl 
 
 Psi 
 
 n 
 
 CO 
 
 c long 
 
 ^il /j^iiya 
 
 Omega. 
 
 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 
16 SOUNDS OF PAIITICULAK LETTERS. [♦ ^ 
 
 Remakk 1. Sigma at the end of a word takes the form s, e. g. <reiaix6s, in 
 most editions of tlio classics. Tliis small s is also used in the middle of com- 
 pound words, if the first part of the compound ends with Sigma, though such 
 a usage is contrary to the authority of the manuscripts, e. g. irposc/iepm or 
 rpotripipd}, Susyeyfjs or ^uay^u-iis. 
 
 Hem. 2. When o- and t come together, both letters may bo expressed by one 
 character, r, Sti, or Stigma. 
 
 Ke.ii. 3. Besides their use as alphabetic characters, c arid v were originally 
 Bsed as mere marks of aspiration, the former for the spiritus asper (5 6), for which 
 in the earliest times H was also employed, the latter for the Digamma (§ 25) ; 
 hence, as letters, they were called, in opposition to their use as aspirates, t \fii\6y 
 and 3 if/iAoV, 1. e. unaspirated. Omicron and Omega (small and large o) derive 
 their name from their relative size. 
 
 Eem. 4. The principle on which most of the »jtters of the Greek alphabet 
 are named, is entirely different from that adopted in this countiy and among 
 the European nations, at the present day. We name each letter by the sound 
 It represents, as a, b, c, adding a vowel to the consonants in order to vocalize 
 them. But among the Orientals, from whom the Greek alphabet was dcriTod, 
 the name was not determined by the sound of the letter. They gave their 
 letters the name of some familiar object, the first sound or syllable of which 
 was the alphabetic character to bo represented. For example, the Phoenicians 
 and Hebrews called the first letter of the alphabet Aleph (Greek Alpha), which 
 means an ox : now the first sound or syllable of Aleph is the character or 
 element to be represented. Tlie second letter was Both (Greek Beta), a house, 
 the first sound of which is the character to be represented. The third is Gimel 
 ( Greek Gamma), a camel. This mode of naming letters, undoubtedly originated 
 from the custom of designating those letters by the picture of the object from 
 which they derived the name, instead of by the characters now used. Thus 
 Aleph was represented by the picture of an ox, Beth by that of a house, etc. 
 
 ^ 2a. Sounds of j) articular Letters. 
 
 The sound of the letters is indicated by the Roman characters opposite to 
 them. The following remarks on particular letters are all that is needed in 
 addition : — 
 
 Kemakk. The sounds given to tlie following letters are those more usually 
 adopted in pronouncing the Greek in New England ; but the usage is not 
 e.itirely uniform. 
 
 A has the sound of a in fan^ when it is folbwed by a consonant in the same 
 syllable, o. g. x"^-"^!; the sound of a in fate, when it stands before a single 
 consonant which is followed by two vowels, the first of which is e or i, e. g. 
 ama-Tda-cais, o-TpaTiiuTijj ; also, when it forms a syllable by itself, or ends a 
 syllable not final, e. g. fiey-i-x-rj, (TTpa-ris; it has the sound of a in futliei- when 
 it is followed by a single p, in tlie same syllable, and also when it ends a word; 
 but a final in monosyllables has the sound of a in fiite, i^. g.'Ba.p-^a-pos, ydp 
 aya^di "rd. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 26.] BRIEF HISTORY OF THE ALPHABET. 11 
 
 7, before y, a, x, sind |, has the sound of ^117 in angle, or nasal n iu ancle, c. g 
 iyye\os, ang-j!hs ; K\ayyfi, clangor; 'Ayxla-ns, Anchises (Angchises) ; a-vyicSirn, 
 syncope ; Kdpvy^, larynx, y before vowels always has the hard sound, like g in 
 (jet ; also before consonants, cxeept y, k, x, f , e. g. y'lyas. 
 
 6 has the sound of short e in mei, when it is followed by a consonant in tho 
 same syllable, e. g. fiiy-as, lier-d ; the sound of long e in me, when it ends a 
 word or a syllable, or when it forms a syllable by itself, e. g. ye, di-a>, ficurix.- 
 €-*iy. 
 
 n has the sound of e in me, e. g. /jioirfj. 
 . S has the sound of th in thick, e. g. ^dvaros. 
 
 I has the sound of i in mine, when it ends a word or syllable, or foi-ms a 
 syllable by itself, e. g. iKiri-ai, Sri, ireS-i'-oi/; the sound of i in pin, when it ii 
 followed by a consonant in the same syllable, e. g. irpiV, kIi/Svpos. 
 
 K always has the hard sound of k, and was expressed in Latin by c, e. g. 
 KiXiKi'a, Cilicia ; K4Kpo\li, Cecrops ; KiKepwv, Cicero. 
 
 I, at the beginning of a word or syllable, has the sound of z, e. g. |eVos ; else- 
 where, the sound of .r, e. g. Siaifia, irpa^is, Sto|. 
 
 has tho sound of short in not, when it is followed by a consonant in the 
 game syllable, c. g. \iy-05, Kv-pos ; the sound of long in go, when it ends a 
 word or syllable, or forms a syllable by itself, e. g. r6, !nt6, ^o-6s, to|-o'-tijs. 
 
 <r has the sharp sound of s in son ; except it stands before /i, in tho middle 
 of a word, or at the end of a word after rj or a, where it has the sound of z, 
 e. g. irmivfi, uSfiur/m, yrjs, Kd\as ; before 1 it does not have the sound of sh, as in 
 Latin, but retains its simple sound, c. g. 'Aala ^A-si-a, not A-shi-a. 
 
 T followed by i has its simple sound, never tho sound of sh, as in Latin, e. g. 
 roXoTia = Galati-a, not Galashi-a; Kpirlas =Kriti-as, not Krishi-as ; Alyiimoi. 
 
 V has the sound of u in tulip, a. g'. rixv ; but before p the sound of u in pure, 
 e. g. TTiJp, yetpvpa. 
 
 X has tlie hard sound of ch in chasm, e. g. rax^s. 
 
 a has the sound of long in note, e. g. Syto. 
 
 i 2b. Brief history of the Alphabet. 
 
 1. The Greeks derived most of their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Ac- 
 cording to the common tradition, letters were brought into Greece by Cadmus, 
 a Phoenician. The Phoenician alphabet, being nearly the same as the Hebrew, 
 consisted of 22 letters, tlie names of which are, Aleph, Beth, Gimel, Daleth, 
 He, Van, Zain, Heth, Tcth, Jod, Kaph, Lamed, Mim, Nun, Samech, Oin, Pe, 
 Tsado, Koph, Rosch, Schin, Thau. Vau, the 6th letter of the Phoenician 
 alphabet, was rejected by the Greeks as an alphabetic character, and used only 
 as the numeral sign for 6. Koph (Greek Koppa), the 19th letter of the Plioe- 
 nician alphabet, was also vejoctod, because its sound so nearly resembled that 
 of Kaph (Greek Kappa), and was used as the numeral sign for 100. Zain 
 and Tsado were modifications ^^ tlio same sound; Tsade. like the Greek Zet* 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
18 OKGANS OF SPEECH. l' "^• 
 
 represents the sound of both, and takes the place of Zain, becoming the 6tli 
 letter of the Greek alphabet, while Zain (Greek San, Sampi), was rejected as an 
 alphabetic character, and used as a numerical sign for 900. Thus 19 letters oi 
 the Phoenician alphabet were adopted by the Greeks, as alphabetic characters. 
 These are the first 19 letters of the present alphabet. To these the Greeks 
 themselves added the five last letters of the alphabet, viz., v, <p, x> 'f'l "• '^^is 
 seems to be the most rational view of the formation of the Greek alphabet, 
 though somewhat different from the common legendary account, which repre- 
 sents Cadmus as bringing only 16 letters into Greece, viz., a, 0, y, S, t, t, n, \, 
 H, ,/, 0, T, p, 0-, T, u. 
 
 2. The alphabet was not brought at once into its present complete form. 
 The old Attie alphabet contained but 21 letters. H was considered merely as 
 a breathing, and the place of i; and u was supplied by e and o, and that of >^ 
 and { by *2 and X2, e. g. AIOEP (aiSrlip), EX0PON (^x^puv), *2TXAI (if/uxoOi 
 X2TN (|w). The alphabet is said to have been completed in the time of the 
 Persian war, by Simonides, who added E, 'V, and il, and changed the breathing 
 H, to the long vowel ij. The lonians first adopted the present full alphabet 
 of 24 letters, and by them it was communicated to the Athenians. This full 
 alphabet was first used in Attic inscriptions in the archonship of Euclides, 
 B.C. 403, before this period only the old Attic alphabet is found in Attic 
 inscriptions. 
 
 3. The early Greeks used the capital letters exclusively, and left no spaces 
 between the words, e. g. METAAETOTTONEinEXEIPISOiOS, i. e. ^eri Se to5- 
 Tov cTttc Xeipiffa<l>os. The cursive, or small character, was not introduced till 
 veiy late. A document has been fonnd in Egypt written in the cursive char- 
 acter, 104 E. c. But cursive writing was not in general use till long after that 
 time. It is first found in manuscripts in the eighth century. 
 
 4. The eajly Greeks commonly wrote in the Oriental manner, i. e. from 
 light to left, as may be seen in several inscriptions. Other inscriptions, how- 
 ever, of equal antiquity, are written from left to right, proving that both modes 
 were in use. A third method was from left to right and right to left alternate- 
 ly. This was called $ov<rTpo<j)riSiv, because it resembled the tmiiing about of 
 oxen in ploughing. Solon's laws were written in this way. But in the time cf 
 Herodotus, the Greeks wrote only fromieft to right. 
 
 {3. Organs of Speech. 
 
 1. The organs of speech, used in forming or aiticulatiiig 
 words, are the palate, the throat, the tongiie, and the hps. tj//''. 
 
 2. Tlie sounds wliich are emitted abnost without any action 
 of the throat, tongue, and Hps, and which proceed in the freest 
 manner from the breast, are called Vowels; the rest, Conso- 
 nants. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
M.J 
 
 19 
 
 } 4. Vowels . 
 
 1. The Greek has seven vowels, a, i, v, which may be 
 long or short, e and o, which are always short, rj and o> 
 which are always long. The character (") over one of the 
 vowels a, i, v, shows that the vowel is short ; (') that it is 
 ^°^g 7 i~) that it may be either long or short, e. g. d, a, a. 
 
 Bemasv 1 a, I, and v are called the principal vowels, because they denote 
 the principal sounds ; the other vowels are called snbordinate, because their 
 sounds are the intermediates of the principal sounds. Thus, the sound of e is 
 intermediate between a and i, the sound of o is intermediate between a and u j 
 r; is produced by lengthening e or o, a by lengthening o. The relation of these 
 vowels may be illustrated by the following diagram: — 
 
 A 
 
 \L \t. 
 
 2. When two vowels are so combined as to form but 
 one sound, the sound so produced is called a diphthong. 
 When both the vowels are sounded, the diphthong is called 
 proper ; when only one, improper. 
 
 3. The Greek diphthongs originate from the union of the 
 vowels a, e, o, v, rj, ay, with the vowels t and v, thus : — 
 
 « + '=<", 
 
 pronounced 
 
 like at in aisle, e. g 
 
 .rfl, 
 
 a -|- u = ou, 
 
 t( 
 
 
 " au in laud, " 
 
 vavs, 
 
 c + I = ei, 
 
 
 
 " ei in sleight, " 
 
 BeivSsy 
 
 € -f- " = ^ 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 v + u^-nv, ) 
 
 
 
 " eu in feudal, " 
 
 cirXevCaf TjS|of , 
 
 + I = Oi, 
 
 
 
 " oi in oil, " 
 
 K0lJ/6s, 
 
 ~\~ V = ov. 
 
 
 
 " au in soutid, " 
 
 obpav6sy 
 
 U + » = Wl, 
 
 
 
 " whiui whine, " 
 
 vios. 
 
 0) ■•)- u = av, (only '. 
 
 Ionic,) " 
 
 
 " ou in sound, " 
 
 (out6s; also the im 
 
 proper diphthongs, ?, p 
 
 , B(i.e. o+£ 
 
 ,„ + ,,co + i); " 
 
 aitrxp^, Kepa, -if, Ttp 
 
 Rem. 2. The pronunciation of the diphthongs oi, ri, a is the same as that of 
 the simple vowel% a, j), a>, though the ancient Greeks probably gave the i a 
 slight sound after the other vowel. 
 
 Hem. 3. With capital letters, the Iota subscript of a, p, 9, is placed in a 
 line with the vowels, but is not, pronounced, e. g. Till KAAni= t^ Ka\^, t^ 
 AiSri, but ?'8b. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
20 
 
 |} 4. 
 
 Rem. 4. Tlie Iota subscript, which in the most flourishing period of the 
 Greek language was always pronounced, at length became a silent letter, and 
 was either omitted in writing, or was written under the vowel to which il 
 belonged. It was first written under the vowel in the thirteenth centmy. 
 
 Hem. 5. The following examples will show how the Eomans sounded thf 
 diphthongs: oi is expressed by the diphthong ae, ei by t and e, oi by oe, ov byu 
 u was generally expressed by y, e. g. 
 
 *a7Spos, Phaedrus ; ESpor, Eurus ; epaxes, Thraces ; 
 
 rXauKor, Glaucus ; Boiwrfa, Boeotia; ©p^o-ffo, Thressa; 
 
 Ne<Xos, Nilus ; Mowa, MOsa ; rpayMs, tragoedus ; 
 
 Ai;K6?oy, Lyceum ; EiAe^S-iiio, Ilithyia; Kvpos, Cyrus. 
 
 In words adopted later, the Romans expressed w by o, as 4^> °'^^- 
 
 Eem. 6. "When two rowels, which would regularly form a diphthong, are tc 
 bo pronounced separately, it is indicated by two points, called Diaeresis, placet 
 nvcr the second vowel (i, u), e. g. alS6'i, for aiSo7, to, iihrms. K the acute 
 accent is on the i or v, it is placed between the points ; if the circumflex, over 
 them, as uiSijs, K\€'idt, irpa^s, 
 
 IIeji. 7. The pronunciation given under § 2(Z, as well as that given to the 
 diphthongs above, is the one more generally adopted in New England. The 
 original pronuncian:.n of the Greek is lost. It is, therefore, the common cus- 
 tom for scholars (in each country) to pronounce it according to the analogy of 
 their o\vn language. This is the method proposed by Erasmus in the sixteenth 
 i-entuiy, and is generally adopted in Europe at the present day. The pronun- 
 ciation defended by Reuchlin ' in the same century, coiTcsponds nearly with 
 the modern Greek. 
 
 ' For the benefit of those who may wish to compare the two modes, the fol- 
 lowing explanation of the Eeuchhnian is extracted from the Greek Grammar 
 of Sophocles : " A is pronounced like a in father, far. p, y, S, like b, g hard, 
 d ; in later times, like Romaic j8, 7, S. Before k, 7, x> l> 7 ha^ the sound of 
 ng in Jiang, c like Romaic 6, or Italian e. (, like 2, but stronger. ij, like French 
 c, as in fSte. 3, like th in thin, ether, saith. i, like i in machine, k, like k'. 
 K, |ii, like /, m, respectively, f, liice n. At the end of a word it was often pro- 
 nounced and written as if it were a part of the next word. {, in the Attic 
 ! dialect, likc!|^; in the other dialects, like ms. In later times, the sound ks pre- 
 vailed. 0, like Romaic 0, or Italian u. it, like p. p, like r. At the begin- 
 ning of a word it was rolled ; when it was doubled, only the second one was 
 rolled. It was rolled, also, after &, (p, x- a, like s in soft, past. Before u, it 
 was, in later times, sounded like f, and even changed into ( in writing; as 
 lliipva, for 2/uvpyo, in an inscription, t, like ( in tell, strong, i, like French 11. 
 (f), like/ but stronger. x> 'iko Romaic x, German ch, or Spanish^ (x). ^, in 
 the Attic dialect, like <ps ; in the other dialects, like vs. In later tunes the 
 sound irs prevailed. », like in note, nearly. When u consonant was doubled 
 in Vriting, it was doubled al.';o in pronunciation. During the most flourishine 
 period of the language, both the vowels of a diphthong were distinctly heard 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* ^-.i CONSONANTS. 21 
 
 ^ 5. Consonants. 
 
 1. The consonants are divided,- first, according to the dif- 
 ferent organs of speech, by which they are formed, into — 
 
 Palatals, y k j(^ 
 Linguals, 8 t"^ vX p cr, 
 Labials, ^ -tt (p /i. 
 
 Remark 1. The consonants, which are produced by the same organ of 
 speech, are called cognate consonants ; thus y, k, x are cognate consonants. 
 
 2. Consonants are divided again, according to the greater 
 or the less influence of the organs of speech in their forma- 
 tion, into breathings, liquids, and mutes. 
 
 (a) The Breathings form a kind of transition from the 
 vowels to the consonants. There are three breath- 
 ings : the lingual 0-; the Spiritus Asper ('), correspond- 
 ing to our h (§ 6) ; and the labial F (Digamma) ; on 
 the last, see the remarks Gpon the Dialects. 
 
 (b) The Liquids, X fi v p, are so called, because they easily 
 coalesce with the other consonants. 
 
 Rem. 2. Tlic Brcatliings and Liquids ai-e also included under the commoi 
 name of semivowels, forming a Icind of transition to the full vowels. 
 
 Duiing the brazen age, and probably during the latter part of the silver age, 
 the diphthongs at, ei, ou, had each the power of a single vowel, ai, like ai in 
 aisle; in later times, like ij, or French i ; during the latter part of the brazen 
 age, lilce e. av, lilse ou in our, house ; in later times, like av, af. ei, like d In 
 freight, nearly ; in later times, like i. During the silver and brazen ages, € was 
 often prefixed to i long, merely to mark its quantity ; as Kfeipa, TcSroi, Tei^ttijiroi. 
 And when quantity began to be disregarded, even short i was represented by 
 CI ; as Elai^apos, E'uroKpirris, yv/ivaireLapxll'^as. eu, like eh-oo rapidly pro- 
 nounced ; in later times, like ev, ef. oi, like oi in oil, nearly, ov, like oh-oa 
 Iftpidly pronounced ; in later times, like oo in moon, or like French ou, Italian u. 
 When the Boeotians used av for i>, they pronounced it long or short, according 
 as the original v was long or short ; thus, in oiSap, aoiv, it was short, like oo in 
 hook ; in oSxt), aaovTiia, long, like oo in moon, w, like wi in twist; ii, lilce whi in 
 uihip; in later times, like v. As to the diphthongs ol, ri, <p, dv, riv, av, they 
 differed from ai, ei, ot, av, eu, ou only in tlie prolongation of tlie first voncl. 
 In later times, ^, ;;, m were pronounced like d, ij, a>, respectively." — Ti{ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
22 
 
 BREil THINGS. 
 
 [♦«. 
 
 (c) The Mutes are formed by the strongest exertion of the 
 organs of speech ; they are, ^yS'^K7rT<px- 
 
 3. The Mutes are divided, 
 
 (a) According to the organ of speech used in pronouncing 
 them, into three Palatals, three Linguals, and three 
 Labials ; 
 
 (b) According to their names, .nto tuee Kappa, thi-ee 
 Tau, and three Pi-miltes ; 
 
 (c) According to the force of articulation, into three smooth, 
 three medial, and three rough Mutes. 
 
 Rem. 3. Hence each of the nine mutes may be considered in a threefold 
 point of Tiew, e. g. y may bo called a palatal, a kappa-mule, or a medial, ac- 
 cording as we wish to bring into view the organ by which it is pronounced, its 
 name, or the force of articulation, a medial mute requiring less force to articu- 
 late it than a rough mute. 
 
 
 SMOOTH. 
 
 MEDIAL. 
 
 ROUGH. 
 
 
 Palatals 
 
 K 
 
 7 
 
 X 
 
 Kappa-mutes 
 Tau -mutes 
 
 Linguals 
 
 r 
 
 S 
 
 3 
 
 Lal;iais 
 
 IT 
 
 /3 
 
 ' 4' 
 
 Pi-mutes 
 
 Bem. 4. The consonants, which are produced by the same effort of the 
 organs, are called coordinate, e. g. the smooth mutes, /c, it, t, are coordinate. 
 
 4. From the coalescence of the Mutes with the Breath- 
 ing a, three double consonants originate, — 
 
 ^ from TTO- P<r tjxr, as ri^a (irir), x«^"'(' (^o")) fariiXiiJ/ (<^ir), 
 
 { from K(r ya xo", as K(!pa| (kit), \k\iii (ycr), 1aro\ {x"), 
 
 ( is not, like i)/ and (, to be regarded as a sound compounded of two con- 
 sonants, but as a soft hissing sound, to be pronounced like a soft «■ 
 Only in the adverbs in (e, is ^ to be considered as composed of o-S, e. g, 
 'AS^yafc instead of 'ASrfivasSe ; also, jSuftc {dose) , for 0i<rST)v (from $wea, 
 to stop, Perf. $ePviTiiai). It may be regarded, perhaps, as a transposition 
 of sounds, as when the iEolic and Doric dialects use, in the middle of 
 a word, irS instead of C> "■ g- fifXia-Serai for (UEAfferai. 
 
 ^ 6. Breathings. 
 1. Every word beginning with a vowel has a smooth ot 
 & rough Breathing; the former (Spiritus Lenis) is jndi- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 7, 8] HIATUS. 23 
 
 cated by the mai-k ( ' ) ; the latter (Spiritus Asper) by the 
 mark ( ' ). The rough breathing answers to the English 
 and Latin A, e. g. iaropla, historia, history. The smooth 
 breathing is connected with every vowel which has not the 
 rough ; but the smooth has no influence on the pronuncia- 
 tion, e. g. ^ AiroXKcov, Apollo. 
 
 Remakk 1 . With diphthongs, the breathing is placed over the second vowel, 
 e. g. oXos, eiSris, oW/co. But when the improper diphthongs, <f, ri, a, are capital 
 letters, the breathing is placed over the first vowel, as these three diphthongs 
 are regarded, to a certain extent, as simple vowels, e. g. "AiSijs (JSr)i) ; ''Ht,''Cli 
 
 Bem. 2. Originally, the Greeks had no mark for the smooth breathing. The 
 rough breathing was at first denoted by E or H. But when H came to be used 
 as a vowel, Aristophanes of Byzantium, about 200 years B. c, divided it into 
 two characters P and i, the former as the sign of the rough breathing, the 
 latter of the smooth. Later, these became ( ') and ( ), and at last ( ' ) and ( ' ) , 
 
 Rem. 3. The liquid p at the begmning of words has the rough breathing 
 e. g. pdpSos. When two p's come together, the first has the smooth breathing 
 the last the rough, e. g. Xlip^os, Pyrrhus ; but some editors omit both breath- 
 ings, e. g. Hippos. 
 
 Rem. 4. At the beginning of a word, v always has the rough breathing, 
 except in the JEolic dialect. 
 
 CHANGES OF LETTERS 
 
 } 7. General Remark. 
 
 Both the vowels and consonants are subject to a variety of 
 changes. These changes result from the tendency of the 
 language to euphony, from their grammatical significance, and 
 from the difference of dialects. The last wiU be considered 
 in treating of the Dialects. 
 
 I, Changes of the Vowels. 
 
 k 8. Hiatus. 
 
 The concurrence of two vowels in two successive sylla- 
 bles or words, occasions a harshness in the pronunciation, 
 
 2 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
24 
 
 EUPHONIC CONTRACTION OF VOWEIS. 
 
 • [» ft 
 
 called Hiatus. TMs is avoided by Contraction, Crasis, 
 Synizesis, and Elision. 
 
 Remark 1. The poets, particularly the Attic, were decidedly averse to the 
 Hiatus of two Towels in two successive words ; among the prose-writers, the 
 orators sought most carefully to avoid it. 
 
 Bem. 2. In the Iambuses of the tragic poets, the Hiatus is allowed in the 
 interrogative r!; what? e.g. ti oSy; ri fives ; among the comic poets, its use is 
 mostly confined to r I, '6ri, we pi, S, e.g. 8ti is, 3ti oixl, we/A i/uiy, also in ovSe 
 i/aiSe) ets {er), ne unus quidem, to distinguish it from oiSels, nullus. In addition 
 to its use in the Iambic measure, the Hiatus is found frequently, even in tlie 
 Tragedians, who endeavored to avoid it when possible ; still, it is mostly limited 
 to special cases ; for example, it occurs with inteijections and imperatives, e. g. 
 S, vat, Svn {up!), Jf&i, as lAi, &i /jloi ircutiv. Soph. Ph. 832; oAA' &va, i^ eSpd. 
 vaiii, Aj. 194. On the Hiatus in the Epic dialect, see \ 200. 
 
 S 9. A. Contraction of Towels. 
 
 Contraction is the union of two successive vowels in the 
 same word into one long syllable. These contractions arise 
 either from the natural coalescence of two successive vowels, 
 in accordance with the laws of euphony, or from grammatical 
 principles. The first kind of contractions is called euphonic, 
 the latter, grammatical. In the Common language, the follow- 
 i'lg contractions occur : — 
 
 I. Euphonic Contractions. 
 
 (a) o + o 
 
 
 = a 
 
 as • fftAoa = o-eAd 
 
 ^ +e 
 
 
 = Et 
 
 " </>iAe6 = ^.'A« (Comp. No. II.) 
 
 ' +< 
 
 
 = * 
 
 " v6pTU = TTOpri 
 
 -\- 
 
 
 = ov 
 
 " v6os = vovs 
 
 <b)a +£ 
 
 ■ 
 
 _ . 
 
 " rifiae = rliia 
 
 a +1) 
 
 
 " rifLii)Te = Ti/iare 
 
 a+. 
 
 
 = ? 
 
 " rlipai = yhpi: 
 
 -o 4" 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 " Ti/idofiev = Tt/xufiev 
 
 a -j- w 
 
 
 " Tifiiaiiev = Ti/iufier 
 
 a -f- ct 
 a +27 
 
 \ 
 
 = o 
 
 " rtiiilets = Tijx^s 
 " Tifuiris = Ti/jL^s 
 
 Q. •\- 01 
 
 
 = V 
 
 " Tifidoiiu = -ri/irffu 
 
 fi, -\- ov 
 
 
 = ft) 
 
 " Tijuaou = Ttfiia 
 
 {c) e + a 
 
 
 = V 
 
 " relxeS. = Tdxn ( Comp. No. 11.) 
 
 e +a 
 
 
 = d 
 
 " X"«'» = X"" 
 
 e +' 
 
 
 = ei 
 
 " reixe'C = Teixet 
 
 e +0 
 
 
 = ov 
 
 " (l>i\eofLev = <j)i\ovfiey 
 
 e -|- ft? 
 
 W) 
 
 = « M 
 
 " (piKeai = (f)i\u, oariif = &rrf 
 
 « -|- Oi 
 
 
 = V 
 
 " TiSTTTeot = Tvirrjj 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t <) 1 
 
 ' 'J GRAMMATICAL CONTRACTIONS = 
 
 ' + *' = « as : <pi\eets = (pi\ftt 
 
 « + P = p " ,/)»Ae'5s = ,^,^p, 
 
 * "f" "' =0' " <l>iKeois = ^i\oTs 
 
 c + ou = ou " ^iA.c'au = <j>i\ov 
 
 (d) n + e = ,, « 6\4jcff<ra = iKriaaa 
 '' "T ' = P " &irtiiir<ra = @py<rira 
 ' "T" " = P " TI/J^FIJ = Ti/*ps 
 
 (e) ' + ? i . " ir<{pTias = irSprls 
 ' "r * J " ■Jtipries = iripriS 
 
 (f)o4-o = ft. " alS6d = ttlSu (Comp. No. H.) 
 
 » + f = ot/ " filsr^ae = jiiaSiau 
 
 " + 1 = <» •" liur&6rixe = /ur^SiTe 
 
 + » =01 " oiSiJi' = aiSo? 
 
 o 4" «' = «' " airXifoi = airXa? 
 
 » + " " /f«ra<(£i = /uo-ftor (Comp. Rem. 2.) 
 
 » + 1) =01 " ^S&tJ?; = liiar^T 
 
 + 01; = ou " iuiT^6ou(n = /iu(raoCo-i 
 
 (g) w + o " (xftiJos = /x*5s 
 
 y + 6 =0 " ('x*"«' = 'X'*Ss 
 
 " + I! " SsMviriTai = Sej/ccuTai (rarely) 
 
 (h) ft) + o = ft) " ^paia = fipai (only in Ace. of soce Sab. of 
 
 w + 1 = ?> " KiiiiiiTos = ^ifio-Toj. fad ])ec. 
 
 Remakk 1. The above contractions take place in accordance with the fol- 
 lomng principles: (1) Both vowels are retained and foi-m a diphthong, e. g. 
 Te(x«' = 'r*^X"> "'*''' = luSot. (2) Both vowels coalesce into a cognate long 
 vowel or diphthong, e. g. n/idoiiey = Ti/iSfiey, aiS6a — alSu. 13) A, short vowel 
 is absorbed by a diphthong or long vowel preceding or following it ; e. g. 
 <t>i\e<D = <j>t\a, $i\e'ou = *i\oS, uA'^e(r(ro.= iATJa-ffo. (4) The short vowels, a, i, 
 V, absorb the following A wel and become long ; e. g. rluae = tliia, I'xiWos = 
 iX&Sj. (5) A short vowft coalesces with the first vowel of a diphthong, ac- 
 cording to the preceding pi iciples ; when the second vowel is i, it is subscribed 
 with o, Tjjifti, but if it is an_ other vowel it is dropped ; e. g. Ti/Mdps = tiuSs, 
 
 II. Grammatical Contractions. 
 
 (ii) c + « = ij, particularly in the third Dec, e. g. rpi^pff = rpiripn, yevet 
 = yevri, 
 
 (b| f + a =^ o in the second Dec, e. g. dtrrea = oina, xP'^trea = x/^t/cvQ 
 (PI.), and elsewhere, if a vowel precedes, e. g. Uepixhe-ea =- 
 n^pi/cAcd, KKe-ea = tfAea, vyi-ea = ^mj in the Ace. PL 
 Fem. of Adjectives in -eos, -4a, -eov, e. g. xpv<r4'as =^ xp^^^^r 
 finally, in the Fem. of Adjectives in -eos, ■4a, -eoc, when 
 these endings are preceded by a vowel or p, e. g. 4p4-eos, 
 e-ca, 4-4ou == ipeovs, 4 pea, 4peovy, apyipeos, 4a, eoy = oi/$. 
 S, ow- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
20 CRASIS. 
 
 [UO 
 
 , -f. a = »| in the Tem. Sing, of adjectives in -eos, not preceded by a 
 
 Towel or p; e. g. xpuo-EO = XP""^^- XP""^" = 7CP"''VS- 
 € + a = €1 in Accusatives PI. in €aj of third Dec, e. g. aatp^-as = aa. 
 (peis ; so ir<iA.£ir, ir'^X^'Si hX^'^^^y f™™ 7r(jAeor, etc. 
 (n) o + o = a in Adjectives in 60s, on, lioi', e. g. air\<(-a = oirAa. 
 o -^ ^ = t) in Adjectives in 60s, dij, 6011, c. g. o5rA(i-Ji = oTrKri. 
 + a = ou in Accusative PI. of fiovs ; so also /leffoas = fieiCovs, a,ni 
 the like. 
 Eem. 2. The contraction of oei into ou is found only in the Inf. Act. of 
 fcrbs in 6a, and is accounted for from the fact that the Inf. originaUy ended in 
 (c, not in eiv (consequently, not utaSfdeiv = /ua-^ovy, but iutrS6ei' = fuaStovy), 
 and in adjectives in 6eis, e. g. 'Ov6ets = 'Ottovs, fn vfhich the root ends in oeer, 
 and consequently the 1 does not belong to the root. On the accentuation of 
 contract forms, see § 30. 
 
 Kem. 3. The Tragic poets sometimes neglect the contractions on account 
 of the measure, yet only in the lyric and^apestic passages, not written in the 
 pure Attic dialect, o. g. kcAcu, Aesch. Ag. 147 ; rpojj.4a>y. Prom. 542 ; veUeos, 
 Sept. 936; cteo, Soph. OC. 182; cip^i, Trach. 114. 
 
 Kem. 4. Sometimss the grammatical importance of the ending, or the fonc 
 of the nominative, prevents the usual contraction, especially if the ending 
 would thereby become doubtful. 
 
 i 10. B. Crasis. 
 
 L Crasis {Kpaai<i) is the coalescence of the final and 
 initial vowels of two successive words into one long sylla- 
 ble, e. g. TO ovofjLa=rovvofia, to 67ro?=ToS7ros. 
 
 Remark 1. The mark of Crasis is the same as that of the Spiritus 
 Lenis ( ' ), and is named Coronis. It is placed over the vowel or diphthong 
 formed by Crasis, but is omitted when the word begins nith a vowel or diph- 
 thong so formed, because it would then coincide with the Spiritus Lenis, e.g. 
 Tck ayadi = T07<i^i£ ; t&p = S,v; S &vdpmre = Hy^pamf. On the accentuation, 
 see § 31, II ; on the change of the smooth Mute into the rough before the 
 Spiritus Asper, as rh SSup = ^oUSap, see 4 below, and § 17, Eem. 3. 
 
 2. Crasis is found only with closely connected words, the firsl 
 of which is unimportant; hence it most frequently occurs, (a) 
 with the article, e. g. 6 aviqp = avrjo, tov avSpos = TavSpos ; — (b) 
 frequently with Kat and the interjection w, e. g. koI aperq = Kaper^, 
 S> av&pome ^ cov^pajTre, S> aya&i = diyaSi, & ava.^ = Sj/af ; — (c) some- 
 what often in Jyu with oiSa and oTp,ai, e. g. iyZSa, iyZpim; — 
 (d) less often with the neuter relative o and a, as o iyw, a eyco = 
 oiyw, ayw; with toi, p.ivToi, ovtoi, particularly in connection 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ l\.\ MOST COMMON INSTANCES OP CRASIS. 27 
 
 with &v, apa, e. g. Tttv (seldom in prose), /aevtolv; rSpa and oiripa 
 (poetic) ; but seldom with wpo, e. g. irpovpyov for Trph ipyov; fre- 
 quently in composition with the augment c, as TrpoiiStoKo. 
 
 3. As the second word is the most important, it has properly 
 a greater influence on the form of the Crasis, than the first ; on 
 this principle it is to be explained, that the Iota subscript is 
 used only when the i belongs to the last of the two vowels, 
 e. g. Koi tlra = k^to, eyo) oiSa = e-yuSa ; on the contrary, kcu, arti- 
 TO, ^ Kairevra ;. ai aya&aC =.dya5at, tm o)(X,ia = t(S;^Xu>. 
 
 4. When Crasis occurs with the article, and an o follows, the 
 vowels of the article — even on and m - - are combined with the 
 following a into a long a, and, Lf the article is aspirated, the 
 aspirate is transfenred to the long o, e. g. o avrjp = ai^p, oi avSpa 
 
 = avSpes, TO a\ri^(^ = TaX■^]^K, Tii'oAAa = i-SAAa, tov avSpoi = TavSpoi, 
 T« avSpi = ravSpC; also, tov airov = toutov, t(3 avru = rair^. 
 
 Kem. 2. Also the forms of the article ending in a, u, ov, u, if, oi, oi, among 
 the Attic poets, combine with the first vowel of ircpos (Doric Hrepos), and 
 form long a; when the second word has the aspirate, as here, the preceding 
 sraooth mute must be changed into the cognate rough; see also § 17, Eem. 3 
 c g.: — 
 
 t4 iTepa = ^&Tfpa S erepos = arepos tov ircpm = Ahrtpov 
 
 tQ kriptp = ^areptp ot erepoi = a/repoi at erepat = &Tepat 
 
 5. In Crasis, ai of the particle koI coalesces with the follow- 
 ing vowel, the a being sometimes retained and sometimes 
 absorbed, e. g. kcu ckcIvos = KOKeivos, koI av = kov, koX kv = kSv, Ktu. 
 
 iyih^Kayii [koX « = K£t, Kai eis = keZs, poetic] , Kai ■^X&ov = K^\Sov 
 [koa, ov = Kov, KOI evSoufiim' = /ceiSat/icov, poetic]. 
 
 { II Summary of the most common instances of 
 Crasis. 
 
 (a) The following cases conform to the rules of contraction 
 given in { 9 : — 
 
 o + a=d; a-\-e = a; a-{-o = u; o + o — »u\ 
 
 0-^ e==ov; + 4= 01 ; 7i + e = )): » + « = ». 
 
 (b) The following instances belong to Crasis only: — 
 
 c + u = ou as: rb BScop = AoSSup (§ 17, Eem. 3.) 
 *|- au ^ au " rb aurrf = ravT6 
 « -j- ai = f ■ ^ aiTiov = T^Tiof 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
28 SYNIZESIS. ELISIOM. [}§ 12, 13 
 
 + 01 = p as.i olvos = ^vos 
 
 o + t; = 1) " ri fi/ieTepov = ^fieTepoy (§ 17, Eem. 3.) 
 
 £0 -f- e = 0) " T(^ e^cfi = Toj/jt^ 
 
 Of -|- o = OJ " TtiJ bcp^aXfjt^ = Tai(p^a\fj(.ci' 
 
 Oi -}- o = a '* fi4vroi &v = fi^vT&v 
 
 at -\- e = ov' " CO? IffTiy = (ToStTTij', jttot iS6Kei = fiovi^Ket (both poetic, 
 
 m* -|- e = ou *' irov %ffTiv = ttoZcttiv 
 
 ou -^ = ov " Tov hvoixaros = roiUfSfiaros 
 
 ov -\- V = ov " TOV SSaTos = ^oBSaros (§ 17, Eem. 3.) 
 
 J) + T| = 7) " I'S W^Pt = S^W? (§ 17, Eom. 3.) 
 
 ftj -}~ 0* = 9^ " ^7^ t'^Sa = iy^Sa 
 
 ov -\- 11 = 71 " ToB r}iieTepov = ^/iirepav, poetic. (§ l^i Eem. 3.) 
 
 ov -\- ov = ov " ToD oiipayov = rovpapov 
 
 ai -|- ei = ^ " Kal elra = K^ra 
 
 (c) Here belong the examples given under i 10, 4 and 5. 
 
 § 12. C. Synizesis. 
 
 1. Synizesis is the contraction in pronunciation of two 
 vowels into one syllable, e. g. when fir) ov is pronounced aa 
 a monosyllable. It can occur only among the poets, but 
 may have been used in the common colloquial language. 
 
 • Eemark. The difference between Contraction and Synizesis is, that in the 
 ordinary Contraction and also in Crasis, the contraction is made in writing, 
 c. g. (piKa from ^i\ia>, rovpamv from toC ovpavov ; but in Synizesis, it is made 
 only in the pronunciation, both vowels or diplithongs being written out in fiilL 
 
 2. Li the Attic poets, Synizesis occurs almost exclusively 
 between two words, viz., with hrsL, i^, rj, /i^, followed by «, ov, a, 
 01, e. g. eirel ov, rj ovSek (dissyllable), fir] oi (monosyllable), firi 
 aAAot, eyu) ov (dissyllable), and iyu> eifii S. Ph. 677; also, in a 
 few single words and forms, e. g. SeoC (=SoC, monosyllable), 
 iaypaKa (= wpaKa, trissyllable), dveuy/xevos (= avioyfjiei/os, four sylla- 
 bles), particularly in the Ionic- Attic Genitive* -cos, as ©lyo-eus 
 (dissyllable). On Synizesis in Homer, see § 2D6. 
 
 § 13. D. Elision. 
 
 1. Elision is the omission of a short final vowel before 
 the initial vowel of the following word. It occurs also in 
 compounds, but the apostrophe is then omitted. ■ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
» 14-] USE. OF ELISION IN THE POETS. 29 
 
 Beuask 1. The mark of Elision is tne same as tnat of the Spiritns Lenis, 
 «nd is called apostrophe, as toCt' ein-tv, yiroir" &y. 
 
 Rem. 2. Elision differs from Crosis in that the former elides the vowel, 
 while the latter lengthens it, e. g. o^A■ &ye (Elision), ret &\\a = riWa (Crasis). 
 This distinction, however, does not hold, when the second word begins with a 
 long vowel or diphthong, e. g. t4 («ut({ = tbJtiJ. 
 
 2. In the prose writers, Elision is confined mainly to the 
 following cases, where it often occurs : — - 
 
 (a) In prepositions which end in a vowel, except irepl and irpi ; also /idxpt 
 and &xph used as prepositions, but rarely in 'dvexa, e. g. 5i oT/coc, ^ ofKou, but 
 Kepi oIkov, irph oIkov, Elision is regular in composition, except with irep(, irpS, 
 and sometimes &iJ.(pl, e. g. ivehAetv, but irepiop^f, 
 
 (b) In conjunctions and adverbs, aXKi, &pa, dipa, S/xa, eXra, IweiTa, puixa, 
 lUkuTTtt, rdxtt, and in many other adverbs ending in o before iw ; also in tht 
 following adverbs and conjunctions, Ji/o, y4, t4, S4, ouSe, /tTjSe, ffio-Tt, ire (not 
 in), irarri (with the compoicildS, as oSitote), rtrt, %rt, omiri, ^ijk^ti ; e. g. aKK 
 
 (c) In forms of pronouns in a, j, e, as t«ut«, roiavra, iWa, riva ; irSrepa 
 more rare ; toCto, aird, ifii, <re, ai (never in t6, ri) ; also in nouns and adjectives 
 of the second and third declensions, ending in o, as aimpriiijaTa, etc. ; ipurra, 
 etc. ; 4pya, e. g. ravt' avrd, •n&tr^ hyo^i, xpn\iixi,T^ ew f^4pei ; 
 
 (d) In ^jd, oTSa, oT<r3-o, and generally in verbal forms in /u, <ri, i,'a, i, u, e. g. 
 ^fC hf&, oW &vSpa, iKeyer" Sk, ijiTrTovr' &y, yeiton'' &v ; of the forms which 
 admit the v Paragogio (§ 15), in prose, only iffrl often suffers elision ; 
 
 (e) In certain familiar phrases, as vi] Af ?^j). 
 
 Rem. 3. The above elisions are most frequent in Vox orators, particularly 
 Isocrates, much more seldom in the historians. 
 
 Rem. 4. A smooth mute before an aspirate is changed into the correspond- 
 ing rough, as vivSr' Sira. 
 
 Rem. 5. A vowel, followed by a punctuation-mark, cannot be elided. Hence, 
 in words closely connected, as vii Af ei(>r), the comma is omitted, for in such cases, 
 without doubt, the ancients pronotmced the words in quick saccession. On 
 •ccent in Elision, see § 31, HI. 
 
 { 14. Use of Elision in the Poets. 
 
 1. The use of Elision in poetry is very frequent, and much more extended 
 than in prose ; yet the foUovring points are to be noted : A word ending in o is 
 never elided ; nor o, «, o in a monosyllable ; hence the article ti, and the pro- 
 nouns tJ and rl, are not elided ; and ircpt in no case, — at least among the Attic 
 poets, — nor Sti, /lexP'i ^X9^i '""" substantive adverbs of place ending in hi 
 (8^1 excepted), and very rarely the Optative ending in eje. 
 
 2. The Elision of the i in the Dat. of the third Dec, particularly in the 
 Bing., is reiy rare in the Attic poets, and is even doubted by many. 
 
 3. The verbal endings, )im, tm. irhiu, which are short in respect U> tl» 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
so N Pakagogic. . [♦ lA 
 
 accent, are rarely elided in tlie Attic poets ; the Datives /loi and trol are nevei 
 elided. 
 
 4. In the verbal forms which may take the p Paragogic (iipe\KV(rTtK6p), the 
 poets use Elision or the y, according to the necessities of the verse. 
 
 5. Sometimes in Attic poetry, a weak and grammatically unimportant sylla- 
 ble is excluded by a preceding long vowel ; this is specially the case with the 
 augment e, e. g. Tax« 'T'fp«t/(roj', Soph. OC. 1602, iirsl 'SdKpvira, Phil. 360. This 
 omission of the vowel is called aphaeresis (a^a(pe<Tis). It can also occur after 
 a puncluation-mark, e. g. <j>p<i<rw ■ 'iretSii JjJib • 'irl toiJtii't, 
 
 ♦ 15. "i^ Paragogic [l^ekKvcmKov). — Ovru>(s). — 'E^ and 
 e/c. — Ov(k). 
 
 1. Another means of avoiding the concurrence of two vowels 
 in two successive words is by appending a v, (v i<j>e\icvaTuc6v, or 
 Paragogic,) to certain final syllables, viz. : — 
 
 (a) to the Dat PL in cri, to the adverbs wipva-i, Travrairdari, and 
 aU. adverbs of place in crt, as ■jtolo-lv IXefa; y IXAaTotao-iv 
 
 (P) to the third Pers. Sing, and PI. in <ri, as ■nWoucriv e/x^ 
 
 TL^a-iv iv ry rpaTri^y; so also with icrri; 
 (y) to the third Pers. Sing, in e, e. g. emrrev ifii; 
 (8) to the numeral cucoo-t, though even before vowels the » 
 
 is often omitted, e. g. etKoo-tv avSpcs and cikoo-i avSpes ; 
 (c) to the Demonstrative t (} 95, e) but rarely, and then 
 
 always after a; e. g. ovTocriv, iKewoa-Cv, Toxn-ovcrtv, ovtoxtiv ; 
 (0 to the Epic particles, vv and ks, and to the Epic sufiix <f>i; 
 
 hence also to v6cr<f>i,. 
 
 Remark. The poets place the v Paragogic before a consonant, so as to make 
 ti short syllable long by position. In Attic prose, it stands regulai-ly at the end 
 of a book or section ; it is, also, sometimes found before the longer punctuation- 
 marks, and sometimes elsewhere for the sake of a more emphatic pronnn 
 ciation. 
 
 2. The adverb ourus always retains its full form before a 
 vowel, but drops the final s before a consonant, e. g. ovrcus en-oi^- 
 a-ev, but ovTia irouo ; Still, oitcos may stand even before consonants 
 when it is to be made emphatic, e. g. ovrws ■/€, Xen. C. 3. 6 9. 
 
 3. So the Prep, ef retains its fuU form before vowels and at 
 the end of a sentence, but before consonants becomes «, e. g. 
 f^ tip^s, but £K r^s flprjvri'; : so also in composition, e. g. i^^Xav- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 16.J STftBNGtnENlNO AN13 WEAKtJNiNG OP VOWilLS. 31 
 
 WW, hnt iKr^cXv. It also has its full form when it stands aflei 
 the word it governs, and is then accented, dp-i^^ ^. 
 
 4. So oiK has its full foi-m before a vowel, e. g. ovk a?cntf,o's- 
 before a vowel with the rough breathing it becomes dx, e. g. 
 oix ^Sv's; but before a consonant, oi, e. g. d koXo's; so also /.,k^ti 
 (instead of f^.^ hi) after the analogy of ovKin. 
 
 Rem. 2. When o& stands at the end of a discourse, or of a sentence, and is 
 to be pronounced with emphasis, the foi-m otfwith the acute accent is used 
 even before a vowel ; ia tliis case there must be an actual break in the discourse, 
 as when oS stands at the end of an answer expressed interrogatively, without 
 connection with what follows, as USs yiip oS; 'Ap' oh> kt\. Xen. C. 4. 2, 37; 
 or when it is found in the answer only, and corresponds to our No; it is found 
 especially in antithetical sentences, e.e-TayaS,i, ri. S^ kckA o»: 'Eh,> S4 kt\. 
 Xen. C. 1. 2, 42 ; Afftoi/j ei's rhv irarai^v i^phrow, limvovvn Xk oS, oire ^p\ar- 
 Toy oiSim. An. 4. 8, 3. If, on the contrary, the foUowing sentence is closely 
 connected with the preceding, then it is written oi/c, e. g.oiic, a\A.a ktA,. Xen. 
 C. 2. 6, 11. and 13 ; 4. 6, 2 ; oin, «' or ijy ktK. Hell. 1. 7, 19. 
 
 * IG. Strengthening, Weakening, Prohngation, Shortening, Inter- 
 change, and Variation of Vowels. — Influence of a Vowel or 
 a Consonant on another Vowel. — Syncope. — Omission of a 
 Vowel. — Euphonic Prothesis. 
 
 The changes, which further take place in vowels, are : — 
 
 1. Strengthening of vowels ; this consists in changing a weaker vowel into a 
 Btronger (see § 4, Eem. 1). There aye different degrees of str^gth in the 
 roweb ; the weakest is e. The strengthening takes place, e. g. in words of the 
 third Dee. in or, Gen. -cos; the pure stem of these words ends in es: in the 
 Norn., however, which prefers fuller forms, the weaker e is changed into the 
 stronger o (in Latin into u), e. g. yims, germs, Gen. yiveos (instead of y4ve<r-os), 
 ffen!r-is. In y6yt and S6pv (Gen. y6mT-os, SSpar-os}, a, the final rowel Of the 
 stem, is changed into the stronger v, 
 
 2. The weakening or attenuation of vowels ; this is the opposite of tha 
 change just described; it occurs, e. g. in substantives of the third Deo. in -h, -1, 
 ■Sr, -i) ; in these, the stronger stem- vowels i and v are changed into the weaker e, 
 e. g. vi\is, v6\cais ; tttjxvs, vtixeas ; alvam, triydveos ; icrrv, iurreos. So with 
 adjectives in -is, -fi, e. g. yAvxis, y\vKi, Gen. -sos. 
 
 3. Prolongation of vowels ; this changes a short vowel into a long vowel or 
 diphthong, viz. a into t; or oi ; ( into r or ei ; u into C or ei; ; e into r; or ei ; o into a 
 or ov. This prolongation takes place either for the sake of euphony, or from 
 grammatical reasons, or from both together ; in the poets often on account of the 
 metre. The prolongation of vowels is very prevalent in the Greek language. 
 One instance only is here mentioned, namely, the strengthening of the Present 
 tense in Mute and Liquid verbs, e. g. Kpiva, TtXbvai, 'h^Siai, ^aiva, Kdira, <t>tiym. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
32 INTERCHANGE AND VARIATION OP VOWELS. [i if> 
 
 instead of Kptvu, irKilva, \S3-«, ^ava, hiirai, ^Syai. — The reason of the prolon- 
 gation is very often found in the omission of a c with a Tau-mute, more rarely 
 of a mere y, or in the omission of a <r after a Liquid, or of a final Sigma, e. g. 
 iSois instead of dS6vTS, SiSois instead of SiS6i/ts, fiovAeiav instead of 0ou\ei- 
 ovTs; (tt€\ds instead of ii4\avs; JirfrjXa instead of ?(r((>oAo-o, ^yyciAo instead of 
 1JYyf\aa, l<pS)eiptt instead of lip&eptra; piirap instead of fiifrops, iroin-ijv instead 
 of TTotfifus, Saliiuiv instead of Sainoi>s, alS^s instead of aiSias, &\ti^s instead of 
 
 4. Shortening of vowels. See the remarks on the Dialect? 5 207. 
 
 5. Interchange of vowels ; this consists in softening a long vowel into a 
 short one, and as a compensation, in lengthening the short vowel immediately 
 following. Thus, in the Ionic and Attic dialects, tai instead of do, e. g. JAfow, 
 -njy, instead of 7\doi, -or, Ae<4s instead of Ado'j, vtiis instead of vaos, MtreheM 
 instead of MeyeKaos ; further, in the Attic dialect, Paji\4ti)s, Patn\iS. instead of 
 the Ionic PaaiKrios, -^o ; so also, ■ir6Ma>s, ■7rl]xcs, Attic, instead of ■ir6\u>i, 
 niixvos ; e is weaker than i and v, see No. 2. 
 
 6. Variation, i. e. the change of the radical vowel e into o and Sj for th6 
 formation of the tenses (§ 140) and derivatives (§ 231, 6); when ci in the 
 Present is lengthened from the radical i, it becomes oi in the second Perf., but 
 when from the radical e, it becomes o ; e. g. Tpeipm, reTpoipa, irpa<priv ; \ditii 
 (root hiiv), KiKonra; cfi^elpa {iootip^ep),i(p&opa, icp^dpriv; ^Kiya, ip\6^; rpixoi 
 Tpoxis ; tpi^m, rpo^'fi, rpofeis, rpcupepSs. Comp. Germ, stehle, gestohlen, stabli 
 English, ring, rang, rung. The i) is changed into a, e. g. ipiiyoi, apaiyfi. 
 
 Eemakk 1. Whether the o is to be regarded as a variation, or rather as a 
 euphonic change of e, introduced by a preceding or following Liquid, partic 
 nlarly p and A, sometimes even fi. and y, may be doubted. Comp. Irparoyf 
 irpi^v, iarpaipTjv, ifipixVt iSdpriy, 4ipSriprtv, iariXiiv, Iraiioy, iicravay with 
 i^iyriyt irekoy. 
 
 7. Change'of a vowel by the influence of another vowel or of a consonanS. 
 Here belong two special cases : — 
 
 (a) The Attic wiiters change the Ionic i) into a after the vowels e and i aad 
 the diphthongs ending with i, sometimes even after other vowels, and 
 after the Liquid p, c. g. iSea (Ion. JS^jj), eoipia, xpe'») We'ptt, hfyv/m, 
 iviavay itripaya ', 
 
 (b) The union-vowel e in verbs in a, is changed into o before the terminations 
 beginning with /i and v, e. g. $ov\iioiicy, fiovKeiovTiu, i^ovheio/iey, €j8ou» 
 \evoyTo. 
 
 8. Syncope {(fvyKOTtii), i. e. the omission of c in the middle of a word between 
 a Mute and a Liquid, or between two Liquids, or between m- ; the same, also, 
 occurs in the declension of certain substantives of the third Dec, e. g. iroTpiij 
 instead of irartpos; in the forming of the Present tense of certain verbs, e. g. 
 ytyyopua instead of yiyiyo/ua, irlirrai instead of irHreViB, fif/ti/w instead of lufiiya, 
 and in the formation of the tenses of some verbs, e. g. iiypi/niv from iyelpa , 
 Syncope rarely occurs after a; e. g. f^xov, ea-TrS/jLiiy, ftrToi, instead of ca-exoy. 
 iaeirSjotv, taerai. A striking example of Syncope is found in ?A&oi' instead 
 of ihXi&oy, from 'EAET0fl. Comp. 5 155 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 17.' 
 
 MUTES. 
 
 33 
 
 9. Apocope. See on the Dialects, 5 207. 
 
 10. One of the vowels a, e, a is prefixed to several words, for the sake of 
 euphony. This is called euphonic prothesis, e. g. lurTepmii and impmii, aarwpli 
 and VTcupts, 4x^4$ and x^^r, ixeiyos and kcicoj, iSrehM and fteXa, ixfivSets and 
 Kpios, oSipofuu and Sipo/uu, ok4X}m and iceAAw, etc. 
 
 Rem. 2, From these euphonic letters care must be taken to distinguish 
 {!) a when it stands for aird, e. g. h-iiiveiv, to avert, or when used instead of 
 hii,, e. g. hiiiavHv, to tear up, or instead of the 4 or a copulative with the 
 meaning of S/ia, from which also a intensive has been formed ; (2) e, when it 
 is nsed instead of i^ or iv, e. g. lyeipeiv, to wake up, ipdyeiv, eructare, Ipe^eiy, 
 uritare ; (3) o with the meaning of S/ioO, e. g. i/iixKri. 
 
 II. Changes of the Consonants. 
 i 17. a. Mutes. 
 
 1. The changes of the consonants arise, in a great degree, 
 from the tendency of language to assimilate different sounds. 
 This assimilation is either a mere resemblance in sounds, as 
 when \i\ey-racis changed into kike kt at, the smooth t chang- 
 ing the medial y into the smooth k; or it is a complete identity 
 in sounds, as when a-av-pin-TU) is changed into a-yppiima. — 
 Sometimes, however, the language shuns a sameness in sound, 
 and Seeks to remove it by changing similar sounds into dissim- 
 ilar, e. g. ire-ipCkriKa for <^£-^tA.i7Ka, "Sitattjid) for %a^tj>a>. 
 
 2. A R-mute (tt ^ ^) or a Kappa-mute (k y x) before a Tau- 
 mute (t S •^) must be coordinate with the Tau-mute, i. e. only 
 a smooth Mate (t k) can stand before the smooth t ; only a 
 medial (jS y) before the medial S ; only an aspirate (^ x) before 
 the aspirate S; consequently, ttt and kt; /3S and. yS; <jiS an 
 K^, e. g. 
 
 fi before t 
 
 into IT as 
 
 : (from rpt^a) 
 
 r^Tpt^-TOl 
 
 = firpmru 
 
 * " 
 
 T 
 
 " 9r *' 
 
 
 i( 
 
 ypcJ^w) 
 
 yeypwtp-rat 
 
 = y4ypcarrai 
 
 7 " 
 
 T 
 
 " K " 
 
 
 (C 
 
 \4yu,) 
 
 XeKfy-rai 
 
 = XeAcKTcu 
 
 X " 
 
 T 
 
 '' K " 
 
 
 (t 
 
 fip^Xf') 
 
 jSejSpex-TOi 
 
 = fie^peKTOi 
 
 » « 
 
 3 
 
 " $ " 
 
 
 u 
 
 Kvirra) 
 
 KijTr-Set 
 
 = KiliSSa 
 
 ♦ " 
 
 S 
 
 " /S " 
 
 
 ** 
 
 ypdpa,) 
 
 ypd(t)-STiy 
 
 = ypifiSiiv 
 
 K « 
 
 S 
 
 " 7 " 
 
 
 t. 
 
 7r\€lca) 
 
 irKeK-^Tjy 
 
 = irXe'^Sljj' 
 
 X " 
 
 s 
 
 « -, " 
 
 
 a 
 
 ■epiX") 
 
 /3f)^X-5'7<' 
 
 = Pp4ySriv 
 
 JT " 
 
 a 
 
 « ^« 
 
 
 tc 
 
 TCe/JLTTO)) 
 
 iic4ijm-Sri)ii 
 
 = iT^iiupSmv 
 
 " 
 
 » 
 
 " ^ " 
 
 
 « 
 
 rpipa) 
 
 iTpifi-Ssv" 
 
 = 4TplipSn]v 
 
 « " 
 
 » 
 
 " X" 
 
 
 Ci 
 
 •jrXeKo)) 
 
 iir\4K-^P 
 
 = iirKexSn]' 
 
 » " 
 
 » 
 
 " X" 
 
 
 (( 
 
 A.6'7") 
 
 4x4y-&iiy 
 
 = 4\4xSnii' 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
34 MUTES. [i i^ 
 
 Ueslark 1. The preposition ix remains unchanged, probaMy by yirtne of an 
 original movable ir, thus iKS, e. g. iicSovyai, ix^itycu, etc., not iySovyai, ix^^yu- 
 
 3." The smooth Mutes (tt k t) before a rough breathing, are 
 changed into the cognate aspirates (^ x '^)' ^°t "^Y ^ inflec- 
 tion and derivation, but also in two separate words, the rough 
 l)reathing being transferred from the vowel to the smooth Mute ; 
 but the medials (/3 y S) axe thus changed only in the inflection 
 oi" the verb ; elsewhere there is no change, hence : — 
 
 ax' ou = a4>' o5, i-Trfifiepos (from lir^, ri^^pa) = ^(p-fi/iepos 
 47ru(pttivw (from iiri, vtpaiyco) = s(pvtpalva>, Tervir-a = rervipa 
 ovK Sfficos = ovx ^o'iois, SeK-fif^pos (from dsKa, -rjix^pa) = Sex'fl/^^pos 
 av7 eKKw = avSriXKu) = from acTi, e\Ka>), but oiSeis (not ou&eis, from oliS' and ejs) 
 et\oy-a = etKoxaj but A-ey' iripav (not \4-)^ er^pav) 
 TeTpi0-a = Tirpupa, but rpTff oiSrios (not rpTip' oSras). 
 
 Eem. 2. The negative ovk (ou) thus becomes ovx, e. g. ovx V^'^s; yet this 
 change does not occur before the aspirate p, e. g. ov jilirrai. In some com- 
 pounds, the smooth Mute is retained even in the Attic dialect, according to 
 Ionic usage, c. g. ottij^k^ttjs (east wind, from airo and ^\ios), KeiKitrTros (one who 
 rides a white horse, from \evK6s and 'hvos), K^drimros, etc. 
 
 Eem. 3. This change of the smooth Mute before the rough breathing takes 
 place also in Orasis (§§ 10 and 11 ), e. g. t& eVepa = A&repa, rh tuinov = &oi/«£- 
 Ttov, Kot erepos = x^*r6po5, Kot iStra btrris, titrus = x^'^°^ x^'^'^^^f x^'"^' ^^t 
 this Crasis is only poetic. When the smooth Mutes xt or kt precede the rough 
 breathing, both must be changed into Aspirates (No. 2), e. g. Ii/i&^^cpoj instead 
 of lirriiiiepos (from eTTa, ii[iepa.), vix^' Sa.tjj' instead of viKr' S\riv. Attic prose 
 uses also the fuE forms, e. g. yixTa Z\?jy. 
 
 Kem. 4. In some compounds, the aspirated liquid p changes the preceding 
 smooth Mute into the Aspirate, e. g. ippoi/uov, formed by Crasis from wpooliuov 
 (from irpS and olfios) ; reSrptimov (from rarpa and ?5nros), Srpiaaa from rapiaaa; 
 so (ppovdos from trpA and 6d6s. 
 
 4. On the contrary, a rough Mute carjiot stand before the 
 same rough Mute, but is changed into the corresponding smooth, 
 e.g. %a.Tc<i>u>, BaKxo'S, tCtSt], 'AtSls; not ^a^qiw,, Ba^xos, tC^^ti, 
 A&3^k: on the same principle, when p is doubled, the fii-st 
 Aspirate disappears, e. g. Hvppos, not IIijppos. 
 
 5. A Tau-mute (r 8 ^) before another Tau-mute is changed 
 i»lo o- (comp. clamtni'm from clahdo) ; but it disappears before 
 K (in Perf. and Plup. Act.), e. g. 
 
 iireld-&T]y (from ird^m) becomes 4iTel(r^v 
 jret^-Tcos ( " irefyai) " irsurreos 
 
 ilpdS-Sniv ( " ipelSa) " iipeitrShir 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 18] LIQUIDS. 3a 
 
 6. Tlie T, which in the Attic dialect very often becomes <t, is 
 frequently changed into o- by the influence of a following j, e. g. 
 rXovtrios (instead of irXomo^, from ttXovtos), 'A/ia5ouo-ios (instead 
 of 'A/i(i5oviT-tos), MiXijo-tos (from MiXijtos), 'Axepovtrio^ (instead 
 of 'AxepovT-ioi), ova-ta (instead of ovr-ta), yepovcria (instead of 
 ytpovT-Lo.), ivuxva-ios (from iviavroi). The i sometimes changes 
 by assimilation the other Tau-mutes, and the Palatals, into o- ; 
 thus in the forms of the Comparative in -aa-tav and -^av, where 
 there is a doiible change, first of the Tau-mute or Palatal to a 
 by means of the t, and then the assimilation of the i to a-, e. g. 
 
 ^/DoSvs (flpaSiw, ^pacrCwv), ^pdcra-wv, poet., ■7ra)(6s (Tra-)(LW, irajcr- 
 Cwv), irda-armv, poet., p.eya^, /tct^oiv (instead of /icyiW), rap^us, 
 Sa.a-(T<av (instead of Tay^-mv). 
 
 } 18. b. Liquids. 
 
 1. The Liquid v is sometimes changed into o. Tliis takes 
 place, e. g. in the Ace. Sing, third Dec. of substantives, whose 
 stem ends with a consonant, e. g. Kopai, KopaK-a (not Kopan-w), 
 Xafnrd.^, XafiiraS-a. The same change, also, sometimes takes 
 place in the third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. and Pass, of 
 mute and liquid verbs, which properly should end in -vrai and 
 -vTo (as in pure verbs, e. g. /8e^ovXcu-iTot, ij3e^ov\ev-vTo), e. g. 
 TCrpt'i^aTai, iTCrpt^aro, TrejrX^^arat, Terdyarai, ia-KevaSdrai, KcxiapiSaTOU, 
 €<j>&a.pa.Tai (instead of TiTpi/SvTai, fTerpi^VTO, etc., from Tpifi-U), 
 jrX«K-(i), T(Mr<r-(i), crKevd^-ia, )(oipL^-(a, (ji&iip-bi). See § 116, 15. 
 
 2. N before a Liquid is changed into the same Liquid, e. g. 
 
 trvv-hoyl^w becomes (TuXAoy/^w ffw-fierpia becomes ffv/ifieTpla 
 
 Kemabk. Comp. iHino, immineo, instead of infino, inTnineo. Assimilation 
 takes place mSWv/ii, instead of 6?uwiu, — 'Ev before p is not assimilated, e.g. 
 IrpbtTcc ; yet IjS^uSjtoy is more frequent than ivpv^iios ; on the contrary, ivXojt- 
 Inia stands instead of iWaxKeia. 
 
 3. M initial before a Liquid is changed into /S, e. g 
 
 ix/drreiy (from /ticAi) becomes jSAi'tteic 
 
 uporSs ( " /i(!()Oj, mors) " ffporis. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
S6 
 
 MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 
 
 \\ l» 
 
 i 13 c. Mutes and Liquids. — Liquids and MuUs 
 
 1. A Pi-mute (ff j8 <^) before ^ is 
 
 a Kappa-mute (k y x) " /* 
 a Tau-mute (t 8 5) " fi 
 
 (o) Pi-mute: rirptp-iim (from, rplfia) 
 
 \4\eiv-iMi ( " Xeftrw) 
 
 y^ypafft-fiat ( 
 
 (fl) Kappa-mute: jr4ir\eK-iJM ( 
 
 ^ePpex-li"' ( 
 
 (■)) Tau-mute: ijvvr-iMi ( 
 
 4frfipitd-[jLai { 
 
 K6K(JjLtl5-/AOt ( 
 
 Remark 1. In some woitls, the Kappa and Tau-mutes are not changed 
 before /i, e. g. ^Kfjiii, ir^r/tor, Kaxi/is, /cevStjuii', etc. In some words, even x 
 stands before ^ci, instead of the original k or 7, c. g. ic<ixM<'r from Uku, irKoxii.ii 
 from irAeKco. The preposition ^k, in composition, is not changed, e. g. iictaa- 
 
 2. The medial j8 before v is changed into jt,, e. g. 
 
 Ktheti) 
 ypiipff) 
 
 Ppexf) 
 
 changed into fj., 
 " y, 
 " " a-, e. g. 
 
 becomes rirpiiium 
 
 " y^ypafifjuoBi 
 " Tre7rA.e7/«tt 
 remains KcXeyfuu 
 becomes pdPpejfuu 
 
 " ^p^peuTfim 
 
 trefi-vis (from ire'^ofiai) 
 4pe$-v6s { " cpe^os) 
 
 becomes tn[ji,v6s 
 " ip£fj.y6s. 
 
 i. N before a Pi-mute (tt ^ <fi ij/) is changed into /«, 
 N before a Kappa-mute (« y x ^) i^ changed into y, 
 N before a Tau-mute (t S 5) is not changed, e. g. 
 
 iv-Treipia becomes ifnretpia 
 but cruj/Teii'ft), d'uj'Ssto, (Tvi/^s&i. 
 
 e'vy~Ka\4ca becomes (nry/coXeftj 
 xruy^yiyj/djffKot *' (ruyytyvt^iricw 
 
 iriv-xpovos " tT^Tfxpovos 
 
 Comp. iwJno, imprimo. 
 
 Eem. 2. The enclitics are not changed, e. g. 'oDirep, rdyye, not Syirep, etc. 
 Rem. 3. Also at the end of a word, v before a Pi-mute, as well as before in, 
 was, without doubt, pronounced like p., and before a Kappa-mute, like 7 ; and 
 10 it is found in ancient inscriptions, c. g. TOMriATEPAKAITHMMHTEPA, 
 rorXPHMASriSMON (i. e. rhv irwripa Koi r'i]v fitirepa, tJij" xP'ru^aTuruiiv). So also 
 K and <r are used instead of c before V and a-, e. g. 'EAAHMNOI, 'E25AMOI 
 it e. ^y A^/JVB, iv Sti/tusn)- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
I EO.l 
 
 THE SICILANT O" WITH MUTES AND LIQUIDS. 
 
 37 
 
 f 20. d. Use of the Sibilant o-, with Mutes and 
 Liquids. 
 
 I. A Pi-mute (tt /3 tj>) with o- is changed into ^, 
 
 a Kappa-mute (k 7 x) with o- is changed into f, 
 a Tau-mute (t 8 .S) disappears before <r, e. g. 
 
 (a) Pi-mute: 
 
 KeilKTO) 
 
 (from Xtfirai) becomes Aefif-w 
 
 
 rplfiffm 
 
 
 ' T()(;8a>) 
 
 T/jfl/'O) 
 
 
 ypitpffa 
 
 
 ' rP'J^'o) 
 
 yp6.^ta 
 
 ((8) Kappa-tnutc 
 
 : irAcKiTM 
 
 
 ' irAcKw) 
 
 TrAefoj 
 
 
 JVeytfo) 
 
 
 ' A.V) 
 
 Ae'la. 
 
 
 flpe'x™ 
 
 
 ' J3pe'x«) 
 
 /3p.'{» 
 
 (■y) Tali-mutc : 
 
 avuTffw 
 
 
 ' i^*™) 
 
 Si^utrw 
 
 
 ^pci'Stro) 
 
 
 ' ^peffiu) 
 
 ipei&o» 
 
 
 ffe/a-o-oj 
 
 
 ' irefau.) 
 
 ireifffa 
 
 
 iXirlStra 
 
 
 ' ^\7r(f«) 
 
 lATrftrti 
 
 Kemabk 1. Comp. dtiri) rexi, com ; from ducg, rejo, coguo. The Prep. U 
 Before o- is an exception, e. g. eWcofo), not i^iiira. — In irais, Gen. iroS-i(j, and 
 tn the Perf. active Part, in -dis, Gen. -6t-os, after the Tau-mute disappears, the 
 preceding vowel Is lengthened. 
 
 2. N disappears before o- ; but when v is joined with a Tau- 
 mute, both disappear before a-, but the short vowel before a-, is 
 lengthened : e into «, into ov, a, i, v into d, I, v, Comp. Rem. 3, 
 e.g. 
 
 Tv()>^ivr-ffi becomes TmpSicirti Aeovr-iri becomes Kiovai 
 
 <mivZ-aa " OTTEitrw e\fuvA-i!'t " f\/u(Ti 
 
 fi^avT-ai ri'l/aai ieiKvivT-iri " SeiKvSri 
 
 ZcdfiQV-TTi " iaifiofft "Eivo^tHyr-ffL " "Efvo^uiri, 
 
 Hem. 2. Exceptions : 'Ey, e. g. ivaTnlpia ; ?ra;'- before cr with another conso- 
 nant, e. g. ircJj'crttOTros, in some words is assimilated ; e. g. irda-ffofos is used as 
 well as ivdvao^jios, etc. (in vd?\.ty the usage varies) ; also in some inflective and 
 derivative forms in -troi and -tris from verbs in -ali/a, e. g. Tti^mau (from 
 i^o/xu), triitavais (from ireiraii'to), and in the substantives, ^ t\iuvs, earth-vxmm,, ^ 
 Telpivs, icagon-baeket, t) Ttpvvs, v is retained before o-. — In composition, the v in 
 wiv is changed into tr before cr followed by a vowel, e. g. o-uo-irtSfiij (from in5i» and 
 j-riJf*] ; but before a followed by a consonant, or before f, it disappears, e. g. ahr- 
 mrifm becomes ffiarijiia, trvp-^vyla becomes trv^vyla. — In ^ap^O'', y' is dropped ; 
 on the contraiy, in tcJaoj, ^eAds (Gen. -avos), ktcIs, efs (Gen. -h6s], els, and in 
 the third Pers. PI. of the principal tenses (see § 103), e. g. fiov\eiovari (instead 
 of Pov\eiova-i), the omission of the simple v is compensated by lengthening 
 the vowel. 
 
 3. On the contrary, in the Aorist of Liquid verbs, c is omitted 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
38 CHANGE OP CONSONAKIS. [i 21 
 
 after the Liquid, but the omission is compensated, by lengthen 
 ing the stem-vowel, e. g. 
 
 flYy^\-(ri> becomes fijy^iXa ei'e/j.-a-a, becomes ?yei/<.o 
 
 ^av-aa " ?(^r)ya %<pSiep-ffix * ^(p&eipa, 
 
 Eem. 3. Sigma is Kkewise omitted before m in the future of Liquid rerbs, < 
 being inserted before o- for the sake of an easier pronunciation, and eai being con- 
 tracted into a, e. g. ayye\-4-(ra>, AtycAS. So too in the Nom. of the third Dec. 
 the final Sigma is omitted, when v or p precedes, and the short vowel is 
 lengthened, e. g. ehiiv instead of t'lKSp-s, iroti^iiv instead of iroi/ifv-s, pifrecf 
 instead of ^iiTop-s, alSrfip instead of aiStip-s. — T and <r are omitted in the Nom. 
 of substantires and participles in -oiy, Geni -ovt-os ; but, as a compensation, a is 
 lengthened into to, e. g. \4ovt-s becomes \eW, PoiKtvovr-s becomes fiav\siav, 
 
 Kem. 4. In imOfu (instead of tV-yujui, ves-tio) the o- is assimilatci^ to the 
 following y, and in -flfii (instead of i<r'iil) t is omitted, but c is lengthened 
 into (I. 
 
 §21. e. Change of separated Consonants. 
 
 1. Sometimes a consonant affects another consonant, though 
 they do not immediately follow one another, but are separated 
 by a vowel or even by two syllables. Thus, one A. changes 
 another A. into p, e. g. KetfiaXapyCa (instead of Ke<f>aXa\yLa from 
 aXyiiv), yXoia-crapyia (instead of yXtaaa-dkyia), dpyaXeos (instead of 
 aXyaXio's from dAyetv) ; the suffix (uXiy becomes wpi}, when a \ pre- 
 cedes, e. g. S^aXTTiap-rj. 
 
 2. In the reduplication of verbs whose stem begins with a 
 rough mute, instead of repeating this mute, which would be 
 the regular formation, the first rough mute is changed into the 
 corresponding smooth, thus : — 
 
 0e-^iA7j(ca (from ^i\4a) is changed into )rEifi\7;Ka 
 Xe'-X""" ( " X^'") " " K^xvKa 
 
 ^4-StOKa ( " &l!oj) " " re^uKa 
 
 Ai-Srvfii (stem0E) " " ri^fu. 
 
 Likewise in the verbs, Weii/, to sacrifice, and TiSt4mi (stem BE), to place, & of 
 the root is changed into t, in the passive forms which begin with S : — 
 
 Itv-^v, TU-^co/Mi, ^tc'-Stjv, Tf-^ao/iai, instead of e3T!-&i)i/, f^i-^i/. 
 
 So also, for the sake of euphony, the p is not reduplicated, and instead of il 
 l^^ is used, c. g. ippiriKo.. 
 
 3. In words whose stem begins with t and ends with an 
 Aspirate mtite, the aspiration is transferred to the preceding 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 22, 23.] METATHESIS OP THE LIQUIDS. 39 
 
 smooth T, when the Aspirate before the formative syllable be- 
 ginning with (T, T, and [i, must, according to the laws of euphony 
 (H 17, 2; 19, 1; 20, 1), be changed into a smooth consonant; 
 by this transposition, r is changed into the Aspirate &. Such a 
 change is called the Metathesis of the aspiration. 
 
 Thus, rpfip-w (rirpoipa Perf.) is changed into (ftpeir-o-eo) S)fe^a, dpiir^fip, {Stpen- 
 fia) dpifi/ia; 
 
 raxfiii, TKi-a, Ttupiivai {second Aor. Pass.), into ^il\j/a, diir-ra, (rei^Bir- 
 uoi) TeStaiifuu (but tliird Pers. PI. TCTiJif otoi, e. g. Her. 6, 103, with one 
 of the better MSS. is to be icad instead of Tc&cJ(faTai); 
 
 Tpi<pos, TPT*-w into dpi\fia>, ^piir-ra (TeSpiwr-juai), Ti^pfumuu; 
 
 Tpix-" iiito {^psK-ffo/uu) apfjojiioi ; — rptx-is into S/)fJ, &pi|{» ; 
 
 raxii, in the comparative, becomes ddirarav. For the same reason, the 
 future ?{«, from Ix"' t" ^"Si is the proper form, the aspiration of 
 the X lieing transferred to the smooth breathing and making it 
 rough. 
 
 Bemabk 1. Tei^io from reiixu, and Tpijoi from rpix", remain unchanged. 
 
 Rem. 2. Where the passive endings of the above verbs, -rpi^a, TA*n 
 ifiiarrw), TPT*n (^pinrra), begin with &, the aspiration of the two final conso- 
 aants ^^, changes r, the initial consonant of the stem, into d, e. g. 
 
 i^p4(j}-^v, ^pe(j}-dT}vai, ^petp-^aeff^ai, 
 
 Eem. 3. In the imperative ending of the first Aor. Pass., where both syllar 
 bles should begin with ^, namely, ftijai, not the first, but the last aspuate mute 
 is changed into the corresponding smooth ; thus Sijtj, e. g. $ov\ei&riTi. 
 
 i 22. Metathesis of the Liquids. 
 
 The Liquids, and also the Lingual t when tt precedes, often 
 change place with a preceding vowel, for the sake of euphony. 
 The vowel then usually becomes long. This lengthening of 
 the vowel distinguishes Metathesis from Syncope (the latter 
 being the mere omission of e), e. g. fii-fivi^a-Kio (from the root fiev, 
 comp. mens), iSviJo-km (from Sav-elv), TeT/ii;Ka (from re/t-flv), 
 /3cy3Xi;Ka (from fiaX-eiv), ■TTT^croficu (from Triroflai). 
 
 y 23. Doubling of Consonants. 
 
 1. Consonants are doubled, in the first place, for the sake of 
 euphony, e. g. jSo^vppoos from /3a^ and pica ; eppeov instead of 
 iptov ; in the second place, in consequence of the concurrence 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
40 STaENQTHENING AND ADDITION OF CONSONANTS. (} 24 
 
 of like or similar sounds, in the infle'',tion and derivation, e. g 
 Ir-vo/tos (from ev and vo/moi), iX-keurw (instead of evX.), cn;/i-/xa;)^os 
 (instead of (tuv/j,.), XeXetj«.-/x.ai (instead of Xe\€t7r/A.), \rj/j.-fia (in- 
 stead of X^TT/xa), KoiX'/jM (instead of kottixo), rdxr-a-ui or Tar-Ta 
 (instead of rdy-o-ai), ^a-a-av or ijtt(ov (instead of yjK-unv), pSXKm 
 (instead of /ta\-tov), oAAos (instead of oXtos, alius). 
 
 2. In the Common language, only the Liquids, X, /*, v, p, the 
 SibUant cr, and the Mute t, can be doubled ; yet ir and k are 
 also doubled in single words, e. g. ra-Tros, a horse ; kokko';, a berry. 
 The Medial y is often doubled, but this letter thus doubled is 
 softened in the pronunciation (Jj 2). Two Aspirates are not 
 doubled (} 17, 4). 
 
 3. p is doubled when the augment is prefixed, e. g. tpptov, 
 and in composition, when it is preceded by a short vowel, e. g. 
 
 appr/KTO';, ^a^vpipoo's ; but ev-puxTTOs (from ev and pwyw/j-tj. 
 
 Eemaek. In imitation of Somer, the Tragic writers also double the ir, yet 
 much less frequently than Homer, e. g. T6<r<roy, Soph. Aj. 185; o\4(r&as, 390; 
 cffavAri, 294 ; ij.4<rtrri, Ant. 1223 ; ea-a-erai, JEsch. Pers. 122 ; so also in the Dat 
 PI. of the third Dec. (crm. 
 
 § 24. Strengthening and Addition of Consonants. 
 
 1. Consonants are frequently strengthened, in the inflection, by the addiiion 
 of a corresponding consonant, namely : — 
 
 (a) The Labials (;8 ir <p) by t, e. g. /SXi^tt-t-m (instead of j8\i£j3-ib), TfJir-r-oi 
 (instead of rin-a), piit-T-a (instead of ^'.(p-a) ; sometimes also by o-, which 
 assimilates the preceding Labial (thus tra; Attic tt), e. g. tteVo-oi (root 
 TTfir), Att. T€TTii, Tut. TTEifia!, thc poctic tffo-o/uu, Put. Stf/o/ioi J iu S4tjl» 
 (instead of Se'^oi), <^ and <r are changed into ^ ; 
 
 (b) The Palatals (y k x) are strengthened by <r, which assimilates the pre 
 ceding Palatal (thus a-a; Att. tt), or, though more seldom, the Palatai 
 unites with the <r and is changed into (, e. g. Tia--<r-u, Att. t4t-t* 
 (instead of T07-B), <ppl(r-(r-ui, Att. tpplr-r-a (instead of <j>plic-a), $^<r-ir-t- 
 Att. p-lrr-T-a (instead of /3^x-<») ! Kp&^a (instead of Kpiya), rpl^a (instead 
 of Tplya) ; a Kappa-mute with <r is seldom changed into J, e. g. oSt" 
 (aug-eo), a\4i,u, o5<ifi» and oSe£f«> ; the strengthening t is found only in 
 
 TTCKTW and TIKTOJ. 
 
 (c) The Linguals (S t a) are strengthened by cr, which with the precedina 
 Lingual is changed into C, e. g. <ppii(a (instead of ^piSa), or, though 
 more seldom, a assimilates the preceding Tau-mute, c. g. Klaaonai and 
 Xko/iai, ip4<r<ra, 4p4TTa> (instead of ^pe'rai), icopi<T<ru (instead of Kopi^a). 
 
 2. The unpleasant concurrence of p.p and vp in the middle of some words. 
 occasioned by the omission of a vowel, is softened by iasertrng j8 between ho 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 25.] EXPULSION AND OMISSION OP CONSONANTS. 41 
 
 and S botvieen vp, thus, in fietrnfi-g-pla (formed from /lemineplit, iiemiiifla), 70/1- 
 fi'pos (from yajj-'e-pSs, yafipSs), &.v-5-p6s (from cLvepos, avp6s). 
 
 3. N also is used to strengthen the Labials, especially in poetry, so as to make 
 a syllable long by position, e. g. ri/iTravov (from TiJir^-m), (rTp6pi0os (from <rrpi- 
 i^m); ^iiJ.$os {rdipos); Kopiixfii) (icopvipii) ; &p6ii$!>s {rp4<pety); o/*(p^ {e'areiy)' 
 viju^Tl (nubere) ; i$piiws and S/iPpifios, vJivvfios and vdmnvos. In the present 
 tense of many yerbs, this strengthening v is found, c. g. Trw^imiuu, diyyivu, 
 \a/i0iva instead of iridoimi, &iya), \dPu. On the change of y, see § 19, 3. On 
 the V Faragogic, see § 15, 1. 
 
 4. 2 also is prefixed to some words, but mostly to such as begin with /i, e. g 
 ^uSi| and (T^uSil, iuKp6s and a/uKpSs ; a strengthening a is also inserted before /i 
 and T in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and before & in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. TeTE\e- 
 a-iiai, TereAE-ff-Tai, 4TeKc-(r-&T)v (5 131); also in the derivation and composition 
 of words, tr is frequently inserted for the sake of euphony, e. g. <rft-ir-/i6s, ttuv- 
 aivepjis, /jlojo-it-tSkos, etc.; instead of tr, & also is inserted before ft, e. g. 
 pvK7j-^-/i6sf 6pxv~^'l^^S) ffKop-^-fiSs from aKaipw, trop-^fiSs from ireipta. 
 
 i 25. Expulsion and Omission of Consonants. 
 
 1. In inflection, <r is very often omitted between two vowers, e. g. TiJjrTp, 
 ^TiSirTou, Tiirroio instead of r&trTe-ff-cu or TiSirTij-troi, eTi^re-tr-o, T^irrot-ff-oj 
 ycye-as, 7 ei't-sii' instead of yipc-ir-os, yey4-<r-av {coTaii. gene-r-is, gene-r-um). 
 At the end of a word, and after Pi and Kappa-mutes, it is retained, e. g. yems, 
 Ti\fia {—TvTrirai), TK^^a (= TrXeK-fftti), but after the Liquids, in inflection, as 
 well as commonly at the end of a word, it is omitted, e. g. ^7761X0 (instead 
 of i)yye\-(r-a), ayye\a (instead of a77eVe-<r-a>, a.yye\-e-a), ^iiToip (instead 
 of jiiyrop-s). Comp. ^ 20, Eem. 3. 
 
 2. The Digamma softened into the rowel v (§ 200) is omitted: (a) in the 
 middle of the word between two vowels, e. g. a6v [aF6v), ovum, iU (iFls), ovis, 
 kHv (aiFiiv), aevum, v4os [viFos), novus, ffKaiSs {(TKaiFis), scaevus, ;3o<!y (fioF6s), 
 bovis ; ae'», tAcoj, arew, e\da> instead of &4Fai, etc. ; (b) at the beginning of 
 the word before vowels and p, a. g. olyos (Fo7pos), vinum, lap (Fiap), ver, Ij 
 (Fls) vis, oXkos {Fomos), vicus, iZitv (FSetv), videre, ia-Snjs (FeaSrhs), vestis, 
 ^yyufu {Fffliyiiviu), frango. On the contrary, the Digamma (this softened v) 
 is retained in connection with a preceding a, e, u, with which it then coalescea 
 and forms a diphthong : (o) at the end of a word, e. g. 0od (instead of p6F), 
 /SocriAeS, etc. ; (iS) before a consonant, e. g. 0ovs {06Fs, bovs, bos), vavs (viiFs), 
 navis, ySoSc, Pmtri, PaffAeis, j8(WiXeS<ri, ^eitrofiai, vMiaouM, inieiaoiuu, ihaivia. 
 But when an . or v precedes it, then it disappears before a consonant, but 
 ?fingthens the 1 or u, e. g. k?s (instead of kIFs), (tvs (instead of aiiFs) IxSii' 
 (instead of ixS>iFs), Ace. kTc, irijc, Ix^v; but it disappears also, in this case, 
 in the middle of a word between vowels, e. g. At-is, Ki-6s, (rC-ifs, I'xS^u-os (instead 
 of AiF-ifj, KiF-6s, aiiF-is, Ix^tF-os. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
42 EXPULSION ANL OMISSION OP CONSONANTS. [♦ 25. 
 
 3. Since the Greek language admits an accumulation of three consonants, 
 only in composition, not in simple words, unless the first or the last is a 
 Liquid, then, if in the inflection of the verb, a tei-mination beginning with ird 
 is appended to the consonant of the root, the a is dropped : — 
 
 \e\fiTr-a&a>v (irorCL kslir-u) becomes AeA-efiffteov (§17,2.) 
 Ks\iy<rSt<u ( " Key") " AcAeX*"' (§17.2.) 
 
 i<rT&K-(rSi(u ( " ffreXK-a) " iardf^ai. 
 
 Uemakk. On the omission of a Tau-mute, and a v and vt before o-, and a o 
 after a Liquid, see § 20. On veTre/iiua, ia^ryjuu, etc. instead of -TreTre/ififuu, 
 cffipiyyiuu, see \ 144, E. 2. In composition, v is often omitted, e g. HvAoKTi- 
 cos, 'AiroAAff-ffw/jos, instead of Xlv^oyxT,, ^^TroXKdvZ, 
 
 4. Some words may drop their final consonant, either to avoid an accumula^ 
 tion of consonants, or, in verse, to prevent a syllable becoming .%ng by position. 
 In addition to the words mentioned under § 15, namely, ouk (ou), €| (^k), oSt«s 
 {ottTu), which usually retain their final consonant before - vowel to prevent 
 Hiatus, but drop it before consonants, here belong, 
 
 (a) adverbs of place in aey, e. g. irpSa-Aev, iirur^ev, virepdcv, etc., which never 
 drop the v before a consonant, in prose, but- very often in Epic poetry, 
 more seldom in the Attic poets ; 
 
 (b) /ie'xpij and SxP'^i which, however, in the be?! classical writers, drop 
 their cr, not only before consonants, but commonly even before vowels, 
 c. g. jue'xpi 'Ava^ay6pov, PI. Hipp. Maj. 281, c ; /ie'^pi ivrav^a. Id. Symp. 
 210, e ; fi^xp^ otov, X. C. 4. 7, 2 ; ft-^xp^ ipv^pas ^a\ilT7Tis, Id. Cy. 8. 
 6,20; 
 
 (c) the adverbs arpefias, efiiras, juecijyiJs, ai/riKpvs, &.i^€ccs, &<pv(aSi which in 
 poetry may drop their s, but never in prose ; in the Ionic dialect, numeral 
 adverbs in -bkis also frequently drop the o- before consonants, e. g. 
 TroWdxi. Her. 2, 2. 
 
 5. A genuine Greek word can end only in one of the three Liquids, ^, <r (i(', 
 f, i. e. irff, K<r) and p. The two words, ovk, not, and 4k, out of, form only an 
 apparent exception, since, as Proclitics (§ 32), they incline to the following 
 word, and, as it were, become a part of it. This law of euphony occasions 
 either the omission of all other consonants, or it changes them into one of the 
 three Liquids just named; hence, aa/ia (Gen. (rt6/<oT-os), instead of a-w/tccr, 
 ■ydXa (Gen. 7i£xokt-oi), Instead of yi\aKT, \4uy ( Gen. X^oit-os), instead of 
 kiopT, ifiov\tvov instead of iBoiXevovr; — re pas (Gen. repar-os), instead of 
 WpoT, K^pas (Gen. Kipur-os), instead of Kepor, n4\i (Gen. h4mt-os), instead 
 of lUkn, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 20. 27.] NATURE AND QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 43 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 Syllables. 
 
 §26. Nature and Division of Syllable;. 
 
 1. Eveiy vowel, pronounced by itself, or in connection with 
 one or more consonants, is called a syllable. 
 
 2. A word consists of one or more syllables. When a word 
 consists of several syllables, a distinction is made between the 
 stem-syllables and the syllables of inflection or derivation. 
 The stem-syllables express the essential idea of the word, the 
 syllables of inflection or derivation, the relations of the idea. 
 Thus, e. g. in yi-ypa<j>-a, the middle syllable is the stem-syllable ; 
 the two others, syllables of inflection : in irpay-iux, the first is 
 the stem-syllable ; the last, the syllable of derivation. 
 
 5 27. Quantity of Syllables. 
 
 1. A syllable is short or long, by nature, according as its 
 vowel is short or long. 
 
 2. Every syllable is long which contains a diphthong, or a 
 simple long vowel, or two vowels contracted into one, e. g. 
 
 jSorXeuo) ; 17/3(1)5 ; 'aKtov (from aiiaav), ^orpv? (from ySorpvas). 
 
 3. A syllable with a short vowel becomes long by position, 
 when two oi three consonants, or a double consonant (^ $ i^), 
 foUow the short vowel, e. g. cttcAAoj, tuij/avrc';, Kopa^ («opaKos) 
 
 Tpairlt/x. 
 
 Beuark 1. The pronunciation' of a syllable long by nature, and of one 
 long by position, differs in this, that the former is pronounced Umg, but the 
 latter not. When a syllable long by nature is also long by position, its pronun- 
 ciation must be protracted. Hence a distinction is made in pronouncing such 
 words as TrptirTW, irpa|is, irpclyfia (d), and rdrra, rii^ts, rdyfia (a). 
 
 Bem. 2. But whed a short vowel stands before a Mute and a Liquid (Fositio 
 debilis), it commonly remains short in the Attic dialect, because the sound of 
 the Xiiquids, being less distinct than the Mutes, they are pronounced with mora 
 
 ' The method of pronunciation stated in this remark is adopted in many of 
 the Grerman gymnasia, and in some of the schools in England and Scotland. 
 but not to any extent in this country. — Tk. • 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
44 QUANTITY OF THE TENULT. f^ 28. 
 
 ease, e. g. &TiKvos, fiireTrXoj, 'aKjjcli, Parpvs, SiSpaxiios, yet in two cases the posi- 
 tion of the Mute and Liquid lengthens the short vowel : — 
 
 a) in cempounds, e. g. 'Ixve/ia ; 
 
 b) when one of the Medials (/3 y S) stands before one of the three Liquids 
 {\ n v), e. g. pi0\os, etoSp-os, ■a-eirhey/uu ; in tragic trimeter, &\ also lengthen 
 the preceding short vowel. 
 
 It is obvious that a vowel long by nature cannot be shortened by a Mute and 
 Liquid, e. g. ^iivvrpov. 
 
 4. A syllable, which contains one of the three doubtful 
 vowels (a, c, v), cannot, in the same word, be pronounced long 
 and short, but must be either long or short. 
 
 V 28. Quantity of the Penult. 
 
 In order to a correct pronunciation, the quantity of the three 
 doubtful vowels, a, i, and v, in the penult of words of three or 
 more syllables, must be determiued. The following are the 
 principal instances in which the penult is long. The quantity 
 of the syllables of inflection is treated in connection with the 
 Forms : — 
 
 The penult is long, 
 
 1. In substantives in -aav (Gen. -aoms or -aams); in substantives of two or 
 more syllables in -lav (Gen. -tofos; but -lav. Gen. -"tavos), and in forms of the 
 comparative in -rwc, -Toy (Gen. -lovos), e. g. oTriav, -ovos, i, ti, companion, Tla<r(i- 
 titer, -avos ; Kiav, -ovos, ri, pillar, iSpa^W, -ovos, 6, arm, 'Aucpftnv, -ovos ; but 
 AevKaKbcv, -tovos ; KaWftov, KdWlov, more beautiful. 
 
 Exceptions. The two Oxytones, ^ iiidiv (X), shore, and generally ti x'"^"' f""*- 
 In Homer, the comparatives in -iav, lov, are always short, where the versificar 
 tion admits. 
 
 2. In oxytoned proper names in -avis, and in the compounds in -a.y6s (from 
 iyta, to lead, and Sryvvfu, to break), -avap and -Kpavos, e. g. 'Aoiavis, \oxayis, 
 captain ; vavdySs, naufragus ; BicWap, SUpavos, having two horns. 
 
 3. In adjectives in -oijs (I"em. -ais) derived from verbs- in -aw, in proper 
 names in -drris, in substantives in -irris (Fem. -Ttis), and in those in -uTjjsof the 
 first Dec. (Pem. -Btis), and in proper names in -rrTj, c. g. axp&iis, untouched; 
 Eu<jK>dT7is, Mi&piSdrijj, iro^fTrji, -ov, citizen (Fem. iroXiris) ; TrpeopbrtiS, -ov, old 
 nan ; 'A<l>pottrTj, ^AiJUpLTptrTj. 
 
 Exceptions: (a) to the proper names in -otijs: TaXarns, AnAynaTijj, 2apftST7)i, 
 all in -^dT7)r and -(parris, and compounds formed from verbal roots, e. g. ^Smxpi- 
 this; — (b) KpiT'lis, judge, from the short root KpX, ktIt^s, builder, and Atriis, 
 one who sacrifices. 
 
 4. In Proparoxytones in -l\os, -IKov, -Ivos, -Ivov, in words in -Ivri, -Tva, 
 ■fvrit-Ova, in those in -ivos, when <r does not precede the ending; in Pro 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t28.] 
 
 QUANTITY OF THE PENULT. 43 
 
 Proparoxytone8 in -6 pa, and in adjectives in -Coos with a precedinir lona 
 ayllable, e. g. *■ b a 
 
 'O SjiOujs, multitude ; ButA-j), gift ; i KivSOi/at, danger; 
 
 iriSTKov, shoe ; KXyXva, ylijiupa, bridge ; 
 
 fi Kifuvos, oven ; a'urxij'v, shame : l(rxvp6s, strong ; 
 
 a4Kivoii, pardy; &iiOm, defence ; {hut 6x<ipis and. ix»pis), Jirm. 
 
 Remakk 1. The following may be added to the Proparoxytones in -ivos 
 and -Op o, namely, S x»A.ii'<fj, rein; 6 iplv6s, wild fig-tree; SioA i, KoWipa, course 
 
 Exceptions. EiXairfi/Tj.ycasi, and compounds in-yiivos {from yiiiiii, woman] 
 e-g. iySpoyiiyos, and KoptvTi, club. 
 
 5. In substantives in -Stoj, whose antepenult is long, and in compound 
 adjectives in -SaKpvros and -rpvTos (from iaxpia, rpta), &nd also in sub 
 stantives in -i/iio, -vyi,, and -iywv, and in adverbs in -ui6v, c. g. 
 
 i KUKiris, wailing ; irpiiTos, indestructible ; o\o\vyli, ululatus ; 
 
 liSixpOros, without tears; iSpO/ut, -otos, seat; oKoMydy, ululatus, 
 
 . &orpvS6v, in dusters. 
 
 Exception. Map/tapflyri, splendor, 
 
 6. In dissyllabic Oxytones in -iK6s, -lp.6s, -lv6s, -l6s, -6\6s, -i/iit, 
 if 6s, and in Paroxytones in -i/ti), -irii, e. g. 
 
 '^l\6s,bare; ii fiiuis, skin ; i ^vids, pcde ; iiiiiis, common ; 
 
 6 x^^s, fodder; 6 'Us, dart; 6 M/iis, mind; AJ/iij, injury; 
 
 i hl/iis, hunger ; i xif^s, Juice ; so, idifua, etc.; /iiyri, excuse. 
 
 Exertions. BiSs {6), bow; irKSyds (4), washing-trough. 
 
 7. In dissyllables in-aos, -av6s (oxytoned), and in dissyllables in -la, which 
 Vgin with two consonants, c. g. 
 
 i va6s, temple ; ipdvos, brilliant ; aria,' pebble; ip\li, door-post. 
 
 Eem. 2." The following maybe added to dissyllables in -la: KoKii, shed, 
 avta, trouble ; Kovta, dust ; and to those in -om, the variable iXooy, and the propet 
 names in -d o s, e. g. 'XiuptApaas ; Olv6iiAas is an exception. 
 
 Exceptions. Ta6s or rais(i), peacock; itkuHX), shadow. 
 
 8. The following sinaile words should also be- noted : — 
 
 r. d. 
 
 'AKpdTos, unmixed; veavis, young girl ; -riApa, turban ; 
 
 a,vidp6s, troublesome; maS6s, attendant; ^iXapos, dear; 
 
 av^hSns, self-sufficient ; irlvairi, mustard; S ^Kvcipos, tattle. 
 
 Also the proper names, 'A/ido-ij, "Amiros, 'Aparos, Ari/iipaTos, Q^avi, 'lio-mi. 
 MpldTFos, ^dp&jris (Serapis),.2Ti5^(/)dA.oj, ^tlptrSAos. 
 
 II. i. 
 'AKpWfis, exact ; iviirl], rebuke ; TrapS-Ei/oirfiriji, gallanL 
 
 fipS'Tiios, strong; epT&os, day-laborer; 
 
 rk ripTxos, picHedfish ; i fi ;ceXrSi»i', swallow; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
46 ACCENTS. [i 29. 
 
 Also the proper names, 'Ayx'f<'''!ri TpivlKos, 'E.ipXiros, kJukos {l),''OirXpis, Bovtrlpit, 
 The following dissyllables should be noted for the sake of the compounds: 
 Tifiii, honor ; yftcT), victory ; (f:vK-ti, tribe ; "CAn, forest; \It6s, little; tuKpis, small; 
 
 ^'- ^. &TiflOS, 
 
 in. 0. 
 
 'Aiivfimv, blameless ; epvKa, to hold back ; \ii(^vpov, booty ; 
 
 &av\ov, asylum; 6 l\06s, den v iriirijpos, papyrus; 
 
 aSrfi {i), war-cry ; iyvbri, the har,i ; tl-rvpov, bran. 
 
 Also the proper names, 'AfiiSos, 'Apx^^ar, BiS-Oyiir, Ai6m<ros, Ka/iPvffris, Kcp- 
 Kvpa, KaKvrSs. And the dissyllables, ^vxht soul; 6 Tvp6s, cheese; S iriipds, wheat; 
 6 xpCfcf J, gold ; Kvirn, grief; ^Oxpis, cold. 
 
 k 29. Accents 
 
 1. The written accent designates the tone -.syllable, according 
 to the original Greek pronunciation. The accented syllable 
 was pronounced with a particular stress as well as elevation of 
 voice. The same is true of the modern Greek. In Enghsh, 
 too, while the stress of the accented syllable is more particu- 
 larly prominent, there is often also an accompanying elevation 
 of the voice, but not so much as in the modern Greek. 
 
 2. In the pronunciation of Greek prose, the accent and quan- 
 tity were both regarded ; thus, in av^powros, while the accentual 
 stress was laid on the a, the proper quantity of the penult oj was 
 preserved. Compare analogous EngUsh ■^vords, as sunrising, 
 mtpouring, in which both the accent on the antepenult and the 
 length of the penult are observed. 
 
 3. How the Greeks observed both the accent and quantity in 
 poetry, cannot now be determined. But as it was generally 
 sung or recited in the style of chantiag, the accent was probably 
 disregarded, as is constantly done in singing at present. 
 
 4. The Greek has the following marks for the tone or accent 
 
 (irposwSsai) : — 
 
 (a) The acite (-) to denote the sharp or clear tone, e. g. 
 Xoyos; 
 
 (b) The circumflex {- ) to denote the protracted or winding 
 tone, e. g. (ru>ix.a.. This accent consists in uniting the rising 
 and falling tone in pronouncing a long syllable, since, e. g 
 the word o-SiiLa was probably pronounced as o-oo/xa ; 
 
 (c) The grave {-) to denote thefallitig or heavy tone 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 29.] ACCENTS. 47 
 
 Eemakk 1. The mark of the falling tone was not used, llenoe not fivftpA.- 
 wis, \6yhs, but ivSipairos, \6yia. The mark of the grare was used only to 
 distinguish certain words, e. g. tU, some one, and t'is, who ? and, as will be seen 
 in § 31, 1, instead of the acute on the final syllable of words in connected 
 JiscouTse. 
 
 Rem. 2. The accent stands iqion the second vowel of diphthongs ; at the 
 beginning of words commencing with a vowel, the acute and grave stand 
 after the breathing, but the circumflex over it, e. g. Sirol, aS\eios, ttv tSftrpj, 
 Apos, aT/<a. But in capital letters, in connection with the diphthongs (f, y, a, 
 the accent and the breathing stand upon the first vowel, e. g.'AiStjy. On the 
 diaeresis, see § 4, Bern. 6. 
 
 Rem. 3. The grave accent differed from the acute as the weaker from the 
 stronger accent in d^rim^nhd, or in the Ijaimfineratdrum, the penultimate accept 
 in both words being much stronger than the preceding one. Tjie circumflex 
 accent denoted a tone like the circumflex inflection in English. 
 
 Rem. 4. In the United States and Great Britain, Greek 4s pot generally 
 pronounced by the accents, no regard being had to these so far as the pronun- 
 ciation is concerned. In a few institutions, however, the pronunciation is 
 regulated* by the accent ; but where this is the case, the grave and ciixnimflex 
 accents are pronounced in the same manner as the acute. No difference is 
 therefore made in the pronunciation of n/iii and n/iii, nor between yvaiia/t and 
 yvdiiiais. In these and all similar cases, the Greeks must have made distinp- 
 lions. 
 
 5. The accent can stand only on one of the last three sylla- 
 bles of a word; it was not any natural difficulty but merely 
 Greek usage which prevented the accent from being placed 
 further back than the antepenult. 
 
 6. The acute stands on one of the last tliree syllables, whether 
 this is long or short, e. g. koXos, avSpilmov, iroX«/ios ; but upon the 
 antepenult, only when the last syllable is short, and is also not 
 long by position, e. g. av^powros, but avSpumov, 
 
 7. The circumflex stands only on one of the last two sylla- 
 bles, and the syllable on which it stands must always be long 
 by nature, e. g. rov, o-5/ia; but it stands upon the penult only 
 when the ultimate is short, or long only by position, e. g. reixos, 
 XPVf^ ■Jrpo^ts, avA.af, Gen. -Skos, KaXavpoiff, Ko-T^kif, Aij/aSvo^. 
 
 Rem. 5. Also in substantives in -t| and -CJ (Gen. -ucos, -vkos), j and u long 
 by nature, are considered as short in respect to accentuation, e. g. ^oiyij, Gen. 
 •iKos, Krjpii, Gen. -vkos. 
 
 8. If, therefore, the anteppnult is accented, it can have only 
 the acute ; but if thp penult is accented, and is long by nature, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
48 ACCENTS. [i 29. 
 
 it must have the circumflex, when the ultimate is short, e. g. 
 reixos, irparre, but the acute, when the ultimate ' is long, e. g 
 relxov;, Trpdrrai ; if the penult is short it has only the acute, e. g. 
 rarro), Tarre. On the ultimate, either the acute or the circumflex 
 stands, e. g. ■n-ar'^p, iraTplov; nominatives accented on the ulti- 
 mate usually have the acute, e. g. hnrevs trorafwi, ^-qp. 
 
 Kem. 6. In the inflection-endings, -oi and -oi, and in the adverbs, irpiirdKiu 
 and &oroA.oi, the diphthongs, in respect to the accent, are considered short, e. g. 
 TpiireQai, tiWetoi, yKaffaai, iv^panroi, x'^f""- The optative endings, -o i and 
 :oi, e.g. Tt/iiiffai, iK\cliroi, Ae/iroi, and the adverb oiKoi, domi, a< home, are long; 
 on tile contrary, oTkoi, houses, from oIkos. 
 
 Bem. 7. In the old Ionic and Attic declension, a> ia considered as short 
 in respect to accent, having only half its usual length, as it takes the place of o, 
 e. g. Mei/eAeMS, ayilryeccy ; — Tr6\e(its, ttSKcwv — ; %\eu>s, ^ynpcos. Gen. %\etc, ayTjpco ; 
 but if adjectives like J\eas are declined according to the third Dec, they are 
 accented regularly, e. g. <j)i\oy4\us, (piAoyeKaTos ; so also in the Dat. Sing, and 
 PI., as well as in the. Gen. and Dat. Dual, where the penult is long, e. g. &ynpas, 
 iLytjpai, ayiiptes, ayfipcitv. 
 
 Kem. 8. In the words, elSe, that, ralxi, ceiiainli/, the penult has the acute, 
 apparently contrary to the rule ; but these must be treated as separate words. 
 The accentuation of the words etre, oSre, Sjirsp, ^Tis, roisSe, etc., is to be 
 explained on the ground, that they are compounded with Enclitics (§ 33). 
 
 Rem. 9. According to the condition of the last syllable with respect t« 
 accent, words have the following names : — 
 
 (a) Oxytones, when the ultimate has the acute, e. g. rerv^ds, KiiKis, Sijp; 
 
 (b) Paroxytones, when the penult has the acute, e. g. TivTai ; 
 
 (c) Proparoxytones, when the antepenult has the acute, e. g. if^pamoi, tvw- 
 T^fiej/os, &f^poi7rotf TVTrT6fj.eyot', 
 
 (d) Pcrispomena, when the ultimate has the circumflex, v. g. kcucus; 
 
 (e) ProperispomSna, when the penult has the circumflex, e. g. wpay/ia, ^i- 
 Xovtra ; 
 
 (f ) Barytones, when the ultimate is unaccented, e. g. irpayiiora, irpvLyixa. 
 
 ' Hence the accent often enables us to detei-mine the quantity of syllables, 
 e. g. from the acute on the antepenult of iroiirrpia, fux^Tpta, "We infer that the 
 nltimate is short, otherwise the accent could not stand further back than the 
 penult, No. 6, above; — from the circumflex on o-rros and irpa^is, that those 
 syllables are long by nature, 7; — from the circumflex on fio7pa and areipa, 
 that the ultimate is short, 7 ; — from the acute on x^P") S/">, and "Hpa, thai 
 the ultimate is long, otherwise the penult of these words must be circumflexod, 
 8 ; — from the acute on ipihos and ttoikiXos, that tlie penult of these words ii 
 short, othei-wise they must have Ircen circumflcxed, 8. — Tjl 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 30.] CHANGE AND REMOVAL OP THE ACCENT. 49 
 
 ♦ 30. Change and Removal of the Accent by Inflec 
 tion, Composition, and Contraction. 
 
 1. Whe^ a word is changed by inflection, either in the quan- 
 tity of its final syllable or in the number of its syllables, there 
 is generally a change or removal of the accent. 
 
 (a) By lengthening the final syllable, 
 
 (a) a Proparoxytone becomes a Paroxytone, e. g. TroAc/iot, 
 
 {P) a Properispomenon, a Paroxjrtone, e. g. tcixosj Tetxovs ; 
 (y) an Oxytone, a Perispomenon, e. g. 5eo?, 5eoI). Yet this 
 change is limited to particular cases. See § 45, 7, a. 
 
 (b) By shortening the final syllable, 
 
 (a) a dissyllabic Paroxytone with a penult long by nature 
 becomes a Properispomenon, e. g. (j^evyw, <j>evye, irparTt 
 
 (but Tarre) ; 
 
 (/3) a polysyllabic Paroxytone, whether the penult is long 
 or short, becomes a Proparoxytone, e. g. ySouXeuto, y3oi5- 
 Xeve. 
 
 (c) By prefixing a syllable or syllables to a word, the accent 
 is commonly removed towards the beginning of the word, e. g. 
 tfievya), t^euyov; so also in compounds, always in verbs, com- 
 monly in substantives and adjectives, e. g. oSos o-wVoSos, Stos 
 ^iXo^eoi, rL[i,rj art/Aos, ^ievye air 6 <ji evy e. But when syllables 
 are appended to a word, the accent is removed towards the 
 end of the word, e. g. tvttto}, rvTrro/ie^a, TV<l>Sr]a-6iA.eSa. 
 
 Eemaek 1. The particular cases of the change of accent by inflection, and 
 the exceptions to the general rules here stated, will be seen below, under the 
 ajcentuatiou of the several parts of speech. 
 
 2. The following principles apply in contraction : — 
 
 ( 1 ) When neither of the two syllables to be contracted is 
 accented, the contracted syllable also is unaccented ; and the 
 syllable wllich had the accent previous to contraction, still 
 retains it, e. g. 4>LKee = t^tXei (but (^lAm = ■^lA.et), yive'i = ycVet (but 
 yeviuiv = •yevfij'). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
60 CHANGE OF THE ACCENT. [^ 3l; 
 
 (2) But when one of the two syllables to be conttacted is 
 accented, the contracted syllable also is accented, 
 
 (a) when the contracted syllable is the antepenult or pemilt, 
 it takes the accent which the general rules require, e. e,. 
 
 ayavdo/Jicu = iyaitatuu (ptKeSfieyos = <l>i\ovfitvos 
 
 iffraSros = ia-rwros op^6ovci = hp^ovffi 
 
 (b) when the contracted syllable is the ultimate, it takes the 
 
 acute, when the last of the syllables to be contracted had 
 
 the acute ; the circumflex, when the first of the syllables 
 
 w^as accented, e. g. etrrams = ecrrcos, rixoi = '^X"'- 
 
 Bbm. 2. The exceptions to the principles stated, will be seen below, under 
 the contract Declensions and Conjugations. 
 
 CHANGE AITD REMOVAL OF THE ACCENT IN CONNECTED 
 DISCOURSE. 
 
 } 31. I. Grave instead of the Acute. — 11. Crasis. — 
 III. Elision. — IV. Anastrophe. 
 
 I. In connected discourse, the Oxytones receive the mark of 
 the grave, i. e. by the close connection of the words with each 
 other the sharp tone is weakened or depressed, e. g. Ei ju,^ 
 (ityrpmrj iripiKoXKri's 'HepijSota ?iv. But the acute must stand before 
 every punctuation-mark by which an actual division is made 
 in the thought, as well as at the end of the verse, e. g. 'O /icv 
 
 KC/DOb iiripaa-e. tov ■TroTo.f.wv, ot St iroXi/iioi a.Tri<j>vyov. 
 
 Exceptions. The interrogatives rls, ri, quis? who7 quid? what? always 
 remain oxytoned. 
 
 Eemaek 1. When an Oxytone is not closely connected with the other 
 words, i. e. when it is treated grammatically, the acute remains, e. g. <l -rh ni 
 heyeis — rh b,vrip ivofia. 
 
 II. Words united by Crasis (§ 10), have only the accent ot 
 the second word, that being the more important, e. g. rd-yo^o* 
 from TO aya^ov. When the second word is a dissyllabic Paroxy- 
 tone with a short final syllable, the accent, according to § 30, 2, 
 (2) (a), is changed into the circumflex, e. g. to cttos = toSttos, 
 Tot aXKo. = TttXXa, to ipyov = ToSpyov ; ra oirXa = .^MTrXa, iyoi otuai = 
 iywfjLOt. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 32.] ATONICS OK PnOOLITICS. 51 
 
 III. When an unaccented vowel is elided {i 13), the accent 
 of the word is not changed, e. g. tovt to-rtv. But if the ehded 
 vowel is accented, its accent is thrown back upon the preceding 
 syllable, as an acute ; yet, when the elided word is a preposi- 
 tion or one of the particles, aXXd, ovSi, juiySe (and the poetic 
 ^e, iSi), the accent wholly disappears, and also when the 
 accented vowel of monosyllabic words is elided, e. g. 
 
 iToWh ena^ov = ir(Jw' ^ira^op iropa ifiov = irap' ifiov 
 
 Seivit ipoyr^s = Scij/ ipar^s otTrb kavrov = d^* eavroS 
 
 ^7/jUl ^7(6 = ^^)it' iy^ oKKk iyila = aW' iy^ 
 
 alffxpti eAe^as = td(TXP eA€|as ou8e iyii) = ouS* ^dy 
 
 ItttS: ^ffav = cttt* ^ffav ij Se 8s = ^ S* 5s. 
 
 IV. Anastrophe. When a preposition follows the word which 
 it should precede, the tone of the preposition naturally inchnes 
 back to its word, and hence the accent is removed from the 
 ultimate to the penult; this drawing back of the accent is 
 called Anastrophe (dvao-rpo^i^), e. g. 
 
 juiixis ^T' tit ^"'1 jxaxris yeav &wo but airh »e3y 
 
 'l^aiaiy ndra " Karh 'I&tiKTjy koKSiv irepi " irepl icaKai/. 
 
 Hem. 2. The prepositions, a^^f, a;'Ti, tiyiJ, S«i, and tbe poetic m^ai, inreip, 
 Siof, Trapai, do not admit Anastrophe. If tlie preposition stands between an 
 adjective and a substantive, according to Aristarchus the Anastrophe is found 
 only when the substantive stands first, e. g. 'Biv^f em Sivlievri (but Sijrtjeini hi 
 Bdi/^ai). Other Grammarians reject the Anastrophe in both cases. — In poetry, 
 jrepl is subject to Anastrophe only when it governs the Gen., but then very 
 often, and even when the Gen. and irepi are sepai-ated by other words. See 
 § 300, (c.) 
 
 Hem. 3. Prepositions, moreover, admit Anastrophe, when they are used 
 instead of abridged foiTns of the verb, c. g. &ya instead of liyJur^Ti ; ^ero, vipa, 
 €iri, Stto, trcpt, hi, instead of the indicative present of eTcoi, compounded with 
 these prepositions, c. g. 4yi} vipa. instead of irdpcifu, irepi instead of xepUffri ; 
 also, when the preposition is separated from the verb and placed after it, which 
 is often the case in the Epic dialect, e. g. bhiaas Siro vivras eraipous. But the 
 accent of Sm6 is drawn back without any reason, in such phrases as Imh &o\i£(r- 
 <r7|j oiKeTy, liirh axmov, ait' iKiriSos, and the like ; in such cases it is properly on 
 the ultimate. 
 
 i 32. V. Atonies or Proclitics. 
 
 Atonies or Proclitics, are certain monosyllables which, in 
 connected discourse, are so closely united to the following 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
52 ENCLITICS. [i 33. 
 
 word, that they coalesce with it, and lose theii- accent Thev 
 aire: — 
 
 (a) the forms of the article, 6, -fj, ol, al ; 
 
 (b) the prepositions, iv, ek (es), e'k (ii), &■;, ad; btit if i^ is 
 after the word which it governs, and at the end of averse, 
 or before a punctuation-mark, it retains the accent, e. g. 
 KaKwv ti, H. $, 472 ; in prose, i^ does not stand after its 
 case, 
 
 (c) the conjunctions, ws (as), ct; but if ws follows the word 
 which it should precede, it has the accent ; this position, 
 however, is found only among the poets, e. g. KaKol &, 
 for u)s KaKoi; 
 
 (d) ov (ovK, ovx), not; but at the end of a sentence and with 
 the meaning No, it has the accent, ov (ovk). Comp. 
 § 15, Kem. 2. 
 
 5 33. VI. Enclitics. 
 
 Enclitics are certain words of one or two syllables, w^liich, m 
 connected discourse, are so closely joined, in particular cases, 
 to the preceding word, that they either lose their tone or ttoow 
 it back upon the preceding wprd, e. g. <j>iXoi tk, iroXcfios tk. 
 They are : — 
 
 (a) the verbs el/it, to be, and <t>r)lJ^t, to say, in the Pres. Indie., except the seeond 
 Pcrs. Sing., el, thou art, and ^ijj, thou sar/est ; 
 
 (b) the following forms of the three personal pronouns in the Attic dia- 
 lect : — 
 
 I. P. S. /lOV 
 
 fjioi 
 
 II. p. S. a-ov 
 col 
 
 in. p. S. ol Dual. a(puiv PI. <ripiai (v) 
 
 li, viv i 
 
 (c) the indefinite pronouns, tIi, t1, through all the cases and numbers, 
 together with the abridged forms toS and r$, and the indefinite adverbs vis, 
 Trdi, iT'fi, iroi, irodi, Tro&eV, irot, irort ; but the corresponding inteiTOgative pro- 
 nouns are always accented, e. g. t(i, t(, ir»j, etc. ; 
 
 (d) the following particles in the Attic dialect, ri, toI, ye, viv, vep (and in 
 the Epic, K€, Kev, vi, fia.), and the inseparable particle Be, ^ 34, Kem. 3. 
 
 Eemakk. Several small words are combined with these enclitics, forming 
 with them one word, with a meaning of its own, k. g. eJfTe, oi/T€, jn^re. Site, 
 ffiyirep, Syris, etc. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 34.] INCLINATION OP THE ACCENT. 53 
 
 ? 34. Inclination of the Accent. 
 
 1. Au Oxytone so unites witli the ibllowing enclitic, that the 
 accent, which is commonly grave in the middle of a sentence 
 (k 31, I), again becomes acute, e. g. 
 
 ft^/i Tis for ^p tIj Kohis iariv for Kohhs iarh 
 
 KaXSs re " koJ^ t4 Troraixoi rives " Trora/iel rives, 
 
 2. A Perispomenon unites with tue following enclitic without 
 further change of the accent, e. g. 
 
 <pSos Ti for ff»SJs tI ' ^i\^ rts for (pi\ei rls 
 
 <pas iffriv " tpws iffriv Ka\ov rivos " Ka\ov riv6s, 
 
 Bemark 1. A Perispomenon followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, is regarrtoil 
 as an Oxytone. For as ipHs earai, for example, are considered as one word in 
 respect to accent, and as the circumflex cannot go further back than the penult 
 (4 29, 7), the Perispomenon must be regarded as an Oxytone. Long syllables 
 in enditics are treated as short in respect to the accent ; hence otvrivoiv, &vri- 
 vmv, are viewed as separate words, e. g, KsiKSiv rivav. 
 
 3. A Paroxytone unites with the following monosyllabic 
 enclitic without further change of the accent; but there is no 
 inclination when the enclitic is a dissyllable, e. g. 
 
 ipi-Kos fiov for ipi\os fiov but (l>i\os iffrly, (^»Ao: tpcuriv 
 &Wos irus " SAAoj iris "' fiXAos ttotc, SAAoiy rivav. 
 
 Kem. 2. It is evident that if there was an inclination of the accent when a 
 Paroxytone was followed by a dissyllabic enclitic, the accent would stand on 
 the fourth syllable, e.g. ji'Aoi-^airiy, which is contraiy to the usajc of tl: ■ 
 laiignage. 
 
 4. A Proparoxytoue and a Properisponienon unite with the 
 foUowing enclitic, and take an acute accent on the last sylla- 
 ble; this syllable forms the tone-syllable for the following 
 enclitic, as av^poj-Tros tk, e. g. 
 
 &v^piim6s ris for ^.v^panos r'ls arSfii ti for irfflfM tJ 
 
 &vApmrol rives " ftK&ponroi rives (ru/j-i iffrtv " (rafM effrlv. 
 
 Exception. A Properispomenon, ending in | or ^fi, does not admit the incli- 
 nation of a dissyllabic enclitic, e. g. a^Aof rwis, ai\a^ iariv, ^ofci| l<rriv, xiipvi 
 ivrtv, AjjIXb^ eori/. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
54 ENCLITICS ACOENTEIT. 
 
 l}35 
 
 Rem. 3. Tlie local suffix Se (f«), which expresses the relation to a phoe, 
 whither, coalesces with substantives according to the rules of inclination, e. g. 
 
 ''0\viJ,Trii/Ss SifirjTTiJj'Se ovpavivSe XluS-SSe (from YlvSrd>) 
 fpeP6sSe 'E\svir'tvdSe WyapdSe S6fwvS€. 
 
 So 'AdimCe (i. e.'ASrliPasSe), n^aroiafe (IlAaTaiaO, X«M«ff (X«^J -A-ce.) Tho 
 suffix 5€ when appended to the Demon, pronoun draws the accent of this pro- 
 noun to the syllable before Se. In the oblique cases, these strengthened 
 pronouns are accented according to the rules for Oxytones, § 45, 7 (a), e. g. 
 
 rSaos — TO{r6s5e, TOffovSe, TOff^Se, roa'fivSe, roa&ySf, 
 Toios — ToiosSe, t7)A£kos — Ti)AiK(is5e, Towri — TounSt, 
 
 ivda — ^y&aSe. 
 
 5. When several enclitics occur together, each tlirows back 
 Its accent on the preceding, e. g. et irlp tk ere /noi ^ijo-t Trore. 
 
 §35. Enclitics accented. 
 
 Some enclitics, whose signification allows them to be in a measure indepen- 
 dent, are accented in the following cases': — 
 
 1. 'EoTi (v) is accented on the penult, when it stands in connection with an 
 Inf. for it,i(m (y), and after the particles d\X', ei, ouk, /i^, Sis, Kid, itiv, 3ti, iroi), 
 and the pronoun toCt", and also at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. liilv iari* 
 (licet videre), ej iariv, o4/c iimv, tout' iariv, iart &e6s, etc.; the other forms of 
 el/ii which are capable of inclination, retain the usual accent on the ultimate, 
 when they stand at the beginning of a sentence, c. g. ttai Aeol. 
 
 2. The forms of ^rifii wtiich are capable of inclination, retain the accent, 
 wiien they stand at the beginning of a sentence, and also when they are sep- 
 orated from the preceding word by a punctuation-mark, e. g. ^jjjitl iyi. — 'Etnir 
 ttj'^p aya^6s, (pljfiL 
 
 3. The enclitic Pers. pronouns, o-oD, trol, ai, oT, <r<pi(ri (v), retain their accent; 
 (a) when an accented Prep, precedes, o. g. irapii ffoO, fiEri ite, irpis aol. But 
 
 the enclitic forms of the first Pers. pronoun are not used with accented 
 prepositions, but, histead of them, the longer and regularly accented 
 forms, e. g. 
 
 Trap ifwv not irapA fiau irpis ifioi not 7rp6s fiot 
 
 /car' l/xe " KOTtt fie vep\ i/iov " iripi /lou. 
 
 Remakk 1. There are, however, a few instances of enclitics of the first Pers. 
 pronoun standing with accented prepositions, e. g. '!rp6s fie. PI. Symp. 218, c. 
 
 Rem. 2. When the emphasis is on the preposition, there is an inclination 
 of tho accent, e. g. iirl as ij aiv trot, X. An. 7. 7, 32 {against you, rather than with 
 you). — The enclitic forms are used with the imaccented prepositions, c. g. ek 
 fi.uu, iv /loi, ?s ere, h fi€, ?k aov, iv aoi. But when the emphasis is on the pro- 
 noun, there is no inclination, and instead of jutv, fwl, /ie, — Ifujp, ^^o(, i/ic, are 
 used, e. g. 4v ftioi, oAA.* ovk if aoi. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 36.] DIVISION 03? SYLLABLES. ' 55 
 
 (b) The enclitic pronouns generally retain their accent when lliey are em- 
 phatic, as in antitheses, e. g. i/ii ««! tri ; i/j.^ fj a-e ; hence the forma oZ, or, 
 e, are accented only when they are used as reflexive pronouns. 
 
 4. The pronoun tIs is accented when it stands at the beginning of a sentence, 
 e. g. Ttv^s Kdyovtriv, 
 
 5. There Is no inclination, ■when the accent of the word on which the enclitic 
 rests disappears by Elision, e. g. KoXbr 8" ia-rty, hut KoKhs Sc iiTTii> — ttoWoI S" 
 eitrlj/. but TToXAol 8e etffty. 
 
 i 36. Division of Syllables . 
 
 Pkeliminaht Eemaeks. The division of syllables, according to our mode 
 of pronouncing Greek, depends in part upon the place of the accent. The 
 term accent and accented, throughout these rules, is used with reference to our 
 pronunciation of the Greek, and not to the written accent on the Greek words. 
 
 The accent (stress) is on the penult in dissyllables, and on the antepentdt in 
 polysyllables, when the penult is short. The accent on the penult or antepenult 
 IS called the primary accent. If two syllables precede the primary accent, there 
 is a secondary accent on the first syllable of the word. 
 
 The following rules exhibit the more general method of dividing syllables, 
 except where the pronunciation is regulated by the Greek accent : — 
 
 1. A single consonant between the vowels of the penult and ultimate in 
 joined to the latter, e. g. trya, tra-pd, fui-\a, l-va, 1-t6s, i-x<ipt •tiKe-jiOS, arpirtv 
 ^, x"^^"^^'! }u>xa-yi5, inro\a-0iiy. 
 
 Exception. In dissyllables, a single consonant following e or o is joined to 
 the first syllable, e. g. \6y-os, rix-os, irep-t, St-i, iroK-i, ^X""") TTiiA-os. 
 
 2. The double consonants f and \fi are joined to the vowel preceding them ; 
 e. g. rd^-a, Sltfi-os, trpa^-is, hnna^-diiLtvos. But f is joined to the vowel following 
 it, except when it stands after € or o, or after an accented vowel in the ante- 
 penult, — in which case it is joined with these vowels; e. g. yo/tf-fm, v6iu-^e, 
 apTrd-(a ; but rpdwf^-a, S^-os, voiii^-ofitv, o/Jirof-ofiey. 
 
 3. A single consonant (except in the penult) before or after the vowels a and 
 1 having the accent, and also a single consonant before or after e and o having 
 the accent, is joine.! to these vowels ; e. g. i.y-tt&6s, ■aor-aii.h, Pa-aiK-4a, {-ttoA- 
 tt^iv, S-irSr-epos, Tfy-o/tey, a-vop4a, eli-SiK-la, iiri-Ti/i-ia; for a single consonant 
 after a long rowel, etc., see 4. 
 
 Exception. A single consonant preceded by a, and followed by two vowels, 
 tlio first of which is 6 or i, is joined to the vowel after it ; e. g. a-Tpa-rii, avattri- 
 aeas, ffrpa-Ti^Tris (not ffrpar-id, etc.). 
 
 4. A single consonant after a long vowel, a diphthong or v, is joined to the 
 vowel following; e. g. &7roTi)-A(J&i, icpi\-iiepos, tt>i\ti-Tepos, h,Ko\ov-Siia, aKov-a-art, 
 liv-plas, tt^/ila, ^v'ySvTes, <f>i-yofi^v. 
 
 Exception. A single consonant following long a or i in the antepenult, and 
 having the accent, is joined with the vowel preceding; e. g. &-iroKpti/-aTo, iir^ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
66 ' DIVISION OF THE PAUTS OF SPEECH, ETC. [H 37, 33 
 
 5. Two single consonants coming together in the middle of a word, ar« 
 separated ; e. g. 7ro\-Aci, iV-riirai, TeSt-VTiKO., Sraf-()a\iois, KKvTOTex-'"ls- 
 
 Exception. A mute and liquid are sometimes joined to the following Towcl 
 e. g. irt-rpuMTxay. 
 
 6. When three consonants come together in the middle of a word, the last 
 two, if a mute and liquid, are joined to the following vowel ; if not, the last 
 only ; e. g. iv^puTros, av-Spia, but iripip-^v. 
 
 7. Compounds arc divided into their constituent parts, when the first part 
 ends with a consonant ; hut if the first part ends with a vowel followed by a 
 •hort syllable, the compound is divided, like a simple word ; e. g. iK-Paiva, 
 cuyeK-ipciiiriffis, irpiSt-eiris, oj/ajS-oo-w, but imoipiiriis, not imoi^-iTris ; so iropo- 
 
 tiivta. 
 
 ) 37. Punctuation-marks — JDiastSle . 
 
 • . The colon and semicolon are indicated by the same mark, a point above 
 the line, c. g. E3 &.c{as • Trdi/res yap aiio\6yri<rav. The interrogation-maik is 
 our semicolon, e. g. Tis ravra iirolricrey j who did this ? The period, comma, and 
 mark of exclamation have the same characters as in English ; the mark of 
 exclamation is rarely used. 
 
 2. The Diastole (or Hypodiasti51e), which has the same character as the 
 comma, is used to distinguish certain compound words, from others of like 
 sound, but of dissimilar meaning, e. g. 3, ti, whatever, and on, that, since ; S, te, 
 whatever, and Hre, when. More recently, such words are generally separated in 
 writing nisrely, e. g. 8 ti, 3 t«. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY, OR GRAMMATICAL FORMS. 
 
 > 38. Division of the Parts of Speech. — Inflection 
 
 1. Etymology relates to the form and meaning of the Parts 
 of Speech. 
 
 2. The Parts of Speech are : — 
 
 (1) Substantives, which denote anything wliich exists, any 
 object (person or thing) ; as man, rose, house, virtue; 
 
 (2) Adjectives, wliich denote a property or qiiality; as great-, 
 small, red, beautiful, hateful ; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^-Se.J DIVISION OF THE PARTS OF SrEEOH. INFLECTION. ' 51 
 
 (3) Pronouns, which denote the relation of the object spoken 
 •of to the speaker (i 86) ; as I, tJioa, he, Hiis, that, mine, thins, 
 his; 
 
 (4) Numerals, which denote the number or quantity of an 
 object; as one, two, three, many, Jew; 
 
 (5) Verbs, which denote an action or state-, as to hhom, to 
 wake, to sleep, to lave, to censure ; 
 
 '(6) Adverbs, which denote the way and manner in which an 
 action takes place, or the relations of place, time, manner, qual- 
 ity, and number; as here, yesterday, heautifully (—'no. a beautiful 
 manner), perhaps, often, rarely ; 
 
 (7) Prepositions, which denote the relation of space, time, 
 etc. of an object to an action or thing; as (to stand) before the 
 house, after sunset, btfore sleep ; 
 
 (8) Conjunctions, which connect words and sentences, or 
 determine the relation between sentences ; as and, but, because. 
 
 3. Words are either essential words, i. e. such as express a 
 notion, or idea, viz. the substantive, adjective, verb, and the 
 adverbs derived from them; or formal words, i. e. such as 
 expres^s merely the relations of the idea to the speaker or some 
 onB else, viz. the pronoun, numeral, preposition, conjunction, the 
 adverbs derived from them, and the verb avai, to be, when it is 
 used as a copula, with an adjective or substantive for its predi- 
 cate i as o avSpuyTTOs SvrjTos itrriv. 
 
 Remark. Besides the parts of speech above mentioned, there are certain 
 organic sounds, called interjections ; as alas ! oh ! ah ! They express neither 
 an idea nor the relation of an idea, and hence are not to be considered as proper 
 words. — Prepositions, conjunctions, and adverbs not derived from adjectives 
 and substantives, are included under the common name of Particles. 
 
 4. Inflection is the variation or modification of a word in 
 order to indicate its diiferent relations. The inflection of the 
 substantive, adjective, prondlin, and numeral, is termed Declen- 
 sion ; the inflection of the verb, Conjugation. The other parti 
 of speech do not admit inflection. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
58 'DIFFERENT KINDS AND GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. [^539,40 
 CHAPTEE I. 
 
 The Substantive. 
 {39. Different kinds of Substantives. 
 
 1. When a substantive (5 38) indicates an object, wliich haa 
 an actual, independent existence, it is termed a Concrete substan- 
 tive, e. g. man, woman, lion, earth, flower, host; but when the 
 substantive indicates an action or quaUty, which is only conceived 
 of as being something actual or independent, it is called an 
 Abstract substantive, e. g. virtue, wisdom. 
 
 2. The Concretes are, 
 
 (a) Proper nouns, when they denote only single persons or 
 things, and not a class ; as Cyrus, Plato, Hellas, Athens ; 
 
 (b) Appellatives, when they denote an entire class or an 
 individual of a class ; as mortal, tree, man, woman, flower. 
 
 Ebmaek. Appellatives are called material nottns, when they indicate the 
 simple material, e. g. milk, dust, water, gold, coin, grain ; collectiye nonns, ■when 
 they designate many single persons or things as one whole, e. g. mankind, 
 cavalry, fleet; nouns of quantity, when they denote measure or weight, e. g. a 
 biishd, a pound. 
 
 §40. Gender of Substantives . 
 
 Substantives have tlnree genders, as in Latin ; the gender is 
 determined partly by the meaning of the substantives, and 
 partly by their endings. The last mode will be more fuUy 
 treated under the several declensions. The following general 
 rules determine the gender of substantives by their mean- 
 ing:— 
 
 1. The names of males, of nations, winds, months, and most 
 rivers, are masculine, e. g. 6 ^aai^v^, the king; ol 'EAAiji/es, o 
 ro/*7j\Mov (January, nearly); o 'AX^etos, the Alpheus ; 6 eSpos, t/te 
 southeast wind. 
 
 Eemaek 1. Exceptions: Diminutives in -ov, which are not proper names 
 ( these are conceived of as things and are neuter) ; e. g. rb fieipaKioy, the lad 
 jbut proper names of females in -of are feminine, e. g. ^ Ae6vrioy) ; also Ti 
 kv^pdirodoy, a slave, mancipium ; t& TratSf/cti, a favorite ; and some rivers e. g. 
 fj SriiJ, and also some according to the ending, e. g. ^ KiiSn]. ' 
 
 2. The names of females are feminine, e. g. rj it-rfrrjp, motJier. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 40.] GENDER OP SUBSTANTIVES. 59 
 
 .3. The names of the letters, infinitives, all indeclinable 
 words, and eveiy word used as a mere symbol, are neuter, e. g. 
 TO Xa/A/3Sa, TO TVTTTuv, tilt strildng; to iJ-rp-qp, the word mother. 
 
 Eem. 2. The gender of the names of mountains is determined by their 
 endings; hence (a) masculine, 'SKix^y, -Stos, etc.; those in -as. Gen. -ow, e.g. 
 Tlapva(T6s; in -as, -w, e. g.'Aaai (i'EpuJ, derived from the name of a person, 
 is particnlarly to he observed) ; (b) feminine, those in -tj (a). Gen. 'tis, e. g. 
 Atrirn, 'ISti, OlTn ; those in -« and -vs, c. g. 'AXttis, Gen. -eas, "AXtteij, -eav, 
 KApa/ifiis, -iSos, "O^pvs, -vos (masculine in Lat.), Hdpyris, -ij&os ; (c) neuter, those 
 in -oy, e. g. Ai/kcuov, n^Aioy, 
 
 Rem. 3. The gender of the names of places also is determined almost entirely 
 by the endings ; only a few of these are feminine, properly agreeing with the fem- 
 inine appellatives yrj, x^Pft yviros (i. e. viovira x^P'')t "■"'A'* to be supplied with 
 them ; (a) names of cities and islands in -os, -ov, e. g. ri KSpiy^os [t6\is], ti 'P6Sos 
 [j/^ffos], 7j A^Aos [j/^ffos] (except d ^OyxTjiTTSs, 6 ^CLpoyrrSs, 6 Atytodf.6s, 6 Kdyairosj 
 usually i 'Opxoiiev6s, S 'AKlapros ; but generally ti Hi\os and fi '^niiaupos) ; and 
 the following names of countries : ti Atyvtrros, ti 'X.epp6vTiaos, ti "Hireipos, ti IIeXo- 
 Tr6vy7]ffos ; (b) names of cities in -uy, e. g. ti Ba$v\iiy, -ayos, ti AaneSalfiay, •ovos, 
 TI 'AySrriSdy, -6vos, ti Xa\icnSiiy, -6vos, ti KapxnSdiv, -6vos (except & Oiyetiy and i 
 Bpavpiiv, 'wyos, usually d Mapa^dty, -uvos; but commonly ^ ^iKvdy, -uvos)', (c) 
 TI Tpoiffjy, -riyos. The gender of the others is determined by the endings. 
 Hence, 
 
 (a) All names of countries in -os, Gen. -ov (except those named above), are 
 masculine, e. g. 6 B6<nropos, 'l(r^ii6s, Tl6yTos, 'E\)vlisiToyTos, AlyidK6s ; all plural 
 names of cities in -oi, Gen. -av, e. g. Hmttttoi ; names of cities in -oris, Gen. 
 -odyros, e. g. S 'typovs (some of these are used both as masculine and femininej 
 e. g. ^i\ovs ; 'Afui^ovs, Kepatrovs, 'Pafivovs, XiSovs, and Tpaire^oCj, are feminine 
 only) ; those in -as. Gen. -ayros, e. g. d Tipas ; those in -tvs. Gen. -eas, e. g. 
 S ^avorerts ; iinally, b MdffTis, Gen. -tjtos ; 
 
 (b) All names of countries of the first Dec. and those of the third, which 
 have feminine endings, are feminine (see § 66, II), e. g. ^ "E,\evcis, -tvos, ti 
 :Sa\aiiis, -Tvos, etc. ; 
 
 (c) All in -oy, Gen. -ov; plurals in -a, Gen. -ay, and those in -os, Gen. -ovs, 
 are neuter, e. g. ri 'IKioy, ri, AevxTpa, Th "Apyos, Gen. -ovs. 
 
 4. The names of persons which have only one form for the 
 Masc. and Fem. are of common gender, e. g. o ^ &e6s, god and 
 goddess ; o rj irals, boy and girl. 
 
 Rem. 4. Movable substantives are such as change their ending so as to 
 indicate the natural gender, e. g. 6 $curi\eis, Jang; ti PojlKeia, queen. See Tor- 
 mation of Words. 
 
 Eem. 5. Substantives (mostly names of animals) which have but one gram- 
 matical gender, either Masc. or Fem., to denote both genders, are called 
 Epicenes {iTrlKoiya), e. g. ti aSxlnrn^, the fox, whether the male or female fox: ti 
 ipKTos, the bear; ^ Kn/i9j\os, the camel; 6 /iCs, the mouse; ti x^^^^", the swallow; 
 il oh, the sheep ; ti Povs (collectively), at Pies, cattle; S ittttos, horse (indefinitely), 
 but in PI., oi XiTKoi ; but when the natural gender is to be distinguished, S^fniv, 
 male, or SrqXvs, female, is added, e. g. A-oyis & ft^Aus, the female hare ; AaiStijJ h 
 ippTiy, the male fox ; or the gender may be indicated by prefixing the article, or 
 by another adjective, e. g. 6 &pKTOs, the male bear. Some masculine names of 
 animals have also the corresponding feminine forms, e.g. i Keay, a lion: i 
 Uaiya, a lioness. See Eem. 4. — Here belong, in the second place, the Mast 
 names of persons in the PL, which include the Fem., c. g. o> yoyus, tfm parents 
 at treuSfS, liberi, the children (sons and daughters). 
 
 • 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
m 
 
 NUMBEfi CASE 
 
 AND DECLENSION. FIEST DEC. [§} 41,4? 
 
 Ml. Number, Case, and Declension. 
 
 1. The Greek has three Numbers ; the Singular, denoting one 
 person or thing; the Phiral more than one ; and the Dual, two. 
 
 Eemask 1. The dual is not often used; it is found most frequently in the 
 Attic dialect ; it does not occur in the ^olic, nor in the Hellenistic Greek 
 
 2. The Greek has fire CaseS.i Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
 Accusative, and Vocative. 
 
 Bbm. 2. The Nom. and Voc., as they represent an object as independent of 
 any other, are called independent cases (costM redi) ; the others, as they rep- 
 resent an object as dependent on or related to some other, are called dependent 
 cases (casiis ohliqui). 
 
 Rem. 3. Neuter substantives and.adjectives have the same foi-m in the Nom., 
 Ace, and Voc. of all numbers. The dual has only two case-endings ; one for 
 the Nom., Aec, and Voc, the other for the Gen. and Dat. 
 
 3. There are in the Greek three different ways of iaflecting 
 substantives; distinguished as the First, Second, and Third 
 Declensions, 
 
 Rem. 4. The three declensions may be reduced to two principal declensions, 
 viz. the strong and the weak. The case-endings of the strong are prominent and 
 clearly distinguishable, while those of the weak are less distinctly marked. 
 Words of the third Dec. belong to the strong, those of the first and second to 
 the weak. In the third Dec. the case-endings unifoi-mly appear pure ; in the 
 first and second this is less so, because in these declensions the stems end in a 
 vowel, and hence combine with the case-endings which begin with a vowel. 
 The inflexion of both the principal declensions, in the Masc. and Pern., is a« 
 follows : — 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 Strong. 
 
 Weak. 
 
 Strong. 
 
 Weak. 
 
 Strong. 
 
 Weak. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 s 
 
 I — 11 s 
 
 es 
 
 I 
 
 e 
 
 6 
 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 OS 
 
 I 
 
 V and a 
 
 S 
 
 I 
 V 
 
 ai(v) 
 &s 
 
 15 
 
 as 
 
 oiv 
 oiv 
 
 IK 
 
 tr 
 
 f 
 
 i 42. First Declension. 
 
 The fii'St declension has four endings, a and iy feminine ; ds 
 and 1JS masculine. 
 
 See a fuller statement under the Cases in the Syntax, § 268, seq 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t43. 
 
 NOUNS OF THE FEMININE GENDER. 
 
 61 
 
 Endings. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 fi fi or Tj 
 
 as 
 
 or i)F 
 
 at 
 
 d 
 
 Gen. 
 
 7)S OJ 
 
 T)J 
 
 
 ov 
 
 wy 
 
 atv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 V ? 
 
 V 
 
 <f 
 
 V 
 
 air 
 
 aiv 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dv Av 
 
 flV 
 
 av 
 
 rii> 
 
 as 
 
 
 Voc. 
 
 a I 
 
 ■n- 
 
 a 
 
 v,s.- 
 
 at 
 
 &. 
 
 Kemaek 1. It will bo seen from the above terminations, that the plural as 
 well as the dual endings are the same, whatever may be the form of the singa- 
 lar. 
 
 Rem. 2. The original ending of the Dat. PI. was atcri {v), as in the second 
 Dec. oi<ri{v), e.g. SlKauri, ra'ai, Ka/nrcuiTi, deoiiri, <riuKpo7tTi, kyaSrotcri. This 
 form is also found in the Attic poets, and is not foreign even to prose, at least 
 to that of Plato, especially in the second Dec. Even the Ionic form -po-i (v) 
 is sometimes used by the Attic poets. 
 
 §43. Nbuns of the Feminine Gender. 
 
 1. (a) The Nom. ends in a or a, whicli remains in all the 
 Cases, if it is preceded by p, c, or i (a pure), e. g. x'^P"'' land; 
 lSla,form; <To<j>ia., wisdom; xp^Ca, utility ; evvoia, benevolence ; here 
 also belong the contracts in a (see No. 2), e. g. [iva; some sub- 
 stantives in a, e. g. aXaM, war-cry, and some proper names, e. g. 
 
 'AvSpo/tcSa, AiyScij rfXa, 4>tA.oju.-^A.d, Gen. -as, Dat. -a, Acc. -av. 
 
 Remark 1. Th; following words whose stem ends in p, take the ending ij 
 instead of a: Kipn, maiden; K6ppri, cheek; Sipri, neck; a^dpri, water-gruel; and 
 some proper names introduced from the Ionic dialect, e. g. 't,(pipri ; the i) then 
 remains through all the cases of the Sing. — If any other vowel than e or i, 
 precedes, the Nom. and aU the cases of the Sing, have ri, e. g. liKo-fi, <j>irli, aieevii, 
 iarh; except 7r({o, grass; jip6a, color; crSa, porch; yva, field; aixia, gourd; 
 Kapia, walnut-tree ; i?iAa, olive-tree ; aXted, tkreshing-Jloor ; Naucrifraiii, all Gen. -os. 
 
 (b) The Nom. ends in a, which remains only in the Acc. and 
 Voc. ; but in the Gen. and Dat., it is changed into ij, if the a is 
 preceded by X, XX, a-, aa (tt), ^, fc ij/. 
 
 Rem. 2. The ending is commonly in a when v precedes, e. g. ^iSra (so es- 
 pecially in words in -aim) ; but ij is often found, as is always the case in the 
 euffix aiini, e. g. tv^poiriint-, also Sroivi), irpifivri and irpiiiva, inivr) and ■Kitva. 
 Ataira is the only word ending in a preceded by a single t. 
 
 (c) In other cases, the Noin. ends in 17, ^\'hich remains 
 throughout the singular. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
62 
 
 NOVNS OF THE MASCULINE GENDER. 
 
 \iU 
 
 2. If a is preceded by e or a, -ea is contracted in most worda 
 into rj, and -aa into a in all the Cases (comp. jSoppas, i 4:4:, 3). 
 The final syllable remains circumflexed in all the Cases. 
 
 Eem. 3. The first Dec. is called the a declension, as its uninfiected forma 
 end in a, e. g. yiKifi-ri from the tminflected ■yv&ii.sa (comp. irvKia), veavlas from 
 the uninfiected veavia, Trohir-ns from TroKkea; the second, the o declension, aa 
 it.5 uninfiected forms end in o, e. g. ArJyoj, uninfiected form Arfyo ; the third, the 
 consonant declension, as its uninfiected forms end in a consonant, and the vowels 
 and V, which originated from consonants. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 a) T) 
 
 through all the cases. 
 
 b] a through 
 
 all the cases. 
 
 c) o, Gen. 7JS. 
 
 
 
 Opinion. 
 
 Fig-tree. 
 
 Shadow. 
 
 Land. 
 
 Hammer. 
 
 Lioness. 
 
 s 
 
 N. 
 
 V 
 
 yi/tx>iJ.7i 
 
 (rvK-{4a)7J 
 
 CTKl-A 
 
 X<ipa 
 
 ffipvpo. 
 
 Aeafvo 
 
 
 G. 
 
 T7)J 
 
 yvttifiris 
 
 (Ty/C-TJS 
 
 (TKl-aS 
 
 X<l>pas 
 
 fftpvpds 
 
 KeaivTis 
 
 
 D. 
 
 rri 
 
 yvciifiTi 
 
 irvK-ri 
 
 ffKi-a 
 
 {TKl-aV 
 
 X<ipf 
 
 . <"P^Pi 
 
 Keaivji 
 
 
 A. 
 
 T^V 
 
 yyca/j^7]v 
 
 ffVK-'qv 
 
 Xdpav 
 
 (Tipvpav 
 
 KeatySjf 
 
 
 V. 
 
 & 
 
 yvdi^jLt] 
 
 ffVK-T] 
 
 OKL-^ 
 
 Xdpi. 
 
 fftpvpa. 
 
 Aeaij-a 
 
 p 
 
 N. 
 
 ai 
 
 yvwfjutt 
 
 (TUK-ai 
 
 aia-m. 
 
 XS>P<u 
 
 ff^vpat 
 
 Aeaij^at 
 
 
 U. 
 
 ruv 
 
 yvwiMwv 
 
 a-vx-iev 
 
 CKL-UV 
 
 Xaipav 
 
 (Tcpvpuv 
 
 \eaifuu 
 
 
 D. 
 
 rats 
 
 yvt^fxais 
 
 (TUK-aiS 
 
 (TKl-atS 
 
 Xt^ptir 
 
 tr<pvpais 
 
 Kealvats 
 
 
 A. 
 
 tSls 
 
 yydjfias 
 
 ffvK-as 
 
 (TKt-^S 
 
 Xipas 
 
 (T^lJpdS 
 
 \ealvds 
 
 
 V. 
 
 & 
 
 yyoJfiaL 
 
 (TVK-ai 
 
 a-Ki-ai 
 
 Xwpat 
 
 IT<t}vpcU 
 
 \4aiyiu 
 
 Dual 
 
 T^ 
 
 yvcafio. 
 
 trvK-a 
 
 CKl-d 
 
 X<ipa . 
 
 fffpvpa. 
 
 \ealva 
 
 
 
 Tatp 
 
 yy^fiaiv 
 
 truK-atu 
 
 ffKl-tUIf 
 
 X^ptuv 
 
 ff<pvpaLV 
 
 \eaiviuv. '. 
 
 Eemakk 1. On the form of the article rti instead ofri, see ^ 241, Kern. 10. 
 On the declension of the article ti, see § 91. The & standing before the singu- 
 lar and plural Voc. is a mere exclamation. 
 
 Kem. 2. On the contraction of -ca into -ij, see § 9, IL (a) ; in the plural and 
 dual of the first and second declensions, however, -ea is contracted into o. 
 Comp. § 9, II. (b). Nouns in -aa are contracted as follows: N. /jivda, p,va 
 (mina), G. fifdas, fjivas, D. fivit}, /ivf, A. /xynca', umv; PI. N. fivaT, etc. 
 
 M4. II. Nouns of the Masculine Gender. 
 
 1. The Gen. of masculine nouns ends in •ov; nouns in -as 
 retJiin the a in th(3 Dat., Ace, and Voc, and those in -ij? retain 
 the 17 in the Ace. and Dat. Sing. 
 
 2. The Voc. of substantives in -775 ends in a : — 
 
 (1) All in -T?7S, e. g. rofo'-nys, Voc. rc^oVa, irpotp-qrq?, Voc. Trpoip^- 
 
 rS ; (2) all in -ijs composed of a substantive and a verb, e. g. 
 
 yeoj/xeVpij?, Voc. ycw/XCTpa, /xupo7r<uX?j;, a scdve-sellcr, Voc. ttvpo 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 44.] 
 
 MASCULINE NOUNS. PIKST DECLENSIO.V. 
 
 63 
 
 ffSXa; (3) national names in -rj's, e. g. Ilepo-rjs, a Persian, Voc. 
 nepcra. — All other nouns in -17s have the Voe. in 17, e. g. Uepcnjs, 
 Peraei (the name of a man), Voc. VLifxrr). 
 
 3. The remarks on contract feminine nouns (( 43, 2), ap- 
 ply to Masc. nouns contracted from -axs, e. g. 'Ep/n^s, ySoppas. 
 In ^opicus, the ca is contracted into o, and not into 1;, siaoe p 
 precedes, } 43, 1 (a). The doubling of the p in fioppSs is merely 
 accidental. 
 
 Remakk 1. Contrary to 4 43) I) compounds of fi^Tpeci {to measure), as 
 yeaiierpris, end in -ijs instead of -as ; on the contrary, several proper names, etc., 
 as lleXxmlSas and 7evvdSas, a noble, end in -cii instead of -jjs. 
 
 Kem. 2. Several masculine nouns in -as have the Doric Gen. in d, namely, 
 irarpafMlas, lirjr pa\otttS, patricide, matricide; hpviStcMipas, fowler; also several 
 proper names, particularly those which are Doric or foreign, c. g. "TAor, Gen. 
 'TAa, SkiJtos, -a, 'Amtfias, -a, SiJaAos, -d ; (the pure Greek, and also several 
 of the celebrated Doric names, e. g. 'Apxh-as, Aeayldas, Uavircwlas (also the 
 Boeotian 'EwafieiviiySas), commonly have m;) finally, contracts in as, e. g. 
 Bo^^Ss, Gen. ffa^^a. 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Citizen. 
 
 TroKh-Tjs 
 itokItou 
 TToKlTr; 
 
 ToATrd 
 
 Mercury. 
 
 ■Ep/t (e'as) jjs 
 'EpjUoS 
 
 'EpuffV 
 
 'Ep/iTJ 
 
 Youth. 
 
 veaytas 
 
 veai/iov 
 
 yeavi^ 
 
 yeayidv 
 
 veayia 
 
 Towler. 
 
 epyi&oSrtipds 
 
 opvi^o^pa 
 
 opyt&o^pf 
 
 opyf^o^pdv 
 
 opyt^o^pd 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 iroXlroi 
 
 TTOAlTWf 
 
 TroKiTtiis 
 iroAfrdr 
 
 TTOXTTat 
 
 'Epfuu 
 
 *EpfiQj/ 
 
 'Ep/xoLS 
 
 'Epiias 
 
 'Epfmi 
 
 yeaytat 
 yeaytwy 
 yeayiais 
 veayids 
 yeaylai 
 
 lllll 
 
 Dual. 
 
 iroA^Td 
 iroXiratv 
 
 'Ep/m 
 'Epflaiy 
 
 yeayid 
 yeayiaty 
 
 opyt^oHpa 
 opyt^o^jpaty 
 
 Rem. 3. The Ionic Genitive-ending -ew of Masc. nouns in -tjs (§ 211), is 
 retained even in the Attic dialect in some proper names, e. g. 0d\ea from 
 0oAflj, T^pea) from T^pns. — The contract Poppas is also found in the Attic 
 ■m-iters in the uncontracted form ; thus, fiopias, X. An. 5. 7, 7. PI. Phaedr. 229, 
 b. Popem,, Th. 3, 23. fiop4ay, 3, 4. , 
 
 Rem. 4. The ending ijj occurs, also, in the third Dec, To the first Dee. 
 belong: (a) proper names in -Stjs and -oSt^j, e.g. 0ouki5(Si)s, 'AT-pEiSrjr (from 
 'krpe and ISris), MiXriiSiis, as well as gimtile nouns, e. g. 'S.-irapTiiTrts; (b) nouns 
 in -Tijs derived from verbs, e. g. vovfp-iis from Troie'w ; (c) compounds consisting 
 of a substantive and verb, or of a substantive compounded with another of tlia 
 first Dec, c. g. TraiSmpifi-ns, 0i/3Ar(nn6Ai)s, OfHeSfiojs. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
64 QUANTITY AND ACCENTUATION. FIRST DEC. IH5 
 
 4 45. Quantity and Accentuation of the First 
 Declension. 
 a. Quantity. 
 
 1. The Nom. ending a is short in all words, which have the Gen. in -tjs [§ 43, 
 1 (bj] ; but long in those which have the Gen, in -as, e. g. xrcAeo, vkA, <ro<t^t, 
 TcuSela, xpe'o, XP"^' "'''"i W^P°-i AijSi, a\a\i, etc ; the same is true of the Fem. 
 ending of adjectives in os, c. g. i\ev^ipa, Sixald. 
 
 Exceptions. 
 The following classes of words have o short in the Nom. : — 
 (aj Dissyllables, and some Polysyllabic names of places in -aifi, e. g. 'loriaio, 
 UKdraia, 
 
 (b) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -eici, e. g. a\'li^eia, M'^Seia, fiairi\aa, 
 queen, yKvKfia, except abstracts from verbs in -e i5 b, e.g. Pa<n\etS,, king- 
 dom ; Soi/Xei'a, servitude (from fiaaiKiiu, iovKtiu) ; 
 
 (c) the names and designation of females, etc. in -rpio, e. g. i^oXTpin, afemaSt 
 musician, words in -u7d, e. g. /tv7a, TCTu^uTa, the numeral jda, and, finally, 
 some poetic words ; 
 
 (d) Trisyllables and Polysyllables in -oici, e. g. eSvom, ivoia; 
 
 (e) words in -pa whose penult is long by a diphthong (except m), by, C, or 
 by ^p, e. g. ,ffe*po, fidxatpa ; yetpvpa, (r(pvpa ; Tli^pa. 'Eralpa, ifaXaiirrpdf 
 At^pa, i-alSpa, KoXAvpa, are exceptions, 
 
 2. The Toe. ending a is always short in nouns in -tjs ; but always long ia 
 nouns in -as, e. g. iroA.Va from TroKirTjs, vcavla from vcayias. The quantity of 
 Fem. nouns in -a and -d, is the same in the Voc. as in the Nom. 
 
 3. The Dual ending a is always long, e. g. Moiio-o from MoDo-o. 
 
 4. The Ace. ending av is like the Nom., e. g. MoD<raj', x'^P"^ from MoG(ra, 
 
 5 The ending as is always long, e. g. t&s TpaTr4(ds from rpiireCa, 6 i/eoWdt, 
 rohs peavias, ttjs oiKids, Tas oiKids. 
 
 b. Accentuation. 
 
 6. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom., as long as the laws 
 tf accentuation permit (§ 30 J. 
 
 Ejcceptions. 
 
 (a) The Voc. Siffirora Horn te<rv6Tris, lord; 
 
 (b) The Gen. PI. of the first Dec always has the final syllable av circnm- 
 flexed, which is caused by the contraction of the old ending day, e. g 
 AeaivSc from \faiva, veavtav from Deaytas. — But the substantives, xp^jff- 
 T))s, creditor; cupiri, andumy ; irvirtat, monsoons; and x^oivr)s, wild-hoar, 
 are exceptions ; in the Gen. PI. they remain Paroxytones, thus xp^Wi 
 a^iay, iTtiuUnv (but aipvwy, xpno'Tciv from o^u^j, unapt; xpV<rT6s, useful). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 46.] 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 69 
 
 Remark. On the accentuation of Adjectives, sec § 75. 
 
 7 The accent of the Nom. is changed, according to the quantity of the final 
 syllahle, thus : — 
 
 (a) Oxytones become Perispomena in the Gen. and Dat. of the three num- 
 bers, e.g. (Nom. Viju^) tijut/i, -jj, -Sy, -cuv, -aTs; this holds, also, in the 
 secona Dec; e. g. 3-ciJr, -oC, -p -<5v, -o!y; 
 
 (b) Paroxytones with a short penult remain so through all the Cases, except 
 the Gen. PI., which is always circumflexed on the last syllable; but 
 Paroxytones with p. long penult become Proporispomena, if the last syl- 
 lable is short, 0!=' ,the Nom. PI., and in the Voc. Sing, in a of Masc. 
 nouns in -ris {^ii),e.g. •yvdiiai, yvSfica, but yvu/iup ; voXinis, iroXiro, 
 ffoXiToi, but TToXirav ; on the contrary, SftcTj, Stxat, but Sucwr ; 
 
 (c) Properispomena become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, e. g. 
 Moi/tra, Moiffrjs ; 
 
 (d) Proparoxytones become Paroxytones, if the last syllable is long, c. g. 
 Aeaiva, Keaiyjjs, 
 
 {46. Second Declension. 
 
 The Second Declension has two endings, os and ov ; nouns 
 in -OS are mostly masculine, but often feminine (} 50) ; those 
 in -ov are neuter ; except Fern, diminutive proper names in -ov, 
 e. g. ^ TXvKcpiov 40). 
 
 Endings. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 OS ov 
 
 ot 
 
 a 
 
 03 
 
 Gen. 
 
 oil 
 
 av 
 
 
 otv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 V 
 
 ots 
 
 
 OIV 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ov 
 
 ovs 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 Voe. 
 
 OS and e ov. 
 
 01 
 
 a. 
 
 w. 
 
 Remakk I . The Gen. and Dat. endings of the different genders are Iho 
 «ame in all numbers; neuters have the Nom., Ace., and Voe. alike in all 
 cambers, and in the plural they end in o. 
 
 Beh. 2. On th3 form of the Dat. PI. oio-i {v), see § 42, Rem. a. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
(56 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 [§47 
 
 
 
 Para 
 
 d i g m S . 
 
 
 
 
 Word. 
 
 Island. 
 
 God. 
 
 Messenger. 
 
 Fig. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 6 \6y-os 
 
 7} yrja-os 
 
 6(^)^eos 
 
 6 &yy€\os 
 
 T^ trvKov 
 
 G. 
 
 Tov xSy-ov 
 
 rrjs yffo-ov 
 
 TOV Steov 
 
 ayy€\ov 
 
 TOV ffVKOV 
 
 X>. 
 
 T(? \6y-ip 
 
 Tf p-fja-q} 
 
 T^ ^€tp 
 
 ayy4\qt 
 
 T(p fT{lK(p 
 
 A. 
 
 rhu \6y-oy 
 
 T^u vr^ffov 
 
 Thy ^e6y 
 
 &yyeKoy 
 
 Th avKoy 
 
 V. 
 
 S> \6y-e 
 
 S v%tre 
 
 & Srt6s 
 
 SryyeKe 
 
 S ffvKoy 
 
 P.N. 
 
 oi \6y'0i 
 
 at V7}(roi 
 
 ol ^eol 
 
 &yy€\0L 
 
 tA a'vKa 
 
 G. 
 
 r&v h6y-wy 
 
 Tuv vfiffay 
 
 Tuy ^€&y 
 
 ' airyy4\a}V 
 
 r&y ff{jKav 
 
 T>. 
 
 To7s \6y-ois 
 
 Tats yitffoti 
 
 To7s ^eois 
 
 ^4Kois 
 
 T07s ffVKOlS 
 
 A. 
 
 rovs \6y-ovs 
 
 T&S yfi<Tovs 
 
 Tohs ^eo-6s 
 
 a^^Kovs 
 
 Th cvKa 
 
 V. 
 
 S \6y-0L 
 
 & yriffoi 
 
 S} ^eoi 
 
 &yyeKot 
 
 S ffvKa 
 
 D. 
 
 rdj X6y-af 
 
 TO yi)iTa) 
 
 T(i} hed> 
 
 ayy^Kta 
 
 T(i) <T{>Ka> 
 
 
 ro7y \6y'0iy 
 
 Tcuy y^troty 
 
 Toty ^eo7y 
 
 hyyiKoiv 
 
 ToTv ffvKoty. 
 
 Rem. 3. The Voc. of -ivords in -os commonly ends in e, though Sften in -os, 
 e. g. & <plXe, and S (pi\os ; always S ^eos in classic Greek. 
 
 M7. Contraction of the Second Declension. 
 
 1. A small number of substantives, vnA\ o or e before the 
 case-ending, are contracted, in the Attic dialect (§ 9). 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 S.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Navigation. 
 
 b TrXtJos TrAoiJj 
 TrXdou tA.oD 
 
 ttKSov irKovy 
 ■7r\6e ttAoD 
 
 C ircu mnavigation . 
 
 6 ■trepiirKoos irepiirXovs 
 TTeptTrAoou TreplTrhov 
 frepiirXda trepiTrKa 
 ireplirXooy' Treplir\ovy 
 trepiirXoe TreplirXou 
 
 Bone. 
 
 Th offTeoy oo'TOvy 
 oariov octov 
 
 OtTTetp OO'T^ 
 
 offTeoy ocTTOvy 
 otTTeov oo'TOvy 
 
 P.N. 
 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 •irKScoy 
 •TrKSoLS 
 irXSovs 
 ir\6oL 
 
 -ttKoi 
 
 irKay 
 
 ir\o7s 
 
 ■7r\ovs 
 
 ttKol 
 
 irepiirKooi 
 
 TTcptirXocay 
 
 TrepiTrXSots 
 
 'irepiv\6ovs 
 
 TrepltrXooi 
 
 Tr€pl7r\oi 
 TreplirKcoy 
 
 TTCplTrXoiS 
 
 Trepiirkovs 
 
 ireptvXoi 
 
 oaTea 
 
 oa-Tetay 
 
 hffriois 
 
 offTia 
 
 oa-Tea 
 
 oo'Ta 
 
 OffTUV 
 OOTOlS 
 
 oo'Ta 
 otrra 
 
 B. 
 
 1T\6oiV 
 
 ttAoTv 
 
 TreptTThSta 
 ir€pnr\6oiy 
 
 TT^piirKw 
 irepiirXotv 
 
 offTea) 
 offTeoiy 
 
 da'T(& 
 
 OtTTO&f 
 
 Only the following nouns besides the abore are contracted in this manner: S 
 vios, rom, the mind ; fi ,5<(rw, ^oBj, a stream ; i ftpoDj, noise ; & xvom, dozen ; 6 oSeX- 
 <i.5oCi, o nephew; d Stuyarpiiovs, grandson ; 6 a«i(-ioSoCs, son of a sister's' child. 
 
 Remark. Uncontracted forms sometimes occur even in the Attic dialect 
 though seldom in substantives, e. g. „6v, l^lato, Prot. 344, a; much oftener in 
 adjectives, particularly neuters in -oa, as ri Srao, iTep6w\aa. On tlie contrac 
 tion of to into a in the PI. see 5 9, II. (b). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 48, 49.J 
 
 THE ATTIC SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 67 
 
 M8. The Attic Second Declension. 
 Several substantives and adjectives have the endings us 
 (Masc. and Fern.) and w/ (Neut.), instead of os and ov; they 
 retain the o through all the Cases instead of the common 
 To-wels and diphthongs of the second Dec. and subscribe i 
 under w where the regular form has u or ot ; thus, ov and o 
 become w ; os, ov, and ous become cus, ojv, and <os ; oi, ots, and ow 
 become <j>, us, and (uv; — u, u, and tav remain unclianged. The 
 Voc. is the same as the Nom 
 
 Paradigms. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 People. 
 
 \e-ti 
 
 Ke-&v 
 Ae-dSj 
 
 Table. 
 
 KOK-Ot 
 
 Kd\-as 
 
 Hare. 
 
 6 Xay-iis 
 \ay-Ja 
 
 Kayiv 
 Kay-6s 
 
 Hall. 
 ri ivliye-aiy 
 
 &y(iy€-(fi 
 
 hv&ye-mv 
 
 h.v&y&-uv 
 
 Pliir. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 X.4 
 
 Ke-ds 
 
 xdK-av 
 
 Kayc^ 
 
 A07-WV 
 
 \ay-^s 
 
 Ao-y-cSy 
 
 Kay-i^ 
 
 &j/(ijye-u 
 
 avdyye-wv 
 
 ttviye-ifs 
 
 &v<liye-u 
 
 aj/tiye-a 
 
 D. N. A. V. 
 G. and d: 
 
 AE-t6 
 
 K<i\-a 
 
 KayS 
 Atty-^v 
 
 iiyt^ye-auf. 
 
 KEiiAElc 1. Some words of the Masc. and Fem. gender often reject the i> 
 in the Ace. Sing., namely, d \ay^s, the hare; (Ace. rhy Xay&y and Aa^tS), and 
 commonly % eW, the dawn; ^ &\as, a threshing-floor; ri Keas, fi KSs, 6 'Adas, r) 
 Tius, and the adjectives &yripms, not old; MvKeas, full ; inripxpfus, guilty. 
 
 B£M. 2. This Declension is termed Attic, because, if a word of this class 
 has another form, e. g. Ae<4s and Xais, vtis and ynSs, MeveAtojs and MccEAdos, 
 the Attic writers are accustomed to select the form in -eibs ; though, in the 
 best Attic writers, the non- Attic forms also may be found. On the interchan{ta 
 of the long vowel in this Declension, see § 16, 5. 
 
 f 49. Accentuation of Second Declension. 
 
 1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the quan 
 tityof the final syllable permits; the Voc. ft5eA(()E from iZ^K^Ss, brother, it 
 an exception. 
 
 2. The change of accent is the same as in the first Dec. (§ 45, 7); in the 
 Gen. PI, however, only oxytones, e.g. &e<(s, are perispomena ; the rest are pro 
 paroxytoncs. See the Paradigms. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
68 Ii.EMAE.KS ON THE GENIiER OF THE ENDING OS. [{ Stt 
 
 8. The following exceptions to the rules given for the accentuation of con 
 tracts in § 30, 2, should be observed : (a) the Dual in u of words in -oos, -tor, 
 ■fov, has the acute instead of the circumflex, e. g. Tr\i{w = irAdi, oittcii = offrti, 
 instead of irAa, ba-rSi ; — (b) compounds and polysyllabic proper names, which 
 retain the accent even on the penult, when it would regularly stand as a dr 
 cumflex on the contracted syllable, e. g.Tepnr\6-ov = ire plir\ov (instead of 
 TrepmKou), from' weplir\oos = ■irspl-ir\ovs ; netpiS'6-ov = netpidov (instead of 
 nc(pi&oC),from ncipi'aooj = neipfyovs; also adjectives, e. g. eiy6-oii = eSvov (not 
 twoS), from (tvoos = evvotis ; yet the accent is never removed to the antepenult • 
 thus, irepiTr\oi, i.ot ireprnKoi; KaK6voi, not KaKovoi; — (c) th Kiveov, basket, takes 
 the circumflex on the ultimate, in the contract forms ; hence Kiveov = Kavovv 
 (instead of Kdmw) ; — (d) words in -SeSs = Sous denoting kindred, have the cir- 
 cumflex instead of the acute on the ultimate, b. g. aSe\<fiiSe6s ^ aSe\(j>iSovs, 
 nephew (instead of i.'Se\^iSois). It may be stated as the rule, that all simple 
 substantives and adjectives in -eoj and -oos take the circumflex on the contracted 
 eyllable, hence kovovv, i.i(\(f>iSovs, xpucoBs (from xp^b'^'Os)- 
 
 4. In the Attic Dec, Propaioxytones retain the acute accent on the antepe- 
 nult through all the cases and numbers. See' ^ 29, Kem. 7. Oxytones in -is 
 retain the acute accent in the Gen. Sing., contrary to § 45, 7 (a), e. g. \ei. fl 
 Here absorbs o, the inflection-vowel of the Gen. (e. g. A<!7o-o = \6yov), which 
 accounts for fhis unusual accentuation, thus \eii instead of \eii-o. 
 
 J 50. Remar/cs on the Gender of the Ending os. 
 
 Substantives in -os are regularly Masc. ; yet many are Fcm. In addition to 
 the names of countries, cities, and islands, mentioned under the general mle 
 in § 40, the following exceptions occur, which may be divided into general 
 classes ■ — 
 
 (a) Substantives which denote certain products of trees and plants, e. g. 
 ri &kv\qs, acorn ; ^ ^d\avos, acorn ; tj 0vt7(ros, Jlne linen ; ij 5o/c(ff ,. a beam ; ig 
 pipSos, a staff; ri ^l^Kos, bark of the papyrus ; t) iffoS-os, rush mat ; 
 
 (b) Such as denote stones and earths, e. g. 6 ^ Ki&os, a stone; % \iS)os, partic- 
 ularly a precious stone ; 7} i|/^<^os, a small stone ; tj ij/dnfios, sand ; t] a-rrodos, ashes ; 
 7] filhTos, red earth; ti KpiJoroXAoy, crystal [& KpvirraWos, ice) ; tj ^dffavbs, a touch- 
 stone; rj ij\eKTpos, electrum; ^ tr/jiApay^os, a smaragdus; 7\ jQwXoy, a clod; ■^■ytSi^os, 
 gypsum; ^ ioKos, glass; ^ -rlravos, chalk; ri &pyT\os, clay; rt vKivAos, brick; r) 
 &<r^o\os, soot ; tj K6irpos, ordure ; tj duipoKTos, bitumen ; 
 
 (c) Such as denote a hollow or cavity, e. g. ij KapSowos, kneading-trough ; ^ ki/Sib- 
 T^i and ^ xt^^^i ° ^^ ! V <fop6s, a coffin; ^ Xrjvis, a uiine-press; ^ A^/cC&oj, an 
 oil-fiask ; tj k6.^1vos, an oven; rj (pcopia/j^s, a chest; tj Trie\os, tub; 
 
 (d) Such as express the idea of a way, c. g ^ SS6s, a road; ^ o/iu»|iti{s (sc. 
 iS6s), a carriage-road; ^ TpiPos and ^ SrpSiros, afoot-path; ^ ricfipos, a ditch; 
 
 (e) Many of the above substantives were originally adjectives, and hence 
 appear as feminine nouns, because the substantives with which they properly 
 igree are feminine. There are also many others, e. g. ■^ aShews (sc. ^pa). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
51, 52.1 
 
 THIRD DKCLENSION. 
 
 69 
 
 louse-door; ri ijveijms (sc. 7^), the mainland; ri SyiiSpor (sc. yn), thirsiylancl desert ; 
 h "^os (so. X'^pa), a fallow field; ri-yrjcros (from yeii/, sc. 7^), an island; r) SiiXeit 
 ros (sc. Kjiairii), a dialect; rj aiyKXifTos (sc. fimXit), senate; ii pdpPnos (sc. hipa), 
 lyre; ii Sidiierpos (sc. ypafiiu'li), diameter; i] (more seldom i) Skotos (sc. vavs), 
 loot; 7) d6\os (sc. aiKia), round building, etc.; 
 
 (f ) Several feminine nouns which stand alone, and hence specially to be 
 noted, 6. g. i) v6aos, sickness; r) yriAos, Jaw-hone; ^ Spiaos, dew; ri /i^pivdos, 
 twine ; 
 
 (g) Some words which have a different meaning in different genders, c. g. 
 6 Jmroj, horse ; i) tiriros, mare, also cavalry ; 6 \4ici^os, pea-soup ; 7/ Xe'/ci&oj, the 
 yoVc of an egg. 
 
 Kemakk. On the diminutives in -ov, see § 40, Kem. 1. 
 
 § 51. Third Declension. 
 Tlie third Declension has the followinar Case-endinffs : — 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 J 
 
 OS 
 
 i 
 
 V and a 
 
 mostly as the Nom. 
 
 Neut.— 
 
 Neut.— 
 Neut. — 
 
 «; Neut. a 
 
 uv 
 
 aX(v) 
 
 S.s; —a 
 
 es; —a. 
 
 6 
 
 otv 
 
 OIV 
 
 Remakks ok the Case -endings. 
 ^ 52. A. Nominative. 
 
 1. The Nom. of Masculine and Feminine nouns ends in s, 
 e. g. o Kopa^ (instead of KopaK-^), ij XaiXaij/ (instead of Xoi\a7r-s) 
 Still, the laws of euphony do not always allow the s to be an 
 nexed to the stem; it is either rejected entirely, or, as a com 
 pensation, the short vowel of the stem is lengthened (§ 16, 3). 
 But when the stem allows s to be annexed, the usual euphonic 
 (} 20) changes take place in the final consonant of the stem. 
 
 2. In this way aR Masc. and Fern, nouns may be divided into 
 three classes : — 
 
 (a; The first class includes words, which in the Nom. assume 
 the gender-sign ?, e. g. 
 
 ■ ipXep-6s 
 
 K6pfiK-0S 
 
 I <..yiya.vT a ■ i yiyain-s yiyas (§ 20, 2) -g - ytyavr-os 
 
 M S€\$lv g i Seh^tv-s Se\<pls-{^ 20, 2) m Se\^ifot 
 
 $o-6s 
 ( Ai-6s 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 l<l>\e0 
 
 
 
 'v 
 
 <l>\40-s 
 
 <;.\#(4 20, 1) 
 
 KopaK 
 
 
 O) 
 
 6 
 
 K6paK-s 
 
 K<!po|(§20, 1) 
 
 KafiTaS 
 
 
 't? 
 
 V 
 
 \afnrdS-s 
 
 hafiiris (§ 20, 1) 
 
 .yiyavT 
 
 
 s - 
 
 d 
 
 yiyayr-s 
 
 yiyas (§ 20, 2) 
 
 S€?<xply 
 
 
 g 
 
 6 
 
 1 06F-S {bdv-s) 
 
 S^\<pls-{^ 20, 2) 
 
 PdF{3c,v 
 
 bov) 
 
 !2i 
 
 d 
 
 Povs, bos (5 25, 2) 
 
 a:f 
 
 
 L^ 
 
 AtF-s 
 
 Ats (^ 25, 2) 
 
70 THIRD DECLENSION. l§ 53 
 
 (b) The second class includes words, which in the Nom. 
 reject the gender- sign s, but, as a compensation, lengthen the 
 short final vowel of the stem, c into ly, o into w {^ 16, 3, and 
 20, Rem. 3), e. g. 
 
 iroifiey 
 \eoyT . g 
 
 alBos ^ 
 
 6 }>-hT(op Q 
 
 71 alSdiS 
 
 'n'oifieu-os 
 \4ovT-os 
 piyrop-os 
 {alZ6a-os) aX^6-os\ 
 
 'Ship 
 
 (day g 
 
 Tipas o 
 
 SofiapT ^ 
 
 ireTTept 
 
 
 ri iriirepX 
 
 ffcKas 
 
 s . 
 
 rh erehas 
 
 trafiar 
 
 1 
 
 rh {(TcofjiaT) ffwfia 
 
 ^ repar 
 
 
 T^ (Tcpar) Tcpoy 
 
 (c) The third class includes words, wliich in the Nom. have 
 the stem pure, since the stem neither assumes the gender-sign 
 s, nor lengthens its final vowel, e. g. 
 
 6 &^p (instead of S^p-s) .. ( ^p-6s 
 
 & alti>v ( " " aiav-s) ^ J tdwv-os 
 
 i films ( " " iipuiT-s) g 1 (^paa-os) Ijpai-oi 
 
 Tl Si/jMp ( " " Si/iapr-s, S^apr) [ Sd/utpT-os. 
 
 3. Neuters exhibit the pure stem in the Nom. ; still, euphony 
 does not permit a word to end in t (§ 25, 5). Hence, in this 
 case, the r is either wholly rejected (as in the Masc, kitav, Gen. 
 XiovToi), or is changed into the corresponding a- (J 25, 5), e. g. 
 
 Iireirept-os or e-os 
 {(ri\a(r-os) aeKa-os 
 (TdifjLar-os 
 TspaT-OS. 
 
 Eemakk. The stem jrCp is lengtliencd in the Nom., contrary to the rale: 
 T^ irvpy Gen. nvp-6s. 
 
 § 53. B. The remaining (Jases. 
 
 1. The remainmg Cases (with a few exceptions, which will 
 be specially treated), are formed by appending the endings to 
 the stem, e. g 
 
 StemKopoK T^OTJi. K6pai, Gen. K^paic-os PI. Nom. icipait-ei. 
 
 2, In forming the Dat. PL by appending the syllable <n to 
 stems ending in a consonant, the same changes take place as 
 have already been noticed in regard to the Nom. of similar 
 words [§ 52, 2 (a)], e. g. 
 
 -/lyavTai. = 7^700-1 ht6v'r-ai = 65oD<ri jSoF-o-f = /Souirf. 
 
 The following points also are to be noted : 
 
 cJ. (a) The Ace. Sing, has the form in -v with masculines and 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
\S3.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 7| 
 
 feminines in -is, -vs, -ovs. and -ovs, whose stems end in -i, -v, -av 
 and -ov, e. g. 
 
 Stem TToM Norn. ir6\is Ace. irJMv, Stem iSorpu Nom. fiorpus Ace. /3((t()ux 
 
 rai^'yau ydFs mvs vdFv mvy, PoF 0ov 06Fs Pods p6Fy fioOv. 
 
 But the Ace. has the form in -a,' when the stem ends in a con- 
 sonant, e. g. ^Xe^, (^XcV, tjiXi^a — KopaK, Kopof, /copoK-a — XojiwroS, 
 Xa/j/Trdi, XafnirdS-a. 
 
 (b) Yet barytoned substantives in -ts and -us, of two or more 
 syllables, whose stems end with a Tau-mute, in prose have only 
 the form in r-, e. g. 
 
 Stem ipiS Nom. Ipts Ace. epic (poet. ^ptS-a; in the dramatists cpo/) 
 
 opvid ipvis ipvw (poet, ipvi^-a) 
 
 Kopv& xipvs K6pw (poet. K({pu&-o) 
 
 Xop'T xi^P's X^P'" (poet. xi2("T-a), 
 
 In prose there are but few exceptions, e. g. Fepyi&a, X. H. 3. 1, 15, and else 
 whpre (instead of T4pyu/) from ^ ripyis; x^P'^a (instead of xi^pw), ib. 3. 5, 16 
 in constant use rptiroSa, tripod. (X. An. 7. 3, 27, nnrlSa is to be read instead 
 of TJariSa.) The goddess X'^P" bas x»/"Ta in the Ace; stUl, in Luc. Deer. d. 
 15, 1 and 2, rijv x^P"'- 
 
 Eemakk 1. Oxytones of one or more syllables have only the regular form 
 in -a, e. g. (iroS) vois, Aec. ircJS-o; (^XiriB) 4\nts, Ace. 4\irlS-a; (x^m/uiS) x^"- 
 Itis, Ace. x^''A'"'5-a. The monosyllable kXe/;, Gen. k\€iS-6s, contrary to the 
 rule, usually has the Ace. KKeTy, instead of kAeiS-o. 
 
 4. The Voc. is like the stem, e. g. 8at/«ov, Gen. 8(u/ior-os, Voc. 
 
 oaifwv. Still, euphony does not always allow the stem-form to 
 
 appear. Hence the following points should be noted : — 
 (1) The Voc. is Uke the stem in the following cases : — 
 (a) When the final vowels of the stem, e and o, in th6 Nom. 
 
 are lengthened into tj and w, the short stem-vowel reappears in 
 
 the Voc, e. g. 
 
 Baifiav Gen. 5aifwv-os Voc. Sdifioy 
 
 yepav ycpovr-os yipmi (instead of yipmrt) 
 
 iiiiyTiip firyrep-os ftTJrep 
 
 ^axpiiTTjs ^uKpdre-os (instead of etr-os) ^t&KpaTes. 
 
 ' It is probable that the Ace. Sing, in the third declension as well as in the 
 first and second, originally ended in v ; but where the stem ended in a conso- 
 nant, the y could not be appended without a union-vowel ; o was used for this 
 4)urpose ; hence, e. g. KSpaxav ; the termination v was at length omitted The 
 Ace. ending o, may therefore strictly be regarded as a wnion-vowel. 
 
 A 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
72 THIRD DECLENSION. [i 53 
 
 Exceptions: Oxytoned substantives (not adjectives) retain the lengthened 
 vowel, e. g. 
 
 ■iroLii.i]V, Gen. woi/ieV-or, Voc. troin^v (not Trot/iey), 
 except the three oxytones : ^ar^p, av^p, and Sa-lip, which, in the Voc, take 
 again the short stem-vowel e, but with the accent drawn back, thus : irdrep, 
 ivep, Saep. According to this analogy, even 'HpaK\(4ii)ris (stem 'HpdiAces) is 
 shortened in the Voc. by the laltr wi-iters, into "HpaicMs. 
 
 (b) Adjectives in -as. Gen. -avos, and also adjectives (not 
 participles, see Rem. 5), whose stems end in -vt, have in the 
 Voc. a form like the neuter (or the stem) ; iras and its com- 
 pounds are exceptions, e. g. 
 
 /neAar, Gen. Sv-os Nent. and Voc. /teASv 
 
 XapUis, iVT-os ^op^ei' (instead of xaplevr, § 52, 3). 
 
 So substantives in -ds. Gen. -a^ros, have the Voc. in -ay (instead 
 of -arr), § 52, 3, e. g. 
 
 yiyas 
 
 Gen. avT-os 
 
 Voc. 7^701' (instead of yiyavr) 
 
 KiKx^s 
 
 avT-os 
 
 'K.aKxa.v 
 
 Mas 
 
 avT-os 
 
 ATav. 
 
 Kem. 2. Some substantives of this class, with the t reject also the v, but as 
 a compensation lengthen the short it, e. g. "ArKas, Gen. -to'T-os, Voc. 'AtAo, 
 noAuS^df, Voc. 'no\vdana. 
 
 (c) Substantives in -ts, -us, -avs, -eus, and -ovs, whose stems 
 end in -t, -v, -av, -eu, and -ov, have the Voc. like the stem, the 
 s of the Nom. being rejected, e. g. 
 
 udvris Voc. fidpTi J Trpefffivs Voc. irpeff^u ; fivs Voc. fiv ; orvs Voc. av ; \is Voc. 
 A?; ypavs Voc. ypav ; jSaffiAeiSs Voc. ^acrO^v ; fious Voc. j8ou. 
 
 The word irois, Gen. iroiS-iij, has irai in the Voc, since, by rejecting the gender- 
 sign r, the stem would end in 5 (irai!), a letter which cannot end a word, and 
 must be dropped. 
 
 Rem. 3. Substantives in -is, -vs, -ovs, whose stems end in a consonant, have 
 the Voc. like the Nom., u. g. S Spvis, Kipvs, irois. Still, some substantives in 
 -IS, Gen. -ims, have the Voc. like the stem, e. g. S> SeA^^v (also SeAi))£s), from 
 BeK^isi, Gen. -Tims. 
 
 (d) Tlie Voc. is like the stem in all words, which in the 
 Nom have their stem pure, e. g. ^-^p, aim/, etc.; but 'Ajto'XXmv 
 (Gen. -ojvos), IlocreiScuv (-Svos) and a-wT-qp (--^pos) are exceptions, 
 tho Vocntives beine: w 'A^oAAov, TIoWiSov, ctSteo, with the accent 
 draw^ oack 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 54.] THIRD DECLENSION. 73 
 
 (2) The Voc. is not like the stem, but like the Norn., in most 
 words whose stems end in one of the consonants which cannot 
 euphonicaliy stand as the final letter (} 25, 5), because after 
 dropping the stem-consonant, frequently it could not be de- 
 termined from the Voc. what the true stem was ; e. gj from 
 a-dp^. Gen. o-apK-os, the Voc. would be o-a/j (insteadof o-ap/c) ; from 
 6 ^ous. Gen. i^ur-os, Voc. <j}6 (instead of ^wt) ; from vuf/, Gen. 
 vuj>-6g, Voc. n (instead of vt<^) ; from oSi^, Gen. dir-os, Voc. w 
 (instead of mr) ; from -n-ovs, Gen. ttoS-os, """oc. ire. 
 
 Eem. 4. The Voc. of &vtxi, king, in the Common language, is like the Nom. 
 ? &yai, ot by Crasis Seal ; but in the solemn language of prayer : S &ya, (in 
 Horn, and the Attic poets, e. g. Soph. 0. C. 1485 : ZeO iya, trol tpavu), or Siva 
 (instead of Hvokt, according to § 25, 5). 
 
 3. Substantives in -c6 and -ws, whose stems end in -osj have 
 the Voc. neither Ulce the stem, nor the Nom., but, contrary to 
 all analogy, in -ot, e. g. 
 
 Stem ^Xoj N. ^X'* G.^X'^""' (instead oi iix^'^-"^) V. f/xo'l'iiste^ad of Tixo(ri, iix^') 
 cuSos aiSiis cuS6-os ( " " alS6iT-os) atSoi ( " " aiS6(T-i cuSi-X) 
 
 Eem. 5. The Voc. of all participles is like the Nom., e. g. S rim-av, tctw 
 (j)^s, ri\jias, -riijiav, SeiKvis. 'Apxw, Voc. &px'"'t when a substantive, is an 
 exception. 
 
 A. WOKDR WHICH IN THE GeN. HAVE A CONSONANT BEEOEE THE ENDINO 
 -OS, i. 0. TVOEDS WHOSE STEM ENDS IN A CONSONANT. 
 
 } 54. I. The Nom. adds a to the stem 
 
 (a) The stem ends in X ; thus : o tj oAs, Gen, dX-os, Dat. PI. 
 aA,-o-i(i'). See Rem. 1. 
 
 (b) The stem ends in a Pi or Kappa-mute — p, ir, <l>; y, yy, 
 K, pK (■^ o-apf, crapK-oi;), and x- See § 52, 2 (a). 
 
 (c) The stem ends in a Tau-mute — 8, t, kt, ^, v.9. See 
 i 52, 2 (a). On the Ace. see i 53, 3 (b). 
 
 The stems of the Neuter, belonging to this class, end in t and kt (70A0KT), 
 but, according to § 25, 5, reject the t and kt ; thus : tra/jia instead of ffSfucr^ and 
 yd\a instead of yi\axT ; or, according to § 52, 3, they change the r into <r; on 
 the omission of the t before o-i in the Dat. PI. see § 20, 1. 
 
 (d) The stem ends in v or vt. See i 52, 2 (a). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
74 THIRD DECLENSION. [i 54. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 7), Storm, ri, Torch. ^, Helmet, rb, Body. ^, Nose. 
 XoiXaiJ' AafiTrds Kdpvs <rafia. ^is 
 \ttl\dir-os Ka^TrdS-os K6pv^-os {rtvfw,T-os pLV-6s 
 \ai\aiT-i Kap.T!iS-i K6pu&-i a&iiaT-i ^Iv-i 
 AofAair-a Ao/xW5-o Kopvv fftaf.i.a plp-'a 
 
 i. Tooth. 
 oSois 
 6S6vT-os 
 oSoVr-t 
 6S6i/T-a 
 iSo6s 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 \td\air-es 7\.aiiTrdS-es 
 Aai\dir-wy A.a^uiraS-wi' 
 \at\a'fii{v) \aiiird-n(v) 
 Ao£\d7r-as Aa/iir(iS-or 
 Xai\oir-6S Xa/nrdS-es 
 
 KOpv^-UV (TtafldT-UV ■ fttV-UV 
 
 KOpv-(ri(v) irdiiia-(ri{v) (it-ai(v) 
 K6pv^-as ffd/juiT-a ftiy-as 
 Kopv^-es fftojAar-a .^7y~€s 
 
 6d6vT-es 
 6S6vT-cav 
 oSo5-iri(i') 
 
 oS6i/T-es 
 
 D.N.A.V. 
 G. and D. 
 
 
 Kopv^- e 
 
 KOpiA-MV 
 
 
 oS6vT-e 
 
 So: i K(!pa{, -&COI, raven; 6 \dpvy^, -vyyos, throat; S, ^ SpyTs, -t^os, bird; i 
 Si/al, -cucTos, Icing; r) e\)uvs, -ivSros, tape-worm; 6 Se\tj>h, -7ms, dolphin ; iylyis, 
 -avTos, giant, etc. 
 
 Kemaek 1. The stem of nouns in -tfi and -| commonly ends in the smootli 
 TT and K ; the stem of those in -7I ends in -77, except 6, ii Kiy^, Gen. \iiyK-6s, 
 lynx (but ri \iyi, Gen. \vy^-6s, hiccough). Instead of (j>dpuyyos from ^ (pdpvy^, 
 throat, the poets, according to the necessities of the verse, use ipdpiiyos also. On 
 fi Apl^, rpixis, hair, see § 21, 3. 
 
 Bem. 2. The word ij a\s, Gen. a,\-6s, signifying sea, and in the Pem. gender, 
 is only poetic, and the Sing. 6 oAr, signifying salt, is only Ionic and poetic ; 
 elsewhere, only oi oAej, salt, occurs (PI. Symp. 177, b. Lys. 209, e). 
 
 Rem. 3. To class (c) belong also the contracts in -rils, Gen. -riiSos = -5's, 
 pSos, e. g. ^ Trapes, cheek, irap^Sos. 
 
 Rem. 4. The stem of ri oSs, ear, is mt, thus : Gen. u-t6s, Dat. ir/, PI. Sra, 
 dSrav, ier^i/). The word rh ripas, according to the rule of the ancient gram- 
 marians, usually admits .-^on* faction in the plural, among the Attic writers, 
 after the t is dropped: -ripa, repw (but X. C. 1. 4, 15. PI. Phil. 14, e. Hipp 
 300, e. T6(jaTo) ; — ri yepas, retvard of honor ; ri yvpas, old age; rh Kpsas, JUsh, 
 and ri Kepas, horn, reject t in all the Numbers, and then suffer contraction in the 
 Gen. and Dat. Sing., and throughout the Dual and Plural (except the Dat. PI.) ; 
 yet Kipixs, besides these forms, has the regular form with t; Thucyd. uses the 
 contracted forms ; the uncontracted Kepara occurs only in 5, 71. Kipas is uni- 
 formly employed in the phrase M. x^pais, in column. When the o, contracted 
 from oo, is used by the poets as short, it must be considered a case of elision, 
 not of contraction ; the same is true also of Neuters in -«, -aos, -os, -eor, c. g. 
 ntrS. (fr. o-KfVos) instead of o-K^Tra, kAe'o (fr. (cXeor) instead of /cAe'a. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
*55.1 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 73 
 
 Sing, N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 rb Tepas, wonder. -rh Kepas, horn. rb Kpias, flesh. 
 
 TepaT-os K4paT-os and Kepus {Kp^a-os) Kpeas 
 
 Ttpar-t Kepar-i and /ce'p? ((cpea-i) Kpe'^ 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 repar-a and repa 
 rep&T-tov and repwv 
 Tfptt-ai{v) 
 
 Kepar-a and K€pd 
 Kepdr-av and xepup 
 K4pa-(ri{v) 
 
 {xpea-a) Kpea 
 {KpeA-uv) Kpeav 
 Kpea-fft^u) 
 
 Dual. 
 
 T6paT-6 
 
 Tepdr-otv 
 
 Kepwr-e and Kepi (Kpfe-e) icpe'd 
 
 Kepdr-oiy and KepQv [Kpe6,-oiv) Kpe^v. 
 
 Rem. 5. To class (d) belong also the contracts in -(!eij, Gen. -iJeyToj = oBi, 
 oucTos, e. g. A irA-AKoi;^, ca^c, Gen. irKaKovvros ; also in -^ew, Gen. '•fjevros = -ps, 
 -^vToj, c. g. Ti^fs, honorable, riiirjin-os. 
 
 Rem. 6. For the irregular lengthening of the vowel in ktcIj, eXs, /ie'\as, and 
 riKas, see § 20, Eem. 2. 
 
 { 55. II. TAe Nom. rejects <;, but lengthens the short 
 final vowel of the stem e or o into r/ or w (^ 16, 3). 
 
 1. The stem ends in -v, -vt, and -p. For the omission of v, 
 and vr, before o-t, see § 20, 2, and for the omission of t, in the 
 Nom. of stems ending in vt, e. g. Xiwv, see } 25, 5. 
 
 ■2. The following substantives in -iqp: b irar-qp, father ; ij it,rj- 
 •njp, mother; ^ Svyirrip, daughter; y ya<m^p, belli/; fj ^■qp.rfrqp, 
 Demeter (Ceres), and 6 avfip, man, differ from those in the above 
 paradigms only in rejecting c in the Gen. and Dat. Sing, and 
 Dat. PL (5 16, 8), and in inserting an a in the Dat. PI. before 
 the ending o-t, to soften the pronunciation. 
 
 The word avi]p (stem oye'p), rejects e in all Cases and Numbers, except the 
 Voc. Sing., but inserts a 5 (§ 24, 2), thus : Gen. i.vSp6s, Dat. avSpi, Ace. Sj/Spo, 
 Voc. S.vip, PI. SvSpes, oySpSi/, hvipajn^v), ScSpcts, etc. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 i, Shepherd 
 
 TTOtfieV'OS 
 
 irotfjLev-t 
 iroi/iiv-a 
 ■traipL'fiv 
 
 . 6, Lion. 
 
 \e(av 
 \4ovT-os 
 
 hfOVT-l 
 
 Keovr-a 
 \iov 
 
 S, Orator. 
 pifrap 
 
 /i^JTOp-OS 
 
 ^■flTap-i 
 ji4rrop-a 
 piiTop 
 
 6, Father. 
 
 irarrrip 
 
 iraTp-6s 
 
 trarp-i 
 
 irarep-a 
 
 iraTfp 
 
 ij, Daughter. 
 
 ^vyi,ri\p 
 
 dvyarpos 
 
 dvyarpl 
 
 SivyaTtpa 
 
 AiyaTcp 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 jroi/icV-ES 
 
 ■jroijifv-av 
 
 voiiie-(ri{y) 
 
 woifiey-as 
 
 Tvot/jLey-es 
 
 \4ovT-es 
 
 Ke6vT-ttiV 
 
 \4ov<ri{v) 
 \eovT-as 
 \eovr-iS 
 
 piirop-es 
 
 firiTdp-av 
 
 ^■firop-(rt{y) 
 
 pilTop-as 
 
 pipop-cs 
 
 Trarep-es 
 
 Trarip-av 
 
 ■jraTp-&-ffL{y) 
 
 •KaTfp-as 
 
 •n-arep-es 
 
 dvyaTfpes 
 
 dvyarepay 
 
 SvyaTp&<ri{y) 
 
 Snymepas 
 
 dvyaripes 
 
 troifiev-e 
 irotfjify-oiy 
 
 \eovT-e 
 Keivr-ow 
 
 pijTop-e 
 prjrSp-otv 
 
 irarep-e 
 iraTfp-ow 
 
 ^vyarepe 
 Svyarepoiy. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
76 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 [^56 
 
 Remaek 1. The substantive ri x^h' ^>^' belongs to nouns of class No. 2, 
 and differs from them only in not lengthening the e of the stem (xep) into % 
 but into (I, e. g. x^'P instead of x«ps i it is irregular in retaining the « in 
 inflection, thus : X"'p> X^'P^^' etc., except in the Dat. PI. and the Gen. and Dat. 
 Dual xep<rf(i'), x^P"'"- Y^' '" poetry, the short as well as the long form is used 
 n all the Cases, as the necessities of the yerse require, u. g. x^'piis and xspcis, 
 Xepo7v and x^'P""' X^P"^ "nd xEipecri. 
 
 Eem. 2. The following nouns in -av, Gen. -ovos, reject the v in particular 
 Cases, and suffer contraction : ^ «/«J>', image, eUdvos, ei'koVi, eMva, eUSfas, etc., 
 together with the Ionic and poetic forms : Gen. thcovs, Ace. eixii, Ace. PI. fixois 
 (the in-egular accent is to be noted in thd and tlKois] ; ri ItriSiiy, nightingale, 
 Gen. artSdvos and ariSoSs, Dat. aTjSoT; ^ x'^'St''''. swallow. Gen. x«^'5(i»'0J, Dat 
 XeAiSo?. 
 
 Rem. 3. To class No. 2, belongs the obsolete Nom. 6, fi "APH'N, iim6; the 
 Nom. of this is supplied by i ^ aiji.v6s, Gen. ojji'iJj, Dat. cipvl, Ace. S/jra, PI. 
 Nom. &ppes, Gen. ipyajy, Dat. opra<ri(i/), Ace. &pv<is; farther, the word 6 curriip, 
 ■fpos, star, though not syncopated like trm-lip, etc. belongs to this class on account 
 of the assumed a in the Dat. PI. lurTpa(n{v). In substantives belonging to 
 class No. 2, the accent of the Gen. and Dat. Sing, (and in the wotd aviip, also 
 that of the Gen. PI. and Gen. and Dat. Dual) is removed by syncope to the last 
 syllable, and that of the Dat. PI. to the penult, e. g. irorpdr, imrpl, avipuy, 
 iroToSin(i'). The word Ai)/i^T7jp has a varying accent, viz. Aiifiiirpos, A^ihtj- 
 rpi, Voc. A'ti/iiiTep (but Ace. Ai)iiriTepa). So also ^iyarsp Voc. of ^vyirTip.. 
 On the Voc. of iror^p and avf}p, see § 53, 4 (1) (a). In poetry, according to the 
 necessities of the verse, are found ^yuTpes, SrvyaTpuv, A'lifiriTpa, and also, on 
 the contrary, irwrepos, Sruyaripos, nrrripi. 
 
 k 56. in. The Stern of the Nom. is pure. 
 The s is omitted -without changmg the filial vowel of the 
 stem. The stem ends in v, vr, p, and (only in Sd/mp, wife) in 
 pT. The Case-endings are appended to the Nom. -without 
 change. On the omission of t in stems ending in vr and pr, see 
 § 25, 5 ; and on the omission of v, vr, before cri, see \ 20, 2. 
 
 Sing 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 i, Paean. 
 
 vat&y 
 
 naiay-os 
 
 irouay-t 
 
 vatay-a 
 
 iraidy 
 
 dj Age. 
 
 atdty 
 
 cuay-os 
 
 aiMy-t 
 
 alioy-a 
 
 alcity 
 
 dj Xenophon. 
 •^eyo<pay 
 Eevo^wcT-os 
 BevoipSiyT-i 
 BeyoipSJyT-a 
 U^yo^uy 
 
 6, Wild beast 
 
 ^p-6s 
 Sh}p-l 
 
 Hp 
 
 rb, Nectar. 
 yeKTap , 
 yiicrap'os j 
 y4icrap~t 
 veKTap 
 yeKTap 
 
 riur. 
 
 N. 
 
 a 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 iraiay-es 
 
 iraiav-uy 
 
 •jtaia-(Ti{v) 
 
 •waiav-as 
 
 itaiay-^s 
 
 alio-<Ti{y) 
 
 aicoy-as 
 
 al&y-es 
 
 'p.€vo<pcbyT-es 
 "EeyoipdyT'toy 
 
 Eevo^cS-(r((y) 
 H^yoipcoyT-as 
 aeyotpcovr-es 
 
 ^rjp-€S 
 
 ^p-wy 
 
 ^^p-as 
 ^r}p~€s 
 
 vcKTap a 
 
 yeKrAp-oiV 
 
 v4KTap<n{v) 
 
 veKTOp-a 
 
 y4teTap'a 
 
 Dual. 
 
 iraiav-e 
 
 waiay-oiv 
 
 aiQJi/-e "Eeyotpwyr-e 
 
 Strjp-e 
 
 ^Tjp-o7y 
 
 peKTap-e 
 vetcrdp-oiy^ 
 
i57.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 77 
 
 Remark 1. The three words in -^y. Gen. .«m,: 'AWwu,.-, no^„SS,y, i, 
 «Aw, threshmg-Jhor, drop v in the Ace. Sing., and suffer contraction; thus, 
 ('hTr6\Kava, 'AviMMu) "ATrcfA.A.w, noo-eiSiS, Sa.m (on &\a,, comp. ^ 48, Kcm. 1, on 
 KuKeS, § 213, 11). Also the Ace. ^A^X". from {, y\-t,xay or ^Ki,x<^y, penny- 
 royal, Gen. -ara; , is faund in Ai-istophancs. 
 
 Rem. 2. All the Neuters belonging to this class end in -p (op, op, o,p, up), 
 e. g. t4 yeWop, ^Top, jreAwp, TrCp (Gen. vipis). The word tJi %., spnny, may 
 also be contracted, e. g. ^p. Gen. ^poj. 
 
 B. WOEDS WHICH HAVE A VOWEL BEFOKE THE ENDING -OS IN THE GeN. 
 
 § 57. L Words in -e«s, -aSs, -oCs. 
 
 1. The stem of substantives in -cws, -oBs, -oBs, ends in v (from 
 the Digamma F)\ s is the gender-sign! On the omission of v 
 between vowels, see k 25, 2. 
 
 2. Substantives in -cu's have -e'a in the Aec. Sing., and -e'ds in 
 the Ace. PL, from iFa, eFa^; the omission of the F lengthens 
 the a and os. These nouns have the Attic form in the Gen. 
 Sing., viz. -e(os instead of -/os, and in the Dat. Sing, and Nom. 
 PI. admit contraction, which is not usual in the Ace. PI. When 
 a vowel precedes the ending -evs, as, e. g. xocu's, Ei^oevs, the end- 
 ings -e'us, -ewv, -id, -ids are also contracted into -5s, -Zv, -S, -as. 
 Nouns in -aCs and -oSs are contracted only in the Ace. PL, which 
 is then like the Nom. PL, as in all contracts of Dec. III. 
 
 
 i. King. 
 
 6, A measure. 
 
 i, *, Ox; 
 
 ri. Old woman. 
 
 Sing. K. 
 
 Paa'iKfis 
 
 XoeiSs' 
 
 fiovs, bos for bovs 
 
 7PbSs 
 
 G. 
 
 /3a(riXc-»s 
 
 X0(e«)ajj 
 
 fi0-6s, bov-is 
 
 ypd-os 
 
 D. 
 
 0airi\eT 
 
 XO" 
 
 00-i, bov-i 
 
 ypa-t 
 
 A. 
 
 Pain\4-a 
 
 Xo(e'o)« 
 
 ^ouy 
 
 ypavy 
 
 V. 
 
 j3airiA.cC 
 
 Xoeu 
 
 fiaO 
 
 ypau 
 
 Plur. N. 
 
 PairiKas 
 
 Xoe<y 
 
 06-€S 
 
 ypa-es 
 
 G. 
 
 0afft\4'wy 
 
 Xo(ra)»i' 
 
 Po^&v, borum 
 
 • ypa-Sov 
 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 fimriKi-as (and 
 
 Xaevffi{y) 
 «s) X't"")"' 
 
 povirl(v) 
 (SoGs 
 
 ypavffl(v) 
 ypaSs 
 
 V. 
 
 $aiii\us 
 
 X0£« 
 
 fio'-et . 
 
 ypa-es 
 
 Dual. 
 
 fiafft>J-e 
 
 Xoe'e 
 
 p6-e 
 
 ypa-e 
 
 /8iHri\e-aw 
 
 Xoeair 
 
 ^a-aar 
 
 ypa-ow. 
 
 Remark 1. Among the Attic poets, the Gen. Sing, of nouns in -eis some- 
 times ends in -4os instead of -4as ; thus 0rj<reoj, apurreos, and the Ace. Sing, 
 not only in the Attic, but in all the poets, sometimes ends in -5, instead of -4d, 
 e. g. ieprj, fuTTpa^. The Nom. and Voc. PI. in the older Attic writers. 
 
 ' Commonly written x^oh contract xow. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
78 THIKD DECLENSION. [{{ 58, 59. 
 
 especially in Thucydides, end also in -^s (formed from the Ionic -?er), e. g. 
 BmtiK^s, iinrTis, nXaTairjs instead of n\araie!s. The uncontracted Nom. Qjjo-ms 
 occnrs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. The Ace. ending -its instead of -edj is veiy 
 common in Xen., e.g. robs imrcTs, C. 3. 5, 19. -robs yoyeis, 2.2, 14. ypa^a, 
 (TKuTeis, xtA/ceij, 3. 7, 6. robs Pa(rt\eis, 3. 9, 10. and elsewhere, but more seldom 
 among the other Attic prose writers. The Ace. vU7s is regular in all the Attic 
 writers. 
 
 Bem. 2. The following are declined like x'^''^ '■ Tleipatfis, Gen. Tleipcu&s, 
 Ace. Xleipaia, 6 ayvieis, altar before the door, Gen. ayvius, Ace. ayvia, Ace. PI. 
 ayvias, and several proper names, e. g. 'SpfrpiSs, Srcipiu;, lSr)\ia, Ev$ous, 
 Ziiffoa, Eu;8oSi, IIXaTomi, AmpiSj ; yet the uncontracted forms are often found 
 in proper names, e. g. ®etnri4uVf 06(nr(ea;, ^Teiptea, II\aTai€ay, ^EperpUuiv,' 
 /^apttav, Xleipoiiav (in Thu., X., PI., Dem.). , The uncontracted forms arc 
 regular in aKieis, Jislierman, a\t4us, a\i4a, oAieaSt 
 
 Eem. 3. The Nom. PI. of /SoCs and ypavs are always uncontracted in good 
 Attic writers : B6es, ypaes ; on the contrary, in the Ace. only the contract forms 
 ypavs and vaSs occur ; the Ace. PI. 0ovs is the common form ; $6as occurs only 
 very seldom. 
 
 Rem. 4. Only 6 X""*, a measure, u, mound, and ^ /Sous, vinegar-tree, are de- 
 clined like jBoBs ; but in the PI. both without contraction ; only fi yaVs {viFs, 
 iiavis), is declined like ypavs ; still, this noun is quite irregular; see § 68. 
 
 J 58. 11. Words in -i;s, -£s (Gen. -eos); -(os (Gen. 
 -<oos), -<i)s and -to (Gen. -oosi; -as (Gen. -aos), -os 
 (Gen. -cos). 
 
 The stem of words of this class ends in s. On the omission 
 of (T, see § 25, 1. In the Dat PL, a o- is omitted. 
 
 § 59. ;^1) Words in -ijs and -cs. 
 
 1. The endings -ijs and -es belong only to adjectives (the 
 ending -ijs is Masc. and Fern., the ending -es neuter), and to 
 proper names, terminating like adjectives, in -^avijs, -/tcnjs, 
 ■yimji, -Kparr]?, -/iijSjjs, -TreiSTis, •aSivris, -reXT/s, -KijSrji, -wAqs, -epiojs, 
 -/3apj7S, -dprji (-riprji), -a.pK-q<;, -vdicq<s, -Xdp.Tn]q, -o-amys, -T«x^s, and 
 
 (kXcjjs) kX'^s- The neuter exhibits the pure stem' ({ 52, S); but 
 in the Masc. and Fem., e, the short final vowel of the stem, is 
 lengthened into rj [5 52, 2 (b)]. 
 
 2. The words of this class, after dropping cr, suffer contraction 
 in all the Cases, except the Noni. and Voc. Sing, and Dat. PI. ; 
 and nouns in -xXeV) which are already contracted in the Nom. 
 Sing, (into kX^s), suffer a double contraction in the Dat. Sing. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
?59.] 
 
 WtlRb fiiSCLIINSION. 
 
 79 
 
 Singular, 
 ffa^j, clear. aonph 
 {(rcuj>4-os) ' tra<l>ovs 
 {(Tcupe-'i) acupfi 
 
 <T<vp4s <ra^4s 
 
 Dual N. A. V. 
 G. and D. 
 
 Singular. 
 ^ rpcfipris, trireme, 
 {rpflipe-os) Tpiiipov: 
 {Tpi-fipe-X) Tpiiiptt 
 (Tpi'tipe-a) •rpi'iipn 
 
 TpiTJpes 
 
 {(fatpf-es) 
 (ffafpe-wy) 
 (r(up4-<tt(y) 
 (ffo^e-as) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ffatpeis 
 <ra}buy 
 
 (<raipi-a) iTa<pii 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 'SDiKpArT^s 
 
 ^UKp&TOVS 
 
 SaKpdrel 
 
 ^WKpdTTJ 
 
 ^(^Kpares 
 
 ffwp4-otv. 
 Plural. 
 \rpii\pf-es) rpiiipus 
 {Tpirip4-av) Tpii)pant 
 Tpiiipe-iTl{y) 
 (rpttipe-as) rptiipus 
 {rpelipe-is) Tpiifpeis 
 
 Singular. 
 
 &cupeis 
 traipeTs 
 
 ircupij 
 (TcupoTv. 
 
 {(Tatpe-a) 
 (a-eupe-a,) 
 
 fraipTJ 
 (TaipTJ 
 
 Dual. 
 Tpflipf-e 
 TpiTipe-oiy tpffjpoiv 
 
 {llepiK\4ris) 
 
 (neptK\4e-os) 
 
 {TlepiK\4f-i) 
 
 {nepiK\4e-a) 
 
 {neplxXees) 
 
 nepiK\T)S 
 TlepiKKeovs 
 {TlepiK\4fi) UeptKKtl 
 nepiK\4a (Poet, also TlepinK^) 
 Tltptie\eis. 
 
 Remark 1. On the contraction in the Dual of ee into n (not into ti), and in 
 the Ace. Pi. of -eas into -eis, see § 9, It. When a vowel precedes the endings 
 'tis, -es, then -ta in proper names in -kKtIs is always contracted into -o, and 
 commonly also in adjectives (§ 9, H.), e. g. nepiicK4ca = nepiK\4d; lucXe^i, 
 without fame, ItKKeea = iicXeS, 671^1, health/, iyi4a = iyta, 4vUi)s, pom; ivStea = 
 fi/Sia, inteptpvlist supernatural, {nrep(pv4a = iirepipva (Ate. Sing. Masc, and Nom., 
 Ace, and Voc. PI. neuter) ; but sometimes the contraction into -rj occurs, e. g. 
 iyiij, Supvri, iipvij, mTo<pv^, X. ft. Equ. 7, U (in all the MSS.). The Ace. PI. 
 Masc. and ITem. has -eis, e. g. iyiets, aSro^urfj. 
 
 Rem. 2. Proper names in -Kpirns, -<rSt4vris, ■y4iiris, -(pivris, etc., also "Apjjs 
 (Voc.'Apfj), form the Ace. Sing, both according to the first and third Dec, 
 and are hence called Seteroclites (i. e. of different declensions), e. g. 'SaKpi.Ti] 
 and 2mk/)c£ti))/, according to Dec. I., 'A\Kafi.4yri and -/ie'i/Tjc, 'AvrurSt4irn and 
 •<r&4vriv, 'Apri and -riv, etc. ; Plato commonly uses the form in -t;, Xenophon that 
 in -III/, other writers both, without distinction ; in words in -pris, the form in ■vfif 
 is preferred to that in -vn. (The Gen. ofApris in good prose is "Apcas [often in 
 Plato], yet in the poets 'Apeos is also used according to the necessities of the 
 verse.) But in words in -k\^s, the Ace. in -KhTJn is first used in later writers. 
 The PI. is declined according to Dec. I., e. g. 'ApurTo<piyiu, tojs AsaKpiTais, robs 
 'Api<rTO<pdyas, robs Ai]noaSr4i/as ; still, 'HpaK\4e5 occurs in PI. Theaet. 169, 6. 
 
 Rem. 3. The Gen. PI. of rpflipns occurs, also, in the nncontracted form, viz. 
 T/xjjpeW ; but in all the other Cases it is uniformly contracted ; the Dual 
 also in words of this class occurs in an uncontractcd form in Attic writers, 
 e. g. (vyyeyes, and the Tragedians use the uncontractcd forms of proper names 
 
 ' aape-os from <rap4(T-os, the o- of the stem being dropped ; and so in fho 
 other Cases, except the Nom. and Voc. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
go THIRD DECLENSION. [H 60, 6;, 
 
 in -«\4ns = lAfis, according to the necessities of the Terse, e. g. "MpoicX^iif, Dat 
 •K\4fi, Voc. -KMes. The contract Ace. in -kKtj is rare. The Voc. S"Hpo/t\ej, 
 as an exclamation, belongs to the later prose. 
 
 Rem. 4. The irregular accent of the Gen. VI and Dual is to bo noted, vit. 
 tpffipav (instead oi TptijpSiv fromTpiripeap), -rpi^pow (X. II. 1. ^, 19. 5. 4, 56). In 
 addition to this word, adjectives in -nSnis and the word avrapiais, have the like 
 accent, e. g. ifvini&4av = armfiAeiy, avTapKcoD = airipKay, 
 
 i 60. (2) Words in -us. Gen. -toos, and in -ajs and -m, 
 
 Gen. -oos. 
 
 (a) -as, Gen. -was. 
 
 Thus, e. g. o ^ ^w, jackal, Gem^wo's, etc. Polysyllables have 
 
 the Ace. Sing, and PL either coAtracted or uncontracted, e. g. 
 
 6 ^pois, herOj tw ijpcoa and ^pu>, tovs rjpiaai and ■^ptos. 
 
 (h) -as and 'oi, Gen. -oor. 
 Substantives of these endings are always feminine. The 
 stem ends in -os. The short final vowel, according to } 52, 2 
 (b), is lengthened into u. The ending '<us, however, is retained 
 in the Attic and Common language only in the substantive 
 atScos (stem aiSos), and in poetry in ^eiis, morning (in Eurip.) ; 
 but in aU other words, it has been changed into a smoother 
 form, so that the Nom. ends in -us, e. g. ^x<^ (stem ^x^^)- ^^ 
 the Voc. in di, see § 53, 4 (3). The Dual and PI. are formed 
 like the ending -os of Des. II. ; thus, oiSoi, y]ypi, etc. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 T) W.I&S (stem oiSos), shame. 
 
 ^ ^X'' (stem ^xos), echo. 
 
 G. 
 
 (aiS(f-os) atSoOf 
 
 (^X&-as) ^x""* 
 
 D. 
 
 (ot5(f-i) aiSo? 
 
 (^X<i-i) *X"' 
 
 A. 
 
 (atS(j-a) aiSc^ 
 
 (^X-f-a) ^X« 
 
 V. 
 
 (a{S({-i) atSo?» 
 
 (^X<'"') wxo?' 
 
 § 61. (3) Words in -as. Gen. -aos, awa! «»t ^os, Gen. »eo«. 
 
 (a) -as, Gen. -aos. 
 
 Only the Neuters to <r€'\as, light, and to SeVas, goblet, belong to 
 tliis class : Gen. o-e'Xa-os, Dat. o-e\o-t, and o-iX-q. ; PI. &i\a-a and 
 friX-a, Gen. o-cXa-wv, Dat. <re\a-o-i(x) ; Dual a-eXa-t, fftXd'Olv. 
 
 Remark 1. On tlic poetic shortening of the contract o, see § S4, Rem. 4. 
 In the following four Neuters in -of, the a in the Gen., Dat., and in the PL, i« 
 Changed, according to Ionic usage, into tlie weaker e, viz. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
4 62.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 81 
 
 Bpiras (poet.), itnage, Gen. jSpereos, PI. Pperta and fiphri, ^pereav 
 Haas (poet.), place, PI. in Homer, xtiea, Ki€m{v). 
 oSSor (poet.), ground, Geu. oBSeor, Dat. «t!S€» and o«Sa (Horn.) 
 Ki/eVos (poet, and prose), <for7cnes«, Gen- Kj-eV's Epic, KveVour Attic, Kj/t'^ol 
 Epic, Kyeipif Attic. 
 
 (b) -OS, Gen. -cos. 
 
 All substantives of this class are also neuter. In the Nom., 
 €, the stem- vowel of the last syllable, is changed into o (U6, 1). 
 
 Sg.N.A. 
 G. 
 D. 
 
 rh yems (instead of veVes), genus, ri kk4os (instead of kA^es), glory. 
 {y4iie-os) yevavs {K\4e-os) K\4ovs 
 
 {y4ve-t) y4va {K\4e-X) K\4fi 
 
 Plur. N. 
 6, 
 
 {y4ve-a) 
 yetr4-uj/ and 
 y4ve'ffi(v) 
 
 yen) 
 
 {K\4e-a) 
 {K\4-a}i/) 
 K\4e-iri(f) 
 
 K?L4d 
 KKeay 
 
 Dual. 
 
 iyeye-e) 
 yew'-oif) 
 
 y^yrf 
 yei/otv 
 
 {k\g4~mv) 
 
 xKeotj/, 
 
 Bem. 2. On the contraction of « into ij (instead of et), and of ea into a 
 (instead of rj), when a vowel precedes, see § 9, II. ' On the poetic shortening 
 ){ the contracted d in kXeo, sec ^ 54, Bern. 4. 
 
 Rem, 3. The uncontracted forta of the Gen. PI. is not nniisual, e. g. ipiav, 
 Be\4tiiv, (cepBeW, and almost without exception ay^4av; in PI. Polit. 260, a., the 
 uncontracted Dual in ee occurs : nirw ri yevee. In the lyric portions of the 
 Attic tragedians, ir&ea, &x^a, etc. occur. 
 
 IIL Words in -is, -t«, -i, -u, 
 
 i 62. (1) Words in -ts, -vs. 
 
 Tlie substantives in -is, -ijs originally ended in -KF^ -vF^. 
 See { 25, 2. 
 
 Sing. N, 
 
 6 kTs, corn-worm. 
 
 ri aus, sow. 
 
 i iX»*s, fish. 
 
 G. 
 
 Ki-6s 
 
 av-is 
 
 Ix^-os 
 
 D. 
 
 kU 
 
 aU 
 
 IxSii-i 
 
 A, 
 
 KOr 
 
 <rvy 
 
 ixSti" 
 
 V. 
 
 IBi 
 
 «m 
 
 ix^ 
 
 Pirn-. N. 
 
 xt-es 
 
 trt-ts 
 
 iX*i5-« 
 
 6. 
 
 Kl-UV • 
 
 ffv-av 
 
 ixS^-a" 
 
 D. 
 
 Ki-ai{v) 
 
 irv^tri{j/} 
 
 (xa*-<"(y) 
 
 A. 
 
 xt-as 
 
 irv-as, Attic '<rCs 
 
 ix&iS-os, Attic ix&Bj 
 
 V. 
 
 let-es 
 
 «riS-ej 
 
 ixS^-€s 
 
 Dual. 
 
 kU 
 
 ff1j-6 
 
 (Jx»6-e) 'X*B 
 
 
 kX-oiv 
 
 vv-oiv 
 
 Ix^i-oiv. 
 
 Kestaek, The contracted Nom. P], al &pKvs occurs in X. Ven. 2, 9 ■ 6, 2 
 10. 2, 19. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
82 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 P63 
 
 § 63. (2) Words in -ts, -t, -vs, -v. 
 
 The stem of these substantives ends in il or v. The stem- 
 vowels I and V remain only in the Ace. and Voc. Sing. ; in the 
 other Cases they are changed into c (^6, 2). In the Gen. 
 Sing, and PL, masculine and feminine substantives take the 
 Attic form in -tos and -cov, in which the <o has no influence on 
 the accent (comp. i 29, Rem. 7). In the Dat. Sing, and in the 
 Nom. and Ace. PI., contraction occurs. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Tl TToAis, city. 
 'ir6\e-cas 
 
 S iTTOfc, cubit. 
 Trfixvy 
 
 ■JTTJXV 
 
 rh fflmm, mustard. 
 o-HTOTre-os 
 trivdirei 
 civmri 
 fflvmri 
 
 rb iarv, city, 
 fio-re-os 
 &ffrei 
 &(rrv 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 iro'Aeij 
 
 Tr6\e-ait 
 
 5rii\e-(n(v) 
 
 ■n-lixe's 
 ir-fixs-av 
 
 TT'fixeis 
 Triixeis 
 
 trtythnj 
 
 ciyaTre-ay 
 
 triydTre-(ri{v} 
 
 ffiydiTTj 
 
 aivdirri 
 
 darri ' 
 currc-ar 
 
 filTTT) 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ir6\e-e 
 'TToKe-otjf 
 
 Trfixe-e 
 
 TTTIX^OIV 
 
 trtvdirs-e 
 fnvair4-0LV 
 
 fiffTC-e 
 atTTe-ow. 
 
 Remakk 1. Here belong all sub.stantives in -{is, -\fiis, most in -tns and many 
 others, e. g. ^ k6vis, dust; S ndvris, prophet ; ri i(pis, serpent; ti irlaris, faith ; ri 
 vfipts, abuse; 6 ireAeKuy, axe; d irpeff^vs, old man; rh ireirepi, pepper ; ihrtyyi- 
 Papi, cinnabar; rh irav (poet.), herd (without contraction). Adjectives in -us, 
 -eJo, -i5 are declined in the Masc. and Neut. like irrjxvs and Scrrii, except that the 
 Gen. Masc. takes the regular forms -eoj, -eW (not -ems, -eav), e. g. rfiis, ^Se'oj. 
 
 Eem. 2. In the Attic poets, though probably only in the lyric passages, the 
 Gen. in -eoj, from substantives in -it, occurs, e. g. 'ir6Kfos. 
 
 Rem. 3. In X. An. 4. t, 16, the contracted Gen. Trnx^'v is found. Instead 
 of the Dual form in -ee, one in -tj is also used ; likewise a form in -ei (instead 
 of -ee), is quoted by the ancient grammarians from Aeschines. — The Ace. PI. 
 of nouns in -vs sometimes occurs uncontracted in the Attic poets, e. g. irTixfas. 
 
 Rem. 4. Neuters in -i and -v have the Attic Gen. Sing, very seldom, c. g. 
 Ko-TEWJ, Eur. Bacch. 838 (831). Or. 761 (751). 
 
 Rem. 5. Adjectives in -is, -r, c. g. XSpts, idp'i, sl^lful, and some substantives 
 in -IS, which are partly poetic, have the regular inflection : t-os, i-i, t-fs, etc., 
 or both forms together, e. g. ^ juiji-is, anger (also niviSos, etc.), i fi oh, slieep ; ri 
 jTE'iTEp: (Gen. -epios and -eos), pepper; 6 t] irSpris, calf; 6 ii irijffis, spouse (Gen. 
 irifffios, but Dat. always ttoVei); ^ Tp6iris, heel (also TpiJiriSos, etc.); i) ripffis, 
 tower (Gjn. Tipa-ws,X. An. 7. 8, 12. ripnv, ib. 13, but Plural Tvpints, ripaeai, 
 etc.) ; ri fidyaSis (Gen. -los, Dat. naydSl, X. An. 7. 3, 32) ; some proper names, 
 e. g. Sue'weo-is, "Ipis (Gen. -los, etc.), X. An. 1. 2, 12; 6. 2, 1 (5. 10, 1), finally 
 one noun in -is, h ^7Xe^''D^nfe«9'»j>m^feto8i3^) 
 
*} 64, 65.] 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 83 
 
 Sing.N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Plur. N. 
 G. 
 D'. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 6, 7) Tr6jnis, calf. ^ eyx*^"*. eel. i, f) oh, sheep. 
 ■Kdtiri-as iyxi\v-os oUs 
 
 nrifni-i and itSfnl iyxf\v-X oU 
 
 iripTiv iyxf>J>i> dlv 
 
 iripTi iyxf\v oh 
 
 v6pTi-es and TrSprls 
 voprl-cay 
 iripn-irilv) 
 vojyri'os and irSprti 
 iropTt-es and irSprts 
 
 iyxiheis 
 
 i'Yx4\i-(n{v) 
 
 iyXi^cis 
 
 oUs 
 oiujf 
 
 oTas and oh 
 oUs 
 
 v6pTi-e 
 
 TTOpri'OlV 
 
 iyX^Ke-e 
 
 o7e 
 oiotv 
 
 Beh. 6. Xenophon uses the Ionic forms of oh : oiV, iXes, oW, S?os, and i'is, 
 
 } 64. Quantity of the Third Declension. 
 
 1. The inflection-endings -a, -/, -«, and -aj, are short. 
 
 Exception : The a in the Ace. Sing, and PI. of substantives in -eis is long, 
 e. g. rhv Up4a, roils Up4d,s from i lepeis, priest. 
 
 2. Words, whose Nom. ends in -a|, -ij, -i;|, -call, -KJi, -vtji, -is, and -vs, have the 
 penult of the Cases which increase, either short or long, according as the 
 vowel of the above endings is long or short by nature ; o, i, v, are long in all 
 Genitives in -avos, -ivos, -viios, e. g. S dtipa^, breastplate, -Bxos ; i pi^, reed, par6s ; 
 ri iucris, ray, -Tyos, but f) fia\a^, dod, -oikos, ti i\irts, hope, -idos. See fuller 
 explanations in Larger Grammar, Part I. 4 291. 
 
 § 65 Accentuation of the Third Declension. 
 
 1. The accent remains on the tone-syllable of the Nom. as long as the laws 
 of accentuation (^ 30) permit, e. g. ri Trpayim, deed, rrpdynaros (but irpayfuiTay), 
 rh tiyofia, name, oyofiaros [but ovo/MiToiy), 5 tj x^^'-^^^t swallow, ;f;eXi5((ro5, 'Beva- 
 tjiav, -&VT0S, -uvres, -isvruv. Particular exceptions have been noticed in the 
 Paradigms. 
 
 2. Monosyllables are accented in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers on the 
 final syllable ; the long syllable uv and oiv having the cireumflex ; the others, 
 the acute, e. g. i n^iy, iiriv6s, firivi, iir)tio7y, firivSiv, iiiial(v). 
 
 Exceptions: 
 (a) The following ten substantives are Paroxytones in the Gen. I'l. and Gen. 
 and Dat. Dual: ri S^s, torch; i S/uis, slave; i rj d^s, jackal; -rh KPA2, poet. 
 (Gen. Kpards), head; ri ois (Gen. arSs), ear; 6 fi vols, child; 6 oils, moth; S ti 
 Vpiis, J^ojan, Trojan woman; ri ijiifs (Gen. (paiSSs), a burning; rh <pus (Gen. 
 ^aiTits), light; e. g. S<fSay, Si^Soiy, ^diuy, Kp&Tuy, Stuv, Uroiy, iraiSwy, vaiioty, 
 tiav, Tptiay, (pt^Say, tpinay (on the contrary, ruy S/iuZy from ai Suuai, ray 
 Tpuuv from at Tpaai, ray (pun&v from & ipds, man; ruy ^uuy from ^ ftai^, 
 injury). • 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
R4 THIRD DECLENSION . [§ 66 
 
 (b) The following contracts, according to the nature of the final syllaljle, art 
 titlier Properispomcna or Paroxytones, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, 
 US in the other Cases, e g. rh eap {Epic ^p), spring; icrjp (Epic from Ke'op), hearti 
 i \S.s (from KSas), stone; i irpiiv (from wpriiiy), hill, e. g. fjpos (rarer ^apos), ?jpi 
 (rarer sapi). Krjpos, Hrjpi, \aos, \ai, \aiiiv, irp&vos, irpan. 
 
 Remakk. The following contracts, on the other hand, follow the principal 
 rttle (No. 2) : (neap = ffTrip, tallow; a-Tearos = (rTijTiir, (ppeSp, well, <\>p4S.TOs and 
 •ppririst n. (ppriTuv, 0/)?|, Qp^^> QpifiKos = &paic6s, and &pyK6s, oh, oi6s, oil, 
 olwy, oi<rl{v). 
 
 (c) Monosyllabic participles, as well as the pronoun n's ,• quis? retain the 
 accent, through all the Cases, on the stem-syllable; but the pronoun ttSs and 
 i niit is an Oxytone in the Gen. and Dat. Sing. ; in the other Cases either a 
 I'aroxytone or a Properispomenon, according to the nature of the final syllable, 
 0. g. ^lij, (jyivTOs, &i>, oPTOs, 8vTi, foTa);/, oS(ri(y), ivraiv, tIs, rivos, tIvi, etc. ; ttSs, 
 rraLprSs, ttiivtI, iritntiVi irdpToiv, 5rSo-i{>'), 6 Ibir, Ilav6s, rots tlaffffv). 
 
 3. The following are accented, in the Gen. and Dat. of all Numbers, like 
 monosyllabic substantives : — 
 
 ^a) Ti yvp-fj, wife {yvvaiK6s, yvvawi, ywaiKotv, ywauc&v, yvyat^i{p) ; but yum- 
 Ka, yvpoLKes, etc.) ; 6 t] k6cuv, dog {kvpos, Kuvi, Kvvdtv^ Kvvuiv, Kvat{v) ; but 
 Kiva, Kvpes, etc.) ; 
 
 (b) Syncopated substantives in -np, on which sec § 55, 2 ; 
 
 (c) Compounds of els, unus, in Gen. and Dat. Sing., c. g. oiSfis, ouSep6s, 
 ovSepi] but ofiSeVajr, ovd4(ri{p), so fjiri^dsy fi7jdep6s, etc.; 
 
 (d) The Attic poetic forms, Sop6s, Sopl, from S6pu. 
 
 4. For the accentuation of substantives in -ij, -vs. Gen. -cus, see § 63 ; of 
 those in -i (§ 60), the irregular accentuation of the Ace. Sing, of iix^" = ^X* 
 (instead of fix's), should be noted. 
 
 5. (a) In the Voc. of syncopatjd substantives (§ 53, 2) in -tip, the accent, 
 contrary to the principal rule, ij! drawn back as far as possible, e. g. £ irarep, 
 SiiyoTcp, A^«T)T€p, &P€p; so also (a) in the following substantives; 'At6kKii>p 
 {capos), TlotreiSSop [uvos), (rwT'fjp [Tjpos], *AiJt(plap {iopos), Swfjp (epos)] thus, & 
 'A-n-oWov, IliJa-ciSoj', o-Srep, 'A/Mjuoy, Saep; — (b) in compound substantives in 
 ■ap. Gen. -opos, in adjectives in -op, Gen. -opos, whether simple or compound; 
 also in comparatives in -ft»y, -ay (in adjectives and comparatives, also, in the 
 neuter gender), e. g. 'Ayifieiiyov from 'Aya/iefipaiv, ^Aptariyaroy from 'Apurro- 
 '^"■Ircoy (but 'Ituroy, HaKat^oy, ^t\yi^p, etc. as simple) : S and rh fUSaifioPf & and 
 rh iXifiixop, S and ^h KiWiop ; (the following are exceptions : S Aa/tcSiu/ioi' from 
 t\a.Ki^aiiioip, compounds in -(pptap, e. g. £ Avxicppop from AvK6<ppwp, Eui&u</>po»' from 
 Kii^vtppuy, S andri So'f^poi' from ^atippccy,) — (c)in the compound Paroxytones in 
 ■rjs, mentioned in § 59, c. g. 'SiixpaTes, ATin6(T^epcs ; S and rh oKS-oSej from aidd- 
 St)!, (pi\d\Ti^ss from ;|)i\ci\^&7/j (but liKiides from aATjS^s as a simple), aUrapKe!, 
 KaK6ri^es. — (Adjectives and substantives in -ojijs, -ooSjjs, -wXtjj, -apiis, -ripris, are 
 exceptions, e. g. euiil5»)s, ebaiSes, a/ufxinis afupues, TravdiKfjs wia>Si\es, vvipiis yeSpes, 
 
 \l<p'l)P'riS ^KprQpeS, T] rpffjpTJS TpiTJpeS, Alt^pTjS S Atap^s. 
 
 (b) The Yoc. of nouns in -aus, -eus, -ous, -lo, and -as is Perispomonon, c. g 
 Vpa?, ^a(Ti\ev, 3ou, '^awtpot, aiSoT. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' ""-I THIUC DECLENSION. 83 
 
 } 66. Gender of the Third Beclensinn. 
 
 The natural gender — the masculine and feminine — is distinguished in the 
 third Declension, not by a special form, but jjartly by the signification, pai-tly 
 by the forms, and in part by usage alone. The following rules will aid in 
 determining the gender : — ' 
 
 I. MascuUnes i (A) all nouns whose Nom. and stem (which can be recognized 
 by the Genitive) end in -av, , Gen. -av-os ; -ay, Gen. -ovr-os and -um-os ; -iiv, 
 Gen. -vv-os (only i novaivt tower) j -e«, Gen. -ec-os (only & Krets, comi) ; -os, 
 Gen. -o/'T-os; -ovs, Gen. -opt-os, -ouyr-os, -o5-os {& ttoiSs) j -a»p, Gen. -op-osj -eus, 
 Gen. -fas j -rfs, Gen. (-e-os) -ouj ; -us, Gen. -m-os ■, 
 
 (B) the following with exceptions ; — 
 
 (a) in -riv, Gen. -rims , but 6 ti xtlff goose ; -» in -iji/, Gen. -eyas ; mt 6 ^ dSij;', 
 gland) and ^ <^f)^;', diaphragm ; 
 
 (b) in -oiv, Gen. -o>v-os\ but ^ SxtDf, threshing-floor; fi jBA^X"'" <"' T^fe""') 
 pmny-rojjal ; r/ /ifXiS^v (poet.), care) ^ jiitKuv, poppy; 7; jrAaroyicii', rattte ' 
 (but 4 ttA.. /jrfaZ of the poppy) \ ^ Tp^pmi', pigeon; t) av\<iy (poet., but prose 
 6), ravine; fi i xdiStav bell; 
 
 (c) in r)pt Gen. -ijp-oi j but ri Kiip,fate (on account of ij icfip, goddess of fate) \ 
 6 Ti ^auTTfip, hammer; (those in "rip contracted from -eap, are neuter: ri 
 KTJp (poet.). Gen. K^pos, heart; rb lap, Gen. ^pos, spring;) — in -rip, Gen. 
 'pos; but 71 yaoriip, yaaTp6s, belly ;— in -rip, Gen. sp-os; but i ri aid^p, 
 ether; 6 ri i^p, air; 
 
 (d) in -Eip, Gen. -eip-os; but ri x^lp, hand (regularly, 6 kvrixeip, the thumb) ; 
 
 (e) in -ap, Gen. -up-os j but ri e'Aaip (poet.), booty; rh rr4Xap (poet.), monster; 
 
 (f ) in -»M) Gen. -o-os, see § 57, Rem. 4; 
 
 (g) in *aij, Gen. •dit-oj; but rb ^iSr, %A*; 
 (h) in -^, Gen. 'ttoj, -;3os. 
 
 II. Feminine: (A) aS nouns ia -is, Gen. -i£8'os; •tir, Gen. -eiJ*oj (only ^ 
 «\e£i, fc^) ; -tais. Gen. -K-aj ; -tvs. Gen. -iv^-os ; -ws, Gen. -wft-os ; -tjj, Gen. 
 •7)T-os; -If, Gen. -iT»or (otly ri X'^P'^) i ""^i Gen. -vS-os and -u&-os; -<4 and -ds, 
 Gen. -d-dr j 
 
 (B) the following nouns with exceptions : — 
 
 (a) in -ir, Gen. -t-os; but i x^'^i P"''^ wine; 6 ipinxis, a part of a ship; 6 
 iprts, carpMiter's tool; i Ki", com-uvrm ; i yXivis, a kind of fish ; b Ids 
 (Epic), lion, idnd i ri oXs, sAeep; — in -ir, Gen. -em, but & Spxts, testicle (»; 
 SpX'S) a kind of olive) \ 6 Sipis, serpent; S (later also fi) ex") viper; 6 (later 
 ri) ii6pts, bug ; 01 and ai icipPets, law-tables;'^- in -is, Gen. -iS-osj but 5 ^&<ii>, 
 •iBos, u, kind of cake; fi 6 rlypis. Gen. -los and -iSos, tiger; — in -is, Gen. 
 -i&-or; but 6 ri Spvis, bird;-^-m -is, Gen. -7p'os; but S SeKtpls, dolphin; i 
 IktIs, weasel; 6 ri Si's, heap ; 6 Te\fi.ls, marsh-mud; 
 
 (b) in -vs. Gen. -u-os; but 6 p6Tpvs, cluster; 6 S>privvs, footstool; d lxdvs,flsh; 
 i Itus, mouse; 6 vckvs, corpse; S (rTiJx"S; car of com; 6 &k6\\vs, rimde of 
 tonsure ; i riipvs, the night-mare ; 6 kAvSus, a Median garment) 6fivs or.tfBi, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
gg Tl-IIItC DECLENSION. L' 
 
 ^n.; .^.^a.Sp«,*»->A,■ n (later also.) ^Y^-. -^.J ^'''""' "' 
 
 (c)fn -L, Gen. -o.-o.; b«t « S«^»., a««a,- « -P^"'^ »''«'.• f ™'"^''. ™^'- 
 6J»y aar/e; & ff^i^""- earthen-Vessel; S iitia^'mv, Mi ; i v k"^", P'tl^r; i 
 H\aUy and kKp4,,o>v, bough ; 6 \a.yiv,gvlf; 6 irXayy^y, dott ; 6 /ivp/i^iip, 
 ant's nest; d fi aheierpviiv, code and hen. 
 Remakk 1. Nouns in -J are partly masculine, partly feminine, except thoso 
 In -a| (Gen. -dKos), which are masculine ; most of those in -J are feminine ; the 
 larger part of those in -if- are masculine, but many are feminine, e. g. i) KOMd- 
 po^fi, -OTTOS, shepherd's crook; r) XoiXaif', tempest; ri o^fi {vox), Ms, voice; ri (rarely 
 i) li\\i, onr6s,face; rj ^K4\f/, <l>\ep6s, vein; if x^ppi.'^, holy-iliater ; rj KarriXofi, -ipoi, 
 upper start/, etc. 
 
 III. Neuters : (A) all in -o, Gen. -ar-os ; -i), Gen. -tjt-oi (only -rh Kipn) ; -i. 
 Gen. 'It-OS (only ri fii\i. with its compounds) ; -vp. Gen. -vp-os (only ri TrCp, Gen. 
 Trvp-6s,Jire); -ap, Gren. -ot-os or-j;p, Gen. -?)t-os ; -op, Gen.-op-os; -or, Gen.-oT-«i 
 -OS, Gen. {-e-os) -ovs ; -i, Gen. -eos ; -v, Gen. -v-os, and -eoj, and -ar-os, ^ 68, 1 ; — 
 (B) the following with exceptions: (a) -op. Gen. -op-os; but S ^ip, star- 
 ling; (b) -as. Gen. -a-os; but 6 XSr, stone; (c) -top, Gen. -ot-os (except 6 ax^p, 
 Ix^Pt eo'Ttop, ^\4ktwp, § 68, 15). • 
 
 Kem. 2. The following single words may be noted in addition : ^ Ids, Gen. 
 SatT-6s, feast ; rh ffTois or o-rofr, <rTaiT6s, dough; rh ots. Gen. a>T-6s, ear. 
 
 \ 67. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declension. 
 
 All substantives, whose inflection differs from the rules and 
 analogies above given, are included under the ii-regular substan- 
 tives of the thu-d Dec. AU the anomalous forms of the third 
 Dec. may be divided into tluee classes : — 
 
 (a) The first claas includes those substantives whose Nom. cannot be derived, 
 according to general analogy, from the Genitive-stem, e. g. ^ yuvi], wife, Gen. 
 yvvaiK-6s. 
 
 (b) The second class inc^ades those substantives, which, with one Nom, 
 form, have in some or ali of the Cases, two modes of formation ; both of these, 
 however, may come, in accordance with the general rules, from one form of the 
 Nom., e. g. 6 ^ ipvis. Gen. -i&oj, bird, PI. Jfpvi&er and ipveis, as if from ipm, 
 Gea. -iws. These substantives are called Heterodites (i. o. of different declen- 
 sions or irregularly declined). 
 
 (c) The third class includes substantives, which, with one Nom. form, admit, 
 in some or all of the Cases, two modes of formation, one of which may be 
 derived from the Nom. form in use, but the other supposes a different Nom. 
 form, e. g. Stepd-traiv, -ovtos, servant, Ace. depiirovra and poet. Aepaira, as if from 
 S)epmp. This formation is called Metaplasm (transformation), and the substan- 
 tives included under it, Mefaplasls. The Nom. form, presupposed in this case, 
 is called the Theme. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
«G8.] 
 
 ANOMALOUS FORMS OF THIRD DEC. 87 
 
 } 68. Anomalous Forms of the Third Declenion. 
 
 1. ro'i/u (to, knee), and So'pu {to, spear), see ^ 54 (c). 
 
 In me tragic poets, the Epic forms, yoh/ara and yomia, yoivcari, occur ; 
 also m the Attic poets, the Gen. Sop6s, Dat. Sopl, and even S6pet, and 
 PI. Sop 71 instead of Sipara, are formed from S6pv; and in the phrase, Sopl 
 i\e!v, to take it prisoner of war, this Dat. form is retained even hj the Attic 
 prose writers. 
 
 2. TvvTJ (■^, woman), Gen. ywam-os (as if from yvyaii), Dat. 
 yui/acK-ij Ace yuvaiK-a, Voc. ■yui'at ; PI. yui-ai/ccs, yuvatKwv, yw/at^i (v), 
 
 ywaiKas; on the accentuation, see § 65, 3 (a). 
 
 3. Adpvj see yovu. No. 1. 
 
 4. Zevs, Gen. Aios, Dat. ^.d. Ace. Ata (as if from ^is), Voc. 
 Zev. 
 
 Poet, corresponding forms are Ziivis, ZtjW, Z^vo. 
 
 5. ©epaTTwv (oj ser«;a«i), -ovTos. In Eurip. Ace. Sipawa, PI. 
 ^tpaircs, } 67 (e). 
 
 6. Kapa (ro, head), an Epic and poetic word, Gen. KpaT-ds, 
 Dat. KpaTt and Kopa, Ace. to Ko^a, to Kpara (tov Kpara, { 214); 
 Acc. PI. tovs Kparas, i 67 (c). 
 
 7. KXets (ij, ^ey), Gen. kXciS-os, Dat kXeiS-i, Ace. kXcii/ (§ 53, 
 Rem. 1), later icXciSa; PI. Nom. and Aee. kXeis, and kXeiSk, 
 KXctSas, } 67 (b). 
 
 Old Attic, K\-ns, k\i]36s, MXySl, K\ySa. 
 
 8. Kvwv (6, ij, dog), Gen. kw-o's, Dat. kwi, Acc. Kwa, Voc. kvov; 
 PI. KWK, K-jvSiv, Kvcri, Kvva^. 
 
 9; A lira (to, oil, fatness), in the Epic dialect always in the 
 phrases, aXeiij/OLa^ai XiTT iXam, xpto-ai and ypitraxr&ai Aiir' ihxm, and 
 SO also in the Attic prose, dXei^eo-^ai, )(pU(rSaL Xwra ; XtVa is thus 
 an abridged Dat. instead of XtTrai, XCtto, from to XCtto, Gen. -oos, 
 but cXatov must be considered as an adjective from iXda, olive, 
 so that XCtto. eXmov means olive-oil. 
 
 10. MapTvs (o, vdtness). Gen. p-aprrupoi, Dat. p.apTvpi, Acc. 
 «<£pn;pa, and in Simonides /n.JpTDi'; Dat. PI. /^cJ/rri5crt (v). 
 
 11. NaSs (^, sA*». Gen. vews, Dat. vni, Acc. mw, Voc. want- 
 ing; Dual, Gen. and Dat. veoiv (Nom. and Acc. wanting) ; PI 
 y5«,' veSv, vavo-i (.'), i«iSs- Comp. ypaCs, * 57. 
 
 In Attic poets and later prose also, vri6s, vnl, v^o, etc 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
86 
 
 DEFECTIVES OP THE THIRD DECLENSION. [♦ 6. 
 
 "2. 'Op VIS (o, Tj, bird), Gen. opvlS-os, etc. The PI. has a col- 
 lateral form declined Kke iroXis, except the Dat. : opvl^es and 
 opvets, opvt^usv and opvemv, opv'un, opvl^as, opvas, and opvls, § 67 (b). 
 So 'Avdxapa-L's, 'Avaxa-puiSos, and 'Avaxa/xretos. 
 
 In the Attic writers, the i is sometimes short, Spvts, ipviy, Aristoph. Av. 16. 
 270, 335 (but SpDis, ipvlv, 70, 103, 73). 
 
 13. livv^ (ji, place of meeting), Gen. irvKv-o^, Dat. ttvkvl, Acc. 
 TrvKva. 
 
 14. 2^s (o, moth). Gen. a-c-oi; PI. o-e'es. Gen. o-eW, etc.; in the 
 later writers, Gen. cnyroi. 
 
 15. 'SiKwp (to, dirt). Gen. o-Karos, etc., and vSwp (to, water), 
 Gen. vSotos, etc. To both of these belong : — 
 
 16. ^peap (to, a well), and a-Teap (to, tallmo). Gen. -taros and 
 -ip-os (a long in Attic, short in Epic). 
 
 17. $5dts, c^^is (o, art of cooking), Gen. ^^oi-o's and (from 
 <^^ofe) (j>^otS-os ; PI. ^%'ets and <f>SoiS€s. 
 
 18. XoSs (o, a measure), ^oos, ^oi, x"'''', x°^5> X"*^"' X""""'' X""' 
 like ySoiJs (§ 57) ; also Gen. xoGsj -A-CC. x°^y -^cc. PI. xo«Sj as if 
 from xo«i^s- The latter forms are preferred by the Attic writers ; 
 Xovi, with the meaning of mound, is inflected only like /Sow. 
 The form xoe^s is Ionic, Dat. xo"- 
 
 19. Xpcus (o, skin), xpwT-os, XP""'^' XP'^"- Collateral forms in 
 the Ionic dialect and the Attic poets, are, Gen. xpo-os, XP°^ XP""" 
 like oiSms. The Daf. xp¥ i^ found in certain plirases with iv, 
 e. g. iv xpw KeipicrSai, Xen. HeU. 1. 7, 8. ^pei £v xpM, ii shaves close 
 to tlu ildn, it comes Jwme, Soph. Aj. 786. 
 
 4 69. Defective Nouns of the Third Declension. 
 
 Some nouns of the third Dec. are wanting in one or more of the Cases, and 
 are, consequently, called Defectives. Existing forms, however, of such substan- 
 tives, are found, for the most part, only in certain phrases, c. g. 
 
 XpEMs (t!i, debt), Ionic-Attic form for the Nom., Gen., and Acc; also tJ 
 Xptoj, Gen. xP^o^^t ^^- "'''■ XP^'s, Gen. XP^""! the Dat. and Dual are wanting; 
 map and Bjto/j (only as Nom. and Acc), in dreaming and waking; StjieKos (only 
 as Nom. and in the construction of the Acc. with the Inf ), advantage; /u£ai| 
 only in the phrase iwi uiMis, under the arm. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
}} 70, 71.] redundant nouns. iieteroclites. 89 
 
 Kemakks on the Declensions. 
 
 {70. I. Redundant Nouns. 
 
 Nouns are called Redundant, wliich have two modes of 
 inflection in all or in most of the Cases : - 
 
 A. They belong to the same declension, 
 
 (a) of the same gender, e. g. 
 
 i \e(is and \5.6s, people; i veis and m6s, temple; 6 Kayds and ?Myis, hare; 
 5 KoAais, rope, PI. also Ki\oi ; ri S,\us, thresMng-Jloor, PI. also ai Si\oi ; fi Vopyti 
 and Vopytiv. 
 
 (b) of different genders (hence called heterogeneous), e. g. 
 
 i yuTos and rh varov, back (the last form was regarded by the Atticists as the 
 only proper form, still rhv vSitov Xen. E. Equ. 3, 3) ; i ^vy6s&nA.T)) (vy6y, yoke. 
 — In the PI. the neuter foim of these heterogeneous nouns is more frequently 
 used, e. g. & irtTos, rek cTra ; ot Seirfiot, and more commonly tA SetTjUcE ; i ffra^fiSsf 
 a station, balance, ot trra^fwi and Tot irTo^fui, stations, and t& ffra^fiA, sometimes 
 also balances; ol (vyol does not probably occur. 
 
 B. To different declensions, and commonly of different gen- 
 ders (heterogeneous), e. g. 
 
 S tp^6yyos and ^ ^^077^, voice; 6 xlipos and ii X'^P'^t space; 7) ix^ ^"^ ^ 
 ix^os, rising ground ; ri Siifia and rb Si^lios, thirst; {/ vdwri (the older form) aid -rh 
 viitos, valley, etc. It should be observed further, that the word S irpiafivs, elder. 
 has only Ace. Trpiafivv, Voc. irpeV/Su; these three forms are almost entirelj 
 poetic (irpeo-jSiJTspos and Trpeer/SiiraTos formed from this, are in frequent use); 
 in the Common Language, 6 vp^irfiiriis, -ov, elder; in the meaning o{ messenge,: 
 envoy, the Common Language uses in the Sing. 5 xpfo-jSeurfc -ofl ; but in the 
 PI. 01 and Tois irpeV/Seis, irpitr^fav, irp4trPs<rt; also, rb Sdxpvoi/ and rb SiKpv 
 tear. The latter and older form is retained in the poetic dialect ; still, the Dat. 
 PI. SiKpviTi is found even in the Attic prose-writers (Thu. 7, 75 ; Dem. c. Onet 
 T. § 32). 
 
 {71. II. Heteroclites. 
 
 Heteroclites [{ 67 (b)] have two modes of formation; they 
 are either of the third Dec, wliich have been already presented 
 together (§ 68), or of two different declensions. Those of dif- 
 ferent declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 
 
 A. Of the First and Third Declension. 
 
 Several substantives in -lys are inflected, either in whole or in 
 part, according to the first and third declensions : — 
 
 (a) Some in -j)s, Gen. ■<»• and -tfros, through all the Cases according to both 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
90 THIED DEC. METAPLASTS. [J 72 
 
 declensions : 6 fi^KTis, viusJiroom, Gen. fi^Kov and fi^Ktyros, and some proper 
 names, e. g. XapTis. The name 0a\rjs, in the old Attic, has tli3 Ionic Gen. 
 form 0ciA.e(o, Dat. 0a\^, Ace. @aKrjy ; in the later writers, SoAoD and @d\riTos, 
 ed\Tiri and QaXfira. Observe that the accent is drawn back on ©oXea. 
 
 (b) The proper names mentioned, § 59, Rem. 2, have ti as well as ijj/ in the 
 Ace. Sing. only. 
 
 B. Of the Second and Third Declensions. 
 
 (a) Of the Common secoud and third declensions : several 
 substantives in -os, as masculine, are inflected according to the 
 second Dec, but as neuter, according to the tliird Dec, e. g. 6 
 and TO oxp's, chariot, rov o)(ov and oxovi> top S^ov and to o)(os ; 6 
 and TO o-KOTos, darhness. 
 
 (b) Of the contract second and tliird declensions : — 
 
 irpdxoos {tj, Tvatei'ing-pot)^ Att. irp6xovs. Gen. Trp^xov, etc., Dat. PI. vftrxoviri 
 (like Pom, $ov<riv). 
 
 OISIttuvs, Gen. OlSliroSos and (poet.) OlSiirov, Dat. OiS/ttoSi, Acc. OiS^iroSa and 
 OlSiirovy, Voc. OiSiTTou. 
 
 (c) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 
 
 In the Acc. Sing., S ytXios, laughter, yiXanos, yeKant, Acc. yehaTa and 
 ye\av, and the three following: virpas, patruus, /iiiTpus, avunculus, and 
 Klyas, which, in the Gen. and Acc. Sing., are inflected according to the third 
 Dec. and the Attie second Dec. ; in the other Cases, according to the third 
 Dec. 
 
 irdrpas, Gen. Trdrpu and irtirptoos, Dat. Trdrpoji, Acc. irdTpuv and ndrpwa j 
 t/Livas, Gen. Mlyta and Myuos, Dat. Kivat, Acc. yLlyu (§ 48, Kem. 1), MiVa* 
 and Miytaa. 
 
 § 72. ni. Metaplasts. 
 
 Metaplasts [§ 67 (c)] like Heteroclites, have two modes of 
 formation ; they are either of the third declension, wMch have 
 been already presented together (68), or of two different declen- 
 sions. Those of different declensions are, e. g. as follows : — 
 
 (a) Of the Common second and third declensions : — 
 
 AeySpoy {ri, tree), (Jen. SiySpov, etc. ; but in the Dat. PI. among the Attic 
 wi-iters, ZiySp«n (from the stem t^ AENAP02) and SeVSpoij; the fii-st fonn is 
 regarded by the Atticists as the better. To this stem belong, also, the forms 
 rp S^ySpei and ra UySpri, which occur in the Attie poets, and in later prose 
 rmters. 
 
 Koivmyis {i, partaker), Gen. icoiyioyov, etc.; Xenophon usgs the forms oi 
 Koiyiiyts and toiis kouwi'm (from KOINfiN). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' '3 1 INDECLINABLE AND DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 91 
 
 Kpivoy {ri, Uli/) Gen. xpimv, etc., with the secondaiy form in the Dat. PI. 
 Kplve(Tt in Aristoph. from the PL xpiyea (in Herod.). Comp. SivSpoi: 
 
 Aas {S, stone), Gen. A5os and in Soph. 0. C. 196. \dov. 
 
 'O Smpos [and poetic t!> Svetpov], dream, Gen. ovilpou and iv^ipmos. 
 
 Tlvp {Th,Jite), irvpos. But PI., ri irvpd, watch-fires, according to the second 
 Dec. 
 
 'TiiJj (&, son), Gen. v'lov, etc. Together with this formation, there is another 
 according to the third Dec, much in use, particularly in the Attic writers, from 
 the theme 'TIETS, Gen. vUos, Dat^w'ei (Ace. vUa is rejected); PI. vieTs, Gen. 
 vUay, Dat. w'eVi, Ace. {vUas), Attic vUh (J 57, Eem. 1); Dual, vUf, Gen. 
 vUoiy. 
 
 (b) Of the Attic second and third declensions : — 
 
 The three substantives, ri a\as, threshing-floor; 6 radis, peacock; and i ntpis, 
 whirlwind, have, together with the common inflection according to the Attic 
 second declension, another according to the third declension, in -ams, etc., e. g. 
 
 TlKJIUVa. 
 
 Eemaek. The wcwds ^ S.\as and S rads are generally declined accord- 
 ing to the Attie second Doc, Ace. Sing. aXav, -raiiv ; still, the y is commonly 
 rejected from Sxaj in the Aec, § 48, Rem. 1. But the forms &\wvos, aXava, 
 iKuai^v), TBwvi, rauves, rautriy, etc., are used on account of their greater 
 perspicuity. 
 
 i 73. Indeclinable and Defective Nouns. 
 
 1. Substantives which do not vaiythe termination, but retain in all the Cases 
 the form of the Nom., are called indeclinable. Except foreign proper names, as 
 i 'APpaifi, ToS 'Afipadfi, and the indeclinable cardinal numbers, all indeclinable 
 nouns are of the neuter gender. Here belong especially : ^- 
 
 (a) The names of the letters, e. g. tIi, rod, r^, fix^o ; 
 
 (b) Most of the cardinal numbers, c. g.Sexa avSpay; 
 
 (c) Th, rov, Tif!, XP^^"' necessity, destiny, and S-e/iis with iirriy and elyai, and 
 several foreign words, e. g. rh, rod, r^ irdaxa ; 
 
 (d) The substantive infinitives, e. g. t^, toO, t4> ypdcpfiy. 
 
 2. Some substantives are used only in the Sing., or only in the PI. Such 
 words may be termed defective in number. The reason of it is found, either 
 in the meaning of the word, or simply in usage, c. g. i otS^p, ether; ol irricriai, 
 the Etesian wind ; ai 'AAijyai, Athens ; tci 'OKifiiria, the Olympic games. Comp. 
 further. Syntax, § 243. 
 
 3. It has been already noted, § 69, that some substantives are found only in 
 single Cases (Defectiva casu). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
92 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. L^ 74, TH 
 
 CHAPTER n. 
 
 The Adjective and Participle. 
 
 {74. Gender and Declension of the Adjective 
 and Participle . 
 
 1. The Adjective and the Participle, like the Substantive, 
 have three genders, being varied by inflection to agree with 
 the gender of their substantive. But all adjectives have 
 not separate forms for the three genders ; many have but 
 two endings, one for the Masc. and Fem., the other for the 
 Jjeuter, e.g. 6 a-coippcov avrjp, rj crdxfipcov •yvmj, to aai^pov 
 TeKvov. Several, indeed, have but one ending, commonly 
 used only for the Masc. and Fem. See § 80, e. g. o (^1/709 
 avrjp, r) ^vya<i <^vvri. 
 
 2. In Adjectives and Participles of three endings, the 
 Masc. and Neuter belong to the same declension (second or 
 third), and the Neuter is like the Masc. in the Gen. and 
 Dat. ; the Fem. is always of the first Dec. 
 
 Kemakk 1. Hence, in an Adjective in -os of three endings, the Masc. is 
 declined like \6yos (§ 46), the Fem. like Bfkij or aKii (§ 44), and the Kent. 
 like ffvKoi' (46 ). 
 
 Kem. 2. The declension of Adjectives and Participles differs only in a few 
 points from that of the Substantive ; these will be noted hereafter. But it may 
 be remarked here, as an essential deviation, that Participles always have the 
 Voc. of the third Dec. like the Nom., § 53, Rem. 5. 
 
 kit. Accentuation of Adj ectives and Participles. 
 
 The accentuation of Adjectives and Pai-ticiples is like that 
 of Substantives, virith a few exceptions, which are now to be 
 -loted : — 
 
 1. The Fem. is accented on the same syllable as the Masc. through all the 
 Cases, where the nature of the final syllable permits, e. g. kIix6s, koK-Ii, KoXoi'i 
 KoB^os, Koifrj, Kovtjxiv; x^pfeis, x'^P^eaaa, xv^^"; fiiKas, fiehaim, ii.4\av ; ■'ifip'i 
 Ttpfiva, Tcpei) ; $apvs, $apela, Papi ; Pov\e6a-as, Pov\eiff&(ra, Pov\ivirav ■ riSfJi, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 75.] ACCENTUATION OP ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES. 93 
 
 Eemaek 1. In adjectives in -oj, -rj, -of, or -oj, -o, -ov, the Fem., on accounj 
 of the length of the final syllable (ij, d), must be a Paroxytone, when the Masc. 
 is a Proparoxytone, or a Properispomenon, e. g. av&pdwti'os, avStpairlvri, i.vSrp^- 
 vtvovj i\ev^fpos, 4\sv^4pa, i\si^epovj kov^os, Kovtprf, Kov(pov'j ff-trovSouoSf trnov- 
 SaiS, movSatov; but, when the final syllable'in the declension is short, it again 
 takes the accentuation of the Masc, i. o. it becomes again a Proparoxytone, or 
 a Properispomenon, e. g. av^pimvat, i\tiAfpat, uovtpai, trirouScucu, like hv^pimi- 
 roi, iKeiAepot, uovipoi, mrovSaioi. Hence the difference between 'PiiSiat, AOKiat 
 {yvvaMes), as adjectives, and 'Po 8 (oi, Avxlai, as substantives, according to 
 § 45, 6. 
 
 2. Participles accent the same syllable in the Neuter Nom. as in the Masc, 
 when the nature of the syllable permits, «. g. 
 
 iratSeiaUf Tra^devoy Tifi-fjcruy, Tifirjirov 
 
 fpiKiev, tfuKovv T^irdiv, Kiirov. 
 
 Bem. 2. Tet Adjectives sometmies deviate from this rule, see § 65, 5. 
 
 3. Contracts in -ovs, -?, -ovi>, from -eos, -is., -eov, 60s, -6ri, or 6a, -6ov (except 
 the Nom. and Ace. Dual Masc. and Neuter, which are Oxytoucs, § 49, 3), are 
 Perispomena through all the Cases and Numbers, though the uncontracted 
 forms of those in -eos are Proparoxytones, e. g. apyipeos = apyvpoSs, hpyiptm 
 = apyvpovv. On contracted compounds in -ooj, -oov, c. g. eSvovs, eimvi', see 
 4 49, 3. 
 
 4. Barytone feminines of adjectives and participles, whose Masc. is of the 
 third declension, are Perispomena [§ 45, 6 (b)] in the Gen. PI., but all the 
 other Cases retain the accent of the Masc., e. g. 
 
 $apis, -Eio, -i Gen. PI. fiapiav, Papiiav 
 
 Xapteij, -Uaffa, -Uv " xapieVraij', x «(" < "f <'' " " 
 
 JUEA.M, iii\iuva, fiiXav " lieA&ymv, ineKaiv&v 
 
 ttSj, vatra, mv " Tiivruv, iraaSiv 
 
 TvijAeis, -ilea, -ip " Tvfd4vTav,rv(j>dsi<rav 
 
 ri^as, ri^l/aa'a, rv^av " rv^j/iiyTQiy, t u ^ a cr w y ; but, 
 
 ttv^p^Ttvos, -ivTj, -ivov " a V(d-/>wir(»'Otfj', as Masc, P., and N- 
 
 4KeiAepos, -4pS., -epov " i\e v^ i pai/, as Masc, P., and N. 
 
 TimT6fisvos, -eVj), -eyoy " t u ir t o ^ e v w y, as Masc, P., and N. 
 
 Eem. 3. On the accentuation of the monosyllable irSs, and of monosyllabic 
 participles in the Gen. and Dat., see § 65, 2 (c). 
 
 Kem. 4. On the accentuation of the Nominative of compound adjectives, 
 the following things are to be noted : — 
 
 -, (fr( ,, --, - . , - 
 
 formed of a verb, then adjectives with a long penult, are Oxytones, e. g. 
 itvXoiro^iriJj, fie\oTroi6s, S€ivav6s, dSvyis ; but those with a short pcniilt, 
 are commonly Paroxytoncs, if they have an active sense, but if a passive, 
 Proparoxytones, e. g. 
 
 \iS>oP6kos, one castinij stones ; \i^6^oXos, cast down by stones ; 
 
 wnTpoKT6vos, inatrici(k ; ^tjtp^ctomj, slam hy amotha-; 
 
 SnipoTp6(pos, nourishing wOd he-tsts : i*r)poVpo.|.os, no irtslied by wild U is,s. 
 Words compounded with prepositions, a privative and intensive, ti and 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
94 
 
 ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [i 76. 
 
 Sus, and aei, ayav, opi, apri, 4pt, t)iu, fo, vav, and toKv, arc alwr-js Pro 
 
 pajroxytones, and hence exceptions to the rule respecting words with a 
 
 short penult. 
 (I)) Verbal adjectives in -tiJj remain Oxytones, even in compounds, if they 
 
 have three endings, but aie Proparoxytones, if they have but two. gea 
 
 h 78, 1, (c). 
 (c) All compounds in -irX'^l, -pdi^, -rpii^, -<r<l>ai, are Oxytones. 
 
 SnilMASY OF THE ADJECTIVE AND PaBTICIPLB EnDINQI, 
 
 } 76. I. Adjectives and Participles of three 
 Endings, 
 
 I. -0 1, -1), -ov: Nom. diyoaoj, ayoa^i, aya^Sir, good, 
 
 Xya^ov 
 
 ^Sooc, eighth, 
 oyS6wy (§ 75, 4.) 
 ypiKfiS/ievoy 
 ypcupofievuv 
 SIkouiii, just, 
 SiKaiov 
 SlKaiav 
 iX^P^"} hostile, 
 
 h^pooVyfuU, 
 
 a^p6ov 
 
 a^patov. 
 
 Most of the adjectives belong to this class. The Fem. ends in a, when pre- 
 ceded by t or p, § 4.3, 1. Still, adjectives in -oor have -ia in the Fem., when p 
 precedes o, otherwise, •6ti, e. g. a&p6a, yet oy56ri. On the accentuation of 
 adjectives in -or, -jj (d), -ov, see § 75. 
 
 Adjectives in -eoj, -e'a, -eoy, which denote the material, c. g. XP''"'™') 
 golden; cipyipeos, silver; Kepdfieos, earthen; and multiplicative adjectives in 
 •60s, -6ri, -oov, e. g. cmK6os, single; SnrK6os, double, are contracted. On tha 
 accentuation of those in -cos, -ia, -eoy, see § 75, 3, and on the contractlan of 
 those in -e'o into -S, -o'tj into -fi, and -ia into -5, see § 9, II. 
 
 -ov: Nom. iya^os. 
 
 ayaSrl), 
 
 Gen. o7a&oS, 
 
 oyoa^j, 
 
 Nom. &ySooj, 
 
 ayScfr,, 
 
 Gen. PI. oySiuv, 
 
 oyStfeoi', 
 
 Nom. ypa^6fjLevos, 
 
 ypa<l}Oii4v7i, 
 
 Gen. PI. ypa4>oii4vav. 
 
 ypaipoijUvav. 
 
 -ov: Nom. Hkiuos, 
 
 SiKoia, 
 
 Gen. SiKulov, 
 
 SiKaias, 
 
 Gen. PI. Smaiav, 
 
 SiKalojv, 
 
 Nom. 4x^P°'' 
 
 4xS>pi, 
 
 Gen. ^x^pov. 
 
 eX^pas, 
 
 Nom. d^poos, 
 
 a&p6a. 
 
 Gen. aAp6ov, 
 
 aApias, 
 
 Gen. PI. Ii&p6av, 
 
 a&piav, 
 
 Xpuff-fliJs, 
 
 ipe-eos, 
 
 ^pe-ovSf 
 
 ibpy^p-eoSj 
 
 apyvp-ovsj 
 
 Xpvff-ea, 
 
 Xpvo^-Vt 
 
 fpe-ea, 
 
 ip€-a, ^ 
 
 apyvp-ea, 
 
 apyvp-a, 
 
 Si7rA.-5j, 
 
 ^vff-eov 
 
 4p4-eov 
 ipe'ovv 
 apy^p-eoy 
 h.pyi}p-ovv 
 
 5(7rA.-ovi.\ 
 
 Kemark 1 . Contraction is seldom omitted in Attic classic prosOj not unfre- 
 quently in the Tragedians, e. g. xpucea, Xen. Ag. 5, 5; yet a&p(J os, -(J d, -(for, 
 crov)dm.^\% rarely found contracted; SiKp6os, -6d, '6ov^ two-pronged, is com- 
 monly contracted in the Masc. and Neut., BiKpovs^ diKpovy, but in the Fem thfl 
 uncontracted foim is usual, ^ BiKp6a; 6y Boos is always uncontractcd. 
 
 II, 'tis 
 
 Nom. y\vK^Si y\vKe7a, yKvK-6j sweety 
 Gen. yKvK^oSj yKvK^las, y\vK4os 
 
 Gen. PI, yXuKccoj/j y\vKei5)Vy yKvK^oov ( 
 
 75,4.) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
« 76.] ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES OP THREE ENDINGS. 93 
 
 The declension of the Masc. is like ■.rrjxvs, though with the common genitives 
 m -eos, -€«;-; the declension of the Neut. is like Harv, yet always uncontracted in 
 the PI. (-ea). rhe only deviations from the regular accentuation are, fimirvs, 
 mlfeia, iiiua-v, JicUf; dijAuj, »^\eia, dv\u,feviale; irpdfffius, old (used only hi the 
 Masc), and some poetic foi-ms. &ri\vs is sometimes used as feminine in Homer 
 and m the Tragedians. 
 
 Eem. 2. The adjective Jj m «r » s, in the Attic writers, has both the contracted 
 and uncontracted forms in the Ace. PI., i,iil<reis and 4,iilnas: also the Neut 
 vulirea is found in several passages in Demosthenes in the contracted form 
 fint(ni. Sometimes the Ionic Fem. form -4a occurs, e. g. irAorto, X E Equ 1 
 14. (in all MSS.) ^/ulnas, PI. Menon. 83, c. in the best MSS. ■ ■ i • . 
 
 HI -is, -v<ra, -vv: Norn. Seixvis, Semi>v(ra, Ssixviv, showing, 
 
 Gen. SeiKj/ivTos, SeiKvimis, ScMvivros 
 
 Gen. PI. SeiKpipTuv, ieucvvirav, iemvivrav (§ 75,4.) 
 
 Nom. ipis, ^vaa, ipip, produced, 
 
 Gen. (pimos, (fiiarts, ^irros [§ 65, 2 (c).] 
 
 Gen. PI. ipvvTtev, ^vfrStv, ipivrtav. 
 
 So the Pres. and second Aor. Act. participles of verbs in -m. For the de- 
 clension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d). 
 
 IV. -eis, -eo-o-a, -ev: Nom. X'P^^'^i X'V'^"'™> X'^pl^, lovely, 
 
 Gen. x^c'eiToj, xapifWrry, x<''P^^vtos 
 
 Gen. PI. xofucTfiu', xapieairav, x'^P'^i^""- 
 
 For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), the only difference 
 being that the Dat. PI. ends in -eo-i, not -euri, e. g. xapfciri. — The Masc. and 
 Neut. is in the Nom. a Paroxytone, in the Fem. a Proparoxytone ; yet the 
 ancient grammarians prescribe that the Neut. of xv^eis should be accented on 
 the antepenult, hence x'^P'f"- 
 
 Eem. 3. Some of the adjectives in -^ c < j, -^ e <r <r a, -jj € v, and -6ets,-i€r- 
 <ro, •ie», admit contraction, e. g. 
 
 Nom. n/iii-ets, riii,4i-taaa, Ttfirj-cv, honored, 
 
 Tifiys, TtfiTJffffa, Tifiijv 
 Gen. Tt/iTJVTOs, T(/i^iri77)y, ri/irivTos 
 Nom. ^eA(T(i-€is, jiteAiTiJ-eo'o'a, fj.e\iT6-ev, honeyed, 
 
 fiG\tTovs, fjLeMrovfftra, fieKirovv 
 Gen. fieMTOvyros, y^Kiroitrffti^, jueAtTowTos, 
 
 V. -eis, -elaa, -4v: Nom. Aei0&e(5, AEU^i^Eura, Xei</>i^cV, relictus, 
 
 Gen. \ei<j>^eyTos, \Gi<l>^eia'7js, Xeup^eyros 
 
 Gen. PI. \eul>^4i/Tav, \eupdeurav, Acu^eVrwi' 
 Nom. ridcis, Ti^e7<ra, Ti&ec, placing. 
 Gen. TiS-evTos, ri^eiffijs, ri^eyros. 
 
 For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see § 54 (d), and also in the Dat 
 PL, e, g. Tvtp&eTiri. So likewise the first and second Aor. Pass. Participle, and 
 the Pres. and second Aor. Active Part, of rt&Tini and iriiu, e. g. lets, tciffa, Ui; 
 els, etra, %v, deis, ^€7(ra, ^4v. 
 
 VI. -d s, -atva, -av : Nom. iie\ds, jxiKaiva, fieKar, black, 
 
 Gen. ii4\avos, ^eKaivris, /j.4\avos 
 
 Gen. PI. fieJijLyay, tic\cuvav, fie\avay. 
 
 In the same manner only -rdxas, -rdxawa, TiKav, unhappy, the feminine Voc. 
 Bf which has also rd\av. For the declension of the Masc. and Neut., see 4 54 
 (d), with Eem. 6. 
 
 5 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
96 ADJECTIVES AND PAETICIPLES OF THREE ENDINGS. [§ 76. 
 
 VII. -as, -affa, -civ. Nom. iras, iraaa, Ttav, all, every, 
 Gen. vavris, itoo'tjs, tramos 
 
 Gen. PI. TvdvTuy, irafruy, irdvTuy. 
 
 In the same manner only the compounds of iras, e. g. airds (Sircura, oKav), 
 mj/nras, Trpmds, etc. ; these compounds have a short a in the Neut., in dac- 
 tylic and anapestic verse. See 4 54 (d), for the declension of the Masc. and 
 Neut., and § 65, 2 (c), for the accentuation of the simple adjective in the Gen. 
 and Dat. Fl. and Dual. 
 
 TTQ. -as, -acra, -av: Nom. \el<f/a.s, \il4d1roL, X(i\iav, having left. 
 Gen. KeiilfafTos, ?i£L\^.dinis, A.e/i^oJTOj 
 
 Gen. PI. Xet^dt^tci', Kei^lfaffwy, Xeii^dvTtcif^ 
 
 So the first Aor. Act. Part., and also the Pres. and second Aor. Act. Part, of 
 hrrr}fu : Urrds, -aa-a, -dv ; tnas, -atra, -dv. Por the declension, see § 54 (d). 
 
 IX. -II V, -eiva, -ev: Nom. rcpriv, Tepetya, Tfpev (poetic), smooth, 
 
 Gen. repevos, Tepeiyrjs, ripsvos 
 
 Gen. PI. Tepeyuji/, Tepeivav, repeyuy. 
 
 No other adjective is thus declined. Por the declension, see § 55, 1. 
 
 X. -0 V s, -0 V tr a , -6 y. Nom. SiBovs, StSova'a, Sidoy, giving, 
 
 Gen. 5tS6vTos, SiBovtrvis, SiSoyros 
 
 Gen. PI. SiS6yruy, StSovtruy, StS6yrwy, 
 
 Thus only the Part. Pres. and the second Aor. Act. (Safe, Soiffa, iiy. Gen. 
 S6vTos, Soiffiis, Gen. PI. Pem. Sovffay) of verbs in -afit. 
 
 XI. -(&y, -ovca, -6v\ Nom. kxdiv, iKovaa, exiv, willing, 
 
 Gen. e/ctfvTos, e/coutnys, ^xiyros 
 
 Gen. PI. ^Kdyray, sKovfruv, kK&yrwy. 
 
 Thus only the compound aexav, commonly &Kay, &Kov(ra, axoy. For the 
 declension, see § 54 (d). 
 
 XH. -wy, -ovffd, -oy: Nom. Xeitrtay, XeiTroi/tra, XcTttov, leaving, 
 Gen. XeiiTovTos, AeiiroiiffTjy, KeiTTOv^os 
 
 Gen, PI. \€t'7r6yTQ}v, Kelirovtruy, Kenr^yrwy. 
 
 So also the Pres., Put., and second Aor. Act. Part., the last, however, with a 
 different accentuation : -liy, -ovcra, -6v, e. g. Kiirdv, -ovaa, -iy. Por the declen- 
 sion, see 4 54 (d). In the same manner, the Present participles of contract 
 verbs in -da, -eu, and -6a, e. g. 
 
 Nom. Tijiay, -uaa, -&y Nom. ipiKay, -oSa-a, -ovy 
 
 Gen. TiiA.avTos, -lians, -uvtos Gen. PI. ^iXovyray, -ovaay, -oiyruv. 
 
 Gen. PI. TifjiciyTuy, -wcricv, -lityray. Nora. ixur^ay, -ovffa, -ovv 
 
 Gen. PI. fuff^o{iyray, -ovffwy, -o^vray. 
 
 The Put Act. Part, of Liquid verbs is declined like (piKuv, ipiXovtra, <pi\oi>y. 
 Gen. ipiKovyros, etc., e. g-. (ntpav, -oDira, -ovv (ftirmed from airspiay, etc.), from 
 CTTeipot, to soio. 
 
 XIII. -lis -vTa -is- Nom. "rervrjiiis, Tervrpvla, rerv^os, liaving struck. 
 Gen. Tervtpiros, TeTv<pvlas, T^TV(p6Tos 
 
 Geu. PL Terutpircoy, reTvipviuy, TeTV(b6Tay, 
 
 On the form iards, -aaa. Iimis and -is, etc., see below, § 193, Eem. 2 and 3 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
« 77.] 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 ■PARADIGMS. 
 
 97 
 
 Xiy. The adjectives, /iijas, /ieydKii, /j. 4 y a, great, irohiis, iroW-fi, 
 iio\i, muck, are irregular in the Nom., Ace., and Voe. of the Masc. and Neut. 
 S;ng.; the other parts are regular: but even TroA.Aiii'instead ofiroXiv or iro\v, 
 occurs in the Attic poets; Aesch. S. 824, uses the Voc. fi€ya.\e; vpaos, 
 irpafio, irpaoy, soft, is also irregular; it has, throughout the Fem., in the 
 PL and Dual Neut., as also in the Gen. PL Masc., and sometimes, also, in the 
 other Cases of the Masc. PL, a form like irpais, -eio, -i (comp. y\vKis, -«o, -i), 
 which occurs in the Dialects. See the Paradigm. 
 
 i 77. Paradigms. 
 
 
 
 ■^ M^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 S.N. 
 
 iyoS-o's 
 
 &ya^fi 
 
 brfa^-6v, gooc 
 
 <f>i\t-os 
 
 (piKi-& 
 
 tpihi-ov, lovely 
 
 G. 
 
 aya^-ov 
 
 cLya^-^5 
 
 iirya^'ov 
 
 ^l\l-OU 
 
 ^i\l-ds 
 
 ^tAi-ou 
 
 D. 
 
 a7tt&^^' 
 
 &.yaS>'V} 
 
 hryaSr-^ 
 
 <pl\i-^ 
 
 <tit\i'tf 
 
 <l)i\l'(l> 
 
 A. 
 
 &yo^-:6v 
 
 aya^-ijy 
 
 aya^-6v 
 
 iplXi-ov 
 
 (pi\l-dy 
 
 (t>iKt-(A 
 
 V. 
 
 47»^-e 
 
 aya^-'fl 
 
 i.ya^-6y 
 
 <pi\l-€ 
 
 fpt\l-a 
 
 <pi\i ov 
 
 P.N. 
 
 aycA-ol 
 
 ct,ya^-al 
 
 oe.ya^-d 
 
 <pl\l'Of 
 
 ^i\i-ai 
 
 tpiM-a 
 
 G. 
 
 aya^-av 
 
 aya^tby 
 
 aya^-av 
 
 <l>L\i-a}if 
 
 ^LKi-oiv 
 
 ^t\l'<OV 
 
 D. 
 
 aya^ois 
 
 aya^ais 
 
 kya^ois 
 
 (f>iK(-ots 
 
 <pi\i-ais 
 
 <fn\l-ois 
 
 A. 
 
 aya^-ois 
 
 &,ya^iis 
 
 &yc(^'d 
 
 <pi\i-ovs 
 
 (}>i\l-ds 
 
 <pi\i-a 
 
 V. 
 
 aya^'oi 
 
 aya&'cU 
 
 ayaSy-d 
 
 <{ji\t'Ol 
 
 (pl\i-at 
 
 <l>tKi-a 
 
 Dual. 
 
 aya^-^ 
 
 aya^A 
 
 cLya^-4 
 
 <pi\i-to 
 
 ^t\i-d 
 
 tpi\i-a 
 
 
 ayaSr-otv 
 
 hya^-oLiy 
 
 &ya^(iAv. 
 
 (piKl-oiy , 
 
 (jjiKl-aty 
 
 <pi\i-oty. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 yXvxis 
 
 y\VKeia 
 
 y\vKif s^Aejt 
 
 vpaos 
 
 TTpoeTa 
 
 irpaoy, soft 
 
 U. 
 
 y\vKe-os 
 
 y\VKeids 
 
 y\vK4-os 
 
 TTpdoU 
 
 irpaeids 
 
 TTpdoV 
 
 D. 
 
 y\VKfT 
 
 y\vK€ia 
 
 y\vKei 
 
 irpdip 
 
 wpaeic^ 
 
 'Kpd<p 
 
 A. 
 
 yXvK^iv 
 
 yXyKfTav 
 
 y\vK6 ■ 
 
 ',Tpaou 
 
 TTpaetay 
 
 irpaoy 
 
 V. 
 
 y\vK6 
 
 y\vKeia 
 
 y\vK6 
 
 irpaosle) 
 
 irpaeta 
 
 irpaoy 
 
 P.N. 
 
 yXvKeis 
 
 y?ivKi7at 
 
 yXvKea 
 
 'JTpaotj vf 
 
 ae7s Tpaetai irpoea 
 
 G. 
 
 yKvKGtov 
 
 yXvKetSov 
 
 yXvudav 
 
 irpaeay 
 
 ■Trpaetwy irpaecov 
 
 D. ]y\vKe<n{v) y\vKstous 
 
 yhvK€<n(y) 
 
 irpdois, irp 
 
 aeai irpae 
 
 iais irpaetri 
 
 A. \yhuiceis 
 
 yXvKeias 
 
 yKvKea 
 
 irpdovSf wp 
 
 aets TTpae 
 
 ids irpaea 
 
 V. 
 
 y\VKe7s 
 
 y\vK€iai' 
 
 y\vK4a 
 
 irpaoi, TT p 
 
 a.e7s Trpae7ai irpaea 1 
 
 Dual. 
 
 yhvicU 
 
 y\vK€ia 
 
 yKvKee 
 
 TTpda 
 
 irpaeid 
 
 irpda 
 
 y\vK4oiy 
 
 y\vK€latv 
 
 yXuxioiv 
 
 irpdoty 
 
 irpaeiaiv Trpdoty. 1 
 
 S.N. 
 
 Xop^f'S 
 
 XapUffffa 
 
 XapUv 
 
 \€i<l>Steis 
 
 Xet^i^-ewra 
 
 A6f<^^eV 1 
 
 G. 
 
 XapUvTos 
 
 XaptefffTTis 
 
 XaplevTos 
 
 \ei(p^4yros 
 
 K€i(f>&ela'7}s \ei^^4yros \ 
 
 D. 
 
 XapUvri 
 
 Xapieffffp 
 
 XapUvri 
 
 Keiip^evTi 
 
 hetip^elffri 
 
 \€UP^€VTI 
 
 A. 
 
 XaplevTa 
 
 Xaptta-ffav 
 
 Xapje" 
 
 \ei03-trrn 
 
 Xet(/>&e«rai' 
 
 \€i(l>^4y 
 
 V. 
 
 XapUy 
 
 Xapieffffa 
 
 XapUv 
 
 Kettji^eis 
 
 K£i<p^e7(ra 
 
 \et<pSr4y 
 
 P.N. 
 
 XapUvTfS 
 
 yap^ectrat 
 
 Xapleura 
 
 \€i(p^eyTfs 
 
 \et(ft^e7(rai 
 
 K€t<f>^4yTa 
 
 G. 
 
 XapLefTtav xapietTfreS^ x°^^^^'^^^ 1 
 
 Kei^^evTc^y 
 
 \Gi(l>^eurcoy 
 
 \et(p^4yra}y 
 
 D. 
 
 X'>.pUai{i)] 
 
 XapieaaaLs YOflie(ri(v) 
 
 K€i(t>^s7a'i{y) \€i<l>^€ia'ais \€i<p^e7(ri{y} | 
 
 A. 
 
 XapUvras x^P^^o"^^* 
 
 Xapievra 
 
 \€l(p^€yTQS 
 
 Xettp^ela-as 
 
 KeKp^eyra 
 
 V. 
 
 )CapievT€S 
 
 Xapiecrixai 
 
 Xapiej/ra 
 
 KeK^^ey^G ; 
 
 heicj>^€7(raL 
 
 \€t((>^€yra 
 
 Dual ; 
 
 )^apUvT€ 
 
 Xo.piio'aro. 
 
 %api6i/Te / 
 
 \ei(p^4jm 
 
 KeL(p^ei(rd 
 
 \si(p^4yTe 
 
 / 
 
 \Capi4vroiy x^P'^'o''''""' X"?'^"''''"''- 1' 
 
 Ket<}>S^evi J- V 
 
 \ei(p^€l<ratp 
 
 Keiip^eyrotv, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
98 
 
 ADJ ECTIVBS. — TARADlGMS. 
 
 [§77 
 
 XP'Offeos 
 
 Xpvcred 
 
 Xp^ceoVy goklcn 
 
 anrKous 
 
 air\6Tj 
 
 aTr\6oy, single 
 
 Xpva-ovs 
 
 Xpya-ij 
 
 Xpvffovy 
 
 airXovs 
 
 aTTAi) 
 
 airXovy 
 
 Xpvcreov 
 
 Xpvffias 
 
 XpvffeOv 
 
 cm\6ov 
 
 aTr\67}s 
 
 aTrKoov 
 
 Xpvaov 
 
 Xpvtrrjs 
 
 Xpvaov 
 
 ottAoC 
 
 airX^s 
 
 airXov 
 
 Xpvfrecj} 
 
 Xpvo-etf 
 
 Xpv(r4u 
 
 aTrK6(a 
 
 kirKS-p 
 
 aTr\6(^ 
 
 XpVtT^ 
 
 XP^^V 
 
 Xpv<r<p 
 
 atrh^ 
 
 oirAp 
 
 airK^ 
 
 Xpvffeoy 
 
 Xpyaecw 
 
 Xfi^tov 
 
 OLTrKSov 
 
 airXST/jy 
 
 a-K\6ov ' 
 
 Xpycovv 
 
 Xpva-Tjy 
 
 Xpvaovy 
 
 air\ovy 
 
 airX^y 
 
 anrXovv 
 
 doubtful 
 
 Xpvtrea 
 
 XP^ffeov 
 
 doubtful 
 
 airXii^ 
 
 airXSov 
 
 
 Xpvirrj 
 
 Xpvffovy 
 
 
 airXij 
 
 airKovv 
 
 Xpya'€oi 
 
 Xpvffeat 
 
 Xp^a-ea 
 
 awKdot 
 
 atr\6ai 
 
 air\6a 
 
 Xpvcroi 
 
 Xpv<^o^ 
 
 XPva-a 
 
 atr\o7 
 
 airXeu 
 
 airKa 
 
 Xpvtreay 
 
 Xpvffeuv 
 
 Xpvffewv 
 
 airXSwy 
 
 air\6toy 
 
 air\6ay 
 
 Xpvffuy 
 
 XpvfTwv 
 
 Xpv<ray 
 
 ottAoji/ 
 
 airhwy 
 
 oirKav 
 
 Xpv(r^ots 
 
 Xpv<r4ais 
 
 Xpvffeois 
 
 aTr\6ots 
 
 aTr\6ais 
 
 aTr\6ois 
 
 Xpv<ro7s 
 
 Xpuffais 
 
 Xpv(T-o7s 
 
 0.^X075 
 
 airKais 
 
 OTrAoty 
 
 Xpvffeovs 
 
 Xpv(r4ds 
 
 Xp'^o'ea 
 
 aTr\6ovs 
 
 air\6as 
 
 air\6a 
 
 Xpvaods 
 
 Xpva-as 
 
 Xpv(ra. ^ 
 
 aTrKovs 
 
 air\a.s 
 
 ojtAo 
 
 XP^O-€Ot 
 
 Xpvffeai 
 
 XP^a-ed 
 
 aTrXooi 
 
 airhSat 
 
 airXSa 
 
 Xpvaoi 
 
 Xpvaa7 
 
 Xpva-a 
 
 oirXo? 
 
 OTrAoT 
 
 airKa 
 
 XpvtTeo) 
 
 Xpva-ed 
 
 Xpv(r4{o 
 
 aTrKSo) 
 
 ankScL 
 
 airXoa 
 
 Xpvoru 
 
 Xpv<ra 
 
 Xpv<rw 
 
 air\w 
 
 ofl-Aa 
 
 airKu 
 
 Xpva-eoiv 
 
 Xpvcreaiy 
 
 Xpvffeoiy 
 
 a-7r\6oiy 
 
 airK^aty 
 
 aTr\6oiy ' 
 
 Xpvffoiu 
 
 XpvtraTy 
 
 Xpv<ro7v 
 
 aiT\o7y 
 
 airXouy 
 
 airKoly 
 
 apyvpeos 
 
 apyvpia 
 
 apyvpeoyy silver 
 
 TCTVipdiS 
 
 T€TV(pv7a 
 
 T6TU(^(fj, having 
 
 apyvpovs 
 
 apyvpa 
 
 apyvpovy 
 
 rervipSros 
 
 TeTV(}>vias 
 
 reTO<p6Tos [struck. 
 
 apyvpeov 
 
 apyvpsas 
 
 apyvp4ov 
 
 r€TV<f)6Tl 
 
 Terv{f>vl(f 
 
 TeTV(l>6Tl 
 
 rervtpSs 
 
 apyvpov 
 
 apyupas 
 
 kpyvpov 
 
 TiTu<pv7ay 
 
 apyvpetp 
 
 apyvp4a 
 
 apyvpetp 
 
 T€TV(p6T€S 
 
 TeTv<bv7ai 
 
 rerp^ora 
 
 hpyvp^ 
 
 apyvpa. 
 
 hpyvp^ 
 
 T^Tv^Srtay Terv^viatv 
 
 Teru^ffrwy 
 
 apyipeov 
 
 &.pyvp4ay 
 
 apyvpeov 
 
 T€TV<f>6(ri 
 T€TV<p6TaS 
 
 Terv(f)viais 
 
 r€Tv<pvlas 
 
 TeTV<l>6(n 
 
 TGTvipSra 
 
 apyvpovv 
 
 apyvpav 
 
 hpyvpovv 
 
 apy6pee 
 
 apyvpsa 
 
 apyupeoy 
 
 TeTV(f}6Te 
 
 T€Tv<pvia 
 
 reTVtpoTe 
 
 
 hpyvpa 
 
 apyvpovy 
 
 Terv(p6roiv rervipviaiv 
 
 TervtpiToiv 
 
 TToXiJs 
 
 troW-f} 
 
 troX^), much 
 
 /x4yas 
 
 fieyd\ri 
 
 /i e 7 o, great 
 
 iroWou 
 
 itoWtjs 
 
 TTOKKOV 
 
 fieydXov 
 
 /leydKtjs 
 
 lJ.eydi\ov 
 
 TTOWcp 
 
 iroW^ 
 
 iroW^ 
 
 fj.ey<i\^ 
 
 fieyd\rj 
 
 fleyd^tl} 
 
 irQ\-6v 
 
 ■iro\M}y 
 
 TTOXtJ 
 
 fieyay 
 
 fieydKTjy 
 
 fi4ya 
 
 iroX-O 
 
 iroW-fi 
 
 ■iro\v 
 
 fieya 
 
 lieyd\7j 
 
 fieya 
 
 iroWol 
 
 iroWai 
 
 iroAAci 
 
 fxeyaKoi 
 
 {xeyoKai 
 
 fjLeydXa 
 
 voWuv 
 
 TToWuy 
 
 TTOWWV 
 
 fxeydXaiy 
 
 fiGyd\Q}y 
 
 fjLeyd\(oy 
 
 iroWo7s 
 
 TToWaTs 
 
 Tro\\o7s 
 
 fi€yd\ois 
 
 fj,Gyd\ais 
 
 fi€yd\ots 
 
 woWovs 
 
 TTOWds 
 
 •TTOWd 
 
 fj.€yd\ovs 
 
 fxeyd\as 
 
 jueycfAo 
 
 TTOWol 
 
 iroWai 
 
 -iroXKd 
 
 f*€yd\oi 
 
 fieyd\ai 
 
 fj.€yd\a 
 
 
 
 
 fieydXu 
 
 IxeyaKa 
 
 fieydKa 
 
 
 
 
 fieyd\oiv 
 
 fi€ydkaiy 
 
 fj-eydKoiv 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i78.] 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 
 
 99 
 
 tieXas 
 
 fi4\aiva 
 
 jj.4hav, black 
 
 ttSs TTotra 
 
 frayj all 
 
 fiiKavos 
 
 fj.e\aiv7]s 
 
 fi4\ayds 
 
 TrayT6s ird&Tis 
 
 'irayT6s 
 
 fieKaui 
 
 ficKalin) 
 
 fi4Kayi 
 
 iravri irdffy} 
 
 vavri 
 
 fi€\ava 
 
 lJ.4\aivav 
 
 fi4\ay 
 
 trdvTa iraffav 
 
 Tray 
 
 fi4\av 
 
 fi4\aiva 
 
 jUeAav 
 
 iras iratTa 
 
 tray 
 
 fi4Xaif€S 
 
 fjLGXaiyai 
 
 fi4\aya 
 
 irdyres 7ra<rai 
 
 irdvra 
 
 fi€\dvtap 
 
 fieKaivuv 
 
 fie\dyuy 
 
 irdyrwy iraaSov 
 
 irdvTtay 
 
 fjL4\a<n 
 
 fie\aivats 
 
 fi4Ka<n 
 
 iraa-i -rrda-ats 
 
 TTUffl 
 
 fA4\avas 
 
 fieXalvas 
 
 f/,e\ava 
 
 TtdvTas irdffas 
 
 Trdvra 
 
 jueAayes 
 
 fi4Katvai 
 
 ^4\aya 
 
 irdyres iraaca 
 
 irdyra 
 
 fi4\ave 
 
 /teXotVd 
 
 fi4Kave 
 
 TrdvTe Trdad 
 
 trdvTe 
 
 fie\dvoiy 
 
 fieKalyatu 
 
 fAGhdyoty. 
 
 vdvToiv wdaaty 
 
 irdyroiy. 
 
 o-tAs 
 
 aratra 
 
 (TT&y^ standing 
 
 \v7rd}y \nrov<ra 
 
 AiTTjfj/, leaving 
 
 a-rdyros 
 
 ffTdffrjs 
 
 (TrdyTos 
 
 \nr6vTos Knro-6fft\s 
 
 KitrSyros 
 
 ardvTi 
 
 a-rdffrj 
 
 <rrdyri 
 
 \nr6vTi MTro^tn] 
 
 XiirSyrt 
 
 ffTdvra 
 
 ffraffav 
 
 (Trdy 
 
 \nr6vra Knrov<ray 
 
 \nr6y 
 
 ffrds 
 
 (Traffa 
 
 ardy 
 
 Xiir^y \nrov<ra 
 
 Knr6y 
 
 (TrdvTes 
 
 aratrai 
 
 (TrdyTa 
 
 \nr6yTes Xnrova'at 
 
 KiTtSyra 
 
 oTdvrav 
 
 craffiov 
 
 ffrdvrtay 
 
 \tir6yray \nrov<rS>v 
 
 XiTrdyray 
 
 ffTa(n{u) 
 
 crdtrais 
 
 (na.<ri[y) 
 
 \nrov(n{v) hnro6a'ats 
 
 Ktirova-ily) 
 
 a-rdvras 
 
 ffrda'ds 
 
 ffrdyra 
 
 \nr6yTas \nro-6ffS.s 
 
 \nr6yra 
 
 ordures 
 
 (TTuaai 
 
 (rrdyra 
 
 \nr6yTes Xfrrovtrai 
 
 \nr6yTa 
 
 • 
 
 ffrdyre 
 
 (rrdad 
 
 crrdvTe 
 
 \iir6yT€ Kiirovffd 
 
 A-Hr^fyre 
 
 OT.duToiy 
 
 (rrdtraiv 
 
 (rrdyroiy. 
 
 KtirSyToiy Kmovffaiy 
 
 KitrSyroiy. 
 
 tpavuv 
 
 tpavova'a 
 
 (payovv, about to 
 
 ^evyv6s ^evyi/vtra 
 
 ^euyy^i/, joining 
 
 <l>auovvros 
 
 ipavo^ff-ns 
 
 ipayovyros [show 
 
 Cevyy6yTos C^vyy6(n}s 
 
 ^evyvivTOS 
 
 tpavovvri 
 
 fpavoiffri 
 
 (payovyrt 
 
 C^vyy^VTi ^evyydffri 
 
 Cevyy^yrt 
 
 (pavovvTa 
 
 tpavovaav 
 
 (payovyra 
 
 ^evyyi^yra ^evyyvtray 
 
 {evyy^y 
 
 tpauau 
 
 ((>avov(ra 
 
 <pavovy 
 
 ^€vyy6s ^evyyvca 
 
 ^evyydy 
 
 fpavouvres 
 
 ipavovffai 
 
 tpavovyra 
 
 Cevyy6vTes C^vyyviTai 
 
 Cevyy^vra 
 
 <pavo^yro}i' 
 
 ^avovaav 
 
 <{>ayo^yTQ)y 
 
 ^tvyvdyray ^evyyufftoy 
 
 ^evyydyray 
 
 ^avovffi 
 
 (pavoiKrais 
 
 (pavovfTt 
 
 Ceuyy6(ri ^€vyy6(rais 
 
 (^evyyiffi 
 
 tpavovj/ras 
 
 <pavo^<Ta.s 
 
 (payovyras 
 
 ^evyyvyras ^evyyutras 
 
 ^evyy^yra 
 
 (pavovvTes 
 
 (pauovo'at 
 
 <payouyTa 
 
 ^evyy^yres C^vyyvtrat 
 
 ^evyyiyra 
 
 <f>ayovvTe 
 
 Aavodffa. 
 
 (payovyre 
 
 Cevyyvyre ^evyy^ad 
 
 Cevyy^yre 
 
 tpavo^VTOij' <pauoT^ttb.iif 
 
 <payo6vToiv. 
 
 '^€iiyyiifroiv^tvyy6crdiy ^euyvlyroiv, i 
 
 Remark. All participles in -«s are declined like \ettpAets (see § 76, V.) ; all 
 participles in -vs, like Seixyis (see § 76, III.) ; all participles in -or, like ffrds (see 
 § 76, Tin.); the Pres. Put. and second Aor. Part. Active, like Aor<iy (§ 76, 
 XII.) ; the Put. Act. Part, of Liquid verbs, like (rirepay (§ 76, XH.) 
 
 ^ 78. II. Adjectives of tivo findings. 
 
 Adjectives in -os of two endings are declined like ayaSo^, 
 except that they have no separate fomi for the feminine, the 
 same form being used for the masculine and feminine. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
100 ADJECTIVES OP TWO ENDINGS. [i 78 
 
 I. -OS, -ov; S T) &\oyos, rh &\oyov, irrational. 
 
 To this class belong, 
 
 (a) A few simple adjectives without particular derivative endings, e. g. fl 7) 
 PdpPapos, not Greek; hippos, vehement; ^fiepos, gentle; KalSopos, calumniating; 
 riS)a<r6s, mild; xk<^<>^' unfruitful; '^(riixos, silent; Simms, extravagant; ewAos, 
 
 (b) Most simple adjectives with the derivative-endings -los and -eioj, and 
 -i/tos, e.g.Sr] awTitptas, saving ; S ri fiacrlKeios, regal ; i i\ yvipitios, recognizable ; 
 
 (e) AH compounds, e. g. a ^ &\oyos, rh &Koyov, irrational; S fi apySs (instead 
 of 0€p7ifs), inactive (but apy6s, -v, -ir, bright) ; b f) iriyKiAos, very fair (hMtKohis, 
 ■4), -iv) ; 7) iriXKfVKos, very white (but XeuKo's, -^, -6v) ; dUirvevaros, -ov, divinely 
 inspired (but irfcvtrris, -ii, -6v); adjectives compounded with adjectives in 
 -k6s, which then become Proparoxytones, e. g. <i ^ i/zeuSiittikos, not pure Attic, 
 but ('ATTi/c<is, -ii, ■6v) 6 71 fuo'oTrepa-iKos (but ntpo-iKifs, -^, -6y). 
 
 Exceptions are adjectives derived from compound verbs with the deriva- 
 tive-endings -k6s, which remain Oxytones; those in -re as, which remain 
 Paroxy tones, e. g. ^TriSeiKTiKcij, -^, -6v, from iTriSelicvvfu ; those in -t li r vary 
 between two and three endings, e. g. aveKrSs, -h, -6v (from avix"), f^nd aireKT6s, 
 -6v, see Lobeck, ad S. Aj. 1296. Paralipp. p. 482, sq. Poppo ad Th. 2, 41, 4. 
 But when compounds in -r&s, -rii, -riv, are again compounded, they have but 
 two endings, and are Proparoxytones, e. g. i ^ aKOTo<r/ceio(rTos. 
 
 Eemakk 1 . Comparatives and Superlatives have three endings, even when 
 the Positive has but two, though there are some rare exceptions, e. g. anopim- 
 pos ii TJri^is, Thu. 5, 110. Suje/i/SoAcoraTos ii AoKpis, Id. 3, 110. 
 
 II» -ovs, -ovv; 6 7j eVyovs, rh eiii/ovy, benevolent. 
 
 Adjectives with these endings are, 
 
 (a) Those compounded with the contracted substantives vovs and irXovs, and 
 hence in the Masc. and Fern, are declined like these, but in the Neuter liko 
 oarovv (§ 47 ), yet the Neuter PI. in -on does not admit contraction, consequently 
 TO ei/voa. On the accentuation, see § 49, 3. 
 
 Bem. 2. Attic writers sometimes omit the contraction in the PI., e. g. koko- 
 v6ais X. Cy. 8. 2, 1. Kpvx^iviovs X. Ag. U, 5. Sisvooi X. H. 2. 1, 2. 
 
 (b) Such as are compounded with the substantive ttoDs, e. g. 6ti itoKxmovs, 
 rh -rroKimovv, and are inflected like it, but in the Ace. Sing., even as OtSlirovt 
 [§ 71, B. (b)], are partly of the contract second Dec. and partly of the third, 
 e. g. Gen. iroAiJiroSos and ttoKutvov ; Ace. iroXuTToSa and iroXvirovv, etc. 
 
 Kem. 3. In several adjectives of this kind, e. g. Sirouj, fipaSiirovs, Slirous., 
 avmT6irovs, the inflection does not follow the second Dec. • 
 
 III. -03 s, -(ay; 67] iAeois, rh tK^iav, compassionate. 
 
 Adjectives of these endings are like the Attic second Doc. (§ 48). 
 
 Rem. 4. The Ace. commonly ends in -av, but in a number of compound 
 words, it ends in -to (§ 48, Rem. 1 ),. c, g. h^iixp^a, avi,7r\eoi, HyTipa (in respect to 
 the accentuation, see § 29, Hem. 7), iTriirKea, {mepxpea. 
 
 Rem. 5. There are three endings to the simple adjective : — 
 
 UKeas, TrXia, irXiav, full, Gen. TrXe'to, Tr\eas, 7r\ia, PI. irAt'cji, irXe'ai, 7r\sa; the 
 compounds are either of two endings, 0. g. i ^ amirKeas, rh aya.7r\eav, PI. 01 w 
 &irAeij) (iirireis ^KirXeifi X. Cy. 6. 2, 7. cKTrAeM Tpairefoi X. Hier. 1, 18), to ilcirMa 
 X. Cy. 3, 1, 28. 1, 6, 7, and even the Nom. PI. ir\eV, of the simple adjective 
 is not seldom used for the Masc. and Fem., or they have (yet more seldom) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 78.] ADJECTIVES OP TWO ENDINGS. 101 
 
 three endings, e. g. hvivKfas, imirXea (PI. Phaedon 83, d.), aviirXsaiv. Eui'. 
 Ale. 730, has vkxov, after the example of Homer, as Neuter Sing. So like- 
 wise compounds, seldom in the Sing., e. g. rb ^/jLvKeov, Soph., oftener in tha 
 PI., e. g. %ii.tr\eoi PI. Rp. 6. 505, c. and very frequently in the Neuter, e. g. 
 e/orXea X. Cy. 6. 2, 7, and 8. Trept-rrKm 6. 2, S3. Also from iKeas, Plato Phaedon 
 m, a. has iSUa as Neut. PL 
 
 Hem. 6. 'O f) aas, rb crSc, salva&, is formed from the old word 2AOS by 
 contraction. In addition to the Nom. o-as, <rav, this word forms only the Ace, 
 Sing. ffSc, like the Attic second Dec. ; it has also the Ace. (ruov. The form a-a 
 (from <ria), occurs as Fern. Sing, in Eurip. Pr. 629. (Dind.) and as Neut. PI. in 
 Plat. Clilias, 111, c. in the best MSS. The PI. consists of forms from aSis of 
 the second Dec. and of forms from the lengthened a-ios, namely : — 
 
 PI. N. of ai (rSis (from iracs), and of o'ffloi, of <raai, N. tr&a, rarely o'S. 
 A. Toils riis aas (from auas), and rohs tr&ovs, N. aSia, rarely aa. 
 
 The Singular forms of cuas are very rare in tlie Attic writers, e. g. ams, X. 
 An. 3. 1, 32. 
 
 Rem. 7. The compounds of Kepej and y4\as are partly like the Attic 
 second Dec., partly like the third Dec, e. g. i r) xpuo-iJicEpais, rb XP'"'^"^P'"''> 
 Gen. )cpv(r6Kepu and xp^^oi^h^^o^ i * ^ (piKoy^Kas, rb ^iK6yiKav, Gen. ipi\6yiKa 
 and ^i\oy4\aros ; fioiuepas. Gen. poiKepa and fiauKeparos, so ei/Kepais, The 
 adjective SureptM follows the third Dec. only, e. g. Svs4par9s, etc. Forms like 
 the Common second Dec. originate from forms of the Attic second Dec, e. g. 
 SiKfpov, vi]icepot, &ic€ptt. On the accentuation, see § 29, Rem. 7. 
 
 IV. -«!'; 'Oyj N. ^ ^ irdtppav, rb a'U(ppoy^ prudent, 
 
 G. ToD Tris T0V fftli^poy&s (according to § 55, 1), 
 
 Rem. 8. From i ri vlwv,faL, comes also the Fern, form wUipa, even in prose 
 writers; so also irp6<l>pa<r<Ta from i ri 'irp6<ppay, occurs in the poets. 
 
 Rem. 9. Here belong, also, the Comparatives in -av, -or, -iav, -Ion ; but in 
 respect to the declension of these it is to be ^oted, that, after the rejection of 
 V, they are contracted in the Ace. Sing., and in the Nom., Aec, and Voc. PI, 
 See the Paradigms, § 79. In the Attic writers, the uncontracted forms in -ova, 
 •oves, -ofaSt frequently occur, e. g. iJielCova, ihdrTova, KaWlova, 4\ilrroves, 
 KOKioves, fi^C^ves, ^eXWayey, irA-eloyes, ^TTovas, fieXrtovas, ^ikTTovas, X. Cy. 5. 2, 
 36, 7, 5, 83, 2. 1, 23. 2. 1, 13. 5. 2, 36. Hell. 6. 5, 52. Cy. 7. 5, 70. On the accen- 
 tuation, see $ 65, 5. 
 
 V. -^i, -£S5 N. 4 ^ iXii^Si "rh iX-nSKS, true, 
 
 G. ToD TTfS rov hXti^eos, aKTj^ovs (§ 59). 
 
 On the contraction of -ea into -Si (instead of -jj), where a vowel precedes, see 
 $ 59, Rem. 1. 
 
 Rem. 10. Compounds in -errts (from ?tos, Gen. 4rous\, are either of two 
 jendings, e, g. wopeteo' x'^'fTij, PI, Rp, 10, 615, a, ir^«$S«i> ry x'^'*'""" Rhaed, 249, 
 a,, or they take a pai-tieular Fem, form, namely, -4tis, Gen, -eriSos, e. g. 
 iiitrerns, F, liw^ris; TpiaxovroiKiSav (riroyZSiy, Th, 1, 87, 
 
 Rem, 11, Simple adjectives in -ris are Oxytones, except jrXijpTjy, irKripa, 
 fiM. On the accentuation of the Voc. and of the Neuter, see § 65, 5, and oa 
 the accentuation of the Gen. PI. § 59, Rem. 4. 
 
 VI. -7)v, -e"\ TS. i Ti &^f>r)v, "rb &p^ey 
 
 G. ToB TTJs Tou &^pevos (^ 55, 1), No other word like this, 
 
 VII. -up, -op; "S. i ri ixirup, -rh tmarop, fatherless, 
 
 CcTov Tris ToS air&Topos (§ 55, 1). In like manner onl» 
 ap,i\Ti0p, &p.7iTt^ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
102 
 
 PARADIGMS OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [n9 
 
 VTII. -IS, -i; (a) N. 6 ^ %is, rh 15pi, hiowing, 
 
 G. ToB T^j ToS {Spins (§ 63, Kem. 5). 
 
 lu like manner, only vtjo-tij, temperate, and Tp6(pts, nourished. In addition to 
 the form in -loi, these adjectives have another in -iSos, but more rare, and only 
 poetic, e. g. tSpiSa, iSpiSes. 
 
 (b) 'S. iri fixapis, rh eSxap', agreeable, 
 G. Tov rijs Tov evxdptTos, * 
 
 Here belong the compounds of x^P'^i "^tP'Sj t\Tns, ^pivris, which are 
 declined like the simples, e. g. cKeAiris, cifcAiri, Gen. cSe\jr(5os ; ^lAcSiraTpis, Gen. 
 f iXoirtJrpjSos ; the Ace. ends according to § 53, 3, in -w, e. g. tiieAiriv, cSx"/"".; 
 but compounds of jriJXis, when they refer to persons, are inflected in the J.ftic 
 dialect in -iSoj, e. g. i^iKiiioXis, Gen. -tSo^, yet in tb* Ace., ^iKlmaKw and -iSa; 
 still, as epithets of cities, etc., they are inflected Jike iiiKis, e. g. KaK)dtio>js, 
 ^iKal&KoKiS, etc.. Gen. KoAAiTrdAews, etc. 
 
 IX. -vs, -v; (a) N. 5 ^ fcSa/cpus, rb &daKpv, tearless. 
 
 So compounds of Sixpu ; yet these inflect only the Ace. Sing, like the third 
 Dee., e. g. iSmpw, Neut. iSaxpv. The other Cases are supplied by aSaKpvras, 
 -Of, Gen. -ov, according to the second Dec. 
 
 (b) "S. 6 7) SItttixvs, "rh Slirnx'J, two eUs long, 
 G. TOV rrjs rov StTT^x^**^- 
 
 Here belong the compounds of irrjxvs ; the declension is like y\vKis, yAviei 
 m 76, II. and 77), except that the Neuter PI. in -ea is contracted into -ij, like 
 tia-Tui, e. g. Snrltxn. 
 
 X -ouy, -or; N. i ^ iiov6Sovs, rh ii.ov6Soy, one-toothed, 
 G. TOV TIJS TOV iJU}y6SoyTos. 
 
 So the remaining compounds of oSois. Tor the Dec., sec § 54 (d). 
 
 i 79. Paradigms. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 eySo|os 
 
 ^vSo^ov 
 
 Siirovs 
 
 
 Show 
 
 G. 
 
 ivSo^ov 
 
 4vd6^Qu 
 
 
 SliroSos 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ivSditj, 
 
 ivS6la> 
 
 
 SiVoSi 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ^ySo^oy 
 
 eySolov 
 
 SiTTtfSa and Slvovy 
 
 S'twow 
 
 V. 
 
 ?vSo£e 
 
 €ySo\oy 
 
 Sivov 
 
 
 SlTtOW 
 
 P.N. 
 
 foSoJoi 
 
 ^vSoia 
 
 ShoSes 
 
 
 SimSa 
 
 G. 
 
 ivSi^av 
 
 ivU^ay 
 
 
 Sra'(!San> 
 
 
 D. 
 
 ivS6^ots 
 
 ^»So'|ois 
 
 
 S/iroci 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ivS6lovs 
 
 ej/5o\ovs 
 
 Slwodas 
 
 
 SiTToSa 
 
 V. 
 
 ^fSo^ot 
 
 ?j'5o|o 
 
 SiiroSes 
 
 
 St'iroSa 
 
 Dual. 
 
 ivdi^m 
 
 iM^a 
 
 
 S/iro5e 
 
 
 -.^___ 
 
 4vS6^oiy 
 
 ivSS^ouf, 
 
 
 tnr^^oiy. 
 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
»79.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OP ADJECTIVES. 
 
 loa 
 
 S.N. 
 
 fijTrK{Q-os)ovs eiiTr\[o-oi')ovjf 
 
 ?\€10S 
 
 't\€av 
 
 G. 
 
 eihrhov 
 
 
 ■ 1\iU 
 
 D. 
 
 eHirKifi 
 
 
 •iKecf 
 
 A. 
 
 tHirKovU 
 
 
 TKfav 
 
 V. 
 
 doubtful 
 
 t\€m 
 
 iXeuv 
 
 P.N. 
 
 edirXoi eijw?\.oa 
 
 'iKecp 
 
 r\cai 
 
 G. 
 
 eijTrXtijy 
 
 
 1\e(iiv 
 
 D. 
 
 eijTrhoLS 
 
 
 tKews 
 
 A. 
 
 eHirKovs eihrKoa 
 
 t\eas 
 
 •l\ea 
 
 V. 
 
 eSirAoi €ihr\oa 
 
 fXeiji 
 
 'IXw 
 
 DuaL 
 
 eijTr\(c 
 
 
 iKea 
 
 
 et'TTAow'. ^ 
 
 
 'iKecpv, 
 
 S.N. 
 
 ev^aifitau eiSSatfioi/ 
 
 ixS>foy 
 
 ^X^iov 
 
 fiel^wif fte'tCov 
 
 G. 
 
 evSai/iovos 
 
 ixs>t 
 
 ovos 
 
 y.ei(oms 
 
 D. 
 
 evdaifjLoyt 
 
 ^x^iWi 
 
 uet^Qj/t 
 
 A. 
 
 evSidfjLoua eUSatfiOf 
 
 ix&iova-la 
 
 ^X^ioy 
 
 fid^oim p-ei^co p,z7^ov 
 
 V. 
 
 etSaifioy 
 
 ^X^'O" 
 
 /t.ei(oi/ 
 
 P.N. 
 
 eitSal^oves sOSatixoya 
 
 iX^ioves 
 
 ix^^ov"' 
 
 /ielCoves fiei^om 
 
 
 
 iX^iovs 
 
 ixS'i" 
 
 ^ei^ovs jue^C^ 
 
 G. 
 
 eiiSaifjLSvtav 
 
 ixs>' 
 
 6va)v 
 
 IM(6vav 
 
 D. 
 
 eiiSaiiiotri{v) 
 
 ixS't 
 
 o(ri(i>) 
 
 pt.ei^QfTi[v) 
 
 A. 
 
 svdalfiot/as eviai/jLOva 
 
 ^X^iavas 
 
 ^X^f""" 
 
 p-st^oyas fieiCova 
 
 
 
 ixAiovs 
 
 ^X»f" 
 
 p.el(i)us /idCa 
 
 V. 
 
 evdal/ioyes eit^aifioya 
 
 like the Nominative. 
 
 like the Nominative. 
 
 Dual. 
 
 eiSatftove 
 
 ^x&i 
 
 ove 
 
 /iclCoye 
 
 
 evSaiii^voif. 
 
 ix^'iyo'y- 
 
 lifiQ6voui. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 &\ridis &Kri^4s 
 
 vychs 
 
 iyUs 
 
 G. 
 
 oX7I&(e-os)o5s 
 
 
 irfi(i-os)ovs 
 
 D. 
 
 &\7i^4-i)eT 
 
 
 MZ-ijcr 
 
 A. 
 
 diArj&{e'-o)5i a\vSr4s 
 
 iyi(i-a) 
 
 a" iyih i 
 
 V. 
 
 oMnStes 
 
 
 iyih 
 
 P.N. 
 
 &Kn&{i-es)eis a\7i^4-a)ri 
 
 iyi[e'es)e' 
 
 s iyi{4-a)a^ 
 
 G. 
 
 oA.9)a(e'-o;y)Sv' 
 
 
 byi{4-wy)wv I 
 
 D. 
 
 ci\7)&€'(n(v) 
 
 
 byUtrt[v) 
 
 A. 
 
 li\ri^{4-as)eis a\riSt(i-a)Ti 
 
 vyi{e-as)e!s iyL(i-a.}a 
 
 V. 
 
 like the Nominative. 
 
 like the Nominative. 
 
 ifnal. 
 
 a\riSr{4-e)ri 
 
 
 6yi(e'-e)S 
 
 
 &KiiSrle-oiv)o7v. 
 
 
 tyi{ e-aiv)6iv. 
 
 S.N. 
 
 ellxapis e^X'^pi 
 
 airtiTQ)p 
 
 &iraTop 
 
 G. 
 
 eiiXapXTOs 
 
 
 hriropos 
 
 D. 
 
 evxdp'Ti 
 
 . 
 
 htr.flt.Topi 
 
 A. 
 
 euxtS/jira aild eixdpiv fHxapi 
 
 Ifjrcirapa 
 
 iirarop 
 
 V. 
 
 6»X«P' 
 
 
 &ivaTop 
 
 P.N. 
 
 £AX<ipiTej tixdptTa 
 
 aJvdTopes 
 
 andropa 
 
 G. 
 
 evxapiTOJV 
 
 
 wjrarSpciiy 
 
 X). 
 
 ' euX'^P'"'' 
 
 
 aTrdropat 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 evx^piTas evxiipira 
 euXi^piTej evxap'ra 
 
 a-K^Topas 
 airdropes 
 
 airdropa 
 aitdropa 
 
 Dual. 
 
 fvxdpiTs 
 
 
 airdrope 
 
 
 fiX"?^"^ 
 
 otv 
 
 soft® 
 
 anraripOiv^ 
 
 ' hut n 
 
 'vvnS,i-<.>v = ffMir'JSH'- 
 
 '« 59. Rom 1. 1 
 
i04 ADJECTIVES Ot ONE ENlllNa. [? 8( 
 
 § 80. III. Adjectives of one Unding. 
 
 Adjectives of one ending have no separate form for the Neii 
 ter, partly because their meaning is of such a nature that thej 
 generally occur in connection -with persons, and partly because, 
 their formation admits of no separate neuter form. In poetry, 
 however, these adjectives sometimes occur in those Cases in 
 Which the Neut. form is like that of the Masc. and Fern., i. e 
 in the Gen. and Dat, even in connection with neuter substan- 
 tives, e. g. /iavtao-tv Xva-a-^fnarrLv, Eur. Or. 264. Iv irhnyn crw/Jian, la 
 El. 375. They Very seldom take a separate form for the Neut, 
 e. g. «n;Xus, iinijXvSa tJi/ca, Her. 8, 73 ; a derivative aljective is 
 commonly used, where the neuter is to be denoted. 
 
 iSndinga. 
 1. -ait Gen. 'o«; 6 iioi)[as, Gen. iMOyiov, single (Patoxytone). 
 ll. -as, Gen. -avTos: 6 7/ &k^/ioj, Gen.-avroi, unwearied (Paroxytone). 
 
 III. -ds) Gen. -iSos: 6 ri ^uyis. Gen. (pvyiSos, fugitive (Oxytone). 
 
 IV. -a^, Gen. -apos : only fidxap, though the Fem. form fidicaipa is sometlmeB 
 found. 
 
 V. -ri t, Gen. 'dv: 6 iSnKopriiSi Gen. ^SiiXovTov, voluntary. 
 
 Some of these adjectives take, in connection with Fem. substantives, a sepa* 
 I'ate Fem. form in -is (Gen. -iSos), e. g. eu^Jirjjs, Fem. eltuvis, fiir'looldng. They 
 are Paroxytones, except 4Sre\ovTi)s, exopftis, and 6j3pifl-T<jj. 
 
 VL -Tjs, Gen. -rjroj: 6 ri ipy^S) Gen. hpyjiTos, whiter 
 
 So all compounds in -M]s, '■S/flis, ■PK'lis, -irhist and -K/i^s, and some simpltt 
 adjectives, e.g. yvjivfisi naked; x^pv^s, needy; itcptis) poor ; Trxdvris, locaidering, 
 etc. 
 
 Vn. -fip, Gen. '^f 0*: 6 71 hrT'ijv, Gen. inrrrivos, utfeathefed. In like manner 
 no other. 
 
 Vm. -tSs, Gen. -aros: 6 t] irypis. Gen. irfvaTos^ unknoton-. 
 
 So all compounds in -jSpSij, -yi>d)S) and -xcSj) and also airrJis, firm. 
 
 IX. -IS, Gen. -lios: i tj &ciJ\Kir, Gen. a:/d\KiSosf poioerless. 
 
 These adjectives aftef the omission of a feminine substantive to which they 
 belong, are, like those in -As, -tSSor, e. g. ^ 't,\\ds (sc. 7^), used as substantives, 
 e. g. 71 Ttarpls (sc. •^),fitherland> 
 
 X. -Kj, Gen. -OSoj: 4^ pctjKvS) Gen. ce^XuSos, one lately come 
 In like manner only a few other compounds. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
$ 81.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. lOS 
 
 XI. if. Gen. -yos, -kos, -xos : i ii Spiraf, Geu. -dyof, rapaaious. 
 i ri ?X<f, " -<K»s, equal. 
 6 ri luivv^, " -iJxof, one-hoofed. 
 ^I- -<('5 Gen. -jr s : 3 ^ alylKi\f/, Geu. -jiras, Ajji. 
 
 Xm. Such as end in an unchanged substantive, e. g. &Trais, childless; fuucpt- 
 X«p, long-handed; aliTSx^tp, dene with one's mm hand; inaxpaiav, long-lived; 
 ■uaKpaixvv, long-necked ; KeiKcunrts, having a white shield. The declension of such 
 adjectives is like that oC the substantives, e. g. /uucpaix^ms. On the compounds 
 of TTouj, however, comp. § 78, II. (bj. 
 
 i 81. Comparison, of Adjectives. 
 
 1. The quality expressed by an adjective may belong to 
 en object in different degrees : — 
 
 (a) When the quality belongs to one object in a higher 
 degree than to another, the form is called the Comparative, 
 e. g. Plato was more learned than XeTwphon. 
 
 (b) When the quality in the highest degree belongs to an 
 object, the form is called the Superlative, e. g. Plato was 
 the MOST LEARNED of the disciples of Socrates. 
 
 (c) The form of the adjective which expresses its simple 
 meaning without any comparison, is called the Positive, 
 e. g. Plaio was learned. 
 
 2. Only the adjective and adverb are susceptible of com- 
 parison 5 the participle does not admit it, except in a few 
 rare cases, where the participle has the meaning of an 
 adjective, e. g. ippo}fj,iiit)<;, -i<TTepo<;, -eararw;, 
 
 3. The Greek has two classes of terminations for the 
 Comparative and Superlative. The first, and much the 
 most common, is -repo?, -ripd, -repov, for the Compara- 
 tive, and -Tei,To<i, -raTTi, -raTov, for the Superlative; the 
 second is -(i^)ti>v, -(i)ov, or -av, -ov, for the Comparative, 
 and - (t) <rT09, - [1) artj, - (i) cttov, for the Superlative. The 
 I is the union-vowel. 
 
 4. The first dass of terminations is appended to the stem 
 of the adjective by the connecting syllables o (to), ai,.K, e?; 
 hence the general rule : In most adjectives, the usual end- 
 ings are appended to tlie stem by means of the connecting 
 syllahl^. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
106 
 
 ADJECTIVES. FIRST FORM OP COMPARISON. 
 
 :§ 82 
 
 Kemakk. Instead of the single forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
 the Greek, like the Latin, can prefix /iSAAoy (magis) and niXiUTa (maxime) to 
 the Positive. This periphrasis is necessaiyin all adjectives, which, for the sake 
 of euphony, have no Comparative form. 
 
 \ 82. A. First Form of Comparison. 
 
 Comparative, -reposj -rip a, -repov, 
 Superlative, -raro^, -raTT], -Tarov. 
 
 These endings are appended to the stem of the adjective; 
 the stem is found by rejecting os in the Nom. of the second 
 Pec, and the same syllable in the Gen. of the third Dec. 
 
 I. Adjectives in -os, -i? (-"■), -ov. 
 
 (a) Most adjectives of this class annex the above endings to 
 the stem by means of the union-vowel o or w ; the union-vowel 
 is o, when a syllable long by nature or by position (^ 27, 3), pre- 
 cedes, but CO, when a short syllable precedes, — co being then 
 used to prevent the concurrence of too many short syllables, 
 e. g. 
 
 Kovip-os, light, Com. Koutp-S-repos, 
 
 l(fj(vp-6s, Strang, " Iffx^P'^-repoSt 
 
 A.67rT-(Js, thin, " X^Trr-S-repos, 
 
 (r(po5p~6s, vehement, " ff<po^p-6-Tepos, 
 
 •iriKp-6s, bitter, " iriKp-o-repoSf 
 
 ffo^-6s, wise, " (rofp-^-repoS) 
 
 i^iip'Ss, Jirm, " ^x^ip-ti-Tepos, 
 
 &^X-os, vxyrthy, " a|i-o5-Tepos, 
 
 Sup. Kov<p-6-raTos, -t;, -ov, 
 
 " A.eirT-J-TaTOs, 
 " (rcpodp-6-TaTos, 
 
 " '7riKp'6-TaTOSf 
 
 " aofp-t^aTos, 
 " ^xiJp-(5-TaTos, 
 
 Ebmabk 1. A mute and liquid here always make a syllable long by posi- 
 tion, though the Attic poets, on account of the verse, sometimes consider such 
 syllable as short, e. g. evTeKviiraTos from eHreicms, Eur. Hec. 579. 618. (Pors.), 
 SiKTroTudrepa, Id. Ph. 1367. 
 
 (b) Contracts in -eos = -ovs and -oos = -ovs are contracted also 
 it the forms of Comparison ; the first contract e and o> the union- 
 vowel into (1) ; the last assume the union-syllable es and contract 
 in with the preceding o, e. g. 
 
 ■irop(pip-eos = ■jrop(pvp-ovs mrK-6os = larK-ovs 
 
 ■Koptpvp-ednpos = ■7rop<j)tip-di-Tepos airKo-ftr-repos = air\-ois-Tcpos 
 
 ropcpvp-edraros = iropfvp-d-TaTOS airAo-eV-Taroj = airA-oi!o--TOTOS. 
 
 Hero belong also contracts of two endings in -ovs and -ovv, e. g. ci/y-ooi=» 
 
 iVv-ms, Neut. eVv-oon — eSv-ovp, Com. eiim-4(r-Tepos = €i?y-ois-Tepos, Sup. fin- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 82.] ADJECTIVES. —FIRST FOEM OF COMPAEISON. 107 
 
 Keu. 2. Adjectives in -oos take also the uncontracted forms the (Jomparo- 
 live and Superlatiyo in -odrepos, -odraros, e. g. eivvoirepoi, X. E. Equ. 1, 10. 
 ciixpotSrepor, X. 0. 10, 11. 
 
 (c) The following adjectives in -aios: yepaids, old; waXai- 
 OS, ancient; Trepalos, on the other side; a-y^oXalo's, at leisure, 
 assume -repos and -xaros ■without a union-vowel, e. g. 
 
 ytpai-is, Com. yepal-repos. Sup. yepai-Taros, 
 
 iraXoi-os, " ^ra\o^TepoJ, " iroXor-Taros. 
 
 Rem. 3. Ila\ai6s and (rxoXoTos have also the usual forms of Compari- 
 son; ira\ai6Tepos, <rxo\ai6T,epos, so also ytpaiiiepoi, Antiph. 4, p. 125, 6. 
 
 (d) The following adjectives in -os: £ii86os, calm; ri<rvxo^, 
 ffiiet; iSios, peculiar ; to-os, equal; fi-io-o?, middle; op^pio^, 
 ea/rly ; otj/io^, late; ■TrapairX^o-ios, similar; and Trpwios, iw the 
 morning, assume the union-syllable ax, the Comparative and 
 Superlative thus becoming hke the preceding words in -aios, 
 e.g. 
 
 fieff'OS, Com. fieiT-at^epos, Sup. fieff-ai-raTos, 
 
 iSt~QS, " idi-ai-repos, '' iSt-oi-Toroy. 
 
 Beu. 4. Sometimes also the common form is found, e. g. rjtrvxtirepos, 
 riirux&raTOS ; <pi\dnfpos, ifiiKdiTaTos are the usual forms in the Attic writers. 
 Here belong also the adverbial forms TrpuiaiTepov, n-puiafrera, from irpdiios ; thus 
 in Plato ; likewise ■Kpairepoy and vpaiTara ; thus always, as it seems, in Thu. 
 (Popp. ad 7, 19, 1), also in Xen. Anab. 3. 4, 1. irpatTepov according to the best 
 MSS. (on the contrary irpmaWara, Cy. 8. 8, 9). The adjective <pi\os has 
 three forms: ^i\6repos seldom (e. g. Xen. C. 3. 11, 18.), and tfuXirarot, 
 ^ijuihepos seldom in prose {e. g. Xen. An. 1. 9, 29, though one good Ms. has 
 ^Xiirepoy), and ^iXofraToy seldom in prose (e.g. Xen. H. 7.3, 8.), ipiXTepos 
 poetic, and tplhraTos very frequent ; the Comparative is usually expressed by 
 /iSWoy (j)ll\.os. In addition to these three forms, also the Superlative <f>iKurros 
 (as in Homer, the Comparative ^0\iav) is found in Attic poetry. 
 
 Bek. 5. The two adjectives, p-iaos, middle, and v4os, ymng,'h.a,ye a special 
 Superlative form, fieiraTos, ydaros; but this is in use only when a, series 
 of objects is to be made prominent, /i.4(raTos denoting the very middle of the 
 series, and rcaros the last or most remote, whereas /tetraiTaros expresses the 
 idea of the middle in general, and wiStotoj retains the primary signification 
 of the adjective, young, new. In prose, viaros is used only in reference to the 
 tones of music (vearos ^i^oyyos) ; and then the Feminine is contracted, vtrrn, 
 (he lowest line or string. 
 
 (e) Two adjectives in -os : ipfxa/ievo^, strong, and a/cpaTos, 
 unmixed, append the union-syllable es to the stem, e g. ipp(oiJ,ev 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
108 ADJECTIVES. — PlllST FOUM OF COMPARISON. l? 82, 
 
 ea--T6j00Sj ipp^ftev-icr-TOTO';, aj<paT'i<r-T€pos, aKpar-ia-raTOi. So also 
 atSotos lias atSot-eo-raros in the superlative. 
 
 Rem, 6. Further, the adjectives, S^&ovoj, rich; trirovSatos, sieabus; and 
 Ha-fiei/es, glad, sometimes take the above form, as &<p^oyi<rTepos, -fovaros, 
 together with the common form, -tHrepos, -drctTos. From Strficcos is formed 
 iur/ieviiTepes, and the adverbial neuter, lurjuvaWaTa and oa-tuv-fff-raTa. — Several 
 other adjectives also have this formation, yet for the most part only in poetry, 
 B. g. eiCupos, unmixed (of wine) ; j)Si/j«os, sweet ; iTriireSos, JIat {iwiirsSsarTepm, 
 X. H. 7. 4, 13), and all contracts in -oos ; comp. (b). The forms in -httc/mis, 
 -sVTttTos, belong properly to a(^ectives in -ris and -uv. 
 
 (f) The following adjectives in -os: XoXos, tallcative; fiovo- 
 ^dyos, eating alone; oi/'o<^ayos, dainty; and irrdix^h poor, 
 drop OS, and append the syllable is, e, g. XaX-oi, Com. Xak-ta-- 
 repos. Slip. XaA.-«r-TaTos ; ■irTbixo's has also Sup. ?rrco;(OTaTos. 
 
 Rem. 7. These endings properly belong to adjectives in -tjs, Gen. -ov. 
 
 II. Adjectives in -tjs. Gen. -ov, and i/feuSiJs, -es. Gen. -e'os, drop 
 •i;s, and append the syllable -ts, e. g. KXhrr-Tj^ (Gen. -ov), thievislu, 
 Com. KXeTTT'ia-'Tipo'S, Sup. KXeirr-io--TaTO?'; ij/euS-Lcr-T€pos, ij/'eu8-la- 
 raros. 
 
 Exceptions. 'TjSpHTT^j, -oC, insolent, has iPptffT6Tepos, X. An, 5, 8, 3, iPpiiTTi- 
 voTos, X. An. 5! 8, 22. C. 1. 2, 12. From a/cpar^s (Gen. -eoj) is the Com. oitpa- 
 rferrepos, to distinguish it from hxpaTecrraTOs, No. (e). 
 
 III. Adjectives of the third Declension. Tlie Comparison- 
 endjngs are appended to the stem of the adjectives, either 
 directly or by inserting the syllable -es (also -is). 
 
 (1) Those in -vs, -eia, -V, ijs, -cs (Gen. -eos=-OTs), a^ 
 
 -av, and the word fiaKap, Jiappy, append the endings of Com- 
 parison directly to the pure stem, wliicli appears in the Neuter 
 form, e. g. 
 
 jKvicis, Neul. -i — ^ yKvici-repes y\viciTaros 
 
 aMi^s, Kent, -h — a\riA4<r-Tepos &\ri^etr-raros 
 
 /J-^Kas, Neut. -ay — fi,f\ii'-r€pos nsKdv-raros 
 
 TaAas, Neut. -av — raK^v-Tepos raXdy-raros 
 
 lidxapi ■ — fiaKap-repos fiaKdp-Taros. 
 
 Rem. 8. The adjectives riSis, i-ax^s, and voWs a,re compared in -lav and 
 ■tty. See § 83, 1. 
 
 (2) Adjectives in -wv, -ov (Gen. -ovos), assume -es, e. g. 
 
 c^SafjUwi, Neut. etfSoijitoy, Jiappy, 
 
 Com, ei'Saipor-fV-T^pos, Sup. eiSai/ioy-ev-TaTas. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
» 83.] ADJECJtVfiS. — SECOND POEM OP COMPAEISON. 109 
 
 (3) Adjectives in "^ sometimes assume -«?, sometimes -is, 
 e.g. 
 
 i^ijATJ) Gen. Af-fiMK-os, growing old, ^piraf) Gon. Si/may^os, rapax, 
 Com. luj>Ti\iK-4ff-Tepos, Com. apTray-ltr-repost 
 
 Sup. lupri\tifeir-TaT0S) Sup. apirayl^-raros. 
 
 (4) Adjectives, in 'eis, -ev, whose stem ends in vt, append the 
 Comjarison-endings directly to the stem, the last t being 
 changed into a, and the preceding v being then dropped ({ 20, 2). 
 
 X«piet*i "^€^, Gen. x^P^^^"^'^^* phamnU 
 
 Com. xopffo'-Tcposj Sup. x«pfe(f-TaTi)f, 
 
 (5) The compounds of x^pw assume wj e, g. 
 
 Mxapisy Gen. iirixipir-os, pleasant 
 
 Com. iTTixapiT-ta-Teposi Sup. ^irtxapir w-TaroSi 
 
 'Ax'»pfi'''''€(jnj in Homer, comes from axaplr-Ttpos ; comp. No. '4). 
 
 } 83. B. Second Form of Comjjarisott. 
 
 Comparative, 'twv, Neut. 'lov, or -wv, Nent. -oc 
 Superlative, -to-ros, 'ia-rrj, -to-Tov. 
 
 Uemaek 1. On the quantity of i in -iav, -loy, see 5 28, 1 ; on the declension, 
 S 78, Kem. 9 j and on the accent, § 65, 5 (a). * 
 
 This form of Comparison includes, 
 
 I. Some adjectives in -us, which drop -t)s and append -uav, 
 etc.; this usually appUes only to ■^Siis, siveet, and Taxvs,sw^ 
 (the other forni of these adjectives in -w-epos, -uraros, is some 
 times used, but not by Attic writers). Taxi's ha,s in the 
 Comparative Sda-o-mv (Att. &d.TTwv), Neut. ^oo-o-oi' {Sarrov). 
 Comp. §§ 21, 3, and 17, 6. Taxtwv is foimd only among the 
 later vrriters. Thus, 
 
 S,i-is, Com. Tii-hiv, Neut. Yii-iov, Sup. ?iS-iirfor, -i), -ov. 
 
 rttx-is) " aeffl-irBV, Att. ^irrwy, Neut. aao-froy, Att. SSttO!', Sup. Ti^x'f^Toj 
 
 ItJH. 2. The other adjectives in -i5j, as $aStis, deep; ^apis, lieavy ; ^pw 
 iis, aloV); ppaxi^t short; yKvKis, sweet; Satris, thick; fipis> wide; ojiii, 
 sharp; Vp{ir0ys, old; aiRtJi, stoift, have the form m-Arepos, -iraros (§ 82, 
 in.) ; in Attie poetry, however, single examples of these adjectives are found 
 With the other form, e. g. Ppdxwfos, irpitrPia-ras, Ukuttos. 
 
 II. The fblloWing adjectives in -pos: aio-xpos. ^«sf >■ ^X^po's* 
 hostile; KvSpos, honoruble; and oIkt pi's, wretched (but always 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
110 ADJECTIVES —ANOMALOUS FORMS DP COMPARISON. ['} 84 
 
 oiKTpoTtpos in the Comparative), — the ending -pos here also 
 being dropped, e. g. aJa-^os, Com. ai<7x-to)v, Neut. ata-x-tov. Sup 
 
 aMTjJ^-OOTOS. 
 
 Rem. 3. OiKTurros, KvSfuy, KiSurros, are pOetlc. Besides this form, in -lav, 
 etc., which is preferred hy the Attic wi-iters, the above adjectives have also, 
 though seldom, the other form in -drtpos, -draros, e. g. ix^^SraTOs ; but always, 
 in prose, olicrphwros 
 
 \ 84. Anomalous Forms of Comparison, 
 
 Positive. 
 aya^6s, good, 
 
 2. Ktueds, bad, 
 
 3. Ka\6s, beautiful, 
 
 4. aK-)eiv6s, painful, 
 
 5. iuaep65, long, 
 
 6. fiiKp6s, small, 
 
 7. oKlyos, few, 
 
 8. niyas, great, 
 
 9. TtoXis, much, 
 
 10. pifSios, easy, 
 
 11. TFtTruv, ripe, 
 
 12. iriaVjfat, 
 
 Comparative. 
 a/ietyujfy Neut. &f*€iyoy 
 
 {04\T€pos, Poet.) 
 KpclcrtrtDV, Att. KpeitTioi/ 
 
 [tpeprepos, Poet.) 
 
 Kouciuv 
 
 X^iptnv 
 
 rflfftrwVt Att. ^TTOJV 
 
 -aKyeiy6repos 
 h.\y'MV 
 picucporepos 
 [pLcLtrffav, Poet.) 
 fjLtKpSrepos 
 iK&aaav, Att. ^xirroiv 
 
 trXelav, or tt\4(ev 
 
 vfTralrepos 
 iriSrepos 
 
 Superlative. 
 &pta-Tos 
 
 ^4\TiaT0S 
 
 ($4\TaTos, Poet.) 
 
 Hp^TlffTOS 
 AlplTTOS 
 
 ((pepraros, <pepuni.s, Poet.) 
 
 KliKKrTOS 
 
 X^'tpt^TOS 
 Adv. ^iKUrra 
 Kii?i\i(rTos 
 aKyGiyorafas 
 &\yitfros 
 
 flAKpoTaTOS 
 
 fiiiKiffros 
 lUKpoTcrros 
 4\dx'(r'ros 
 h\iyuTToS 
 
 flsyilTTOf, 
 
 irKetffTOs 
 
 p^tTTOS 
 
 ireTrcuTaTos 
 
 Kemakk 1 . The Superlative &pia-Tos (from "Apjjs, the god of war), and the 
 Jomp. anelvav, have particularly the idea of bravery, boldness; Pe\Tlav, like th6 
 Latin melior, signifies better, in a moral sense, though by no means confined to 
 tliat ; Ktpav is mostly used in such phrases as A^oV la-ri, it is better, and X^otos 
 mostly in the Voc. & Xifo-Te. The poetic Superlative (pepta-ros is found in 
 Plato, in the exclamation S> ip^purre ! most worthy ! The iiTegular forms of 
 fuKpSs, viz. ixdcrcrtoy, ixAx^aros, express both the idea of smallness and fevmess 
 {o\iyos) ; but lisluv generally expresses the idea of fewness, seldom that of 
 tmaUness; the regular fonns of /utipis, viz. uMpdrtpos, -oraros, always retain 
 their original idea of smallness, and also oXiyuTTos that of fewness, though oKlyos 
 often signifies smait. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 84.] ADJECTIVES. ANOMALOUS FORMS OF COMPAUISON. 11' 
 
 Rem. 2. The use of the longer and shorter form of the Comparatire irXelav, 
 itAeci))', should be particularly noted. The neuter ir\4ov is more frequent than 
 >r\e7oi», especially when it is used adverbially ; irXeovos and irXeiovos, ir\4ovi 
 and irXefoK, Ace. irXeai, irXiova, and irAefw, are used indiscriminately ; PI. Nom. 
 and Ace, usually irXelovs, also vMiones and irKdovas (but not vKiovs) ; itXiia 
 is much more frequent than irKiia ; ttXckJi/cijv and TrXefocri are more frequent than 
 K\tivav and ir\4o(n. Finally, the shortened form of the Neut. Sing. ir\uv 
 (farmed from irXeibv), but limited to such phrases as T\e!v ^ liipioi, should be 
 mentioned as a special Atticism. 
 
 Several adjectives, ■which express the idea of an oj-der or 
 series, have only the Comparative and Superlative forms, 
 because, on account of their signification, ihey cannot be used 
 absolutely, but only in comparison. An adverb of place is 
 usually the root of these forms of Comparison, e. g. 
 
 ^from irpi), irporepos (prior), irparos (primus),^rsi. 
 
 ( " &va>), avdrfpos (superior), av^raros (supremus). 
 
 ( " vKfp), iTriprepos (superior), higher, xmipraTOS, Poet. iJiraTos (supremus). 
 
 ( " {m6 ?), Scrrepos (posterior), later, SffTaros (postremus), last. 
 
 ( " ii), ^(TxtTos (extremus), outennost. 
 
 ( " irKTiaiov, prope), (irKniaios, Homeric), irKijirtairepos, or irK-qaiiirTtpoi 
 
 (proprior), nearer, irAijo-iofTOTOS, -Effroroi (proximus), nearest. 
 ( " irpicm), far, vpoffdrnpos, farther, vpoffdnaTos, farthest. 
 
 Eem. 3. Other adjectives in the Comparative and Superlative, which are 
 also derived from adverbs, have no Positive form of the adjective, e. g. ^pe/ui, 
 quietly, fipe/tte'o-Tepos, ^pe^e'o-TaTos ; irpoipymi, usefiU, irpovpjuxiTepos, more useful, 
 vpovpyialraTos. 
 
 Kem. 4. Comparatives and Superlatives are also foi-med from substantives. 
 Here two cases are to be distinguished : (a) when the substantive, both in form 
 and signification, is the Positive from which the Comparative and Superlative 
 may be formed, i. e. when the substantive can be considered as an adjective, 
 e. g. 80DA.0J, slave, SovKirtpos, more slavish; — {h) when the substantive, in 
 respect to the signification, is not really the Positive, but only in respect to the 
 form can be considered as the basis of the Comparative and Superlative, the 
 proper Positive form, having been lost, (comp. Kpirunos from the Epic Kparis, 
 4\4yX"rros from the Epic IXeTX^s.) Numerous examples of the last kind may 
 be found in poetry, particularly in Epic. See § 216, Rem. 2. 
 
 Rem. 5. For the sake of greater emphasis, the Comparative and Superla- 
 tive are sometimes compared, e. g. iffxaros (Superl.), ^<rxaT(4T€pos, tVxaT<4Ta- 
 TM ; so ^piinaro! from ^pOros. This is frequent in the Comic writers, seldom 
 in Homer and the Tragedians, still more seldom in prose. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
112 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 
 r«85. 
 
 i 66. Comparison of Adverbs. 
 
 1. Adverbs derived from adjectives, when compared, have 
 commonly no independent adverbial ending ; the Comparative 
 is expressed by the Ace. Sing, neuter of the Comparative 
 adjective, and the Superlative by the Ace. PI. neuter of the 
 Superlative, e. g. 
 
 aroipios 
 
 from 
 
 a-o(p6s) 
 
 Com 
 
 . tTQfbdiTCpOV 
 
 Slip 
 
 co^eiJTaTa 
 
 erovpas 
 
 
 a-a(p-f}s) 
 
 
 ffa<pe(rr€poy 
 
 
 (rai^eiTTOTa 
 
 XopteVraJS 
 
 
 Xap^ets) 
 
 
 XapUffT^pov 
 
 
 XapKCTaTO 
 
 svdaifiovas 
 
 
 evBatficav) 
 
 
 evdcaiioyearepov 
 
 
 ivta.iixoviffTa.rtL . 
 
 alffxpSts 
 
 
 altrxp^s) 
 
 
 o^a'X^oy 
 
 
 ayfTXKTTa 
 
 Tjdiais 
 
 
 ^Us) 
 
 
 9lBiou 
 
 
 ^tiffra 
 
 Tax^ofS 
 
 
 rax^s) 
 
 
 ^afftroVi -TTov 
 
 
 rdxtffTcu 
 
 Kemark 1. The Singular of the Comparative is used, because only two 
 objects are compared, and it is affirmed that one of these is better, etc. than 
 the other ; but the Plural of the Superlative, because the object Compared is 
 the best, etc. of many others. 
 
 Eem. 2. But sometimes these adverbs also retain in the Comparative the 
 adverbial ending of the Positive -as, e. g. x"^^'"''^^?"^, aKri&eiTTepus, /lox^po- 
 ripus, KoKKiSvas, especially nei(6yas, etc. The Neuter Singular is seldom used 
 in the Superlative, and belongs mostly to poetry. 
 
 2. All original adverbs in -<o, e. g. avw, koltw, c^m, ecno, etc., 
 retain the ending -u) regularly in the Comparative, and almost 
 uniforaily in the Superlative, e. g. 
 
 Sj/w, alxyiv, 
 K^ra), below, 
 
 Com. avwTepu 
 KaTccTepoo 
 
 Sup. oi'a/~<{Tw 
 KaToyraTU. 
 
 In like manner, most other original adverbs have the ending 
 •ft) in the Comparative and Superlative, e. g. 
 
 ayxov, near, 
 Iff pa, ultra, 
 T7j\ov, Jar, 
 eKds,Jar, 
 iyyis, near. 
 
 Com. hyxoTtpw 
 vepatripa 
 'T'/iKoripta 
 eKcUTTepcj 
 iyyvTepu 
 eyy^Tepoy 
 
 Sup. arfxol&Tto 
 
 Sup wanting 
 
 Trtlh.ffT^.Ta 
 
 etieurrdTo} 
 iyyvrdro) and 
 ^YyAraTa 
 lyyurra (rarely). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
« 86, 67.1 
 
 THE PRONOUNS cyu, (TV, OV. 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 113 
 
 The Pronoun. 
 
 § 56. Nature and Division of Pronouns. 
 
 1. Pronouns do not, like substantives, express the idea 
 of an object, but only the relation af an object to the 
 speaker; i. e. they show whether the object is the speaker 
 himself (the first person), or the person or thing addressed 
 (the second person), or the person or thing spoken of (the 
 third person), e. g. / (the teacher) give to thee (the scholar) 
 it (the book). 
 
 2. All pronouns are divided into five principal classes : 
 (1) Personal, (2) Demonstrative, (3) Relative, (4) Interrog- 
 ative, (5) Indefinite Pronouns. Pronouns are again di- 
 vided, according to their signification and form, into (a) 
 Substantive, (b) Adjective, ,and (c) Adverbial Pronouns, 
 e. g. e'^o) ravra iTroirjcra; (a) /, thou, he, she, it; (b) mi/, thy, 
 his; (c) here, there, thus. 
 
 I. Peesonal Pronouns. 
 
 A. Substantive Personal Pronouns. 
 
 i 87. The simple iyw, ego, av, tu, ov, sui. 
 
 Nbm. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 N.A. 
 G.D. 
 
 Nom. I 
 Gen. 
 Dat.- 
 Ace. I 
 
 Singular. 
 iri, tliou 
 
 ffov [trov), of thee 
 (Toi (trot), to thee 
 ai (ire), thee 
 
 Dual. 
 vA, we bath, us both i (r(pd>, you both 
 v^v, of vs both, to us <rip^v, of you both, 
 both 
 
 fiov (nQv), ifiov, of me 
 fioi ifioi), i/iol, to me 
 fi4 (fie), iii4, me 
 
 to you both 
 Plural. 
 
 wanting 
 
 ov (ow), of himsdf etc. 
 ot (o(), to hinvadf, etc. 
 E (I), himself etc. 
 
 (T^we, Aec. (Poet.), Aem both 
 ffiptoiv (ffcpcciv), of them both, 
 to them both 
 
 Tifieis, we 
 Tjfiwv, of us 
 Tifjuif, to us 
 Tjfias, us 
 
 vfie7s, ye (a) 
 vfiuv, of you (G) 
 vfuv, to you (v) 
 ifias, you (u) 
 
 a-tps7s, Neut. iri^eo (Poet.), ((r*e«) 
 aipiiv, of them [they 
 
 (r<pl(ri[i') {<r(pim[y]), to them 
 <rcl)as, Neut. a'fea {(T^ea), them. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
114 THE REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS ifiaVTOV, (TCaVTOV, iaVTOV. [} 88 
 
 Kemaek 1 . The forms susceptible of inclination are put in a parenthesis 
 without any mark of accent. Comp. ^ 33 (b), and 35, 3. On the accentuatioi 
 and use of the third Pers. of the Pronoun, see ^ 302, Rem- 3. The Vocativi 
 is here, as in the following paradigms, omitted, because, when it occurs, it i 
 always like the Nominative. 
 
 Rem. 2. The Gen. Sing, of these three pronouns, in imitation of Homer 
 often has, among the Attic poets, also the forms ifii^ev, triSrev, e&ev, thesi 
 forms always retain their accent, except when ?&e» is not used as a reflexive 
 Isui), but as a pronoun of the third person {ejus). Comp. § 35, 3 (b). 
 
 Rem. 3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of ou hai in Attic poetry also the fomi 
 fly {ytv) signifying him, her, it, PI. them, e. g. Soph. OR. 868. 1331, instead of 
 airois and aiirds. See the Dialects, § 217. 
 
 Rem. 4. The oblique Cases of tjucTs and fifieTj, when not emphatic, some- 
 times undergo a certain inclination among the poets, being written in the fol- 
 lowing manner : ^fjiay vfiuv, TJ^ury v/jily, or ^fuy Ziiiv ; still, this inclination 
 cannot take place if a Paroxytone precedes. The shorter form of the pronoun 
 of the third Pers. is used in the Dat. and Aec. PI. by the poets (also by the 
 Attic writers), e. g. Dat. ff(pi (or tr(ply) instead of aipitri(v), to them, Ace. crfi 
 instead of ir^Sj, them. Both forms, ir<pl and ir<l>ty, though seliom, are used by 
 the poets as the Dat. Sing. ; the form <r(t>4, on the contrary, is used much more 
 frequently as the Ace. Sing, instead of tdn6y, -ijy, -6, also as reflexive instead 
 of ia.vr6y. 
 
 ^ 88. (b) The Reflexive Pronouns, ifx-avrov, a-tavTov, 
 
 Singular. | 
 
 G. 
 
 ifMVTOV, -ris, of 
 
 ireauToC, -ijr, or 
 
 iavTou, -Tjs, or 
 
 
 myself 
 
 trmTov, -Tjs, of thyself 
 
 a&Tov, -^s, of himself, of herself 
 
 D. 
 
 ifiavT^, -p, to 
 
 aeoAiT^, fi, or 
 
 louTip, -p, or [ilsdf 
 
 
 myself 
 
 (TouTifi, p, to thyself 
 
 avT^, -p, to himself, to liersdf, to 
 
 A. 
 
 tlMVT6y, -Tiy, 
 
 <rfa.vT6y, -!]y, or 
 
 kauriv, -fiv, -6, or [jtee/fi 
 ouTor, -liy, -6, himself, herseK 
 
 
 myself 
 
 iravr6v, -^y, thyself 
 
 Plural. '. 1 
 
 G. 
 
 rifiay avr&y, of 
 
 ijuSiy mnay, of your- 
 
 iatrray or oSroij', or 
 
 
 ourselves 
 
 selves 
 
 (r<t>ay avray, of themselves 
 
 D. 
 
 Tl/j-iy ouToTj, -ais, 
 
 ijuy auTois, -ats, to 
 
 eavTois -ats, or avTots -ais, or 
 
 
 to ourselves 
 
 yourselves 
 
 tr^laiv avToTs -oTs, to themselves 
 
 A. 
 
 fi/ms ttirais, -is, 
 
 ifias axnois, -is. 
 
 kavTois, -is, -i, or afrrotir, -it. 
 
 
 ourselves 
 
 yourselves 
 
 -i, or 
 a^as avrovs, -is, aipia avri, 
 themselves. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 8t(-91.] RECIPKOCAL AND DEMONSTllATI^ E PRONOUNS. 
 
 IIA 
 
 i 89. (c) Reciprocal Pronouns. 
 
 To express reciprocal relation, the Greek has a special pro- 
 nominal form, which is made by the coalescence of aAAot aWuv, 
 aWoi SlXXok, aXXoi oAAovs, into one word. From the nature of 
 the relation, this word can have no Singular. 
 
 Plural Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 afjJiKav, of one another 
 oW^\oij, -ttij, -ois 
 &AA^Xau$, -OS, -a 
 
 Dual iWiiKoiy, -uv, -oiv 
 aXK4i\oiy, -cutf, -oiv 
 \?oJ\\a, -o, -a. 
 
 § 90. B. Adjective Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Personal pronouns, having the form of adjectives, are called 
 Possessive pronouns, since they express possession. They are 
 formed from the Genitive of substantive personal pronouns : — 
 
 ilJt6s, -ii, -6v, meus, -a, -um, from iitoS ;. THiircpas, -ripa, -repov, noster, -tra, -trum, 
 
 from fifiav ; 
 <r6s, -i\, -6v, tuus, -a, -um, from <roC : i/iertpos, -repd, -npov, vester, -tra, -trum, 
 
 from ifuov ; 
 (Tiperepos, -repd, -Tipov, suus, -a, -um, from cripav (used in speaking of many ; 
 
 when single persons or things are spoken of, Att. prose always uses the 
 
 Gen. louToS, -^s). The Epic form, 'is, 5}, 8c, suits, -a, -um, also occurs in 
 
 the Tragedians, though seldom. 
 
 § 91. n. Dbmonsteative Pbonouns. 
 
 
 
 
 Singul 
 
 %r. 
 
 
 
 
 
 the 
 
 hie 
 
 haec 
 
 hoc 
 
 ipse 
 
 ipsa 
 
 ipsum 
 
 Nom. 
 
 d 71 ti 
 
 oyTos 
 
 ai^Tij 
 
 TOVTO 
 
 avris 
 
 .BKT'^ 
 
 outJ 
 
 Gen. 
 
 TOV TTIS rou 
 
 roirov 
 
 TOUTTjr 
 
 TOVTOV 
 
 avTov 
 
 airris 
 
 auTov 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Tip rp ,Tip 
 
 Toirip 
 
 toi!t?7 
 
 Toirip 
 
 OUT^ 
 
 aiiT^ 
 
 OVT^ 
 
 Ace. 
 
 riv rijv to 
 
 Tovrov 
 
 Totmiv 
 
 rovTO 
 
 avrSy 
 
 OUT^C 
 
 c^inS 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 01 at -ri. 
 
 OVTOL 
 
 aZToi 
 
 Tavra 
 
 avToi 
 
 aiiTai 
 
 avTti 
 
 Gen. 
 
 rav Tuv rav 
 
 TO^TUV 
 
 roirav 
 
 TOVTUV 
 
 avTuv 
 
 aVTOJV 
 
 ailTuv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 To7s rais toIs 
 
 roirois 
 
 rairais 
 
 Toirois 
 
 avTois 
 
 avTcus 
 
 avro'is 
 
 jAcc. 
 
 Tois rds -rd 
 
 Toirovs 
 
 rairas 
 Dual 
 
 ravra 
 
 OUTOlis 
 
 avrds 
 
 aiird 
 
 N.A. 
 
 Td (tiL) -rd) 
 
 ToWw 
 
 (toiIto) 
 
 TOUTW 
 
 avTci 
 
 a'JTi£ 
 
 OUT(5 
 
 G.D. 
 
 701V raiv Toiy 
 
 Toiroiv 
 
 TW^TalV 
 
 TOVTOIV 
 
 aiiToiu 
 
 auraii/ 
 
 aiiToTv. 
 
 1. The pronoun o5t«j is composed of the article S, %, t6, and the pronoun 
 ouTifi; where the article has o, a, or oi, they combine with the first syllable 
 of airis and make ov ; all other vowels of the article are absorbed by the 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
116 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 fH2 
 
 first syllable of aliros. Hence tlie first syllable of otros ends in ov where tho 
 article has o, a, or ot ; elsewhere in av. The same rule holds when iu)t6s is 
 compounded with an adjective pronoun, e. g. -roaovros (from tJo-os and aMs). 
 Examples ; i mn6s = otros, n airii = oBtij, ri aircJ = toCto ; toS outoD = 
 Toinov, TT/s carriis — rauTrjs, etc. ; so toVoi a\iT6s = roaoiros, i nan "■^'h = Toir- 
 oiJttj, Ttfco;/ ai)r6 = roffovro, rStrov avTov = roffovrov, etc. 
 
 2. Lilce i, ^, T(i is declined, 8Se, {j^e, rSSe, toBSc, ttj jSe, H. o25f , a'lSe, rilSe ; 
 Like oBtoj are declined, roffovros, Toaairr), ToaovTo{v), tardus, -a, -urn, toioE- 
 Tos, Toiaint), toioDto(c), t(dis, -e, •ni\iKovTos, T7i\iKairii, ■7t;\o£oSto(i'), sogreat, 
 so old; it is to be noted, that the neuter Sing., besides the form in c has 
 also the common form in ov ; 
 Like airos is declined, tKEivos, ixelyTi, ixilvo, he, she, it, &\Kos, &K>t.ti, fiAAo, 
 aims, alia, aliud, the neuter Sing, here also ending in o. 
 
 Rejiark 1. The neuter form in o seems to have rejected a S, as may be 
 inferred from the Latin, is, ea, id, ille, -a, -ud, alius, -a, -ud. — On the Dual 
 tonus, Tii, raiv, ra^iTa, Tairaiv, see § 241, Eem. 10 (b). — Instead of iKe7vos, the 
 Ionic Ke7vos Is also used in Attic poetry ; this word occurs somewhat frequently 
 in Attic prose, but always after a long vowel or diphthong ; nence Aphaeresis 
 (§ 14, 5) must be assumed here, as tj 'xetvas, PI. Bp. 2. 370, a. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 TOffovTOS TOtraMrTi to<tovto[v) 
 
 ToffovTOL Toffavrat 
 
 Toaavra 
 
 Gen. 
 
 TOfToirov Toaavrtis rotro^rov 
 
 roffoirwv rocro^tay 
 
 roffo^Tuv 
 
 Dat. 
 
 TOtTO^TO) Toa-avrr} Totro^traj 
 
 ToaovTois Totravrats 
 
 TOffOVTOtS 
 
 Ace 
 
 1 Toa-ovTOV TOffavrTjv ToffovTo{y) 
 
 TOffOVTOVS Totra^Tos 
 
 TOtravra 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 
 N. A. ToaovTQi Totravra rotro-urco 
 
 
 
 G. D. ro(rovTotv ro<ravraiv TotrovToiv. 
 
 
 IlEjr. 2. The article usually coalesces by Crasis (§ ID) with airSs and forma 
 one word, viz. ouriis (instead of i airSs, idem), avTii, ravrd, usually rau- 
 t6v (instead of riouTii), tbutoC, butTijj outtjj, rair$, TauTj (to distinguish 
 it from ravTri, this), but rhv avrdv, rijv aiiT^n, avroi, avrai, TauTa (instead of 
 TO ouTa, to distinguish it from tb'to, liaec), but tuv avrav, rots mnots, etc. 
 
 § 92. III. Relative Pkonoun. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 
 "Norn. 
 
 Sj 
 
 5) 
 
 •6 
 
 o1 
 
 a1 
 
 s. 
 
 & 
 
 & 
 
 l!< 
 
 Gen. 
 
 oS 
 
 h 
 
 oS 
 
 U3V 
 
 Siv 
 
 wv 
 
 all/ 
 
 cdp 
 
 oXy 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 
 V 
 
 *■ 
 
 oU 
 
 ah 
 
 oTt 
 
 
 aty 
 
 oh 
 
 Ace. 
 
 u 
 
 5iv 
 
 8 
 
 ovs 
 
 &s 
 
 & 
 
 S> 
 
 s 
 
 &. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 93.1 
 
 INDEFINITE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 IIT 
 
 5 93. IV. Indepinitjs and Intisekogative Pkonouns. 
 
 The Indefinite and Literrogative Pronouns are denoted 
 by the same form, but are distingviished by the accent and 
 position, the Indefinite being enclitic (} 33) and placed after 
 some word or words, the Interrogative being always accented 
 and placed before. 
 
 Kemakk 1. When the interrogative pronouns stand in an indirect question, 
 the relative S is placed before their stem, which, however (except in the case 
 of isris)j is not inflected, c. g. biroios, 67r^(ros, AvSrepos, etc. 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 jU, some one N. t1, some thing 
 
 rls; quis? -ri; quid? 
 
 G. 
 
 riv6s, or rod 
 
 
 rivos, or toD 
 
 I). 
 
 Tivl, or TO 
 
 
 TiVi, or Tyjs.yn. /.a.Az 
 tJto tI 
 
 A. 
 
 Tiyd N. tI 
 
 rim-. N. 
 
 Tivis N. Tivd and Stto 
 
 T^ves T^fa 
 
 G. 
 
 TtvSiv 
 
 
 T^vw;' 
 
 1). 
 
 Ti<ri{v) 
 
 
 Ti(ri(v) 
 
 A. 
 
 Tivis N. TiycJ and Stto 
 
 rivas riva 
 
 Dual N. A. 
 
 TIV6 
 
 
 rive 
 
 • (J. and I). 
 
 TIVOIV 
 
 
 rlvoiv. 
 
 S, 
 
 SsTis, whoever iJTiy fl ti 
 
 olrtvfs arrives artva, or arra 
 
 (J. 
 
 otiTtiios, or Stou ^sTiray 
 
 SivTwav (rarely Sray) 
 
 D. 
 
 ^Tivt, or Stoi ^TtVl 
 
 otsTt(n{y) (rarely iiTOLffi[y]) o^sruri{y) oTsTnrt{y) 
 
 A. 
 
 ivruia ^vTUia 8 ti 
 
 obsTiyas oisriyas Srwa, or otto 
 
 
 Dual N. A. &Tiv€, 
 
 Sti«, G. D. oTptivoiv, tSvTivotv. 
 
 Rbm. 2. The form Stto not enclitic (Ion. £<ro-o) is often used instead of nvd 
 in connection with adjectives, e. g. Seivh Stto,. itiKpa Hrra, or placed first, c. g; 
 ijv yctp S^ Stto TOi(£Se, PI. Phaedon. 60, e. On the accent of ^vrivuv, oTvrtvotVj 
 alvrivoiv, see § 34, Eem. 1. The shorter forms, orov, irif, etc. are used by the 
 dramatists almost always ; Stou, St^ are also used by the orators ; but '6tw, , 
 )iTo<n{v) are very rare in prose. The negative compounds of rXs, viz. oStis, 
 oSti, /j.'flris, ni)ri, no one, nothing, inflect the simple t2s merely, e. g. oStwos, 
 oSrives, etc. These forms are poetic ; instead of them, prose writers use oiSets, 
 fniScis ; only otri and /iip-t are used in prose with the adverbial meaning, in no 
 respect, not at all, and in the phrase, oSrt ye Sti (iii)ri ye S^), let alone then, much 
 
 Sing. N. 
 
 6 TI t)) Beu/o, some one, 
 
 some thing 
 
 Plur. 01 Selves 
 
 G. 
 
 rod T^s rod Suvoy 
 
 
 rav Seivav 
 
 D. 
 
 T^ Tp t^ Setvi 
 
 
 wanting 
 
 A. 
 
 rhv r7]v rh Zetva 
 
 
 robs Se7vas, 
 
 Bem. 3. Aeiva is also used indeclinably, though seldom, e. g. toD t^ t4» 
 ieiva. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
118 
 
 COERELATIVE PKONOUNS. 
 
 t*94 
 
 ? 94. Correlative Pronouns. 
 
 Onder Correlative Pronouns are included all those which 
 express a mutual relation (con-elation) to each other, so that if 
 one implies a question, the other with a corresponding form 
 contains the answer. 
 
 1. This mutual relation is either a general or a definite one. The general 
 correlation is expressed by tIs ; ri ,- who? what? rXs, rX, some one, same thing; 
 8Se, oSror, he, tliis ; ixfTyos, that one ; oiSels, no one ; 8 s, who, which, etc. Here 
 the forms of the correlatives do not correspond with each other, except in the 
 case of Ti'i. For example, if a question is asked ';y -rls, the answer may be by 
 tIs, SSe, oVtqs, etc. 
 
 2. The definite correlation has four dififerent forms, viz. the' Interrogative,: 
 Indefinite, Demonstrative, and Eelative. This fourfold correlation belongs both 
 to adjective and adverbial pronouns. Allihe four forms come from the same 
 root, but they are distinguished, partly by a different accent, partly by a differ- 
 ent initial : the Interrogative begin with ir, the Indefinite have the same form, 
 though with a, different accent, the Demonstrative begin with t, and the 
 Relative with the Spiritus Asper. The indirect interrogatives, as shown above, 
 4 93, Rem. 1, place the relative d before the initial ir. 
 
 3. CoiTclative adjective pronouns express relations of quantity and quality ;, 
 correlative adverbial pronouns, the relations of place, time, and manner, or 
 eandition. 
 
 (a) Adjective Correlatives. 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Relat. and De- 
 pend. Interrog. 
 
 Wiros, -IJ, -ov ; 
 how great? how 
 mitch ? quan- 
 tus? 
 
 ■7roa6s, -^, -6v, 
 of a certain 
 size, or number, 
 aliquantus 
 
 Too-os, -7j, -ov, so great, so 
 
 much, tantus 
 Toa-ia-Se, roaifie, Toa6vie 
 ToaouTos, -airri, -ovto(v) 
 
 iffos, -71, -ov and 
 
 hiriffos, -ri, -ov, 
 
 as great, as 
 
 much, quantus 
 
 iroios, -a. -ov ; 
 of what kind? 
 qualis ■? 
 
 iroiiii, -d, -6y, of 
 a certain kind 
 
 ToTbs, -a, -ov, of such a 
 
 kind, talis 
 ToiSsSe, toioSe, roi6vSe 
 rotovTos, -oi5t9j, -ovto{v) 
 
 ofoff, -d, -ov and 
 diroTos, -a, -ov, 
 
 of what l-ivd, 
 
 qualis 
 
 TTTlXiKOS, -n, -ov; 
 how great? how 
 old? 
 
 wanting 
 
 tttiKIkos, -n, -ov, so great, so 
 Tr}\m6sSe, -^JSe, -wSe [old 
 Tri\iKovros, -airi), -ovto(v) 
 
 TjKiKos, -77, -ov and 
 
 dwrjKlKos, -7], -ov, 
 
 as great, as old. 
 
 Remakk 1. The simple forms tSotos and toZos arc seldom used in Attic 
 prose ; toVos and toios are found in the phrase, toToj ^ toTos, PI. Phaedr. 271, 
 d, and elsewhere ; tJitos koX T6aos (PI. lb.) ; ^k tiJo-ou [so long time since), PL 
 Leg. 642, at end ; tJo-^ with a Comparative, coiTCsponding to the relative 2itw. 
 ». g. Th. 8, 24. X. Cy. 1. 6, 26. Vect. 4, 32. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
195.] 
 
 LENGTHENING OP THE PRONOUN. 
 
 119 
 
 
 (b) Adverb 
 
 ial Correlatives. 
 
 
 Interrogative. 
 
 Indefinite. 
 
 Demonstrative. 
 
 Eolative. 
 
 Indirect 
 Interrog. 
 
 -iroO; where? 
 
 worf, somewhere, 
 
 wanting (hie, 
 
 ou, where. 
 
 ifirou, where. 
 
 ,ubi?' 
 
 alioubi 
 
 ibi) 
 
 ubi 
 
 ubi 
 
 it6^evi whence? 
 
 ■iroSt4y,fiom some 
 
 wanting (hinc, 
 
 o^ey, wJience, 
 
 MStfV, 
 
 unde? 
 
 place, alicunde 
 
 inde) 
 
 unde 
 
 whence,uTi&e 
 
 iroi; whither ? 
 
 Tol, to some place. 
 
 wanting (eo) 
 
 of, whither, 
 
 &Koi,whitlu!r. 
 
 ■quo? 
 
 aliquo 
 
 
 quo 
 
 quo 
 
 jTi^Te ,• when ? 
 
 iroT6, some time. 
 
 t6tc, then, turn 
 
 Stc, when, 
 
 ^Kire, 
 
 quando'? ' 
 
 aliquando 
 
 
 qunm 
 
 when, 
 quando 
 
 wiiviKa ! quo 
 
 wanting 
 
 Tnvi- hoc 
 
 rivlxa, when. 
 
 SirrivlKa, 
 
 temporis punc- 
 
 
 K6Se 1 ipso 
 TTjyi- ' tcm- 
 
 quo ipso 
 
 when, quo 
 
 to ? quota ho- 
 
 
 tempore 
 
 ipso tem- 
 
 r4? 
 
 
 KavTtt J pore 
 
 
 pore 
 
 iSsj how? 
 
 iri6r, some how 
 
 oStu{5} ^Se, so 
 
 as, liow 
 
 Siras, how 
 
 TTTJ; whither? 
 
 iHi, to some place, 
 
 T^Se ( hither, 
 rairp \ or here 
 
 TJ, where. 
 
 Htttj. vjhere, 
 
 how? 
 
 thither, in some way 
 
 whither 
 
 whither. 
 
 Kem. 2. Tlie forms to express the idea of here, there (hie, ibi), wanting in 
 the Common language, are supplied by iprav^a, iy&dSe, and the idea of hence, 
 thence (hinc, inde), by Iv^iySs, ivTed^ep; ey&o and Iv^ev in the old and poetic 
 language have both a demonstrative and relative sense, but in prose only a 
 relative sense, except in certain phrases, c. g. Iv^a iHv — ivSra S4, hie, illie, 
 Iv^ev Kol Iv&ev, hinc, iUinc, and when the signification of place is changed to 
 that of time, e. g. ly^a Kdyei, then he says, iv^cv, thereupon. The forms ris, thus, 
 TTJ, hither, here, are poetic ; &s (instead of oSroii), is also for the most part 
 poetic ; in prose, it is confined almost wholly to certain phrases, e.g. koL Sis, vel 
 sic, ouS" (inifi') &s, ne sic quidem, and in comparisons, aij — &s, ut — sic, PI. Ep. 
 7. 530, d. Prot. 326, d. ; also iis aZv, so then, Th. 3, 37. 
 
 § 95. Lengthening of the Pronoun. 
 
 Some small words are so appended to the pronouns, for the purpose of giving 
 a particular turn to their signification, that they coalesce and form one word. 
 They are the following : — 
 
 (a) The enclitic ye is joined to the Personal pronouns of the first and second 
 person, in order to make the person emphatic, by putting him in contrast with 
 other3,je. g. ^ywye, I far my part. The pronoun lyd then draws back its accent 
 in the Uom. and Dat. e. g. iyaye, iiuivye, i^oiye, i/iiye, (riye. As y4 can be 
 joined with any other word, so also with any other pronoun, but it does not 
 foi-m one word with the pronoun, e. g. oZt6s ye. 
 
 (b) The pai-ticles S^ (most commonly B^irore), and oZv, are appended to 
 relatives compounded of interrogatives or indefinites, as well as to Stros, in 
 order to make the meaning general or indefinite, i. e. to extend it to everything 
 embraced in the object denoted by the pronoun, e. g. SsrisS^, SsTtsSjirore, dsris- 
 SjittotoSj/, dsTisovv, rrrisovv, Sriovy, whoever it be,.Ilaiow not who, nescio quis, qui- 
 cunque (Gen. oinivosovv or Inovovv, tjstivosovv, Dat. ifTtviovv or inaouv, etc.) ; — 
 ifoaosH, iTToaosoiv, io-osS^iroTc, quantuscunque ; — iTrv\tKosouy, however great, 
 how old soever; so also usTrepovy [comp. (d)]. 
 
 6 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
120 NATUKE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. [i 96. 
 
 (c) The snfRx 5 c is joined with some demonstratives for the pui-pose of 
 strengthening their demonstrative relation, e. g. 3Se, 5iSe, TiSe ; Toi6sSe ; To<r6s- 
 Se ; TTjAiKiJsSe, from to7os, T(i<roj, ttjAIkos, which change their accent after S e is 
 appended (^ 34, Rem. 3). 
 
 (d) The enclitic iripis appended to all relatives, in order to strengthen the 
 reference to a demonstrative, and thus to connect the relative more closely with 
 its antecedent ; hence it denotes, even who, which, the very wan, who, etc. e. g. 
 Ssirep, fjirep, irrep (Gen. avrep, etc.) ; Saosircp, oV6sTrcp (Gen. 'dirowrep, o'hmep, etc.); 
 S^mep, o^evTrep. 
 
 (e) The inseparable demonstrative f, is appended to demonstratives and some 
 few adverbs, always giving them a stronger demonstrative sense. It takes tha 
 acute accent (which yet, according to § 31, 1., is changed into the grave in con- 
 nected discourse) and absorbs every short vowel immediately preceding it, and 
 also shortens the long vowels and diphthongs : — 
 
 obroai, this here (hicce, celui-ci), alrriit, tout/, 
 
 Gen. TouToCf, ravrrtat, Dat. -rovript, Tovryt, PI. oinoti, canvui, ravri; 
 
 dSf, TiSi, roSt from '6Se ; uiSt from SiSe ; oinatri from oBtws ; 
 
 ivTeu^evt from ii/nv^ev ; iv^aSt from iv^dSe ; vvvi from vvv ; Sevpi from Sevpii. 
 
 CPIAPTER IV. 
 The Numerals . 
 
 ? 96. Nature and Division of Numerals. 
 
 1. Numerals express the relation of number and quantity. 
 They are divided into the foUovsring classes, according to their 
 signification : — 
 
 (a) Cardinals, which express a definite number absolutely, 
 and answer the question, how many ? e. g. one, two, three. The 
 first fijur Numerals and the round numbers from 200 (Siaicoo-ioi) 
 to 10,000 (/ivpiot) and their compounds, are declined; but all the 
 others are indeclinable. The thousands are expressed by 
 adverbial Numerals, e. g. Tpi'^CKxoi,, 3000. 
 
 (b) Ordinals, which denote a series, and answer the question, 
 ivhich one in the series ? AU have the tliree endings of adjec- 
 tives, -05, -Tj, -ov, except SeuVepos, which has -os, -a, -ov. All up 
 to 19, except 2, 7, 8, end in -to's and have the accent as near 
 as possible to the beginning of the word. From 20 upwaids 
 they end in -o-ro's. 
 
 Kemakk 1 . Adverbial Ordinals, which also denote a series, are expressed by 
 the Neut. Sing, or PI., with or without the article, but sometimes also with the 
 adverbial ending -as, e. g. irpaTov, t!> irparov, irpuTa, to TrpSna, irpdras. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
§ 96.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF NUMERALS. 121 
 
 (c) Numeral adverbs, wliich express hoiv often, or how many 
 times anything has happened, and which answer the question 
 how many times ? They are formed, except the first three from' 
 the ordinals with the ending -cJ«5, e. g. ,reKra«w, five times 
 (§ 98). 
 
 (d) Multiples, which show the number of parts of which 
 a whole is composed, and answer the question, Imv many fold? 
 All are compounded of ttXov^, and are adjectives of three end- 
 ings, -ovs, -Jj, -oZv (W 76, I, and 77). 
 
 airXovs, -r,, -ovy, single; SwXoDs (2), rpwAoCs (3), T«Tp«TAoBj (4), ■Tr^yrmKovs 
 (5), IJairXoBs (6), 4irTa7r\c.0s (7), &KTmr\ovs (8), inaxKavs (%), Seicair\ous (lOj, 
 fKaToi>Taw\oSs (100), x'A.wirAoBi (1000), (ttupiuTrAoSs (10,000). 
 
 Eem. 2. The adTerbial Multiples in answer to the question, how many 
 fold? or into how many parts? are farmed from the Cardinals with the ending 
 -XS. or -xv and -xus, e. g. ViVTaxa, Trevraxri, irevTaxHs. 
 
 (e) Proportionals, which denote a, proportion, and answer the 
 question, kow many times mare ? All are compounded with the 
 endings -TrXao-ios, -la, -wv (more seldom -irXaaiuiv, -ov, e. g. iKarov- 
 TaTTAao'UtiVj -ov) r — 
 
 SOTXoo-ioy, twice as much (as another which is taken as an unit), rprnxJunoi 
 (3), TerpoirAiJo-ioj (4), Trcj/ToirA.i(ffios (5), ^avKda-ios (6), Im-airX&rior (7), owra- 
 ir\d<rws (8), ivvm\i<rios (9), SiKa-K\6.<Tios (10), iKaTOVTairKiaws (100), x'Aio- 
 TAcJo-ios (1000), livpimXdnos (10,000). 
 
 (f ) Substantive Numerals, which express the abstract idea 
 of number. Except the first, all are formed from the Cardinals 
 witn the ending -a?, Gen. -aSos : — 
 
 71 fioyds (from ii6yas, only), more seldom ^ eyds, unity; Svds, duality; rpids (3), 
 Terpds (4), veyrds or Tre/iTrrtij (5), €|as (6), ePSo/ids (7), o^Six^s (8), ^wci^r (9), 
 ScKds (10), eiKij (20), rptajcds (30), reTTapcacovrds {40), TfyrriicovTds (50), e/co- 
 Toyri^j (100), X'Ak^j (1000), fivpids (10,000), Sio /ivpdSes (20,000). 
 
 Kem. 3. In addition to the Numerals mentioned above, there is still anothei 
 class, which does not, like those, express a definite number, bat either an 
 indefinite number or an indefinite quantity, e. g. eyioi, some; -rdyres, all; vo\- 
 ?oi, mam/ (4 77); oAi'701, few; iMyoy, o\tya, u, little; oi/Seis, no one; aiSey, 
 Siothing, etc. 
 
 2. Numerals, like pronouns, are divided, according to theii 
 signification and form, into Substantive, Adjective, and Adver- 
 bial Numerals, e. g. rpcts yj\3ov ; o TpiToi avrip ; rpt^. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
122 
 
 NUMLllALS. 
 
 [ii 97, 93 
 
 § 97. Numeral Signs. 
 
 1. The Numeral Signs are the twenty-four letters of the Greek alphabet, to 
 which three obsolete letters are added, viz. after e, BaG, or the Digamma F, ol 
 StT, s- ; tlie last character is taken from the figure s-, which is a mutilated form 
 of the Digamma, but -which has only an accidental resemblance to the abbre- 
 viation of <r (r) and t (§ 1, Rem. 2) ; — K^wa, 5, as the sign for 90 ; -So/ix?, 
 "% , as the sign for 900. 
 
 2. The first eight letters, i. e. from o to & with the BoD or 2tT, denote the 
 units; the following eight, i. e. from i to tt with the KdirTro, the tens; the last 
 eight, i. e. from p to w with the iaiMiri, the hundreds. 
 
 "s. Up to 999, the letters as numeral signs, are distinguished by « mark 
 placed over them, and when two or more letters stand together, as numeral 
 Bigns,'only the last has this mark. With 1000, the alphabet begins again, but 
 the letters are distinguished by a mark placed under them, thus, a' = 1, /i = 
 1000, i' = 10, ,1 = 10,000, ,t^ti0 = 5742, ,a«/t/3' = 1842, /)' = 100, ,p = 
 100,000. 
 
 
 { 98. Print 
 
 •Apal Cla. 
 
 sses of Numerals. 
 
 
 Cardinals. 
 
 
 Ordinals. 
 
 la' 
 
 eTs, jtifa, eV 
 
 
 irpuros, -1), -ov, primus, -a, -nm 
 
 2;8' 
 
 Sio 
 
 
 Ziirepos, -a, -ov 
 
 sy 
 
 rpeis, Tpla 
 
 
 Tpiros, -71, -ov 
 
 4 8' 
 
 Terrapcs, -a, or 
 
 riffffapiS-, -a. 
 
 Ttrapros, -■>), -ov 
 
 5e' 
 
 vivre 
 
 
 veimros, -ri, -ov 
 
 6s-' 
 
 H 
 
 
 fKTOS, ->), -ov 
 
 W 
 
 kirri 
 
 
 e65o(U)s, -71, -OV 
 
 8V 
 
 OKTli 
 
 
 6ydooSt -Tj, -ov 
 
 9a 
 
 iryea 
 
 
 ^VCLTOSy -77, -ov 
 
 10.' 
 
 ScKa 
 
 
 BeKOTOS, -7), -ov 
 
 11 lo' 
 
 ?./S€Ka 
 
 
 cvSeKaTos, -7j, -ov 
 
 12 10 
 
 S.(Sek> 
 
 
 SaSiicaTos, -7j, -ov 
 
 13<-» 
 
 Tpeij (Tpta) Kal BcKa' 
 
 rpiros, -7), -oy /col Sc'kotos, -tj- -o»' 
 
 14.5' 
 
 TeTTo/Jes(a) leal I 
 
 teKa' 
 
 TfTapTos, -7j, -ov tfol Se/caTOS, -77, -ov 
 
 15.6' 
 
 •KevreKalS^Ka 
 
 
 ire'fiTTTOs, -7), -ov Kal Se/coTOJ, -7), -o> 
 
 16 .r' 
 
 cKKaiSeKa 
 
 
 EKTOS, -7), -ov Kol BeKOTOJ, -7), -OV 
 
 17 if 
 
 sTTTaKai^eKa 
 
 
 £j8So/.os, -7j, -ov Kol Sc'kotos, -J), -ov 
 
 18.7)' 
 
 OKTuKaiSeKa 
 
 
 SySoos, -Tj, -ov Kal BeKoros, -7j, -ov 
 
 19 .a' 
 
 4weaKaiSeKa 
 
 
 evaros, -77, -ov Kal SeKaTos, -^, -ov 
 
 20 k' 
 
 elKOai(v) 
 
 
 (iKoaros, -i), -.Jv 
 
 * The rare Attic form TpisnalSexa is indeclinable. 
 ' The non- Attic form rearrapaKalSfKa is indeclinable. 
 
 ' The forms given from the 13th to the 19 th are preferable to Tpi5Ka.SEKoToi 
 UTTapaKa.SEKOTOs, TTEVTEKaiSeKOTOs, etc. ' 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
4 93.] 
 
 NTJMEKALS. 
 
 123 
 
 Cardjials 
 21 Ka' flKOtriv ets, fiia, %f 
 30 x' Tpi&Kovra 
 40 fi' TeTTap&Koma 
 50 >/ irevriiKotna, 
 60 I' E^'^fco^^a 
 70 o' ipSofiiiKovTa 
 
 80 i/ pySoiiKoma 
 90 5' iveviiKovra 
 100 / l/caTi};' 
 200 r/ SidKf^cTiotj -tti, -a 
 
 300 T* rpiaic6<rioi, -oi, -a 
 
 400 i/ rerpoKiftnor, -ai, -a 
 
 500 ^' 5rE>ToK(!(rioi, -at, -a 
 
 600 x' ^Ifi/coVioi, -ai, -o 
 
 700 ^' €7rTdK<J(noi, -ot, -a 
 
 800 flj' OKraK6(Tioif -at, -a 
 900 '!^ ' 4yyaK6(noi, -oi, -a 
 
 1000 ^o X^^""> ■""> "" 
 
 2000 ,i8 Sisx'hioi, -at, -a 
 
 3000 /y Tpisx*^"", -ai, -a 
 
 4000 ^S TerpaKtsxi^totf -at, -a 
 
 5000 ^6 TTcyra/ctsx^Atoi, -oi, -a 
 
 6000 ^r e|d/c{5x(Aioi, -o£, -a 
 
 7000 ^^ eTTTaKisx^^tot, -at, -a 
 
 8000 ,1) OKTOKisxiA"") -ai, -« 
 
 9000 Jd ifvaKtsxi^ft, -m, -a 
 
 10,000 / fivptot, -at, -a 
 
 20,000 ,K Sisfiipioi, -Oi, -o 
 
 100,000 iP SeieaKtsiiiptoi, -at, -a 
 
 1,000,000 1/ ktcarovToKtsiiiptot, -ai, -o 
 
 8,000,000 Kf itoKotrtoKtsftfipiot, -at, -a 
 
 Ordinals. 
 ei/coiTTlir, -^, -hv, irpuroi, -|, -o» 
 rptaxoaT6s, -fi, -iv 
 TerrapaKotrris, -"f], -6v 
 irevTiiicoaTis, -f), -6v 
 ilaxottT&s, -i, -iv 
 ipSonrjKotrrSs, -i), -6v 
 oySoijKoa-Tis, -^, -6y 
 
 iKarq<7T6s, -fi, •6v 
 Staiio(rio(rT6s, -^, -6y 
 TpiaKoffioffT6s, -^, -oy 
 TerpaKOfftotTTSs, -Vj, -6v 
 TreyraKOffioffris, -^, -6y 
 e^oKOfftoffrSs, -•/}, -6y 
 etrTaKOffiOfTTSs, -^, -oy 
 OKTaKomoiTT6s, -ii, -oy 
 iyvoKotrtoffTis, -^, -6y 
 Xt\ioirT6s, -ii, -oy 
 Stsxt^totrrSs, -ii, -iv 
 rpisxt\io(rT6s, -^, -iy 
 
 TfTpOKlSXt^tOffTis, -4), -i» 
 
 ireyTaKtsxt^toffris, -7], -6v 
 f^aKisxt^.toirT6s, -ii, -iv 
 eirTo/riJX'AiO<rT<is, -i\, -6y 
 
 OKTOKiSXlAWKTTlir, -^, -iv 
 
 ewaKisx'^"""'(!s, -^, -&y 
 livptoaris, -4], -6y 
 Stsfivptoo'TSs, -^, -6y 
 SeKaKtsp-vptofTTOs, -^, '6y 
 €KaroyTaKtsjj.vpiot7T6sj -•/}, -6v 
 Zia.Ko(TtaKt$p,vptoffT6s, -^, -6y, 
 
 1 SttoI, once 
 
 2 its, twice 
 
 3 rpls 
 
 ' 4 rETpdKis 
 b TreyrdKis 
 
 6 i^iKts 
 
 7 eirrdKi^ 
 
 8 OKiixts 
 
 9 ^yyedxts, ivdxtj 
 
 10 Sexditis 
 
 1 1 eVScKcS/cis 
 
 12 Sa>SEK(£/cis 
 
 Numeral Adverbs. 
 
 13 TpisKat^Gfcdxts 
 
 14 T6TTopesKa(5e/C({Kis 
 
 15 ireyTeKoiSeKilicts 
 
 16 eKKaiSeKaKts 
 
 17 iTTTOKOiSe/CciKif 
 
 18 oKTCtf/cotSe/cc^/cf; 
 
 19 iyyeaKatSexaKts 
 
 20 e'tKOtrdKts 
 
 21 etKOffdKts aira^ 
 
 22 clKOffdKts dis 
 30 rpiaKoyrdKis 
 
 40 reTTapaKoyrdKis 
 
 50 TreyTTiKoyrdKis 
 60 e|TjKOl/TaKts 
 70 ePSoiaiKoyrdKU 
 80 oySojjKOVTiJ/cii 
 90 iyeyTiKoyroKts 
 100 e/coToyTcEtfis 
 200 SiaKoa'idKts 
 300 TpiaKotrtdjcts 
 1000 X'A."^'"S 
 2000 Sisx'AioKiJ 
 10,000 /ivpidKts 
 20,000 StsfivptdKts, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
124 
 
 UEMAUKS ON THE NUMERALS. [i 99- 
 
 } 99. Remarks. 
 
 1. The rarer subordinate forms of 13, 14, etc., used by later wiiters, arc 
 JeKarpeu, Neut. SeKOTpfo, SeKarirTapes, -a, SsKairevTe, etc. 
 
 2. Mipioi, 10,000, when Paroxytone {M-vpioi), signifies innumerable. 
 
 3. In compound numerals, the smaller number either precedes the larger, 
 and then always with ko(, or it follows the larger, usually with W, sometimes 
 without it. The fii-st order corresponds with the usage in English, e. g. five 
 and twenty; the second only in part, e. g. twenty-five, e. g. 
 
 25 : irivTi Kol ^K.oai(v), or eIkoiti koI xevTc, 
 345 ; TreVre koL rerrapaKoyTa Ka! rpuuiiinoi, or TpiaK. text. koI it. 
 
 The same holds of the Ordinals, e. g. 
 
 irep-TTTOS Kol e:/coffT(Ss, or ei/coCT^s Kol ttc^tttos. 
 
 4. The tens compounded with 8 or 9 are frequently expressed in the form of 
 suUraction, by means of the paxtidple of Sciy, to want, which agrees with tha 
 larger number, e. g. 
 
 49 : ircvrljKavTa. kvhs SiovTa eri;', undequinquaginta anni, 
 48 : ireVT'liKoi'Ta Si;o£i> deoyra err), duodeguinquaginta anni, 
 39 :' r9j€s /uas Siovaai TsnapiKOVTa, undeqnadraginta naves. 
 
 So with the Ordinals, e. g. 
 
 49 : ivhs Seojc veyrrixotTTiis arlip, undequinquagesimus vir. 
 
 5. Tractions are usually expressed by laepo^ or iio7pa. These words, as 
 denominators of the fraction, are put in the Gen., depending on the numeral 
 which denotes the numerator. If they are expressed as denominators, they are 
 understood with the numeral denoting the numerator ; if they are expressed 
 as numerators, they are understood with the numeral denoting the denominator, 
 e. g. \ is Tuv iriyre ftepav rk Si5o [/tepij], or ray trsyre [jjLepioy] tA Sio jiip^, fWG 
 parts of the five; | is ray oxrii noipay oi iriyre [funpai], or tuv oxTcb [jioipay] al 
 tio lioTpai. But one half is expressed by compounds with fiiii, e. g. iijiiSapetK6v, 
 half a daric ; so in the PI. rpia, ireyre ruiiSapeiKa, a daric and a half, two darks 
 and a half. — Fractions are also expressed by an ordinal with /iopioy or fiipos, 
 e. g. Tpi.Trip.6piov or Tplrov fj.4pos = J, irepi.Trroy y.4pos = ^ ; a mixed number is 
 also expressed by ^i preceded by a numeral, e. g. Trccre ^iniSapeiKcJ = 2j darics, 
 also by i-rri prefixed to an ordinal, e. g.. MrpiToy — Ij, ini-KeimToy = 1^. 
 
 6. The Cardinal numbers compounded with aiy are equivalent to the Latin 
 distributives, c. g. triySvo (bini), two together, two at a time, each two, vvyrpia 
 (temi), a-ijiireyTe (quini), etc. 
 
 ' Fifty years, wanting one. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
§ 100.] NATURE AND DIVISION OF THE ADVERB. 125 
 
 7. Declension of the first four Numerals : — 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ets /lia eV 
 
 6t5a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 iv^s /"OS evds 
 
 SvMv (very seldom Sueii/) 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ivl fu^ kvi 
 
 Sv(ui> hvirilv] Ionic and Th. 8, 101.) 
 
 Ace. 
 
 eva fiiav eV 
 
 Sio 
 
 Nam. 
 
 Tfsis Neut Tfiia 
 
 Terrapes, or r4<T<TapeS Neut. Terrapa 
 TeTTopaiv 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Tpuai 
 
 Dat 
 
 r()uri{,v) 
 
 TeTTap0':{i') 
 
 Ace. 
 
 TpeEt Nent. rpui 
 
 TCTTOpaS Neut. TtTTOpO 
 
 Eemaisk. Lite rfs are also declined suScfs aad ;«j8efe, no «ne ; like cTs too 
 they have the irregular accent, e. g. abSels, eiSeiila, oftSeV, Gen. ouSey6s, ouSt- 
 fiiSs, Dat. oiSevi, otSe/uj, etc. ; but in the PI. eiiSeves {pjiStves), -ivav, -da-i{v), 
 idms. Comp. farther, 4 €5, 3 (c). The form 8i!<u, instead of Sio, seems to be 
 foreign to the Attic dialect. Avo is often used as indeclinable in all the Cases. 
 "Afvpu. boti, is declined like Sio, Gen. and Dat. ^ij.^o7v, Acc. iji^a. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 The Adverb. 
 
 ^ 100. Nature ■amd division of the Adverb. 
 AdveAs (§§ 38 and 314) are indeclinable words, denoting 
 tlie relatj«ms of place, time^ manner, modality, intensity, and 
 repetition. They are formed either from essential words 
 (§ 38, 3), viz. Substantives, Adjectives, Participies, or from 
 prm.al words, ^'iz. Pronouns and Numerals, or they are 
 primitive words, e. g. tw, ,i/4> i^> ^^' ^'' «"' ^*"- 
 
 (a) Adverbs of pfaee, e. g. qiipav6^^v<, coelitus, iravTaxn, ubivis; 
 
 i(b) Adverbs of time, -e. g. viKTiap, noctu, i/w, nunc ; 
 
 id) Adverbs of maimer, e. g. KoiSs, o%r<t(s) ; 
 
 <d) Adverbs of wadxAiLy, vAich, e. g. r«( and o¥,k), express an affirmaion and 
 
 B«7a«K)n, or e. g. ^r, Td£, ^, ^ M". ^> ''<"^^^ ''f' '^'^ '"*'"■""' **''• '''"''' 
 eiL^ress certainty, dejiniteness, uncertainty, condiiiomHti/ ; 
 
 (e) Adverbs of tnfenstiy and Jreqmrmj, e. g. /iiiAa, iriro, iroAu, S<n»', etc. rpls, 
 
 ibree times; oS&is, again; woAAtSmr, o/tei. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
126 
 
 PORMATION OP ADVERBS. [i 101 
 
 § 101. Formation of Adverbs. 
 
 1. Most Adverbs are formed from adjeotivfe by the ending 
 -0)5. This ending is annexed to the pure stem of the adjective ; 
 hence, as the stem of adjectives of the third Dec. appears in the 
 Gen., and as adjectives in the Gen. PI. are accented like 
 adverbs, the following rule for the formation of adverbs from 
 adjectives may be given : — 
 
 Ckamge -wv, the endirig of the adjective in the Gen. Pl.,into -<us, 
 
 e.g.. 
 
 <pl\-os, lovely, Gen. PI. pih-ay Adv. <l>lK-as 
 
 KaX-6s,fair, " koK-wv koK-us 
 
 Kulpi-os, timdy, " Ktupi-mv Koipl-as 
 
 avK{6-os)ods, simple, " ajr\{6-uv)av airK{6-as)as 
 
 illy{o-os)ovs, beneoolent, " (e!iv6-av) iivav (^6-ais) eSms 
 
 iras, all, vavris, " irdvr-av irdvT-as 
 
 irdtjipay, prudent, " aa^pov-av ffa^piv-m 
 
 Xa-pifis, pleasant, " x^'P^^"'''''"' X"?'^'""'"^ 
 
 raxis, swift, " -rax^-av -rax^-as 
 
 fieyas, great, " /j-sydK-ay /teydK-as 
 
 a\vHs, true, " a\7i&(6-«i')Sv oXrj&(t-«j)Ss 
 
 ffwiiSnis, accustomed, " {avvriSri-iiiv) (TvirliSray {ffwii^e-m) (rvyliStus. 
 
 Remabk 1. On the accent of compounds in -iiSas, and of tlie compound 
 avrdpKas, see § 59, Kem. 4, also on the accent of eSyas, instead of eivas, § 49, 
 3. On the comparison of Adverbs, see 5 85. 
 
 2. In addition to the adverbs with the ending -us, there are 
 many which have the endings of the Gen., Dat., or Ace. 
 
 (a) The Gen. ending appears in many adverbs in -ijs and -ov, 
 e. g. Ifijs, t^e^s, in order; i^amvrjs, suddenly; ttov, ahcubi; irou, 
 ubi ? oTTovj ov, ubi ; airov, ibi ; ovSa/xov, nowhere. 
 
 (b) The Dat., or an obsolete Abl. or Locative* ending, occurs 
 in the following adverbs, 
 
 (a) In adrerbs with the ending -i, e. g. ^pi, in the morning, comp. ^p, spring, 
 aupt, unseasonably ; ckijti (Dor. ckuti), vl4k7iti, eKoyrt, hsKovri; in adverbs 
 of manner in -ei and -i, from adjectives in -qs and -r)s, and almost exclu- 
 sively in adverbs compounded of a privative and irSs or airSs, c. g. 
 ■iravopp.d and vavopfii. On the use of both forms, see Large Grammar, 
 Tart I, § 363 (,8). 
 
 ' The Locative Case, is one which denotes the filace where 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 102.] 
 
 CLASSES OP THE VERB. 127 
 
 iP) In local adverbs in -oT, commonly derived from substantives of the sec- 
 ond Dec, e. g. 'l<rSy/iot from 'I<rS-/t<fs, nvStoT from TlvSiti, Mevapo? (ri 
 Miyapa), neigawT, KiKvym? from ^ KUvym), oT, oVoi, quo, whither, oiKoi, 
 domi, from oTkos. 
 
 Kem. 2. Adverbs in -o7, derived from substantives, denote an indcflnito 
 mere, but those derived from pronouns commonly denote the direction whither, 
 yet sometimes the indefinite lehere. 
 
 (V) In local adverbs in -ai. This ending occurs only in a few forms, e. g. 
 XoA«oi, humi, iriKiu. To this form corresponds the PI. locative form 
 -J) 0-1 {y), or where i precedes, -airiv, derived from substantives of the first 
 Dec. ; this ending originally belonged to plural substantives only, but 
 was transferred later to substantives in the singular number, e. g, 0j);37j- 
 a-i{v) from ©ijiSai, 'Adfivv<ri{i>) from 'A^i/'ai, n\aTaitt!Ti(v) from UKwraial; 
 nepycurriaL{y) from nepyturii, 'OAupariaiTiM from '0\v/mla. 
 
 (S) In _adverbs in -»; and -d, e. g. &Uat, erefni, 7r€f)i, on foot; Kpv^, KiApa, 
 *(k5, temere ; o68a/i7), Irtiwola, pvhlice ; Komri, in common ; iSla, privatim ; 
 ko/uSt), diligenter ; also ir^, Sittj, irirTn, ?, t?, t^Se, toutj), etc. ; i; and a com- 
 monly have au Iota subscript. 
 
 (c) The Ace. ending occurs in the following forms, 
 
 (a) In the endings -i)v and -av, e. g. irp^v; puucpiv, far ; irepay and we^ijc, 
 
 trans (but wipa, ultra), etc.; so also of substantives, o. g. Slmiy, instar; 
 
 ixiiiiv (acme), scarcdy; Supeiv, gratis. 
 {P) In the ending -oy, e. g. SripSy, diu; (r-tififpoy, hodie; aSpioy, to-morrow. 
 (7) In the endings -iov, -Sriy, -So {adverbs of manner), e. g. airoaxfUv, 
 
 cominits ; ;xai'8({i', hnrorpoxiS^y, mroimSi. 
 (S) In some substantive forms in the Ace. of the third Dec, e. g. x^^P'i', ff 
 
 the sake of; TpoMa, gratuitously. 
 
 CHAE'TEK VI. 
 
 The Verb. 
 
 Nature and Division op the Vekb. 
 i 102. Classes of the Verb. 
 
 1. The Verb expresses an action or state, which is af« 
 firmed of a subject, c. g. the father writes, the rose blooms^ 
 the hoy sleeps, God is loved. 
 
 2. Verbs are divided into the following classes : — 
 
 (1) Active verbs, which express an action, that the sub- 
 ject itself performs or manifests, e. g. ypd^m, to write ; 
 ^aXXo)j to bloom (comp. § 248) ; 
 
 (2) Middle or Reflexive verbs, which express an action 
 that the subject performs on itself, the subject being, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
128 VEKBS. — TENSES. [i 103 
 
 therefore, both agent and object, e. g. ^ovKevofiai, 1 
 advise myself, I deliberate ; 
 (3) Passive verbs, which express an action that the sub- 
 ject receives from another object, e. g. rvirTo/Mai t^Tr^ 
 TWO?, T am smitten by some one, 
 3. Verbs, which are used only in the middle form, are 
 callt-d Deponent. They have either a reflexive or intransi- 
 tive meaning. They are divided into Middle Deponents, 
 which have a middle form for their Aorist and Ftitm-e, e. g, 
 ^apl^o/d,ai, grattficor, Aor. e')(api.<Td/ji,r]v, Fut. ■)(apwv/iai, ; and 
 into Passive Deponents, which have a Passive form for 
 their Aorist, but commonly a middle form for their Fut, 
 e. g. iv'^vfji.eo/j.ai,, mecum reputo, Aor. ive'^v/M'^'^tjv, mecum 
 reputavi, Fut. iv'^v/j-ijaofj.at, mecum reputabo. Comp. § 197. 
 
 § 103. The Tenses. 
 
 1. Tht Tenses denote the time of the action of the verb. 
 The Greek has the following Tenses : — 
 
 I. (1) Present, ^ovkevco, T advise, 
 
 (2) Perfect, ^e^ovKevKa, I have advised; 
 II. (3) Imperfect, i^oiXevov, I was advising, 
 
 (4) Pluperfect, i^e/3ovKevK6i,v, I had advised, 
 
 (5) Aorist, i^ovXevaa, T advised (indefinite) ; 
 III. (6) Future, ^ovKevcrm, I shall or will advise, 
 
 (7) Future Perfect (almost exclusively in the mid« 
 die form), ^e^ovXevaofiai, I shall have advised my 
 self, or / shall have been advised, 
 
 2. AH the Tenses may be divided into, 
 
 a. Principal tenses : Present, Perfect, and Future; 
 
 b. Historical tenses: Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist 
 
 Remark. The Greek has two forms for the Perf. and Pluperf. Act., two for 
 the simple Put. Pass., and two eaoli for the Act,, Pass., and Md. Aorist ; these 
 two forms may be distinguished as Primary and Secondary tenses ; i. e. the 
 first Perfect is a primary tense, the second Perfect «, secondary tense, etc. 
 Still, only a very few verbs have both forms ; most verbs construct the above 
 tenses with one or the other form, but not with both. No verb lias all tho 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
M 104, 105.] VERBS. MODES. PAKTIOIPIALS. 12''j 
 
 tenses. Pure verbs (§ 108, 5) form, with vciy few exceptions, only tins primary 
 tenses. Mute and liqnid verbs (§ 108,5) may form both the primary and 
 secondaiy tenses, biit no verb has all die forms iii use. The Fut. Perf., which 
 is fonnd in bat few verbs, is entirely wanting in liquid verbs. It is seldom 
 found in verbs which have the temporal augment (§ 121), e. g. aip4a, to take, 
 ^/yfia-a/uu, PI. Pret. 338, c, Sm/idm, to -disJmnor:, iitrijidtrofuu, Dem. 19, 284. 
 
 i 104. The Modes. 
 
 The Modes denote the manner in which the action of 
 the verb is represented, whether as a direct affirmation, a 
 ■condition, or a command, etc. (comp. § 258, seq.) The 
 Oreek has the following Mod«s : — 
 
 I. The Indicative, which malces a direct affirmation, e. g 
 the rose blooms, bloomed, will bloom. 
 
 II. The Subjunctive, which expresses what is merely 
 •conceived, or conditional. The Subjunctive of the his- 
 torical tenses is called the Optative. Comp. yfid^oi/jLt with 
 scriberem. 
 
 Eemakk. See § 257, 2 (a), *(b,'), and Rem. 1, for tlie manner in which the 
 Aorist may use both forms of the Subj., and how the Puture may have an 
 Optative. 
 
 III. Tlie Imperative, which expresses a command, e. g. 
 ^ovKeve, &dvise. i 
 
 § 105. Parlicipials (Infinilive ^wnd JParticiple'j 
 
 Besides the modes, the verb has two forms, which, as 
 they partake both of the nature oi the verb and also of 
 the nature of tiie substantive and adjective, are called 
 Participials : — 
 
 (a) The Infinitive, which is the substantive participial, 
 e.g.^^eXw.^ovXevei.n/, Iwis/i to advise^ and to ^ovXeveiv, 
 the advising- 
 
 (b) The Participle, which is the adjective participial, e. g. 
 ^ovXevcop av-qp, U cotmsellor. 
 
 Rbmaek. These two participials maybe called verbum infinitum; the ro 
 Biaining forms of th<3 verb, verbum Jinitum, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
130 VERBS. STEM, AUGMENT, AND KEDUPLICATION. [H 106-103 
 
 § 106. The Persons and Numbers. 
 
 The personal forms of the verb show whether the sub- 
 ^3et of the verb be the speaker himself (/, we, first person) ; 
 or a person or thing addressed (thou, you, second person) ; or 
 a person or thing spoken of (he, she, it, third person). They 
 also show the relation of number: Singular, Dual, and 
 Plural (comp. § 41, 1), e. g. ^ovXeva, I, the speaker, advise; 
 ^ovXevea, thou, the person addressed, advisest ; ySouXeiJet, he, 
 she, it, the person or thing spoken of, advises ; ^ovXeverov, 
 ye two, the persons addressed, advise ; ^ovkevovai, they, the 
 persons spoken of, advise. 
 
 Kemakk 1. The student will at once observe that the ending, or persona! 
 forms of the Greek verb, determines the person and number -without the subject 
 being expressed. So in Latin. But in English, as the verb is not varied so 
 as to indicate the person and number of itself, the subject must be expressed. 
 
 Rem. 2. There is no separate form for the first Pers. Dual throughout the 
 Act., and none for the Pass. Aorists ; in these instances it is expressed by the 
 form of the first Pers. PI. 
 
 i 107. Conjugation. 
 
 Conjugation is the inflection of the verb in its Persons, 
 JSIumbers, Modes, Tenses, and Voices. The Greek has 
 two forms of conjugation, that in -co, which includes much 
 the larger number of verbs, e. g. ^ovXev-co, and the older, 
 origiaal conjugation in -fit,, e. g. urrrj-/M, to station. 
 
 Conjugation of Vekbs in -» 
 
 i 108. Stem, Augment, and Reduplication. — Char- 
 acteristic. 
 
 1. Every verb is divided into the stem, wliich contains the 
 ground-form of the verb, and into the syllables of formation, by 
 which the }-elations of person, number, tense, etc. are denoted, 
 The stem is found in most verbs in -lo by cutting off the ending 
 of the first Pers. Ind. Pres., e. g. ySouXcu'-w, Xiy-ta, rpi/S-m. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 109, llO.] VEIIBS. — INFLECTION AND TENSE-ENUINGS, 131 
 
 2. The syllables of formation are either annexed as endings 
 to the stem, and are then called inflection-endings, e. g. /SmiXev-m, 
 fiovXev-a-ai, P(yv\ev-mit.ai, or are prefixed to the stem, and are 
 then called Augment and Eeduplication, e. g. i-l3ovXevov, I was 
 advising; ^e-^ovXevKa, I have advised. For a change in the stem 
 of many verbs, e. g. Tpiir-u>, Tt-rpoiji-a, l-Tpd-n-rp/, see § 140. 
 
 3. The Augment is £ prefixed to the stem of verbs which 
 begin with a consonant, e. g. i-fiovXcva-a, I advised; but in 
 verbs which begin with a vowel, it consists in lengthening the 
 first stem-vowel, a and £ into rj (and in some cases into £i), i and 
 V into i and ii, and o- into w. The Augment implies past time, 
 and hence belongs to all the historical tenses (Imperfect, 
 Aorist, and Pluperfect) ; but it is confined to the Indicative. 
 
 4. Reduplication consists in repeating the fii'st stem-conso- 
 nant with e, when the stem begins with a consonant ; but when 
 the stem begins with a vowel, the Eeduphcation is the same as 
 the augment, e. g. fie-^ovXevKa, I have advised; 'iKerevKa, I have 
 supplicated, from "XKerev-a. The Eeduphcation denotes the cont' 
 pletion of the action, and hence belongs to the Perfect, Pluper- 
 fect, and Future Perfect. For a fuller view of the Augment 
 and Eeduplication, see § 119, sq. 
 
 5. The last letter of the stem, after the ending -tu is cut ofl, 
 is called the verb-characteristic, or merely the characteristic, 
 because, according to this, verbs in -u are divided into different 
 classes ; according as the characteristic is a vowel, a mute, or 
 a Uquid, verbs are divided into pure, mute, and liquid verbs, e. g. 
 PovXev-io, Ti/jLa-ui (pure verbs), Tpi/3-ui (mute), cf>aiv-(a (Uquid). 
 
 i 109. Inflection- endings. 
 
 Ill the inflection-endings, so far as they denote the relation 
 of tense, mode, and person, there are three different elements : 
 the tense-characteristic, the mode-vowel, and the personal- 
 ending, e. g. /SouXeu-cr-o-jnat. 
 
 i 110. (a) Tense-characteristic and Tense-endings. 
 
 1. The tense-characteristic is that consonant which stands 
 next after the stem of the verb, and is the characteristic mark 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
132 VSEBS. — PERSONAL-ENDtNGS AND MODE-VOWELS. [^ 111 
 
 of the tense. la pure verbs, k is the tense-characteristic of thu 
 Perf. and Pliip. lad. Act., e. g. 
 
 the characteristic of the Fut. And. first Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
 the Flit. Perf. is a-, e. g. 
 
 Pov\ei-&-u $ov\eifr-oiiai 0€-0»vKci-ir-oiaU 
 
 the characteristic of the fijrst Aor. Pass, is .^; the first F«t 
 Pass, has, besides the tense-characteristic *, the ending of the 
 first Aor. Pass. -3r], thus, 
 
 The pfunary tenses only (J 103, Eem.) have a tense-charac> 
 teristic. 
 
 2. The tense'characteristic, together with the endiMg fdllovf- 
 ing, is called the tense-ending. Thus, e, g. in the form /8oi> 
 \eva-ta, o- is the tense-characteristic of the Fut., and the syllable 
 9-0) is the tense-ending of the Fut. The steni of the verb, 
 together -with the tense-characteristic and the augment or 
 reduphcation, is called the tense-stem. Thus, e. g, in ifiov- 
 kev(r-a, iJSovXevcr is the tense-stem of the first Aor. Act 
 
 f 111. (b) Personal-endings and Modc-voweh. 
 
 The personal-ending denotes the person of the verb, and 
 takes a different form according to the different persons and 
 numbers; the mode-voWel connects the tense-stem and the 
 personal-ending, and takes a different form according to the 
 different modes, e. g. 
 
 1 Pers. Sing. Ind. Pres. M. fiovKii-o-fiai Subj. ^ov\^i-a-iiat 
 
 3 " " " 3?ut. " Pov\ev-<r-e-Tca Opt. 0ov\e6-(T-oi-TO 
 
 1 " PI. " Pres. ■' 0ov\fv6-ftf^a Subj. ;8oi;A.Eu-i6-/ie»« 
 
 2 " " " " " fitiv\ei-i-a^e « fiav\fi-n-ff»e 
 
 1 " Sing. « A. I. " iPov\fv-o-i-fLr,r " BovK^i^-oi-ixm. 
 
 ^ " " " " " ^fiovKfi-tr-a^To Opt. Pon\ei-iT-ai-To. 
 
 RemakK. In the above forms, fiov\e» is the verb-stem, and jSou^eu, $ou\ev(F, 
 and movXevo- are the tense-stems, namely, of the Pres., Fut, and first Aor, 
 Mid.; the endings -/.a., -rat, etc., are the personal-endings, and the vowels o, 
 «, ., 01, t; a, oi, are the mode-vowels. The modc-vowcis 6 and a of the Indie 
 arc Icngtlicncd into ?| and w in the Subj. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
112, 
 
 113.] mode-Vowels. — peiisonal-endings. 
 112. Summary of the Mode-vowels. 
 
 133 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subj. 
 
 Opt 
 
 Impr. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 Person. 
 
 Pres. and i'ut. 
 Active. 
 
 Impf., A. 11. A. and 
 M.andPrs.andJT.M. 
 
 Act. Mid. 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 1). 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 U) 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 u 
 
 01 
 
 _ 
 
 6t, cr 
 
 Wf 
 
 €1 
 
 e 
 
 6 
 
 
 € 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 
 V 
 V 
 a 
 
 V 
 
 ot 
 ot 
 
 01 
 01 
 
 6 
 
 , e 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 
 6 
 
 17 
 
 ft) 
 
 
 01 
 
 ot 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 € 
 
 6 
 
 7? 
 
 •n 
 
 01 
 
 € 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 to 
 
 01 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Optative. 
 
 llnpr. 
 
 Infinitive. . 
 
 Person. 
 
 Plpf. 
 
 A. I. M- 
 
 A. I. A. and 
 Pf.A. 
 
 A. I. A. 
 andM. 
 
 A. I. A. andM. 
 
 A. I. A. ana M. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 €£ 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 at 
 
 _ 
 
 2. 
 
 61 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 at 
 
 a 
 
 
 3. 
 
 
 a 
 
 6 
 
 at 
 
 u 
 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 El 
 El 
 61 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 d 
 d 
 
 d 
 d 
 d 
 
 at 
 ai 
 at 
 
 ' at 
 
 a 
 a 
 
 Participle. 
 
 A. I. A. and M. 
 and P£ A. 
 
 2. 
 
 61 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 at 
 
 a 
 
 a 
 
 3. 
 
 («)e 
 
 a 
 
 d 
 
 at 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 } 113. Personal-endings 
 
 of Verbs in -w. 
 
 I. Active Form. 
 
 n. Middle Form. | 
 
 A. Ind. and Subj. 
 the Princ. tenses. 
 
 B. Ind. and Opt. 
 
 the Hist, tenses. 
 
 A. Ind.andSubj. 
 (he Princ. tenses. 
 
 B. Ind. and Opt. 
 the Hist, tenses. 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 Dual 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 r 
 
 TOJ' 
 TOV 
 
 /lev 
 
 Te 
 
 (vTi) (rt{r) 
 
 V, Opt. lu 
 s 
 
 TOV 
 TtJV 
 /ifV 
 
 Te 
 
 y, o-av 
 
 fiat 
 
 cat 
 
 Tat 
 
 fie^ov 
 
 aSiov 
 
 IT&OV 
 
 /lefto 
 (r&6 
 VTat (aToi) 
 
 nmv 
 
 trb, 
 
 TO 
 
 fiedov 
 tr^ov 
 cr^riv 
 
 vTo (aro] 
 
 C. Imperative. 
 
 C. Imperative. 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 Dual 2. 
 Plur. 2. 
 
 3. -w 
 
 TOV 3. loJl' 
 
 Te 3. Twcrav 
 
 Sing. 2. (iTo) 3. aSra 
 
 Dual 2. aSrov 3. crS>av 
 
 Plur. 2. <r&6 3. crdairav, ai^av 
 
 D. Infinitive. 
 
 D. Infinitive. 
 
 » Pres., Fnt., and Aor. II. 
 
 vai Perf. Act. and Aor. I. and II. Pass. 
 
 1 Aor. I. 
 
 (rftai 
 
 E. Participle. 
 
 E. Participle. 
 
 Stem vT, vrith exception of the Perf, 
 whose stem ends in -ot. n- -.r,^^^ h„ n/i,>, 
 
 fifvos, fifvri, lievov ; 
 ,JM»H. ^eV);, /leVoi/, Peif. 
 
134. PERSONAL-ENUINGS. [} 114. 
 
 Remaek. The Personal-endings follow so directly the modc-rowcl, and aro 
 8o closely joined to it, that often the two do not appear separately, but aro 
 united together, e. g. pov\ei<r-Tis, instead of /3ouA«iiir-7)-is, $ov\ei-ri, instead of 
 BovKei-i-ai {a ande coalescing and i being subscribed). 
 
 i 114. Difference between the Personal-endings in 
 the Principal and the Historical Tenses. 
 
 1. The difiFerence between the Principal and Historical tenses is important. 
 The Principal tenses (Pres., Perf., and Put.) foi-m the second and third Pers. 
 Dual with the same ending -ov, e. g: PovXei-e-Tov fimXei-e-rov ; jSouAciJ-e-irS^ox 
 $ov\ei-e-(T^ov \ the Historical tenses also form the second Pers. Dual in -oy, 
 but the third in -tj y, e. g. 
 
 c;3ou\ei5-6-To J/ ipov\ev-4-Tijyt i$ov\ei-s-tr3rov i0ov\ev-4-a^7jyt 
 
 2. The Principal tenses form the third Pers. PI. Act. in -(ri(y), from -j/ti, 
 ■i/a-t, and the Mid. in -vrai; the Historical tenses in the Active, in -y, and Mid, 
 in -yro, e. g. 
 
 Pav\si-o-v cr L = Pov\fi-oviri{y) iPoihiv-O'V 
 Bou\e{i-o-yrat i^ov\ev-o'VTO, 
 
 Bemaek. In 0ov\eioi'(ri the v is dropped, and as a compensation the o pre- 
 ceding it is lengthened ; so also in the Put. Act. Comp. 116, 5. 
 
 3. The Principal tenses in the Sing. Mid. end in -/lai, -<rai, -toi ; the Histori- 
 cal in 'fiTjyf -ffo, -TO, e. g. 
 
 $ov\ei-o-nai ipovKeu-i-fiTiP 
 
 Pov\ev-€-(rai = $ov\ei-Ti, 40ou\ci-e-(r o = lPov\ei-ov , 
 
 Pov\ei-e-Tai ifiovKei-e-r o. 
 
 4. The Pisrsonal-endings of the Subj. in the Principal tense? aro like thos« 
 of the Ind. in ihe same tenses ; the Opt. are lite those of the Ind. of the Hii- 
 torical tenses ; 
 
 2 and 3 Du. In 3 
 3 PI. " 
 
 I. Pr. 0ov\eis-TOv 
 0ov\ei€'(r^oy 
 
 Subj. j8ouAei5?j-Tov 
 
 1 Sing. " 
 
 2 '* " 
 
 3 " " 
 2 and 3 Da. " 
 
 Pou\eio-vra 
 ■' ^ouAei5o-jcioi 
 ' /SouAelt-T) 
 " /3ouAei!E-Tai 
 
 " jSoi/Aetlw-j'Toi 
 " fiov\eia-fiat 
 
 '■ fiov\eiTi-Tai 
 Opt. Pov\eioiToy, -oi-Ti)V 
 
 3 PI. " " i^i\evo-v " pov\eioi-ey 
 
 40ovKe6o-yTo " povKsioi-vTO 
 
 iSing." " 4$ov\ev6-tiT,v « i8ou\eTOf-^5,y 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
< 115.] CONJUGATION OP THE KEGULAR VERB IN -«). 13S 
 
 § 115. Conjugation of the Regular Verb in -lo 
 Pkelimhtaet Eemabks. 
 
 1. Since pure verbs do not foi-m the secondary tenses (§ 103, Rem.) these 
 tenses are supplied in the Paradigm from two mute verbs and one liquid 
 verb (rpf^-ai, Xefir-oi, stem AIII, (paiy-a, *AN), so as to exhibit a full Conju- 
 gation. 
 
 2. In learning the table, we are to note, 
 
 (1) That the Greek forms may always be resolved into, (a) Personal-ending, 
 (b) Mode-vowel, (c) Tense-cbaraeteristie, (d) Tense-stem, (e) Verb-stem, (f ) 
 Augment, or Reduplication. 
 
 (2) The spaced forms, e.g. PovKii-e TO V, povKev-riTov, third Pers. Du. lud. 
 and Subj. Pres., may direct attention to the diiference between the Historical 
 tenses in the Ind. and Opt., and the Principal tenses. 
 
 (3) Similar forms, as well as those that differ only in accentuation, are 
 distinguished by a star (*). The learner should compare these together, e. g. 
 Pov\fi<ra, 1. Sing. Ind. Put. Act. or 1. Sing. Snbj. I. Aor. Aet. ; PoiKmaai, 
 2. Sing. Imp. I. Aoi-. Mid., fiovK^iaat, 3. Sing. Opt. I. Aor. Act., Pov\ev<rai, 
 Inf. I. Aor. Act. 
 
 (4) The accentuation (§ 118) should be learned with the form. The follow- 
 ing general rule wiU suffice for beginners : The accent of the verb is as fir font 
 the end as the final syllable will permit. Those forms, whose accentuation 
 deviates from this rule, are indicated by a dagger (t). 
 
 (5) When the Paradigm is thus thoroughly learned, the pupil may first 
 , resolve the forms either of jSouXEiSai, or any pure verb, into their elements, i. <j. 
 
 Personal-ending, Mode- rowel, etc. ; observing this order, viz. /3oi;\cii<rcB is, (1) 
 first Pers., (2) Sing., (Sj Ind., (4) Put., (5) Act., (6) from PovKeia, to advise; 
 then he may arra.:ge the elementary parts of the form, and in the following 
 order: (1) Verb-stem, (2) Augment, or Reduplication, (3) Tense-characteristic, 
 (4) Tense-stem, (5) Mode-vowel, (6) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel, (7) Per 
 sonal ending, (8) Tense-stem with Mode-vowel and Personal-ending. E. g. 
 What would be the form in Greek of the phrase, he advised himself, using the 
 Aor. of the Pres., fiov\ei-a, to advise ? Answer : The Verb-stem is Povhev-, 
 Augment, 4, thus i$ovKfu ; the Tense-charaeteristie of the first Aor. Mid. is ir, 
 thus Tense-stem is i-Pov^sv-a ; the Mode-vowel of the first Aor. Ind. Mid. is a ; 
 thus, e-jSouAcu-ir-o ; the Personal-ending of the third Pers. Sing, of an Historical 
 tense of the Mid. is to ; thus, c-PovKei-tr-a-ro. 
 
 Remark. By making himself familiar with the above elements, the pupil 
 cin construct from the root any form of the verb he may wish. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
136 
 
 TAKADIGM OP THE EEGHLAK. VERBS IN -it). 
 
 [i 3 15 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Tense- 
 stem: 
 j3ou\eu- 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Tense- 
 stem: 
 
 Perfect Z, 
 
 Tense- 
 stem: 
 
 Pluper- 
 fect I., 
 
 • Tohse- 
 stem: 
 
 30VX€V-K~ 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 i Perf.ir. 
 
 Plpf. II. 
 
 Awist /., 
 
 Tense 
 
 stem : 
 
 e-jSouAEU-tr- 
 
 j Aorist II., 
 
 Future, S. 1. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2, 
 3. 
 
 D.2 
 
 P.l. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 r).2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 "sTT 
 
 "PouK^i-a,* I advise, 
 j8ou\ej5-«s, thou advisest, 
 $ov\ii-et, he, she, it adoises, 
 PovXei-eTOV, ye two advise, 
 BovAei-fToy, they two advise, 
 ^ovK^u-ofieys we advise, 
 $ov\ei-eTe,* you advise, 
 Pov\ev-bva' I {v), they advise. 
 
 i-$ov\ev-oy,^ I was advising, 
 ^-Po^\€v-es, thou wast advising, 
 i-Poi\iv-([v), he, she, it was adv. 
 i-BovKti-erov, ye two were adv. 
 4-PovK(v-e T t; c, they two were adv. 
 l-BouKci-ofKy, we were advising, 
 4-povKfi-ere, you were advising, 
 i-^oiKev-ov,'* they were advising, 
 
 Subjunctive 
 of tho Principaltenses. 
 
 PovKfi-i/,^ I may 
 $ov\e{i-Tis J 
 
 /3ovA.6l5-7?* 
 
 j3ouAei5-7;TOj/ 
 
 Pov\e6-TtToy 
 
 ^ovXev-ufJLey 
 
 fiov\ii-T\Ti 
 
 PoiiKfi-w&i(v) 
 
 j8e-j3oiJA6u-K- 
 Pe-Bo6\ev-K- 
 ^e-^oiXev-'lt- 
 j8e-^ouA6lJ-/c- 
 j8e-i8puA.€iJ-K- 
 
 advised, 
 $€-$ovKe6-K 
 jSe-j8ouA.eu-K' 
 
 ■a, I have advised, 
 ■as, thou hast adv'd, 
 ■e(v),*he,she,ithasa. 
 uTov, ye two have a. 
 ■arop, they two have 
 
 ■afiev, we have adv'd, 
 .-are, you have adv'd, 
 ■a(rt{y), they liave a. 
 
 0s-Pov\fi-K-ai,Imay liavea. 
 
 Pe-Pou\ev~K'7is 
 
 ^e-fiovKev-K-7t 
 
 Be-0OV\ev-K-7]TOV 
 
 ^e-^ovKev-K-Ti f ov 
 
 jSe-jSouAeu-K-ftJjue/' 
 
 jSe-jSoi/AeiJ-K-T^Te 
 
 P^-Bo^^.^v-K-a>ffl{v) 
 
 i-Pe-$ov\ev-K- 
 ^-j8e-j8auA.ci5-K- 
 e-iSe-^ouAe-J-K- 
 ^-j8e-j8bi;A6u-/c- 
 
 i-$e-Pov\ev-K- 
 
 advised, 
 i-^i-^oOKed-K- 
 4-P€'Pov\s6-K- 
 e-j36-j3ouAei5 «■ 
 
 ■€iv, I had advised, 
 CIS, thou hadst adv. 
 ei, he, she, it had ad. 
 ■tvrov, ye two had 
 
 ■fir 11 v,they two had 
 
 •etfiev, we had adv. 
 -Eire, you had adv. 
 -eiTav, they had a. 
 
 iti-ipTtv-a,^ I appear, 
 i-Tr€-<jyl]v-ew,^ I appeared, 
 i-0oi\fv-(r-a, I advised (indef.), 
 e.$oi\€v-tr-as, thou advisedst, 
 ^-j3oi5Aeu-o'-6(»'), he, sh^, it adv'd, 
 i-fiou\ei-tr-a,Tov, ye two advised, 
 e-;8ouAeu-(r-oT7)v, they two adv'd, 
 ^-j3oyAei5-(r-aj[tey, we advised, 
 i-Pov\€ii-ff-aTe, you advised, 
 i-PoiKeti-(r-a v, they advised. 
 
 ■iti-(priv-a>, I may appear, 
 
 Pou\ei.<T-w,* I may advise, 
 
 '^ouKfii-a-'Tis 
 
 (3ouAeiJ-(r-77 * 
 
 j3ouA6i5-(r-7?Toi' 
 
 Pov\ev-(r-7iToi' 
 
 Pov\eii-cr-otfiev 
 
 .^ouAetJ-ir-r^Te 
 
 ^6v\ei-a'-ta(ri(v) 
 
 ?-Aiir-oy, Ileji, 
 ?-Anr-es, etc. declined lilce Impf. 
 Ind. 
 
 aJtt-w, etc., like the Subj, 
 Pres. 
 
 jSouAEU-ff-w,* / shall advise, 
 like the Indie. Pves. 
 
 1 The inllection of tho 2d Porf. in all the Modes sind Participles, is lilco that of the 1st Perf. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 115.] 
 
 rARADIGM OF THE REGULAR VERBS IN 
 
 137 
 
 Modes. 
 
 Participials. | 
 
 Optative 
 I. e. Salii. of HlBtodcal tenses. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Particip. 
 
 
 
 1/ fiovKiiuy '^ 
 
 
 0oi\ev-e, advise. 
 
 fiov\ei- Pov\e6-ovtra 
 
 
 Pov\fv-eTa, let him ad. 
 
 eiy, fiov\eb'Oy\ 
 
 
 0ovK£^-eroVtye two ad. 
 
 to 
 
 Cc.PovKeit-oyros 
 
 
 $av\ev-4raiv, let. them 
 
 advise, 
 
 PovXev-oiitnjs, 
 
 
 both advise, ^^ 
 
 
 advising, 
 
 
 Pov\ei-ere,* do ye ad. 
 
 , 
 
 
 PovKev-trairav, usually fiouKev-SvTui',* let them a. \ 
 
 fiovXii-oiiit, I miijht aduisi; 
 
 
 
 
 Pov\ei-ois 
 
 
 
 
 $ovKei'Qt 
 
 
 
 
 ffovKe/j-oiTou 
 
 
 
 
 fiovKev-olTTiy 
 
 
 
 
 Pov\ei-oiiiey 
 
 
 
 
 PovKei-otre 
 
 
 
 
 /3avA.cv-a i c « 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 jSe-iSouAeu-K-tSst 
 
 
 [^e-;8ouAeu-K-e,*] etc., 
 
 fie-Pov- 
 
 j8e-j3oyAe!/-ic-u?at 
 
 
 like the Imp. Pres. 
 
 Ae«- 
 
 Pe-Pov\ev-K-6s\ 
 
 
 yet only a few Per- 
 
 K-4y<u,^ 
 
 G. •K'SrOSf -K- 
 
 
 fects, and such as 
 
 to have 
 
 vltts, having 
 
 
 have the meaning 
 
 advised, 
 
 advised, 
 
 
 of the Pres., form 
 
 
 
 
 an Imperative. 
 
 
 
 /Se-flouAeu-K-oijiu, 1 mig. have a. 
 
 
 
 
 Pe-Pov\€iK-ois 
 
 
 
 
 0e-pov\eirK-oi . 
 
 
 
 
 fie~0ov\e^K-otTov 
 
 
 
 
 ffe-Pov\fV-K-0 f T 7) K 
 
 
 
 
 fie-fiovKei-K-otfiev 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 fie-Pov\ei-K-oiTe 
 
 
 
 
 0€-^ou\e'6-K-o I e V 
 
 
 
 
 
 iri-<pTiv-e, appear. 
 
 iry^V- 
 
 Te-^Tjy-t^st 
 
 5re-(^^f-oi/ii, / might appear, 
 
 
 yc-yaf,Ti 
 
 
 fiovKei-tT-at/it, I might advise, 
 
 
 
 )3oi/AeiJ-(r-ds 
 
 jSouAeiJ-tr-atr, or -uas 
 
 0o6\ev-a'-oy, advise. 
 
 jSou- 
 
 PovXei-a-aaa 
 
 fiojj\ei-(r-ai,* or -«e(i/) 
 
 $ov\€v-tr-dTco 
 
 \€V- 
 
 /3oi>A65-o'-oj4 
 
 fiov\G6-(r-aiToj/ 
 
 ^ovK^-d-ff-aTov 
 
 ir-at,*t 
 
 . GenitiTe : 
 
 0ov\ev-a-alTTj y 
 
 ^ovKiVTtr-arcav 
 
 to 
 
 j8oi/A6l5-(r-ai/Tos 
 
 fiovXei-ff-cufiey 
 
 
 advise, 
 
 jSouAeu-jr-affT^s, 
 
 )8ouA.ei5-(r-oiTe 
 0ov\ei-ff-aiev, or '■eiav 
 
 $ov\ii-ir-aTe 
 
 
 having advised, 
 
 PovKev-a'-aTaffay, iisua 
 
 ly -uAvTiav^ 1 
 
 \k-oi/j.i, etc., like the Opt. 
 
 Kiir^e, etc., like the 
 
 Aht- 
 
 \t'jr-c5y,od(Ta, (fj'J 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Imp. Pres. 
 
 etv, t 
 
 G. 6yros, oviriqs, 
 
 Pou\iv-(r-otiu, I would advise. 
 
 
 PovKeii-ff'Ojy, 
 
 like the Opt. Impf. 
 
 
 a-uy. 
 
 etc. like Pr. Pt. 
 
 = The inflection of tlie 2cl Plapcrf. i 
 
 s lite that of the Ist Plupori., both in the Jni and Opt. | 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
138 
 
 PARADIGM OF THE KEGULAK VEKBS IN -0). 
 
 [* 115 
 
 
 S s 
 
 The 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 111 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a i£ 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 of the Principal t«nses. 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 /SouAeu-o/iioi, I deliberate, or am 
 
 Pov\fi-ionai, I may de- 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Pov\ei-ri * [advised, 
 
 PouKei-ri * [liberate. 
 
 
 Present, 
 
 3. 
 
 ^ov\ei-eTai 
 
 0OV\€i-TJTat 
 
 
 
 I). 1. 
 
 0ov\ev-6fjie^oj/ 
 
 Pov\ev-ili.e&oy 
 
 
 Tense- 
 
 2. 
 
 0ov\e6-eff^ot/ 
 
 PovKe^-Tjtr^ov 
 
 
 stem: 
 
 3. 
 
 0ov\ei-e<rdov 
 
 y3oi/Aei5 Tftr^oy 
 
 
 ^QV\SV- 
 
 P.l. 
 
 0ovK€v-6/ie^a 
 
 /SouAeu-tS/ncfto 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 PovKci-ea-Ae * 
 
 Pov\ei-ri<rAe 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 fiovKei-oj/Tai 
 
 PovKev-Ofyrat 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i-Pov\fu-6ii.rtv, I was deliber- 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 4-Pov\e6-ov [aiing. 
 
 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 ^-j8ouA6i5-eTO 
 i-Pov\ev-6iieAov 
 
 
 
 Tenso- 
 
 2. 
 
 i-^ovKei-etr^oy 
 
 
 
 stem: 
 
 3. 
 
 4-$ov\fv-4<rAiiiv 
 
 
 
 4-^ou\eu- 
 
 P.l. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 i-Pov\ev-e(TAe 
 4-0ov\e^-ovTO 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 Pe-0oi\ev-ii. a i, I have deliberated. 
 
 fie-0ou\ev-ii4yos, S, Imay 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 $e-0o{>\ev-irat 
 
 Pe-Pou\€v-ii4yos ^s [have 
 Pe-Pou\ev-fi4t/os y [delih- 
 
 
 Perfect, 
 
 3. 
 
 Pe-Poi\ev-T a I 
 
 
 ' 
 
 D.l. 
 
 jSe-jSouAetJ-zie^of 
 
 [erated. 
 
 
 Tense- 
 
 2. 
 
 0e-Poi\cv-aS^oy 
 
 Be-0ov\ev~fieyte ^toc 
 
 
 stem: 
 
 3. 
 
 0e-Poi\ev-<rAov 
 
 P€-Pov\ev-ii4ya ^rmi 
 
 
 Pe-PouKeu- 
 
 P.l. 
 
 Pe-pov\€i-fi.eda 
 
 fi€-$ov\ev-/ieyoi S/iey 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Pe-0oi\€V(r^c* 
 
 Pe-Pov\€v~ft4yot ^t€ 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 P^-^oiKev-vrai 
 
 0e-$ov\€v-fieyot Sffi 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i-Pe-PovKei-fi riv, I had deliber- 
 
 • 
 
 
 Pluperfect, 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 4-Pe-Pov\ev-tro [ated. 
 
 
 
 Tense- 
 
 D.l. 
 
 i-Pe-Pov\ei-ii.€Aov 
 
 
 
 stem: 
 
 2. 
 
 4-0e-Poii\€v-(rdov 
 
 
 
 ^;8£- 
 
 3. 
 
 4-0(-Pov\ei-iT^nv 
 
 
 
 jSovAeu- 
 
 P.l. 
 
 ^/36-;8<wA6l5-^€^•a 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 4-0e-0oiKev-<T^e 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 4-0e-0o6Keu-VT 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i-0ov\ev-<r-dnrii', I deliberated. 
 
 PovKei-iT-wiiat, Imayde- 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 4-0ov\ev-<r-a [(indefinite) 
 
 Pov\ei-(r-ri* [liberate^ 
 
 
 Aarist /., 
 
 3. 
 
 4-0o/i\ti-a--aTo 
 
 $ov\fi-tr-riTai 
 
 
 
 D.l. 
 
 4'Pov\ev-(r-iifie^oj/ 
 
 PavKfva-iiJLcdoy 
 
 
 Tense- 
 
 2. 
 
 4-0ov\ei-a'-a(r&oy 
 
 fiov\e6-ff-7]tr^oy 
 
 
 stem: 
 
 3. 
 
 4-Pov\€v-a'-ii tr ^7jp 
 
 0ov\ei-a-iiiff^oy 
 
 
 4-$ov\eu-ir- 
 
 P.l. 
 
 4-Pov\ev-iT-iifJie^a 
 
 Pov\fv-a-iii,f^ 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^-/3oiS\€u-<r-a(r&e 
 
 j8ou\eT5-o'-ij(r&6 - ' ^ 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 4-Pov\9i-a'-a vro 
 
 Pov\ei-r-iiiVTai 
 
 
 Aonst II. 
 
 4-Km-S/j.riv, I remained, like Ind. 
 
 \lrr-iiiiai, I may reinain, 
 
 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 like Pres. Subj. 
 
 
 Future, 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 Pov\€v-a-otuu, I shall deliberate, 
 like Pres. Indie. 
 
 
 
 FiU. Peif., 
 
 S.l. 
 
 Pe-PovKe^'tr-o/iat, I shall have rfe- 
 liberated, like Pres. Indie.' 
 
 
 
 
 
 Digmicc _> MicrosoffBT' 
 
 
 " 
 
♦ 115.] 
 
 TAEADIGM OP THE REGULAR VERBS IN -0). 
 
 139 
 
 Moi 
 
 Optative 
 i- »■ Subj. of HJBt. tenses. 
 
 fiovXev-oliitiy, I might 
 
 0OV\€V-O ITO 
 
 PovKei-oia^ov 
 ^ovXei-oivTO 
 
 lerate, 
 
 Pe-Pou\eu- 
 fie-fiov\ev 
 JSe-jSot/Aei'- 
 
 ■ju.ivos eftjc, I 
 ■lieyosftTisbnCt 
 ■/ievos eSt) [de- 
 [liberaie, 
 ■fiGva eftjToi' 
 'lieyu el-fiTTiy 
 ■fieyoi eXriiiLfv 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 $ou\ev-ov, deliberate, 
 iSouAew-e'ff&a 
 
 PovKcv-eahaaav, usually fiov\tv-i<rS>ar* 
 
 Participials. 
 
 Infiu. 
 
 /SovAeiJ- 
 ecr&ai, 
 to deliber- 
 ate, 
 
 Particip. 
 
 fiov\ev-6fievos 
 fiovXev-ofi^VTj 
 
 Pe-0oi\ev-(ro, deliberate, 
 $e-0o{>\ev'tr^oy 
 
 ge-PoiXcv-a-^e* ^ 
 
 Pi-fiov\ei-(T^a(rav, nsnally Pi-$ou\ei-tr^icv * 
 
 (r3-oi,t to 
 have delib- 
 erated, 
 
 Pefi0V\€V-fieV7J 
 
 jSe^ouAEU-jue- 
 voy,^ having 
 deliberated, 
 
 fiov\ev-tr-alf/.riy, Imight 
 
 0ov\e{-ff-aio [deliberate, 
 
 0ovKei-tr-aiTO 
 
 ^ovXev-a-aifie^ov 
 
 0ov\ei-ff-ai(r^oy 
 
 0ov\ev-(r-a iirbtiv 
 
 0ovKev-(r-aitieba 
 
 Pov\ei-tT-at(r&e 
 
 0ov\e6-(r-atyTO 
 
 knr-oln7iv,Imightremain, 
 like Opt. Impf. 
 
 0ovhev-<T-oliM7iv,Im. have 
 deK5eraterf,iikeOpt.Imp. 
 
 0oiKEV-a-ai,* deliberate, 
 0ov\€v-a--da'^Qi 
 
 0ov\e6-a'-aff^f}y 
 $ov\ev-a--dir^(oy * 
 
 jSouAEu-fT-flwr&e 
 
 0ov\€v-a'-d(r^u(ray, usually 0ov\ev-ir-dtr^ay^ 
 
 ^ouAeiJ- 
 tr-jL(r-^at, 
 to deliber- 
 ate, 
 
 fiovXev-tr-dfieyos 
 0ov\ev-(r-a/iey7i 
 fiov\ev-tr-dfifvoy 
 
 havint 
 
 ated, 
 
 Anroujt -E(r&ai, like Pres. 
 Imp. 
 
 0e-$ou\€v-ff-olin]y, Ish'dl 
 deliberate, like Opt. Imp.l 
 
 AiJT-E'ir&oit Xcn-dfityos, -o- 
 fieyr], -ifieyoy 
 
 jSouAeiJ- 
 
 fi€-fiov\cv- 
 ff-eir^ai 
 
 jSouAeu-ct-^e- 
 yos, -ri, -oy 
 
 uigmzea oy iviicrosorrs) 
 
 0e-0ov\ev-ff-6- 
 li^yos, -rj, -oy. 
 
140 
 
 VERBS. REMARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [} 116 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 a § s 
 
 The 
 
 Indieatiye. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 of the Principal tenses. 
 
 Aorist I., 
 
 Tense- 
 stem : 
 e-^ouAeu-,^- 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 i-$ovKfi-^^v, I was advised. 
 
 4-^Ov\ev-^-71T€ 
 
 j8ouA.£u-3-a), / might have 
 
 $ov\ev-^-ijs [been advised. 
 
 jSowAev-^-p 
 
 fiov\ev-^-7JToy 
 
 0ovKev-^-TJTop 
 
 ^ovKev-^-ufiey 
 
 Future I. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2. 
 
 /3ouA€i/-a^-o--o/uai, IskaU be adv. 
 Pov\ev-^-ir-ri, etc., like the 
 Ind. Pres.'Mid. 
 
 Aorist H. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2. 
 
 i-Tpi$-Tiv, J was rubbed, 
 4^pl$-ri!, etc., like the first 
 Aor. Ind. Pass. 
 
 Tpi0-ii, Imay liave been rub'd, 
 TpiP--ps, etc., like the first 
 Aor. Subj. Pass. 
 
 Fia. II. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2. 
 
 Tpf0-ii-<r-ofiai, I shall be rubbed, 
 Tpifi-il-(r-ri, etc., like the first 
 Put. Ind. Pass. 
 
 Verbal Adjectives : /3ou\€u-T(is, -^, -6v, advised, 
 
 §116. Remarks on the Inflection- endings. 
 
 1. The personal-endings of verbs in -a are apocopated forms, as may be 
 shown from the older CDnjugation in -/ii, and in part from the dialects (^ 220, 
 1 ) ; thus, -lu in tlio first Pers. Sing. Ind. and Subj. Act. and -ti in the third 
 Pers. have disappeared, c. g. $ov\ei-a instead of Pou\ei-o-)u or PovKei-uiu, 
 Pov\ei-u instead of $ovXei-e-Ti (by tlie dropping of -/ju in $ov\eu-a-iiU, the o is 
 lengthened into w, and by the dropping of -ti in j8ou\fi5-e-Ti, e is lengthened 
 into ci) ; in the first Pers. Sing, first Aor. Ind.. Act., v has disappeared, e. g. 
 efioi\evcTa instead of iPovKfvffav ; in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. Act., except 
 the first Aor., -^i has disappeared, e. g. /SoiAcu-e instead of 0ov\ei-f-di : but tbo 
 first Aor. Imp. Act. has a different ending -ov, c. g. $oi\sv-ir-ov. 
 
 2. The second Pers. Sing. Act. has the ending -o- 3- a in tile Common lan^ 
 guage in the following forms only : — 
 
 oX(rSrci, nosti, from the Porf olSa; ;;Seio-&a and ^STjo-fta, Plpf. of oI5a, 
 €</>7jir»a, Impf fiom <l>Tjixi, to snjj ; ^o-fto, Impf. from flat, to be; peifffta, 
 Impf from €?/ii, to go. 
 
 3. There is no special form for the first Pers. Dual Act., or for the first 
 and second Aor. Pass.; the first Pers. PI. is used for this puroose. Comp. 
 i 106, Eem. 2. 
 
 4. the original foi-m of the first Pers. PI. Act. is-^L^s (not -^ily). Corap 
 the Dialects, § 220, 6, and the Latin ending -mus, e. g. ypd,p-o-ij.^s, scrib-i-m!«. 
 
 5. The original form of the third Pers. PI. Act. of the Principal tenses was 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{ 116.] VERBS. R.EMAEKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 141 
 
 Modes. 
 
 Participials. | 
 
 
 Optative 
 i. e. Snbj. of the Hist, tenses. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 fiov\ev-Sr-tlvy, I might be 
 Pov\€vA-eii]s [advised, 
 
 PovKev-^eiriTov 
 0ov\ev-d-eiiirriv 
 PavKev-^eitj^ev and -et/xey 
 jSouXeu-a-efijTe and -eire 
 
 j8o«\€^-&-7jTi, be thou ad- 
 j8oi;\Ew-&-^™ [vi^ed, 
 
 ^OU\€u-A-^TWy 
 
 Pov\ei-A-TiTe * 
 /3ou\eu-a-^Tw(rav 
 
 to bead- 
 vised. 
 
 $ov\ev-d-cls^ 
 fiouKev-^-eia'a'\ 
 ^ouXeu-&-ej4 
 Genitive : 
 
 fiov\€V-^-eVTOS 
 
 0av\ev-&-cl(rTis, 
 being advised. 
 
 
 fiouXeu-Sij-o'-oi^rii', / should 
 be advised, etc., like the 
 Impf. Opt. Mid. 
 
 
 ^ov\ev- 
 IH-ire- 
 
 jSoi/Aeu-&r)-(r-(J- 
 fieyos, -7j, 'Oy 
 
 
 Tpi/S-c/r))', / might be rubbed, 
 TpiP-elris, etc., like the first 
 Aor. Opt. Pass. 
 
 TolS-Ti&i, -^Ttt), etc., like 
 the first Aor. Imp. Pass. 
 
 Tpi/3- 
 rjmt 
 
 Tpi$-eis,i etc., 
 like first Aor. 
 Part. Pass. 
 
 
 Tpij8-7i-o*-of/t7jv, / should be 
 rubbed, etc., like the first 
 Fnt. Opt. Pass. 
 
 
 Tpi/3^- 
 
 TpiP-ri-(T-6iifms, 
 -V, -ov 
 
 j8ouX€u-Teos, -Tea, -reoy, to be advised. 
 
 -vTi; when t was changed into a, v was dropped (§ 20, 2), e. g. fiovXiiovri = 
 fiouKiioviri = pov\eioviri. On the irregular lengthening of the vowel pre- 
 ceding the V, see § 20, Rem. 2. 
 
 6. In the first Pers. Sing. Phvp. Act., Attic writers use, together with the 
 form in -611', a form in -17, which arises from the Ionic ending of the Plup. -eo, 
 e. g. i$e$ov\dK-ri instead of -K-iiy. The mode-vowel ei in the third Pers. PI 
 is commonly shortened into e, e. g. iPePovKei-it-i-ffay instead of fPe0m\ei-K- 
 
 fi-ffay* 
 
 7. The first Pers. Sing. Opt. Act. has the ending -,111 in verbs in -a, c, g. 
 iraiSel!-a |Ui, iraiSeia-ai-pii ; but the ending -Tjy in the first and second Aor. Pass., 
 according to the analogy of verbs in -/ii. This i) remains through all the per- 
 sons and numbers, th --ugh it is often dropped in the Dual and PI, especially 
 in the third Pers. PI. and then, eiTj/iey •= er/iev, ci'titc = eiTe, ilnaav = eUy, e. g 
 iroiBeuaefTj/tey and T-aiSevAei/xev, fiyriffAeiriTe and -ftfrre, (payelniirav X. H. 6. 5, 
 25;, TtpoKpiS>€lT,aw Ibid. 34., irc/u^aciijtray Th. 1, 38, and (more frequently) 
 
 8. The Attic Optative endings -ij;', -ijs, -jj, etc., and the third Pers. PI. -iv 
 (rarer -naav] which appropriately belong to verbs in -fu, are used with verbs in 
 '■«, in the following cases : — 
 
 (a) Most commonly in the Impeif. Opt. uf contract verbs, c. g. Ti/iijiT/r, 
 
 <pi\oiTiv, lua^oL-nv ; 
 (h) In all Futures in -a, e. g. ipavoiriv Soph. Aj. 313., epo/jj Xen. Cy. 3. 1, 
 
 14, from the Fut. ^avU, ipa ; 
 (c) Somewhat often in the serond Phip., e.g. ^Kirtfevyolriy S. O. E. 8iO, 
 
 Tpoe\7,\vSroivs X Cy. 2. 4, 17., •n-ciro.&o/rj Ai-. Acham. 940; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
142 VERBS. UEHARKS ON THE INFLECTION-ENDINGS. [H 16 
 
 (d) In the second Aor. <rxoiw uniformly {ecrxoy from €xw) ; still, not gen 
 erally in compounds, e. g. irapia-xo'ii'- 
 
 9. The forms of the first Aor. Opt. Act. in -eias, -tie (v), -stai/, instead of 
 ■ais, -ai, -ail/, have passed from the iEolic Opt. in -sia, -etas, etc., into com- 
 mon use in all the dialects, and are employed by the Attic writers more fin- 
 quently than the regular forms, e. g. $ov\ciir-eias, -ei€(v), -eiav. 
 
 Remakk. The second Pers. Dual Act. of the Historical tenses often ends, 
 among the Attic writers, in -5)1/ instead of -ov, e. g. EiVeTjjy PI. Symp. 189, c., 
 ^ireBrj^ijirijTi)!' Euthyd. 273, e., jJo-ttjv 294, e,, iXeyh-nv L. 705, d., ixoivuvDiri- 
 Tvy Tb. 753, a. On the Dialects, see § 220, 9. 
 
 10. The Middle endings -<rai and -ffo, when immediately preceded by a 
 mode-vowel, drop <r (§ 25, 1), and then coalesce, except in the Opt., with the 
 mode-vowel, c. g. 
 
 jSouAeu-e-trw BQv\€u-e-ai = 0ovKev-i} 
 
 Pov\ei-T\-(rai BovKii-ti-tu = Pov\ei-ri 
 
 fiov\ei-ot-<ro $ov\€v-oi-o 
 
 i^ov\ei-e-a'o 4$ov\ev-e-o = i$ovKe6-ov 
 
 e^v\eiff-a~uo iffouKeiff-a-Q = ifiov\GinT-a, 
 
 11. In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and Put. Mid. and Pass., the Attic writers 
 use a subordinate ending in -ei, together with the ending -j;, c. g. Pov\fi-ri and 
 -cf , ^ov\ei(r-ri and -et, jSeySouAeiia"-?; and -ci, ffovKev^tr-ri and -ei, rpi^trri, and -€t, 
 TToirj and -«, o\ri and -ft. This form in -ei passed from the Attic conversational 
 language, into the wiitten language ; hence it is the regular fonn in the Come- 
 dies of Aristophanes, but is avoided by the tragedians. Also Thucydidcs 
 and Xenophon use it ; other writers, as Plato and the orators, employ both 
 forms ; yet three verbs always take the form -ei, namely, 
 
 PoiKo/ittt /SoiiAei {but Subj. fioi\ri) 
 
 oio/iai oUi (but Subj. ojj;) 
 
 Sy^/Q/jLai Put. ti\pel, 
 
 12. Together with the endings of the third Pers. PL Imperative Act. and 
 Pass. -€Tft!(rav, -ATottrav, -fr^onrav, the abbreviated forms -(fcTwi*, -dvTtay, 
 ■irduy, are used; and since they are employed very frequently by Attic 
 writers, they are called Attic forms. These abbreviated Imperatives of the 
 Active Voice are like the Gen. PI. of the Participle of each tense respectively, 
 except the Perfect j and the Middle form -cr^ui/ is like the third Pers. Dual, 
 e.g. 
 
 Pres. Act. fiovKeveTwtray and ^ov\iv6vTtav 
 
 Perf. " TTciroi&ETioo'aj' " ■imrotA6intov ( Gen. Part. veTrotd6Tuv) 
 
 Aor. I. " fiovKevtrdTajtrav " ^ovKcvffdmtav 
 
 Pros. Mid. ^ovKivitr^uxTtw " ^ovXevea^tev 
 
 Aor. " ffKi^6.(T^waav " fftce^da-^aiy. 
 The Aor. Pass, ending -e'l/rwj' or -iirav, abridged from -■^two-oi', is found in 
 PI. Legg. 85B, d. ire/tiJiS^eWmc, and lb. 737, e. Stave/iri^Tav (according to several 
 MSS.). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 117.] VEB.BS. ATTIC FUTURE. 143 
 
 13. Besides the simple forai of the Suhj. Porf. and the Opt. Plup. Act., a 
 periphrasis, formed by the Perf. Part, and the Subj. or Opt. of ehcu {t» be), S, 
 etili/, is very frequent, e. g. vsiraiSevKdis S, educaverim ; ir^iraiSevKliis eiirjv, educa- 
 vissem. Yet this form seems to denote a circumstance or condition, more than a 
 simple completed action ; comp. PI. Hipp. M. 302, a. et KeK^riK^s ri, ^ Terpw 
 iiims, i) ireirXnyjueVoj, i^ &?^' drioSv irtjroy&iij cKarepos riiiav ciri, od Kai aii(p6- 
 Tepoi aS ToiVo irev6vdoiiJ,er; examples of the simple forms are, iTreiA^^, PI. 
 Ep. 614, a., el\-li^u(ny Polit. 269, i;., iinmrTiiicoi X. An. 5. 7, 26., (coToXeXoiiroiEx 
 X. H. 3. 2, 8., aTroKexiBjtiiKoi ib. 5, 23., vrniperiiKoi ib. 5. 2, 3., 7reiroi4j(coi Th. 8, 
 108., hPt0\iiKoiey ib. 2, 48. — The Imp. Perf. docs not often occur in the Act„ 
 e. g. ytyave, Eur. Or. 1220. 
 
 14. The Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, append the personal-endings to the 
 tense-stem without a mode-vowel, and hence they cannot form the Subj. and 
 Opt. (with few exceptions, which will he further treated below, § 154, 9), 
 but most also be expressed periphrastically by means of the Participle and 
 cTvai, e. g. TreiraiSevjifvos S, efriv, educatus sim, essem. 
 
 15. The third Pers. Ind. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, of pure verbs ends in 
 -vrai, -VTo, e. g. Ps^ovKevvrai, 40€Poi\ewTo ; but in mute and liquid verbs, this 
 formation is not possible. Hence the Attic writers usually express this person 
 periphrastically, by means of the Perf. Part, and u<rl{v), sunt, ^(rav, erant; the 
 older and middle Attic writers, however, sometimes use the Ionic forms -arai, 
 ■aro (instead of -vrai, -vro); the a of these endings is aspirated after the 
 Kappa and Pi-mutes, and hence changes the preceding smooth Kappa or Pi- 
 mute into the corresponding rough (comp. § 144) ; but this a is not aspirated 
 after the Tau-mutes ; thus, 
 
 Tptp-w, to rub, Perf. Te-Tpiix-iiai 3 F.TeTpi(pa,Tai (for Terpi^iTai) Pip. irerpifpaTo 
 irXeic-ai, to tivine, ir6-ir\c-y-jiioi " ireTrft.exS.Tai ( " ireirKeKyTat) iTTeir\4xa.T0 
 
 T&TT-a, to arrange, Te-ray-nai " Tfrixariu ( " rtTayvTai) irerix""''' 
 
 XtDpiC-", io separate, Ke-xtipur-pnu " /cex^p'S"'''" ( " KEX<Spi5yToi) 4icsX(»piSS.To 
 <pdelp-ii, to destroy, t-^ap-iuu " i^Stiporrai ( " %ipSrapvrta) i<p^ipa.To. 
 
 16. The two Aorists Pass, follow the analogy of verbs in -/u, and hence are 
 not treated here. 
 
 i 117. Remarks on the Formation of the Attic 
 Future. 
 
 1. When one of the short vowels S., e, i, in the Put. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
 in -aa, -ffoiJiM, from stems of two or more syllables, precedes tr, certain verbs, 
 after dropping o-, take the circumflexed ending -S, -oD^i ; because it was fre- 
 quently used by the Attic writers instead of the regular form, this is called 
 the Attic Future, e. g. 4\da (usually i\aiva>), to drive, i\d-<r-a, Put. Att. 4\Z, -f s, 
 ■f, -oTov, -Zfitv, -a.T(, -u(ri{v) ; reKeai, tojinish, T€\4-<r-a, Put. Att. T€\£, -eis, -el, 
 •urov, -oSfiev, -etre, -ov<ri{v); re\4-iT-o/Juu {reKeoiiCu), TeKov/mi, -ei, -firai, etc.; 
 touiCw, to carry. Put. KOfxi-ir-u, Put. Att. KO/iiS, -iCiS, -let, -le'iroi; -loOp-ep, -le.Tc, 
 
 7 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
144 VEUBS. ACCENTnATION. [^118. 
 
 iov(rc{p) ; Ko/iioO/toi, -ici, -lelrai, -ioi/ie^oy, ete. This Fttt. is inflected like the 
 forms of contract verbs. 
 
 2, This form of the Fat. is found only in the Ind., Inf., and Fart. ; never in 
 the Opt., thus, t€A£, reM'iy, TiXSiv ; but TsKeffoifii. The verbs which have this 
 form are the following: (a) i\ia {i\aii>a>), to drive; reKeu, to finish; Ka\ea>, 
 to call; and, though seldom, a\«'w, to grind; — (b) all verbs in -((a (character. 
 5) ; — (c) a few verbs in -d (a, veiy generally ^ipd^w ; — (d) of verbs in -/u, all 
 in-dvvvi^i and also i/i(^£6i/j'iifti,tocfa/ie(a,u<>)iiS, -leis, etc.). A few exceptions 
 to this Fat. are found even in the Attic dialect, e. g. 4\ia-a X. Cj. 1. 4, 20, cAd- 
 royras X. An. 7. 7, 55., TeXeaovffiv Cy. 8. 6, 3., KdKeireis 2. 3, 22., voi/iffovn 3. 
 1 , 27. (according to the best MSS.) iJ/7)iJ)iffeo-ae, Isae. de Cleonym. hered. § 51. 
 
 J 118. Accentuation of the Verb. 
 
 1. Peimaet Law. The accent is drawn back from the end of the word 
 towards the beginning, as far as the nature of the final syllable permits, c. g. 
 ^o6\5v€j ^ov\e6o^t, ^oiXevaov, travfToy, rv^ov, but jSouXeiSew, /EtouXeiJetr, On 
 the ending -ai, see 5 29, E. 6. 
 
 2. This law holds good in compounds, e. g. ^epe irpos^epe, <l>evye eKfeuye, 
 Xeiire aTr6Kefire ; also in words in the Subj., when they are not contracted, e. g. 
 KaTd(Tx^, Kardcrxv^i KaTdtrx^^^^s i-jritnrca, iiritrirTis (but aya^u, airoffTu, diaSut 
 irapaSa, ava^ufjiiv, etc., on account of the contraction, ayafida, iyaPda/tey, etc.). 
 Still, this rule has the following exceptions: (a) the accent cannot go back 
 beyond the syllable of the preceding word, which before the composition, had 
 the accent, e. g. airiJSoj (aw6 the preceding word being accented on the ultimate), 
 ffv/jLirpiiSf eiritrxej, iniSes (not diroSos, frvfnrpoes, eTrurxes, eiriSes) ; (b) the accent 
 cannot go back of the first two words of the compound, as in the examples 
 just qnoted, and also irvveKSos, irapeySes (not (riyiKSos, but like exSos; not 
 vdpev^es, but like ev^fs) ; (c) the accent cannot go back of an existing augment 
 (this holds of the Impf., Aor., and Plup. as well as of the Peif.), e. g. vpos(!x<" 
 like etxov, ■'rapea'xov like isxoy, ^Kyov like iiyov, it,rjv like ?iv (not irpSseix'yt 
 Trdpecrxov, i(,nyov, i^riv) ; so also irposT\K0i like ^/cov, i,Trupyoy like otp^oy, but 
 Imp. ^Treip-ye, also acplKTcu, atp'iKTO, like f/cTai, Xkto. 
 
 Exceptions to the Primary Law. 
 
 3. The accent is on the ultimate in the following forms : — 
 
 (a) In the Inf second Aor. Act. as circumflex, and in the Masc. and Neui. " 
 Sing. Part, of the same tense as acute, c. g. Kmety (from Xnrhiv), Xmdy, -6y; 
 and in the second Pers. Sing. Imp. second Aor. Act. of the five verbs, erne, 
 e'A&e, Eijpe, \a^4, and ISe (but in composition, direme, imiKaPe, Sirexae, tifsiBe). . 
 
 (b) Also in the Imp, second Aor. Mid. as circumflex, c. g. Aa^oO, 3-oS (from 
 T(a»P|iii). 
 
 Remark 1. In compounds, the Imp. (not Participials) of the second Aor 
 Act. draws back the accent in all vcrb,s according to the primary law, e. g. 
 ejc^oAe, eJeA^e, ekSoj, ckSotc, a.iv6Sos, airSSoTt, /lerdSas, fiETaSore (yet not Su )5ii5, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' Jl°-] VERBS. ACCENTUATION. 145 
 
 jieVaSur, see No. 2), but iK0ci\^7y, iKPoKiv, lK\m(7v, i^^j^ip, etc. But in the 
 linp. hing. second Aor. Mid. of verbs in -«, the circumflex remains on the 
 Ultimate^ in compounds also, c. g. iK$a\ov, &<pLKod, ixXmov, iTrt\aS>ov, ftAeXoS, 
 tveviyicov ; so m verbs m -fu, when the verb is compounded with a monosylla^ 
 bie preposition, e. g. TpoSoS, iy^od, a</>oD; yet the accent is drawn back, when 
 the verb IS compounded with a dissyllabic preposition, e. g. MSov, KardS>ov, 
 oir<i&oi.; but in the Dual and PI. of the second Aor. Mid., the accent is in all 
 cas^ drawn back, e. g. ixM^^a-^i, iivoKd^e^Sre, ■^p6So<T^i, ?.-a6(r»£, ^^^S/e, 
 
 (c) The acute stands on the ultimate in all participles in -s (Gen. -ros), con- 
 sequently in all active Participles of verbs in -^ui, as well as in those of the first 
 and second Pcrf. Act. and first and second Aor. Pass, of all verbs, c. g. e^fiav 
 A€uk(4j (Gen. -Stos), Tr^ipTivds (Gen. -oVos), Rov\evSreis (Gen.-eVos), tuttc/s (Gen. 
 -eVros), iaris (Gen. -avTos), TiSrds (Gen. -ivros), SiSois {Gen. -6vtos), Setxyis 
 (Gen. -vvTos), Siaa-ris, ix^els, irpoSo6s, Gen. Siatrrdnros, 4kA4ptos, npoSAyras. 
 
 _ Rem. 2. The first Aor. Act. Part., which is always paroxytono, is an excep- 
 tion, e. g. vaiSei<ras, Gen. iraiSeiffairros. 
 
 (d) In the Sing, of the first and second Aor. Suhj. Pass, as circumflex, c. g. 
 flouXcu&S, rpipS (3 being contracted from -eu). 
 
 4. The accent is on the penult in the following forms : — 
 
 (a) In the Inf. of Perf. Mid. or Pass., of first Aor. Act. and second Aor. 
 Mid. ; also in all infinitives in -yai, hence in all active infinitives according to 
 the forniation in -^i, as well as in the Inf of first and second Aor. Pass, and 
 of the first and second Perf. Act. of all verbs, e. g. tetiJ^&oi, Pe$ov\eva^ai, 
 Terifajtr^ai, irec^iA^cr&oi, fiefwrdiitr&ai ; — <j>v\d^ai, PovKetvai, ri/iijaai, <jii\7j<rai, 
 unr^utrai ; — AtTretr^a/, ^K^etr^ai, dtnSitr^ou ; — iffravai^ ri^ivai, SiSovai, S^iKj/ivm, 
 arrivaty fKffTTJyai, ^eiyai, eic^etyat, Sovyaif fiera^ovyai : — Pov\€v^yai, Tpi$7jyai ; 
 — fie^ovKeuKeyaif \e\otireVoi. 
 
 (b) In the Participle Perf. Mid. or Pass., e. g. PePov\evn4yos, -Ii4v%, -fifyay, 
 TiiTifn]fi4yos, ve^t\7]fieyos. 
 
 (c) As circumflex in the Dual and Plu. of the first and second Aor. Subj. 
 Pass., e. g. PovKevSrajxev. 
 
 Rejc. 3. The three corresponding forms of the Inf. first Aor. Act., Imp. 
 first Aor. Mid., and the thu'd Pers. Sing. Opt. iirst Aor. Act^ when they consist 
 of three or more syllables, whose penult is long by nature, are distinguished 
 from one another by the accent, in the following manner : — 
 
 [nf. 1 St Aor. A. PovKivaai, Imp. 1st Aor. M. $ov\iv<rai, Opt. 1 st Aor. A. povKeiaai, 
 iratTJa'ai, iroi7](rat, irot^a-ai. 
 
 But when the penult is short by nature or long only by position, the Inf 
 3rst Aor. Act. corresponds with the third Pers. Sing. Opt., first Aor. Act^ c. g 
 pvKi^ai; but Imp. first Aor. Mid. <p6\a^ai. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
146 VERBS. SYLLABIC AUGMENT. [§§ 119, 120. 
 
 i 119. Further view of the Augment and Redu- 
 plication. 
 
 1. After the general view of the Augment and Reduplication 
 (} 108, 3), it is necessary to treat them more particularly. 
 
 2. As has been already seen, all the historical tenses (the 
 Impf , Plup., and Aor.) take the augment, but retain it only in 
 the Ind. There are two augments, the syllabic and temporal 
 
 { 120. (a) Syllabic Augment. 
 
 i. The syllabic augment belongs to those verbs whose stem 
 begins with a consonant, and consists in prefixing ei to the 
 stem, in the Impf. and Aorists, but to the reduplication in the 
 Plup. In this way, the verb is increased by one syllable, and 
 hence this augment is called the syllabic augment, e. g. ySou- 
 Xcuo), Impf l-j3oii\evov, Aor. i-/iov\eva-a, Plup. i-^e-^ovXevK€iv. 
 
 2. If the stem begins with p, tliis letter is dotibled when the 
 augment is prefixed (} 23, 3), e. g. purTui, to throw, Impf. eppnn-ov, 
 Aor. eppuj/a, Perf. Ippufta. Plup. ippl<f>€iv. 
 
 Bemajik 1. The three verbs $oi\oiiai, to mil; Svyajiai, to be able; and 
 ueWa, to be about to do, to intend, among the Attic "writers take tj, instead of e, 
 for the augment ; still, this is found more among the later than the earlier 
 Attic wiiters, e. g. ifiovX-li^ i and iiffovX-fi^y ; iSvvd/iriv and ifivviiatv, iSvt4lniP 
 and iiSvvliSrtiJ' Chut always iSvudtr^v) ; e/ieXXoy and ^/te^Aov. The Aorist is 
 very seldom ^fieAAijo-o (comp. X. H. 7. 4, 16. 26). 
 
 Rem. 2. Among the Attic writers, the augment e is often omitted in the 
 Pluperfect ; in compounds, when the preposition ends with a vowel ; in sim- 
 ples, when a vowel which is not to be elided precedes, e. g. ayafieP^xei, X. An. 
 5, 2, 15 ; KaTuSiSpafi.-liKeffai', X. H. 5. 3, 1 ; KaTd\4\enrro, X. Cy. 4. 1,9; Kcfa 
 ireiTTi^Kei, Th. 4, 90; al (rwdritcai yeyevrii/To, X. Cy. 3. 2, 24 (according to the 
 best MSS.) ; but in the Impf. and Aorists, the syllabic augment is omitted 
 
 ' According to analogy, we may suppose that e is prefixed to all verbs in the 
 angsnented tenses, whether the verbs begin with a vowel or consonant. If the 
 verb begins with a consonant, e appears as an additional syllable, e. g. e-jrpoT- 
 ■rov, but if with a vowel, e is assimilated with that vowel and lengthens it, if it 
 is not already long, c. g. &.ya, Impf. ^0701/ = ^vox ; e&€'\m, Impf. US>€\ov = ijSre- 
 Aov ; 0K4\?.a, Impf. iSxeWoy = &Ke\\oy. If the word begins with a long vowel, 
 it absorbs e, e. g. f/XtJmca, Impf. i-l]Ka.(TKov = ij\a<TKOv, aS)l(a, Impf. iiiS)LCov = 
 Saifoi/. When the verb begins with e, the augment € is sometimes contracted 
 with this into ei, e. g. eTxoc, instead of ^xov. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
121, 12i.] VERBS. TEMPORAL AUGMENT. 
 
 147 
 
 ily in the lyric parts of the tragedies, and here not often ; in the dramatic 
 jrtions it is rarely omitted, and only in the speeches of the messengers (^treis 
 fye\iKal) ; also at the beginning and middle of the trimeter, and likewise at the 
 iginning of a sentence, and even in these cases but seldom. The Impf. 
 pij r, which, together with ixp^'t is used in prose, is an exception. 
 
 § 121. (b) Temporal Augment. 
 
 The temporal augment belongs to verbs, whose stem begins 
 rith a vowel ; it consists in lengthening the first stem -vowel. 
 ?his is called the temporal augment because it increases the 
 ;me, e. g. 
 
 ■n, e. 
 
 g. 'aya 
 
 Impf. ftyov 
 
 Peif . ^x« 
 
 Plup. ^X€» 
 
 1, ' 
 
 '■' iWlCa 
 
 " ^\iriCoi> 
 
 " fjKTriKa 
 
 fi 
 
 f/ATr^Keiy 
 
 r. ' 
 
 ' 'i/cereuw 
 
 '• 'iKeVeuoy 
 
 " 'iKGTGVKa 
 
 (t 
 
 'rKCTeiJKeii' 
 
 ", ' 
 
 ' &iil\4a 
 
 " SifiiXovv 
 
 " wfiiXTjKa 
 
 u 
 
 &fii\-f}K€iy 
 
 >>. ' 
 
 ' "WC" 
 
 "- "CjSp'Co" 
 
 " "vfiptKa 
 
 " 
 
 *V0plK£iy 
 
 V> ' 
 
 ' alpeu 
 
 " ^povv 
 
 " vfyntca 
 
 (C 
 
 yp-fiKfW 
 
 1)U, ' 
 
 ' avKea 
 
 " tjSaouc 
 
 " T]^\7JKa 
 
 " 
 
 7Jv\^K€ltf 
 
 p. 
 
 " oIktICw 
 
 " SKTl^oy 
 
 " ^KTIKO. 
 
 l( 
 
 ^KrlK^ty, 
 
 Kemaek. Verbs which begin with it, I, v, a, ov, and ei, do not admit the 
 ugment, e. g. ^TTc£o/tai, to be overcome, Impf. irrriiaiv, Perf. Irnriiiai, Plup. 
 rrij/iiji'; 'lir6a, to press, Aor. 'Hrauro ; 'uiri'iiai, to lull to sleep, AoT."imyu(ra; 
 (t>e\4ai, to benefit, Impf. oxpeXeov; oiri(u,to wound, Impf. olhaCov; (Xku, 
 I yield, Impf. cTkoc, Aor. €?{a; eini^a, to Ween, is an exception, which among 
 le Attic writers, though seldom, is augmented, e. g. efKofoc, rf/cocra, cScofffmi, 
 ;ldom pKofoi/ (e. g. Th. 6, 92. -^KaQov, in the best MSS.), ^icaaa, jiKoir^ai. 
 Jso those verbs whose stem begins with eu, are usually without an augment, 
 . g. t^xoiuu, to supplicate, eixofoi", more rarely ijix'^/tiji', but Perf. TjZy fuu (not 
 'ryiuu) I evpiaxt), to find, in good prose, always omits the augment. 
 
 ? 122. Remarks on the Augment. 
 
 I. Verbs beginning with a followed by a vowel, have d instead "of jj, e. g. 
 Ife, (poet.), to perceive, Impf. 'dro;' ; but those beginning with d, av, and at fol- 
 )wed by a vowel, do not admit the augment, e. g. 'drj5ifo;iai, to have an un- 
 leasant sensation, Impf. 'diiSifojiir))' ; aiaiva, to dry, Impf. aSaiyov; olaKl(a,1o 
 !eer, Impf. oUKi^ov; also imKia-Ku, to destroy, though no vowel follows d, has 
 ^iKaffa, api\<^Ka, as well as ayii\u,(ra, au-h\<cKa. But the poetic i.dS<» (prose 
 So,), to sing, and aia,rm (Att. ^<r(r<»), to rush, take the augment, e.g. ^^lSov (prose 
 Soy), <i|a (Att. jTfo) i <.roA««, to believe, <fif<.-nv, etc. does not belong h?re, sine* 
 ,e « following o'., is not a Pg^^gf ^tl'^^^'^fcVosofi® 
 
148 VERBS. REDUPLICATION. [§ 123 
 
 2. Some verbs also beginning with oi and followed by a consonant.^do not 
 take the augment, c. g. o i k o « p e w, to guard the house, Aor. olKoifyqaa ; oiV/fa, fo 
 smell of wine, Impf. o?«foy; o < ^ <( a., to intoxicate, Perf. Mid. or Pass. oiVwueVoj 
 and ^ycofievos ; oiffTpda, io make furious, Aor. otaTfmcra. 
 
 3. The twelve following verbs, beginning with e, have « instead of r; for the 
 augment, viz. iia, to permit, Impf. e&y, Aor. efao-a; ^ftifw, to accustom, (to 
 whieh belongs also iUSm, to be accustomed, from the Epic e&w) ; ttaa, poetic 
 Aor. (stem 'EA), to place (in prose only. Part. Aor. Mid. eaifii^ms and ^Miisms, 
 establishing, founding} ; lA..'<r<rw, to »«(?; %\Ka>, to draw; Aor. €?A./£ii(ro (stem 
 'EAKT) ; e1\ov, to take, Aor. (stem 'EA) of a/pea ; e-irouai, to follow; ipyd- 
 fofiai, to ioori; epira, IpiriJfo), to creep, toga; kiTTidio, to entertain; 6X<». *" 
 luxve (on the Epic cT|itai, see § 230). 
 
 4. The six following verbs take the syllabic, instead of the temporal, 
 augment : — 
 
 iyvviii, to break, Aor. eo|o, etc. (^ 187, 1^. 
 
 aKlffKO/iai, capior, Perf. koKaKa and rliKaKa, captns sum (§ 161, 1). 
 
 avSdva, to please (Ion. and poet.), Impf. kdviavov, Perf. e'aSa, Aor. ed5o» 
 
 (\ 230.) 
 u p £ w, mingere, 4oipovv, iovpriKa. 
 a^eai, to push, iii^ouv, etc. (sometimes without the augment, e. g. Sw&ovvto, 
 
 Th. 2, 84; ^{(icrajjiroi/, X. H. 4. 3, 12 ; &S>ii, PI. Cli.nrm. 155, c). 
 wydo/iai, to buy, Impf. iavov/iTiv {ami/iTiv, Lys. Purg. Sacril. 108. § 4; eju- 
 
 raC>/To, Aesehin. c. Ctes. c. 33 ; dyToi^iTo, Andoc. p. 122.), Aor. iuvnai- 
 
 lUTjK (see however § 179, 6.), Perf. Hvmuu. 
 
 5. The verb lopTt^fai, to celebrate a feast, takes the augment in the second 
 syllable, Impf. kipra^ov. The same is tnie of the following forms of the 
 Plup. II.: — 
 
 EIKn, second Perf. ioMa, lam like, Plup. iipKetr. 
 
 l\iroiiai, to hope, second Perf. €o\7ra, I hope, Plup. iiiKimv.} 
 
 EPrn, to do, second Perf. eopya, Plup. 4iipyetv. > 
 
 6. The three following verbs take the temporal and syllabic augment at tho 
 same time, the Spiritus Asper of the stem being then transfcn-ed to the e of 
 the augment : — 
 
 dpdw, to see, Impf. kdoptitv, Perf. kdtpaKa, k^pa/JMU 
 
 ayoiyu, to open, Imjif. ayscpyov, Aor. ayetc^a (Inf. avot^at), etc. 
 
 aKlaKo/xai, to be taken, Aor. ki\tov (Inf. a\Siyai, o), and f/Xtoj'. 
 
 ^ 123. Reduplication. 
 
 1. Kediiplication (^ 108, 4) is the repeating the first conso- 
 nant of the stem with e. Tliis imphes a completed action, and 
 hence is prefixed to the Perf.,' e. g. \i-XvKa, to the Fut. Perf., 
 
 ' Strictly, we jnay say that tho first letter of all verbs is repeated in the 
 Perf., whether the verb begins with a vowel or a consonant. When the conso- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 1-23. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 - REDUPLICATION. 
 
 149 
 
 e. g. Ki-Ko<rix.ri(TOfi,ai. (from Koa-fnib}), and to the Plup., which, as an 
 historical tense, takes also the augment e before the reduplica- 
 tion, e. g. i-^e-l3ovXevKELv. This remains in aU the modes, as 
 well as in the In£ and Part 
 
 2. Those verbs only admit the reduplication, whose stem 
 begins with a single consonant or with a mute and liquid; but 
 verbs beginning with p, yv, yX, px,^ take only the simple aug- 
 ment, except fiXd-TTTia Pip\n4>a, fiXxurfjjrifjLiu) ySe/SXacr^ijiiiTjKa, and 
 jSXao-Tavd) ^eySXdcrnjKa and i^XaorrjKa, e. g. 
 
 \ia, to loose, 
 Aim, to sacrifice, 
 ipureitOf to plant, 
 X'pfifi, to dance, 
 ypdtpca, to write, 
 Khiva, to hend down, 
 Kplva, to Judge, 
 srvea, to breathe, 
 A\ia, to bruise, 
 ftTTa, to throw, 
 yrisplQa, to make hioum, 
 Phtuceia, tobe slothful, 
 y\i(pa, to carve, 
 
 Perf. \4-\vKa, 3?lup. i-\f-\iicav 
 
 " Te'-auKo<§ 21, 2.) " i-T€-StiKety 
 
 " x£-(()uTeuKa (5 21, 2.) " 4^e-ipufreiKav 
 
 " Ke-xip^Ka (5 21, 2.) " i^Ke-xopiiKca> 
 
 " y4-ypii<l>a " i-ye-yp(i<l)eiv 
 
 " Ke-K\lKa " i-Ke-K\lKeii' 
 
 " Ke-icpiKa " i-Ke-icpiKeiv 
 
 " Tri-TTvivKa " l-ire-iri/€iJK£<» 
 
 •■^ T6-aXoKO (§ 21, 2.) " l-re-SiK&K^iv 
 
 tppiipa (\ 23, 3.J " ipl,l,pciv 
 
 l-yvipiKa " l-yvaplxav 
 
 i-0\iKevim " i-^KmcsiKeiv 
 
 t-y\vlpa " 4-y\itpeiy. 
 
 3. Besides the verbs just mentioned beginning with p, yv, /3X, 
 yX, the reduplication is not used, when the stem begins with a 
 double consonant or with two single consonants, which are not 
 a mute and liquid, or with three consonants, e. g. 
 
 {riKia, to emulate, Perf. l-QfiKuKo, 
 
 Plup. l-f7jAt«/ceu/ 
 
 j^eySa, to entertain, " i-lhana 
 
 a 
 
 i-^ev(&Ketv 
 
 ^i\Ka, to sin^, " ^-\j/a\ita 
 
 cc 
 
 h^&KK^iV 
 
 (rirelpu, to sow, " e-avapKa 
 
 K 
 
 i-inrdpKeti' 
 
 Kri^a, to build, *' ^-tcrtica 
 
 " 
 
 I-ktUhv 
 
 irria-a-a, to fold, " i-irrvxa 
 
 u 
 
 i-Trrix^'" 
 
 BTpanyyea, tobe a general, " i-frrpariiyilKa 
 
 u 
 
 i-aTpaTnytiKciv 
 
 nant is repeated, e is joined with it in order to vocalize it. If the verb begins 
 with a vowel, the vowel is doubled and the two coalesce, if the initial vowel is 
 ehort, and thus form a long vowel ; but if the initial vowel is long, it absorbs 
 the other, e. g. 
 
 &yai, Perf. proporlj- &axa — ^x" 
 
 dycipto, " " i4yepKa = ijyepKa 
 
 oiKeu^ " " 6olK7}Ka = I^KflKtU 
 
 Sometimes when the verb begins with e, the double e, instead of coalescing 
 into -ij, is contracted into -et, e. g. 4Ata, Perf. ^a.Ka, instead of ^a/ca. 
 
 ' Words beginning with these letters are excepted on account of the diffi 
 enlty of repeating them. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
150 VERBS. ATTIO REDUPLICATION. [} 129 
 
 Remakk 1. The two verbs fnfivliiricai (stem MNA), toremind, and ktcJo- 
 1. oi, to acquire, though their stem begins with two consonants, which are not a 
 mute and a liquid, still take the reduplication, lii-iiiniimi, Ke-icrriiiat, i-iie-iurlim<', 
 i-Ke-KT'linriv. The regular form ^KTrj/mi, is Ionic, but it Is found also in Aesch. 
 Prom. 792, and in Plato with xi-KTrifmi; likewise in Th. 2, 62. irposeKTriiiha 
 (as according to the MSS.it must probably be read, though elsewhere, Th. 
 always uses /ceKTTjjwai). Perfects firmed by Metathesis or Syncope, are seem- 
 ing exceptions to the rules of reduplication, e. g. Be'S/*')K«. iriTrTaiuu, etc. (§§ 22, 
 and 16, 8.) 
 
 4. Five verbs beginning with a liquid do not repeat this 
 Hquid, but take a for the augment : — 
 
 \aii.pi.va, to take, Perf. ^Kritpa Plup. elK^tjieiv 
 
 KayxAvu, to obtain, " etKrixa " ciA^x"" 
 
 \eyo}, ffv?tj\.iyw, to otUect. " ffvifeiXoxa) (rvvei\eyfJLCu " tfwGi\6x'sw 
 'PEil, to say, " eifpijKo " eipiiKeai 
 
 fielpofuu, to obtain, " c'tiiaprai (with rough breathing), it is fated. 
 
 Rem. 2. The regular reduplication is sometimes found in the Attic poets, 
 e. g. \eX^|U/«c&o, ^vWe\ey/j.4ms, also in Xen. iiriXeheyfiivoi occurs, Cy. 3. 3, 41 
 (Altorf, oTreiAEyfteVoi), and lK\t\€'x3^ai, H. 1. 6, 16. — AiaAEyo/iai, to converse, 
 has Perf. Si^ifLeypat, though the simple \4yai, in the sense of to say, always 
 takes the regular reduplication, KeAsyfiai, dictus sum (Perf. Act. wanting) 
 
 { 124. Attic Reduplication. 
 
 1. Several verbs, beginning with a, e, or o, repeat, in the Pcif. 
 and Plup. before the temporEil augment, the first two letters of 
 the stem This is called the Attic Reduplication The Plup. 
 then veiy rarely takes an additional augment; e.g. SiMpiLpvKro, 
 X. An. 7. 8, 14 ; so ^K-ijKoeu', but sometimes aK/jKoav. 
 
 2. The verbs, which in the Attic dialect have this reduplica- 
 tion, are the following : — 
 
 (a) Those whose second stem-syUable is short by nature : — 
 
 aKeco, -a, to grind, i/iia, -a, to vomit, 
 
 [i\-^\(Ka) a\-iiKeff[uu ifi-^/ifKa iji.-i)iKcrimi 
 
 (aA.-?)\6'K€iy) oA.-ijXeiTfHjj' iii-n/i^Keiv i/i-nfi.4a'iii,T]v 
 
 ap6a, -a, to plough, i\da {ihaivw), to drive, 
 
 {ap-lipoKa) ap-iipoiioi ^A-^\oKa ^K-ii\aiMi 
 
 (lip-TtpiKew) ap-npiinw iK-TiKiKsiv i\-7)\&ii.r)V 
 
 'OMOn, S/iwiii, to swear, 'OAEn, 6?i\vfu, to destroy, 
 
 ili-tiiioKa o;ii-(6/iofffiai 6\-^\eKa Perf. II. lSK-a\a ("OAO) 
 
 uix-wjiiiiciv Ofi-ufiSa-ftr)!' oA-wAeKeii/ Plup. II. 6\-(i\iip 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
< 125.J AUGMENT AND REDBI'LICATION IN COMPOUNDS. 151 
 
 iKeyxw, to convince, opirra, to dig^ 
 
 (i\-l)\fryxa) iK-^\eyixai ip-dpvxa 6p-iipvyficu and Hpuyiiat 
 
 {iK-riK4yx(tv) iK-nXfyiiiiv , ip-apix^iy ip-a>piyji.1i» and upiyniju. 
 
 Further: eKi(nrti>,to vnnd, {iK-tiKixa), i\-ii\iyiJi.M {the rough breathing be- 
 ing rejected), and in good usage among later writers, e?Ai7;uai ; SCa ('OAn), 
 to smell, SS-a>Sa; <j)epa ('ENEKH), to cajry, ^jz-^toX") ^'"^"e?/*"') i(r^ia> ("EAn), 
 to eat, iS-l)SoKa, iS-riSefffi-ai; &y a, to lead, Perf. usually ^x«! ity^oxa (instead 
 of 4y-l)7oxa> so as to soften the pronunciation) is later, and is rejected by the 
 Atticists as not Attic, though in Tiysias ; but Peif. Mid. or Pass, always ?iytuu. 
 
 ^(b) Those which in the second stem-syllable have a vowel 
 long by nature, and shorten this after prefixing the reduphcation 
 (except cpet'So)) : — 
 
 a\el^a, to anoint, axoiu, to hear, 
 
 &\-^Ai^a ItK-^Kifiluu i,ic-fiKoa i/Kovrjiai 
 
 hK-riMpciv i,\-r]\liiii'ni' iiK-iiK6eiy liKoiff/iriv 
 
 'EAET0n, ipxajHM, to come, ipetSw, to prop, 
 
 iK-!l\v^a ep-'llpeiKa ip-tipsur/at 
 
 c'A-TjAlJ&eiv ip-itpelxiiv ip-tipelffiiTiv 
 
 oiyeipu, to collect, iyelpco, to Wake, 
 
 ay-i)yepKa ay^yepfiai {iy-iiyepKa) ly-'fiyep/nai 
 
 hy-niyipxew i.yrty^pii'itv (iy-ityepxeiv) iynyipiiitv. 
 
 So from iytipo) comes the second Perf. iypiiyopa (on account of euphony 
 instead of iy-liyopa), I wake, second Plup. Act. 4ypiiy6peiv, lauioke. 
 
 Kemask 1. The forms included in parentheses are such as are not found 
 In good Attic prose. 
 
 Rem. 2. The verb S.ya), to lead, forms the second Aor. Act. and Mid., and 
 <l>epa, to carry, forms all the Aorists with this reduplication ; here, however, the 
 reduplicated vowel takes the temporal augment, and that only in the Ind., and 
 the vowel of the stem remains pure : — 
 
 &ya, to lead, Aor. II. ^7-070^, Inf. iyaye'c, Aor. II. Mid. iiyayStiiiv ; 
 (t>4pa, to carry (stem 'EFK), Aor. It. ijif-eyKoi', Inf. ir-eyKetv, Aor. I. ^r-E-y/cd, 
 Inf. iy-4yKtti, Aor. Pass, iiv-ex^") Inf- iv-^X^""'- ' 
 
 i 125. Augment and Reduplication in Compound 
 Words. 
 
 1 First rule. Verbs compounded with prepositions take the 
 augment and reduphcation between the preposition and the 
 verb ; the final vowel of prepositions, except mpi and wpo, is 
 ehded [n3,2, (a)] ; vpo frequently combines with the augment 
 by means of Crasis (§ 10), and becomes Trpoi; Ik before the 
 syllabic augment is changed to l| (ns, 3 ) ; and iv and otJv 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
1S2 VERBS. — UEMAUKS. [5 126l 
 
 resume tlieir v which had been assimilated ({ 18, 2), or changed 
 {i 19, 3), or dropped (20, 2), e. g. 
 
 B7ro-j3iiAAai, to (krowfrom^ Im. Kir-i^oKKov Pf. arro-fiefiXriKa Pip. btt- E^€;8A^Ken' 
 
 :repi-y8ciAA£ii, to tfiroM) around, irepi-ifiaWov Tr£pi-;3e'/8A.5)ica Trepi-e0s0\-liKuy 
 
 < irpo-i&aKXov Trpo-p40\r]Ka rpo-ifiefiXiiKeiy 
 
 ^pi,-Mx\a, to throw before, \^p„epa\\op -irpo-^i^Kma rrpoip^^Xin^iv 
 
 iK-0d\\u, to throw out, ^l-e'^SoAAoy iK-Pe$\7iKa e{-e/3e;3A^Keu» 
 
 (TiiA-Xe'yw, to coZfeci together, ffvv-€\eyov <rvv-el\oxa (Tuy-ei\6xtai 
 
 ffv^-^iTTTOi, to throw together, ffw-^^pnrTov ixvv-4ppi<pa ffvv-e^piipstv 
 
 ^-yiyvofiat, to be in, iv-eyiyjf6ijLi}v iy^yiyova iv^^y^yoveiy 
 
 4(i-pi?\X<i>, to throw in, iv-ffiaWoy ifn-piphTiKa €V-efiffi\i)Keiy 
 
 cu-tTKevd^af, to pack up, ffvy-eCKeia^oy cuy-effKevaKa crvv-eiTKeudKeiy. 
 
 2. Second rule. Verbs compounded with Sus, take the aug 
 ment and reduphcation, (a) at the beginning, when the stem 
 of the simple verb begins with a consonant or with rj or u>; (b) 
 but in the middle, when the stem of the simple verb begins 
 with a vowel, except ij or w, e. g. 
 
 Svs-Tvx4(^, to be unfortunate, i-Svs-r^X'^"^ Se-Svs-TvxVKa i-Se^Svs'Tvx^KeiV 
 Svs-onr^Wf to maJce ashamed, i-Svs-tCTrovy Se-Svs^^irrjKa 4-5e-dvs-uTr^Kfiv 
 dvs-ape(rre(o,'to be displeased, dvs-7jp4<rTov/ Svs-7jp4{rT7jKa Svs-ripeffT'fiKeiy, 
 
 Eemakk 1. Verbs compounded with c5 may take the augment and redupli- 
 cation at the beginning or in the middle, yet they commonly omit tliem at the 
 beginning, and eiepyeTim usually in the middle, e. g. 
 
 eii-Tvx^oj, to be fortunate, Impf. Tjii-r^xeoy, but commonly eit-rvx^oy 
 
 ev-ax^ouai, to feast well, " ev-ux^^l^Tiy 
 
 ii-epyiria, to do good, " ev-ripyireoy, but commonly cu-epyeVeoc, Perf. 
 
 ev-ripyirriKa, but commonly cv-epyirriKa. 
 
 3. Tliird Rule. All other compounds take the augment and 
 reduplication at the beginning, e. g. 
 
 liv^oKoyea, to relatif, 4fivAox6yeov ils-ixv^o\SyriKa 
 
 olKoSo/xea, to build, ^KoSo/icoi' ^'/ceBiJ^ttijKO. 
 
 Thus va^^fd^atuu (from iroppijo-fo, and this from irav 83 4 prjtns), to speak 
 openly, Aor. l-iro/J^Tjo-iairti/iTji', Perf. Tre-Tra^^ijo-fatTfiai. 
 
 Rem. 2. 'OSoTToie'to has the Perf. iiSoimronia-Sniu, X. An. 5. 3, I. Lycuig. c 
 
 teocr. \ 139, has lTTrOTeTp6^K€y. 
 
 ) 126. Reinarhs. 
 
 1. The six following words compounded with prepositions take the augment 
 in both places, viz. at the beginning of the simple verb and before the preposi- 
 tion : — 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 1^-] VERBS. — remauks. i,f.i 
 
 ^fiTr4xo,iai, to dothe one's self, Impf. V^X'^M'?'',' or S/tireix. Aor. i)u.max6u.m'' 
 Y^X0l^«', to endure (not ivix")," flveixoMI" " Ve<rxW 
 
 ■aii.(pi.yvocta, to be uncertain, " iiiitpeYv6ovv aad iifjL<piyv6ovy 
 
 •avopAda, to raise up, " ifvdipSrovv Perf. i]vd,pS>uKa. " ■%c<i;p;Ja>(ro 
 
 ^TOj(*.€.B, to mo/es«, " i)vd,x\ow " iivcijxhVKa " i,v6x>^T,ira 
 
 vapotveu, to ruSt, " iTotp^mvv " Trempt^fnica " imp4viiaa. 
 
 2. The analogy of these verbs is followed by three others, which are not 
 compounded with prepositions, bnt -are derived from other compound words, 
 VIZ. ' 
 
 SiaiT^a^ (ftom StaiTa,food), (a) to feed, (b) to 6e o jucfye, Impf. iSi^rap and 
 BiTjTav, Aor. ^SipTjjo-o and 5i?fT5)<ra; Perf. SESijfTijKa ; Impf. Mid.' SiTjTtJ^nijc 
 
 SiuKovea, to serve (from Sn^Korar, servant), Impf." iSniicivow and SirtK6vaw, 
 Perf. 5eSfrjK6j/TjKa 
 
 ■aji^iLff&TiTia (from AM*KBHTH2), to djs^JKte, Impf. V^ea-;31)Tow and ^iU^ht- 
 
 ■3. Exceptions to the first rule. Several Terbs compounded with prepositions, 
 take the augment before the preposition, since they have nearly the same 
 signification as the simple verbs, e. g. 
 
 afiipiyvofa {voeu), to he uncertain, Impf. ii/iiptyy6aw, or TifupeyvSovv (No. 1) 
 
 iliiptevvviu, to chtke, Aor. iip.cl>ietra, ¥ei-{.i]fujilea-fuu 
 
 iitiaraiJiai, to know, Impf. ^ttio-to^ijj' 
 
 i/piriiu, to dismiss, " a(plovv and if(f>iow, or ■%<f>i€i>' [&«« 
 
 waSfpa, to set, ^ " ■^Ki^^Co" (old Att. also koSiTCov), Pf. kekci- 
 
 KoAeConat, to sit, " ^Ko&efiffnjy and Koaef. (without Aug.) 
 
 leddriimi, to sit, '■" ?Ka^/ijji/ and KoSrlifrnv 
 
 KoAiiSw, to sleep, " iicJAevSov, seldom Ka^iSov. 
 
 ■i. Those verbs :are apparently an exception to the first rule, which are not 
 formed by the composition of a simple verb with a preposition, but by deriva- 
 tion from a word already compounded, e. g. 
 
 ^vamovfuai, to oppose one's self to (from ivavrtos) Impf. T\vavnoiiJ.r)v 
 
 ayTiStK€w, to defend at law t " ayriSiKos) " TjvTtSiKovj/ and ijvTediKovy 
 
 kvrtPoKca, to hit upon ( " am^oX^) " iivTifi6\ovp 
 
 i/XTropda, to ffain bi/ traffic ( " ipir-op-li} " i\fm6pav 
 
 ^/in-eSf^ft), to establish ^ " %^irehos) '' ^fiireSovy^ 
 
 5. Many verbs, however, which apparently are formed only by derivation, are 
 treated, even by the best classical writers, as if they were compounded of a 
 simple verb and a preposition. Thus, irapayof/.4w, irapTivStiovv and irapevip.ovy, 
 TrapTiv^fiTjira, Perf. ■Kapavev6ii7jKa, although it is not from irapA and avofieo} or 
 vo/iea, which two verbs are not in use, but from tlie compound Trapivofios ; so 
 further, iyx^lp" (from 'ErXEIPOS), to take in hand, Impf. iyex^lpovv; 4iriAv 
 ftew (from 'EniSTMOS), to rfesiVe, Impf. ive^6p.ow: evAufieoiiai, Aor. eye&u/ii^ 
 Atjc, Perf. iyre^vfiTifMci; Kar7]yop4w (from Karif/opos), to accuse, Impf. KaTijyS- 
 povy, Perf. Kar7iy6p7iKa; Ttpobvp.ov^ai (from irpS^yfips), to desire earnestly/, 
 Impf. irpov^vfioifjLTiy and irpo^^wiftTiy; so eyKcofiid^eiy, wpmpTiTe^eiy, ^yeipeieiy, 
 iKK^Tjaia^eiy, inroTrre^eiy, eiriTij^eueiy, 4p/pavi^Giy, ffvyepy^tv, etc. 
 
 ■ So PI. Phaed. 87, 6, according to most and the*e9t MSS. 
 ' Eur. Med. 1128, and Aristopli. Thesm. 160. 
 
 XT.M. (.2.. 3d. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
154 VE7.es XN to. DERIVATION OF TENSES. [H 127, 128 
 
 ITOEMATION Ol' THE TeNSES OF VeRBS IN -«. 
 
 i 127. Division of Verbs in -to according to the 
 Characteristic. 
 
 Verbs in -a> are divided into two principal classes, accord- 
 nig to the difference of the characteristic (§ 108, 5) : — 
 
 L Pure verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel ; these are 
 again divided into two classes : — 
 
 A. Uncontracted verbs, whose characteristic is a vowel, 
 except a, e, o, e. g. Traiheu-o), to educate ; "Kv-co, to loose ; 
 
 B. Contract verbs, whose characteristic is a, e, or o, e. g. 
 rifid-o), to honor ; <f>iXi-o), to love ; fMa^6-(o, to let out 
 for hire. 
 
 II. Impure verbs, whose characteristic is a consonant; 
 these are again divided into two classes : — 
 
 A. Mute verbs, whose characteristic is one of the nine 
 mutes, e. g. Xewr-tu, to leave ; TrXe/c-w, to twine ; Trel'^-co, 
 to persuade ; 
 
 B. Liquid verbs, whose characteristic is one of the four 
 liquids, X, fi, v, p, e. g. d77eX\-ft>, to announce ; vifi-co, 
 to divide ; ^aiv-ay, to show ; ^'^elp-co, to destroy. 
 
 Bemakk. According to the accentuation of the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act, 
 ftU verbs are divided into : — 
 
 (a) Barytones, whose final syllable in the first Pers. Pres. Ind. Act. is not 
 accented, c. g. \ii-ai, irXeK-co, etc. ; 
 
 (b) Perispomena, whose final syllable is circumflexed in the first Pers. ; thesa 
 are consequently contract verbs, e. g. ri/tm, ipi\u, liurdi. 
 
 § 128. Derivation of Tenses. 
 
 All tenses are formed from the stem of the verb, the inflection-endings men- 
 tioned above (§ 11.3), being appended to this. The Primary tenses only have 
 u, distinct tense-characteristic (§ 110); this is always wanting in the Pres. 
 and Impf, the mode- vowels and personal-endings being sufficient; but the 
 Pres. and Impf. very frequently strengtlien or increase the pure stem, o. g. 
 riiTTT-o? (pm-e stem TTn), anapT-di/a (pure stem 'AMAPT) ; the Secondaiy tenses 
 never admit such an increase, but are formed from the pure stem, and without 
 the tense-characteristic; yet, in certain cases (^ 140), they admit a change of 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 129.J FORMATION OP THE TENSES OP PORE VERBS 156 
 
 the 8tem-vowel. Hence, certain tenses, which are formed from a cofamou stem, 
 may be distinguished from each other and classed by themselves. Tenses, 
 included in such a class, may be said to be derived from one another. The 
 principal classes are the three following : — 
 
 I. Tenses, which may strengthen the pure stem. These are the Pres. and 
 Impf. Act., Mid., or Pass., e. g. 
 
 (pure stem TTn) Ti!ir-T-» tiJtt-t-o^bi 
 
 t-rvn-r-ov iTvir-r-S/iriu* 
 
 II. Tenses, which have a tense-characteristic. These are the Primary 
 tenses, e. g. 
 
 (a) First Perf. and first Plup. Act., e. g. (W-^^oS-kb) vi-(ppaKa, i-m-jtpir 
 Kfiv; 
 
 (b) Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass. These do not have the tense-charac- 
 teristic ; from the Perf. Mid. or Pass, the Pat. Perf. is farmed by 
 rejecting -/uu and annexing -aoiua, e. g. ri-rvii-nM (instead of reruir- 
 /ttoi), ire-rifintiv, Tertnl/ofiai (instead of Terimtroiuu). The Perf. has 
 a short vowel, but the Put. Act. and Mid. a long vowel, e. g. Kiu, 
 Ac^iJ/ca, \4\vfiai, Xitra, XvtrofjLoi, Sea, SedrjKa, SeSefiatj S^ffu, d^irojuai ; 
 so the Put. Perf. has a long vowel, e. g. \f\i(roiJ.at, SeS^o^uai ; 
 
 (c) First Put. and Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. ritlita t^i^o^bi 
 
 l-Tvifm i-Tvifid/iTiv j 
 
 (d) Pirst Aor. and first Put. Pass., k. g. i-riip-^u Tvip-^ffo/ioi. 
 in. Tenses, which are formed from the pure stem without a tense-character- 
 istic, may yet, in certain cases, admit a change of the stem-vowel. These 
 are the Secondary tenses, c. g. 
 
 (a) The second Perf. and second Plup. Act. c. g. ri-rvTr-a, i-Te-rvr-etv ; 
 
 (b) The second Aor. Act. and Mid., e. g. e-Aoft-ov, 4->M^-6uriv from Aai^ 
 ^dya (pure stem AA0) ; 
 
 (c) Tha second Aor. and second Put. Pass., e. g. i-rihr-Tiv, TiJir-^o-o/iai. 
 
 § 129. I. FOEMATION OP THE TeNSES OF PUEE VeBBB. 
 
 1. In pure verbs, both Barytoned and Perispomena, the 
 tense-endings are commonly appended to the unchanged chai- 
 acteristic of the verb, e. g. ^ovXev-a-o), /Se^ovkiv-Ka. Pure verbs 
 commonly form no Secondary tenses, but only the Primary 
 tenses ; the Perf. with x. (ko), the Put. and Aor. with a- and 3 
 (o-o), <ra, 9tjv, ^-rjao-ncu). Pure verbs, however, are subject to the 
 following regular change in the stem : — 
 
 2. The short characteristic vowel of the Pres. and Impf, is 
 lengthened in the other tenses, viz. 
 
 ( into r, e. g. firivfu, to he angry, ni\vi-aa, t-ii-livlira, etc. 
 
 t ' 0, " KwAii-ai (u commonly long), to Under, uuXv-aa, Ke-KdMfttu, etc. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
156 TENSES OP PURE VERBS Wll'H SHORT VOWEL. [j 130 
 
 •c into n, e. g. •pi\4-a {cj)iAu), to love, (piK'li-aa, ire-if^Aij-Ka, etc. 
 
 o " u, " fua-^d-a {/itaSra), to let out for hire, ixm^d-tra, /ie-filffSa-ica, etc. 
 
 ■a " 7}, " riii&'ttt (Tijuw), to honor, Ttfi'fi-tTa, re^rifnf-Ka, etc. 
 
 Remark 1. a is lengthened into a, when c, i, orp precedes it [comp. § i% 
 l,(a)], e.g. 
 
 ici-a, to permit, ia-cu, e^cura, eiaKa, etafjLai, eid^v^ kiTTia-a, to entertain, kaTti. 
 svo ; <papa-a, to steal, (piopa-ira ; but iyyvi-a, to give as a pledge, ifYvi]tra ; Po&«, 
 to coll out, $o-fiirofiai, ip6ri<Ta (like oySori). 
 The two following imitate those in -eia, -lia, -pia, viz. 
 a\o&-u, to strike, to thresh, old Att. Fut. &\a£-<rai ; but usually &\oii)ra; 
 &Kpo&-o/iat, to hear, Fut. lucpoiiroiMi, Aoc i)Kpoa<riia\v (like i^poa). 
 
 Rem. 2. The verbs XP'^"> to give an oracle; xf><^o/i«'> to i^e; and Tirpiu 
 (0 tore, though p precedes, lengthen a. into tj, e. g. xRV'^'t-^'^h 'rpiicrm. 
 
 i 130. Formation of the Ten&es of Pure Verbs with 
 a short Characteristic-vowel. 
 
 The following pure verbs, contrary to the rule (§ 129, 2) re- 
 tam the short characteristic-vowel, either in forming aU the 
 tenses, or in particular tenses. Most of these verbs assume a 
 cr in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, and first Aor. Pass., and in the 
 tenses derived from these, and also m the verbal adjectives; 
 such verbs are designated by : Pass, with a-. 
 
 (a) -im. 
 
 XjSi'ai, fo sting, Fut. %pi<!iii, Aor. ixpiaa. Inf. xf^am. Pass, with a; (but xp^f^i 
 to anoint, Fat. XP^""' ^°'^- ^XP'"'") I'lf- XP''">'> -^O'"- Mid. ^xf "J^oMI" j Perf 
 Mid. or Pass. Ke'x/5r-<r-/Ki«, K€xpur^(u; Aor. Pass, ixpi-a-^v; verbal a^j. 
 XpitTTos). 
 
 Remakk 1. Itrato!, to perceive, of the Ionic dialect, belongs here (^ 230). 
 Tlie poetie iia is found only in the Pres. and Impf. ("diov, § 122, 1). 
 
 (b) -t<o. 
 
 1. 'A.VVU) (also old Att. avtra) to complete, Fut. avtaa; Aor. Hjuvtra. Pass, 
 with (T. 
 
 Bfjuo) (also old Att. apira), to draw vxiler. Fut. aptaa; Aor. ^piira. Pass. 
 
 with ir. 
 Riiw(C), to close, e. g. <& eyes, Fut. fiuow, Aor. e/iCertt; but Perf. u^vKa, to is 
 
 closed, to be silent. 
 Krvm{v)^ to spit, Fut. irriffa; Aor. ^irrBo-o, Pass, with <r (^TrTu-cr-ain'.), verbal 
 
 adj. TTv-a'-rSs. 
 
 2. The following dissyllables in -ia lengthen the short charaeteristic-vowel 
 m the Fnt and Aor. Act. and Mid. and in Fut. Perf. Mid., and 8i!w also in the 
 Perf. and Plup Act | but they resume tlic short vcwel in the Perf. and Ptap. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 33U.] TENSES OP ruaE verbs with short vowel. 157 
 
 Act. (except Siiai), Mid. or Pass., in tiie Aor. and Fut. Pass., and in verbal 
 adjectives : — 
 
 Si! a, to wrap up, I"ut. Ssd-a Aor. ISOo-o Perf. Se'SO/to SeSOpoi Aor Pass. iSt^, 
 &io:,io sacrifice, " aio-u " raOtrn " TcMko WaS/um " " ^rSaijy 
 Altai, tofoose, '• xaffa " rxiitra " Xe'XtVa Ac'M^oi " " 4\tSniy. 
 
 Rem. 2. The doubtful vowel v is commonly used as long in the Pres. and 
 Impf. by the Attic poets: but in prose it must be considered as short; hence to 
 be accented liie, vrie. Me, etc., and not itvt, tttCe, \ve, etc. 
 
 (c) -S«. 
 
 rc\ow, to laugh, Fut yeA.So-0/icti (seldom ye\&irai); Adv. iy4\a(ra. Pass. 
 
 with (T. 
 e'Aiito (usually i\aiva), to drive, Put. 4\&<ra (Att. ^\w), etc. See § 158, 3. 
 &A ({», to bruise, ^K&<ra; etc. Pass, with cr {TeSyKa-ar-fuu, iSt\(l-a--S>riv). 
 <c\ia,to break, KX&ira, etc. Pass, with o- (K4KXa-<r-ix!u, iK\a-a-S>r)v). 
 X ei\iu, to loosen, xoAace, etc. Pass, with o- {4xa\d-ir-^v). 
 ^a/ido! (usually dofidCa), dome, Aor. iSd/iaaa. Pass, with (r. 
 irepdu, to transport, to sell, Fut. ircpaaa ; Aor. eVepaira ; Perf. *€iripS.ita (but 
 
 irepdiD, to pass over, Intrans., Put. irepia-w ; Aor. 4irepa<ra). These seven 
 
 verbs have a liquid before the cfiaracteristic-vowel o. 
 TTrdu, to draw, (nraira, etc. Pass, with cr (4(nrd-iT-^ii]. 
 \rxda, to loose, to open, ffxSo'ia, etc. 
 
 (d) -e'«. 
 
 1. AlSdofiai, to reverence. See § 166, 1. 
 
 liKcofiai, to keal, axeiroiiai, iixeffd/iTiy ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. flKe-(r-/«u; Aor. Pass. 
 
 a\ eoj, to grind, to beat, a\4-(T-a, Att., yet seldom a\i5 ; Aor. ^Aeo-o ; Perf. Mid. or 
 
 Pass. a\1iKea-iMi (§§ 117, 2, and 124, 2). 
 li pit 4 a, to stiffice, etc. Pass, with ic. 
 ifi 4a, to vomit. Put. ifxetra, etc. ; Perf. Act. ^/t^/ieica ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, i/iiifiet- 
 
 fiai (§ 124, 2). 
 f e'<o, to boil (usually intrans., and fcccu/iu, usually trans.). Pass, with <r. 
 ^ 4 a, to scrape. Pass with cr. — reh4a,'to accomplish. Pass, with »•(§ 117, 2). 
 tp4o}, to tremble, -etroj, etc.; verbal adj. Tpe-ir-r6s. — x^"> '" pf"""- See § 154, 
 
 Rem. 1. 
 
 2. The following have in some tenses the long, in others the short vowel: — 
 air 4 a (in Attic prose 4Tra.iv4a), to praise. Put. att'4tru; Aor. Jvetra; Perf. ■^yeKa; 
 
 Aor. Pass. ^y4^ii>; Put. Pass. aiVe&^iroiuai ; verb. adj. alj/c-r^s, -t4os; but 
 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. ijiMj/ttou. 
 alp4o), to choose, Aor. Pass. ^p4^v; also p'p^i&j)!'; alpfiaa, -^prixti, ^pri/iai. 
 yafi4a!, to many. Put. yojia; Aor. iyniia; Perf 7e)'(£;u7)«;a ; Aor. Pass, iyapi'li^p 
 
 (I was taken to wife). 
 a a, to bind, B^<r», fSijo-a, e57;<rcifir)v ; but Se'Se/ca, S4Siiuu, iStSrnv; Put. Perf. 
 
 SeSiia-e/ua is commonly used for SsS^iro^i (the latter is used by Dem. ana 
 
 later writers). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
(58 VERBS. — AORIST AND PUTUKE PASSIVE WITH cr. [} 131 
 
 <a\4a, to call, Put. Ka\effw, Att. KaA-w (§ 117,2); Aor. ^KdKfffa; Perf. Act 
 
 K&A?)KO ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KexXrifiat, lam called; Put. Perf. KeKhiiffofuu, 
 
 J shall be called; Aor. Pass. ixA-liShiv; Put. Pass. icATja^irojum ; Put. Mid. 
 
 KcAouixai ; Aor. Mid. ^KoAetra/ii?!'. 
 n-oS e'o), to desire, iroStiaofuu, Lys. 8, 18, PI. Phaed. 97, a. ; liriStiiia, Isoc. 4, 122. 19, 
 
 17; elsewhere, ToS^ira!, i-ir6^(Ta; Perf Act. Trririi&riKa ; irEiriiSTjjUoi ; Aor. 
 
 Pass. iito^ia^Tiv. 
 trovia, laboro. Put. iroviiau, etc. (to warh) ; irovitra (to be in pain) ; Perf. irfirrf- 
 
 V7J/CO in both senses ; Mid. and Pass, always have ri, e. g. iTvovriiriniiv and 
 
 i-Koviidritv, Perf ireitSvltiiM. _ 
 
 JeJ -oaj. 
 \/)i{m, to plough, Put. op(((rci!, Aor fipotra; Perf Mid. or Pass, ipfipoiuu (§ 124, 
 2) ; Aor. Pass. iip6^v. 
 
 i 131. Formation of the Aor. and Put. Fuss., and 
 the Ferf., Pluperf. Mid. or Fass. with cr. 
 
 1. Pure verbs, which retain the .short characteristic-vowel in 
 forming the tenses, in the Aor. and Fut. Pass, and in the Perf. 
 and Piup. Mid. or Pass, (also in the verb, adj.), unite the tense- 
 endings driv, [Jiai, etc. to the tense-forms by inserting o- (} 130), 
 
 TcAe-ctf €-T6\e-(r-^y TC-reAe-ff-^ot 
 
 Te\G-(f-^ffOfiai s-Te-TeAe-tr-jUTjf. 
 
 2. Besides these verbs, several others also, which either have 
 a long characteristic- vowel in the stem, or lengthen the short 
 characteristic-vowel of the stem in forming the tenses, have the 
 same formation, viz. 
 
 aKoia, to hear, Aor. Pass. iiKoi-a-^v, Put. Pass, hcov-ir-hiiaoiuu, Perf Mid, 
 or Pass. 1riKov-ir-ix.ai, Plup. iiKoi-(r-fi.riv ; ivaia, to kindle; Ke\eva, to command; 
 the Deponent StaTrapaKe\eiofiai, to arouse; Kvala, ki/^o), to scratch (KeKym-a-iuu, 
 K€KVTi-ir-iuu, ixval-a-^v, iKpif-a'd^v) ; KvKia, to roll; Atuw, to stone (i\ei-(r-dT)V, 
 Perf seems to be wanting) ; {i!ai, to scrape; walu, tostrihe; iroAofo), to xoresde 
 (ivaKai-ir-^v) ; irAcai, to sail; irpia, to saw ; irraiw, to strike against,to stum- 
 Ue; pala (poetic), to destroy; irela, to sliake; Ba>, to rain, Aor. Pass. v-a-Srnv, 
 I VMS rained upon, Perf Pass. S-<r-/tai (i<^v-a-ii.4vos, X. Ven. 9, 5), Put. vvopju 
 (instead of i-ir-Srli-a-oiiai) ; <j)p4a, to send (only in compounds, e. g. t'ur^., 
 eK(l>., to lead in). Put. (ppii<ra>, etc., Mid. ^ffjiTotixu, Aor. Pass. i<pp^-(r'^v ; x^"'^ 
 heap up (Kexo)-<r-/iai, 4x<!i-a-^v) ; xpti", to give an oracle (K4xpri-(r-pi(u, ixP^'' 
 Sm", 5 129, Kcm. 2) ; xp'". to anoint [§ 130, (a)] ; iliaiu, to touch (^av(r-fMi, 
 Hippocr.). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 131.] VEB.LS. AOE.1ST AND FUTURE PASSIVE WITH Or. 15S) 
 
 3. The followmg vary between the regular formation and 
 that with cr : — 
 
 yeia, to cause to taste. Mid. to taste, to enjoy, Pcrf. Mid. or Pass, yiyeviuu (Euvip.); 
 
 but Aor. Pass, probably iyii-a-^v. Comp. ytvjxa, but ycv-a-r4ov. 
 SpcJeij, to do, Eut. SpSiro), etc.; Perf. SiSpaxa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Sf'Spo/ioi and 
 
 S4ipa-<r-iMi (Th.) ; Aor. Pass. iSpdadTiv (Th.). Verbal adjeetire ipa-ff-rSs, 
 
 Spa-ff-rsos. 
 
 bpaia,to break in pieces, Perf. Mid. or Pass, ri^pm-a-iiai (Plat. Tc^pavnai) ; 
 Aor. Pass, i^pai-a-^v. Verbal adjective ^pau-ff-rSs. 
 
 K\ait», Att. K\aa, to weep, Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeK\avii,ai and K4ic\av-a--fuu. 
 
 KKflu, to shut, Peif. Mid. or Pass. K^KKfi/iai commonly, K€icAei-(r-/iai Aristoph.; 
 KfKKiiiMt Tragedians, Thn., sometimes PI., rarely Xen. ; Aor. Pass. ixAei- 
 v&rjv, Attic iK\^-(r-^v (Th.) ; Put. Pass. K\ei-iT-^<rofUU. Verbal adjective 
 K\et-a'-T6s, K\?j-<r-'r6s. 
 
 Ko\oia, to maim, Perf. Mid. or Pasp. KeKiXov/xai and /ceKiJXou-ir-^oi ; Aor. 
 Pass. iKoXoi-a-^v and lKo\oi^v. 
 
 xpoia, to strike upon, Ved. Blid. or Vass. KiKpovfiat and (seldom) Kexpov-ff-fuu 
 (X. H. 7. 4, 26) ; Aor. Pass. fKpoi-a-Srnv. 
 
 veto, to heap up, Put. ir!i<ra, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, viwimi (ye'ioj-ir-^oi doubt- 
 ful) ; but Aor. Pass. ivi)-a-&T]v fArrian). Verbal adjective irnr6s. 
 
 via (collateral form vliSsa>),to spin, Perf. Mid. or Pass. viin]-a-p.ai; but Aor. 
 Pass, ivii^y. Verbal adjective inrris. 
 
 ^da,to rub, Perf. Mid. or Pass, ^fni^i and i^-a-pm; Aor. Pass. i^StrjV and 
 i^i\-a-&r\v (instead of which the Attic writers use i^rrtpM, i^iix^i> from 
 
 4. The following verbs assume a in the Aor. Pass., but not 
 in the Perf. : — 
 
 /ii/jHjir/cm (MNA-n), to remind, Pf. jucpwi/aai, I remember, A. P. iiivifff-Sntv 
 irj/ew, to blow, ir^irw/ioi (poet.) iirv4va-dTi» 
 
 Xpiopitti {XP''I^^)> "toi'i K«Xf";M«' ixp^-"-^- 
 
 iraia, to cause (o cease, to finish, ire'iroufiai iirai-tr-Sniv 
 
 and iiraiSmv, vmSr^iaoiia- Ion. and Th. Verbal adjective irav-ff-rios. 
 
 5. The following verbs, though they retain the short charac- 
 teristic-vowel in the Perf. and Aor. Pass., do not assume <r : — 
 
 tiu, S>i«>, \i<i b 130 (^)> 2]. '^"" [5 130 (<=)!' "''"''"' "''"''°' '^'" ^^ ^'''° ^^^' ^1' 
 oprfw [5 130 (o)], x^'" [§ 154, Kem. l], tr^ia, to excite (J 230) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i60 
 
 UNCONTRAOTED AND CONTRACT VERBS. [H 132-134 
 
 Pakadigms op Pure Vekbs. 
 
 A. XJncontracted Pure Verbs. 
 
 § 132. (a) without o- in the Mid. and Pass. 
 
 im\ia, to hinder. ACTIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Ktv\v-QJ 
 
 Perf. Kf-xi-M-Ka 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Kto\6-trw 
 
 Aor. 
 
 l-Ki$Au-(ra 
 
 MIDDLE. 1 
 
 Pres. 
 
 KwKv-ofiai 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Ke-K^\v-(iai 
 
 Fut. 
 
 KcoKv-aofiat 
 
 Aor. 
 
 
 PASSIVE. 1 
 
 Aor. 
 
 4-Kai\i-drir 
 
 Eut. 
 
 kbAO ^trofioi. 
 
 4 133. (b) with a- m the Mid. and Pass, {k 131). 
 
 Perf. S. 1. 
 
 Kf-KeKfv-tr-fuu 
 
 Imperative. 
 ice-KEAcii-iro 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Mid. 2. 
 
 K€-K€\eV-ffal 
 
 Ke-KEAeB-o-ftM 
 
 or 3. 
 
 , Ke-Ke\fv-ir-Tai 
 
 KC-«eAeiS-<r^w 
 
 Partieiple. 
 
 Pass. 1. 
 
 Kf-KsKev-ff'fli^OV 
 
 
 lad. D.2. 
 
 Ke-Ke\ev-iT^ov 
 
 K€-KeAei/-ff"&oi' 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Ke-KcXev-tr^oy 
 
 Ke-KiKev-a^av 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 K6-/c6A€i5-(r-/ie^a 
 
 
 Kf-Ke\ev-(r-ii4ms S 
 
 2. 
 
 Ke-KeAeu-fffte 
 
 KC-ice'Aeu-ir&« 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Ke-KeAeu-ir-jueVoi €i(ri{v] 
 
 Ke-KcAeii-iraatroi' or /ce-KfAetS-iraiui'] 1 
 
 Plupf. ^ , 
 Mid. or °' 
 
 i-Ke-KiKfi-ff-iiriv D. i-Ke-Ke\ci-cr-iJ.e&ov P. €-KC-/ceAe«-ir-;ncaa 
 
 Pa's"! 
 
 e-Ke-K€\eu-(ro " ^-/ce-'ceAeu-t-'^oj' " i-K^-KeXev-ff^e 
 
 Ind. ^■ 
 
 i-Ke-K^Aev-a-To " 4-Ke-Ke\ei-a^]v " Ke-KeAeu-ff-ueVoi V"" 
 
 Opt. 
 
 Ke~Ke\eu-ir-^4vos ^tjv 
 
 Aorist Pass. 
 
 i-K€Kfi-(r-&riy Future Pass. KeXev-a-d^ffoncu. 
 
 B. Contract Pure Verbs. 
 
 i 134. Preliminary Remarks. 
 
 I. The characteristic of contract pure verbs is either o, e, or o (^ 127) ; these 
 are contracted with the mode-vowel following. The contraction, which is made 
 according to the rules stated above (^ 9, 1.), belongs only to the Pres. and 
 Impf Act. and Mid., because in these two tenses only is the characteristio- 
 vowel followed by another vowel. The Paragogic r in the third Pers. Sing 
 Tmpf. Act. disappears in the contraction. On the tense- formation, see 4§ 
 129-131. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 134. J PnELIMINATlY REMARKS. 16J 
 
 2. The contract forms of verbs in -da in the Indicative and Subjunctive arc 
 the same ; contracts in -6ai liave the same form for the second and tliird Pcrs. 
 Sing, in tlie Indie. Opt. and Subj. viz. -o7s, -cT. 
 
 3. The contracted Infinitive of verbs in -da, which, in our editions of the 
 classics, is more commonly written with an I)ta Subscript, is without that letter 
 in the ancient inscriptions, being contracted from -aey, e. g. n/xSi', not ri/i^v. 
 
 A. If only one syllable follows the parenthesis in the paradigm, the termina- 
 tion of the uncontracted form is tlie last syllable in the parenthesis, and the 
 syllable after the parenthesis is the tennination of the contracted form, e. g. 
 Tiju(c£-b))w = Tt^dd), Tifia, rifi{d-eiv)aj/ = TifLdeij/, TifjLciv] but if more than one 
 syllable follows the parenthesis, the syllable, or syllables, after the last hyphen 
 is the common ending of the contract and uncontracted foi-ms, the uncontracted 
 word embracing all the letters of the form except the vowel after the paren- 
 thesis ; the contract, all without the parenthesii' 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
162 
 
 PAEADIGMS OF CONTEACT VERBS. 
 
 [i 133 
 
 § 135. Paradigms of 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Ill 
 
 III 
 
 3 w a, 
 
 a ft 
 
 Present. 
 
 Cliaracteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic e. 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 Indica- 
 tive, 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Ti/x{c£-w)w, to honor^ 
 Tift{d-eis)§s 
 
 'Tlfi{d-e)a-70v 
 
 Tiij.(ii-e]a-TOi> 
 
 Tifi{d-o)w-fj.ey 
 
 Ti|U((£-e)a-TC 
 
 riiJ(.{ti'Ou)u-tri{y) 
 
 (}>t\{4-(o}S>, to love, 
 ^i\ €-6i}e? 
 <f>i\{e-€)e7-Tot/ 
 
 (pi\(4-€)eT-T0V 
 
 (pt\(4-o}ov-/xey 
 
 <pi\{4-€)e?-7e 
 ^LX(4-ov)ov-(ri{v) 
 
 •ua-d{6-a}5), to let, 
 
 /JtttT^{6-€ls)o'lS 
 
 l.iur^{6-c)ov-Toy 
 
 tua-&{6-f)ov-Tov 
 
 fiia'^[6-o)ou'fiey 
 
 /iii(7&(({-r)oD-Te 
 
 IJ.i<rA{6->}v)od-<n{y) 
 
 Sub- 
 junc- 
 tive, 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 T(iU(££-7/s)aj 
 
 Ttfi[d-Tj]a-Toy 
 Tt/j.{d-7i)a-Toy 
 T(jit(t£-w)w-juev 
 Ti^((£-7j)o-Te 
 Ti^(ii-w)3-in(v) , 
 
 to 
 
 - M 
 1 
 
 (ln\{4'r}s)vs 
 
 <pt\{e-7i)Ti-Toy 
 tj>i\{e-T})7i-Toy 
 (j}t\[e-a)u-iJ.€V 
 
 (l>l\{4-0j)w-tTt{v) 
 
 fuo &l6-7i)a-Toy 
 
 li,ir^{6-ri)<i-Tov 
 
 fj.tfT^{6-a)w-^fy 
 
 tu(rA(6-7i)!c-Tc 
 
 fii(r^{6-(ij)iti-fft{y) 
 
 Impera- 
 tive, 
 
 S.2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Tj|U(a-e)a 
 
 Tf/t(a-e)<i-TW 
 
 Tiju(c£-6)a-T0J' 
 
 Ti/t(a-6)a-Tetfj' 
 
 Tifi(ii-e)a-Te 
 
 Ti^(a-€)a-Tw(rai', or 
 
 1*ju(o-(J)ei-j'Taii' 
 
 (pl\{e-4)ei-Tui 
 <l>i\{4-e)€7-TOv 
 <piK{e-4)€i-r(oy 
 (piX{4-e]ci-T€ 
 <pi\{e'4)ei-Twffav or 
 tpi\{e-6)ov-VTaiv 
 
 fit(r^{o-4}oir-Tu 
 
 fll(T&{6-e)ov-TOy 
 
 fit(r^(o-4)ov-Ttoy 
 
 fj(.ifr^{6-e)ov-re 
 
 liicr&{o-4}oi-Tacrav 
 
 or fjit(r^{o-6}oii-yTuy 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 
 Tiju(<i-€«')ar 
 
 ipi\[4-eiv)4!y 
 
 fii(r^(6-€iy)ovv 
 
 Partici- 
 ple, 
 
 Tifji.{d-Qiy)ai/ 
 Tifi{d-ou)u-(Ta 
 Tifi{d-oy)&v 
 rtfi{d-o)w'VTOs 
 
 (}3eK{4-ay)ciiy 
 
 <pi\{4-ov)ov-tra 
 
 (lii\{4-oy)ovy 
 
 <pl\{4-o}ou-VTQS 
 
 ipt\{e-o{r)oi£h(rtjs 
 
 liurA(6-ay)u^ 
 
 fu(rA{6-ou]ov-a-a 
 
 fU(r^{6-oy)ovy 
 
 liurA{6-o)od-vTOs 
 
 Hi(r^{o-oi)oi-(nis. 
 
 Imperfect. 1 
 
 In.lica- 
 tivc. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3, 
 P. L 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 iTliJ.{a-oi/)uv 
 irlfj. a-es)as 
 irin a-e)a 
 
 iTi^{d-e)a-TOV 
 
 iTiii.{a-4)ii-Triv 
 
 4rtfi{d-o)a-/jt.ev 
 
 4Ti/x{d-e)a-Te 
 
 iTlfi{a-oy)ti}V 
 
 4(t>l\{e-oy)ovv 
 4cf>i\{f-€s)eis 
 4<p(\{e-e)eL 
 
 iiptK{4-e)€7-Toy 
 
 4<pi\{f-4)el-TTiy 
 
 4tl)i\{4-o}ov-fiey 
 
 4<pi\(4-e)et-Te 
 
 4(t>l\[e-oy)ovv 
 
 4ixiird{o-ov)ovv 
 
 ^yii((r&{o-e)ou 
 
 4fiur&{6-c)oS^oy 
 4iit(TA{o-4)o£^nv 
 4iwrSr{6-o oD-;uef 
 4nur&{6-e oD-te 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 135.] 
 
 i-aKadigms of contract verbs. 
 
 163 
 
 Contract Verbs. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Present, 
 
 Cliaracteristic. a. 
 
 rifi(d-o)u-iJ.ai 
 
 Ttfi{d'€)a-Tat 
 
 Ttix{d-e)a-(r^oy 
 rtfL{d-€)a-tr^oj/ 
 
 Tifi{d-e)a-a'S^e 
 Ttfx{d-o)S}-vrat 
 
 TifjL{d-u)u-fiai 
 
 rtfji(d-ri)^ 
 
 rtfi{d-7})a-rat 
 
 Titi(d-T})a-(r^ov 
 Tifi{d-7i)a'(r^ov 
 Ti/A(a-(6)(6-jUe&o 
 rtfi{d-7i)a-(r^e 
 
 Ttfj.{d-a)Si-yTai 
 
 ■wtfjL{a^4)d'a-^Q> 
 :Tifi{d-e)a.<r^ou 
 
 Tifila-4)d-<r^toj/ 
 '.ri^{d-€)a'ff^e 
 
 Tifi(ar4)d-ff^a><rai', or 
 TiiJ.{a-e)d-a'^<i)v 
 
 Characteristic £. 
 
 ^t\(4-o)ov-fiat 
 
 <pt\{e-€)ei-(r^oy 
 <}ii\{4-e)ei'(r^oy 
 
 <fn\(4-€)e7'<r&e 
 ^i\{4-o)ov-j/rai 
 
 <l>iK(4-(o)w-iJ.ai 
 <t>i\{4-T])T}-'rai 
 
 <pl\{ e-di ) 6-fA.€^0y 
 
 tl>i\{4-7l)7}-C^OV 
 
 <t>iK(4~7i)^-(r^oif 
 
 ipt\{4-7])Tj-(r^e 
 ipi\{4-ai)S}-yTat 
 
 <fn\{4-ov)ov 
 ^i\{e-4)€i-(r^to 
 
 t}>t\{4-€)e7-a'^oy 
 <f>i?\.{e-4)el-<T^tiiy 
 <pi\[4-e)eT-<r^e 
 ipi\{€-4)ei-tr^worav, or 
 (piK{e-4)€i'<r^av 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 fjU(rSt(o-6)oi-fie^oy 
 fjLi<r^{6'o) w-yrai 
 
 fj.tcr^[6-7])S}-Tcu 
 
 fJLttT^{0-^)(i-fMe^0y 
 
 fiitr^i 6-7} )u-tr^ov 
 fita^l o-di ) io-fi^^a 
 fii<r^{6-7i)u-a^€ 
 
 
 ov)ov 
 4)o^-a'Sra 
 ■e}ov-c^ov 
 4)oi>-(r^av 
 
 ■4)ov-(r^a<TaVf or 
 
 0'4)o{>-a'^fav 
 
 rifj.{d-e)a-(r^aL 
 
 <pi\{4-€)€'i-<r^ai 
 
 fiio'^{6-e)od-(r^at 
 
 Tift{a-o)Q)-/j.4y7j 
 r(.u{a-6){&-ft€i'oy 
 ti/a( a-o)a-fi4vov 
 
 Tifi{a-o)tc~fi4y7]s 
 
 <pi\{e-6)o6-fievos 
 
 if>iK{e-6)o{i-fX€yoy 
 ^i\ ( €-0 ) ov-fi4vov 
 (pi\{e'o)ov-/A,4y7}S 
 
 
 o)ov-fi4y7j 
 ■6]o^-fieyoy 
 ■o)ov-fi4yov 
 
 ■o]ov-fi4yrji. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 irtfi{a-6)(^-fj.r}y 
 
 iTtfJt{d-ou)w 
 
 4Ttn{d-e)a-T0 
 
 iTifi{a-6)^-/xe^oy 
 
 4rtfi{d-e}a-(r^ov 
 
 irifila-4)d-(r^p 
 
 fTifi{d e)n-trS^e 
 iii/xil o)oj-vro 
 
 i(pi\{e-6)o^rfnjy 
 
 i^i\{4-ov)ov 
 
 4<piK{4-€)e7-TO 
 
 i<pi\(4-e)e7-tr^oy 
 i^t\{e-4)€i-<r^y 
 
 4<pi\{4-€}€7-a^e 
 iif>iK{4-o)ov-VTO 
 
 €fit(r^{o-6]ov-fA.7fy 
 4fH(r^{6-ov)ov 
 ifit(r^(6~e)od-70 
 e/ittr^l 0-6 io6-fj.t^o» 
 ifittr^l 6-€ ) ov-ff^ov 
 ifiitr^i 0-4) oii-ff^p 
 4{u<TSi\o-6 ) oi-fi^^a 
 4fj.iff^{ 6-e)ov-ff^e 
 ifitff^{6-o)ov-yTO 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
164 
 
 PARADIGMS OP CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 [i 136 
 
 111 
 
 1 
 
 Hi 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 Characteristic e. 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 Opta- 
 tive. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Ti/i{cJ-oi)ij;-Ati 
 Tifj.{d-ois)^s 
 
 TlfJ.{d-Ot}^ 
 
 7tfi(d'Oi)^-Toy 
 Tifi{a-oi)^-njy 
 ri/j.{d-ot}^-fi€y 
 Ttfi{d'Oi)0-re 
 
 7lfi(d-0l)(p-€V 
 
 (f)t\{4-ot)o7 
 
 <pt\(e-ot)o7-rou 
 (ptxle-oljol-TTjv 
 
 (f>l\{€-OL]o7-fl€l/ 
 
 <l}i\{e-oi)o7-Te 
 (pt\{€-oi)o7-€y 
 
 fit(r^{6-ot)Q7-fti 
 (j.t<r^{6-ois)o7s 
 ui(r^{6-oi)o7 
 
 fit(r^{6-ot)a7.-iuv 
 fii(r^{o-oi)oi-T7iy 
 jtit<rid-( 6-oi)o7-fjtejf 
 fii(rM^-oi)o7-re 
 fit(r^{6-oL)o7'ey 
 
 Attic 
 Opta- 
 tive, 
 
 S. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 r>.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Ttfi{a-ol)(p-T)y 
 
 Tlfl{a-ol)(p-7]TOl' 
 Tlfl(a-0t)(f>--f)T71V 
 
 Tin{a-ol]tp-r]T€ 
 rifi{d-ot)^-£v 
 
 (piK{e-oi)oi-7]v 
 (pi\(e-oi)oi-7]s 
 (pi\{e-oi)ol-7] 
 
 ^:\{€-Ol)of-7JTOI' 
 <}}l\(€-0t)0t-'flT7JV 
 
 <f>i\{e-ol)oi-r}fiey 
 
 ^i\{e-oi)oi-T]Te 
 
 <f>t\{e-ot)o7-ev 
 
 /j.L(r^{o-oi)oi-7iy 
 fii(r^{o-ol)ol-T}s 
 fiiff^{o-oi}oi-7i 
 
 fXl(r^{o-oi] QL-TITOV 
 
 lJ^i<f^{o-oi)oi-4rniy 
 fxitr^{o-ol)oi-T}fi€y 
 
 fj.t(r^[o'ol)ol-7iTe 
 fit(r^{6-ot)o7-ev 
 
 Indica- 
 tive, 
 
 Perf, 
 
 TerliMTjKa 
 •ire<pd>pdKa 
 
 ireif'\7)Ka 
 
 fMe/XLtr^coKa 
 
 Plup. 
 
 iTrefoupaKett/ 
 
 in €(plK7lK€iy 
 
 ilMef^Lur^^Ketv ' 
 
 
 Put. 
 
 Tifi-fitro) (/jQjpacrw 
 
 (pi\'^crca 
 
 jjito^citra 
 
 
 Aor. 
 
 iTliMrjaa i(pd}pa.cra 
 
 i<f>i\7]<ra 
 
 ifii<r^(a(ra 
 
 P. Pf. 
 
 PAS 
 
 Aorist, 1 iTi/i-n&riv lijxDpS^y 1 eifiA.-^&rjj' | ifu<r^ui^v 1 
 
 "Verbal adjectives ; rifXTj-reos^ -Tea, -tcoj/, <pupd-r4os, -^^a, -rdoi'. 
 
 ^ 136. With short Vowel 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 fi*resent, 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Peifect. 
 
 Pluperfect, 
 
 Puture, 
 
 Aorist, 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 (nr{d-Q})a}f to draw, 
 ^<nr{a-oy)(cy 
 
 iaTraiceiy 
 
 (nra(rca 
 effTrdca 
 
 Characteristic i 
 
 T€\(e-w)io, to com- 
 ^TeA{ s-oy)ovy\plete. 
 Tere A.€Ka 
 
 TeAw 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 op ( 6-ta ) w, to plough. 
 
 ilp{o-ov)ovy 
 
 ap-'{}poica 
 
 ap-7)p6iceiy 
 
 apSaco 
 
 ^poaa 
 
 PAS 
 
 Aorist, 
 
 j iinni-(r-^7ii/ 
 
 1 4Te\4-(T-S)riv | ripoSrjj' I 
 
 
 
 Verbal adjectives : tnra-cr-Tfos, -te'o, -tc'ok 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
< 136.] 
 
 PAUADIGMS OF CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 16S 
 
 1 
 
 Imperfect. | 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic e. 
 
 Characteristic o. 
 
 
 Tilt(,a-ai)<f-iatv 
 
 ■rili(a-oi)<f-li.i^ov 
 Tt/i irot)$ixdov 
 
 Ti/ufjJ-oiJV-f&e 
 Ttn{d-oi)^-irro 
 
 <j>i\{f-oi)oi-fi.riv 
 
 <j>t\{e-oi)Qt-o 
 
 <piK\4-oi)oi-To 
 
 (l>i\{e'ol}oi-iie&op 
 
 <pi\(€'6t)o7-ir&oy 
 
 tj>iKle-oi)ol-(r^v 
 
 ^i\{e-oi)ol-fjLf^a 
 
 <pi\{€-oi)o7-a^e 
 
 ^l\(6'-0l)01-;'T0 
 
 fU<rAlo-ot)ol-iiriv 
 
 pLlff^{6-Ol)o7~0 
 
 lu<r^{6-oi)o7-To 
 
 fiur^l o-oi)oi-fie&oy 
 
 fiiiT^{6-oi) o7-ff&oy 
 
 tucr&{o-i>l)ol-(rATiy 
 
 lucrA{o-oi)ol-/ji.e^a 
 
 fU(r&{6-oi)o7-(r^e 
 
 lwrd{6-oi)o7-vTO 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TeTiii-niMi 
 
 Tre(j>l\riiuu 
 
 ttefilaSunai 
 
 
 ireriiiTJti-Ttv 
 iire<p(op&fi7jy 
 
 i-jretptKiifiTjy 
 
 ifiefiia^ii/iriv 
 
 
 TifL^otJLot (ptapdiTOfiat 
 
 <pi\i]trofjiai 
 
 luar^iiroiwj. 
 
 
 iri^TjcrdfiTiv iepupcurdfiifiy 
 
 i(f}i\ri(r(i/j.ijy 
 
 ifit(r^(i}(rtifj[.Tiy 
 
 
 TeTiii.iiaoiJ.tu ire<pupicroiiai 
 
 tre<pt\'fia'(ifj.at 
 
 /iefiurAtiffpiiat 
 
 SIVE. 
 
 1 ITatnre, I T(ui)3^(r0(uoi ^wpOS^ffo^oi | 0iXt)3t(O-o;uoi f iwrda^aoiuu 
 
 (plKlj-Teos, Tea, -^4ov, fua^u-Teos, -Tea, -Teov. 
 
 in forming the Tenses. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Characteristic a. 
 
 Characteristic e. 
 
 Characteristic «. 
 
 (nr((£-o)m-jt4ai 
 iirvi.-<T-iJiTiv 
 
 (TtSiTOjUOI 
 
 TeP- e-o)ov-fjtat 
 
 4Ti\[e-6)oi-finy 
 
 TeT4\e~a'-fiai 
 
 iTeTe\e-tr-fi7}P 
 
 reKovfiai 
 
 ireAead/j.-tii' 
 
 ap[6-o)ov-fjicu 
 
 ijp{a-6)ov-fir}y 
 
 &p-iipofMaL 
 
 ap-'rjp6fi7]y 
 
 ap6(ro/jLat 
 
 Tipotrd/jLiji/ 
 
 SIVE. 1 
 
 Future, | air a 
 
 ■a-Sii\(roiiLa.i \ Ti\i-a-Sti 
 
 a- /J. 0,1 1 apoSrliirotuu 
 
 Te\€-a--T4os, -/a, -ioy. 
 
 cLpo-reoSt -ea, -eoi/. 
 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
166 REMARKS ON THE OONJ. OF CONTRACT VERBS. [i 137 
 
 Eemaek. On the formation of the Perf. and Aor. Pass, with <r, see §§ 130 
 131 ; on the omission of the <r in ap^pafiat, iipo^v, see §131,5; and on the Attic 
 Eeduplication in ap-fipoficu, see § 124, 2. The further inflection of eirwa-(r-fiai, 
 iawi-a-jiiiv, T6Te'Ae-(r-^ai, iTeTe\4-<r-firii', is lilce that of KeKeA€i;-ir-/Mai, § 133. On 
 the Attic Fut., rtAeVco = teAm, -eir, etc., TeKea-o/uu = reAoS/iai, TtAp [ei], 
 etc., see § 117. 
 
 i 137. Remarks on the Conjugation of Contract 
 Verbs. 
 
 1. The Attic dialect omits contraction only in the cases mentioned imdet 
 I 9. Rem. 3 ; but verbs in -da with a monosyllabic stem, e. g. irAe'a, to sail, Ttvai, 
 to blow, aea, to run, etc. are uniformly uncontracted, except in the syllable -b 
 (from -eel or -ec), e. g. 
 
 Act. Pr. Ind. irAeai, TrAeis, irAe?, irAe'o/iey, xAeH-E, irA6'ou(ri(y), 
 
 Subj. TrAew, irAej^s, irAe??, TrKeatfiev, TrAeTjre, 7rAe«(rt(v), 
 
 Imp. TTAe?. Inf. 7rAe«/. Part. TrAewv. 
 Impf. Ind. eTTAeoy, eirAeis, cTrAet, eirAeo/iez/, eVAetre, eirAeoj'. 
 
 Opt. irKeotfii, irXeois, etc. 
 Mid. Pr. Ind. TrAe'o/iai, irAe'j;, irAeirai, ir Ac<!/ie&oi', TrAeiir&o;', etc. 
 
 Inf. TTAerff&oi. Part. irAeiJ^uevoj. Impf. i ir \ e 6 firi f. 
 
 2. The verb Se'm, to JjW, is commonly contracted in all the forms, particu- 
 larly in compounds, e. g. t& dovy, tov Bovvtos, Sia5ov/j.ai, Karedovy. But 5 e7, ii 
 is necessary, and Se'o/ioi, to need, follow the analogy of verbs in -ea, with a 
 monosyllabic stem, c. g. t!) SeW, Seop-M, SelaAai ; uncontracted forms of Seopai 
 occur, instead of those contracted into -e i, e. g. Seerai, 5ee<r&o:, eSe'ero, Xen., 
 and sometimes also forms of other verbs belonging here are uncontracted, e. g. 
 cirAeec, X. H. 6. 2, 27 ; xAe'ei, Th. 4, 28 ; irvvix^iv, PI. Ep. 379, 6. 
 
 3. Several verbs deviate in contraction from the general mles, c. g. 
 
 (a) -oe, -oei, -art, are contracted into -17 and -j), instead of into -a and -if, e. g. 
 C(<i.-u'^ a, to live, C^s, -f^, -Ctitoi', -f^re, Inf. (ijv. Imp. ^, Impf efaiy, -ris, 
 -7j, -i)T(r,, -Ijrjiv, -^Te; — ircty(cJ-M) u, to hunger, Inf. iretvrjv, etc.; — 5ii(^ 
 ((i-<o)£, to tfuVsi, Sii('77j, etc. lufSnJ/^v; — Kv{d-)a,to scratch, Xnf. Kvijv ; 
 — <riJi(d-o)a, to smear. Inf. iTHT)v ; — TJi{i-a>)S, to rub, Jjif. ^rjv ; — XP i^-o) 
 u-fiai, to use, XPV^ XP^'^^h XP^^^^^j ^^ airoxpa^ai, to have enough, 
 a,voxpv(r^ai; — a,ir6xp''i (abridged from oTro^pp), it suffices, Inf. anoxpriv, 
 Impf. airixpVi — Xpl'^'") "i to give an oracle, to prophesy, xpv^> XPV' XP^"- 
 b) -00 and -oe are contracted, as in the Ionic, into -a, instead of into -ou, and 
 -6rj into -$, instead of into -o7, 0. g. liiy{6-a) a, to freeze. Inf. ^tyiip 
 (Aristoph., but ^lyoiii', X. Cy. 5. 1, 11), Part. G. piyuinos (Ai'istoph., but 
 (liyoimul', X. H. 4. 5, 4), and piyacra (Simon, de mulier. 26), Subj. jiiyi} 
 (PI. Gorg. 517, d.), Opt. piryd-q (Ilippocr.). 
 
 Eemark 1. The Ionic verb iSpcim, to sweat, corresponds in respect to COU' 
 traction with j>iy6u>, to freeze, though with an opposite meaning : BpHai, 
 ISpcpTjv, iSpSiiTa, IBpuvrts. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 138.] FORMATION OP THE TENSES OP IMPURE VERBS. IGT 
 
 4. The following things are to be noted on the use of the Attic forms of tha 
 Opt. in -TV (M16, 8), viz. in the Sing., especially in the first and second person, 
 of verbs in -e'a and -Sa, the form in -o/ijv is far more in use than the common 
 form, and in verbs in -da it is used almost cxclusiyely ; but in the Dual and 
 PI. the common form is more in use. The third Pers. PI. has always the 
 shorter form, except that Aeschin., 2, § 108, Bekk., uses SoKolri<Zv. 
 
 5. The verb \oia,to wash, though properly not a contract, admits contrac- 
 tion in all the forms of the Impf. Act. and of the Pres. and Impf. Mid., which 
 have -E or -o in the ending, c. g. l\ov instead of ^\ove. iKov/iiu instead of i\oi- 
 o/iev. Mid. Koviuu (Ao'ei, Aristoph. Nub. 835. according to MSS.), Aoin-oi, ctc^ 
 Imp. \ov. Inf. \oD<r&oi, Impf. 4Koiiatv, 4Kov, i\ovro, etc., as if from the stem 
 AOEn ; still, uncontracted forms are found, e. g. Koiofiai, iXoi'ovro (Xen.). 
 
 Rem. 2. On the change of the accent in contraction, sej § 30, 2. 
 
 n. FOBMATION OP THE TeNSES OP ImPUBE VeEBS. 
 
 } 138. General Hemarks. 
 Pure and Impure Stem. — Theme. 
 
 1. Impure verbs (J 127, II.) undergo a variety of changes in 
 the stem. In the first place, the stem of the verb is strength- 
 ened : — 
 
 (a) Either by an additional consonant, e. g. riit-r-a, stem TTn ; KpiQ-a, stem 
 KPAr ; <t>pd(a, stem *PAA ; and even by inserting an entire syllable, e. g. 
 apiapr-dr'-a, stem 'AMAPT ; 
 
 (b) Or by lengthening the stem-vowel, e. g. ipeiy-a, stem *Tr; A^&-m, stem 
 AA0 : riiK-a, stem TAK ; 
 
 (c) Or secondly there is a change of the stem-vowel in some of the tenses ; 
 this change may be called a Variation (§ 16, 6), e. g. KKeirr-ai, 4-K\&ir^v, 
 k£-kAo<()-o ; comp. Eng. ring, rang, rung. 
 
 2. The original and simple stem is to be distinguished from 
 the strengthened stem ; the first is called the pure stem, the 
 last, the impure. The Pres. and Impf. commonly contain the 
 impure stem ; the Secondary tenses, when such are formed, and 
 specially the second Aor., contain the pure stem ; the remaining 
 tenses may contain either the pure or the impure stem, e. g. 
 
 Pres. riir-T-a), to strike., Aor. 11. Pass. 4-rvir-nv Fut. Act. ti^b (niw-o-a) 
 
 " \ebr-a, to leave, " Act. i-\Xv-ov " " Xs^u (Xfh-mi) 
 
 " tripdC-o>, to kill, " Pass. ^-<r<()a7-rjv " " <r<pdiai {a-<t>dy-<ra) 
 
 " ipaly-u, to skm, '• " i-^av-nv " Mid. <(iov-o0^a( 
 
 « ip^ilp-a, to destroy, " " 4-ip^cip-riv " Act. tji^ep-w. 
 
 8 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
168 
 
 IMPURE VERBS. STRENGTHENING OF THE STEM. [} ISJ? 
 
 3. When a form of a verb cannot be derived from the Pres. 
 tense in use, another Present is assumed ; tliis assumed Pres. 
 may be termed the TJieme (S^€ft.a), and is printed in capitals, 
 to distinguish it from the Pres. in actual use ; thus, e. g. <f>evyui 
 is the Pres. in use, $Yro is the assumed Pres., or the Theme, 
 designed merely to form the second Aor., e-^vy-ov. 
 
 i 139. Strengthening of the Stem. 
 
 1. The stem is strengthened, first, by adding another conso- 
 nant to the simple characteristic consonant of the stem, e. g. 
 
 TtJiTTw (tujt), to Strike, 
 rdTToi {rayj, to arrange, 
 Kpoi^co {xpay), to cry, 
 
 Aor. n. Pass. i-TvT-riv 
 " i-T&y-nv 
 " Act. 6-Kpay-ov . 
 
 2. Yet the strengthened stem is found only in the Pres. and 
 Impf. ; in the other tenses the simple stem appears, e. g. 
 
 Pres. T\mT(a Impf. gtvittov Aor. H. Pass, erviniy ITut. rvipa (TiJiro'w). 
 
 Eemakk 1. The characteristic of the pure stem, c. g. w in TTII-Q is called 
 the pure characteristic ; that of the impure afem, e. g. ttt in rivr-a, the impure 
 characteristic. 
 
 3. The stem of many verbs is strengthened also by length- 
 ening the short stem-vowel in the Pres. and Impf ; this short 
 rowel reappears in the second Aor., and in liquid verbs, in the 
 Fut. Thus, 
 
 a is changed into tj in mute verbs. 
 
 ai in liquid verbs, 
 
 ti in liquid verbs, 
 
 €1 in mute verbs, 
 
 I in mute and liquid verbs, 
 
 in mute and liquid verbs, 
 
 ev in mute verbs. 
 
 e.g. {e-Ka^-ov) Xil&a 
 
 {<l>Aep-&) <(&elpa 
 {^-Xtv-ov) Xelva, 
 [^-T pt$-Tiv) rpi^ta 
 [i-^pty-nv) ippvyio 
 
 Eem. 2. This strengthening of the stem distinguishes the Impf Ind. and 
 Opt. from the same modes of the second Aor. ; likewise the Pres. Subj. and 
 Impf. from the same modes of the second Aor., c. g. ixpa^ov Hxpayov, KpiCoipit 
 Kpiyaiju, icpdCa Kpdya, Kpd^t Kpdye ; — eAhttoj' JfKiiroi/, \etiroiiu \ftroi;ui, Xelira 
 Kbrw, AetTre Xbre. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 140.] VERBS. CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEI. 
 
 169 
 
 i 140. Change or Variation of the Stem-vowel 
 
 1. The change or variation of the stem-vowel [§ 138, 1 (c)], 
 occurs only in the Secondary tenses, with the exception of a 
 few first Perfects. 
 
 2. Most mute and all liquid verbs, with a monosyllabic stem, 
 and with e as a stem-vowel, take the variable a in the second 
 Aor., e. g. 
 
 rpiv-a, to turn, Aor. H. Act. i-TpS.Tt-or 
 
 K\iTr-T-a, to steal, " Pass. l-KK&Tr-7,v 
 
 Tp4<p-a, to nourish. " « i-rp&ip-riv 
 
 <rTp4,p-a, to turn, " " i-ffTpi.<p-nt> 
 
 ep4x-a, to wet, " " i-pp&x-V" 
 
 iip-a>, to flay, " " ^-Sjjp.^, 
 
 areKK-a, to send, " « l-aT&\-r)V 
 
 ffirelp-u, to sow, " " i-a-Trip-nf 
 
 ^Srilp-a, to destroy, " " i-^A&p-jiy 
 
 Tfjiv-a, to aa, " Act. H-TapL-ov. 
 
 The second Aor. traiiov (from tIiwih, to cut), is very rare in Attic prose (Tli. 1. 
 81. rdficanev) ; regular ere/iov; the second Aor. iPpexv (from Ppexu, to wet), is 
 poetic and late ; common form iPpex^". The first Ac: Pass. iTp4(j>^v (from 
 rpiiru), iAp€<pdriv {{r.rpetpa), iffTpeip^v (fr. <rrp4<pa), belong more to poetry than 
 prose ; 4k\4(I>^v (fr. KXe'irrai) Ionic and Eur. Or. 1575 {xKeip&els). iJipu, tnretpa, 
 and (p^eipa, have no first Aor. Pass. The variable a does not occur in polyByl- 
 lables, e. g. ijyye\oif, ijyyeKTji/, &<peXov, iiy€p6fL7}v. 
 
 Eemaek 1. As this variable vowel distinguishes the Impf. from the second 
 Aor. Act., e. g. h^peirov (Impf.), Irpairoy (Aor. II.), in some yerbs of this class 
 (2, above), whose second Aor. Act. is not in use, the variable vowel does not occur 
 in the second Aor. Pass., because that tense cannot be mistaken for the Impf., 
 see 5 141, Kem., e. g. j8 A eirw, to see, Impf. l-p\tir-oy, second Aor. Pass. i-0\fTr- 
 rjy (first Aor. Pass, is wanting) ; \4ym, to collect (in compounds), second Aor. 
 Pass. KaTe-\4y-rir, avv4\frp\v (more seldom Aor. I. avviK4x^i\v, 4(e\4)^v ; with 
 the meaning to say, always lA.exSf") ; so also \4ir-ai, to peed, i-\4w-Tiv (first 
 Aor. Pass, wanting) ; itKiK-a, to ftraztf, usually i-^\i,K-nv, but also i-vx4K-Tiv 
 Plat, (first Aor. Pass. iir\4x^y, Aesch. Eum. 259) ; if>x4y-a, to bum, 4-^\4y-riv 
 (more seldom i<pK4x^v) ; ^4ya, to censure, 4-<^iy-T]v, first Aor. Pass, wanting. 
 
 Rem. 2. The verb irXiirTa, to strike, when uncompounded, retains the ij 
 in the second Aor. and second Put. Pass., but when compounded, it takes the 
 variable a ; thus, i-Tr\-fiy-7jv, ir\7]yfia'op.at, i^e-Trhdy-rjy, Ktne-irK^y-r^v, cK^irhayfi- 
 aajjuu; (T^itm, to make rotten, and t^jkoj, to mdt (trans.), also have the variable a; 
 hence Pcrf a-earjira, I am rotten, second Aor. Pass, iorainiv, second Put. Pass. 
 (Taw^aofiai ; Fut. t^^w, Aor. eT7)|a ; second Perf.TCT7)Ka,Zamme&rf; second Aor. 
 Pass. eraKvy; also first Aor. Pass, ir'fix^'', PI- Tim. 61. b., Eur. Supp. 1033. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
170 VERBS CHANGE OF THE STEM-VOWEL. [i 140 
 
 3. Liquid verbs with a monosyllabic stem and with e for a 
 stem-vowel, take the variable a, not only in the second Aor., but 
 also in the first Perf. Act., in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and the 
 first Aor. Pass., e. g. 
 
 iTTeWco, to send, Put. aTe\-a Pf. %-araX-Ka s-araK-ii.ai Aor. i-trrix-diiv 
 (jiStdpu, to destroy, !Fut. <j>&cp-u Pf. ^-(p^ap-Ka cipSfap-iuu. 
 
 The first Aor. Pass. eVToASTji/ is poetic ; the first Aor. Pass, of Sepw, irircipu, 
 ip^elptu is not in use ; but instead of it the second Aor. Pass., thus, dSipriy, 
 ia-iripyijy, itp^dpr/i/. The variable a does not occur in polysyllables, e. g. 
 ijyye\.Ka, ijyyi>i^v from otteAAoi, aY/iyepfi.ai, iiysp^v from ayelpa, Comp. 
 No. 1. 
 
 4. Mute verbs, which have e in the final stem-syllable of the 
 Pres., take the variable o in the second Perf. ; but those which 
 have «, take ot; liquid-verbs, which have e or « in this syllable, 
 take o, e. g. 
 
 SfpKOfiai (poet.), to see, d4SopKa B4po>, tojlay, S4iopa 
 
 rpe<pw, to nourish, Ttrpotpa iyetpw, to wake, iyp^yopa, I awohe, 
 
 KeiTTb), to leave, XiKonva OTretpa, to sow, effiropa 
 
 T€i'&a, to persuade, ireVoi^o, I trust, ip^eipu, to destroy, c^d-ops poetic, {tfSrapKa, 
 prose). 
 
 •> 
 
 Eem. 3. Here are classed the following anomalous second Peris.; e^u 
 (Epic), eiada instead of ei&a, to be vxmt, c'm^evcu, elaMs, Plnp. cid&etv; — 
 'EIAn, video, oISo, I know; — 'EIKfl, loiica, to be like, to appear, Plnp. icpxciv; — 
 l\vw (poet.), to cause to hope, eoAiro, / hope, Plnp. idhireiy, I hoped; — 'EPrfl, to 
 do, leopya, Plnp. iiitpyeip j — piyy-vv^i, to break, ^^^uya, I am broken (but on (T^iraj. 
 see Item. 2). 
 
 5. The following take the variable o in the first Perf. also, 
 contrary to the rule in No. 1. 
 
 KXiirra, to steal, first Perf. KfK\o<pa, but Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKKefincu (vei^ 
 
 rare and only poet. k^kAo/^ijimu). 
 \4y<i, to collect, first Perf. trvvflXox"-, i^^lKoxa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 rrciaru, to send, first Perf. Trtvo/ifa; but Perf. Mid. or Pass. ireVeju/iai. 
 
 Tpiiro), to turn, first Perf. TCTpo^a (like the second Perf. of Tp4<pa, to nourish), 
 and Terpo^a ; still, this last form is rare ; the more usual form is Tcrpo^o, 
 The variable a in the Perf'. Act. is not found elsewhere, and is probably 
 here used only to distinguish it from Tirpo^a, Perf. of Tpffu. 
 
 6. The follovi-ing mute verbs with a monosyllabic stem, and 
 with € for a stem-vowel, like liquid verbs (No. 3), take the 
 variable a in the Perf. Mid. or Pass. ; still, the o is not found in 
 the first Aor. Pass., as is the case in liquid verbs, e. g. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 141.] VEKBS. REMAKKS ON THE SECONDAKY TENSES. 171 
 
 (TTpcfai, to turn, Pf. Mid. or Pass. eUTpa/iiiai, but first Aor. Pass, iarpi^^r 
 rpeiru, to tum, " " TcTpajn/noi, " " iTp4(t>^v 
 
 rpif a, to nourish, " " TiSrpannai, " " iS>p4fShiy. 
 
 On K\4irTu, see No. 5. 
 
 i 141. Remarks on the Secondary Tenses. 
 
 1. The Secondary tenses differ from the Primary, partly in wanting the 
 tense-characteristic, and consequently in appending the personal-endings (-av, 
 ■6p.riv, -7IV, -iiffoiMi, -o, and -eiy) immediately to the pure characteristic of the 
 verb, e. g. i-KXir-ov, second Aor., but ^-To(Seu-<r-o, first Aor. ; partly, in being 
 formed throughout from an unchanged pure verb-stem (except the Perf. which 
 prefers a long vowel, see No. 2), e. g. XeiTra;, e-A.iir-oy, ipfiya i-(piiy-ov; and 
 partly, in taldng the imnaft/e vowel, c. g. (rTpe'<|>(.i l-<rTp&<p--ijii a-TpHf-liiroitat, 
 but (-<TTp4^-Striv (§ 140, 2). 
 
 2. Tlie second Perf. either lengthens the short stem-vowel i into r, a into rj, 
 and, when it stands after other vowels or p, into &, e. g. 
 
 Kpifttj, to cry out, second Aor. %-KpS,y-ov second Perf. Ki-xpay-a 
 
 tjiplfftra, to shudder, stem : *PIK (T) " Tr4-(j>plic-a 
 
 ^dWa, to bloom. Put. &dA.-S " re-^K-a; 
 
 so, ueijniva, AeXjj&o from *AN-w, AA0-a ; or it retains the long vowel or diph- 
 thong of the Pres., c. g. witpcvya from ipeiya (but second Aor. Act. tipvyoy), 
 TcT))Ko, o-f'ffjjira from r^Ko), (rijTrai (but second Aor. Pass. iraK-qv, ia&iTr]v, see 
 4 140, Kem. 2) ; a short vowel occiu-s only in the cases referred to in ^ 124, and 
 § 140, 4. 
 
 Remakk. Those verbs whose second Aor. Act. could not be distinguished 
 from the Impf , or at least, only by the quantity of the stem-vowel, have no 
 second Aor. 'Act. and Mid., but only the second Aor. Pass., since this last form 
 has a different ending from the Impf, and could not be mistaken for it, e. g. 
 
 ypaipa Impf lypaipov A. I. eypaif/a A.. IL Act. want. A. II. P. iyp&ijrnv (A. I. P. does 
 
 not occur in classical writers). 
 (cAft/M ' ^KKTmv " iK\tva " " A. II. P. ixhtvTiv (A. I. P. ^K\f- 
 
 Sniv in Aristoph). 
 ^vxn> " ^vxov " eifiOla '• " " ii^ixt]''. Plat, (i-^iyiiv 
 
 Aristoph. Nub. 1 52 [with the variation ^vx^iirri} and often in the later writers ; 
 A. I. it^ixSmv, Plat.). 
 
 3. The following points, also, are to be noted: (a) There is no verb which, 
 together with the second Aorist, forms the three first Aorists ; (b) There is no 
 verb which has in use at the same time the second Aor. Act. and Mid. and the 
 second Aor. Pass. ; but all verbs, which form the second Aor. have either the 
 second Aor. Act. and Mid. only, or the second Aor. Pass. only. A single 
 exception, -in regard to both the particulars specified, is seen in the verb Tpena, 
 to turn, which has three first Aorists together with three second Aorists : irpairop 
 (Ion.), 4rpaTr6faiv, iTp&iriiv, erpeffia (the common form in Attic), erpixfidfiriv 
 (transitive, e. g. rpi^cur^ai tls (pvyliv, to put tofligitt), Irpttp^v (used more by the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i72 FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF MUTE-VERBS. [} 142 
 
 poets, see § 140, 2) ; but in compounds, e. g. inTpef^vai, Antiph. 4. 126, 4 
 127, 5). 
 
 There are but few exceptions to the statement under (b), since the second 
 Aor. Act. and Mid. and the second Aor. Pass., occur but rarely, and mostly 
 in the poet, dialect, e. g. sTmov Eur., and iTuintv ; eKnrov and i\iiTr]v ; 4\cl<j>^v, 
 and very seldom iXmS/inv. 
 
 4. It is rare that a verb has both Aor. forms ; Vfhero this is the case, the two 
 forms are used under certain conditions, namely : — 
 
 •(a) The two Aor. forms of the Act. and Mid. have a different meaning, i. e. 
 the first Aor. has a transitive meaning, the second Aor., an intransitive. The 
 same is true of the two forms of the Perf , where they are constructed from the 
 same verb. See § 249, 2. 
 
 (>, ) The two forms of the Aor. belong either to different dialects, or differ- 
 ent periods, or to different species of literature, prose or poetry. Still, in some 
 verbs, both forms occur even in prose, e. g. InrnXKiix^v, and usually !wn)AA.a75jy,. 
 flAa^a^coi and /SA.ojSij.i'ai, both for ex. in Thuc. Several verbs in psetry have a 
 second Aor. Act., which in prose have commonly a first Aor. only, e. g. ktcIvu, 
 to kill, Aor. prose, ?KTeiya, poet. eKravov and e/tToc. 
 
 (c) The two Aorists stand in such a relation to each other, that the forms 
 of one Aorist take the place of the forms of the other not in use, and in this 
 way each supplies, respectively, the place of the other, as will be seen under 
 the verbs t'l^iu and dlSwiu. 
 
 A. rORMATION OF THE TeNSES OP MdTE-VeRBS. 
 
 { 142. Classes of Mute Verbs. 
 
 Mute verbs are divided, like mute letters, into three 
 classes, according to their characteristic ; in each of these 
 classes, verbs with a pure characteristic in the Pres. and 
 Impf. are distinguished from those with an impure charac- 
 teristic (§ 139, Rem. 1) : — 
 
 1. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Pi-mute (yS, tt, <f> pure 
 
 characteristic; ttt ([§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
 e.g. 
 
 (a) Pure characteristic: Tre/ATr-o), to send; Tpi^-co, to 
 rub ; 'ypd(p-a), to write ; 
 
 (b) Impure characteristic : rvrrr-as, to strike (pure char- 
 acteristic IT, pure stem TTH) ; PKolttt-w, to injure 
 (/S, BAAB) ; ptW-w, to hurl {j>, 'PI^). 
 
 2. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Kappa-mute (k, y, \ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
< 143.] MUTE VERBS. REMARKS ON THE 01IARACTEB.ISTIC. 173 
 
 pure characteristic ; crcr or Attic tt [§ 24, 1] impure 
 characteristic), e. g. 
 {a) Pure characteristic: irkeK-ai, to weave; wy-m, to 
 
 lead; revx-oD, to prepare ; 
 {h) Impure characteristic: ^pl<ra--co, Ati. ^pirr-a), to 
 shudder (pure characteristic «, pure stem ^PIK) ; 
 Taffo--o), Att. TOTT-a>, to arrange (y, TAF) ; firiaa-a, 
 Att. ^riTT-m, to cough (x, BHX). 
 3. Verbs, whose characteristic is a Tau-mute (t, B, ^, 
 pure characteristic ; f [§ 24, 1] impure characteristic), 
 e. g. 
 (a) Pure characteristic: avvr-ay, to complete; aS-co, to 
 
 sing ; Tret^-o), to persuade ; 
 (h) Impure characteristic : (f>pd^-eo, to say (pure charac- 
 t^istic Sj pure stem ^PAJ). 
 
 ? 143. Remarks on the Characteristic. 
 
 1 The following mute verbs in -irra and -aaus (-TTa) form the Secondary 
 tenses, especially {ho second Aor. l\iss., and have for their characteristic : — 
 tt: kXcttt-w, to steal; K(firT-o), to cut; t^ttt-qj, to strike (second Aor. Passive 
 
 l-KXajr-Tlv, etc.). 
 j8: PKdiTT-a, to injure, and Kpiwr-ai, to conceal (second Aor. Pass. e-PKafi-i)v 
 
 and IfixA^^v, 4-Kpv0-rii' and iiipi<lidT}v). 
 ^ : 'Piiirr-ie, to tinge ; ^ciTrT-a, to bury ; ^pvirr-O), to break ; pi-m-tOf to sew tO' 
 
 geffier; plirr-ta, to cast; axirrr-u, to dig (second Aor. Pass, i-^a^-'qv, 
 
 s-r&ip-iiv, i-rpv^-riv, ip-fii,ip-i]V, i^-pi<p-'nv and ipyitp^v, 4-aKa.^- 
 
 x: (ppiiraa, to shudder •{seconiVett. ire- 4>p.iK- a). 
 
 ■y: i.JO\.d<T<ra, to change (second Aor. Pass. aWayijvcu, iirst Aor. Pass. 
 aWax^'"t't Tpoetic), /Mffira, to knead {fidy rival), opitrmi, to dig {ipv-y-rjiiat 
 and opvxdiimt), irhjjirffoi, to strike {i-vKiiy-rfii, e\e-Tr\ay-tiv), ■npiaaa, Att. 
 a^-pdrrw, to do (Tri-Tr,p ay- a).,a(^i.Zw (Attic mostly (np^^TTw), to km [i^trip&y- 
 -rjv, rarely, and never in Attic prose, iafax^"), raa^aa, to arrange {rayels, 
 Eur., elsewhere irixSniv)-, (ppiffffic, to hedge round {ifp&y-riy and ^(ppdx^i')- 
 
 2. Two verbs strengthen the pure characteristic k by t, like verbs with the 
 impure characteristic irr: — 
 
 TT^KT-a (commonly ircKTea, also Tref/cfiu), to shear, to com!b, ]?ut. ir€|w, etc. , 
 still, Keipeiv is commonly used for irc/cTew with the meaning to shear, and 
 KTeviC^iv and ialvetv with the meaning to comb ; 
 
 tIkt-u (formed from ti-tck-oi), to beget, Tat. Tt^ofuu, second Aor. Act. 
 Mtskov, second Perf. TeVo/ca. 
 
 3. The following verbs in -(ririi), -ttw have a Tau-mnte, not a Kappa 
 mute, for the pure dharacteristic : apfiirTa (non-Attic apii6(a), to Jit, Put. 
 .,^0,; — p\ir-ra, to take honey. Put. -iau; — ^piaaa (non-Attic fipit'"), to 
 
 ihdke • ipetrtru, to row, Put. -eVaj; — iriiffffcaj to scatter, Put. -dtroj; — ir\(£tr- 
 
 fct, to/orm, Put. -dra; — nrrljrira, '» >-isk. Put. -lira; — and Poet, tiiAtr(ra.,ia 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
174 FORMATION OF THE TENSES OF MUTE VERBS. [§ 144 
 
 lo/Hp, !Fat. -cJo-M ; KV&aaa, to sleep, Fut. -tSirm ; \eia<r(o,to Zooi, Put. \eiaa; 
 Klffffo/iat (poetic, especially Horn., also \lTOiiai),to pray, Aor. iKurdtiiiv, 
 eKiriiivy; vltraonat, v^iaff ofiai, to go, Fut. velaoiua; Kopvaaa, to equip 
 (EpicPerf. Kc-i£(ipua-/toi). , , 
 
 Here are classed derivatives iu-iIittoi: Ai;ni4TTa!, to hunger ; oyetpwTTu, 
 
 to dream; iirvdiTTUftobe — ^^^ . ^ 
 
 4. The following verbs in - ir o- w vary between the two formations : vaatrto, 
 to press together, Fut. vd^a, etc. ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. vhiuiiMi ; verbal Adj. vcuttSs ; 
 — h^iaaw (Poet.), to draw, Tut. -iJ|<», Aor. ^(fiiira, i)(pv(rip.iiv. 
 
 5. Of verbs in - f to, whose pure characteristic is a Tau-mute, commonly S, 
 there are only a few primitives, e. g. cfo^itai, Poet., Kofte'CoAiai, prose, / seoi 
 mjfse?/j ?fco, commonly Ko&ffai, to seai; <rx'f"». *" separate; x^'f"". alvum 
 dejicere ; yet there are very many derivatives, namely, all in -i^a and most in 
 -i(a, e. g. ^S-ifw, ciKafa, etc. 
 
 6. Verbs in - fa, whose pnre characteristic is a Kappa-mute, commonly y, 
 are mostly Onomatopoetics, i. e. words whose sound corresponds to the sense ; 
 the greater part of these denote a call, or sound, e.g. aldC") to groan, Put. 
 ald^a; a\a\dCa), to shout (ouS<i|o<raoi, tospmi, Aor. wanting in Her.); ypi(u, 
 to grunt; Kot(a, to squeak, to grunt (like a swine). Put. Koi|i»i Kpd(a, to 
 sa-eam, Aor. cxpayov; Kpdi^a, to caw, to croak; /taa-rl^u, to whip; oSi(u,to 
 scratch ; oif.<iC''t '" lament. Put. otiid^oiuu ; o\o\6 (a, to ay out, to shout ; pva- 
 Tafa, to drag about; ard(a and <rTa\&^a, to trickle; urevdCa, to sigh, 
 (TTtipl^a, to make firm; ffrt^a, to mark, to prick; avpi^a, to whistle (Put. 
 a-vpl^oiiai, etc.; avpiaa, etc., later, and not Attic) ; artpdC" (Attic mostly ir(pdf- 
 'Tw),toh.ll; (T(p via, to throb; rpf f», tocAi'rp (TcTpiyo, Ion. andpoet.) ; ^Ki^a, 
 
 7. The following verbs in -fw vary between the two modes of formation; 
 fiairrd f o), to lift up, to support. Put. -iffa, etc., Aor. i^aardx^i' ; — SiffTd f », 
 to doubt, SuTTctcru, from which the verbal Subst. SurTayii6s and Siirraffis; — fvir- 
 T d (a, to nod, to sleep. Put. -d<Ta, Aor. iviaraaa, in the later writers vvirTi^u, 
 etc., e. g. Plut. Brut. 36; — Tai^a, to jest, Put. 'Traif oS^ai and irtdiofuu, Aor. 
 Att. eiroio-o (in later vmters ?7rai|o, tteVkixo), Perf. Mid. or Pass. Att. Tteaauiixat 
 ( in later writers iriitaiyiuu, iiraix^v) ; verbal Adj. vaurrios ; — apird (a, to rob, 
 Att. apTrdaofuu, Sjpiroira, etc. (but in the Epic and Common language apwd^a and 
 -d<ra, etc., second Aor. Pass. Tipwdyrjy) ; — lii f w, to moan, has fl. 8, 20. iirefui^an, 
 but in Hippocr. ifujirev. 
 
 8. The following verbs in - f <o have 77 for a pure characteristic : K\d^a,to 
 sound, to cry, Perf Kt-icXayy-a, Put. KKdy^a, Aor. 6/c\a7{o; — TrXctfn) (poet.) (0 
 cause to wander. Put. irA.o7fiB, etc. Aor. Pass. IvKdyx^" ; — cr o Xir f f «, to fcfoio o 
 trumpet. Put. -£7|m, etc. (later also -/itm, etc.) 
 
 § 144. Formation of ihc Tenses. 
 
 Mute verbs form the Fut. and the first Aor. Act. and 
 Mid. with the tense-characteristic tr, and the first Perf. and 
 first Plup. Act. with the aspirated ^ endings -a and -elv, when 
 the characteristic is a Pi or Kappa-mute; but with the 
 
 ' The Perf Act. of all verbs properly ends in ko, but where k is preceded by 
 a Pi or Kappa mute, that mute combines with k and is changed into the cor- 
 responding rough. On the contraiy, a Tau-mute before k is dropped, e. g. 
 rirvKKa = rirv^a ; "K^pdyKa = ire'irpaxa, but ireireiKa instead of TriTrei^Ko. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
4 144.] POEMATION OP THE TENSES OP MUTE VEftCS. 173 
 
 endings -Ka, -Keiv, when the characteristic is a Taii-mute ; 
 though the Tau-mute is omitted before k (§ 17, 5). 
 
 Remark 1 . For the change of a Tau-mute into <r, before n in the Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass, see § 19, 1 ; for the change of a Tau-mute into <r before t, see 5 17, 5, 
 but tliis <r is omitted before <r of the personal-endings, k. g. Tr^-ireurjuu, -o-tiu, 
 neippiuTiMi, -(TTai ; but second Pers. TEirci-o-ai, Tre^pa-irai instead of irevwr-aiu, 
 Tri<ppa.ir-(ra.i. The vowels a, i, u are short in verbs which have a Tau-mute as a 
 characteristic before endings with the tense-characteristic <r and k [-Ka, -Kew), 
 e. g. <(>/)i£f», (ppaira, e^paira, -rreippaKa. ; 7r\(f(r(ra), <o ^rm, TrAaffa ; m/ilCcD, to thinks 
 4v6iu<ra ; KMifm, to u;asA, kKvctid, etc. ; in like manner, short vowels remain short, 
 e. g. apfiSC^j l^p/jLOKa, 
 
 Rem. 2. On the changes which the mutes undergo by the addition of the 
 endings btgiiming with <r, ^, it, or t, and before the aspirated endings -a, -eiV, 
 F«o §§ 17, 2 and 3. 19, 1. 20, 1 ; on the lengthening of -« into -ei before o- of 
 verbs in -4vSa> or -iy^a, e. g. aitivS-a, Fut. ((TireyJ-irw) iTTreiW, Aor. «r7rEura, 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass, linreiiriiat, see § 20, 2 ; on the omission of it in endings 
 beginning with <r&, e. g. Kcicpu^oi instead of K^Kpi^i^M (/cf/cpiJ^ir&ai), ireirXix- 
 ^ai instead of mirhi^^eu, see § 25, 3 ; on the endings of the third Pers. PI. 
 Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., -arat and -ara instead of -vrai, -mo, see ^ 18, 
 1 and 116, 15 ; on the variable vowel in the Secondary tenses, and in some first 
 Perfects and Perfects Mid. or Pass., see § 140 ; on the Att. Put. of verbs in 
 ■i^a, and -1^<d, e. g. fiiPd^a, Put. fii^lUra, PifiS, -^s, -a, -arov, -u/iev, etc., xoid^a, 
 Put. Kofitira, Ko/ftS, -leis, etc., see § 117. 
 
 Rem. 3. When /i precedes a Pi-mute, which is the characteristic of the 
 verb, e. g. in iri/ar-a, the /i is rejected in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, before endings 
 beginning with jtij thus, vc/xir-u, to send, Tre-Trefi-ficu (instead of fri-^e/j/jr-fuu, Tre- 
 ireii/i-fiai), ireVc/ti^eu, ireirefvirTai, etc., Inf. trcirtii.tpSnu, Part, veirt/ificms ; so 
 /crf/iirr-eo, to bend down, Ke~Kaft-fiat (instead of Ke^ttafi'jr-fiat, Kt KaufJ.-/xai), Also 
 when two gammas would stand before /x, one y is omitted, e. g. aflyy-a, to tie, 
 l-(r<piy-fmt (instead of l-(r<liiyy-/ua), l<r<piy^at, iiT(piyicr<u, etc.. Inf. itr<j>iyxdiUi 
 Part, iar^iyiiivos ; so 4^e\4yxa, to convince, i^eA'liXeyfuu (in.stead of i^eKfi\eyxfuu, 
 f^e\iiyyiuu), efc\^\e7|ai, ctc. Both the Jit and y are here dropped to prevent 
 the concnrronce of three consonants 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
176 
 
 FAKADIGMS 0]? MUTE VERBS. 
 
 [§ ua. 
 
 PA.EADIGMS OF MdTE VeBBS. 
 
 ♦ 145. A. Vabs, whose Characteristic is a Pt-muie 
 
 (13, ■TT, <t>.) 
 
 (a) Pure Cliaracteristlc, p, *, p (Sut. -i)/w). 
 
 TpfjBa!, to rub. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 Perf. 
 
 Plnp. 
 Put. 
 Aor. I. 
 
 Ind. Tpfp-u Subj. rptff^a Imp. rp!p-e Inf. Tpt0-eiv Part, Tpt^-av 
 
 Ind. l-Tptfi-ov Opt. rptp-oi/ii 
 
 Ind. (Te-T()i;3-a) Te'-rpicf-a Subj. Te-rpi^-io Imp. not nsed, Inf. te- 
 
 Tplc(>-4vai Part. Ts-rpltp-t&s 
 Ind. (i-Te-Tpf;3-6iV) l-re-Tpiip-itv Opt. re-Tpi^-oini 
 Ind. (t()/)3-i7») t()(i|/ii) Opt. Tpii/«)i/ii Inf. ^pi-ifieif Part. Tpi\jiai 
 Ind. J-Tpiifio Subj. Tp(iJ/a Opt. TpdJ/oi^uot Imp. rpt^av Inf. Tf ; f oi 
 
 Part. Tp(i(/or. 
 
 MIDDLB. 
 
 Ind. Tpip-ofuu Subj. rptfi-uiMU Imp. rpip-ov Inf. rptp-eaSnu Part. 
 
 TpijS-tJjweyos 
 Ind. i-TpiP-6iniv Opt. rpi$-olfiiiy 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Ind. 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 .3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 {Te-Tpij8-jUOi) 
 
 Te-rpifi-fiat 
 
 Te-rpi^ui 
 
 re-rptTT-Tcu 
 
 re-rplfi-fie^oy 
 
 r4-rpi<^^oy 
 
 r4-Tpt(j>-^oy 
 
 Te-rptfi-fie^a 
 
 Te-rptUL-fieyot el(n{tf) 
 or Te-Tpt(p-a.Tai 
 
 Imperative. 
 (T6-Tpij8-(ro) 
 re-rpt^o 
 Tz-rpi^-^O) 
 
 Te-rpitp-^ov 
 Te-Tpi(p-^Qfy 
 
 re-rpitp-^G 
 ri-Tpl(l>~^a(ray 
 or re-rpitp-^uv 
 
 Infinitive. 
 (Te-TpiiS-S^oi) 
 Te-rpi^-^ai 
 
 Participle. 
 
 tf-Tpi/l-flivOS, -17, -ov 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Te-rpifi-fieyos 5 
 
 Plup. 
 Ind. 
 
 Opt. 
 
 S. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 i-T€-Tpifji.-^r}i/ D. e-re-Tpt/i-^e^ov P. e-T€-Tpi/i-/A63a 
 
 i-T^-rpv^o 4-Te Tpiip-^ov i-Te-TpKp-^G 
 
 i-re-Tpm-TO e-Te-rplij)-^v Te-rpili-p-tvoi ^ffav 
 
 Te-Tptfi-neros tjTjx [or i-Te-Tpl<l>-S,Tp 
 
 Put. 
 Aor. I. 
 
 P. Pf. 
 
 Ind. rpltfioiiai Opt. rpiifiolfiriy Inf. TpffEir&iu Part. rpitfi6fi£ms 
 
 Ind. i-rpf^ifiriv Subj. Tpir^oj/nai Opt. Tpii)/offi7)i' Imp. TpTi|ia: Inf 
 
 rpiypoff^at Part, rpi^dfievos 
 Ind. Te-Tp(<|/0|Uc« Opt. TE-Tpn)/o(fiijy Inf. Te-Tpfi('«<r&i« Part. TE-Tpnf(i- 
 
 fieyos. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 Put. I. 
 A. II. 
 P. II. 
 
 Ind. (^-Tp/;8-&7)v) i-Tpl(p-^riv Subj. Tpi</>-au Opt. Tpufi-^elw Inf. 
 
 rptifi-^vai Imp. Tpl(p-&7iTt Part, rptip-^ets, (instead of I. Aor. 
 
 Pass., commonly II. Aor. Pass.) 
 Ind. Tpi(/>-a^(ro/iot Opt. rpiip-diitrotfaiv Inf. Tpii(>-&^iJ'6tr,&cii Part. Tpi(Ji- 
 
 Ind. i-Tpip-Tiv Subj. Tpi$-a Opt. TpT/S-eJiji/ Imp. Tpt^-Tjfti Inf. Tpi;8- 
 
 ^voi Part. Tplp-els 
 Ind. Tpr/3-^)(rO|iioi Opt. TpXP-qtroliiriv Inf. TpT$-fi<y€(rhai Pait. Tpi|3- 
 
 Verbal adjective: (Tpi;8-T(is) 'rpi7f-T((j, -^j -li;/, rpm-rios, -ia, -tov. 
 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^i 146, 147.] PARADIGMS OF MUTE VEKDS. 
 
 177 
 
 !§ 146. (b) Impure'Characteristiio.wT in Pros, and Inipf. (Fut. -^b). 
 
 K6TrTa, 'to cut. 
 
 ACTIVF. 
 
 Pres. 
 Perf. I. 
 Perf. n. 
 
 Fut. 
 Aor. I, 
 Fnt. Pf. 
 
 •{■Ke-KOTT-a) K4-«a<t)-a 
 
 Ki-Kmt-a (Horn. J 
 
 (ftoV-o-ai) Ko^d) 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Koirr-ojiai 
 Ks-KOfM-nai, like re-Tpififiai 
 
 4-K0}j/ifJ.TJV 
 
 A. I. i-xiip-^v 
 F. I. Ko(p-^a-oiJ.at 
 
 A II. i-K^TT-riP 
 
 F. II. KOTT-ilffOliOA 
 
 Verbal adjective : Koir-rds, -^, ■6v, kot-tcos, -Tea, -reW. 
 
 Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 K<iuw-T-w, to lend down (k&o/h-^oi for KeKa/i/i-imi, § 144, Rem. 3). 
 
 Ind. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 <MKafl;H01 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infimtiye. 
 
 2. 
 
 KeKOfi^j/ai 
 
 Kixa/i^o 
 
 Kexiiif^cu 
 
 3. 
 D. 1. 
 
 KfKaiiiTTai 
 KeKdftfjLe^ov 
 
 KeKoifKp^OJ 
 
 Participle. 
 
 2. 
 
 KGKatl^^OV 
 
 KeKOjlfp^OV 
 
 •KSKafi/iivos, -rj, -oy 
 
 3. 
 
 KCKa/JL^AoV 
 
 KeKdfiip^aiy 
 
 ' Subjunctive. 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 KeK^/tfie^a 
 
 
 K€Kafifi4yos S> 
 
 2. 
 
 KcKaiiipAe 
 
 KCKUfl^^e 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Kexa/i/xfyoi eliTl{v) 
 
 KiK(iii.(pSru(rav, oi KeKiiupSfUv] 
 
 Verbal adjective : KatiwK^s, -^, '6v^ Kafiirreos, -rea, -riov. 
 
 •i 147. B. Ver'bs, who'se Characteristic is a Kappa- 
 mute (y, K, x)- 
 
 ifi) Pure Charactenstic, y, k, %. (b) Impure Characteristic in the Pres. and 
 Impf., aa, Att. tt, rarer f. 
 
 ■ff\Eic--iD, to weave. Fnt. -Jb. Tafffrai, Att. raTTw, fo arrange. 
 
 ACTIVF. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Perf. 
 
 Fnt. 
 F.Pf. 
 
 ir\6K-W 
 
 (ire'-irXeK-o) 
 ire-TTAex-o 
 (wMK-ffa) ■lr\4\a> 
 
 irAeK-o/iat 
 
 (ire-7rA.€tf-/xal) 
 
 5re'-irAe7-/iai 
 
 irXefojUat 
 
 7re-7rA6|o^al 
 
 Tao-<r-ai 
 
 (Te-Tay-a) 
 
 T6-Tax-tt 
 
 {Tdy-ffai) rd^a 
 
 rdtra'-ouai 
 Tf-rayfuti 
 
 Td^O/XCU 
 
 Te-ri^outu 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Fut. I. 
 A. II. 
 F. n. 
 
 vKiY'^a-OfUil 
 
 i-Tr\dK-7iy and i-Tr\eK-7]V 
 
 mx-^a-oficu 
 e-rdy-Tjy 
 Tay-^co/iat 
 
 Verbal adjective : iv\eKT6s, -v, -iv ; TrAeK-reos, -Tea, -reov ; raKrSs, TaKTtps: 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
178 
 
 PAKADIGMS OP MUTE VERBS. 
 
 [i 148. 
 
 Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Too-o-tt?, to arrange, and cipiyya (§ 144, Eem. 3), to bind. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 TerayiJLat 
 
 e<r<j>iynai 
 
 Imperative. | 
 
 2. 
 
 TeVnloi 
 
 ^(ripiy^at 
 
 Tero|o 
 
 effipty^o 
 
 3. 
 
 reraKToi 
 
 iffiplyKTal 
 
 terax^tif 
 
 i<T(piyx^a 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 Terdyfiedov 
 
 itrtpiyfie^oy 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 rirax^ov 
 
 etr(ptyx^ou 
 
 rerax^oy 
 
 iatpiyxStov 
 
 3. 
 
 Terax^ov 
 
 taipiyxAov 
 
 TenixS'""' 
 
 4a(()tyx^av 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 rerdyfie^a 
 
 4<r<piyfi€^a 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 TETox^e 
 
 ea-(piyx^f 
 
 TeVax&e 
 
 €ir<piyxS>e 
 
 3. 
 
 lerayp-evoi iL(Ti{v), 
 
 iffiptyfieyot etiTl{y) 
 
 rertix^t^f^f'tyi 
 
 ifftplyx^uiray, 
 
 
 or mdxO'To-^ 
 
 
 or Tcrdx^av 
 
 or ia^iyx^uv 
 
 Inf. md^ax 
 
 i<r(piyx^ai Part. Teray/ifms 4a<l>iyfievos. 1 
 
 Bemabk. The student will observe particularly the changes which take 
 place in the inflection of the Perf. Pass, of these verbs : rerpiii-iuu (instead of 
 rirptP-iicu), P before fi being changed intoyu; Tirpitfiai (instead of TiTpnr-aai), 
 V and <r forming rfi; rerpiir-rm, the characteristic tt remaining unchanged; 
 TiTpvp-^ov (instead of rfTpiir-Aov), the characteristic ir being changed into ^, to 
 be of the same order as the S- following (§ 17, 2) ; so others similar. In like 
 manner, rerayfiai : Tera^ai (instead of Teray-ffai), y and a" fonning | ; tstcuctiu 
 (instead of Terayrai), y being changed into k, to be of the same order as the 
 T following ; TeraxPov (instead of T€T07&oy), y being changed to correspond 
 
 S 148. C. Verbs, whose Characteristic is a Tau- 
 mute (8, T) 5) . 
 
 (a) Pure Characteristic, 5, t, St. (b) Impure Characteristic in Pres. and Impf, 
 f, rarer aa. — Put. <rw. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 i^€i;S-(U, 
 
 ^l'€vS-o/^al, 
 
 ^pcJf-OJ. 
 
 <pfdC-oiuu, 
 
 
 to deceive. 
 
 to lie. 
 
 to say. 
 
 to think. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 %-^ev^-ov 
 
 ^-^evd-SfiTjp 
 
 e-^paf-oy 
 
 l-ippaQ-6iaiv 
 
 Perf. 
 
 (g-l)/6uS-Ko) 
 
 (e-^evd-fxat) 
 
 (7re-<j>paS-Ko) 
 
 [iri-^paS-iiiu) 
 
 
 ^-^ev-Ka 
 
 %-i^evff-ijLaL 
 
 ir^'ijypa-Ka 
 
 •jr€-(l>paa'-fmi 
 
 Plup. 
 
 4-^e{l-KilV 
 
 4~^iiff-[niv 
 
 i-Tre-<l>p&~Kelv 
 
 e-Tri-^pdff-p.iiv 
 
 Put. 
 
 (y^iiS-(Ta>) 
 
 (i//€i5S-(rojuoi) 
 
 {(ppdS-trw) 
 
 [ippdZ-ffoit^) 
 
 
 t)(ei5 r-M 
 
 i|/6i5-(ro/4ot 
 
 tppa-fru 
 
 tppd-troptm 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 e-\j/ev-(ra 
 
 ^-ij/eu-trci^Tji/ 
 
 s-^pa-aa 
 
 e-(f>pa-adia\v 
 
 P.Pf. 
 
 
 ^-i^ei5-(ro/Aoi 
 
 
 we-ippd-trofuu 
 
 PASSIVE. 1 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 (^lf.6t55-a^,y) 
 
 i-^ficr-Srr\v 
 
 {i-ippdS-Sniy) 
 
 i-tppdff-^y 
 
 Put. I. 
 
 
 ^€v(r-^(ro/xai 
 
 
 <l>pa<r-^(roiua 
 
 Vei 
 
 bal Adj. : (rf/fuB-r 
 
 eos) i|/eu(r-Teos, -re 
 
 a, -Te'oj' ; tftpcur-rei 
 
 )s, -Tea, -T^oy. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'49.J FOKMATION OP THE TENSES OP LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 179 
 
 Inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Ind. S. I. 
 
 f^«y(r-yitai 
 
 2. 
 
 eyj/ev-aat 
 
 3. 
 
 ^yj/evtr-Tai 
 
 D, 1. 
 
 ij^da-liedov 
 
 2, 
 
 lififvo&ov 
 
 3. 
 
 ^fpeV'O^ov 
 
 P.l. 
 
 4\)ifiir-iieAa 
 
 2. 
 
 ^ij^eu-ff-ae 
 
 3. 
 
 iifievir-fiemi clirHv) 
 
 Imperative. 
 l^ev-trAov 
 
 
 Infinitire. 
 Participle. 
 
 Subjanctire. 
 
 Kemask. SiiC'") '" s't»6, has in the Perf. Mid. or Pass, trea-a-iicu from ada 
 (Attic), and treiraiT/iuu, but Aor. laddriv, verbal Adj. aa>ar4os. 
 
 §149. rOKMATION OF THE TeNSES OP LIQUID VeKES. 
 
 1. Liquid verbs (§ 127, II. B.) form the Fut. Act. and 
 Mid. and the first Aor. Act, and Mid. without the tense- 
 characteristic o- (§ 20, 3) but the Perf. Act. with the tense- 
 chsiracteristic k, e. g. 
 
 a(paKhw (stem 2*A/V), Put. a(paK-S>, first Aor. c-(r<\n]K-a, Perf. t-a^oK ■•> 
 
 Eemakk 1. The endings of the Put. in liquid verbs, namely, -a, -ov/uu, are 
 formed by conti'action from -4<ra, -iiroiuu after the rejection of ir (^ 20, 3). The 
 inflection of these contracted endings is like that of contracts in -ia in the 
 Pres. Act. and Mid.: ^i\-a, tpiK-oviuu (§ 135) ; <r is omitted in thePut. of liquid 
 verbs, to prevent the harshness occasioned by the combination of tha( letter vrith 
 the preceding liquid. The Put. Perf. is wanting in liquid verbs. 
 
 2. The Present tense of Liquid verbs, with the exception 
 of a few whose stem-vowel is e, is strengthened, either by 
 doubling the characteristic X, or by inserting the liquid v 
 after the characteristic ; also, by lengthening the short stem- 
 vowel, as in all verbs in -Cva, -vvw, -ipa, or by changing it 
 into a diphthong (§ 16, 3), e. g. a-^oK-X-co, rifi-v-co, Kpiv-co, 
 afivv-co, KTelv-a, (}>alv-co (stems S^AA, TEM, KPIN{i), 
 'AMTN{v), KTEN, #^iV) ; but fiiv-w, vifi-m with a pure 
 
 stem. 
 
 3. Except the Pres. and Impf. the tenses are formed from 
 the pure stem, but the final vowel of the stem is lengthened 
 in the first Aor. Act. and Mid. (see No. 5), e. g. cr^aXK-a 
 {X^AA)t Fut. aj>aX-w, second Aor. Pass. i-aj>ak-'nv, first 
 Perf. Act. 6-(7<j)aX-Ka, first Apr. Act. e-a-<]>r]\-a. The second 
 Aorists Act. and Mid. rarely occur, and scarcely at all in 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
im 
 
 FOIlHtATION DP THE TENSES Of LIQUID VEKBS. [} 14? 
 
 prose ; on the contrary, the second Aor. Pass, is more in use 
 than the first Aor. ; the first Aor. is wholly wanting in many 
 verbs. 
 
 4. In liquid verbs with an impure characteristic, the 
 ground-form of the stem is not borrowed, as in the case 
 of mute verbs, from the second Aor., but from the Fut., 
 since only a few verbs of this class form a second Aor. Act 
 and Mid. 
 
 5. Liquid verbs are divided into four classes according as 
 the stem-vowel of the Fut. is d, e, I, or ii before the ending aj. 
 In the first Aor. Act. and Mid. o is lengthened into tj, e in**j 
 fit, I into I, V into v (§ 16, 3). Thus : — 
 
 I. Class with 5 in tho Future. 
 
 Pros. Fut. Aor. 
 
 ff(pdW-oi, io deceive^ ^(paK-a e-c^A-a 
 
 Kti/jiv-u, to labor-, Kafi-ovfjuu wanting 
 
 rcKftatp-Uf to point otd, reicfidp-to i-rcKfiiip-a 
 
 rpaip-tOf ti} show, <pay-u e-(p7]p-a, 
 
 II. Class Willi e in the Future. 
 
 fief-w, to remain, /xcz/-w e-/i6«/-a 
 
 ft77eAA,-ii), to announce, 0776^-13 tJYyuK-ci 
 
 ■ ^ixv-as, to cut, Teij,-a wanting 
 
 veii-a, to divide, ve/iS e-peift-a 
 
 KTtty-a, to kill, ktsv-u e-KTciv-a 
 
 fjLttfp-w, to desire, Ifiep-a Y^etp-a 
 
 III. Class with i! in the Future. 
 
 t tA\-ca, to pluch, r'iK-a ^-Tt\-o 
 
 fiplv-to, to separate,^-' Kplv-a e-Kplv-tu 
 
 IV. Class with C in the Future. 
 fTuo-w, to draw, aiip-w e-avp-a 
 
 aiivv-a, io defend, hjivv-u ij/iOv-a. 
 
 Rem. 2. The following verbs in -airai of the first class take u in the Aor. 
 instead of j;, namely, lo-xraiVw, to make emaciated {la-xmm, iVxi'Stoi) ; /tepSaiw, 
 
 to 
 
 ^'P' . , . , , , ,. 
 
 ra, Terprivai), and all in -taha, e. g. irialpw, to make fat, iirlgjia, irmrai (except 
 aialvio, to slain, lUTJvai, rarely /uavm). — The verbs <rriiiaiva, to give a signai, and 
 Kd^alpw, to purify, Jama both irriiiTJmi (whieh is usual among jfie Attie writers), 
 Ka^ripai, and (r-n/Mvai, Kvi^apai. Also alpa, to raise, and aWofiat, to leap, are 
 formed with a : dipcu, ahacr^ai, but in the Ind. the o is changed into t; on account 
 (if tho augment, e. g. ^pu, Tihi/iriv (second Aor. ii\6intv is not used in the Ind. 
 lA.nd very rarely elsewhere). Comp. on c, \ 16, 7 (a). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t 1'19.] PoB.MA.TION OP THE TENSES OP LIQUID VERBS. 181 
 
 6. The first Pei-f. Act. of verbs with the characteristic v 
 (according to § 19, 3), must end in -y/ca, e. g. fj.6filar^-Ka, 
 Plut. (from fj,iaLVQ} instead of fMe-fiiav-Ko), ire^cuyKa, Dinarch. 
 (from fj)alv(a), Trapco^vyKa, Polyb. (from 'n-apo^ww, to excite). 
 But the form in -yica is found only among later writers. The 
 best writers endeavor to avoid it, sometimes by dropping the 
 p, e. g. KexplKa, KeicKlKa from Kpivco, kKivo) (so also KeKephaKO, 
 among later writers, also Ksicephar/Ka, but KeKep&rjKa, Dem. 
 56, 30. from KepSaivco) ; or also, as in KTsivoj, by using the 
 form of the second Perf., e. g. avexTova, in the sense of the 
 first Perf. (sKTayKa, eKTUKa, from the time of Maenander), 
 or, as in the case of verbs in -evco, by not forming any Perf.; ' 
 as, c. g. in /j.ivco, by forming it from a new theme, as fie/xe- 
 vTfKa from MENEIl. 
 
 7. The three following verbs with the characteristic v 
 drop that letter, not only in the Perf. and Plup. Act., but 
 also in the Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, and in the first 
 Aor. Pass.: — 
 
 KpivWy to separate^ K^KpiKa KeKpifiai iKpt^y 
 
 KSivie, to bend doiDn, Ke'KA.iKo k4K\'iiiai ^/c\feij>' (the 2d Aor. eVPifrrjv is rare), 
 
 irAuj/w, ta washj (ir^trKvKa) 'ireTr\vfjuju iir\^^y (Hippoc.) 
 
 Kem. 3. Telvoi, to stretch, and Kreifm, to kill, form the above-mentioned tensea 
 from new themes, viz. TAn, KTANfJ, KTAn, thus : — 
 
 TCTo/ca r^ra/xai iriS^v 
 
 ^KTaiea, (and e/cToy/co) ?/cTd/iai iKTaSiv" {iicTdy^v among the later writers); 
 
 yet the forms of kte/cib here presented, are not Attic. The Attie writers use 
 ticroi/a as the Perf. Act. (see No. 6), and instead of iK.raiJ.ai and iKri^v, sub- 
 stitute ri^riKa and iire^avop in passive phrases with wrS and the (Jen., or 
 lu/riprifiai and ai^jpeSijc, without a preposition. 
 
 Kem. 4. Kplvu, KTdva, irKiim, and ktcIvu, among the poets, often retain v in 
 the first Aor. Pass, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. iK\lpdi^r, 
 lirxiv^v ; in prose, these forms seem to be doubtful, yet nareKXiv^ is found in 
 X. HeU. 4. 1, 30, in all the copies. 
 
 8. On the formation of the Perf. Mid., the following 
 points should be noted: — 
 
 Verbs in -alva> and ivu, usually drop the v before the endings beginning with 
 /i, and insert <r to strengthen the syllable, e. g. ipaiv-a vi^a-a-imi 7re-(f>a-<r-^£fto; 
 v^aivw S<pairiiar, /.lepaiva /iendpaff/iat (Luc.) ; (ri\ii.aivw ffi(ri)iuuTimi ; irepalva ireirc- 
 oacrjjju ; fiaiva Ippaff/iai ; Traxifa ■7reirdx^<''H^ai ; riSim> TiSuir/ioi ; XenTwas A€\eir- 
 imp-iu ; h\<iv<a Sfi/fffiM ; ^\<iv<a ■'i^Xvafua (Luc.) ; -triaiva irarlaffiiat ; rpax^va 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
182 
 
 PAEADIGMS OP LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 150, 
 
 TeT/)tJx"'''i'"» (Luc); Kv/iatvofiai AeAufioir/ieVoi ela({i'); fualva jis/ifao-^Ki ; but 
 some verbs of this kind assimilate tlie v to the following p, c. g. t,npalv-u, 
 ii^ipaii-iMi instead of ^-Zipav-iiai (also i^'/ipturi^cu). ■iTapol,iva>, vapii^v/iimi, a\<rxiv-u 
 ^axif-ptat (Homer) ; a very few verbs drop v among the later Writers, without 
 substituting a strengthening a ; the vowel, however, is made long, e. g. rpaxiy-ai, 
 to make rough, re-rpiixS-ftai also T£Tptix'"^A"" ^""^ TeTpdxvf-fiai. It is evident that 
 in the personal-endings, except those beginning with /u, the v remains, e. g. 
 Tr4ipcKr-^ai, iriipav-ffai, iri-tpavTaij i^Tipafi-iuii, -ai^cat, -avraty ^(rxu^tijuai, -I'ytraij 
 •vvToi, -i/i-iie^oir (see cpalf-u and ^npatva, 5 151) ; still, it is to be noted that the 
 form of the second Pers. Sing., in -y(rai, is rare j instead of it the Part, with 
 rT is used, e. g. irefaff/i^i/os f?, etc. 
 
 Ebm. 5. On the omission of o- in endings beginning with ffS-, s<c § 25, 3 ; 
 on the variable a, in the first Perf. Act. and Mid. and in the first Aor. Pass,, and 
 also in the second Aorists of liquid verbs with a monosyilabic stem and the 
 stem-vowel e, see ^ 140, 3 ; on the Perf. of iyelpa, and iyelpu with Att. Kedup., 
 gee § 124, 2 (b). 
 
 9. In the second Perf. (which, however, belongs only to 
 a few verbs) the short stem-vowel before the ending -a, is 
 lengthened, as in the first Aor. Act, except in verbs with e 
 in the Fut, which take the variable o (§ 140, 4), e. g. ^aiv-a, 
 first Aor. e-^7]v-a, second. Perf. iri-^v-a; but a-irelp-a, Fut. 
 ffTrep-cb, second Perf. e-crirop-a. 
 
 Hem. 6. Second Aorists Act. and Mid. are rare in liquid verbs, e. g. e/SoAo;', 
 l^a\6ii.7]v, ixavov, iirrapov (doubtful in prose) from jSaAAu, liaiva, VTaipu, KTfU 
 va ; Aorists are also formed from some irregular verbs ; a few verbs, also, have 
 a second Aor. Pass., e. g. those with monosyllabic stems, as S4pa, itipijv, f&el- 
 pa, (TTeAAw, (paiyta, fiatyu, K\iyu, etc. 
 
 150. Paradigms of Liquid Verbs 
 hyyihKw, to announce. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Pres. ayyiXKa Perf. I. fiyyi\-Ka Perf. II. i-tpStop-a, perdidi, from ^^ip-a 
 
 Fut. Ind. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 a77eA-w Opt. ayyehoT^t or hyyeKoiiiy 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i,yye\-eis ayyeXoTs " ayyeAolris 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ayycA-e? a776Ao( " &77eAo^7j 
 
 
 1). 2. 
 
 &77eA-6?rov ayyeKoiTOV " &yye\oiriTay 
 
 
 3. 
 
 a.yyf\-e'iTov ayyeXohriv ' ayye\oiiiTriy 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 ayyeK-ovney ayyeKoTfiey " ayyeXoliHiev 
 
 
 2. 
 
 AyyeA-eiTe ayye\o7Tt " liyyeKolriTe 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ayye\-ov<n{v) dyyeAoTei/ " &Yy(\o7ev 
 Inf. ayyf\eTv Part. 077eA3>', -ovcra, -oSy 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 ■^77ei\-o, ayyel\a, ciyyeiKaiiii, &yyeiAoy, ItyyeTKai, &yyet\as 
 
 Aor. II. 
 
 Ind. ^TTeA-ov Subj. ayy^Ka Opt. ayy4\otfu Imp. SweAe 
 
 (rare) 1 Int. ayyeXuv Part. hyjiXjiv, -ovaa, -6v. | 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 151.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 183 
 
 MIDDLE. 1 
 
 Pcrf. Ind. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 ^eK-liai 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^TTcX-o-oi 
 
 ijyyeK-ffo 
 
 ^JryeA-aoi 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ^77e\-Toi 
 
 ifyyi\-Sim 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 ^77e'\-/te&iii' 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^TyeVftov 
 
 ^77c\-aoj' 
 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 
 3. 
 
 IJYyA-dov 
 
 i)YYi\-^wv 
 
 ijyyeK-/i4yQs S> 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 iiyyf\-He&a 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^Yye\-Ae 
 
 iirr^\-Ste 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 iiyye\-li&oi e'uri{v) 
 
 ^TT^\&aj(roi', or riyy4\-^aii] 1 
 
 Plup. Ind. 
 
 iiyy4\-iJ.riy, -ffo, -to, -lienor, -Aoy, -3t)J', -;tt€&a, -ftf, iiyyeK/iei/oi ^<rav | 
 
 Put. Ind. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 &77e\-0UjUai 
 
 Opt. a.Ytc\-oiiiriv 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 &77cVp, or -e? 
 
 ayycK-oTo 
 
 y-,i\-ftada.i 
 
 
 3. 
 
 &77eA.-£Ttoi 
 
 iryye\-o!TO 
 
 Participle. 
 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 ayyeK-oifjie^ov 
 
 &yye\-oi/j.e^ou 
 
 ayysX-oviiiVos 
 
 
 2. 
 
 hrfyeX-eiff^ov 
 
 ayye\-ii!<rdov 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ayye\-ei(r^ov 
 
 ayyeK-oiff^v 
 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 ayye\-oi/ie^a. 
 
 ayye\-oliJi.e&a 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 a'Yye\-et(T^e 
 
 a.yye\-o7o'^e 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ayye\-oSvTcu 
 
 ayyeX-otpTO 
 
 
 Aor I. 
 
 Ind. ^fyyeiX-^ntiv, etc. 
 
 Aor. II. 
 
 Ind. irryeK-6iniv Subj. ayyi\-aiuu Opt. d-jTeX-ofiUTj^ Imp. 
 
 (rare) 
 
 477e\-oG Inf. OTyeA-eV&ai Part. ayye\-6/i.evos. 
 
 Verbal adjective : &77EA-TEOS, -re'a, -reoy. 1 
 
 } 151. Shorter Paradigms, arranged according to the 
 stem-vowel of the Future. 
 
 (a) with a in the Putnre: tripilwa, fiillo; (palva, to show, Mid. 
 
 to appear. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 Perf. I. 
 Perf. IL 
 Put. 
 Aor. I. 
 
 e-fftpa\'Ka 
 ^-(TtpTjK-a 
 
 O'^ciXA.-OjUCU 
 
 ff<l)a\ovfla'. 
 wanting 
 
 tpaiv-v 
 {ire-tpay-Ka 
 
 tpalv-ofjxu 
 'Tre-tpaff-fiat 
 
 ire-tpTjy-a, 1 appear, 
 
 (j)av-u I tpav-Qvfiat ^ 
 
 ' I shall appear, inro^., I shall affirm. " Prose Imeip., it was affirmed by me. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Put. L 
 Aor. IL 
 Put. II. 
 
 i-(r^>iK-^v (poet.) 
 ir^o\-&^o'0(noi (poet.) 
 
 ffipaK-4iffoiiai 
 
 4-^aii-^v, I appeared, 
 
 ipca^-^ffo/jLOL 
 i-ipav-Tiv, I appeared, 
 
 <fiav-i)aoiuu, I will apvT- 
 
 Verbal adjective ; tr<paK-74os, -r4a, -t4ov, ipav-T4os. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
184 
 
 PAEADIGHS OP LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 [iH 152, 153 
 
 Inflection of the Pcrf. Mid. or Pass, of 
 (paly-a,to show; ^npaly-io,to dry, and Teiya [^ 149, Hem. 3), to stretch. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 ir€-(paff-fiai 
 Tri-ipav-frai 
 ird-ipav-rai 
 
 Tr4-<pav-&oy 
 Tr4-(pav-^oy 
 Tre-<pdff-iJ.e^a 
 
 i-i'lipan-/ua 
 
 i-^iipav-ffat 
 
 i-^ijpay-Tat 
 
 i-^TIpd/i-iiedoy 
 
 (-(■iipav-hoy 
 
 4-l,ipav-boy 
 
 i-\r\pdn-ixeda 
 
 l-\iipavS>e 
 
 i-\i)paix-ii.iyoi e\(Tl(y) 
 
 T£-TCt-jUOI 
 
 Te-TOL-trat 
 
 Te-TCt-TOI 
 
 Te-ra-fie^oy 
 ri-ra-tr^ov 
 
 Te.Ttt-ff^e 
 
 Tc'-TO-VTOt 
 
 Imp. S. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 T>.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 ire-(t>dy-^cii 
 v4tj>aif-^ov 
 ne-ipdv-dav 
 
 •7re-(l>dv-^ojaca', -or 
 ire-tpdy-^av 
 
 ( i-i,i]pav-ao) 
 e-^Tjpdy-^tv 
 e-^^pcai-^oy 
 i-^pdy-^uy 
 4-liipay-Ae 
 i-^Tjpdy-^aa-ay, or 
 i-^fipdy-^Qiy 
 
 Te Tct-tro 
 
 re-rd-ff^w 
 
 •re-Ta-trboy 
 
 r^-rd-ff^wy 
 
 re-Ta-cr^e 
 
 re-rd-tr^aiTay, or 
 
 Te-rd-a-Auy 
 
 Inf. 
 
 ■ire-(l>dy-S>ai 
 
 i-^7ipdy-^at 
 
 Te-rd-a^ai 
 
 Part. 
 
 Tre-ipa(r-fi4vos 
 
 i-^7ipafj.-f/.eyos 
 
 re-ra-fieyos 
 
 4 152. (b) with € in the future: *ifieip'Co (Ion. and Poet), to 
 desire^ and (rreXAw, to send. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pros. 
 Perf. I. 
 Put. 
 Aor. L 
 
 i/ji.eip-ci> 
 'Ifxep-Ka 
 i^ep-u 
 Xfietp-a 
 
 tfieip-oficu 
 'l/jLe^-fjLcu 
 If^ep-ouiiai 
 ifjictp-dfj.Tjy 
 
 ffreK-u 
 
 (TTcAA-OjUOi 
 
 e-o-ToX-fuu 
 
 (TTeX-oS/Mn 
 i-cretK-diaiv 
 
 PASSIVE. 1 
 
 Aor.L 
 Put. I. 
 
 ip.4p-^v 
 'tp.ep-&^(rofiai 
 
 i-a-Tdh-^Tjv A. II. i-trr&K-^v 1 
 iTToK-^'lirofiat P. II. a-Td\-iiaoiiUU 1 
 
 Vertal Adj. i/iep-ros, -it, 
 Remakk. The inflection 
 
 -6y, Ifiep-reos, -Tea, -reoy, aroK-Tos, aTak-rios. 
 of tlie Perf. Mid. or Pass, is liiie -fiyyeX-iuu. 
 
 § 153. (c) "With I and v in the Future, 
 (a) rlXK-a, to pluck ; avpa, to draw; pioXvy-a, to defile. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 tI?J\^-CO 
 
 
 rlW'Ofiai 
 
 Perf. 
 
 re-TtK-Ka 
 
 
 Tt-TiK-itai 
 
 Put. 
 
 tTX-w TX\-ovfiat 
 
 Aor. L 
 
 ^-TlA-a 4-rl\-dfi7iy 
 
 A. LP. 
 
 i-riX-^y 
 
 P. I. P. 
 
 Ti\-^a-ofiai 
 
 trvp-co 
 trvp-ofiat 
 
 ffi-fTVp-Ka 
 
 (re-avp-fxai 
 
 aijp-u ffvp-ovfiai 
 e-<rvp-a i-ffvp-dfJTjy 
 
 4-(TVp-^V 
 
 trvp-^trofiat 
 Aor. II. and Fut. II. P. i-atp-rfv, <rvp-fj(rofj.ai 
 
 pLoXvv-a 
 fio\vv-o/xai 
 
 IxoKvu-w fioKvjf-ovfuii 
 i-fi6\vv-a i-tio\w-dfiijy 
 4-fio\vy-^v 
 
 fjLoKvy-^iTOfiat 
 
 A^erbal Adj. tiK-tS^, tiK-tcos^ crvp-rSs, ffvp-rios, ^oKw-tSs^ p.o\vv^4&s. 
 Hesiakk 1. Tlie inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass, of Te-riX-fiaij tr4-(rvp-^ 
 /xai, is lilie ^yy€\-p.at, and that of /ie-/x<jA.i/a'-jUai like Tr4-(paa--fiai, that of jiffxvjtt" 
 Ijai (from alcrxw-atj to sJiame), like e-^^pafx-fxat. 
 
4 134.] rECULIAKITIES IN THE FOEMATION OF VERBS 
 
 1S4 
 
 {$) Rhiv-a, to bend dovm; irJdlv-u, to wash, with v dropped (§ 149, 7). 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Prc3. 
 Perf. 
 Fut. 
 Aor. I. 
 
 K\{v-a 
 
 iMv-S> 
 i-KKTv-a 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 KXtv-ofiai 
 Ke-K\i-/Aat 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 ire-)rA.iJ-Ka 
 •irKvv-u 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 irhiiv-onaL 
 
 •jrXvv-oviJuu 
 i-TrKOv-ifirtv 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 Aor. I. 
 Aor. II. 
 
 i-K\t-S)TIV 
 
 i-ic\tv-rii' 
 
 Fut. I. KKi-^croiuu 
 Eut. II. KK'iv-i)aofiai 
 
 i-Tr}J>-S)-nv vKv-diiaojuu 
 
 Verbal Adj. KKi-r6s, -^, -6v, KXt-reos, -Tea, -reW, itAu-tos, TrAu-reos. 
 Kem. 2. The inflection of the Perf. Mid. or Pass. Ki-K\l-imi and n-e-irAii- 
 luu is like Te-Ta-yma, and corresponds with that of pure verbs. 
 
 i 154. Special Peculiarities in the Formation of 
 single Verbs, both Pure and Impure. 
 
 1. The Future of very many Active verbs is in the Middle 
 form, e. g, aKovw, I hear, Fut. aKovcro/xai., I shall hear, Aor. rjKovira, 
 Iheard. See § 198. 
 
 2. The following verbs in -aim or -aw and -ha, whose stem 
 ended originally in -au' and -ev {aF, eF), resume the v in the 
 Aorist and Future (} 25, 2) : — 
 
 Kaio> (old Attic KvLa seldom, and without contraction), to bum, Eut. Kai<ru ; Aor. 
 
 ^Kavtra ; Perf. xeKavxa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. KeKoviuu ; Aor. Pass. ixavAriy ; 
 
 Eut. Pass. Kav^aoiuu; verbal Adj. KavaTeos, Ravaros, KavT6s; but second 
 
 Aor. Act. ixaiiv, I burned, Intrans., in the Ion. and later writers. 
 kAo(ib (kAShi seldom, and without contraction), to weep, KAaia-ofiai or KXavaovfim 
 
 (No. 3), K\aiaa> late j first Aor. Act. %K\avaa, etc. ; Perf. Pass; KeKXavfuu; 
 
 Aor. Pass. lK\ai<r&riv lute. See § 166, 18. 
 A4a, to run, Eut. S-eio-o/ioi or aeu<roD/iai (No. 3), ^eitra late ; the other tenses 
 
 are wanting. See rpexo', § 167, 5. 
 v4a, to swim, Eut. veia-o/iat or vevffoSjmi (No. 3) ; Aor. iiisv(ra; Perf. vivevxa. 
 irAcoj, to soiV, Eut. irActio-oyuoi, usually ■n\ivaoviuu (No. 3) ; Aor. ?7rAeuiro; Perf. 
 
 ire'irAeu/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Triir\ev(rnai; Aor. Pass. ^irAei!<r9T)c ; verbal 
 
 Adj. irAeuiTTeos. 
 
 ' The V in the Eut. of these verbs is occasioned by the reappearance of the 
 Digamma (F) softened into the vowel u. The Digamma would regularly 
 stand in the Pres. before the personal-ending a, but is omitted where it comes 
 between two vowels : it appears, however, in the Eut., as it therestauds before 
 the consonant <r. This is analogous to the disappearance, in the Pres., of some 
 aspirate, perhaps h (comp. veho), in the Latin verbs fluo, struo, and the reap- 
 pearance of the same in the Peif. before s, with which it combines and forms x 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
l8G rEOULIARITIES IN THE FORMATION OP VEllBS. [5 154 
 
 iri/ea, to how, Fiit. iryeiffoiiai or Trvevaoviuu (No. 3); Aor. eiryeuiro; Perf 
 
 ireVyeu/ca ; late Put. iryeiffa, and Aor. Pass. iirveiaSrriv. 
 pta, to flow, Fut. piiaoixM ; Aor. ipjievffa ; both forms extremely rare in tho 
 
 Attic, which vises instead of them ^vtia-o/iai, ippiriv (^ 192, 7), and so also 
 
 the Perf. ippinKa. 
 
 Remark 1. The verb x™ (x^F") X^""); '" /"""' ""'i differs from the pi'e- 
 ceding verbs : Put. x™ i I'll- Mid. x^V"' (see No. 4) ; Aor. ?x™> Subj. xc'», 
 Inf x'<"> I™P- X^'o") XE''''"> <='<=; -^oi"- Mid. ix^iia]v (see No. 7); Perf. Act. 
 K6X>'f"j Perf. Mid. or Pass. KEXu/icti ; Aor. Pass, ex"^"; Put. Perf. xu^ffo/nu 
 (§ 223, E. 2). The forms with eu belong only to the Epic; Put. x^^^'j Aor. 
 
 3. The circumflexed Fut. in -oB/xat which properly belongs tc 
 liquid verbs only, is used by the Doric writers with other verbs 
 also, whose Future would regularly be in -o-u or -arofiai, e. g. 
 Tvij/Z, -£ts, -et, -ov/j.o', -cire, -ouitoi ; Tyxj/ov/jiai, etc. ; this is called the 
 Doric Fut. and is in common use in the following verbs, yet 
 only in the Middle form, with the signification of the Fut, 
 Act. : — 
 
 tftevy-Uj to flee, Put. ^€V^ovjUat and (pev^ofiat 
 
 Trai^-w, to sport, " Trai^ov/jLcu " irai^o/jLoi 
 
 Xef-io, alvum exoncrare, " x*<''<'"i'"" 
 
 irlirr-a, to fall, " ire<roC/ioi (IIETil) 
 
 irui/&t£couoi, to inquire, " 5r€u<raOjnoi, usually ireitroitiu, 
 
 and also in those mentioned under No. 2 : kAoi'oj, irXe'w, ir^/ea, vw, 
 
 ftew. 
 
 4. Future without the tense-characteristic. The Fut. of the 
 following verbs, being -without the Fut. characteristic cr, and 
 having the inflection of the Present, takes entirely the form of 
 a Present, viz. : — 
 
 eS-d), Epic, usually tVS-ioi, to eat, Put. eS-o/.ioi ; irfy-to (nm), to drink. Put. iri- 
 oiuu ; xe'a, to pour out. Put. xe'", x^''^, X". etc. ; Put. Mid. xeV<« (see Eem. 1). 
 
 5. Also two mute verbs take the Future form of Hquid verbs 
 in -ovfiai without o- : — 
 
 luix-ofiai, to fight, Put. ixax-oviuu (fonned from the Ion. nax-iiroiuu). 
 Koi^a' ("EAn), to sit, Put. {eS-ovfiat) icaSrsS-ov/Mi. 
 
 6. The Fut. Perf of the following verbs has an Act. form:— 
 
 »i4trKu, to die, Perf. rcinniKa, lam dead. Put, Perf. Te3i/^{w or -|i)//ai, / shaU 
 
 be dead; 
 Vo-TTj/ii, to station, Perf. cVrijKa, / stand. Put. Perf, ea-Tq^u or -|o/iat, / shaU 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
\ 155.] VERBfs. SYNCOPE. 187 
 
 Stand. 'EffT^lu and reS-y^fm are old Attic ; I(7t^|o/4oi and re^vii^oiuu are 
 only in tlio Attic, X. Cy. 6. 2, 17. 
 
 7. The tliree following verbs, though not liquid, form the 
 first Aor. according to the analogy of the second Aor., without 
 the tense-characteristic o- : — 
 
 tliretp (second Aor.), to sai/, first Aor. elv-a; <p4pw ('EFKn), to bear, first Aor. 
 ¥ivsyK-a (second Aor. ^vtyKov) ; x^'^t ^X^* {^*^® Rem. IJ. 
 
 Hem. 2. In tlie second Aor. iirtaov, from nET-to (irfirr-w), to fall, the ff is 
 not the tense-characteristic, but belongs to the stem, the t having here been 
 changed into (r (Dor. tireroi/). The first Aor. iireaa, is late ; in Eurip. Ale. 471 
 and Troad. 294, the readings are not sufficiently confirmed. 
 
 8. The following pure and impure verbs form, the Perf. Subj. 
 and Plup. Opt. Mid. or Pass, without the aid of the auxiliary 
 dfd; the impure verbs by assuming an e as their characteristic 
 in forming the tenses, become analogous to pure verbs : — 
 
 KTd-ofiai, I obtain, Perf. K^KTrj/xat, I possess, Subj. ksktuijuu, -ij, -yJToi; Plup. 
 
 ^KcKT^/iijc, / possessed. Opt. ke/ctt/iUtjj', /ce/trf o, kekt^to or KeKT^S/tT))/, -^o, 
 
 -qjro. 
 Hi/ivfliTKu (MNAn), to remind, Perf. /ie^yTj/iai, Iremember, Subj. /lefii/iiiuu, -p, 
 
 -5toi ; Plup. i/ie/irijiJiiii', Opt. lii/iv^/iTiv, -po, -yro or /jiefivi^fiiiv, -$o, -fro, and 
 
 in X. An. 1. 7, 5. fi^fimio (in all the MSS.). 
 pdWa, to throw (BAA), Perf. $4fi\iifiat, second Pers. PI. Perf. Subj. Sia;8e- 
 
 P\rj<rS^e, Andoc. p. 22. ^ 24. 
 KoAe'w, to name, Perf. KiKKijiMU, lam named; Plup. iicsKK'liniiiv, Opt. KsK\^iunv> 
 
 -yo, -^TO. 
 
 Rem. 3. i/cTeTfifia-Stov may be found in PI. Rp. 564, c ; at present, however, 
 the right reading is iKTiTjiiiaia^ov, according to most MSS. 
 
 § 155. Syncope. 
 1. A few verbs, in some forms, suffer Syncope (§ 16, 8j. 
 E. g. the following words in prose : — 
 
 ■KcToixai, to fly, Aor. cVtiJ^iic, irTEV»oi, Put. ■n-Tiia-o/uu (e syncopated). 
 
 iyelpa, to wake, second Aor. ?iyp6ii.nv (also the Inf. lypeirSrcu with the accent 
 
 of the Pros.), I awoke (^ipSmv, J" was awake), (« or i syncopated.) 
 ipxoi^ah to go, second Aor. ?i7^ov, Inf. IhStetu, etc., from "EAETSa (v synco- 
 
 pated), (h 167, 2.) 
 »7fuu, to suppose, instead of ofo/ioi, ^juric instead of ij!({/ir;y. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
188 VERBS. METATHESIS [i 15(> 
 
 2. This Syncope occurs most frequently after the redu. 
 plication ; thus, e. g. 
 
 a. In the Present: 
 yiym/iM, to become, instead of yi-yemimi, stem TENil. 
 fitiivw, to remain, Poet., instead of /u-yneVn). 
 
 niirra, to fall, instead of iri-TreVo), stem IIETil. 
 TiTrpcEiTKaj from irepia. 
 
 b. In the Perfect: 
 
 reTdmvfii, to spreaa out, Teirra/Jiai; iriirTieKa (from IIETn), tafaU. 
 
 } 156. Metathesis. 
 
 1. Metathesis (§ 22) occurs in the formation of the tenses 
 of several verbs, most frequently in the Perf , Plup., first 
 A.or. Pass., and first Fut. Pass, (seldom in the second Aor. 
 Act.), sometimes also in the Pres., both for the sake of an 
 easier or more euphonic form, and, in poetry, for the sake 
 of making a syllable long by position. 
 
 2. In the Com^mon language, the fohowing verbs are 
 subject to Metathesis : — 
 
 pdWa, to throw, Put. /3aX£ {fiaKXiicrai, Aristoph. Vesp. 222); Aor. e;3o\orj 
 Aor. Mid. i^ax6n-t]v; BAA: Perf . jSe'^^rj/ca; Perf. Mid. or Pass. fi4fi\ii- 
 fioi; Aor. Pass. effK^li^riii; Put. Pass. /8Ai)&^(ro;uai ; Put. Perf. /3£/3\Vo/«>'- 
 
 Saixdu, usually dafi^^u, to tame. Put. Zafxaaw; Aor. eScCjuaira; AMA: Perf. Se5- 
 jmjKo; Perf Mid. or Pass. SeS/^^/uai ; Aor. Pass. iSfiii^Tiv, iSdfaiv. 
 
 Se//eu, to build (mostly Poet, and Ion.) ; Aor. Act. eSeiyita ; Aor. Mid. iSeiiidiiiiv] 
 AME: Perf. 5€5/i7)Ko; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se'S;nTjjnoi. 
 
 ^vfifTKw, to die, Aor. StTr^S^avov ; Perf. reS-vrj/co. 
 
 ^pdjfTKof, to leap, Aor. e^opoj/. 
 
 KaKiai, to call (Poet. KiKKiiffita, like AvIjtrKai), Put. hczAco; Perf. K4K\iiica. 
 
 Kdfiyto, laboro, Aor. iKaiiov; Perf. KeKfiijKa. 
 
 <ric4\\a, (rK€\4a, to make dry, second Aor. icnXriv; Perf. eaKKrixa; Put 
 ir/cA.1^ (TO /xat. 
 
 Tftivw, to cut ; Aor. erejuoj/; Perf. t er/tT^fca. 
 
 TA^<ro/4oi, I will bear ; Aor. erKiiv; Perf. TerXrjKa, from the stem TAAA. 
 
 Remakk. When the stem of the verb is dissyllabic, then the vowel trans- 
 posed by Metathesis coalesces with the following vowel ; (a) In inflection : — 
 
 Kspd-vvvfu (Poet, jcepd-co), to mingle ; Put. Kepaira ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Kixpa 
 
 /uai instead of /ce-Kpeo-fiai ; Aor. Pass. ^/cpd&Tjj'. 
 mrpdffica, to sell linstcad of TriTrfpciff/cto, TrmpfdtrKoi), from irEpato (hence Fut 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
j} 157, 158 ] VERBS IN -<i) WITH STRENlxTIIENED STEM. 183 
 
 Trep&ffu): Perf. ir e'lrpd/ca, ir e irp a/ia,.; Aor. Pass, iirpd&rjv; irut.Perf. 
 
 irtTrfjaa'Ofiai. 
 grofi-vvviii, to strew; secondary form aTpdivvvjii {instead of (rrpeSyyviu)-; 
 
 Put. (T T p <i ,r <D ; Aor. eiTTpaxra; Pert'. Mid. or Pass, eo-rpauoi; Aor. 
 
 Pass. idTpiSniv. 
 ireX(i^u, appropinquo, to bring to, ireKdda, wKi^a; Aor. Pass, iire^iir&Tiy, 
 
 Poet. Att. iirKcL^riy; second Aor. Att. iTrKA/itii'; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Att. TreirXafiai, 
 (b) The same holds also in the stem of the- verb ^pirru, to disturb (formed 
 ftwm Topdrra, Tpairra), an Attic foi-m of rapdirfa ; Aor. 6&pa|a. 
 
 i 157. Verbs in -w with the Stein of the Present 
 strengthened. 
 
 1. It has already been seen ({^ 138-140), that the stem of 
 many verbs is strengthened in the Present ; but this strength- 
 ening remains only in the Present and Imperfect. Besides the 
 modes of strengthening already mentioned, by -r {wr, kt), cr (a-tr, 
 i, ), and by lengthening the stem-vowel, there are otiiers, which 
 will now be specified. 
 
 KEMAim:. All the forms which are assumed for the sake of constructing the 
 tenses in use, are indicated by capitals (§ 138, 3). The abbreviations, D. M., 
 signify Deponent Middle, and D. P., Deponent Passive (§ 102, 3). The n i, placed 
 in parenthesis, shows that the form standing before it, is analogous to the con- 
 jugation in -/111, to be treated below. See 5 191. 
 
 ^ 158. I. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in the 
 Pres. and Impf. by inserting .v before the ending. 
 
 Pbeliminakt Kemark. BaiVcii lengthens the stem-vowel a into u ; iKaivu, 
 a into av ; Ziivta and -jriva, v and i into v and I. 
 
 1. BaiVu), to go (BA-), Fut. P'^a-opi.aL; Perf. fti/3rjKa (§ 194, 2) ; 
 second Aor. ejSrp/ {{jll, } 191); the Pass, occurs in compounds, 
 e. g. avaPatvoinai, dva^cySa/xat, irapapi^aijuxi, av£/3a9^r]v, wapeyScwijv 
 [H 130 (c), and 131, 5]. Verbal adjectives, ySaTo's, jSareos. 
 
 Kemaek. Pirst Aor. Act. efiriffa, and Put. jB^o-a, are transitive, / brought, 
 will bring, and belong only to the poetic, Ionic, and later writers 
 
 2. Sw(o, to go in, to go under, to put on. The unstrengtheiied 
 verb Si5a) (KareSuo)) has in the Pres., in the Fut ^vcria and fu-sl 
 Aor. Act. tSiio-a, a transitive signification, to wrap up, to immerse. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t9U VEKBS IN -0) WTTH STRENGTHENED STEM. [i 108 
 
 lo sink; (so also Perf. in X. An. 5. 8, 23, dTroScSii/cei/ ; ) Aor, 
 Pass. iSvArjv; Fut. Pass. 8i;^^o-o/iai [i 130 (b),2]. But the Mid, 
 Svo/jiai, ScSv[j.aL, Suo-o/xat, iSvcrdixTiv, signifies to irn'op up one's self, to 
 go into, or under, to clothe one's self; likewise the Perf. h&vKo. 
 and the Aor. 'Stw {i>.i, h 191), have an intransitive signification, 
 like Svofim. Verbal adjectives, Sijtos, Svrios. 
 
 3. cAaww, io drive (secondary form cXS, -as, etc. poetic, yet 
 also in X. Cy. 8. 3, 32. wKiXa, Imp.) ; Fut. IKmrta (in later writers, 
 though also X. An. 7. 7, 55. eXaerovras), commonly Att. tAS, -ols, 
 5., In£ i\a.v ({ 117); Aor. •^Aao-a; Peif. Qvt)Ka.Ka.; Mid. to drive 
 from me, Aor. rikaa-ajx-qv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. tX-^Xa/xot ; Inf Ikri- 
 hi.a-&ai [} 124, 2 (a)] ; Aor. Pass. rjXaSi^v [S. in the tense-forma- 
 tion, i 130 (c) ; without a-, i 131, 5]. — Verbal adjectives, eAaros, 
 iXarios (X. Hipparcli. 2, 7). 
 
 4. Srvum and Siva (poet.), to rage, Fut. ^iffa, etc.; second Aor. Part, ^i/i^ns 
 (/xi), raging. 
 
 5. mvoi, to drink, Fut. wlofMai (i 154, 4), among the later 
 writers Tnovfiai, but also, in X. Symp. 4, 7. ■TrieTcr^e ; second Aor. 
 effioi/, Inf wieiv, Part. TrtiiJi', Imp. m^t (§ 191), poet, and seldom 
 prose me ; IIO- Perf weTruiKa ; Perf Mid. or Pass, irbroiuu ; Aor. 
 Pass. Im^v, Fut. Pass, iro^i^croiiai [ii 130 (c), and 131, 5]. 
 Verbal adjectives, ttotos, ttotcos. 
 
 6. rtva, to pay, to expiate, Fut. rta-ui; Aor. erltra; Perf. Act. 
 rerlKa; Perf Mid. or Pass. TtTicr/iaij Aor. Pass. iria-Srjv (M31). 
 Mid. rtvofjiaL, to get pay from, to avenge, to punish, rto-oju.ai, erlcra- 
 ynijv. Verbal Adj. na-reov. In the Pres. and Impf the penult is 
 long in Epic, short in Attic ; in the other tenses, it is long in all 
 the poets. 
 
 Tlo), to hojior, T'tcrot, ^ri(ra, r4Tifiai, Poet. 
 
 7. <j>3^a.v(i>, to anticipate, Fut. <f>3-q(rofi,ai, more rarely ^Sdcra, e g. 
 X. Cy. 5. 4, 38. 7. 1, 19; first. Aor. t^^ao-a, and (in prose more 
 seldom) second Aor. c0^v (/it, § 191) ; Perf li^^axa. In Pres, 
 and Impf. a in Epic, a in Attic. 
 
 8. (p&iiico (poet., rarely prose and only in the Pres., c. g. PI. Phaedr. 246, c. 
 Symp 211, a.), to perish (seldom to consume), Fut. </)&ftrm and Aor. c<jiSrXaa, trans, 
 to consume. — Intrans., Fut. ^Aicofiai ; Perf. %<^StXij.ai, Itp^ivrai ; Plup. and second 
 Aor. i(fiSiijx-r}v, Suhj. tpSria/iai, Opt. if&ifti)!', (p&Tro, Imp. ip&lir^a. Inf. ip^ta&ai, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 159.] VERBS IN -0) WITH STKENGTHENED STEM. 191 
 
 Part, ipdt/iems, c. g. X Cy. 8. 7, 18. to« tp^t/iei/ots, the dead {/li, § 192). Verbal 
 adjective, ^aMs. 
 Here belong also three verbs, whose pure stem ends with a consonant ; — 
 
 9. SaKvo), to bite, Aor. eSaKoi' ; Fut. 8)jfo/*at (late S^fco) ; Perf. 
 Aor. Se'Sijxo; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Se'Sijy^tai; Aor. Mid. JSijfa^iji' 
 ( Hippoc.) ; Aor. Pass, i^x■^ ; Fut. Pass. Srix^^a-ofiau.. 
 
 10. Kti/xvQ>, io feSor, to 6e weary, Aor. tKa/iov; Fiit. Kafiovfiai; 
 Perf. KeK/ATjKa ({ 156, 2). 
 
 11. Te/ivo), io CM<, Fut. Te/iS; Aor. £TEjU,ov (tra/ioi/, § 140, 2) ; 
 Perf. TiTit,y}Ka (§ 156, 2) ; Mid. to CMi5 _/br owe's «e^ (something) ; 
 Aor. Mid. iTeiw/irjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Tf.Tfi,yjfim. (Subj. rer/iijcp- 
 .^ov, § 154, Bern. 3); Aor. Pass. Ir/i^^i'; Fut. Perf. Terii^ija-ojjMi. 
 Verbal Adj. t/aittos, Ti).rfTio%. 
 
 f 159. II. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
 the Pres. and Impf. by inserting the syllable v« 
 before the ending. 
 
 1. ^v-viio, to stop up, Fut. j8v<ro) ; Aor. e^va-a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 ^ifiva-ijuxi; Aor. Mid. e/3iio-a/iT;v ; Aor. Pass, i^va-.^ (i 131). 
 
 Pres. ;3u(», not used by the Attic writers. 
 
 2. iK-vco/MM (the simple is seldom used in prose, e. g. Th. 5, 
 40. PL Phaedr. 276, d., the compound being generally used 
 instead of it), ax^LKviojxoL, to come, Fut. d^iifo/iou; Aor. a^lKOjxriv, 
 d^tK£o-5at; Perf a^lyiim, d^ix^at; PIup. d^iy/ui/v, A^Ukto. Verb. 
 
 Adj. tKTOS. 
 
 3. Kuv-£(i), to ^-W5, Fut. Kvo-u: Aor. Iciaa [^ 130 (b)]. But irpos- 
 Kwe'ci), to worship, Fut. 7rposKW^o-(o ; Aor. irposeicuvj;cra (also poetic 
 jrposcKiJO-Oj Inf Trpos/ctjcrat). 
 
 4. vTn<rx-v(oiJi.aL (vTrLcrx-oimt lon.), strengthened form of vTr^o/xai, 
 properly, to Ao&? owe'5 self under, to promise, Aor. vn-eax-ofirp/, Lnp. 
 Cirotrxo-u ; but Fut. imocrx^croimi ; Perf. vKicrxqiiMi. So, ajjiTrurxyov- 
 fiai or aii'Trixofuu, to clothe (from d/iirej^cu, to surround), Impf d/;nr€r- 
 <ov, Fut. d/i<^efo)j Aor. rjiijrurxov, aiiiricrxeLV, Fut. d^^efo/iat; Aor. 
 'J/tTTMrxo/tiji' and rnJoreaxoM^ ^^6, 1). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
192 VERBS WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [^ TOO. 
 
 f 160. III. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
 the Pres. and Inipf. by inserting the syllable av, 
 more rarely aiv, before the ending. 
 
 a. av or aiv is inserted without any change. 
 Peeliminakt Kemaek. All verbs of this kind form their tenses from a 
 inreefold stem, viz. the Pres. and Impf. from the strengthened stem, the second 
 Aor. from the pure stem, the Put. and Perf. from a third stem, consisting of -i 
 pure stem and an assumed e, which is changed in the inflection into >j ; hence 
 the Put. and Perf. are formed like the same tenses of verbs in -e'w. — The a in 
 the ending -i.vu is also short in Epic (except in the three verbs, iKavu, (jiddva. 
 and Kix<iya); but long in tKdva in Attic. 
 
 1. aurS^-av-ofjiaL (seldom aia-^o/jLai), to perceive, Aor. jJo-^-o/it^v, 
 awr^eo-^ai; Perf. y(TSrjiA,ai' Flit, aio'^ijo'o/j.ai ; verb. Adj. aurSTjTO's. 
 
 2. d/xapravu), to miss, Aor. Tj/xapTOV (late ■^/j-dpr^cra.') ; Flit, d/iuip- 
 T^a-o/xai (a/jiapr-^a-oi, only in Alexandrine Greek) ; Perf. riiuipn]Ka; 
 Perf. Pass. rjiia.pTriiJi.ai; Aor. Pass. rjnapr^Srjv (X. An. 5. 9, 21. 
 Vect. 4, 37). Verb. Adj. dfiap-np-iov. 
 
 3. dTr€)(Sa.vopjai, to be hated, Aor. a.Tnj)(36iJ.rjv (poet. ■^X'^ofiijv) ; 
 Inf. cm-ix^ear3aL witli irregular accent ; Fiit. arrex^ria-opM, ; Perf 
 a.Trrjx^rj[i,ai, I am hated. 
 
 4. aiio,via (and av^ui), to increase, Fnt. av^a-oi; Aor. i/wfijcra; 
 Perf rfiirjKa; Mid. and Pass, to thrive, Perf rjv$r)ij.ai; Fut. avi^-' 
 aofiai and a.v^^r)(Top.aA, ; Aor. tjv^Stjv. , 
 
 5. /BXao-To-vw, to sprout, Aor. l/JXao-roi' (later J/JXacmjo-a) ; Fut. 
 |SA.ooT^o-(o ; Perf i/SXacn-qKa and /Jc^XaonjKa (i 123, 2). 
 
 6. Sap3av(a, commonly in composition, kotclS., to sleep, Aor. 
 KaTcSap^ov (KaraSapS^evra, Aristoph. Plut. 300) ; Fut. KaraBap^-^cro- 
 /xai; Perf. KaraSeSdp^rjKa. 
 
 7. L^avco and KoS^L^avai, secondary form of ttfa, Ko^Ltjui. See 
 } 1G6, 16. 
 
 8. KXayyavm, used of dogs, a secondary form of K\a£,iD, to cry 
 out, Fut. KXayiw (KCKXdyiofiat, Aristoph. Vesp. 930) ; Aor. cKXayfa, 
 {KXayov, Eur. Iph. T. 1062 ; Perf. KtKXayya (old form KUXtiya). 
 
 9. oi3ai/w, oiSatVu) (also oiSacD, oiSeu)), to swell, Fut. otSijcro); Perf. 
 
 10. oXto-^avu) (oXt(r.9atvo) used by later writers), to slip, Aor. 
 {LXvT^ov ; Fut. oXto-.9Tjaci) ; Perf. wXia-^TjKa (first Aor. (lX«r5ijo-a 
 later). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t 160.] VERBS IN -<a WITH STKENGTHENED STEM. 193 
 
 11. 6<T<l)pa[voiJ.m, to smell, Aox.-oia(l>p6/jirjv; Fnt. ocr^pijcro/xai. 
 
 Pros. 6(r(ppttirStai was a rare Attic form ; Aor. ii(r^pTi(ri,ij,riv and oaippavdiivm 
 late. 
 
 12. 6<l>\iaKdvui (rare Inf. o^Xtiv, Part. otfiXav), to be liable to a 
 fine, to i'ficur punishment (the double strengthening utk and a.v 
 is to be noted) ; Aor. S^Xov (uxjiX-qcra, Lys. 13, 65. and by later 
 writers); Fut. 6<j>\iQ<Ta) ; Perf. w<jiXriKa; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 b. 01/ is appended to the pure stem, and v is inserted before 
 the Characteristic-consonant. 
 
 Pkeliminaky Remakk. The short vowel in the middle of the pme stem 
 is changed into a long one, in inflection. The y is subject to the usual changes 
 before the Pi and Kappa-mutes (§ 19, 3). 
 
 13. ipvyyavta (instead of lpv-v-ydv(o), rucio, Aor. ripvjov , iut, 
 ipev^oytai. 
 
 14. S^iyydvb), to touch, Aor. s^iyov; Fut. ^tfo/x.ai. 
 
 15. Xayxdvu), to obtain by ht, Aor. e\a;:^oi' ; Fut. X'^iofj.cu ; Perf. 
 t'X-rjxa (rarely \i\oyxo- from AEPX-, comp. ireirov^a, ■iraS^eiv, Trev- 
 iJos) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. etX-qypai (§ 123, 4) ; Aor. Pass. Ikrix^v. 
 Verbal Adj. Xijkteos. 
 
 16. XaiJ.j3dvai, to take, Aor. eXajSov, Imp. Xa.j3e and Attic Aay8« 
 ' [U18, 3 (a)]; Fut. X-^fop-ai; Perf etXyj^a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 eiXrifjiiJuxL (§ 123, 4), (XcXiy/xat Aesch. Ag. 876) ; Aor. Mid. iXaPopLrp/ ; 
 Aor. Pass. Ovri^^tp/ ; Fut. Pass. Xr](j)&T^(ro[mi. Verbal Adj. Xiprds, 
 
 XlJTTTeOS. 
 
 17. Xav&dvoi (poet, and also X. O. 7, 31, also X-^&ai), to be con- 
 cealed, Aor. tXa^ov (I. Aor. ek-qa-a late in simple words) ; Fut. 
 X-qa-w; Perf XeXij^o, I am concealed; Mid. Xja-vSravofLoi (Ion. and 
 poet, also X-q&o/juu), in prose IttiA.. (seldom iirX.'), to forget, Fut. 
 Xijo-o/iat; Perf. Ae\ijo-/j.at (^ 131); Aor. IXo^o/.iijj' ; Fut. Perf. AcXi}- 
 rrojuat, Eur. Alc. 1981. 
 
 18 Xi.jLird.visi, rare secondary form of XetTroj. 
 
 1 9. /xavSavoi, to learn, Aor. e/jLoSov ; Fut. fnaB-qcrojiai ; Perf. 
 p-efid^riKa. — The u. remains short, and the Fut. and Perf. are 
 formed from the stem MA®E, according to No. a. Verb. Adj 
 
 20. irw3dvoaac, to inquire, to perceive, Aor. errv^fi-qv; Perf. tte- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
194 VERBS IN -(D WITH STRENGTHENED STEM, [i 161 
 
 irvo'/Jiai, iriTnicrai, etc. (i 131); Fut. Treva-ofjLai (very rarely Trevcrov' 
 ^uu, } 154, 3). Verb. Adj. TreuoTos, ireDO-reos. 
 
 21. Tuyx°-^'^> ^ happen, Aor. hvxov, Fut. Tivio[ji,ai (TEYX-) ; 
 Perf. TeTvxQKa (TYXE- according to No. a). Tlie transitive of 
 this verb is the poetic revxo, paro. 
 
 22. <l>vyydvo), secondary form of <j>evyu), to flee, Fut. tfiev^oijuu 
 and -foC/iat (i 154, 3) ; Aor. icjivyov; Perf. Tre'i^evya. Verb. Adj 
 
 tfteVKTO';, -T€OS. 
 
 23. xavSavM, to Iwld, contain (spoken of vessels), Aor. tx^^ov; 
 Perf. with a Pres. signification /c/j^avSa; Fut. x'^Ca-o/j.ai (stem 
 XENA-, comp. «ra^ov, Treco-o/iat). 
 
 { 161. IV. FerSs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened in 
 the Pres. and Impf. by annexing the two conso- 
 nants, a-K or the syllable io-k. 
 
 2k is annexed, when tlie stem-characteristic is a vowel, and utk, when it is a 
 consonant ; Kv-ta'Kot and xpi-'^^^Ko/tat are exceptions. Most verbs, whose pure 
 stem ends with a consonant, form the Future, etc. according to the analogy of 
 pure verbs, in -ia, -4a, and -6a, e. g. eip-la-Ka, Fut. eup^-o-a from 'ETPE- ; a/iP^lir- 
 Ko;, Tut. a/ipKii-ira from 'AMBAO-. Some of these verbs, in the Pres. and Impf, 
 take a reduplication also, which consists in repeating the first consonant of the 
 stem with i, and may be called the improper reduplication. Most of these verbs 
 correspond to the Latin Inchoatives in sco : ytyvdaxu, TificuTKu, yripia-Ka. 
 
 1. oX-La-K-o/j-ai, to be taken, to be conquered, with tliis meaning, is 
 used as the Pass, of alpiw, Impf fiXurK6p,riv ; CAAO-) Fut. oAiio-o/iot ; 
 second Aor. t}Xu)v, Att. iikcav and r^Xmv (fu, § 192, 9), I was taken, 
 Per£ ^XwKa, and Att. iSXoiKa and rjXaiKa, Iliave been taken (Aug , 
 h 122, 4 and 6). The Active is supphed by aip«v, signifying, to 
 take captive, to conquer. Verb. Adj. dXovros. Xen. uses both 
 kaXw/ and y\SMsv, An. 4, 4. 21. ; Thu. only kaXuai and eoXcoKa: Plato 
 also only koKwKo.. 
 
 2. appXiaKw (seldom d/ijSXow), to miscarry ('AMBAO-), Fut 
 ap.p\aa-w, Aor. ■^^/3A.wo-a ; Perf rip.p\wKa; Perf Pass. ■^ju.^Xw/uu; 
 Aor. Pass. r^ppXiLdrjv. 
 
 3. ava^uiaKopat, (a) to recall to life, (b) to live again, Aor. 
 uve^imrdprp/, I recalled to life; but second Aor. avepioiv (pi, § 192, 
 10), J lived again. 
 
 4. dvaXlo-Ku (also avaXom), to spend, to consume, Impf avi^Xio-Kor 
 {iydXow without Aug.) ; Fut. di/dXwo-o) ; Aor. av^X^a-a and avd- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 161.] VERBS IN -d) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 195 
 
 KuxTo, Karrp/aKwa-a ; Perf. dv^Xuxa and avdXwKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 oan^XiofiaL and dvcLKuiimi ; Aor. di/oXu.Jijv, avrjXioSTjv ; Fut. Pass. 
 
 dvoAxo^^oro/iai. Thu. and the Tragedians preferred the unaug- 
 mented forms ; Plato and the orators, the augmented. 
 
 5. djoe'o-Ko), to please, Fufe apia-w; Aor. ^pea-a [i 130 (d)] ; (Peif. 
 ap-qpiKa in Sext. Emp. ;) Mid. with Accusative, to appease, to 
 satisfy. Put. apia-opiai, Aesch. Suppl. 654 ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ^pta- 
 {Ml,; Aor. Pass. ^pia-S^v, Soph. Ant. 500. Verbal Adj. dpto-Tos. 
 
 6. PijSpuia-Kui, to eat (Put. Att. tSo/xat from icrS^lw, second Aor 
 ifjiayov), Perf ^e/3/)a)Ka; Part. ^£/3p(6s (5194) ; Perf Mid. or Pass 
 pi^ptupLOA. (Aor. Pass. ifipdSTjv, and Put. Pass. PptaS^-^aoy-ai non- 
 Attic; instead, the forms of ia-^iu) are used). 
 
 7. yeya)vl(rKa {mostly Poet.), to call, to make known, Fut. yi-/uvi\aa>; Aoi 
 iyeyivnaa; Perf. ^e'ydij'a, with -a, Present signification; — further, ysyavelru, 
 Xen., ^eywveri', Poet., seldom prose, e. g. PI. Hipp. M. 292, d, from the Prim. 
 
 TErcNEn. 
 
 8. yrjpd.<TKu) (or yrjpdio), senesco, to grow old, Fut. y-qpaa-o/jjiii (sel- 
 dom yrjpdcrm Plato) ; Aor. eyqpatra (in Aesch. Suppl. 901., Trans. 
 to cause to grow old). Inf. yijpao-at (instead of it yripavai, from an 
 old second Aor. kyrjpav, was preferred by the Attics, p.i, k 192, 1) ; 
 Perf. yeyi^paKO, I am old. 
 
 9. ylyvdxTKta (ylvuxTKUi) , cognosco, to know (PNO-), Fut. yvdxro- 
 ficu; second Aor. eyvaiv (p-i, i 191); Perf eyvtaKa; Perf Mid. or 
 Pass. tyvoxr/jLai (§ 131); Aor. Pass. iyvdxT&rjv; Fut. Pass, yvwo-^- 
 KTOfiai. Verbal Adj. yi/cooros (old form yvowos), yvworeos. 
 
 10. StSpao-Ko), to run away (only in compounds, e. g. diroS., IkS., 
 SiaS.), Fut. Spda-opMi; Perf SeSpaxa; second Aor. cSpdv (/xi, } 192, 
 
 !)■ 
 
 11. evpia-Kia, to find, second- Aor. (xpov; Imp. evpe [{ 118, 3 
 
 (a)]; CEYPE-) Fut. eup^o-oi; Perf evpT/xa; Perf Mid. or Pass. 
 ivprip-ai,; Aor. Pass, evpi^v [k 130 (d)] ; Fut. Pass. evpTjSi^a-oiuu; 
 Mid. to obtain, Aor. evpofiTjv (Aug. } 121, Rem.). Verbal Adj. 
 evperos, cipiyreos. 
 
 12. rjpdcrKU), pubesco, to become marriageable, Fut. rjPi^iTO) ; Aor 
 ^Prjo-a; Perf ^/3T7Ka (i7/8a«), to 6e young, but dnj^au, to become 
 young again). 
 
 13. Si'-qa-Kia, commonly aTro^v^o-KU), to & (Metathesis, ^ 156, 
 2), (®AN-) Aor. oTriSavov (Poet. I^avov; 3avu>v, ol &av6vTes, thi 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
196 VERBS IN -0) WITH STRENGTIltNED STEM. [i 161 
 
 dead, aiso in prose) ; Fut airoSavovfjAu (Poet. 5avov/iat) ; Perf. 
 TeAvTjKa (not aTroTeSvrjKo) both in prose and poetry, rihrajitv 
 {^ 194), etc., Inf. rtSvavai; Fut. Perf. Ti^vrjtio (5 154, 6), and 
 among later writers Te^^|o/*ai, I sliaU be dead. Verbal Adj. 
 -Jvijros, mortal. 
 
 14. S^pdia-Kto ({ 156, 2), ifo spring, to leap, Aor. e^opoi'; Fut. 
 Sopov/xai; Perf. re^opa. 
 
 15. IXda-KoiJMi, to propitiate, Fut. L\.ao-o;i«u; Aor. I. tXacra/iijv ; Aor. 
 Pass. tXao-^Tjv. 
 
 16. fiiSva-KO), to intoxicate, Fut. /ie5i5o-a); Aor. i/jLE^vaa. But 
 fie^um, ?o ie intoxicated (only Pres. and Impf ), borrows its tenses 
 from the Passive, e. g. ifki^vtr^-qv (§ 131). 
 
 17. jut/Av^cTKU), to remind (MNA-), Fut. /avijo-o) ; Aor. t/j-vrja-a ; Mid. 
 to remind one's self, to remember, also to mention ; Perf. /Ac/ivij/iai, 
 inemini, I remember, I am mindful (Piedup. § 123, Rem. 1), 
 Sllbj. ju.€/j,vS/xat, -g, --^Tat ({ 154, 8), Imp. /j-c/j-vrjcro ; Plup. ifie/ivq- 
 [jLrjv, I remembered. Opt. iji,eiji,vi^/j,t]v, -fjo, -fJTo, or ix.e.ii.v(ofi.rjv, -<ao, -Srro 
 {^ 154, 8); Fut. Perf fieixyrjaropLaL, I shall be mindful (among the 
 Tragedians also, I will mention) ; Aor. ifjiv^crSTjv, I remembered 
 (c/ivijcra/xTji' Poet.) ; Fut. p-vriaS-rjCTofiai, I sliall reme7nber (diro/ivij- 
 o-o/tat, Th. 1, 137). 
 
 18. Trao^u) (formed from TraSa-Kw, by transferring the aspiration 
 of 3 to k), to experience a sensation, to suffer, Aor. lira^ov; 
 (IIEN®-) Fut. ■KEUTOfi.ax; Perf. ■Ki-Kov^a. Verbal Adj. tto^tjtos. 
 
 1 9. Trnrio-Koi, to give to drink, Fut. mo-o) ; Aor. hfujo.. 
 
 20. Tnirpda-Ko), to sell, rare in Pres. Act. (Fut. and Aor. in the 
 Common language expressed by airoSuxxofiai., aTrSo/jLTiv) ; Perf 
 ■n-i-rrpaKa (} 156, Rem.) ; Perf Mid. or Pass. TrcVpd/tat (Inf Trarpajor- 
 &ai, often instead of the Aor.) ; Aor. iTrpdJdijv; Fut. Perf ir«rpa- 
 (TOfMi in the sense of the simple Fut. TrpcuJ^o-oju.ai, wliich is rare 
 and not Attic. Verbal Adj. Trpdros, wpdTeos. 
 
 21. trrcpio-Ku) (seldom arepeur, a?roo-r£poiJi/Tas, Isoc. 12, 243, 
 according to the Ms. Urb.), to deprive of, Fut. arep-^a-m; Aor. 
 iareprjcra.; Perf ia-riprjKa; Mid. and Pass. aTepuTKoim.1, orepov/MU, 
 privor ; but o-Tipop,ai, I am deprived, Fut. ortpi^cro/xat, rarer orepij- 
 ^T/o-Ojuai (a7rooTcyDtrcr.Se, Andoc. Myst. 149); Perf ia-T€pr;imi; Aor. 
 iareprj^-rjfv. The simple occurs most frequently in the middle 
 form; in the Act , the compound dTroo-Tepi'o-Ku is more frequent. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
§4 1C2, IBS.] VERBS IN -<u 'WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 191 
 
 22. TtTpuo-KtOj to wound, Fut. Tpwcrw ; Aor. erpaa-a ; Perf. Mid 
 or Pass. Terp<i)/tat, In£ rcrpuicrSaL, Part. TCTpw/jJvo's ^ Aor. h-pi^v \ 
 Fut. Tpii>3i^(70fiMi and Tpuiaofiai, Verbal Adj. rpurros. 
 
 23. cj>dcrKw, to say, to think (Ind. and Imp. very rare), Impf 
 e<j>ajTK0V ; Fut. tfn^au) ; Aor. e^ijcra. — (Pass. i(jid<7KeT0, S. Ph. 114). 
 
 24. )(dcrK<it, to gape (XAN-, among the later writers x°'"'o*). Aor. 
 «;(avov ; Fut. ;;^avox)/iai ; Perf. Ktxqva, to stand open. 
 
 Eemaek. In SiSiiiricB, rfoc-eo, the k belonging to the stem is strengthened 
 by a prefixed; hence the « remains in forming the tenses, Fat. SiSiifoj ; Aor. eSi- 
 8o|o; Perf. SeSiSax«; I'eif. Mid. or Pass. ieUSa.yii.ai; Aor. Pass. tSiStix^''- 
 Verb. Adj. SiSaicTiis, -teos. The same usage is found in the Epic and poetic 
 verbs, li.\S)^<rK<ii, aKiaxa, xiaKa. See § 230. 
 
 4 162. V. Verbs which have a Secondary Form in -^<a. 
 
 Several verbs, particularly in poetry, have secondary fomris in -&i», u. g. 
 4>Ae76&eu', poetic (instead of ^\4yeiv), to burn; iiyepeStovrai and riepi- 
 dovrat. Epic, instead of oyefpojTai and aelpovTai. Hero belong also the end- 
 ings -a^av and -dAoifu of the Imp£, and -dAnf of the Pres. Inf^ which are used 
 even in Attic prose, e. g. aKe^a, to ward off, tragic Irif. a\Ki&eiv (stem "AAK) ; 
 ifiiva, to ward off, a^vvd^ew, Impf. iffiiya^ov ; — didjKoj, t& pursue, SiuKo^etv, 
 Impf. iSidKo^op, also prose; — etxa, to yield, Impf. ^KoStov, eixdAoiiu; — efpya, 
 to shut up, Impf. and Aor. etpyoAoy ; — ex"! *" '"""^ trx^^^u' (in Homer axe&UB> 
 as Aor.). 
 
 J 163. VI. Verbs, whose Pure Stem is strengthened m 
 the Fres. and Impf. by prefixing a Reduplication. 
 
 The reduplication consists in repeating the first consonant of the root with 
 &e vowel t. In the Epic and poetic dialects, there are also verbs, which take 
 the Attic reduplication, i. e. they repeat the first t^vo letters of the root ; see 
 aKax^C^, aTTcujiiffKa, apapiffKw, § 230. 
 
 i. yStySa^aj, io make go, to ^jonvey, Fut. Att. /^t^fij -^s, -a (still 
 also jStySdEo-o), X. An. 4, 8, 8. 5. 2, 10). Verbal Adj. pipmrrw. 
 
 2. yiyvopML (yivopuu) instead of ycyivopiai (§ 155, 2), to become, 
 to be, (PEN-) Aor. (yevofjLTjv (late Attic iyev^Srp/) ; Fut. ycijo-o/Aot 
 (PL Farm. 141, e. yev^a-erai., fet, and moreover ycveSi^a-eTcu, efficie- 
 tur) ; Perf. ye.ybn)p.a.i, I have become, factus sum, exstiti, and yiyova 
 with a present signification, lam, implying lam by birth; eycvo- 
 lurpi and yiyova are also used as preterites of Ap-i, to be. 
 
 3. mm-io (instead of imriTio, k 155, 2), to fall, Iiap. iri-Trre; 
 (IIET-) Fut. JTEo-oDnoi (s^ 154, 3i ; Aor. hnarov (very seldom first 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
|9R VERBS IN -<a WITH STRENGXHENED STEM. [}§ 164, 165 
 
 Aor. iirea-a), i 154, Eem. 2 ; Perf. ^em-wKa with irregular variable 
 vowel (Part. Trcnrws, TrcTrnoros, Poet, § 194, 5). 
 
 4. Tirpdo), to bare, Put. Tpijo-to; Aor. erprjcra. More usual the 
 .secondary form Terpaivia, Put. Terpavco; Aor. erirprjva 149, Rem. 
 2) ; Perf. TiTprjKa, Terprnxcu. Verbal Adj. rpi^Tos. 
 
 Several verbs of class IV (§ 161) belong here, as yiyyiifTKa, and several verbs 
 in -/HI, as SlSafu, 
 
 {164. VII. FerSs, whose Pw e Stem-vowel a is 
 strengthened in the Pres. and Impf. by i. 
 
 Here belong the dialectic verbs, mostly Epic and poetic : ayaio/iai, to be in 
 dijnant; Sata, to divide and bum ; lialo/iai, to rage; vaia, to dwell. See § 230. 
 
 § 165. VIII. Verbs, whose Pure Stem assumes e in the 
 Pres. and Impf. 
 
 1. ■ya/ico), to marry (of the man), Perf yeydp.rjKa; but Put. 
 ■ya/ioj ; Aor. h/Tjiia, yq/jiai (cyaju.->jo-a first in Menander, then in 
 Lucian. ; ya/A^o-etas with the better reading •ya/x.ijcr«£is in X. Cy. 
 8. 4, 20). Mid. ya/iov/^ai (with the Dat.), to marry (of the 
 woman, nubo). Put. yapxyvpai ; Aor. hfqp.a.p,r]^ ; Perf. yeydp/rjuai. 
 Pass, in matrimonium ducor, Aor. iyap.'^S-riv, etc. [j 130 (d), 2]. 
 
 2. yrj&eto, Poet, usually Perf. yeyij^a (also prose), to rejoice, 
 Put. yTjSijcna. 
 
 3. SoKEoj, to seem, videor,to think, Put. Sofu (SokiJo-o) poet); 
 Aor. fSoia (iSoKTicra Poet) ; Aor. Pass. KaTaSo)(3^€ig, Antiph. 2. 116( 
 2 ; Perf Mid. or Pass. BiBoypai (SeSdioj/iat, Ionic and Eurip.), 
 visiis sum. 
 
 4. KTtnrea (Poet.), to resound, Put. -^a, etc. ; second Aor. iierimov (Epic and 
 S. 0. C. 1450) ; first Aor. iierinnffa (ib. 1606). 
 
 5. /j-apTvploi, to hear witness. Put. /laprvprja-w, etc. But futprvpo- 
 fuu, Dep. Mid. <o caS as ivitnesses. 
 
 6. fupco), io shear, to shave, Mid. ivpop.ai ; Aor. l^pap-riv ; but 
 
 Perf. l^prqp,ai. 
 
 7. w^eo), to jOMsA, Impf. £a).5ow; Put. oia-o) and ci^^cro); Aor. 
 ccotra, So-ai ; Perf. cwKa late, Plut. ; Put. Mid. uxro/xai ; Aor. ewtra- 
 Hijv ; Perf Mid. or Pass, imrpxii ; Aor. Pass. imrSrjv ; Put Pass. 
 iicr.Jjjcro/*ai (Aug. i 122, 4). Verbal Adj. tucrds, -teos. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 166.] VERBS IN -ft) WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. I9l> 
 
 § 166, Verbs, whose Stem is Pure in the Pres. and 
 Impf., hut which assume an e in forming the 
 tenses. 
 
 This change has taken place in the fonnation of verbs in -^a, partly from 
 necessity, as is the case with verba whose characteristic is |, i/( ; partly for the 
 sake of perspicuity, that the root may not wholly disappear by the introduction 
 of consonants, as in verbs whose characteristic is itk, x^ j ^nd partly from mere 
 choice or the desire of euphony, as in verbs whose characteristic is 5, ,-, f, x, 
 p, IT, K, X, «> o', «) "'■ The 6 is changed into tj in inflection. Exceptions i 
 atSojjiiu, Ax^ofuu, and /xi£x<'M<" B ^^^ (^)\- 
 
 1. dlSo/uu, to feel shame, to fear (Pres. and Impf. old poetic, in the Common 
 language cuSeoixai), Impf. alS6iiriv without Aug.; ]?ut. aiSeironai and -^o-o/noi 
 {iiratSea^iToitm, Eur. Iph. A. 889) ; Perf. ^Seff/ieVor, Dem. Aristocr. 646, 1 ; 
 Aor. ^SeaiiJLrjr (with Ace), as a law-term in Attic prose, signifying to pardon u 
 luppliant; but also in poetry, signifying to he ashamed of, to fear ; but in this 
 sense ySicr^y is commonly used. 
 
 2. d\e|ai, to ward off. Act. seldom in prose, X. Cy. 4. 3. 2, akk^- 
 v.v; Fut. oXe^o-ti) (Aor. ■^Xefijcra, Hoiii.) ; Mid. to ward off from 
 one's self Fut. oXef^o-o/tat (oXefo/tai as Fut. of 'AAEK- is rare, 
 e. g. S. Or. 171. 539. X. An. 7. 7, 3); Aor. ■^Xc^a/tijv (^Xefijo-a/xiji', 
 Horn, and X. An.. 1. 3, 6. in all the best MSS.) (Inf. second 
 Aor. dXKo^nv, used by the Trag., § 162.) 
 
 3. av^ia, to increase ; see avtivw, § 160, 4, 
 
 4. ax^o/iat, to be vexed, Fut. ax^ia-ofjuu, and in prose usually 
 axS^ia-S-^a-oiJuu (both with the same signification) ; Aor. ■^x^i(T^v 
 (U31). 
 
 5. /Jo'o-Ku), to feed, Fut. jSoa-K'^a-a) ; Aor. ijSoa-Ki^aa ; Md. intrans. 
 to feed, to eat. Verbal Adj. /3otos, ^o<7K.yyrko%. 
 
 6. ^ovKopm, to wish (second Pers. Povka, § 116, 11), Fut. ^on- 
 X-qa-o/JMi ; Perf. ^efiovXrunai ; Aor. s^ovXri^v and y]fiov\ri^rfv (Aug., 
 ^ 120, Rem. 1). 
 
 7. Se'oj, to want, to need, usually Impers. M, it is wanting, it is 
 necessary (§ 137, 2), Subj. S«;, Part. Uov, Inf hav; Impf. JSei, Opt. 
 Scot; Fut. Sc^o-ci; Aor. £8677a-£(v) ; Perf SeSV^W ! ^<i- 8«V<»'' ^^ 
 need, Fut. Se^o-o/iai ; Aor. eSe^^i/v ; Perf SeSerj/uu. 
 
 8. e^^Xft) and .SeAo), to mil, Impf ^.S^eXov and e^eXov; Fut. 
 e^eXijo-o) and ^c\ijoro); Aor. y&eXrja-a^ and i^khr/o-a; Perf only 
 t/^eXr-KO, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
200 VERBS IN -ID WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. [i 166 
 
 9. £iX<Oj etXAu), iXXo), also eiXcoj, to press, to shut %ip, Fut. eiAijo-u , 
 Perf. Mid. or Pass. ilXquai; Aor. Pass. fxK-rj&rjv. 
 
 10. eXko), to t^raw), Fut. IXfu (which is preferred to the other 
 form cXKucro) from 'EAKYfJ) ; Aor. ilkKvna {k 122, 3), IA.kvo-oi 
 (more common than ak^a) ; Perf. £°A.Ki5Ka; Mid. to draw to orie's 
 self, eXKvo-o/^ai, eiX/cuo-a/xijv ; Aor. Pass., Fut. Pass., and Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass, only aKKXxrSrp/, iX-Kvcr^T^crOfxai, eiAjcvo-jitat. 
 
 11. 'EIPOMAI, Aor. rjpoiirjv, I inquired, ipea-Stu, tpto/Mi, ipoLjxtjV) 
 ipov, e/Do/tei'os ; Fut. iprjcro^ai. The Other tenses are supplied hy 
 ipun-av; but the Aor. T^pwrqa-a is rejected. 
 
 12. ippui, to go forth, Fut. Ipprjo-m; Aor. TJpprjcra; Perf. JipprjKa. 
 
 13. euSei), commonly Ko^ei^io, to sleep, Fut. Ka^euSijo-iD ; Aor. rare 
 and late; Perf. wanting (Aug., §} 121, Ptem. and 126, 3). Verb. 
 Adj. Ka^evSrjTiov. 
 
 14. fX'^, to have, to hold, Impf e'^oi' (i 122, 3) ; Aor. arxov 
 (instead of e-a-exov). Inf. (rxelv. Imp. CT-;!(es, TrapaCTT^es according to 
 verbs itl /ii (in composition also o-xe, as Karacr;!^e, irapda-x^), Subj. 
 0^5, -gs, 7rapa.<rx<^, irapa<Txg?, etc., Opt. axotrfy {[ii, J 192, Rem.), 
 but in compounds Trapdcrxoip-i, etc., Part. crj^oJi'; Fut. Ifu and 
 a-X^fia; Perf. tax^Ka; Aor. Mid. iaxop-rjv, Subj. ox^'fiJ'-i; Opt. o^oi- 
 j«.?jv. Imp. <r)(o!), ■Trapdaxov, Inf. crxia-3ai, trapairx^o-S^ai, Part, cr^^o/ievos ; 
 Fut. e^o/xat and a-;:^i7cro/iai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. la-xrjpMj. ; Aor. Pass. 
 iaxf^v (not used in good Attic). Verbal Adj. cktoj, and oftener 
 poetic cr;^eTos, -t&s. 
 
 15. (.ij/oi, to cook, Fut. £i/f^o-a) (Fut. Mid. exjr^a-oimi, Plat. Kp. 372, 
 c); Aor. rnj/7]cra; Aor. Pass, -^ip-j^rjv ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ■^i/Tjju.ai. 
 Verbal Adj. i<j>36s, or k^rfr6<s, iip-rfrios. 
 
 16. 1^(0 (Plat. Symp. 196, 6), commonly Ka&L^tD, to seat, to sit, 
 Impf iKdSi^m, old Attic Ka^St^oi/; Fut. ko^iG (117, 2); Aor. 
 iKoSio-a, old Attic Ko^^To-a (^ 12G, 3) ; (Perf. KeKo^t/ca;) Mid. Iseat 
 myself, Fut Ko^i^^o-oynat ; Aor. lKa3uT6.iJ.riv, I seated for myself, 1 
 caused to sit. But Ko^i^ojiai, Iseat myself, I sit, Impf iKa3el6p.Yjv ; 
 Fut. KaSeSov/jLai. 
 
 17. KijSo), fo wia/ie anxious (Act. only Epic), Fut. Kij8i;(r<o; Perf 
 KEKr/Sa, J o»i anxious ; Mid. K^8o/iat, to Se atjxious, iu prose only 
 Pres. and Impf; in Aesch. S. 138, is found Imp. Aor. Mid. 
 •oJSecrai. 
 
 18. KXaiw, to ivcep (^KXd<i. seldom, and without contraction') 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 166.J VERBS IN -10 WITH STRENGTHENED STEM. 
 
 201 
 
 Fut. Kkava-onai (KXava-ov/jiai, } 154, 2, in Aristoph.), rarer (in 
 Dem.^ *Aat7jcr(o, or Kka-^a-'a; Aor. eKXavo-a; tKkava-6.iJ.-qv, S. Tracll. 
 153-; Perf. KiKKavfiai, and ^ater Kc/cAavcr/iac (§ 131, 3). Comp. 
 § 154, 2. Flit Perf. /ce/cXaccreTat, Ai'Istoph. Nub. 1440. Verbal 
 Adj. fcXauoTos and KXauTos, KXaDor&s. 
 
 19. fiAxoixoA., to fight, Fut. /xaxoS/iat, } 154, 5 (Epic and late 
 .prose /Mix^cro/iai) ; Aor. l/^axeo-a/iijv ; Perf. /Ae/ia;^|iiat ; Aor. Pass. 
 ifiaxea-^rjv late. Verbal Adj. paxerio^ and fmxr]Tio?. 
 
 20. /ieXXo), «o intend, to be about to do, hence ?o &Zay, Impf. 
 ?/i€AAoi' and ^/^eWov ; Fut. /ieW^o-to ; Aor. iixiXk-rja-a ; Pass. /aeAAco-- 
 ^at, io &e ^3j<* q^ delayed. (Aug., { 120, Rem. 1.) Verbal Adj. 
 ficX.ijreoi'. 
 
 21. /t?A.£i ;uoi, ciu-ae mihi est, it concerns me, I Jay it to heart 
 (rarely personal //.eXo)), Fut. fitk-qa-u; Aor. ijifX-qa-iiy) ; Perf. 
 px[x.iK-r}K€(y) ; Mid. jticXo/tat, commonly £5rt/;teXoj«,ai. (and e:rtj«.€XoS/««, 
 but Inf. probably lirtfi-ikicr^ai.) ; Fut. e7ri/.ieXi;(ro/iat (sometimes 
 «7ri/teXi;^d-o/x.ai) ; Perf iTrijji,€fjLi\rjiJLaL; Aor. iire/ji.eX'q&Tjv. Verbal 
 Adj. eTTi/iEXijTeoi'. 
 
 The compounds, e. g. /neraficAei, poemtet, are used as impersonals onl j ; sel- 
 dom ii.eraii4\o/ji.ai, to repent (Thuc.), Aor. /jtereiieK-^^y (late) ; /ie/i7)\iii, caring 
 /or. 
 
 22. juiJ^ci), !!o SMC^, Fut. /nv^ijo-o), etc. 
 
 23. 0^0), to «meZZ, i. e. to emit an odor, Fut. o^-qa-io ; Aor. uit,7j<ra 
 (Perf o8(i)8a with the meaning of the Pres. in Homer and the 
 later writers, H24, 2). 
 
 24. oio/iai and oTfmi, to think, second Pers. oi« (^ 116, 11); 
 Impf. ffio/x.iji' and (o/xrjv; Fut. ol-qcrofiai; Aor. laqSr/v, olijSTJvai; Perf. 
 wanting. (Au.g., § 122, 1.) Verbal Adj. ol-qrios. 
 
 The abbreviated forms, olfiat, ^/iiiv, are used in prose as a mere paren- 
 thetic expression, like the Lat. credo, and hence are often employed in an 
 ironical sense; ofo/iai, on the contrary, has such a sense, only when it is n 
 governing verb ; still, this difference of usage is not fully observed even by the 
 best Attic writers. 
 
 25. o'xoiJ.a.1., I am gone, Jiave gone (with sense of Perf), abii, 
 Impf ^o/jurjv (sense of Aor,, also Plup.), I went away, had gone , 
 Fut. oixt}fiojx.ax; Perf wxr]fw.i, commonly as a compound, e. g 
 trapiaxw"'''' -^- ■^'^- ^- 4' •'■ ^'^ ^^^^ ^®®* MSS., Ion. and Att Poet 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
202 VEKBS IN -0) WITH STKENGTHENED STEM. [{ 1C6 
 
 (xxwKa (so originate, o?xa, oiK-uxa, oix-w'"'', comp. the Epic oKa>xa 
 fromej^o), § 230). 
 
 26. 6(j>eiX.w, to owe, debeo, I ought, must, Fut o^etX^o-o) ; Aor. 
 ttM^eiXijo-a; Perf. oKJjeiXriKa ; second Aor. wtpeXov, -es, -e(v) (first and 
 second Pars. PL not used), in forms expressing a ti;is/i, utinam. 
 
 27. iratw, to sin/i;e, Fut. iraicrw (Att. secondary fonn Tranjo-w in 
 .\ristoph.) ; Aor. cTraio-a; Perf. TriiraiKa (the simple late); Aor. 
 Mid. t7raurdii.riv ; Pass, with cr ({ 131, 2) ; yet instead of ■jreiraur- 
 uAu and l-n-aMrjv, iTrXrjyrjv and TriTrXrjyfmi Were commonly used 
 Verbal Adj. irato-T£os. 
 
 28. TrepSo), usually TrtpSo/iat, emittere /latum, Aor. hrapSov ; Fut. 
 TrapSiJo-o/iai; Perf TreTTopSa (5 140, 4). 
 
 29. TTCTo/tat, to _;?«/, Fut. (ireriJo-o/Aat, Aristoph.) commonly ttttj- 
 0-0/xat ; Aor. commonly in prose and in the Comic writers, eirrd- 
 ju.iji', ■m-eaScu. (rarer hrrdiuriv; hn-qv, TrTW, 7rTair]v, Trnjvai, Trras, poet, 
 and in the later writers (} 192, 2) ; Perf TreTrorrifiai (Aristoph.). 
 — Syncope (} 155, 1). 
 
 30. o-keAXco (ot o-keXco)), to dry, Aor. Io-kXijj' ({ 192, 4), and Perf 
 IcTKkflKa, and Fut. <TKkrp-o\ui.i, intrans. to dry up, to wither. — Met- 
 athesis, k 156, 2. 
 
 31. riTrria, to strike, Fut. Attic rmrtfria (ruil/w, Homer); (Aor. 
 I. irvTrrqara late ; Irui/^a, Hom. ; Aor. II. enmov, Eur. Ion. 779 ; for 
 the Aor. of this word, the Attics use hraxaia, eiraiaa ;) (Perf 
 TervTmjKa, Pollux) ; Fut. Mid. TV!m^<TO[ji,ai, Aristoph. Nub. 1382. 
 Pass, blows will be inflicted; Perf. Tirvfj-jxai, Aesch. (rervTmjiuu. 
 late) ; Aor. Pass. hvTrqv (ctuttt^^tjv late). Verbal Adj. Tvirrqrioi. 
 
 32. x'^P"') *^ rejoice, Fut. xatpi?"'"' (x°-PV'^°l^''-'- l^'te) ; Aor. ^xapipi 
 (jjii, i 192, 8); Perf Kexa-pT]Ka (Aristoph. and Herod.), I have 
 rejoiced, and k^x^^W'"- (poet.), I am glad. Verbal Adj. x^pros. 
 
 Remake 1. Of the preceding classes, there belong here verbs in -tkua (5 160), 
 and imurxvfoimi, of tliose in § 159. 
 
 Bem. 2. With these verbs several liquid verbs are classed {§ 149, 6) ; still, 
 t ley form the Fut. and the Aor. regularly, e. g. 
 
 fifvii, to remain, Eut. fieva; Aor. ^/ieiva; Perf. fie/ifyriKa, Verbal Adj. 
 
 fisverSs, iiiv^rios, 
 v4fi.a, to divide, F\it. vfnZ ; Aor. ipei/ia; Perf. veve/iiiica; Aor. Pass, irf 
 fiil^riv. — JVLid. vdfiofiai, Fut. yeiiov/iai; Aor. ivet/tdijeriv ; Perf. Mid. of 
 Pass. ycvifiTiiiai. Verbal Adj. vfHTircos. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 167.] VERBS WITH TENSES FEOM 1. IFFilKENT EOOTS. 203 
 
 j 167. Verbs, whose Tenses are formed from different 
 Roots, and which are classed together only in 
 respect to Signification. 
 
 1. aipeo), to take, to capture, e. g. a, city, Impf. iJ/sow; Fut 
 oip^tro); Perf. yprjKa; Aor. (from 'EA) dKov, eXetv; Aor. Pass. 
 ipeSr]v; Fut. Pass, aipc^^tro/iat [§ 130 (d)]. — Mid. to choose, Aor. 
 dX6ii7]v ; Fut. aiprjcTOfjicu ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ^pij/xai ; Fut. Perf. 
 igp'^a-o/JMi, PI. Prot. 338, b. Verbal Adj. aipsros, -t«os. 
 
 2. €pxoimi, to go, to come (only the Lidic. of the Pres. in use in 
 Attic, the remaining modes and the participials being borrowed 
 from £t/tt ({ 181) ; thus, tp^o/^o'i ""j 'i^h 'eWt, «ov), Impf. riftypy.rp/, 
 
 commonly ^ew and ^a. Opt. 'oi/xt; Fut. et/it, I shall go (^fu, JsAoa 
 come) ; — ('EAEY©-) Perf. eX^Xv^a [} 124, 2 (b)] ; Fut. IXev^roiiai. 
 almost exclusively poetical and later prose, still also Lys.' p. 
 165, HI; Aor. JjX^ov, IXSw, (X^oiy-i, iX»4 [^ 118, 3 (a)], i\&civ, 
 Ik^iav. Verbal Adj. /leTeXcDoreov. 
 
 'Epxantti has in common the signification of to come and to go ; the idea of 
 coming commonly belongs to the form from i?\&e!y, and the idea of going to that 
 of cT/u. But in compounds, each of these three verbs expresses both ideas, and 
 only the preposition limits it to the one or to the other signification. 
 
 3. i<r&i<a, to eat, Impf ^o-^iov; (ISo), Ep.) Fut. 2So/tai, (§ 154, 4) ; 
 Perf iS-^SoKa ; Aor.' tfJMyov, cfiayeiv ; Perf Mid. or Pass. eSijSeer/iai, 
 (4 124), 2 ; Aor. Pass. •^Seo-^i/. Verbal Adj. iSearos, eSeorc'os. 
 
 4. opati), to see, Impf. Iwpcov; Perf. iwpaKa (Poet, also iopdKa, 
 Aug., § 122, 6) ; Aor. (from 'IA-) etSov, lSa>, rSot/it, iSi, H18, 3 (a), 
 iBcLv, iSwv. (On the second Perf. otSa, I know, see § 195.) Fut. 
 (from 'on) ^ofiai (2. Pers. oi/'ei, HI 6, 11). — Mid. or Pass. op5- 
 liaP, Perf. Mid. or Pass. Idpafiat, or wfi/jLoi, Zxficu,, etc. ; Inf. S>^&ai] 
 Aor. Mid. eiSo/tijv, iSar^at, iSov (and with the meaning ecce, iBov), 
 as a simple only Poet; Aor. Pass, a^^rjv, 6<l>&^vat; Fut. 6<pSi^o-- 
 o/MM. Verbal Adj. oparos and otttos, owreos. 
 
 5. Tpix"), to run, (APEM-) Fut. Spa/jLov/juu; Aor. eSpafwv; Perf 
 ScSpa/xijKa; Perf Mid. or Pass. cTriSeSpa/jiy/wu (X. O. 15. 1). Verb. 
 
 Adj. SpCKTCOV. 
 
 S^pejoyaoi, ^^pe^a, rare and poet. — Second Perf. only Epic Se'Spo/to (APEMn). 
 
 6. ^epo) (only Pres. and Impf), to hear, ("01-) Fut. otcrto (Aor. 
 Imp. oJo-e, oia-fTw, bring, in Aristoph., see i 230, under ^epw) ; — 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
SQ4 tiOJfJTJGATION OF VERBS IN -/Xl. [^ l'C8 
 
 (TErKO, cr 'ENErKfl) Aor. II. ^veyKov (rarer Aor. I. ■^ve-j/cai), -es; 
 -€(v), -0/u.o', -ETC, 'o;/ (and -a/iEv, -are, -ar), (§ 124, Rem. 2), Opt 
 foeyxot^tj etc. (rarer -at/x,t, etc.), Inf. ei/EyKeiv, Part. iveyKtiv (rarer 
 EveyKos), Imp. ETEyKE, -£T(i), etc. (and -dtToi, etc.) ; — ('ENEK-) Perf. 
 iv^voxa (i 124, 2) ; Mid. to carry o^ carry «ic«y, m^, Fut oicro- 
 uai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, hrrive^iuu (-yfat, ^Krai, or Ev^ve/tTai) ; Aor. 
 Mid. rjveyKd.jji.T^v, eveyKai, -acr&ai, -a/tcvos; Pass, (a) to be borne, 
 carried, (b) to bear one's self, to Jiasten; Aor. Pass, ^ve^^ijv^ Fut. 
 h/^x^rjo-oiMii (rarer our^rfa-oixai). Verb. Adj. oio-tos, oicrrcos (Poet 
 
 7. ^ij/it (5 178), to say^ Impf. E^i/y with the meaning of the 
 Aor. also ^amt and <^as (* 178, Rem. 2); — ('EII-) Aor. ehov, 
 dirut, eiTToi/nt, eote [§ 118, 3 (a)], (the other forms of the Imp. are 
 rarely or never used, compound irpoEtn-E), ehrelv, EiiruJi/ (first Aor. 
 elira, not very frequent in Attic writers, more frequent cliras, 
 very frequent EtTmrEi rarely earaK, Imp. eIttov rarely, very frequent 
 EtTraro), e'iraTov, ehraTwv, and always EiiraTE ; all Other forms want- 
 ing in the Att..). From the Epic Pres. etpw, come Fut. ipS>, Perf. 
 a/>j/(ca, Perf Mid. or Pass. apTjfuu 123, 4) ; — (FE-) Aor. Pass. 
 ippri^riv {ippi&Tjv appears not to be Attic), prj^oL, prj&ek; Fut 
 Pass. p-q^-qcToiMii and e-pT^a-o/iai. — Mid. only in compounds, Fut. 
 aTTcpov/jMi, and first Aor. aTriCiracrSai, to dieny, to he wearied out, to 
 give up, like aMuirfiv. Verbal Adj. prp-o^, ptfrio's. 
 
 Instead of the Pres. i^ijfif, other ■words are sometimes used, particularly in 
 composition. Compare hrar/opeia, I forbid, im^mov, I forbade; avriKeyu, I 
 contradict, kpTuirov, I contradicted, the compounds of EtVeJi' iu the Aor. heing 
 more frequent than airrrycSpewra and hvTi\i^a. So, ayqpe^w Tiva kokws, I speak 
 ill of one, but ayTUTroi/ kokus, 
 
 i 168. Conjugation of Verbs in -pn. 
 
 1. Verbs in -/jli, the number of which is small, differ from 
 those in -a, principally in tailing different personal-endings 
 in the Pres. and Impf., several also in the second Aor. Act. 
 and Mid. ; and also in omitting the mode-vowel in the Ind. 
 of the above tenses. The formation of the remaining 
 
 ' The first Aor. is preferred to the second, in the first Pers. Sing. Indie, when 
 the next word begins with a consonant ; also in the parsons of the Imp. which 
 liave u ; hence (veyKe, but iveyKiTca, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 169.] DIVISION OP VERBS IN -/il. 203 
 
 tenses is like that of verbs in -a), with a few exceptions. Li 
 omitting the mode-vowel, these verbs are analogous to those 
 in -da>, -60), and -oeo. 
 
 2. In the Pres. and Impf., most verbs in -pu, with a mono- 
 syllabic stem, take a reduplication (§ 163) ; this consists in 
 repeating the first consonant of the stem with i, when the 
 stem begins with a simple consonant or a mute and liquid; 
 but, when the stem begins with o-t, ttt, or with an aspirated 
 vowel, t with the rough breathing is prefixed to the stem. 
 These verbs are the following : — 
 
 2TA 'l-ffTit-fu nPA Trf-/i-7i »7)-^i 
 
 XPA kI-xpV-I^' AE (5{-5^-^i) SiSeWi(i') 
 
 * BA {$i-$ii-jit) ^ifiis 0E tI-S»i-iu 
 
 nTA 'l-Trra-iim 'E i-ri'/u 
 
 nAA Trl~fi-v\Ti-fii AC di-^wfiu 
 
 Remark. Most verbs in -^i do not follow this conjugation throughout in 
 tlis three tenses above named, but only in some particular forms ; four verbs, 
 rl^fit, to put ; ttrrriia, to place ; SiSw/u, to give, and Iti/u, to send, have this 
 conjugation most full, though even these have forms in use borrowed from the 
 conjugation in -<», together ■with several forms of the inflection in -fu. See 
 § 172, Rem. 8 
 
 § 169. Divisioi^, of Verbs in -/ii. 
 
 Verbs in -/it are divided into two principal classes : — 
 
 1. Such as annex the personal-ending to the stem-vowel. 
 The stem of verbs of this class ends : — 
 
 (a) in o, e. g. 'l-ffrri-fu, to place, Stem 2TA- 
 
 (b) " fe, " ri-Snt-l^i, to pat, " ez- 
 
 (c) " 0, " Si-Sai-iu, to (jiiv, " AO- 
 
 (d) " i,- " ^Tiit,togo, " 'I- 
 (c) " 8-, " Ei'itu', instead of iffjil, to he, " 'ES-. 
 
 2. Such as annex to theijr stems the syllable -wD or -vij, 
 and then append to this syllable the personal-endings. The 
 Btem of verbs of this class ends : — 
 
 A. In one of the four vowels, a, e, t, o, and assumes -vpv 
 
 (a) in a, c. g. (rKeSd-vyv-fii, to scatter. Stem 2KEAA- 
 
 (b) " e, " Kopi-vvv-iu, to satisfy, " KOPE- 
 
 (c) " 1, only ri-vvv-iu, to atone, " TI- 
 
 (d) " o, xi. g. o-rpii'iivi-ui, to spread oat, " 3TPC 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
206 VERBS IN -fCl. STEM OP THE PEES. STRENGTHENED. [} 170 
 
 B. In a consonant, and assumes -vv. 
 
 (a) in a mute, e. g. Setic-vv-fu, to show, Stem AEIK- 
 
 (b) " liquid, " Sn-m-iu, to swear, " 'OM-. 
 Kemaek 1. Wlien a. diphtliong precedes tlie final consonant of the stem 
 
 that consonant is omitted before the -yv, except it be a Kappa-mute, c. g. 
 
 ai-vv/iM Stem 'AIP (comp. dlp-a, Sp-yu/uai) 
 
 Sai-vvfit " AAIT (comp. Safe, SaiT-6s) 
 
 Kal-vi/uu " KAIA from KAA (comp. Perf. KfKaS-itat, KeKcurfLUt) 
 
 KTel-vvfiL " KTEIN from KTEN (Fut. KTev-a) ; but 
 
 deilc-yvfjLt, eipy-vOfjLt, ^eiry-yvfit, oXy-VV[il, 
 Rem. 2. Verbs of the second class, — those in -C/ii, — form only the Pres. 
 and Impf. like verbs in fii, and even in these tenses, only a part of the forms 
 are in -ujni, the others in -tu; in the Sing. Impf. the forms in -ta are predomi- 
 nant, and in the Pres. Subj. and in the Impf. Opt., these are the regular forms. 
 The verb api-mv-iii, from the stem 2BE-, is the only verb of this class which 
 forms the second Aor., namely, itrp-itv ; several verbs in -w, form their second 
 Aor. according to the analogy of these verbs, c. g. Sua?, %Svv. 
 
 } 170. Characteristic-vowel and Strengthening of 
 the Stem of the Present. 
 
 ' 1. In verbs of the first class, the short characteristic-vowel 
 of the stem, a, c, o, is lengthened in the Pres., Impf., and 
 second Aor. Act : — 
 
 a and 6 into tj, and o into a. 
 Still, in verbs in -c and -o this lengthening extends only to the 
 Ind. Sing, of these three tenses ; but in verbs in -a, to the Dual 
 and PI. Ind. also, and lUiewise to the entire Imp. and the 
 second Aor. In£ Act. In the second Aor. Lif. Act. of verbs in 
 -e and -o, e is lengthened into ct, and o into ov, e. g. Sa-vai, Sou- 
 vai. But in the same tenses of the Mid., the short character- 
 istic-vowel remams tlxroughout. 
 
 2. Verbs in -Cju,t, whose stems end in a vowel, and hence 
 annex -vw, retain the short charg,cteristic-vowel, except those 
 whose stem ends in -o, e. g. o-rptu-vw/tt (5TPO-) ; but verbs 
 whose stems end in a consonant, and hence annex -w, are 
 strengthened in the stem of the Pres. by lengthening the stem- 
 vowel, namely, 
 
 d becomes ?;, as in vfiy-vvfu, second Aor. Pass. iiray-i]v 
 ci " <u, -" aX-vvjjuu instead of ipviiuu, stem 'AP, 'AIP 
 Bedc-vu^i, stem AEK, hence Ion. iSeta 
 
ii 171, 17?.] VERBS IN -/U. PERSONAL-ENDINGS. 207 
 
 ^ 171. Mode-vowels. 
 
 1. The Ind. Pres., Impf., and second Aor. do not take the 
 mode-vowel 168, 1), and hence the personal-endings are 
 V ' n«xed immediately to the stem of the verb, e. g. 
 
 1'ffTa' lieu ^-Tl-^€'[Jiev ^-So-iiev 
 
 I-ffTci-^tte&o i-Ti-^e-fieda i-S6-ixe&a. 
 
 2. The Subj. has the mode-vowels a and ij, as in verbs in -(a; 
 but these vowels coalesce with the characteristic-vowel and 
 form one syllable ; this coalescence differs from the contraction 
 of verbs in -ta, as follows : — 
 
 in and dfi coalesce into 5 and p (not, as in contracts in -ia, into o and f), op 
 
 coalesces into f (not, as in contracts in -6a, into oi), e. g. 
 
 i-ffrd-a = i-OTu i-trrcf-?;* = l-trr^s i-(rTii-r]-Tat = t-ffrri'Tcu 
 
 trri-oi = ffTU ar6.-ris = flrps 
 
 Ti-&c-a> = Ti-&aj T(-&f-j;s = Ti-dpi T(-&e'-a-/iai = ri-^Si-iJuu 
 
 SM-a = Si-S£ iM-ris = Si-S^s SM-ig = SiStf. 
 
 Eemask 1. This form of the Snbj. of To-ttj/ji and rt^/u is like the Subj. 
 of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs, e. g. rvtpAa, -fj, -p, etc., ti/tt-S, -f j, -p, 
 from riir-rw, ora-ftS, -ps, -p, from Stttj/u. 
 
 Bem. 2. The Subj. of verbs in -vfu is like that of verbs in -ia, e. g. SeiKpia, 
 -ifs, etc. 
 
 3. The Impf and second Aor. Opt. have the mode-vowel i, 
 which is amiexed to the characteristic-vowel, and with it forms 
 a diphthong, e. g. 
 
 Impf. Opt. A. l-irra-t-7]V = l-arai-rpi Aor. II. A. oTol-rp/ Impf. M. i-o-Tol-UHjy 
 Ti-^e-i-riv = ri-S>ei-i\v ^cl-nv ' Ti-^el-iirir 
 
 Si-So-t-7iv = SL-Sol-nv Sol-Tiv !i-5o£-jaij». 
 
 Kem. 3. The Opt. of verbs in -e {tI^hi) is like the Aorists Opt. Pass, of 
 all verbs, e. g. trra-^ci-nv, rvij>-del-nv, rm-el-rpi. 
 
 Eem. 4. The Impf. Opt. of verbs in -viu, like the Subj. Pres., folloivs th« 
 fcrm in -a, e. g. Semviot/u. The few exceptions will bo considered below. 
 
 i 172. Personal- endings. 
 
 1. The following are the personal endings for the Act. ;^ 
 (a) For the Indicative Present, 
 
 Sing. 1. -/it T-oTTj-yiti 
 
 2. -s (properly -<n) tffrn-s 
 
 -<r((</) (properly -rt, 't-iiTn-at[v) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
208 
 
 VEUBS IN -fU. PEKSONAL-ENDINGS. 
 
 [§ 172 
 
 12. 
 
 -TOP 
 
 'l-ara-Tov 
 
 3. 
 
 -Toy 
 
 %-ffTa-Toy 
 
 . 1. 
 
 -juey (properly -/les) 
 
 y-tTTct-juev 
 
 2. 
 
 -T€ 
 
 t-O-TO-TE 
 
 3. 
 
 [-v(Tt{i')] (properly -vti) 
 
 [i-a-ra-yTi 
 
 'i-(rTa-ffi[v}]. 
 
 The ending of the third Pers. PI. -ya-i{y) is changed into -a<n(</), and thea 
 is contracted with the preceding stem-TOwel of the verb. Still, the Attic dia- 
 lect admits contraction only in the stems ending in -a, thus : — 
 from 
 
 i-a-Ta-yn is formed 
 
 l-ffTafft 
 
 
 (i-o-TiJ-do-iJ 
 
 TL-^^-ytrt " 
 
 Tt-^e7(Ti 
 
 Att. 
 
 Ti-3-e-d(rt 
 
 Si-So-ya-i 
 
 Si-8oi3(rt 
 
 tc 
 
 5i-5<!-d<ri 
 
 SflK-yV'Va-i " 
 
 SetK-ydfft 
 
 " 
 
 Sem-yi-tJ.. 
 
 Remakk I. The uncontraeted form in -e'uff^, -rfdcri, -iaffi, is the only one 
 used in Attic prose, though it also occurs in the Ionic dialect ; the contracted 
 form in -eun, -oDiri, -v<n, is the usual form in the Ionic wiiters, very seldom in 
 the Attic poets. But from "ri/ii (stem 'E), to send, this Attic form miri (con- 
 tracted from I'-e'-dfl-i) always occurs. 
 
 (b) The personal-endings of the Subj. Pres. and second 
 Aor. do not differ from those of verbs in -w. 
 
 (c) The following are used for the Impf and second Aor. 
 Ind. : — 
 
 Sing. 1. -v Impf. t-rrrj-y 4-tI-^-v 
 
 I 2. -s I'-ffTTj-s i-rl-^-s 
 
 3. - l-ffTi) 4-tI-^ 
 
 Dual 2. -Toy A. II. i-aTri-Toy e-^e-Toy, 
 
 3. -T1JP i-iTT^-Tiiy i-^4-rTiy 
 
 Plur. 1. -ney (properly -^es) i-aTi\-iifv i-^e-ney 
 
 2. -T6 e-irrri-Te e-fte-re 
 
 3. • -ffay ^-a-TTj-a-ay ^-^e-a-ay. 
 
 Rem. 2. The Ind. of the two Aorists Pass, of all verbs is like the second 
 Aor. EO-Tijj', c. g. ETuir-T)!', i-aTor^y, -tjs, -tj, -Tiroy, -ijTnv, -riiifv, -ijte, -ij<ror. 
 
 (d) The personal-endings of the Opt. Impf and second Aor. 
 (except the first Pers. Sing.) differ from those of the Opt. of 
 the historical tenses of verbs in -m, only in being preceded by 
 ij ; comp. the endings of /JovXeuot/xt, ^ovXcva-aifiLi, etc. with those 
 of 
 
 a-ra.l-r\v, i-tTTat-riv Ael-riy Tt-&el-riy Sol-Tjy Si-Sot-riv. 
 Rem. 3. In the Dual and PI. Impf Opt, the -jj is commonly rejected ia tha 
 Attic dialect, and the ending of the third Pers. PI. -ntray is almost always 
 shortened into -ey, e. g. 
 
 T^d-ilfiey = TiStufisy i<rTa(-S)TE = Jd-TaiTe 
 
 T^.t-V<ray = -'^^itizedbyMicrosoft®^'^'^-'"'-^ = S-^""'- 
 
172.] 
 
 <fERBS IN -fl.1. TEESONAL-ENDINGS. 
 
 209 
 
 Sing. 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Dual 2. 
 
 'TOV 
 
 3. 
 Plural 2. 
 
 -Te 
 
 3. 
 
 -Ttatxav 
 
 (Ttae-a<) 
 
 (5/-5o-ai) 
 
 TJ-Se'-TM 
 
 Si-5(f~TW 
 
 Tl-fte-T-oy 
 
 U-So-rov 
 
 TI-d-6-TWC 
 
 St-d6-Tuy 
 
 rr-ae-TC 
 
 Sl-So-TC 
 
 Ti-&e-T«iTay 
 
 St-S6-^affav 
 
 T.-&£lTaiI' 
 
 Sl-Siin-ai>. 
 
 The same holds of the Opt. Pass. Aorists of all verbs, e. g. TroiScu&efi/jiieK '= 
 s-oiSEua-cr/iEi- (wholly like TiStelrii>). — On the contrary, in the second Aor. Opt. 
 Act. of la-TTt/u, rlS-ri/ii, SiSa/u, the abbreviated forms arc very rare, except the 
 third Pers. PI., which Is commonly abridged. 
 Eem. 4. The forms StStfrjv and Sifrjv also occur. 
 
 (e) The endings of the Pres. and second Aor. Imp. are : — 
 
 (if-o-Ta-S-i) 
 
 'i-iTTa-TOV 
 
 l-CTti-Tcoy 
 
 t-ffTO-Te 
 
 i-ffrd-r'affav 
 or l-ffTavTav 
 
 Rem. 5. The second Pers. Sing. Imp. Pres. rejects the ending -*i, and, as a 
 compensation, lengthens the short characteristic-vowel, namely, a into ij, e into 
 6f, o into 01/, V into 0, 
 
 '/-o-ra-S-i becomes V-o-tj) rl-^e-^i becomes rl-Sifi 
 
 Si-So-Sri " S^Boi; SciK-yv-»t " Seki/i. 
 
 The ending -fti is retained in the Pres. only in a very few verbs, v. g. ipi^i 
 from ^tiiii, Iff^i from ei;n(, l&i from eTiui, and some others ; it also occurs in cer- 
 tain Perfects of verbs in -a, e. g. reftvoAi. 
 
 In the second Aor. of r'Ariiu, Iri/u, and SiSoi/xi, the ending At is softened into 
 s ; thus, &€-&! becomes fte's, e-3^£ = es, 5o'-&i = Biis ; but in the second Aor. of 
 trrTriiu, the ending -fti is retained ; thus, (tt^-Si ; also in the two Aorists Pass, 
 of all verbs, e. g. ruTrij-fti, TraiSei^TjTi (instead of ircuSei^-S^i, § 21, Kem. 3). In 
 compounds of o-rij&i and jS^&f, the ending -^&t is often abbreviated into o, iu 
 the poet, dialect, e. g. •jrapda'ra, aTr6trTa, irpifid, Kard^, 
 
 (f ) The ending of the Pres. and second Aor. Inf is -vow. 
 This is appended in the Pres. to the short characteristic-vowel ; 
 but in the second Aor., to the lengthened vowel (a being 
 lengthened into tj, e into et, o into or, } 170, 1) ; thus, 
 
 Pres. l-ffTorvai Ti-^i-vai Si-S6-vat SciK-vt-ytu 
 
 Second Aor. arri-vai ^c7-vcu Sov-rai. 
 
 Rem. 6. The Inf. Pass. Aorists of all verbs are like arfivai, e. g. Timrj-vai, 
 
 (g) The endings of the Pies, and second Aor. participle are 
 -VTS. -vTo-a, -VT, which are joil sd to the characteristic-vowe] 
 according to the common rules ; thus, 
 
 i-trrd-yTS = i-ffTay, t-crratra, i-ar&v oris, (rrScro, (TtSv 
 
 TL-^i-VTs =■■ Ti-Sreis, -eiiro, -eV Mj, Aeicra, fteV 
 
 dM-i/TS = ii-Sais, -ovaa, -iv Sois, -ouffa, ■6y 
 
 SeiK-yi-PTs = SiiK-vis, -i<ra, •"». 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
210 VERBS IN /At. POKMATION OF THE TENSES. [i 173 
 
 Rem. 7. The participles of the two Pass. Aorists of all ve/bs are like tht 
 Part. Tiftci's, or &e(s, e. g. Tinr-eis, -t'iaa, -ey, (SouAcuS-efj. 
 
 2. Tlie personal-endings of the Mid. are like those of verbs 
 in -co, except that uniformly, in the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and 
 almost always in the Impf Tnd. and in the Imp., the personal- 
 endings retain their full form, -aai and ■<to. Still, the following 
 points are to be noted : — 
 
 (a) The second Pers. Prcs. Ind. of verbs in -a (as '/o-TTj/ii, Stlra^ni), isonly-oiroi 
 in Attic prose ; the contracted form is found, from the earliest period, only 
 in the poetic dialect, e. g. eirfo-Tij from iTrlaraimi in Aesch., iivr) (from the Ionic 
 ending -eoi) instead ef Sui/<f, in' Soph, and Eurip. — In the second Pers. Imp. 
 and in the Impf., 'la-ra sceins to be only poetic; but, iirltrra, •qTrio-Tw, Siru, 
 fl5uy«, are the regular forms in good prose, and the uncontracted forma 
 scarcely occur except in the poets and later writers. 
 
 (b) In yerbs in -e, the contract forms in the Imp. Pres. arc poetic and rare, and 
 in the Indie. Impf. not at all in use ; thus, Impf. ir'Accro, Imp. ti'S-cito (t&ou) ; in 
 the second Aor., both of verbs In -e and -o, the contract are the regular forms, 
 e. g. Indie. €&ov, Imp. &o5 ; c5ou, Sod. In verbs in -o also, the uncontracted 
 forms seem to be the usual ones in the Impf. and Imp. : iSiSotro, SlSocro. 
 
 (c) The contracted forms are unifonnly employed throughout the Subj. ; in 
 the Opt., as in verbs in -a, the <r is always omitted, yet the form remains 
 uncontracted. 
 
 Rem. 8. The Sing. Impf. Act. of rl^fu, is ir'Ariv, 2 Pers. ir'Aeis, 3. hi^ei 
 (from TI0Efi), ir'Aeis and eTO-et being more frequent than irl^s, eViftj;; on 
 iriiu, see ^ 180; the Sing. Impf. Act. of SlSw/u is always 4SlSovv (fr. AIAOfl), 
 iSiSovs, etc. (X. An. 5. 8, 4. is to be read cBiSouj instead of eSiSais, according to 
 the best MSS.) In verbs in-S/iu, the forms in -iSiu are usual throughout the Pres. 
 and Impf., especially in third Pers. PI. Indie. Act., e. g. S€iKiaiouiri(i'), and 
 the only forms in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., e. g. SeiKviu, ofiviu, trvii/iiy- 
 ria, together with Selxyvfu, o/ii/u^i, (rvfiiilywiit. — In Attic poetry, there are also 
 contracted forms of rt^/u and iriiii in the second and third Pers. Sing. Pres. 
 Ind. Act., e. g. riaeij, te!s, Tiftei, if!. — But the Middle admits the formation in 
 ■ia only in the Subj. and Opt. 
 
 FOEMATION OF THE TeNSES. 
 
 § 17S. I. First Class of Yerhs in -jj.i. 
 
 1. In forming the tenses of the Act., the short characteristic- 
 vowel is lengthened, both in the Fut. and first Aor. Mid., 
 namely, a into -q, e into 17 ; also in the Perf. Act. of Tt^/x-i and 
 iqiu, c is lengthened into «, and o into co ; but in the remaining 
 tenses of the Mid., and throughout the Pass., the short charac- 
 teristic-vowel is retained, with the exception of the Perf. and 
 Plup. Mid. and Pass, of riM^fi-i and 117/ii, where the ei of the 
 Perf. Act. (ri^iiKo, TiBcifLOLi, uKa, el/xai) is retained. 
 
 2. The first Aor. Act. and Mid. of TL&rjiJLi, l-qfi,i, and 8i'Su)/ii, has 
 K for the characteristic of the tense, no*, o- ; thus, 
 
♦ J.74.] VERBS IN -fll. FORMATION OP THE TENSES. 211 
 
 The forms of the first Aor. Act. eSrjKa, ^Ka, and iBwKa, however, 
 are usual only in the Lid., and generally only in the Sing. ; in 
 the other persons, the Attic writers commonly used the forms 
 of the second Aor. ; in the other modes and the participials, 
 the forms of the second Aor. were always used. 
 
 Examples of the first Aor. m the PI. lud. are: i^Kantv, X. C. 4. 2, 15. 
 iidKafiei/, X. An. 3. 2, 5. 0. 9, 9. 10. iStixaTt, Antiph. 138, 77. naxcw, X. Cy. 
 4. 6, 12. I'arj/cav, H. 2. 3, 20. iup^Kav, Cy. 4. 5, 14. 
 
 Also the forms of the second Aor. Mid. of rtSij/xi, hj/ai, and 
 8t8ci)/x,i, are used by the Attic writers instead of the first Aor. ; 
 riKa.ii.rp/ from tij/it occurs, though but seldom. On the contrary, 
 the forms of the second Aor. Ind. Act of rt^/xi, wj/it, and StSufii 
 (JSt/Vj rjv, c8ci)v), are not in use. 
 
 3. The verb 'UrrqiJ.i forms the first Aor. Act. and Mid., like 
 verbs in -(d, with the tense-characteristic cr, e.g. e-cnri-cr-a, i-an)- 
 cr-a/iTjv. The second Aor. Mid. iardfjLrjv is not used. Some 
 other verbs, however, have a second Aor. Mid., e. g. iTnaiuiv, 
 hrpid.ii.rjv. 
 
 IIemaek 1. The second Aor. and the second Fut. Pass, are wanting in these 
 verbs, also the Fut. Perf., except in 'laTrtju, the Fut. Perf. of which is eiTT^lai 
 and iffTii^o/tai, § 154, 6. 
 
 Kem. 2. On the meaning of the verb "o-ttj^i, the following things are to be 
 noted.- the Pres., Impf., Fut., and first Aor. Act. have a Trans, meaning, to 
 place ; on the contraiy, the second Aor., the Perf. and Plap., Act. and the Put. 
 J?erf., have a reflexive or Intrans. meaning, to place one's self, to stand, namely, 
 ivT-iiv, I placed myself, or 1 stood; ea-rriica (with present signification), / have 
 placed myself, I stand, sto; earl\Keiv, stabam; k(rrlii,a>, karlt^oiiM, staho (a^earii^a, 
 IshaU withdraw). The Mid. denotes either to place for one's self, to erect, to stand, 
 zansistere, or to place one's sdf; Pass, to be placed: "EifrriKa and k(ni\Kcuf usually 
 take the place also of the forms eo-rojuai and kaTiiiriv, which occur jjut rarely. 
 
 } 174. IL Second Class of Verbs in -fi,i. 
 
 There is no difiiculty in forming the tenses of verbs of the 
 second class ({ 169, 2). All the tenses are formed from the 
 stem, after rejecting the ending -wO/ii, or -viifxi. Verbs in -o, 
 which in the Pres. have lengthened the o into ta, retain the oi 
 through all the tenses, e. g. a~rpw-wv-ii,i, ^(o-nai-/At, pui-wv-ia, Fut. 
 (TTpdi-au), eta. But verbs, whose stem ends in a liquid, in form- 
 ing some of the tenses, assume a Theme ending in a vowel, 
 e. g. oix-vv-p-i, Aor. 3>ii.-o-(Ta, from 'OMOO. The second Aor. and 
 the second Fut. Pass, occur only in a few verbs, e. g. ^evy-vv-ni. 
 See i 182 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
212 
 
 PAEAL-GMS OF VERBS IN -/XI. [} I7d, 
 
 § 175. Paradigms of 
 
 
 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 -a 
 
 111 
 
 2TA- to js/ace. 
 
 0E- to put. 
 
 AO- to. give. 
 
 AEIK- to show. 
 
 
 s 
 
 s 
 
 iz; ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 vS. 1. 
 
 i-o-T?]-;tt( 
 
 ri-^-fjit 
 
 Bl-Bu~fii 
 
 BeiK-vv-fit ' 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 t-CTT?-! 
 
 ri-^-s 
 
 ti-Sa-s 
 
 SetK-vv-s 
 
 
 tf 
 
 •1 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 5!'-(rT7;-(n(y) 
 
 Ti-^-(ri{v} 
 
 Sl-^w-(ri{v) 
 
 d€lK-vv'<Xi{y) 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 '/-(TTO-TOV 
 
 ri-^e-Tov 
 
 Si-Bo-Tov 
 
 SeiK-vv-Tov 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 3. 
 
 '/-(TTd-TOV 
 
 tI-^s-tov 
 
 Si-Bo-roy 
 
 BelK-yH-TOU 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 'i-a'Td-iJ.eu 
 
 rl-^e-ftey 
 
 S^5o-/zel' 
 
 ^eiK-vij-ftey 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 t-fTTd-Te 
 
 rl-^e-re 
 
 Si-So-Te 
 
 SftK-vv-re 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 i-ffTa-o-t(i') 
 
 Tl-S^€-d<Tl{y) 
 
 di-^6-d{ri{v) 
 
 d€iK-vv-dffi{v) 
 
 
 
 
 
 (from i<rTa-d(ri) 
 
 and Tt-&si(n{v) 
 
 and Si-SoSo'i(v) 
 
 and BetK-vva'i{w) 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i (TTW 
 
 T(-3-cS 
 
 Si-Soi 
 
 SciK-VU-Cl) 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-o-T^-s 
 
 Tl-^'S 
 
 Si-Bi^-s 
 
 deiic-yv-rjs 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 3. 
 
 i-O-TJj 
 
 ri-^ 
 
 St-dcp 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 
 1X1. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 2. 
 
 i-ffTTi-rov 
 
 Ti-&7j-T0>' 
 
 BiSaJ-Tov 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 3. 
 
 t'CTTJ-TOy 
 
 Tf-^TJ-TOV 
 
 Si-Sw-TOJ/ 
 
 
 
 (il 
 
 IM. 
 
 i-ara-fi^y 
 
 Tt-^W-fX^U 
 
 Si-Sw-^uej/ 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-a-TTj-Te 
 
 Ti-3-^-T6 
 
 ti-Sco-Te 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 i-(rrw-<ri(v) 
 
 ^-^^-^((l/) 
 
 Si-Sa-(n{v) 
 
 
 
 
 S. 2. 
 
 'l-a-TT}^ 
 
 Tf-.^et'* 
 
 bi-Sov^ 
 
 SefK-i'O * 
 
 
 
 
 
 (from ioTd3i) 
 
 (from Ti'^e^O 
 
 (from Bi'So^O 
 
 (from ^eUvij^i) 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 3. 
 
 i-trra-TW 
 
 Tt-^e-TW 
 
 5i-5o-Tft) 
 
 BeiK-vt'-TU 
 
 
 
 ■K 
 
 D.2. 
 
 '/-(TTd-TOT/ 
 
 T/-i&e-TOV 
 
 5i-So-Toy 
 
 BeLK-vv-T.oy ^ 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 3. 
 
 f-CTa-TOJI' 
 
 Tt-S-e-Twv 
 
 Si-5(i-Tft)i' 
 
 SeiK-Pv-TUU 
 
 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 '/-ord-Te 
 
 Tl-&e-T6 
 
 St-5o-T€ 
 
 SeiK-J/U-TC 
 
 
 ' 
 
 3. 
 
 i-ffTa-Toitra^/ 
 
 Ti-^e-T£u(roj' 
 
 Si-5o-TWrTat' 
 
 SetK'Vv-TOiffav 
 
 
 
 
 
 and I-(TT({z/ra);' 
 
 and Ti-i&^e;'Tw»' 
 
 and Bt.-S6yTwy 
 
 and SeiK-rui'TWj/ 
 
 
 Injin. 
 
 i-CTa-i/ai 
 
 Ti-^e-i'ai 
 
 Si-B6-vai 
 
 SeiK-i/O-i/ai 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 I'ffTaSf affUj &y 
 
 ri-^ds, cTca, eV 
 
 5i-5ot5y, oi/ffo, 6v 
 
 detK-yvs, vca, iiv 
 
 
 
 G. (ivTOS 
 
 G. cVtos' 
 
 G. <5VT0.7 
 
 G. uyros 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 '/-(TTTJ-J/ 
 
 ^Tf-aijj/ 
 
 €'-S£-Bou»/3 
 
 €-BciK-yvv 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 V-ffTTJ-S 
 
 ^-ri-S^eis'-' 
 
 ^-5i-Soui ' 
 
 4-SelK-vvs 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 r-o-TT; 
 
 i^-Srei''^ 
 
 ^5r-5ou^ 
 
 4-SelK-vO 
 
 
 
 % 
 
 D.l. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 2. 
 
 '/-{TTd-TOr 
 
 ^-ri-^e-Tov 
 
 e-Sf-BorTOj' 
 
 4-BelK-vii'Toy 
 
 
 
 -« 
 
 3. 
 
 I-ffTa-TT?!' 
 
 4-ri-^€~^7)v 
 
 e-St-Sd-nji/ 
 
 e-heiK-vv-rTiv 
 
 
 
 ►is 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 '/-(TTd-juei/ 
 
 i~TL-^€-fJ.€V 
 
 e-5/-So-jUe;/ 
 
 4-^eiK~vv-fJi.ev 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ?-(rTd-T6 
 
 e-rf-i&e-Te 
 
 e-5(-So-T6 
 
 e-Sef/c-vC-Te 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 '/-(TTd-o-av 
 
 ^-Tt-3-e-craf 
 
 ^-fit-So-a:ccv 
 
 i-te(K-vii-<rav 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 l-aTal-Tjv 
 
 T(-&€(-7]|/ 
 
 Si-Sof-Tjy 
 
 ^eiK-vt-oifii 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i'O-Tai-Tjs 
 
 Ti-^e^-jjs 
 
 Bi-Sof-T^s 
 
 BeiK-vv-ois 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 3. 
 
 i-a-ral-r} 
 
 Ti-S-ef-'jj 
 
 5t-5o^^J 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 
 Ul. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 l-<TTal-TOV * 
 
 Tl-^€7~T0U '' 
 
 Si-5o?-Toi/ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 3. 
 
 l-ffTai-T7\y 
 
 Ti-S^e^TTjy 
 
 5i-5of-Tijf 
 
 
 
 
 
 r. 1. 
 
 i-(TTa7-fiev 
 
 Ti-^eT-jUec 
 
 5i-5o7-)t(e:/ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 i-ffTai-Te 
 
 T(-|0-€?-T6 
 
 5i-S0i-T6 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 l-(rTa7-ev 
 
 ■ Ti-^ei-eu 
 
 5i-SoL-ev 
 
 
 
 And SeiKri-ai, -eij, etc., especially Seuci/tavtn{i/). Also Impf. iSclxmov, -Cm, 
 -iif(i'), and the Part.usually Ssiki>v-uv, -ovira, -ovU 172, Hem. 8). ' S 172. Kem, 
 
i 175.] PARADIGMS OP VEKBS IN -fll. 
 
 Verbs in -fjn. 
 
 213 
 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 
 
 
 ©E- to put. 
 
 AO- to give. 
 
 AEIK- to show. 
 
 
 l-arH-fjuu 
 
 rl-^e-fiai 
 
 Si-So-fiat 
 
 SclK-yv-fuu 
 
 
 y-tTTO-ffOI 
 
 rl-^e-a-at 
 
 dl-So-ffat 
 
 SelK-vv-aai 
 
 
 'C-ffTa-rai 
 
 ri'^e-rai 
 
 Si-So-rai 
 
 SeU-vi-Tttt 
 
 
 i-ffTcL-fze^ov 
 
 Tt-^4-fX€^0y 
 
 di-d6-fi€^oy 
 
 SfiK-vi-fieStov 
 
 
 X-<Tra~(y^ov 
 
 ri-^K-a^ov 
 
 Si'So-ff^oy 
 
 iiix-vvaSiov 
 
 
 V-ffTa-ffS-ov 
 
 rl-^e-a^oy 
 
 Bi-So-ff^oy 
 
 te'iK-vv-a^ov 
 
 
 i-(rTd-;tte&a 
 
 Ti-&€-jtte^a 
 
 Si-S6-/jLe^a 
 
 SfiK-yt'^e^a 
 
 
 'l-ffTOrffbe 
 
 rl'^e-tr^e 
 
 Sl'Bo-ff^e 
 
 Setx-m-trde 
 
 
 'i-ara-vTai 
 
 rl-^e-yrai 
 
 Si-Bo-PTCU 
 
 SeiK-ro-KToi 
 
 
 i-ffTu-fi.at * 
 
 Tt-^&-fA.ai 
 
 Si-Su-fxai 
 
 SeiK-vu-oificti 
 
 
 I'ffTy 
 
 Tt-a^ 
 
 5i-5,f 
 
 SeiK-vi-p 
 
 
 i-ar^-Tai 
 
 TI-^-TOt 
 
 Si-Su-Tat 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 t'trrili-fie^ov 
 
 rt-^^-fie^op 
 
 Bi-Sc^fie^ov 
 
 
 
 i'(TT7J'<r^0V 
 
 Ti-^-tr^oy 
 
 Ji-Sm-it&ov 
 
 
 
 l-ffTTJ-tr^OV 
 
 rt-^7)'(r^ov 
 
 Si-Sw-ff^oy 
 
 
 
 i-(rTd)-fi€^a 
 
 Tt-Sf^-fX€^a 
 
 St-Sti-fie^a 
 
 
 
 i-a-TTJ-a^e 
 
 Ti-^^-ffS-e 
 
 Si-Sa-ade 
 
 
 
 i-ffTco-yTat 
 
 Ti-^ca-yrat 
 
 St-Su-vrat 
 
 
 
 X-ffra-ffo and 
 
 rl-^e-ffo and 
 
 St-So-<ro and 
 
 SeU-ini-iro 
 
 
 X-ffTCO 
 
 ri-^ov 
 
 Si-Sov 
 
 
 
 i-ffTd-a^co 
 
 Tt-^e-tr^a 
 
 Si-S6-<r&a 
 
 SeiK-vi-ada 
 
 
 'i-ffra-a^ov 
 
 ri-^e-ff^oy 
 
 Si-So-<r&oy 
 
 SeiK-mj-a-Srov 
 
 
 i-ffTti- tr^cov 
 
 Ti-^e-ff^itiy 
 
 St-Sd-ff&ay 
 
 SetK-pirffStuv 
 
 
 'i (TTa-tr^e 
 
 ri'^e-tr^e 
 
 SJ-So-fffte 
 
 ^eiK-w-abe 
 
 
 i-trTd-tr^oxrav and 
 
 Ti-^i'<T^a><ray and 
 
 Si-S6-crAairav and 
 
 SetK-vi-a^aurav 
 
 
 t-trrd-a'^cijif 
 
 ri-^e-ff^av 
 
 5z-5(f-(T&tuv 
 
 and Seuc-iii-admv 
 
 
 X-ffTa-ff^ai 
 
 rl-^e-ff^ai 
 
 Sl-So-ir&ai 
 
 SeiK-w-a^ai • . 
 
 
 i-ffTd-fxevos, 77, ou 
 
 TL-M-p€VOS, Vi <*V 
 
 5i-S6-^evoSi Tj, ov 
 
 SeiK-yt-fj-evosp ri, 
 ov 
 
 
 I <rra-fi7}V 
 
 4-Ti'&e~fl7iy 
 
 i^'it-Si-p.iiy 
 
 i-ZeiK-vt-iifiv 
 
 
 'I'ffTortro and 'l-trra 
 
 4'Ti"Sire-tro 
 
 4-Si-So-iro 
 
 4-Seiic-i'v-iro 
 
 
 X-ffTOt-TQ 
 
 iM-^e-TO 
 
 i-Si-Sa-TO 
 
 i-SeLK-yO-TO 
 
 
 I'tTTcL-Ue^OJf 
 
 i-Ti-^e-/j,e^oy 
 
 i-St-S6-iie^ov 
 
 i-SeiK-yii-iiedoy 
 
 i 'l-rrra-trStoif 
 
 4-rl-^e-tr^oy 
 
 i-Si-So-a-^ov 
 
 i-deiK-yv-fr^oy 
 
 
 l-ffrd-ff^y 
 
 4 Ti-^e-<r^y 
 
 ^Si-So'-o-arjy 
 
 4-SeiK-yi-<r^y 
 
 
 i-aroL-fie^a 
 X-ffTarff^e 
 
 e-rt-Sre-fie^a 
 
 4-Sl-S6-fi.e^a 
 
 4-SeiK-yti-neda 
 
 
 ^-Tf-&e-<r^e 
 
 i-Si-So-ar^^ 
 
 4-SeiK-vv-tr^e 
 
 
 X-trra-vTO 
 
 i-rl-^e-VTo 
 
 i-Si-Sa-vTo 
 
 4-teLK-VV-VTO 
 
 
 i-iTTal-^Tjy ° 
 
 Tl'^ol-fjt.T}y^ 
 
 SiSoi'fiTiy ' 
 
 SeiK-yS-oi/ivy 
 
 
 i-(TTCU-0 
 
 Tt-^6t-0 
 
 St-So7-Q 
 
 SeiK-vt-oto, 
 
 
 i-ffToi-ro 
 
 ri-^o7-TO 
 
 St-Boi-TO 
 
 etc. 
 
 
 i'trral-fie^ov 
 
 ri'^ol-fie^oy 
 
 5i-5oi-|Ue3-o!/ 
 
 
 
 i-ffToi-ff^oy 
 
 ri-^o'i-(T^ov 
 
 Si-Boi-o-ftoy 
 
 
 
 i-a-Tal-trSrvv 
 
 ri-^oi-a^y 
 
 Si-Sol-ff^n" 
 
 
 
 I'ffTai-fie^a 
 
 Ti-^oi-fi-eba. 
 
 Si-ffoi-^uenVa 
 
 
 
 t-ffrai-ff^e 
 
 Tt-^ot-a^e 
 
 St-SoT-c^e 
 
 
 
 L'tfra7-yro 
 
 Ti-^oi-vTO 
 
 Sl-Soi-lfTO 
 
 
 n J* & 1 72. Rem 8 
 
 * § 172, Kem. 3. 
 
 * On the in-eg. a 
 
 ;cent of firiffro/uoi. 
 
 
 ek, sec § 176, 1. 
 
 "0")i?|JgS£^ 
 
 iriVTcuo, etc. see 4 1 
 
 76, 1. ' § 176, 2 
 
214 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/Xl. 
 
 [i 175. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 
 ■; 
 
 1 
 
 
 2TA- to place. 
 
 0E- to put. 
 
 AO- to give. 
 
 AEIK- to sliow. 
 
 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 a cu 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 e-trrri-v, I stood, 
 
 (l-dTi-y) ) A. I 
 
 {^-Su-y) i A. I. 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^ffTTj'S 
 
 (c-Ati-s) > used 
 
 (e-Su-s) > used 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 l-tTTTI 
 
 (^-aij) 'for it 
 
 (^-5»)- )Torit 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 D.l. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 51 
 
 2. 
 
 f-ar-ri-rov 
 
 f-Ae-Tov 
 
 e-So-tay 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 3. 
 
 i-<rT'l]-Ti)v 
 
 4-^e-rny 
 
 4-S6-niy 
 
 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 l-trrTi-fiet/ 
 
 ^-&6-/.e»' 
 
 ^-So-'^ey 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 e-ffTTi-Te 
 
 l-3-e-Te 
 
 e-So-Yf 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 f-trtri-aay 
 
 c-&e-(roy 
 
 t-So-ffav 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 crra^ 
 
 as' 
 
 S«' 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 arris 
 
 3^-s 
 
 S^-s' 
 
 
 
 
 a? 
 
 3. 
 
 ary 
 
 »» 
 
 S^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 D.l. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 tm]-Toy 
 
 &ij-TOI' 
 
 Su-Toy 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 -n 
 
 3. 
 
 ffTTJ-TOy 
 
 &^-TOI' 
 
 Za^'ov 
 
 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 oreu-jKEi' 
 
 ^u-fiey 
 
 da-jiey 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 (TTTJ-Te 
 
 a?-TE 
 
 S5-rc 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 3. 
 
 a'Tu-a'i{v) 
 
 a5-<ri(>') 
 
 SS-(n{y) 
 
 
 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 ffral-Tiv 
 
 &e(-5)y 
 
 Zoi-^v' 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 2. 
 
 a-ral^s 
 
 ftef-ijs 
 
 ^0L-7]S 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 .u 
 
 3. 
 D.l. 
 
 ffTod-r] 
 
 a€f-j/ 
 
 Sol-n 
 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 
 2. 
 
 ffTai-nTov'' 
 
 ftef-jjToy * 
 
 Sol-hJTOv' 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 3. 
 
 tTTal-^TtJV 
 
 3-e(-^njv 
 
 S'oi-iJTiiv 
 
 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 ffTtd-fifiey 
 
 ^el-Tiiiey 
 
 Sol-Tiiify 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 0•TO^J)Te 
 
 ^ei-Tire 
 
 ^ai-Tyre 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 trrat-ey 
 
 dei-Ej' 
 
 So7-ey 
 
 
 
 
 S.2. 
 
 o-Tij-S-i' 
 
 
 S6s {S6&i) * 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 3. 
 
 O-T^-TO) 
 
 S6-ni 
 
 
 
 
 ■a 
 
 D.2. 
 
 tTTTJ-roy 
 
 &6'-T0y 
 
 S6-Toy 
 
 
 
 
 ii 
 
 3. 
 
 (TT'fi-Tuy 
 
 fte-To?!' 
 
 Si^uv 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 arri-Te 
 
 ae'-re 
 
 S(irt-6 
 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ffT^-T(aaav 
 
 ^e-Tiotray and 
 
 t6-Tu<rav £jnd 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 and (rT6.vrav 
 
 AevTuy 
 
 'iiyrwy 
 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 arri-viu 
 
 Aei-yai 
 
 Zov-vtu • 
 
 
 
 Part. 
 
 a-ris, So-o, ay 
 
 ^els, (la-a, 4v 
 
 5o^f, oOird, dc 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. arivTOS 
 
 Gen. ac'i/Tos 
 
 Gen. Sdvros 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 Aorist I. 
 
 ffT'fi-tra 
 
 a^-o-M 
 
 Sc5-<r(ij 
 
 JeifM 
 
 
 H-arnaa, I 
 
 ?-3t)-ko 
 
 ^-5w-«a 
 
 e-SEifa 
 
 
 
 [placed, 
 
 Instead of these fo 
 
 rms, the 2d Aor. is 
 
 
 
 
 used in the Dual, 
 
 n. Ind. and in the 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 other Modes and Vz 
 
 rtioipinla, § ITS, 2. 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 erfect. 
 
 'd-a-TTj-Ka,^ sto, 
 
 Te-S-ei-Ka 
 
 St-Sa-Ka 
 
 SE-Seixa 
 
 
 'Pluperfect. 
 
 e-o-T^-Kciv and 
 et-ffrii-Keiy 
 
 e-Te-Ae £-«£»/ 
 
 l-Sc-S <i-Kciv 
 
 ^-5E-5ef;^€ty 
 
 
 Fut. Pcrf. 
 
 l-o-T^fii) old Att. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 
 PAS 
 
 
 Aor.I. \e-aTa-Sntv \ i-Te-^v' \ 
 
 E'-s<f-a7)i/ 1 i-tfixMy i 
 
 ' The compounds, o. g. oirofl-Ta, iKStii, StaSa 
 
 have the same accentuation a^ 
 
 the simples, e. g. kirotrratrt, iic^Tov, StaSi 
 
 H^v. '^ Sere 5 172, Rem. 3. ' In 
 
 composition, iraptio-Tjiai, TragArrS -^Triaim 
 composition, vep&es, "jW?S^ SnWo™ e^?^ 
 
 &. &ir<;<rTd, § 172, Rem. 5. < In 
 
 '^ep^ETE, ?kSote, his. Rem. 1. 
 
 » See 4 176, 3. « ire^v and -r^f^^mm, ir 
 
 sfoqd nf A^.^-*^^.- o«.l tt__ey^,_. 
 
 
i 175.] 
 
 PARADIGMS OF VERBS IN -/it. 
 
 215 
 
 
 MIDDLE. 1 
 
 
 5TA- tj place. 
 
 ©E- to put. 
 
 AO- to give. 
 
 AEIK- to s^w. 
 
 
 (i-ari-iiipi does 
 
 i-»e-HVy 
 
 4-S6-iJ.7jy 
 
 
 
 not occur, but 
 
 l-Aov (from e^ea-o) 
 
 ?-Soii (from ISoiro) 
 
 
 
 i-ni-iaiv 
 
 ?-»e-r(. 
 
 E-So-TO 
 
 
 
 i-irpui-fiTitf) 
 
 ^-fte-^E*'"' 
 
 ^-S((-/tEi&OC 
 
 
 
 
 e-^e-a-^oy 
 
 ^-So-<rdoj/ 
 
 wanting. 
 
 
 
 i-^4-ad7iy 
 
 ^-S(<-ira7ji' 
 
 
 
 
 (?-»€-/*€*« 
 
 i-S6-iieAa 
 
 
 
 
 €-ae-(ra6 
 
 l-So-irdE 
 
 
 
 
 e-de-jTO 
 
 ^-5o-|/TO 
 
 
 
 (<TTa-iuu does not 
 
 3w-/|(m' 
 
 5fti-/tai' 
 
 
 
 occur, but irplu- 
 
 »5 
 
 5^ 
 
 
 
 lUU, -JJ, -JJTO(, 
 
 d^TOl 
 
 SS-TOt 
 
 
 
 etc.) 
 
 
 Su-a-dov 
 
 Sw-ir&E 
 BS-yrot 
 
 
 
 (aiai-ii-t]v does not 
 
 Stol-nriv ' 
 
 Sol-iiriv " 
 
 
 
 occur, but rrpud- 
 
 &ot-o 
 
 5o(-o 
 
 
 
 iai», -010 -oiTo, 
 
 &or-TO 
 
 SoI-TO 
 
 
 
 etc.) 
 
 ftoT-VTO 
 
 Bof-ftEaoc 
 Soi-irdo;' 
 
 Sot-yro 
 
 
 
 ((prii-iro, or orS 
 
 ftoO (from»^(rol° 
 
 SpS (from S(iiTo) ° 
 
 
 
 does not occur. 
 
 dE-(r,»ii) 
 
 J<<-(ra<» 
 
 
 
 but irpla-<To, or 
 
 ae-ffftoi' 
 
 Sii-tr/^ay 
 
 
 
 irolui) 
 
 ^i-<rStu(r(W and 
 af-o-&»i' 
 
 So-<r&a»' 
 
 SlJ-ffftE 
 
 S6-<r^a(rta' and 
 
 
 
 (ari-aSiai) irplar. 
 
 &6-iraoi 
 
 5(i-(r,&a( 
 
 
 
 [ffrd-fievo^) irpia' 
 
 ^€-fi€yov, -71, -ov 
 
 S6-/ifyos, -7), -ov 
 
 
 
 lUPOS 
 
 
 
 
 
 arii-trofuu 
 
 Sfi\-<rojmi 
 
 SdS-ffo/iai 
 
 Sei^ofjLat 
 
 
 i-aTri-ffdfiTjy 
 
 (i-d^-Kd-fiT/y) 
 
 (J.8»-K(£-/t7J>') 
 
 i-Sei^iimv 
 
 
 
 Instead of these forms, the second Aor. Mid. is 
 
 
 
 
 used by the Attic writers, J 173, 2. 
 
 
 
 e-(rTa-iiai,}.T3,'R.2. 
 
 Te-&Et-/10l 
 
 5£-So-ua< 
 
 S4-Seiy-iuu 
 
 
 i-aT&-ii7iv, 5 173, 
 
 4-re-dei-firiy 
 
 i-Se-S6-fi7iy 
 
 4-de-5e(y-fi7jy 
 
 
 Rem. 2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 e-OT^fo^ai,'" 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 wanting. 
 
 SIVB. 
 
 1 Fut. 1. 1 <TTa-Mtaoii<u 1 7e-S4(roiuu ' j So-Srl](roiiat | Seix-Miaaiuu 
 
 § 21, 2. ' Also in composition, iv^aiuu, -p, -tjtm, etc., hvo^mimi, -5, -5toi, 
 
 etc., ^KSSfiai, -if, -urat, etc., ottoSS/mi, -^i, -Stoi, etc. " See § 1 76, 2. 'In 
 
 composition, /coTiteot/, lm6dov; irepiSou, iiriSov; xard^eff^e, veplSoa-d-e; ivStcir- 
 
 a«, 5rp({Soo-ac; but ^i/aoS, ti^iij3^o53&».i«Sfla,.iJ18, Rem. 1. '°4 1.54, 6, and 
 
 5 17.5, Rem. 2 
 
216 SUMMARY OP VERBS IN -/*l. [U 176, 177 
 
 ^ 176. liemarks on the Paradigms. 
 
 1. The verbs Sivaiiai, tobe able; cTriffTo/ioi, to hiow, and xp^l^i'l'^h loliang, 
 have a different accentuation from 'laTafuu, in the Pres. Subj. and Impf. Opt., 
 namely, Subj. Siya/icu, i-TrlcrTai/iai, -ri, -ijTai, -Tjcr&oy, -^irSie, -avTtu; Opt. Svvalirriv, 
 imirTiiiii.nv, -mo, -oito, -auT^ov, -aiffSre, -aivTo; so also oyaifoiv, -ato, -aiTO (§ 177, 
 4), and iTrpid/iTiv (§ 179, 6). 
 
 2. The forms of the Opt. Mid. Impf and second Aor. in -oi, viz. Ti&olfaii>, 
 &olur]i , were preferred to those in -et, viz. Ti^eifiriv, -eio, -tiro, etc., Sci^rji', -eio, 
 -eiTo, etc. In compounds, the accent remains as in simples ; thus, iv&olunii/ 
 {if^ilurii'), iv^oTo (iv^eio), etc. ; SO also in compounds of Soifi-qv, e. g. SiaSoluny, 
 ttado7o, etc. 
 
 3. On the abbreviated form of the Perf. and Plup. . i-a-Ta-rov, e-aTa-uey, 
 e-fTTd-re, e-a'Td-a-i(y), see § 193. 
 
 4. Verbs in -i/u, as has been seen, form the Subj. and Opt. like verbs in -Sa. 
 Still, there are some examples where these modes follow the analogy of verbs 
 m-fu: '6irosiJ.il SiatrKeSdvyiTai (instead of -iJijTai), PI- Phaedon. 77, b.i/roxon-(< 
 T6 leal ireyyvTO (from -vito, instead of -tJotro), Ibid. 118, a. 
 
 5. In the later writers, e. g. Polybius, a Perf and Plup. are found with the 
 Trans, meaning, I have placed, namely, cVtSko, IcrTa/teiy. 
 
 SuMMAKT or Verbs in -/h. 
 
 1. Verbs in -/ii which annex the Personal-endings immediately 
 to the Stem-vowel. 
 
 § 177. (a) Verbs in -a (i-a-T77-/Lii; 5TA-): 
 1. KC-xpyj-f-i; to lend, to bestow (XPA-), Inf. Kixpavcu, Fut. xp^""") 
 Aor. e^Tjaa. Mid. to borrow, Fut. p^jjo-o/Aat. (Aor. €xf)r)(ra.iJi.i^v in 
 this sense is avoided by the Attic writers.) To the same stem 
 belong : — 
 
 2. XP'^^ '' ''^ necessary, oportef, (stem XPA- and XPE-), Subj. xpVt l^f. XPVI"^'> 
 Part, (rh) XP^'^" (usually only Nom. and Ace.) ; Impf. ixpn", or xp?" (with 
 irregular accent), Opt. XP^^'n (from XPE-) ; Put. xp^o'i'ai in Soph, (but not 
 XP-ijcrej). 
 
 Inf xPriv, kiroxpriv, in Eurip., by contraction from x/"^f"'- 
 
 3. airixim, it suffices, sufficit ; the following also arc formed regularly from 
 XPAri: d7roxpSin(i'), Inf oiroxpiji'; Part, anroxpar, -tScro, -<Sv ; Impf oirf'xpT) ; Pnt. 
 ottoxpVei ; Aor. d7rexp'!<''e(f), etc. Mid. aTroxpa/Jai, to abuse, abutor, or consumo, 
 Inf diroxp5)o-S-ai, is inflected like xpaO|ft«, ^ 129, Eem. 2. 
 
 4. ovarqixi, (with Attic reduplication instead of ovonj/ii), to ben- 
 cfit, ('ONA-) Inf ovtrarat; Impf Act. wanting, d^eXow being 
 used for it ; Fut. dwyo-u) ; Aor. (ui^jo-a, Inf ovijo-ai (for it avrfvai, like 
 (TT-^vat, in PL Rp. 600, d.). Mid. ovim/iai, to get benefit, be bene- 
 fitted, Fut. ovijo-o/xai ; Aor. iivqix-qv (ctii/a/iijv later, but also in Eiir. 
 vjvao-^c), -ijcro, --ryro, etc., Imp. ovi7o-o, Part, w-^/xevos (Horn.), Opt. 
 orai/x.ijr, -aio, -atro (s^ 1 J^^/f^d^ Jg^ji^^ Aor. Pass. <inJ5^i/ rarel 
 
178.] 
 
 SUMMARY OF VERBS IN -/At. 
 
 217 
 
 instead of divT^iirjv. Tlie remaining forms are supplied by 
 
 5. m-fi-7rXri-fi.i, to fill, (IIAA-) Inf m/jLTrXavai ; Impf eTri/^TrXiji' ; 
 Flit. ttXt^o-o) ; Perf. irtTrX-qKa ; Aor. eirXijo-a ; Mid. to Jill for one's 
 ielf, mii.TrXafi.ai, TM. TTLii.TrhuT&ai; Impf. cTrt/ATXa/Ai;^ ; Aor. e7r\ijo-a. 
 
 (iiyv; Flit. wA^o-o/xat; Perf. Mid, or Pass. ir«rXijo-/tai ; Aor. Pass. 
 £7rX^o-.9Tjv (§ 131); Fut. Pass. irXi^o-.^o-o/x.at (i^ 131); second Aor. 
 hrX^lLtjv, Poet. Verb. Adj. TrXijcrrios. 
 
 The ;n in the redaplication of this and the following yerb is usually omitted 
 in composition, when /* precedes the reduplication, e. g. i/arlirluinat, but ivewiix- 
 v\inriv. Contrary to this rule, however, foi-ma with and without /t are both 
 used by the poets, according to the necessities of the verse. 
 
 6. ■jTLiLTrprrifi.i, to burn, Trans., in all respects like irinirX-qiu : irpij- 
 <r(i), eTrprjcra, Trerrp-qKO., Treirpijcr/iat, i'trp-qaSrjv, TrpriaSrja-OfJMi, ven-p'qa-OfJi.at. 
 
 7. TAH-MI, to endure, Pres. and Impf. wanting (instead of 
 them inrojxivu), dvej^o/tat) ; Aor. erXajv, (rXZ,) rXaiTju, tXtjSi, rXas 
 (rXoo-a) ; Flit. TXi}o-o/x.ai ; Perf. rirXrjKa. Verbal Adj. tXijto's. (In 
 Attic prose this verb is rare.) 
 
 8. <f>r]-fji,L, to say (stem $A-), has the foUovsring formation : — 
 
 § 178. 
 
 Present. ACTIVE. 
 
 Imperfect. | 
 
 Indi- 
 cative 
 
 Subj." 
 Imp. 
 
 Inf. 
 
 Part. 
 
 8.1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 •PVfLi' 
 
 <pri<r(j,y) 
 
 ipaTov 
 
 <f>S.T6v 
 
 ipafiey 
 
 (pare 
 
 <l>a(ri{y) * 
 
 Indi- 
 cative 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 i()rns, usually tiprtada 
 
 %<t», [(M16,2), 
 
 e(paTov 
 
 iipaT7)V 
 
 iipaniv 
 
 etpdre 
 
 itpdnrav 
 
 <!>&, (p^s, 05, (jyTJTOv, <pcofi.ey, 
 
 (p'ne, <l>a,ri{y) 
 ipa^i, or (pS^i {a-6ii.(pa^i), (para, 
 
 <p&Tov, (paTuv, ^are, ipara- 
 
 ffav and ^dfruy 
 ipavai • 
 {ipds, (paffa, (pdv 
 
 G. ipdvTos, (pdffrjs) 
 
 Opt. 
 
 and (pvuTov, tpai^rrip and 
 tpaiTtjy, (j)aiiiiJ.€y and tpcu- 
 fiev, ^airiTC and tpture, ipatev 
 
 Put. 
 Aor. 
 
 <pil<ra 
 ^(pria-a. 
 
 MIDDLE. 1 
 
 Perf. Imp. Tt--^ij!^a> (PI. Tim. 72, d.), U it he. s 
 Fragm. 3. fX. Cy. 6. 1, 21, is a false reading 
 687, in chorus. Part, (pdii^ms (rare), affirmin^ 
 
 Verbal adjective, iparSs, <] 
 
 aid. Impf Ind. eipam-o, Lys. 
 ] ; Inf. (pao-Sai, Aesch. Pcrs. 
 /• 
 
 ' In composition : Suirtipriixi, <riiMJ>Tiiii, a,vTi(p7iin{v), a-ifi^<ri{v), etc., but avri- 
 ^■/is (accent on uliimate), <rviiflis, and Subj, avrupSi, avrup^s, etc. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
218 DEPONENTS BELONGING TO VERBS IN -/it. [k 179. 
 
 Remaek 1. In the second person <f if y, both the accentuation and the Iota 
 subscript are contrary to all analogy. On the inclination of this verb in the 
 Prcs. Ind. (except ^jfs), see § 33, a. 
 
 Kem. 2. This verb has two significations, (a) to say in general, (b) to affirm, 
 (aio) to assert, to assure, etc. The Fut. tp'iiira, and Aor. ^(pria-a, have only the 
 last signification. The Part. <pds. is not used in Attic prose ; still, i^ PI. Ale. 2, 
 139, c. ^ivTcs. 
 
 Kem. 3. With <pniA the verb ii/ii, inquam, may be compared, which, like 
 inquam, is used in the spirited repetition of what had been said ; the imperfect 
 fy, ^ is used in the phrases ^y S" iyii, said /, ^ S* Ss, said he, to describe a con- 
 versation. 
 
 ^ 179. The following Deponents also belong here, 
 
 1. aya/Aat, to wonder, Impf. riydiJiriv; Aor. rf/aa-Srpr (r[yajTd.ii,r)v, 
 Epic and Dem. 18, 204) ; Fut. ayao-o/xat. Verbal Adj. ayaoro's. 
 
 2. Swa/tatj to he able, second JPers. Swao-at [Su'i/j; from the Ion. 
 Sweat, tragic and later, k 172, 2, (a)], Subj. Swto/tat (} 176, 1), Imp. 
 Swoo-o, Inf. hvvaa-^ai, Part. Swa/.ievos ; Impf. i8wa.fjirp/ and rj^dfirjv, 
 second Pars. iSivoi (not eSwao-o, i 172, 2), Opt. Swat/iijv, Swoto 
 (^ 176, 1) ; Fut. Swijcroynat; Aor. iSw^BijV, r/SvvTj&riv and i&wda-SrjV 
 (not ^^vvda-Sriv), the last Ion. and in Xen. (Aug., § 120, Kem. 
 1) ; Perf. Se8ijn;/i.at. Verbal Adj. SwaT09, able and possible. 
 
 3. i-irlcTTajxaL (like toTa/i.at), to know, (properly, to stand upon 
 something, to be distinguished from i(f}tcrTaijt.(u), second Pers. 
 en-toTao-at (eVtoTot Seldom and only Poet), Subj. eTrtoTtojuat (II 176, 
 1), Imp. hrUrria [seldom and only in the poets and later writers, 
 ima-Taa-o, § 172, 2 (b)] ; Impf. rjwia-TdfiLrjY, rjirio-rta [seldom and 
 
 only in the poets and later writers, rimcrrcuTo, i 172, 2 (b)]. Opt 
 
 en-tcrrat/iryv, e?rtOTaio (^ 176, 1) ; Fut. CTrtoT^o-o/iat ; Aor. ■^wurr^Srjv, 
 (Aug., § 126, 3.) Verbal Adj. ^Trto-nTro's. 
 
 4. epaixcu, to love (in the Pres. and Impf only poetic, in prose 
 ipdca is used instead of it) ; Aor. ripdb^^-qv, I hved; Fut ipaa-Sri- 
 o-of^ai, I shall love. [Pass. ipCi>[j.ai (from ipdw), I shall be loved.] 
 Verbal Adj. ipa.a-ro';. 
 
 6. Kpi/Mafiai, to hang, be suspended, pendeo, Subj. KpifuttpM 
 {k 176, 1), Part. Kpeij.diJ.€vo^ ; Impf iKpi.jj.dp.-rjv, Opt. Kpipai/jiriv, -ato, 
 -atro (^ 176, 1), (Arist. Vesp. 298, KplpoLo-^^e, comp. pofvafmi, 
 i 230, and iJ.eit.voiiJ.rjv, § 154, 8); Aoy. iKpe/jda-.^ ; Fut Pass 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 180.J 
 
 VERBS IN -/Al. 
 
 219 
 
 Kpciiacr^-qcrofmL, I shall be hung; Fut. Mid. Kpefi^tro/mi, pendcbo 
 I shall hang. 
 
 .6. irpuuT^ai, to buy, iTrpuxfiTjv, second Pers. i-n-pCia (an Aor. Rlid., 
 and found only in tliis tense, which the Attic writers employ 
 instead of the Aor. of wviopai, viz. eiunjo-a/iijv, wlaich is not used 
 by them, k 122, 4), Subj. ■jrp«o/Aat (} 176, 1) ; Opt. irpiatp,riv, -aio, 
 •aiTo 176, 1); Imp. irpim; Part, irpia.p.ivo'i. 
 
 § 180. (b) Verbs in -e (Tt-5ij-ju,t, 0E-) 
 
 'I-ri-p-t (stem 'E-), to send. Many forms of this verb are found 
 only in composition. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Pros. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Ind. 'bifit, ins, X'i\(ri(v) ; leroy; hiier, 'lerc, ia(!i(v) \teiai(v)\, 
 
 Subj. iw, t^s, iy] iiyroyj iu^ev, i^re, I5)tri{v); atpite, atpi^s, atpiy, 
 
 etc. 
 Imp. ^et, Utu, etc. — Inf. Upai. — Part. Uis, Utaa, Uv. 
 
 Ind. "ow (from 'lEfl), aflovv (rarer i\^iovv, rare Uiv, irpoUtv, i)(pUw), 
 Uis, ?«, iupUi (rarer ii<pUi); Utou, Uri)v; '/f/iey, '/ere, jeo-iic, 
 i^Uffav (rarer ii<pU<rav). 
 
 Opt. UItiv (second Pei's. PI. cupione. Plat.; third Pers. PI. ajplo^y, 
 X. H. 6. 4, 3). 
 
 Perf. 
 Aor. n. 
 
 eTra.— Plup rfKEij/.— Fut. %aa. —Aor. I. ?ko (§ 173, 2). 
 
 Ind. Sing, is supplied by Aor. I. (§ 173, 2) ; Dual cfToj', a<f>£!rov, 
 
 e'hriif ; Plur. etfiev, Ko^eiftev, efre, aveiTe, %irav, commonly 
 
 eTtray, a^ettrof. 
 Subj. S, ^F, d05, a(pys, etc. 
 Opt. E??;;/, c'/tjj, e^ij ; elTov, k<l>eiTav, eXrriv ; eifiey, cupeifiev, eTre, cuttei- 
 
 re, elev, a<pe7ey. 
 Imp. es, ji<^e$, eVw ; ctoc, &peToy, eravj ere, &ipeTe, eruffav and eWwi'. 
 Inf. cTvai, ai^eii'ai. — P. rff, efiro, a(^E7(ra, cV, 4^eV, Gen. «Wos, e'/irjjj. 
 
 Bemark 1. On the Aug. of lujilriiu, see § 126, 3. 
 
 Rem. 2. The form of the Impf. Jrii' is very doubtful, and the forms 177s, Tit 
 are very rare. The form Uiv has the ending of the Plup., like the Impf. of e?|i»i, 
 to go ; it is Att. and Ion., a secondary form of Vow. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
220 
 
 VEKBS IN -fU. 
 
 U 181 
 
 MIDDLE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Aor. II. 
 
 Ind. 7f|Uai, Ua-ai, "erai, etc. — Subj. iciy.cu, cKpiafiM, Iff, afiff, etc. 
 Imp. Utro, or You. — Inf. 'Ua^at. — Part. i4fi.eyoSy -tj, -ov. 
 
 UfjLTjv, Uiro, etc. — Opt. UlfiTji/, Att. ioifiTiv, loio, a(t>w7o, etc. 
 
 Ind. e'lfjLTju Subj. S/xa(, a(pwfiaiy ^, aipy, ^rat, a^^rai 
 
 effTo, atpetcro Opt. trpooifj.Tji', •olo, -oIto, -oifie^a, -OiirS-e, 
 
 efro, at^etTo -oTcto {wpoeTTo, vpoeTo'^e, trpoeTino 
 
 e'l/itda, etc. are rarer forms) 
 
 Imp. ou (difoO, irpoov), second Pers. PI. 
 €(r&£ {&<j>€ir&e, vp6e(r^e), eaAta, etc.). 
 Inf. etr^cu. — Part, efieyos, •7], -ov. 
 
 Perf. fljiai, /lE^ci/iai; Inf. etaSiai, /ie^elff^ai. — Plup. e'i/iTjv, €T(ro, atpuiro, etc. 
 — Put. Ijo-o/uai. — Aor. I. riKdix.i)v (rare, § 173, 2). 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 A. I. rfarj;', P. e^rimi, etc. — Put. e^a-o/mt. — Verb. Adj.lriJs, ercoj (fiiferos). | 
 
 Eem. 3. Besides the two verbs ri^/u and 7i)/ii, only tlie following dialectic 
 verbs belong here, viz., 'AH-MI, AI-AH-MI (AE), (though Si5€Z<rt{v). from the 
 last is found in X.) ; Si'fiJM'" and AIH-MI. 
 
 i 181. (c) Verbs in -i, only eT/Ai ('I), to go. 
 
 Pkeuminart Eemaek. The verbs eTfii, to go, and elui, to be, are pre- 
 sented together (though the last, on account of its stem 'E2, does not belong 
 here), in order to exhibit to the eye the agreement and disagreement of th« two 
 verbs in their formation. 
 
 PRESENT. 1 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 (IfLi, to be 
 
 Subj. S 
 
 Ind.l. 
 
 cTfj.1, to go 
 
 Subj. ta 
 
 3. 
 D.2. 
 
 it 
 
 ^O-T.'(y) 
 
 1' 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 el 
 
 c?<n(y) 
 
 iroy 
 
 
 3. 
 
 4(Tt6v 
 
 9iT0V 
 
 3. 
 
 trov 
 
 Xtjtov 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 iaiJLfV 
 
 &fjL€y 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 Xfiev 
 
 iafi€y 
 
 2. 
 
 iOTf 
 
 ^Te 
 
 2. 
 
 rre 
 
 ?7JT6 
 
 3. 
 
 €iVf(y) 
 
 S>ffi{v) 
 
 3. 
 
 rao-i(>') 
 
 t«(rt(v) 
 
 Imp. S. 2. 
 
 r<r3-i 
 
 Inf. fli/cu 
 
 Imp. 
 
 'i^i, irp6siAi 
 
 Inf. Uyai 
 
 T. o- 
 
 e(rTw 
 
 
 
 (seld. ■jrp6sa) 
 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 ^ITTQV 
 
 Pai-t. Hv, oiaoL, 
 
 S. 
 
 Xtu> 
 
 Part. Uv, lov- 
 
 3. 
 
 tffTOiV 
 
 iv 
 
 D.2. 
 
 XtoV, ■Kp6siTOV 
 
 cra, I6v 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 ca-Te 
 
 G. ivTOS, 080-171 
 
 3. 
 
 irav 
 
 Gen. Uin-os, 
 
 3. 
 
 iffTtoffav 
 
 {irapciiv, irapov- 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 ire, Trp6sfre 
 
 loi&ffTJS, 
 
 
 (rare itrruv; 
 
 0*0, iraptfy, 
 
 3. 
 
 iTwtrav, ov 
 
 {■jrapi^y, irapt- 
 ovcaf TrapioVf 
 
 
 ivTosv, Plat. 
 
 G. irap6tfTos) 
 
 
 lovrtjov {Ituv 
 
 
 Legg.879,b.) 
 
 
 
 Aesch.E.32.) 
 
 G. TrapiSvTOs). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 181.] 
 
 VERBS IN 
 
 ■fU. 
 
 221 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 s 
 
 I. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 D.2. 1 
 
 
 3. 
 
 V 
 
 1. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ina._ 
 
 ?iv. Twos 
 
 Opt. 
 
 eiTiJ/ 
 
 Ind. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 ^€i(/ or §a, I went 
 
 Opt. 
 
 ioifiL or 
 loirjv 
 tois 
 U 
 
 XoiTOV 
 
 ioiTt)v 
 iotre 
 
 V*a (§ 116, 2) ■dfjs 2. ^cis and ^eio-ao 
 
 ^v (from ^6 »•) cJfj; 3. ^ci 
 
 ^(TTov (^Tov) etriToy D. 2. ^eiroy, us'ly proy 
 
 ^o-Trjx (^TTjv) «'-^Ti)c . 3. ^e(Tj)i/, " ^Trjj/ 
 
 ^ir;ite;'_ rfrj/itcv (seldom e?/tey) P. 1. rjsi/j.ey, " ?f;Uey 
 
 ^Te {9i(rTe) tfi)Te(seld.poet.eiT6) 2. ^eitc, " ^re 
 
 ^ira;" efrjirai' and ele)/ 3. 5eira!'(iT(rai'poet. 
 
 Fut. tffoiuu, I shall be, iari, or eirsi, tffTcu, etc. — Opt. iaoijiriv. — Inf. eireir&ai. 
 — Part, ^^jaeyos. — Verbal Adj. iffreov, ffw^trriop. 
 
 Middle Form : Pres. Ufxai, lecrai or Ir/, JTeTcu, etc., Imp. Uiro, Inf. UaStai, 
 Part. Ujievos: the Impf. U/iriv, Uiro, etc., signifying to hasten, ouglit 
 probably to be written with the rough breathing, which is strongly 
 confirmed by the manuscripts, and to be referred to '/7;/ni. — Verbal Adj. 
 It6s, iTeoif, rarer h"0T4ov. 
 
 Kemake 1. On the inclination of the Ind. of ci/ii, to be (except the second 
 Pers. e?), see % S3 (a). In compounds, the accent is on the preposition, as far back 
 as the general rules of accentuation permit, e. g. irdpetfju, Tripei, iripeaTi^v), etc. 
 Imp. irapHT&i, ^ivia^i; but irapTtv on account of the temporal augment, wapea-rai 
 on account of the omission of e (irapEVeTai), Trapetvat like infinitives with the 
 ending -vm, irapa, -ps, -f , etc., Trapare, irapelev, on account of the contraction ; 
 the accentuation of tlie Part, in compound words should be particularly noted, 
 e. g. TTaptliv, irapovffa, irapSy, Gen. irapSin-os (so also irapu&i/, Gen. irapiSvTos). 
 
 Rem. 2. The compounds of cT/ti, to go, follow the same rules as those of 
 fllii, to be ; hence several fomis of these two verbs are the same in compounds, 
 e. g. vdpeifu, irdpft, and ■irdp£iffi(v) (the last being third Pers. Sing, of el/ii and 
 third Pers. PI. of el/i-l) ; but Inf. irapievat, Part. Traptdv. 
 
 Rem. 3. The form elev, esto, be it so ! good! shortened from iXri and strength- 
 ened by a V, must be distinguished from the shortened form €?€>/ instead of 
 <f7|(roy of the third Pers. PI. Opt. Impf. — A secondaiy form, yet critically to be 
 rejected, of the third Pers. Imp. ^tb instead of ioTa, is found once in PI. Rp. 
 361, c, with the varying reading iarw. — The form of the first Pers. Impf. is 
 often ^, among the Attic poets, and sometimes also in Plato ; the foi"m ijpLtjv is 
 rare (Lys. 7, 34, X. Cy. 6. 1, 9). — The form of the second Pers. Impf. ^j is 
 found frequently in the later writers, and rarely in lyric passages of the Attic 
 poets. — The Dual forms with <r are preferred to those withont «• ; on the con- 
 trary, ^T6 is preferred to ^o-re (Aristoph.). 
 
 Rem. 4. The form of the third Pers. Sing. Impf. ^eic Instead of ^ei, from 
 ei/u, sometimes occurs, even before consonants, Ar. Plut. 696. irposrjeiv (in 
 Senarius) ; PI. Crit. p. 114, d. (in the best MSS.) ; jfci;/, PI. Grit. 117, e. (in tlie 
 best MSS.) ; ir/iopew, PI. Tim. 43, 6 ; avrieiv, ib. 60, c ; ottiJeiv, ib. 76, b. 
 
 Rem. 5. The Ind. Pres. of €?ki, to go, has regularly in the Attic prose- 
 tniters the meaning of the Fat. I shall or will go or come ; hence the Pres. is 
 supplied by ipx<>l>^ (§ l^^: ^'j the Inf and Part, have likewise a Pres. and 
 Fut. meaning. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
222 
 
 VERBS IN -IJI.I. 
 
 •i 182. 
 
 n. Verbs in -/ji which annex the Syllable vvv or vS to the 
 Stem-vowel and append to this the Personal-endings. 
 
 i 182. Formation of the Tenses of Verbs whose Stem 
 ends with u,, t, o, or with a Consonant. 
 
 A. Verbs whose Stem ends with o, t, or o. 
 
 Voice. 
 
 Tenses. 
 
 a. Stem in a. \ b. Stem in e. 
 
 c. Stem in o («). 
 
 Act. 
 
 Pres. 
 Impf. 
 Perf. 
 Plup. 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 ffKeSd-yyv-fju ' 
 l-trKcSi-viw-i' ' 
 hffKcSa-Ka 
 i-aKfSa-Keiv 
 
 Att. CKeda, -aSf -§ 
 i-aK&a-tra 
 
 Kope-viw-iu ' 
 i-Kope-vvO-y ' 
 Ke-ic6pe-Ka 
 i-Ke-nope-Kety 
 Kop4-ffa, 
 Att. KopZ, -CIS, -e! 
 i-KOpf-cra 
 
 iTTpd-yvv-iu ' 
 e-trrpti-yyv'V ' 
 ^-trrpw'Ka 
 
 i-OTpii-KelV 
 
 tttpii-aa 
 i-arpw-aa 
 
 Mid. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Impf. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 Plup. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 F.Pf. 
 
 Aor. 
 
 Pat. 
 
 i-ffK^Sa-vyv-fiTjy 
 
 i-ffxeSa-ir-iJuu 
 
 e-ffKeSti-tr-fiTji/ 
 
 Kop4-yyv-/uit 
 i-Kope-yyv-fiTty 
 Ke-K6pe-ir-iiat 
 e-Ke-Kope-tr-/i7iv 
 Kope-tr-oijuu 
 i-Kope-<r-inriv 
 Ke-Kope-tr-ofiaL 
 
 trTpii-yyi-lua 
 i-arpa-yyi-nriy 
 
 i-arpi-iiariv 
 
 Pass. 
 
 aKeSa-ff-^tro/juu 
 
 i-Kopi-a-d-i)y 
 Kope-a-MitTOjuu 
 
 i-aTpi-dnpi 
 irrpie-Miffoiuu 
 
 Verbal Adj. 
 
 <|-KfSo-(r-T(!s 
 iriceSa-ff-TfOS 
 
 Kopc-ff-r6s 
 Kopc-a-rios 
 
 ffrpoa-rSs 
 arpa-reos. 
 
 'And irKeSa-mia, ivKeH-vvvov — 
 trrpi-mvov (v always short). 
 
 -Kope-yyiu, i-Kope-yyvoy — arpa-yria, 4- 
 
 B. Verbs whose Stem ends with a Coilsonant. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 iK-\v-iu,' perdo, Sx-Xii-fiai, pereo, 
 
 6fJi-yv-/jLi ' 
 
 Sfi-yii-fial 
 
 Impf. 
 
 6\-\v-y ' ah-Kv-fiiiv 
 
 SH-yO-y ' 
 
 afiryi-foiy 
 
 Perf. I. 
 
 i\-;i\e-Ka ('OAEC), perdidi, 
 
 ifi-d/io-Ka 
 
 Ofl-lillO-tUU 
 
 
 4 124, 2. 
 
 ("OMOn) 
 
 
 Perf. II. 
 
 S\-a\-a, peril, 
 
 § 124, 2. 
 
 
 Plup. I. 
 
 o\-cii\e-K€tv, perdideram. 
 
 6ii-oii6-Keiy 
 
 hfji-wii6-fi.-i\y 
 
 Plup. II. 
 
 oA.-dJA.-eiv, perieram, 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 6\-a, -eTj, -e* 6\-ovfiai, -c? 
 
 on-ovftca, -ei 
 
 
 Aor. I. 
 
 HKe-ira A. II. u\-6iiiiy 
 
 dJjao-ffn 
 
 uLLO-frdiiTiy 
 
 
 
 A. I. P. a>ii6-(r-^v {et afU^y)] 
 
 
 
 F. I. P. i/iotr-d^troiuu. \ 
 
 1 
 
 And oWi-a, &X\v-oy — ofivv-ai, i 
 
 twv-oy (always i 
 
 ')• 1 
 
 Remark. 'Oaac^i comes by assimilation from SA-yC/iu (§ 18, Hem.). For an 
 example of a stem-ending with a mute, see SelKyvfii above, under the para 
 digms (§ 175). The Part. Perf. Mid. or Pass, of «/.to/« is ofu,>iw<rfi.4yos. The 
 remaining forms of the Perf. and Plup. commonly omit the o- among the Attio 
 writers, c. g. ifu&fMnai, o/x^fioTo. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 183.] SUMMARY OP SOME VERBS IN -/il. 223 
 
 Summary or the Verbs BELONaiNS iiese. 
 
 The Stem enda, 
 
 A. In a Vowel and assumes -yyii, 
 
 } 183. (a) Verbs whose Stem, ends in a. 
 
 1. K£pa-i/vi}-/xi (poetic secondary fonn Kipvaxa, Kipyqiu; Epic and 
 poet. K€pa.u}), to mix, Fut. Kepaa-w, Att. K(pS>; Aor. e/cepSo-a; Perf. 
 KiKpSiKa ; Mid. to mix for one's self, Aor. lK€pa.<j&p,riv ; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass. KiKpa.fi.ax (KEKepacr/tot, Aiiacr. 29, 13 ; Inf. KtK€p3.(r^ai, Luc. 
 Dial. Meretr. 4, 4); Aor. Pass. eKpa&r]v, Att. also iKepdaSTjv 
 (Metathesis, i 166, Rem.). 
 
 2. Kpi[x,a.-vvv-p.i., to hang, Fiit. Kptjidata, Att. Kpsfiui ; Aor. iKpipM- 
 era ; Mid. or Pass. Kpefrnvvvfiai, to hang one's self, or be hung (but 
 KplfiMfuu, to hang, § 179, 5) ; (Perf. Mid. or Pass. KiKpifw-pju in 
 later Avriters;) Fut. Pass. Kpefma-'^TJa-op.ai; Aor. iKpcpMa-Srjv, I was 
 hung, or I hung. 
 
 3. TrEra-wv-ziij to spread out, to open, Fut. ireraa-ui, Att. ?r£TS; 
 
 Aor. lirhaua (Perf. Act. imriTOKa, Diod.) ; Perf Mid. or Pass. 
 niirraixai (} 155, 2) (TrcTCTacrfiot, non- Attic and Luc); Aor. Pass. 
 iTrerdcrSrjv. 
 
 4. <nce8a-vvii-/it, to scatter, Fut. o-KtScwro), Att. cr/ccSS ; Aor. eo-Kc- 
 Seo-a ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ecnceSacr/Aai ; Aor. Pass. ia-KeSdo-Srjv. 
 
 § 184. (b) FerSs whose Stem ends in «. 
 
 Pheliminaey Remark. The verbs ermiu, tr^eyrCiit, and also (livvv/u 
 (§ 186), do not properly belong here, since their stem originally ended in <r, 'ES- 
 (comp. ves-tire), 2BES- (comp. StrjSeir-Tos), Zn3- (comp. (ar-T'fip, (air-Tpov, (Jia- 
 T-qs, (u(r-T6s) ; but by the omission of the o-, they become analogous to verbs in 
 -£ and -0. 
 
 1. t-wv-jxi, to clothe, in prose d.p/^ihn/vp.i, Impf. dix.<l>iivwv with- 
 out Aug. ; Fut. dfitjiiicra), Att. a/jitfjiui ; Aor. ■^/i<^ieo-a ; Perf. Act. 
 wanting; Perf. Mid. or Pass, ^/x^tecr/wu, -^pLipCea-ai, ^iJi.(f>ie(TTaL, etc., 
 Inf. ^/i<^teo-^at ; Fut. Mid. d/tt^wo-o/Aat. (Aug. §5 126, 3. and 230.) 
 The vowel of the Prep, is not elided in the Common language, 
 hence also hriiaacr^ai, X Cy. 6. 4, 6. 
 
 2. ^i-wv-iJLi, to boil, Trans., Fut. ^eW ; Aor. e^ea-a ; Perf. Mid. 
 or Pass. l^ea-pM ; Aor. Pass, i^ia-^rjv. — (^eu, on the contrary, ia 
 usually intransitive). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
)>24 SUMMARY OP SOME VERBS IN Jlit. [^ 185-187 
 
 3. Kopi-wv-fjii, to satiate, Fut. Kopia-io, Att. Kopu>; Aor. tKopeoraj 
 Aor. Mid. iKopacfafjiTp/ ; Perf. Micl. or Pass. KiKopttrpM. ; Aor. Pass 
 iKopicr^ufv. 
 
 4. a-pi-wv-p.1, to extinguish, Fut. ir§i<T<ii ; first Aor. ea-jSecra, I 
 extinguished; second Aor. fcr^r]v, I ceased to burn; Perf. ea-j3r)Ka, 
 I/mvs ceased to burn. — Mid. o-pivvvpuxi, to cease to burn, intrans. 
 Fut. crjS^o-o^ai ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. Icr^^tjpju. ; Aor. Pass, etr^eo- 
 ^riv; Fut. Pass. tj^vjbri<Top.tu.. No other verb in -w/xi has a 
 second Aor. Act. (\ 191, 2). 
 
 5. crTopi-wv-p.L, to spread out (shortened form a-Topyv/j-i, Poet, 
 and X. Cy. 8. 8, 16), Fut. iTTopia-oi, Att. o-to/jS;- Aor. iaropecra', 
 Mid. to spread out for one's self. The other tenses are formed 
 from arpwwvp.i; i<TTpus(r6.p,-(]v; tcrrputfiai, Io-touiStjv, crrpwros (non- 
 Att. i(TT6pi(Tp.iu, icrropicr^r]v, and ia-rop-^Srp/). See § 182. 
 
 § 185. (c) Verbs whose Stem ends in i. 
 
 ri-vyv-iu (TI-), to pay, to expiate, Mid. Tl-vm-iuu, to (jet pay, to punish, to avenge, 
 secondary Epic form of -rlvw and rlm/iai. — In Attic poetiy, the Mid. is often 
 found, and with one v, itnpai. 
 
 § 186. (d) Verbs in u, with the o lengthened into u. 
 
 1. ^w-wv-fiL, to gird, Fut. ^ma-a>; Perf. c^wko, Paus. ; Aor. I^mo-o; 
 Mid. to gird one's self, Aor. Mid. itfMxa.p.tjv ; Perf Mid. or Pass. 
 
 liflXTpJXl (J) 131). 
 
 2. pw-wv-pi, to strengthen, Fut. pmo-o) ; Aor. ippmra ; Perf Mid. 
 or Pass. IpprnpaL, Imp. ippaxro, vale, farewell, Inf. IppSus^ax; Aor. 
 Pass, ippiitr^v (§ 131) ; Fut. Pass, puo-^^cro/iiai. 
 
 3. arpii-wv-p.!. (^ 182), to spread out, Fut. ffrpuxroi; Aor. icnpuf 
 (TO., etc. See (rTopiwv-pi,i ({ 184, 5). 
 
 4. y(pdi-wv-pt, to color, Fut. ^p^o-o) ; Aor. l^ymira ; Perf Mid. oi 
 Pass. KexpiMTpai ; Aor. Pass. ixpiia-Stjv. 
 
 B. Verbs whose Stem 3nds in a Consonant and assumes -cO. 
 
 § 187. (a) In a Mute. 
 
 1. ayvu-pi, to break, Fut. a^w; Aor. ea^a, Inf afai (Part. Lys. 
 100, 5. KareafavTcs with the Aug.) ; second Perf tayo, I am 
 hroJcen; Mid to break for one's self, Aor. la.ia.p.yp/ ; Aor. Pass 
 
 ia-ym/ (Auff., 5 122, 4V 
 
 // V >='^ '■'^'^''^ J- Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 1S7.J SUMMARY OP S01HT3 VERBS IN -fU. 223 
 
 2. SeiK-vv- [jLi, see i 175. 
 
 3. dpy-vv-fiL (or eipyco), to «AMiS in, Firt. etp^o); Aor. cTp^a, Inf. 
 %lpi(u, Part. Ip^as <P1. Polit. 285, b.), ^eptcplavres (Th. 5, 11), 
 ^wcpfavTos <P1. Ep. 5. 461, b), Subj. KoSdp^'; (with the variation 
 KoSepfijs), PI. Gorg. 461, d; Aor. Pass, cipx^riv; Perf. dpyp.cu. 
 (Bwt etpyo), etpfo), elpfo, eip^^v, to shut out, etc.) 
 
 4. ^evy-vv'ij.1, to join together, Put. ^eu'fu ; Aor. I^eu^a ; Mid. to 
 join to or /or one's self, Fut. ^Etlfo/iot ; Aor. it,£v^aiJLr]v ; Perf. Mid. 
 oar Pass e^£/iy/*(u; Aor. Pass. i^evxSrjv, and more frequently 
 ■e^iSyijv. 
 
 6. ,fi.l.y-in>-fii,L, to mix (iMojw, Secondary form), Fut. jut^o); Aor. 
 «/xtfa, fuiai; Perf. /J-i/jCixa. (Polyb.) ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. nip-iy/jtAxi, 
 ^e/At;(5at ; Aor. Pass. i^ix^W' ^^'^ i/uytjv ; Fut. Pass. fj.Lx^TQcrofjMi ; 
 Fut. Perf. /ie/xifo/ia6. 
 
 6. oty-vii-^t, usually as a compound: (Tlie Attic use of the 
 form oiyi/O/At is not certain) avoCyvvfii, SiocyvvfjL.t (but instead, 
 avoCyuy, Siotyu), are more frequently used in the Pres. and dvcuiyov 
 always in the Impf.), to open, Fut. dvoifo) ; Aor. avew^a, avdliai (in 
 X. Hell, rp/oiyov, rivoiia, signifying to put to sea, to weigh anchor') ; 
 first Perf. (xvla);^a, I have opened; second Perf. di/coiya, / stand 
 opeM, instead of which Att. dveuy/Aat; Impf. Mid. dveajyo/tiji/ ; Aor. 
 Pass. aviiLx^v, dfotX'^vai. (Aug. h 122, 6.) Verb. Adj. di/oi/creos. 
 
 7. 6[L6py-vv-fLi, to wipe off, Fut 6fx,6p^w ; Aor. &[wp^a ; Mid. to 
 icipe off from one's self; Fut. ofiApiofwj.; Aor. u)y.opidfi.T]v } Aor. 
 Pass. oiix,6px^v. 
 
 8. TTTy-yu-Zuj to fiz, fasten, freeze, YaX. Trgfm; Aor. hn]^a; first 
 Perf. Trhrrfxa; I have fastened ; second Perf vkTcrpja., I standfast, 
 am frozen ; Mid. irq^vv^w.i, I stick fast ; Perf. TriTnjyuai, I statid 
 fast; Aox. Pass, iirayrjv (more seldom eiriJx'^Tjv) ; second Fut. 
 Pass. ■Kayrjcrofi.aA.. Verbal Adj. TnjKros. 
 
 9. priy-vv-ju, to rend, Fut. p-q^w; Aor. tpprj^a.; second Perf 
 ^po}ya, I am rent {h 140, Rem. 3); Aor. Mid. IppyiUiajv; Aor. 
 Pass. ippa.yy)v (epp-^x^rjv rare) ; second Fut. pa.yria-op.aj.. 
 
 10. ^pa.y-vv-p.1 (commonly ^pdxra-ui, (jipdrrui, 5 143, 1), to break 
 £mpf i4>pd.yTniv (Thuc. 7, 74. S. Ant. 241); Fut. <^pdfa); Aor. 
 E^pa|a; Perf. Mid. or Pass. ■iT&j>payi).aj.; Aor. Pass. e<t>pax^ri> 
 {i(l>pa,yr}v first used among the later writers). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
226 VERBS. '^Kiifwj, A«D ^/^at. [{§188, 189 
 
 i 188. (b) Verbs ttvhose Stem ends in a Liquid. 
 
 1. ip-vv-iim (Epic and also in Plato), to take, obtain, secondary form of afpo. 
 luu, and used only in particular phrases, to obtain, to acquire, namely, u. reward, 
 spoils, etc. Impf. ^pvvii.tiv. The remaining forms come from aXpofuit. 
 
 2. KT€t-vi)-/xi, commonly written ktCwv/u in the MSS., to put to 
 death, Att. prose secondary form of ktclvoi, is used in the Pres. 
 and Impf The stem is KTEIN-, lengthened from KTEN-. 
 The V of the stem is omitted on account of the diphthong (§ 169, 
 Rem. 1). 
 
 3. oA.-Au-/it (instead of oX-vu-fii), to destroy. See § 182, B. In 
 prose, only in compounds. 
 
 4. ofh-vv-iu, to swear. See k 182, B. 
 
 5. op-vv-fJiL (poet), to rouse (i 230). 
 
 6. oTop-iai-/At, to spread out. See o-Topiwvij.i, i 184, 5. 
 
 } 189. Inflection of the two forms of the Perf. Kci/iai 
 and ^ii,ai. 
 
 Preliminaet Eemakk. The two forms of the Perf. xet/iat and ^/tai, 
 are so essentially diiferent, in their formation, from the other verbs in -/ti, that 
 they require to be treated by themselves. 
 
 a. Kct/Atti, to lie. 
 
 Ka/ioi, properly, / have laid myself down, hence I lie dawn; 
 then Pass. I have been laid down, I am lying down (e. g. avaxa- 
 ixax, I am laid up, i. e. consecrated, o-vyKea-aj., it lias been agreea 
 upon, compositum est, constat, but awTiSuTai im rivos, it hai 
 been agreed by some one) ; this verb is a Perf without reduplica- 
 tion, from the stem KEI- 'contracted from KEE-). 
 
 Perf. Ind. xeiiiai, KcT<rai, k^itcu, Kef/tffto, Kftir&s, KeTi/701 ; 
 
 Subj. KfieiUU, KCJ), KiTITM, OtC. 
 
 Imp. /ceTo-o, Kcftrftoi, etc. ; — Inf. keict&oi ; — Part. K^lfums. 
 Impf. Ind. 4k4jj,tiv, ^kucto, e/ceiro, third Pers. PI. tKeivTO. 
 
 Opt. Reoifnjv, Kioto, K4oiro, etc. 
 Fid. KeitroiMi. 
 
 Compounds o>/<{itei,uai, KariKei/uu, KariiKeicroi, etc.; — Inf KoTaKiir&ai ; — Imp 
 
 KariK^io'o, eyttcitro. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
M 190, 191.] VERBS IN -(1) WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE IN -/it. 2?7 
 
 { 190. b. ''H/iat, to sit. 
 
 1, *H/iat, properly, I have seated myself, I Jiave been secxtcd, 
 hence, I sit (Ion. and poetic, also used of inanimate objects, 
 instead of iSpij/Aat, I have been fixed, established) ; this verb is 
 a Perf. of the poet. Aor. Act. elcra, to set, to establish. The stem 
 is 'HA- (comp. ^cr-rai. instead of ijS-Tai, according to i 17, 5, and 
 the Lat. sed-eo). 
 
 Remakk 1. The active Aorist-forms of eTcra are dialectic (§ 230) and poet,, 
 but the Mid. signifying to erect, to establish, belongs also to Attic prose, eltrd/jajv; 
 Part, tlaifiems (Th. 3, 58, krainevos) ; Imp. tVoi, co-ffoi (iipe<raai) ; Fut. poetic 
 faoiim, iiriroiMi (iipiffiroiJM). The defective forms of this verb are supplied by 
 idpta, 
 
 Perf. Ind. ^/«ti, Jiucu, ^arai, ^/ie&a, ^a^e, ^vrai j 
 
 Imp. ?i<ro, Tjo-ftdj, etc.; — Inf. ?<r;^oi; — Part. Imtros. 
 
 Plup. ^hift ^"Oj ?TTO, fiiK^a, 5i<r&c, ^VTO. 
 
 2. In prose, the compound xa^/iai is commonly used instead 
 of the simple. The inflection of the compound differs from the 
 simple in never taking o- in the third Pers. Sing., and in the 
 Plup., only when it has the temporal Augment : — 
 
 Perf. Htteijiiioi, KoSijo-ai, iciSfv'rai, etc.; — Subj. Ko^S/ioi, koSj, koS^- 
 
 Toi, etc. ; — Imp. xi^ao, etc.; — Inf. Koaijs^ai; — Part. koS^- 
 tixvos, 
 Plup. iKo^im" an^ Ko^nv") iiti^Titro and ica^ffo, E/c(i&rjTo and 
 
 KaATJffTO, etc.; — Opt. Ko^oiintv, Kd&oto, xi^otra, etc. 
 Eem. 2. The Opt. forms : Kc&^ia\v, -fo, -fro, etc. are doubtful. — The 
 defective forms of ?^ai are supplied by eCea^cu, or ifeo-ftoi (prose Ko&eCeirdca, 
 Koa/feo-aoi). 
 
 VbBBS in -a, -WHICH FOLLOW THE ANALOGY OP VeKBS IN -/U, IN FOKMINO 
 THE SECOND AoE. AcT. AND MiD., THE PkES. AND PeKF. AoT. 
 
 { 191. I. Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 
 
 1. Several verbs wth the characteristic a, e, o, v, form a 
 second Aor. Act. and (though rarely) a second Aor. Mid., ac- 
 cording to the analogy of verbs in -/ai, — this tense being without 
 the mode-vowel, and appending the personal-endings to the 
 ptem. But all the remaining forms of these verbs are like 
 verbs in -w. 
 
 2. The formation of this second Aor. Act., through all the 
 modes and participials is like that of the second Aor. Act. of 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
928 
 
 VEKBS IN -U) WITH TENSES LIKE THOSE .« -fU. [i 191 
 
 verbs in -/it. The characteristic-vowel, with some exceptions, 
 IS lengthened, as in ia-rrjv, viz. 5. and e into ■>], o into w, i and i; 
 into I and ij. This lengthened vowel remains, as in ea-njy, 
 Ihroughont the Ind., Imp., and Inf. The third Pers. PL in -tjo-av 
 (Char, a) and -wav shortens the vowel, when the poets use the 
 abridged form in -v, instead of -crav, e. g. eySav, tSvv. The Subj., 
 Opt., and Part, with some exceptions, which will be noticed in 
 the following tables, are lilie verbs in -jj-l, e. g. ^aCrjv {a-Tuir]v), 
 a-^drjv {Sdrjv), yvoujv [Boirjv), yvov? (Sow). The Imp., liise ot^&i, 
 in the second Pers. Sing., takes the ending' -3l, and the stem 
 vowel remains long tlirough all the persons ; in compounds of 
 jSatVw, /Brj^L is also shortened into j8d, e. g. Kanx^a, irpo^a, e'ifia^ 
 Ifi^a, cTTtySct instead of Karo^ij^i, etc. 
 
 Modes a- Characteris. a 
 
 b. Characteris. e 
 
 c. Characteris. o 
 
 d. Character, C 
 
 ana 
 
 BA-n, ^aivw, 
 
 2BE-n, o-jSeWujui, 
 
 rNO-n, yiyvdcr- 
 
 J--W, 
 
 Persona. 
 
 te (/&. 
 
 io extinguish. 
 
 icui, to know. 
 
 to wrap up. 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 
 e-jSig-y, / vjent, 
 
 i<r^-nv, I ceased to 
 
 iyviev, Ihnem, 
 
 €5uy, I went in 
 
 2. 
 
 S-Pri-s 
 
 ^(T^Tis [barn, 
 
 tyvtas 
 
 eSus [ortBidcr, 
 
 3. 
 
 I-/37I 
 
 ia^-i) 
 
 eyyt: 
 
 ^SD 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 e-j877-Toy 
 
 t(r^i]roir 
 
 eyi/QiToy 
 
 eSuTOX' 
 
 3. 
 
 i-0-fl-rTiv 
 
 daQiiTTiy 
 
 iyytitTTlv 
 
 e8liTr)V 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 e-fiTI-fiey 
 
 trrfi-rifiev 
 
 eyvafjLey 
 
 edvfiey 
 
 2. 
 
 £-;8rj-Te 
 
 e(r^7]Te 
 
 eyyatre 
 
 eSuTE 
 
 3. 
 
 e-^r}-(Tay 
 
 ifT^Titrav 
 
 eyyw(ray 
 
 ESuo'ai' 
 
 
 (Poet. €'/3w) 
 
 
 (Poet, ^yyay) 
 
 (Poet, rscy) 
 
 Subj. S. 
 
 j3w, Pfis, $v ' 
 
 afiSi, ris, p ' 
 
 yya, yy^s, yy^f^ 
 
 Sua, 51, 5 ' 
 
 D, 
 
 ^rJToy 
 
 (T/S^Toy 
 
 yyatroy 
 
 SuTJTOI' 
 
 P. 
 
 ffauev, fire. 
 
 a-pafiey, ^t€. 
 
 yvu^cy, wre. 
 
 Siufiey. 
 
 
 wtrt{i') 
 
 Qj(ri[v) 
 
 aKrt{v) 
 
 ■nre, i)i<rt{y) 
 
 Opt. S. l- 
 
 ^ailji/ 
 
 V0eiriv 
 
 yvoii]v ^ 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^airfS 
 
 audits 
 
 yvo'njs 
 
 
 3. 
 
 pd-n 
 
 a-$elri 
 
 71/0177 
 
 
 D. 2. 
 
 fiaiTiTov Ct atTov 
 
 a-^elriTOv et elrov 
 
 yyoirjToy et orroy 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Pmi\rriv et aW-rtv 
 
 a0iiilTr\v et e^TTjv 
 
 yymi)TTiy et olrrjy 
 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 ^cdTjfjLGP et aifjL^v 
 
 v$dtjfj.ey at elfjxy 
 
 yyoirif-ey et oTfisy 
 
 
 2. 
 
 ^atrire et cure 
 
 <r;8e(l)T£ ct CITE 
 
 yyoiTjTe et oire 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ^ahf (seldom 
 ^atri<rav) 
 
 {TjSetey 
 
 yveUv (rarely 
 yyolTiffav) 
 
 
 Imp. S. 
 
 ^S&i, -fiTa'' 
 
 (r/3i)&i, i^TB ' 
 
 yy&^tf (6t«'' 
 
 SS&i, iSrai ' 
 
 D. 1. 
 
 jStjtoc, ■^tw;/ 
 
 o-jS^TOj/, i^Twy 
 
 yyuToy, tiroiy 
 
 SOtoi-, iray 
 
 P. 2. 
 
 /SlJTE 
 
 (T^^re 
 
 yywre 
 
 Bute 
 
 3. 
 
 piirairav and 
 
 fT^ilTQKrav and 
 
 yydraiTay and 
 
 SuTWffai' et 
 
 
 fidfrap 
 
 a'^e^'Twi' 
 
 yySyruv 
 
 Svyrwy 
 
 Inf. 
 
 fifimi 
 
 trjS^j'at 
 
 yvwyai 
 
 Svyai 
 
 Part. 
 
 0&Sj atra, av 
 
 o-^efs, eio-o, ek 
 
 yvo^s, oD<ra, 6v 
 
 Sis, S<ro, iy 
 
 
 G. fidl'TOS 
 
 G. crj8ei/Tos 
 
 G. yy^yros 
 
 G. Siyros. 
 iiu,. ■ 
 
 ' Compo 
 
 unds, e. g. avaPa, avaMs, etc. ; otto 
 
 ' Aeschyl. Suppl. 2.30 (215) avyyvifri ; but i 
 
 a the Mid. form a 
 
 vyyrdiTO. 
 'aSu^t. 
 
 ' Compounds, e. .g. i.vifii]S)i, wo/Sjitc ; air6at. 
 
 illSn ; !ic£7V(o&i ; a 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
)i 192, 193. 1 VERBS IN 'to LIKE VEUBS IN -/U. 229 
 
 Hemakk. The Opt. form Soiji/ (instead of Sui'rjy) is not found in tlie Attic 
 dialect, bat in the Epic (§ 227). ^ 
 
 '5 192. Summary of Verbs with a second Aor. like 
 Verbs in -/it. 
 
 Besides tlie Verbs mentioned above, some others have this form : — 
 
 1. 8iSpti(7ttm, to run awag {\ 161, 10; Aor. (APA-) ISpSv, -as, -a, -d/iev, -oTf, 
 •aaav (iSpav Poet.), Subj. Spa, Sp^s, Spf, Sparov, Spaiiey, Spare, Spu(rt{i'), Opt, 
 Spalriv, Imp. Sfa&i, -iju. Inf. Spavat, Part. 5pdr, -Sira, -ay, Gen. Spdnros, 
 
 2. *^TO/>«j, Jo^y {§ 166, 29), Aor. (OTA-) ^ttttji'. Inf. Trrrimi, Part.Trrels; Aor 
 Mid. iiTTiifi-rjv, irTaor^ai, 
 
 3. vplcur^ai, see § 179, 6. 
 
 4. (TKcAAu or trKe\ia, to dry, second Aor. (2KAA-) f(rK\riv, to wither, Intrans., 
 Tnf. (TKXrjyai, Opt. aKKai-i)V. 
 
 5. <p^i,-vu, to come before, to anticipate (^ 158, 7), Aor. i^driv, (pdijyai, tp^is, 
 
 6. Kaiu, to burn. Trans. (§ 154, 2), Aor. (KAE-) ixdriy, I burned, Intrans. ; ^iit 
 (irst Aor. licouiro, Trans. 
 
 7. lieu, to flow (§ 154, 2), Aor. ('PrE-) ^^tw, Iflx>wed. 
 
 8. xa''p". to rejoice (§ 166, 32), Aor. (XAPE-) ix&pnv. 
 
 9. oKiffKofiat, to be taken, Aor. (*AAO-) riKoty and eoLKuv (§ 16', 1), aKwyai^ 
 «A.w, -$s, -$, etc., aKolriv, a\ois (always a, except in the Ind.). 
 
 10. ^la'w, to live, Aor. i^iap, Sulg. fiiH, -Ss, -^, etc.. Opt. fii^tiv (not pioiriy, 
 as yyalriv, to distinguish it from the Opt. Impf. jSio^tjv), Inf piatvai, Part. /Sioiij 
 [oDtra, oSy] ; but the cases of |3«n5j are supplied by the first Aor. Part, ffuiras. 
 Thus: h>fP'uav, Iretamed to life, from avaPttivKo/iai (§ 161, 3). The Pres. and 
 Impf. of fitia are but little used by the Attic writers j for these tenses, they em- 
 ploy (a j besides these tenses, only the Put. f^iTEic was in good use among Attic 
 writers ; the remaining tenses were bon'owed from 0i6(e ; thus, Pres. f« ; Impf. 
 (Cay (5 137, 3) ; Put. Pidrofiai, more rarely Cti<ra; Aor. ifiiay (X. 0. 4, 18, has 
 also ipiaa-ey) ; Perf. p^ffiaKa ; Perf. Mid. or Pass. fitPlaiTat, Part. PePitcfih'os. 
 
 11. (pirn (0 or li), to produce, second Aor. e<pvy, Intrans., to be produced, be bom, be 
 naturally, (pSyai, ipvs, Subj. <pva (Opt. wanting in the Attic dialect) ; but the first 
 Aor. itpiitra. Trans. I produced; Put. ipiaw. Trans. / ivill produce. The Perf. 
 ire<j>vKa, I am produced, also has an intransitive sense, so also the Pres. Mid. 
 ^iiofLoi ', Put. tpvffofiau 
 
 Ekmaek. Here also belong the forms o-x«'s and (rxoivv of the second 
 Aor. iaxo" from 6X«, to have (§ 166, 14), and irji&i of the second Aor. tTrioi' 
 from ttiVb, 1o drink (§ 158, 5). 
 
 i 193. II. Perfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 Tlie Attic dialect, in imitation of the Epic, forms a few Per- 
 fects of pure verbs immediately from the stem, e. g. AI-O, ta 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
230 
 
 VERBS IN -<i> LIKE VEEBS IN -/il. 
 
 [i 193 
 
 fear, 8e'-8i-a, then rejecting the raode-vowel, in the Dual and PL 
 Ind. Perf. and Plup., and to some extent in the Inf., e. g. Se-Sc 
 fiev instead of Se-SC-a-nef. In this way, these forms of the Perf 
 and Plup. become wholly analogous to the Pres. and Impf. of 
 verbs in -/tt, e. g. i-<rra-[jiev. The stem- vowel remams short, e. g. 
 SiSifiev, TerXa/AEv, rerXavai ; but in the third Pers. PI. Perf, the 
 mode-vowel a is not rejected, e. g. Se-8t-a<Tt; with verbs in -ao, 
 however, a is contracted with the stem- vowel, e. g. Te-rXd-am = 
 Te-rXa-crt. 
 
 Ebmark 1. Except the forms of Ain and '/(Tttjiui, all the Perfects of this 
 kind belong almost exclusively to poetry, particularly to the Epic. The Sing. 
 Se'Sia is not Attic. 
 
 Ebm. 2. The Imp. of these Perfects is also in use, and, since it not only 
 wants the mode-vowel, but takes the ending -^i in the second Pers. Sing., it is 
 wholly analogous to the forms in -fu. So the Inf. Both append their termi- 
 nations to the short stem-vowel ; ScSUvcu is an exception. The Subj. Perf. and 
 the Opt. Plup. of verbs whose stem-vowel is a, are formed like verbs in -/u, since 
 the Subj. Perf. admits the contraction of the stem-vowel with the termination, 
 and the Opt. Plup. ends in -aliiy, e. g. iffrd-a, itrra, -pr, etc., TeT\aiiiv. The 
 Part, of verbs in -da contracts the stem-vowel a with the ending -ds and -(fj, 
 e. g. earads = kards, i(rra-6s = eOTis and cittos, and also have a peculiar 
 feminine form in -oj<ro, e. g. effxSo-a ; all the Cases retain the a, e. g. Icrraros, 
 IffTt^tn^s, etc. 
 
 Rem. 3. The form resolved by e is retained in some participles, in the Ionic 
 dialect, e. g. iands, standing firm ; so from ridvriKa, redveiis f never redfiis) 
 together with rcAiniKtis, is retained in the Attic dialect also. In these forms, 
 ai remains in all the Cases, e. g. 
 
 eCTetSs, ItTTefflffo, ^ffreds, Gen. efrrewTos, -dtrijs, 
 re^yeds, Te&j'€W(ra, Tc^yeds, Gen. re^yeuros, -dffTjs. 
 
 B40nKa and rirXtiKa never have this form of the participle. 
 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 PliiperfecL i 
 
 Ind. S. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 D. 2. 
 3. 
 P. 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Se-Si-o 
 
 U-Sl-as 
 
 Si-Si-e(v) 
 
 Be'-Si-Toj' 
 
 Sc'-Sj-Tf 
 
 5e-Slf-ucri(;/) 
 
 iSfSteiv 
 iSeSiToy 
 
 iS4Si<rav {iS^SUo-av) 
 
 'E-2TA-A 
 
 e-OTa-Toj/ 
 
 e-ffra-TOV 
 
 (-ara-iiey 
 
 e-ffra-Te 
 
 e-lTTa-tTi{y) 
 
 iarceroy 
 
 i<TT&T7t» 
 
 ea-Tafiey 
 
 etTTare 
 
 eOTaaav 
 
 Imp. 
 Subj. 
 
 Se'-5i-ai, SeBft-a), etc. 
 5e-S/-a, -Tjj, -rj, etc. 
 
 €-<rTo-&i, etc., 3 Pers. PI. 
 eo'TaToja'oi' and -dyruv 
 
 Inf. 
 Part. 
 
 Se-Si-eVoi 
 
 5€-S(-£5s, -wa, -OS, Gen. -Aros 
 
 k-tTTa-vat 
 
 k-o-rds, -aaa, -is (■ds'i) 
 Gen. -Stos, -doits 
 
 Subj. Pf. 
 Opt. Plup. 
 
 etrrwy ps, -ijy etc, 
 
 iffTal-qv, Dual taTaiiyrov and -oTtoi', PI. karairnKv and -oj/ao', 
 etc., third Pers. PI. karaitev. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
}J 194, 195.] VERBS WITH A PERP. LIKE VERBS IN -/t«. 231 
 
 Rem. 4. The Opt. Plup. third Pers. Sing. SeSieln, PI. Phaedr. 251, a. is re- 
 stored according to traces in the MSS. The Plup. of foTTjyui, in this form nevct 
 takes the strengthened augment ei. — The Imp. Perf. ea-ra^i, etc., and the Opt. 
 Plup. emalriv, etc., are poetic only. But the Inf. IotStoi is in constant use ; 
 yet lo-TijKeVoi is^very seldom ; also the Part, itrriis, -axra, is far move frequent 
 than iarriKtis, -v7a ; the neuter €(rT7)K<fs, on the contrary, is more frequent than 
 iffTos. Instead of the Ind. Sing. Perf., Plup., and Part, of ScSta, the forms 
 of Se'SoiKo are more frequent ; besides the Indie. Perf. and Plnp., particularly 
 in the Sing., the Inf. and Part, were used. 
 
 } 194. Summary of Verbs with a Perfect like Verbs 
 
 in -[11. 
 
 Besides the two verbs above, the following have this form of the Perfect: — 
 
 1. ylyvo/iai, to become, TEFAA (stem TA): Perf. (Sing, yeyom, -as, -€),yeya 
 JEJ', yeyare, y4ydaa-i[y), Inf. yeydfifv (Epic), Part, yeycij, yeyaaa, ytyis, Gen 
 yeySrros. 
 
 2. Paiva, to go, Perf. 04$riKa, BKBAA: PI. $40aiifv, -are, -a(ri{y), third Pers, 
 PI. Subj. in0ePa<rt[v) (PI. Phaedr. 225, e). Inf. jScjS&'oi, Part, 0€0iis (X Hell. 
 7. 2, 3), /Se^wo (i8£j8£(ra, PI. Phaedr. 254, b), Pefids, Gen. yStjStSros ; Plup. ifii- 
 Ba/iev, -are, -aaav. These abridged forms are almost wholly poetic and dia- 
 lectic (§ 230). 
 
 3. Miaica, to die, Te&njKo, TE0NAA : PI. re^m/Kv, Te&yoTe, Tfdm<n{v), Imp. 
 TedvS&i, Part. Te&yjiKdSr, Tf&i/tiKv7a, Te^vriK6s, or re^eds, Te&veuaa (Lys. and 
 Dem.), Te&ceJy, Inf. re^&vai (Aesch. re^vavu from TeStvcxvai) ; Plup. ire^va- 
 7m>, Opt. TcSmahiv. 
 
 4. TAAQ, to bear, Perf. rir\t]ica, TETAAA: Dual rirXaTov, PI. TfrKa/iey, 
 TtV\oTE, TeT\a<ri{v), Imp. TtrXofti, -Sra, etc., Subj. wanting, Inf. TerxSroi, but 
 Part. TeT\riKiis ; Plup. irfTKcifiev, ^TerAoTe, iThXcurcu', Dual ^TerKaToii, etetAS 
 rriv. Opt. TcT\al7iv. 
 
 5. Here belong the two participles of, 
 
 Pi$pti(rKu (§ 161, 6), to eat, Perf. fiippaxa, poetic P(0pds, Gen. -»toj. 
 jthra (§ 163, 3), to fall, ireirraKa, Att. Poet, ire-miis (comp. § 230). 
 
 Rejiakk. There are also found, in imitation of Homer, Kenpaynev and 
 the Imp. KcKpax^h from the Perf. xexpaya (from xpi^a, to cry out) ; also the 
 Imp. veireur^i, ft"om n-ETToii&a, to trust (from irei^a, to persuade), is found in 
 Aesch. Eum. 602. See § 230. The Perfects olSa and eoiko require a distinct 
 Donsideration. 
 
 j 195. OiSa and ioiKa. 
 
 1. OiSa, Perf. from 'EIAQ (second Aor. ttSoy, I saw. Inf. ISeTv, videre) 
 properly / have seen, hence / know; for the syllable ot, see § 140, 4; for the 
 change of 5 into a in larov, etc., see § 17, 5; for the change of S into a in 
 Xviur, see § 1 9, 1 . Its inflection is as foUows : — 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
232 OTSa AND coiKtt. [§ 196 
 
 PERFECT. 
 
 Ind. 
 
 S 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 D 
 
 2 
 
 3. 
 
 
 P 
 
 1. 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 oTSa Subj. ei5S Imp. 
 
 oTS€(y) «5^ yiTTO) 6l5eW 
 
 iarov, Xarov eiSiJTOi/, -^tok Xarov, itrray 
 
 ifffiev elSufiej/ Part. 
 
 JirT€ 6iS7)T6 liffTC cj5(ii, -uTo, -6s 
 
 X(ra(ri{v) elSSi<ri{v) iirTaxroj' 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 Lid. S. 1. ^etv^ Dual Fl. pS«/K€v (Poet. pff/iEi/) 
 
 •nTieiTav. Poet. ^ffTov nSeiTC ( " nffrel 
 
 ^eiv^ Dual Fl. ^S< 
 
 pSeis and -eicrfta' jjSeiToi', Poet ^(rToj/ pS( 
 7;5€i(>') jiSeiTrj!/, " pffTTjy fiS( 
 
 _. l€iT6 ( " pffTe) 
 
 Opt. Sing. ciSe/gy, -rjj, -ij; Dual eiSEfflToi', -^ttjj/; PI. elSelriiicv (seldom e'lSu- 
 
 fie;/), €i5efT)Te, elSetep (seldom fiSeiri(rav). 
 Fut. ^troiuu (Ion. eiSi)aa, though Isocr. crui'ciS'^treij), / shaU know or 
 
 experience ; sometimes also elSepat, elSu, elSeltjVj have the same 
 
 meaning. — Verbal Adj. IffTiov. 
 
 ZivoiSa, compounded of oI5o, I am canscioits, Inf. (rvi/eiSsvai, Imp. trivurdt, 
 Subj. avyeiSa, etc. 
 
 ' M16, 2, olSaj scarcely occurs in Attie. 
 
 ' First person ^S-q, second pSjjo-aa, third ^S?j, arc considered as Attic 
 forms ; yet ^S«y, ijSeur^a (also jfSets), ^Sci, are found in the best Attic wri- 
 ters. oySofieV, oiSare, olBoiri(i')! instead of tffufv, etc., are rarely found in 
 the Attic writers. Comp. X. An. 2. 4, 6. Antiph. p. 115, 3. Pi. Ale. 141, 
 e. Eur. Suppl. 1047. X. 0. 20, 14. oTSos occurs in X. C. 4. 6, 6. The 
 shortening of the ei into e in the Dual and PI. of the Opt. pSf/iei/, is poetic 
 and rare. S. 0. T. 1232. 
 
 Remakk. The Perfect, / have Jcnoim, is expressed by eyvaiKa, and the Aorist, 
 1 knew, by iyvuv. 
 
 2. 'EoiKa, lam like, I seem, Perf. of 'EIKH (of this the Impf. el/te, is used in 
 Homer), poetic eZ/co instead of ^oiKa, emdycu instead of ioiKeycu, and (instead 
 of iolKatri) the anomalous Att. third Pers. PI. et^an, even in prose (Plat.), Part. 
 iomis, in the Attic -wi'iters only in the sense of lilce ; Att. €i/tt6s and cikcVoi 
 (instead of iomis, ioixivai) commonly in the dramatists, only in the sense of 
 probable, likely, right; hence especially in the neuter cik<$s, .ts «i (:Ik6s, as is 
 natural; PIup. i^xiiy (\ 122, 5), Fut. ff(a (Ar.). 
 
 Here belongs the abridged form ioiy/iev, among the Tragedians, instead of 
 ioiKaiifv; comp. Uruei/. The poetic Mid. forms ^V|(u (Eur. Ale. 1065), second 
 Pers. Sing. Perf., and ^iViTo, third Pers. Sing. PIup., are constructed according 
 to the same analogy. 
 
 § 196. III. Present and Imperfect. 
 
 There are also some Present and Imperfect forms, mostly in the Epic dialect, 
 which, according to the analogy of verbs in -jtii, take the personal-endings 
 without tlie mode- vowel. See § 230, under avia, Tavia, ipiu, a-eiu, eSb, ^fpa ' 
 tluai {{ 166, 24), of the Common language, belongs here. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'"'■I DEPONENT PASSIVES. 
 
 23? 
 
 i 197. Summary of the Depcr-.ent Passives 
 (§ 102, 2, 3). 
 
 Aya/itu, to wonder, Uvajuu, to be able, Kpe'/M/iai, to Iiang, 
 
 ttiSeoiMi, to reverence, ^vsapea-Tfo/Mi, to be dissat- XoiSophfuu, to revile, 
 
 ahdo/iai, to wander, isfied, jMlyofuu, to be mad, 
 
 aiitKKiioiJ.ai, to contend, imfTtio/xai, to resist, lieTa/ieAotuu, to regret, 
 
 avTi6oiiai (Poet.) adversor, iv^iJ.4oiua, to lay to heart, lanrdTTo/iai, to loatlie, 
 aTTomeoiMt, to be distracted, ivyoiofiat, to consider, vejicirioiuu (Poet.), to bt 
 
 iiropEO/ioi, to be perplexed, imneKoiiia and -eo/iat, to Justli/ indignant, 
 apiaTOKpaTtofiai, to have an take care, olo/juu, to suppose, 
 
 aristocracy, hrivoioyiai, to reflect upon, oAiyapxfoiuu, to have an 
 
 &pv4ofiai, to refuse iirltrraiiai, to know, oligarchy, 
 
 Ax^oM-'h to be displeased, epa/uu (Foet), to love, rupdofuu, to try, 
 $oi\oii.ai, to wish, ev^v/iioiiai, to be happy, irpoi^u/teofwu, to desire, 
 
 ppvxdo/uu, to roar, evXafiUpuu, to be cautiotts, vpoi/oiofuu, to foresee, 
 
 Siojuu, to want, eiivo/ieonai, bonis legibus treffofuu, to reverence (Aor. 
 
 SipKofLai (Poet.), to see, utor, icr€<j>^v, PL Phaedr. 
 
 SrifioKpaTeofuu, to have a euTrope'oyitoi, to be opulent, 254, b). 
 
 democracy, ^Sofiai, to rejoice, (pAorifiiofiai, to be ambi- 
 
 iitOUyoiiai, to converse, Aepopuu (Poet.), to become tious, 
 Smvoeo/uu, to think, hot, hroTOTriopLai, to conjecture. 
 
 Remahk 1. The Aor. of several verbs have a Mid. as well as a Pass, form, 
 u. g. av\i^ofjuii, to lodge ; KoiBop^ofiai, to revile ; opeyofiai, to strive after ; vpayjid' 
 riioiim, to carry on business (Pass, rarer); (juKotppoveo/mi, to treat kindly. Also 
 several of the above verbs belong here, yet they more seldom have a middle 
 Aorist, e. g. iya/juu, Aor. Mid. in Dem. alSeoimi, see § 166, 1, a/iiWiloiua, Aor. 
 Mid. in later writers, apviopuu in Herod. Aesch. and in later writers, SuAeyo/Mu 
 in non- Attic writers, Smvoeofiat in later wiiters, KoiSop4oiuu, Aor. Mid. in Isae. 
 6, 59, weipdo/tat often in Thu., vpovoiopuu, Eur. Hipp. 683. Pans. 4. 20, 1. (pi\o- 
 Ti/jtfo/iat in Isoc. and Aristid. — Several of the above list of verbs have a mid- 
 dle as well as a Passive form in the Put.: alSeofuu, ^ 166, 1, Ax^o/mi, § 166, 4. 
 Sia\4yQfiai, to converse with, StaKe^ofiai and rarer SiaKex^trofiat, Siavoeofjtat, to 
 think, imnihniuu, § 166, 21. ■Trpo&u/ieo/iai, to desire, irpo^faiiroiiai and rarer irpo^u- 
 fxTiA^iro/iai. Both J/So/iai, to rejoice, and the poetic Ipa/iai, to /owe, have a passive 
 form for their Fnt.: ria^aonai, ipimMttroiuu, § 179, 4. , 
 
 Rem. 2. All the other Deponents are Middle Deponents, or are used only 
 in the Pres. and Impf. 
 
 Rem. 3. Among the Deponent Passives, are very many Active verbs, which 
 in the Mid. express a reflexive or intransitive action, but have a Passive form 
 for their Aorist ; on the contrary, a Middle form for their Future, e. g. ipofiia, 
 terreo, to terrify ; tpoPTj&rjyai and <po$'li(r€(rAai, timere, tofear. Here belong all 
 verbs in -atveiv and -jiyeij", derived from substantives and adjectives, almost 
 all in -ovy, and most in -i^etv, e. g. evtppaiveiv, to gladden, cv(l>pay^yat, evtppa- 
 i'f7(T2rai, and fiKppav&'fja'ea^ai, to be joyful, to be happy ; imraiv^iv, to make ripe, 
 TTeTTav^vai, ireiravuff^ai, maturescere, to ripen; alffxvy^ty, to shame, cuffxvy^iyat, 
 aia'xvveta^at (rarer cdo'xvv^o'ea^ai), to feel sliame ; i\aTTOuv, to make less, eKar- 
 ' ra^fai, iWaTrc^ffea^ai, to he inf&^ior, to be conquered ; xoAoyi', to make angry, 
 XoXaift^rai, x"^'^"'*"''^'") succensere, to be angry; /noAaKifeic, to make effeminatu, 
 VLoKaKia^ixu {rarer /^aXaKfiriurd^ai). uoD'jiKiiiaS'ai., 'o make one's self effeininaie, to 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
234 
 
 ACTIVE VERBS WITH A MIDDLE FUTURE. 
 
 [i 198. 
 
 be effeminate ; 6pyl(eii/, to make angry, opyur^mi, opyi€7(r^ai, and opyur^treadai, 
 siiccensere, to be angry ; there are very many others also, of which only those 
 most in use will be mentioned here : — 
 
 'Ayeii/ (from avdytw, come, amxSiriviu and iyayayea-^at, signifying to be carried 
 to sea, in mare provehi, but Fut. ava^eaSrtu), ayeipeiv, ayvivai, adpol(ety, aiaxiviui, 
 aviav, idpeiy, oWi^TTeiy {aWayli<Toit.ai, often also a\\d^e(rSrai), ap/io^eiv, SirxoXeii', 
 ouloyeic, oifiai'/ffEU»;^-/3ti\A€ii'; — SoxovSy, Siairav ; — idl(uv, iinlyeiv {iiTrelx- 
 i&ijy), kdTiav, euwx'"'! — rjTTav (F. ^TTTjSi^crouai and rarer ^tt^o-o/uou) ; — ISpieui; 
 — Kivetv, Kf-iveii', KOipav, Koixi^nv (KOfiur^vat, to travel, but KOiJil(rcur^ai, sibirecu- 
 perare, to recover for one^s self), Kpivetv, Kv\lvSeiv, — Aeyeu', heiireiv, \ieiv, 
 \vTrf!y; — liibviTKetv, luyvivai, /iifiviiirKeLv; — opeyeiv {dpex^i"^h "nd rarer 
 ope^aiT^iu), ipfiap, oxHo; — Trc/fteiy (Fut. inlffofuu, IwiU obey, but jreKrS^o-o^ai, / 
 wiU be persuaded), ir/jyyiyai, 'ir\ayaVf TrAcKetv, vX^iTreiv, Tro\iTeveiy (also iroAiTeiJ* 
 <ra<rdai), iroyeveiy; — ^riyyiyai, fiwvvivat; — aeltiv, aiyirnv ((rair^vai, troTr^ffcffaoc), 
 ffKeSavyuyat, ffirav, tnreipay, aireipeiy, ffreWeiy {ffToK^vat, ffTa\'l]a'etr^ai), (rTpE(l>eLp 
 {(TTpoujjiiyai, iTTpatjiria'sa-nrai), <T<pa.\K^ty [tyipaKT)ya,i, tripaX^ffstr^ai, seldom ir^oAeiff- 
 ktu), (Tcidety {atiiSrrjyai, to save one's self, but aiicrajr^ai, to save for one's self, sibi 
 servare) ; — rapdrreiy, rspTreiy, Tpiirciv [TpairTiyat, to turn one^s self, to turn, Tpei^atr- 
 ^cui to put to flight), rpi(\)eiy', — ipaiyeiy {^avrivai, (payijtrea^ai and fpayeitr^at, to 
 appear, but <pav^vai, to be shoum), (pavrd^ety {(pavrairSrliiTfadai), <l>4peiy {iyex^- 
 vat, oXtretrbai and iyex^frstr^cu, rarer oUr^troficu), (p^eipety ((p^apTJyai, tp^apitff&T~ 
 dai [(p^epeTodai, Ion. and poet.J, ^oPfiy ((poPJia^ahcu and 4>oPiihiitjiadiu) ; — i|ie(J- 
 Seiy (■^ivir^yai, ifcu(r&^<ro;uoi, to deceive one's self, be deceived, but ■^ciaiahai, ^d- 
 trcur^at, to lie) ; — x^"*- 
 
 ^ 198. Summary 
 a 
 
 'AiSw (^Su), to sing, 
 aKoia, to hear, 
 ii\a\d(a, to shout, 
 afiaprdyu), to miss, 
 airavrdu, to meet, 
 airoKaiu, to enjoy, 
 apTrd^u, to seize, 
 PaStC", to go, 
 $alya, to go, 
 BkJq), to live, 
 ySAeVft), to see, 
 fioiat, to cry out, 
 yf\da, to laugh, 
 yilpdffKiD, to grow old, 
 yiyy^ffKo), to hnow 
 idKyto, to bite, 
 Sap^dyto, to sleep, 
 5e7trai, to fear, 
 dtairdu, to live, 
 SiSpdffKO), to run away, 
 Si^Ku, to pursue, 
 iyKW/xid^u, to priise 
 
 of the Active Ver 
 Middle Future, § 
 
 flfii, to be, 
 iiraivem, to praise, 
 icrAtw, to eat, 
 davfid(ai, to wonder, 
 fte'a, to run, 
 
 ^pdot, ^pevu, ic hunt, 
 diyydya, to touch, 
 ^yiliTKcij, to die, 
 ^piiffKu, to leap, 
 Kdftvu, to labor, 
 K\ata, to weep, 
 KKeTTTic, to steal, 
 KCDfid^co, to revel, 
 \ayxdy(c, to obtain, 
 \afifidyio, to take, 
 XiXP-da, to lick, 
 fiav^dyto, to learn, 
 v4u, to swim, 
 yeiita, to nod, 
 otSa, to know, 
 olfi.ii(a, to lament, 
 oKqKvQu, to howl. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 bs most in use with 
 154, 1. 
 
 tixyvfu, to swear, 
 
 bpdttt, to see,^ 
 
 ovpia, urinam redere, 
 
 Ttai^a, to sport, 
 
 irdtrx", to suffer 
 
 ■miSda, to leap, 
 
 ttIvU) to drink, 
 
 TriiTTu, to fall, 
 
 irXcw, to sail, 
 
 iryew, to blow (but fufi 
 
 trve^ffu), 
 irylya, to strangle, 
 irofteai, to desire, 
 ■tposKvyiu, to reverence, 
 pea, to flow, 
 po^4ia, to gulp down, 
 fTtydu, to be silent, 
 triaTrda, to be silent, 
 VKiiTTa, to mock, 
 trirovM^m, to be zealous, 
 avplrrta, to whistle, etc* 
 TiKTw, to produce, 
 
' 199.] PREPOSITIONS AND CONJtNCTIONS. 238 
 
 ''P^X"! to ™n, ■ra&i^a, to rail at, x^""^ to gape, 
 
 rptiya, to gnaw, ^eiya, tojlee, xK^t to ease one's self, 
 
 Tuyxiyc, to obtain, <pddi>a, to come he/are, X"'?^'"'; '" contain. 
 
 Remake. Some have both the Active and Middle form for the Tuture ; tho 
 Middle, however, is preferred, e. g. d'Sai (?(r« non-Attic), ofiri^a, pUa, ynpi- 
 ((TKJa), fiKeirw, BttJ^Kto, iyKWfiidCu, iirouveu, ^avpu^o), KKeTrrto, po^4o3, ffK&inta, 
 rffCTu, x"?^"' — ®i)P^i ^p^ia, KoKd(a are also used with the middle form. 
 The following compounds of x'^P^" have an Active and Middle form in the 
 Fut. : axo; ffvy- irpos;^wpeai, but Ai'o- and Trpoxtopea have only the Active form. 
 
 CHAPTER Vn. 
 
 § 199. Prepositions and Conjunctions. 
 
 Besides the Substantive, Adjective, Pronoun, Numeral, 
 Adverb, and Verb, there are also the two following parts of 
 speech, viz. Prepositions and Conjunctions. On the forms ol' 
 these notliing need be said ; hence these parts of speech are 
 treated in the Syntax, so far as it is necessary. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
PECULIARITIES OF THE DIALECTS. 
 
 PARTICULAKLY OP tllE EPIC DIALECT. 
 
 A. ORTHOGRAPHY. 
 
 i 200. Digamma, or Labial Breathing F. 
 
 1. The Greek language had originally, in addition to tlie Spiritus Asper (' , 
 and the Lingual Breathing a, a Labial Breathing,' the sound of which corre- 
 sponds nearly to the Eng._/j or the Latin v. In accordance with its form (F) 
 which is lilce one Gamma standing upon another, it is named Digamma (double 
 Gamma) ; and as the Jiolians retained it longer than the other Grecian tribes, 
 it is called the JSolic Digamma. It has the sixth place in the alphabet, namely, 
 between t and Q, and is named BoD. Comp. §§ 26, 1 and 25, 2. 
 
 2. This character disappeared very early ; but its sound was in some cases 
 changed, in some of the dialects, into the smooth Labial /3, e. g. j8i'a, vis, Fls 
 (later is] ; in other instances, it was softened into the vgwel u, and, after other 
 vowels, coalesced with these, and formed the diphthongs ou, ev, r)v, ov, uv, c. g. 
 vavs (viFs), navis, x^"" (x''^") .35ol., $ovs {0iFs), bovs, bos, Gen. bivis; in 
 others still, it was changed into a mere gentle breathing, which at the beginning 
 of a word is denoted by the Spiritus Lenis, but in the middle of a word and 
 before p is not indicated, e. g. Fis, vis, is ; oFis, ovis, Sis ; eiA.e«, volvo ; Fp6Sov, 
 ^6Soy, etc. ; it was also changed, in the beginning of some words, into a sharp 
 breathing, which is denoted by th» Spiritus Asper, e. g. 'iawepos, vesperus; Irmiii, 
 vestio. 
 
 3. In the Homeric poems, no character denoting the breathing F any longer 
 exists ; but it is very clear that, in the time of Homer, many words were 
 sounded witll the Digamma, c. g. iyvv/j-i, Svol, civdtraai, avSdva, iap, ver, tlie 
 
 ' " The Vau, or Digamma, an important agent in early Greeli orthography, 
 less, however, a principal than a subsidiary letter, retained much of its previous 
 character of vowel-consonant, or, in the technical language of the Oriental 
 schools, of quiescible letter. It was chiefly used as a liquid guttural, or aspirate, 
 somewhat akin to our English wh, to impart emphasis to the initial vowel of 
 words, and possessed the power, with certain limitations, of creating metrical po- 
 sition. But these vague and indefinite properties, were not such as to entitle it to 
 a regular or habitual place in the written texts of the popular Epic poems. It 
 was retained by the Boeotian states in monumental inscriptions till the 145 
 Olympiad." — Mure's Hist, of the Language and Literature of Greece, vol. i, p. 85 j 
 vol. iii, p. 513. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
238 DIALECTS. [5^01 
 
 forms of 'EIAn, video; ioiKa, eUon, viginti ; (Tim, vestis ; eiireu' (comp. tiocarc), 
 ficn\os, evm/ii, vestio ; eos and 3s, suus ; ov, sui ; oT, sibi ; cirmpos, vesperus ; oIkos, 
 vicus; ohos, vinum, etc. ; this is obvious from tlie following facts : (a) words that 
 have the Digamma cause no Hiatus, e. g. irph e&ei' (= irph Fe^ev); — (b) henca 
 also a vowel capable of Elision, when placed before a digammated word, cannot 
 be elided, e. g. Khev Si e {= Se Fc), oiri lo (= airh Feo) ; — (c) the paragogic n 
 (^ 15) is wanting before words which have the Digamma, e. g. SaU ol (= ScSe 
 Foi) • — (d) oir instead of oIik or ovx, is found before the Digamma, d. g. iTrel 
 oB €*€c iffTi x^P^^"" {= 0^ FiS)ey); — (e) in compounds, neither Elision 
 nor Crasis occurs, e. g. Siaenrc/iey (= SiaFemintif), aayfis (= oFay^s); — (f) a 
 digammated word with a preceding consonant, makes a vowel long by position, 
 e. g. yap e*ey (where the p and the Digamma belonging to cdev make a long 
 by position) ; — (g) long vowels are not shortened before words that have the 
 Digamma, e. g. KiKKei re aTiKPanr Kal flfimn {= koI Feiptcun), II. y, 392. 
 
 k 201. Interchange of Vowels. 
 
 PEELiMiNAEr Eemabk. The dialectic peculiarities in the change of vow- 
 els, as well as of consonants, never extend to all the words of a dialect, but are 
 uniformly limited to certain words and forms. 
 
 1. The three vowels, e, o, a, called (§ 140, 2 and 4) variable vowels {rpe'l"', 
 TfTpo(pa, iTpd<jniv) undergo various changes in the dialects : — 
 
 a is used instead of e (Ion.), e. g. Tpiiru, ranvu, /ieya&os instead of rpiiru, 
 refiVQi, fieye^os ; s* also Doric rpofpa, ffKiap6s, ''Aprafiis instead of rpetpUy 
 ffKiepos, 'Apreius ; and in several particles, e. g. 8ko, rixa, irixa instead of 
 3t6, TfJre, n-Jre. 
 
 e instead of a in the Ionic dialect, when followed by a Liquid, e. g. rtaaepes, 
 ipfftiv, i?eA.os, fiepe^pop (Ion.) instead of ritrffapes, four, &pir7]v, a male, SaKos, 
 glass, pdpaSrpov, gulf; also in many verbs in -aa, e. g. tpoiria, bpim (Ion.) 
 instead of ^oetAw, bp&M. 
 
 s instead of o (Doric), e. g. epSefi.'iiKovTa instead of e^So/i'liKoi'Ta. 
 
 a Instead of o (Ion.), in dji^ioSEiv instead of o/S^uSeu'. 
 
 2. The following cases are to bo noted in addition : — 
 
 The long o is a special peculiarity of the Doric dialect, and causes, in paf- 
 ticular, the so-called Plateiasm (i. c. the broad pronunciation) of the Dorians, 
 e. g. hfiepa, Kairos, oSiSi, Aa/iaTrip, The older and the later Ionic have softened 
 this grave a into ij. The Attic uses both the Doric o and the softened );, (§ 16, 
 7). Comp. Dor. afiipa. Ion. ri/iipa, Att. rt/iepa (with the Ion. ij and Doric o) ; Ion. 
 co<f>iri. Dor. and Att. ao^la ; Ion. W^njf, Dor. and Att. ^dpaf. — So, also, in 
 the diphthong av, among the Ionic writers a is changed into rj: vrivs, wiSs, 
 instead of yavs, ypavs ; likewise in the diphthong at in the Dat. PI. of the first 
 Dec, ris and jiiTi (Ion.) instead of ois and oiiri. — Still, in certain words, tha 
 Dorians retain the tj, as the lonians do the a. 
 
 J) instead of €i (^olic and Doric), e. g. aaii/qov, tiivos, ojija, so the Infinitive, 
 e. g. \a^riv, KaXriv, instead of atnie'tav, xeims, 6|cTa, Xafiety, KaXEur. 
 
 Ol instead of ei (Doric), e. g. ^^alpa instead of ^elpai. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{§ 202, 203.] CHANGES OF THE CONSONANTS. 239 
 
 V often instead of o (^olic), a. g. o-u^jir, infM instead of (ro(p6s, Svona, bo in 
 Homer iyvpis instead of &.yopii ; and in the Common language, titin/ios, weaiii- 
 yupis, etc. 
 
 u instead of on before a Liquid and tr, and at the end of a word in the termi- 
 nations of tlje seeond Dec., and in the stem of several words; — oi instead of 
 ov before the breathing o- in the third Pers. PI. ouri{v) instead of ou(rt{y), and in 
 the participle ending -oura instead of -ova-a, and in Moiira and 'Ape&owra instead 
 of Movira, and 'Api&ovffa; the above use of a instead of ov is Dor., yet not in 
 Pindar ; the use of oi instead of ou is JEiolic and Pindaric, o. g. 
 
 T£ i^ipa instead of toO iip^fiov, Sm (also Ion. and Pindar.) instead of oSi/, 
 
 ia\as instead of SoS\os, upm6s instead of oipiw6s, Pas instead of /Sous; T(«r- 
 
 Touri[i') instead of TiJ7rTouo-i(>'), rivToura instead of riiirTouo-o, (t>t\4ouTi[v) instead 
 of ^i\oS<ru', f)^ot<ra instead of ^;(av(ra. 
 
 Some other instances will be considered below, in treating of the Declensions 
 and Conjugations. 
 
 § 202. Interchange of Consonants. 
 
 The change of consonants in the different dialects is according to the two 
 following laws : — 
 Coordinate consonants (§ 5, Bern. 4) interchange with each other; and co"- 
 nate consonants (§5, Bem. I) interchange with each other. 
 
 {203. I. Interchange of coordinate Consonants. 
 
 A. The Mutes : (a) The smooth Mutes it and k. The interrogative and 
 indefinite pronouns, ir«s, wifTe, iroios, dvoios, etc., are in Ion. kus, kSte, etc 
 
 K instead of t : tti^te, vot4, Ste, tSts, dirdre, &WoTe, are in Dor. wixa, iroKii, 
 Sko, riiea, dnixa (Poet. diroKKa), &KKoKa ; SO 8ko (shortened from iSK(uca] instead 
 of &Tav. On the contrary, r instead of k : rrjyos Dor. instead of Ktims, iKeivos. 
 
 T instead of t (Mo\. and Dor.), e. g. Tre/tTre instead of irivre. 
 
 (b) The Medials $ and 7, e. g. PKiixav (Att.), penny-royal, is in Ion. y\-l)xav, 
 P\4ipapov, eyS'lash, is yXetpapoy. 
 
 S instead of y (Dor.), c. g. S5 instead of yfj ; hence Arifi'^rnp instead of 
 T-qiiirnp. 
 
 B instead of ;8 (Dor.), oSe\6s instead of iPehds. 
 
 (c) The Aspirates 3 and (p, e. g. ft^p, beast, AKav, ^\($eiy, oi^ap, udder, are 
 in Dor. ifrfip, tp\ay, ipxi^eiv, oZipap (uber) ; ^p and (p\ipeiv also in Homer. 
 
 X instead of & : !&/« is in Dor. SxM"? ^"d opyi^os, etc. (from Spvis) is Sppixos, 
 etc. 
 
 B.- The Liquids : (a) The Liquids interchange with one another: y instead 
 of A before & and t, often in the Dor. dialect, e. g. ^y^oy, piyrurros (Dor.) 
 instead of ^A&ov, fie\TurTos; also (Ion. and Att. ) TrXei/iay, pulmo, instead of 
 irye6fitoy, Kirpoy instead of yhpoy. 
 
 p is rarely used instead of X, e. g. xpifiayos, mien, Att., instead of xKiPayos. 
 , 11 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
240 DIALECTS. [i 204. 
 
 (b) The Liquid p and the breatliing o- in the later and often in the middle 
 Attic : ^^ instead of the Ion. and old Attic pa; e. g. S/wtiv and &^jniv, a male ; 
 Kopa-q and k(J/3^7j, lack ; bnt pp remains where the augment is used, and in com- 
 positioB. 
 
 f204. II. Interchange of cognate Consonants. 
 
 (a) The Palatals y and k, e. g. Km^ms, fuller, is preferred by the Att. writers 
 to the other form, yva/peis. 
 
 K and X in Se/co/toi (Ion.) instead of Sexo/iat. 
 ' (b) The Linguals ,& and t, e. g. oStii (Ion. and Epic) instead of t^iis, again 
 
 Eemaek. In some words a change of the aspiration, from one syllable to 
 the other, occurs, e.g. KiStdv (Ion.) instead of x'Tt^v, ivSravra, hie, iv^evTev, hinc, 
 (Ion.), instead of ivrav^a, ez/reD^ec; ici^pTj (Ion.) instead of x^P^ pot. 
 
 a and t, c. g. TioTtiiav, tireroy, cfKon, -ri, re (Dor.) instead of WofffiSSv, e-Ke 
 <rov, elKoiri, av, (re. The Attic forms TevrKoi', beet ; rriKia, sieve (from (r^dio), 
 Tvp^rj (from ffvpto), turba ; r^fiepov, to-day, and TTjres, this year (the two last only 
 in the comedians, but in tragedians and in other Attic writers aiiufpov, o-^res), 
 are in the Ion. and Common language aevrKov, c-qXla, irvp0r}. 
 
 «a and tt. Instead of aa, employed in the older and the later Ionic, in old 
 Attic and in most other dialects, — the new and often also the middle Attic 
 in most words uses tt, c. g. Tatrtrw, yAoJtrtra; bnt Att. tcJttw, 7A.WTT0. (But 
 when aa results from composition, it remains unchanged.) Yet the Ionic 
 forms prevail, not only in the older Attic writers, but are also found in other 
 authors, some words always having aa, c. g. traaaai, to scatter; irT^mrai, to 
 avouch; ^uaaos, a deep; Tniaacii, to husk; TTT^affa), to fold; fipdaaut to shake; 
 TTTciaaai, to cower; ipeaaca {iperrca is rejected), etc. 
 
 a and v in the Dor. verb-ending -/les, c. g. TiJirTOyues (instead of the common 
 form TvvTOfiey, see 5 220, 6) ; also oie's Dor. instead of aiiv. 
 
 ai instead of C {JEoL, so also in Theoc.) but only in the middle of words, e. g. 
 IJ.e\iaSeTcu, /leaSmv instead of lieXt^erai, lie^mf or /iel^av, not at the beginning of 
 words, nor if & precedes, or «• follows, c. g. /uox&'foi'Ti, iiri^p^i^oiaa. 
 
 ^and TT, avpirreiv, appt^rretv (Att.) instead of avpiQciv, app.6^eiv. 
 Here belong : — 
 
 I and a and aa, e. g. i,iv (Epic and old Attic) instead of aiv ; SiJ({s and Tpi(,6s 
 (Ion.) instead of Siiriro's, Tpiaa6s\ K\at, Dor. instead of K\ms (kXus) ; even in the 
 Put. and Aorists, the Dorians, and also Homer, in several verbs use { instead 
 of a, see § 223, 5. 
 
 (c) The Labials </> anil ir, — the first Att., the last Ion., — e. g. aaipi.pa.yos Att., 
 aa-rripayos Ion. So jEol. and Dor. ir, instead of <(i, c. g. ajx.iil (jEol.) instead of 
 Oju<J)( ; hence in the Common language, a/uTre'xeiv, etc. 
 
 II and TT, K. g. ireScJ (iEol. and Dor.) instead of ix^tA. 
 
 (d) The double consonants { and i//,. and the two single consonants of which 
 
 they are formed, though transposed, in tlie JEol. dialect, e. g. axivos, ariKis 
 
 instead of feVos, ij/oxts, yet only at the beginning of a word. So <r<p and 41, 
 
 B. g. tlif Dor. instead of <r*e'. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 20t).j CONTRACTION AND DIAERESIS. 241 
 
 Change of the Vowels. 
 i 205. Contraction. — Diaeresis. 
 
 1. In the Dialects, the following contractions, which differ from those men 
 tioned in § 9, are to be noted: eo and cov, sometimes also oo and oe are con- 
 tracted into ev in Dor. and Ion. — not, as commonly, into ov; so oo, oou, and 
 oou (Ion.) are contracted into ev — not, as usual, into a and ov, c. g. cfiAeufrom 
 ^t\eov = <pi\ov'j irXevves from TrXeoceJ ; "TrKjipevvjes from 'irKTjpSovTes = TrX-qpovv 
 Tes ; iSiKaUv from iSiKoloe = iSiKoiov ; elp^revv from elptltTaoy = elp^ruv ; 76- 
 AeDoca from yeXai.ovffa =^ ^eXcSffa; 5t/caieij(ri from ZiKOioovffi = 3i/ca(ot7<ri. But 
 commonly the Dorians contracted oc into w (instead of ou), u. g. Tup6evTa — 
 Tvpavra instead of Tvpovvra, jnyijov instead of ^vyovv. 
 
 2. Ao, aou, and cm are contracted in the Doric dialect into d (instead of a>), 
 namely, in verbs in -da, in genitives in -ao and -iaii', in substantives in -day, 
 Gen. -&0V0S, and in proper names in -\aos, e. g. ^vtrmres, xo^Sf'j 7eASj' from 
 (l>v(rdoyTcs, xa\c£ou(ri, 7e\c£iii>'; — tov Kopav from Tciav Kopduv ^ tSc Kopav; — 
 IloirciSa;', -avos, Att. no(reiSMV, -avos; — yieviXSs, 'KpKialKas, Gen. -a, Dat. -^. 
 
 3. Ae and aei are contracted in the Dor. (but not in Pindar) into tj and r) 
 instead of d and ?, in verbs, u. g. i<poiTri, <j>oirys instead of ifoha, ipoirSs. See 
 ^222, ni. (1). 
 
 4. The Attic dialect is the opposite of the otiier dialects, particularly of the 
 later Ionic ; since, while the other dialects often avoid contraction, and the later 
 Ionic commonly, the Attic almost always admits it. The tendency of the later 
 Ionic towards uncontracted syllables is so great, that it even resolves the long 
 sounds (which are never resolved in the other dialects) into their simple ele- 
 ments, e. g. tpiKeeai instead of <pi\v, which had been contracted from <l>t\4i}. 
 Epic poetry often uses, indiscriminately, contracted and uncontracted forms, 
 according to the necessity of the verse, c. g. acKoiv and &Ka>ir. 
 
 5. On the contrary, it is a special pecuHarity of the Ionic dialect, that while 
 it delights to avoid contractions, it still, in particular cases, admits them, where 
 the Attic dialect does not, e. g. Ip6s (r), Ipeis, tpeicroffSrai Ion., instead of tep6s, 
 etc., and especially the contraction of otj into a, particularly in the verbs Poup 
 and meTu, e. g. ?j3wiro, Ivaira [hyv^amrieiv Horn, from hyvoia), imhuKo. instead 
 of ^^o'no-o, iv6n<ra, iyi/eyS^xa ; so oySiixovTa in Homer, instead erf iySoiiKovra. 
 
 6. The opposite of contraction is Diaeresis (Siai'pcffis), the separation of a 
 diphthong into its vowels. Diaeresis is specially used in the ^ol. dialect. 
 The use of it in Homer, also, is not rare; most frequently, in such words as 
 separate the two vowels by means of the Digamma, namely, or in Ttdis ; av in 
 tvT(4, breath (from &FriiM]; &!J:rTg\4os, dirty; ej in ilvim, to malce like, HXkto, 
 tiKToy, ihcrnv ; Eii veiy often in the adverb 4i (= e3, well), e. g. iti Kphas, ivieri- 
 pxvos; when p, ,-, p, or o- follows ^» in compounds then they are doubled, e. g. 
 ivfi^Airis, iivvn-ros, iilpPoos, iitra^Xf-os ; o. in Sis (iFis, avis), ito^a,, (comp. opt- 
 nor). dia-T6s, ilija. ii^av (from oiyvviu). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
24a DIALECTS. _ [} 206. 
 
 i 206, Crasis, Synizesis, Elision, N Paragogic, 
 Hiatus. 
 
 1. In particular instances tljf Dialects differ from the laws of Crasis stated in 
 §§10 and H ; namely, iu the Ionic dialect and in Pindar and Theoc, the o of 
 the Article coalesces with d and forms a, and with oi and forms a, e. g. ri StoX- 
 ua = r&yaXiui ; so TOXij&e'f , ravri, iiv^p, SySper, Air^paiiroi, <fir6\oi, from rh akri- 
 &ES, Ti aiiT(J, i ayfip, oj HvSpes, ol 6,vdpuvoi, oi alir6\oi. In Herodot. occur, &punos, 
 iin6s, SiKKoi, with the smooth insteaei. of the rough breathing (from i &piffToi, 
 6 aMs, ol &Woi) ; Homer uses Crasis seldom, namely, only in topiaros, uMs, 
 TaAAa, ovfi6s (instead of & ^p^s), ToiiieKO., oHyexa (instead of ou €y€Ka) j Kaydi is 
 doubtful. 
 
 2. Instances of Crasis in Doric are : r&\yeos, rHyrptf instead of tov &\yeos, 
 T^ ifTptp ; so and e = w, ot and e = 17, e. g. 6 ^ha(l>os = &\atpoSf 6 e| = tEif , koI 
 ix = Ki]K, Kol elTTc = K.?T€, Kol H» ov ifV = K^y, which last is also Ion. 
 
 3. Ionic writers admit the common Crasis in ou, in the Masc. and Neat, of 
 the Art. and in eTepos, e. g. ovreposy ToijTepoy. 
 
 4. The use of Synizesis (§ 12) is very frequent in the Homeric poems: — 
 (a) In the middle of words, it is oftenest found in the following combination of 
 
 Towels (the vowels over which the line is placed being pronounced as one 
 syllable, whether consisting of two or more vowels) : eo, ctf, coi, coj; eo, 
 €01, €ou ; 6(0j eiji ; e. g. (TT^&eo, rip-eas, &Eof, xP^'O'^ois, TE&veuTe ; much rarer 
 m oe, ta, 101, Hj, i?7, 10, e. g. ae&Xevay, jr6\ias, ttJaioj; 00 only in 
 tyioov; vol only in Stucpiotiri; tji in Sjjfoio, Srjtav, Sijiohti, ^la j 
 'b) Between two words in the following combination of vowels : 1) a, tj c, 1; ij, 
 1) ei, 7} ov, T) 01 ; €1 ou ; m a, w ou ; the first word is cither If, ^, S-ti, /t^ and 
 ivei, or a word with the inflection-endings, ij, a, e. g. ^, ou, S}; cupveiiraTOs, 
 u^ £\Aoi, efAair(i^ 7/6 yd/ios, aff^iarta ouS* UitJy. 
 
 5. Elision (§§ 13 and 14) is found very often iu Homer, particularly as fol- 
 lows : — 
 
 (a) The a is elided in the PI. Neut. and the Aoc. Sing, of the third Dec, 
 rarely in- the Aor. ending -o-o, e. g. SXeif iii4 Od. 11, 200; commonly in 
 the particle i.pa; 
 
 (b) The E in cp.f, p.4, ae, etc. ; in tlie Voc. of the second Dec, in the Dual of 
 the third Dec, in endings of the verb, and in particles, e. g. Se', te, to'te, 
 etc. (but never in »8e). 
 
 (e) The i in the Dat. PI. of the third Dec. ; much rarer in the Dat. Sing., 
 and only when it could not be mistaken for the Ace, c. g. xave i\ r^ 
 tpviSt' "OSuo-EiJj, II. K, 277 ; in 6.p^, g/iiu, and tr<pi ; iu adverbs of place in 
 -fti, except those derived from substantives; in cITkoo-i; finally, in all end- 
 ings of the verb ; 
 
 (d) The in i.ir6, \m6 (but never in irpo), in 5i!o, in the Ncut. of pronouns 
 (except t6), and in all "' 
 
♦ 207.J LUNOTIIENING AND SHORTENING OF VOWELS. 243 
 
 (c) The o( in endings of the verb ixai, toi, aSru (ecu. only in V o\iyrine\4i,^>, 
 
 n. o, 245, and ai in the Nom. of the first Dec. in 6^eV oMvai, H. X, 272) ; 
 (f ) The 01 in /toi, to me, and in the particle, toi. 
 
 6. The V paragogie (§ 15) is commonly rejected in Ion. prose, e. g. irSa 
 
 7. The Hiatus (§ 8) is admitted by Homer in the following cases : — 
 
 (a) In long rowels or diphthongs either in the Arsis of the verse, c. g. 
 di^iae'l If 'Oiv\<rrii; or in the Thesis, in which case the long vowel of 
 diphthong is considered short, c. g. of/coi ?| <rav, 
 
 (b) When the vowel does not admit Elision, or hut rarely, e. g. iroiSl ifivj'ev; 
 
 (c) "When two words are separated by a punctuation-mark, e. g. &\K' ton, « 
 lx4nov&s yt ; 
 
 (d) In the Fem. Caesura (i. e. the caesura succeeding a short syllable) after 
 the first short syllable of the third foot; — as this caesura here divides tha 
 line into two parts, it is opposed to the close connection which would 
 arise from eliding the final vowel, u. g. 
 
 Kfivi) ] Se Tpv<pd I Aeio 1| S/i' | emero \ xei/sl ira | x^ht I'- 7i 376. 
 Tmi/ ol 1 1| lyi I vovro \\l\v\ /xeyi | poio-t ye | vfy\ri, II. s, 270 ; 
 
 (e) In the metrical Diaeresis," after the first and fourth foot of the verse, e. g. 
 
 «Vx*' I '^So/isinjos ayavov AevKaKtSao, II. /i, 117. 
 
 ■irifi,\fiai iit' 'ArpelS-g ^Ayan^/imrt | od\ov''Ov€ipoy, II. /3, 6. Comp. f, 422 ; 
 
 (f ) Where the first word has the apostrophe, e. g. SeVSpe eftaAAec ; 
 
 (g) Sometimes in proper names ; 
 
 (h) Words, which have the digamma occasion no Hiatus (§ 203, 3), e. g. 
 ov 1 Se ots 1 iraiSas e 1 affK^v (= ovU Fois). 
 
 } 207. Lengthening and Shortening of Vowels. 
 
 1. The following vowels are lengthened : — 
 
 A in Homer is sometimes lengthened into oi ; this occurs in oieroj, oie/, hyal- 
 ofMi, instead of aerSs, etc.; so also vapal (also KaToi/SaToi), in the tragedians 
 iiai, and analogous to these, viral, instead of TrapcJ, Sii, im6. 
 
 o into 7) in Homer, in ^epcS-oj/Tai, fiyep4^ovTai, i, ve/iSfts in the Arsis, conse- 
 quently on account of the metre. 
 
 d into ai before o- (JEol.) in the Ace. PI. of the first Dec. ; also in ft.in.au and 
 riXais instead of fte\ds, rdKds, tois instead of tc^s, roXiius instead of /coA^ ; in 
 Pindar, in the first Aor. Act. Part., c. g. ri^ais, -aura instead of -or, -omi ; but 
 always Tras. 
 
 Au into wv (Ion.) in rpav/ia, &av/ia and its derivatives : rpiivfut, Hitiviia, 
 duvfidCii ; and in pronouns compounded with aMs into an;, e, g. iavrov, <rfvu- 
 Tov, i^ecavroy instead of iavrov, etc. ; so also tccutS instead of ravrS. 
 
 E into €1 in the Ion. writers before a Liq. in a number of words, e. g. e&e/w 
 (also in Attic prose), Keiv6s, C^tvos, arav6s, tlpuniai. Homer lengthens « int.» 
 
 ' Metrical Diaeresis, is where a word and a foot end togethei . 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
244 DIALECTS. [i 207, 
 
 €1 according to the necessities of the verse, in other words, also, which in lonio 
 prose have e, e. g. ciV, iirelp, iretpas end, <j>pctaTa (from (jipeap, a well) ; also befora 
 vowels in adjectives in -sos, e. g. xp>5<rfi<" ; in substantives and pronouns, a. g 
 r-iruos, ifieTo ; in verbs in -em, e. g. rcXela, vvsio), also in e'las instead of eas, 
 until; sometimes also in the Augment and Reduplication, c. g. €i\-f]\ov&a, eloi- 
 Kviai, ScLSia, BetSexciTai. 
 
 E into n (Horn, and Dor.), in the Dec. of substantives in -efe, e. g. fiaffiKeis, 
 Gen. -ijos, etc. ; further {also Ion.), in adjectives in -ews, e. g. ^amXifCos, royal; 
 liliewise in single words, e. g. K\riis, KKrj'iSos (Ion.), etc., instead of K\fls, and 
 in very many substantives in a of Dec. I., e. g. a\TiS)T(tri instead of aKii^eia. 
 
 H sometimes into ai (JEol.), e. g. SivtdirKw instead of Srvi\aKa. 
 
 O into 01 (Ion. and Horn.) before a vowel in several words, e. g. Trolti, iroirieir, 
 Xpofh, poi-l], etc.; in the Gen. of the second Dec. in Homer, e. g. Sisoio instead 
 of i&eoO, and in ^oivtos, xopotruTrfTj, SdonrSptov, ay Koly7](ri(i'-), and TiyvoLTja-eiy). 
 
 O is changed into ou (Ion. and Horn.) before a Llq. or Sigma, still only in a 
 certain number of words ; and, in the Dor., before a Liq. into w, e. g. 
 
 KSpos Ion. Kovpos Dor. Kwpos fi6vos Ion. fiovyot 
 
 uyofia " ollyofia " &vo^a ''OXvfitros " OfjKvfiiros j 
 
 also in the oblique cases of S6pv and yoyv. — But substantives, which have the 
 variable vowel o, cannot bo thus lengthened, u. g. ircjyoj from iriyofuu, S6/io5 from 
 
 O into a in Homer, on account of the verse, in Aitiyuiros, icriTdeis, Tpaxift 
 irondofiai (and also Tpoxdat, troTaoftai). 
 
 T into ou often (Dor.), e. g. dovydrrip instead of ^vyariip. In Homer, in 
 flX-qKov^a. 
 
 2. The Epic dialect can resolve contracted syllables, when necessary, 
 namely, d into aa, a into at} ; tj into etj, eir;, tit} ; w into ow, wo, ww ; particularly 
 in the inflection of verbs, e. g. Spdas instead of 6p^s, RpijTiyov instead of KpTJyoy, 
 6p6(o instead of 6pa, y^Kdiovns instead of yeKStvTes, Ti^dtaaa instead of ri^iectn 
 also ip6as instead of (pais, light (from <j>dos), and proper names in -(pay, e. g. 
 ATifjLocpoaiy. 
 
 3. Another mode of lengthening a vowel in the Epic dialect is by resolving 
 an original Digamma or a Spiritus Asper into a vowel, e. g. efeTjAoj and eicTiXos 
 (FfKTi\os), oZpos instead of Spos, bound; oSKos instead of '6\as, ^e'Xips instead of 
 T^Kios ; ^iiros instead of Tcos ; elKiffffw instead of kKiaffoi (comp. volvo), iii&s instead 
 of eojj. In the Ionic, and sometimes in the Epic dialect, the a> (contracted 
 from oo and occ), is resolved by c, e. g. (//£6tw) iKeTea instead of i/c6Tao, iruAeW 
 instead of TrvxAav. 
 
 i. The following vowels are shortened : — 
 
 Ai into d before a, vowel, often in the JEol. dialect, c. g. apxaos, 'AAicaot 
 instead of kpxouos, 'AXkoios ; in Homer, in eVdpos, Irapiy, fTdpi^eoAai. 
 
 El into 6 before liquids (Ion. and in Horn.), in the forms x^P^^t X^c'i ''™™ 
 Xfip, Iiand, so also Att. x^P""'. X^P"'' j also (Ion. and Dor.) before a vowel, in 
 Proparoxytoncs in -eios, and in Properisporaena in -eia ; in Homer, only in a 
 few Eem. adjectives in -ur, c. g. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
!a07.] LENGTHENING ANB SHOM'ENrNG OP VOWELS. 245 
 
 iirtrfiSeos, -ij], -eoy Ion. instead of -eios i/cca instead of iiKcta from awiJj 
 riXeos, -in, -eov " " -eios ^aSrit] " /SaAera " ^aSiis 
 
 eup^Tj from cupij " '' -«« Sao-tj) '■ 8a<re7a " Soffiis; 
 
 EG also in Horn. 'Ep^tet instead of 'Epwcf?; also ei in Ion. is shortened into «, 
 when two consonants follow which make the vowel long by position, e. g. 
 iiriiSelij instead of i,ir6Ssit,is, fiiCav instead of iJ.et(av, Kpiaamv instead of xptla- 
 aav ; finally (Doric) in forms of the verb, e. g. aefSej instead of Aei'Scu. 
 
 Eemakk 1. In the jEol. dialect, ej before a liquid is very often shortened 
 Into c, and the Liq. is doubled, c. g. KTivva, avi^ba, aneXKii, instead of KTiiva, 
 trireipo), oiTEiA^. 
 
 H is changed into e in Hom. in apytTi, op7E'Ta, from apy{\s, -tjtos, shining, and 
 in the Subj. ending -ete instead of -tjte; also -oij.ev instead o( -aim', e. g. slfSeTE, 
 
 Oi into often in the Dor. and .SSol. dialects, e. g. iroa instead of irotu. 
 
 Ov into in Hom. in the compounds of irois, e. g. iie?Ot.6Tros, apT-'mos ; often 
 in Theocritus in the Ace. PI. of the second Doc, e. g. ris xiKos instead of -rois 
 Kixevs ; also ^ol. piWa instead of fiovK'li ^ so too in Hom. p6\iTai, 06\ea-S^ 
 fix)m Po'i\ofiau 
 
 5. On the Ionic-Attic i-nterckange of the vowels, see ^ 16, 5. 
 
 6. The use of Syncope (§ 16, 8) is frequent in Homer, particularly in forms 
 of the verb, as will be seen below ; he also has Tlirre instead of TiiroTe, y\aicTo- 
 tpdyos instead- of yakaKTOtpdyos. 
 
 7. Apocope (airoKoir^) is the rejection of a short final vowel before a word 
 beginning with a consonant. It is employed by the Epic and Doric poets, 
 sometimes also by the Ionic, and in a few single forms even by Attic prose 
 writers. It occurs with the prepositions, e. g. avd, Hard, wapd, rarely with aird 
 and ujrif, and with the (Epic) conjunction Spa. The accent is then thrown 
 back^ &v before p, ir, (p, /i, is changed into S/i (§ 19, 3), e. g. ti/i fia>fiM<ri, 
 ii/tfiahstv, hii irtXayos, SjU i\>ivov, apipiiyiD; the t in kot is always assimilated 
 to the following consonant, except that the coiTesponding smooth mute stands 
 before a rough mute (^ 17, 4), c. g. waS S6i/afiiv, kcitt cf>d\apa, kclk ke^oAt)?, Kay 
 yiinj; examples of oir(J and VT& are, airireji^ei, ipfidWetv (Horn.); examples 
 from Attic prose, aiifidrns, aiJ.po\ds, X. Cy. 4, 5, 46. 7. 5, 12, S^ttiutis. 
 
 Rem. 2. In the concurrence of three consonants, assimilation is omitted, and 
 the final consonant of the preposition is rejected, e. g. ndKTovc, Kdax^Sie, a/ivd- 
 C£i, instead of icdKKTaye, Kdtrtrx^^^i ajifivdffet. 
 
 8. Prothesis (§ 16, 10) occurs in Homer, in oo-TEpoir^ {a-Tepoirfi), ^S-E'A.ai (&E\aj), 
 ^/cEO'os (keu'oj), ipio/iai f(^iJo;ttBi) ; Homer also often resolves the -F into the vowel 
 E, namely, Uptriii eeS^o, UlKoat, ^aos, tenrov, ieXSoiioi, iepfihos. 
 
 9. Sometimes, for the sake- of the metre. Homer inserts t, e. g. .aSekfeis, 
 tayfis, instead of aSe\<pis, Kevos; so also in the Gen. PI. Eem. outeW, irpureay. 
 To prevent the accumulation of short syllables, he inserts in several compound 
 words an n in place of the short vowel, e. g. TavTt\eyeos, iv-fifioKos, ^itijetWs, 
 BAiTiJircAEeUj iAaj)TiP6\os, mstead of j-oyuA., ^Wj8., ^thet., oKiyar., eKaipofi6\os^ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
246 DIALECTS. [i 208. 
 
 An 4 is inserted in Homer after oi in d/mUos instead of B/ioios, and in the Dual 
 •oiw instead of -ou". 
 
 10. The later Ionic, also, sometimes inserts c before n long vowel : (a) in 
 some genitives of substantives and Fem. pronouns before a, and in ovtos, toi- 
 ovTos, and avr6s before long inflection-endings, c. g. iwSpeay, ■jcrtviuv, Ixaviav, 
 TouTeW, wTtav, atireqi ; (b) in some forms of the verb before a long vowel, e. g. 
 /ffrecUTi, dvyeia/jLaif Svyeavrafj (c) some verbs in -a have forms as if from -eai, 
 e. g. ^cJWo) iTvnPaM.€6iievos, uirEp;8aA\eeH' ; iriiQu VK^ei/ievos (also in Horn. 
 Tri4((vv instead of 4m4^€ov) ; also etpee, ivfix^t, liip\ee, from etjica, ipexa, S^Aoi/ ; 
 finally, the three following forms of the Perf. in -te instead of -e : olx<iicff, 
 
 i 208. Change of Consonants. 
 
 1. In the Ion. dialect, the rough breathing has no effect on the preceding 
 smooth mute, e. g. aw* o£, iir'tj/jLepos, ovk bffltas, etc. 
 
 2. In the Hom., Ion., and Dor. dialects, a S or & remains before /t, in certain 
 words and phrases (contrary to § 19, 1), e.g. o5/i^ instead of oir/f^, ifS^iiev, hfxiiA- 
 fnis, iTrcTriS'iifv, K€Kopv^u.4ms ; also in the Hom. dialect, the v remains before <r 
 (contrary to § 20, 2) in avard!, aKffxc&eW, navrvSlri instead of irairavilri ; 
 finally x before fi (§ 19, Kem. 1) in aKoxfeVoy, acute. 
 
 3. The Metathesis (5 22) of p often occurs in Hom. and in other poets, e. g. 
 KpaSlij instead of KapMa, heart, Kilprepos and Kptirepos, strong, Ktipriorros, fidpSiffros 
 (from PpaSis, slow) ; also in the second Aorists iTrpa&ov, eSpo&oi', tSpoKov (from 
 nepAa, to destroy, Sap^dva, to sleep, SepKo/itu, to see) ; here belongs also 1Jit$poTm 
 instead of ijuparov (= ^/laprov, according to § 24, 2). 
 
 4. Homer doubles a consonant (comp. § 23, Rem.) after a short vowel, 
 according to the necessities of the verse in the following cases : — 
 
 (a) The liquids and Sigma on the addition of the augment, mostly when 
 there are three successive short syllables, c. g. cAAa^Soi', f/ifia^ov, inviov, 
 
 (b) In compounds also, the liquids and Sigma are doubled, e. g. yeifAAouroi 
 (from v4o5 and \oia) ; apropos, ft\ofifietSris ; arr4!pc\os, ivwriTos', fic&i^ 
 ^oos ; iiff(re\fios ; 
 
 (c) In the inflection of the Dat. in -o-i, and of the Put. and Aor., e. g. v4Kvir<ri, 
 St&iJicuTfTi ', ndXetrtra, dfjL6a'crai, ^pdtTffoixai, i^elvurira ; 
 
 ,'d) In the middle of several words, c. g. iaaov, T6<rtrov, ottWo;, vp6a-fftt, 
 fi4iTaos, ve/ifirira, veneirvjiAfis, dv(T<rav6cis. 
 Homer doubles the mute ir in Interrogative pronouns which begin with iw, e. g. 
 S-mras, etc. ; — /c in ireAfKKOc, ireXexKia ; — t in Stti, 8tt60, Stteu ; — 5 in eSSeiffe, 
 neptSietffaffa, aSdces, &S5r]v. 
 
 Uemaek. The doubling of p, which always takes place in the Common 
 language when the augment is prefixed, and in compounds when a short vowoi 
 precedes, may be orfiitted in the Epic dialect, according to the necessities of tha 
 verse, e. g. Ipe^ov from p4(a, xpu^'^pi'Tos. For the same reason, one of the 
 eonsonants, which is elsewhere doubled, is omitted in the Epic dialect, though 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 209.] QUANTiTV. 247 
 
 rarely, e. g. 'OSva-eis, 'Ax'^eiis ipdpvyos, instead of 'OSutmis, Ax'Wfis, 
 ifjdpvyyost 
 
 5. Homer often places a consonant before a short syllable, to make it long 
 by position, namely, a y in vdyvftvos, InrdXanvos, iSpiv^rj, i.p.viiidTi, iirefiv^/iu/cE j 
 a T after ir in Trr6\(/ios, »t({Ais, itroXie^pov ; a S- after x in X'^ii/ioAoy, Six^d, 
 rpix^d, Terpax^d, and after A or p in /idt^oKos, iypriydp^eKri ; or he places a y 
 before 8 in iptySowros, 4ySoiwii<re, and a o- before /i and k in <riiiKp6s (also Att. 
 i 24, 4), iTKiBdvyv/u (comp. kISvi)Hi), truoyepas (comp. /noyepus), (TfiepSdKfOS, 
 Here belongs also the Epic prefix of /i. (= v, according to \ 24, 3), before ppo- 
 ris in composition, so as to strengthen the long syllable and give fulness to the 
 word, e. g. &nPpoTos, Tcptf/lftfiporos, and in ttfupaai-ri instead of lujtcurlii, 
 
 i 209. Quantity. 
 
 Pbeliminart Remaek. Only a few general rules will be given here ; the 
 quantity of particular words, not embraced in these rules, may be learned from 
 rules previously given, or by observation. 
 
 1. A syllable which has the vowels « or o, followed by another vowel or a 
 single consonant, is short by nature, e. g. Te;c3j, ^nis, fidii. 
 
 2. A syllable which has the vowel r; or a, or a diphthong, is long by nature ; 
 so all contracted and circumilexed syllables are long by nature, e. g. "ijpai, 
 oi/paySs, &K(ajf (instead of ac/ccui'), irlfid (from iTifiae)^ ircis, <r?ro^, ipvxos, yvy, 
 
 3. A syllable which has a doubtful vowel (o, i, u), followed by another vowel 
 or a single consonant, or at the end of a word, is short by position, e. g. 'a^i- 
 ioyreSi SatfiovtTjy tpv-fi, fiaxVs ^itXos, apyiipeos* 
 
 4. A syllable which has a short or doubtful vowel followed by two consonants 
 or a double consonant, is long by position j e. g. iKcir^ai, cKara/uySr), Si^dur&ai, 
 lx^'<^'^os, (piwoy. 
 
 Exceptions to No. 3. 
 
 (a) a of nouns of the first Dec, which have the Gen. in 'as, is long in all the 
 Cases in which it occurs, e. g. fifiepa, <l>t\ta, -as, -If, -av, etc. (Comp. § 45.) 
 
 (b) a in the Dual of all nouns of the first Dec, is long, c. g. Nom. Sing. 
 K^atva, Dual \ealva. 
 
 (c) a is long in the Gen. Sing, in -bo and Gen. PI. in -day, e. g. 'ATpti'Sdo, 
 ieyopAay. 
 
 (d) the ending -as of the first Dec. is long, both in the Nom. and Gen. Sing., 
 and in the Ace. PI., e. g. Nom. raiilds, Gen. ffxlds, Ace. PI. S(J|or. 
 
 ( e) o of masculine and feminine participles in -as is long ; so also other words 
 in -OS where yr or y have been dropped, e. g. axoiirds {itKovaayrs), axoi- 
 erda-a, I'dTcti, $&s\ yiyas (yiyavrs), /ii\ds (^ueAow). 
 
 (f ) a in the third Pars. PI. Perf Ind. Act., e. g. tcTi^Sxri. 
 
 jg) V is long in the Sing, of the Pres. and Impf. Ind. Act. of verbs in -viu, 
 also in the masculine and feminine Sing, of the participle ; e. g. SelKyv/u, 
 iSeUyvy, Seixyts, Suxyvira. — Other exceptions may be learned by obser- 
 vation. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
248 DIALECTS. [i 209 
 
 B In Epic poetry, a mute and a, liquid (§ 27, Rem. 2) commonly make a 
 syllable long by position ; the vowel is shortened, for the most part, only when 
 the form cannot othei-wise be suited to the verse, c. g. TfixfrXirKTiTa. 
 
 6. The final syllable cf a word in verse, is uniformly long by position: (a) 
 when it ends with a consonant, and the following word begins with a conso- 
 nant, e. g. Kct^i I (rov Tpa \ ar; also (b) when the final syllable ends with a 
 short vowel, but the following word begins with a double consonant, or with 
 two single consonants, which are not a mute and liquid, c. g. oSju^ | rriv, V I 
 oi/TTO) i 1 5r6 (vyhv \ ^7a7e>' ] ay^p, II. K, 293. But a mute and a liquid in this 
 case, always make the syllable in the Arsis long j on the contrary, the syllable 
 in the Thesis, may be either long or short according to the necessities of the 
 verse ; e. g. fiii fioi | Sap' 4pa \ to irpicjie \ pi XP" I "^'l^ 'A<f>po \ Sittjj, H. y, 64 ; 
 on the contrary, in the Thesis, ourip '8 | irAijo-Zoy | Iitt^ | k6i, II. S, 329 ; but 
 &vdpa I ^vrirhv i \ 6vTa, ira ] \oi ire \ trpUjji.iVOD \ atari, II. ir, 441. 
 
 Hem. 2. In the names 'indiiavSpos, Zixuv^s, Zi\eia, even a-K and f do no( 
 make a syllable long by position in Homer ; so also ctt | eird axi | irapvon, Od 
 t, 237, occurs. 
 
 7. A long vowel or a diphthong at the end of a word, in Homer, commonlj 
 becomes short before a word beginning with a vowel, when it is in the Thesis, 
 but it remains long when it is in the Arsis, or when the following word has ths 
 digamma, e. g. fi/iei'^ | iv Pey \ ^vratv, II. o, 358. ufej, & \ fiev KretJ | tou, i S 
 &p' j EupuToiJ I ^AKTopl 1 avos, II. jS, 621. avTap 6 | ^yv0 | ytriy i [ yl <ppeirl | ^tSyjj 
 I o-eV re (^ffiv = F^<nv). But sometimes a long vowel in the Thesis is not short- 
 ened before words which do not have the digamma, especially in the fourth foot 
 of an Hexameter, e. g. t^J ^-^ 1 fioi irore | pas iro^' 6 \ fioly \ ev&eo | rifiy, II. 8, 
 410, and before a punctuation-mark, e. g. KiTff^aT, | aXX' im \ /xvyoy, H. e, 685. 
 
 8. A long vowel or a diphthong in the middle of a word before another 
 vowel is but seldom shortened by the poets, and for the most part, In certain 
 words and forms ; thus, o. g. in Homer, iiret-li ( ), efuwaios ('""], oTos (""), fi4- 
 iSATjoi ( ), and often in the Iambuses of the Attic dramatists, e. g. oTos, ttoioj, 
 ToiovTos, T0i6sSe, oUi (from olofuu), ■Koiety ; and always before the demonstrative 
 i in pronouns, e. g. Tommt, ainad. 
 
 9. In Epie poetry, a short syllable in the Arsis is usually considered long, 
 if it stands at the beginning of a word, e. g. ao-iri'Sos 1 'axiiia \ Toy irvp, U. e, 4 ; 
 or at the end, in which case it is followed either by a liquid (\, ;ii, y, p), or a a 
 or S, the sound of which is easily doubled in pronunciation, or by a woi"d with 
 the digamma, e. g. /tal ircSf | a Aw | revyra, II. ft, 283. Sfvyars \ pi fjv {= Friv), 
 II. \, 226. 
 
 Eem. 3. A syllable in itself short, may be used as long or short in the same 
 word, according as it is or is not, in the Arsis, e. g.'Apfs 'A ] pes Pporo \ Aoi7e; 
 — &ySpes "l \ ffafftv and "TrKeiova | ''itTaxriy. 
 
 10. Not unfrequently in Homer, from the more necessities of the verse, 
 a short vowel is measured as long in the Thesis, when it stands between 
 two long syllables. This occurs in the middle of a word, and oftenest witb 
 1, e. g. e<r^' iwo | Se^f | 7), II. i, 73. po-i wpo | Srv/if \ jia-i, II. ;3, 588 ; this is rarely 
 the case at the end of a word, c. g. ttvkvS \ liaiyaKe \ i^y, Od. p, 198. if S' M] 
 uiy Top I 7^ B\oov \ p!i^!^[ii^£i4 ^fmrlhoM" 
 
?f 21 0,21].] FIRST DECLENSION. 24.9 
 
 B. DIALECTIC FORM'S. 
 
 '§210. Homeric Suffix </>t {^lv). 
 
 1. In the Homeric dialefit there is, besides the Case-inflections, a Suffix <i>i(v), 
 Which properly and originally denotes the indefinite where, like the had Dat. 
 (see the Syntax) ; it is also used to express other relations of the Dat., as the 
 Dat. of the instrument, and with prepositions (such as in Lat. govern the Ahl,), 
 it expresses those relations of the Gen. which in Latin would be denoted by 
 tlie Abl. 
 
 2. The Suffix (pi is found with substantives of all the declensions, and is 
 always annexed to the unchanged stem of the woi-d : — 
 
 1. Declension only in the Singular: (a) Dat. aye\Ti-^i, ary\aif\^. (in the 
 herd), ^ipTjipt, before or without the door {in several ancient editions ijijii is 
 •incorrectly written with an Iota Subs, ricpi); (b) Gen. (Lat. Abl.) ajri 
 vevpriil>ty id\X€tv (to shoot an arrow from the string), i^ evir!j<j)i ^apeTv (to spring 
 from bed), Kpa.T(pri<pi fiii]<pi, H. <p, 501 (vnth great force), t/i' iioT (jmivo/ievTi- 
 ^iy, Od. S, 407 (as soon as the morning danmed). 
 II. Declension both Singular and Plural. All these forms, without respect to 
 the accentof the N<om., are paroxytone (-oKpiv) : (a) Dat. Saicpv6cpiv (with 
 tears), p-iiimap ariJAai'Tos Ae&piv (an adniser equal to the gods) ; — (b;) Geni- 
 ;tive (Abl.) cmh or 4k vaa-a-afti(pii' (to take from the pin), in dc6<pty (through 
 the gods), kir' out Uipiv (from the bones). 
 III. Declerision almost exclusively >in the PI. 9tv is here nsed with not a large 
 number of neuter substantives in -os (Gen. -tos), also with KorvK-qSiii/ and 
 yavs, e. g. Tphs KoTv\riSoy6tpi(v) (with the union-vowel o), to the arms, yav- 
 ■(pi(y) (at the ships) ; in words in -os, the ending -os must always be restored 
 to its original form res, since (|>i is always annexed to the pure stem ; thus, 
 .SxEO'i?"(>'), o-ly lix^''''t'^{'')i ""''' Spe(r<p'i(v), AttSi, 5ia, iic (TT'liSrecr(pt(y). 
 
 4 211. First Declensi'on. 
 
 1. (a) The Epic and Ionic writers use ri instead of the original long o (which 
 the Dorians use) through all the Cases of the Sing., c. g. n^d, -5s, -a, -iy 
 (Dor.) ; a-otpiri, -tjs, -ti, -rpy, Si^prj, -rjs, yenyivs, *n, -V" (Epic and Ion,) : so Hiji/e- 
 Aoveiris, rbiyeAoTreiTj, from IIijceAoTeio, ^pi-rpT], Boperis, Boper/, Bop4riv. 
 
 Exceptions in Homer are S>ei., goddess, -as, -?, -ay, J^avotxdd, *eio, also Alyeias, 
 Aiyeias, 'Epfiefos, and some other proper names in -as pure. The Voc. of yvnipn 
 is yifiipa instead of yi/J-^-n, 11- y, 130. Od. S, 743. 
 
 (b) In substantives in -eta and -oia, derived from adjectives in -ns and -ous, a§ 
 also in some other feminines, the short a in Attic is also changed into t; in 
 Ionic, e. g. aKit^elri, avaiSeiri, evirKoh, Kviaat] instead of aK-fiSrud, hyalSem, 
 eflTr\otdf Kyifftra, 
 
 (c) The .^ol. and some other dialects have -a instead of -?js, as the Masc 
 ending in the Nom. Sing., like the Latin. The Epic also uses this form, accord- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
250 DIALECTS [) !il2 
 
 Ing to the necessities of the yerse, in a great number of words, particularly in 
 TO, e. g. iViriiTa, alxfiiiTa,, KvavoxoiTa, ve<pe\riy£peTa, iinnjAiTa, lairlera, cvpimra. 
 The Voc. retains the ending -o in all these words. 
 
 2. The Gen. Sing, of masculines in -tjj and -os originally ended in -do, -at 
 was then contracted into -a (Dor. into -a). In Horn, both the uncontracted 
 and contracted form is found; he also resolves the -a, originating from 
 -ao, by means of e (comp § 207, 3) ; it is further to be remarked, that the -u 
 in respect to accent is considered short (§ 29, Eem. 7) and the e is always pro- 
 nounced with the Synizesis; -ew becomes -a when a vowel or p precedes (still 
 fiiviUa, II. e, 534). Thus there occm- in Homer, 'Epfielas, Gen. 'Epiiilao and 
 'Ep/Ae(w ; BopfTjSf Gen. Bopeao and Bopew ; 'Arpei^Tis, 'ArpefSdo, and ^ArpeiSeu, 
 'meTao and iKeVeoi ; ^B^/i€\iiB, 'Aaia. In Homer, then, the Gen. endings of nouns 
 in -as or -rjs, are -ao, -to, or -ea (not -ov). The Gen. ending -c», becomes, in 
 the Ion. writers, the usual ending, e. g. TroXirfw, 'ATpeiSea. 
 
 3. The Ace. Sing, and PI. of masculines in -ijj is commonly formed in the 
 Ion. dialect like the third Dec, e. g. rhr Sf(nriTea, Toiis SeinrifTcas from SetriroTT/s, 
 -ov, MiXriaSea from MiAtioStjj, -ov. 
 
 4. The Gen. PI. of all the endings was originally in -dtai/ ; -iiey was after- 
 wards contracted into -ay (Dor. in -ar). Homer uses both the uncontracted and 
 contracted forms, e. g. ^edav and ^suy, irttpeiawv and Trapfiuy. He can also, 
 as in the Gen. Sing., again resolve, by means of e, the -av originating from 
 ■iai/; the ending thus becomes -eW, which is commonly pronounced with 
 Synizesis, e. g. "ttvK^uv, ^pewy, ayopiuv. The Gen. ending -ewv becomes in the 
 Ion. writers, the common form, e. g. Mouo-e'my, Ti/*fW. 
 
 5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -a«ri(y) ; this ending is found in the Dor. 
 writers, in the Att. poets, and even in the older Att. prose writers ; in the Ion. 
 writers, -oio-i was changed into -j!(n(>') and -jjs; and in the Att. and Common 
 language, -auri was shortened in -ais. In Homer, the Dat. PI. ends in -rim, -ps, 
 and -oir, yet the last is found only in d^eats and aierius. 
 
 6. The Ace. PI., in JEol., ends in -ois (as in the second Dec. in -oir instead 
 of -ovs), and in Dor. in -as (as in the second Dec. in -os instead of -ovs), e. g. 
 Toiy rifiais (^ol.) instead of t&s ri/iis (but Dat. PI. njxjuai) ; Taaas Kovoas 
 (Dor.) instead of Triffas Koipds. 
 
 i 212. Second Declension. 
 
 1. Nominative Sing. Proper names in -Aaoj are changed in the Dor. dialect 
 'rto -\as (Gen. d, Dat. ?), e. g. Meve\ds instead of Mcj/eAooy, NiftdAdj, 'Apxe<rl- 
 \ds. 
 
 2. Genitive Sing. Homer uses both the common form in -ov, and that in -oio ; 
 ;he tragedians, also, in the lyric passages, use the ending -o(o. Theocritus has 
 ine Dor. ending -a and -oio. 
 
 3. Genitive Sing, and PI. Some genitives are formed according to the 
 analogy of tlie first Dec. (a) Herodotus has some Masc. proper names in -os 
 with the ending -ea. in the Gen. Sing., e. g. BcirTea instead of Birrov, Kpolffeu, 
 K\eon^(JTEM, M€iifi\idp€a, and some Masc. common nouns with the ending 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 213.] thihd declensiok. 251 
 
 '4av in the Gen. PL, u. g. itaTaiar ; (b) The ending -&u» instead of Uo Ion, 
 •iwv belongs to the Dor. (comp. alyav instead of aiyAaiv from oTf, § 213, 5). 
 
 4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect ends in -ouv instead of -01*1, 
 c. g. &imuv instead of Sifwiv (§ 207, 9). 
 
 5. The Dat. PI. originally ended in -010-1(1/). This form, as well as the 
 abridged form in -01s is found in Homer and in all the poets, and in Ion. prose 
 
 6. The Ace. PI. ends, in the Dor. writers (except Pindar) in -as and in 'oi 
 (like -oj in the first Dec, § 211, 6), e. g. rij riiuas, v6fios, so also ris \ayis, the 
 hares; JEol. in -01s, e. g. irmrviSxois instead of -ovs. 
 
 7. Attic Declension. The Gen. Sing, in the Epic dialect ends in -So, instead 
 of -0), in ThiPf\(ao (II. {, 489 ; though most MSS. have n7)«\coio) from Xliji/e- 
 heas, and in nereSo from nercas. — In yd\us, sister-in-law, "A&as and KSs, the 
 « originating by contraction, is resolved, in the Epic dialect, by means of o; 
 hence ya\6us, 'Ad6ws, K6as, Gen. -6a. On the words y4?»is, ISpiis, Ipas, see 
 4 213, 7. 
 
 8. Contracted forms of the second Dec. are rare in Homer, namely, yoSs only 
 Od. K, 240 (elsewhere v6os), x€i/ii£^^ous, II. A, 493 (but v, 138. x^l^^h"^) ^"^ 
 Xfi/iafipoi, II. !, 452, also U<hidovs, Udy^m, ndvAtf. Homer does not contract 
 other words ; in words in -eos, -eoy, he either lengthens the t into ci (§ 207, 1 ), 
 or employs Synizesis, as the measure requires. 
 
 i 213. Third Declension. 
 
 1. In the Dor. uialect the long a here also takes the place of ri, c. g. ^iv, 
 IMv6s instead of jitV, nt]y6s, etc., "EWdy, "EAXdves, iroiix&v instead of iroinfiy. Gen, 
 -fvos, yeSras, -dros instead of yetJrijr, -tjtos. 
 
 Aid^p, d'fip, S?p«, and all names of persons in -r^p, are exceptions to this 
 Dor. usage. 
 
 2. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, on the contrary, ?; commonly takes the place 
 of the long a, as also elsewhere, e. g. ^^pri^, ofijl, J/njI instead of ddpa^, Upa(. 
 
 3. The Dat. PI. in the Epic dialect, ends, according to the necessities of the 
 measure, in -o-i(c), -o-o'i(y), -eo-i(>'), and -e(r(rt{v). The ground-form is -fo-i(i') 
 and the strengthened form is -co- o-i(y). This ending is always annexed, like 
 the other Case-endings, to the pure stem, e. g. Kvy-ea-iri (from Kiay, Gen. kvv-os), 
 veKv-eaiTi (from v4kvs, -v-os). The ending -e<n{y) is foimd in Homer only in 
 iviaiy, oUa-i, xefpeo-i, and hviKT-eaiv (from &va^, &vaitT-os). In Neuters, which 
 hare a radical a in the Nom., the a is omitted when it stands between two 
 vowels (§ 25, 1), e. g. iiri-eaai (instead of iirea--etr<ri from -rh ?iroj), Seiri-eirinv 
 (from rh SeVor). In stems in -ou, -eu, -ou {aF, tF, oF), the v (F) must be 
 omitted, according to ^ 25, 2 ; thus, p6-e<r<ri- instead of 06F-eirat, finr^-eo-o-i 
 instead of iinriiF-eaa-i. The ending -0-0-1 is annexed almost exclusively to 
 stems which end in a vowel, c. g. ycKv-crn from vexvs -v-6s ; but also tpiravi 
 from Ipis (-i5os) and commonly irocrffl from irois (ttoS-iJj). The Dat. form in 
 -oo-i never admits the doubling of o-. — The ground-foi-m -fo-i is very common 
 in the Dor. poets and prose-writers ; also the Ionic prose has this form fre 
 quently in stems ending in -y, e. g. ^■^y-effi. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
232 DiALEcts. P 213 
 
 4. The Gen. and Dat. Dual in the Epic dialect, ends iu -oiij/ (ss in tlrt 
 second Dec, § 2l2, 4), e. g. ttoSoTiv, "ietpivouv. 
 
 5. The Gen. PI. in the Ion. dialect often ends in -iwv, e. g. xv^^y, iu^peur 
 (§ 207, 10). Theocritus has rav cilyav (instead of rav oitwc) from t) al|, a goal 
 after the analogy of the first Dec. 
 
 6. The Epic dialect sometimes forms the Ace. Sing, of words in -vs (stem u) 
 in a instead of >, e. g. tvpea jrdvToc, tx^'^'^i "''" froni vavs. 
 
 7. The words ye'Araj, laughter; ISpdis, sweat ; ^pas, love, which properly belong 
 to the third Dec, in Homer follow the Attic second Dec in some of the Cases, 
 e. g. iSpS), iSpif instead of iipSiTa. and iSpan ; ydku) and yiKuv, yiKa, instead of 
 fiXwTa. and 7€\tuTi, ipia instead of ipanu 
 
 8. Words in -is,' Gen. -iias. The Horn., Ion., and Dor. dialects often 
 inflect these substanti-res, particularly proper names, in -lor, e. g. p.i)vios, Horn., 
 Qefuos, Herod., ©eVios, Dat. ©eVi, Horn. Those ending in -ii, -iSos, in the Epic 
 dialect have the Dat. only in -i instead of -5i. Substantives in -Tjfs, rijtSos, 
 ave sometimes contracted in the inflection, by the poets, e. g. ^aprjts, irappSoi 
 (instead of iraprjiSos), Kriprfts, Nrjp^Ses. See ^ 54 {c). 
 
 9. The Neut. oSs, in-os, ear, is in Dor. Sj, wtos, etc., and in Hom. oSas, Geu 
 ov&Tos, PI. oSara, the Neuters, (neap, jut ; oS^ap, udder^ and •7re7pap, end, have 
 -oTos in the Gen., nameh'", (rreaTes, oij^aroy -KeipaTa, •jrelpatru In the words 
 rtpas, Kepas, /cpeas, the Epic writers reject t, e. g. repaa, -omv, -deav-4,v)'., K^pif 
 Dat.; PI. Kepo, Kepdajy, -flieir(rt(;'.), and *-curi{v) ■; PI. Kpea, Kpsduv, Kpewv, and Kpsiav^ 
 KpecuTilv). Among the Ionic writers these words, lilce Pperas, etc. (§ 61, Rem. 
 1), often cliange the a into c, e.g. Kepeos, /c^pea, Kfpeav, ri, ripen, kpieavi^v). 
 Sec § 54 (c). 
 
 10. In the words irar^p, /i^Tjjp, etc., Homer either retains or rejects the e 
 through all the Cases, according to the necessities of the verse, 'e. g. avcpos and 
 afSp6s, av4pt and avdpi, etc., but only aySp&v, aySpdat and -etrci; ytxffritp, yaff- 
 Tepos, -4pi, and yourrpSs, yatrrpi, yaffripa, yairrepes ; ArnjiriTTip, ^Tjrepos, and -Tjrpos, 
 Ai)fir)repa', ^tiydrrip, -repos, and Tp6s, etc., ^uyaTepeir(Ti{ir>i, bat dvysTpav ; jii^Tijp 
 and trar^p, -repos, aud -rpSs, etc. See ^ 65, 2. 
 
 1 1 . In Homer, the word tx=''Pi blood of {he gods, 1ms in the Ace. I'xS instead of 
 IxSipa, and nxtKeuv, 5, mixed drinJc, has in the Ace. kvkcco or KvKetu. See § 56, 
 Rem. 1. 
 
 12. In -au J, -ens, -ous. Of 7pnDs, there ave found in Homer only the Nom. 
 yptivs and yprjis, Dat. ypTji and tire Voc ypiiv and 7p))6. In the Ion. dialect, 
 also, the long a is changed to rj; thus. Gen. ypn6s, PI. yp^es-, this also appears 
 in vms, navis, sea the Anomalies. — The word $oSs is regularly declined in 
 Her., hence Nom. PI. $6ss, Ace. jSoCs: in the Ace. PI. Homer uses both fi6as 
 and jSoCs. On the Epic Dat. jStJeiro-i, see No. 3. In Doric, the Nom. is P&s, 
 Ace P&v, Ace. PI. /3»s. This form of the Ace. Sing., occurs also in the II. ij, 
 2.38, in the sense of buWs hide, a shield made of bull's hide. See § 57. 
 
 ' The student may consult the iirst part of the Grammar, where similar 
 words are declined ; references to the particular section wUl bo given at the end 
 of the pai-agraphs here. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 213.] TltlRD DECLENSION. 253 
 
 13. In common nouns in -eis, and in the proper name 'Ax'M.tis, ri is Used In 
 the Epic dialect, instead of c, in all tlic forms ■which omitu (F) of the stem, 
 this is done to compensate by the Icngtli of the Towel for the omitted v (F) ; 
 thus, Pa(ri\evs, Voc. -eO; Dat. PI. -sCiri {except apitrTiie<riri{v) from ipurreis), but 
 Pamxfios, -rl'C, -ija, -fits, -ijiai', -^os> Yet the long a in the Ace. -€u, -eas of the 
 Attic dialect, again becomes short. Among the proper names, the following; 
 are to be specially noted ; 'OSvtreeis, Gen. 'OSva-a-^os or "OSuo-^os and 'OSvavUs, 
 also 'OSvireOs (Od. a, 398), Dat. "OSoir^i and 'OSva-eT, Ace, 'OSva-a-fja and 'OSvcr- 
 aitt, also 'OSvari (Od. t, 136) ; IIjjTieuS) riijA^or and Tl-lthios, nij\^i' and TlriXii, 
 nrjXija; the others, as 'Arpeiir, TuBeiJs, generally retain the -e and contract -eoj 
 in the Gen. by Synizesis, and sometimes -ea in the Ace, into -i; ; thus, TuSebj, 
 -61, -e'ee, and -^. — In the Ion. of Herodotus, the inflection with tj in common 
 nouns is very doubtful ; in proper names, the e is regular, e. g. IlEpire'os, AupUt$, 
 ^WKEOli/, A.lQ\4as> 
 
 14. In -»js and -ei, Gen. -fos. In Homer, the Gen. Sing, remains uncon- 
 tracted. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, both the uneontracted form -ccs, and 
 the contracted form -eis is used for the Nom. PI. The Gen. PI. remains uneon- 
 tracted (except when a vowel precedes the ending -euy, e.g. foxpiwy from 
 faXPI™'') i so ^ls° *li^ Ace. PI. ending -eas. "ApTjs has in Homer 'Apijos and 
 "Afeqs, 'Aprii or "App, 'Apei, "Ap?) and "Aprir, 11. e, 909,^Apef and "Ap^s (^ 209, 
 Rem. 3). See § 59. 
 
 15. In proper names in -/cA^r, the Epic dialect contracts te into rj, e.g. 
 'HfoK\e'jjr, -KKrios (instead of kKUos), -Tj'i, -ijo, Voc. 'H/kJkAeis; but in adjectives 
 m -cTjs it varies between -« and t;, e. g. o7o/c\6^y, Gen. a-yoKATJoy, but ivK\etas 
 (Ace. PI.) from ivK\efis, e'ii^^E^i, Gen. liipptios. The Ion. and Dor. writers, and 
 sometimes the poets for the sake of the verse, reject an s in these -frords, o. g. 
 TlepiKKios, -€% etc.; so also in Homer, SusK\fa, II. fi, 115, and {mepSea, II. p, 330. 
 
 16. In (a) -as, Gen. -aos. In Homer, the contracted forms, fipa Dat., and 
 MiVd) Ace. occur. — (b) -Jis and -», Gen. -60s. Words of this kind even in tlie 
 Epic and Ion. writers, as well as in the Attic, always have the contracted form, 
 except xp<^s and its compounds, c. g. XP"^'' XP"^! X/"'* — The Ion. dialect fre- 
 quently forms the Ace. Sing, in -ovv instead of -w, e. g. 'I«S, 'law, ii^s, ijovv^ — 
 The JEoL Gen. Sing, ends in -as, a. g. aiSas, Sdnipas instead of alSovs, SaTr^oOi, 
 thus, in Moschus, ras 'Axas. See § 60. 
 
 17. In (a) -as, Gen. -aos. In Homer, the Dat. Sing, is either uneontracted 
 or contracted, according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. yfipat and ■y^ipif, 
 Sdvif, o-€\a. But the Nom. and Ace. PI. is always contracted, e. g. Sewa. — On 
 those in -as, Gen. -eos, see § 61 (a), and Kem. 1. 
 
 (b) In -OS, Gen. -eos. The Epic dialect, according to the necessities of the 
 verse, has sometimes the uneontracted and sometimes the contract forms, 
 except in the Gen. PI., which is always uneontracted. The Gen. Sing, is also 
 uneontracted, except in some substantives which contract -eos, as in the Dor., 
 into -eus ; thus, 'Epepevs, Srip<revs, yeyivs, ftii/i/Seus, Srepevs ; Dat. Sing. Srepei and 
 »4pei, K(£wi€i; and niWei. Nom. and Ace. Plurals in -ea, commonly remain 
 uneontracted, but they must be pronounced with Synizesi-s, i. e. as one syllable, 
 e, g. velKea, /SeAfa.— The Ion. dialect is like the Epic- -In <r7re'os, ka/os, Sdos, 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
254 DIALECTS. [{ 214, 
 
 Xf><oii the Epic dialect lengthens e, sometimes into €(, sometimes into ij ; thus, 
 (Jen. trirelovs, Dat. ffTrrjX, Ace. (Tjre'oi and trirfTos, Gen. PI. (TTreW, Dat. ttT!iir(rt[y) 
 and <ni)^<riri(v) ; XP^'"* ^'^'1 XP""* i *^^'" ^""^ KAsKt. 
 
 18. In -IS, Gen. -Xos; -is, Gen. -Coj. The Epic dialect contracts those in 
 -« in the Dat. Sin^., e. g. offui, irAeftur, vekui; the Ace. PI. appears with tho 
 contracted or uncontracted forms, according to the necessities of the verse, 
 though more usually contracted, e. g. I'x&Ss instead of Ixhias, SpSs ; vhvas is 
 Klways uncontracted ; the Nom. PI. never suffers contraction, hut is pronounced 
 with Synizesis. The Dat. PI. ends in -iffari and -iea-ffi (dissyllable), e.g. ixrWc- 
 <riv and Ix^if'for"'- See § 62. 
 
 19. In -IS and -I, Gen. -loi, Att. -euj;. -iii and -S, Gen. -lioj, Att. -eas: — 
 
 (a) The words in -Is, Att. Gen. -«»!, in the Epic and Ionic dialect, retain i 
 of the stem through all the Cases, and in the Dat. Sing, always suffer contrac- 
 tion, and usually in the Ace. PI. in the Ionic writers, and sometimes also in 
 Homer (-« = -r, -los = -is), e. g. rr6\is, irSxtos, irSXT, ir6\iv, TTiJAies, iroKlaii', v6\urt, 
 Tri\ias, and iriJAis. In the Dat. Sing, however, the ending -ei and -ei is found 
 in Homer, e. g. v6<reiC and iriJo-ei from iriJo-is ; in some words, the i of the stem is 
 changed into e in other Cases also, e. g. EiraA|ei$ instead of hrd\^tas, inii\^art(v), 
 especially in t6\is, which, moreover, according to the necessities of the verse, 
 can lengthen e into i; ; thus. Gen. tj-Saios, iroAeos, and ttiJajjos, Dat. TrcfAei, tiJaei, 
 and ir6\7iTy Nom. PI. Tr^fAees and TrtfATjes, Gen. iroXiav, Dat. iroKiefffft, Ace. n-t^Aias, 
 7r(!Aeis, ir6\rias; from ois, ovis, Dat. PI. oie(r(ri{v), olf£<ri(y), Se(rt{y). See § 63. 
 
 (h) The words in -fiy, whose Gen. in the Attic ends in -ews, in the Ionic 
 make the Gen. in -eos, e. g. viixeos, except eyxe\vs, Gen. -uos ; in the Dat. Sing., 
 both the contracted and uncontracted forms are found in Homer, e. g. elipet, 
 TT^X") tAoteT. In the Nom. PI., the form can be either contracted or uncon- 
 tracted ; in the Ace. PI., the uncontracted form in -eos is regular, which, when 
 the verse requires, can be pronounced as a monosyllable, e. g. teAekem (tri- 
 syllable). 
 
 i 214. Anomalous and Defective Words. — Metaplasts. 
 
 1. T6vv [rh.hnee) and 56pv (t)>, spear, §68, 1), are declined in Homer as 
 follows : — 
 
 Sing. yoivaTos and yovvos Soiparos and Sovpis Soipan and Soupi 
 
 PI. Nom. yoiyara " yovva Soipara " Sovpa — Dual SoS/je 
 
 Gen. yo'uywv Soiipwy 
 
 Dat. youi/a(rt(y} and yovvetririiy) So6paiTi{y) and Sovpefrffilv). 
 The form yovvaaai (II. i, 488, p, 451, 569) has critically little authority. 
 
 2. The following forms of k cJpa (rb, head, 5 68, 6) are found in the Ilomerie 
 dialect : — 
 
 Sing. Nom. kcJ/h; Gen. xipriTos napiiaros Kpards Kpiaras 
 
 Dat. KipriTt Kaplan Kpari Kpiari 
 
 Ace. Kipn {tIv Kpara, Od. », 92, and ettI laifi, II. «■, 392). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
vr;.is 
 
 Dor 
 
 . vavs 
 
 ve6s 
 via 
 
 
 ya6s (also Trag.) 
 
 yat 
 
 vavy and yav 
 
 roe 
 
 yaoly 
 
 «'« 
 
 
 va^s 
 
 VitaV 
 
 
 yawy 
 
 ' 215-.1 ADJECTIVES. 255 
 
 PI. Nom. KcipS Kapiiara ; secondary form Kdpriya 
 Gen. Kpirav " KOfrfivav 
 
 Dat. Kpa(r^(>') 
 Ace. KpcSoTo " Kifniya 
 
 3. Aaos (6, s^one, Horn., instead of xSi), 6cn. Aacrj, Dat. XSi, Ace. \oo)', Gca 
 Fl. A((ii»', Dat. A({E(r(ri(i'). 
 
 4. Meis (i, month), Gen. fiTjvds, Ion., instead of /ti^i/, -6s, but also in Plato. 
 
 5. NoSs {fl, ship) is inflected in the Epic, Ionic, and Doric dialects a» 
 follows: — 
 
 S. Nom. Ep. and Ion. y/ivs 
 
 Gen. «j(Js (also Tragic) 
 
 Dat. yrfl 
 
 Ace. vrja 
 
 D. Nom. Ace. Voc. yr/e 
 
 Gen. and Dat. ytoiv 
 P. Nom. yijes 
 
 Gen. i/>IwK(i'aS^i only Ep.) yeuy 
 
 Dat. yijwiri (j»aDiJ>ionlyEp.) ylieff<ri{y), yU(T(ri{v) yavirt{y) 
 
 Ace. y^oi yf'oy yaas. 
 
 6. 'Opyis ((i ^, bird). Gen. Spyt^-os, Doric SpvjX""*! ^tc. (§ 203). 
 
 7. Xeip {fj, hand), Ion. xep6s, x^p'j X^fi I*'ial x^iiP^i X^PO'" (poet. also x«'P''"')i 
 PI. x^P^^! X^P""! X^f^'l") (x*'P^''''('')i ^"'^ -€irr«(c) in Homer), x^C"'- 
 
 Beuabk 1. Metaplasm (§ 72) occnrs in Homer in the following words: 
 &\ieii, ii, strength, Dat. a^Jci (from Nom. "AAH) ; 'AiSr/s, -ov, 6, Gen. &iSos, Dat. 
 ii'St {'AIS); 'Ayri^eETTjj, -ao, i, Aco. 'AvrujiaTria C'ANTI*ATET2) ; taiKii, ri, pur- 
 suit, Ace. laxa ('ICE); icntyT), ri, battle, Dat. iafuvi (ian'is) ; — TlirpoKKos, Gen. 
 TlaTp6K\ov and -kX^oj, Acc. -kXoi' and -k\^o, Voc. -k\cis (HATPOKAHS) ; tti/Spif- 
 TToSoy, rh, slave, Dat. PI. ct^/SpairfJSeffiTifv) j wpSsosiroy, ri, ^ce, PI. Trposf^TraTo, 
 irposiiTraat ; ufoj, i, son, has from 'TIET2 and 'TIS the following forms : Gen. 
 uUos and vTos, Dat. vht and vfi, Acc. vica and via ; Dual vTc ; Nom. PI. vice; and 
 vhis and vTes, Dat. vif^tri, Acc. vUas and uros j — OlSlirovs, Gen. OiSiTrdSoo 
 ('OIAinOAHS). 
 
 Kem. 2. The following are defective in Homer : \itI Dat. and rh Kha, linen ; 
 Ais and \7y = AeW and Kcoyra ; piiaTi and jtiaTtv = /idim^i and -o ; imx^s, 
 (TtIx^s, ffrlx"!, row ; Sffffe, ri), Nom. and Acc. Dual, both eyes ; ii\>f\os, advantage. 
 and ^Sos, pleasure, in the Nom. only ; 9ipa, something pleasing, and Seims,form, in 
 the Acc. only ; ii\e6s, infatuated, Voc. ^Ae and ^At e ; finally, SS, Kpi, £a^i, as 
 Nom. and Acc. Sing., from which come the forms Sm/io, house, xpidri, barley, 
 &K<j>iToy, dried barley. 
 
 §215. Adjectives. 
 
 1. Some adjectives in -vs, -eio, -v, have sometimes in the Homeric dialect, 
 the feminine form -to or -cr; ; viz. aiKe'o (instead of uKcTa), $a^4a (instead of 
 PoAfta) ; Gen. /SoaeTjr (and )3o3-fiV) , Acc. PaSiiriv ; so also in Herodotus, -ea, 
 seldom -cia, e. g. ^aSria, -eri and -eio, fiapea, evpea, Idvs, -4a and -eTa, Sii\\fa (from 
 &^Aus), Tj/ilirea. 
 
 Eemakk. In Epic and Doric poetry, some adjectives of this kind, and also 
 some in -rfeis and -^Etj, are of the common gender, i. e. they have but on« 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
25G DIALECTS. P 216 
 
 termination for tlie Masc. and Fem., e. g. "Hpij &? Kvs iovffo, II. t, 97 ; so riSiis 
 avTuii, Od. /i, 309, and the irregnlar iroXus: iroXfiy 4(p' vypi\v, II. k, 27; so iiina- 
 &6eis, an^fiSsis, apytyieis, iroi'lieis, agreeing with feminine substantives. — The 
 Epic ct"s or iivs, Neut. tjv {40 and eS only as an adverb), wants the feminine 
 form ; in II. w, 528, is found S^tiptop ota SiSutrt kukcov, erepos Se ioLQjv (so. Sctipui^), 
 therefore iduf as the Gten. PI. Neut., unless perhaps from Sdpuy the cognate 
 Soireav is to be supplied for iawv to agree with, as in 5aiT%)es iiav sc. S6<reuv ; 
 the Gen. Sing, is irjos. 
 
 2. Adjectives in -ieis, -^so-o-o, -^ev, are often found in Homer in the contracted 
 form -5s, -^ffffa, -riv, e. g. ■ri/j.-^s (and Tifi'liets), Ti/j.rjvTa ; those in -ieis, -ieaffa, 
 -6ev, contract -oe into -ev, e. g. TreSfa Ktar^vvTa. 
 
 3. In the Epic dialect, r:o\is is regularly inflected in the masculine and 
 neuter, viz. Nom. iroXis and irouAis, Neut. iroXv, with the secondary forms 
 vo\k6s, ■ko\\6v, Gen. 7roA.6os, Ace. iro\u(/ and irovKiv, iro\{i and iroWtJi' ; Nom. 
 PI. vo\4es and TroAets, Gen. iroA.ea>p, Dat. 7roX€(ri{;'), iroKetrcrtiy}^ and iroA6€ir(ri(»'), 
 Ace. ToXeas and TroKeTs. — The Ionic dialect inflects jroWos, -4i, -6y, regularly 
 throughout. 
 
 4. Compound Adj. in -of (comp. § 78, 1.) often have in Hom. a feminine ending, 
 viz. -7;, e. g. a^mfti.Tq, aa-^effrtj, To\v(p6pffrjj apt^^\Tj (but also api^7]\ot avyalt II. 
 X, 27), afi^iPpSrT], oyx*^^"*?* ctpyupoTre^o, afi^ipirr] ] on the contrary, kAut^s as a 
 feminine is found in II. p, 742. Od. e, 422, from the simple k\vt6s, -fi, -&v. Also 
 the ending -or of the superlative is sometimes found as feminine, e. g. oKoirraras 
 id/i'ti, Od. 8, 442. /cori irpdiruTTov oTmTti\v, H. Cer. 157. Comp. § 78, Kem. 1. 
 
 5. Compound adjectives in -vovs, -vow. Gen. iroSos, in tlie Epie dialect, can 
 shorten -iroui into -iros, e. g.'Ipu ae\A(!iroy, H. ,&, 409. rpliros, II. x> 443. 
 
 6. '^piTjp^s from dpiriposj ^pvcapfiar^s and -as from ipvffdppLaTos, arc examples 
 of Metaplastic forms of adjectives in Homer. 
 
 § 216. Comparisoti, 
 
 1. In the Epic dialect, the endings -^repos and -draTos are used for the sake 
 of the metre, even when the vowel of the preceding syllable is long, e. g. 
 oCQuptfiT^pos, oi^vpdiTaTos, KOKO^eiv^Tepos, Kaptinajos. — ^AvnjpSs, irowifesome, has 
 tlie Comparative avn\pi(TTepov, Od. i3, 190, and Sxapis, disagreeable, axaplirrepos, 
 Od. V, 392. Comp- 5 82, Rem. 6. Adjectives in -uj and -poi, in the Homeric 
 dialect, form the Comparative and Superlative in -iav, -lov, and -uttos, -t), -oc, 
 sometimes also regularly, e. g. iKax^s, little, IxAx^aTos, yKvKvs yXuxiav, fiaAis, 
 fid^itrros, KvdpSs, Ki^icrros, oiKTpSs oXktiittos and oiKTp6TaTos, Trax^s irdxtiffoSt 
 vpea-fivs irp4tT^i(rrQS, ukvs iaKtaros. 
 
 2. Besides the anomalous forms of comparison mentioned under § 84, the 
 following Epic and dialectic forms require to be noticed: — 
 
 aya,^6sy Comp. apelajv, hoiitay, AwiVepos (Ion. Kpcfftrav, Dor. Kd^jtwy), Sup. 
 
 KapTiirros. 
 kukSs, KaxSjepos, XE'poxepor, x^Pe^mj/, x^P^'-irspos (Dor. x^f^""^ Ion. srsap). 
 
 Sup. ^(cio-Toj (II. tj(, 531, Avith the variation fJKttrros, which fepitzner prefers). 
 6\lyos, Comp. oXiCai" {oAl^oves ?i(rav, populi suberant statura minores, II. <r, 
 
 519); lijiav, Bion, 5, 10. 
 pritSios, Ion., Comp. pijhepos (Ion. prjtaiv), Sup. (lyftraTos and plfiaTos. 
 0paSvs, slow, Comp. ^pdaaaiv. Sup. ffdpSia-Tos (by Metathesis). 
 
217.] 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 257 
 
 Remark 1. The -positive XEPH2 ix^pv, x^PVa, x^pv^s, x^PVa] found in 
 Homer, and belonging to x^P^l"", always has the signilicatiou of the Compara- 
 tive, less, baser, weaker. The PI. -itKees and (Ace.) ir\e'os are found in Homer 
 from tho Comp. ir\4av. 
 
 Rem. 2. In the Epic dialect, the forms of the Comparative and Superlative, 
 in many instances, are derived from Substantives ; some of these forms have 
 been transferred to the Common language: 6 Pa<ri\eis fi(Wi\siTepos ; ri 
 KepSos, gain, KepSiov, more lucrative, KepSiffTOs; t6 iKy o s, pain, oKyiav, more 
 painful, &Kyunos; rh j>7yos, cold, fiiyiov, colder, more dreadful, piymTosi t4 k^- 
 5 1, care, ioiSuttos, most dear ; 6 ft xiav, dog, Kvurepas, more shameless, kvvthtos. 
 
 § 217. Pronouns. 
 
 I.S.N. 
 
 iyti and (before a vow- 
 
 <ri Epic; ri Dor. and 
 
 
 
 el) iy^v Epic; iya 
 
 JEol. ; rif-q Epic 
 
 
 
 and er/uv iEolie 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 E/Aco, i^Gv, /AeS (jueu) 
 
 TeS Dor.; treo {a-^o). 
 
 eo [h], eS (eu) Epic 
 
 
 Epic and Ion. 
 
 (Tsv (<reu), Ep. and Ion. 
 
 and Ion. 
 
 
 ififio Epic 
 
 treto and reoio Epic 
 
 efoEp.; ee?o later Ep. 
 
 
 ilisSiev Epic 
 
 a-e^ev Epic 
 
 '4dei> e^ev) Epic 
 
 
 4[iGv^f 4/iovs Doric 
 
 reus, Teovs Dor. 
 
 iovs Dor. 
 
 r». 
 
 iliolj/iol (/noij.l/ioi iEol. 
 
 a-oi Epic 
 
 
 
 4iifi> Doric 
 
 riy Dor. ; Tffv Dor. et 
 
 if Dor. (usually or- 
 
 
 
 Ep. (usually Orthot.) 
 
 thotone) 
 
 
 
 Toi (toi) Ep. and Ion. 
 
 £or,or(oJ)Ep (Reflex.) 
 
 A. 
 
 e>e', /he' (iii) Epic 
 
 <ri (ire) Ep. ; re Dor. 
 
 «,?(!) (as Neut.Il. 
 
 
 
 Ti) (tu) Dor. 
 
 a, 236.) 
 
 
 
 r/y in Theocritus 
 
 vtv [mv) Dor. (and Att. 
 
 poet.) [him, her, it) 
 fitv (/io/) Ion. (him, her, 
 
 it; seldom PI.) 
 ir(()e Dor. et Att. poet. 
 
 D.N. 
 
 vm 
 
 
 fftpaitv {ff(p(aXv) 
 
 
 G.D. 
 
 vuCv 
 
 •Epic 
 
 o-^sr, ,r,p^_ U . 
 
 aipoitv, fftpaiy J 
 
 A. 
 
 y&Xy vtio . 
 
 
 tT<pwt, c^efi 
 
 ff^oje, a-fiee ■ Epic 
 
 
 
 
 (Ti^cj], o'<pw ) 
 
 P.N. 
 
 ^^ueisEpic; iiiiUslon. 
 
 ifi^is Ep. ; iiiUs Ion. 
 
 
 
 a/tis Dor. ; &^fies Epic 
 
 U|i«'s Dor. ; iniies Ep. 
 
 
 G. 
 
 riiJ.4av Ion. and Epic 
 
 u^eW Ion. and Epic 
 
 (Tfpeav (ffipeoiv) Ion. 
 
 
 Tjixeiaiif Epic 
 
 ilieiav Epic 
 
 and Epic 
 
 
 hliiifav .^olic; k/iSiv 
 
 viiiieav Mo\. 
 
 (T^wc Epic 
 
 
 Doric 
 
 
 o-^EiW Epic 
 
 D. 
 
 T)iuv, Jiiuv, 7iii.lv Epic 
 
 ifjuv, Zfiiv, ifiiv Epic 
 
 
 
 &IJ.Iu(v) Mo\. and Ep. ; 
 ajuv and kniv Dor. 
 
 {;/t^i(c) Epic 
 
 <r^i (ir^i) Ion.; o-cff- 
 (n(i'),[ff0Hri(»)],o-<(>f>', 
 
 
 aiJiiJ,i<ri{v) JEol. 
 
 
 (<r<f>ty),(r(l>l (<r<pt) Ep. ; 
 SiTifi Mol. 
 
 A 
 
 Ti/icas Ion. and Epic 
 
 vjiias Epic and Ion. 
 
 <r<p€as (trcfieas) Ion. 
 and Epic. 
 0'(/)as, (r<^e7os Epic 
 
 
 ?lims, viids Epic 
 
 vims, vfids Epic 
 
 
 S/tjucEinc; oue Dor. 
 
 6ju/4e Epic ; ujue Dor. 
 
 (<r(f.E)Epic(Il.-.265.) 
 
 
 
 
 &a-(l>€ JEol. 
 
 Eemakk. The forms susce] 
 
 jtible of inclination are those written without 1 
 
 an accent. I 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
258 DIALECTS. [{ 218. 
 
 2. The compound forms of the reflexive pronouns, Iimvtov, (reavroS, etc., are 
 never found in Homer; instead of them, he -writes the personal pronouns and 
 the pronoun aiiros separate, c. g. e/i' auriiy, i/iol avrif, Ifiev cuiTrjs, I avT^ir, ol 
 aiiTrj. When the pronoun aiiros stands first, it signifies himself, hersdf, itself, 
 even. Bat tlie Ion. writers use the compound forms iaeaivrov, ireavTov, iavroO, 
 etc. Comp. ^ 207, 1. 
 
 3. Possessive pronouns : tcSs, -I], -iv Dor. and Epic, instead of ir6s ; iis, -^, 
 -iv, and is, 5), 'iv, suus. Epic ; afiSs, -it, -6v Dor. and Epic, S/nftoj, a/ififrfpos JEol, 
 instead of rnxerepos ; yatrepos, of vs both. Epic ; i/ais, -^, -6v Dor. and Epic, 
 ififios .Mol., instead of i/iirepos ; o-ijKoiTcpos, of you both, II. a, 216 ; <r<l)6s, -^, ■6i> 
 JEol. and Epic, instead of fftpiTepos. 
 
 4. Demonstrative pronouns : (a) 6 ^ rd (Dor. a instead of tj] ; Gen. t» Dor., 
 Toio and tcD Epic, tSj Dor. ; Dat. t^ Dor. ; Ace. -rdv Dor. ; PI. Toi and ral Dor. 
 and Epic; Gen. TtJtov Epic, tSv Dor.; Dat. ToTcri, TaTln, Tpri, and ttjj Epic; 
 Ace. Ttis, t6s Dor. 
 
 (b) 8Sc: Epic Dat. PI. ToijSeiri and ToiiSco-iri instead of roisSe; Epic Dat. 
 ToicrfSE instead of ToisSe is found also in the Tragedians. 
 
 (c) oEtos and ourtfj: an e stands before the long inflection-endings in the 
 Ion. dialect (§ 207, 10), c. g. Tovreov, ravreris, toutcw, tovt4ovs, taneii, aiireuy, 
 
 (d) 4Ke7ms is written in Ion. and also in Att. poetry xums, JEol. Krjvos, Dor 
 
 (e) On the Ion. forms uvris, t<i>vt6 instead of 6 avris, rh avri, see §§ 206, 1, 
 and 207, 1. 
 
 5. Eelative pronouns : 3 Dor. and Horn., instead of oj ; oTo Ion. and Epic ; 
 Sou Epic seldom, lijr II. ir, 208 ; Jcri and ^s instead of aTs. Besides Ss, 5(, the 
 other forms of the pronouns are supplied, in the Dor. dialect, by the forms of 
 the article, e. g. t6 instead of S, toS instead of o5, rrjs instead of ?j, etc. The 
 Epic dialect uses both forms promiscuously, according to the necessities of the 
 verse. In the Ion. dialect also, the forms of the article are frequently used 
 instead of the relative. 
 
 6. Indefinite and interrogative pronouns: (a) tIj, t1: Gen. t4o (t€o) Epic 
 and Ion., red (rev) Epic, Ion., and Dor., Dat. rem (tfoj), t$ (tijj) Epic and Ion. ; 
 PI. &ir<ra Neut., dmoT &<rcra, Od. i-, 218, Gen. t4uv {reav) Epic and Ion., Dat 
 Te'oiiri Epie and Ion. (To«n, S. Trach. 984). 
 
 (b) tIj, tI: Gen. reo Epic and Ion., teD Epic, Ion., and Dor., Tea Ion. 
 
 (c) 8sTis: Nom. STir,Neat.8Ti,8TriEp. 
 Gen. oTeuEp.andIon.,STco, 
 
 '6TTeo, Sttcu Epic. 
 Dat. Stc^, Srp Ep. and Ion. 
 Ace. Srira Epic, Neut. 8ti, 
 
 oTTi Epic, 
 
 Neut. PI. oTiva Hiad. 
 ((Teaiy Epic and Ion. 
 
 irtoun Epic and Ion., h-iyai Her. 
 irivas Epic, Neut. &nva and S.<raa, Epic. 
 
 ^ 818. The Numeeals. 
 
 The JEol. and secondary form of ida is fa, trfs, tri, lav ; also 1$, II. (, 422, is 
 •Qstead of kvi. Aio and Sia are indeclinable in Homer ; the secondary formi 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
j 219.] AUGMENT AND REDUPLICATION. 259 
 
 are SoicS (indecl.), Soiol, Soiat, Soid, Dat. SoioTs, SoioTo', Ace. Saui (indecl.), Sotois, 
 ■is, -d. — Ula-vpes, -a Mo\. and Epic, instead of reVo-oper, -a. — Autf Se/ca and Sua- 
 KalSsKa Kpic, also StJSeico. — "Eefitoffi Epic, instead of rf/cocri. — 'OySiiicovTa and 
 ivvi}KovTa Epic, instead of oyJo^Kocro, ivevfiKoyrci. 'EvvedxAoi and ScKiix'A-oi 
 Epic, instead of 4vyaKisxl>^ot and /i^pioi. Tlie endings -dKoi/ra and ■aK6aioi in 
 the Epic and Ion. become -iiKonTa, -rj/crfirioi. The Epic fonns of the ordinals 
 ai-o Tplraros, rh-paros, i0Safw,Tos, iy56a,Tos, ^varos, and tiyaros. 
 
 The Veeb. 
 
 i 219. Augment. — Reduplication. 
 
 1. All the poets, except the Attic, may reject the augment, according to the 
 necessities of the verse, e. g. xDo-c, aTdKavro, diaav, iparo, e'Ae. The Ion. 
 prose, as well as the Epic dialect, may omit the temporal augment ; it may also 
 omit it in the Perf., e. g. a/i/Mu, ipyturixai, oiKi)tuu, which is done by the Epic 
 writers only in &vaya and ipxarai from ^pya. 
 
 2. On the omission of the Epic dialect to double the p when the augment is 
 prefixed, c. g. epefoj, and on the doubling the liquids, e. g. frnreTO, see § 208, 
 4, and Kem. 
 
 3. a in the Dor. writers is changed into d by the augment, and oi suffers no 
 change, c. g. 570^ instead of ?iyor, aXpeov instead of ^peov. 
 
 4. Verbs which have the Uigamma, in Homer take the syllabic augment, 
 according to the rule, e. g. avSavw, to please, Impf. kdvhamv, Aor. eaSov , — tISa- 
 pai, mdeor, iiurdfiiii', also in the participle Icurdiievos. On account of the verse, 
 the € seems to be lengthened in (toiKvid, eUaSe (cFoSc) from avSdva. 
 
 5. In Homer, the verbs oiVoxoew and avBdvai, take at the same time both the 
 syllabic and temporal augment, viz. ioivoxiei, II. S, 3, yet more frequently ^po- 
 X<^et; e-fivdave and nffuSoafe. 
 
 6. The reduplication of p is found in Homer, in ^epv]Tiiip.4ms, from p\nr6ai, to 
 make dirty. On the contrary, the Epic and poetic Perfects, s/tfiopa from fielpa/iat 
 and HaaviMi from trAw, are formed according to the analogy of those beginning 
 with p, i. e. by Metathesis ; hence iiijjiopa, etc., instead of niptopa. — The Epic 
 and Ion. Perf. of KTdo/iai is eKTTjfioi. A strengthened reduplication is found in 
 the Hom. forms SeiSex""''" and SeiSfKTO. 
 
 7. In the Epic dialect, the second Aor. Act. and Mid. also often takes the 
 reduplication, which remains through all the modes. In the Ind. the simple 
 augment e is commonly omitted; thus, e. g. Kdfiva, to grow weary, Subj. Aor. 
 KSKd/jUD; KfKoiiaiyto command, iiKK\6ii,Tiv; K\iu, to hear, Aor. Imp. KexKvd^, 
 KeK\uTc; Xayxdva, to obtain, \e\axov, \afi$dva, to receive, KeKafieaSai; 
 \ar&di>a, lateo, to escape notice, AeXa&oy; irel^a, to persuade, iriiri^ov, irem&rf- 
 liTiv; repiTK, to delight, rerpair6ia)v ; Tvyxdva, to obtain. rervKety, TETU/ce'o'&m ; 
 *ENn, to murder, sireipvov, irecpyov; (ppd^a, to say, to shenr., iri^paSov, initppaSor. 
 Aorists with the Att. reduplication (comp. § 124, Kem. 2) commonly take the 
 augment: 'APXl, to Jit, ijp-apoy; 'AXn, to grieve, ^x-axoy; aKe^a, to ward off, 
 ik-a\Koy, &\a\K€'iy ; Spvvut, to excite, &p-opoy; i ylirTU, to chide, iyep-Toy. Twe 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
260 DIALECTS. [§ 220 
 
 verbs in the Aor. take the reduplication in the middle of the word : viz. ivlirrui, 
 jjx-ftroTrev, and ipixa, to restrain, iipi-Kaxoy, ipvKaKUiv. Comp. the Presents, 
 
 8. In the Dialects, there are still other forms of the Perf. and Plap. with the 
 Att. reduplication (§ 124); thus, c. g. alp 4a, to take, Ion. a,p-aipi)Ka, ap-aipTinai; 
 aXoo^ai, to wander, Epic Perf. with a Pres. signification a\-i£A))/uai ; 'APfl 
 (hpapia-Koi), to Jit, Poet. &p-apa, I Jit, (Intrans.), Ion. Spijpa; 'AKa {Si.KaxlC"h to 
 grieve. Epic and Ion. oK-iixeimi, ajc-dxin"" j 'ENEKO (<(>t'/)M), to cany, Ion. e> 
 iiveiyi^cu ; ipelira, to demolish,Toet. ip-^ipnra,^pic ip-epacTo; i pi Qia, to contend, 
 Epic ip-iiptiriiai. 
 
 J 220. Personal- endings and Mode-vowel s, 
 
 1. First Pers. Sing. Act. The original ending -fti of the first Pers. Sing., ia 
 found in the Epic dialect in several subjunctiveH, k. g. KTelvufu, ayiyuni, tvxuiu, 
 '/kwjui, iS'4\uiii, XSai/u. Comp. § 116, 1. 
 
 2. Second Pers. Sing. Act. In the Dor., and particularly in the Mol. and Ep. 
 dialect, the lengthened form -irS-o is foimd (§ 116, 2). In the Ind., this 
 belongs almost eKclusively to the conjugation in -/j.t, e. g. rt^a^a, (priaAa, 
 SiSaur&a, irap^(r^a. In Homer, this ending is frequent in the Subj., e. g. e^eXr/a- 
 &o, Eifjrpcr&o, more seldom in the Opt., e. g. K\aloi(r^a, pi\oi(r&a. 
 
 3. Instead of -the ending -eis, the Dor. frequently has the old form -ej, e. g. 
 Tiwres instead of Tiin-eis ; so in Theocritus avpiaies = crvpl^eis. 
 
 4. Third Pers. Sing. Act. In the Epic dialect, the Subj. sometimes has the 
 ending -o-i (arising from -ti) appended to the usual ending of the Subj., c. g. 
 4^4KTi(ri{v), &yri<n, aXAKKriin; the Opt. only in Trapatfi&alriffi. 
 
 5. Instead of the ending -ei in the Pres. Ind. of the Dor. dialect, the form -t) 
 is used, though seldom, b. g. SiSdffKri instead of SiSqitkci. In the second and 
 third Pers. Sing. Perf. Act., Theocritus uses the endings -t)s, -ri instead of -as, 
 -6, e. g. TreTr6y^s, oniitinj instead of Tr4-jrov^as, tirui'Ki. 
 
 6. First Pers. PI. Act. The Dor. dialect has retained the original ending 
 -jUes, u. g. rvtrrofies instead of T'ltnrofiey (§ 204). * 
 
 7. The third Pers. PL Act. of the principal tenses, in the Dor. dialect, ends 
 throughout in -vti, e. g. TiJTrToyTi (instead of TiiTToutri) , tw^ovti, tuttwcti 
 (instead of TiTrTco(n), TeT6(j)ayTi, iiraiveovrt, i^airarioifTi. In the jEol. and Dor., 
 this ending in the Pres. and Put. is -oicri instead of -ouiri, e. g. irepiwiieounlv), 
 yaioi<ri(y). 
 
 8. Personal endings of the PIup. Act. In the Epic and Ion. dialects, the 
 following forms occur : — 
 
 Fh-st Pers. Sing., -ea the only Epic and Ion. form (-ij old Att., § 116, 6), e. g 
 ^TE&^irea, jfSea, trfrroi^ea instead of ire^ireiv, etc. 
 Second " " -em, e. g. ^teS^tteos, Od. w, 90, instead of ^re^irEis. 
 Third " " -ee(j/), e. g. e't'eyiJj'ee, KaTa\e\o'nree, ifisPpciKtev (not Horn.). 
 Second " PI. -eVe, o. g. o-uyjjSEOTE, Her. 9, .58. 
 
 Eemakk 1. The third Pers. Sin^. Plup. Act. in -ei, as well as the same 
 Pers. of the Impf. in -ei, is found in Homer before a vowel with the v paragogic; 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
220.] PERSONAL-ENDIKGS AND MODE-VOWELS. 263 
 
 thus, lo-T^KEiv, II. 1^, 691. e^MKiiy, II. c, 661. &, 270. f, 412. SiStmy^xeiy, Od 
 p, 359 ; — ijffK€iy, II. y, 388. 
 
 9. The second and third Pers. Dual of the historical tenses are sometime! 
 exchanged for each other. Thus in Homer, the forms -raj'and -<r&ttv (seeond 
 Fcrs. Dual) stand instead of -rriv and -(tStiv (third Pers. Dual^, e. g. SiiiKeToy, 
 n. K, 364. Xa^ia-aerov, II. o; 583, &airli<rin<r&ov, II. ^, 301. On this inter- 
 charge in Attic, see § 116, Ecm. 
 
 10. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Ind. and Suhj., Impf. Ind. and Opt. Mid. oi 
 Pass., the first Aor. Mid. Ind., after dropping a; remain nncontracted in the 
 Ion. and often in the Epic dialect, e. g. iirtTtWfai ; Homer tses either these 
 forms, e. g. Xeiir^at, \i\aieai, luptxTjat, ipiaanai, iiraipjicu, lnre> iaao, 4yelvao, oi 
 the contract forms, -p (from -eoi), -eu (from -co), -a (from -off), e. g. ItrKev, fyx^v-i 
 ippdCeu, inpijiw. When the characteristic of the verb is e, it is very frequently 
 omitted in the Ion. dialect, before -fai and -eo, a. g. fiAe'ai instead of (pAteai, 
 ^Ae'o instead of <j>i\4eo ; so in Homer, 4k\4', II. a, 202, yet with the variation 
 ?kAe' from kK4o^cu. Comp. 4 222, B (3). — The ending -eo in Homer is 
 lengthened into - c i o, e. g. epcio, (nre7o, and the ending -eeoi is contracted into 
 -fiai, in verbs in -eu, e. g. /iv&uai, ve!ai. Homer sometimes drops cr in the 
 second Pers. Sing. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass, also, viz. jue^yijai (and itf/u^), 
 B(0\riai, iaavo. 
 
 11. The Dual endings -r^jy, -aSntv, and first Pers. Sing, -/jtji/, in the Doric 
 arc, -rav, -aS)av, -ixav (§ 201, 2), e. g. i^paaiimv. In the' later Doric, the 
 change of ij into a is found, though seldom, even in the Aor. Pass., e. g. irina* 
 instead of irmt\v. ■ 
 
 12. The personal-endings -jithov, -^ueSo, in Epic, as well as in Doric, Ionic, 
 and Attic poetry, often have the original forms -jiea^ov, -fiecr^a, e. g. Tuirro/tea-- 
 
 13. The third Pers. PI. Perf. and Plup. Mid. or Pass., in the Ionic and Epic 
 dialect, veiy generally ends in -arai, -aro, instead of -vrai, -mo, e. g. ireirel- 
 .ftoToi, ireiraiariu, i$e0ov\eiaTo, iffTaAaro; veiy often also the third Pers. PL 
 Opt. Mid. or Pass! is -oiaru, -aiaro, instead of -oivro, -aivro, e. g. rvKToiaro 
 instead of Tinrroivro, apT^aaiaro (Homeric), instead of ctp-fiffaivro. Also the 
 ending -ovto, in the Ion. dialect, has this change, thougli the o before v becomes 
 e, e. g. iPovXeuTo instead of 40oi\ovTo. In verbs in -ia and -€<», the r) in the 
 ending of the Perf and Plup. -rivrcu, -rtvro, is shortened in the Ionic into e, e. g. 
 otKeaToi instead of ^KTjvTai from oIk^co, irerifiiaTo instead of iTerifiTjin-o from 
 rifida. Also instead of -ovrai, the Ionic dialect has -earai (instead of -c^otoi), 
 e. g. ireirreaTai instead of iriwravrtu. 'ATrUaTai, in Herodotus, from the Perf. 
 iujuy/iiu (Pres. iupiKyeo/iiu) is the only example in whicli the rule stated § 116, 
 5, is not observed. 
 
 Hem. 2. Two Perf. and Plup. forms are found in Homer with the ending 
 -SoToi, -SaTo, from verbs whose characteristic is not 5, viz. ihaiva (ixiaj 
 iXitXap-ai 4K7i\iSaro, Od. rj, 86, and okox^C'" a.K^x^f"'^ aKTix^Sarai, II. p, 637 ; the 
 8 seems to be merely euphonic ; yet it is to be noted, that the reading is not 
 wholly settled ; the forms ippiSarcu and 4plitiSaT0 (from paiyu) must be derived 
 from the stem 'PAZil (comp. ^i^o-ctote, Od. u, 150). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
262 DIALECTS. [i 220 
 
 l-t. The third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. -Jio-iw is abridged into -ey, in the Doric, 
 and also frequently in the Epic and poetic dialect, e. g. rpd<)icv instead of irpi- 
 fjia-av. In the Opt. this abridged form is regular in the Common language 
 (4 116, 7), e. g. Tuf^eiev instead of TiKp^eijiirav. 
 
 15. The third Pers. PI. Imp. Act. in -rairav, and Mid. or Pass, in (r^utrav, is 
 abridged in the Ionic and Doric dialect (always in Homer) into -vrav and -tr^uf 
 (§ 116, 12), c. g. tvtttSvtuj/ instead of TUTrTeTwtrai/, TrsTrot^ivrwu instead ofireiroi- 
 diTaiTav, TwrTiadav instead of rwrea^axrav. 
 
 16. The long mode-vowels of the Subj., viz. a and n, are very frequently 
 shortened in the Epic dialect into o and c, according to the necessities of the 
 verse, e. g. iofiev instead of iufiey^ (f}^i6fie(r^a instead of -^fie^a^ a'Tps(liercu 
 instead of -tjtoi (§ 207, 4). 
 
 17. The first Aor. Opt. Act., in the ^olic dialect ends in -eia, -aas, -«e, etc., 
 third Pers. PI. -eiav, instead of -ai/ii, -ats, -ai, etc., third Pers. PI. -oieV. See 
 4 116, 9. 
 
 18. Infinitive. The original full form of the Inf Act. is -^cvai, and with 
 the mode-vowel, -efievai, which is found in the Epic, Doric, and JEolic dialects. 
 This form is sometimes shortened into -juev (-iVf) ^7 dropping ai, sometimes 
 into -vat by syncopating jue (e/ic). But in the Epic dialect, the ending -eu/ also 
 is found, fonned from -e/iey, and in contract verbs, and in tlie second Aor., also 
 the endings -esiv and -etr. The Pres., Fut., and second Aor. take the mode- 
 vowel e and the ending -^uey, hence -ejney, e. g. Tuirr-e-^ei/, Twpc/iey, eivefjLev, — 
 Verbs in - li u and -4 a, as tliey contract the characteristic- vowel a and the 
 mode-vowal e of the Inf ending -ijuvcu, have the form -■fi/ievai, e. g. yoiineiiiu 
 {yoda>), <j3i\-fiftevcu (^(\c«), (pop^^evat {<pop4(o), — With the ending -^/lEyai corre- 
 sponds that of the Aorists Pass., e. g. ruTr^jneyai instead of rinr^i/ai, aoMiir 
 
 •i^/tEi/ai ; so always in the Epic dialect ; but the Doric has the abridged form in 
 -fjiiev, e. g. Tuirfiij.iv. — In the Pres. of verbs in -/u, the ending -juv and -/<cvoi is 
 appended to the unchanged stem of the Pres., and in the second Aor. Act, to 
 the pure stem, c. g. Tt^e-^uei', Tt^e-juei'oi, IcrreJ-juey, laTd-fievoa, diS6-fiey, SiBS-p.€vcUy 
 SetKvv-iieVy SELKvv-^evaLj'^e-liev, ^e-fievaij So-juec, BS-fievaLj so also in Perfects 
 derived immediately from the stem of the verb, e. g. re^i/iey, fiefiiua'. The 
 following are exceptions, viz. ■nSr^p.em.i, H. if", 83 (with which the forms of the 
 Pres. Part. Mid. Ti^/iivos, kix'^^'coj, correspond), SiSovvat, II. a, 425, also the 
 Inf second Aor. Act. of verbs in -a and -v, which also retain the long vjwel 
 (§ 191, 2), K. g. ffTTi-fixvaij ^-fjLfvai) Su-^ttej'of, instead of frTTJvai, Bvvai, 
 
 1 9. Besides the forms in -ifievai and -6/iEy, the Doric dialect has one in - e i^ 
 abridged from these, e. g. i.y€v instead of i.y€iv; Put. apfiSirev instead of ap/J- 
 o-eiv ; second Aor. (SeV instead of ISuv, AajStV instead of ^afietv, etc. In the 
 Doric of Theocritus, the iEol. Inf ending -Tjy is found, e. g. X'^^PVt s'scond 
 Aor. \aPriv, instead of xafpeii', \aPe!v. 
 
 20. The Inf ending of the Aor. Pass. -Iineyai, -rjitev, is abridged into -niv in 
 the Doric writers, yet only after a preceding long syllable, e. g. fi^Aiff^v instead 
 of -Sfyytii. The Inf ending of the Pcrf Act. varies between -riv and -eiv in 
 the Doric ond jEolic writers, e. g. TediapijKriv, yfy6vftv instead o( re^ev VKcfat, 
 yvyoyA'tu. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
?5 221, 222.J CONTRACTION AND RESOLUTION IN VERBS 263 
 
 21. Participle. The ^olic dialect has the diphthong oi instead of ov before 
 r in participles, and ai instead of d, e. g. riirray, Tiirroiaa, riwTov, XaPoim, 
 \iTo7ara instead of -oBcro ; Titjiais, -ca<ra, instead of r^as, -aa-a (§§ 201, 2, and 
 207, 1). The Epic dialect can lengthen the accented o into a in the oblique 
 cases, e. g. iK/iaaTos, mtpvon-as. — The Peif. Act. Part., in the Doric dialect, 
 Eometimes takes the ending of the Pres., e. g. irc^pi'/covres instead of Trc^puciJTei. 
 
 { 221. Epic and Ionic Iterative form. 
 
 1. The Ionic and particularly the Epic dialect, and not unfrequently, in 
 imitation of these, the Tragedians, have a special Impf. and Aor. form with the 
 ending -o-koi', to denote an action often repeated, or continued. This is called 
 the Iterative form. It is regularly without the augment. 
 
 2. It is generally found only in the Sing, and in the third Peis. PI. Ind. of 
 the Impf. and Aor., and is inflected like the Impf. ; for in the Impf. and 
 second Aor. Act. and Mid., the endings -o-kov, -aKts, <rKe{v), -(rudiiTir, -aKov{eo, tu), 
 ■(TKfTo, preceded by the nnion-vowel e, are used instead of -oc, -(J/tJic, and in the 
 first Aor. Act- and Mid. the endings -oo-kov, -oo-Kit^ijv are used instead of -a, 
 -diaiy, e. g. 
 
 (a) Impf. Sivei-effKoy, ^e\-«rKfs, eV-e(r/ce(>'), ve\-4<rKeTo, /Soitk-cVkovto, In 
 verbs in -da, -dea-Kov is abridged into -affKov, which, according to the necessities 
 of the verse, can be again lengthened into -datrKov, e. g. vixdaKoiKv, vaieriiur- 
 Kov. Verbs in -4a have -i^aKov and -eSKov, e. g. koAe-ectkc, PovKoXifffKe ; c/lxvf'- 
 Kov, TraKiffKera, KdKiaKiTo \ when the verse requires, -UaKov can be lengthened 
 into -cieaKov, e. g. vaxelifficov ; verbs in -6a do not have this Iterative form 
 among the older authors ; verbs' in -fu omit the mode-vowel here also, e. g. 
 rl&e-VKov, Si5o-<rKoy, Seiicvu-ffKov ; in some verbs the ending -affKov has taken the 
 place of -ctTKoy, e. g. ^iirr-curKoy, KpinT-affKoyj from ^/irTw, KpiirTu. 
 
 (b) Second Aor. I'A-eo-Kf, fidK-effKe, tpvy-ea-Ks ; in verbs in -/ii, without a mode- 
 vowel, e. g. ffrd-iTKe (= efTTj)), irapefidaKe (= Trape/Sjj), SiJcrffc, iiiTRi; also an 
 Iterative form of the second Aor. Pass, is found, viz. (pdvitTKc instead of t^dvii, 
 II. A, 64. Od. li, 241, 242. 
 
 (c) First Aor. iKda-turxiv, aiS'liir-affKev, Ha-affxe, ixvifff-daKiTO, ayriia-iuriK 
 (instead of hyvoiiaturKi from hyyota). 
 
 { 222. Contraction and Resolution in Verbs. 
 
 I. The Epic dialect. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -dai, -c'a, -6a, are subject 
 to contraction, but by no means so generally as in the Attic. The contraction 
 is made according to the general rules, with a few exceptions, as will be seen in 
 the following remarks. 
 
 A. Verbs in -i£w. (1) In these verbs, the uncontracted form occurs only in 
 certain words and forms, e. g. v4paoy, KaTiSKiaov, vmerdoviri ; always in i)i&a, and 
 in verbs which have a long a for their characteristic, or whose stem is a mono- 
 syllable, c. g. 8«!^i5a>i', ireiyAaif. ^Xf^t ^xpdcrt (from XC"*! *" <^<^<'^) 
 13 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
264 DIALECTS. [i 222 
 
 (2) In some words, a is changed into e, viz. fieyoheoy ft-om /ieyoivia, limn 
 from avTooa^ 5fi6K\eov from S/ju)K\da, Comp. § 201, 1. 
 
 (3) Instead of the uncontracted and contracted fonms, the contracted syUahle 
 is resolved, as often as the measure requires it ; this is done by inserting a simi- 
 lar vowel, commonly shorter, more seldom longer, before the vowel formed 
 by contraction ; in this way, a is resolved into aa, or da, and a into ow or aa 
 (§ 207, 2). T-he short vowel is used here, when the syllable preceding the 
 contracted one is short, e. g. {6pSi) 5p6a>; but if this syllable is long, the long 
 vowel must be used on account of the verse, e. g. riHaxomz, The resolution does 
 not take place with the vowel d before a personal-ending beginning with t, 
 e. g. ip«-Tai, Spa-To. Thus : — 
 
 {dpd€is) 
 
 6p§s 
 
 Spates 
 
 {Spdo.) ■ 
 
 6pw 
 
 &p6a 
 
 {dpdea^ai) 
 
 dpatr^ai 
 
 Spdaff^ai 
 
 {&piiov<ra) 
 
 Spwaa 
 
 &p6a(Ta 
 
 {fieyoivdei) 
 
 fi€VOiva 
 
 /j.evotv6i<f 
 
 (^odovffi) 
 
 fioS/(ri 
 
 $o6a(rt 
 
 {Uris) 
 
 "t 
 
 saas 
 
 {dpdoifii) 
 
 dptSfii 
 
 &p6wfii 
 
 {fivde(r^at) 
 
 /jLvaff^ai 
 
 fivaaa^at 
 
 {Spaova-t) 
 
 Bpaffi 
 
 Sp^aau 
 
 Remakk 1. In Od. f, 343, the form Spriai (from Spdeai) occurs instead of the 
 Sprjai, which Eustath. cites. In the following Dual forms, ae is contracted into 
 7} : irposav^-ljTTiVi <TvKiiT'f]v, ffvvavr-fiTTjv^ (poiT'fjTTjv instead of -aTTjv ; so also in the 
 two verbs in -ew, dfjLupTTiTTjv, aTretK-i]TT]v instead of -eirriv, 
 
 4. When vt comes after a contracted vowel, a short vowel may be inserted 
 between pt and such a contracted syllable, e. g. TjPtiovra instead of Jiffut^a, 
 yeKdovTes, fjLviovro ; in the Opt. also, the protracted -aoi instead of -ip is found 
 in rjPdoLfU (instead of ri^doifu = ri$ipfu). The following are anomalous forms: 
 ycueTaacra (instead of -6u<ra), ada, second Pers. Imp. Pres. Mid. and third Pers. 
 Sing, Impf. Act. from 2An, to save. 
 
 Hem. 2. On the Inf in -4]ij.evai of verbs in -am and -ea, see 5 220, 18, and on 
 the Epic-Ionic contraction of oij into a, see § 205, 5. 
 
 B. Verbs in -e'tti. To this conjugation belong also all rutores in -e'a and 
 -ioimi, all second Persons in -co, -eai, and -rjai, second Aor. Inf. Act. in -iioi, 
 and the Aor. Pass. Subj. in -em and -ei'to. 
 
 ( 1 ) Contraction does not take place in all forms in which c is followed by the 
 vowels w, a>, ij, ri, 01, and ou, e. g. ^iKiwpav, ^i\eoifit, etc. ; yet such uncontracted 
 
 , forms must commonly be read with Synizesis. In other instances, the contrac- 
 tion is either omitted according to the necessities of the verse, e. g. (^iA.e«, epea 
 Put., oTpwiovaa Put., 0a\e(iv second Aor. Act., ■ire<r4e(TAai Put. Mid., p.iyia(ri 
 second Aor. Subj. Pass. ; or contraction takes place, and then, when eo is con- 
 tracted, it becomes eu (§ 205, 1 ), u. g. aipct/^UT}^, avrevv, y^vev ; except ave^ltiirrovv 
 and iirip^ovv. 
 
 (2) Sometimes the open e is lengthened into €i (§ 207, 1), e. g. iT£\fiero, 
 iTcXeioti, vKsUw, oKveiu ; — Sajxiio) instead of Sa^o), /xiyeiri instead of juiyy 
 (second Aor. Subj. Pass.). 
 
 (3) In the ending of the second Pers. Sing. Pros. Mid. or Pass., two Epsilons 
 
 coming together are either contracted, as in the third Pers., e. g. uufte'-Eoi 
 
 = uv^ciai, like uuften-ai, raai, like veTrai, or one e is elided, e. g. uu&e'oi, 
 Digitized by Microsoft® . t. f 
 
i 222.] CONTHACTION AND EESOLUTION IN VEEBS. 265 
 
 jrdjAc'oi. This elision commonly occurs both among the Epic and Ionic writerB, 
 in the second Pcrs. Impf. and Imp. Pres. Mid. or Pass., c. g. (fo)3e'o, i/c/o, aiVt'o, 
 Hvy^o. In such cases, the accent is on the penult, whether the word ends with 
 •ecu or -60 (§ 220, 10). 
 
 Kem. 3. On the irregular contraction in the Dual, sec Rem. 1 : on the Inf. 
 m -liiiei/ai, see 5 220, 18. 
 
 C. Verbs in -6 a. These verbs follow either the common rales of contrac- 
 tion, c. g. yovvov/iai, yovvova^m, or they are not contracted, but lengthen o into 
 0), and then the forms of verbs in -6u resemble those of verbs in -ia, c. g. 
 lipiioina, ISpiiovira, imvdovras [coxa-p. rifidiovTo, 4 above) ; or they become wholly 
 analogous to verbs in -<£to, since they resolve -oCo-i (third Pers. PI. Pres.) into 
 -oojffi, -ovvTo into -iuvTo, and -oiec into -liajei/, and consequently suppose a 
 contraction like that of verbs in -iu: (h.p6ovai) apova-i a.p6w<ri (comp. dpSaiiri), 
 (SijiiovTo) Sni'idvyro SijlSayTo (comp. bp6avTo), (Si\iioisv) Sij, tiv Sri'iSijiev (comp. 
 dp6ii>eii). But this resolution into -6u or -ao is confined to such forms as admit 
 it in verbs in -ia ; hence, e. g. the Pres. apoTs, apo7, apovre, and the Inf apovv, do 
 not admit this resolution. 
 
 II. Ionic dialect. (1) In the Ionic dialect, only verbs in -cSm and -6a suifer 
 contraction ; verbs in - ea commonly omit it, except the contraction of -to and 
 -eov into -eu, which frequently occurs (§ 205, 1), e. g. <j>i?i.fd)iev instead of ipiXeo- 
 fiev = <j>i\aviiev, i<j>lKevii instead of 4(pl\eov = i(pi\ovv, (piXiv instead of ipiKtov 
 
 (2) The uncontracted forms exhibited in the table (§ 135) of the second 
 Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf. Mid. or Pass, in -4ri, -dri, -017, -4av, -dov, -igv, e. g. 
 ^i\e77, rifidri, ^tfr^iri, <pt\4ov^ TtfjAov, fii(r^6ov^ etc., are found in no dialect, and 
 iire presented merely to explain the contraction. For even the Ionic WTitcrs 
 use here the contracted fonns of verbs in -ia and -Sa, e. g. rtpi^, /ua-^oT, ri/iZ, 
 jiuir&oC, etc. ; but of verbs in -ea>, as also in barytone verbs, they do not use the 
 endings -p, -ov, but -eat, -eo, e. g. TtSTrr-eai, iTvirr-eo, <pi\4-eai, i(pi\4-eo. — On the 
 elision of e in the ending -eeo, see above. No. I, B (3). 
 
 (3) Verbs in -da follow the common rules of contraction; but in the uncon- 
 tracted form, the a is changed into e, c. g. dpeu^ dpeo^ev instead of 6pda, xp^^'^^h 
 Xpeai/Tcu instead of xp<i6Toi, etc. Comp. ^ 201, 1. 
 
 (4) Ao in the uncontracted forms is frequently lengthened into ea (§ 207, 3), 
 u. g. ;^/)6ca»'Tai, iKTsuvTO, dpeavres, ireipet^fieyos instead of {xpdoirrat) xpw;/Ta£, 
 etc. 
 
 (5) The change of the a into €, as in Spea, explains the usage among the Ion. 
 writers of sometimes contracting ao and aov, and also eo and eov in verbs in 
 -4a, into -ev (§ 205, 1), e. g. elpdyrevv instead of eipdtriwv, ye\ev(ra instead of 
 ■ye\douffa, ayairf Dcres instead of ayawdopres. So also in the Doric dialect, e. g 
 yeXevi/Tt instead of ye\dovfft. This contraction into cu instead of ov is often 
 found even in verbs in -6a, u. g. Siitaievcri instead of (SwonJouo'i) Sumiotiffi, 
 SiKtttevv instead of Sixaiovv, eZucaiew, trretpaifevvTat from (rreipca'6a. 
 
 (6) In Ionic prose, the Epic resolution is found but seldom in v.rbs in -da, 
 e. g. K0fjL6u(ri-, 7}yop6ai/To, Her. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
266 DIALECTS. [§ 223 
 
 m. Doric dialect. { I) Contrary to the common usage of the Doric, a e and 
 oti are contracted into ri and 17 (§ 205, 3), v. g. Ti/irJTe instead of ri/idire — 
 TtfjiMTe, <l)oiTfis instead of <l>oir^s, dpTjv instead of 6pay, The Inf. is written 
 without an i subscript, as the uncontracted form originally ended in -aiy 
 Comp. also II. 5, also § 134, 3. 
 
 (2) The Inf. of verbs in -e'a has a double form, either the abridged form in 
 -ev instead of -eiv, e. g. iroieV instead of loieii', or according to the analogy of 
 verbs in -da, a form in -ijv (from -eriv), e. g. (pi\fij' instead of ^iKeeip = <pi\eiv, 
 KoiTfiiiv instead of Kofffteiv, <ppovTju instead of <ppov^7v^ 
 
 (3) In the Doric and ^olic dialects, -ao, -aou, and -oa are contracted .nto a 
 (§ 205, 2), c. g. irEicS/jes instead of ireiva/iey {neiviojity), ireivavn instead of 
 W9tv{d-ov)w-a't, yeXay instead oi yeK{d-av)wy, tpvaavres instead of ^u(r(a-o)w-yT€j, 
 
 Hem. 4. On the contraction into -ev instead of -ov, see § 205, I. — A striking 
 peculiarity of the Doric dialect, especially of the later Doric as used by The- 
 ocritus, is, that it frequently has a long a even in the inflection of verbs in -eV 
 c. g. Mvcura instead of iirirriiTa from n-ove'w, itliiXanTa, instead of iiplKrtra from 
 
 { 223. Formation of the Tenses. 
 
 1. Besides the verbs mentioned (§ 130), the following also in the Homeric 
 dialect retain the short characteristic-vowel in forming the tenses, viz. kotcbj to 
 have a grudge ; peiiciai, to quarrel ; raytu, to stretch ; 4piw, to draw. On the con- 
 trary, iiraivea, to approve, has iir^yriira. 
 
 2. In the Fut. and first Aor. Act. and Mid. of pure verbs, which retain the 
 short characteristic- vowel in forming the tenses, and in the same tenses of verbs 
 in -foj, -ffffoi (-TToi), the <r can be doubled in the ending, in Homer and other 
 non-Attic poets (§ 208, 4), e. g. iyej^ofrae, Koreffffiiixevos, 6fi6irffai, ^TdvvffiTe, 
 SiKiifftrai, K6/j.ia'ire. 
 
 3. The form of the Attic Fut. ( § 117) occurs in the Homeric dialect in verbs 
 In -ifa, e. g. KTcpiovai, ayXaCelirSrai, together with the common Futures ipfulirm- 
 utv, KcnrpliTirovTes, Kovi(iaovai(v). From verbs in -ia>, -da, -va, Horn, forms 
 Futures which are similar to the present of these words, viz. in verbs in -ia, he 
 often uses the ending -ea instead of -eira, c. g. /cope'ei, H. &, 379. xapUis, II. n, 
 831. iiaxiovTM, II. fi, 366; — in verbs in -da, after dropping ir, he places before 
 the vowel formed by contraction, a corresponding short vowel, e. g. hmiu, 
 i\6a(rt, Safxdif ; — in verbs in -ioj, ipiovtri and raviovfft are found. 
 
 4. In the Doric dialect, all verbs in - f w take | instead of a in those tenses 
 whose characteristic is s, i. b. in the Fut. and Aor., c. g. Sixd^a, SiKo^a, eSlKo^a, 
 instead of SiKdaa, iSlKatra. But the other tenses of verbs with the pure charac- 
 teristic B, follow the regular formation, b. g. iStKda-^v, not iSixdx^y. This 
 peculiarity of the Doric appears even in certain verbs in -da, which, in forming 
 the tenses, retain the short a, and in this respect are analogous to those in -(a, 
 which likewise have a short vowel, c. g. yexda, ^yeKa^a instead of €ye\!U)a, yet 
 not vixda, i/uca|w, but ciKdirw (Att. viiciiira). In Doric poetiy, the regular form 
 of all these words can be used, according to the necessities of the metre. 
 
 B. The following verbs in -Qa have, in Homer and the Ionic dialect, f instead 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 223 J FOKMATION OF THE TENSES. 267 
 
 of <r, through the whole formation, viz. aPpori^a, to wander; oXaitafo., to 
 empty, Fut. o\tnri4|a>, etc. (so also Xeiioph. An. 1. 1, 29) ; ivoiraXi^w, to sJiake; 
 iaiCa, todivide, to put to death. ; iyyva\l(a, togive; ivapi^a, to spoil a dead 
 enemy; SipvWl^a, to break in pieces; iiepnTipi(a, to reflect; ireAe/iffo', to 
 thake; iroAe/iitfa, to contend; o-rvipeKl^a, to smite. 
 
 6. Liquid verbs in -air a, which in the Attic dialect form the Aor. with the 
 ending -ay a instead of -tjco (§ 149, Kem. 2), have d in the Doric, and tj in the 
 Epic and lonic^. The following liquid verbs, in the Epic and poetic dialect of 
 all periods, form the Eut. and first Aor. with the ending - o- w' and -a- a, viz. 
 KeWai, to land (kcXctiii, comp. Kevarai from Kevreai, to goad) ; eiXw, to crowd 
 together (^Ao-ai) ; Kipa, to meet, to fall upon; apaptaxa ('AP-fl-), to Jit {^paa, fipiroi) ; 
 Sp-vvpu, to excite {op<rti>, &paa) ; Siafielpw, to destroy {Bia<l>d4pirai in Homer) ; 
 Kflpa, to shave {eKtpaa, in Homer, but first Aor. Mid. iKupi.p.-i\v) ; ^ipu, to mix, to 
 knead (<l>ipa-w, lipvpira, ^((pipa-ofuu, Epic and old poetic; second Aor. Pass. 
 itpiprjv in Lucian, who also has the poetic Perf. ni^upnai, while in prose, the 
 verb (pvpda, Itpipaaa, Trecpipa/iai, etc., is used). The Opt. ot^EAAciet/, Od. 0, 334. 
 H. IT, 651, is formed according to the usage of the iEoIic. 
 
 7. To verbs which form the Eut. without the tense-characteristic ir (§ 154, 4) 
 belong the following forms of the Epic dialect : pioimi or fieioncu, second Pers. 
 /So;, I shall live, perhaps from fialpa, to go, to live, also from AAH, to know, to 
 learn, and KEin (ku/iui, to lie down), S^w, S-fieis, 5^o/iec, S^cte {I shall view,find), 
 and K^ia or K4tc, xeUfiev, Kelwv, Keuv. 
 
 8. To verbs which foi-m the first Aor. without the tense-characteristic ir 
 (§ 154, 7) belong the following forms of the Epic and poetic dialect: x^"' ** 
 pour out, eXEua ( Homer ; Att. ^x^") i <reia, to shake, iaaeva and iairevdtai* 
 (Homer), akeo/iat and oKeio/jLai, to avoid, ii\eiaTO, etc. (§ 230); Kata, to bum, 
 ?Kr)o, ?Keio Epic, EKea Tragic (§ 230). 
 
 9. To verbs which have an active form for the Fut. Per/. (§ 154, 6), belongs 
 also the Epic xexapfiira (with Kexap^'ro/J.iu), I shall be joyful, from x^'v- 
 
 10. The exchange of the endings of the second Aor. with those of the first 
 Aor. (§ 154, 7) is somewhat frequent in the Epic dialect, c. g. fialva, to go, 
 ifii\ (TiTo, Imp. ,8^70-eo ; Sio/iof, to plunge, 4Si<j-eT0, Imp. Sio-eo, Part. Su<r(J|UeTOs ; 
 &yu, to lead, Sf €Tf, a^f/iev; iKveo/ioi, to come, T^ov; i\4yiiriv, I laid myself down 
 to sleep. Imp. Ae'|o, Ae'Ieo; Upvvfu, exdto, Imp. Spa-€0, Spirev; <p4pa, to bear, 
 olffE (oTiTE is also Att.), dttrere, oiVe'toj, oiaovruv, olaijxiv, ohefieyai; aEiS», to 
 sing. Imp. a.el(reo. 
 
 11. Several second Aorists, in Homer, are formed by a Metathesis of the 
 consonants (^ 156), in order to make a dactyle, e. g. iSpwiov instead of eSapKoy 
 (from S€pKop.ai), ^wpa^oy (from TripSta), UpaStov (from SapSiava), ij/iPporou 
 (instead of ^ifiapTov from aimprdm). Eor the same reason Homer syncopates 
 the stem (§ 155), e.g. ciyp6iJ.euas from ayepiaSiai {iyelpa, to collect); sypero, 
 lypeo (Imp.), ijpono, eypecrS-oi (with the accent of the Pres.), iypSjievos from 
 iyepscr^ai {iyeipa, to wake) ; irrd^atv, iirT6iir]v, vria^ai, irrStieyos (tteto^oi, to 
 fly) ; 4KiK\eT0, ic4kK€to, K£KKi/j.£ms {lUxoimi, to summon, excite) ; TTi(pvov, eirtipyoy 
 (♦ENfl, to Ml). 
 
 12. In the first Aor. Pass. Homer inserts a y, according to the uecessities of 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
268 DIALECTS. [§ 223 
 
 the -rorse, not only as other poets (§ 149, Kera. 4) in Kplvoi and kKUx {Suucotv- 
 &^T€, KpwSisis, iK\ivSrn), bnt also in iSpica, to establish, and iryea, to blow {ISpi-ydrjt 
 and tSptS^v, aixTrvvyhri). 
 
 13. Homer forms a first Perf. only from pure verbs, and such impure verbs 
 as in the tense-formation assume an t (§ 166) or are subject to Metathesif 
 (^ 156, 2), e. g. X"''/"" KexapriKo. (from XAIPE-il), 0d\\a fie^KriKa (from BAA). 
 Except these, he forms only second Perfects (which belong commonly to 
 intransitive verbs, or have an intransitive signification) ; but even in pure verbs 
 and in the impiire verbs mentioned above, ho rejects the k in certain persons 
 and modes, and regularly in the Part. ; in this way, these forms become analo- 
 gous to those of the second Perf. These participles either lengthen a and e into 
 f|, e. g. Pefiaprjiis, burdened (from BAPEn), KSKopri^s, satisfied (from Kops-vrnfu], 
 KeKOTTjcis, enraged (from kot4u), r€Tn}c&s, troubled (from TIEXl), TerAijctJs, enduring 
 (from TAAfi), K€Ka<j>7i(is, gasping for breath (from KA* En), KeKfiri^s, wearied (from 
 Ktififw), ireiTTi}(a$ (from Trr^o'a'Qj, to shrink through fear), rc^irqtis, KeKTiqoTi, Kex^' 
 orids (from X'''p'") i — "i" they retain, thouch more seldom, the stem-vowel without 
 change, e. g. fiefiais (from fiaiva, BAfl), dKyey&vta (from ytyvofiat, TAfl), SeSads 
 (from SiBduTKta, AAfl), ir6<^iJu?a (from ^i5ty), farads (from "ifTTtj^i, 2TAn), fiefmds 
 (with iiefiads and /i€/id(!TEr from MAQ). The accented o of the oblique cases 
 can, in the first instance, according to the necessities of the verse, be lengthened 
 into G), hence re^vrjoTos and -Stos, rc^i'TjiTa and -Syra, KeK/iTjSra and -ura ; but 
 when the Nom. has a short penult, a is always used (except in IcrraijTos), e. g. 
 $e$aaTos. The ending -iSj, formed by contraction, is resolved by € in Trfwreara 
 (from TTiTTTa), teS-wbti, and according to the necessities of the verse, e can be 
 lengthened into ei, e. g. teS-veiStos. The feminine form -So-o is found only in 
 PeP&a-a, Od. V, 14 ; in some feminine forms, the antepenult, which properly would 
 be long, is shortened on account of the verse, c. g. apapvTa (Fem. of apripis from 
 apapltTKto), ^efiaKuta (of fiefitjKds, from /jiTiicdofiai], re^aXvta (of T^^\ds, from 
 ^aAAtu), \f\o.Kv7a (of XEXTj/ceSs, from XcEcrrcw), ireira^via (from Trdtrxto). 
 
 Eemaek 1. The form resolved by t, in the Ionic dialect, has become the 
 permanent one with some participles, e. g. ectteiSs; so reStyeds (never rt^ds) 
 and TeSnrriKds from TiSrvi)Ka, remains even in the Attic dialect. In these forms, 
 the a remains through all the cases, e. g. 
 
 kffT^ds, ktrreuffa, kcrreds, Gcn. etTTeuros, -diTTjs 
 re^yeds, TE^»'EW<ra, re^v^ds, Gen. te&z'eStos, -dtrris. 
 
 BifiT]Ka and TETXTjKa never have these forms. Comp. § 193, Hem. 3. 
 
 14. Some verbs, which in the stem of the Pres. have the diphthong en, 
 shorten it in the Epic and poetic dialect into C, in the Perf. Mid. or Pass., and 
 in the first Aor. Pass., e. g. 
 
 iTEiJS-o/toi, to ask, TTETTuo'/ioi ; (rei(a, to shake, Mid. and Pass, to hasten, iaai- 
 (Ua/, first Aor. Pass, etrtrv^'qv', teuxw (poet.), paro, Perf. TETu-y/tai, Aor. 
 i:T\JX^''^^'i <l^^^y(^, to fee, Vcri. TT^tpvy/isyos, 
 
 Kem. 2. X e'm (formed from x^^<'< X^^"): '" pour out, follows the analogy of 
 these verbs, in the forms KextJica, KExC^ai, ix"^" j these forms have been trans- 
 ferred to the Common language also (5 154, Kem. 1). Contrary to the analog; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 224. CONJUGATION IN -/At. 269 
 
 just stated, the v is long in the Homeric form ireirmnai from jrceoj [iryeFa), to 
 blow. 
 
 Rem. 3. In Homer, Od. a; 238, the third Pcrs. Opt. Plup. AeXEro instead of 
 \e\iiTo is found, according to the analogy of Trriyvtho, Scuvuto. 
 
 Kem. 4. The Homeric Perfects li.KaxhlJ.evos, kxaKiiiievos, &pripefievos, i\ri?uiiji.e- 
 vos, a.Kdxw^'", a^tiA.ijo'&aj, have the accentuation of the Pres. 
 
 i 224. Conjugation in -/x,i. 
 
 1. On the lengthened form of the second Pers. ri^ar^a, SiSour^a, see § 220, 
 2^ on the IteraUve farms in -o-kok, see § 221 ; on the Inf. forms in -jxivai, -ii€f, 
 see ^ 220, 18. 
 
 2. In the Epic, Ion., and Dor. writers, some verbs in -/u in the second and 
 third Pers. Sing. Pres. and Impf., frequently have the contracted forms of verbs 
 in -4a and -6w (§ 172, Kem. 8), u. g. Ti&ets, ri^eT, dihois, SiSoT, irl^ei, iSidovs, 
 cSlSou, SIei^ — contracted forms of iVti)^! are very rare, e.g. iVt^ instead of 
 iiTTTiai, Her. 4, 103. In the second Aor. Opt. Mid. the Ionic writers have the 
 resolved form 3-eo ffiTji', as if from ©Efl, e. g. irpos&eoiTO, TrposS-ioiffde. 
 
 3. In the Epic dialect, verbs in -B^u form an Opt., not only in tlie Mid., as 
 sometimes in Attic 'writers, e. g. SaivvTO, II. w, 665. (comp. \s\vro, 5 223, Rem 
 3), from SaiwjMi, but also in the Act., e. g. e/tSD/iec (instead of ^/cSui'ij/icy) from 
 lixSia, (p!hi (instead of ^ui'tj) from ^uw; so ^^o, tp^lro Opt. of i<pAiia)v from 
 
 4. The thu'd Pers. PI. Impf. and second Aor. in -c-aav, -ri-ffay, -o-aav, -m-ffav 
 -v-<rav, are abridged in tbe Epie and Dor. dialects into -tv, -av, -ov, -vv, e. g. 
 ^Tiaev instead of MSteaav, i^iV, &«V instead of iSrecav ; earav, a-r&v instead of 
 eo-TTjo-oi', <l>^ay instead of f<p&Ti<Tair, efiav, piv instead of ^^ffav ; eSiSov, SiSoy 
 instead of 4SlSa<ray, iSov, SoV instead of iSo(rav ; i(pvv instead of iipvaaii. 
 
 5. The second Pers. Sing. Pres. Imp. Act. has in Hom. the common form 
 iartt, hut n. i, 202. Kt&l<TTa ; iroTi&et in Theoc. instead of Trorf^es or ■irp6sSres 
 from TI0EG. — In the second Pers. Sing. Pres. and second Aor. Mid. Imp., 
 Homer rejects the <r and admits the uncontracted form even when it could be 
 contracted, e. g. Saiwo, fiipvao, (pio, irivSreo, %vSteo. — In the Ion. dialect, the first 
 a of the ending -aacu, second Pers. Mid. or Pass., is changed into t, after the 
 rejection of the <r, e. g. e tt (<r t e o i, S iJ j/ e a i, instead of eVfo-Tacroi, Sivaaai ; hence 
 the contracted forms iirla-Tri in the Ion. poets, and also Sifji {^ 172, 2) in tbe 
 Tragedians. 
 
 6. The short stem-vowel is sometimes lengthened before personal-endings 
 beginning with ju and v, according to the demand of the measure, e. g. ■nSrlif-e- 
 vos ; SiSovyai ; so also SiSaiSii, Xkti^i instead of 'l\ai>i. 
 
 7. The third Pers. Sing. Subj. has often in the Epic dialect the ending -tri 
 ^ 220, 4), e. g. 8^0-1 and SdJTuri (instead of 5^), fieSrlriffi. 
 
 8. The contracted Subj. of verbs with the characteristic a and e, is sometimes 
 resolvedly f in the second Aor., Epic dialect, and regularly in the Ion. 
 
 .(a,) Verbs in -o ("o-ttj/m) : — 
 
 .(iffTif-* .'(TtS Ion. ta-Te-a, hr-e-ris, iiTTe-oj/iiei', -6-7)T€, ^e-oai 
 (oTtt-) OToi " O-T^-OJ, ffTe-jjj, UTe-ajiev, etc. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
270 
 
 DIALECTS. 
 
 f*224 
 
 Bemake 1. So also in Herod.: irpoeffreare and hffTeaai, etrreiis, instead of 
 •ituri, -ads, Gen. Io-tcmtos, Neut. etncdis, Fem. Iffxeao-o. So also in tha Att 
 re^viis (with Te&y7;Ki6s), TeSrveiaaa, TeSrviis, Gen. te&wStos. 
 
 (b) Verbs in e (ri^iu): — 
 
 Ti^io Ion. Ti^e-w, Ti&e-ps, ri^e-u/jiev, -e-?jTe, -4-utrt 
 Ti^ufioa " Ti^4-ufuu, Tt^i-rjy etc. 
 &£ " fte'-tij, &c'-7;s, ^e-aiiey, etc. 
 d£/£al " ^e-Uftal, etc. 
 
 Rem. 2. Here also the two Aorists of the Pass, of all verbs are like tbo 
 verb Tidrint, e. g. 
 
 TVTTu, ~^s Ion. Twrgci), -his, -eufxey, -4i}tg 
 eupe^u, --^s " evps^ew, -ej/s, etc. 
 
 (c) Verbs in o (B/S<b^i) ; the contracted second Aor. Snbj. ia "csolved in 
 Homer by means of a, e. g. Siiua-i instead of Saa-i. 
 
 9. In the Subj. second Aor., Homer uses the following forms, according to 
 the nature of the verse : — 
 
 
 Contracted, 
 
 Kesolved and lengthened forms, 
 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 ffTU 
 
 (TTEB, tTTela, jSefojtoi 
 
 
 2. 
 
 erps 
 
 (TT^pS 
 
 
 3. 
 
 ffrf 
 
 (Tt:^?;, ^M^^ij, <l>^ri, (pd^ri 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 tTTTJTOy 
 
 TraparT-fjeTou 
 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 a-raney 
 
 iTTeaiiev (dissyllable) vTiiofi^v, KaTaPdo/ify | 
 
 2. 
 
 (TTTJTe 
 
 ffT-fjere 
 
 
 3. 
 
 aTuat(v) 
 
 iTTsa(ri{y), irepurriiaiTi, H. p, 95. 
 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 &S 
 
 ^€W, ^eia, Safielo) 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Mjs 
 
 &€i)s, i&^?)s, and ftef^s 
 
 
 3. 
 
 a^- 
 
 ae?7, ft^p, ov/;5, and jueac/j) 
 
 
 Dual. 
 
 a^Toi/ 
 
 ^eieroi' 
 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 ^Ujuej' 
 
 Ataiiev, Aelo/iey 
 
 
 2. 
 
 aiJTe 
 
 SafieieTe 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Sing. 1. 
 
 
 ^ea3(Tt{v)j ^elto(ri{v) 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Sips 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 5^ 
 
 S(iri(ri(v) and Sc^i; 
 
 
 Plur. 1. 
 
 ZSafjxv 
 
 SciofJLey 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Sane 
 
 
 
 3. 
 
 Swiri(x) 
 
 St&uiTt{y) 
 
 
 Rem. 3. The resolution by means of e is found in verbs with thfe stem- 
 vowels o or c; the E is commonly lengthened, (a) into « before an o sound; 
 (b) into 7) before ij in verbs with the stem-vowel a; (c) sometimes into si, some- 
 times into -n before n, in verbs with the stem-vowel c. Verbs with the stem- 
 vowel are resolved by a. 
 
 10. The Impf M^y, or commonly ^rl^ovy, has in the Ion. the foi-m iriStea 
 (like eVerrifea Ion. instead of ireTi^av, § 220, 8), irl^ecs, -ee, etc. 
 
 11. In Homer, a shortened form of the first Aor. eo-rijirai', is found, namely, 
 ia-raaw, they placed, II. ^, 56. Od. y, 182, <r, 307 ; also 'iarnrf (with the variation 
 tffl-TijTe), II. S, 243, 246, instead of eo-Tare (lo-T^/caTe). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
1^225, 22C.J CONJUGATION in -iJi.i..~'Elfi.i, to be.— Ei/ai, to go. 271 
 
 12. In the thii-cl Pers. PI. Mid. or Pass, the v before the personal-endings -toi 
 and -TO is regularly changed, by the Ion. writers, into a (5 220, 13), c. g- 
 
 Ti&caToi, BiSrfoToi, iSeiKpinTO Ion., instead of TilJeyroi, etc. 
 But when an a precedes the c, the a is changed into c, and y into b, e. g. 'urTtaTM 
 Ion., instead of to-Toyroi, iWearo Ion., instead of "iTTayTO. 
 
 13. The third Pers. Sing, in the Doric is -ti, c. g. '/(rroTi, tOjjti, Si8a;Ti, Bff/t- 
 i/Oti, and the third Pel's. PI. ends in -yri, e. g. la-rdin-i, TiS)4pri, SiUvti, SdKvim. 
 
 14. The forms of the first Aor. Mid. i^TiKiiiiriv and iSuKd/iriy and the P.irt. 
 STIicd/ieros are found in the Ion. and Dor. writers ; on the contrary, the Att. 
 writers use here also, the forms of the second Aor. Mid. The remaining 
 Modes, as also the Part. SwKd/icms, are not found. 
 
 15. From SiSuiu, Homer has a reduplicated Tut. SiSi^a-Ofttv and SiS<i<rur. 
 
 §225. Etfi.L ('ES-). :3 &e. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 i/x/xl Mo\., instead of iir-iil 
 
 2. 
 
 iirai Epic, also Eur. Hel. 1250. 
 
 
 eh Ion. 
 
 3. 
 
 ivTi Dor. 
 
 P. 1. 
 
 elfiiv Epic and Ion. 
 
 2. 
 
 ecrre regular 
 
 3. 
 
 ?a(ri(i') Epic and Ion., tvrl Dor. 
 
 Subjunctive* 
 
 1. ?a Ep. and Ion. /ueTe/w Ep. 
 
 2. iris Ion. 
 
 3. ej7, l^cri(i'), ^o-^v), eSp Epic, iri 
 Ep. and Ion. 
 
 PI. iinfiev, tTjTc, ^wiri Ep. and Ion. 
 
 Inf. ^fisvai, Hfiiievai, ifiev, ifijuv Epic 
 ^iJLtv or ■^lus, ft/iev or etjues Dor. 
 
 Imperative. 
 S. 2. eo-o-o JEol. and Epic 
 P. 3. Uinav Ion. 
 
 Participle, 
 liip, iovaa, Uv Ep. and Ion. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 S. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 D.3. 
 P. 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Indicative. 
 to. (comp. eVi'&eo), ^a, eoj/, ^ffKoy Epic and Ion. 
 ir)(rS)a Epic, eos Ion. 
 
 eTjc Ep. and Ion. fi-qv, ^€v, eo-wefc), Ep., ^j Dor. 
 ijirrnv Epic 
 
 ^uey or iiiies, cTnei' or c?/i» Dor. 
 eare Ion. 
 
 ?(roj' (eireirav) Epic and Ion. ; eirro (instead of 
 ^i/To) Od. V, 106 
 
 Optative. 
 
 lots 
 
 ioi Epic and Ion. 
 
 €?Te Epic 
 etei' Epic 
 
 Fut. fiTonai and iffirofjiai, etc. Epic, according to the necessities of the verse, 
 2. iireai. 3. ^treroi, ^(Terrat. 
 
 §226. E7/tt ('!-), to go. 
 
 Pres. Ind. S. 2. eTo-&a Epic, cTj Ion. Siibj. Sing. 2. Pers. %ir&o Epic 
 
 /n/I ineyat, ifiev Epic 
 
 /m/j/: /nrf. S. 1. ijia (and lifeif ) Epic and Ion., ^iov Epic 
 
 2. ij'ies (and jieis), fcs Epic 
 
 3. •^le (and ^ei) Epic and Ion., 1jU{v) Epic, ^^(j'), lfe(>') Epic 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
272 DIALECTS. [§ 227 
 
 p. 1. I J7»//£r 
 
 3. ijSov Epic, ijiirai/ and ^(rav Epic and Ion., tffay Epic 
 D.3. ifTTji/Epic 
 Clp«. S. 3. toi. Epic, icJt) II. T, 209. (EfT/v and cITt) II. o, 82. a, 139. Od. |, 496 
 
 come from ei/ii)- 
 Fut. and .4or. Mid. eia-ofiai, eXaa-ro, third Pcrs. Dual UunkirSrnv., II. u, 544. 
 
 V'ekds IK -a), WHICH IN THE Pkes., Peef., anc second Aon. Act. and 
 Mid., eollow the analogy of "Veees in -/u. 
 
 k 227. (1) Second Aor. Act. and Mid. 
 
 In addition to the Aor. forms mentioned (§§ 191, 192), the poetic and 
 especially the Epic dialect has the following ; — ■ 
 
 A. The Charactekisti c is a Vowel. 
 
 (a) Stem- Vowel a (e/Si)!/, BA-) : 
 
 PciXTiti), to throw, Epic second Aor. Act. (BAA-, i^X-qv) fu/ijSA^TTjr, Od. <\>, 15, 
 Inf ^vfiP\-liij.eyat (instead of -^mi), II. i(>, 578 ; Epic second Aor. Mid. (^;8A^- 
 |U7))/) e^KTiTo, (vfiPXriPTo, II. I, 27, Inf fiKTJff^ai, Part. pX'iiiievos, Subj. (ifi$\rj- 
 rai, PK^erai (instead of px-qryrai), Od. p, 472, Opt. pxtto (from BAE-, comp, 
 ir£/i?rAr;/ii), II. j/, 288. Hence the Fut. 0X-li(roij.at. 
 
 yTlpdto, or yTipia-Ka, to grow old, second Aor. third Pers. Sing, fylipa, H. p, 197, 
 KaTeyfipd, Herod. 6, 72, Inf (Att.) yripayat, Part. (Epic) yripis. The Sin 
 iy^pd, etc. is used instead of tj on account of the preceding p. See SiSpd<rKu, 
 { 192, 1. 
 
 Kreiva, to kill. Epic and poet, second Aor. Act. (KTA-) e/traj' retains the short 
 Towel ; thus, exTafiei', in-ra-re, third Pers. PI. also cktoc instead of eKToacw, 
 Subj. KTu (flrst Pers. PI. KTia>ii(v Epic), Opt. KTalriv, Inf Kravai, (Epic Kriiiev, 
 KTap.^i/ai), Part. KTcts; Epic second Aor. Mid. with Pass, sense, imicTan, 
 KTiic^at, KaraKrAfjieyos. 
 
 ouTcCoi, to wound. Epic second Aor. Act. oZta third Pers. Sing., Inf. oiiTa/ieviu, 
 ovTi/iev (the a remains short as in scrfij') ; Epic second Aor. Mid. oind/xeyos, 
 wounded. 
 
 B-eXofio, to approach, Epic second Aor. Mid. iTrXiip.i\v, (Att. iTrXiyrtv), vXriTO, 
 irX^UTO. 
 
 jrA^&o) {irlp.TTXruu), to fill, Epic second Aor. Mid. iirX7)ro and irA^TO, citAtjwo 
 also in Aristoph., who uses the following forms also : Imp. irAijo-o, Part. ip.rX'fi- 
 fiems, Opt. 4ii,TvXriii.i)v with the variation ifiTrXei/i-nVi as XP^^V from xp^{<'ii') and 
 ;8\Ero from ifix-l]ia\v (BAA-). 
 
 TTT^traw, to shrink with fear, 'E'pic second Aor Act. (IITA-) (ettttj^) kotottt^tiji 
 third Pers. Dual. 
 
 ip^dvu, to come hefore. Epic second Aor. Mid. (p^iiiems. 
 
 Remark. 
 Pers, 
 
 EMAEK. Prom e^Tii/ {Palvai) are found in Homer the forms p&nii/ (third 
 .. Dual) and tmip^araii (third Pcrs. PI.) with the short stem-vowel- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
4 •227.1 VEEBS IN -(» Ll-KE VEniiS IN -/iil. 273 
 
 (b) Stem- Vowel e (iafin", 2BE-): 
 
 iiAn, Epic, stem of ScSiaKw, to teach, second Aor. Act. (AAE-) iSilriv, I learned, 
 'Sul^. Sau, Epic Saeiu, Int. Sa^vai, Epic Sa/i/icpat. 
 
 ■(c) Stem-Vowel i: 
 
 4>3i-yo', to consume and (o vanish, Epic second Aor. Mid. i^^ijir/y, f^lff^at, ipM- 
 ^evos, tp^lff^a, fp^lvfiat. Opt. (j>^iijLijVy ^^tro, 
 
 (d) Stem- Vowel o (eVywy, TNO-) : 
 
 ^iPpdxTKw, to eat, Epic second Aor. Act. %^pav. See § 161, 6. 
 v\diii} (Epic and Ion. secondaiy form of irAeto), to sail. Epic second Aor. Act. 
 ^■kKwv^ ^irXw/iey, Part. irXttis, Gen. irXoii/Tos. 
 
 <(e.) Stem- Vowel u (^Suy): 
 
 (cAiJu (poet.), to hear. Epic Imp. second Aor. Act k\S&i, kASte; and KixAv^i, 
 
 TceKKure (§ 219, 7). 
 Auai, to foos«, Epic second Aor. Mid. Xvro, Kivro. 
 trueoi, to breathe. Epic second Aor. Mid. (IINT-, from TH/iFm, vviiu) i^Ttnra 
 
 instead of 'ivdirmro, to breathe again. 
 reia, to shake, Epic second Aor. Mid. eca-ifiiiv^ I strove, Imrvo, airo. 
 ^ii», to pour out. Epic second Aor. Mid. (XT-, from x^^"> X^"") X^"'''"' X^f^""^- 
 
 B. The Chakactbkistic is a. Consonant. 
 
 a\\oi*ai, to leap. Epic and second Aor. Mid. 5A.iro, Sato, eiraX/iewj, IviiXiKvos, 
 
 Subj. SAtjtou. 
 lipapiffKa ('AP-), to Jit, Epic tpfievos, fitted. 
 •y'ivTo, to talce, Epic, from F4\to, the Digamma being clianged into y and tlie 
 
 radical A. before t into v (§ 203, B). 
 •yiym/iai., to become, poet eTsvTe, yivro. 
 Uxo/iM, te take, Epic fSe/tTo, Inf SexSrat, Imp. 5e|o. The first Pers. Sing. 
 
 iS4yiJ.riv and the Part. Sey/iems have, like .the Perf. SeSey/Mi, the meaning to 
 
 expect, await 
 i\e\iCa, to whirl, Epic ihiXiKTO. 
 
 iKvioiim, to come, EpicT/cro, 'Ikhsvos and iKji-iVos, favoraUe. 
 AEXn, <o Ke cfo«?n. Epic iKeyiofv, iX^Kra, to lay one's self down '(same sense as 
 
 iXeidfoiv), Imp. Aefo. — Asyoj, to coZfcct, to cAou.;c, to coun*, Od. i, 335. iKeyii.i\v, 
 
 I counted myself, Od. S, 451. xUto api^/iSv, he counted the number, 
 maim, to soil, Epic /judv^y (third Pers. Dual, instead of iij.S.virSrnv). 
 uiffya (p.iymiu), to mix. Epic iukto. 
 
 opvia (i)()TO/ii%to excite. Epic SpTo, Inf. iSpSwi, Imp. Spffo, iptreo, Part ipixivos. 
 TirAxXa, to brandish. Epic ttAxto, he sprang. 
 
 irip^a, to destroy, perdo. Homer uses irep&oi instead of vipb-a^ai. 
 nnrn (ir^vu/ti), to ^x. Epic TijaTO, KareVTjKTO. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
274 DIALECTS. [i 228. 
 
 §228. (2) Ferf. and Plup. Act. {Comp. M 193, 194). 
 
 (a) The Stem ends in a "Vowel. 
 
 ylymiioi, to become; TEFAA, Stem TA: Perf. (Sing. yeyoya,-a!, -f) Epic apd 
 
 poet, yeyajiiv, -are, -oo(n(y), Inf. Epic yeyi/iev, Part. poet, yeyds, yeyu(ra, 
 
 yeyJii, Gen. 7€7aiT0j ; — Plup. Epic iKyeydrTiv. 
 8aivu, to go, Perf. pip-itKa, BEBAA: Epic and poet. PI. fii^ajiev, -are, -S<ri(>'), and 
 
 8ifiAa.<ri[v) ; third Pers. PI. Subj. i^fiepUn (PI. Phaed. 252, e). Inf. ^c/S&ai, 
 
 Part. Epic Pefiatis (also Attic prose fiefiiis, Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 3), -uia (i8e)33(ro, 
 
 PI. Phaed. 254, b). Gen. fftPauTos (Att. pePuros); — Flap, ipefiaiiei', -&Te, 
 
 ■affav. 
 SetSa, to fear ; besides the forms mentioned (^ 193), the following Epic forms 
 
 are to be noted: SeiSi/iev, SelSire; Inf. SeiSifji.ei' instead of SeSiivxi; Imp. 
 
 SeiS^&i, SeKiTE ; — Plup. iSeiSi/iiV, iSeiSuray. 
 Ipxo/iiu, to come, Perf. Epic ciA^Xoudo instead of lA.'fjAu&o, PI. elKliKov^nev. 
 ai/^o-Kw, to die, Perf Te^mtKa, TE0NAA : PI. Te&iidji.ei>, Tedyarc, Ts^m<ri{y), Imp. 
 
 Tcftva^i, Part. TtStviiKdis, TeftvijKuro, reSvriic6s or re^ve^s {re^V£a(ra. Demosth. 
 
 40, 24), re^veiis (Epic re^rids, -Ztos, -HiiTOs), Inf. Te&yayai (Aesch. Teftyarai 
 
 from reSivaivai, Epic Te^m/iev, -ii/iei'm) ; Plup. ird^yaffav. Opt. Teftyafj/y. 
 TAAfl, to endure (second Aor. ^rArji'), Perf. TCTAijKa, TETAAA: Dual TETXaToi'i 
 
 PI. TeTAa^uev, TsTXaTe, TeT\a(Ti{y), Imp. TerAo^i, -^tw, etc., Subj. wanting, 
 
 Inf rerKayai (Epic T€TAB;iie>'), but Part. Epic tctAtji^s ; Plup. Dual eTe'i^aToi', 
 
 eTCTAoTjjc, PI. ^TcTAa/tey, cTeTAdre, ^TerAdtrai', Opt. TeTAa^Tjv. 
 MAn, to strive, Perf. ficfioya; MEMAA: Epic ii4iiaij,ev, -aroy, -are, -da(rt{T), Imp. 
 
 liffiara, Part, /ienads, Gen. fieiiciuTos and /iefiaSros, third Pers. PI. Plup. 
 
 ^€/tdfraz'. 
 
 Here belong the two participles of 
 SiPpdiTKa, to eat (second Aor. ePpay), Perf. piPpaKa, poet. P^Ppdis, Gen. -Stos; 
 witrTa, to fall, TreTTTWKa, Epic Treirrews, Att. poet. weiTTtisn 
 
 (b) The Stem ends in a Consonant. 
 
 It is to be observed in respect to the formation, that when the consonant of 
 the stem comes before a personal-ending beginning with t, the t is changed 
 into &, and thus these forms assume the appearance of a Mid. form, e. g. 
 irei&m, to persuade, vivoiSra, to trust. Epic Plup. Iire'iri&^e;', Imp. in Aeschyl 
 
 Evim. 602, ircTreHT&f (instead of TreVicrai). 
 
 Eemaek. Thus the Epic form TreVoirae, stem nEN0 with the variable o 
 (nON0), instead of Treiriy^are from Trdcrx'" ; from Treir6ySta,re by dropping the 
 connecting vowel o, comes iriirovSm ; and hence as a Tau-mute before another 
 Tau-mute is changed into <r (§ 17, 5, comp. JS-re = fo-re), Tre'iroj/Sre becomes 
 Tremeir&e, and as c is dropped before o-, ireroffTe ; finally, this form, as has been 
 neen, assumed the appearance of the Mid. form (3-e) and so became ireiroffS-e. 
 
 Perf Tnd. S. 
 
 D.2. 
 
 3. 
 
 Kexpaya, -as, -e{v) {Kpd(a>, to bawl) Plup. ixcKpiy^iv, -els, -«i 
 
 KCKpiyaTov KeKpaxSrov iKcxpayeiToy ikiKpax^oy 
 
 KCKpiyaroy KiKpay^ov iKeKpay^Tniy iKsKpdxSrnP 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® "^ ^ 
 
} 229.] VERES IN -0) LIKE VEEDS IN -fU. 275 
 
 K^Kp&yaiiev KeKpay/iev iKsxpiyetfiev iKetrpayfiey 
 
 Kexp&yaTe K^xpax^f ixsKpiyeiTe ixeKpax^e 
 
 KeKp&yd(ri{v) iKeKpdyfurai', -icrav 
 
 Imp. KfKpax^i, -dx^a, -"•X^^t ^'<^' I'lf- neKpayivat. Part. Kexpayds. 
 
 So the Epic Perf. Svojyo with the sense of the Pres. I command, &nayas, &vaye, 
 PI. t.vayi»,(V. Imp. &vasyi and ivux^h A^/ayeTiB and ii,viix^''> i,v<iyirea.ni 
 KfuX^e; Subj. livdryTg; Inf. avuy^iiev; Plup. ^ci^fa, iirtiyei; Opt. livdyoes. 
 
 iyilpa, to awaken, Perf. iypiyyopa (stem 'ErEP with the varidble o), lam awake; 
 from this, Homer has the forms: Imp. iypiiyop^e instead of iyprry6paTe, Inf. 
 iypriy6pS'at (as if from iypiiyopfuu) and e7fii)')'(fp&o<n(v) instead of iypriyipa- 
 ai{v) third Pers. PI. 
 
 oXSa, Iknow, the regular fonns oXSafiev, dtSaTt, &lSac-t{y) are found hat rarely in 
 the Ion. and Att. writers (5 195, 1), second Pers. olSas in Homi. and Ion 
 (rarely Att. § 195, I ). The form tS-fiev is Epic, Ion., and Doric. Inf. ISnevtu 
 and iSnev Epic, Subj. lS4a Epic instead of elSu (Ion. ei'Jeoj), Part. iSuIo Epic 
 and elSv7a, 
 
 Plup. 1. Pers. Sing.T^Sea (hence the Att. fSr)) Epic instead of ^Seiy 
 
 2. " " iielSds and ^e^Sr)s Epic instead of ijScis 
 
 3. " " iielSei and ^eiSrj, J)See(i'), Epic instead of ySei; — ^ei8e, 
 
 Herod. 
 3. " PI. Itrav Epic instead of ^Ssaca/. 
 Fut. etS^trw Epic and also ^tro/icu. 
 ioixa, lam like, Epic, eiKToy (Dual), ^KTjjy (Plup. Dual) ; hence in Plnp. Mid. 
 or Pass. %'iKTO. 
 
 § 229. (3) Present and Imperfect. 
 
 Finally, there are certain forms of the Pres. and Impf. mostly in the Epic 
 dialect, which after the analogy of verbs in -;iii, take the personal-endings with- 
 out the Mode-vowel. Thus: — 
 avia, to cmnphte, in Theocritus : Impf. ivv-jifs (instead of iiviopiev), &m-To (instead 
 
 of i\vieTo). 
 Tavia, to stretch, to span, H. p, 393. Tdvv-Tcu (instead of ravierai), 
 ipiai, to draw, Ipvrai, etpvTO, tpiro, %pvao, ^va^ai (§ 230). 
 reiio, to shake, Epic Pres. (revrat and (by variation) ffoihai. Imp. irovrro and 
 
 abridged croO, o-oSir&e, troitr^a {to move one's self, to hasten). The Imp. has 
 
 passed into the common colloquial language. 
 tSw, commonly 4(r&la, to eat, Epic, Inf. ^S/icrai. 
 pfim, to carry, Epic Imp. ^epre instead of (pepere. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
S76 DIALECTS. t^ 230 
 
 ^230. Alphabetical List of Verbs in the Diulecti. 
 to be specially noted. 
 
 hiai (aFa.u),to hurt, to deceive; Horn. Srrivai; the Att. Tragedians use thu 
 has the following forms: Aor^ Saira following forms : ^iftf-ino and direr*, 
 andSo-a ; Pres. Mid. aaru, Aor. liMTii- jJla, a|ai and ^|a, Sjoh 
 ftw, Aor. Pass. adffSrriv. Verb. Adj. Ma (Ep.), to hear, only Pres. and Imjil' 
 awrSs (a-oiaTos). fc""- Comp. iirma. 
 
 iyaiofiM, Epic and Ion. prose {§ 164) a/caxif™ (Epic), to trouble, stem 'AJCn, 
 and a7(iO|ixm(Ep.),to 6e ant^ry erf, and second Aor. fixaxov; Fut. axaxfia-ia, 
 in the Pres. Epic also to grudge, to first Aor. iiic(lxn<ra, ; Mid &KBxffo/ioi, 
 €ni;^, Fut. aydaofjiat ; Aor. ijyaadfiriv. SxoA«" oi^ Sxi'u/iioi, <o 6e sad, Aor. 
 
 lyelpa, to collect, 'E^pic second Aor. Mid. iiKaxif^V (§ 219, 7) ; Perf. afc^x^imi 
 aye'pui/TO, Part, dyp^^fwj (§ 223, 11); (4 219, 8, comp. 6.fii)peiMi, opiipe/uu) 
 Plap. ayriyipato ; Aor. Pass. a7e|P^, and axaxTlfMi, third Pers. PI. ti/njxe- 
 third Pers. PI. iyfp^ei/; Epic Pres. Sarai (^ 220, Eem. 2) and oKTJxe'aToi, 
 717€pe'&0;uai (^^2). Part. nKrjXf/i*'"'^ '"^cl oKaxw^'"'s, In£ 
 
 ayi/oeai, to be ignorant. Tip. Aor. ^jymlria-e aKaxio-Aoi (§ 223, Kera. 4); Plup. 
 {5 207, I), ayvdaaaKs (^ 205, 5). Epic d/caxfioTO. 
 
 SryyOfu, to break, Aor. Epic ^|o instead aKax/iefos (Epic), sharpened, pointed, 
 of eaja ; third Pers. PI. Aor. Pass. from 'AKfl, acuo, instead of aKa^fieTOS 
 &yev Epic instead of iayqa-ap. (§§ 19, Rem. 1, and 208, 2). The x 
 
 S71.), io feo^ Epic second Aor. Imp. comes from the Perf, Act. 
 SjeTc, Inf. d|€;uerai, a^efiev (§ 223, oKTiSea, to neglect, Aor. ctK^BEffcfv). 
 10) ; first Aor. Mid. &^aa-^e, SJoi'To. a\dofiai, to wander about, Ep. Perf. a\i- 
 
 de(5iB (prose ?5m), to smjr. Epic second Aij/iai (§ 219, 8), a\tt\^fi.ivos, d\i{AT)ff- 
 Aor. Imp. dEdrEO (§ 223, 10). ftai (^ 223, Eem. 4). 
 
 aeipw (prose aXpu), to raise. Epic first a\dcuvQj, to make increase, Epic Aor, 
 Aor. Act. S,eipa, Mid. afipdfoiv. Pass. ij\Saye{v). 
 
 depftrji" ; Epic second Aor. Mid. ap6- a\4^m, to keep off, Epic second Aor. 
 fiijj" from aifpw; Epic Plup. Smpro ^\a\(coj' (5 219, 7), (from 'AAKXl). 
 instead of ^pro with the variable a\a\Kuy, dAaA.ictSi' ; Put. d^oAjc^crai. 
 vowel, and transposition of tlie aug- d\E'o/iai and aKeiofxai (Epic), to shun, 
 mcnt; Epic Pres. ^EpEfto/iai (§ 162). Aor. iiAevdfiTiv, Subj. aKerirat, Opt. 
 
 'AHMI, ('AE-,) to blow; in Homer, are; aXtaiTo, Imp. dA.E'an-3-E, Inf. dAEiJoir^oi 
 Part. oEi'j, dEVros; third Pers. Sing. and aXea(r^ai (§ 223, 8). 
 Inipf St), Sei, SieJEt ('AEn) ; in the dA^tr/cco, a^AlvKoi (Ion. prose), to ^caJf 
 other forms, the j) remains contrary Fut. dX&E'Jto, etc. 
 to the analogy of Ti&rj^ui (§ 224, 6): dXiraiVtu (Epic and poet.), to sm, Fut. 
 St7toi/, arjvai, d^^Ei'ai ; Mid. and Pass. dAiT^trcu ; Aor. ^Atroy, dAiTtJ/tTjc, dAi- 
 fiij/jai, to 6/ow, v6nevos Kal aiifisyos, teVc^oi; Perf. dAiT^/nEyor, sin/i</ (§ 223, 
 drenched with rain and beaten with the Rem. 4). 
 wind; Impf Mid. Stjto. aAAO|Uai, to spring, Epic second Aor. 
 
 nVSo^iai and alSio/iai in Homer, to te Mid. aAiro, etc. (^ 227, B). 
 
 ashamed, to respect. Epic aiS^ija-oiiai, iAvKrea, to be in trouble. Epic Perf. dAo- 
 ?jSE(r&»)i' and ySeffdixtiy. \iiKT7ifiai (§ 219, 8). 
 
 eXfvfu (Ep.), to fate (instead of aipvvfi.ai, aXitrKta (Ep.), to escape, dAi)|w, ^Au|a. 
 § 1G9, Rem. 1), only Pres. and Impf a\^alvai (Ep.), to find, Sec. Aor. dAi))eu'. 
 
 nipE'aj, to (oic. Ion. Perf apaiprixa, apai- a/iapravta, to miss. Epic Aor. ijupporop 
 prj^ai (§ 219, 8); Epic second Aor. {^ 223, 11, and 208, 3). 
 Mid. 7eVto instead of eAeto (§ 227, aiaKaido-Ka (Ep. and poet.), to err, Fut. 
 B). d/zirAaK^o-oj ; Aor. ^/[i-n-AoKOi'. 
 
 idaaai, Epic (o, but ^TratfEi, II. ^, 126; di/Savto (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to pfawe, 
 1) instead of If irira, to ni^A, Ep. forms : Impf. lai'Scu'oi' (Herod.), e^kS. and 
 ^ijB, Subj. dtjco. Part. di|aj ; Aor. VS. (Ep.) ; Aor. eoSov (Herod.), S5o» 
 Pass. ^fxST)" (silso in Plat,), Inf di'x- (Ep.) ; Inf oSeu/; Perf caSa: Fut 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 230.J LIST OP DIALECTIC VEECS. 277 
 
 iS^ifoj.'-rAug., « 219, 4, 5. In The- Mid. Trans., to lead, efin<ra, 40nird' 
 
 ocritus eaSc ; Ep. Aor. fSaSov {^ 219, ifny ; second Aor. Mid. 4$ii<reT0, Imp. 
 
 4, and 207, 3). im^iiaeo (§ 223, 10). Ep. secondary 
 
 i,vl]yo^e, to sprimj up, Ep. Perf. with form : Pi^da-^av, to stalk, strength- 
 
 Att. Eednpliration and the variable ened secondary form from fiaivm; 
 
 o (§§ 219, 8, and 140, 4), from also |8i;8ji, /8i/8wyTa, /SiiSoJira and (from 
 
 'ANE0n. BIBHMI) fii/lds; finally, Imp. i8<i(rKf, 
 
 acTow, to meet, Epic ijvTeov [^ 222. A and Inf. iTrtPaffKe/iey. 
 
 (2)] ; afmamiiTi\v (§ 222, Rem. 1 ). PaWai, to throw, Ep. second Aor. ^PK-i]r, 
 
 hvim, to complete. Epic Impf. in Theoc. i^Kitii-qv [^ 227, A (a)], Fut. jSA^ero- 
 
 SyC/xcs, ScCro (§ 229). ixm ; Ep. Perf. fie^oK-rilMi (used of the 
 
 &niiya (Ep. and poet. Perf), to command, mind) ; but fii^\nii.a,i (of the body). 
 
 ii,vayiJLiV, Imp. ivuxSih etc. (§228); fiapto! (Ep.), to be heavy, $e$ap7i<is (^ 223, 
 
 Plup. iivdyea (5 220, 8). In certain 13). 
 
 forms this Perf. is changed into the Pefipi&ois (Ep.), to eat, instead of ySi- 
 
 inflection of the Pres., e. g. third PptUcKots. 
 
 Pcrs. Sing, avdiysi, Impf. ^vtt/yov and ^eofjLou and ^iiofiat, I will f/o, will life, 
 
 &!/uyov ; Fut. avd^a ; Aor. -^wo^o. Ep. Fut. Pe-ri, Pii/x-ea-^a (^ 923, 7). 
 
 airaupda (Epic), to take away, Impf Pido/Mu (Ep.) instead of /S iC^t^at, to 
 
 a-rritiptay, -as, -a ; first Aor. Act. Part. force, i$ii(raTo, Pe$tiiKe. 
 
 airoipas ; first Aor. Mid. air-qipaTo, ^i^pdxTKa, to eat, Ep. Aor. ePptev [§ 227, 
 
 Part, mrovpdiievos. ■ A (d)] ; Perf Part. jSejSpaJ, -iStos 
 
 i.Tra!pia-Ka (Ep.), to deceive, Fut. airoi^^- (4 228). 
 
 tm, second Aor. Act. ijiratpov, Opt. PK^crKu (Ep. and poet.), to go, instead 
 
 MiA. mrdfaiTO. of /Ada- ica (§ 18, 3), Aor. e/toAov, 
 
 &weiK4ai (Ep.), to threaten, AiteiA^ttji' jj-oKeiv, ftoXiiv (also X. An. 7. 1, 33, 
 
 (§ 222, Rem. 1). y-iKaaai) ; Perf. ^€jH|3A.toKa (instead of 
 
 airifcpire, an Ep. Aor., he hurried off, fi.ifi4\a!Ka) ; Fut. juoAoD/iai. 
 
 Subj. hro4ptrri, Opt. awo4ptrete. 0oda, to cry out, Ep. Aor. ePava instead 
 
 fiTTO), to join to, Ep. Aor. Pass. ed<p^, of 4p6r)(ra (§ 205, 5). 
 
 fell on. Poi\o/iai, to will, Ep. p6\eTat, 06\e<r&e 
 
 ipaplffKO) (Ep.), to fit, stem APXl, first (§ 207 , i), ■irpop4pov\a,'I prefer. 
 
 Aor.'^piro, Spiroi(4 223, 6); fii-st Aor. Ppvxdoiiai, to roar, Ep. Perf. p4ppvxa. 
 
 Pass. Sfj&ey instead of fip^trav ; sec- with tlie sense of tlie Pres. 
 
 ond Aor. iipapov {<) 219, 7; also In- Tafi4a, to marry, Ep. Fut. yafi4a>; Ep. 
 
 trans, to be adapted, to please), more Fitt. yaii4a-aeTcu, II. i, 394, wiUgive in 
 
 usual than the first Aor. ; Perf. &pS.- marriage. 
 
 pa (Ion. &pnpa.) (§ 219, 8), I am fitted, ydviifiai (Ep.), to be glad, ydmirtu; Fut. 
 
 Intrans., Ep. &pdpv7a (§ 223, 13), Perf. yavi<r<reTcu. 
 
 Mid. or Pass, apiipe^ai, apripenems TAXI, Ep. Perf., ydya/iev, to have become, 
 
 (§ 223, Rem.4) ; Aor. Sp/teyos, adapted etc. (| 228). 
 
 (5 227, B). ■ye'yaii'a Ep. and poet. Perf. with tha 
 
 APAiJ, apdoiim, to pray, Epic second senseof the Pres. to en/ out; in Hom., 
 
 Aor. ap^ixevtti, Od. x, 322. third Pers. Sing. 7e7«i'e (also with 
 
 &pmii.m, to gain (§ 188, 1). the sense of the Aor. j, Part, yeymi'iiis, 
 
 AG, Ep., (a) to blow, see &ripu; (b) to Jn{.yiya:y4fisi/;Vlap.4yeycivei. From 
 
 sleep, Aor. &etra, Siro/nei'; (c) to satis- the Perf. a Pres. has been foi-med of 
 
 fy (also Intrans. to be satisfied), Inf. which there are in Horn. : Inf. 7e7M- 
 
 "dfjiei/cu instead of aeVerai; Fut. S<ri»; my, Impf. 4y£y<ivew, 
 
 Aor. So-o, fio-offS-ai. Verb. Adj. Soros, ysim/au (Ep.), to 6e terre, to ie produced, 
 
 g.roj. Aor. Mid. to beget, to bear, Subj. yef- 
 
 Baivu,'to walk, to go, Ep. foi-ms : Perf. vecu instead of yeivriai. 
 
 ^ifiofuev, etc. (§ 228) ; second Aor. yivra, to seise (§ 227, B). 
 
 Dual pdrnv, third Pers. PI. tmtpPa- yvpda, to grow old, second Aor. tyiipa, 
 
 a-w a 227, Rom.), third Pers. PI. etc [§ 227, A (a)]. 
 
 ^/SoK, iSiii' U 224, 4), Inf. piiiiemi, 7oa(» (poet.), to li'ait, Ep. third Icrs. PI. 
 
 Subi. besides /3w, etc. : jSeim, iS^, Pel- Aor. 7(io«'. , , ,. 
 
 o/it;' (] 224, 9) ; first Aor. Act. and AnfrO/ii (Ep.), to entertain, to feed (id 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
278 DIALECTS. [i 230 
 
 stead of SuIt-w/u, § 169, Rem. 1), ere, to await (e. g. an attack, a wild 
 Fut. Bofirw I Mid. Saimnai, to feast, to beast), in the following fonns : Scxo- 
 c»nsanie,secondPers. Sing. Impf. Ind. rai instead of Scxoi/Tai (§ 220, 13), 
 iaivv (daivvo instead of ^taivvao, 11. p., 147, Perf. SeSeyjUai with the 
 § 224, 5), third Pers. Sing. Opt. Jm- sense of the Pres., Put. SeSe'lo/tai, 
 yuTo instead of -iiTo, third Pers. PI. excipiam, second Aor. Mid. ISekto, 
 SaiviaTo; Aor. iSattrdiiTiv. etc. (§ 227, B); Perf. Mid. SeSoKtifii- 
 
 talai, Ep., (a) to divide (4 164), Put. vos, awaiting, lurking, II. o, 730. 
 Siiiro/iai; Aor. (also prose) 4Saa'aiJ.riv, Seia (instead of SeFa), Bp. instead of 
 FeTi.Fa,ss.S4Sa<rfiat,amdivided,broken, Seen, to want, from which come iSfiri' 
 ScSttlarai ; (b) to bum, to inflame, Perf. ire, he uxmted, Siiffey, he was in want 
 Se'Stje, he burnt; Mid. to bum, blaze, of; Mid. Se^o^ai, fo be wanting. Put. 
 Intrans., second Aor. Subj. Si^TjTai. Seu^ia-o/jiai. 
 
 Sa/ivdai and Si{/u«);tii, Ep. secondary AIAHMI (AE-), Ep. and older Ionic- 
 form of Sa/idio, to subdue, from Att. (Xen.), secondary form of Scu, 
 which come third Pers. Sing. Pres. to bind, SiSe'oo-i (Xen. An. 5. 8, 24) ; 
 So/ij/^ ; third Pers. Sing. Impf. ^Sif/iva Impf SlSri instead of iSlSri, II. \, 105. 
 and di/iva, Sd/nvcurKs ; second Pers. SiCn/uu (Ep. and Ion.), to seek; it re- 
 Sing. Pres. Mid. SafivS; — StJ/iyrjo-i, tains the r) (contrary to § 170, 1, 
 Sd/ivaftai, etc. comp. 'AHMI) ; iSlfyro, ef.^^7)VT0, SI- 
 
 Sup^dvio, to sleep, Epic Aor. iSpaSiov (v'^at, Si(/ifi.ems (in Herocl.) ; 5(rtjoi 
 (§ 223, 11). (Horn.], sr^eoi (Theoc.) ; Fat. Sif^a- 
 
 Sareofuu, Ep. secondary form, used. in /not; Aor. iSt^ija-dfiriv. 
 the Pres. and Impf, from Saio/Mi, to AIHMI ( AIE-), of the Act. only evSUaav 
 divide. (third Pers. PI. Impf), II. er, 584, they 
 
 AAn (Ep. and poet.), (a) to teach (= drove away; Mid., to make one run, to 
 Si.Sd(rKa>),{h) to learn (^= StSd(TKoii.ai); make free, oftener to scare, to chase 
 to (a) belong the Ep. second Aor. (specially with the Inf), Sievrai, II. 
 SiSae (Hom.), %Sae (Theoc. and ij/, 475, Sieo-S-ai, II, /i, 304, Subj. 
 ApoU.); to (b) SeSodJj (Horn.), SeSii- BiVoi, SiavTtu, Opt. SIolto (comp. 
 od-i (in other authors) ; Ep.. second TiStoiro). 
 
 Aor. Act. '^Sdriv, I learned [§ 227, A Sia (Ep.), to flee, SU, SefSie, Slav, I fled. 
 (b)], from which Ep. Saharoijua, SiSaft- Soviriu (Ep. ), to sound, Perf. SeSouir/roj ; 
 Ka, SeSmifieyos. Prom the Perf a Aor. iSaimia-a and 4ySoi7ni<ra (from 
 new Ep. Pres. has been formed, SeSd- TAOTn-, comp. tutttio and KTimea). 
 aa-Siat, Inf Here belongs also the Sim/uu, to be able, second Pers. Ion. 
 Ep. Put. Stici (Ishallflnd, meet with), Siveai; Aor. 'E^. iSuvdaSrnv a-nd. iSuvrr 
 Si^is, Sijonev, Sisre (§ 223, 7). iro/irjc (\ 179, 2). 
 
 Se'oTo (Ep.), it seemed, Aor. SoiJo-troTo, Sia, to go in, to wrap up, Tip. Si/ieviu in- 
 third Pers. Sing. Subj. Sodaa-erai stead of SSmi from ISw ; Ep. second 
 (instead of -rrrat). Aor. Mid. Siaero, Sia-eo, Sva6ix.iVt)S 
 
 SelSa, to fear, the Pres. occurs only in (§ 223, 10). 
 the first Pers., Put. Sela-o/mi ; Aor. 'Eyelpio, to awake, Ep. Aor. iypero, he 
 fSetffa, Ep. SSewro (as is probable awiofe, etc. (4 223, 11) ; Ep. forms of 
 originally eSFeura), Perf Ep. SelSotKo. Perf. iypityapa are iypiiyapStf, etc. 
 mstead of BeSoi/ca, and SelSia Ep. (^ 228). Prom the Perf. has been 
 instead of S4Sia {<> 228). formed the Pres. iyprryopiav, toatch- 
 
 Sc.K«i/ii, to show. Ion. ( AEK) S4^a, ^Sejo, ing, Od. u, 6, as if from iypiiyopda. 
 etc.; Mid. Se^KTOfioi in the Ep. dialect eSw and eirao. (Ep.), to ea« (= iffdlai), 
 has also the sense, to greet, to welcome, Inf eS^erai (§ 229) ; Impf. ^Sov and 
 to drink to: so also in the Perf. Sd- ^Sea-xov; Perf ^SijSiiij; Perf Mid. or 
 Siyiitti with the sense of the Pres., Pass. iSriSoTai. 
 S€,S4xaTat third Pers. PI.; Plup. S^l- 'ESn, from which come theEp.?»«c, 
 ScKTo, (0 welcome, SeiSixaro. wont, accustomed, and the Perf. «&&a 
 
 StpKOfiai, to see, Ep. second Aor. Upaxov (§ 140, Rem. 3). 
 
 (§223,11). ■EIAn,-IAn, Aor.eIS<,;',7saM»,Ep.l(SoF, 
 
 S<Xo^',toremM,Ion.8E/co;iai;inHom. Inf. l5eW, Subj. raaiui: En. Pres. 
 this verb signifies also, to take, excip- Mid. tXSerai, it seems, eiSrffifraj, op 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
\ 230. 
 
 LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 
 
 279 
 
 pearing, making like; ]?ut. eliroiuu; 
 first Aor. ela-d/niv and htaiiniv, eW- 
 fifvos and Uurdfifvos (§ 219, 4) ; sec- 
 ond Aor. ISifiiiv, I saw. 
 
 ZlKa, third Pers. Sing. Impf. cTkc, it 
 appeared, H. a; 520 ; Perf. UiKa,Iam 
 like, Ep. third Pers. Dual ttiKTov and 
 Plnp. ttKTTjiv {§ 228), Part. iotK<isa.ni 
 II. ip, 254. ciKcS;, ciKvia and II. ir, 418. 
 tiouaiiai; Ep. Plup. Mid. ^i/tTo and 
 tlKTo, it was like. 
 
 ti\iu (Ep.), to cover, envelop, ei\ia-a, 
 tf\vnai, third Pers. PI. dKiaToi ; from 
 4\ia) comes Aor. Pass. 4\i(r^riv. 
 
 etKai, to press, to drive, from which in 
 Horn, only ei\6fj(.svos j in the same 
 author, el\iiD, iei\eov; the rest are 
 from 'EA, e. g. JXiroj', Inf rxtrai and 
 Uhirat, Part. cAtros (§ 223, 6) ; U\iuu, 
 if\lj.4ms; second Aor. Pass. id\riv 
 (from IX\w), third Pers. PI. SAef, 
 ii\rjvai and d\^;i(crai, &Acf;. 
 
 «>(, to be, § 225. ' 
 
 fifu, to go, \ 226. 
 
 fipya, to shut out, Ep. Impf. %pyo&ov 
 (§ 162). Comp. ifrya. 
 
 stpoiMi (Ep. and Ion.), to ask, Impf. 
 e'ip6iiriv ; Fat. ttpiiaoiiai ; second Aor. 
 i)p6iiny, Subj. ipific^a, Opt. %poiTo, 
 Inf ^pea-^at in Horn, with the accent 
 of the Pres. ; — Ep. secondary forms 
 of the Pres. (a) Iphiuu, ^peWftai ; 
 Impf. ipiovTO ; (b) ip4u, Subj. ^peii- 
 ;rtey, Opt. ip4oiflev. Part, ipiav. 
 
 •EIPTMI, see ^p^«. 
 
 cjp&f, Ep. and Ion., sero, to arrange in a 
 row, to string, first Aor. 4^e!pas, exse- 
 rens, Herod. 3, 87 ; Ep. Perf Mid. or 
 Pass, ^ep/uai, itp/ieyos (in Herod. 4p- 
 fieyos), Plup. eepro, 
 
 fipa, to say, Pres. only Ep., Put. 4pw, 
 Ep. 4p4io, 
 
 tlaa, Ep. Aor., I placed, from the stem 
 'EA- (comp. sed-eo), Opt. avitrai/ii, 
 Imp. etffov, Part. eVas {avt^avTes', 
 tmelffas, Her. 3, 126. 6, 103), Inf ^((leV- 
 erai ; Aor. Mid. 4ffdfi-riv and ietraaTo, 
 Part. €0e<rff(f;t6i'os(Her. 1, 66. ela'dfie- 
 voi). Imp. f<j>eatrai ; Put. 4^4a(ri&^ai. 
 
 iTixeivio, to drive, Pres. Ixdw, Ep. eXifio ; 
 Impf. Ep. I\a«'; Ptit. Ep. 4\6aei 
 instead of 4\aai; Ep. Perf. 4\itKd- 
 Hfvos (§ 223, Rem. 4), third Pers. 
 Sing. Plup. 4Mi\dSaro (^ 220, Rem. 
 2) ; Ion. Perf. 4\'fi\a<riiai and Aor. 
 Pass. fiKdtr^v. 
 
 4\e\l(a, to whirl, Ep. second Aor. Mid. 
 4\4KmT0 (§ 227, B). 
 
 ^veVffl or 4m4nu (Ep.), to sjy, to teU, 
 Impf with the sense of the Aor. 
 ivfirov, evveirov, Aor. evunrov (comp. 
 4<rTr6ixnv from enofiai), Imp. Ij/i<rirf j, 
 Subj. 4i'l<nra, Opt. 4vi<rvoiiu, Inf ^wcr- 
 irerv, Put. ^;'/;|'(» and 4vi<nrriaa. 
 
 4irl\mda, Ep. Perf. from 'ENSn or 'EN- 
 Eon with the sense of tlie Pres. and 
 Impf, 4irevi)voSre, to sit on, II. fi, 219. 
 to lie on, H. Cer. 280. Comp. airl^vo- 
 &E above. 
 
 4vlirra (Ep.), to chide, second Aor. ^i- 
 ivmov, iiv-tiraiTiv (^ 219, 7). 
 
 eyyvfu, to clothe, Ep. and Ion. eli/v/u; 
 Ep. Put. eWio; Aor. eViro and eVo, 
 katrdjiriv, kcffffaro, eaturdai; Peif. 
 ef/uu, efiroi (and tVo-ai), tFrac, etc., 
 Ei/i^yos: second Pers. Plup. eWo, 
 third Pere fWo and eWro, third Pers. 
 Dual eVaijf, third Pers. PI. cToto; — 
 on icffffaro, e'fiTTo, comp. ^ 219, 4. 
 
 foiKa, lam like, 5 228. Comp. 'EIKD. 
 
 firata, to understand, Aor. ^i^iVro (i), 
 Herod, and ApoUon. (§ 130, Rem. 1 ) ; 
 the poet. Ma is found only in Pres. 
 and Impf. 
 
 4travpltrKofuu (Ep. and poet.), to receive 
 advantage or injury from a thing, Aor. 
 4-inrivp6fji7]y, 4'iravp4tr^at (first Aor. 4'it7]v 
 pd/iny in Aeschyl. and in the later 
 writers); Fnt. hrmipijcroiim. Of the 
 Act. in the sense to touch, to injure. 
 Homer uses, second Aor. Subj. 4Tra6- 
 pij, Inf. 4Travpe7y, 4vavp4ii€v. 
 
 4TriffTaiuu, to know, second Pers. 4irierTrt, 
 Ion. poet. 
 
 6ira), as a simple, in Act. only Ep. in 
 the sense tracto aliquid, to take care of 
 (II. (, 321); generally used as a 
 compound, e. g. trepteiroc, Sieirw, etc-, 
 second Aor. Act. ea-irov instead of 
 eo'-eiroj', in Homer 4n4<nrov, 4Triinreiv, 
 4iriav(iv ; Put. ei^m, Ep. 4ipe^(ts ; Mid. 
 also as a simple, generally signifying 
 to follow ; Impf. Ep. cfrifoiv instead 
 of eiiriiirtv ; Put. Ei^o/iai ; second Aor. 
 Mid. fffTiimv, a-iretr^ai, trirov (4tio'- 
 iroS); Ep. forms: <rjrera, IffireVaw, 
 Subj. favafiat. Opt. einroifj.T]y, Inf. 
 4<nr4ff^at and (nretr^at. Part. iffirSfie- 
 vos. Herodot. has from irepieim also 
 •jrepi€<p^vai and irepisipeff^ai instead 
 of vfpieijt^ireir^ai. 
 
 ^pyto, commonly 44pya, Ep., instead of 
 Apya, to shut in and shut out, with the 
 secondary forms 44pymiu, 4pyiS)u>, 
 4tpydSta, Aor. epjo; Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass. Upyiuu, third Pers. PI. ipxiniu 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
280 DIALECTS. [5 23V 
 
 thiixi Pers. PI. Plup. Upxaro and Attic Redup.) ; Ep. Plup. iTrtixaTo 
 
 ■tpxaro ; Aor. Pass, ipx^eis. ihey were dosed, II. ;u, 340. 
 
 epSoi and ^eX"" (Ep-), lo do, Put. ^e'|i», '■H/ioi, to si«, eoToi, eoTo (lon^), and_ eVb- 
 
 Aor. ep^efa and epefa, or epla, ?p|o ; rai, eioto Ep., instead of ^vrai, ?ivto. 
 
 Perf. gopyo, Plup. iiipyiiv (§ 140, VS" (Ep.), to sink, Perf. iire/xiffiiiVKf, to 
 
 Kem. 3), Perf. Mid. or Pass, iepy/ie- let the head sink, II. x> 491- '-Tlie 
 
 yos, Aor. Pass, ^ex^f^s, ^cx'^'''"- above form has the Att. reduplication 
 
 ipeiSa, to prop, Ep. Perf. iorip45S.Tai iii.-iii.vKe (^ 219, 8), and is strength- 
 
 (§219,8). enedbyi'(§208, 5). 
 
 ipeiva (poet, and prose), to throw down, ®4po)im (Ep-), to warm one^s self, Put. 
 
 Ep. Plup. ipipnrTo (§ 219, 8). »4p<ronai (§ 223, 6) : Aor. iStepmy, 
 
 ipiiaiva (Ep-), to fight, Aor. Mid. IpiSii- Subj. aepea. 
 
 irair&oi. ^\iw (Ep. and poet.), to sprout. Put. 
 
 e/)iXi<), to .^jA«, Ep. ipi(oitai, Perf. Mid. ftijA-V", etc.; Perf. TfSniKa (re^aXvTa 
 
 ipipurpM (§ 219, 8). Ep. \ 223, 13) ; second Aor. e3-a\o!/. 
 
 tp^w, to jcanrfer afiowi, Ep. Aor. Spiral, to ©Hlin (Ep.), to stun, Perf. reftTiTra; 
 
 hurry away (§ 223, 6). Plup. dre^ina; second Aor. (from 
 
 ipv^aiva (poet.), to redden. Put. ipv&-li<ra. TA*n) irafov., 
 
 ipvKtii, to keep off, Ep. second Aor. Act. ^vicrxa, to die, Perf. Tti^yijico, PI. Te&ra- 
 
 TfpiKaKov, ipvKOKeeiv (§ 219, 7). fiev, etc. (§ 228). 
 
 ipia and €ipu£u (Ion. and Ep.), to dmu;, d^piia-Ku (Ep., Ion., and poet.), to spring. 
 
 Put. iptffoi {<T(t) and Ep. ipvova'i', Aor. ^^opov; Put. d'opou/iat, Ep. &op6- 
 
 Aor. ^pvffa (^ro") and elpiJirfl; Put. Ojuoti; PeW. Te^opo. See § 161, 14. ' 
 
 Mid. ^potro/tai and Ep. ^piJetr&ai ; Aor. 'I5p6to (Ion.), to sweat, IBpua-i, ISpuvres, 
 
 epvadfiTiv (fffr) and elpvcrdfiitj/ ', Perf. t5pco(ra, ISptpjiv {^ 137, Kem. 1). 
 
 Pass, third Pers. PI. elpiarai, II. |, 'Irj/u, to send (Ep. and Ion.), Aor. eTj/ta; 
 
 7.5, and Plup. ^pmro, II. ir, 69. elpi- Put. ri<rio, but Od. <r, 265, avecrei ; in 
 
 ttTo, II. 8, 654 (of ships drawn to the Ep. and Ion. dialects, there are 
 
 land, long in the Arsis); Plup. several forms from the theme 'in, 
 
 Mid. etpvTo {(p^ffyavov, had drawn the e. g. avUi instead of avirjtrt Her., 
 
 sword, V long in tlie Arsis), Od. x, ^vvtoy instead of ^wUffav Horn., ^^e- 
 
 90. — Secondly, tlie Mid. in Horn. Weto and /je/ieTi^iieVos Herod., instead 
 
 and poet, takes the sense to save, to of fiebiero, ixeStap-iyos. 
 
 shelter (from danger) ; in this sense iKv4oimi, to corr.e, Ep. Pres. Stm and 
 
 there are the following forms : spvtro, Impf. Ikov; Ep. Aor. X^ov (§ 223, 10) 
 
 efpuTo and ipiro, which are to be and Ikto, etc. (§ 227, B). 
 
 regarded as syncopated forms of the 'lAHMl (instead of 'lAA), to be merciful 
 
 Irapf. — The two following Mid. Of the Act. only the Ep. Imp. tK-i)Sti, 
 
 secondary forms have also the sense he merciful (in addresses to tlie gods) 
 
 of to guard: (a) Ep. 'EL'^TMI, Inf. instead of 'iKoAi (§ 224, 6), as in 
 
 elpifieyai, Hes. 0pp. 816, Mid. to Theoc. 15, 143, Subj. Ep. ihriiqicri } 
 
 guard, etpvarai instead of etpmrai, Plup. Opt. Ep. i^^koi; Mid. poet- 
 
 Inf. epiKr&m, eipvaStai; — (b) Ep., 'iKa/iat, to appease. 
 
 poet, and, tliough very rare, Attic la-a/u {Dor.},to biow,1(j-)is,1a-dTi,i<Tap.ev, 
 
 prose l)vofitu. Inf. ^Oo-ftai instead of Part. i(ras. 
 
 pifcrSfar, Impf. third Pers. Sing. Kaivufuu (Ep.) instead of Kaiivvfiai 
 
 ipvTo, was watched, Hesiod. Th. 304, (§ 169, Rem. 1) from the stem KAA, 
 
 third Pers. PI. fimr instead of 4pioy- to excel, Perf. KiKcurpju ; Plup. im- 
 
 TO (they protected) ; Aor. iD^Oad/aiv ic<i<rp.nv. 
 
 and Ep. fiOcrdfn^v (but 11. o, 29. pHa-d- Kata, to bum, Ep. Aor. eKijo (Trag. 
 
 M")- cKea), Subj. icl]op.eii instead of -ufiev, 
 
 tpxo/J-at, to go, Ep. Perf €l\ri\ov&a, first Opt. third Pers. Sing. K^ai, third 
 
 Pers. PI. eikiiKou^iiei'; Epic Aor. Pers. PI. K^oiey, Inf Krjai (in the 
 
 ^\vdov. Odyss. also Ke7!u, Kelop.€v, K^lairres) : 
 
 fX", to have, Ep. Aor. eirxeSrov, (rxeSrov Aor. Mid. iKridfi-nu, K-ndfiems (in the 
 
 and eo-xoj' (MG2); Ep. Perf. Sx^ta Odyss. Kudfiems, Kelavro) ; second 
 
 (for oKux"' K '"^"'l X being trans- Aor. Act. ixdriv [l burned, Intrans.), 
 
 posed, and the word having the Inf. Ka-lifitvtu. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VERBS. 281 
 
 tinvo), to weary one's self, Ep. Kf/c^ijiSj, K\dCo, to sound, Ep. Perf. with the sense 
 
 -UTos, -6tos (§ 223, 13), Ep. second of the Pres. K4ic\riya, KSK\iry^s, PI. 
 
 Aor. Subj. KfKdfia (^ 219, 7). KeKK^fiyopres (as if from KeK\^a) ; 
 
 Kitnai, to he, in Horn. Khmm. as if from Aor. eKKayov. 
 
 KEo/iai ; Ep. and Ion. tteerai, /tfecr&oi; K\ela>, to shut, Ep. and Ion., KKTftca, Aor. 
 
 second Pers. Sing. Keieroi and Kerai, ^K\^iVa (i), KAiji'D-ai; Perf. Mid. or 
 
 tlurd Pers. PI. kcu/toi and Ep. Keia- Pass. KeicK-fiL/juxt (third Pers. PI. wettXe- 
 
 Toi and (Ion.) Kearcu, Subj. KEw/ioi, arai instead of /ce/tAVToi); Aqr. Pass, 
 
 third Pers. Sing, ki/toi ; Irapf. Kearo iKKritir^v ; from the Ion. KA.r)tai come 
 
 and Kelaro Ep. instead of eKetvro; the forms often found in the AtL 
 
 /cEO-KcTo; Ep. Eut. kcIo), ke'w, icelav, writers, viz. kAj^w, ^(cApo-o, KEKAp/tmi. 
 
 (tea?!', KEiE/iei/. kAe'w (Ep.), (o celebrate, of which' only 
 
 Kcipto, to sAcar o^ cut off, Ep. ke'^o-w, Kheoinai, Impf ^kAco instead of 1/cA.e'co 
 
 ixepaa (§ 223, 6), but ^Keipd/iiiv. (4 220, 10). 
 
 ke'Mo), to drive, Ep. e/ceAcro (§ 223, 6). K\ia (Ep.), to hear. Imp. KAue, /tAlieTc; 
 
 Ke'Ao/ioi (Ep. and poet.), to urje. Put. second Aor. Imp. K\d&i, kACte; and 
 
 KeK-fjirofiai, first Aor. iKA-ittrifJiriv ; kekAu&i, keVXute [§ 227, A (e)] ; the 
 
 second Aor. iKCK\6/irii>, etc. (5 223, Impf. ekAuoi/ is used instead of the 
 
 11). Ind. Pres. 
 
 Kii/Tea (Ep.), to prick, stimulo, Aor, KiiirTCD, to sfrife, second Perf. KcKO-rra in 
 
 KeWai (§ 223, 6). Horn., instead of KcVoifio. 
 
 Kepdvmfu, to mix, Ep. Kcpi^a (/cEpScTos) KophvO/jii, to satisfy, Ep. Fut. KopE'o; and 
 
 and Kepaia (Imp. xtpan), Kipvia (Kip- Kopeaa, Perf. KeK6priiiai, to wliich the 
 
 v^s, Impf. ixipva) and Kipirii/u (Impf. Part Kexopritis {<) 223, 13) in respect 
 
 ixlpvii, Kipiids) ; Ep. Mid. Kepavrai (as to its meaning belongs, 
 
 if from K^pa/Mi) ; Impf. KepStuvro Ep. .Korea and KOTeo/iot (Ep.), to !ie angry, 
 
 instead of ixepSyTo from Kepda. first Aor. Part. KOTsVas ; Perf. Part. 
 
 KepSalvu, to </ain, in Ion. and later wi'i- KeKoriids (5 223, 13) ; Mid. Eut. kote'- 
 
 ters: iKepdTjtra', KspS-^trea'^ai and Kep- aoiiai ((rff); Aor. ixoreadfiTiy (fftr). 
 
 dayeofiev in Herod. Kpd^to, to bawl, cry out, poet. Perf. KSKpd- 
 
 Kei^a (Ep.), to conceal. Put. /cEiicrM, Aor. ya, KsKpay/iey, etc. (§ 228) ; Put. /ce- 
 
 EKEucra ; Perf. keVew^b ; second Aor. Kpd^ofiai, Aristoph. 
 
 cKvAov, KvAoy, Subj. KeKi^a (§ 219, Kpaiyu (Ep. and poet), to complete, ac- 
 
 7); Mid. only Pres. and Impf. complish, Ion. commonly xpaiatvu, 
 
 K f)Sw, to maie anxious, in the Act. only Impf. iKpaiatyop ; Ep. Put. xpavea ; 
 
 Ep. Put. K7j51)(ra ; ]?erf. kektjSo, 7 am Aor. ixpriva. and Ep. iKpTjriva, Imp. 
 
 anxious ; Ep. Put. Perf. K€KaSii<ro/j,<u, Kprivov and Ep. Kp'tiTivov, Inf. xpfivM 
 
 II. a, 353. and Ep. Kprirjvcu ; Ep. Perf. Pass. 
 
 KiSi/o/iai) Ep. secondary fonn of (tkMv- Kexpaavrai (Eur. KEKpoyToi) ; Ep. Put. 
 
 vu/[iai, to scatter, only Pres. and Impf. Mid. Kpav4ofJuu. 
 
 Ktyupuu (Ep.) instead of Kiyeo/iai, to stir KTeiya, to hill, Ep. Put. kteceo) (Ep. 
 
 one's scZ/j to ie nwved, Pass. Ktvi/j.svos. Part. Kraveovra, KaraKTaviOvai(v) and 
 
 Ktpvda and Kipintm, Ep. secondary form KaraKrayUa^e with the variable a ; 
 
 of KepdyySfit, to mix, from which comes Aor. Ep. and poet. HxTavoy ; Ep. 
 
 the Part mpyis, Impf. ^/cipra and second Aor. Act. EKToy, etc. [4 227, 
 
 itfpvT). A (a)]; first Aor. Pass, third Pers. 
 
 iciX**'"" """i Kix^yofMi (Ep. and poet.), PI. %KTaStey Ep., instead of iKriSrn- 
 
 to reach, meet with, Aor. extxoy, Put. ffov. 
 
 KixVoi"'"! o'lisr forms not found in ku/je'm, rarely K^pw (Ep. and poet.), to 
 
 the Att. poets ; but Ep. Impf. iKlxa.- find, to reach, Aor. iRvpaa, (§ 223, 6), 
 
 yov, second Pers. ^kIx^'s (from and more seldom ixipiiira. Put. Kipira 
 
 KIXE-) ; second Aor. Subj. /cix"" ^""i ^^^ more seldom Kvpi^ira ; Perf. keki;- 
 
 Kixeia, Opt. Kix^i-rjy, Inf. Kixrim', pvKa. 
 
 Part. kixe(s and Mid. KiX'^iJ^yos ; Aor. Aayx'^''". '" partake, Ion. Put. Adjo^a: , 
 
 Mid. iKix^aaro. Ep. Aor. Subj. AeAiix" (§ 219, 7), 
 
 rioj (Ep.), to JO, only Pres. and Impf. Trans, to make partaker in the phrase 
 
 The Part. Ki^y is accented like itiy ; Stayovra. irvpds, to give the dead the 
 
 Aor. fiiTCKiaSroy (§ 1G2). , honor of fire, i. c. make him partaker 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
282 DIALECTS. [i 230 
 
 of; Peri AeAoyx" Ep., instead of MAO (Ep.), to strive for, Perf. with tha 
 
 fiK-nxt [Oa A., 304. \€\6yxS-<rt]. sense of the Pres., in Sing, /le/iova 
 
 AAZTMAI {= \a(ofim, to take), Epic (eorap. 7€7o>'o with rErAA),/ieji40Toy, 
 
 iKi(vTO. ii.4iiaiJ.ey, etc. (§ 228). 
 
 \a,u$dyai, to receive. Ion. x6,iv^ofia,i, \e\(i- fieipofiat (poet.J, to obtain, Ep. e/i/iope 
 p-qKa, \eKa.fJi/Mi, A.€\o^(paai, iKa/if^y, third Pers. Sing. Perf. (and II. a, 
 Xaimrios; also Dor. Ke\dPriKa, but 278), third Pers. Sing, second Aor. 
 AeAdrtuoi, \eA.a(f>aoi; in Dramatists Act. (Augment, § 219, 6); Perf. Pass. 
 \e\riiiiiiai; Ep. Aor. AeA-a^eVftcu (^ 219, ei/iapTcu, it is determined (§ 123, 4). 
 7). /teAu), commonly Impers. /i4\ei, it con- 
 
 Kav^iva, Ep. oftener A^S-w, to he hidden, cerns, I lay it to heart, Ep. Perf. jUs/jt;- 
 concealed; Ep. second Aor. Act. Ae, Part. |U€|Ur)\c6s ; Ep. Perf. Mid. |He'|H- 
 Subj. AeAiid'ai and Mid. XeXa^o/irii' pxe-rai and Plup. iJ.e/i,0\€TO instead of 
 (§ 219, 7); Perf. Mid. AeXaa-fiai; in ii.eii.-l)Kr]Tai, iii.eii-fi\T\ro, comp. /3Ai4(r- 
 Theoc. Xaa-d-rJiiey (= Ar)<r&?j'oi) in- km; yet these forms were more 
 stead of Aa^eir&ai ; inXiiSnii and properly considered as a Pres. and 
 ixK-l^a, to cause to forget, Ep. Aor. Impf. 
 
 ineKijcra ', iK\e\a.^oj/. /levowaM, fievolveov, § 222, I, A (2). 
 
 fiiiTKai (Ep. and poet.), Aor. eAdKov; faiKdo/iai, to bleat, "Ep.Teit. fiefirjica with 
 Ep. Perf. AfAij/ca (poet. AeAoKo and the sense of the Pres., lie/wLxma 
 iK\t\aKa even in Demos.) with the (§ 223, 13); Aor. yuaKiSt-; ifom the 
 sense of the Pres. ; Ep. Part. AcAij- Perf. the Impf. iiaeiaiKov is formed. 
 itds, AeAoKuTo (§ 223, 13) ; Fut. \atel\- /iittlpa, to stain, Ep. second Aor. /iioj/- 
 (ropMi; first Aor. poet. 4\dK7i<Ta, Ep. ^y (^ 227, B). 
 
 Aor. Mid. Ke\iicovTo (^ 219, 7). lilyvvfu, to mix, Ep. Aor. idxTO (§ 227, 
 
 AEXn (Ep.), to cause to lie down, lAe^a, B). 
 
 €Ae|ii//T)v, / &(!()? myself doum, I lay, I fivKao/iai, to roar, Ep. fie/ivica, Aor. 
 rested, Ep. Aor. i\4yiniii, etc. ( § 227,6). ^/ivKoy. 
 \ova, to wash, Ep. Aoe'm, Aoue'm, Impf. Na(iB, Ep. and poet., to rfwcS, first Aor. 
 4Koiiov, i\6iov; Aor. Inf AoEtrtriu, evacr<ra, I caused to dwell; Mid. with 
 Part. Koiatras ; second Aor. Act. Pass. Aor., to settle down : vivaro/Mu, 
 tAooc, third Pers. Sing. \6e Od. k airevaa-ffiii-iiv, ivia^v. 
 361, k6ov; Mid. Pres. Inf. AoiJeer&oj yciKe'm (Ep., poet., and Ion.), to quarrd, 
 and AoOirftai; Put. Mid. Koiffiroijuu; Put. z/eiKeVeo, Aor. Ivekeffo (§ 223, 
 Aor. Mid. Inf Koica-aaSrai; Part. 1). 
 
 \oe<ra-ifi.ei'os ; Perf. Mid. or Pass, vl^a, to wash, Pres. and Impf. ; the other 
 \4Koiificu. tenses are formed from vivra, which 
 
 Kia, to loose, Ep. second Aor. Mid. among the later writers came to be 
 Atiro, AtJi-To [§ 227, A (e)] ; Ep. Plup. used in the Pres. and Impf also; 
 Opt. AeAuTo (§ 224, 3). thus, Put. w'lf/w, Perf. Mid. or Pass. 
 
 Vlaiyo/j.cu, to rave {ixfialva, to make vhiupju, poet.; Aor. Pass, ii/if^y, 
 raving, also Aor. eti.r\va, Arist. ; doubt- Hippocr. 
 
 ful X. H. 3.4, 8) ; second Perf. iiefii)- yla-a-ofiai (Ep.), to go. Put. yiao/juu (the 
 va (Soph.), / am ravBig (Theoc. 10, form yeiiraoiuu is rejected). 
 31, iiendmifuu) ; the Put. is iMvoviitu '0AT550MAI (Ep.), Aor. miviriiiuiy, to 
 in Herod, {/iay-iicrofiai in the later be angry, oSvirdtuyos ; Fei{. oSiiSvfffua 
 writers). .1,-ith tlie sense of the Pres. (§ 219, 8). 
 
 fialo^ai ^(Ep.), to seek. Put. /ida-Ofua olSa, to know, ^ 228.. 
 
 {ivmda-a-eTai) ; Aor. ^fiaa-d/iriy. olofMi, to think; Ep. oiw, ota, ohfua, 
 
 liayMm, to learn, Fnt. in Theoc. fiaStsv- iiii^Tjv, ofoiTo ; Aor. Mid. iiaip.ny; 
 
 fiat (like iiaxovfi.ai). Aor. Pass. aUSniy, oicrdeis. 
 
 fidpyafiai (Ep.), to fight, only Pres. and iyo/iat (Ep. and Ion.), to blame, iuoaai, 
 Impf^hke ivyafuu, but Opt. frnpyoi- third Pers. PI. Syoyrai, Imp. 6yo<ro ; 
 H7IV, Od. A, 513. Impf wySiiTiy, Opt. oyol/nip, 6yoiTo ; 
 
 uaxo/xoi, to contend, Epic tuxeoyrai. Put. iySmiiai; Aor. iiyoadu-v and 
 ^axeiToi, imxeoiTo, imxeoivro, Part. ii'iio-aT);' ; Ep. oSyeaSte (comp. oSA(!/i- 
 imxeii/ieyos and A'»Xf"i'.«''os ! Ep. e;/os), II. «, 241, instead o( SyeirSti 
 Put. imxtifofuu and liax^a-o/iai; Aor. . and this instead of oroerd-* from 'ON- 
 iiiaxe<rdp.-riv. Ep. Aor. Mid. iKtoto. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 230.] LIST OF DIALECTIC VEUBS. 283 
 
 Spdia, to see, Ion. ipeu, Epic dp6ai, Impf. first Aor. ^irfptra (^ 223, 6) , second 
 
 Sptoy; Ep. second Pcrs. Sing. Pics. Aor. tTpa^oif{^ 223,11); Ep. second 
 
 Mid. Sprjai, third Pcrs. Sing. Irapf. Aor. Mid. Inf. irdp^cu (^ 227, B). 
 
 ipfiTo ; Ion. Perf. Sirwira. ireVo/iai, to flu, second Aor. iitTipmw, etc. 
 
 OPErNTMI, from wliicli Ep. hpcyvis, (5 223, 11). 
 
 stretching out ; ipeya,io stretch; Mid. irei^opuu (poet, instead of irvv^dm/iat), 
 
 to stretch, one's seljf, to reach after, Ep. Ep. second Aor. Mid. Opt. irsTri^oi- 
 
 Pcrf. Mid. opdpey/uu, third Pers. PI. to; Perf. Trencr/uu (§ 223, 14). 
 
 ipapixarai (§ 219, 8), Plup. third vctpyoy, ^e(j>i/ov, Ep. second Aor. Act. 
 
 Pcrs. PI. hpapixaro. of *ENn, to kill (§ 219, 7), Part. 7re>- 
 
 Ipmiu (poet.), to excite. Put. iptrv, Aor. vwv with irregular accentuation; Ep. 
 
 &paa (§ 233, 6); Ep.Perf. Intrans. Perf. Pass, ircfarcu, vefdaSrca ; Put. 
 
 opapa (§ 219, 8), Subj. opiipri, Plup. Perf. Topriiroiuu (comp. SeS^jo-o/um 
 
 opdpei and updpet ; Ep. Aor. Siwpev ; from SEScjuai). 
 
 Mid. ipvvimi, to rouse one's self, to stir, iHiyvvjiai, to fix, Ep. Aor. tt^kto, kotc- 
 
 Ep. Put. opthtu, Aor. ipif^ijn ; Ep. tttikto (4 227, B). 
 
 Aor. Mid. Sipro, etc. (§ 227, P,| ; Ep. jrUva/ioi, Eq. secondary foi-m of 7re\ofa, 
 
 Perf. opiipeTai, Subj. bpdipi]Tcu ('.. 219, to rfraio near, only Pres. and Impf. 
 
 8). iriixTTX-riixi, to fill, Ep. Aor. Mid. ttA^to, 
 
 iffippalvoiiai, to slhell. Ion. Ao). Mid. etc. [§ 227, A. (a)]. 
 
 ta<j>ptuiT0. irliTTa, tofiill, Ep. ireirre^is (§ 228). 
 
 ouTitii), to wound, Ep. Aor. ci/y/, etc. TriTviiM and Tr^TyTjjUi, Ep. secondary form 
 
 [^ 227, A (a)]. of ircTivpvij.i, to spread out, from 
 
 o<pel\a, to owe, be under oUigalu i.. ought, which come Impf. trirya instead of 
 
 must. Ion., poet, (except ir. (>iO dra- eVfTvo, and Part, iriryaj. 
 
 matic dialogues of Att. Toilers), and irXijo-ira, to strike, Ep. second Aor. Act. 
 
 in late prose 6tl>e\oy, -e;, -e, Ep. eireirKTjyoy, ireirKijyoy and iren\ijy6fi'tiv 
 
 ti(l>€Woy, i<j>e\Xoy, in iorim wliich (§219,7). 
 
 express a wish. irXiia (Ion.), to sail, Ep. second Aor. 
 
 ocjifWa (Ep.), to increase, only Pres., Act. eirAwy, etc. [§ 227, A (d)]. 
 
 litlpf., and Opt. Aor. o^/Wtiev, Od. iryea, to breathe, in Horn. Perf. Triwyviuu 
 
 ff, 334. (§ 223, Rem. 2), to 6e animated, intel- 
 
 n^AAw, to s7!at«, Ep. second Aor. Act. Ugent; second Aor. Act. Imp. &pm- 
 
 ainreTToKdy [^ 207, 7, and 219, 7) and yve, second Aor. Mid. &p.TryvTo [4 227, 
 
 second Aor. Mid. irikro (§ 227, B). A (e)] ; Aor. Pass. ainrviySni instead 
 irdcrxf, to suffer, Ep. Perf. Part, ireiro' of afiiryi^ (§ 223, 12). 
 
 ftu/p, as if from TteirtxAa ; Ep. Perf. ttt^o-itw, to crouch, shrink from fear, Aor. 
 
 ireTToo-S-e (§ 228, Rem.). 67rT7j|a; second Aor. KaraTrToKiiv, 
 
 iraTEO/nai (Ion.), to taste, to cat, Aor. Aeschyl. Eum. 247; Perf. iimixa, 
 
 iwiurdfiTiy; Perf. irtVair^ai. Part. Ep. ircTrrijoiir, Stos (4 223, 13); 
 
 TTtiftw, to persuade, second Aor. Act. Ep. second Aor. KOTOTTT^Tijy. [§ 227, 
 
 eTTiaoj', Aor. Mid. iTriSi6p.ftv, only poet. A (a)]. 
 
 in the Att. writers (TriftoB is a false Vaiyu, to sprinkle, regular Aor. i^jiaya ; 
 
 reading in Plat. Phaed. p. 117, a); Perf» Mid. or Pass, ef^afffiai. In 
 
 Ep. second Aor. Act. -iteiri^ov, Subj. Hom. ip^dSarai (§ 220, Rem. 2). 
 
 iTEiri&a), Opt. ireTrldoi/ii, Inf. ircTri&erj', ^4(01, see €pSa. 
 
 Part. ireTTtaii;/, Imp. ireViaE (4 219, 7) ; ^i7e'a> (Ep. and poet.), to shudder, Fut 
 
 second Aor. Mid. iiriSfSuvi't to tntst, pi-ffjo-a; Aor. i^piyr)aa; Perf. Ep 
 
 Opt. •jrejri'&oiTo ; from the second Aor. e^^lya. 
 
 come iriS^o-j), to 6e obedient, ireiriS^ira, SckJw, (Ti^m and irow (Epic), to sawe 
 
 «o 6e convinced, tti^o-os, obedient; on (= <rtifai) ; from ffo(i<u Put. crai^o-a, 
 
 tVeV/a/ieyandireVsiff-ai (see§ 228). Imp. Pres. Act. o-i^w [§ 222,1, A 
 
 T«Xofi», to draw near (Trag. ircActoio, (4)]; third Pers. Smg. Impf. Act. 
 
 irAoftoi), Fut.ircX'io-to, poet, sometimes cdou and iriiw instead of iiraoe ; Aor. 
 
 ■ir£\u; Ep. Aor. Pass. iireXdir^y, itijaaa; Put. Mid. ffotSffOAiaj, Aor. 
 
 poet. h'X. ;ir\A'>ni , Mid. Ep. eVx^/iT/i', Pass. 4ira<i^y; from ffaiw Part. <r^- 
 
 etc., Att. JirAa/iijj' [4 227, A (a)]; oyres and Impf. o-iico-Koy ; from <r6a 
 Eo.'Parf. ircirAii/ieVis, Att. TreirXd^uu. Subj. Pres. (r(Sp, o-dj/j, ff6a<rt. 
 tiidii (ivoot.), (o rfasiro^. Put. ireptra; ffeiia (poet.), (o ;)«( w wio/eni m«;(on 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
284 DIALECTS. [i 230 
 
 Mid. to haste, Ep. Aor. co-creua and <p£ldonai, to spare, 'Ep. second Aor. Mill 
 
 a-eva, l(rir^-Ajj.i]V and n-euofirji' (§ 223, veijuSoi^v": ifetjiiSea^ai (§ 219, 7) , 
 
 8); Perf. itravnai (§ 223, 14); Plup. from ipelSoi^ai cornos ircc/jiSVo/tia:. 
 
 iaffifi-nv ; second Aor. Mid. icraiinnriv, <p4p(>i, to carry, ipepre Ep. instead of 
 
 etc. U 227, A (e)]; Aor. Pass, itrcri- <l>4p€Te (§ 229); Ion. and Ep.^fonns 
 
 f&rji' Soph., i^ea-iSr-nv Horn. — On the are : Aor. fiveixa., iviiKM, etc., Tivexi' 
 
 Ep. o-eBrai, (ToCtoi, etc., see 5 229. ^rji' ; Perf. ivivtiyfiai ; Aor. Pass. 
 
 (rm'Sya/jai. <o scatter, Ep. secondary form iiveixSiriv; — Ep. second Aor. Imp. 
 
 of (r/££Sawu;<ai, only Pres. and Impf. olo-e, Inf. o'uri/jLev (§ 223, 10); first 
 
 (TTepe'a, to rob, first Aor. Inf. (r7€peffai Aor. oy^irai, Herod. 1, 157 (comp. 
 
 Ep. instead of a-Tfpjjcrat. 6, 66. avd'Caros instead of av&iffTos). 
 
 aruyea, to fear, to hate, Ep. second Aor. ^euyw, to fiee, Ep. Trecpvy/ievas, escapin 
 
 ea-rvyov; first Aor. eirru|o, Trans., to (§ 223, 14). 
 
 make fearful. (pSxit/a, to come lefore, anticipate, Epic 
 
 TArn, Epic second Aor. TeTa7£6y, fdiiievos [§ 227, A (a)]. 
 
 seizing, tb^dpai, to destroy. Ion. Fut. ^latp^apcofiai 
 
 TAAAQ, to endure, Ep. Aor. iriXaaa, instead of (|)ac(p<)<rO|iiai; Aor. 8ia(^,&6()- 
 
 Subj. TaXacra-m; second Aor. eTA.7)y o-oi (^ 223, 6). 
 
 (§ 191, 4); Perf. TeTAijica, riTXap-ev ifiSrivtn, to vanish, and Ep. ^afai, to con- 
 
 (§ 228), Put. TX^irO|ii(M. swmc, and sometiiKes to vanish, perish 
 
 Taviai (poet.), to stretch, Ep. Tanrcu (Ep. first Pers. long), Put. ipdiaa-. 
 
 (§229). Aor. e<pSria-a; Mid. to perish, FiU 
 
 rupicrcriii, to disturb, Ep. second Perf. il>Srtffoii.ai ; Perf. e^SrXpai ; Plnp. ^^fti 
 
 Tsrprjxa, I am disturbed. f^Wj Ep. Aor. i<p^ip.T}v, etc. [§ 227, 
 
 TEMii, to reach, overtake, Ep. Aor. eVeT- A (c)] ; Ep. Aor. Pass, third Pers. PI. 
 
 fwv (§ 219, 7). awecp^i^ev. 
 
 TepTTta, to delight, Ep. irap^hr^v, iT6.pirrtiv, <pt\iw, to love, Ep. Aor. i^plKap.tiv {<\ti 
 
 iTptimjif, Subj. first Pers. PI. Tpatreio- Xwrrat, <ln\at). 
 
 fx^v ; second Aor. Mid. 4rpaTr6^7]y and ^pd^ia, tc speak, Ep. Aor. TretppaSov 
 
 T€TapTr6p.-r\v (§ 219, 7). (§ 219, 7). 
 
 Tiix" (poet.), to make ready, to obtain, (pipai, to inearf, in prose, forms its tenses 
 
 Put. T6t/|(y ; Aor. eTeu|a, Perf. Ep. from tpvpixw, e. g. (pvpacrw, etc., Aor 
 
 Terevxtis, having obtained; Put. Mid. Pass. itpvpiSntv, Plat. Theaet. 147; c. 
 
 T6i5|o^oii; Aor. Mid. Tcii^aiTi^cu ; Perf. (but i^vpSfnv, Aesch. Ag. 714); yet 
 
 TcTvypiai (§ 223, 14), third Pers. PI. j?erf. ire'i/jupinct:, and in Aristoph. ire- 
 
 Ep. TeTetJxaTOi, Inf. Tervx^ai ; Plup. (pvpafxca ; Fut. Perf. Trei^iiptretr^oi 
 
 iTeriyiofv, third Pers. PI. Ep. irerei- Pind., Epic and poet. <j>ip<ra>, etc 
 
 Xaro; Aor. Pass, irix^v; Put. Perf. (§ 223, 6). 
 
 T6TeiJ|o/iai ; — Ep. second Aor. t6tu- </)iJ&j, to produce, Vcyf. iritpuKO., Ep. third 
 
 Keiv, rervKovTo, Tc-TuK^a-^ai (§ 219, 7). Pers. PI. Tretpitda-i, Part, ire^uwras, 
 
 TIEQ, .Ep. Perf. Act. tctitjius, -iJtos, Tre<pvma (§ 223, 13); Impf. Ep. eVf- 
 
 anxious, and Perf. Mid. /am. aiixious, ^vkov. 
 
 second Pers. Dual TeTiTidSrov, Part. Xi^o/iaL (Yi\>.), to retreat, yield, Aor. Mii. 
 
 T6TirjjueVos. . . KeKtidavTO (§ 219, 7); Aor. Act. KeKa- 
 
 Ttvpvij,at, Ep. secondary form of Tivoiuu, Sop and Put. KexaSiitra, Trans., to de- 
 
 to punish; in Att. poetry with one prive of, rob. 
 
 V, rivvpiai {§ 185). X^-'^P^t ^ rejoice, Ep. Put. K^xo^ffQ), 
 
 Tix7)ya, Ep. secondary form of 'r4p.vai, Kexapi]aoixa.i ; first Aor. Mid. x^poTo ; 
 
 to cut, first Aor. rfa'i^as ; Aor. Pass. second Aor. Kex'ip'"''''o, Kex"?"'"™ 
 
 third Pers. PI. T/iciyei'. (§ 219, 7); Kex^p-qiis (§ 223, 13)- 
 
 Tpe'fw, to nourish, Ep. second Aor. Perf. Kexapp-ivos, Eur.; Verb. Adj 
 
 irpa(pov, I nourished, Perf. Terpocpa, x^P'rt^s. 
 
 Intrans.; Aor. Pass, irpdipriv, third X'"'5a"'M (Ep.), to hold, to contain, Aor 
 
 Pers. PI. rpd^fv. exaSoc ; Perf. with the sense of the 
 
 Sa/yti), to s/iow, Ep. tpaeivav. enlightening ; Pres. KEXai'Sa; Fut. xe^o'oA"" (comp 
 
 Ep. Aor. Pass. ^(^aayaT))/; Perf. Mid. eiroAov, ■wdcropLai). 
 
 or Pass. Tricpmrpiai, thij-d Pers. Sing, xf'™! to pour out, Ep., Put. xf"'" ; Aor 
 
 T4(t>avTm ■. Fut. TrEiJi^o-o/iai ; second EX^ua; second Aor. Mid. x^to, xi^Mf 
 
 Aor. (piveffKcv, II. \, 64. yos [§ 227, A (e>l. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i S31.] FORMATION OF WORDS. 285 
 
 SECTION III. 
 FORMATION OF WORDS. 
 
 {231. Primitive words. — Stems. — Derivatives. 
 
 1. Words are formed, (a) by derivation, and (b) by composition, in accord- 
 ance with certain laws. 
 
 2. Those words, from which other words are der'ved, but which are them- 
 selves underived, are called primitives (vocabula pnmitiva). Primitive words 
 are either verbs (which constitute the greater part), substantives, adjectives, or 
 pronouns. A primitive has two parts, the root and the inflection-ending, e. g. 
 Tpecp-Wf ypd<p-u, ^4p-te, K4y-co, Kl^-os ; KciK-is ; ifl-e, 
 
 3. The roots, i. e. the forms which remain, after the rejection of the inflection- 
 endings, are all monosyllabic. Still, the roots do not always appear pure in 
 the primitives, but often with a strengthened form, e.g. SAk v-a, iK-vi-ojuu, 
 aii^-dv-u, Tu(7 )x-ai'-(w, aK-iffK~ofiai, iri-irpii-trKw. Comp. §§ 139, and 157, 1 
 Yet these strengthened forms extend only to the Pres. and Impf. 
 
 4. Words which are derived (vocabula derivata) from primitive words, are : — 
 
 (a) Either Stems, i. e. such words as are formed from primitives by merely 
 assuming another inflection-ending, which is without any special signification. 
 To these indefinite endings belong several of the third Dec, e. g. the gender- 
 sign s [S yi'i't h a^, 7) /3^|, Ti irriil, ^ vav-s, i •}] fiov-s, 6 ^ Trar-s, instead of ttoTS-j; 
 in many words the s is omitted, see § 53, 1) ; the endings -is {ri aTrdy-ts, want, 
 T] i\Tr-ls), and -us (4 (rrix-'^s, V Icrx-is) ; also the endings of the first and sec- 
 ond declensions, e. g. -tj, -o, -or, -on (vlK-ri, Kir^, piC-a, ttKovt-os, via-os, p6S-ov) ; 
 finally, several adjective-endings, e. g. -oj, -17, -ov {(pi\-os, -rj, -ov), -is, -era, -i 
 {y\vK-isj -eta, -u), etc. ; 
 
 (b) or Derivatives, i. e. such words as are foi-med either from primitives, 
 or I'rom stems, by assuming a special derivation-syllable with a special ' sig- 
 nification, e. g. xi»"'-°-''>y i" ™at« golden, to gild ; fiij-rup, orator ; ypaip-iKSs, skillea 
 'n painting. 
 
 5. The root is often lengthened in deriiition (§ 16,- 3), c. g. A-^ft-ij (lirom 
 \S£>-eiv), xhv (from xa''-e?;') ; or it takes the variable vowel (§ 16, 6), e.g. rpiip- 
 a, Tpo<p-i], Tpo<p-6s, Tpi(p-iiws, Tpaf-ep6s. A strengthening consonant (§§ 139, 
 1, and 157, seq.) may also be added; or the final consonant A be doubled, e. g. 
 KiKKos from Ka\6s; some stems also take a reduplication, e. g. oTr-air-^, ^S-^Mi 
 iy-ay-os, Si-a-v<p-os (from 2E*-n, comp. ffo<p-6s). Other changes also may be 
 laade in the root, as has been shown in § 16. 
 
 6. The change of e into o (seldom into a) and of ei into 01 (§ 16, 6) reqcirea 
 
 > By comparing the examples under (a) and (b), it will be seen that th« 
 terminations of the former are not signijicant, while those of the latter are. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
286 FORMATION OP WORDS. [^ 232 
 
 special attention. It oceui-s, (a) in Oxytones of the first Dec. in ^ and i of 
 more than one syllable, e. g. rpo^-^, nourishment (from rpeV-u) ; fiocWj, a remain, 
 ing (from p.h-a) ; <pop-i., a carrying (from ^ep-co) ; oA.oi(f-^, saZra (from a\e(^ 
 «,); — (b) in dissyllabic Barytones of the second Dec, which denote what ia 
 done, or the result of an action, e. g. x6yas, word (from x4j-oi) ; <p6v-05, murder 
 (from *EN-Q, comp. fire(j>yov) ; yoiios, a law (from veju-oj) ; — (c) in dissyllabic 
 Oxytones of the second Dec. in -ids, and in dissyllabic oxytone adjectives of the 
 second Dec. in -6s, which, for the most part, denote an active object and often have 
 a substantive meaning, e. g. ttKox-i^os, plait of hair (from ttKck-u) ; ittoK-iiSs, 
 garment (from o-teAA-m); irofiv-os, attendant {from ire/xir-w); tro(p-6s, wise {{mm. 
 2E*-n, sapio); Tpo<j)-is, nourishing, nourisher (from Tpe(fi-w) ; — (d) in monosyl- 
 labic substantives of the third Dec, e. g. <l>\6^, flame (from <t>\4y-a) ; Sop|, 
 untefope (from SepK-o/uoi) ; — (e) in oxytose substantives in -eiis and adjectives 
 in -ds, which, however, have sometimes a substantive sense, e. g. Tpo(p-iis, nour- 
 isher (from Tp4cl>-a) ; airop-ds, scattered (from o-Trep-Eiv) ; \oy-ds, chosen (from 
 XeV") ; Spo^tt-as, running (from APEM-Q, comp. Spa/i-eiv) ; — (f ) in all derivatives 
 of the forms mentioned, e. g. in substantives in -afios, adjectives in -i/ws, vSrbs 
 in -do), -eu, -6(a, -evw, -iC^, e. g. irxSK-a/jios; rpitp-tfios ] ip^ov-4u (from (^^6y-os), 
 Su/i-iica (from SSfi-os, and this from Sefi-a), etc. 
 
 Eemakk. The cliange of e into a (comp. ^ 16, 6) is found only in a few old 
 poetic derivatives, e. g. Tpa<p-ep6s. 
 
 Rem. 2. Words derived from verbs are called verbals; those derived from 
 substantives or adjectives, denominatives. 
 
 A. Debivation. 
 
 k 232. I. Verbs. 
 
 1. All derivative verbs end in -ia, -da, -Im, -6a, -ia, -eia, -i(a, -ff», 
 6Ca, -iC"', -alya, -iva, -alpa, -fipa. All these verbs must be considered 
 as denominatives ; for though the stem-snbstantive for several verbs of this 
 kind is not in use. yet the analogy of the other verbs requires that a substan- 
 tive should be assumed as the stem of these also. Many of these derivative 
 verbs, especially many in -4a and -ia, supply the place of obsolete primitives, 
 e. g. <t)i\ea, Tifida. — On the formation and signification of derivative verbs the 
 following points are to be noted : — 
 
 (a) Verbs in - ci co and - a (a, which are mostly derived from substantives of 
 the first Dec, and those in -i(a which are derived from substantives and 
 adjectives of all declensions, are partly transitive, partly intransitive, since 
 they denote either a condition or the exercise cf agency or activity, e. g. roX/juia, 
 to be bold, from. tiJa^k, boldness; X"^^'', to be angry, {torn xoXii,ga]l; yoia,to 
 weep, from y6os ; SixdCa, to judge, from Sinn ; iXiriCa, to hope, from iXrls ; SplCa, 
 U> limit, from '6pos: ahlCa, to beg, from atrris, beggar; sometimes those in -in 
 denote fulness, abundance, e. g. xoXi^m, to be full of bile, have much bile. — Verbs 
 in-dCa and -ICa formed from proper names, express the eflfcrt to resemble 
 singW individuals or wliolo nations, in custom, nature, language, sentimeni 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{ 233.] DERIVATION OF VERBS AND SUBSTANTIVES. 287 
 
 Such verbs are called Imitative verbs, e. g. SapiiC", to be a Dorian, i. e. to speak 
 or thijik as a Dorian, Aaptevs ; k\Kiivi^a, to personate the custom or language of a 
 Greek, to be a Greek in custom, etc. ; firiSiCii, to be a Made in sentiment. 
 
 Remakk 1. Verbs in -r^u often signify <o make something into that which 
 tl;e root denotes. See (c). 
 
 Rem. 2. Verbs in -rffw and -v^a are very rare, e. g. apfi6Ca, toft.; ifmi^a, to 
 creep. — By the ending -i^a also, verbs are formed, which denote the repetition 
 or strengthening of the idea expressed by the simple verb ; these are called 
 Frequentative and Intensive verbs, e. g. ptirTiiCa, to throw to and fro, jacto, from 
 ^iirTa,jacio; aTevi(u>,to sigh much and deeply, from ariva, to sigh ; eiKd^a, properly, 
 to liken again and again, to compare on all sides ; hence to irifer, conjecture. 
 
 (b) Verbs in -4a and -da are derived from substantives and adjectives of 
 all declensions, and commonly express the intransitive idea of the primitive, for 
 the most part, the being in a condition, or the exercise of agency, the practising of 
 that which is signified by the primitive ; bnt they are sometimes transitive also. 
 When the stem ends in -a, which is the case, c. g. in adjectives in -ijy, -«, the 
 ei is omitted, and when it ends in -ev, the €u is omitted before the ending -eia, 
 K. g. <j>i\ea, to be a friend, to love, from iptKos, arvx^a, to be unfortunate, from 
 OTUX^j(stem liTvxes), fiSaifwviU, to be prosperous, fioia eiSaifjiav (stem evSai/ioi'), 
 hyopeva, to speak in public, from ayopd, marJcet, Koafj-ea, to adorn, from K^fjuis, 
 BariKtia, to be a king, from fia!ri\eis. 
 
 (c) Verbs in -6 a, which are mostly derived from substantives and adjectives 
 of thfe second Dec, those in -atva, which are commonly derived from adjec- 
 tives, more rarely from substantives, and those in -iya, from adjectives only, 
 generally denote the making or transforming something into that which the primitive 
 word lignifies; in like manner several in -l^a, see Rem. 1, c. g. XP""'^'", '" 
 make golden, to gild, from xpv^^'i Sri\6a, to make evident, from STJ\os,'ayviiai, to 
 make, pure, from ayvSs, itA-oi/t/^w, to make rich, to enrich, from irAoDros, Kot\alya, 
 to make hollow, from koTKos, \evKcilva, to make white, from \cvk6s, fiapiva, to 
 burden, from fiapis. 
 
 Rem. 3. From the Fat. of several verbs, are formed verbs in -a da, which 
 denote a desire for that which the primitive word signifies; these are called 
 Desiderative verbs, c. g. ye\t^eia, to desire to laugh, from ye\da, to laugh, iro\e 
 foia^ela, to desire to engage in war, from iroAe/iffai, vapaSaffda, to be inclined to sur- 
 render. There are also other Desideratives in -ia and -taa, e. g. Sravarda, to 
 wish to die, yuo&TjTufw, to wish to become a disciple. 
 
 Rem. 4. Some verbs in -a-Ka have an inceptive sense (beginning to be), and are 
 called Inceptive or Inchoative verbs, e. g. yitpiaKu, to begin to be old, to grow old; 
 ycv€ti(rKa, to begin to have a beard ; Tj^aaKu, pubesco. 
 
 § 233. II. Substantives. 
 
 Substantives are derived: — 
 1 From verbs and substantives, and express — 
 u. A concrete idea, i. e. the idea of an active person (concrete nouns) : 
 (a) With the endings -eis (Gen. -4us) for the Masc, -eio or -iffaa for tho 
 Fem.; -tjjs [-crris, -6t7Is, -it-ns, -drris] (Gen. -ou) (mostly Paroxytones), -riip 
 and -rap (Paroxytones) for the Masc^, -roia (Proparoxytones), -rpti, -Tir, 
 
 13 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
288 FORMATION OF WORDS. [{ 233. 
 
 and -IS (Gen. -iSoj), -reipa (Propaa:oxytone) for the Fem. ; -wy for the Masc, 
 -an/o for the Tern.; -bs for the Masc, -ais and -aivri for the Fem., e.g. 
 Uptis, priest, Fem. iepeia, from Upis ; avXrfrifs and -^prjiute-plaj/er, Fem. ouA^- 
 Tpia, aij\r]Tpis, from avK^u ; auT-fjpt deliverer^ auretpa, from (Tt^^ ; ffoA/rijj, 
 citizen, iroATris, from ttiJais ; p-h'rup, orator, from 'PE-n ; atptijriar, seraant, fttipii- 
 iroiva, from Stipa^ ; olKerris, a slave, from oTkos ; Siiix6ni]s, one of the people, from 
 S^jtios ; bn\irris, a hoplite, from (jTrAoy ; ffTpart^Tijs, a soldier, from ffrpcnid. 
 
 ($) With the ending -<ij (Gen. -ov), seldom, and only from verbs with the 
 variable vowel [§ 231, 6 (o)], e. g. iroiiirds, attendant, from ireynjra ; i i/ rpofos, 
 nourisJier, nurse, from rp^^u ; apayyis, an ally, from ap^ycc. 
 
 b. They express the abstract idea of action, i. e. action or energy apart from 
 the person who manifests it. These are abstract nouns : — 
 
 (a) From verbs : 
 
 (a) with the endings -a-is (Gen. -ireots) and (more seldom) -ala, substantivei 
 which denote the transitive or active idea of the verb, e. g. »pS|is, actio, an actings 
 from irp^TTu ; TToijiffis, a Tnaking, from iroUu ; SoKifiaffia, a proving, from SoKiiidCa ', 
 
 (3) with the ending -fi6s (Gen. -ov), such as denote the intransitive idea of 
 the verb, e. g. oSvpii6s, weeping, from oSipo/ai ; 
 
 (7) with the ending -;ua, such as denote the effect or result of the transitive 
 action of the verb, e. g. irpayfia, something done, fivTJfia, monumentum, iroirjfia,^ the 
 thing made or done ; 
 
 (8) with the endings -/trj, -rj, -a (all for the most part Oxytoues), and (from 
 verbs in -eiu), -ela, such as denote sometimes a transitive relation, and some 
 times the effect of that relation, e. g. Top.'li, a cutting, from T€/iyw ; aoiS^, song, 
 from aeiSa, :pAopd, destruction; iraiSfi'ct, education; 
 
 (e) with the endings -os (Gen. -ou), -tos (Gen. -tou) and -os (Gen. -ous) 
 such as denote, generally, an intransitive relation, also a transitive, and partly 
 the effect of the action of the verb, e. g. \iyos, word, from \4yu ; Kaicvrds, 
 lamentation ; rh ktjSos, care. 
 
 (b) From adjectives (and substantives, which are sometimes used in an 
 attributive sense) : — 
 
 (a) with the endings -Id, from adjectives in -os, and some in the third Dec., 
 c. g. a'a<j>ia, wisdom (from (rs(f><!s) ; iiiSai/iofla, happiness (from eiiSaifiuv, (Jen. 
 -ov-os) ; 
 
 (;8) -iS. (Proparoxytones) from adjectives in -tjs and -our, whose stem ends in 
 6 and o, with which the 1 of the ending coalesces and forms ei and 01 (thus -era, 
 -01a), e. g. SA^acia, truth (from a\ri^s, Gen. -4-os), efoom, benevolence (from 
 i^vo-os, e^vous) ; 
 
 (7) -a-iv-n mostly from adjectives in -ui> (Gen. -ovos) and -or, e. g. o-io^po- 
 airq, modesty (from a-(i(fipav. Gen. -ov-os) ; SiKaw-ciirit, justice (from SIkcuos) ; 
 
 (S) -Trjs, Gen. -TijTos (commonly Paroxytones) from adjectives in -os and 
 
 ' Nouns derived from the first Pers. Perf Pass, denote the result of the action 
 of the verb, e. g. (eKprjuai), eSpi/ta, the thing found, the discovery ; those from tho 
 second Pers., the abstract act, e. g. (cBpijo-ai), cSpetrts, the act of finding; those 
 from tho third Pers., the agent or doer, e. g. {eSprirat), euper-lis, the discoverer. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
233.] DERIVATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. 289 
 
 -US, c. g. I(r6nis, Gen. -o'tt;toj, equalit!/ (from ifo-os) ; iroxiiriys, tfiiclcness (from 
 7rax>!s) ; 
 
 (<) -oj, Gen. -SOS = -ous, from adjectiyes in -us and -ijs, and sucli as havo 
 the forms of comparison in -taf and -urros, o. g. ti^xos, to, Gen. toxous, swift- 
 ness (from ToxiJs), if-sSSos, r6. Gen. -ovs, falsehood (from ifiEuSiJs), a?(rxos, t(J, 
 baseness (from alirxpis, aiVxW) ; 
 
 (0 -<^J. -i^Sos (only in abstract numeral substantives) e. g. •% jno^iis, MnsV?/; 
 Svds, duality ; rpUs, a triad. 
 
 Eemaek 1. In abstracts in tIo, which express both a transitive and intran- 
 sitive relation, from compounds in -tos and -ttjj (Gen. -ou), the t is commonly 
 changed into a, e. g. i&KoS^iTia and -<ria {aSr\o^irris), a&amala (a^imTos), am- 
 Srapa-ia, o|u^\Ei|(Ja, etc. So also with adjectives in -ws, e. g. MiA^'os (M/Atjtos), 
 ifiavffios {ivtavrds). Comp. §§ 17, 6, and 234, Rem. 2. 
 
 Bem. 2. The older Attic poetry sometimes makes the a long in the endings 
 ■eia and -oio, e. g. ai/aiStid, irpomta. 
 
 2. From substantives alone, the following -lasses denoting tlie names of 
 persons and things, are derived : — 
 
 (a) Gentile nouns, i. c. the names of persons derived from their country, in 
 -eis (Fem. -is, -iSos), -h-ris (Fem. -ms), -dTrjs (Fem. -Stis), -ijtijs, -i^tj/s, e. g. 
 Aaiptiis {a Dorian, one from Doris), Aapls, Su^Sa/j^TTjs, -Ttis, 2irapTiST)js, 'Aiyiv^- 
 Tj)s, 'Hir6ipi5T7)S. Comp. § 234, 3 (g), etc. 
 
 (b) Patronymics, 1. e. the names of persons derived from their ancestors, with 
 the endings -lSr]s (Fem. -is. Gen. -fSos) ; also -ioStjs' ; but substantives of the 
 first Dec. in -rjs and -as, and many of the second and third Dec. whose stem 
 ends in i, and some others, have -dSris (Fem. -ds, Gen. -iSos) ; these endings are 
 appended to the stem, and where the stem ends in e, this € and i of the ending 
 -iSjjs combine and form a diphthong, as in IlijAE/Brjs, e. g. npiafi-tS-ns, Fem. Xlpiafi-is 
 from Tlplajx-os, UriXilSris from TiiiXcis, Gen, • IIijAe-eoj, KeKpoiriSris from KsKpmji, 
 Gen. -oTT-os, IlayS-OiSijs from lldi'&oos, -ovs ; TeAa/iwy-iaSijs from T€\a^uiii, hived- 
 tris from Ai;'eas, ^ffTidtris, Fem. ®EiTTL-ds from Qea-rios, 
 
 (c) Diminutives (frequently with the accompanying idea of contempt) with 
 the endings -lov which is the most usual, -Spioj- [-So-ioj/] (seldom) and some 
 few with the endings -ii\ A. lov, -vKKls, -ibpiov, -i<piov (-iipiop) (which 
 
 belong mostly to the language of the common people and to comedy) ; Is 
 
 (Gen. -iSos and -TSos), -tSiov (fonned from -is); laKos, -laKii (-iaKiop, 
 
 iyvTi, -ixviov) ; 1 S c iJ s (but only of the young of animals), e. g. jinpiKwv, youth, 
 
 from juer/Jo|j -o/c-os, iratS-toy, a little child, from irais, trcuS-Ss ; — tratS-dpiov ; -dtriov 
 instead of -dpioy only in Kopdiriov (from /nfpo, young woman) on account of the 
 Breceding p ; fieipax-iWiov, aKavSr-vWis from &Kav^a, thorn, vri<r-vSpioy, islet ; 
 ^u$-^iov, little animal ; XP^^~°^^'^^ from xp^^^^ j — trivax-is, little tablet, from 
 •rfcof; afia^ls, little wagon; vria'-tSiov, islet, from i/7J<ros; Kpekhiov (instead of 
 •tfSioy) from Kp4as,.oiKTStoy (instead of otKt-iSioy) from otKla ; — v^avi-VKos, veavi- 
 TKri from veavlas; -Io'kiov seldom, e. g. KoTvTdaiaav from kotuAij; -/x''1i 
 
 ■' This form is used, when the syllable preceding the Patronj'mic ending is 
 long, otherwise the word would not be adapted to hexameter verse, since one 
 short sylhible woukl stand between two long syllables ; thus, Ylri\T)tSfjs. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
290 FORMATION OP WORDS. [i 234 
 
 ■(xvoy only iii iroAfx^I, mKix'"ov from irJXis, KvXixPri, Kii\txvioti from KiiAiJ; 
 — Ak7-i56i)j, youn^ fei)-«, from AaydJj ; o6T-i5eiJy, yom^r eagle, from 4eto'j. 
 
 (d) Designations of place, with the endings -lov (in connection with the 
 preceding vowels -oioy, -eioy, -^oy) and -eioj', which denote the abode of the 
 person designated by the primitire word, or a place consecrated to a divinity 
 or hero ; -dv (Gen. -urns), seldom -eiii', and -ayia, which denote the residence 
 of persons or a place filled with plants, e. g. ipyaffT-fip-iov, workshop, from 4pyair 
 rijp, and so others in -r-lipwv from -r-fip or -ttjs ; sometimes also tliis ending is 
 used with reference to vessels, e. g. irorfipioy, drinking vessel; Rovpiiov, barber't 
 shop, from xovpeis, -e'-as (several in -loy [-eioy] have another signification, e. g. 
 Tpocj>e7oyf wages of a nurse, from rpotpeis) ; ®7jaeioy from ©jjtreus, -e-ws, 'A^tiyaioy, 
 Movtritoy; — aySptiy and yvycuKdy, apartments for men and women; miriv, stablt 
 for horses ; poBdy and poZwyiS., bed of roses ; •jrcpiiTTepedy and irepiffTcpdy, dove- 
 cote. 
 
 (e) Substantives which denote an instrument or a means of accomplishing 
 some object, with the endings -rpoy and -rpa, e. g. ^vtrrpa, curry-comb ; S.Sac- 
 rpoy, tuition-money; \ovTpoy, water for washing; Aon-poy, bath; also to designate 
 place, e. g. dpx'fl<rTpa, dancing-room, instead of the ending -riipioy. 
 
 5 234. III. Adjectives. 
 
 1. From verbs are derived adjectives with the following endings: — 
 
 (a) With the ending -os, which is annexed to the stem of the verb. These 
 adjectives express the transitive, intransitive, or passive idea of the verb from 
 which they are derived, e. g. <l>ay6s, brilliant, from (paiyw ; \oir6s, the remainder , 
 the verb-stem of many is not in use, e. g. KaK6s. 
 
 (b) With the endings -ik6s, -ft, -6y, and -i/ios, -oy, -t/ios, -i), -ay ol 
 -irilios, -oy, which denote dbility, fitness, aptness. Of these, those in -ikiJs have 
 a transitive signification, those in -i/ios both a transitive and passive, c. g. 
 ypa^tKSs, fit or able to paint ; rpiip-tfios, nutritive ; Id-trifios, cwable. 
 
 (c) A few with the ending -y6s, -ii, -6v with an intransitive or passive 
 signification, e. g. Sei-yiis, /riyi^/uZ (AEIfl), <reii-y6s, honored, honorable {trefio/uu), 
 (TTvy-ySs, hated, hateful (STTm), Tro^eiy6s (iro&e'to), desired. 
 
 (d) A few with the ending -A.(fs with a transitive signification, -aXifi, -j}, 
 -6y and (from verbs in -da) -riK6s, -■ti, -6y with a transitive and intransitive 
 signification, b. g. Sei-A.(fr, timid; e/cTray-Aos (instead of iicwKay\6s from ^mrA^o" 
 irai), frightful; ipeiS-a\6s, sparing; inyri\6s, silent; i.iraTr\\6s, deceitful. 
 
 (e) With the ending -S.p6s, -6., -6v (from verbs in -aw and -afi/w) with an 
 intransitive signification, e. g. xaXopiSj, slack ; iuap6s, stained; also in f&oyepSs, 
 tnvious ; yoffy)p6s, diseased; oiKrpSsf pitiable. 
 
 (f) With the ending -/ioij/, -/loy (Gen. -oyos) with an intransitive significa- 
 tion, e. g. ii.yli-ii.wy, mindful, memor (MNAn), yirli/uov, intelligent {yoeai). 
 
 (g) With the ending -tj j, -es (Gen. -eas), e. g. TrA^pijj, plenus. 
 
 (h) With the ending -ds (Gen. -dSos) with a transitive, intransitive, or pas> 
 Bive signification, c, g. fop-ds, bearing {(l>4pu) ; Spofidi, running (APEMQ) ; \oyis, 
 chosen (A^yco). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^e-fio6\ev-Tai 
 
 /30U\€U-T(fj,' -TeOJ 
 
 TC-T^/iTj-rat 
 
 Ti/A7J-T(fs 
 
 ire-^tipCi'Tai 
 
 ^wpd-reos 
 
 irf-^lKrj-Tai 
 
 4)iA?;-T^5 
 
 K^-xv-rai 
 
 Xu-T<Js 
 
 TT^-TTA-eK-Tat 
 
 ■7r\eK-T(f5, -T€OS 
 
 \e-\€/c-Tai 
 
 Ae/c-Tor 
 
 ^-(TTdK-Tat 
 
 (TTaA-Teos 
 
 Te-TO-TOl 
 
 Ta-reos 
 
 Se-Bo-TOt 
 
 Bo-rSs, -reos. 
 
 * 234.] DEB.IVATION OF ADJECTIVES. 291 
 
 (i) "With the endings ■t6s, -t^, -r6v, and -reos, -rea, - t €0 v (verbal 
 adjectives) ; those in -t6s denote eitlier a completed action like the Perf. Pass. 
 Part., e. g. \eK-T6s (from \4yw), dictus; or the idea of possibility = English 
 termination -ble, which is their usual signification, e. g. ipa-T6s, capable of being 
 teen, visible. In their formation, most of these follow either an existing or an 
 assumed Perf. Pass., e. g. 
 
 Tifld-tO 
 
 tpwpd-Qi 
 
 •KKiK-03 
 
 \4y-ta 
 frT4\-\-co 
 rely-a (TA-n) 
 Sl-Sa-iu (AO-n) 
 
 Remake 1. Very many verbal adjectives, however, follow the analogy of 
 other forms of the verb, not according to any definite rule, but take precisely 
 such a form as suited the ear of the Greeks. Thus, for example, a considerable 
 number followed the form of the first Aor. Pass., e. g. aipe-ai, ^pk-d-nv, alpe-ris 
 7rai-fi, i-vai-a-dTiv, Trnv-ir-ris, -t4os; xP<^-of"^^> i-xp^l-<r-^v, xptf-a-Tis, -Teas 
 irrpetp-to, 4-ffTp4<p-Srr]Vf (TTpeir-TtJs ; Tpeir-o), i-Tp4(p-^y, rpex-^eos ; Tp4<p-w, 4-^p4(p' 
 yitv, &peir-Te'or; 'l-ffTti-iu, iiTT&Srrii', (rro-Tiii, -reos; iircuvi-ai, lirriiie-Sniv, iiraivt- 
 T^fs; — some the form of the second Aor. Act., e. g. ex"> e-irxc-Toy, ax'i-''<>^ 
 xtpea, e'i\e-Tov, iKi-T6s ; Iwh i-rov (commonly eXTov), iup-f-Teos, iv-e-rSs ; tI^ 
 ■^i, i-he-Tov, &E-T^J, -t4os; — some the foi-m of the Pres. Act., e. g. /ie'cai, fieV 
 erov, iieve-T6s, -teos; eliu, 1-tov, i-t4os; so air-edxe-roj from 'ETXE-TON {eSxo 
 /Ml); Sma-rds (Sfoa/ioi) ; ipTtjil, ^o-Toy, i^o-rdj. 
 
 2. Adjectives are formed from substantives and adjectives : — 
 
 By the ending -los (in connection with the preceding vowel of the stem 
 -aias, -etos, -oios, -ifos, -mos) and -ik6s (which, when v precedes, becomes -k6} 
 and when i, often -ok((s). These adjectives have a very great variety of mean 
 ino-s. TJiey frequently indicate the mode or manner of the adjective idea, 
 often also in a very general manner, that which proceeds from an object and is 
 connected with it or related to it, e. g. oupac-ioi, heavenly, pertaining to heaven ; 
 Ka^ip-ios, cleanhj (but KaS>ap6s, clean) ; 4\evSr4ptos, frank, liberal, liberalis (bat 
 ^AeiJS-epos, liber) ; ayopatos, belonging to the marJcet-place {ayopd) ; Si4peios, summer- 
 like {^4pos, -e-os), cuSoTor (oiSaj, -6-os), iipifos and iipaos; Tpmiix^ws ; Sov\Mis; 
 ^\vk6s, iiaviaKis. 
 
 Rem. 2. In some words the ending -tuos also -laios occurs, e. g. xcperoios, 
 TKOToios and (Tkotuuos. In several words the ending -aios (§ 17, 6) is used in- 
 stead of -T-ioj, e. g.'tpiKoT'liffios (c()iA<iT7)s, -ijToj), eKouiTios {4k^v, -Si/tos). 
 
 3. Adjectives are formed from substantives alone : — 
 
 (a) With the ending -eioi (mostly Paroxytones), which are formed from 
 B-ords denoting persons, especially from proper names; but in respect to then 
 signification they are like adjectives in -ixis, e. g. avSpelos, behnging to a man. 
 manly, yvyatxeios, at/^ptiveios, 'O/t'tipeios. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
292 FORMATION OF WORDS. [i 2S3. 
 
 (b) With the endings -eos = -oSs and -Ivos, which denote the materiu.1 
 of which anything is made, like the English ending -en, c. g. xp^ff-ios = XP"- 
 <rods, golden ; x<^iVKeoy = x"'*-'"'''', hrazen ; JuX-iros, wooden ; dKVTivos, made of 
 leather, leathern. 
 
 (c) With the ending -'iv6s (seldom -ti>6s), derived from siibstantiyes. These 
 express certain relations of time ; sometimes, also, an abundance or fulness, 
 c. g. ecrirep-tvis, vespertinus ; x^^'^'^^^^t hesternus ; dpeiv6st mountainous {opoSf Gen. 
 -6-oy). 
 
 (J) With the endings -eif, Gen. -evros (always preceded by a vowel, ij, 
 when the substantive from which the Adj. is formed, is of the first Dec, and o, 
 when it is the first or second); -pos, -ipis, -i)p6s, -dAe'os, which denote 
 fulness or abundance, e. g. uA^-ets, woody ; irupo-eiSf fiery ; tutrX'P^^t ^^ > ''os- 
 c/jffs, and yo(T-7ip6s, unhealthy ; ^«^-a\eos, strong. Exceptions to those in -eis, 
 are SeuSp^ets from SevSpoi^j x^P^^^^ from x^P^^' 
 
 (e) With the ending -■liptos, which have the transitive sense of verbal sub- 
 stantives in -np and -rjs, e. g. o-ar^pios, preserving, that preserves. 
 
 (f) With the ending - (i 5 rj s, Neut. -uSes (formed from -o-ei5^s from elSos, 
 form, gualiiy). These adjectives denote a, quality or resemblance, but often 
 also a fulness or abundance, e.g. <j)\oyMr]s, resembling flame, fiery ; iroiSSris, 
 abounding in grass, grassy. 
 
 (g) With the endings -los {Fem. -id), -k6s, -ik6s (ITom. -k^, -ik^), -tjj/iJs 
 (Fem. -itvi)), and when i or p precedes, -avis (Fem. -avii), -Tvos (Fem. -Ini) ; 
 these are Gentile adjectives, which are also frequently used as substantives, 
 particularly those in -nvis, -av6s, -7vos, which are formed only from names 
 of cities and countries out of Greece, e. g. Kopiv^-ios, -ia, 'AArji/aias, -ala, X!os 
 (instead of -fws from X(os), 'ApyeTos {{rom''Ap-yos,-e-os) ; AaKeSai/iov-iKos ; KufiK- 
 T]y6s, -Tjvfi {Kv^tKos), ^ap5i-av6s, -avfi {'SiipSets, Ian. Gen. -l-uj/), 'AyKvpavis 
 {"AyKvpa), TapwT-7yos, -ivy} {Tdpas, -avr-os). 
 
 i 235. IV. Adverbs. 
 
 1. Adverbs are formed from verbs : — 
 
 With the endings -Brjy or, when the primitive has the variable o,-iSriv, 
 which denote mode or manner, e. g. KpipSriP, secretly [KpowTu) ; ypifi-Sriv, bj 
 writing, scribendo [ypii(p(o) ; ffirop-a^-qv, scatteredly, sparsim. 
 
 2. From verbs and substantives : — 
 
 With the ending -5 (i;- or -a SiJi/, -T| So 1/ (mostly from substantives). These 
 also denote manner, or, when derived from substantives, the external form, e. g. 
 kva^avZiv, operdy, aperte; SiafcpiSoV, distinctly; 0oTpv56v, grape-like, in clusters 
 {Pirpvs), i\aS6v, in troops, catervatim ; ay^\nS6v, in herds, gregatim; KunjSdv, 
 like a dog. 
 
 3. From substantives, pronouns, and adverbs, adverbs are formed to denote the 
 three relations of place, viz., whence, whither, and where, by the endings -div, -St 
 (-0-6), and -&i, c. g. ovpav6-^ev,from heaven ; oipaviy-Se, into or to heaven, oiipm6- 
 &i, in heaven; &\\o-dev,from another place, aliunde, fiAAo-tre, to another place, alio, 
 SaAo-^i, at another place, alibi. — Rules in respect to the accent of those m &§<■ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
293 
 
 • 
 
 ' 236.3 DERIVATION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 and -Sft: (a) Dissyllables are either Paroxytoncs or Propeiispomena, c. g, 
 wp6irS^ey, -pj^^y, adStr, (b) polysyUables are Paroxytones, when the penult is 
 short by nature, e. g. Aeo-^toey from AeV^Soj, Kimp6St€y from KiTrpos, oipavSStev, 
 aipaviS^i from oipa.v6s:, exceptions: otKoSiev, oUoAi, IfSoS^ev, ^fSoSii, iriy-ro^J, 
 fcUoftei-, ImioToao/, and some poetic words ; (c) polysyllables whose penult la 
 long by position, are without exception Proparoxytones, e. g. ryroeraev, inrrStiy ; 
 <d) polysyllables whose penult is long by nature, are Proparoxytones, when the 
 primitive was a Barytone, e. g. ^^wSr^y (rf«), ir^p^d^y (eVepoj), 'AS>iyr,A(i> 
 {'A^vm); but Properispomena, when the primitiye was an Oxytone, c. g. 
 Tlv^a^ev {nvSiti), ^pi^S>iv {®pti). On tlue accent of those in -Se (-<re), see § 34, 
 Rem. S. 
 
 Remaek 1. Words of the first Dec. retain tlieir o or tj before -^ey; those 
 of the second, their o-, and those of the third, the o -of the Gen. ending, e. g. 
 'OKviJ.Tria&ev, :STTapTri-Sisy, oIko-Skv, &K\o-Srevj but the vowels a, i), and o are 
 often exchanged with each other, e. g. l,i(6-^ey from ^l{a; MeyapiSny from 
 Miyapa, Ti. 
 
 Rem. 2. Adverbs in -w, and also others, append the endings to the un- 
 changed vowels, e. g. &vu-Srey, Kdra-Srey, gfm-S-ey, lKc7-Srey, iY/^-bi, hSo-Srey, 
 iySa-Ai, Some forms of the comparative in -repos lengthen o into ai, e. g. 
 ifitpoTcpa-^ey. In some of the above forms, a can be shortened into o in poetry, 
 and then rejected entirely, e. g. ^o-^ey, irp<Jo--&€j/' (instead of e(aSfev, ■irp6<raiAey), 
 and in imitation of Doric usage, <r is often omitted before », e. g. Hirt^ey, Iicto- 
 ^Ev (instead of imaAey, fKToir^ey). 
 
 Rem. 3. The ending -5e is commonly appended to substantives only, and to 
 the unchanged form of the Ace, e. g. oAoSe, to or into the sea {S.\s], Tlv^aSf (from 
 Tlv&d), oTkiJi/Be only Epic, elsewhere otxaSe (from the stem 'OIH), as fiyaSe (from 
 *YH) instead of ^vy/iySe which is not in use, 'E\ev<r7ydSe). In pronouns and 
 adverbs, -<re is apjjended instead of -5e, e. g. iKct-ae, &\\o<r€, irepaaf, ovSap^ae, 
 Tn\6a-e ; more seldom in substantives, e. g. otKoa-e. — In plural siibstantivcs in 
 -as, aSe becomes (e, e. g. 'A^ya^f, ©^jSafe ; but some substantives in the singu- 
 lar, also, follow this analogy, e. g. 'OXv/nriaCe ; so the poetic adverbs, ^ipa^e, 
 to the door,foras, epa^^, x«A'"C^i '" '^^ ground, humum (from the' obsolete sub- 
 stantives, ^, x^M) earth). 
 
 Rem. 4. Instead of -Se or -o-e, the Epic dialect has -Sis also, e. g. x"f"^S's 
 instead of xV^C^i iM.vSis instead of S^^oite, and olxaSis, domum. 
 
 Rem. 5. Several pronominal forms with the usual suffix, have, between the 
 stem and fhe suffix, the syllable ox, which is to be accounted for by the ending 
 -aicis coming before the aspirated relative, e. g. Tro\\-i>x-6^ei' (from roWifcis 
 and o^cv), myrax-baf ; this occurs also in most pronominal adverbs of place 
 in -?7, -ou, -{M, e. ^. aKK-ax-ov, alibi, iro\\-ax-ov, iravr-ax-V, TroW-ax-Vi travr-ax-oi, 
 
 § 236. B. Compounds. 
 
 1. Every compound consists of two words, one of which explains the other 
 more definitely. The explanatory word usually stands first, e. g. yav-iiax'a, 
 eea-Jight, as is usual in English in composite words. The word which is explained 
 by the other, shows to what class of words the compound belongs, i. c. whether 
 it is a substantive or verb, etc. ; thus, e. g. vav-imx'i is a substantive, vav-ixaxi!" 
 a verb, yau-fidxos an adjective. 
 
 B.EMAEK 1. The explanatoiy word takes the second place in the compound 
 trat seldom, and mostly in poetic words, a. g. ScuriSaliiav, i. e. SeiVbi robs Sat 
 futyes. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
_394 I'ORMATION OF WORDS. [} 237 
 
 2. Both words stand either in an attributive relation to each other (== a suhstaiv 
 tive qualified by an adjective or by another substantive in the Gen.), e. g. Kax 
 e^la (= KuKii e|is, bad condition) ; amaypiujtia (= amas ypaipri]), painting in light and 
 shade; iinr-ovpls (= 'l-mrov ovpi), horse-tailed; or in an objective relation (= a 
 verb, adjective, or substantive with the Case of a substantive in the relation of 
 an object, or with an adverb in the same relation), c. g. linroTpoipeiv (= imrovs 
 rp4<ti€U'), tvrroTp6<l>os; yaujuaxeo' (i- >=■ vavai ndxetrdai), mv/idxos, vavpa-xia; 
 euTUX"*'i euTux^s; ayitrrdi/cUy aytiffTaros, afdffTatris, 
 
 3. The verb can be compounded with prepositions only, e. g. airo-, Ik-, oi/ti-, 
 irpo; 4/1-, Sia; Kara-, napa-, Trpoff-Palvftv ; comp. § 237, 5 ; the substantive and 
 adjective, either with substantives and adjectives, or with prepositions, or with 
 separable and inseparable adverbs and prefixes, e. g. ffa>p.aTo-(pi\a4, TiSv-\6yos ; 
 irepl-VToa-is, Siti-\evKos ; fii-rux'fis, av-ahios ; the adverb, with prepositions only, 
 e. g, irepi-ffTaStJj'. 
 
 Rem. 2. All other compounds are formed by derivation from words pre- 
 viously compounded, e. g. ev-rvx^^y and ev-rvx^Js from eit-Tux^s, 
 
 Rem. 3. (a) Separable adverbs are sue?i as are used alone, as well as in 
 composition, e. g. c8, well; vK-lir, except; aim, at the same time; &YX', near; ifrri, 
 now, recently ; &yav (aya.-), very; iroKiv, again; TrdKaijlong since; Sis from Wo, 
 bis, or the same as 5ix<», dis, separately ; irSi/, wholly ; eirvx^iy, euTux^s, prosperous; 
 irKTififieKifS (t^t?^, /acAos), violating harmony; 'n-\rifjip.e\eiy, ■7r\€fjifi4\T]a'is ', hparpo- 
 X^ta, to run together, ap-arpoxla ; ayxt^areTy, to go near to ; ayxi^d\air(ros, man 
 propinquus; apTi^a\'t}s, now blooming; aycur^ev^s, ayd^^oos, aydyvi^os, very snmoy; 
 KaKip,^XaaTos, that buds again ; TraXa'upvros, planted long since ; Sisxlf^ot, two thou- 
 sand ; Si<l>^oyyos, liaving a double sound ; irdyffoipos, all-wise. 
 
 (b) Inseparable adverbs arc such as are used only in composition. They are 
 as follows : — 
 
 (o) ripii-, half, semi, e. g. fiiiltpKeicTos, half-burned, semiustus. 
 
 \fi) Zvs- expresses difficulty, adversity, or aversion, and is often the antith 
 esis of efi, e. g. Si/stux"" and euTux^"'. SvsSaiixovla, misfortune; 
 
 (y) a Privative (usually av- before a vowel) lias the force of the Latin in, and 
 expresses the negation of the idea contained in the simple word, e. g 
 6.ffo<pos, unwise; aripia, dishonor ; &Trdis, childless ; avaXrios, innocens. 
 
 (5) a Collective and Intensive, like the Latin con in composition, expresses com 
 munity, equality, or a collective idea, and lience also intensity, e. g. (commu 
 nity, especially in the names of kindred and companions) i.Se\^6s, brother, 
 from SiKifiis, womb; (equality) aTd\avTos,of the same weight; &TreSos, even ; 
 (in a collective sense) itAp6os, collected (ftpea, ftpeo^oi, to cry aloud), ooXX^s, 
 collected (from aKiis or o\^s), &yelpu, ayeXri ; (intensity) arewji, intent, in- 
 tenius ; &<rKios, very sliady ; &Ppop.os, malcing a hud noise. 
 
 Rem. 4. The Euphonic « (5 16, 10) must be distinguished from the Collec- 
 tive o, e. g. ardx^s and SffToxus, an ear of grain; arfpmrli and curTepanii, lightning. 
 
 S 237. Formation of Compounds. 
 
 1. When the first part of the compound is a verb (5 236, Rom. 1), the pure 
 (sometimes also the strengthened) stem of the verb remains unchanged, if the 
 following word begins with a vowel, <=. g. cpep-aijylis, veiS>-dpxeTv ; or the final 
 vowels e, 11, 1, also the syllables <ri, etr, eiri, tro, arc annexed to the stem of the 
 verb, if the following word begins with a consonant ; a- also is annexed wlieu 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 237.] FORMATION OF COMPOONCS. 21)5 
 
 the following word begins witli a vowel, e. g. So/c-e'-ftu^uoj, Km-o-rdKTijs and \eiir 
 o-riKTTjy, Tepr-i-Kepavvos, iyfp-(rt-ye\ws, ipcp-eff-ptos, Tafi-ecri-xpus, ^\K-e(rl-weir\o3, 
 lu^o^ipfiapos (= luy-iro-p.), piy^affins (= piir-a-ainris), TrA-ijfnrTros (= ■ir\iiy-<r' 
 
 tlTKOs). 
 
 2. "When the iirst part of the compound is a substantive or adjective, the 
 declension-stem of the substantive generally remains unchanged, c. g. (first 
 Dec.) viicri-<p6pos, i,yopa-v6nos ; (second Dec.) \oyo-ypd(j>os, ia-i\jiepos (by Elision), 
 kaKovpyas (by Crasis), >M.ya06\os {Twyiis) ; (third Dec.) ia-rvviinos, TjSv\6yo!, 
 Pov(popP6s, i/av'imxlt ; ■irvp-<ji6po^, /icXay-xo^-la, irauffyvpis ; in some, the union- 
 Vowel is annexed to the stem, e. g. (rii>/ioT-o-^iJ\a|, ipv<ri-o-\6yos, BijSoDxos (by 
 Crasis, instead of S^S-ci-cxos) ; in neuters in -os. Gen. t-os, the e is elided before 
 0, c. g. Jn(>-o-^(ipoj, or the declension-stem in -es [§ 51, (b)] is retained, e. g. 
 TiKts -ipipos ; so also in other neuters, c. g. Kepas-06\os, ipciis-tp6pos. 
 
 Remark 1. In the first Dec., however, the union-vowel a is often found 
 mstead of the declenaiou-stem, e. g. 5iK-o-7p(ii()Ds (Simj), liMyx-o-tp6pos ; so also 
 the ending -jj or -a is annexed even to words of the second and third Dec, e. g. 
 JovaTij-^opoj, &(rmS7i-<ti6pos\ neuters in -os (Gen. -eoj, PI. -tj) frequently vary 
 between the o and ij, e. g. ^itj}o^6pos and ^t(lyqtl>6pos, ffK&jo^6pos and trK&n)tp6pos. 
 
 Hem. 2. In some wordis of the third Dec, more seldom of the first and 
 second, i is annexed to the pure stem, as a union-vowel, e. g. Tvplirfovs, 0171- 
 $6ttis ; iJi,varnr6\os {/joitrTiis), livpiirvoHs. In several words a euphonic a (<n) is 
 inserted, e. g. noyo-cr-rSKOS, &€0-(r-ex3/>£o, together with the regular ^eoex^P^") 
 vav-ffi-iropos. 
 
 3. When the first part of the compound is an adverb, only those changes 
 take place, which arise from the general rules respecting the change of 
 (consonants. 
 
 4. Respecting the second part of the compound, it is to be noted, that the 
 words beginning with o, e, o, in composition regularly lengthen these vowels 
 (if the last part of the compound is a simple) into ij and a, c. g. (o) cu^vc/uot 
 from &y€fioSf trrpaTTtySs from Sym^ eit^vup from &>^pj (c) 5us//peT)Uos from iper^ 
 a6s, Svs^fMTOs from i\ttii'a ; (0) ava<pe\Tis from oi^eAo;, ■iravii\edpos from SWv/iii 
 ivdw/ios from Svofxa, 
 
 5. In relation to the end of the word, the following points, shotild be noted : — 
 
 A. In the Greek language, as has been seen (5 236, 3), a verb can be com- 
 pounded only with prepositions ; but if it is necessary to compound a verb with 
 another part of speech, this is never done immediately, but by means of a 
 derivation from a compound word either actually existing or assumed. Then 
 the derivative-ending, commonly - 4u, is regularly appended to this compound 
 word : e. g. from %inrovs rpetpetj^, to keep horses^ the derivative is not iiriroTpe(p€iV) 
 but by means of the compound substantive lTnroTp6ipoSf it is imroTpotpito ; so 
 ^coiTePia from &eo(r£/3^j, vav/mx^'" from vavfidxos, ivrvx^'iv from cxnuxiis- 
 
 B. The compound is an adjective or noun : — 
 
 a. The second part is derived from a verb, and has the following endings : 
 (a) Most frequently -or, -ov, e. g. ^poTp6<pos, nourishing wild beasts, ^p6Tpa- 
 
 ^s, mmrished by wild beasts. See 5 75, Kem. 4. 
 (/3) -ijs (-T7)s) or -as (Gen. -av), -rip (-tt;/)), -rap, commonly used as 
 
 substantives with a transitive signification, c. g. tvipyiri)s, bene/actTr ; 
 
 yofxo^fTTis, legislator; fivpotrdhris, bpvi^o^jpas, iratdoXerup , 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
296 FORMATION OF WORDS. [i 237 
 
 (y) -ijs, -e i, commonly with a passive or intransitive signification, e. g, 
 ^siKfiiTvtis, beloved^ of God; ei/ia^iis, quick to learn, docilis ; eliirp^irlis, 
 becoming i 
 
 (S) -s (-f), e. g. ij>evS6iiaprvs from MAPTTn, mfio<pv\(^, 
 
 b. Or tiie second part is a substantive : -^ 
 
 (a) An attributive relation exists between the two parts of the compound, the 
 first containing a more definite explanation of the last. TI>e substantive 
 remains unchanged. The first part is an adverb or preposition, sometimes also 
 a substantive or adjective, e. g. i/iiSovKos, afellowslave ; Poi\i/j.os, excessive hun- 
 ger, bulimy ; httpoiroKis, citadel. 
 
 (b) An objective relation exists between the tivo parts of the compound, the 
 last denoting the object of the first. This division includes a large number of 
 adjectives, the first part of which consists either of a verb, or, though more 
 seldom, of an adjective, of a separable or inseparable adverb, or of a preposi- 
 tion used as an adverb, e. g. deuri^aifuov = 6 robs Sat-^oj^as SeitraSf iTrixaLpeKoKos 
 = 6 TOis KaKo7s iirixatpuv, KOKoSaifiay = b KaKhv Sal/iova exwy, Svsepats, one rvhoi 
 lias an unhappy love, %v^eos = & rbv ^ehy ef eaur^ ^X^^t &t^oikos = 6 airh rov 
 oixov Up, Sttois = 6 imTSas ovk ex""- ^ ^^1 these examples the foiin of the sub- 
 stantive remains unchanged,' where the substantive has a form which is appro ■ 
 priate for the Masc. or Fern, of the adjective, but where this is not the case, the 
 substantive assumes a, corresponding adjective-ending, viz. -os (Gen. -ov), -as 
 (Gen. -w), -7)S (Gen. -ovs), -is (Gen. -iSos), -aiv and (when it ends in -v) -s, e, g 
 <r{ivSenri/o5 {5e7in/ov), u fellow-guest, ev^vSiKos (SIktj), &TifiOS {rifi^), dcxhp^^poi 
 {rj/iepa), ^iKoxpillMTos (xp?M"> XP^I""''^)i SiTTOjiios ((TTtJ/ia), eiyeas {yv), liaving a 
 fertile soil; \enr6i>eus (vavs), one who deserts the ship ; aya<j>e\'fis {ri Si^eAos), Si/uA- 
 Kis (a\K^), axp^fJUDVf &SaKpvs, Gen. -vos [rh Sdlcpv). 
 
 c. Or the second part is an adjective : — 
 
 The adjective retains its foim, except that those in -us commonly take tho 
 ending -tjs ; the first part consists either of a substantive or an adverb, e. g. 
 iiffrvyeiTaVf near the city, urbi vicinus; travirotpos or Trdairo<j>os, -ov, very wise; av6- 
 pioiQs, -ov, unlike ; irp^SriX.os, -ov, ariS-fis from 7]56s, TroSdjmys from wkvs. 
 
 ' For example, Seio-iSuffimv is an adjective of two endings, the ending -am 
 being both Masc. and Fem., Aerefore the substantive Soi;iu»i/ is not changed in 
 composition ; but a-ivSemms takes a regular adjective termination, as the sub- 
 stantive SeTwyay has neither a Masc, nor Fem. endine- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
SYNTAI 
 
 SE CTION I 
 8INTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 
 
 •CHAPTER I. 
 Parts of a Simple Sentence, 
 1238. Nature of a Sentence. — Subject. — Predicate. 
 1. Syntax treats of sentences. A sentence is the- ex- 
 pression of a thought in words, e. g. To poSov '^dWei; 6 
 aj/^jotuTTo? S-j^To? iariv. The conceptions of the mind are 
 related both to each other and to the speaker. The con- 
 ceptions or ideas themselves are expressed by Essential 
 words (§ 38, 4) .; their relations to each other, partly by 
 inflection and partly by Formal words. 
 
 Thus, e. g. in the sentence Ti xaKhv jiSSov M\k-ei iv rf tov Trarp-hs Kiiir-oi, 
 there are fire essential words : RciKis, plSov, Adweiy, Tm~lip, KrJTros ; their rela- 
 tions to each other are expressed pai-tly by their inileotion and partly by the 
 Formal words ri, iv, t$, tou, 
 
 2. Every sentence must necessarily have two parts, a sub- 
 ject and a predicate. The subject is that, of which some- 
 thing is afiirmed ; the predicate that, which is affirmed of the 
 ■subject, e. g. in the sentences, to poSov '^aXXei — o av%pas'Ko<; 
 ^OTjTO? ia-TUV, ro pohov and o dv^pairo'; are the subjects, '^ak- 
 \ec and S^i^to? ia-Tiv, the predicates. 
 
 3. The predicate properly contains the substance of the 
 sentence ; the subject is subordinate to it and can be 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
298 SYNTAX. [i 236 
 
 expressed by a mere inflection-ending of the verb, e. g. 
 SiBa>-fj,i, (J) g-ive. 
 
 4. The subject is a substantive or a word used as a 
 substantive, viz. a substantive pronoun or numeral; an 
 adjective or participle used as a substantive ; an adverb 
 which becomes a substantive by prefixing the article ; a 
 preposition with its Case ; an infinitive ; finally, every word, 
 letter, syllable, and every combination of words can be con- 
 sidered as a substantive, and with the neuter article com- 
 monly agreeing with it, can be used as a subject. The 
 subject is in the Nom. 
 
 T^ ^6Soy ^d?^st, — 'Eyii ypdtpa;, av 'ypihpGts, — Tp cTy ^A^-oy. — 'O ffotphs €u- 
 Salfiav 4ffTi. — 01 tp^oyovures fiiffovvrai. — 01 irdXat avhpiioi ^fftw. — 01 -nepl 
 MiKrtdStjv KoKws ifiax^cavTo. — X. Cy. 8. 3, 42, Oirroi outws 7j5v iari rit 
 ^X^"' XP^f^^'^'^1 ^^ ^^^°^P^^ T^ O'TTo^dWeiv, — Ti SiSdiTK^tv kox6v iaTiv. 
 — X. R. L. 9, 2. cVerat rp apery trd^eff^ai els rhv irXetto XP^^^^ luiWop, ^ 
 Tp KaKl^. — T^ el (r{'t/Se(rfi6s effrtp. — Tb ^to pLOMpdv iffriv. — Tj» yvSo^i treav- 
 rhv Ka\6v effriv. 
 
 Remakk 1. In the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, the 
 subject is in the Ace, as will be seen § 307, 3. In indefinite and distributive 
 designations of number, the subject is expressed by a preposition (els, vepi, Kard) 
 with its Case, e. g. Eis rerrapas ?A<&oy, as many as four came (with round num- 
 bers els also signifies about, at most). 2L Cy. 8. 3, 9. etrrafraif trpurov pAv Tav 
 Sopvip6pav els T er paK i sx^^^iov s {about four thousand stood), epmpotr^ev 5e Tmi 
 TruXwj/ els reffffapas, Sisx^A.ioi Be eKarepco^ev rStv irvKuy, X. H. 6. 6, 10. 
 eipvyov els AaKeSaip-Ofa rwv Trepl ^Tdtrnrnov TeyeaTtuj/ ire pi oKraKoffiovs. 
 So KoS-' eKoa-Tovs, each one singly, one by one, singuli; Kara e&vTj, singulae gentes. 
 
 5. In the following cases the subject is not expressed by 
 any special word : — 
 
 (a) When the subject is a personal pronoun and is not particularly emphatic, 
 e. g. Tpdcftoi, ypd(j>eLS, ypdtpet', 
 
 (b) WTien the idea contained in the predicate is such, that it cannot appro- 
 priately belong to eveiy subject, but only to a particular one, the subject 
 being, as it were, implied in the predicate. Thus, olvoxoevei'm Hem. 
 m}. a olpaxios, the cup-bearer pours out the wine; S)vei in Her. sc. & Snnitp. 
 X. An. 3. 4, 36. 4irel iyiyvuHKOv aVTobs Oi"EWrives ^ovKo/ierous airieVoi Kol 
 Stayye\\oii.4povs, eK-lipv^e (sc. i m'iDu|) toTs "EAAtjo-i irapao-Keuifo-aiTaal. So 
 ffriiiaiyet rfi irdKwiyyi, iard\Triy(e v, sc. S (rdKirmrfis {the signal is 
 [wm] given by the trumpet). So we must explain words which denote the 
 state of the weather or the phenomena of n.ature ; as He i, it rains ; vl<j>ei, 
 it snows, $povT§, ao-TpaTTTEi, sc. i Zeus. Th. 4, 52. ^ a- e lire, there um 
 an earthquake. X. Cy. 4. 5, 5. (rva-icoTaCei, it is dark; 
 
 (c) The subject is easily supplied from the context; thus, in designations of 
 time, e. g.^y iyyi's fi\iov Svffnuv (sc. t) vnepa). ^UvaiMpl 070/301^ wA'fiSmvaat 
 and the like ; -irapexeiuoi, sc. Katp6s, it is time, it is allowed, one can = licet. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'^^ ^ SUBJECT. PREDICATE. COPULA 299 
 
 61 ,(, ler. 3, 73. fi/uy wape^ei avairiia'airdai tV ^pxh"- In this way th« 
 Wit IV. ) de6s is very frequently omitted in certain phuases, e.g.irfoart- 
 fiai". I, sc. 6 A(6s; Trpox^pei fioi (sc. t4 TrpdyimTa), things prosper to me, 
 I succetd, comp. Th. 1, 109. In such expressions as <)>aal, \iyouai, etc.. 
 the sulject fiy&pwiroi is regularly omitted, as it is readily apparent ; 
 
 (d) Sometimes the subject is supplied from some word of the sentence. Her. 
 9, 8. Thy 'ItrSffihu irelxfov xal tr<f>i %v irphs T^Ari, sc. rh' tuxos, they 
 walled the Isthmus, and the [wall] was, etc. X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. iropeiaofuu 
 fi^hs irpij Tcl fia<ri\cia, Kol fiv /iXv 4i/MirT7)Tai, sc. & Pa<rt\eis. So also 
 Other Cases as well as the Nom. are thus supplied, e. g. PI. L. 8C4, d. 
 vaiSt^ Xp^i^tvos, ovSey n-co twy roioiruv (sc. Tvai^wv) dia^eptav] 
 
 (e) "With the third Pers. Sing, of the verb, in a subordinate clause containing 
 a general idea, and in definitions, the indefinite pronoun t 1 s is sometimes 
 omitted. PI: Criton. 49, c. oi/re amaSiKiiv !)€?, oike KaKus noieTy oi/Sfva 
 kv^pdoirav, oii^ tar &Tiovv irdirxv ^* ahruv, not even if any one should 
 suffer from them ; so often with the Inf. ; but if a participle stands in 
 connection with the Inf., e. g. Eur. M. 1018. Koifas <pepeiv xph ftcriTij" 
 ivra a-v/upopds, the participle must be ccnsidered as the subject. 
 
 Rem. 2. Such expressions as SeT, xp'h, SoKtl, irpcTci, ^eo-ti(>'), IvSexerai {it is 
 possible), Ka\as, eS fX"> ^X«' ^^yoy {consentaneum est), Ae'^EToi {it is said), etc., 
 the Greek language always aonsiders as personal, the following Inf. or substan- 
 tive sentence being regarded as the subject of these verbs. 
 
 6. The predicate is a verb, an adjective, participle, ad- 
 jective pronoun or numeral, or a .substantive with the 
 Formal word ehai ; ehai, in this relation, is usually called 
 the copula, since it connects the adjective, substantive, etc. 
 with the subject, and forms one thought, e. g. 
 
 TJ> p6?ay ^dWei, — 'O iv^poyn-ss ^vtitSs iffriv, — 'A^dyarol eiaLy oi 
 deoi. — 'H apsT^ KaXii 4tTTiv, — *Aya^^ icapaitpatris ifrriv eTaipov. — Kvpos 
 9ty fiafft\ei s, — Tovto to irpayfid iffri T<JSe. — Si* ^ff^a TrdvTwv Trp.WTos, 
 — Ot&ySfies ^tray rpeis. 
 
 Rem a. The finite verb denotes both the thing afBrmed (id qaoipraedicatur) 
 and the relation of the affirmation to the subject and speaker ; the relation to 
 the subject, is denoted by the personal-endings of the verb ; the relation to the 
 speaker, by its Modes and Tenses ; e. g. the ending of the verb \4ya shows 
 that its subject is in the first person, and its being in the Ind. mode Pres. tense, 
 indicates that the speaker asserts something directly, at the present time. But 
 if the predicate is expressed by an adjective or substantive with elyai, the 
 affirmation is denoted by the adjective or substantive, and its relation to the 
 speaker by eivai, e. g. eiiSat/iav eipil = fvSaifU)ye-u, evSalfuav el = evSai/iavf-ets, 
 tvSaiiioyes taovrai — eiiSaiiioyfi-arnvirty, though there is a difference between the 
 two modes of expression. 
 
 Rem. 4. It is necessary to distinguish between the use of elyat, as a Formal 
 and as an Essential word ; in the former relation, it is merely a copula, con-_ 
 necting the subject with the substantive or adjective, etc. (4 238, 6); in the' 
 aatter, it has the idea of being or existence, being in a certain condition, etc., e. g. 
 tan SteSs = &€(is ^a-ra &v {there is a God, God exists), as in Her. 3, 108. to? 
 ^eiov 7] TTooyo'iTj iarl iovtra trotjyl]. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
300 E-'NTAX. [{239 
 
 Rem. 5. In order to give greater emphasis to the predicate, the simple idea 
 expressed by the verb, is resolved into the participle and copula elvai. This 
 mode of expression, however, is more usual in poetry, though it is found also 
 in prose, particularly in Herodotus, comp. Kem. 3. Eur. C. 381. irws & raW- 
 iriap^ ^Te ira(rxoyTes rdSe; Id. H. 117. ^v (rireidav. Her. 3, 99. airap- 
 ye6fiev6s iari. Id. 9, 51. ^ i/7J(r6s i (rri cLirh rod 'AtrwTroO Se/ea iTTaStovs 
 aTrexovca: PI. L. 860, e. el raiha ovrtas exovrd ^ffriv. Dem. 01. 3. 
 [t. 1.) 11, 7. •TcuiT' hv iyfaK6res ^crav, Hiey vxuld have been convinced of these 
 things^ 
 
 Kem. 6. The copula cTvoi is sometimes omitted, though commonly only in 
 the Ind. Prcs. ; tlvai is sometimes omitted, even when it is not a copula, but 
 properly a verb. This ellipsis is most frequent in the following cases : — 
 
 (a) In general propositions, observations, and proverbs. Eur. 0. 330. 6 fiiyas 
 6\^os ou fxitft/x-os iv fipoTo-iS. X. Cy, 2. 4, 27. arpaTt^ yap t] ^cfo-Tri (65(fjl 
 
 (b) Very often with verbal adjectives in -reos, as also with other expres- 
 sions denoting necessjily and rfu*!/, e. g. d >'(£•)' «?;, xp^^''t befits, eiK6s, 
 also with Koipos, Spa and the like. Dem. Ph. 3, 129, 70. rifuv y fmep n^s 
 i\iv^€pias aywvujTiov. Id. Cor. 296, 205. arifiias — ey SovXevo^nnj rij 
 v6\et tpepuy ayiiyK7]\ 
 
 (c) Often with certain adjectives, e. g. erotiios, irpiJS-6/ios, oT6sTe, Svya- 
 t6s, fiaSiov, X " -^ e "■ "^ "> StjXov, SJioj', etc. PI. Phaedr. 252, a. {-ij 
 i/zuX^)) SouXeufic eToifiiri. Dem. Ph. 1. 48, 29. eyi viaxeai iriovv eroi- 
 fios^ X. C. 1-, 1, 5. SijAov o5//, on ouk Uv {^taKpdrrfis) irpoe\eyep, el ^7; 
 iir'ujTfvev aKitSaiireiv. Comp. ib. 2, 34. Here belong also the expressions 
 ^avfmtrTbv oaov, it is very wonder/al (= mirum gaantum), afi-fixayov 'icrov, it 
 is quite impossible, inconceivable {= immane quantum), see § 332, Rem. 10. 
 On ovSils osTis oi (= nemo non), see 5 332, Rem. 12. 
 
 Rem. 7. The Ind. Impf is but seldom omitted, e. g. Aesehin. Ctes. §.71, yi^ 
 4y fieffa (sc. ^i/j Kal iraprj/iev Ty vcrepalif fls tV 4KK\riiriav ; the Ind. Pres. also is 
 not very often omitted after conjunctions, e. g. SttSts, iirei (comp. X. C. 1, 46); 
 on the contrary, very frequently after ori and iis (that), c. g. X. C. 1. 2, 52. 
 Ktyav, is ovSev 6(pe\os. The subjunctive is but seldom omitted after the rela- 
 tive hs S,v^ and especially after conjunctions, e. g. PI. Rp. 370, e. Sy hv amoh 
 
 ... .... ^oK4pLioiti.v T]fi4repot {s>c.eX-qiTa, ,. -...„ 
 
 ellipsis of the Imp^is very rare, e. g. S. 0. 0. 1480. 'l\aos, S, Saifiuv. X. An. 3. 
 3, 14. TOW oSj/ &eo7s x<^("r (sc. eVrio), Bti ov abv ?roA.\p ^i^jup, a\Aa <riiv 6\lyois 
 ?i\Srov. The participle is very often omitted, especially after verba intelligendi 
 and declarandi, e. g. X. S. 3, 7. SriXiv ye, 8ti ipavKos (sc. Hy) (payovfiai, but else- 
 where also, 0. g. X. C. 2. 3, 15. &roira \eyeis Kal ovSa/xUs Trpis aov (sc. uvra), a 
 nuUo modo tibi convenimtia ; even in such cases as Th. 4, 135. x^^l^Siyos reKevTuv- 
 Tos /to! irpis tap ijSri (sc. iyros). The Inf. is often omitted after SoKeiy, meta- 
 &ai, vo^.Xeii/ and the like, e. g. Th. 7, 60. PovKeurea iSSicei. X. Cy. 1. 6, 14. 
 iiri(Ji/TO fie eKe\ev(rai Tois vrpaTrryiKoTs (sc. ejyai) yoiuCofieyois aySpiai SiaKeyeir- 
 
 } 239. Comparison. — Attribute and Object. 
 1. "V\1ien the predicate belongs to the subject in a higher or 
 .ower degree than to another object, this relation is denoted by 
 ile Cojiiparativc, e. g. 'O tott/p ii.t.i£,wv io-Tiv, ^ & woV — 'O 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
S 239.] coMtAnisoN. — attiudute akd oBjjJct. 305 
 
 d-on^os fiaWov xa'/>«' 'H? ^P«t^. ^ to's )(p-ijiJia(nv. And when the 
 predicate belongs to the subject in the highest or lowest 
 degree, as respects all other objects compared, the Superlative 
 is used, and commonly takes with it a partitive Genitive, e. g. 
 SwKpanjs wmnrnv 'EAAiyvcoi/ o-o^WTaros ?jv.-~'0 <ro^os irai/ruv 
 /xaXio-ra iTri&v/jLeX rrjs ape-rrj's. 
 
 Remaek 1. The Comparative is strengthened or more definitely stated in 
 the following ways : (a) by ^ti, still, even, etiam, e. g. fiilCav i-ri, dill greater; 
 (b) by fi.ttKp$, oxi-ytf, ivoK\if, ?_Ti TToKK^, oircf, ToaovTif, iieya, 
 oKlyov, iroXv, '6(tov, t o (to C t o, which shoW how mucA more or less of the 
 quality expressed by the adjective is intended, e. g. iro A\p inilCav, multo major, 
 far greater, IT o\\^ ir I /iil^oyes, multo majores etiam ; (c) sometimes by^aA- 
 Koy. Her. 1, 32. /iciWoy oXfiuirepos iffri {far). 
 
 Rem. 2. The Superlative is strengthened or more definitely stated in the 
 following ways : (a) by k a i,vel,eisen, e.g. kuI ii.iKtaTa,vd maxime, very greatly 
 indeed;^ (b) by words denoting measure or the degree of difference, viz. ir o A A ^, 
 Uaicpf, iroKv, Iraph iroAi!, Scro!, rlxrovTia, e. g, iroAA^ &pmros, mvlto 
 praestantksimus, the bestbyfar; fiaxp^ &purTos, longe praestantissimus ; (c) even 
 by the Superlative: fidXia-Tu (-rrXe'iaTov and ixiyiaTov j /)et.), e. g. S. 
 O. C. 743. ■jrAerorTov hvSrpdmiev xdmirros. Th. 7, 42. niKior-a Shvototos; 
 (d) by the relative: is' (girttis), 8ti and ^, oXos (§ 343, Rem. 2), e.g. iis 
 Tax'trra, quam celarime, Sti ixiXuTTa, p &punov, e. g. PI. Apol. 23, a. iro AAal 
 fieV aTre'x*€ia/ fioi yiyivaai kA o fo t x"^^'"^""'"' KoL PapiTarai. X. An. 4. 8, 
 2. x^pio" oXov x«AeiriiSToToy ; (e) by efj, unus, e. g. Her. 6, 127. ^Afte Sfii;-- 
 SvpiSr)s SufiaplTns, is 4irl irKeigTav 5j) x^i-^n' ^^^ ayijp dir/zceTo. X. An. 1. 
 9, 22. SS>pa irAeiffTo efs 76 nyjjp ity i\ifi$ave, he received the most gifts, at least 
 mmidering the fact that he vxis but a single individual (C. Tusc. 2. 26, 64. amplitu- 
 dinem animi unam esse omnium rem pulcherrimam) ; (f ) a peculiar mode of 
 strengthening the Superlative, is by joining in rots with it, in which case the 
 Superlative must be repeated, e.g. 'O "Epws 4v rots Trpeir$iTaT6s eVri 
 (i. e. iy rots TrpeafivriTois od<ri), the oldest among those who are very old, lier. 7, 
 137. toSt<< fioi iv rottri ^eiSraroy tpaiveroL ysveaSiai. PI. Symp. 173, b. 
 SwKpdTOvs ipcuTT^is Siv iv Tois /idKiffra -ruv tiJte. The construction with the 
 Fcm. is found only in Thuc., e. g. 3, 81. (ariffis) iy toTs it pint) iy^yero. lb. 
 17. iy ToTs irAeiiTToi vijes. In such instances, ro7s must be considered 
 as Neut. In like manner, the expression H/ioia {d/ioialon.) toTs was used 
 with the Superlative. Her. 3, 8. a-effoyriu Se 'Apdpiot irUnis ay^pdnray dfioTa 
 T olfft txd\Lffra{^c. ae^ofieyois), like those who respect very much, vt qui maxime. 
 Th. 1, 25. xp^f^rwy Svyd/jieL byres Kar' iKcTyoy rhy xp^^oy Hfioia rots 'E?>Ji.^ycoy 
 ■ir\ov(Ttardrois. The Superlative is also intensified by joining a positive 
 with it, e. g. 'Aya^wy /ttttcW Kpdricrros, the best among the good horsemen = the 
 very best. 
 
 Resi. 3. The Superlative relation is often expressed more emphatically by 
 negative adjectives or adverbs in thB Superlative, preceded by oi (lAtHtes), 
 instead of positive adjectives or adverbs in the Superlative, e. g. oux fiKiara, 
 not the least, especially, oi Kdnitrros, ovk i\dx'<rros, stronger than fid- 
 Aiffra, jSeAtio-toj, /ifyurros. Sometimes, also, it is expressed antithetically, e. g 
 ovx ^Kicrra, aAA& fj.d\tffra. 
 
 ' 'fls, 8ti are not in themselves intensive particles, but merely connect some 
 part of Siya/iat understood, and in that way may be said to give intensity to 
 the Superlative. Sometimes Siya/ua is expressed. »;. g. Styo(p<iy ayltrraTcu 
 iffraXfifyos iir} ir6\e^oy us eSiyaro KdWiffra, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
302 SYNTAX. ^ 240 
 
 2.. A sentence consisting of a subject and piedicate may b« 
 extended by defining the subject and predicate more exactly. 
 Tlie word or words which define the subject more fuUy, is 
 called an attribute, or attributive. The subject is more exactly 
 described, therefore, (a) by the addition of an adjective (attrib- 
 utijipi adjective), e. g. to *aAov po'Sov; (b) by the Gen. of a 
 substantive (attributive Gen.), e. g. 6 tov /Jao-tXe'tus k^ttos, 
 regis hortus (= regius hortus) ; (c) by a substantive in the same 
 Case as the word which is more definitely described, e. g. 
 KJpos, o PacTiXivs. The explanatory word is here said to be in 
 apposition with the word explained, and may be called an 
 appositive of that word. The predicate (wliich is termed the 
 object), is more exactly described, (a) by a Case of a substan- 
 tive ; (b) by a preposition with a substantive ; (c) 'oy the Inf , 
 (d) by an adverb, e. g. 'O o-o^os t^v aper^v aa-Ku. Ilepi t^s 
 irar/otSo? fi.ax6iJ.e9^a. 'AirLivai c7n.Ju/«,S. KaXSs ypafjieK. 
 
 5 240. Agreement. 
 
 1. The finite verb agrees with the subject in Person and 
 Number; the adjective, participle, pronoun, and numeral, in 
 Gender, Number, and Case. The substantive, as a predicate, 
 agrees with the subject only m Case; in Gender, Number, and 
 Case, only when it denotes a person, and hence either has a 
 particular form for the Masc. and Fem., or is of common gender, 
 The same principle apphes to substantives in apposition (i 266, 
 1). But when the substantive denotes a thing, it agrees with 
 the subject only in Case, e. g. 
 
 'E7W ypitpm, (TV jpiipsis, oSros ypdcpet. — 'O Sv&pMTToj ftvriTos ^(TTiy. — 'H oper?/ 
 KcA.'fi eo-Tiy. -^Ti irpay/jLa amxfiv iarai. — Oi "EAArji/es iro\e|i4lK<iiTaT<il ^aa,v.— 
 'O KaAbs 7ra7r, ^ (ro0^ yvvi\, t^ fiiKphv t4kvqv. — ^Y.yivi(T^7iv Tctj Sl^Spe toutw 
 {Kpnias /cat 'A^KIi8£c£5^Js) ^iffel tpi\OTifWTiiTCii TnivTatf ^ A^vaiay, ^. C. 1.2,14. 
 — Kvpos V PounKeis. — Toiiipis ^v paaiKeia. — Kupos, 6 /SairiAcur, T(i/xiipis, ^ ^offl 
 Keia. On the contrary, t^k ^vy ar4pa, Beivdv rt K<iWos Kol fiey^- 
 bos, il,iyav S56 eTirey (his davghter a vxnder in beauty and size), X. Cy. 5. 2, 7. 
 
 ' "When the adjective merely ascribes some quality to the substantive with 
 which it agrees, it is called an attributive adjective, but when it belongs to the 
 predicate and is used in describing what is said of the subject, it is called a 
 predicative adjective, e. g. in the expression i aya^hs h.viip (the good man), hyv 
 i6s if attributive, but in & si.vr\o iffn o7aa<is (the man is good), it is predicative. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 240.] AGE.EEMEJMT. 303 
 
 2. The predicative adjective or substantive agrees with the 
 subject as above stated, when the following and other similar 
 verbs, which do not of themselves express a complete predicate 
 sense, have chiefly the force of the copula : — 
 
 (a) The verb iirapxn-v, to be the cause of, to he, to 'exist ; 
 
 (b) Verbs signifying to become, to increase, to grow, e. g. yiyvo- 
 [laL, t<j>w, av^dvofJLaL ; 
 
 (c) The verbs ftevw, to remain, and Karonrp', to be established, 
 appointed, to stand; 
 
 (d) Verbs signifying to seem,, appcw show one's self, e. g. 
 ioiKa, cfiaLvofjMi, SijAoS/iat ; 
 
 (e) Verbs signifying to be named, e. g. KoXov/jiai, ovo/j-d^oimi, 
 Xeyofj-ai, aKovu), to be called (like audire) ; 
 
 (f) Verbs signifying to be appointed to something, to he cliasen, 
 to be nam,ed, e. g. aipovfjLai, aTToSeiKw/iai ; 
 
 (g) Verbs signifying to he regarded as something, to be recog- 
 nized as something, to be supposed, e. g. voful^ofiai, Kplvo- 
 flat, vTroXai^pdvoixai ; 
 
 (h) Verbs signifying to be given as something, to be received as 
 s-ymething, to he abandoned, cast off, and the like, e. g. 
 
 (Dem.). — 'AKKt^iaS-ris ppe^Ti ffrpaTijyos. — 'Avrl (j}t\wv Kol ^4puv vvv xdXaKss 
 Koi deoTs ix^P"^ aKoiovffir {audiunt), they hear themselves called batterers, etc, 
 Dem. Cor. 241. 
 
 Remark 1. "When the verbs mentioned under (e), (f ), (g), (h), have the 
 active form, they take two accusatives (§ 280, 4). 
 
 Bem. 2. Several of the verbs above named, are also joined with adverbs, 
 bat they then express a complete predicate sense ; e. g. ^wKpaTris 9iv {lived) oel 
 ahv Tois yeois. Ka\us, Kaxas icTTiy {it is well, etc.). Aetvas stray ip 
 tl>v\aKfn 01 Ba0v\iiviot {diUgenter versabantur in custodia). Her. 3, 152. 
 Mdrrtu eTvai, to be in vain. EJvat, as well as the verbs yiy i/etr^ai and iretpv- 
 Kivai, is very often connected with adverbs of place and degi-ee, of wliich 
 the corresponding adjective-forms arc not in use, asSfx a, xi'f'^i, ^Kiis, juax- 
 odv, Tr6^pa, iyyis, ir\ijtrlov, 6/jlov, aKis, ^aWoy, fiii\iffTa, c. g. 
 To7(Tt 'A^valofv {TTpaTTjyoTtrt iylyoyro Bixfi atyu&fjuu {scnteiLtia.e in diversas 
 partes discedebant). Her. 6, 109. 
 
 3. When a Demonstrative, Relative, or Interrogative pronoun, 
 either as a subject or predicate, is connected with a substantive 
 by the copula elvai, or one of the verbs mentioned in No. 2, 
 the Greek commonly, as the Latin regulai-ly, put the pronoun 
 oy means of attraction, in the same gender and number with 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
304 SYNTAX. [^ 241 
 
 the substantive to wliicli it belongs. So too, when the pronoun 
 is in the Ace. and depends on a verb of naming, e. g. 
 
 OSt((s iiTTlv 6 hvip. — A0T1) eVrl vriy')] Ka\ apx^ ttixvtwvtSiv KaKwv. — 
 OStoi t^ 'A^yalol ye SIkiiv airiiv KaKovaiv, i.\\h ypa^iv, PI. Eutyphr. 
 princ. — Tlaph t&v jrpoy€yevj]fi4vcav ixai/^dvere ' ajirr] yap aptffTTj 5 tSaaKa- 
 A.(ii, X. Cy. 8. 7, 24. — Tis iari wriyii ttjs aperris; — ndv-res ovtoi vifi-oi 
 eurip, otis Ti itA^iioj <rwe>^hy Kal SoKifidaav typwfie, X. C. 1. 2, 42. — 'Eiv tis 
 <pl\os /Ml yeyS/iems e5 iroieu/ i^e\ri, oStiJs fioi ^los ia-rl {this is my means of 
 life, hie raihi est victus) 3. 11, 4. 
 
 Rem. 3. Yet the Greeks not unfrequently put 'fie pronoun in the Neat 
 Sing., e. g. 'Eo-Ti Be tovto Tvpavvls, ¥1. lip. 344, a, where in Lat. it would 
 be, Est autem haec tyrannis. Tovr 6 iariy ^ S iKaiocvyt], ih. 432, h. Tovto 
 Trnyi] Kal apxh Kifiiffecos, Phaedr. 245, c. The Ncut. PI. is sometimes used 
 instead of the Neut. Sing. ""EyMye <^»//tl raura fxkv tp \v aplas eti^at, X. An. 
 1.3,18. See ^ 241 , Rem. 3. The neuter pronoun denotes the nature of an object ; 
 on the contraiy, the pronoun that agrees with a noun, denotes the quality of the 
 objeet. Hence there are cases where the two forms of expression cannot be 
 interchanged, e. g. Tl etrrt ^^6yoSf quid est invidia? [what is its nature?) 
 andris iffTL tj)^6vos; quae est invidia? {what is envy ?) The neuter demon- 
 strative is also always used, when it is more fully explained by a word in appo- 
 sition, e.g. Oil TOvT^ ^v €vSaifM)yia, ws eowe, KaKov airaXAa-)^) I*i* Gorg. 478, e 
 
 §241. Exceptions to the general rules of Agreement. 
 
 1. The form of the predicate in many cases does not agree 
 with the subject grammatically, but in sense only (Constractio 
 Kara, avv^friv). Hence, after a collective noun in the Singular, 
 when it is used of persons, as well as after the names of cities 
 and countries, used for the inhabitants, and also with abstracts 
 which stand for concretes, the Plural is used, and such a gender 
 as belongs to the persons denoted by these words. '' 
 
 Her. 9, 23. ri irXTjStos ^Tre/So^&ij o-ov. Th. 4, 32. & &Xkos STparis 
 air e 0atyov. 5, 60. ri ff r p ar SneSo v aye^dpovy. 2, 21. irayrl rpdirw 
 aynpi^uTTO i) ir(f Ais koI -rhy TltpiK\4a iy opy^ e^xoy. With attributive adjec- 
 tives, this construction is rare and only poetic, e. g. II. x> 84. (jtlKi TcKyoy (Hec- 
 tor) ; but it is very common in prose with a Part, whi^h stands in a remotei 
 attributive relation, e. g. Th. 3, 79. iirl ttJC ■7r6\ty iireirKeov iy iroAAp Tapaxj 
 Kol (p6^!f SyTas. X. Cy. 7. 3, 8/ 2 ayaS)^ Kal nurrii ifiux^ii "''XP ^h awoXi- 
 niiy ijjias. X. H. 1. 4, 13. 6 4k toC Hareos ox^oJ Tf^poia-^ Trphs ras yavs, 
 ^aup.d(oyTes Kal ISup Pov\6fieyoi rhy 'AKKt$uiSny. It is very frequent 
 with the pronouns, Th. 1, 136. ipeiyei is Kepxvpay as avruy (sc. KepKvpal 
 ay) euepyeVijs. 4, 15. is tV SirdpTiiy as iiyy4)\^ to yeycyrnidya Trepl TluKoy, 
 eSolty aiiToTs {sc.to7s SwapTidTois). X. C}-. 3. .3, 14. (ruyKa\i(ras iray rh <tt pu- 
 na riKhy eAf|e irphs aiiToiis ToicSSe. Also with the relative pronoun ; see on 
 adjective-sentences, 4 332, 5. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 24.1. J EXCEPTIONS TO THE RULES OF AGREEMENT. 305 
 
 Kemabk 1. "When the subject is expressed by the Neut. article ri or t iin 
 connection with a substantive in the Gen. PI., the predicate is commonly in the 
 1^)., being conformed to the attributive genitive ; the predicative adjective or par- 
 ticiple talies the gender of the attributive genitive. S. Ph. 497. ri tSc Sioki!- 
 yav rhi/ oiKoS' ^irei-yoy iTr6\oi>, {1}irfiyoi> which has the Neut. PI. ri for its 
 subject would regularly have been in the Sing, according to No. 4, but is con- 
 formed to the plurality in Stauuiyai'). PI. Kp. 8. 563, c. t!i rSiy Srripian 
 i\iv^eptirepd icrriv (the Sing. iaTip is used on account of the Neut. PI. 
 i\evdepciTepa, according to No. 4, while iKeu^epiirepa is conformed to the idea 
 of dripia contained in ^ptav). 
 
 Hem. 2. Closely related to the construction just stated, is th« following . 
 When a substantive subject with an attributive substantive in the Gen. PI. 
 expresses periphrastically a substantive idea, as il'ux^) Teipeo-i'oo, the Participle 
 which stands in a remoter attributive relation to the subject, agi-ees in Case 
 with the subject, but in Gender and Number with the substantive in the Gen., 
 which expresses the principal idea of the periphrasis. Od. K, 90. ^h^e S' iirl 
 ^vx^ 07)jSa£ou T eipetriaa ;^pi)(r€oy {rKijirrpoy extoy, the shade of the Jlieban 
 Teiresias came, having a golden sceptre {here %x'^^ agrees in number with ^vxhi 
 but in gender with TcipEO-(ao). 11. P, 459, opciftmy veTeT)piay ^&yea iroWa, 
 ^v^a, Kal ^y^a iroTuyTcu ayaWifieyai ivrepvyitxtriy, 
 
 2. When the subject is expressed, not as a special and defi- 
 nite object, but as a general idea, the predicative adjective is 
 put in the Neut. Sing, without reference to the gender and 
 number of the subject. 
 
 (The English sometimes uses the words thing, or something. Sometimes the 
 pronoun tI, or the substantives xP?M"i ''^pay/ia, are connected with the 
 adjective. When the adjective is in the Superlative, the English uses the 
 article the). 
 
 II. ;3, 204. ovK aya^hy TroKvKoipay'ni [a mnltiplicitt/ of riders is not a gooa 
 thing): ets Koipayas iffTtc. Eur. 0.760. Suvhy ol -iroWol, xaicoipyovs Stov 
 exoiffiirpoiTToeras. JA.M.. Z2^. irK^y yiip TtKyay ip-oiys ^iKraroy Tr6\is. Id. 11. 
 ¥.1295. at fieraPo\al \vTr7ipiy. Jler. 3, S2. tj fiovyapxh KpaTitrroy {a 
 monarchy is the best thing, or most desirable). PI. Rp. 2. 364, a. Ka\hy uhv ri 
 (ratppoaiyq te koI SiKaioiriyr], X'^^^'"^" f«EWoi Kol iirlTrovoy. Also 
 in abbreviated adjective sentences, e. g. Her. 3, 108. ^ Kiaiya, ihy l<rxvo6 
 Taroy icat ^paairaTOV, aira| eV t$ fiif tIktsi ev. PI. Ep. 4, 420, c. oi 
 ocft^aK/iol, KtiWiffToy Sy, ovK oiTTpela iyaXi]\iii.p.4yoi e'uriy. Her. 3, 53. 
 Tupayyls XPVI^<i a(^aKsp6y. PI. Th. 122, b. (rvp.pov\ii iepiy XPVH-"- 'Dam. 
 01. 1. 21, 12. Sttm ittEC h6y05, ty oirp Tci irpAyjiLaTa, ii.i,Tai6y Ti tpaiyerai ical 
 Ktv6y. 
 
 3. "When the subject is an Inf or an entire sentence, tne 
 Greeks usually put the predicative adjective in the Neut. PI- 
 instead of the Sing., where the Enghsh uses the pronoun tt, 
 e. g. it is pleasant to see the sun. This occurs most frequently 
 with verbal adjectives in -to's and -tegs; with those in reos 
 and many in -ro's, the Inf. is implied in the word itself c- g. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
306 SYNTAX. l^ 241 
 
 afivvria. icrn twi, some one is to be helped; TruTTa luri toIs ^iA.019, 
 friends are to he trusted. 
 
 Her. 1, 91. T^y Tmrpufi4v7}V fioioav aSiyar d iiTTi {it is impossible) airo^vyUw 
 Koi aE(j). 3, 83. Si] As, 8ti Sei iva ye -riva r]jiiav PaaAea yeyeV&ai. Th. 1, 86. 
 ous ov rapaSoTea rots 'A^yaioiS cffT^v, oi'Se Kal Koyois StaKpiTeaj aAAci 
 T lUupriT 4a eV Tdx^i- 4, 1. aSivar a ^v ^v ry 'Kap6vTl Tobs AoKpoi/s h}xi>- 
 vea^at. 
 
 Rem. 3. In like manner, the Greek very often uses the PI. raSra, riSt 
 (sometimes also 4Ke7va), to express an idea in its whole extent or in the most 
 general manner, the plural bringing before the mind all the particulars involved 
 in the idea. Th. 6, 77. ovk ''laves rdSe ei(riy, ou5* 'E\\TjSTr6vTioif aWh Auptris, 
 it [this] is not lonians, etc. Aeschin. Ctes. p. 55. ovk ea-ri ravra i.pxh (this is 
 not an office). Id. Leg. p. 50. tout' effnv h TrpoSoTTjs, this is the traitor. PI. 
 I*haedon. 62, d. 6 avSriros &v^panros Tax* ^^ oiij^eiT] r avra, fpevKreov etvai airi 
 tov Se(TiT6Tou. In the English these plurals are generally translated by the 
 singular, as this, that. 
 
 4. The subject in the Neat. Pl.js connected, with a verb ia 
 the Sing., inasmuch as a plurality of objects in the neuter, was 
 regarded by the Greeks as one connected tehole, the individual- 
 ity being lost sight of. 
 
 Ti, fSa rpex^i. — To ■wpdynard ia-TiKoXd. X Yen. 12, 11 irby rfi 
 TToAet cr(5^eTot Kol aw6WvTai to oiKeTa eKdffrov. Eur. M. 618. Kofcovya^ 
 avSphs Satp' ivr)iTiv ovk eX^'* 
 
 Rem. 4. Also in adverbial participial phrases, a neuter plural is joined with 
 a participle in the singular, e. g. SiJ^oi' tout a, quum haec visa, decreta essait. 
 X. An. 4. 1, 13. S6^ay Se toDto, e/c^pu|ay oStoj •Koietv, when these things had 
 been agreed upon, orders were given, etc. Yet, X. H. 3.2,19. 8o|oyTaS6TaC- 
 To Kol TT e p a y ^ 4 y T a, ril /jihy aTpuTevfLoTa aTTTJ^^ey. 
 
 Rem. 5. There arc some exceptions, however, to the rule just stated ; most 
 of them may be referred to the following cases : — 
 
 (a) When the subject in the Neut. PI. denotes persons or living creatures, 
 the verb is very often put in the PI. in accordance with the Construdio 
 KOTi <riye<riy. Th. 4, 88. to t4\ti {the magistrates) rosy AaKeSi/ioyiinv 
 oix.6a-ayTa BpaaiSav i ^4Treii^ay. 7, 57. rocrdSe /uetA 'ASniyaiay 
 e^yri^ iST pdr evo.v. PI. Lach. 180, e. rb, /iapdKia Sia\ey6ii.eyoi 
 i7ri.ii4fi.yTiyTaL 2<»)k/)c£tous ko! <rij>dSpa ^Kaiyova-iv. 
 
 (b) When the objects contained in the plural are to be represented individih 
 ally rather than collectively, or when the idea of plurality composed of 
 several parts (which may also have relation to different times and places) 
 IS to be made prominent,' e. g. X. An. 1. 7, 17. to^tj; tJ i„t4p<t ouk ipaxt- 
 a-aro I3a(n\evs, aW' iwoxapouyToiy (payepct ^aav Kai '/ttVox/ koI iy^pdnrun 
 "iXfri TO \\c£ {many tracks here and there). Cy. 5. 1, 14. rk piox^VP^ 
 i.y^p<inta irairwy, ol/iai, ray iirtStvtitay aKparij eVTi, K&ireira ipuTaaiTi- 
 
 ' It will often, therefore, depend upon the view in the speaker's mind, whethei 
 Ihe Sing, or PI. is to bo used. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f24].J EXCEPTIONS TO THE UULEg-^ AGREEMENT. 
 
 307 
 
 & VI at, the si^m^cariaTi^is^yiStd Jiere because mankind is re/erred to as a 
 .^ ,.dass, but the JMiraTaiTiuvTat, to denote that each individual blames love, tJie 
 charge being iHade too, in a different manner and at different times. Th. 5, 
 26. I{a) [praeter] tovtuv irpbs rhv yLai/TiyiKhv Kol 'EmSaipioy ■!r6\efi.ai/ Kol h 
 a?iXa afi({tOTepots a/xapr'ijij.m a iy 4yov to, mistakes of each of the tvx>,at 
 various points and times. X. An. 1.4,4. ^aav 8c touto Sio reixn. 
 
 ' z) The non- Attic poets from Homer down, very often use the PI. simply on 
 account of the metre. 
 
 Hem. 6. The plural subject, masculine or feminine, is connected in the poets, 
 though rarely, with a verb in the Sing. Pind. 01. 11. (10.) -prmc. laXi'yipvfs 
 S/jivo. iar^paiv i.pxa\ \6ya)V reWer at. This construction is very limited in 
 prose-writers; it occurs with co-ti and ^y, but only at the beginning of a sen- 
 tence (comp. il est cent usages), which then assume the character of impersonal 
 expressions. Her. 1, 26. etrrt Kctt fiera^h ttjs re iraXatijs irSXios Koi toD vtiou eirro: 
 jradiot. PI. Rp. 5, 462, e. ^(Tti koL iv rais &\\aLs tr6\€(riv &pxovTe$ re Kal Sij^ttos. 
 In like manner the Greeks regularly say laTiy, o", sunt, qui. See § 331, Kem. 
 4. The construction mentioned § 242, Kem. 2, is very different from this. 
 
 5. A subject in the Dual, as well as two subjects in the Sin- 
 gular, very often have a predicate in the PL, e. g. Au'w a-rparli 
 a.j'£;^(upijo-av. T£v dirSv Siovrai Kal ■^ yvvij Kal 6 av-qp. The 
 rale seems to be, that when the afftrmation is made of each of 
 the two separately, the Dual is used, but when of both together, 
 the Plural, e. g. Mtvcos koj. KvKovpyo<s vofiov; i&eTr/v {each 
 gave laws) ; ijSov^ crot xat Xviryj iv Ty TToXa jiacrtXeijaeTOV. 
 
 Kem. 7. The Dual is not used in all cases where two objects are spoken of, 
 but only where two similar objects are mentioned, either naturally connected, 
 e. g. ir<i5e, x^V^t ^"> °^ such as we conceive to stand in a close and reciprocal 
 relation, e. g. two combatants, two friends, etc. 
 
 Rem. 8. The Dual very often interchanges with the PI., especially in par- 
 ticiples, e.g. II. A, 621. toI ^ iSpio aireyj/ix'^^'''^ X""^^^^ tr r d v T e ttotI nvoiiiy. 
 Pl.Euthyd.273,d. €76A.a<roT7)y &ii.fii> fiKt^avres els aW^Aiu. 
 
 Rem. 9. A subject in the PI. sometimes has a verb in the Dual, when two 
 objects mutually connected, or two pairs, are spoken of, e. g. II. S, 452, sqq. dis 
 S' Ste x^f/*"^^"' TOTaiiol, kot' bpeffipi ^eoyres, is luayi-yK^iav <rvij.$i\- 
 \eToy SPpiftov SSaip, . . &s ray liuryo/ifvuv yiviro lax'll te <j>6Pos re (two streams 
 running on opposite sides are compared with two hostile parties). II. S-, 185, 
 sqq. ady^e re Kol ai Xl6Sapye, Koi A&ay Aiiiire re S!e, vvy fioi rliy KoiuSijy o tt o - 
 riyeToy, — 191. oAA' i(po jiapT elroy Acal aveiZeT ov (two pairs). 
 
 Kem. 10. The following points also are to be noted in respect to the 
 Dual: — 
 
 (a) A substantive in the PI. is very often connected with the Duals Sid, 
 Sio, but seldom with Svo7y. II. t, 10. Sua vUes. H. <, 4. Sc€/io< 
 Siio. Aesch. Ag. 1395. Svoly ol/idy/i-aa-iy. PI. Soph. 244, b. irpos- 
 xpi/ieyoi Svo'iv 6y6/j.a<riy. PI. Kep. 614, c. Sio xt^fMOTa ^x"/*'" 
 yai aW-^iKoiy; 
 
 (b) The Duals ti5, to?//, rdiSe, ToTySe, rcnna, Toiroiv, avrii, avToly, S>, oTc, in 
 prose are used both as masculine and feminine (i. e. they are of common 
 gender), e. g. Sjmi/hb ri noXee — t& yvyaine — &fuj>a roira r& Ti/iepa — toT> 
 yeyetreoiy — Toirca ri rexya — roiroiy toIv Ktyrjffeoty — rii dSa. The Fern 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
308 SYNTAX. 
 
 li 241 
 
 form of the article rd, is extr.eme^.fee4;-3!"«3:xa £trTt TOis ^tAois, 
 769 ; oftener the forra TaTy,X. H. 6, 4. 17. ±"1. i'im. Tt,*a',-':' 
 8" oVa-aiv irapSrivoiv, S. 0. C. 445. Tai^a occurs* Av. Pac. 847, but 
 r air a IV is more frequent, e. g. TotjTot;' fji.6vaiyj S.O.C SSQje/fTojJ- 
 raiy, 1149; rairaty 5c Taiv SiaA^Kaiy, Isae. 5, 15. Ai/To, S. Ant. 
 570. Besides the pronouns mentioned, sometimes other attributives also 
 in the Dual are used as of common gender ; the participle but seldom. 
 PI. Phaedr. 237, d. Tjfiwv iv eKdarcfi Svo riv4 iarov ISea &pxovTe koI 
 ayovTE, oXv ^-TTofie^a — 'tovtu Se K. T. \. 
 
 6. When the predicate is a substantive connected to the 
 subject by etrat or any other verb having the character of a 
 copula (i 240, 2), the verb often agrees by means of attraction, 
 as commonly in Latin, with the nearest predicative substantive. 
 
 Her. 3, 60. Tb fjJrjKos rod op{tyfxaTos eirTct ffrddtoi el(ri. 2, 15. at Qtj^cu 
 KXyv-KTOS i Ka\4eT0, Th. 3, 112. earhv Svu \6(J>a) t] 'ISofievjj vi^K^. 
 4, 102. rh xapiov tovto, 'oirep irp6Tepov 'Eyyea 6 Sol eKaKovyro. Isocr. 
 Paneg. 51, b. etrri a pxiKciiraTa ruy i^yay Kai' fieyiffras Svyaaretas e^oyTa 
 2Ki5^ai Kal Qp^Kes Kal Udpffai. So also in the participial constraction, e. g. Th. 
 5,4. KaToXufi^dyovtri Kal ^piKiyvias, hv epvfia 4y rp Aeoyriyr]. Pi. L. 735, e. 
 Tohs fi^yttrra ^^Tj/j.apTtjKiTas, aytdrovs Se ovras, fzeyiffTTjy Se oZffav $\(i^7jv 
 TTtiAews, aiTaWdrT^ty elu^^y (instead of Syras). So also Her, 3, 108. tj \4aiya, 
 ihy Iffx^poraroy Kal ^padraTov, aira^ iy rep j3iw tIktu eV, instead of 
 ^oCo-o!. Comp. No, 2, A similar attraction occurs sometimes in sentences 
 denoting comparison, e, g, Ttoy Koivwy ri &pa Sieyooi^tjy, S>y ovSey, ah fia\Xov, ^ 
 Tir &Wos ex^'t PI, Theaet. 209, a. {exf here agreeing with tij instead of ffiil. 
 In Latin this is much more frequent. 
 
 7. A superlative connected with a partitive Gen. commonly 
 lakes the gender of the subject, more rarely that of the partitive 
 Gen. 
 
 II. (^, 253. {alerov) '6s^^ 'd^a. KdpT ttXT6s re Kal &KltrTQS nrn^riyuy. x> 
 139. KlpKoSj 4Xa.<pp6TaTos ireTsTjvuy. Her. 4, 85. 6 U6yros Tre\ayeca> 
 awdyray ire'i/juKe Sruv/iair idraTos. Menandr. p. 193. (Mein.) voauv x^^^- 
 TTi^Taros <p^6yos. X. C. 4. 7, 7. 5 ^\ios rhy irdyra XP^^^^^ '^'^^'^^^ Ka^irpi- 
 TaTos Siy Sia/ieyei. PI. Tim. 29, a. 6 k6itij.os KaWia-TOs ray yeyoyoray. 
 Plutarch. Consol. 102. i;. ^ Kivri xo^«TaTcJT7j TraSiay. On the contrary, 
 Isocr. ad Nicocl. extr. trufi^ovXos aya^hs XRVo'ificiraroy Kol rvpavviK^- 
 TUToy a-n-dy-ray icTi)iidTa>v iirrl (the Superlative here taking the gender 
 of the partitive Gen. KTr!iJ.dTo>y). 
 
 Rem. 11. When the idea of personality in general is to be expressed^ the 
 Masc. form may be used, referring to words denoting females ; (in this and 
 other similar irregularities, less regard is had to strict grammatical principles 
 than to the general idea to be expressed,) e. g. SmeKriKiStaaiy as Ifih (taToAeXEi/i- 
 fieyai aSeKfai Te zeal aS€\</>iSar kcH ave<fiial TOffavTat, Sst' cTvai iv rfj olxia ■reaaa- 
 piSKaiSeKa tous i\fvSiepovs {free men), X. C. 2. 7, 2. 'H imlpo's o5<ra' fioVxos 
 avK dw'JeTai riKToyras &\\6vs, owe exova-' aurii rexya, she cannot cduri 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
r^4],J EXCEPTIONS TO THE KULE'' -"^ SUBJECTS. 309 
 
 ""I tti, the singular iarl is »-^':A>rt/i young, Eur. Andr. 711. So also the 
 'fc ■ rn '"'' ^"'•^- ^^ife-^'^-wgT-^'Cn a woman speaks of herself in the PI., c. s 
 , SnX. HfSTTEleetra says of herself) ireo-iTiJ/iey, eJ xp^i, Tarpi t iti.o,poi fisvoi. 
 
 Eem. 12. Sometimes the first Pers. PI., or the Pers. prononn first Pers. PI 
 IS used, for the sake of modesty, instead of the Sing., the speaker representing 
 his own views and actions as common to others. This usage, which is very 
 frequent in Latin, is rarely found among the Greeks in the Common language. 
 n 'AXKtPtaSTi, Kai i) litis tt)Kikoutoi Syres Seivol Ttk toioCto ^fiev (I also was at 
 that age sharp m these matters), X. C. 1. 2, 46. 'EwoitC tto^' ^ijlIv 4yipfTo {the 
 thought once occurred to me), Cy. 1. 1, 1. Ttepl fiei/ oZv twi/ -irpaX^evTui/ iv tcf 
 rra^ivTi -raW etxof^f" ewe?!'. Among the poets, particularly the Tragedians, 
 this use of the PI. is more frequent, p,nd a transition from the Sing, to the PI. 
 often occurs, e.g. Eur. H. E. 858. "HAioj/ juapTujxffiecr&a SfZo', & Spav ol 
 fioi\oiuu. Hipp. 244. alSoi/ie&a ykp to \f \e7/i€Vo lioi. 
 
 Rem. 13. In an address directed to several persons, the Greek has several 
 peculiar idioms : — 
 
 (a) The Imp. Sing. tlir4 and some others, which denote an exhortation oi 
 animating call, e. g. S 7 e, (^ € p f , 1 5 e, is frequently connected in the Attic 
 writers with a Voc. PI., or with several vocatives, e. g. PI. Euthyd. 283, 
 b. eiVc fioi, 3> 'S.iixpaTis re KaX i/ieTs ol &W01. Dem. Chers. 108, 74. eiVe 
 /u», fiovKcieo&e. 
 
 (b) In an address directed to several persons, the predicate in the PI. oiten 
 refers to a Voc. which denotes only one of the persons addressed ; this is 
 done for the purpose of making the principal person prominent. Od. ,8, 
 310. 'Avriyo*, otiras etrriv inr€p(pidKoifrL jtte^' dfiiv Suivua^at, ^, 85. j/7ja 
 l&iverf, falSt/j.' 'OSva-trev. X. H. 4. 1, 11. It, i(pr\, i/ifTs, Si 
 'II piTniSa, Kal S iSlio'KeTe ainhv fiou\T]^vcu Hwep Tifiets ' oi fiev Si] avaff- 
 TivTes iSiStuTKop. An interchange of the Sing, and PI. often occurs 
 among the Tragedians, when the chorus is either addressed by others, or 
 speaks of itself, the poet having in mind, at one moment, the whole 
 chorus, at another their leader, e. g. S. 0. C. 167. {eTvoi, iJi S^t" iSuoj- 
 ^a ffot iriffTet/iras. 
 
 (c) The second Pers. Imp. instead of the third, is sometimes connected with 
 the indefinite prononn tIs or iras tij, or even with a substantive and 
 tIi ; this idiom, which is not common, occurs mostly in the Attic dia- 
 logue, e. g. Ar. Av. 1186. p^i^pei (instead of x<"Pe/t(u) Sevpo vas fnn)p4- 
 TTjs {every servant come hither): Ttj^eue (instead of 'To|eu€Tft)) iras rts 
 {every one use his bow). Hence, also, the transition from the third Pers. to 
 the second, e. g. Eui'. Bacch. 327. (345.) o-teixe't a tis us rdxos, 4\Sri>y 
 Be ^aKOVS ro6sS', 'Iv* ottayoaKOKetf fwx^o7s Tptaii/ov Kavdrpe^ov efnra\Lf, 
 Kol — /jl e'a e s. Comp. Larger Grammar, 5 430, 2 (7). 
 
 f 242. Agreement when there are several subjects. 
 
 1. When there are two or more subjects connected together 
 there is a double relation to be distinguished : — 
 
 (a) The subjects are regarded as expressing multitude, and 
 the predicate is referred to all the subjects equally ; then 
 the predicate is in the Phiral, and when there are but two 
 subjects, in the Dual or even in the Plural (comp. k 241, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
310 SYNTAX. l^ 242 
 
 5) ; the gender of the predicative adjective is determined 
 
 according to the following rules : — 
 
 (a) With words of like gender denoting persons, the 
 adjective has the same gender; with words of dif. 
 ferent gender denoting persons, the gender of the 
 adjective is confoi-med to the masculine subject 
 rather than to the feminine or neuter, and to the 
 feminine rather than the neuter ; in both cases the 
 adjective and verb are plural. 
 (^) With words of like gender denoting things, the 
 adjective is either in the same geuder and in the 
 plural, or is in the neuter plural; with words of 
 different gender denoting things, the adjective is in 
 the neuter plural. 
 (y) When words denoting persons and things stand in 
 connection, the adjective is plural and takes the 
 gender of the words denoting persons, when the 
 persons are to be considered as the more prominent 
 idea, or the things are to be viewed personally ; but 
 when both are to be viewed merely as things, the 
 adjective is in the neuter plural. 
 
 Kal Kii^Ti Se KoL a^vfiia Koi Svs KO\ia Kal (jLav ia TroWti/cts iroAXots Sik 
 T^f ToD aci^Tos Kaxe|iai' ^Is r^y Sidyoiaf i f^^iriirr ov(r tv, X. C. 3. 12, 6. XinKpa- 
 Tet Sfii\7]Ta yevo^iya Kpirias re Kal 'AKKl^tdBrj s TrKeiiTTa KaKa tV 
 tr6\iv iiroLriffii'rrii'j ib. 1. 2, 12. 'H paK\7Js icaX ©Tiffebs fi6yoi ray irpoye- 
 yeyrjueywy vir^p rod ^iou Tov tS>v ay^pcxiiraiy a^KijTal kut 4a'TT](ray, Isocr. 
 Pan. 212. Kal ri yvyii Kal i ayiip aya&oi turiy, PI. Men. 73. Ai Si irou 
 Tj^eT e pat r' &\oxol- Kal vi]Tria T^Kva eiar' iyl fieydpois iroT tS eyfieyatf 
 11.0, 137. 'ris elSe irarepa n KaX fiTjTepa Kal aS€\<pobs Kal ttiv Ioutou 
 yvvatna alxi^aXdiTov s ycy ei/ijju ez/ous, iS^Kpuffey, X. Cy. 3. 1, 7. 'H 
 py^i Kal 71 affvy effia ettri KaKaL — ^cifMoros KdXKo s Kal I O" x ^ s SeiAiy Kal 
 KuKcfi ^vyotKovyra TrpeTro vra ^af;/eTai, PI. Menex. 246, C. "Evyeyeiai Tt 
 Koi Svyd/j-e ts Kol r tfial di]\d iffriy a y a S' ^ Syra, PL '^Hi' 7] ay op h, Kol Ti 
 vpvravfi'ioy Tlapto} \l^^ i] ff kt] fi.4ya, Her. 3, 57. Ai^oi re Kot i7\iy^ot 
 Kol ^uAa Kal KepafMos ardnTbis 4 ^^Hfifieya ovSey xp^trtjUcJ iffriy, X. C. 
 3.1,7. *H T^XV f^^l ^i\tTtiT OS ^ffay rcoy epycov Kiptot, Acsch. *H KttA- 
 \^trT7^ IT oKtr eia Te Kal 6 KaWLO'r o s &y^p Xonrct ti.y 7]fuy eft^ SieXi^eZt'i 
 'vpayyis re Kal rvpayyus, PL Up. 562. a. 
 
 (b) Each subject is considered separately and hy itself; then 
 the predicate is confined to one of the subjects and 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
?242J AGREEMENT WITH SEVERAL SUBJECTS. 311 
 
 agrees with it. Tliis construction is also used, when one 
 of the subjects is to be represented as more prominent 
 than the others. There are here three positions of the 
 predicate: (a) before all the subjects; (b) after all the 
 subjects ; (c) after the first subject. 
 
 Pl.Lys. 207, d. <l>t\ci a-e i -iraT^ip /col ^ ju^TTjp. Her. 5, 21. €?ireT(! <r(pi 
 KoX ox'hl'-aTa Kol &epiirovT(s Koi t) iraira iroAXj) ira/Jao-Kcu)). X. R. Ath. 1, 2. 
 ol TrevriTiS Kol S S^/ioj -irXeov ^x^'- K- Symp. 109, >;. cu tijuoI airots Kol to 
 Ifpd Tck irapi tuv cu/hpiTruv i)<f>avl(iTo. Th. 8, 63. ol iv tJ MiX^t^ koI 6 
 'Affrioxos . . . i^ipa-riere. Th. 3, 5. MeAfor Ai£k(i)i> aipiKveTTat (col 
 'EpfietiivSas OrijSaioj. X. An. 2. 2, 1. iaXTyos ^x''""" k"* <"' "■"'' out^. 
 
 Remake 1. Sometimes the verb, though it follows different subjects, agrees 
 with the first subject, the remaining subjects being then represented as subor- 
 dinate, e. g. X. An. 1. 10, 1. ^Sao-iAeiy Se Kol 01 avv aiirf StdKuv elsTrlir- 
 Tfi. So also with the attributive adjective, e. g. X. An. 1. 5, 6. IittA 6$o- 
 Kobs Kol 7]fito06\ioy 'ArTtKo^s (the adjective here agreeing with ofioXovs 
 rather than 7jfjLio06Kioy). Th. 8, GS.'AiTTioxos i-Trv^ero Thv ^TponfiixiSrjv 
 KaX Tas vavs a-jre\Tj\v^6ra, 
 
 Rem. 2. The verb sometimes stands in the Sing., if several nouns in the 
 PI. denoting things precede, when it is intended to represent those nouns as 
 making up one whole, as a condition, state, etc., e. g. PI. S. 188, b. koI jtc^x""' 
 Kul xaAo^ai Kol ipv(rt$at iic irXcoye^ias Koi axoaiitas irtpl iM.iiXa ray roioih 
 Tuy ylyyerat epwriKau. 
 
 Reu. 3. When the subjects are connected by if — ij, aut — aut,Kal — Kai, 
 et — et, oi/r€ — oSre, neque — neque, the predicate agrees with the subject 
 standing nearest to it, if each subject is to be regarded separately and by itself, 
 e. g. tj ouTos, t) iK€7yos a\Ji^ \4-yei, aut hie, aut illc vera dicit; but when the 
 subjects are not considered separately or as independent of each other, but as 
 expressing plurality, the predicate is in the PL, e. g. Dem. Aph. 817, 12. & 
 ATifioipaii fj @TipnrnlSris ^x "'"'■'• 
 
 Rem. 4. The attributive adjective commonly agrees with the substantive 
 nearest to it, e. g. 'Afi^oripois oi avroX UpKoi koX ^v^fxax^o. KareffrTj, Th. 
 But where perspicuity or emphasis requires it, the adjective is repeated with 
 each substantive, e.g. inivTes &v5pes koX traffat yuya7Kesj or the con- 
 structions stated under No. 1 are observed, e.g.'HpaKXrjs koX 0ri<revs fiSi/ot. 
 Tlariip Kol iii\T7ip KaX aSiXipoX oixfoASroi yeyivrifji^voi, etc. Sec 
 examples under No. 1 . 
 
 2. When several subjects of different persons have a com- 
 mon predicate, the verb (which is commonly plural) is in the 
 first person rather than the second or third, and in the second 
 rather than the third. 
 
 'E7ci) Kcd (TV ypdipofiev, ego et tu scrihimus. — 'E^i Kol eKsTyos ypA^o^iev, ego et ilU 
 scribimus — 'Eyi Kai ffb Kai l/ceTyoj ypdijiofiey, ego et tu el ille scribimus. — 2i Kol 
 ixeTyos 7p(Sf erf , tu et ille scribitis. — 'Eyii Kol iKcTyoi ypitpofiev. — 2ii koI iKuvoi 
 ypi(pere. — 'H/ieis Kol eKeiyoi ypafo/iey. — 'Tfieis km Ikuvos ypatpere. 
 
 Rem. 5. Sometimes also for the sake of a more forcible'contrast, the person 
 of the verb agrees with the subject nearest to it, e. g. X. C. 4. 4. "'. irtpl toS 
 14 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
312 SYNTAX. [i 243. 
 
 StKolov "Trdvu oifiot vvv exc'v ciireiV, 7rp!»s & otfre (rtf of^r' fey i.\Kos ouSels So- 
 van' avremeiir. PI. Phaedon. 77, d. ii/iiBi Se fwi SokcTs ai re ifol Stufdas 
 ilSeas tiv Kol tovtov SiairpayixareiffairAat {pertractare) -rbv Ximov. X. An. 2. 1, 
 1 8. (T i5 T6 yap "EAAtji/ el icaX 7ifj.€ts. Comp. liem. 4. 
 
 } 243. Remarks on certain Peculiarities in the use 
 of Number. ' 
 
 1 . The Sing, has sometimes a collective sense and takes the place of the 
 Pi, ; thus in the poets : taKpvov, axrls, araydv, arax^s, harvest, etc. ; 
 in prose: kS^q, etr&iis (like vestis), \ldos, ttAiv&os, £/(te\os, ^ fir- 
 iros, cavalry, t] htrvls, a body of troops, etc. 
 
 2. Entire nations, that live under a monarchical government, are sometimes 
 designated in prose, by the Sing., e. g. 6 Tie pa-ns, the Persians, i 'ApdPtos, 
 i AvS 6 s, 6 'Affo-ipios, etc. This rarely occurs in respect to nations that 
 have a free government, e.g. rhv "EWriva (j)l\ov irpos^ecr^ai, Her. 1, 69. Also 
 the words (rrpaTuirqs, voKeiuos and the like, are sometimes used in the Sing, 
 instead of the PI. 
 
 3. The PI. properly belongs only to common nouns, not to proper names, nor 
 to the names of materials, nor to abstracts ; still, even such nouns in certain rela 
 tions take the PL, namely, when they express the idea of a common noun : — 
 
 (1) Proper names : (a) to denote several individuals of the same name, e. g. 
 Siio KaTuAoi ; (b) to denote persons that possess the nature or the qualities 
 of the individual named, u. g. PI. Theaet. 169, b. oi 'MpaKXies re /col @i\- 
 frees, men like Hercules and Theseus. 
 
 (2) Names of materials occur not seldom in the PI., since either the single 
 parts, which make up the material, or the different kinds of a given material, 
 are contemplated, e. g. S,\es, salt; \\id,p,aAoi, sand; irvpol koI Kpt^ai; &i>e 
 fios Kol ijSaTa, oTyot ttuKvt e\eis, olvOL iraXaloi', |i5\a Koi Ki^os, 
 etc. 
 
 (3) Abstracts in the plural have a concrete signification, since the plural is 
 used when the separate kinds or circumstances or relations of the abstract idea, 
 are denoted, or the manifestation of the abstract action, as repeated in diiferent 
 places or times ; hence also when the abstract idea relates to several persons, 
 e.g. Herod. 7, 158. ifuv p.eyi\aL a<pe\lai -re Kol etravpeffeis yeyivafri. 3, 
 40. e'/iol OI iral iieyd\at evTvxlai ovk apetTKovai. So eX'&li inimicitiae; ard- 
 (Teis, seditiones ; <pt\iai, raXaiiriapiai, aerumnae; Srdvarot, mortes ; i^^x't 
 Kal aciAiTTj, Snip-ol, animi ; <ji6$oi, rppovf^treis, reflections; &.v4x^^""> 
 avSpiai, brave deeds; iyleiai Kal eiie^lat rav ao>iia-rav, like valetiidines, 
 etc. ; TT i <r T 6 1 s, testimonia ; elivoias Sovvat, to show ads of kindness ; x t' P ' 'r f s. 
 presents; in many cases, the PI. denotes a plurality of parts, e. g. ttAoBto., 
 treasures, divitiae {irAovros, riches, abstract) ; ya/ioi, nuptiae; puKres, thehouri 
 or watches of the night, horae noctumae; Ta(pat, /wjcra,. etc. So, e. g. in Eng- 
 lish, How long these nights are ? when one night is meant. 
 
 liBMARK. The Greeks commonly use the PI. of Abstracts as well as Con- 
 cretes, when; they refer to a PI. Adj., the idea contained in the abstract term 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 244.] THE ARTICLE. 312 
 
 being then applicable to several persons, e. g. kcmoI toj if'i'X'^si ica\ol rh 
 trdifiaTa.; ipurroi tAs ^licreij; Koi ra7s yv^nats Kal to7s aiiitairi 
 (ri()oAAO|tiej'oi, X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. 
 
 4. When neuter adjectives, pronouns, and numerals are used as substantives, 
 the Greek, like the Latin, always employs the PI., when several individual 
 things, individual relations or circumstances, a whole which is represented as 
 consisting of single parts, are to be understood by these words : the English often 
 uses the singular here, as this, that (rauTa, 4Keiva). Comp. § 241, Rem. 3. The 
 Sing, of adjectives used substantively is put in the Neut., when an abstract idea, 
 a whole as such, is to be expressed, c. g. rb Ka\6y, the beautiful in the abstract, 
 tJi kukSv, the had. The PL, on the contrary, denotes a concrete idea, i. e. the 
 different parts, classes or conditions which are implied in the abstract, e. g. tA 
 KoKi, res pulchrae ; rh, Kaxd, mala, the evil deeds, things, etc. 
 • 
 
 ^ 244. The Akticle. 
 
 1. The subject as well as every substantive, takes the 
 article, when the speaker wishes to represent an object as 
 a definite one, and to distinguish it from other objects of the 
 same kind. The substantive without the article denotes 
 either an indefinite individual, or it represents an abstract 
 idea in the most general manner, without any limitation. 
 
 'Ay^paTos: (a) a man, as an individual, i. e. some one of the race of men ; 
 (b) man, a man, as a species; 6 dy^puiros : (a) the man, as an individual, the 
 man whom I have in view and consider as an individual distinguished from 
 other men ; (b) the man, as a class or species, as I think of him as something 
 definite and limited in respect to his entire nature or constitution; — yd\a, 
 miVc, ri yjLXa,the milk [as a particular substance) ; <rotj>la, wisdom, jj irofjyia, 
 the wisdom (viewed as a definite property or particular kind of wisdom) ; ipiXoao^ia, 
 philosophy in general, tj (fnXoirotliia, as a particular science or a particular branch of 
 philosophy. When the Inf. is to be considered as an abstract substantive, it has 
 the article, e. g. tJi ypiip^tv. But the abstract noun takes the article when 
 It expresses a concrete idea, e. g. fi trrdcris, the (particular) sedition; rh 
 vpayiiajihe (particular) &ed; hence also the PI. ai ardaeis, tH xpiy 
 fiara. 
 
 Remark 1. From what has been said, it follows : (a) That the substantive, 
 jii the subject of a sentence, may stand with or without the article, according 
 as it is intended to be represented, either as a deiinite or an indefinite object ; 
 (b) on the contrary, that the substantive, as a predicate, must be generally with- 
 oit tlio article, since the predicate does not denote a definite individual, but only 
 ;hc abstract idea of a quality in general. Her. 1, 103. yif ^ rip-ipa iyhero, the 
 ■lay became night. Isocr. Nicocl. 28, a. K6yos &Ai)S-}js koI v6iuiios Ka\ Siiccuos il'uxis 
 aya^s Kal TTia-TTis eXStax6v iari. But when the predicate denotes a definite, 
 a before-mentioned, or a well-known object (No. 6), it of course takes the 
 ar^ficle. Her. 1, 68. irvve$iX\eTo rhv 'OpeffTjin tovtov elmt, he concluded that 
 this teas the Orestes, namely, the one before-mentioned. 5,77. ot S' 'n!vo^6Tat 
 ii.dKioi'To oi Traxi'fS, '/'e rich bore the name of [before-mentioned) iirm06Tcu. Ir 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
314 SYNTAX. [5 244. 
 
 passages like X.. Cy.3.3,4. 6 /liv ravra elwiiv Tra/yli^jurev ■ S Se 'Ap/j-evios (ru/j- 
 irootTrefnre Ko! oi fiAXoi triiin-es &v&pmroi, ftraKoAoScTfl rby eti epyerriv, tJk 
 &ySpa rhy ayaSfov. An. 6. 6, 7. oi Si &\\0i of -irapSi/res tui> aTparianuti 
 tirix^tpovffi ^dWeiif r'bv Ae^inirov, avaKa\ovvr€s rhv ir poS6rT]v, the article 
 denotes, that the ideas expressed by benefactor, honest man, traitor, point to a 
 definite action either before named, or well-known. — When the predicate is a 
 superlative or a substantive with a'superlative, the article is not used in Greek ; 
 the English, however, uses it here. Oi *o(rijXiTo! eiVi vovripSTaTOi iu/^pdnrup 
 Koi aSiKiiTaToi {the most mcked, etc.),Dem. 2,5, 2. 'AcSpl Ka\<p Koyai^ ipya- 
 irla Kparia-TTi 4(rTi ywpyia, X. Oee. 6, 8. Comp. ^ 241, 7. 
 
 2. Hence the article is used to denote the whole compass of 
 the idea, everything which can be included under the term 
 used; one object is here considered as a representative of the 
 
 whole class. 
 
 • 
 
 'O Sc&paiiros ScTjTiJy iari, men (i. e. all men) is mortal. XpJi 'i airh <p^4y 
 yeff^at rhv jii]Topa Kol rhv v6fi.ov, Aesch. Ctos. 16. 'H avSpeia KtAi) 
 ^(TTi;', i. e. everything which is understood by the idea ot anSpela, Ti yd\a 
 ^Sv fffriv. 
 
 Rem. 2. Where the English uses the indefinite article a or an, denoting 
 merely a class, as a man, or an individual of a class who is not distinguished 
 from the others, as some man, it not being determined what man, the Greek 
 omits the article ; hence iv^puiros in botli instances. 
 
 Hem. 3. Common nouns sometimes omit the article, where, according to the 
 statement in No. 1, it would be inserted. This is the case: (a) In appellations 
 denoting kindred and the like, where the particular relation is obvious of itself, 
 or is sufficiently definite from the connection or the context, e. g. irariip, nilriip, 
 v'ws, &Se\ip6s, voLSes, yovus, ip^p, husband, y\ivi\, wife, etc. Comp. the expreS' 
 sions. Father has said it. Mother conies ; (b) When two or more independent sub- 
 stantives are united, forming one whole, e. g. iraiSes (cal yvi/aiKes (like English 
 wife and child, horse and rider), ircjAis koI oIkIoi [city and houses), Th. 2, 72; (c) 
 When common nouns are, at the same time, used as proper nouns ; these being 
 definite from their nature or from usage, do not need the article, e. g. i{\io;, obpar- 
 v6s, dcTTv, used of Athens, tt6ms, of a particular city, known from the context, 
 yri, of a particular country, $aiTL\€is, of a particular king, commonly the king of 
 Persia, etc. ; other like expressions are Sve^os, d(i\a<r<ra, etc. The article is 
 often omitted also with words denoting time, though this is generally the case 
 only in connection with prepositions, e. g. a.(j>' Tin4pa,s, fiexp^ vvxris, k/jut Sp^pai, 
 •jrepl TjXlov SvtTfiAs, juera 'l\iov aKaffiv. The omission of the article is altogether 
 natural when a common noun has an abstract signification, or expresses an 
 action, or the manner of an action, most frequently in connection with prepo- 
 sitions, e. g. riyi7ir^ai ^epvs, to believe in gods. 'Esrl Seiiruov 4?^etu, to come to 
 
 ire), Her. 3, 14 
 
 Eem. 4. The names of the arts and sciences, of the virtues and vices, often 
 omit tlie article, even where they occur in a definite relation, since, as well- 
 known appellatives, they have come to be used as a kind of proper names, e. g. 
 XldvTa iiev oZv efioiye SoxeT Ti, KaA.i Kal to aya&a iaKnirii ilvai, ovx T^Kurra Be 
 aaippoaipn. X. C. 1. 2, 23. 'Eire! o5i/ t<£ tc SlKaia Koi ra £AXa KoKi T€ koI 
 i.yc&h irdv'ia Stperfi irpdrTerat, SrjKov elvai, in koI SiKaioaivrt koX t) Sx\ij irnffo 
 iffT% (Toipla itrri, 3. 9, 5. 'EiriffTTifin &pa oocpia iirriv, 4. 6, 7. Mii\i<rTa y^ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 244.] THE ARTICLE. 313 
 
 i/iftiv^'^Ket airip Irn-iK^s, Cy. 8. 3, 25. The omission of the article is natural 
 also, when an abstract is to be represented actively, e. g. 'Ev ipi\o<ro<pia (acriv, 
 tn philosophizing (in philosophando), PI. Phaed. 68, c. But whore a particular 
 art or science, etc. is to be distinguished from another, the article is used, e. g. 
 fi ^T|i opiiefi, Ti apiStntiTMii. The substantives itiyeSios, irKriStos, i'^os, e8- 
 poj, j8(i&oj, yevos and the like, are veiy often found in the Afic. or Dat. 
 without the article, as they are to be received as a kind of adverbial expression, 
 e.g. iroTojuJis KliSyos tvop.a, cipos Svo irKi^aav. two plethra ividcX. An. 1. 
 2, 23. 
 
 3. The article is veiy often used with common nouns to 
 denote what belongs to an object or is requisite for it, what is 
 due to it. 
 
 X. Cy. 3. 3, 6. 'EmfilCe ydp, ci 'ixcurTos rh intpos a^ieiraiyov Troi^ffEie, rh '6\ov 
 auT^ KoXws ^x^^^ (partem, cut praeest; centuriam suam], 8. 3, 3. vstfias Sh Toiniav 
 {jSiv tTTo\wv\ rb fiepos eKdtrru ruv TiyefiSfoiy, iK4\evirev aiirohs tovtqh K0(Tfte7v 
 robs avTuii/ <pl\ovs {partem debitam). An. 7. 6, 23. i,?i\d, (palrirt &v, «Sei t4 
 iv4xvpa rdre Ka^eiv, i)s jUijSe el ifiovAero iS6i/aT0 &y Tuvra i^airaray (the meas- 
 ures requisite to guard against deception). 5. 6, 34. ol arpariarai i]mlKovv aiir^ 
 el K'fi^ovrat avodidpdffKovTa, Srt t^v SiKijy iiri^ffoiev (the dite, deserved pun- 
 ishment). 
 
 4. Hence the article very often takes the place of the posses- 
 sive pronoun, when it is connected with such substantives as 
 naturally belong to a particular person, mentioned in the sen- 
 tence. In such cases, the English uses the possessive pronoun. 
 
 ol yove7s t A rexva ffrepyovfTtv (parents love THEIR children). 'O (rrpaTTiyhs 
 Toi/s trrpar tt&ras iTrl Tobs iro\efiiovs &yei (leads HIS soldiers). Kvp6s re 
 KaTaiTT^S^eras airh rov iipfiaros rbv ^apaKa iveSu Kol hva^hs eVi rhy 
 Xttttov ra iraXra els ras x^'po's eA.oj8e, X. An. 1. 8, 3. 
 
 5. As the article may make one object prominent, by indi- 
 vidualizing it and presenting it apart from others, it is often 
 used, when an object is to be represented in a distributive rela- 
 tion to the predicate of the sentence. 
 
 lIposairov(n Se jiiaSihv 6 KSpos virurxye7rai Siiireiy ayrl SopeiKoS rpia ri/iiSapeiKi 
 Toi /iTiyhs r^ arparidrr) (singulis mensibus singulis militibus, three half- 
 Ikirici a month to each soldier, comp. English so much the pound), X. An. 1. 3, 21. 
 (Comp 5. 6, 23.) J^apeixby eKoaros olffei rov ii-nvhs iiiav (each of you shall 
 nave a Baric each month), 7. 6, 7. 'O Se a-vye^icr^eh rhv eya ifiaf^hy eVi Jfij) 
 irpoiriixireiv, &Te lA) irapel-i) mWd, Siyair" ttv aX-imas T^ evX xp'j'r&t" (singula pan is 
 frastra, to dip each morsel into the different sauces), Id.'C. 3. 14, 6. 
 
 G, The article is properly and originally a demonstrative 
 pronoun, and is still often used in a demonstrative sense. This 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
316 SYNTAX. [} 244. 
 
 is particularly the case in Homer, where the article almost uni- 
 formly has a pronominal relation. Comp. { 247. 
 
 The simplest use of the article as a, demonstrative, is as follows : An object 
 not before "described or referred to, when it is first mentioned as an indefinite 
 individual, does not take the article; but when it is repeated, it takes the article, 
 because it has been already referred to and is known, e. g. EiSov fiySpo • d 5t 
 aii-l]p lioi eAe|€i/. Hence the article is also used when the speaker points to an 
 object, u. g. *6pe /ioi, & irai, -rh Pifi\iov {the book = this or that book). In this 
 relation, the article maybe used with material nouns, e. g. Ao's /xoi rh yaKa {the 
 milk, ichith had been pointed out) ; and even when a jjart only of the material is 
 referred to, tlie article is employed, though material nouns elsewhere" are always 
 without the article, as they contain no idea of individuality, e.g. Uiva toB 
 olvov {of this wine). The article is often used in speaking of persons or things 
 known and celebrated, where the Latin uses the pronoun ilk, u. g. ii Ka\hs vdis, 
 ' that beautiful hoy ; this is very frequent with proper names. See No. 7. "Otj 
 Eep^Tjs ayeipas t^v ayapi^fiTiToy ffTpartav ^f^ev 4ir\ r^y 'EWdta {that 
 numberless host), X. An. 3. 2, 13. 
 
 7. Personal proper names as such, i. e. so far as they in them- 
 selves denote merely individuals, do not take the article. But 
 they take it, when they have been already mentioned, and 
 are afterwards referred to (No. 6) ; or even when they have not 
 been before named, if it is intended to designate them as weU- 
 known and distinguished (No. 6). Plural names of nations, 
 and also the names of countries, districts, and festivals, are 
 lioth with and without the article. 
 
 "S, a K p At 1] s e(j>Ti. So also where an adjective is joined with a proper name, 
 e.g. <ro<j>hs S <0KpJ.T 71 s, the wise Socrates. 'EWicTjiroy ©ij/SaToi AaKeSatno- 
 yiovs. 'A.$poK6fi.ci,s oil tout' eiroiTjo'ei', ttW' iirel ^kouc Kvpov eV Ki\tKl(f 
 ovTa, avaa-Tpe'fms ek ^oivIkiis vaph $a<ri\4a awfiKavyev, X. An. 1.4, 5. K5- 
 001/ Se ^eTaire'^UTreTai (Attpeioj) . . avafialvei oZv 6 Kvpos, X. An. 1. 1, 2. 'Air^ 
 Toi; 'IKia-a-oS Keye-rai 6 Bopias tV ^npei&viaf a/)?rc£(rai, PI. Phaedr. 229, b 
 (as well-known names). 
 
 Rem. 5. When a noun in apposition, accompanied by the article, follows 
 a personal proper name, the proper name does not take the article, e. g. 
 K.po7<ros, 6 twj/^ AuSmj/ ^MriXiis. But yet when the article is used, e. g. 
 i KpoXaos, 6 t&v AvSuy Paa-i\cis, it has a demonstrative sense, and desig- 
 nates the proper name as one already mentioned or known. The noun 
 in apposition is accompanied by the article, when it serves to distin- 
 guish the person or thing mentioned from others of the same kind, or 
 when the person or thing named is to be pointed out as one known, e. g. 
 SaiKpdT-ijs, d (l>lKoa-0(pos ; 2u>KpiTns, S 'AArivaTos, Socrates, the phihsophtr, the 
 Athenian; Xeiplaoipos, d AaKeSaii/.6vws ; on the contrary, the noun in apposi- 
 tion does not take the article, when it expresses merely an adjective attribu- 
 tive, e.g. Her. 1, 1. "HpoSoTOs 'AXmapvaaasis, Herodotus of Balicamassus. Th. 
 1, 1. &0VKv5iS7is 'ASrnvalos, Thuci/dides an Athenian, or of Athens. KXedvup 
 'Opxo/imos, Cleanor of Orchomemis, X. An. 3. 2, 4. The names of rivers are 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
< 244.] THE ARTICLE. 317 
 
 commonly placed as adjectives between tlie article and the word voraiiis, e. g 
 4"AAuj iroTo^(is (ihe river Halys), Her. 1, 72. i 'Ax^K^os iroro/icfj, Th. 2, 102. 
 iirl riv %ipov iroraftov, M riv Tlipafiov TroraftiJy, X. An. 1. 4, 1. inl thv E6<|>p(£- 
 Tf)v 'K0Ta^6v, 11. Trpbs rbv 'Apo^Tji' iroTa/i(J:', 19. Examples like tlie following 
 are more seldom : iiri t^ vo-ra^ KoKvirdpei, Th. 7, 80. 4itI rhv TroTafihu Thp 
 'Epiyc<iy, ib. 82. Sometimes the article is wanting : M Vdpov ■!roTap.6i/ {accord- 
 ing to the best MSS.), X. An, 1. 4, I5 M "Apiraaov ■norap.Sv (according to tlie 
 best MSS.), ib. 4. 7, 18; irora/iij SfXiroSs, 5. 3, 8. The names of mountains, 
 islands, seas, cities, etc., are also placed between the article and the noun, when 
 they are of the same gender or, at least, of the same declension as the nouns to 
 whicli they belong, viz. 777, &Kpov, Spos, vrjcros, etc., e. g. M t^j/ 2o\iiyeiay Kcifiriy, 
 Th. 4, 43 J T^ ^oiivtov i.Kpov, tj ©etrn-pwrls yrjj tj AijXas V7}(ros j tov ^K6fi^pov apovSj 
 Th. 2, 96 ; to9 A'lpiov Spovs, Th. 2, 96 (6 ATiios); ti B6\pri Klpivp, Th. 1, 58. 4, 
 103; 4 MevSi) t6\is, Th. 4, 130. But if. the gender (or declension) is not the 
 same, they must be regarded as in apposition with tlie nouns to whicli they 
 belong, and arc placed before or after them, e. g. rm ipet rfj Tepayeia, Tli. 4, 70 ; 
 T7JI' &Kpay Th Kvyhs trrifJLa, 8. 105 ; tojs^IStjs rod upovs, 108 ; tj Atjkv^os Th ^poi- 
 pLOVf 4, 113 ; rh xfi'>P^oy at 'E^yea 65of, 1, 100 ; t^v -trSKiy tovs Taptrous, X. An. 1. 
 2, 26. The article is seldom omitted, e; g. airb 'A^S-ripay ■ir6\eas, Tli. 2, 97. 
 
 8. When adjectives or participles are used as substantives, 
 they regularly (according to No. 2) take the article. The Eng- 
 lish here either employs an adjective used substantively, as the 
 good; or a substantive, as fJw speaker (= tlie one speaking) ; ox 
 resolves the participle by he who, they who, that which (=to the 
 Lat. is, qui). This usage is very frequent in Greek with all the 
 participles. 
 
 'O (iofpos, ihe wise [man), u wise (man), oi aya^ol, ol kokoi, ol Bticii^oyTes {those 
 who judge), the judges / ol \eyoyTes, the orators ; Th ayaA6y, rh KdK6y, to, Ka\ii, i 
 fiou\6fieyos, quivis ; 6 rvx^y, whoever happens. 'O ir\€urra*QKJ}sKQiy rh Kotyhv 
 tieyiaToty Tifiwy a^iovrai. 'O wKeTtTTa w<l)e\7)a' as Th k. fj.. r. &^tovTai. 'O irKet' 
 ffTa a)(pe\^ffuy t. k. fi. r. a^iw^treTol. — 'O apeT^y ex^ty irXovret fiey ovTwy 
 ^ihay voKKav, irXovTe! Se Ktti &Waiy ^ovKoixiyay yey4<r^ai koJ eS p.€y irpiTToiy ex" 
 Tobs ffvyTja'^T] ffofieyovs, eh.y S4 Tt fftfiaK^, oif ffiravi^ei ray ^oti^Ti<r6y- 
 T a> v, X. An. 7. 7, 42. But when the adjectives and participles are designed to 
 express only a part of a whole, the article is omitted, e. g. aya&oi, good men ; 
 ^Aoa-o<poiiyT€S, iiaA6yTfs ; Ko/ca /col oiirxp^ e7rpo|Ey. 
 
 9. Participles also take the article, when definite individuals 
 are spoken of, in the sense of those, who ; a participle with the 
 article is veiy often appended to a preceding substantive, in the 
 form of apposition, in order to give prominence to the attribu- 
 tive meaning, somewhat in the sense of eum, earn, id dico, qui, 
 quae, quod, or ct is quidern, qui. 
 
 Her. 9, 70. tt/jwtoi isr\>Siov riyerJTai is tJ) tiixos, ical T^y fficriyiiy toS UapSoyiov 
 
 ouToiiffay oi Siapirda-ayTes {and these are tlieij that robbed, etc.). X. C.2.6,l& 
 
 all niyoy oi iSiiuToi toDto ■troiovaiv, aWa Kol irSXfts al twv te KoXSiy ^oAio-to 
 
 /iriueAoiS/iecai, Hol Th. mffypk iKurra Tpasifiievai voM.dKis iroXffuicu! 
 
 Digitized ^>y Microsoft® 
 
318 SYNTAX. [5 2-10. 
 
 ixovai irpbs a\K'ti\as. 3. 5, 4. BoiutoI /ieV, oi TrpiffSrev ou5" tv Tp laurSi/ toX 
 aavrfs 'A^nmlois &vev AaKficuiiovlaiy re Kol rav &\Xav \lf\movv7}(rla>v amrit 
 retrial, viv ainikovaai ainol koA' lavroiis ifi.$a\e7v els -rriv 'Attik^v. 
 
 10. The Greek may convert adverbs of place and time, more 
 seldom of quality, into adjectives or substantives by prefixing 
 the article. In like manner a preposition with its Case may b« 
 made to express an adjective or substantive meaning. 
 
 ■H &va ttSms, the upper city. 'O ^£Ta|i t6tos, the intervening place. Ol eV&i£S' 
 i.vSrponrai or oi ivStiSe. 'O vvy 0a(Tt\e6s. Oi ti(Aoi aixpol ii/Spes. Ol Tcire, tli* 
 men of that time. 'H avpwv (sc. Tiiiipa): 'H ie,ai<pitis niTiaraais. 'O ael, an im- 
 nio-iial. So t!> and Tk vw, now, i. e. at the present time; t}> irdKai, formerly, in tht 
 former time ; Tb irplv, -rh kut/ko, immediately. Oi irdvv tuv aTparianav, the best oj 
 the soldiers. Ti udpra 4'Exor. 'H Syoy a/ie'\eia. 'O d/JLohoyovfisvas Soi\os. Th 
 6, 80. tV amvSivws ZovKflav. So also rh Trd/nrav and rb ■Kapi.-nav, omnino, ri 
 Kdpra, rb irapaTroxli used adverbially. Even : 'H tuv yf<f>vpay o h itoKvais, tht 
 not destroying of the bridges. 'O -Trphs robs ITeptray TrdXe/xos. Oi irepl 0i\ocro^£ai', 
 the philosophers. Oi iy &<rTfi. 'H iv Xi^j>ovii<rtf Tvpavvls. 
 
 11. The neuter article to, may be placed before every word 
 or part of speech, when the word is not considered in relation 
 to its meaning, but is used only as a form of speech, or when 
 a preceding word is repeated, without regard to the structure 
 of the sentence in which it is repeated. Tlie Greek, by prefix- 
 ing the article, may give even to whole phrases the form and 
 meaning of an adjective or substantive. 
 
 Ti Tvirrto, ri TiJirTeis. Dem. Cor. 255, 4. u/ie?s, S> &vdp^s *A^vatoi' rb 8* 
 vij.e7s '6Tav eiirai, T^v ■k6\iv Kiyta. PI. Kp. 352, d. ov irepl tov ^ttitvx^vtos {de ri 
 levi) 6 \6yos [iffTtv), cW^Trepl Tov ovTiva Tp6i7ov XP^ Cv*^- 
 
 5 245. Position of the Article. 
 
 1. The article is sometimes separated from its substantive by 
 intervening particles, e. g. fiiv, Se, yi, ts, yap, Sij ; by the indefinite 
 pronoun tIs (in Herodotus very often), and by avros kavrov. 
 
 Tie likv &vSpa, t^iv Se yvvaiKa. When a preposition stands before the article, 
 the prose-writers say cither : wpbs Si rby &v5pa, or irpbs Tbv fij^po 5e, but not irpbs 
 rbv S\ i.vZpa. — TMy tls TlepiTeuv, Her. 1,85. To7s avrbs airov Tr^fiafft /3aptJi/€T0i, 
 Aeschyl. Ag. 845. 
 
 2. When several substantives are connected by koi or « — 
 Kai, there are two Cases : (1) the article is repeated vriih each; 
 then the separate ideas expressed by the substantives are con- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
24d.J POSITION op THE ARTICLE. 3l9 
 
 sidered independent of each other, or they stand in contrast ■ 
 or (2) the article is not repeated; then the separate ideas ais 
 considered as forming one single conception. 
 
 SaKpiTDs vivra iiyetro Steobi eiSeVai, td, Tc Kty6fiiya Kal ivpaTTi/ifm ko! rh 
 s-ipf Pov\ev6iiem (the first two members form a whole, but the last is contrasted 
 With them), X. C. 1. 1, 19. Af fiaStoupylai koI 4k tov jropaxp?M« vSoml, 2. 1, 20. 
 AJ E'TTifi^Asmi Tuy KaKSiv ts K&ya^wy ^pyfv, ib. 1i re avpjpipovTa Kol KfX'^pur- 
 p-iva, 2. 2, 5. Oi' (rrpaTiiyoX koI Koxayoi, An. 7. 3, 21. Ih ncyaKoTrpeTv^s T€ koI 
 4Kev^4piov Kol rh Tmreivdv tc KaX aveKeiispov (hero the first two and also the 
 last two form one single conception), X. C. 3. 10, 5. Tois i.ypohs Tois iavrov Kai 
 omias, Th. 2, 13. 0/ iraTSes re ho! yuvaXKes (so many MSS.), PI. Ep. 557, c. 
 
 3. When a substantive having the article has attributive 
 expletives joined with it, viz., an adjective, participle, adjec- 
 tive pronoun or numeral, a substantive in the Gen., an adverb 
 or preposition with its Case (« 244, 10), then the article has a 
 different position according to the idea to be expressed, as wiU 
 be seen from the two following cases : — 
 
 (a) The attributive is joined with its substantive to express 
 a single idea, as the teise man — the sage, and is designed to 
 contrast the object denoted by its substantive with other objects 
 of the same kind. In this case, the attributive stands either 
 between the article and the substantive, or after the substantive 
 with the article repeated ; or the substantive stands fii-st without 
 the article, and the attiibutive follows i with the article. 
 
 O ayaSihs aviip or <S iyiip 6 ayaSrds or afiip & ayoAos (in contrast with the bad 
 man). See Rem. 1. Oi irKoifftoi iro\7Tai or ol iroXiro; oi irXoirioi (in contrast with 
 poor citizens) . 'O iftis irar^p or 6 variip 6 i/ids. Oi rpei; inSpes or ol ivSpes oi rpeiS, 
 'O Twv 'A^valav S^juos or S Sfiiios 6 twv 'Adjivaiwv (the Athenians in contrast with 
 another people). Oi vvy &y^putrot or oi &y^pcaTrot oi vvy* 'O irphs robs YlepffaS 
 r6\ffios or 5 rSKepjis i wphs robs Xlepaas (literally the against the Persians war, i. e. 
 the war against the Persians, in contrast with other wars). 'Air!) dahAffaris rrii 
 *i^yuy. TvpayyU 7} iy Xeppoy^cnp. 'H iy SoAajuTn nohs rhy nepffTjy yavfiaxta, the in 
 
 ' Where the attributive expletive consists of several words, or where the 
 expletive is itself qualified by another expletive, it is usually placed after its 
 substantive, otherwise too long a phrase would intervene between the article 
 and its substantive ; such expletives involved the idea of some such phrase as, / 
 mean, etc., e. g. iiiKta^ffav 4v rati Kti/iais rats \m\p raS treSlov rov vapi, riy 
 Keyrplrriy wora/iiy (they encamped in the milages [I mean] those aftoue, etc.). Here 
 Kdpuus is qualified by fmep weSlov, and this by wapli Keyrptriiy, etc., X. An. 4. 3, 1 
 Tpiros fiatrrhs \0iTrhs ?iy, . . . ^ uirep ttJs iiri r^ irvpl KaraXijtp&etffris ^XaKijs t^s 
 yvKris inrh ray iSK\6vray, here 6 intep and what follows qualifies tlie Word (mv- 
 Toj, X. An. 4. 2, 14. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
820 SYNTAX. I* 243 
 
 Sdlamis against the Persian tea-JigU, i. <;. the sea-fight in Salamis against, etc. Tlieso 
 lest examples show that a substantive with its Case has an adjective force. 
 
 Remark 1. In the fii'st position (6 iiyaSAs av^p), the emphasis is on the 
 attributive, e. g. Aei iraiSeias Kotvavsw ri &^Au jims v/ui' r^ twv a^ptvap 
 (YeVei)) PI- L- 805, d. But in the second position (5 wr/p 6 a.yaSi6s), the idea 
 expressed by the substantive is represented as a definite one or one already 
 mentioned, or is contrasted with that of another substantive ; in the third posi- 
 tion [av^p h hya^lis), the idea expressed by the substantive is represented as in- 
 definite, but in contrast with another. TiSia(pepel &ySrpanros b.«parri]S Srriplor) 
 rov d/cpaTerTTaTot;, X. C. 4. 5, 11. 'H aperri iriyfir-n iJt€y ^foTs, ffiyetrnSe 
 avSypdirois rols ayaSro7s,2.\,32. Th&piirTovov Toys vifiovs iffrly Itrx^' 
 iiv, a\\' &v5pa rhy fifrh (^poy!](rei»s fiaaiKiKiy, PI. P. 294, a. Aiomovvtcu al 
 jxey Tvpavvites KaX oXiyapx^f^^ "rots r poits ' s ray i(j)e(rr7iK6t(oy, at $h 
 ■:r6\ets [republics) al Sri ^OKparoifieyat rots ySfiots rots Kei/ieyoist 
 Aeschin. 3, 6. Tb iTrirtKhy rh eKsivtav (sc. tSi' "XKv^aiy) oijrtu jxax^rai, rh 
 5e dirXir tKhy r6 ye rSty 'EAA^ytuy, &$ eyeii \4ya}, PI. Xach. 191, b. 'E-yit 
 fiky oiiv €Kilyovs rovs &ySpas <l>7Jfd ov fiovoy ray tra //.drtoy ruy TjfjLerepwy 
 irarepas etycu, aWcc Ktt\ rris i\ev^iplas rrjs n rifiLerepas Kai ^vflirayrioy, 
 rSiy €1/ T^8€ T^ TjifefpoJ, PI. Menex. 240, e. Ate^epxoyrairds re (rvfitpopas ras 
 eK rod Tro\4fiov rov irphs aW'fiKovs Tjfjuy yeyeVTifieyas Kod ras ai(j)e- 
 Keias ras iK rrjs ffTpareias ttis ctt* itce'iyov ^(To/t ei/ as, Isocr. Paneg. 
 43, 15. Sometimes the position varies in the same sentence, e. g. Tis /ieyi- 
 Kas 7]dovks Kal r^ aya^^ Ta fji.eyd\a ?; irel^i Kcd 7] Kaprepia ical oi eV 
 T^i Kaip$ 7r6yoi Kal KiySvyoi irapix'"^'"- {great pleasures and advantages), X. Cy. 3. 
 ."5, 8. nSs TTOre 7] &Kparos tlKaioaivf) 'irphs aSiKiay r^y &Kparoy 
 ?X" ; PI' Rp- 555, a. Then the second position does not differ from the first. 
 
 Rem. 2. With a verbal substantive, the attributive expressed by a preposi- 
 tion and its Case, is often placed after its substantive without the repetition of 
 the article. So also, when an attributive explanation comes between the article 
 and the substantive : 'H truyKOfiiSij iK ray aypSty is rb &crrVf Th. 2, 52. 'H yvy 
 vfj.erepa opy}] is M.Lrv\rivaiovSf 3, 44. Ttjs rGiv yvyatn&y <pt\Las wphs rovs £fSpas, 
 X. Hicr. 3, 4. Also the more definite expletives of an Inf., Part, or adjective, 
 frequently are not placed between the article and these words: Tiiv ao(piav 
 rovs apyvpiov t<jJ ^0vXo}l4va "KuKo^yras. ffO(pLffras airoKaKovaiy^ X. C. 1. 6, 13 
 (instead of rovs r^iy croiplay . . . vuXovyras, in order to make prominent the idea 
 in r^y &o(^lay). 
 
 (b) The attributive is joined with its substantive not to 
 express a single idea, but is to be regarded as the predicate of 
 an abridged subordinate clause ; then the attributive is not con- 
 trasted with another object of the same kind, but with itself; it 
 being designed to show that the object to wliich the attributive 
 belongs, is to be considered, in respect to a certain property, by 
 itself, without reference to another. In tliis case the adjective 
 without the article is placed either after the article and the 
 substantive, or before the article and substantive. 
 
 'O ay'tip aya&65 or kyaSrhs 6 hviip, a good man {= o7o&!)r Sly, the man who 
 is good, inasmuch as, because, if he is good). 01 &ySrpairoi fiia-ova-i rhy &ySpa Ka- 
 K6y or Kanhy rhy SySpa, thai hate the bad man, i. e. they hale the man, inasmuch 
 as, because, if he is bad. (On the contrary, rhv KaKhy &vSpa or rhv &ySpa rh» 
 Kaic6y, the bad man, in distinction from the good ; hence, roiis ^ev aya^oiis ay- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 245.] POSITION OF THE ARTICLE. 321 
 
 dpdmovs &7a7r4)juej/, vohs Se Koxohs /Mitrovfiei/,) *0 ^otrtKfhs TjSeois xopiC^Tui Tots 
 jroAfraij aya&ots, good citizens, i. e. i/'or because they are good (on the contrary, 
 rots aycAo'is Tro\iTais or toTs 7ro\(Tois TO?y KyaS-oTj, good citizens, in distinction 
 from bad citizens). 'O ^hs ttiv ^vx^v Kpar la'Tt] v rtp &v^ptl>Tr{p ^vetpvffiv [a 
 30ul, as it is the most excellent), X. C. 1. 4, 13. 01 {mb rov tiKIov KaTaKafat6nevoL 
 ra -xp^imTa fi.€\dvTepa 6xou<r«'^(a iizcter sJdn ; the blackness of the skin is 
 the consequence of the KaraA^/tirEird'ai iiri rov 7i\iov), 4. 7, 7. "Eyeirpriffdv re Tcis 
 ericjiviis iprifioiis Koi t& xP^t""^"' SiiipTrcurav (quia deserta erant), Th. 1, 49. 'A^tai 
 {postuh) Tohs ^epdvopTas ifiol pXv &.<p^ova toI iiriT-fiSeia TTapaOKevd^eiy, ainobs 5e 
 fi.T]Sfvhs Toirav SirTEir&ai (= Srre auri fi^i^ova Eli/ai), X. C. 2. 1, 9. 
 
 Kem. 3. If a substantive having the article has a Gen. or a preposition and 
 its Case connected with it, the position under (a) occurs, only when the sub- 
 stantive with its Gen., etc. forms a contrast with another object of the same kind, 
 e. g. & Tuv 'AdTjvalav S^fios or & drjfios d ray 'A^vaiwv (tlie Athenians in contrast 
 with another people) ; the emphasis here is on the Gen., e. g. Ovk aWorptov tijcitiu 
 elyai d'A^T] V at (a V Stj/jlos rhy Qri^aiwv Siifioy, avafiifiy^fTKeTcaSe KixlTks 
 Tuy Trp oySyojy riay eavrov els robs &7i^aiovs irpoyoyovs evepyeffias, 
 Dem. (Psephism.) 18, 186. 'E^ayartiAri virh ray iy rp SiriJpTTj te\Siv, X. 
 An. 2. 6, 4. On tlie contrary, the Gen. without the article, is placed either before 
 or after the other substantive, when that substantive denotes only a part of that 
 expressed in the genitive ; the emphasis is then on the governing substantive, 
 e. g. 6 S^/ies 'A^yatav, or 'A&nvaiav 6 Sij/uos, the people and not the nobles. 
 Hence, with this position, a partitive and not an attributive genitive is used ; 
 the Athenian people is not here considered in contrast with another people, but 
 a part of the Athenian people is contrasted with another part of the same, viz., 
 the nobles. Compare further, ^ ^uRpdrovs <piKoa'o(pia or tj (pt\o<ro^ia ii ^ojKpdTovs, 
 i. e. the philosophy of Socrates, the Socratic philosophy, in contrast with the 
 philosophy of another, e. g. Plato's, the Platonic, with ^ ipAoirofla ^aiKpdrovs or 
 "SittiKpdTovs 71 <pi\offo<pla, i. e. the philosophy of Socrates and not something 
 else of his, e. g. his life, "ilnrep aiKias ret KaTie^ev (dcmvs infimas partes) 
 lffxvp6rara eJyat SeT, oStw koL ray 7rpa|e«y t«s apx^s Kol ras vwo pe- 
 trels aKrj^eis /col SiKaias elyat irpos^Kei, Dem. 2. 10. Tovrov eS e^peil/e koI iwai- 
 Sevffey, us SoKei ^A^Tjyaiojv t&J •jr\'fj^et, to the multitude, not to the intelligent, 
 PI. Menon. 90, b. Tb elSos toD ira i 3(^5 ^contrasted with ToiJvoua tov ircw 
 S6s), PI. Lysid. 204, e. 
 
 Bem. 4. When the genitive of the substantive pronouns is used instead of 
 the possessives, the reflexives e/xavTov, <reain-oB, etc. are placed according to (a), 
 e. g. Thy ifiavrov irarepa or rity Trardpa Thy epMurov, etc. ; but the simple personal 
 pronouns /uiv, trod, etc. stand without the article, either after or before the sub- 
 stantive with the aiticlil, e. g. 6 ttot^/j fiou or /uoS d vwriip, 6 iraj-iip <rou or (rov d 
 wariip, d itoTTip airrov (avT^s) or airov (avTrjs) 6 ■aariip, my, thy, his [ejus) father, 
 & variip Tifiay, vfi&y, vipy, avTay, or rip-^y, vfiuy, vay, ainav o iraT'ffp, our, your, 
 their (earum) father. But when the substantive has' another attributive joined 
 with it, these pronouns can stand between the substantive and that attributive, 
 c. g. 'H TtiAoi riiiSiv (pva-ts. In the Sing, and Dual, the enclitic forms are always 
 used ; these never stand at the beginning of a sentence ; but in connected dis- 
 course they can stand before the substantive which has the article. The Gen. 
 of demonstrative and also of reciprocal pronouns, have the position of (a), e. g. 
 i Toirou {ixelyov) iraT'fip or S irar^p 6 Toirov (eKelyov). T^ aXKijXiny evvoltf. The 
 demonstratives are sometimes also found without the article after the snbsta,n- 
 tive with the article, e. g. Oi ayayKotoi iKeivov, Isae. 9. 10. Ta lepa eKeiyov, ib. 
 86. ToO ira-rphs Toinay, IC 3. Tp vvy BjSpci rourov, Dem. 4, 3. 
 
 Bem. 5. The difference between the two cases mentioned is very manifest 
 with the adjectives &Kpos, /ncVor, ^ctxotoj. When the positioi mentioned 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
322 SYNTAX. [i 24a. 
 
 under (a) occurs, the substantive with its attributive forms a contrast with 
 other objects of the same kind, e. g. t/ fiiirri ttSkis or irifAis ri fi-e(rri, the middle city, 
 in contrast with other cities ; ^ iffxirri vrjtros, the most kemote island, in contrast 
 with other islands. 'Es rh iaxarov epu^a t^s vitaov (in contrast with other ifii- 
 fuuTi), Th. 4, 35. When, on the contrary, the position mentioned under (b) 
 occurs, the substantive is contrasted with itself, the attributive tlien only defin- 
 ing it more fully. In this last case, we usually translate these adjectives into 
 Englisli by substantives, and the substantives with which they agree as though 
 they were in the genitive, e. g. cttI t4> Spet &Kpcp or iir &Kpctj rQ Spei, on the top 
 of the mountain (properly on the mountain where it is the highest) ; & /ieari rfj 
 TT6\ei (seldom 4v if iroK^i jtieVp), in the middle of the city ; iv eVxar?/ tt? vijaip 
 "^r iv VT]trw Ty etrxtiTri, on the border of the island. 'Ev fiiaois toIs iroKefiiois 
 dn^^ave, X. H. 5. 4, 33. Karct fietrou rhv kvk\ov, Cy. 2. 2, 3. Ot Uepaat irepl 
 &Kpais Tois x^P^^ x^'P^^"^ Sa(Teia$ ^xovtriy, 8. 8, 17. 
 
 Rem. 6. In like manner, the word ii6ms has the position mentioned under 
 (a), when it expresses an actual attributive explanation of its substantive, e. g. 
 6 liivos TTcSs, the ONLY son; on the contrary, the position inentioned under (b), 
 when it is a more definite explanation of the predicate, e. g. 'O Trots ixAvos or 
 li.6vos & Tats irai^ii, the boy plays alone (without company). M6vriv ray ay^pdvaif 
 {yKwTTay) iirolTitray {ol S-eol) o'iav ap^povy T^y ^teviiVt i. e. ^ ruy ayQrp, yA-STTa 
 IJ.6yri larly, ^v iirohi(ray oXav k. r. A., they made the human tongue only, capable of 
 articulating sounds, X. C. 1. 4, 12. 
 
 Kem. 7. When a substantive has two or more attributives, one of which 
 limits the other (^ 264, 2), one position maybe as an English, e.g. Oi £aAoi aya- 
 &ol ivApomoi, the other good men ; or the limiting attributive with the article either 
 stands first, and the second follows with the article and substantive, or the 
 limited attributive with the article stands iirst, and the limiting attributive fol- 
 lows with the article and substantive. 'O yavTixbs i ray ^ap pipoiy arpa 
 t6s. At 6.Wai at /tarck t!i ffaiia iiS ovai, the other bodily pleasures,'Pl.'R]). 
 365, d. 'Ec toTj &\\ois rots ifiots x^P^o'^t I'ys. 281. (When 4 fiAAos is 
 joined_ with an adjective used substantively, the article is commonly repeated, 
 e. g. TaAAa ri iroKiTMa, X. Hicr. 9, 5. Oi SAAot oi irapaTvyxdyoyTcs, X. Apol. 
 11.) 'H ovx TiKiCTTa 0\(l\jia<ra ri KoLjxiStts v6(ros, Th. 1, 23. 'Ey rij to5 
 Aihs Tp lieyla-TTi eopr-p, Th. 1, 126. 'Es airhy rhy M t$ (rrSpiaTi tov \iii4yos 
 rhy erepov iripyoy, 8, 90. 'Ey t^ opX"^? Tp 7}fi,eT4pcf (payp, PI. Cratyl. 
 398, b. Ti iy 'ApicaSlif rh t oV Aihs iepoy, Kp. 565, d. The limiting 
 attributive can also stand between the substantive and the limited attributive; 
 in this case the article is used before each of the three parts, e. g. t4 rcix't 
 Ta eavray ret iJ.aKpci. aireTe\e<ray, Th. 1, 108. (But the article is omitted with 
 a limiting demonstrative standing between the substantive and the limited 
 attributive, e. g. Tijy roirov ram-nA tiV Srav/uurTiiv Ke(paJJiv, PI. Symp. 213, e.) 
 Finally, if the limiting attributive with the article is placed first, the limited 
 substantive and its attributive follow, both without the article, e. g. Uphs rhs 
 ndpoi&e a-vy.(popas ^vS aifioy as, Eur. Hcl. 476. TaAaj iyii rfji iy fiax^ 
 fu/i^oAfls ^apftas, Aii Acharn. 1210. 'Awh ray iy rf Evpciwri irSKeoiy 
 'EWriylSoiy, X. H. 4. 3, 15. TAs virh rrj Qpaicri olKoiaas iroAe is 'EAAnvf- 
 Sos, 4. 8, 26. 
 
 Rem. 8. When an attributive participle has a more definite expletive belong- 
 ing to it, their relative position is as follows : — 
 
 [^) 'O Tvphs "rby irix^y.oy alpcbfls (rr paTriy6s. 
 
 (b) 'O crrpaTriyhs 6 Trphs rhy 'ir6Kfii.oy atpe^^ls. 
 
 When there are two of these more definite expletives, one stands either 
 after the substantive or after the participle, e. g. Ti/y vphs EUPovKoy yeyon4yrir 
 Tltrny vp.ty, Aeschin. 3, 25. T&y koSi' bfrns irenpayfieyuy Ka\av t^ wiiAet, 
 Uem. 18, 95. Trjs vvy iirapxoians avrip Svydfiem, 4, 4. Tis Trap' iu&y {ima- 
 \^omas aliT^ Ti/ids, 20, 83. r i~ -r 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
24,6.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 
 
 (c) 'O atpeii^els irpbs rhv v6\efjiov ffTpaTrjy 6s* T^v viriipxovtray tjJ 
 5r<(Ae( Swafitv, Dem. 8, 10. 
 
 (d) 'O alpe^cls (rrpuTTiyhs irphl rhv ■ir6\iiioi'. Ttjc Trposovaav aSa£> 
 lav T^ irpdyfiwrii Dcm. 6, 8. 
 
 (c) 'O irphs rhy Tr6\cnov (rrpa-rriyhs aipt^ets (this position is most fre- 
 quent, wlien the participle has two more definite expletives ). T 4 s irrh 
 Toirov p\aiT<pi]nlas elpi);u cz^as, 18, 126. Al irph rod aroiiaTos v ri e ! 
 vavfiaxovaai, Th. 7, 23. Tji irphs Ai$iriv fiipos Ter pannevov, 58, 
 When there are two or more explanatory woi'ds belonging to the partici- 
 ple, they ai'e either placed between the article and the substantive, e. g. 
 Tiiv t<(te @TiPaiois j>d>iJLTiv koL S6^av virdpxo'><^''v, Dem. 18, 98; or 
 they are so separated, that one is placed either before the participle or 
 after it, e. g. OJ irap4 toiItou \6yoi r6re ^rj&eVTES, Dem. 18, 3S. 
 Tainjv T^v airh tov T6trov St(r^d\€Lav ittrdpxovffav T^ Trrf Act, 19, 84. 
 
 Kj:ii. 9. When a participle used substantively has predicative expletives 
 joined with it, these are placed between the article and the participle. Thus, 
 for example, irphepos, irparos, Sarepos, StrToras {he came first, etc.), becomes : 
 6 irpdrepos {irpuros, tiTTepoSf vararos) a(j>LK6fievos (he who came 
 first) j &KCIJV afiaprdvei becomes: S &Katy afxapTdvwv; avdpetos yofil^erat: 6 
 avipetos vdfil^6fisvos; ouris ASttfe?: & aitrhs &SiKuy {one dxjing wrong of 
 his own accord); toiovt6s eartv: d toiovtos &v\ fi6vos iffrly: 6 fi6yos &v. 
 When the predicative expletive consists of an adjective and substantive, the 
 substantive is usually placed directly after the participle, e.g. irpuTos Tcray 
 fidvos Ta^lapxos {he who had been placed as the first centurion). 
 
 i 246. Use of the Article with Pronouns and Numer- 
 als, with and without a Substantive. 
 
 1. Tlie article is sometimes iised with personal substantive 
 pronouns in the Ace, either when ihe personality is to be made 
 prominent instead of the person merely, or, what is more fre- 
 quent, when a person previously mentioned is referred to. On 
 6 TToios, see § 344, Eem. 3. 
 
 Thv kavriv Sii Keyay fi,d>M ffffuias xai iyicwiiiii^ay {his important person), Fl. 
 Phaedr. 258, a. Aevpo S^, ^ 5" Ss, euSi JipbUv. noi, ^tjrrii' 4yti, \eyeis, Koi -irapi 
 TiVos Toij vfias {i. e. Kol Tivis flaiv ovroi, ois \fyeis ti/jms), PI. Lys. 203, b. 
 
 2. The article is used with a substantive which has a pos- 
 sessive pronoun belonging to it, or the Gen. of a personal or 
 reflexive pronoun (^ 245, Kem. 4), when the object is considered 
 as a definite one or as relating exclusively to possession ; the 
 possessive is placed between the article and the substantive 
 [^ 245, 3 (a)]. 
 
 'O ^/i!i? TOTljp, i als \Syos, thy word (a definite or particular one), d Ifihs irais, 
 my son (a definite one of several, or even the only one) ; als6 6 \6yos mv; ihv 
 tfOMTOv Tra-ripa or ^^hv varipa tIv treouToC ; on the contrary, the article is omitted 
 when it is to be denoted, that the object named belongs to tlie possessor ii, 
 common with others of the same kind, or when the substantive with the posses- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
324 SYNTAX. [i 246 
 
 sivc is n predicate or in apposition : i/xhs aSe\<pii or aSe\(p6s fiov, a bivther of 
 mine (it not being determined which) ; d/ihs ira7s or vraTj /j/iv : out6s icrTi{i') 
 it5eK(J3iis it6s or aSeX^os trov ; oSroy, aSsKtphs ifiis or ade\(p6s fiou. 
 
 3. A substantive to whicli one of the demonstrative pronouns 
 oOtos, oSe, cKEtcos, and even air 6s, ipse, is joined, regularly 
 has the article. As these pronouns are not considered as at- 
 tributives, but either as substantives (he, tlie man), or are taken 
 in a predicative sense (the man, who is here), they stand either 
 before the article and the substantive, wliich is then in apposi- 
 tion with the pronoun, or after the article and substantive [comp. 
 »245, 3 (b)]; thus: — 
 
 o%Tos b ay^p or <5 av^jp ovtos (not & odros &v^p), 
 tJSc ij yvtifiTi or ^ yi/(&/j.ri 7]5€ {not 7] tJSc "yycS/tTiJ, 
 iiciivos & avfip or & aj^^p eKcTi/os (not 6 e/ceryos avfip), 
 
 avrhs 6 ^a<ri\eus or S fiaaiKehs avros (but b avrhs ^cwtKevs [seldom [b) fiafft- 
 Kfis 6 aiTis\ signifies idem rex, the same king). 
 
 JKemakk 1 . The substantive docs not take tlie article : — 
 
 (a) When the pronoun is used as the subject, and the substantive as the, 
 predicate (§ 244, Rem. 1 ), e. g. avTTj iiXTlv aySphs aper-f] {this is tlie virtue of 
 a man), PI. Men. 71, e. AKtt; eo-rco Ixavri h.-Ko\oyia, Apol. 24, b. Kfngns 
 ourrj jxeylo-Tn Sri tois "EAAtjo-iv iyefs'To {this was the greatest agitation), Th. 
 
 I, 1 ; hence a distinction must be made between toutw rif Si5air/n{\» 
 XpSivrai {they have this teacher), and Toircf 5i5a(rKaA.m XP"'''"'" {'^^ ^'^'"^ ^^ 
 man for a teacher). TeK/mjpi'^ toutw xP'^M"'"' (whicli signifies tout(( iffri 
 TSKfi-fiptoy, ^ expTJTo), X. C. 1. 2, 49. TairTji^ yvtofiriv excf (which signifies 
 oSttj iffrlv fi yvdfiri, ^v exw). An. 2. 2, 12. If, however, the predicative 
 substantive is to be represented as a definite object or one before-men- 
 tioned, it takes the article, e. g. 'OTroVe (2ci)KpaTijr) ti t^ Aiiyai Sie|i'oi, Sih 
 
 . T&y ixa\ta'Ta bfio\oyov/j.4ifwp iiropeieTO, vopXCwv rairTTji/ t^ y acr^ctAeioi' 
 etvai \fifOv (banc esse firmam illam disputandi rationem, viz. such a mode 
 as had been clearly shown by previous examples), X. C. 4. 6, 15. 
 
 (b) When the substantive is a proper name, e. g. oStos, iiceivos, avris 'Suxpi- 
 TTji. Eii9-uS7)|Hos odrocri, X. C. 4. 2, 3. NiKTipdrov Toirov, Symp. 2, 3. 
 XapfilSjis ofnoai, 2, 19. Aurij' Vlitiuva, An. 1. 5, 13 j or when a common 
 name is used instead of a proper name, e. g. AutoB jSao-iXear, An. 1. 7, 
 
 II. 'Ett! 7^v T'^j'Se ^A&0|U6i' (with the variation lirl ttiv yriv t.), Th. 2, 
 74. The article occurs but seldom, and then with a demonstrative force. 
 T( Srjr' lKi~ivav rhv a\fiv ^aaiidCo/icv; Ar.'Nnh. ISl. T({;'5f rhu 
 'iTTTrijjy neTenfiufidfJLiS>a, Her. 5, 91. Comp. 8, 27. 
 
 (c) When the idea of an object is to be expressed absolutely, the substantive 
 without the article is joined with the pronoun a\n6s. Comp. ^ 244, 1. 
 Auri; Seo-TOTefa ouTiJj SovXelas, PI. Parmen. 133, d. hxnrfs hriarii- 
 /iTis oil /ieTe'xoiUEV, 134, b. Ovic airov Se<ririTov Stiitov, 8 4<tti Ss(rniTTis, 
 eiceivQu SovK6s ^(Triv, 133, d. 
 
 (d) When o5t-o j dj/^p is used to denote emotion, especially scorn or con- 
 tempt, instead of the pronoun iri. O 6 t o o- 1 aviip ov iraiaerat ^Kvapuv; 
 EiTTe fioi, S ^liKpares, oSiic mirxipri mi/iara Srr)psiiav ; ( = blockhead, why dont 
 you cease ?) PI. Gor^. 489, b. Ouk oIS" Stto Keyeis, S S^iJKpoTES, ah\' &M.m 
 Tivk ipiira. 2. Oiiros aviip ovx vTroiJ.€Vfi axpeKoi/ifvos {= you, oil mau, 
 can yoi) not hear to be bgf^(^^ j^ ^9§f0&oft® 
 
♦ 24G.1 ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 323 
 
 (e) In passages like OEtoi, otis ionre, fidppapoi iroKiiu^epoi itiiiv iffoinai, X, 
 All. 1. 6, 16, the relative clause supplies the place of the article. But 
 there are few passages like: *epe Tm^Hiv x ' t fi •' a j u-iv rovTovai and the 
 following Toisie x'"''''""''^' ^- Cy. 8.3,6, where the demonstrative is 
 used like a ffei'c(/c {tlud which points out) adverb (liere, there). The poets 
 Very often omit the article where the pvose-writers must use it. 
 
 IIem. 2. When the pronoun ovros or ixiims belongs to a substantive having 
 the article and an attributive, then these pronouns are often placed between the 
 attributive and the substantive, e. g. Ai -ruv UcKo-rrai/i/Tja-loiv avrai yrjes, Th. S. 
 80. 'H a-revii auTij iSis, X. An. 4. 2, 6. 'O Aifivi eKeTpos \4av, Ad. H. A. 
 7, 43. So 6 avrhs otros irti^Efior, Luc. de hist, conscr. c. 14. So also with the 
 genitives /.lov, o-oC, aiiroij, etc. (§ 245, Kem. 4) ; likewise with ttos, oXos, e. g. i 
 avoids fiou TTaT^p; 7} rdv ' Pi^yivaiitiv iratro (oAtj) ir((Ais. 
 
 4. A substantive with ■\vliifli toioBtos, roto'sSc, too-oCios, 
 r'q'KiKovToi, are joined, takes the article placed according to 
 { 245, 3 (a), when the quality or quantity designated by these, 
 is to be considered as belonging to a definite object, one before 
 mentioned or known, or as belonging to a whole class of objects 
 previously named. 
 
 'Ap' oZviivaio rhu roiovrov &iJ.ejnrToi' ^l\oi> vofil^eiv ; (1. c. talem, qualis aniaz 
 descriptus est), X. Cy. 5. 5, 32. IIws &y oSv S roiodros o^viip Suup^tipoi robs 
 ptovs (i. e. talis vir, qualem descripsimus Socratem), C. 1. 2, 8. TSi/ tovovtuh 
 Kill ToiovToiv h.y<&Siv i/ui/ /col toTs S\Aois 'A^vaiois ix""'^^^ X»P"' ('" relation 
 to what precedes), Dem. Cor. 327, 305. 'Opav robs T-nKiKoirovs <f>v\i.r- 
 Tovras iiiUt<rTa ris yvmiKas (relating to the preceding yepaia, but at the same 
 time designating the whole class of the yepaioi), X. R. L. 1, 7. So also when 
 taken substantively : 6 toiovtos, -rh. Toiavra. On the contraiy, the article must 
 be omitted, when the object is indefinite : any one of those who are of such a 
 nature, or are so great, e. g. Toiovroy &vSpa. ovk &</ iiratrolTis. 
 
 5. When was, -jravres, oA.os belong to a substontive, the 
 fbllowing cases must be distinguished : — 
 
 (a) 'Wnien the idea expressed by the substantive is considered 
 as altogether a general one, the article is not used. 
 
 naj &vS!pmros (seldom &y^poiros ms), every man (i i;. every one to whom 
 the predicate man belongs ; TrivTes i.vSrpmrai, all nien. So also '6\ri v6\is, a 
 WHOLE "cjVy, ir6\is -iAv, « ^''ole CITY. Then ras' in the singular signifies mch, 
 every. nSj may often be translated by mere, or utter, e. g. 'O 'Epas iv vimi ayap- 
 Xl<f Kttl ayo/ilq. Qup, PI. Rp. 575, a. UJivra i.yaSrh Kol KaXa S-irepydCoyrai, Polit. 
 £84, n. 
 
 (/3) Wlien the substantive to wliich iras, iravre'; belong, is to 
 be considered as a whole in distinction from its parts, it takes 
 the article, which is placed according to i 24.5, 3 (a). Here ttSs, 
 
 B-awts are emphatic. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
32b SYNTAX. [i 240 
 
 'H Tiaya yrj, the WHOLE earth ; ol irdvTes Trohh-at, all citizens without exception. 
 This usage is more seldom than that under (a). This construction occurs also 
 with Sa oy, but it is still rarer than with iras, e. g. i) Saij ■it6kis, i:6Kis if '6\ri, tht 
 WHOLE city. Here the singular irSj always has the sense of whale. Hsipmr&iu 
 (XP'J) K""'? ct^fe'" T^c iraaav ^meXtay, Th. 4, 61. "ESo^ev ainoh oil robs 
 TTapSvTas /iSifov airoxTfiyai, aWh Kttl robs Siroyros Mirv\tiy(iiovs,3,3S. Tb 
 iKovavdymi Tavd.yra /t e'pi) clvai, PI. Theaet. 204, a. 'Av^piiroioi yltp Toij 
 wairi Koivhv Tov^aiiaprdvew, S. Ant. 1023. 'E;ceiVws fioi (palveral, Ssirep Tck ToO 
 wposiiTTov ixipioi ^x^' "'p''* ■'■^ U\oy xpiJsanroc, PI. Prot. 329, b. Hence it 
 signifies, in all. XliiJ.Tro\iai x'Afous robs vavr as &irXlras, a thousand hop- 
 lites IN ALL. J.vvevXnp'^Srnaav vri^s al irciaai Se'ko /tiXurra KoJ eKaroy, Th. 3, 66. 
 
 (y) When the words ttSs, rravrti, intended merely s£ a more 
 definite explanation, without any special emphasis, belong to a 
 word denoting a definite object and hence having the article, they 
 are then placed according to i 245, 3 (b). This is by far the 
 most frequent use of iras, Trarres. The word oXos also is usually 
 constructed in the same manner, in connection with a substan- 
 tive and the article. 
 
 of OTpariurai ^T\oy rh a-r par SireSov air av or Sirov rb {Tr par SireSov, 
 Ol ffrparturat ndyres or iriiyres ol O'r par ivrai KoAus eflax^oavro, 
 Aitt r^v ■7r6\iv '6xi\v or 5i& o\t\v rijv ir6Kiy (simiply through the whole 
 city, whereas 5i4 tV HXriv tt6xw, through the whole city). AtaPatmuari Trdvres 
 els rb BvCdvrtoy ol ffrpariwratj X. An. 7. 1, 7. Ei wrb ryjs 'EXXd^oS 
 tr do7]s a^io7s eV ap^ry ^avfj-d^eff^aii rijv 'EXXdBa ireipariov eu iroi^Tf, X. C. 2. 
 1,28. 
 
 6. When ckocttos, each, every, belongs to a substantive, the 
 article is omitted, as with ttSs in the sense of each, every, when 
 the idea expressed by the substantive is considered as a general 
 one ; but when the idea contained in the substantive is to be 
 made prominent, it takes the article which is always placed 
 according to } 245, 3 (b). 
 
 Kbt4 r^v fip-epav kxdirrriv, Dem. Cor. 310, 249, or Ka&* e Kda-rriv riiii 
 h fie pay, every single day, but oIik dxlya cVtI koS)' iKaari^v rifi.4pay {quoiidie, 
 each day, eveiy day, general) rotavra Spay re xal axoieiy, X. C. 4. 2," 12. *A 
 iKdarri riXticicf irposreraRrai iroieiy, Si7iyTio6/x(Aa, X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Tvpayvovy 
 rai {nrb Sexa avdpZy, ovs Aia'avSpos Kar4orria-ey iy kKaorri iroAei, H. 3. 5, 13; 
 but O ri%y iy r^ yfi tKdorri KaXby ^ ayaSrbv ^, /iefiyfia-oyrat, in every singlt 
 land, Cy. 8. 6, 6. Kal riyeuiiy fiiv ^y d Sea-ir6riis iicdartjs rijs olxlas. An. 
 7. 4, 14. 
 
 7. When cKarepo?, each of two, a/j.<f>ui and tt/i^oVe/aos, both, 
 belong to a substantive, the article is always used, since here 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 246.] ARTICLE WITH PRONOUNS AND NUMERALS. 327 
 
 only two known, therefore definite objects can be spoken o" 
 The article is here placed according to § 245, 3 (b). 
 
 'EttI Tav irXivfSiv iKOTEptov, X An. 3.2, 36, or i-aX iKarepuv tm» 
 rKevpuv. T^ Sra aii(p6T e pa 01 i.ii<p6Tf pa rii Sto. 'A/i^oT;' to<» 
 X^po^y or Toiv X^PO'" afi<po7y. Koft' ixaTepov riv isrKoit, Th. 
 4,14. T^ wtI iKOTepip, X. Ven. 5, 32. 
 
 8. In respect to the pronoun oiro's and the indefinite pronouns 
 or numerals aXXos, ercpos, ttoXvs, irXeiiov, irXeio-Tos, the 
 following points are to be observed : — 
 
 (a) 'O avT6s signifies the same, idem, e. g. d ott^s iy^ponros, idem homo; tou 
 t6, the same; but S Sc&panros airSs or avrhs i &v^pmros, homo ipse. 
 
 (b) "AXXos = aliiis, another, in contrast witl ipse (outiJs) ; 6 &?j\.os = reliquui 
 the other; ol &\Kai = reliqui, certeri, the rest, e. g. ri fiwiij "EAXar, reliqua Graecia 
 the rest of Greece, in contrast with some part before named ; ol &KXot iy^pavoi 
 the other men or the others, in relation to definite individuals, 'n 'ApioiE koI o . 
 S W t Siroi ?ire Kvpov ^iKoi, Ariaeus and the rest. But 'O r\ovs iiretpdyri fitr 
 &\\ay, Glus appeared vnth others, in contrast with himself; — erepos = one 
 of two (it not being determined which), or it forms a contrast with i avT6s and 
 denotes difference or contrast; — i e-repos = the other, i. e. the definite one of 
 two, e. g. ^ erdpa x^lp rf trepif xp^irai; ol tTEpoi in reference to two parties. 
 
 (c) The following cases oi iro\is, iroWol are to be distinguished: (a) 
 When iroxis, woWol belong to a substantive without the article, as iroxiis irdyos, 
 iroAAj) irwovSii, ttoaJs \6yos, woWoi &vApanrot, an object is denoted as au indefi- 
 nite one, e. g. TloXhy cX"""''" ■"ivoy aTcXeij T^s rod tyros ftfos awepxoyrai 
 {hamng much to«7), PL Phaedr. 243, b. noAA.ol Sy&panrot toD ttKoiitov ip4- 
 yovrai (many men, general) ; (j8) but if the object is represented as detinKe, or 
 one previously mentioned or known, the article is used with the substantive, 
 and Trohis is then placed : (1) as an attributive between the article and the sub 
 stantive, e. g. ^ ttoXX^ ffirov^^ t5 oATjS-e/as i^eiy ireStoy {magnum illud, de quo 
 dixi, stadium, that great zeal, of which I have spoken), PI. Phaedr. 248, b. 'ny rept 
 rhy Tro\vy \6yoy iTroLe7To''Ava^ay6pas {muUum ilium sermonem, e scripiis ejus 
 satis cognitum), 270, si. '"Ev rals TroWats yey4ffeiTL {among the many genera- 
 tions mentioned), Phaedon. 88, a; ol ttoAAo! iv^pairoi signifies either the 
 many men named or a multitude of men belonging together, in opposition to the pai-ts 
 of the whole, hence also ol ttoAAo/, the many, the multitude, the populace, plebs, 
 or even the tnost,ihe majority (in contrast with the separate Indiviauals), e. g. 
 "Offa ol 6\iyot Tobs iroWoiis fi^ ireicrayTes, aAA^ Kparovyres ypdxboutft {what the 
 fiw prescribe to the many [the majority^ not by persuasion but by force), X. C. 1. 2, 45 ; 
 ri To\i, the greater part, e. g. Tay iroKcfitav rh fity iroAi e/ieyev, jxepos S' av- 
 ran air-tiyra rots Kara ra &Kpa {most of the enemy remained), X. An. 4. 6, 24. What 
 is true of the Positive, is true also of the Comparative and Superlative. 'Eo» 
 tplXovs fl ir6\iy oxpeXeTy Seji, iror4pia 7] -TrKeiav trxo?^h ro6rwy eTrtfif\i7fT^at, 
 T$ &s ly&i yvy, f) r^ i>s <rb /lOKapifeij SiaiTto/teVp (the greater leisure, considered 
 as a definite thing, or as a definite whole), X. C. 1- 6, 9 Ei iSiSov, ivl roini/ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
328 SYNTAX [i 246 
 
 hy iSiSov, has ifwl Sobs /iftov /i)j cnroSoiii ifuy rh w\e7oy, An. 7. 6, 16. "ETrerm 
 Tf ife-ry o-ijfcd&ai els rhy v\eia> XP^""" haM.ov, ^ rg "cMl/f, K. L. 9, 2; oi 
 irA e 1 J J or T i) TT \ € o )/ signifies the majority in opposition to the minority ( oi ^\ciir- 
 <rous), therefore a definite whole; o'l irAetir-r at, themj}st,rh i!-\eTa-Toy,the greatest 
 part, also to be considered as a definite whole. — Or, {2) iroXisis joined with 
 the substantive having the article, and is placed according to § 245, 3 (b) ; 
 TTo\is is then to be taken in a predicative sense, e. g. 'ETrei e<ipa iro\K^ ra, 
 Kpsa {when he saw the flesh iJiat it was much, the flesh in great abundance), X. Cy 
 1.3, 6. 2c()f(rt -ToWa Toi Siropa |t;/i/3e;87)/C(iTa (sc. (SpSin-es), Th. 1, 52. OoA- 
 \5)i' rijy aiTlay elxoy {they had censure in great abundance, i. c. were very 
 severely censured], 6, 46. 
 
 (d) 'O\lyoi,few, c. g. oKiyoi i,y^pmror, oi 6\lyoi, the few, i. c. either the 
 few mentioned, or to be considered as a definite whole, viz., emphatically the 
 Oligarchy, considered as a whole, in opposition to o i iroWoi, c. g. npea-fins 
 01 M^AioiTTpls /uci/ xb TrX^ftos ovK iiyayoy, iv Se -reus apxats Kal to7s o\iyois 
 \4yeiv ixeKevoy, Th. 5, 84 ; but when only an indefinite idea is expressed by the 
 word oXlyos, the article is omitted, c. g. TlpoSo^yai t^c iro'Aiy inr' b\lyuy (by 
 oligarchs, not by the Oligarchs). 
 
 9. When a cardinal number belongs to a substantive, the 
 article is omitted, if the idea expressed by the substantive is 
 indefinite, e. g. rpets avSpes tj\%v ; but the substantive takes the 
 article which is placed : (a) according to § 245, 3 (a), when the 
 substantive with whi-ch the numeral agrees, contains the idea 
 of a united wJwle ; hence also, when the number of objects is to 
 be represented as a,- sum-total, after the prepositions a/t^i, Trepi, 
 cU, virlp ; but the article is here used most frequently, when a 
 preceding substantive with a cardinal number agreeing with it, 
 and without the arti sle, is referred to. 
 
 Oi TQiv ^atriKewv olvox^ot Si^6a.m rots rpifrl S atcTvKo is oxovvres tV 
 (piaXriv {with the three fingers, i. c. the three generally used), X. Cy. 1. 3, 8. 'Hv, 
 tire creAeuTa, a/j.tpl ra ir evr-fiKoyra er-q {lie Itad reached about the sum of 
 fifty years), X.. An. 2. 6, 15. 'IirireTs els Tois TcrpaKtsx'^^ovs (rvyeXf- 
 yoyTO airif, khi toJiStoi eis tovs /ivpiovs, Cy. 3. 2, 3. ToTs KepKupaiois Tav 
 eiKocri ye ay ou irapovaay (refemng to the preceding words oi Kepicupcuoi 
 eiKoa't yavalv aifTous rpe^dfieyoi, Th. 1,49). 
 
 (j8) But the article is placed according to § 245, 3 (b), when 
 the numeral without any emphasis, is joined with the definite 
 object, merely to define it more definitely, and when the nu- 
 meral had not been previously mentioned, e. g. 'EfULxeaavra 
 ot /iCTO, JlipiKXiovs mrXiTat ^lXiol or )(i\.ioi oi fiera. EC. OTrXtrai, the - 
 hqplites with Pericles, a tJwusand in number, fought. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
*247.J ARTICLE AS A TRONOUN. 329 
 
 Rem. 3. The article is frequently omitted with substantives which have an 
 ordinal number joined with them, as the ordinal in a measure supplies the place 
 of the article. Tplror Itos Tm TroAeum ireKevTa (he died the third vear), Th. 
 2, 103. Comp. 3. 25, 88. ' 
 
 f 247. The Article as a Demonstrative and Relative 
 Pronoun. 
 
 1. The article &tit6 had originally the sense both of a demonstrative and 
 relative pronoun. 
 
 2. In the Homeric poems, the pronoun 6iiT6 has almost wholly the sense 
 both of a substantive and adjective demonstrative pronoun, which refers to an 
 object, and represents it as known or already spoken of, or brings it before the 
 mind of the hearer, e. g. II. a, 12. 6 (he) yap ^Ade ftocij ^irl y^as 'Axcuay. 29. 
 riiv (her) S' iyii oi \iaa. Od. k, 74. ov yip 11.01 &4fus iarl Ko/tifcfiei' oiS" 4iro7re/i- 
 neiv ivSpa to'v (that man), Ss we dsotait/ iirex^'rai luucipeaffw. Hence, in 
 Homer, the substantive is found in very many passages without the article, 
 where later writers, particularly the Attic, would use it. Comp. II. «, 12 seq. 
 witlrPl. Ep. 393, e. Tet there are, in Homer, evident traces of an approxima- 
 tion or agreement of this apparent article with the real article, which was not 
 fully developed before the time of the Attic writers. Thus in Homer, as in 
 the Attic writers, it gives the force of substantives to adjectives and participles, 
 e. g. i ipuTTOs, 6 viHi^tras", S yepaiis ; so also, ri irpiv, ri irp6<TStfv (prius) ; it is 
 found in connection with a substantive and an attributive adjective or adverb, 
 the attributive being placed between the article and substantive, k. g. TS;/ jrpo- 
 repuy ireav, H. \, 691. Tbv Se^ihv Ittttov i^i, 336. 01 ivepSr^ St^ol f, 274. Tb ahv yepas 
 a, 1 85. Tb ffhu iihos a, 207 ; so it is used in case of apposition, e. g. Od. X, 298. 
 Ktd A^5tii/ cldov T^u TuySapeou 'jrapAKotTiy. Od. |, Gl. &vaKTes oi v4ol\ further, 
 '^AvTvyes at irepl Zitppov, H. A, 535. *AvSpwy twv rSre i, 559. TleTs oi AoA/o:o, Od. a;, 
 497 ; also with the demonstrative, at Kines a'lSe t, 372 ; it also takes the place 
 of the possessive pronoun, e.g. II. A, 142. yyy jEte;* S^ tov irarphs Aei/cea TiVere 
 AcS/Stji' (of your father), and denotes what belongs to an object, e. g. Od. o, 218. 
 eyKoaiifhe t4 Tcvxf, eroupoi, rrit jieKalyri (the TEiJxea belonging to the ship). 
 
 3. The use of the article as a demonstrative adjective, is not unfrequent iu all 
 the post-Homerie writers (§ 244, 6) ; hut as a demonstrative substantive pronoun, 
 it was retained, in certain cases, through every period of the language ; thus : — 
 
 (a)T& 5e (jdauicm, or on tAe contrary), very frequently at the beginning of a 
 sentence; i /i4v (is quidem), 6 Se (is autem), ol S4 (it autem) very fre- 
 quently at the beginning of a sentence; irph toB (it p or ov), formerly ; 
 often Kal riv, r^v, et eum, et earn, at the beginning of a sentence, e. g. 
 X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. Kal Thy Ke\eu<rai Sovmi. In connection with koI, the 
 Greek says in the Nom. : /cal &, koI ij, Kal oi (§ 334), but in the Ace. Kal 
 •rhy, Kal -ritv ; seldom r6 ye, id quidem, t S, idea, and the like. 
 
 (b) In such phrases as, Tiy Kal -riv, ri Kal r 6, this man a.ndthat man, this 
 thing and that thing ; to, Kal rd, varia, bona et mala. 
 
 (c) It is used immediately before a sentence introduced by if j, Siros or oTos, 
 which sentence expresses periphrastically the force of an adjective, or 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
330 SYNTAX. [i 'MS_ 
 
 especially, an abstract idea. This usage is confined mostly to Plato 
 
 PI. Phacdou. 75, b. opeVerai toS S iimvliroy {= tovIitov oiiTos),herecu:kea 
 
 after thai which is equal. Prot. 320, d. 4x yrjs Kol irvpis fu'lai/Tes Kol tuv 
 
 Sira TTvpi Koi yy Kepdyvvrai, Soph. 241, e. etre fitfiTj/jjiTay, rfre (pafTatrfxd- 
 
 Tuv avTuv fl Kcu irepl TfiyySiV Tuy, Hffat Trepi ravra et (rl, 
 
 (d) In such phrases as, 6 fiey — 6 5e, oi fiev — oi 5e, the one — the other 
 
 some, the others. Isocr. Paneg. 41. els //.ey tovs vfipi^oyreSf to7s Se iouKevov 
 
 TM, treating some with contempt, and being slaves to others. Very frequently 
 
 rh fiev — ri Se, ra fi4v — Tct 5 e, partly — partly, ry fiev — ry Se, 
 
 on one side — on the other side. 
 
 4. In the Homeric language, the demonstrative & ri to, is frequently used in 
 
 place of the relative. II. a, 125. aWci rcc ^ev To\iuiv i^eirpd^ofiey, ri heSutrTo: 
 
 (quae ex urbibus praedati sumus, ea sunt distributa). The relative use was 
 
 transferred from Homer to the Ionic and Doric writers also ; so the Tragedians 
 
 take this liberty, though very rarely. Her. 3, 81. t a /lev 'Ordrris eiTre, \e\ex^u 
 
 KapLol TavTa' ri 5* es Th irhri^os ivfaye <pepeiv jh KpdroSt yvtv/J.7js TTJs aplffrns 
 
 vuipTTiKe, Comp. Larger Grammar, Part II. § 482. 
 
 5 248. Classes of Vekbs. 
 In relation to the subject, the predicate can be expressed 
 in different ways. Hence arise different classes of verbs, 
 which are indicated by different forms : — 
 
 (1) The subject appears as active, e. g. 'O iraL<i ypd<liei, 
 TO dv'^o'; 'irdXXei. — But the active form has a two-fold 
 signification : — 
 
 (a) Transitive, when the object to which the action is 
 directed, is in the Ace, and therefore appears as pas- 
 sive or as receiving the action, e. g. TinrTm tov iraiBa, 
 iypd<l>ai rrjv ewLaToXi^v, — Transitive verb. 
 
 (^) Intransitive, when the action is either confined to the 
 subject, as To dv'^o<; ^dWei, or when the verb has an 
 object in the Gen. or Dat., or is constructed with a 
 preposition, e. g. 'ETri^/iw tjj? dpeT^?, ■)(a''P^ Vl cfxpia, 
 ^aSi^a) ek rr^v iroKw, — Intransitive verb. 
 
 (2) Or the subject performs an action which is confined 
 to, or is reflected upon itself, e. g. TinrTopuu, I strike my- 
 self ; ^ovXevo/jbai, I advise myself, or I deliberate ; tvttto- 
 fMi, TTjv KetjiaXriv, I strike my own head; KaTaaTpi^ofiat rrjp 
 y^v, I subjugate the land for myself ; dfuwofiai Toiii irdke/j^f 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'249.] CLASSES OP VERBS. ACTIVE FOEM. 331 
 
 ov?, I keep off the enemy from myself,— Middle or Reflex- 
 ive verb. 
 
 Eesiaek 1. When the reflexive action is performed by two or more subjects 
 on eachother, as TuTrroyrai, they strike each other; SiaKeKeiovTai, thai exhort each 
 other, It IS called a reciprocal action, and the verb, —Reciprocal verb. 
 
 (3) Or the subject appears as receiving the action, i. e. 
 the action is performed upon the subject, e. g. Oi (TTpan&Tai 
 vTTo Tu)v TToXe/itcov iBuo^^fjcTav, were pursued, — Passive verb. 
 
 Rem. 2. The Act. and Mid. have complete forms. For the Pass., the 
 Greek has only two tenses: the Tut. and Aor. All the other passive forms 
 are mdicated by the Mid., since the passive action was considered as a reflexive 
 one. 
 
 Remarks on the Classes op Verbs. 
 
 ^ 249. A. Active Form. 
 
 1. Many active verbs, especially such as express motion, 
 besides a ti-ansitive signification, have an mtransitive or reflex- 
 ive sense. (So in English, as he leads, the birds move, the car- 
 riage brealis, the snow melts, which have also a transitive sense ; 
 so the Lat. vertere, mutare, declinare, etc.) 
 
 'Axepav iroTa/ihs ^j/3a\\ei h T^y Kifivriy, Tb. 1 , 46. 'H BiJa/St; Alfivi) i^ili- 
 irtv 4s S^i\atr(rav, 4, 103. 'Eyyis ?jyop ot "EWiives (comp. to draw near), X. 
 An. 4. 2, 15. So also avi.yftv,to go hack, to withdraw; S lay e ip, perstare, to 
 con&tie, are found in p^JSO. — 'EAoiij'eij' or eAaiiyf ly "?rjrw (X. An. 1. 8, 1), 
 to ride ; ■irpose\av!/eiy, adeguitare, to ride up to. — Many compounds of fiikKeiv, 
 e.g. ifi^iWdv and elsfiaWeiv, to fall into, to empty (of a river); 4K0d\- 
 Keii/, to spring forth, to put forth (of plants, etc.) ; lierafiiWeiv (like mutare), 
 SiaPdWeiy, to cross over ; ir pos^iXKeiv Tivi, to make an attack upon; <rvii- 
 0di,\Ke ly Tivi, manus conserere, to engage in combat with ; 4iri0iW€iv, to fall 
 upon; virep$dWftir, to exceed, to be prominent.~~KKiv^iv and its com- 
 pounds, e. g. 4iriK\ij/eiv, to incline to something ; i.iT0K\ivctv, declinare. — Tp4ireiv, 
 Vike vertere; 4iriTpeireiv, se permittere, to entrust one^s self to. — Srpe^eiy (like 
 mutare) audits compounds. — Uraiciv, to strike against, to stumble; irpositTaUiv, 
 as n^yaTiMs TtposiirTourcai, they suffered a total shipwreck (Her. 6, 95). 'AvaK- 
 KirTeiv, to get off, escape. — Compounds of SiS6vai, as 4i>SiS6vai, to discharge 
 itself (of a stream) ; 4TriSiSivai, prqficere, to increase, advance. — Compounds of 
 Ifvai, e. g. avUvai, to relax, be remiss; 4<^Uvai (se. eaur^y) itrx^PV 7eA6JT( {indul 
 gere), Pl.'Rp. 388, e. Compounds of iilayeiv, niyvivai, as ffv/i/ilayeiv, 
 commisceri; irpos/iiyvii/ai, to fight with, also, appropinquare, e.g. irposefii^av t^ 
 Teixei, Th. 3, 22. Alpeiy, to get under wuy, set out (of ships, to weigh anchor), 
 also compounds, c. g. ol pdpPapoi &Trripav 4k t^j A^Aou (to set sail), Her. 6, 99 ; 
 iinaipav (sc. xsv"*) ''"'^ '" fi9f^t with, to withstand. — 2i viivreiv, manus con- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
332 SYNTAX. [i 249. 
 
 serere. — "Exf"! to liind; ex"" Tiycir {desistere), Th. 1, 112; ex^'" "''''' adverbs, 
 as eS, koASj, KaK&s, like 6ene, mafe habere ; ix^^" "M^^ '''i '" aliqua re occupatum 
 esse ; irporex"" (so. yo5c), attendere, to give one's attention to, or appellare, to land; 
 vposxeiv, praestare ; dTrexe'y, se suslinere, or expectare, in mente habere, e.g. lirsT- 
 Xov ffT/jaTei5e(r<&oi ; Korexetjf, se retinere, also to land; napexety, c. g. tt? fwv^ttc^, 
 musicae se dare ; airixeiv, to be distant from; avrex^iv, resistere. — UpaTTeiv with 
 adverbs, u. g. eS, kukSs, or with the Ace. of adjeetives, e. g. /caXii, Kaxd, to fare 
 well or ill. — AtaTpi^eiv {consumere), versari, to employ one's self. — Compounds 
 of (pepety, as Sta(p4puv, to be different, differre; inspcpspeiy {eminere) TrKoira,— 
 'hvaXaiifiiveiv, refici, recreari. — OlxfTv, administrari, e. g. Tr6\ts oiVei {the 
 state is managed), Flat. — TeXevrav, toend,todie. — Karop&oDy, to succeed.— 
 HiKav, to prevail, e. g. dvixa tj x^^pw^ Twy yvufieav (like vincit sententia), Her. 
 6, 109. 'EWe/Treiy, officio suo deesse; hrroXelvuv, to remain behind, ete. 
 
 2, Several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
 form both Aorists, have in the first Aor. a transitive, but in the 
 second Aor. an intransitive sense : — 
 
 Suo), to wrap up, first Aor. iSiaa, I wrapped up, second Aor. &vv, I \^:i>t in, 
 itrTTifMi, to place, " ^a-T-qtra, I placed, '' ^ariiv, I stood, 
 
 <pia, to produce, " €<j>viTa, I produced, " i(pvv,IiDas produced, 
 
 axiKKa, to make dry, '■ {er7(H)A.a, poet. Invoke dry), " %iTK\riv, I withered. 
 
 So several active verbs with a transitive signification, which 
 fomi both Perfects, have in the first Perf. a transitive, but in the 
 .second an intransitive sense : — 
 
 iyetpa, to wake, first Pf. iyliyepKa, Ihave awakened, sec'd ?f. iyp'ljyopa, lam aioaJce, 
 SwO^i, perdo, " 6\ci\eKa, perdidi, " S\ai\a, perii, 
 
 vel^a, to persuade, •' ireTreiKa, I have persuaded, " • -n-ewoiAa, I trust, 
 avolyai, to open, " a.v4a>xa, I have opened, " aveaiya, I stand open 
 
 (§" 187, 6), 
 vpaTTu, to do, ' TTtTTpaxa, T have done, " iriirpaya (sc. €?), / 
 
 fare wed. 
 
 Moreover some second Perfects of transitive verbs, which do 
 not form a first Perf, have an intransitive sense : — 
 
 S-yviil^i, to break, second Pf. ^aya, lam broken, 
 fiirym, to tear, ' ^^fiaya., lam torn, 
 
 riiKW, to smelt (iron), " TeTTjKO, lam smelted, 
 
 i^yvO^i, to fasten, " itimiya, I am fastened, 
 
 iril-^u,, to make rotten, " trian-^a, I am rotten, 
 
 ^aW, to show, " Tr4<t,r,m, I appear, 
 
 Remark 1. The Pass. aXlcrKo/iat, tobe taken, has an active form in the 
 reif. and Aor., viz., k!i\aKa,Ihave been taken, ed\a,y. Twos taken (5 161, 1). 
 
 3. Intransitive active verbs are sometimes used in Ihe p]ace 
 of the passive. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 230.] CLASSES OF VEKBS. 1* jDLE FORM. 333 
 
 This is particularly the case with -iriax^^v, iriimtv, (peiyeiy, eS, (ca- 
 (taij aKoieiv, ^vSi^Kdv, more seldom reXevTav. These active verbs 
 with uiri and the Gen. are veiy commonly used instead of the passive of such 
 verbs as aSmiti>, liiirrav or fiiWeiv, Suixew, Kreiveiv ; ^pi](rKeiv in certain foi-ms 
 is always so used (§ 161, 13). M67<iA.a TeirdyTo (eversa, were destroyed hy) 
 ttpin/iuiTa virh Tiair6va>v, Her. 7, 18. MivSrepov ivi/u^oy ehai kokSis {mi tuv 
 iroXnuv ixoiciv {aiidire, they thought it worse to be evil spoken of by the citizens) , 
 S Ka\Sis iirhp Trjs ■ir6\eus imo^viitrKeu', Isocr. Paneg. 56, 77. So iKirlirTfiv inri 
 Ttvos, expelli ab aliquo ; very often <j>(iyeiv vt6 rtvos, fitgari ab aliquo, to he put 
 to flight by some one, or in a judicial sense, accusatum esse ab aliquo, e. g. itrePetas 
 (peiyeiv iird r i v o s, to be accused by some one oj" impiety . ES, kokSis irirx" 
 vir6 <rov, I am benefited, injured by you. 'ZTeXeirriaav jr" 'A^rivaiav 
 Ainterfecti sunt), Her. 6, 92. 
 
 'Rem. 2. It will be seen (§ 279, Rem. 5) that intransitive ac.ive /erbs arS 
 f-equently nsed in poetry in a transitive sense, e. g. currpaiiTiiv ireKas, fiaiveip 
 
 'Rem. 3. The transitive active is not unfrequently used, when the subject 
 does not itself perform an action, but causes it to be performed by another ; 
 yet this usage is admissible, only when it is evident from the context or from 
 the nature of the case, that the subject does not itself perform the action. X. 
 An. 1.4,10. Kvpos Thv •jrapdSeta'ov i^eKoype /cal to PcuriKeta KareKavtrey, caused 
 to be cut down. So frequently airoKreiveiv, ^dirreiy, olKoSo^7y and similar exam- 
 ples ; often also SiSdoKeiy, TrtuSsieiy (comp. PI. Prot. 320, a. 324, d. Menon. 94, b). 
 
 § 250. B. Middle Form. 
 
 1. The Mid. denotes an action, which is performed by the 
 subject, and is again reflected upon it or is confined to it. Two 
 cases are here to be distinguished : — 
 
 (a) The Mid. denotes, first and most frequently, an action 
 which the subject performs iipon an object within its own 
 sphere, i. e. iipon an object belonging to the subject, connected 
 with it, or standing in any near relation to i.. In English, this 
 relation of the Middle voice is expressed by a possessive pro- 
 noun, or by the preposit'on to or for with a personal pronoun. 
 
 Tinrrofuu, irvifidiiriy Ti)v Keipah-w, I strike, I struck my own head [rv^nai k., to 
 strike the head of another) ; KovaaaSmi toxis ■ir6Sas, to wash one's own feet [hoieiy r. 
 IT., to wash the feet of another) ; a.iroKpi'fiaffStai rit IoutoS, to conceal one's own 
 affairs ; irepif^^aa^ai x'rSya, suam vestem, to rend one's own garment [vepi^^TJ^ai, 
 alius, that of another) ; Tapaaxi^Smi ri, to give something from one's own means, to 
 furnish of one's self, as j/oCj, 'hence also to show, e. g. efooiw vapexeaStcu (on the 
 contrary irape'xeu' tivI vpiyjiara, ipSfioy, etc., to cause trouble, fear, etc., to some 
 one) i — avoSei^aff^al ri, e. g. ^pyov, yyd/ivy, Siya/uy, to show one's own work, etc. ; 
 4wayyei\airSyai ri, to promise; in a reciprocal relation : yel/xairdat rt, aliquid inter 
 te partiri, to divide something with each other, so tifpia-aoAai ; — woiioair&ai rt, to do 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
334 SYNTAX. [5 250. 
 
 or make something for one's self, e. g. elpiirny, airovSis (itoiitv, to do or accomplish), 
 TroiiiffcuT^ai TriKefiOV, to carry on war ; 4mii4\euw, to use care ; iyecr^ai ywaxa, to 
 lake a wife for one's self, to marry; kKea^ai ti, sibi sumere, hence to choose, prefer; 
 &l>aa^at ti, to take up for one's self, to lay on one's self {aXpeiv ti, to take up something 
 in order to lay it upon another) ; aWiiixaffdai ti, to ask for one's sdf(iuTeiv, to ask) ; 
 Trpd^cur^at -xp^^mTo. rtva, sibi ah aliquo pecuniam exigere ; liiff^^ffaff^ai, conducere, to 
 hire for one's sdf (but fwrioKrai, locare, to let out) ; neraKeiiy^aaAcu, to cause to come 
 to one's self to send for ; RaTaarpi^atr^ai, KaraSovXtiffofT^at y^v, sibi subjicere ter- 
 mm ; itvapr-fjaoff^at rij/a, sibi devincire, to make dependent on one's self; an-o\viraa-&al 
 Tivaf to free for on^sself to ransom; ^opiffaff^ai ri, sibi aliquid comparare {vopi^fiv 
 rl Tivt, alii aliquid comparare), KOfiiirair^ai, 6 g. nAaraieis iraiSas Kal yvvcuKas 
 4KKeKof*i(7fieyoL ^trav is ras 'A^-ijvas, Th. 2, 78; KT^/(racr^oi, irapcurKeViiirour- 
 Qai Tt, sibi comparare ; ^etr^ai and ypd^aa^at vS/j^vs are used of one who makes 
 laws for himself, or of a law-giver, who. is himself, also, subject to the laws 
 which he has made for others ; on the contrary, detptu uniypaifiai v6fi.ov are used 
 of one who is not subject to the law which he has made, or generally of one 
 who gives laws to others, without expressing any further relation, e. g. "Exois 
 hv elneiy, Srt ol ^.v^panroi rovs aypdtpovs ySfiovs e^ej/To; 'E7(5) fiev ^€ohs ojfioi 
 Tohs yS/jLOus To6rovs rots av^pdiirois ^eiitai, X. C. 4. 4, 19 ; — a/xuvcur^ai Tohs 5roA.€- 
 ^lovs, propulsare u se hostes, hence to defend one's self against any one {a/iivetv, 
 properly to ward off, then to hdp) : riiiaip^a-aa-^at ti, to revenge one's sdf on some 
 one, to punish him (Tiiiaptiv rwt, to help one) : rpexfiaa^ai, to put to flight; aTrdfrmr- 
 ^at KUKii, a se propulsare mala ; airoTrefi^atr^ai riva, a se dimittere ; airotrsiaBurStai 
 TI, a se depellere; Trapairfia-ao'^ai, deprecari; SiaAeffAcu, aTroS6ff^ai, to sell; otto- 
 rpeij/aa'^cu, airo^aAetrS-oi, awoKpov(racr^cu. Several Deponent Middle verbs also 
 belong here (§ 102, 3). 
 
 (b) The IMidtlle denotes, second, but much more seldom, an 
 action which the subject performs immediately on itself, so that 
 the subject is at the same time, also, the object of the action 
 The English here uses the active verb with the Ace. of tht, 
 reflexive pronoun, e. g. rvwrop-ai, I strike myself; iruxj/dij,-^, I 
 struck myself. Here belong particularly the following verbs: -- 
 
 'Airdy^ai rwd, to strangle some one; air dy^aaStai, to strangle one's sdf, 
 Tiii^air&oi, KS-^aa-Srai, to strike one's sdf; Ki\fiaa-S>ai, to bend one's self 
 down; olKiaaaSrat, migrare; itrtPaKe (rSrai, to apply or devote one's self to 
 something; -rapaa-K cvaa'aa^ai, se parare; Td^aa-Sfai, to place one's sdf iu 
 order of battle, e.g. oSra ^lci/ KfpKvptuot ird^afTO, Th.1,48; [but also to jfo or 
 establish for one's sdf according to No. (a), «. g. riiairSriu <p6pov, to agree to pay 
 tribute;] irposSr4<rS)ai, se adjungere, to agree with; ?(rroo-&a» ((Tt^toi, ftrrdvai) 
 and its compounds, to place one's sdf [but also according to No. (a), sibiponere, 
 to place for one's sdf e. g. Tp6waioy] ; Sp/ila-aa-^at, KaSfop/ila-ao-^ai, to lana 
 (comp. Th. 4, 15) ; KVKKii<raa-&ai, to encircle (comp. Th. 5, 72), but laiKKadri- 
 rai, to form a circle or place one's sdf in a circle; rpawfodai [not Tpitficur^ou, 
 leeNo. (a)! 'o turn one's sdf {Th. 5. 29, 73) ; iyyviiaaa-Aat, to pledge one's selfi 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{ 250. j CLASSES OF VERBS. MIDDLE FORM 33fl 
 
 iraivairdai, to cease (from waia, to cause to cease); Sfi^atr^at, to slum) one's 
 ^Al ! particularly verbs which express an action performed by the subject upon 
 hiiJ own body, e. g. Kova atrial, vi^aff^ai, hK^i^aff^at, xp^^ratrj^ai, 
 C^ff atrial, yvuvdaaff^ai, Ka\i}pa<T^ai, Kotrfi^ffair^aif ctfi^ifffair- 
 d'ai, ipSiffaff^ai, iKSvffaff^ai, Kelpaff^atf av ofiSp^aff^aif se dbster 
 gere; lnroiiv^a<T^ai, se emungere; i,iro^ii<ra<r^at, se abstergere; (rre^o- 
 vdaffav^at; (TTef AcktS-oi, to get ready, to Jit one's self out; also some few 
 verbs which in the Mid. express internal, mental action, e.g. <j>vKti^a<r^ai, to 
 be on one's guard, to be cautiot:s (but (j>v\aTTeiy rivd, to guard some one) ; tfiiiijil- 
 iraa^aifto determine or decree by vote (but ifnitpi^eiv, to put the vote) ; Pov\ei- 
 a-a(r^ai,to deliberate, to advise one's self {bnt PovKeieif tivI, to advise some one); 
 yeiaaa^aL, to taste (yeieiy, to cause to taste, to give a tasteof); Ti/i(»p^(ror- 
 dai, to avenge ; the reciprocals SiaKaTaKifTaff^ai vp6s riva,tobe reconciled 
 toanyone; ffvv^ fa ^ a i, to bind one's self, to agree vnth any one; <rirfiaaa^ai, 
 to make a treaty, peace with; atroffx^fr^ai, to restrain one's self, to abstain 
 from; several compounds of ftj/ii, e.g. 4<pU(r^at, to strive; u^ito-aoi, to 
 yield, be remiss; fie&leirdai, to neglect, be remiss ; aiiTnroii\aaffdal Ttvos, to 
 strive for something; avTt\ap4a^ai tiv6s, to lay hold of something. Here 
 belong, also, most Deponent Middle verbs (§ 197, Eem. 2). 
 
 Rbmakk 1. This immediate reflexive relation is expressed also: (a) bymiddle 
 verbs with a Pass. Aor., e. g. SiaXieo', to separate, ZiaXv^vai, SiaXiafddat, to 
 separate one's self discedere (see ^ 197, Rem. 3); (b) by the active form, e. g. 
 (icTofleiWeii', to change one's self (see § 249, 1) ; (c) by the active form with the 
 Ace. of the reflexive pronoun, e. g. iirawftv kavriv, avaprav eavrSv, to attach one's 
 self to, to make one's self depend on any one ; vmoKpvimiv kmrr6v, i&lC^tv kavT6v, 
 vapex^tv kavr6v, atroKieiv eavr&v, to free one's self, atroircfuiTTeiv eavrSv, airoKTet- 
 retv iauT6y ; the Mid. then has the signification of the Pass. ; thus, irraiveiff^ai, 
 kiroKTfiveadai, airoa'(pdTTeiT&ai, laudari, interfci, Jugulari ab alio, and has for its 
 Aor. and Tut. a Pass. form. Sometimes the active form with the reflexive 
 pronoun is used, even when the verb has a middle form. This mode of expres- 
 sion is very natural in antithesis or contrast, e. g. 'E^pevey iirh limov, &Tt6Te 
 yvfiydffat kavT 6v re koL robs ?7r7rouy, X. An. 1. 2, 7. 
 
 Bem. 2. The Mid. in the same manner as the Act. (§ 249, Eem. 3), can be 
 used, when the subject docs not itself perform an action, bnt causes it to be 
 done by another. There is this difference, however, in the two cases, that in 
 the Mid. the action always refers, in some way, to the subject. 'O xor^p rohs 
 iraiSas iSiSd^wro (^iraiSeiiraTo), which signifies either, the father educated the chil- 
 dren for himself, or, if it is clear from the context, he caused them to he educated 
 (as X. C. 1. 6,"2 ; on the contrary, SiSdaKew, iraiSfieiv are used without referring 
 back to the subject, 5 249, Rem. 3) ; KeipcurSiai, to shave one's self or to get shaved. 
 'Apyeioi ir0eW eMvas iroiriffdiicyoi (having caused to be made) avfdsirai' is 
 Ae\(pois, Her. 1, 31. Uavtrayias -rpdire^av XlipiriK^v iraperl^ero (caused to be set 
 before him), Th. 1, 130. Oi Ao/ceSai/nifcioi idipvKa ire/nf/avTes Toiis vexpoiis Skko- 
 liiaavTo (causedto he removed), 4, 38. 
 
 Rem. 3. The reflexive relation of the middle to the subject, is often so 
 slight, that in oijr mode of considering it, it almost disappears, and sometimes 
 consists only in a very gentle intimation, that the action will be completed to 
 the advantage or disadvantage of the subject, e. g. H. o, 409. oi/re irore TpSes 
 Aoi'aSi' iSivavTO <pd\ayya.s firi^dfieyot (in suum commodum) K\uririai fuyii/itvat. 
 Hence the reflexive pronoun is not seldom used with the middle, particularly 
 in antitheses, in order to bring oat emphatically the reflexive sense which 
 exists in the middle only in a general and indefl»ite manner, e. g. Seyo^ir 
 
 15 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
336 SYNTAX. U ^^^' 
 
 PovXeifTii eavTV oyfta Kol Sivaniv ircpnroi-li<ra<rSra.i (to gain^a name and 
 pmver Jar himself) X. An. 5. 6, 17. 'EireSei^avro tus airay operas, Isocr. 
 Paneg. 58, 85. 'Pd^vfiof aurois nar e<rriia-aVT o rhv fiiav, 63, 108. TV 
 e/ittt/ToS jycitfnjv aTroi^aiy^Jjuevos, Id. Permut. 309, 22. 
 
 Rem. 4. In many verbs, the active and Mid. appear to liave a similar sig- 
 nification; but on a closer investigation, the difference in the nieaning is 
 obvious ; the active expresses the action absolutely, or objectively, without any 
 accessary idea; the middle, on the other hand, expresses the same action in 
 relation to the subject, or subjectively. Hence, the middle is employed when 
 the literal meaning is changed into the figurative, e. g. Biouteo' of an outward 
 arrangement, StoiKeicr^at of mental; ipiCeu> literally, apifeo-S-oi figuratively ; 
 ara^fiav only in a literal sense, to measure, but <rraS)naiT&ai also in a figurative 
 signification, to weigh or measure in one's mind, aliquid secum perpendere ; aKonitv, 
 to look at something, aKoire'urSitu, to look mentally, to consider ; so in derivative 
 verbs in -eioi and -eioincu, the active form is used absolutely, to be in a certain 
 state ; the middle, on the other hand, signifies, to act the part of that which is 
 indicated by the root, to show one's self as such, to have the tendency or habit, to act 
 as such, e. g. vovripeia, to be bad, irovripeiopuu, to demean one's self badly ; iroAi- 
 retiu, to be a citizen, iroXiTeiofiai, to live and act as a citizen ; Tafmia, to be a 
 manager, TafUeio/j-at, to conduct business, to arrange, especially in a metaphorical 
 sense, e. g. Tohs vStiovs ; crpaTeico, to undertake an expedition, used of a general or 
 a state, arparevoiiai, to engage in an expedition, used of the soldiers. Derivatives 
 in -i^oiiM coiTCspond in sense to those in -cioiuu, e. g. do-Trifo/ioi, to demean my- 
 self as a citizen ; xap'ci'Ti^o^ai, to act in an agreeable manner. Still, derivatives 
 in -l(a, from names of nations, reject the middle, e. g. Saipt(a>, to demean myself ot 
 to speak like a Dorian. 
 
 Rem. 5. Several verbs which in the active have a causative sense, in the 
 middle have a simple intransitive sense, though some of them are constructed 
 with an Ace., e. g. <^0|8>jffai, to cause to fear, (po^'lidatrSra.i, to fear; ai(TX«yO'h to 
 make ashamed, ai(rxvi'^'i(r^ai, to be ashamed, to feel shame ; iropevtrai, to cause to 
 go, to convey, Tropeiffaa^ai, to go; •jrepatwtrai, to cause to pass over, Trepauiireff^cu, 
 to pass over ; Koi^ritrat, to cause to sleep, lull to sleep, KoLy.i)ffiuT^ai, to sleep ; iraucrat, 
 to cause to cease, Travtraa^cu, to cease ; Trxdy^aL, to cause to wander, irAii-yf ec&iw, 
 to wander, etc. 
 
 Hem. 6. The middle form, as already stated (§ 248, Eem. 1), is often used 
 to express reciprocal actions. This is particularly the case with verbs signify- 
 ing to contend, vie with, converse with, embrace, salute, to make an agreement or com- 
 pact, c. g. fidxfo-^ai, to fight with ; afiiWatrSiai, to contend with ; ayavl(ea&ai, to 
 strive ; SioAeyeo-^ai, to converse with ; acira^eo-^ot, to salute ; ravra ffwri^eff^tu, 
 mutually to agree on these points ; (nro;/Scts ffiriv^ea^nL or iroi^ia^ai, to make a treaty 
 {ffirov^iis TToisLv signifying to make a libation). So also, where the action is not 
 strictly reciprocal, but where the idea expressed by the verb necessarily sup- 
 poses two persons or two parties, as in questions and answers, e. g. irw^dneaAai 
 and ^pe(r^ai, to inquire; airoKpiyeff^ai and aTraiJ.el$e(r^ai, to answer; avfi^ovMi- 
 fff^at, to consult with one, ask his advice, and avaKOivovcr^at, to consult one {woKoivow 
 being especially used of consulting oracles). 
 
 § 251. C. The Passive. 
 1. From the reflexive signification of the Middle, the Passive 
 is derived. Here the subject receives the action from another 
 upon itself, — permits the action to be performed upon itself. 
 Hence the subject always appears as a passive or suffering 
 object. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
1251.] CLASSES OF VERBS. THE PASSIVE. SS'' 
 
 KaiTTiyodiuu, (thiiov/mu {6jr6 tivos), I receive blows, punishment, I let myself bi 
 struck, punished = / am struck, punished (by some one) ; PKiirToyLcu, iiSiKovfuu, 
 I suffer injury, injustice; SiSdffKoiJuu, I let myself be instructed, I receive instruction, 
 Ileam, hence iTr6 tivos, from some one = doceor ah aliquo; ireiAoimi, I persuade 
 myself, or / permit mysdf to be persuaded, iv6 tivos, by some one = I am per 
 suaded. 
 
 2. Yet, there are but two tenses, the Put. and the Aor., which 
 have special forms to express the passive sense of an action ; 
 the remaining tenses are expressed by the Mid. 
 
 3. Hence the following rule : The Fut. and Aor. Mid. have 
 a reflexive (or intransitive) sense only; but aU the other tenses 
 of the Mid. serve at the same time for the Passive also. 
 
 Kemakk 1. Still, the Put. Mid.has sometimes a Pass, sense also. The reason 
 of this may be found in a great measure in the shorter form of this Fut. compared 
 with that of the !Fut. Pass. This passive use of the Fut. Mid. is found most 
 frequently with Pure verbs ; much more seldom with Mute verbs, and very sel- 
 dom with Liquid verbs (probably not at all in Attic prose). Naa-TiydireTat, 
 (TT pe fi\i^ff€Tat, SeS-fitrsTat, iKlcav^frerat TaKfi^ahfld, TeKevrSov irtivTa Kcaci 
 ira^^v avaffKiv^vXev^ffeTai, PI. Rp. 361, e. T^ riJov xpvf^rcav trTrdvei KaKi' 
 ffovTai, Th. 1, 142. ''Hv tis ^ovKt]^ Kcuchs yevea^at, KoKoff^trerai Tf irpeiroiirrt 
 Cni^i^' 01 Sh aya^ol Tifi'fjfrovTai tois Trpos'i}Kovmv i&Kois t^s apeT7}S (but the 
 brave shall be honored with the befitting rewards of valor), 2, 87. Tlepl rav trtpeTe- 
 puv tppovpicov, as i'7rtfiov\evtro[j.4v(i}V, iroWdKts irpiyfiara eTxov, X. C. 6, 1, 
 10. Eip|<i(tte&a (tncMemur), X. An. 6. 6, 16. 'K yfi e? <t>v\i^eTai iiri tuv 
 tppovpoivTwv. OvK ayvoovvTes, Sti eveBpevffOtvTO inrh t&v iraXEfiiuv, H. 7. 2, 
 18. Very commonly oSiK^ffo^oi, ip^ofiai (from Hpx", impero), $\d<jio- 
 liat, Ap4\liofiai. So always a\(i<rop.ai. Some verbs have both forms 
 of the future, as, e. g. w<l>e\f!v, Qmuovv, aTepetv, <po$e!v, &y€tv ; then the Mid. 
 form seems to denote a condition, the Pass, an action received. But in very 
 many instan;es, the Pass, sense is only apparent, e. g. 'H irifAij Ppaxea ^(ri&e«ro 
 HeySia (nn .tiff erat, shall suffer great loss therefor, in contrast with ffpax^a 
 ria^., Th. 3 40. 2oD (covros, $€\Tiov ^pdifiovrai ;tol iraiS eiaovrai (they 
 shall grow up better and educate themselves), PI. Crito. 54, a. 
 
 Rem. 2. The use of the Mid. Aor. instead of the Pass, is, in all instances, 
 only apparent; so Od. &, 35. xovpta 5e 5i5qj Kal irevTiiKovTa Kpivdir^tov ttari 
 Srjfiov, means, let them select for themselves (on the contrary, 48. Koipa Se xpiv- 
 ^4vTe Svaj K. TTfvT., the selected). Hes. Se. 173. Kdirpoi Soiol airovpiifievoL }pv- 
 xds, they had deprived each other of life. PI. Phaedr. 244, e. ra opS'us /iavevri Kal 
 KaTaa-xo/ievai, "in fine frenzy " and in ecstasy. 
 
 Rem. 3. It has been shown, ^ 197, and Rem. 3 (comp. ^ 250, Rem. 1), that 
 the Aor. Pass, of veiy many verbs is employed by the Greeks to denote a 
 reflexive and intransitive action, e. g. Poi\ofuu, I wiU, iPovXii&riv, I willed; 
 ti^paiva, I gladden, cheer, ei<ppatvofiai, I am glad, ev(j>pdv&iiv, I was glad. In 
 a few verbs, the Pass. Fut. is used in the same way, e. g. ^So/iat, i rejoice, 
 licr^v, I rejoiced, r)tr^croiuu, I shall rejoice. See § 197, Rem. 1. 
 
 Rem. 4. The author or cause of the passive condition or state is generally 
 expressed by the Prep. vtt6 with the Gen., e. g. Oi tTTpaTiwrat inrh rSiv iroK- 
 tftlav 4Sii6xc^i7ira»'. Instead of mo, irpSs with the Gen. is used, when at the 
 same time a strong nnd direct influence of a person, or of a thing viewed as a 
 person, is to be expressed, c. g. 'ATiynnfeir&ni, aSiK^'iaSsai irpis tivos. Barau- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
338 SYNTAX. [i 251. 
 
 iTiKai Texftii elKSras oSo^ovyraL trphs twv TrtJAewv, X. 0. 4, %' also Trapd 
 with the Gren. is used, when the anthor is at the same time to be represented as 
 the person from near whom, or from whose vicinity, or through whose means 
 internal or outward, the action has proceeded ; hence used specially with ttc/*- 
 ireffftoi, SiSoff&oi, ii(/>eA€;(r&oi, <rv\kiyia^ai, \€ye<r&ai, iiioKoyeiirSiai, ar)iialviir&at, 
 imSe'iKyvirAai {demonstrari), e. g. 'O &Yyef^05 iirep.<l>^ri wapa Pa(ri\4us (sent 
 both by and from near the king). 'H fieyi(rT7j evrvxia roirta r<^ avipX irapk 
 ^euv SeSoTat. TioXKh xP't^fiara Kipce iraph. Twy iplKiav <Tvvei\eyn4va 
 ?tv. Ti Sftjpo ircjUTTeTai Trapa TO 5 )8a<ri\6t;oi/Tos, Her. 7, 106. Tavapk 
 Twv ^euv CT/jUaiy^i^eyo, X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. Tlapk irdyroiy dfio \oyE'iTaL, 
 An. 1. 9, 1. OJfjLai ydp fie irapa cov ffo(f>las ir Ktj p at ^ -ft a e<T^ a ty PI. Symp 
 175, e. "Ek is still stronger than 5ropo,used especially with verbs of giving ; yet 
 it is seldom used by the Attic wi'iters, e. g. 'EKelva oBttj fi x^P"' ^« /Sao'iAems 
 4S6Srit, X. H. 3. 1, 6: in Her., however, e'/c is very often used instead of utto 
 simply. The use of bird with the Dat. is almost wholly poetic, e. g. So/iiji/ai 
 vir6 T I y 1 ; in Attic prose only in certain connections, e. g. wis itri rf irarpl 
 Te^pafi/Acvos, PI. Rp. 558, d. Tvyxtivet virh 'TraiSorpl^Tj aya^qi ireiraiSev- 
 lieyos, Lach. 184, e. When the passive condition is not caused by persons, but 
 by things,the Dat.is commonly used (= Lat. Ablative), e.g. 'H t/ais iroAAoij 
 iTv uejiopaTs iTrU^ero, the city was distressed by great misfortunes. — The above 
 usage corresponds with that of the Latin, the voluntary agent with a passive 
 verb being put in the Abl. with the preposition a or ab, the involuntary agent 
 in the Abl. without a preposition. 
 
 Rem. 5. The Dat. of persons, however, is very often used, particularly with 
 the Porf tense, and regularly with verbal adjectives. The Pass, has in such 
 instances an intransitive or reflexive sense, and the Dat. indicates the person by 
 whom the action was performed, or for whom it was perfoi-med. While iv6 
 with the Gen. denotes merely the author of the passive action, the Dat., at the 
 same time, denotes that this action stands in relation to the author, e. g. "flj 
 li 1 ■7rp6Tepov SeS^\a?Tai, i. e. as the thing has been before pointed ovt. by me, and for 
 me now stands as pointed out, Her. 6, 123. 
 
 4, It is a peculiarity of the Greek, that the Act., not merely 
 of tiansitive verbs with the Ace, may be changed into the per- 
 sonal Pass., like the Latin, but also the Act. of intransitive 
 verbs with the Gen. and Dat. 
 
 *&oyo5^ai {m6 Ticot (from (pSiomi' twi, invidere alicui),i. k. I experience 
 envy from some one, am envied (in Latin, on the contrary, invidetw mihi ab 
 aliquo], X. Conv. 4, 29. icpeTrrSv ^irmr i (T t c i e (r A a i imrh ttjs TrarplSos /ioAAoi/, ^ 
 CLW KTTt'ia'&ai (from TruTTeieiv and airiirTeTy tu/i), / am trusted, lam distrusted. 
 Th. 1, 82. ^^ueTj vtt 'ASntmluD ^TrijSouAei/cJjite&o {eiriffovKcieiy rivl). PI. Rp. 
 
 3. 417, b. KcH eVijSouAeuovTej, Kal iir t^ovXevS lievot Sii^ova-i vavra Thii fiioy. 
 8. 551, a. aiTKciTcii S}; rh oel Tinaixevoy, a^eAeiTai ii Tb i,Tiijia^6u.(vov. X. S. 
 
 4, Sl.ouKcTi &Trei\ovfiai, oAA' ^Si; aTEiAu JfAAois, So apxi^?""-) Kparrf 
 S^Tivai, TiyefioyevSrrjyai, Kar a(t>pov7i^TJyai {m6 tivos (from Hpxeiv, Kpa- 
 Tciy, riyiuoyciciy, Karaippoytw riyos), lirixe ipvStijvai (from eirixeipeii/ tu/i). 
 On KiJiTTo^ai tV Kecl>a\^y, iTrnpiiroixai r^y (j>v\aic-liy, see § 281, 3. 
 
 Rem. C. The Greek may form a Pass, from other intransitives also, yet, for 
 the most part, only when the subject is a thing, particularly a Neut. pronoun, 
 or a Part, used as a Nout. substantive, o. g. Ka! fUKpa afiapTri^eyra (velparm 
 peccata), X. An. .'). 8, 20. 'KrvxitSriyray {rerum infeliciter gestanm), Dcm. 
 Cor. 298. 212. 'Eir! tovtois eydi i\riSi e v oiidy ois SiSufil (rot rhy eVV 5eJio> 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 252, 253.] TENSES and modes. 339 
 
 {m conditime, ut haec vere dicaniur), X. Cv. 4. 6, 10. Ey hi iM ■woM.S.v iae- 
 Tdj KiySuj/eueo-fta. {m periculum vocan), Th. 2, 35. 06 idStoy ri {nrh iroAxL 
 KivSvyfv^evTa iip' ei/hs pTi^TJmi, lija. 5, U2. 
 
 } 252. Remarks on the Deponents. 
 
 It has been seen above (§ 102, 3) that Deponents are simply verbs which 
 occur either in the Mid. only, or in the Mid. with a Pass. Aor., and have a 
 reflexive or intransitive signification ; and, also, that they are divided into Mid. 
 or Pass. Deponents, according as their Aor. has a Mid. or Pass. form. The 
 reflexive sense of many Deponents is so slight, that they seem to be, in our 
 mode of regarding them, merely transitive verbs, e. g. Sexo/uti ti, I take (namely, 
 to mi/self) something, ipydCo/ial ti, fiid^o/ial Tim, etc. Such Deponents arc often 
 used in a Pass, sense, particularly in the Perf and in the Pass. Aor Examples 
 of the Pres., Impf., and Put. in a Pass, sense are very rare, and are found only 
 in such Deponents as have in single examples an active form, e. g. 0ui(e<r^M, 
 aveiir^ai. 
 
 niyra awelpyaa-Tai t^ &eij?, PI. L. 710, d. Mt^i/ijj/teVos {ad imitalio- 
 nem expressus,madelike),B.ei.2,78. E5 ivTiS>vinifi,4vov (weU-considered),V\. 
 Crat. 404, a. N^ej ovk ^xp^ff&rjffoi' {adhibitae sunt), Her. 7, 144. 
 
 Eemakk. Several Deponents have both a Mid. and Pass. Aor. ; the Pass, 
 form has then a Pass, sense, e. g. iSe^d/iiiv, excepi, iSdx^vy, exceptus sum; 
 4pia(rdfiriv, coSgi, iPida-Sui", coactus sum; €KrTi<Td/iriv, mihi comparavi, 
 iKrii&'qv, comparatus sum {I was gained); oKoipvpaa-^at, to lament, oA,o- 
 t^vp^Hvai, to be lamented; aKtiraaAai, to heal, aKea-Arjyai, to be healed; 
 i,TioKplpaaSrai,to reply, avoKpi^rivat, to be separated. In a few verbs only 
 are both Aorists used without distinction of meaning (§ 197, Kcm. 1). 
 
 {253. Tenses and Modes of the Verb. 
 
 (a) Tenses denote the relation of time expressed by the 
 predicate, this being designated either as Present, Future, or 
 Past, e. g. the rose blooms, mil bloom, bloomed; 
 
 (b) Modes denote the relation of what is affirmed in the predi- 
 cate to the subject; this relation being denoted either as an 
 actual fact, as a conception or representation, or as a direct 
 expression of the wiU. The mode which expresses a fact, as 
 the rose blooms, is called the Indicative ; that which denotes a 
 conception, as the rose may bloom, the Subjunctive ; that virhich 
 denotes the du-ect expression of the will, the Imperative, as 
 give. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
3J0 SYNTAX. [{^254,255 
 
 4 254. A. More Particular View of the Tenses. 
 
 1. The tenses are divided, according to their form and mean< 
 ing, into two classes : (a) into Principal tenses, which, both in 
 the Ind, and Subj., always denote something present or future; 
 (b) into Historical tenses, which in the Ind. always denote 
 something past, in the Optative, something present or future. 
 
 2. The Principal tenses are : — 
 
 (a) The Present: (a) Indicative, e.g. ypdfo^iiv, scrilimus ; (/8) Subjanctive, 
 e. g. ypdcpiiifj-syj scrihamus ; 
 
 (b) The Perfect : (a) Indicative, e. g. ■yeypii(paii.ev, scripsimvs ; (j8) Subjunc- 
 -tive, e. g. yeypa^toixev, scripserimus ; 
 
 (c'. The Future Indicative, e. g. ypitfionev, scribemus, we shall write; Subjunc- 
 tive wanting ; 
 
 (d) The Putnre Perfect Indicative, c. g. 0ePov\ei(ropiai, I shall have advised 
 myself, or I shall have been advised; Subjunctive wanting. 
 
 The Subj. Aor. also belongs here, e. g. ypa^a, scripserim or scribam. See 
 I 257, 1 (a). 
 
 3. The Historical tenses are : — 
 
 (a) The Aorist: (a) Indicative, e.g. iypw\ia, I wrote; (|8) Optative, e. g. 
 ypi.'^aip.iy I might ivrite, or I might have written; 
 
 (b) The Imperfect : (a) Indicative, o. g. eypafov, scribebam ; (p) Optative, 
 e. g. ypd(poifLij scribei-em ; 
 
 (c) The Pluperfect : (a) IndLicatlve, e. g. eyeypdfetv, scripseram ; [p) Optative, 
 e. g. yeypd^oiiJ-i, scripsissem ; 
 
 (d) The Optative of the simple Future, e. g. ypi^oif-u, I would write, and of 
 the Put. Perf., c. g. fie$ov?\.ev(rolpi.riv, Itmuld have deliberated, or Ivxmldhave 
 been advised, when in narration (and consequently in reference to the 
 past), the representation of a future action, or of one to be completed at 
 a future time, is to be expressed, e. g. 6 dyytXas i\iyev, oVi ol iTo\4fLioi 
 viK-fj&oiev, the messenger said, that the enemy would conquer ; e\eyev, Sti 
 TrtiyTa {nrh rod (TTpaTTjyov eS ^ s ^ovKeiff oiT o, he said that everything 
 •WOULD be well planned by the general. 
 
 i255. (a) Principal Tenses: Present, Perfect, Future. 
 
 1. The Present Indicative represents the action as taking 
 [>laoe in time present to the speaker. The Present i.-, often 
 jised, in the narration of past events, for the purpose of a more 
 vivid and graphic representation ; past time is then viewed as 
 present. This is called the Historical Present. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'^^3- 1 PEINOIPAL TENSES. 34 J 
 
 Tttirn,/ TJ)v Td<l>pov $a<riheis l^^as voie? iyrl ipi/iaros, i'^reiSi, vvvd dver a. 
 Kvpov irpotiKaimvTa, X. An. 1. 7, 16. ''Hv tis nptafuSS, yediraros UoXiSapos, 
 "EitdPns -irats, 4v Ik Tpolas i/iol Tariip SlSaa-i Upia/ws iv Si/jLO,s Tp4<pew, Eur. 
 Hec. 1116. The Hist. Pres. is sometimes used even in passages which in them- 
 selres, aside from adverbs lilce vot4, 5ri{\ai (poet, irtipos), are considered as 
 involving past time, e. g. Z&vt' ehoKoia-as toTSo, ii/ ^Ko-dCet ttotL Eur El 
 419. 
 
 Remark 1. An action is often viewed by the language as present, which 
 belongs, indeed, to the past, but at the same time extends to the present, or in 
 Its results reaches to the present. In this manner, the following voi-bs particu- 
 larly are used: (a) verbs of perceiving, e. g. a k o li a, Truy&tico^ai, aiVacJ- 
 vofiai, yiyytiffKai, p.avSr£va> (like Lat. audio, mrfeo. etc., and Eng. «o liear, 
 to see, to perceive, to observe), when the object of these verbs is to be represented 
 as still continuing in the present; (b) ^eiya,Ihave ffiven myself to flight, and 
 1 am now a fugitive, hence to live in exile; vixio and xpara {I am a victor, 
 hence have conquered), riTTHjiai {lam vanquished, have been vanquished), aStxa 
 {I am in ilie wrong, liave done wrong), yiyvop.a.i (I am descended), etc.; (c) in 
 poetry: <l>oyeia'{Iam a murderer, have murdered, e. g. S. Ant. 1174), S)vi)<rKa 
 [lam dead, have died, S. El. 113), tIktu, yevvu {lam a father or mother, Eur. 
 Ion. 356. Her. 209), etc. This usage extends to all the Modes and Participials 
 of the Pres. as well as to the Impf. &ffiurTOK\ia ovk axoisis &ySpa ayaSshv 
 yeyov6Ta-, PI. Gorg. 503, u. TiatiTa. Trvy^av6/j.svos i Kpo7(ros eTre^Ts 4s 1,-irdp- 
 TTiv orycAouj, Her.^ 1, 69. 1i S4; crv IciTm aiefiKoas, on Muo-ol /col ^l(r(Sa^ iv rp 
 ^B'rOxms X^Pf KarixovTfS ipvpivh -nivu x<apla Siii/ai'Tai f^y ikei&epot; — Kol toBt'o 
 y , 6077,^ aKoiw, Imst thou heard f aKovaa,yes,I have hnoum of it, X. C. 3. 5, 26. 
 ■A7ro77€A€T€ ^Apiaiai, Srt TifieTs ye viKap.fV ;8oa-iAe'o, Kai, iis ipare, oiiSiis tj/up 
 en fidxerat, An. 2. 1, 4. Taj/ viKiivTav iarl Kai ra kavruv ad^siv KaX to, -ray 
 hr-raiiivoiv \a.fi$di/eiv, 3. 2, 39. Aapiov Kai napua-driSas watSes ylyvoVTai 
 iio, 1. 1, 1. 
 
 Eem. 2. Oixop-ai and f/Ka, with Pres. forms, are often translated in Eng. 
 by Perfects, namely, o!fx"f""i I have departed, and ijycw, I have come; yet 
 aixo/iat, properly means, / am gone, and tJkoi, I am here {adsum), e. g. Mij 
 \v7rov, Sti 'Apdtnras oKxerai els rovs Tro\ep.iovs, that Araspas is gone, has 
 departed (= transfitgit) to the enemy, X. Cy. 6. 1, 45. "Hku yeKpZv Kev^fiiom 
 Kol <rK6Tov TriKas \nrdiv, Eur. Hec. 1. 'T/ieir juijAis i.'pmvuir^e, Svot Ti/xeis vdXai 
 Si/csjucv, X. Cy. 1.3,4. 
 
 Kem. 3. But the language often considers an action as present, which is not 
 yet accomplished, but is either actually begun, or is begun in our mind, or pur^ 
 pose ; such an action is virtually future, though considered as present. Com- 
 pare the English: I go to-morrow, i. e. I shall go, I intend to go, andthelilce. Tliis 
 usage also belongs to all the Modes and Participials of the Pres. and tire Impf. 
 It specially holds of the Pres. of e f /ii i, which, in the Ind. has regularly the mean- 
 ing of the Fut, I shall go; the Subj. includes a Eut. meaning in itself (^ 257, 
 Eem. 4) ; but the Inf and Part, have both a Pres. and Eut. meaning. 'E t e i t o 
 rd re vvv ^yra iv t^ mxpaSeitrtp ^pla SiSat fii <rot, koI &\?<a irafrodMra ffvK- 
 Ae'lai, X. Cy. 1. 3, 14 {SI da fit, I offer). "EKtMTTifj tij eiret^ey aevoipSivTOi 
 tnro(rT%vat t^v ifX^" (persuadere studebat), X. An. 6. 1, 19. MnvK-qvcuoi eVi 
 Mi^/jLvav us TrpoStSopieyriy larpdrevcaii (putantes parari ibi proditioncm), 
 Th. 3, 18. In like manner often the Pres. Part, after verbs of motion, e. g. 'H 
 TrdpdKos is rhs 'A^-fivas e-KXevo'ey, an ayyeWov a-a tcc yeyovdra {for the purpose 
 of announcing), X. S.. 2. 1,29. Kol t^ ^tyei avcaWi/j-eS-a, Kol x''">"''AeiVT5) 
 Hy {we e3j>ected to perish), An. 5. 8, 2. — Ovk ev&bs i,<pi]ffa> airhy, ovS" ATreipn, 
 oaA' ep-^aopLal aiirhy Kai ^|eTi£<r(ii, PI. Apol. 29, e. 'Eirel ri MaySdpTi irapear- 
 Kevd^ero us aTrtovffa irdKiy irphs fhy &edpa, iSeiro avr^s 6 'AiTTvayTis KaraKfireiw 
 rhv Kvpop, X, Cy. 1. 3, 13. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
342 SYNTAX. [5 '-iSS. 
 
 Sem. 4. But also actions or events wholly future are sometimes indicated 
 as present, by the use of the Pres. tense, when in the view of the speaker 
 the action or event yet future is vividly apprehended, or when he is so fii-mly 
 convinced of its occurrence, that it appears already present, e. g. 'Ev /u^ nixo 
 T^ySe T^i/ Xi^pav ir pos KTaff^ e Kal iKeivTjv jttSXAoz' ^\ev^epovT€ {you gain^ 
 vjill gain, and free), Th. 4, 95. *Hj/ S-bvjj ai, ircus '6S' iiccpei-yei iiopov aov 8" 
 ov ^eKoimis Kardami', ToVSe KTem, Eur. Andr. 381. 
 
 2. The Perfect (Indicative) represents a past action in time 
 present to the speaker ; the action appears as already accom- 
 phshed at the present time. Hence the Perf. represents not 
 only a past action, but its present effects or results. 
 
 Veypa^a ttJj' imrTo\iiv, I have wkitteit the letter, the letter IS NOW ■wbit- 
 TEN, whether written now, or some time ago ; the writing is the past act, the 
 letteris the result still present. 'H v6\is ^/ctkttoi, thecitywAS built (in past 
 time), is now built, and there it now stands Imilt. 'Affrvdyris tH^ ec M^Soij TrdiTiDi 
 SeffiriTTjv eavrhy ireiroiT] Key, X. Cy. 1. 3, 18. OuSev iffTL Kepda\et&T€poy rot 
 viKay 6 yap Kparay S.fia tr^.tno. trvvftpvaKe, Kai Tovs ivSpas, Kai ras yvpaiKaSt 
 4. 2, 26. 
 
 Rem. 5. Since the Perf. brings past time into close connection with the 
 present, the Greeks in many Perfects contemplated less the peculiar act of 
 completion, than its result as exhibited at the present moment ; and hence they 
 used the Perf., in order to indicate a present condition or state that was occar 
 sioned by the completion of the action. As such a use of the Perfect does not 
 belong to the English, we translate many Greek Perfects by our Present, where 
 the present condition is more prominent than the past act ; the Plupf. of such 
 verbs is then translated by our Impf., e. g. TeSrvTixa (I have died), lam dead 
 (Eur. Ale. 557. i-eS-yao-ic oi &av6yT€s, those who di^, are dead); KeKninai (I 
 have acquired), Ipossess; Ts^aificuca (I have been wondering), 7am astonislned ; 
 0ePov\sviiai (I have taken counsel with myself ), Z am determined; weifnivall 
 have shown myself), lappear; oISo, novi (I have seen), Ihww; TedijXo (I have 
 blossomed), 7 bloom; ireiroi&o (I have convinced myself), I trust; Pe$TiKa (I 
 'lave taken steps), 7 am gying; /le/iiniiiat, memini (I have called to mind), 7 am 
 mindful, or remember; Km\TiiMi (I have been named), 7 am catted, etc. The 
 Pres. and Impf. of many verbs, especially such as express the idea of to sound, 
 to call, are not used at all, or but very seldom, so that the Perf. and Plup. seem 
 to take entirely the place of the Pres. and Impf., e. g. Kexpaya, I cry, properly, 
 I am a crier ; yUEjuvca, 7 roar. 
 
 Rem. 6. The transition from the completed action to the condition or state 
 produced by it, is more obvious in the Pass, than in the active. Comp. fi dipa 
 KeKK'eiffTai, the door has been shut, and it is now shut. So particularly the 
 third Pers. Sing. Perf. Imp. Pass, is often used, when one would command with 
 emphasis, that the thing spoken of should remain fixed and permanent in its 
 condition, i. e. not only that the action should be performed, but particularly 
 that the result should continue, c. g. ri aytcipiov cuietrvdaSno, let the anclwr bf- 
 drawn up and remain so ; Ke\el(l>S>a>, religuum esto, let it remain permaner,tly ; irarei- 
 piia-^a, let it be tried; vvv St rovro TiTo\i).i<rSia €metv. So the Inf. in the Oratio 
 obliqua, X. H. 5. 4, 7. ^luJvrer Se eiirov, tJ/v Stiptw KiK\etaSrtu, tliat it be shut, and 
 remain shut. 
 
 Rem. 7. The Perf. is used with special emphasis, even of future actions, the 
 occurrence of these being affirmed with the same defmitencss and confidence, 
 a? if they had already taken place. II. o. 128. SUip^opasJ you arc lost, willbt 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 255.] PRINCIPAL TENSES. 343 
 
 hst. So SKuKa, likeperii, inter ii, actum est de me, it's all over with me, will be, 
 etc. PI. Phaed. 80, d. n ^j/vxh ctiroAAaTTOjueVrj -fov ifinaTOS, eS&iij Siaire(j>iia-n 
 rai Kal li-iriAaiKev, 
 
 3. The Future (Indicative) denotes an action as future in re- 
 lation to the present time of the speaker. Tlie Greeks very 
 often use the Fut. Ind. in subordinate clauses, even after an 
 Hist, tense, to express that wliich sh/ill, should, must, or can be, 
 where the Latin employs the Subj.; the other forms of the 
 Fut., particularly the Part., are also so used. 
 
 N(ifiowj ivdp^at Set Towirovs, Si av toIs jikv hr/a^dts fcTt/joj Kal 4Kei&epos d filot 
 »ropa<rK6u«(r&<)<r£TOi {should be obtained), to!s Sh kbicois raireiviii re kbI a\- 
 yfifhs Kol iiplanos 6 aiiiv iiravaKtltrfTui {sliould be imposed upon them), X. Cy. 
 3. 3, 52. Oi fls T^y iSao'iAixV T€Xw)v iraiSevi/ieyoi ri Sia^4pov(ri -rwv 4^ avdyicrit 
 KaKOTra^o6t/Ttay, ei ye truv^ffovffi Koi Sitf/^troi/trt /col ^lyi^ffovtri KeX hy* 
 pvitvltaovai (if they must hunger, etc.), C. 2. 1, 17. "ESoJe rif Siiiuf rptaKopra 
 &v5ptts eKeff^cu, dtTovs irarpiovs v6iiovs ^vyypdipovct, ko^* otis iro\tT einrovffi 
 {who should draw up laws, according to which they should live), H. 3. 2, 3. 
 
 4. The second person of the Fut. Ind. is often used to express 
 commands, exhortations, admonitions, entreaties, and, in con- 
 nection with the negative oi, prohibitions ; here the accomplish- 
 ment of what is affirmed is not demanded, as is the case in the 
 Imp., but is left to the choice of the person addressed, and is 
 only expected. This differs chiefly from the Imp. only in being 
 a milder form of expression. On the contrary, the Fut. is used 
 with the negative oi, interrogatively, when, in a strong and 
 in&ignant tone, the accomplishment of the action is expected 
 necessarih/. 
 
 "Opa oSv Kai Trpo^vp-ou KartSeit/, 16.V Tftjj irpSrepos ifxov tS^s, Kai fiOL ^pii' 
 areis {you mil communicate it to me = communicate), PI. Kp. 432, c. 'Xls olv 
 voi-fia-ere Kai Tre^S-ctrS-e /ioi {you wiU do thus, etc. = do thus), Prot. 338, a. 
 Ou Spdffds TovTo, thou uiilt not do this, as I hope = do it not ; butoft SpeEirei} 
 toEto; wilt thou not do this? = do it. Ou iroicrp \4yai'; non desines diceret 
 instead of desine dicere. PI. Symp. in. oi iteptp.evits i wilt thou not wait ? Cem. 
 Phil. 2, 72. o4 tjivKd^ea-^', e<pTlv, 3itus fii) SecririjTijv cSprire; But When in this 
 manner, a negative command is to be expressed, the negative n^i is to be used 
 with oi ; and when two sentences of this kind, one with an affirmative meaning 
 nnd the other with a negative, follow each other, oi stands in the first sentence, 
 «■() in the last. Oi /iii (pXuapiiareis; Ov firi \a\-fiiTeis, &A\' &Ko\ov^iiirfts 
 iftol,. At. Nub. 505 (instead of /ii) ifiKvdpei, nh \d\ei, aW axoXoi^ti] . PI. Symp 
 175, ii. ovK oZv /caAfis aijhv Kal fiT) i,ip-f)<rfis. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
344 SYNTAX. [} 2o6, 
 
 5. The Future Perfect (Indicative) represents ^future action 
 as past, (completed) in relation to another future action ; hence 
 a future prior to another future. Such an action is future with 
 reference to tlie present, past with reference to another future. 
 
 Kal Toidi /u e fi 1 1 e T a 1 iaS>Ah KaKotatv ( the good shall have been mixed with eiiil), 
 Hes. Op. 17?. 'li froKiT^ta reAews KeKo&fi'fi&eT aty iSiv 6 toiovtos avr^v iiriff' 
 IcoTT^ (pi\a^ 6 Toirav eViifT^^toy, PI. Sp. 506, a. As the Greek Perf. frequently 
 denotes the present condition or result of a completed action, so the Put. Perf. 
 frequently denotes the future condition or result of a completed action. Hence 
 the Put. Perf. of those verbs whose perfects are translated by the present tense 
 Of other verbs (see Rem. B), must be translated by the simple Put., e. g. /isfLU^- 
 lrofi.ai, meminero {I shall have reminded myself), IsJiall be mindful, shall remember 
 (biit fjiv^iToiJUu, I shall remind myself) ; H^Krliaoiiai (I shall have acquired), I shall 
 possess (but KT'^irojuoi, I shall acquire), etc. 
 
 Bbm. 8. The Put. Perf., like the Perf. (Hem. 7), is used instead of the sim- 
 ple Put., to express a thing emphatically. Here as in the Perf. used for the 
 Put., the speaker looks upon the action as already accomplished ; hence the 
 Put. Peif. often denotes the rapidity and certainty of the action, the process 
 or progress being left wholly out of view, e. g. *piife, kciX ireirpd^cTui {and it 
 sliall be [cEKTAiNLY, immebiatelt] done), Ar. Plut. 1127 ; ^iA.or ^,11?^ ovSils 
 AcAEfif/eTcti (no friend will [certainly] be left us), X. An. 2. 4, 5. So also ia 
 the Inf. AuoTi/ ^ rptwj/ rifiepuv ravra '^eirpd^ea-^at, Dem. 19,74. In the Act. 
 the periphrasis jSejSouAewciis f(ro[iai is found. 
 
 Rem. 9. The Put. Perf. is used in Greek only in principal clauses, and in 
 subordinate clauses introduced by Sti and as {that), by e i used instead of hi, 
 and by SsT€ (so tliat), all with the Ind. In all other subordinate clauses, the 
 Aor. Subj. (more seldom the Perf.) is used instead of it, in connection with a 
 conjunction compounded of &i>, as iiv, e-aiv, iirnMv, Srav, vplv &v, err" &v, %i 
 Hv, etc., e. g. 'Eay TovTo Ae'ljjs {si hoc dixcris), aimpriiay. 
 
 i256.{h) Historical Tenses: Aorist, Imperfect, and 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 1. The Aorist (Ind.) ei-jpresses past time, ui a wholly indefi- 
 nite manner, with no other relation, e. g. eypatj/a, I wrote, Kil/sos 
 TToXXa l^f] iviKrja-ev. It thus Stands in contrast with the other 
 tenses which express past time ; stm, so far as it indicates past 
 tilde indefinitely, it may be used instead of either of these 
 tenses. 
 
 2. Both the Impf and Plup. (Ind.) represent an action as 
 past, but always as having relation to another past action. But 
 the Impf expresses the action as contemporary with this other 
 past action; the Plup. expresses the action as aheady past 
 before this other past action. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 256.] msTOKicAL tenses 345 
 
 'Ey ^ iri en-oifes, iyi) I y,pa(j>ov, while you were playing, I was loritini/. "Ora 
 ^yyij 9i<rav oi $dp^n)oi, ol"EA\riViS ifidxovTo. "Ore ol fiip^apoi 4ire\Ti\i- 
 df(rav, 01 "EAArifej iiiix""'''''- Tifre (or eV TatiTij rp fidxTl) d "EAAtj^m 
 fra^^aAecSraTa liUtix"'''''''- 'EtciSt) oi "EA.\7);^£s ^jreAijAu&cirosy, oi Tro\eiJuoi 
 &irfr£!l>eiye(ray. "Ore oJ (riiifiaxoi iir\7iffla(ov,el'A^ri»cuoi rotis Tlepffa 
 ivfviKiiKiaav. 'i'.-yiypi^lieiv t^iv i^urroK^v, I had written ilie letter (before 
 the friend came). 
 
 Eemaek 1. It is to be noted that the Greeks freely use the Aor. instead of 
 the Plup., when the relation of the past time to another past time can be easily- 
 inferred from the context, and no special emphasis lies in this relation, e. g. 
 'EtteiS); 01 "EAAiji'ES ^ irijXS-ov (quum Graeci venissent), ol iroKefuoi aimrefeiye- 
 eav. The Aor. is often employed even instead of the Perf., when the relation 
 of the past time to the present need not be expressed emphatically. 
 
 3. Hence the Aorist (Ind.) is used in historical narrations, in 
 order to indicate the principal events, while the Impf. (Ind.) is 
 used to denote the accompanying circumstances. The Aor. 
 viarrates, the Impf. describes. Hence ia the narration of past 
 ■events, the Aor., which introduces the principal facts, is very 
 often interchanged with the Impf, wliich describes and paints ; 
 often, also, with the Hist Pres., wliich, hke the Aor., relates the 
 principal events, and places them vividly m the present ; not 
 seldom, also, with the Plup., sometimes with the Perf By this 
 interchange of the tenses, the narration has the greatest liveli- 
 ness of representation, and the finest shades of expression. 
 
 *Hfios y 'Eas(p6pos clffi <p6us ipiuv iiA ya7ar, TTJfi.os irup/coir) i/MapalveTo, 
 irai<raTO Se (pK-i^ {the fire upon the funeral pile began to abate, and the flame 
 ceased), H. if", 228. Tois irtKraffTis eSefai/ro at fiapfiapM Kal i/iixovro- 
 ewel S* ^77^5 i^ffap oi &iT?SraL, ir pdrroVTO' koX oi TreATaiTTol eu&i/s e'iiroVTO 
 {the barbarians withstood thepeltasts and continued to fight with them; but when the 
 hoplites drew near, they fled, and immediately the jxltasts set out in pursuit), X. An. 
 5. 4, 34. Suve'/Si) T^ aSoK^T-ij) icoi HaTrtrris kix^oripaSiev Tois 'tiSn)vawvs Stopv^T\- 
 Ssrivaf KoX Th ftiv ti^yvfj.oi' Kepas avT&v, Sirep 5v) Kol tt poK^xa P'fl Kel, (ii^vs 
 tmo^iayev ^-(pvys- KcA & BpaffiSas, imox^povyros tjSi] caiTov, timraptiiy Tip Se^iif, 
 Tirp<i<riceTaf Koi ■irvr6vTa airhi/ ot fKv'A^vtuoi oIik aia^dvov rai, oi Se 
 7r\i)(riV &pames avtiveyKap • (col 6 ij.ii/ KKeav, as ri wpZroi/ ov SievaeTro 
 p.hetv, ehSiis (peiryasv, koX KaTa\ri<j)^els virh MvpKivlov teAtoo-toS, aTTo&y^o-KEi • oi 
 5e airov ^viTTpcapevTes 'S^KTrai rtp-ivovro ic. t, \., Th. 5, 10. 'O ficv viK^iios 
 hrivrav iiiias Tav elprtliivaiv oircoTepr/Ke • Kol ydp Tonrevtar4pous veirelriKe, 
 Kcd TToWobs KivSivovs iTOiidvelv ijvdyKaa-i, Kol -n-pbs roi/s "'E.h.Xtfvas Sib^e^Xti- 
 KE KoL Trdvra Tp6Trov reraKanr^p-riKev vp.as, Isoc.r. Pac. 163, a. (The 
 Perfects denote the renult, the Aorist the event.) 
 
 Kem. 2. Inasmuch as the Aor. Ind. represents a past action independently 
 .-md absolutely, uncon looted with any other past time, while the Impf. Ind. 
 represents a past action as always conjiectcd with another past action, being, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
346 SYNTAX. [i 256, 
 
 consequently, employed in exhibiting an action in its duration and procp-ess, anil 
 hence used in description ; accordingly the Aor. expresses a moment or point of 
 time, while the Impf., denotes duration or continuance. The Aor. therefore 
 describes a momentary action or a single action ; the action, however, described 
 by the Aor. may be a continued or protracted one, but the writer in using the 
 Aor. presents no such view of it, communicating merely the fact of the occur- 
 rence. The Impf., on the other hand, describes an action in its continuance 
 and progress, — not merely a single act, but a series of acts. It often depends on 
 the choice of the writer whether the Impf. or Aor. is used. An action graphi- 
 cally presented in its duration and progress by the Impf, can be stated histor- 
 ically as a mere past act, by the Aor. And so, many actions stated in the Aor. 
 might be more vividly described by the Impf., if the writer wished it. 
 
 4. On the use of the Impf. and Aor. Ind., the following thmgs 
 are to be noted : — 
 
 (a) The Impf. appears sometimes to stand instead of the Pres., since an 
 action which continues into the present time, is referred to a past time in which 
 it occurred, or was known to the speaker. Kvpos i^eKa^i/ei — iirl rhv Xdxov 
 irorafiiv, 6vTa T^ eZpos Tr\e&pou, irXiip-j) S* lyhviov fieyaKav Kol irpa4tay, o&s ol ^iipoi 
 fteois ivo/jLi^oi' Kol aSmety ovk elav [which the Syrians CONSIDEK as gods, 
 namely, as I then saw), X. An. 1. 4, 9. ^A^iKoyro irphs rh MriSias KoKoifieyoy 
 TeTxos ' — aireTx^ Se Ba^vhuvos oh 'koK{i, 2. 4, 12. Tp Se wp^rri Tifieptf atpiKovro 
 €Trl T^i/ TTorafiSy, Hs S p i f 6 t^v re rwv VlaKp^yay [x^pay] Kal T^y ray "SKV^iyuy, 
 4. 8, 1 . 'Arip, S eroipe, Sp' oi t(J5€ ^y rh SeySpoy, 4^' Sirep ^yes Tj/ms ; PI. Phaedr. 
 230, a. OiiK &p' aytAhs t& iroXniKi, XIepiK\rjs fjy ex roirov rov \6yov (namely, 
 when he so appeared to us, consequently = ovk fip' a.ya^6s ^ffriy, Sjs e^afyero, 
 he is not therefore distinguished, as he then seemed to he), Gorg. 516, d. — From the 
 idea of duration or continuance contained in the Impf. several other relations orig- 
 inate : (a) The beginning of an action, e. g. e^rel ^771*5 iy4yovTo, i^aTrlyTjs ol fi\y 
 ainwy ^To^evoy, some of them began to shoot their arrows ; — (^) hahit or custom, 
 e. g. avT'bv o'lnep irp6s^ey irposeKvyovy, Kal TjJre vposeKiyjjtray, those who were 
 before accustomed to do obeisance to him, did it then also ; — (y) wish, endeavor or 
 attempt, e. g. irparros K\4apxos robs auTov (TrpaTtciras 4^i^C^ro Uvea, Clearchm 
 endeavored to compel his soldiers to advance, 
 
 (b) The Aor. is often used in general propositions which express a fact bor- 
 rowed from experience, and hence what is customary ; here a single fact which 
 has been obseiTed to be true in many instances, but not established as imivcrsal, 
 is stated to be generally true, — the truth frequently observed in regard to a 
 single event, is considered as holding in the case of other similar events. In 
 such cases the Aor. is usually translated into English by the present, or by the 
 verb is wont, is accustomed, with the Inf. II. p, 177. aisi tc Aths np^laaav y6os 
 aiy i6x°'o, 8sT€ Kal i\Kifiov &ySpa i/JO/ScT, Kal a^et\eTo vIktiv ptfiSlas (who 
 inspires the brave man with fear, and bears off the victory). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. 01 lity 
 yhp TrAuffTcu v6\Gts irposTtiTTOva-i to7s iroKirais fi^ KXeWeu/, fx^ apTrd^eiy, Kal rSAAa 
 Ta Totavra Sisa^Twy ^y S4 rts ro'uray ti •jrapa$alyri, ^tjfilas avTois iire^^O'aP 
 [loere acaistomed to impose a penalty upon them). Dem. 01. 1(2). 20, 9. Stoc iit 
 wK^ov^^ias KoL TOVTipias rts, iisvep outos {^IMttwos), la'x^trri, rj irpcirTj irpSipaffti 
 tial filKphv KTOttrfia HwayTa avexalr tae Kcd Si4\Vff(y, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 25G.] HISTOEICAL TENSES. 347 
 
 Kem. 3. When the idea of being wont to do, as found in the Aor., is to bo 
 made prominent, or when a native habit is to be expressed, the Greek uses the 
 verbs ^iMtv and 4&4\eiy. Her. 7. 10, 5. <pi\4it ycip 6 fteis rtk uTep^x""''''' ■"^•'ra 
 Ko\oiety, 157. t^ ed ^ov\ev^4i/Ti TrpiiyiMirL reXevr^ us rh iirlirav xP'^l^'^h ^i& c A c 
 iTTtylvfaAat, 
 
 ^^;) Hence in poetry, the Aor. is often used in comparisons, instead of the 
 Pres., since comparisons contain facts that are known and founded on often 
 repeated experience. II. y, 33 — 36. as S' Zre tIs re SpdKovra ISiip vaKtmptros 
 &TreaT7j oSpeos ^y ^■fia'tr-pSf ihr6 t€ Tp6fios eAAa)3e yutUf &^ t* &vex(5/)?^<re»', 
 Sixpis t4 fiiv eT\€ irapeiiis ' &s adris ko^* '6fii\oy ^5u Tp^uy ayep<l)X'^y (sc. Tldpis). 
 H. IT, 482. ^pfne 5*, ws Sre ris dpvs i^piirey^ 
 
 (d) The Tragedians often use the Aor. in dialogue as an impassioned or 
 emphatic expression of a decision or determination, which has respect, indeed, 
 to the present time, but which the speaker wishes to represent as having been 
 previously established and settled in his own mind. The English often trans- 
 lates such Aorists, in a very imperfect manner, by the Pres. Here belong 
 especially verbs expressing strong feeling or passion, e.g. InreirTvira (Ida 
 abhor), iytKaffa {I cannot help laughing), 4iryy€fra, ^fioj^a, i^aifiatra, 
 avdiioaa, iitr&riv. S. Phil. 1434. & S" &y XiiySjy tru (TKuAoToSSe toB STparov, 
 ri^ay iij,ay /lyriiieia, Tphs irvphy itiijy K^iuC^ • /col irol tout', 'Ax'AAe'i's reicyoy, ira- 
 pifyetra, this I counsel thee, this 1 have cmnselled thee. Eur. Med. 223. XP^ ^^ 
 ^4yoy ixey ndpTa Trposx^peiy [se accomnwdare) irSKei ouS* ^ffrhy ^yea*, SsTts 
 av^dSris yeyiis iriKphs irohiTMs iarly o/uodfos Stto (nech.udo,necunquam laudam). 
 Hec. 1276. Polym. ; Koi (ri^y y haiiymi iroiXSa KaardySpav haviiv. Hecuba: oire'ir- 
 Tuffa, this thought I do abhor = a thought which I have abhorred. 
 
 (e) With like effect the Aor. is often used by Attic writers, apparently instead 
 of the Pres. in urgent appeals or commands, expressed in the form of a question 
 introduced by t ^ ol'v ov or t ( oh. The speaker wishes, as it were, to see the 
 desired action already accomplished. X. Cy. 2.1,4. tI oiy, e(pri 6 Kupos, oil ko) 
 riiv Siya/iiy ? A e | c{ y /ioi (quin igitur mihi recenses ? why hast thou not yet told me of 
 the forces? insAead of tdl ine forthwith!) 5. 4, 37. ri oly, eipri, S TaSdra, 
 oix' ™ A'^" ■'■"XI ^vAaic^ ^X"P^ eiToltiaas (why therefore have you not made 
 the waUs strong by a guard ? = at once make them, etc.) ; PI. Phaedon. 86, d. ei ody 
 Tis v/MV fiirop^repos i/Jiav, T I oiiK airexplyaTO; {is quam celerrime respondeat, 
 let him answer at once). The Pres. is also so used ; yet the expression is then 
 far weaker, e. g. Tl oZy, ^ 8' hs, ovk ipar^s; (stronger than ^pt^To, but 
 weaker than T^ oZy ovk iip^rritras or ^pov;) PI. Lysid. 211, d. Tl oiv ov 
 ffKOirovfiev, X. C. 3. 1, 10. 
 
 (f) The Aor., like the Pert {§ 255, Bem. 7) is used, when the speaker confi- 
 dently considers a future event as already taken place. II. S, 160 — 162. riirep 
 ydj) Tc Kol avTW 'OAi/jnirioj ovk ireMairey, Ik te koX o^% teAei, aiv te /j-eydAip 
 iTTETio-oc <riiy a-<pfi(riv K€(pa\^n yvyat^i tc ko! TeKhcrtny {then liave they paid a 
 heavy penalty, then shall they pay). Eur. Med. 78. oirwA({fico-&' &p', ei KaKhy 
 rposola-oiiey yeoy iroAoiig {then we shall perish, if, etc.). 
 
 (g) The Aorist is very often used in all its forms to denote the cmning into a 
 condition; this the Ind. alwrys represents naturally in the past. Bo<riAe<!», 1 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
348 SYNTAX. l^ 237 
 
 uma Icing, I PaffiKeua-a {not I was a Hng, hut) I oa-me to be a king, ims madea 
 king, 0n.(riXeviras, liaving been made Icing, rex /actus. BovKeia, lama senatm 
 (X. C. 1. 2, 35), Pov\ei<t-as, having been made a senator, senator foetus (ib. 1. 1, 
 18). Sou (rrpa.T'ny!i(ravTOS, te duce facto (ib. 3. 5, 1). 'Itrx^, I ana strong, 
 ttrxitras, having become or been made strong, patens foetus (Th. 1, 3). Avvi\- 
 & € I s, polentiam nactus. 'Air&evSo-ai, to have become sick, in morbum inddisse, 
 Kvpos ^jaa-Sii] m>T6v {KXeapxo"), X. An. 1. 1, 9. Cgrus came to admire him, ejia 
 admiratione captus est. 
 
 5 257. Subordinate Modes. 
 
 1. As the Aorist Indicative expresses a past action as inde- 
 pendent and completed, having no relation to another past ac- 
 tion; while the Lnperfect, always representing a past action in 
 relation to another past, and being used in describing and paint- 
 ing, presents the action in its duration and progress, so the 
 same distinction holds in regard to the subordinate modes of 
 the Aorist and Present : i The subordinate modes,of the Aor. 
 (Subj. Opt. and Impr.) together with the Lifinitive and Partici- 
 ple, are used, when the speaker wishes to represent the action 
 by itself, as completed; the subordinate modes of the Present 
 together with the Infinitive and Participle, and also the Imper- 
 fect Opt. are used, when the speaker, considering the perform- 
 ance of the action, wishes to represent it descriptively in its dura- 
 tion and progress. In this way the following modes stand in 
 contrast with each other : 
 
 ( a) The Subjimclive and Optative Aorist with the Subjunctive Present and tho 
 Optative Imperfect, e. g. ^vyaiji.sv and tpeiyaixev, let us fee. With 
 <piyaij,ev, tlie idea of fleeing itseL^ is urged and is had in mind ; with 
 Kpsiyuiiev, I rather have reference to tho performance and progress of 
 the action ; the Aor. expresses the action with more energy, as it denotes 
 an instantaneous, momentary act. The same distinction exists in all 
 the following examples. Ti Troi-^o-m/iej' and irotii/j.ey ; what shall we do? 
 Aeyw, '{fa [id^ris and i;/a liav^dj^ris, ut discas; ^\eyov, iVo fid^ois 
 and iva ij.avSr6.vois, ut disceres. ■ The Greek Subj. always refers to the 
 future, and hence is never used, as in Latin, of the present and past, e. g. 
 Laudat puorura, quod diligens sit or fuerii, because he is or has been. In 
 subordinate clauses with ts S.v, eay, arav, etc. [4 260. (a)], the Subj. Aor. 
 corresponds with Latin Fut. Perf. (§ 255, Rem. 9). 'Eav tovto \eyris, 
 o/iopT^(Tj? {si hoc dices or quoiiescunqite hoc diets, errabis). 'E^ tout* 
 
 ' The subordinate modes of the Impeif. are supplied bv those of the Pre» 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 25y.] * SOB ORDINATE JlOtlES. 349 
 
 Ae{7)s, anapT-lfitri {si hoc dixeris\ if y6u sJialllmve said). Comp. the exam- 
 ples under ^ 333, 3. 337, 6. 339, 2, II. (b). The Impf. and Aor. Opt. has 
 the sense of the present or future in clauses which express a supposi- 
 tion, conjecture, or undetermined possibility, in prose commonly with Sy, 
 in hypothetical clauses with ei ; the Opt. in this sense is found in clauses 
 denoting a wish, in final clauses, and in direct interrogative clauses, 
 particularly in deliberative questions. ToSto pc^Slm tur ylyvoiro or 
 7 eV 1 T o , this might easily be done. See ^ 259, 3 and 6, and 260, 4. Ei 
 TOVTO Keyois or A^Jeiaj, afiapTikvois or afiiprois oc, if you 
 shovld say this, you would err. See ^ 339, II, (a). El&e tovto yiyvotra 
 or yivoifo, that this mig/it be! See ^ 259, 3. (b). "EKeyov, ha 
 fiav^ivois or iJ.i&o{.s t vtdisceres. See§330,2. Ti's towPtk vvoXan- 
 fidvoi or iTToXdpoi; loho would suppose such things ? See ^ 259, 3, (e). 
 OiiK eXxoy, Swot Tpeiroifiri ir or t pairal/itii/ , I knew not what I should 
 do. See § 259, 2. The following case also belongs here : When the 
 subordinate clauses in ^ 333, 3. 337, 6. and 339, II, (b), are made to 
 depend on an historical tense, and the Opt. without &y takes the place of 
 the Subj. with hs h/, Srof, eireiSdv, iav, etc., the Opt. has a future sense. 
 6s &c fStu tA KnXk iinrriSeiovTas, Ti/j^o-a (quos videro). "EiJjTjy otis 
 tSoi/jLi T^ Ka\a intTTidieiojn-as, Ti/x^ffeiv [qnos visunis essetn). 'EvetSay 
 &li $oi\ri Sm\4yi<T^ai, <rol SiaKe^o/iat (si or quotiescunque wis). 'E^rjv, 
 ^TciSJ) (fh /3oi5aoio SiaAe'yeo'S-ai, irol SiaAe'|€[r&«i (si or quotieseunque 
 veUes, of the future). In other kinds of clauses, the Opt. of the Impf. and 
 Aor. has z.past sense, so that it corresponds with the Ind. of each of these 
 tenses. 'Vtffffatp^pVTis Sie^oAe rhv Kvpov, &s ^TrijSouAevot aSr^ {that he 
 was plotting against him). "EKe^ay, 8ti Kupos aTro&dvot {that C was 
 dead). 'Oir6re oi "EWjjycr toTj ■noKeji.lois iitloifv or ^TeXSoiec, oir^- 
 ^cuyoj', quotieseunque impetum faciebant). 'Ara/Siofcj eKey^y, & 4Ke! 
 f S 1 {what he had there seen, a dependent question). Comp. No. 2, (b). 
 
 ■ b) The Imperative Aorist with the Imperative Present, c. g. ^iye and 
 ^i\i') 9jjlee. AfisSinilSlSov /M}iTh0i^\ioy,give. Mtj &-opv^e'tT€, &&ydpes 
 'ASiriyaioi, dAA' iiiiaivari fioi, aTs eSe^S-Tjy i/iSiy, fi)| Sropufiay Sij)' oh Sic 
 \4yai (the principal fact is here ip-fieiyare, the more definite explanation 
 ^opv^eLTe) Pi. Apol. 30, c. ^EireiSiy &TrayTa aKoitrriT^, Kpiyare, fi^ irp6- 
 reiooy •jrpoKa^^ti.yere. Dcm. Pii. 1. 44, 14. 'AAA', ^ Xc^Kparss, en kc^ 
 vvy l}xol TTfi^ov Koi ir^^7]Tt PL Crito 44, b (= e^oi irgi&tJft€fos irt^^Ti. 
 i. e. by a process of persuasion, save yourself). In precepts respecting 
 the rules of life, etc. the Pres. is the natural and usual tense. Toij /lep 
 &eobs ^o0ov,Tohs 8e yoyeis ri/xa, robs Se (j>iKovs aiffx^you, roTi 
 Si y6fi.ois irei^ov, Isoer. Demon. 16. Comp. § 259, 4. 
 
 (e) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Present, c. g. 'EfteAco ^vye7ii 
 and <l>eiyety, I wish to flee. 'Iimv6s el/xi iroiTJa-ai and voteTy ri. 
 ('H yeapyia) /uo&e;;' re fi^trrT] sSSkci eTyat Kal ^SiVttj i pyd^eir^at , "S, 
 Oec. 6, 9. klpertiTepiv iffTi koKus atroStav sty , ^ (riv alcrxpas, Isocr. 
 Pan. 95. Ou rh /iii Kafieiy ri, SyoS-A oStio ye x"-^^'"^"' aisirep rh \ap6inii 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
iSO SYNTAX. * [5 257. 
 
 JTcpTiS-fjcoi Auirjipiic, X. Cy. 7. 5, 82. Kc\eia (Ts Sovpai and SiS((>>ai 
 fioi Th $t^\lov. Ka\ifras 5 Kvpos 'Apiffir/jv M^Sov, rovroy sKeKevtre Siaipv 
 \d^aL aiir^ Wjv re yvvatica Koi r^y tricrjvfiy, X. Cy. 5. 1, 2, with which 
 compare iri 3. following: ravrtiv oij/ ^K^Aeutrec 6 Kvpos 5ia<pv\tirTeij/ 
 riv 'ApdiTwnv, 'das tiy avrhs \dpri {to continue to guard, the subordinate 
 clause necessarily implying duration in Siaf uA(£tt«v). In the oratio obliqua 
 after yerbs of saying and thinking, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. is frequently 
 used to denote what is past ; then the Inf. Aor., like the Ind. Aor., is. used to 
 denote the principal events, the Inf. Pres., like the Ind. Impf , to denote the 
 accompanying subordinate circumstances, e. g. 'AAr/vcuoi Xeyoviri, SiKa'ms 
 i^eKiiiTai {robs TleXcuTyo^s)' KnToiKTjfJteyovs yotp roijs Tls\a(ryoi/s vnh r^ 
 'TfiTja-a-^ ey^svTey dpfiewfidyovs, ^StKestv rdSe' tpoiray yhp otel rhs 
 (Ttperepas ^vyarepas re Kal Tohs iraiSas i-Tt' HBwp ' oil yhp eTvai tovtov rhy 
 Xp^yov (Ttpitn Kco oiKeras ' Sk(os 8e eA&Ofei/ aZrat, tovs Il€\a<ryoits inrh ^^pios 
 fiiaa&al (T^fas k. t. \. {Oratio recta: i^TiXdcra/ify oi yiip TlAairyol 
 ilSlxovy rdSe- ((polray, etc.) Her. 6, 137. The Inf. Aor. has a 
 past relation only after rerbs of saying or thinking, and in the construction 
 of the Ace. with the Infinitive with the article. 'EcraCaa Keyerai 
 'ATr6\\(oy iKSetpat Maptrvay Kal rh Sdpfia Hpe^dffai iy tQ &yTpa,'X.. 
 An. 1. 2, 8 {cutem detraxisse — suspendisse, to have flayed, and hung up). 
 Comp. No. 2, (c). ©ouiuao-riy (palyerai /ioi rh Treio-ft^i/af riyas, as 
 ScoKpdTTjs TOiis yhvs Sie<pSreipsy, X. C. 1. 2, 1 {persuasum esse qwbusdarn, 
 that certain individuals had been persuaded). Ti fueSefiiay ray Tr6\eay 
 a\cjvai iroKiopKiif, ixiyi<XT6y ifrri a-rifj.€7oy rov Sth roirovs tt €i<r^4yTas 
 Toiis iuK^as Tavra iraS/^Ty, Dem. 19, 61. (But when by the Ace. 
 with the Inf. with the article, a purpose is expressed, the Inf. Aor. has 
 naturally something of a future relation, c. g. 'Eire/ieX^^v rov StSitr- 
 Ka\6y imi riya, yev iaAai, I took care that I might have some one as a 
 teacher, X. C. 4. 2, 4.) In all other cases the Inf. Aor. has the relation of 
 present time. 
 
 •^\) The Participle of the Aorist with the Participle of the Present ; comp. 
 \d^e <l>vy(ii with Kdy^aye ^eiyay. lIepLcjr\<iioy Soiytoy, Pov\6fieyoi iji^yai 
 airiKSfieyoi is rh itrrv {wishing to come into the city sooner) Her. 6, 115. 
 Toils ay^pdnrovs \it<ToiiiV in iiretrivTes {will secretly attack), X. An. 7. 3, 43. 
 In all such examples the Aor. does not express the relation of past time, 
 but merely the action ofthe verb taken by itself; the time is denoted by 
 the finite verb with which the Part, is connected ; the Aor. Pai-t., there- 
 fore, denotes only that the subordinate action (expressed by the Part.) is 
 contemporaneous with the principal action (expressed by the verb). Yet 
 it is to be observed, that the Aor. Part, is commonly used to designate 
 past time, e. g. TkSt' ciViij' &ir4$n = TaDr' sine koi K7rE',87;. — It maybe 
 added here as a general principle, that while the Aor. Part, generally 
 denotes past lime, the subordinate modes of the Aor. and Present, of 
 themselves denote no relation of time, the Aor., however, designating a 
 momentary, the Pres, a continued action. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 257.] 
 
 SUBORDINATE MODES. 35J 
 
 2. The subordinate modes and participials of the Aorist, form 
 a contrast also with the subordinate modes and participials of 
 the Perfect and Pluperfect ; the former denote an action abso- 
 lutely, as past or completed; the latter, on the contrary, in rela- 
 tion to the subject (Jf the finite verb ; by this relation the sub- 
 orduiate idea of the duration of the result of what is denoted by 
 the verb, is naturally derived. In this way the following forms 
 stand in contrast with each other : 
 
 (a) The Subjunctive Aorist with the Subjunctive Peifect, e. g. "Eiy a-no>tvA 
 yivuvrai, Siovaiv (^/cciffe), iv^ev Jfowt ri ^TriTiSua. (if a treaty sliall 
 have^ been made), X. A. 2. 3, 6. 'Or &y yvipiii,oy (nia^ iSr,), iffWferai, K^y 
 /*7iSei> irtiiroTe vtt' airov ayaSrhv jreiriiy&j, {whomsoever he recognizes, he 
 greets, even if he shall have received no favor from him), PL Kp. 376, a. 
 'Airexeirae tui> oWorpW, ?>/' iurtpiAia-Tepoy robs oUcvs robs ifierepovs aiirav 
 KEKT^uae.Isoc. Nic.49. ( Comp. § 255, Kem. 5. J It has already been 
 stated No. 1. (a) that tI^e Greek Snbj. always refers to the future. 
 
 (b) The Optative Aorist with the Optative Pluperfect, e. g. Of "li/Sol iM^av, 
 Sti It dfLrfieie <r</)5r 5 'IcSajj/ eaffiXeis {had sent), X. Cy. 2. 4, 6. "ESeuray, 
 uii Xirra tis Snrep Kvah 'ruiHv i/nreiTT^Koi {that some madness had 
 
 . fallen upon us, the effects still continuing), X. An. 5. 7, 26. 'AyriffiKaos 
 ^Sc^fti? T^j ir6\eais cuj>sT!'ai auTic toiJttjs Trjs ffrparrryias, Aeyaic, 8ti tijj iroTpl 
 ttVToS iroAAct uTTTjpcTljKoi ^ Toiv Mavraiiav TT^Kis iv rots irphs MeaiT'fii'rjv 
 Tro\4iwis, H. 5. 2, 3. In what instances the Opt. Aor. is used of the 
 present or future, and in wliat of the past, has been stated in No. 1, (a). 
 
 (c) The Infinitive Aorist with the Infinitive Perfect; comp. aTroaoyerv with 
 TE&vjjKeVoi.. Tlarphs Kvpos \4ysTai yevfod^ai Kafi$i(r€a}, Uepaav 0tmt- 
 Keus X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. Aeyerai HvSpa Tiyh ray Mifiav iKirewKrJx^at 
 ■iro\by S'ti Tiya xp^vy iiri rif K&KKii rod Kipov {stood or continued amazed), 
 ib. 1. 4, 27. Comp. § 255, Kern. 6. 
 
 (d) The Aorist Participle with the Perfect Participle ; comp. ano^aytiy with 
 rf&vriK(is, Pint. Aem. Paul, c, 36. extr. Uepffebs fihy exet koI yeyiK-n- 
 fieyos {even tleough vanquished, in the condition of one vanquished) robs 
 irdiSas, AlfiiKtos $e robs avTou {sc. ircuSas) yiK-fjiras oTre^aXey = yeytKTjrat 
 fiey — exei Se — , iyUriffe ficy — airefioAf Se. Perseus even though conquered 
 still has his children ; Aemilius in his otherwise successful war, lost his. 
 
 Kemaek 1. From the above explanation, it is evident why the Aor., though 
 an Historical tense, has besides an Opt. a Snbj. also ; the Aor. Subj. stands in 
 contrast, on the one hand, with the Subj. Pres. ; on the other, with the Subj. 
 Pcrf. The Greek Fnt. has no Subj. as in Latin (e. g. Gaudet, quod pater ven- 
 turus sit), because the Greek Subj. of itself denotes future time. But the Aor. 
 has an Opt., whicli stands in dependent sentences after an historical tense, and 
 consequently, in direct discourse, takes the place of the Ind. Puture, e. g, 
 "Hyyei^fV, 'in iroKf/iioi j/iK^ffo lec {that the enemy WOULD conquer). X. An. 7. 
 I, 33. eKeyey, on eroipLos iXt] rf^^lff^oA avrols cts rb AeKra KakoviL^yov, iv^a ToAXi 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
352 SYNTAX. [} 258. 
 
 Kol oyo&oi K'fi'^oivTO {where they WOULD receive). X. Cy. 8. i, 43. iirifjuMtrn 
 '6irws fi'fjTe &criToif fL'fiTc &TroToi irore %<T o iVT o . (But £7rf/t6A.€tToi, cJttws .... ^trov- 
 rai). X. An. 4. 1, 25. €<^7; etvai &Kpov, & et ^-^ tis tt p OKaTo.K'ii^o n o , hSuvarov 
 tfffa^at •jrape?^e7v. { Orat to recta : el irpoKaraX'fiilfeTat, aSvi/aroy eCTai TrapeT^eit/.^ 
 
 Rem. 2. Verbs of willing, refusing, delaying, entreating, persuading, com- 
 manding, forbidding, hindering, of being able, and ^unable, expecting (Tpos- 
 SoKa, iiriSo^6s elfu, eMs idTW, it is likely, to be expected], wlicn they relate to a 
 future object, are sometimes connected with the Put. Inf., sometimes with the 
 Pres., sometimes with the Aor. The Tut. Inf. is used, when the idea of futurity is 
 to be made specially prominent, e. g. a condition continuing in the future ; the 
 Inf. Pres., to denote a continuing or permanent condition, the idea of futurity, 
 evident of itself, being left out of sight ; this Inf is also used to denote the 
 immediate occurrence of the action ; the Inf. Aor., when the idea of the action 
 itself is made prominent. In English all three forms of the Inf, when the subject 
 of the Inf is the same as that of the gOTcrning verb, are translated by the Pres. 
 Inf.: m4W(o ypd^eLy,yp(i<p€iv , ypd^f/at [Z am now about to lunte, intending 
 to write). 'ASvvaToi eiiriv iTrif/.e\^7s eff^a^at {urtahle to hecome and continue 
 careful), X. Oec. 12, 12. 'Aivvar oi Eia'ty els iirt/i4\eLav tGiv Kar ayphv epyuv 
 iroideiieo'&a I, ib. 12, 15. 'ASui/aroi 7)iuu ^ffoyrat Tavrijv t^v ^irifieKeiav 
 ^ t^ax^ rival, ib. 12, 13. 'Ai'ajSoAA.erat iroi/^tret;' ra 5eoi/Ta, Dem.31, 9. 
 'A^vaXoi ave ^dWovT o Th ivav fj.tjxoiy'flfrao'^at. Her. 6, 53. 'E\3r/^ei 
 ^(fStws vuas ^^aTrari\ifetv, Dem. 860, 54 {lie hopes to deceive you). *EATr{Sos 
 irapexerai riiius eiSaifiovas Troi^ffai, PI. Symp. 193, d. {he gives hope that he 
 will make us happy). With verbs of willing or being able, the Put. Inf. is more 
 seldom than the Aor. or Pres. After verbs of saying, promising, swearing, 
 thinking, the above threefold construction (Inf. Put., Pres., Aor.) is xised, but the 
 Inf. Aor. regularly expresses something past (see No. 1 ), seldom what is future, 
 e. g. Oi UKaTaiTJs 4v6iJi.iffa.v iirt^efjieyoi p<^ius KparTJaai, Xh. 2, 3, {se vidores 
 fore). ^AirSKpLvat, Sj 'AytJpare* ov ycip otfiai (re e^apvov yeveff^ai, ti ivavriop 
 *A^7]vaiuv airdi/TOiv iTroiTjtras, Lys. Agor. § 32 {credo te negaturum). After verba 
 of saying, thinking, hoping, the Inf. Aor. and Pres. with &v, is often used in 
 nearly the same sense as the Inf Put. without 6iv. See § 260, (5), (a). 
 
 * 258. B. A more particular View of the Modes. 
 
 The Indicative, the Subjunctive (Optative) and the Im- 
 perative Modes [^ 253, (b)], are distinguished as follows : 
 
 (a) The Indicative expresses a direct assertion, an actual fact. 
 
 Til ^(iSoy S)6.KXei. 'O va^r^ip yey paipe tV i-'nirToK'l]v. Oi iro\ipnQt 
 a7re(pvyoy. Oi iro^rai Tohs iroAefiious v iKiitr ov a iy. 
 
 (b) The Subjunctive denotes a supposition, conception, or 
 representation. The Subj. of the Hist, tenses is called the 
 Optative. 
 
 'lapiev! eamus! — Ti irotupLey ,- quid faciamus ? what shall we do? Ouk eX"" 
 Xttoi Tpiiirmpi.a.1, nescio, quo me vertam. Ouk €?xoy, Siroi t pair oi fir) y,ncscia- 
 lam, quo me vcrterem. Aeyw, V f 1 5p j, dico, ut scias, in order that you may know 
 it. 'EXeJa, iV elSei-Qs, dixi, ut scires, in order that you might know it. 
 
 (c) The Imperative denotes the immediate expression of the 
 will, being used in commands, entreaties, etc. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 259.J SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 353 
 
 Vpthl/op and ypdtpe, vnite. BpoSews p.ev ^i\os yiyvov, yey6fiei/os 5e Treipw Siafie- 
 neiv, Is. Dem. 7. TpaijiiTa and ypaipeTa, let him write (§ 257, 1. b). The com- 
 mand expressed by the Imp. is not always to be understood as a strong com- 
 mand, entreaties, exhortations, and counsels, being also expressed by the Imp. 
 
 Eemakk. The Modes exhibit the relation of an expressed thought to 
 the mind of the speaker. Hence they denote nothing objective, i.e. they never 
 show the actual condition of an action ; the Ind., in itself, does not denote 
 something actual ; nor the Subj., in itself, something possible; nor the Imp., 
 something necessary ; the language represents these ideas by special expres- 
 sions, e. g. &Ai)&£s, Sivaa&ai, Sel, xp^h 6tc. The modes express subjective rela- 
 tions solely, i. c. the relations to the mind of the speaker, showing how he 
 conceives of an actibn. A mental operation is either an act of perception, an 
 act of supposition or conception, or an act of desire. The Ind. expresses 
 an actual perception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents 
 as a reality, whether an actual, objective fact, or a conception ; even the future, 
 which, in itself is something merely imagined, can be conceived by the speaker 
 as a reality, and hence is expressed by the Fut. Ind. The Subj. expresses 
 a conception ; it indicates what the speaker conceives and represents as a 
 conception, whether it has an actual objective existence, or is a mere mental 
 conception. The Imp. expresses desire ; it denotes what the speaker conceives 
 and represents as something desired, whether it be an actual objective necessity " 
 or not. 
 
 { 259. Use of the Subjunctive, Optative and Im- 
 perative. 
 
 1. The Subj. of the Principal tenses, the Pres. and Perf., as 
 well as the Sub. Aor., alway relates to future time \} 257, 1, (a)], 
 and is used in Principal clauses : 
 
 (a) In the &st Pers. Sing, and PL in exhortations ' and warn- 
 ings, where the Eng. uses kt, let us, with the infinitive ; the 
 negative is here /a^. 
 
 (b) In the first Pers. Sing, and PL in deliberative ^ questions, 
 when the speaker dehberates with himself what he is to do, 
 what it is best to do ; here also the negative is /ii;. 
 
 "luficv, eamus! letusgo, suppose we go ! Mi ia/j-ey. ''A.ye {<l>fp^t ^a) iinfiev. 
 *e/)c XSa {come now, let me see), Her. 7, 103. i4pe S-Jj, ^ S' Ss, veipa^a irphs 
 vfias aTro\oyli(rcur&ai, PI. Phaedon. 63, b. Such an exhortation is very often ex- 
 pressed in the form of a question preceded by 0oi\ei ,- yet in this case, the 
 subjunctive is a subordinate clause dependent on Poi\ei, e. g. Boi\ei oZv, Sie 
 riSij ^auev irei&ovs ; {do you then wish that we propose two Jdnds of persuasions = 
 let us propose), PI. Gorg. 454, e. Ti iroiatiev; quid faciamus? what shaU we 
 do? Y-iira jiGVi ^ ffiyafiey; Eur. Ion. 771. In Iloi tis (ppovriSos eA^p; S. 
 
 ' This use of the Subj, is called Conjunctivus adiiortativus. 
 ^ Conjunctivus ddiberativus. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
354 SYNTAX. [i 259, 
 
 0. C. 170, tIs is used instead of the first Pers., where shall one go ? (= iroT IXfta 
 or eA.atofiej', like to? t^psvav eKSrti; 310). Mj) ^pa/mi; sliall 1 not ash? X. C. 1. 
 2, 36. "0<ra ot oKlyoi rahs iroWoiis ii.ii velcravTes, oAAi Kparovvrts ypitj>ou(ri, vi-r- 
 fQov fiiav ipafiiv, ^ fiJ) ^ajiiv elvat; 45. So also in indirect discourse, 
 and in all persons. Qux eX"' 8"''" rpiTrai/iey (/ inozo noi, whither I shall turn 
 myself, what I sliall do). Ovk f^ovaiy iKe7mi, Siroi (piyaa-t, X. An. 2. 4, 20. Ouk 
 oI5' 61 5S {t1i iKTvaifm), I do not know whether I shall give the cup, Cy. § 8. 4, 16. 
 
 Remark 1 . In the second and third Pers. the exhortation takes 'the foim 
 of a command or wish, and hence is expressed by the Imp. or Opt. Od. x, 77. 
 f\daiiev S' ai/&. &<TTv, Poii S' HKiffra yevotro. Yet there are also passages 
 in which the second Pers. Subj. stands in connection with &ye and ^e'pe instead 
 of the Imp., tj. g. *efi', S tskvoi/, vvii koI rh rrjs v^aov fid^ri s, S. Ph. 300. 
 
 Hem. 2. On the use of the second Pers. Subj. with fi^ to express a prohibi- 
 tion, e. g. /ii) ypdifrps, ne scripseris, do not write, see No. 5. 
 
 Kem. 3. A wish is very seldom expressed by eIS-e with the Subj. instead of 
 the Opt. E ?&' a&epos &va iTToiKaSes o^vrSmv SA ■jrveifmros eKuirl ji {o si 
 avesme sursum in aet,herem per auras stridentes capiant), S.Ph. 1094 (without varia- 
 ■tion). Comp. Elf&e Tivis eiivat SiKaluv i/ievalav iy "Apysi tpavScri TsKvounv 
 Eur. Suppl. 1028. Elf&' — olfcrxioi' elSoj o>t1 toS koKov \ii0m (in some MS S. 
 \afiitv), Hel. 262. 
 
 Eem. 4. In the third place, the Subjunctive is somewhat frequently used in 
 principal clauses, in the Epic language, instead of the Put. Ind., though with a 
 slight difference of meaning. Both express a present conception of a future 
 action ; but the Put. Ind. represents what is still in the future as known and 
 certain in the view of the speaker, while the Subj. represents what is future aa 
 merely a concession or admission of something expected. II. f, 459. ko( 
 VOTE ris G^TvritTiy [and 07ie :m\y say, it may be expected 07' conceded that onemll 
 say). II. 77, 197. oii yap rls ^ue ^irj ye eKiiy aeKovra. SlTirat [otie will not force me 
 away = I will not admit that one will, etc.). a, 262. ov yap ttw roiovs idov ay^pas, 
 ovSh iSoj/zai [nai do I expect that I shall see such men, nor am I to see; oGS^ 
 iijiofiai, would mean, / certainly shall not see). Od. (, 201. oiiK eiry oVros ayiip 
 Siephs fiporSs, ou5e yeytjrai. it, 437. ovk ec^* ovtos av^p, ouS" ffffferat ovSh 
 yeyijrai {nor is it to be expected that he will be). The frequent use of the Subj. 
 with u 8 e /i ^ in the Attic writers, is wholly analogous to the principle just 
 stated. See under 5 318, 6. 
 
 2. The Opt. Impf. and Aor. is also used in principal sen- 
 tences, to denote deliberative questions (i. e. such as express 
 doubt and propriety), but differs from the Subj. in such ques- 
 tions in referring to past time. 
 
 Theocr. 27, 24. troKKal fi IfuidoyTo, vioy 5' 4ixbv oStis eaSe ■ — koI ri, (pl\os, 
 ^e^ai/iij ydfiot vXiiStovaiy ayias, i. e. quid faceeem ? sc. turn, quum multi nup- 
 tias meas ambiebant, sed eorum nullus mihi placebat, what ccmld I then do ? Tha 
 deliberative Opt. is very frequently used in indirect questions, in relation to au 
 historical tense in the principal clause. 'ETr^pero 6 2ei)ai7s rhy iroISo, ci itaitreifV 
 xvT6y, X. An. 7. 4, 10 {whether he should put him to death). Ol 'Emidfiyioi jrcjU- 
 ipayres h Af\<pobs -rhv Stibv iiriipovTO, ci TropoSoiei/ KopiyStlois T^y T!6\iv,Tl\i. 
 
 1, 25 Iwhether they should surrender the city). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 259.] SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPERATIVE. 355 
 
 Rem. 5. In the principle given in No. 2, the act of supposition or conception 
 belongs to the past, and this is the common use of the Opt. (the Subj. of the 
 historical tenses), in subordinate clauses. But the Opt. is also used, where the 
 act of supposition or conception is a present one. When a present conception is 
 expressed by the subjunctive, e. g. tanev, eamus, rl etiraiuv ; quid dicamus 1 
 then the realization of the conception may be assumed or expected from the 
 present point of time. But when a present conception is expressed by the 
 Opt. (Subj. of the historical tenses), the speaker places himself back, as it 
 were, out of the present and the vivid connection, which exists between the 
 present and the actual accomplishment, and represents the. conception as one 
 separate from his present point of time. Hence a present conception expressed 
 in this way, very naturally suggests the subordinate idea of uncertainty. Thence 
 arises the following use : 
 
 3. The Opt. Aor. and Impf. (Subj. of the historical tenses), 
 is used, in principal clauses, of present or future time in the 
 following cases : 
 
 (a) To express, in a general manner, a supposition, a present 
 or future uncertainty, an undetermined possibility, presumption 
 or admission. The prose-writers here commonly use the modal 
 adverb av vnth the Opt., * 260, 2, (4), (a), but the poets very 
 frequently use the Opt. without av. A negation is here ex- 
 pressed by ov (ovk). 
 
 *0 Se ainh aiir^ hv6iwiov efij koX Siifopov, axo\^ y4 iroi rai &?0\.cf SfJiOiov % (pl\ov 
 yevoiTo { that would scarcely be like or friendly to another, as one would readily 
 admit), PI. Lysid. 214, d. 'AiroKoiiivns Si t^s ^"xns t6t ^St) t^v <^iaiv Trjs 
 iiT^eveias iiriSeiKvioi rh ffSiiia nal raxii aa-TiV SioixoiTo {animo exstincto 
 turn vera corpus inibecillitatem suam ostendat et intercidat, it is natural to suppose or 
 assume, tliat the body would give signs of weakness), Phaed. 87, e. 
 
 (b) To express a wish. A negation is here expressed by /iij. 
 
 II. x> 304. jUT) luav atrKovZi ye (col aK\eias anoKolii-riv, may 1 not perishl S. 
 Aj. 550. S ircu, yevoio varphs evrvx^ffTepos, rh 5' &MC 8/iOior.' Kol yevoi Uv ou 
 Ka.K6s, may you be mare fortunate than your father, but in other things like him 1 then 
 you would not be wicked. X. Cy. 6. 3, 11. "AXA", S ZeD /ieyurre, Aa^eiy /loi 
 yivoiTo ahriv, ws 4yi> Poi\oiuu, may I be able to take him. The wish is com- 
 monly introduced by eiS>i, ei yiip (in the poets also by €i alone). Od. y, 205. 
 61 yip e/iol Toa-a-fiySe S)ioi Umjuv irapaSrelev! X. Cy. 6. 1,38. tl yhp 
 yiyotTo!' (In poetry iis is used like Lat. utinam. Eur. Hipp. 407. i,s 
 aT!-6\otTo vayKoxas ! ) 
 
 Bem 6 When a wish is expressed, which the speaker knows cannot be 
 realized, the Ind. of the historical tenses is used, e.g. E»e toBto ^7'V'"-' 
 t»e toBto iyhero ! utinam hoc/actum essetl that this were done, or had been 
 done! So &<^cKes yp&^ai! 
 not). X. An. 2. 1, 4. a\K' & 
 (but I know that he is not) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
3(56 SYNTAX. [5 259 
 
 the Inf.. particularly in poetiy. On the wish expressed by was i.v with the Opt, 
 see § 260, 2, (4), (d). On the infrequent use of the Subj. to denote a wish, sea 
 Bern. 3. 
 
 (o) A command is also expressed in a milder way, in the 
 form of a wish. 
 
 Od. J, 408. Taxio'Td jioi sySoy iraipoi tiey, let my companions come within. 11. 
 icijpul tIs ol eiroiTo yepahfpos, let some herald follow. Arist. Vesp. 1431. 
 epBoi Tis V exaaTos eiSedj Tex"'?"- X. An. 3. 2, 37. el /ney oZv SaAos tii 
 iSe'A.Tioj' 6p§, &K\ois ix^ '''<•'' " ^^ f'^' '^^^p't<'o<l>os p.y riyo'iTo. 
 
 (d) The Optative is used to express a desire, wish, and 
 inclination, in a general manner, without expecting the realiza- 
 tion. A negation is here expressed by /xi]. 
 
 Theocr. 8, 20. Tairav [rijii (rijnyya) KarSrel-nv [1 would be willing or desire 
 to place)' -rh Se tw irarphs ov Kara^ffu. Her. 7, 11. f-ii yap etijv c/c Aapsloa 
 yeyoy^s, /i^ Ttfiaipria-dixevos "ASrriyaiovs, I should not be descended fiom Darius, 
 unless, etc. 
 
 (e) In direct questions the Opt. is used, when a mere admis- 
 sion or supposition is expressed. 
 
 (a) In Homer the interrogative clause then forms, in a measure, the protasis 
 to the conditioned clause, i. e. to the clause depending on the condition ex- 
 pressed by the question. II. S, 93, seq. ^ fid vi iioi ti irlAoio, AvKdovos vie 
 Sdttppov/ TXairjs Kev "SAeveXiiia eirmpoeiiev rayvv lov, -Kafn te KeTpiieffffi x^-pii' 
 Kal KvSos &poiOf will you now listen to me, i. e. ij' you will, you would dare, etc. (the 
 same as et tI jj.oi iriS-oio, rXairis Key, etc.). Here irf&oio, etc. is the in- 
 teiTogative clause containing the condition, and rXatris, etc. the conditioned 
 clause depending on the preceding. When the question has two members, the 
 first, expressed by the Opt. without &v, contains the condition, the last, ex- 
 pressed by the Opt. with &!>, contains the conditioned clause. 11.^, 191. ^ ^i 
 w fwi T ri^oio, (p'lXov TeKos,(iTTi Key ^TTtUfTje Kei> a pyfitraio KOTe<ra'a[j.evrj roye 
 Sfvuip; will you be persuaded by me, — or will you refuse? [p] In the Attic writers, 
 the Opt. is also used in a question without reference to a conditioned clause. 
 These questions, however, always imply a negative. Aesch. Choeph. aW' 
 tireproXpLov aySphs (ppivqiw. ris \eyoi; who couMmdescHbe ? — no one, i. e. w/io 
 can you suppose could describe ? S. Ant. 604. reoy, Zev, Sivaa-u/ rls aySpav utteo- 
 Pcurla KaT dirxoi; who could restrain? I.e. who can be supposed to restrain? 
 Arist. Pint. 438. &va^ 'AtoXXov koI &eoi, no? tis tpiyoi, where could one fly ? 
 Dem. Phorm. 921, 1. ko! Sera /xev elire fiera tijs hKriAelas, fji) xpW^e TeKfOjpltp • & 
 S" hfieio'aTO rh iarepov, TritrrSrepa ravSi' vTroXdPoiTe eiuai ; haec vos veriora 
 existimattiros quisputot! PI. Rp. 437, b. Sp olv — W^/to ra Toiavra rav ivoMriuv 
 iAA^Aois &efr)s; can yov consider all such things to be opposite to each other? i.e. 
 can I assume that you, etc. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 2.'i').\ SUBJUNCTIVE, OPTATIVE AND IMPEKA flVE. 357 
 
 Rem. 7. The deliberative Opt. (No. 2) differs from this. 
 
 Kem. 8. All the cases mentioned under (a) (b) (c) (d) (e), are to be regarded 
 as elliptical sentences, which have originated from a conditional sentence like 
 €?Ti ex"". Solns &•> [^ 339, II, {a,)], if you luxd, you would iiive. 
 
 (4) The following points in addition are to be observed 
 respecting the Imp., [§ 258, 1, (c)] : Though the Imp. always 
 refers to time present to the speaker, yet the Greek has several 
 Imp. forms, viz., a Pres., Perf , and Aor. These forms, how- 
 ever, do not express a ditterent relation of time, but only the 
 different condition or circumstances of the predicate. The dif- 
 ference between the Imp. Aor. ypdfov and the Pres. ypdtfye, has 
 been explained, § 257, 1, (b). The Imp. Perf has always the 
 sense of the Pres., with the accompanying idea of the perma- 
 nence or continuance of the result, e. g. /j-ifivricro, memento, be 
 mindful, re'>nember ; fj &vpa KeK\eLa-&oi, let the door be shut 
 (and remain shut). See § 255, Rem. 5. 
 
 5. In negative or prohibitive expressions with /xij (ne), the 
 Greek commonly uses only the Pres. Imp., not the Aor. Imp. ; 
 but instead of the Aor. Imp., the Aor. Subjunctive is used. 
 
 M!) ypa,<pe or (nrj ypd^ris (but neither ii.ri ypifris, nor iJ.ii ypd'poy). Mi) 
 ypa<l>eToi or fi5) ypd^ri,ne scribito {hut neither iji.ii ypd^prijnoT /iii yprnf/dra). 
 M^ lioi ii,i'Ti\eye or fi'fi fioi apTiKi^ris, do not speak against me (but 
 neither flit a.vTL\4yris t\or fiii hvTi\G^ov). Isoc.Dem.24. MTjSeya fpi\ov iroiov 
 •jrp\v h.v ii^erdffrjs, ttS>s KixpilTai 7o7s Tvp&Tepov <pi\Ois. 36, 29. titi^evX (TVfKpopas 
 dyei?ia-ri s' Koifi] yhp t} tvxv i^f^ "^^ t^^Wov a.6pftTov. Th. 3, 39. KO\cur^^wtrav 
 5e KoX vvv a^itos rris aStKias, Kcd fii] tois f^ev 6\tyois Tf curia trposre^p, rbv Si 
 Zrt^iov air oXuffTjTf. 
 
 Rem. 9. Ye; sometimes in the Epic poets, though very seldom in othe/ 
 poets, ii.il is found with the second I'ers. of the Aor. Imp., e. g. II. S, 410. Tiji 
 fi-fl fioi -irarepas Tvo^' S/iolri Iv&fo dv/jiS. The third Pers. is frequently found 
 even in the Attic prose writoi-s. X. Cy. 8, 7, 2C. ^ijSels iSe'tw. 
 
 6. The third Pers. Imp. is very often used (the second more 
 seldom), to denote that the speaker admits or gi-ants something, 
 the correctness or incorrectness of which depends upon himself. 
 This is called the concessive Imp. 
 
 Ovras exeTw, ais <r!i Ae'yeis (admit that it is as you say), P. Symp. 20], t. 
 'EoiKETU Si; [ri '^"X')) ivpup{n(f Swdfiei fmoiTTepov (fiyovs re Kol i)vi6x'iv (gTlfli 
 that the soul is like, etc.), Phaedr. 246, a. Aeyerii irfpl aiirov, as eicaffTia 
 yiyv^ffKfi (admit that each one speaks of it), Th, 2, 48. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
358 SYNTAX. [^ 260 
 
 Rem. 10. In the interiogatiye formula of the Attic poets : ofo-y t> Spaa-ov, 
 — oT<r^' ms iroifjaov ! (do you know what you are to do ?), the Imperative is to ba 
 explained as a transition, easy to the Greeks, from the indirect to the direct 
 form 'of speech. It is also explained by considering it the same as SpS^ov, 
 oTa^' 3 ,• do, — do you know what ? The formula is a softer mode of exjjf ession 
 than the Imp. Spcurov or iroi'ijo-oi'. The use of the third Pers. Imp., not only 
 in dependent questions, but also in other subordinate sentences, is according to 
 the same analogy. Her. 1, 89. yvv Stv irolrnrov wSe, eiroi eLpeffKei, tA 4yit \eyto' 
 Kdrnroy Twv Sopv^Spuv 4irl TrdfrrifTt T^ffnriKriffi ^v\aK0vs o% \ey6vTuv — , Sj 
 tr<pea (sc. p^p^/wtTa) avayKaius ^x^t BeKaTeu^ijj/at r^ Arf (ot KeySvTott/ = Kal 
 ovToi \cy6vTay, who should say, or and let thetn say). Th. 4, 92. Sei^cu, 
 Sti — KaTiJ<r&«(rav, they might obtain! 
 
 Eem. 11. On the transition of the third Pers. Imp. to the second, see ^ 241, 
 Rem. 13, (c) ; on the use of the Fut. instead of the Imp., see ^ 255, 4, and on 
 the Opt. with Sv in the sense of the Imp., § 260, 2, (4) (b). 
 
 §260. The Modes in connection with the Modal 
 Adverb av (xe, k€v). 
 
 1. The Modal adverb Sy (Epic Ki(v), Doric xa, Kav), denotes the 
 relation of a conditioning expression or sentence to a condi- 
 tioned one ; indicating that the predicate of the sentence to 
 which it belongs, is conditioned by another thought either ex- 
 pressed or to be supplied. By the particle av, the realization 
 of the predicate is made to depend upon the realization of 
 another predicate. Therefore, where a predicate is accom- 
 panied by av, the predicate is represented as conditioned by 
 another thought ; av sdways refers to a condition. 
 
 2. A complete view of the use of av cannot be presented 
 except ia connection with conditional sentences. Yet, as it 
 is used in all kinds of sentences, it is necessary to explain 
 its construction here. It is connected : 
 
 (1) With the Fnt. Ind. The predicate expressed by the 
 Fut. Ind., seems to the speaker, at the time then present, 
 always to depend on conditions and circumstances. Whenever 
 this idea of dependence is to be made specially prominent, & 
 (Epic Ke) can be joined with the Fut. ; yet this construction is 
 rare in the Attic dialect. 
 
 Od. p, 540, el 6' 'Odvcrebs e?^oi — , at^i k 6 irlv ^ iraiSl fitas airoritreTat 
 ivlpuv, he would punish. II. ^, 267. dA\' tSt', iyi> Se k4 rot Xaplriev /ildiv 
 SwXoreptim' Stio-a> oT!vU)i.evai,dabo,scil.sitibilubuent. X. Cy. 6. 1,45. v^pLST^v olf 
 vojil^av (iAt6v, eS oI5' Sti iaiisvos Uv irpiis ivSpa, otos a'ii el, aTra\\ayfi<TeTai 
 (so the MSS.). 7. 5, 21. Zrav Se icai a1<r^avTai fjnas ?ySoc Si/ror, ToKii ttv en fmWov, 
 5 my, hxpttoi e(rocToi inh toB ^KTreTrKrixSrat [&y is wanting in only two MSS.). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
§ 260.] MODAL ADVERB av. 3-59 
 
 Eemakk 1. "With the Pres. and Ferf. Ind., &v is not used. For that which 
 the speaker expresses as a present object, cannot at the same time be expressed 
 as something, the realization of which is dependent on another thought. In 
 those passages where &i/ is found with the Pres. or Perf. Ind., either the reading; 
 is questionable, or &v must be referred to another verb of the sentence, e. g. OIik 
 oW tty « irdffaiiu (instead of ei irdffaiiu &v), Eur. Med. 937 ; so often voiil^a &y, 
 oTfuu Hv and the like followed by an Inf , where Sc belongs to the Inf. ; or it is 
 to be considered as an elliptical mode of expression, as in X. S. 4, 37. 4yi> Si 
 oVra iroAAcfc ^x*» ^^ /«JAis ourct Kal iyih & v avrhs evpiffKot, I have so many things 
 that I with difficulty find them, indeed if I should seek for them maself, I should not 
 find them. Nor is fi y used with the Imp. For what the speaker expresses as 
 his immediate will, cannot be considered as dependent on a condition. The 
 few passages referred to in proof of the use of &v with the Imp., are all, criti- 
 cally considered, questionable and prove nothing. 
 
 (2) 'Av is used with the Ind. of the historical tenses : the 
 Aor., Impf. and Plup. : 
 
 (a) To denote that something might take place under a cer- 
 tain condition, but did not take place, because the condi- 
 tion was not fulfilled. The condition is then expressed 
 by d with the Ind. of the historical tenses. 
 
 Et TouTO eKey^s [■eKi^as), TifiapTaves (Tj/iapT-es) ^v, i,e.ifytm said this, 
 you were wrong, or if you had said this, you would have been wrong, but now I know 
 that you did not say it, consequently you are not wrong; JjOt, si hoc dixisses, 
 errasses (at non dixisti; ergo non eiTasti). Eif ti eXxoim>, 4SiSofi.ev 
 (eSojuei') &y, if we had anything, we tuould give it to you, or if we had had any- 
 thing, we wovM have given it to you ; si quid habuissemus, dedissemus. Also with- 
 out an antecedent clause, e. g. e'xapis i-v, laetatus fuisses (scil. si hoc yidisses). 
 
 Bem. 2. Here belong also the expressions, (f6ni\v if, }lyva tij Sc, 
 ^<r3-6To ris i.v, ^^ri ns &v, and the like, as in. Latin, putares, crederes, diceres, 
 cemeres, videres, you {one) would think, or you (one) would have thought. Here ei 
 Traprjv, el e\fyev, ei efSey, el iSivaro, and the like, as conditioning antecedent 
 clauses, are to be supplied. "'E.vSta S^ eyvte tis Uv robs S^uyrl/uivs ireTroiSeu/iie- 
 couj, &S Sei (turn yen videres, then one might see, were he present), X. Cy. 3. 3, 
 70. t.vdSs}! iyva -is Sv, iaov ii,iav elrt ti> <pi\eiiT&ai &pxovra mh T&v apxoM- 
 vaiv, 7. 1, 38. Eiai/s ahv Toirois elsmiHaavTes els rhv wriKhv dwrrov, ^ Ss tis % v 
 p e TO, iiereiipovs ^exifucrav tos afulias (celerius, quam quis crederet). An. 1. 5, 8. 
 'Ejre}^<ia-dv *' &" ■ns KaKewa. iSdiv (one might he encouraged if he saw those 
 things), Ag. 1, 27 
 
 Eem. 3. "With the Ind. of the historical tenses, &v is often omitted. Thei! 
 the speaker has no reference, in his representation, to the condition contained 
 in the protasis or antecedent, on account of which the action expressed in the 
 apodosis or conclusion could not bo completed, but he emphatically represents 
 the predicate as an actual fact. X. An. 7. 6, 21. Btiroi Sti tis iv OHicow aiaxiyri 
 oSra napas iia.nardiii.ems ,• No! ^i Ai'a ?) o- x t""^ /") " l^evroi, ei xnri voKeiiiouye iinos 
 e|i)iroT'^3T)>' • ^iXcf 5' Ai/n e^airaTay alax^iv fiot SoKei ehai, ^ ilairaraaAai. Lycurg. 
 Leocr. p. 1.54, 23*. ei fiev aiv fav eriyxavev d 'A/ivvras, ixelyov avrby wapeixo- 
 u.T)y yvy ie vfuv Ka\a robs irvyeiSoTas. The ellipsis of &y is most frequent m 
 expressions which denote the idea of necessity, duty, reasonableness, possibili- 
 ty, liberty, and inclination, e.g.xp^y, ^Se', &<t>e\oy; with verbal adjective! 
 io Tf os; with TrposTJKe, Katphs ^y, eUhs ^ y, Ko^bv ^y, aKTXPoy i)y, 
 
 16 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
360 SYNTAX. [i 260. 
 
 &iiov ^v, KaXSs c?Xf> ^^V", vT%px^''i ^IJ-e\^ev, i0ov\6iiriv. Lys. 
 123, 3. XP^" ^^ "■^i ^'"^P ^'^1*" ?CPV<'"''6s, TToKb imKT^U jurji/UTJ)!/ ^eceVaoi • viv Si 
 BOM TO if^a, (pavepli ■yeyevriTcu K. T. A., you ought or yoM OMjrAi to have been 
 toportebat). X. C. 2. 7, 10. ei fi,ey roivvv ata'xpol' ri ^fjLf?iXov lpyd(ratr^at, ^iva- 
 Tov avr' auTou irpoaLpeT e ov ^v' vvv 5* & juev So/cei KdWttrra Kai 7rp67rwSeo'7-epa 
 ^uj'cu^ij' elrai ^iriffTni'Toi, 6j eoi/ce K. T. A.., mors praeferenda erat. So also witli 
 the Inf. X. C. 1. 3, 3. oure 7op fteoTs i^ KaXu>s ex^^"' «' '''"'^ fi^eydhais 
 Srva-iais /iSAAoj/ ^ toij cr/uKpcus txaipoVtfor he said it would not he proper far the 
 gods, if, etc. Very often witliout an antecedent sentence, e. g. ala-xphv ?jv 
 TavTa TToiitv, turpe erat, it would be base, would have been; i^ijy ToSra voieiv 
 licebat, it would be lawful ; icaKas eTxt. Comp. with the above the use of the 
 Ind. in Latin, where the Subj. might have been expected, in such expressions as 
 aequum, justum, rectum est, it would be proper, longum est, it would be tedious, and 
 the participle in dus in the conclusion of a conditional clause, as Si Bxmae 
 Cn. Pmnpeius privatus esset, tamen is eeat deligendus. 
 
 Rem. 4. In all the above expressions, however, &v can be used ; so also in 
 Latin, the Subj. is sometimes found instead of the Ind. Dem. Phil. 1. 40, 1. 
 el yap iK rod irpoeXyjKv^STOS XP^^°^ "^^ Seovra ouroi trvve^ovXevffav, ovSiv %v ' 
 6|tiSs vvv eSet j8ouAei)e<r&ai. So also in Lat. the Subj. is used instead of the 
 Ind. 
 
 Kem. 5. The Pres. tense of XP^< ^"i '"posiiKci, koASi exei, etc., is used of 
 things which can yet take place. Comp. possum commemorare, which implies 
 that I still can do the act, and poteram commemorare, which implies that I 
 cannot do it. 
 
 Eem. 6. "Av is very naturally omitted, if in the apodosis there is an Ind. 
 of an historical tense of the verb KivSvvieiv, to be in danger, to seem, since 
 the verb by itself implies that the action expressed by the Inf. connected with it, 
 did not take place ; for what is only in danger of occurring, actually does not 
 occur. Th. 3) 74. t] 'ir6Ms itcivSiivevffe ■jrao'a 5ta<p^ap^vat, el S,v€fios cireyeveTo 
 ri] rpKoyl iiri(popos is avr4]v, the whole city icas or would have been in danger 
 of destruction, if Aeschin. c. Ctes. 515, II. €t /i^ Sp6ficf fj.6\is i^ecpvyofiev eis 
 A€\<l>o6s, 4Kiv5vve6(rafiev oiroXeir^at. So if in the apodosis, oKlyov, 
 fiiKpaS, rdx", nearly, almost, are joined with the Ind. of a historical tense 
 in the concluding clause ; for what only nearly takes place, actually does 
 not take place, hence the Ind. without &v is appropriate in both these cases. 
 Plat. Symp. p. 198, C. eycuye 4v^vp.ovfj.evos, Hri aurhs ovx ol6s t' effofiai ouS' eyyits 
 TovTwv ovSsv Ka\hv elire^v, ir/r' aurx^vTfS 6\iyov clttoS pats c^xo l^''iv,et ttti elx'^v, 
 I had almost fled for shame, if. Without a protasis, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. Kai Tras 
 StaTTT^Buv avTi^ 6 'Ittttos Triirrei els yovaTa, Kai fj.iKpov KaKeivov i^er pax'h^^' 
 rev. Comp. the Lat. prope (paene) cecidi, 1 came near falling. * 
 
 (/3) To denote that an. action takes place (is repeated), in 
 certain cases, and under certain circumstances. The- his- 
 torical tense in the principal clause is then commonly the 
 Impf. The condition under which the action is repeated, 
 is expressed by a subordinate clause with et, ore, etc. and 
 the Opt. ; the condition, however, is often omitted. 
 
 %XwfV S.V, he was accustomed to say, he would say as often as this or that happened, 
 as often as it was necessary, and the like. X. C. 4. 6, 13. ei Se tis abr^ irepl tod 
 avT i\ey 1, eirl tV uir6^€(riv iwaVT]y€v icv iravr a rhv \6yov, as often as ■ 
 one contradicted him, he loould {he ivas accustomed to) carry back the whole argument 
 tothe original proposition. 1. 3, 4. el Sen S6^eiev avrip (Sm/cpaTfi) <rriimlve(r- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 260.] MODAL ADVEKB oiv. 36] 
 
 &CU trtipk Twv ^ewj/, ^TTOV &;' ^ tr e I it ^tj trapoi rot (ni/iaiv6fieva Troi^cat, ^ et ri, 
 avrhy €iret^ey 6Sov Ka^iiv TiyefiSfcc Tv(l>\bv — &vtI jSXeiroyros. An. 2. 3, 11. el na 
 aiiT^ BoKoij] Tuv irphs rovro r^Ta.yp.ivwv jSAaKctJeif, €7ratev &Vj he would beat 
 him. 1. 5, 2. of /i^K oTOi, ^iref tis SuIikoi, vpoSpa/jiivTes hv iaraaav, as often as 
 any one pursued them, they would stop (the Plup. having the sense of the Impf. 
 4 255, Bern. 3). 3. 4, 22., 6ir6Te Be Sidffxo'fy al irAfupol toS TrKaiaimi, rh jucVoy 
 hy i^eirlfii,ic\aiTav. 
 
 3. With the Subjunctive, to represent the future conception, 
 which the Greek expresses by the Sub. [} 257, 1, (a)], as con- 
 ditional, and depending on circumstances. The following cases 
 are to be distinguished : 
 
 (a) The deliberative Subj. [§ 159, 1, (b)], takes av, though but 
 seldom in direct, more frequently in indirect questions, when 
 a condition is to be referred to. 
 
 Tiitot' &y odv Keyoi/ievs {what shall we therefore say, it tlie thing ia so ">) 
 etc. PI. li. 655, u. lyi> yhp tovto, S> UpoTtty6pa, ovk ^M" S'Sojcrbi' etvai, ffoX 5J 
 \iyoini ouK ix<a 8irais Uv oxkttS (i. u. a axi \iyeis), Ihnow not how 1 could 
 disbdieve it, if you say so, Prot. 319, b. 'Av 8' aS ^/neis vtKaiiev, KeKv/ifvYis ttis 
 yf(pvpas oiix e^ovirtv iKeimi, Hmv hv <j>vyacriy,X. An. 2. 4,20. Ei Se aoi /ii) 
 SoKc!, a-Ki^ai, iay (i. e. « Ju/) rdSe cot ii.aXKov apsa-Ky, C. 4. 4, 12. 
 
 (b) The Subj., which is often used in the Homeric language instead of the 
 Fut. Ind. (§ 259, Kem. 4), is frequently found with &v, which is to be explained 
 in the same manner as with the Fut. Ind. [No. 2, (1 )]. Ei Se /te /lit Uaaiv, iyi> 
 S4 Key airhs cAtofiai 11. a, 137, then I myself wM {without doubt) take it, less 
 direct than the Put. Ou/c &v rot xpa^f MP /cfftopis, H. y, 54. 
 
 (c) In subordinate clauses. In this case, av usually stands 
 with the conjunction of the subordinate clause, or combines 
 with the conjunction and forms one word. 
 
 In this way originate 4dy (from e! &•>), i^dy (from ^tteI &y), Uray (from 3tc &y)^ 
 iirSray (from dir<(T6 &y), ■nph &y, ^ySr' &y, S^t &y, "5 S", ^'^ot, &y, 61 &y, 8iro> &y, ? 
 &y, Sirri &y, 8*e^ &y, MSr^" &-: etc., ts &y {quicunque or si quis),oXos i.y, &iro7os &y, 
 Uos &y, iTToVoj &y, etc. In all these expressions, u, possible assumption is de- 
 noted ; it is assumed that something is possible in the future ; the future occur- 
 rence of it depends upon the assumption of the speaker, i. c. the speaker 
 assumes and expects that it will be, e. g. tay rovro Xhvs, if you say, shall say 
 tliis (viz. according to my assumption, or as I expect you will), hfxaprnoTi, you 
 leill be wrong. 
 
 (4) With the Opt, but not with the Opt. Fut. 
 
 (a) The Opt. with iv must always be considered as the principal clause of a 
 eonditi5nal sentence, even if the condition is omitted, e. g. (1 n ?x»«. S»"l» Sk, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
362 SYNTAX. [} 260 
 
 1/ you. liad anything, you vxiuld give it (j'ou may perhaps have something, and 
 then you may give it to me). The Attic writers in particular, use this mode 
 of expression, to denote firmly established and definite opinions and views of 
 anything, and even to denote actual facts with a degree of reserve, moderation 
 and modesty. A negation is here expressed by oi{K). Her. 3, 82. aySphs hhs, 
 Tov aptffTov (i. e. €4 lipiffTos ejT;) ouSev 6,fmvov Uv tpaveir], TUtihing would seetn 
 better than. 7, 184. &v^p€S ti.v elev iy aiiTolfri T^co'tpfs fivpidSes Kot ciKOtri, there 
 may have been two hundred and Jbrti/ thousand Tnen. 5, 9. y4voiro S' hi/ irav iv 
 T^ ^laKp^ Xpiytfi^ all might happen. X. Cy. 1, 2, 11. ^pwi/res ovk &v apiiTT'f} ■ 
 ratey, while hunting they would not breakfast = they do not breakfast. 13 
 i-jreiS^y ra treyre Kal flKoffiy erri StaTe\^tratfftyf drjcray iihv tiy qvtoi Tr\^t6y r 
 yeyoy6Tes 7/ TreyrfiKoyra erij anh yeyea^. PI. Gorg. 502, d. Aiifnjyopla &pa ris 
 iiTTiy 7} notiiTiK'f}, Call, ^aiyerat. Socr. OvKovy 7] jiTjTopiK)] Srifirjyopta tiy cXtj, 
 By the Opt. with iy. Homer [§ 339, 3, (a) (j8)] and Herodotus often denote a 
 supposition respecting something that is past. Her. 9, 71. ravra piy /col <j>&iytp 
 hy eXvoiey, they might hav^ said these things J^vm envy. Ij 2. efyjiray ^ ay 
 ovToi KpTJTes, these might have been Cretans. 
 
 Eem. 7. If the Opt. is used without &y, as § 239, 3, (a), the action is ex- 
 pressed with greater emphasis and definiteness, since the speaker has no refer- 
 ence to the conditioning circumstances, which might prevent the realization of 
 the thing conceived. Comp. ^eTa &e6s y id^e\coy koI rtiKd^ey &ySpa aaiaai, 
 the propitious deity, I think, can save, Od. 7, 231, and ffadaai &v, could, 
 MIGHT save, if he wished. Hence the omission of &v in the freer language of 
 poetry, is far more frequent than in prose, which has more regard to the actual 
 relation of the things. described. 
 
 (b) So also the Opt. is used with av, as a more modest and 
 mild expression of a command or request, since the tiling de- 
 sired is represented as dependent on the will of the person 
 addressed and is thereby made conditional. Here also a nega- 
 tion is expressed by ou(k). 
 
 PI. Phaedr. 227, c. K4-yois &y instead of \ey^ (properly, you may speak, if you 
 choose). Tim. 19, 0. 4koiJo£t' hy ^Sti to, /ierit raura irepl Trjs T-o\nelas, you 
 might hear then, instead of hear then. S. El. 1491. x^po'^s 6.y, you might go. II 
 0, 250. with a degree of irony, QepatT' — ia-xeo—! ou ycip eyii aio (/wj/ti pcEpsiii- 
 repoy Pporhv &\\oy e/i/ieyai — • t# ovk tiy fituriXrias ayh. <rT6ii ix<"' ayopei- 
 ois, Kal tr^iy dyetded t€ it po<p e p ois, vi<rToy t€ <pv\da(rois! instead of ^i) 
 &.y6peve, etc., you should nof harangue, nor be heaping up reproaches, etc. In the form 
 of a question, X. Hier. 1, 1. ap' &y /mi ^»€A.^<rais, S 'Upay, Zmyii<r<urSta.i, h 
 eiKhs fiSevai <re 04\Tioy e^oB ; would you be inclined, viz., if I should ask you. With 
 ow in the form of a question, II. „, 456. obK hy Si, T6yS- &ySpa /idxvs 4 pi <r at 
 liiTefAdy ; might you not, could you not restrain the man, instead of, restrain him. 
 In a sharper and more urgent tone as an exclamation, II. m, 263. oiiK &i> S^ 
 p.oi&fiaiay 4<j>oTr\l(T<raiTe rdxta-ra, rmrd re Trdyr' iviSte7Te, 'lya ir^o-ffa- 
 uty ito'io ; would you not gel ready tlie chariot, if I commanded it ? 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 260. J MODAL ADVERB av. 
 
 36.1 
 
 (c) The Optative -with av has the same force in interrogative 
 as in other sentences, and may commonly be translated by the 
 auxiliaries can, could, would. 
 
 n. ttj, 367. elf t/s 0-6 rSoiTO . . , t^s iv U\ Toi v6os (Xt); how wmld you then fed 1 
 II. T, 90. aWa ri Kev pe^aiin; what cmdd I do? S. Ph. 1393. rl Stjt tm ^/ieTj, 
 SpSftei'; Dem. Phil. 1, p. 43, 10. \4yeTat ti kiuv6v; yivoiTO yiip iv ti Koiyd- 
 Tepoc, ^ MoKe5iji» iy^p 'ASnivaiovs icaTcaroKeiiMv ; can there be any stranger news 
 than — ? 
 
 Eem. 8. Comp. irot Tis (pci-yet ; whither does one flee ? Arist. Plut. 438. toi 
 ni (^iryoi; whither may one flee? (more definite than with &v). Eur. Or. 598. 
 TTol Tij fiv ^iyoi ; whither would one flee ? whither could one flee ? where in the. 
 world could he flee ? S. Aj. 403. iroT tis oSv <piyn ,■ whither shall one flee or is one 
 to flee ? 
 
 (d) The Dramatists, particularly, often express a wish, in the 
 form of a question, by irfis and the Optative with av, it being 
 asked how something might, could, ivouM take place under a 
 given condition. 
 
 Soph. Aj. 338. St Zed, — ircos tcy rhy aiiivKi&TaTov . . oXetrffas t4\os ^dyoifii 
 KavrSs; how might, could, would I die? instead of, that I might die! Eur. Ale. 
 867. irwj tiv oXoiiJutjv; PI. Euthyd. 275, u. iras i,v KaXus (Tol S trjyTia-al- 
 li.T)V 1 how can I appropriately describe to you ? that I could! 
 
 Eem. 9. But the Opt. in itself, as the expression of a wish, does not take 
 the conditioning adverb &» [^ 259,3, (b)]. II. (, 281. Sis k4 oi aZ^i yaia x<^'">^ 
 is not properly expressed as a wish, but as a doubtful condition, thus {&s = 
 ovTois) the earth should then open for him. 
 
 (5) The Inf and Part, take av (kc), when the finite verb, which 
 stands instead of the Inf. and Part., would take it : 
 
 (a) The Inf. with i,v after verba sentiendi and declarandi, consequently the Inf 
 Pres. and Aor. with &v, instead of the Ind. Pres. and Aor. with iv, or instead of 
 the Opt. Impf. and Aor. with &v in direct discourse ; the same principle holds 
 when the Inf. is used as a substantive. The Inf. Perf. with &v instead of the 
 Ind. and Opt. Plup. with Sy, is more seldom. The Inf. Fut. with &y is rare in 
 Attic i instead of it the Inf. Aor. or even the Pros, with &v is commonly used. 
 
 Ej TI €7x£>', ^(pri, Sovvai &v ( Oratio recta : it rt etxo", eSwKo &v),he said that 
 \j he had anything, he would have given it, dixit, se, si quid habuisset, daturum fuisse. 
 Efri ex""> ^<S>il,Sovvai &v [Or. recta: elri exoifti, Sonjj/Sc), dixit, se, si guid haieret, 
 daturum, esse. 'Eyi> Soku Sendxis tiv Kara, rfjs yijs KaraSSvai i'lSiov, t) 6(pdrj- 
 vat ovru Ta-jreiySs, X. Cy. 5. 5, 9 {Or. recta: SeKcf/cis ttv airo^Ayoifii ^Sioy, 1j 
 i^iSreiriv), meihinhs I would rather sink ten times beneath the earth, than to be seen in 
 this humble condition. 'Uyov/iai . . ovk tiv aKpirovs cdiTohs a.Tzu\o\€vai, a\Kh 
 T^v irpos'liKovaav Slmjii SeSaxei/aitJjJS. 27, 8 (Or. recta: ovk &v O7ro\ii\e- 
 ffav — iSeS^K^cray &v). Ol^ai ykp ovic ttv axaptcrras fiot e^ety, I think you 
 would not be unthankful to me, if I entreated the king, etc., ( Or. recta : ovk hv axa- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
364 SYNTAX. [i 261 
 
 pio-Tws /*oi ex"""* °'' "'XO^V'^i l>ut not efoiTe, see No. 4). "Oaai yap iie((a 
 Svyafitf €X^^ V °-Pxh^ TO(ro{iTai ficiWoy hy Tiyiiffa.ro avT^jv Kal KarairKii^etv Tohs 
 iroXiVaSjK.L. 8, 3. Uais exe's irphs rh iSreXav tiv Uvai&KKT\TOS iiri bshmv; 
 (the same as TT&Js %x^^^ "^P^^ tovto '6ti 4^4\ots hy Ui'ai &K\rjTos i^rl Seiiryoyj) 
 PI. Symp. 174, b. Ei o5j/ Xe-yoifj-i, e5 oIS', '6ti d7ip.'i)yop^1v &v ^e (fial^jSj Pi 
 R. 350, e. 
 
 Eem. 10. In Latin the conditioned Inf. is expressed as follows : 
 ypd<p€iy &y = scripturum esse, yeypafp4vai &v = scripturum futsse, 
 ypd^at ay = (a) scripturum Julsse, or (b) as Prcs., scripturum esse, 
 ypa^eiy 6,y = scripturum fore. 
 
 (b) The Participle with &y after verba sentiendi, or when the Participle takes 
 the place of an adverbial subordinate clause. The same principles hold here 
 as with the Inf. The Ftit. Part, with &y is rare in Attic Greek (the reading is 
 commonly doubtful when it occurs) : instead of the Put. Part., the Aor. or 
 even the Prcs. with iy, is generally used. 
 
 Her. 7, 1.5. evpiffKca Se £5e &v yiy 6fieya ravra, et Xa^ois T)?y ip.^v ffKeviiv 
 {reperio, sic Iiaec futuka esse, si sumas vestes meas). X. C. 2. 2, 3. at troKeis 
 inl Tois /leyitTTOis aSiK^i/j-affi C^f^^ay ^dyaroy ireiroi'fiKaffiy, us ovk Uy fiuCoyos kokov 
 ipS^at T)]y aSiKiav iravffoyTes {exisiimantes se non gravioris mali metu injitriam 
 COEECITUEOS F.OKE, thinking that they could deter from crivie by the fear of no 
 greater evil). Th. 6,38. oijTe oyra, oure hy y ey6 /xeva KoyoTrotovffA _i. e. & 
 oijTe iffriy, ofjT hy y 4vo it o, they fabricate what neither is nor will be). Isocr. 
 Phil. 133. Y.Z ^(T^L pLt^d^y &y p.e tovtojv e irix^ tpTlffayT a tre irei^stv, el Svyaff' 
 Teiay {x6yoy koL trXouroy kdipuv ^^ avrtay yeyTj(r6/j.£yoy (^ 8ti e7re;^e(p7)(ra &y). 
 PI. Phil. 52, c. StaKeKpi[.Le^ X^pls rds re Ko^apas Tjdoyas Kocl ray trxeSi^ hca^ip" 
 Tovs opStSs iiy K^x&^lffas (= Kal ai irxeSl^ aKo^apToi opAHs tiy Kex^^'iiy). 
 So, also, with the case absolute : X. An. 5. 2, 8. IffKoireno, trSTspoy dti Kpurroy 
 hraysiy Ka! Toi/s Sia$e$riK6Tas, ^ Kal toui d-iT\!ras Sio,S:j3afeij', as a\6yTos &» 
 ToO xt^f '"u ( = vo/iifaj/, 8ti rb X"P'<"' a A. 0/17 &y). 
 
 i 2GI. Position and Repetition of S.v. 'Kv loithout a 
 
 Verb. 
 
 1. "With the combination mentioned in 260, (3), c, as Sr &.v, irpXv &y, small 
 particles like 8e', tc, /ley, ydp, sometimes come between, c. g. Sr S' &y. 
 
 2. As &y represents the predicate as conditional, it ought properly to be joined 
 with the predicate, e. g. \syotij.i &y, e\eyoy &y ; yet it commonly follows that 
 member of a sentence which is to be made emphatic, e. g. PI. Crito. 53, c. 
 Kol OVK otel iffx^l^oy tty cfiave'ff^ai rh tov ^inKparovs irpaypLa. BTence it is 
 regularly joined to such words also as change the idea of the sentence, viz., to 
 negative adverbs and interrogatives, e. g. oijk &y, ou5' &y, oSiroT &y, oiSeiror.&y, 
 etc. — Ti's &y, Ti &y, ri 5' &y, tI Stjt' &y, iras &y, nas yhp &y, ap' &y, etc. ; — also 
 to adverbs of place, time, manner, and other adverbs, which, in varioas ways 
 modify the expression contained in the predicate and define it more exactly, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 262.J ATTRIBUTIVE CONSTKUCTION. 363 
 
 e. g. evTaC&a &v, r-ir' Sv, fiWraif &y, la-iis &v, rix' Sy, /uoAwtt' ii-, jJkktt' &v, fi6\is 
 &y, crxoA.p Si/, ^a;Sia?j Sv, ^^(TT Sf, ti^xiitt' S;/, (r(|>o'Sp' Sr, ^Sews Sv, K&y (iustead 
 of (col iij', etiam, vel), etc. 
 
 Kemakk 1 . In certain constructions, the Sk belonging to the Opt. is re- 
 moved from the dependent clause, and joined with the principal clause ; this 
 is particularly the case in the phrase, oiiK oiS" tv el. PI. Tim. 26, b. iyii ydp, 
 & lakv x&" ^Kouira, ou/c &v oTSa ei Svyal/itiv thravTo, 4y p.iii\nri viXw \a$e!v. 
 
 Kem. 2. In certain parenthetic sentences, the &v belonging to the Opt. is 
 placed first; thus particularly, &y tis eiitoi, 0a(i;. PI. Phaed. 87, a. ri oiv (,) h» 
 tpa'tTj d \6yos [, ) ^ti aTrnrTeTs ; 
 
 3. "Ak is very often repeated in the same sentence {k4 very seldom). Tho 
 reason of this is two-fold: 
 
 (a) It is used once at the beginning of the sentence, in order to show, in 
 the outset, that the predicate is conditional. This is particularly the case, 
 when the principal sentence is divided by intervening subordinate clauses, or 
 when several words precede the conditioned verb to which &p belongs. &st' 
 ^Vf « tT^'4vos K&^oifit STjKSiTatfi tip oV avTols <\>povUy S. El. 333. 
 
 (b) The second reason is a rhetorical one. 'hv is joined vrith the word 
 which requires to be made emphatic. If the rhetorical emphasis belongs to 
 several words in one sentence, &v can be repeated with each. But besides this, 
 iv can be again placed after the conditioned verb to which it properly belongs. 
 PI. Apol. 35, d. ffa^ws y^p ^v, « Trei^oLfii 6fms, ^eohs ttp 5iZ6^K0ip.i fiij 
 Tiyeiff^cu ii^as elfat. Eur. Troad. 1244. iKfiavets fey ^vtej oiic &v ifiuriSteiiiei' 
 &!/ Mov<rcus. 
 
 Rem. 3. Homer sometimes joins the weaker kc with &i>, in order to make 
 the conditionality or contingency still more prominent. H. v, 127, sq. "cttovto 
 tpilAayyes . . , &r oUr' &y Kef "Aprjs bviiraiTO fieTeTiAiv, aire k 'ASrrjva'n]. 
 
 4. 'An is very frequently found with a conjunction or a relative without a 
 verb, when the verb can be easily supplied from the context ; thus especially 
 &s Jtv, &sTrep &v el, iras yap &v, irSr 8° oiiK &y, Ssirep i,v and the 
 like, io^oiiiems, & strep &y £i iraij (i. e. Ssirep %v ^o0oiTO, ei ttcus eItj), PL 
 Gorg. 479, a. 
 
 CaVPTEK II. 
 §262. The Attributive Construction. 
 
 Attributives serve to explain more definitely the idea 
 contained in the substantive to which they belong, e. g. 
 TO KaXov poSov, 6 /Meja^ Trat?. The attributive may be • 
 
 a. An adjective or participle, e. g. ro xaXov poBov, ra 
 ^dWov az/^o?; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
366 SYNTAX. 'J 263 
 
 b. A substantive in the genitive, e. g. ol tov SevSpou 
 fcapTToi', 
 
 c. A substantive with a preposition, e. g. ^ tt/jos t^h 
 ■K o'Kiv oho^ ; 
 
 d. An adverb, e. g. ol vvv av'iipanroi ; 
 
 e. A substantive in apposition, e. g. Kpolcro';, 6 /SacrtXew?. 
 
 §263. Ellipsis of the Substantive to which the 
 Attributive belongs. 
 
 When the substantive which is to be more fully explained by the attribtitive, 
 contains a general idea, or one which csji be easily supplied from the context, 
 or is indicated by some word of the sentence, or, by frequent usage in a particu- 
 Lar connection, may be supposed to be known, then the substantire, as the 
 less important member in the attributive relation, is often omitted, and the 
 adjective or participle becomes a, substantive. Substantives which are often 
 omitted with attributive adjectives, are : iv^pairos, Sv&panroi, aviip, &j/Spei, yvvii, 
 yvvaiK^s, Xf%l"'-t XP^/'"»'''«> ■"'pa.yfia, irpdy/jiaTa, rifiepa, yri, x<5()o, iJunpa, dS6s, x^^Pi 
 yi'd/Mi, 'l'TJ(j>os, T6xi^, Tr6\ffuis, etc. ; those omitted with the attributive genitive are : 
 varlip, li^ifnip, vtos, irius, Stvydrrip, aSe\<p6s, avSip (husband), yvvi] (mfe), olicia, 
 oJhos, xi^po, yv (land). The substantive is omitted with the following classes 
 of words : 
 
 ii. The attributive adjective, adjective pronoun, and participle. 
 
 (a) Such as denote persons : ot StyriToi, mortales; oi <roipol, oi yeivdiieyot (instead 
 of 7o«rs) : 01 ^X""'"'"! *''S "f^ )■ ol(pv\dTToms (<pvKaKes); oi SixdCovTes, judges ; 
 ol \4yomes, orators, etc. 
 
 (;8) Such as denote names of things . (a) appellatives : tA ^lUertpa (xp^/mtu), res 
 nostrae; ra ifui, res meae, everything which relates to me ; rtt Kokd, respulehrae; t4 
 Kaxd, mala (§ 243, 4), 7) iarepaia, ri iiriova-a, f) Trpiim, Sevrepa, etc. (^|Uepo) ; ^ 
 iro\6^fa (Xiipa), tlie enemy's country; fi <pi\la, a friendly country; ri oiKovn^ni (yrj), 
 the inliahited earth ; fi &mSpos (yrj), a desert ; ^ eii^eia (6S6s) ; t^v ToxfiTTTjc, quam 
 celemme ; tV ia-Tii' (^oipav) ImoSiSovai ; t) ireirpafi4iiri (fioTpa) ; ii Be|io, ^ apiorepi 
 (Xf'P); V viKua-a (yy^/iri) ; tV ^mvriav (^riipov) riSiiaSrai; ri priTopmi) (t^xvi])- 
 
 (b) Abstracts : ri Ka\6v, t!) ayaStSv, or Ta.yaSr6v, the beautiful, the good; t4 
 siJTuxes, good fortune; -rh avaia^-roy, want of feeling ; rh kow6v, the common 
 wealth (e. g. tSv ^a/iliov) ; rb Aaptrovv, confidence. 
 
 (c) Collective noims denoting persons: t!> ivavrioy, the enemy ; rh imi\Koov, 
 the subjects. Adjectives in -ik6v especially belong here, c. g. Tb ttoAitikw, <A« 
 citizens ; th dT\iTiK6u, the heavy armed; rh oiVeriKcJi/, the servants; rh "E\K-i\vik6ii, 
 ri Pap$apiK6v, rh iinriKiJi/, etc. The plural of adjectives of this ending is often 
 used to denote a number, collection, or scries of single events, u. g. to Tpwi/to, 
 t/ia Trojan war; to 'EWrivixd, the Grecian history; ra vavTind, naval war. but also 
 naval affairs. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 2G4,] ATTRlfiUTlVE ADJECTIVE. 367 
 
 b. The attributive genitive also is used witlxout the governing substantive, 
 e. g. 'AK4^avSpos, 6 ^iKlrrirov {vlis), MaTa r) 'ArAavros {^vydrrip) ; then with th« 
 propositions iy, e/j and ix with the Gen. of a person to denote his abode, c. g. 
 if ^Sov (oITk^) (Tmt; ei'j ^Sov (ojicay) i^SreTv; els SiScuTKdha,' (poirav, to go to the 
 t< acker's; els U/^Tmyos tpoiriv, -irefiTretv, to go or send to Plato's ; iit tLSaiTKd\aiv 
 A7roX\c{TTe(rae«, PI. Protag. 326, c. to leave school; tU r^v Kipov (-yijy) i?^i7v; 
 tI t5)s rixns, the events of fortune; ri ttjs Tr6\fas, the affairs of state; rh toS 
 voXi/iov, the whole extent of the war; tA 'ASn,ualuv <l>poviiv, ab Atheniemium par' 
 tibiis stare; rh. t^s ipyTJS, Th ttjs ifi-ireiptas, ri r&y im^vfit&y {that which pertain* 
 to anger, the nature or essence of anger, etc.] ; rh ruy TrxiSa,y,the custom of hoys; 
 th tmv kKiioav. 
 
 c. The attributive adverb is used without a substantive, e. g. ol nty, ol to'tc, ol 
 iri\ai, 01 iv^iSs {&vSrpanrot.), tA dtnot (irpdy/iaTa), res domesticae, fi e|i)j, {viiiptt), 
 the foUomng day, ete. 
 
 d. The attributive substantive or substantive pronoun with the preposition 
 jy which it is governed, e. g. ol koSt' tih&s, at iijtfiuuy, our contemporaries ; — oi 
 ifi(l>i or irepi riya, 6. g. n\(iTai(/a, signifies (a) a person With his companions, 
 followers, or scholars ; ot i/ipl IteKf'urrpaTOy, Pisistratus and his troops ; oi a/upl 
 
 'ea\rjy, Tliales and other phibsophers of his school ;''Kp<i \iyeis tV rSy ^euv 
 Kpioriv, %» oi vepl KeKpoirn Si' ipcriti' iKpXvai/, which CecTops and his tribunal 
 on account of their excellence, decided, X. C. 3. 5, 10. — (b) more seldom the com- 
 panions, followers, or scholars alone, without the person named.— Further, ot 
 aiv rail, ot /ierd twos, (he followers, etc. of any one ; ot {m6 Tm, the subjects of 
 any one ; ot otto tivos, assedae, or descendants of one ; ol eV So-rci ; ot irepl <pi\oiio' 
 !piav; ot Ttepl tV ^ptw ; ot i/i^l Thv *6\efioi', etc. ; — ret Tiapd Tivos, intelligence 
 respecting any one, or commands of any one; — ri xar' iij.4) rb iv' 4fi,4, as far as in 
 my power, as far as in me lies. 
 
 i 264. a. Attributive Adjective. 
 
 1. The attributive adjective (participle, adjective pronoun 
 and numeral), expresses a quality wliich belongs to an object, 
 as the beautifvZ and hlooming rose. On the agreement of the 
 adjective with the word wliich it defines, see § 240. 
 
 Semakk 1 . The participles \ey6iiems and KaAov/icvos are used, where the 
 Latin has qui dicitur, vacatur, quern dicunt, vacant, etc., and the English the 
 phrase so-called, as it is catted, are called, etc., c. g. AaKeSat/i6moi rhv iephv KaKoi- 
 fievov v6\efioy icTTpdrfviray {the Sacred war, as it is called, or the so-called Sacred 
 war), Th. 1, 112. ^KOTrvy, ihras d Ka\oi/fieyos inrh Tav ffotpurTav K^trfws etpv 
 {the K6(Tiios as it is called by the sophists), X. C. 1. 1, II. 
 
 Kem. 2. It has already been stated (§ 245, Eem. 5), that the adjectives 
 ixpos, lieffos, itxaros, must in certain cases be translated into English by 
 Bubstantives. 
 
 Rem. 3. Many personal nouns which denote an employment, station or 
 age, are treated as adjectives, and the word av{]p is joined with them, if the 
 man is to bo considered in relation to his fimployment, station or age ; but 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
368 SYNTAX. f§ 264, 
 
 the word Slv-Iip is omitted, if the man is considoved as merely performing 
 the duties of a particular office or employment. Thus ai'^jp ^oyris signifies a 
 man who is hy profession a prophet, and fidpris without avrip, a man who, for 
 the time being, acts as ft prophet ; thus ovJjp Patn\eis, ai/ijp ripumos, ayiip iroi' 
 a'fiy, ariiip ji-liTaip, diviip TTpecr/SiiTTjs, avijp veaflas, ypavs yvvf), etc. ; also in the 
 respectful form of address among the Attic orators and historians, e. g. ivSpes 
 SiKaa-Tat, &vSpes aTpaTiHrm. So likewise with national names, c. g. av^p 'AAtj* 
 valos, 'A/3577piT7)s. This usage is still more extensive in poetry. See Larger 
 Grammar, Tart II. § 477. 
 
 2. When two or more attributive adjectives belong to a sub- 
 stantive, the relation is two-fold. The relation is: (a) coordinate, 
 when each adjective is equally a more full explanation of the 
 substantive ; then the adjectives are commonly connected by 
 Kat, rl^-Kai; where there are several adjectives, the con- 
 nective is used only before the last ; (b) subordinate, when a 
 substantive with one of the adjectives forms, as it Were, a 
 single idea, and is more definitely defined by another adjective. 
 In this case there is no connective between the two adjec- 
 tives. The subordinate relation occurs particularly when pro- 
 nouns, numerals, adjectives of time, place, and material are 
 joined with other adjectives. 
 
 SwKt-HTTjj ci,ytiStbs KaX iToiphs avijp iiv. IIoWoI i.ya^oX iySpes or iroAXol 
 aya^o^ Ka\ tro(f)ol &i^Spes. JloWa KoKct spya, 'O ifihs ^Tcupos ffo^6s* 
 OStoj 6 avTjp aya^is. TjjeiS ayaAol &vSpes. Ti irpurov kbAJic irpaypAi, 
 Od. i, 322, sq. Wrhs ytihs ietKOffSpoio ^e\aty7j^, 
 
 Eem. 4. The numeral to Wo I is used in Greek, like imlti in Latin, 
 generally in the coordinate relation, and in this way the idea of plurality is 
 made emphatic, while the English commonly uses the subordinate, e. g. iroAAi 
 Koi Ko\i epya, multa et praedara facinora. The Greek and Latin is many and 
 noble deeds, the English commonly many noble deeds. 
 
 Ebm. 5. In the Greek, the attributive adjective verj' frequently takes the 
 force of a substantive, and the substantive to which the adjective properly 
 belongs, is put in the attributive genitive. Here the following cases ai-e to 
 be distinguished : 
 
 a. The substantive stands with the plural adjective which takes the gendei 
 of the substantive, e. g. oi xpitrrol riiv avSrpdmoiv ; ri ixitovhaia rav irpaypATav. 
 
 b. The adjective which becomes a substantive is sometimes in the Neut. 
 Sing., sometimes also in tlie Neut. PI. Th. I. US, o,' •h^voHoi. M pi4ya 
 ixaonaav Swafiius (= M ney,iKt,v Simniv), had attained a Ugh degree of 
 power. Thus many phrases with irav, e. g. eIs vav kukov (in omne genus 
 ailamitatis) ac^iKveTirSiai; 4y iravrX Kaicov cTj/at; eh Trav TrpoeX-hXv^e uovSnioias. 
 
 c. The substantive is made to depend upon the adjective in the Sinij which 
 take! the gender of the substantive which it governs, instead of being in tho 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 264.] ATTEIBUTIVE ADJECTIVE. 309 
 
 Neut., 0. g. T] Toh\ii T^j UeAoKovvfia-ou instead of rh iroAi rr/s 11. The word 
 il/iiirvs is most frequently used in this manner, often also iroKis, ivKeimv 
 v\i7(rTos and other superlatives, e. g. a %iiiavs rov xpivov; iirl -ry iniiffela 
 T^J T^s. X. Cy. 4. 5, 1. irejuirere rod tr'nov rhy ^/iktw, r&v 'ipraiy tovs 
 ijMifffij. Th. 7, 3. T7)y vKela-rriv Trjs ffTpaTLas irapeVo|£ ; so iroKAii ttjs 
 Xwpas, Tbv Tr\eTa-ro_v rov xpivov. Th. 1, 2. rijj 7^f ^ apia-T-q ae! ris uetb- 
 0oKas ran/ oiKyiTipwy elx^y. 
 
 3. The Greek, lilse the Lalm, frequently uses the attributive 
 adjective to define the subject or object, not by itself, but only 
 in reference to the predicate. In tliis vray the designations 
 of place, time, number, also a reason, condition, and maimer 
 can be expressed by adjectives, which agree with a substan- 
 tive in gender, number, and case. 
 
 a. Adjectives of place and order. OH. <!>, 146. Tfe liuxoiraTos aUi in- 
 stead of €1/ fivxaiTdrcp. Also, vparos, itp6Tfpos (of two), SaraTOs, vtrrepos (of 
 two), liea-os, T€\evTaios, irxiyios, fiereupos, &icpos, Sfvpiuos, dii\d<r<rios, etc. S 
 Ant. 785. (j>oiTas {mepirdvrios instead of tmip rhv irivrov. Th. 1, 134. Xve 
 fi}) uirai^fios raXaiirupoln, that he might not suffer in the open air. Here belong 
 also iras, eKaa-Tos, eKanpos, &ij.<l>a, ait.<j>6T epos, etc. § 246, 5, 6 and 7. 
 
 h. Adjectives of time, e. g. i^ios, SpApios, ea&u/Ss, eairdpws, vix'os, ji^aoviKTios, 
 StepLvos, x^'Co'sj iapi-vis, x^'^l'^P^"^^) etc., especially those in -aios, e. g. Scvrtpaios, 
 TfiTuTos, etc., xpiy'os {after a long time}, etc. II. o, 497. ijepii) S' av4$ri fieyav 
 ovpai>6v instead of ?pi, she went early. X. An. 4. 1,5. tr/coTiotous Ste^^ilv 
 ri) Treilov, to pass through the plain in the darh. TerapraTos, ire/iTToioj lupl- 
 KETO, he came on the fourth, fifth day ; xpivios ^AS-eK, after a long time. 
 
 c. Adjectives of manner and other relations, e. g. o^is, Taxis, aiipviSws, 
 fipaSvs, inrSffTTOvZos, i.(nroy^os, Hpictos', eKtiy, i^eXoia'ios, &Ka)V, &okvos, i^eXovT-ijs 
 ^avxos; avxf>6s, iroKis, a^p6os, ■7rvKp6s, a-irdvios, fioyos, e. g. inr6a''iToySoi air7)'e- 
 e-av = inh CTrofBcu^, they wend away under a truce. Th. 1, 63. robs veKpohs 
 diroffTrSvSovs an-eSotray roTs UoriiatdTais, they gave up the dead under the truce. 
 
 Kem. 6. But when the qualifying words cannot at the same time express 
 a quality of the subject or object, but belong solely to the predicate, the 
 adverb must be used, e.g. xaKus aSeis, you sing beautifuUy (not KoXhs ^Sets, 
 for the person who sings beautifuUy, is not necessarily beautiful). When the 
 Greeks expressed such designations of place and time, as properly belong to the 
 predicate, by adjectives, it is to be explained as resulting from their vivid mode 
 of conception. For example, I o-irepios ^Afte, vespertinus venit, he caine {as it 
 were) enveloped by the evening. 
 
 Eem. 7. The distinction between irparos {Trp6Tepos, S<rrepos, S<rra- 
 Tos), Trp^TTjy {irporepay, v ffT epay, vo" TdrTjy), and 'jrjcoroy (TrptJre- 
 poy, vtTT e poy, vffraroy or j^trrar a), iJi6vos, ix6vriv and fiiyoy r^y 
 evurroX^v eypmlie, appears when the sentence is analyzed; v par as, liiyos 
 mean, I am the first, the last, the only one of all who has written this letter, like 
 PBIMUS scnps{; Trp^ri^y, vardrriy, fi6yT]y ri]y initrroK^y ^ypwpa, this letter 
 was the first, the last, tlie only one I have written ; the adverbs irpjaroy, irpir^pov, 
 etc., on the contrary, are used in stating several actions of the same subject, in 
 flie order in which they occurred, e. g. 'O Trais rpiroy jj-hy r'qv imaroKrir 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
370 SYNTAX. [ii 265, 26S 
 
 typca^sPf en-eiTo iitaiffev, lia-rara 5e airyet] or irpcoToy, vtrraroy, Jbr iht 
 first, last time; so the adverb /ioyov places the predicate ia opposition to 
 another predicate, ii6vov iypai^aT^v iiriaTo\-l]v, I have only written the letta; 
 (not sent it). * 
 
 § 265. Attributive Genitive. 
 
 The attributive genitive will be considered in treating the 
 genitive, ^ 275, Rem. 6. 
 
 § 266. c. Apposition. 
 
 1. A substantive is said to be in apposition, when it is put 
 in the same Case with waaihe^ substantive or with a substan- 
 tive personal pronoun, and even with a personal pronoun implied 
 in a verb, for the sake of defining these words more fully ; if 
 the appositive denotes a person, it is also piit in the same gen- 
 der and number, as the word which it defines, comp. § 240, 1. 
 An appositive referring to two or more substantives is put in 
 the plural, ■when it is a common noun. 
 
 Kupos, & jSactAelSs. T6/j.vpts, 7} ^affiX^la. ''E.Keiyos, 6 jSa(7i\€t5s. X. Cy 
 5. 2, 7 . T-^y ^vyarepa, dewov Tt KdWos Kai fisye^os, 4^<iyiav wSe ejnrev. Th. 
 1, 137. @eiJiiaTOK\rjs tjkw irapa cr4, I, Themistocles, have come. Lnc. D. D. 
 24,2. i S€ Maias Tijs "AtAoctos SiaKoy oviiai airo'is (instead of tyb i 
 Mafas sc. vl6s). 
 
 2. When a substantive is in apposition with a possessive 
 pronoun, it is put in the Gen., since the possessive pronouns 
 take the place of the Gen. of the personal pronouns. 
 
 'Efihs (= iiM)v) Tov aA\lov ^los, the life of me, wretched, aA\lov being hero in 
 opposition with e^iis. Tafia ( = rb, ifi.d) tqS Svffr-fivov Kaxi, the evUs of me, un- 
 Imppy one! 2); rrjs KaWia-rris fvfwp<l>la, thy gracefulness, most beautiful one! 
 In English, as the examples show, such a Gen. with the possessive may be 
 often expressed by an exclamation, u. g. 'EKeaipa rhy trhv tov a^Kiov ploy, 1 
 pity thy life, wretched one ! or by an accessary clause, e. g. I pity thy life, thou who 
 art so miserable. So too the Gen. is put in apposition with adjectives which stand 
 in the place of the attributive Gen. PJ. Ap. 29, d. 'A&riyaios im v6Keas 
 TTJs fieylffT-ns (instead o( 'A^yuy, Tr6\eas), ir6\sa>s being here in apposi- 
 tion with 'A&TiyaTos which is equivalent to 'A^yay. On the expressions i 
 ■!lp.4TEpos, ifihspos, a-ferepos ainav Trarfip, see the remarks on the pronouns. 
 
 Eemakk 1. On the ellipsis of the words vUs, irais, Sniyarnp, yuyfi, etc. in 
 apposition, see ^ 263 ; on the use of the article in apposition, see § 244, Rem. 6. 
 In the phrases houi itrrl uoi, iyojxa riSnuii [Tl^efialj rivi and the like, the naras 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 266.] APPOSITION. 371 
 
 itself, !is an appositive, ia put in the same Case, e. g. 'Ovojii iarl /mi 'Ayidwf, 
 my name is Agathon. 'O vais %Kiyiv ivona that 4avr^ 'Ayd^eva. 'EjtoC&o ^k 
 TTOKis nsyd\Ti, ivofia S' air^ KopiraTT), X. An. 1. 5,4. ib. 2. 4, 13 and 25. Taurp 
 rp ^vyoiKuf i^eiifAa T6\iy Svofia, PI. Ep. 369, c. (to this community loe gave 
 thK name city, called it a city). 'Aviip irivns koI Siniormhs ^kt^itoto t^u ffanKiKari- 
 rijc Koi deundrnv ir posriyopiar, rhv Aixaiov, Plut. Ar. 2. (received the 
 surname,the Just). (The Gen.also is used in the same phrase : ^oiKmv iKT^jOart 
 T^v ToS XpijiTToB TrposTiyoplttV, Plut. Ph. 10. The Nom. also occurs: 
 'Avijp yevSfievos 'n-posei\Tj(l>6 t^v twv TrovTjp&v Koiv^v iiroiw^lav (rvKo^di/TTis, 
 Aesch. f. L § 27.) See 269, Rem. 3, 
 
 Rem. 2. A suhstautive in the Nom. or Ace. sometimes stands in apposition 
 with the. whole sentence ; in the Nom., when the appositive expresses a judg- 
 ment on the whole sentence ; in the Aoc., when the appositive denotes a thing 
 accomplished, a result, a purpose, or ohject, e. g. Eur. Or. 496. 4irel ycip i^iirvev 
 ffev 'Aya/iefivcov ^iov, irAijyels ^vyarphs ttjs. ^/xtjj {caesus a filia mea) imhp Kdpa, 
 — aiffxtffTov lepyovl II. w, 735. ^ tis *Axat&y. {avrhv) ^t^et xcipbs ^\^v 
 ojrh ir^pyoVf \vyphv liXe^poy, Eur. Or. 1105. 'Zkeyrjv KTiivaifj.eVf MePeKetp 
 \6iri]v iriKpiv (i. e. fflsre fhai Aiiirijv vmpiv). Aesch. Ag. 225. trAr) Srvi^p 
 yeveff^ai ^vyarpSs, TToXe^uv apaydv i&sre elvai Itpttyydy), In like manner, a 
 ]?art. or adjective is sometimes added as a clause in apposition to a whole sen- 
 tence, e. g. Tlct^ei ('Air6A\av) 'Ope<rTr)v layrip',^ a^ iydvaro, Kreivai, irphs 
 obx SiravTos eB/t\eini/ ^epov {a deed that brings no fame), Eur. Or. 30 
 Koi Si) irapeiToi {solntum est) cZ/ia, col iihv ov <pl\ov Suppl. 1070. 
 
 Hem. 3. The Inf. also is sometimes used as a clause in apposition with a 
 word, especially with demonstrative and relative pronouns, so as to define 
 more exactly an idea before expressed in a general manner. Ov yhp eVl 
 TO {it If KiSnfTOi i SiKaffriis, M rip KaTOXop^C* <''&'»' ''i S^KOia PI. Apol. 
 35, c, the judge does not sit for this, viz., for the purpose of compromising justice for ' 
 favor. *A 8^ ir/josTcVaKToi Tp fiavTiK^, ^ttic notr s7v tovs "Eparas Kol iot- 
 peiieiy, Symp. 188, c. 
 
 3. With a substantive, expressing the idea of plurality, one 
 substantive or even several substances denoting the parts of 
 that pkiraUty or whole, are often put in, apposition, instead of 
 being in the Gen. according to the natural construction. This 
 may be called distributive or partitive apposition. Here belong 
 especially the words Ikiuttoi, iKarepos, ttSs {every one), ot /xeV — 
 01 8e, oAAos SXKov {alius alium, one this, another that, one another, 
 or mutually), oXAos aX\o^€v {alius aliunde, one from one place, 
 another from another, or one on one side, another on another). The 
 subject, which denotes the plurality or whole, may be impHed in 
 the verb. This kind of apposition is used when the whole is to 
 be expressed with the greater emphasis, while with the Gen 
 the parts are to be made more prominent. 
 
 Od. o, 424. S)) Tiire KOKKfiovT^s efiav olxSySe ckoittos {in suam quisque 
 domum sese contulerunt, they went each one to his own house). Her. 3, 158. ^ncvov 
 iv Tfj IcovToB TcSji e/cao-Toi (in suo quisque ordine manserunt). Th.l, 89. o'iKiai 
 ai f.ii' iroWal (= rai/ omtav iroAAal) iirenrJiiceaaii, oKlyai Se veptrja-ay. X. 
 B.L.6 1. iv Toir SAAa.s ir<(A6<ri tSc ^outov cKaaros /cal TraiSiov Koi oixiTap /toi 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
372 SYNTAX. \} 267. 
 
 XpyiiJ-irtov &pxov(riv {sais quisqueUberis imperant), Cy.3.1,3. SieSiSpoa-Koj 
 ijS-r] eKatTTOS eirl Tct eavTou, j8ou\(Jfteyo( ri ^vra iKwoSitv Troictff^ai. C. 2. 7, 1. 
 TCLS airopias ye twv (piKwv rks juej/ St' 6.yvQiai/ irreipaTO {^MKpaTTis) yvc^fi]^ 
 K/ce((r(&-ai, tXs 5e Si* evSeiav SiBdfTKwy /caret tiva^iv dAA^Aois eTrap/ce?;'. PL 
 Charm. 153, 6. Koi ^ue ws elSoj' eisi6vTa 4^ airposdoK'iiTou, ev^us ■jr6ppai^ev Tjffird' 
 (ov-ro &\\os &,WqSrey (they welcomed me one from one place, another from 
 another). Still, in this case the verb sometimes agrees, not with the appropri- 
 ate subject, but with the words e/cao-Toj, vas. X. An. 1. 8, 9. Trdures ouroi Kari, 
 iSrvT) iv irKaur'Kp Thiipei avStpiTrav eKaarov eSrvos iiropii ero. Tlie parti- 
 tire appositive is often accompanied by a participle. X. Cy. 3. 1, 25. fir loi 
 ^o^ovfi€vot, fi^ \T)(p^syTes aTro^dj/Qifriv, inrh tov fp6^ov ^poaTro^y-fjCKOVtriVy ol fiep 
 ^ iTTT vyr e s saurovs, ot 5c airayX'^f^^J^oi^ oi Se aTrotTr}}arT ofieyo i. 
 rier. 3, 82. aurhs ^Kaffros ^ovKSfjicyos KopvtpaTos cJvai yy<iifi7ia'i re ymav, 
 4s ^X*^" /leyi^Aa aW'li\oia-i aiT iKv 4 ovr ai. Here belong those passages, in 
 which, after the principal subject, there is another subject in the Nora, with a 
 Part, connected with it ; the latter subject, however, making a part of the prin- 
 cipal subject. Til. 4, 73. [ol 'A.^t\va1oi) 7)rrvxa^oy, KoytCofisyoi KOt ot 
 eKeiyojy iTrpaT7}yol fi^ ayTtiraKoy etyat a'ipi<rt rhy Ktybuyoy, the Athenians kepi 
 iilcnce, since even tlieir generals, nanidy, of the Athenians, supposed that, etc. 
 
 liEM. 4. In the same manner in poctiy, especially in Epic, but very seldom 
 in prose, two objects (commonly in the Ace.) are joined to one verb ; the first 
 of those denotes the entire thing, the otlier, that part of it to which tlie action 
 of the verb is particularly directed, both being in the same Case. This figure 
 may be called axfiiia ko,^' S\ov Ka\ jtte'fios, i. e. a construction bywhich 
 the part is put in apposition with the whole, instead of the word denoting the 
 whole being in the Gen. and governed by the word denoting the part. If the 
 whole expresses b- plurality, a distributive apposition may take place. TIo!6v 
 ore evos (piyey epKos oS6yrav, Od. a, 64, what a word escaped thee, thy lips! 
 where €/3K0j the pai-t is in apposition with o-e, the whole. Tpuas Se rpoiios 
 atybs MiKv^s yuTa tVaiTTOi', II. u, 44. 'AxatoT(rty Se /idya tr^eyos en^ak' 
 iKi<rTtf KapSly &\\7jKToy TTo\efi't^ety iiSe iJ,axe(T^at, II. ^, 152, stl- 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 § 267. The Objective Construction. 
 
 As the attributive construction (§ 262) serves to define 
 the subject, or in general, a substantive idea, more fully, so 
 the objective construction serves to complete the predicate, or 
 define it more fully. By object, is to be understood here 
 everything which, as it were, stands over against (objectum 
 est) the predicate, i. e. everything which stands as the com'- 
 plement of the predicate and defines it more fully: (a) 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 2G8.] THE OASES. 373 
 
 the Cases, (b) Prepositions with their Cases, (c) the Infini- 
 tive, (d) the Participle, and (e) the Adverb. 
 
 Kemakk. The object completes the idea of the predicate, when the predicate 
 necessarily requires an olycct, c. g. 'ETrt&u^a ttis apsrrjs. Boi\ofiai ypi(p,fiy. 
 The object dejines the idea of the predicate, when the object is not necessarily 
 required, e. g. Tb ^dSov av^iL 4 f tip Kfiivif. The predicate is thus defined by 
 the specifications of time, place, degree, means, manner, and instrument. 
 
 §268. I. The Cases. 
 
 1. All the relations, v/hich the Greek denotes by the 
 Genitive, Dative, and Accusative, were originally consid- 
 ered relations of space. 
 
 2. The action of a Vefb, with which the substantive 
 object is connected, is contemplated under the idea of 
 motion. In this manner the object of the verb appears in 
 a three-fold aspect : first, as that from which the action 
 of the verb proceeds ; secondly, as that towards which 
 the action of the verb tends ; thirdly, as that bi/ or with 
 which the action of the verb takes place. In this way 
 three Cases originate : the Genitive, denoting the motion 
 or direction whence, the Accusative, whither, and the Da- 
 tive, where. 
 
 3. The relations of time were viewed in the same man- 
 ner as those of space. Thus the Gen. (the whence-case) 
 denotes the time from which an action is conceived as 
 proceeding ; the Ace. (the whither-case), the time to which, 
 or over which the action is conceived as moving ; and the 
 Dat. (the where-case) the time in which an action is con- 
 ceived as existing. 
 
 4. The relations of causality, also, were regarded as 
 relations of space. The cause (the ground, the origin, the 
 author), was conceived as a local outgoing of an action 
 from an object (Genitive) ; the effect (the result, the con- 
 sequence), as a motion towards an object (Accusative) ; 
 the means (the instrument), as the resting of an action 
 with or in an object (Dative). • 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
374 SYNTAX. [ii 269, 270 
 
 { 269 Remarks on the Nominative and Vocative 
 
 1. The Nom. and Voc, so far as tlioy do not express objective relations, 
 cannot be considered as Cases ; the Nom. ia the form for the subject, and the 
 Voc. is the form which is used in calling to or in a direct address to a person 
 or a thing. But also the predicative adjective or substantive, which is joined 
 to the subject by the copula elvai, is expressed, as in other languages, accord 
 ing to the laws of agreement, by the nominative ; and even the objective rela 
 tion of an effect or result with the verbs mentioned in ^ 240, 2, is viewed in the 
 Greek and Latin as a relation of agreement, and is expressed by the nominatiTe. 
 
 Kemaek 1. With the verbs hvofii^eiv, ivofidC^ir^ai and the like, the Inf. ihiu 
 is often added to the Nom. or Ace., and thus in some degree the relation of 
 the effect or result is indicated. Her. 4, 33. ris oyo/id^ovai A^\ioi tlvai 
 'Tirepoxv^ Te Kot AttoSiKT]y. 5, 99. frToarjjyobs £\Aovs aireSele (instead of ciTre- 
 
 Kem. 2. On chai, and ylypfo-^ai with an abstract word, see § 284, 3 (9). 
 
 Hem. 3. Since the Nom., as the Case of the subject, denotes an object as 
 independent, the Greeks use it not only in the case mentioned in § 266, Rem, 
 1, but even with verbs of naming in the active. Her. 1, 199. MuAitto 5j 
 KoKeovat ttiv ^A<ppoSiT7]y ^A(Tff\jpiQt, the Assyrians call Aphrodite^ Mylitta. 
 
 2. Sometimes the Nom. seems to stand instead of the Voc. in a du'ect sum- 
 mons or call; but in all instances of this kind, the Nom. contains an explana- 
 tory exclamation, which takes the place of a sentence. Here belong particu- 
 larly the following instances : 
 
 (a) cZtos either alone, or in connection with the Nom. of a proper name, 
 is oftei. used when one calls out to another, in the sense, }io there! heus tu: PL 
 Symp. 172, a. 6 ^aKrjpcvSf e^?;, ovtos ^AttoWSB mpos, oit irepi/t€j/«s : 
 which means, see ! this is that ApoUodorus, the Plialerean, who comes there ! 
 
 (b) Very often in this way, the Nom. with the article, is joined as an apposi- 
 tive to a call or direct address. 
 
 Pi. Symp. 218, b. ot 5 e o t k e t a i, koL ^t tis ^AAos eVtI P4^tj\6s re Kal aypoi- 
 KOSf TTv\as irdvv fi^yd\as Tois affli/ iiri^eff^e (the same as, v/ius S^, olKerai oyres). 
 X. Cy. 4. 5, 17. &i /ifv oZv ai, e(pri, & tr piafiira-r os (instead of ffiJ, is tlirp.]. 
 
 k 270. (1) Genitive. 
 
 The Gen. is the Whence-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
 local relation, the object or the point from which the action of 
 the verb proceeds, e. g. eiKeu/ oSoC, cedere via, to withdraw from 
 the way ; (b) in a causal relation, the ground, origin, or author, 
 in general, the object, which calls forth, produces, excites, occa- 
 sions the action of the verb, e. g. i-m^ixu) ttjs aper^^ 268); 
 aperrj's is here the object which calls forth, etc. the desire ex 
 pressed by cttuSv/aS. « 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 271. J LOCAL KELATIOy OF THE GENITIVE, 374 
 
 5' 271. A. Local Relation. 
 
 1. The use of the Gen. expressing purely local motion is 
 rare and only poetic, e. g. Ei /x,^ tovSe irua-avrfs \6ym ay oiv to 
 VT^arov (ab insula abducerent) S. Ph. 613; this relation is com- 
 monly indicated by prepositions with the Gen., e. g. avo, fron, 
 €K, out of, Ira pa, from near an object, etc. 
 
 2. But the Gen. very often expresses the relrition of separa- 
 tion, namely, wth verbs denoting removal, separation, loosing 
 abstaining, desisting, ceasing, freeing, depriving, differing from 
 missing, deviating from. Genitive of separation. 
 
 Prose words of this kind are : irapaxt^pf'tv, vTroxupeTv, eiKstv and vneiKeiy, 
 vTTaviiTTair^aL and ^|/<rTo<r&ai, voff^l^eiy, x^^^C^'"! Siopt^eiv; iupUvai, lujiUffSrat, 
 aTrex^iy, cm€xe<r&ai, iraiav, iraietr^ui, KinXiuv, ipTiTieiv, eipyetv, \ietK, iXev^epovj/, 
 a-jra\\ciTT€iy, ffrepeiy, StTroffTepeiv ffTipetr^ai, X'npo^^t ipijfiovy, duupepeiy, ctfiaprA- 
 veiv, <r(piiWe(r^ai, ^j/eideff^ai, etc. ; ^Ux^iv and ATrcxety, to he distant, etc. 
 
 Her. 2, 80. oi xeiirepot ainiiav toiVi Trpeafivrcpouri (rvvTvyxivoyres iXKOvai 
 tris dSoS {vnthdraw from the way). X. Cy. 2. 4, 24. uirox^P^'" ''■'''' "■' 
 Siov (to retire from the plain). Hier. 7, 2. iropoxMoe''' ^5oE. Symp. 4,31. 
 vTraviarafT at Se juot ^Stj /col ^dittcv Kot 6Suv i^iffravrai oi irAotlffio 
 (rise up from their seats and turn aside fromthe road). Veetig. 4, 46. oire'x*' 
 Tuv cLpyvpeiav tj iyyiraTa ir6\ts 'M.eyapa 'jroKh TrKeiov Twv trevTaKoffiav ara- 
 SiW (js distant from the silver mines). PI. Menex. 246, e. iirurT'tifot x'^P'i" 
 fiECT) SiKatoffiyris (knowledge apart from justice). Haiofiai x^^"" (^ 
 cease from anger). Aia, airoWiiTTw Tu/h KaRaiv (I free one from evils). 
 Her. 3, 81. yviifiTis ttjs apiariiis T]ij.iiprr)Ke (he has mistaken the best view). 
 .^,62. Tvpdmaiv ii\ev'ieptidri oav. X.,Hier. 7, 3. SoneT noi roirip Sia</>e- 
 oety ay^p -ray &\\ay C<^<'y> rtf Tiiirjs opeysaSiiu (to differ from other ani- 
 mals).— rfi eiSo/iai, tr(j><i\Kop.ai i\TriSos, S6^r)S, rixv^ (to be cheated, 
 to be deprived of hope, etc.). 'A<j>lrifil rtva r^s alrlas. 'AiroirTepa rwa 
 ray aya&uy. Tijs fiafftXetas 4<rT eprifiai. Comp. 4 280, Rem. 3. 
 
 Eemabk 1. Many of these verbs are often constructed also with the prepo- 
 sition &ir6, e. g. d\€vS>ipovv, airaMATT€tv aw6 (of persons, as fXivSiepovy ttji' 
 'EAAciso airh ray M^Suy), \ieiv, eXpyay, amipyeiy, iprirveiy. 
 
 3. In like riianner, the Gen. of separation is joined with ad- 
 j ectives, adverbs, and substantives which express the same idea as 
 the above verbs, e. g. ikev^epos, /ioVos, Ka&ap6?, ksvos, epr]iJ.os, yvp.v6s, 
 6p<f>av6'5, V"Aos — Sia^opos, iXkorpio's (with the Bat, disinclined), 
 dXXoTos, crepos ; with many adjectives compounded of a priva- 
 tive ; with a.v€V, x<^P'5j tA.ijv, c^o), CKas, St^a, irepav, etc. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
376 SYNTAX. [ii 272, 273. 
 
 S. El. 387. oi 5e <rci/)Ker ai Keval <j)pevay aydX/mT ayopas elirif {bodies witkoul 
 minds). Her. 3, 147. diro&Jis icaxav {without suffering evils, i. e. free from). 
 Til. 1, 28. <pi\ovs ■n-oiita-^ai kripovs ray vvv iyTai/ {to make friends other 
 than, different from the present ones). X. C. 4. 4, 25. TioTepov Toiis S-eoiis 5975 '''^ 
 UKcaa voinoSreretv, il &\Ka. T&y SiKaiav. Cy. 3. 3, 55. airalSevTos fiou- 
 a-iKTJs (uneducated in music). So ^ti/xos i-jcalyui/. Avtrts, eXeuS-ep/a 
 KaKa>v. Her. 6, 103. ire'/njv t^s dSoB {on the other side of the way). Dem 
 Phil. 1. 49, 34. ToC Trcttrxet*' ouroi kokcDs e^w yey^decr^e. ^ 
 
 4. Here belong verbs of beginning and origi-nating, e. g 
 op;(€o-^aij ap^av, vira.p)(iiv, Karapx^i-v, i^a.py(av. 
 
 ''Apx^tr^ai Tivos, e.g. rov ttoA eyitou, means simply to ^et/zn something, 
 without any other relation ; "Xhv rots A-eois i.px^ frSiai xph iravrhs epyov {to 
 begin, every work with thegods); but &px^tyi virdpx^ tfj Kardpx^tv have a 
 relation to others beside the subject, i. e. they signify not merely to begin abso- 
 lutely, but to begin before others, to do something first or before others, to begin first, 
 hence (0 betli£ cause or author: Tovs i^e\ovTas tpvyrjs &px^tv iroKv Kpeirrov 
 cby ToTs TToXe/ifoiy rarro^ivovs, ^ iv ry 7]fieT^p(f Ta^et, dpay {it is better to see those 
 disposed to begin the flight \set the examph of flight] in the enemies^ ranks tJian in 
 ours), X. An. 3. 2, 17. 'H iinepa rots "E\Kri<ri fieyaAiov Kaxav &p^fi{u)iU 
 begin, be the cause of great calamities), Th. 2, 12. "tirdpxc" aStKwy epyar, 
 €V epyeffi as. 
 
 Rem. 2. "Apx^o'^ai air6 rivos (or iro^^v) means, to proceed fiom a thing 
 and to begin with it, e. g. ipx^u^ai a-nb tSiv aroLx^iuy, to begin with the first prin- 
 ciples. 
 
 i 272. B. Gausal Relation. 
 
 The Gen. in tlie causal relation signifies, also, an outgoing, 
 but not, as in the local relation, a mere outward relation, but an 
 inward ^nA activ one, since it expresses the object by whose 
 inward power the action of the subject is called forth and 
 produced. 
 
 k 273. (a) The active Genitive, or the Genitive as the 
 general expression of Cause. 
 
 1. Tlic active Genitive stands in the &st place, as the Gen. 
 of origin or author, and is connected with verbs denoting to 
 originate from, spring from, produce from, he produced from, 
 e. g. yiyi/£o-^at, <^vuv, 4>vvai, etvai. Genitive of origin or author. 
 
 Her. 3, 81. ap/o-Twc avSpZr olxhs dpurra ^ovXei/jurra ylyve<r^ai. {itil 
 nasonable Hiat the best designs should originate with, from tlie best men, the oyS^HS* 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 273.] 
 
 CAUSAL GENITIVE. 377 
 
 being active in, o/ the cause of the result). X. Cy. 1. 2, 1. •n-orpls /ih Si, 
 \4yiTai i Kupos ytviffStai Kafn^iffov, UepaHv PanKias {to be the son of 
 Cambyses) • S Se KafifiUris oltos t o 5 TlspaeiSav yivovs i,v {sprung from the race 
 of Persidae)- firirphs Se 6iio\oye7Tvu MavSdvns yev4(r^a.i. PI. Menex. 
 239, II. fiitts fiiiTphs 5rc£(/TEs aSeKipol (pivres. Attributive Gen.: 'O to2 
 flao-iAe'eo J w'o'j, i. u. d {4k] tov Pa(n\€a>s yevj'ridels vl6s. Tct raiy av^pfiirKr 
 vpdyfiaTa. 
 
 Remark I. Commonly the preposition iK, more seldom btiJ, is connected 
 with the genitive. 
 
 2. The active Genitive stands, in the second place, as that 
 object which has gained another, made its own and possesses 
 it; the Gen. therefore denotes the owner or possessor. This 
 Gen. stands : (a) with the verbs ehai, yevia-^at (to belong to), 
 Trou7a3-ai, to make one's own; (b) with the adjectives iStos (also 
 with Dat.), otKeios (with Dat, inclined), tepoV, Kvpio';. Possessive 
 Genitive. 
 
 Antiph. 5. 140, 92. rh liiv aKoia-tov ap.apTiifi.a rTJs rixv^ lari, rh Be 
 kKoiaiov TT)s yvdjirfs {an involuntary fault belongs to fortune, u, voluntary one 
 toourownwill). Lys. Agor. 135,64. iyiv^To 6 'Eip.dpTis ovtos Ni/cokA-e'ouj 
 {belonged to Nicocles, was his slave]. Th. 5, 5. iytv^ro Meo-o-^c?; AoKpai/ rim 
 Xpivov (belonged to the Locrians). T^j out^s yi/difois elm {ejusdem senteritiae esse). 
 'ZavTou iivai {to be one's own master]. Dem. Phil. 142, 7. V linHv avrmv 
 4de\-fia-riTe ytviaStai {to be your own masters], non ex aliis pendere. Also elml 
 Tims, alicicjus esse, alicui addictissimum esse, to belong to some one, to be earnestlu 
 devoted to something, e. g. ehiu ^iAittttou ; elmi tov ^exHaTav {studere rebus optimis). 
 X. Ages. 1, 33. tV 'Aaiav eavTun irotovvTai. (they bring A. under their 
 ■power]. Isocr. Paneg. 46, 29. ri ir6\is fi/iav Kupia yevofiei/ri toiovtoiv i,ya- 
 Stay oxiK i<pSi6vri<re toTs SAAois (having become the possessor of such advantages). X. 
 An. 4.' 5, 35. iJKOvffev airhv (Thv 'brirov) lephv elvai tov 'HXi'ou (sacred to 
 the sun). 5.3,13. i iepbs x^P"^ ^^ s 'ApT€p.lSas. Dem. 01.1. 26,28. ot 
 KiySvyoi Tav i^sa-TriKiToiv (ducum) iStoi, liur^hs S' qvk tariv. 2.32, 16. 
 TaiTT\s Kip 105 T^s x^P"^ yeviiafTm. In the attributive relation: 'O 
 TOV fiaa'iXeccs ktjttos, 'H 'ZtaKpdTovs ctper-fi. TlaTTjpNeonToKsfiov. 
 
 Kem. 2. The Gen, is connected with h.4yeiii, ^dvM, po/ilCeiy, riyeiirdai, Kplveiv, 
 ^oAa/i^c^yeiv, as it is with eTyat, Dem. 01. 2. 34, 21. SiKaiov iroAtrov Hpivai 
 T^v Twv wpayfidTu^i (TwTijpiav avT\ t^s 4v t^ \eyety ;^(fpiToy alpettr^at, 
 
 (c) Hence the Gen. with uvoa, denotes also: (a) the charac- 
 teiistic, peculiarity, habit, etc. of a person or thing, the charac- 
 teristic, peculiarity, etc., being commonly expressed by an Inf. ; 
 (yS) ^property or quality, viz., price, measure, number, time, space, 
 etc., also what is requisite for a tiling. Genitive of quaUty. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
378 SYNTAX [i 273 
 
 'A.vSp6s irrrtv &■) a^ov ev iroietv rohs ^lKovs, In English this Gen. ia 
 :ranslate<i in various ways, e. g. it is the business, manner, custom, peadiarity, duty, 
 •nark of a brave man ; it becomes a brave man ; it bespeaks a brave man ; a bravf 
 man is wont, and the like. Dem. Phil. 1, 54. KaKoipyov iirrl /cpiS-eW oiro- 
 &ave7v, ffTparriyov Se ix.axil'-ei'oy Tois TroAf/iiois (it is the characteristic of a 
 criminal to die being sentenced, but of a general to die fighting, etc.). 01. 1. 18, 2. 
 iffTi Tav alffXP^" (Neut.), /tSAAoy Se tuv oiffx^ ct wy, v6\eay, ap ?ip.ev 
 TTOTe Kvpioi, ipaivedStai Trpo'ii/ievovs. Chers. 102, 48. Soxei TaCro Kcti 5oiri(i'7(S 
 fieydhTis Kal n6yi»i' voXXav Kol ir pay ixaTii as elvai (this seems to be 
 the mark of great expense, much labor). Aphob. 1. 814, 4. ifih '4irr iTuii Sv-ra 
 (of seven years, i. e. seven years old). X. An. 7. 4, 16. ^i\avhs MoffeVrtoy, irup 
 oKTuKaiSeKa Hy, fftiixaiyei Tp aiiKmyyi. 1. 4, 11. i EiiJ>poT7js worafuis rh 
 e6p6s itrrt TCTTapajy trraSiwy (of four stadia in width =four stadia wide). 
 Attributive Geij. : Scko ij.yay X"?^""' ^^''- 2, 35 (a place of \costiruj] ten 
 minae). The Gen. is but seldom used to. denote other qualitie.', e. g. t^s aur^j 
 yydfiTjs eJyat, ejusdem sententiae esse, to be of the same opinion. ( AhKi^tdSris) &K- 
 KoTe &\\aiy ecttI \6yay, PI. Gorg. 482, a (is of different words at different times, 
 uses different words, etc). 
 
 Bem. 3. Here belong also the expressions ijye7<r^ai, TroMiir&ai, d^Tyai ttoA- 
 Kov,n\ei(rTOv, oKiyov, eXaxi'T'r ov, etc. (to consida of great importance, 
 etc.), the worth of a thing being considered as a property Usually, however, 
 the preposition irepi is joined with the Gen. 
 
 3. The active Genitive stands, in the third place, as that ob- 
 ject which embraces one oi more other ohjects as parts belong- 
 ing to it ; the Gen. represents the whole in relation to its 
 parts. Genitive of the whole, or the partitive Genitive. This 
 Gen. stands : 
 
 (a) With the verbs, eTvai and yiyveaSai (to belong to, to be 
 of ike number of, to be numbered among) ; riSivai, Tt^io-^ai, 
 iroiila-^ai., ^yeto-5at (to reckon or number among), and with 
 many others. 
 
 Ta. ,65. Kol auris ^^eAe twj' invdvTiay et vat, to be one of tlwse remain- 
 ing. X. An. 1. 2, 3. ^j/ Kal d '^uKpdTTjs Toiv a^\ MiKrirov (TT par evo fi4vup 
 (was among those who carried on war around Miletus, (TTpaTeuo/ieVoji' here denoting 
 the whole, of which Socrates is a part). Cy. 1. 2, 15. ot h.v ad eV to7s reAeloii 
 (ay^pa{n) tiayiyoiVTai ayenl\T]iTToi, ouroi ruy ye pair € pcay yiyyoyrai (are 
 reckoned among the elders). Dem. Phil. 3. 122, 43. fi Ze'\ei(£ ia-ri rrjs 'Airlas 
 (belongs to Asia, is a part of). Plat. Phaed. 68, d. rhy Siavaroy iiyovvrai itdyris al 
 SWoi ray neyiffrmy Kaxay elyaL (among the greatest evils). Pl.Ep.376,e. 
 uouff iKrjs 8', eiirov, tI^tjs \6yov5; ad musicam refersne semiones? Phileb. 
 60, d. ipp6yni,-iy Kol a\Tj^rj 56^ay rrjs avTTJs ISeas ri^efiai (I consider prudence 
 andtrueglory as of the same nature, ad eandem ideam refero). Kp. 8. 567, c. toi- 
 ri»*o/ Tiva ray Sopvip6pav. Her. 7, 6. KartXcye rav xpv<'l'i''y {'*• 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 273.] PAETITIVE GENITIVE. 379 
 
 eitabat vaticimorum sc. partem). So T6/t«w yrjs {devastare terrae, sc. partem) 
 iviBaiyeiy rris yTJs, to set foot upon. 
 
 Rem. 4. "With the partitive and attributive Gen., two cases are to be distin- 
 giiished: the Gen. denotes the whole either as a. plurality in relation to the indi- 
 viilual parts, as IloXXoi tuv i,v&piiiruv : or as a unity in relation to a certain 
 qrantity, e. g. neVrc rdKavra ipyvpiov. This last partitive Gen. may be called 
 t'"'! Gen. of quantity. Both these genitives occur veiy frequently : 
 
 !a) With substantives, e. g, SroyoVes SSaros (BSotoj expressing the whole, 
 and trTay6ves the parts) ; aiiiiaros fi4pos ; if with the name of a place, 
 the country where it is situated is mentioned, the name of the country 
 as denoting the whole, stands in the Gen., and usually before the name 
 of the place denoting the part, e. g. 'O aTparhs cujilKero rris 'Attiktjs 
 is Qlviriv {into Oeme, a part or city of Attica), Th. 2, 18 (never ^r ttjs 
 *Attiktjs Olv^Tjv). 
 
 (b) With substantive adjectives, in the positive, comparative, and superlative, 
 when it expresses the highest degree ; with substantive pronouns and 
 numerals : ol xpiirTol ray 6,vdpdmuv, ol e5 <ppomvvTes ruv av^pdnrav (the 
 useful, well disposed part of men) ; — tto}\JmI, o\tyot, Tives, irKeloves, TrKeiaroi 
 T&v avApdmav (many, few, same, etc. among or of men). In addition comp. 
 above, § 264, Rem. 5. On the contrary, ol dvriTo'i in^panoi, since the 
 property of mortality belongs to the race ; ircWol or o\iyot ii/^pmroi ex- 
 presses a whole consisting of many or few (a great or small number of 
 men) ; iroWol or 6X1701 av^pilnraiii denotes the many or few as a part of 
 the whole ; so rpeis rifius ^^v, i. e. we were three in all, there were three of 
 us ; Toeis rifiav J)iraif, i. e. there were three of us (three out of our whole num- 
 ber) there ; 
 
 (c) With adverbs : (a) of place, e. g. irav, ito6, ir-fi, irrfi&ei', oS, ^, otrSajUoO, irav- 
 raxyj, TrSpftu, and ttpotra (further), etc. Her. 2, 43. ovia^ri Aiyiin ov 
 (nowhere in Egypt). PI. Rp. 3. 403, e. fiScVai, Hirov yrjs ia-n (where 
 intheworld). 'ErroS^o ttjs rfXiKlas (atthisage) ; ivrav^a tov \6yov 
 (to this point in the discourse or argument). 'OpSre, ot'irpoe\'t\\v^ep atr^Xyeias 
 (what a degree of insolence he has reached, quo intemperantiae progressus sit), 
 Dem. riavTaxov rris yrjs, ubivis terrarum. n6^^a (To<j>las i\aii- 
 viiv or TiKstv (to advance further in wisdom). — (/3) of time, e.g. o^\ 
 TTJS 7]fj.spas, TOV xp^^^'^y T^s TjXiKids (late hi the day, latc in lifc). 
 Tpls rris riixepas. UoKXiLkis t^j jj/iepas. 
 
 Rem. 5. By means of an abbreviation of the expression (comp. § 323, Rem. 
 j /, the partitive Gen. stands also with a superlative which belongs to the predi- 
 cate. Her. 7, 70. oi ex rrjs Aifii7}s Al^loires ov\6'raT ov rptxo>/J.a exoi/iri irdy- 
 TO)v hv^ptjairtev (properly instead of ov\6TaTov rtcv rpixt^f^dTuv &, ndvjes 
 &ydpanroi ^x'"^"'"')- ^- CIy.3.1, 25. iraiiTav tuv Seiyav d ^6005 liixiara 
 KaTmr\4iTTei tcls ^uxiis. 
 
 (b) With words which signify : (a) to take part in, partici- 
 pate in, share in, e. g. fx.erix^iv, fiiTearc fioi, SiSovai, fieraSiSovai, 
 TrposStSdvat, SiaBiSovai, Kowmruv, Kotvoocr^ai, iirapKuv (to give a share 
 of), a-vvefyyos, a/iotpos, etc.; Kotvo's and icros, which commonly, 
 however, govern the Dat. ; — (y8) to touch (both physically and 
 intellectually), to lay hold of, to be in connection with, to border on 
 S. g. Siryyaveiv, xj/aveiv, airTecr^ai, Sparrecr^aL ; Xa/xpavcaJai, iiera-i 
 j-oXXajM^avea , Ittl-, avriXafiPdvecrS^at ; a-vvaipeaSai; i)(ecr3aL (to ad- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
S80 SYNTAX \} 273. 
 
 here to, be next to, to border on), arr-, irepiexca-Sai, yXixia-Sai, 
 iwixwpi.o';, SlS€X<j>6<; (seldom with Dat.), SiaSoxos (often also with 
 Dat.), i^'s, I4>^^'i (more rarely with Dat.), Ttpoa-^ev, i/j-irpoo-^ei/, 
 oma-Sev, fx^ra^v, and many other adverbs ; — (y) to acquire anJ 
 attain, e. g. rvyxa-v^Lv (to acquire and hit), Xayxa-veiv, e$-, i<l>ticvei- 
 (T^ai, KX71POV01J.UV (with Gen. of the thing, to inherit; with Gen. 
 of the person, to be the heir of some one ; with Ace. of the 
 thing and Gen. of the person, to inherit something from one), 
 TrpoirjKa {p-oi Ttvos, I have to do with something, have part in) ; 
 — (8) to strive to acquire something, e. g. opeyea-^ai, et^kcr^ax, 
 avmrouZa-S^ai, ii/TpeireaS^ai (to turn one's self to something, to give 
 heed to, to respect); crroxa^ecr^ai (to aim at something). Most 
 of the "wrords included under this rule have a partitive idea. 
 Besides the Gen. several of the above verbs take also a Dat. 
 
 Dem. 24, 49. toTs &icov(rti> aiiaprdrnvai jneTeo-Ti trvyyvti it.Tis {those who err 
 unwilUngltj ohtain pardon). PI. Pol. 322, a. i Sy&pmiroj Aeias ^cteo-xe I'-oipas 
 {participated in divine destiny). X.R.Ij.1,9. rov fihf yevovs /cat rris Succi- 
 uectis Ko ivavovff I, twv Se xpTj/xc^Ttu y ovk ai/T tiro tovvT at {who share 
 in the sajRe origin and power, hut do not lay claim to their propeHy). Cyr. 7. 5, 78 
 sq. ^ti\Trov s fiiv Kol ij/vxovs Kal (tItuv Koi TTOTwy Kol uTTt^ov ctfayKTi 
 leal ToTs Soi\ots fj.c TaS tS 61^ at, tr \€ fj.LKT] s S' 4 tr t ff t -fi fjt tj s Kol jU€A.eT7js 
 ou fieraS OT eoi/ {to sliare heat, cold, etc.). C. 1. 2, 60. ^citKpdTTis iracrij/ atp^ovus 
 ^ir-fipKet tSjv kauTou {shared his effects with). Cj. 1. 3, 7. Tuy'Kpeuv Sta- 
 StSifat Tots SrepawevTaTs {to distribute the flesh among the servants). PI. Phaodr. 
 238, b. TO Toirtov aSeKid [horum similia). Hel. 4. 4, 6. {fi£i(Jv effri) rav 
 ye KaWltTTtity Kai fieyl/rtaf aya^oiv opeyofxivovs OL^tiTr atvOTa- 
 T-qs T e\euT7J s Tvx^'tv {that they, desiring to obtain the most Twble and val- 
 uable acquisition, should meet a most honorable death). 4. 8, 18. ^1/ 6 Q4p(ravSpos 
 oit ix6vov aifKtjT^s aya^6s, oAAa /cal a\ ktj s ai/r eir o leTr o {ad Jhrtitudinem eni- 
 tebatar). Th. 1, 8. ^ ipt4 ixev 1 t uv KepSSii/ ol I'ltrtrovs vTr4p.evov t^v rap 
 Kpeicra6i/oip dov\elav {tlie inferiors desirous of gain, etc.). Cy. 1.2,3. irovripou 
 Ttvos ^ altxxpov epyou itpietr^ai. 3.3,10. ^iraii'ovtrt koI aff-jrd^ovTal oi 
 rotovTot {(T'LifXfiaxot) tovs dfioious, vo[j.l^ovr^s ffvvepyovs ahrovs etvat t ov KO.- 
 vov ayaSroO {thinking that they are coadjutors in the common interest). PI. Symp. 
 181, c. 8;8(i££Ds 6,p.otpos {without sharing in insolence). Monox. 241, c. 6/1701' 
 Koiviv A.aKfSatii.oviav t£ keI 'PL^i]vaiaiv {comnnon to the Laced., etc., like 
 communis alicujus rei). "A-n-To/iai tjis x^^P^^- Her. 1, 93. Afiit;/?; ex^'^"' 
 Tov o-iiiiaTos /t-eyaKit {borders on). 3, 72. epyov ex^lJ-eSra {opus aggrediu- 
 mur). Tlept4xop.al Ttms {cupide aliquidamplector). Th. 1, 140. ttjs yviipttis 
 TTJs avrrjs ^x^f^^^ {I hold to the same opinion). 4, 10. &ydpes ol ^vj/apdixevot 
 TovSe ToD KtvStivov {who have taken pai-t in this danger). PI. Rp. 2, 362. a. 
 iXijdefas ^x^fi^evop {cum veritate conjunclum). Deui. 01. 1, \ 20, fas ^ittI km 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 273.J GENITIVE CASE. 38] 
 
 pis, arTi\d$e(rdf rav frpay/idrav {capessere). IstScr. Nicocl. 22, b, (. In-ciSJi 
 ^VTjTou fftifiaros ervx^s, ii^^avdrov Se ^vxv^t tretpa rijs ^v^vs a&o- 
 I'aToc liviiiaiv KOTaXiTreu/ (since you obtained a mortal body, hut an immortal soul], 
 Tvyxdvctv, Xa-yx^^^^^ ;tpTjjU(iTwi', euTu^foy — Tvx^'iv T^XeuTijy, ovi^aros, etc. X. 
 C. 2. 1, 20. at Stci Kaprsplas ^ifx4\eiai [studia assidua) tup kuXuv re Kaya- 
 ^uy epywv i^iKvetff^at iroiova'ip [make them attain noble and illustrious deeds). 
 Isocr. Paneg. 80, 187. ovk ^(piKvovi^ai toS iJiey4^ovs tuv vpayfidruv 
 {non assequor). P. Crit. 52, c. oSt' imivovs Tohs \6yovs aiirx^yjl, otjre TjfiuVf 
 Tuv v6/jLo:jf, iyrpeirri (neither do you respect us, the laius). X. C. 4. 5, 11. 
 SoKeis fioi \iyelPf &s ap^pl ^TTOvt rSiv 5(a ToC (T^fiaros iiSoyuy ndfiiray oi/de fitas 
 &pcTi)s irpos'liKii (that no virtue belongs to a man who is a slave to bodily pleas- 
 ures). Dem. in Aristocr. 690, 14. oinot K\7jpovo fiovo'i ttjs {i/zerepas 
 S6^7js Kol Tuv viieTeptav aya^uv* PI. Gcoi'g. 465, a. tov 7jS4os trro- 
 X <£ f 6 T a 1 iveu ToC PAtIittov. 
 
 Rem. 6. With verbs expressing participation, sometimes the word denoting 
 a part stands in the Ace, e. g. X. Hier. 2, 6. oi ripavvoi tuv fieyliTTuf aya^uv 
 TXeZcTTa /ierexo w (Tt, An. 7. 8, 11. ?va /*^ ^ueTaSoiey t^ ii^pos xpr)tJi6.- 
 Tuv. According to the analogy of verbs of touching, verbs of entreating and 
 supplicating, are connected with the Gen., which denotes the person or thing, by 
 whom or by which one entreats or supplicates, e. g. xWeff^oi, iKcTciew, Ixviia- 
 Srai, since the suppliant, touching the knee or the image of the divinity, utters 
 his prayer. Od. jS, 68. Tdaaoiuu iiftsv Zrivhs 'O\v/j.iriov ijSf Se/iurTos fl supplicate 
 Zeus), So hSffffea^ai iraTphs, Toniiuv. Comp. II. li, 454 sq. b fi4p /jllp efieWe 
 yeveiov x^^P^ ^o-X^h o.^'^/Jt.evos Kifftreir^ai. 
 
 Eem. 7. The poets connect many other verbs with the Gen., among which 
 are those mentioned under (b) ; so any verb may govern the Gen., when its 
 action refers not to the whole of an object, but to a part only. II. tj, 56. /t eV- 
 (Tov Sovphs k\6v (having seized the middle of the spear). Od. 7, 439. Povv S 
 a.y4T'qy Kepduy (took by the horns). 11. a, 197. ^ay^r/s 5e Ko/iiji '4\e 
 n-qKeiuva, In phrases, like ^o^Sety yoivuv, HirTsa'^ai Ttva yeveiov, etc., the knee 
 and beard are conceived as the objects, on which the person who touches and 
 lays hold, hangs, and, as it were, depends. Here belong, also, in poetry : 
 
 (a) Verbs denoting both physical and intellectual tasting, grasping, reaching 
 to, and hence of striving after an object, e. ^. iiriinaita^ai (TKowiKov, 
 Sdpuv, v6arov (to seek the rock, gifts, a return). 
 
 (b) Several verbs, which properly express the idea of a hasty motion towards 
 an object, and then metaphorically are used to express an intellectual 
 
 'eflbrt, and longing, e. g. iirelyecrStat, ipimaSrai, liripdWeadM, eVoiirireij/ 
 (rushing upon something, etc.). II. t, 142. iireiy6fii,ey6s inp 'Apijos 
 (hastening to, desiring the contest). II. |, 488. apfi.i]&r\ S' 'Axd/iavTos 
 (he rushed upon Acamas). 11.^,68. fiTyris vvv ivdpuv itri^aKT^^ixevos 
 ^T6Tri(rpiey fj-t/jit/eTu. , 
 
 (c) Verbs signifying to take aim, e. g. To^eveiv, aKovriCe'v (in prose with els, 
 and vrflh the meaning, to hit, to wound, with the Ace). II. p, 304. "E(cTm;i 
 5" afV AlavTos aK6i/T itr e 5ovpl (paewcp (aimed at Ajax). II. i//, 855. 
 f(S fy' i,y:iyei ro^iveiv. 
 
 Kem. a. According to the analogy of the above-named verbs of aiming and 
 striving, so we find kuto. xS>ovhs SftuaTo ■wrj^ai (to fasten the eyes upon the ground) ; 
 irKuv iirl tdfiov, to sail towards Samos, as if setting out for it (on the contrary, 
 4nl 'Sdfiov, to Samos). — The Gen. of aim accurs in the attributive relation, e. g. 
 with 6!6s, v6aTos t6vov tiv6s (way, return to a place). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
382 SYNTAX. 'J 273 
 
 Rem. 9. There also bdtng here : (a) the adverbs eJ^ii (Ion. iSii), straight 
 forxmrd to something, /i-exph to, up to; — (b) verbs of meeting and approaching, 
 which, however, in prose, are commonly connected with theDat. ; — (c) also 
 adjectives and adverbs of meeting, approaching, nearness, e. g. ki/rlos, ivavrios 
 (though in Attic, only with the meaning contrarius, opposed to), TrapavXiitrios, 
 which, however, are oftener joined with the Dat. ; amiov, ivavTiov (before, in 
 the presence of) ; ^yyis and irAijo'/oj' with the Gen. of local nearness, but in a 
 metaphorical sense with the Dat. Her. 6, 95. ^x"" (dirigebant) rir vias l^i 
 rod "E,K\risir6vTov Kal t^j &p-iiiK-ns (direcUy to the Hellespont). 2, 34. 
 yi AJyuTTTOS Tr^s ope lyTJs Kt\iKias fiaMffTii kij avriT] Keerat [lies opposite to 
 Cilicia). Dem. Ph. 3. 117, 27. irKriffiov &ri$ai> icaJ 'A^nvSiv (near Thebes). 
 
 4. In the fourth place, the active Genitive denotes the place 
 where, and the time when, an action nappens. The action or 
 event belongs, as it were, to the place and the time, proceeds in 
 a measure from them, and is produced by them ; hence the time 
 and place are considered as causing or producing the action, or 
 at least as the necessary condition of it. 
 
 (a) The Gen. of place is almost exclusively poetic. 
 
 II. p, 372. ve^os 3^ ov (paiyeTo irdcrtis yai-qs, ov^ opecuy (not a cloud appeared 
 on the plain, nor on the mountavis). II. t, 219. avrhs 5' avjiov T^ck ^OSutrtrijos 
 ^sioio Tol^ou ToS lT€poio (bi/ tlis othcT woll). Hence, especially, in Epic 
 poetry, with verbs of going and motion, the space or way upon which the going 
 or the motion takes place, and to which, as it were, this action belongs, stands 
 in the Gen., e. g. H. |3, 801. epxovTai ireSloiO (go through the plain). Xi 23. 
 ^eeiy we^loio. v, 64. TreSioio StccKety Spyeoy (to pursue over the plain). So 
 the prose, Uyat tov TrpSa-io (to go over the forward way, to go forward). 
 
 Rem. 10. In this way are to be explained the adverbs of place, ou,irov, ifirou, 
 avTov, ovSafjLov, aXAa%oy, etc. ; and on the same principle also it is to be ex- 
 plained that adverbs of place with the suffix & e i/ stand apparently instead of 
 adverbs of place with the suffix &i, e. g. eySo&ey, iyyi^ey, rrtKi^ey, ^KToaSrev, 
 c. g. II. p, 5S2. "EKTopa 5* ^yyi^ey Iffrd^eyos iorpuyey 'ATToAAoJr. 
 
 (b) The Gen. of time often occurs both in poetry and prose. 
 Also the space of time withiv, which som.etliing happens, as pro- 
 ducing the action, or the condition of it, may be expressed by 
 the Gen. The Gen. expresses time indefinitely, denoting merely 
 the period loithin which or in the course of which the action takes 
 place,. while the Dat. expresses definite time, ^ point of time. 
 
 'Ay&i; actXXei tov iapos, the spring is conceived as producing the flowers, and 
 hence as the cause of them. Thus hipom, in the summer time ; xf/^Sivos, in the win- 
 ter ; 7ifi4pas, in the day lime, in the course of tlie day, by day ; ywcT6s, by night ; SelKri:, 
 iirdpas; as Eng. of a morning, he did it of a fine nm-ning ; also firiyos, per month, 
 monthly ; eViauToO, yearly, etc.; with attributives, e. g. tov aiVoD, tov -wpoTepoS, indir- 
 TOV, €Tovs, the same, the former year, etc. ; -iji aiiTrjs finepas, on the same day; xiji 
 Ivmiiaris vvkt6s ; 'mv litijiyyoiieyou Aeoov. ■ ai/Tijs t^s fi/jiepas, in the courseofthis da<l 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^■273.] GENITIVE CASE. 385 
 
 (but Dat. tbiJtjj Ty riiiepa, in iliat day). Hence the adverbial expressions opx^s, at 
 the beginning, 9,nd toS AouroS, for Ae future. Her. 4, 48. "laTpos Xaos atl oWs {bBtij; 
 />*« Kdi dipovs Koi Xf '/""''<'* {always flows equal to itself in summer and 
 winter). 6, 12. To5\onroS;i)j Tteidiyisda auToD. PI. Phaed. 59, d. i^iiXAoiiey 
 Tou SffffioTTiplov eavipas (at evening). Qv pjucpov xp^mv, (rvxvoi, iroJO^od, 
 fr\ilirrov, o\lyov XP^"?" ("?i ^tJ>in a short, long time) ; iroXXSj' rifiepuv, Ituh 
 (within many days, years), etc. Her. 3, 134. raCro oKiyov xpovov iaroA. 
 XiKiiiicva. X. An. 1. 7, 18. $a<ri\eis oli fmxeTrcu Se/co r)p.fifuv. PI. Symp. 
 173, c. iroWav iruv 'hyiAav ivddSe ouk ^itiScS^/itjkcv. 
 
 Kem. 11. By the Gen. of time, the Gen. absolute may be explained, e. g. 
 ToD Kupou PcKTLK^iavTOS iroWi re Kai KoXii ^pya inrh Tuv Tleptraii iwpiix^. 
 
 Bem. 12. Prepositions are often used to define the relation of time more 
 exactly, e. g. Ik ttoXAoB xpi^"""; ""/>' e<rir4pas, iwl Kipov, Cyri aetate, SA voWav 
 Xpivov, iin6s or iaa ttoAAoP xP^"""' Cbmp. the remarks on the prepositions. 
 
 Beu. 13. The Gen. as well as the Ace. denotes continued or protracted time, 
 but with this difference, that the Gen. denotes the time unthin any part of which 
 the action may take place ; whereas the Ace. of time implies that the action is 
 in progress during the whole of the time mentioned, e. g.TaiTijv r^y vf^^- 
 p av avrov tjv\1^€to, he encamped there during the whole of that day ; but with the 
 Gen. the meaning would be, that, in the course of that day, sometime in that 
 day, he encamped there. Comp. 4 279, 6, in regard to the difference between 
 the Gen. and Ace. of time and plsice. 
 
 5. The active Genitive, finally, denotes the material of which 
 anything is made, formed, and, as it were, produced, or the 
 source from which something is drawn; the material being 
 viewed to some extent as the cause of the result. This Gen 
 stan,d§ : 
 
 (a) With verbs of making, forming, and the like. 
 
 Her. 5, 82. x"^*"'' Toiiovrai rh. ayihiiara (are made of bronge). 2, 138. 
 i<rrpan4iri] iarL iSir \i^ov (is paved with stone). Th. 4, 31. epvpLa avT6&i ^v 
 \i^ay \oy&Si\v tt eTroti] (i4y oy. Itl the attributive relation : eKnaifia ^vKov 
 (a drinking cup [made] of wood) ; Tpiiri^a apyvpiov, trTe(j>ayos vaKiy^ay. 
 
 Bem. 14. This relation is^very often expressed by the Dat. also, and more 
 definitely by the prepositions i( and i.ir6, also Siei with the Gen. 
 
 (b) With words of fulness and want, e. g. irkri^uv, Tr\-qpovv, 
 minrXdvai, yifj.€iy, jipOeiv ; vda-creiv, traTT^iv, anropilv, etc. ; airopiiv, 
 irevecrS^ai, Seicr^ai, Set, criravL^eiv, yfi'i], etc. ; TrXeos, •wk-qprtp, /ieoros, 
 n-Xovo-tos, 8aoTJ9, etc. ; irivrp, evSeijs; oXts (satis). 
 
 X. Symp. 4, 64. ataayp.ivos TrXoirov tV '{'"XV ^o'"/"" (shall he satisfied 
 withriches). PI. Apol. 26, d. Tk'Aya^aySpou Pi$\ia yipLei roiTmv ruv \6- 
 ymy (are fuU of tliese sayings). EinropeTy, ctiropelv, Trevetr^ca, airayiC^ty rStv 
 XjrniiiArav (to abound in, to be destitute of means). X.Cy.3.1,3. Sia^^iyray 
 Kol iKautiyTav Thireiioy pLfiTTdv (full of persons running about). An. 2. 4, 
 
 17 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
384 SYNTAX. [§ 273. 
 
 14. Saa-iis SevSpav {thickly set tvith trees). An. 1. 2, 7. vapiSeuros fUyas, 
 iypiav S>nplav irA^prjs (fuU of wild animds). 1. 4, 19. IvravSia ^a<a> 
 Kcifiai iroWiol /leffTal <riTov Koi olyov. In the attributive relation, e. g. 
 SiTras otmv (a ffoblet of [JUkd with] wine). 
 
 (c) "With verbs signifying to eat, to drinh, to taste, to cause to 
 taste, to enjoy, to satisfy one's self, and in the figurative sense to 
 have the enjoyment, use, and advantage of something; eo-^tW, 
 (bayeiv, €ia)x«o-5at, irCveiv, yeuetv, ytvia-^ai, Kopia-acrS-cu ; diroXaveo' ; 
 ioTiav (to entertain), etc. 
 
 'ECTftieiy KpeHv {to eat of flesh); KopetraaAai (pop^ris {to satisfy one'l 
 sdf with food) , iriveiv oXvov {to drinh of wine). X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. aviyiei) aoi 
 anoyeietr^at roirwv tcov -k avro^air Sav ^pafjtdruy {to taste the various 
 kinds of food). 1.3,10. kuItIS-Ii, S Kvpe, T&Wa nifwifievos rhy^dxav, ouk airepfii- 
 ifrtaas tov oivov; {why did younot gulp downikewinel). Ci.3, 11. air oKaieiv 
 iravrtav rS>v aya^wy {to enjoy all good things) ; but awoKaveiv rtv6s Ti,e.g, 
 aya^d or KaKil, to receive good or evil from some one. X. C. 4, 3, 10. Ti &\\o ^wov 
 aiyay re Koi oiav Koi t&v iWaiy Qflioip t otr avT a aya^cb airoXavet, 
 iffa &y^pmrot ; {what other animal receives so many advantages from goats, etc., as 
 man?), reiea-^ai Ti/x^y {to taste, enjoy honor); y^iety Tivh rifiTJs {to 
 cause one to taste or enjoy Ivmor). 
 
 Rem. 15. The Ace. stands with verbs of eating and drinking: (a) when the 
 substance is represented as consumed wholly or in a great quantity; or (b) 
 when the common means of nutriment is indicated, that which every one takes. 
 Od. (, 347. KurtAajij/, rr\, irle olvov, €7rel <piiyss aySp6fLfa Kp4a {drink wine, 
 since you eat human flesh). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. ovk iicirlo/jiat airbs riy olvov. 
 1. 3, 6. Kpia ye eiuixov [enjoy your meat). 6. 2, 28. SSotj ii£iuyii.fvr)v i.s\ 
 ri]V /id^ay eaStiei {always eats maize). Ibid. /teTct Be riy atroy iiai olvov 
 4ir iTrlvwuev, ovSev fiewv exovffa 7] ^vxrj ^yairaia-eTai (spoken of a habit). So 
 4(r^ie tv Kpea and KpzS>y, tr iveiv olvoy and oXvov, Hence Triyeiy olvoy is said 
 of those whose usual drink is wine, but irivtiy olvov, is to take a drink of wine, to 
 drink some of the wine. Hence the Gen. wijh verbs of eating and drinking has 
 a partitive sense, like the English expressions, to eat or drink of something. ■ PI. 
 Symp. 176, c. iroK^v irlyeLv oTyoy. 
 
 (d) With verbs signifying to smell, emit an odor of something, 
 etc. ; TTVuv, otfiiv, Trpo'i^aXKav. 
 
 "Ofeij' iav {to smell violets); /lipov irve'iv {to emit the smell of myrrh); 
 rpos piWeiv fiipov, xj/eiv rpiyov, S^eiy Kpo/iiaiv. Ar. Ran. 341. 
 iis TiSi fiot irpos4Trvev(re xo'peiuv xpeav {so sweet ivas the smell of swine's 
 flesh to me). 
 
 Rem. 16. In poetry many other verbs are constructed with the Gen. of the 
 material, e. g. aTrocrTiA./Seu- aA.€i(/)aTos, {veKvas) iruphs ij.e iKio'a-f ftty, 
 X.oveo'Stai lv^^f7os TToranoto. See Larger Grammar, II. § 527, Kcm. 
 
 (e) With expressions oi remembering ^xiA. forgetting : fiifiv^a-- 
 Koiuu, to remember, [ii/wria-Km (rivd rti/os), to remind one of some- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 273.J GENITIVE CASE. 365 
 
 thing, fuvrifuav, afiv^fuov, eirtXav^dvo;u,ot, to forget ; hence also with 
 XdSpa, Xa&piws, and Kpv^a ; also with expressions of being ac- 
 quainted and unacquainted with, of experience and inexperience, 
 of ahility, dexterity or skill in anything, e. g. f/iiretpo?, a^eipo;, 
 hrurrrifJiMiv, eTrtoTa/iei-os, aycirtor^fwov, Tpij3(i>v, (rvyyviapMV, dSa'^s, aTrat- 
 
 SevTos, tSuiiTijs ; dircipws, ^ci^ws cx"^ i with adj ectives in - 1 k o s (derived 
 from transitive verbs) which denote sJdll.aptness, etc.; also with 
 irci/Dui/iai, io make trial of som.ething. 
 
 X. C. 2. 1, 33. Ot yepairepoi ri^ias rSov -aaXaiuv tt pci^ecay fidfii/jiVTai 
 [remember the past achievements). Antiph. II. a, 7. 'H iirtAv/iia rrjs rifiapias 
 iLfxyfliiova tuv KivBvvtov Ka^itTTtj avrSv {rendered him forgetfvi of dangers). 
 X. O 16,8. Xl6^ey obv ^oiXet £cp|(u/iaf <re ttis yewpyias viro^ifiiz-fiffKeiv 
 [to remind you of husbandry). Cy. 8.3,3. ToD tpd6vov 4Tre\4hri<rTo {liad 
 forgotten envy). Attributive: /uj^iUtj, \'lid7i ray Kaxav. {Vleiiyqfiai ti, to 
 keep something in mind.) 'Eiiiretpos or 4irt crT^fi/iar eiVl t^j rex"")* (^ 
 am acquainted untkthe art). *Airoi5euTos aperTJs, fioviriKTJ s {ignorant of 
 virtue, music). Her.2,49. ttjs ^vaias Tairris ovk &5(i^s, oAA' i fiireipoj 
 {not ignorant of that sacrifice, but acquainted with it). X. Cy. 6. 1, 37. avyyvii- 
 fiav rSv hvApavivav irpay/idTav [pardoning, not knowing, human errors). 
 — 'Airelpws exf" TaiTijs t^j t 4 xpvs {to be unacquainted with this art). 
 'AiroTreipufiai yyiinr)s {I make trial of an opinion). With the poets this 
 use of the Gen. is still more extensive. II. 0. 411. t4ictovos, ts pi re viaifs eS 
 €(5p ffo^iTjs {who is well acquainted with all skill). X. 3. 1, 6. irapaffKeva- 
 iTT iKhy r uv els rhv iroK^iiov rhv ffrpaTtiyhv elvai xph 1^°^ iroptffriKhv tup 
 iwtrriSetai' to7s ffTparidrrats {slcilfvl in preparing what is necessary for war, ana 
 capable of providing provisions). PI. Euthyphr. 3, u. BL^affKaKiKhs rijs avroh 
 capias {aile to teach his own learning). PI. L. 643, u. t €\€io s ttjs toS irpiyna- 
 Tos apeTTJs {as it were, showing one's self perfed in a thing). Attributive: iiiirei- 
 pto ttIs yewfierpias, etc. 
 
 (f) With the words of sensation and perception: aKoveiv, 
 a.Kp oS,<TSai, al(T'^dv kcr^ai, 6<x<^pa[vi(T ^ai. 
 
 'AkoiSw rZv Koyuv, ^opv$ov {I hear the woi'ds, the tumult). X. H. 4. 4, 
 4. T7)S Kpavyljs ^aSiopTo {they perceived the cry). An. 1. 1, 8. J3a(n\eiii 
 irjS Trphs kavriv 4v i0ov\rjs ovk j a Rivera (did not perceive the plot). C. 2 
 1 24. rivav oa^pivoiievos iiaAeliis ; {what things would you desire to smell?). 
 i.Koieiv SiKiis {ioheara case at law); al<r^dvf<r^ai riZovav, oiriif/s, 
 ^opi ^ov, ^07]^e ias. 
 
 Kem. 17. The attributive Gen. has a much wider signification, e. g. ayeWla 
 Tjjf Xlov, de Cliio {tidings of or concerning Chios) ; ip&rriais twos {a question about 
 something), like the Latin quaestio alicujus rei instead of de aliqua re. 
 
 Rem. 18. 'AKoieiy, vTraKoieiv, KaraKoieiv often take the Gen. also 
 in the sense of to obey, and according to this analogy TreiSfeo-Stai (seldom in 
 Attic) and a-jru^e'iv; so also kot^kooj, vv-Iikoos, take the Gen., more 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
386 SYNTAX. L^ 273 
 
 seldom the Dat. Her. 3, 62. jrpoayapfiei iifuv 'SiiipSios )3«cri\ijos Ititoi 
 611/ {commands us to obey king Smerdis). 101. Aapelov ySocriX^oy ouSo/m 
 inrTjKov<ra.v{tliey6beyedkingDariusnowhere). 1. 126. vvv Siv ifito Trei&oiif 
 vol yiiea-^e ihei^epoi (now therefore obeying me, he free). So Til. 7, 73. 
 
 Rem. 19. The above verbs have the following constructions: (a) Gen. of 
 the thing, as in the examples given. The Gen. denotes the material as a whole, 
 of which one perceives, as it were, single parts, or the sense, the pwrport of which 
 one perceives mentally. Ala^dvoyiai Kpavy^s [I perceive, as it were, the single 
 tones of the cry) ; X. H.4. 8, 19. cu'ir^fV^ai Trjs fiori^ftas {I observe something 
 of the help); — (b) .4cc. of the thing; then it is denoted that one perceives 
 the whole thing with his senses, or the thing in its totality. Th. 2, 94. 'ns 
 rjff^oyTO rijy ^orj^elav {when they observed the help approaching ^ saw wUh 
 their eyes = kipiav). The Ace. of the person seldom stands with ala^ivs&^ai ; 
 when it does, the verb has the sense of ciSeW (to know). X. Symp. i, 36. 
 Alff^avo/jui Tvpdyvovs T tyds, olovra ireiyafft xPVf.'^'rtov {I know some hing§),T7: 
 
 (c) Qen. of the person, which represents the person, as it were, as the source, frpm 
 which the perception is derived. 'Axoia :SwKpdTovs [I fiear Socrates, i. e. the 
 words of Socrates). X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. Ouk aKpoSfievoi tov ^Sovtos afiviere 
 ^Sei;/ SpiffTo {notnearing the voice of the singer). Her. 1, 80. iis SaippavTo rd- 
 Xio'ra Tuv KaniiKmv ot Jinroi Koi elSov avTfis oiricra aii4iirps(pou (as soon as the 
 horses gat scent of the camels). So <rvviriij.i (to undersln'td), viith theGenofa 
 person, e. g. Her. 1, 47. Ktd Ktaipov awiinxi koI ou ^cavevvjos aKovca (I under' 
 stand a mute) ; but with the Ace. of the thing, e. g. X. Cy. 1. 6, 2. Si' epfiiivcav 
 ihs Tuv SreSv (Tv^iPovKias irvfinfii {I understand the counsels of the ga4^), The 
 verb aiir^dvca^ai is not constructed with the simple Gen. of the person, — 
 
 (d) Gmi. of the person and Ace. of the thing: 'H/coutro SaKpdravs tovtov tJv 
 \6yov (audiui e Socrate hunc sermmiem, I heard this conversation from Socrates). 
 So also ri x^^f'rb;' jjir^<rai tou/aov ^iov ; (what have you perceived disa- 
 greeable in my manner of life?) X. C. 1. 6, 4. SwIti/i-I aov rhv K6yov. — (e) 
 Gen. of the person with a participle in the Gen., or with a subordinate clause 
 which takes the place of the Ace. of the thing. 'A.Koia SioKpirovs Sia\e- 
 yoiievov (I hear Socrates reasoning, nearly the same as o/coiiu SaKpdrovs Sid\0' 
 yov), X. H. 4. 2, 19. Aa^ceSat/xtffiot oiiif yff^dvovro TrposiiyTwv ray troKe' 
 liiuv (did not perceive the enemy approaching, nearly the same as -ga^dmyTa tuiii 
 jroAe/iW T^e Tp6so?oy). The person is sometimes also contained in the parti- 
 ciple, e. g. Th. 5, 73. fja-^oyro Tf 'X'^'^J'Twy (they perceived them building ike 
 M)aH, instead of jrirftovTO aliray Teix'ioyrav or 8ti TetxlConv). X.An. 
 1. 10, 4. ficuriKivs iJKOva-e T laira^ipvovs, Sti oi "EWrjves yiK^iV (heard 
 from Tissaphernes that the Greeks were conquering, like iJKovire "iuraajpipyovs tV 
 Tav'EWifvav vIktiv). C ■ i. 4:,l!i. ovk aiaSrdvojml <rov, iirotoy ySfti/ioy )) iroiov 
 SUaLoy \4yeis (Ida not comprehend you, what you call according to law or according 
 to Justice). 
 
 EE3f. 20. Likewise the Gen. of Vie person and Ace. of the thing, or the Gen. of 
 the person with a participle in the Gen. or with a subordinate clause standing in 
 the place of the Ace. [Comp. (d) and (e) Rem. 19], is used with verbs of seeing, 
 hearing, experiencing, learning, considering, knowing; of judging, examining,and say- 
 ing; of admiring, praising, blaming : Spay, fteatr S-oi, aKoir^ly, viroyoeTy, iy 
 > o€7y, y ly f tiff K€ ly, iiriffT atrial, its eyai, 4ySrvn€7<rdai, etc. ; iruyfttJ- 
 yeffSrai, p.aySrdvety, Kplveiy, 4^(rd(eiy, \4yeiy, SijA ouy, etc. : alio- 
 S4xeff^at (to receive the opinion of one, to agree in opinion with one) ; dyaffStat, 
 AaviidCeiy, 4Tratye7y, IJ.4 /^ij) e ff^ai, ^p eye ly. The Gen. denotes the ob- 
 ject (commonly a person) in respeet to which one perceives, sees, obserrcs, 
 knows, judges something, some action, external indication, or some single ci/>- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 387 
 
 curastanco, etc. f or of whom one leanis, hears, affinns something ; or in whom 
 one admires, praises, or censures something. 
 
 X. C. 1. 1, 12. TlpwTOV fj.ev avruy {'^cuKpdT7]s) icKSnet, TrSrepd iroTt 
 vofxt(TayT€s iKavas ij^T] r&f^pdiriua etSeyat 'spxovrai iirl rh irepl rotovrafv ^pof 
 ri^ety, ^ rk ftJc &f&piiTeia irap4vTes, rci SMfi6via Se ffKoirovvres, riyovvrai ri 
 Trpos^KovTa irpiTTtw (he first consideredin respect to them whether, etc.). An. 3.1, 
 19. Sia^e^fievos airav, ia-QV X'^P"" ««! o'lav ^X"'^" {attentively con- 
 sidering with respect to them, what a country they had), Cy. 7. 2, 18. ?7i'iij ko! 
 Iid\a &Towa ifiov ttoiovvtos (he perceived in respect to me, that I was doing an 
 absurd thing, ov iyva 4/10 u, Sti Stottb iroio/ijy). PI. Gorg. 463, d. dip' oivtt)' 
 ud^ots aTToKpivaytivov ; (instead of op' oiv &v /iov li&ois, & hroicpivoiuu , 
 will you then understand my answer, i. c. learn from me what lanswer ?). 465, e. A. €- 
 yovr6s [xov fipax^a ovk sfj.d,v^aves (you did not understand me when I spoke 
 briefly). The Gen. of the person alone. Ph. Phil. 51, c. ef ftov liav^dvets 
 instead of et fiov fiav^dyeis, & \4yu (if you comprehend me, understand wlwt 1 
 say). Th. 4. 6. ^iri^ovTO t5)S TliXov kutc iXTi/ififyTis, instead of iir6^, 
 TTJs ni\ov, oTi KOT6i\r;|iijtteVi7 ?iv (when they learned that Pylus was captured). 5, 83. 
 ijff^ovTo re ixtCovTtoy, instead of ^(r^. avrSiv, Srt retxiCoi^y (learned re- 
 specting them that they were building the ividls, i. e. learned that they were building, 
 etc.). X. O.3. 6, 16. iy^vpiov Twy &Way, ir6Tepd troi SoKovtriy ^ttI to*s 
 roiovTOis iiraiyov ^a\kov ^ i^ifyou Tvyxdvetv (observe respecting the others, whether), 
 ('EySrvft.etff^ai With the Oen. of the thing,for example t^s &pas, X. Ven. 8, 6., 
 T&v T6ircey, ib. 9, 4, signifies to have a regard for something, and belongs to § 174, 1 
 (b); iy&v/j.e'tcr^ai with the Ace. of the thing signifies to reflect upon, consider 
 something, aliquid secum reputare.) PI. Protag. 324, c. airoStxoyTai oi aol 
 iroAtTai Kal x^^'^^^^ '^"^ ctkvt or 6fiou irvu.^ov\t:iovr os rh. Tro\iriKd 
 (receive the opinion of the brazier and shoemaker). Her. 6, 76. iyaaSrai rod 
 'Epa<rlyov ob irpoStSoyros tous ttoAi^tos (to admire Erasinus because he did 
 not betray tJie citizens). Th. 1, 84. rh ^paSii /cat fxeWov, h fi4ii.<povT ai pA\uTTa 
 TlltHy, fail alax^"^"^^ if"'' which they chiefly complain of us). X. Cy.3. 1, 15. ei 
 ftyocoi ToO trarpSs, fl '6(ra ^ ejSo iJAeurai, ^ Utra Treirpax^, irdyv vol 
 irvp.^ovKe'tja rovroy fnfie7tr^ai (if you admire my father either for the measures he 
 has devised, etc.). Ages. 2, 7. rdS* aurov &yafjiai, Sti Trap^cKevdcraro (I ad- 
 mire this in him), 8. 4. iycii Kal tovto iiraivla ^AyTi(ri\dov, rh 'jrphs rh 
 apea-Kuy rots "EAAij<riv {mepiSiiV tV fiacriKius t,eviay (I praise Agesilaus for this 
 also), PI. Men. 95, C. Vopyiou ixdKuxTa ravra iyafiai (1 particularly ad- 
 mire this in Gorgias, or. Oorgias for this). Theaet. 161, b. 3 ^av/idCa toS 
 ■eraipov, t6Sc icrriy (what I admire in a companion is this). Criton 43, b. troD 
 ■jrd\ai ^aviid(ai, al ff^ayi/j-eyos, a$ iiSicas KoheiSeis. Ep. 383, a. viWa 
 'Ott^pou eTraiyovyr es SWa tovto ovk 4Trctiye(r6fie^a (tliough we praise 
 many other things in Homer). 
 
 Rem. 21. In themselves, the above verbs take the Ace, e. g. 6pSi nva or Tt, 
 0rKoira nva or ti, ivaiya, >)/e'7a, fi4fi(pofi.ai, &yafud Tiya Or ti. 
 
 § 274. (b) Causal Genitive. 
 
 The second division of the causal genitive inckides the geni 
 tive, which expresses the cause or occasion, i. e. the object, 
 which calls forth or occasions the action of the subject. This 
 genitive stands : 
 
 1. With many verbs which denote a state or affection of the 
 mind (verba affectuum), viz. : 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
388 SYNTAX [i 274 
 
 (a) Desire and longing for : linSvfi.€!.v, ipav, ipainKui-i ex^iv O) 
 SiaKtio-^at ; Sul/rjv, TreLvrjv ; 
 
 (b) Care for, concern for, and the contrary : imf^eXeLcr^ai, 
 if>povTi^€i,v, KijSetr^ai, ■irepi.opS.a^ai, irpoopav, imepopav (to despise), 
 trpovouv, p-eka, fierafiiXsi, d/icXetv, oXiywpav, (piLSeaSai, ivSvp,ei(T3^at 
 (to have a regard for, J 273, Rem. 20) ; 
 
 (c) Pain, grief, pity: 6Xo<t>vp€a&ai, Trev^tKus ^x""! ^Xeav 
 and oiKrdpuv (witli the Ace. of the pereon and Gen. of the 
 thing) ; 
 
 (d) Anger and indignation: opyltficr^ai (with the Dat. of the 
 person and the Gen. of the thing), xaXcTrGs <f>ipuv; 
 
 (e) Envy : <^5oviLv (with the Dat. of the person and the Gen. 
 of the thing), lin^^oi/ws hiaKua^ai; 
 
 (f) Admiration, praise, hla/me; Sav/xaieLv and ayacrSai (with 
 the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing, sometimes 
 also with the Gen. of the thing and the Gen. of the person, 
 which is governed by that thing, see Rem. 2) ^tjXovv, evSot/to- 
 vt^eiv, iiraivuv, [/.ip-tfiecrSai (all with the Acc. of the person and 
 the Gen. of the thing). 
 
 PI. Rp. 403, a. 6 op^hs epus trecpuKs KOfffiiov re koL ko\oD (r(ii(pp6vus re 
 Kol fiovaiKus ipay {to love wliat is welL ordered and beautiful). 438, a. oviils 
 T70T0V iir i^vfjteT, a\\^ xPV^'^ov ttotov, kccI oh triTov, aAAcc XPV^^'^O^ 
 itItov TTiiyTes yap &pa twv aya^Stv iir i^u fiova" iv {no one desires drink, 
 but wholesome drink, etc.). Symp. 181, b. oi <f)av\oi tuh avApdvav ray <rw/»ri- 
 Twy fiaWoy, ^ tuv i|/i;;^wj/ ipuffiy {love their bodies more than their souls), 
 18G, b. Tb av6[ioioy hyop.o'i.a>v iirt^vfj.€i Koi ip^ {desires and loves what is 
 unlike). 216, d. Sai/tpoTris ipar ikZs SidKurai ray Ka\ay {is very fond 
 of the beautiful). X. Cy. 3. 3, 12. (KCpos) Raxelvov! eiroiijiTEV 4ptaTiKus eX'"' 
 Tov ijST] votiiy Ti {made them desirous of doing something). X. 0. 13, 9 
 neiyw(Tt tow 4iraiyov ovx ^ttov ^ytai T&y (pvffeccy, ^ ^AXat ray airuy tc 
 Kol TTOTmy (thirtl for praise not less than others for food and drink). Attribu- 
 tive, e. g. epair, iiri^fila aperijs {amor, cupiditas virtutis, love, desire for virtue). 
 Th. 6, 14. KiiSecr^ai ttjs TroKeas {to be anxious about the citg). Her. 3, 151. 
 EiroAiiJpKEc {Ba$v\aylovs) (p p oyr i (o vt as ovSey ttjs it oKiopKiri s {liaving 
 no concern about the siege). 3, 159. rod airov irpiopay {to have a care for, 
 to provide food). X. Symp. 8, 33. ol '^6yoti aippovr itrTely 4^iC^neyoi oIik 
 oiVx<ii'OJ'Tai ala-xpiy Ti iroicu/ {those accustomed to be indifferent to censure). 
 X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. Tlepo-Siy vSfioi {Apxcyrat) tou Koiyov ayaStov ^jripe- 
 \oin(yoi. {liaving u, regard for the public good). M€\ei jiol Tiyos {I 
 have a care for something, some one). PI. Crito, 44, c. -ri ri/uy ttjs rmv woWm 
 J((£ijs iif\ei, ywhy do we care for the opinion of the multitude?). 5. 1,21. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 274.] dENITIVE CASE. 389 
 
 ra$pi:f Tretpia-onat metv i^TroTe fier a/iiKri ff at t^s wphs i/ii 6Sov {that 
 Gobryas shaU not repent of his journey to me). Id. C. 1. 2, 9. 6Tepopap EVofei 
 tSv KaSteiTTiiTwii vifiay robs (Tvv6vTas {tmde his associates despise the ex- 
 isting lam). Th. 4, 124. BpaHSas ttis UiySns -k ^piopi,p.,vos (solicitous 
 about Meinde). X. H. 5. 4, 1. &eo! otfre ray hir^fioivruy, offre tS,p kuina 
 votoivrav ifieKova-i (are regardless neither of the mcked nor the profane) 
 Cy. 8. 7, 15. eavTov K^SsTai 6 irpovoSiv iSeKijiov (he who takes thottghl 
 for a brother is anxious for himself). X. Ag. 7, 1. "Attjo-ZAoos, S'jtov #e-,o' tV 
 iroTpffls Ti S,<j,eXiaciv, oi xpvi^irav i<peUfTo {did not spare his wealth). 
 Attiibntive, e. g. ^pomh twv valSay {cura liberorum, care for children). So 
 fVi^eX^j TWOS (caring for something). X. Cy. 5. 4, 32. i Kvpos liKoia-as toS 
 p.hii wi^ovs ^icrcLpev avr6v (pitied him on account of his suffering). 5. 2, 7. 
 T-V Srvywrtpa, vey^iKws ixo"""-" toB &SeA<(>oB rfSrvr)K6Tos,i^iyap 
 ISe eTirey (grieving for her dead brother). Symp. 4, 37. Toiravs oixTelpu Trjs 
 ^yaf xoAeir^j y6(rov (I pity than on account of the disease). Attributive, e. g. 
 &\yos kraipav (de amicis, for, on account of friends) ; moreover with adjectives 
 also (though only in poetry), and especially with exclamations with or without 
 inteijectious. Eur. Or. 413. o%p.oi Siayftav, oTs i\aivoiMi riXas! (alas t/ie 
 vexations!). X. Cy. 3, 1, 39. tpev rod aySp6s (Oh what a man!). PI. Ep. 
 509, c. "AttoAAov, Saifiovlas ivsp fi oKrj s! X. Cy. 2. 2,3. r^s rixv^t rh 
 ^iue vvv R\-i)Si4vra Sevpo r vx"" ■' ( ill fortune, that I am called hither at this time !) . 
 Lys. c. Philon. 187, 11. Ka^etrrTiKe n s^os SiKaiov iraa-ty av^pt^itois, ray avrwy 
 aSiKTiiiiray fuiXiara hpyl^ea-^at roTs liihurra SwaixsvoiS, p,Ti aSmiiy, rals 
 5e Treyrfffiy ^ aSwdrois rip ardpiari tTvyyyt^p.riv tx'^^^t ^'^ "^^ riyeio'^ai &Koyras ai/robs 
 a/iaprdyeiv (to be angry on account of the same wrongs). (In poetry, the Gen. is much 
 ifiore frequent with verbs expressing anger, e. g. II. |, 266. 'HpaK\TJos irep ix<^' 
 <raTo, TTaiSisloro (was angry on account of Hercules, his son). Od. u, 69. (lloo-eiSilay) 
 KvK^M^^os ice x^^ojra t,ty ocl}^a\fJLov &Adta(Tsv (is angry on account of Hie Cyclops). 
 S. Antig. 1177. i?arp\ iLi]yiaa.s <p6yov (having been angry loith the father on 
 account of the murder). Eur. Or. 749. iaas a-oi Siuyarepos Stvp,oip.eyos). At- 
 tributive, e. g. x^>^os rtyis (ira alicujus instead of de aUquo, anger on account of 
 some person or thing) ^^oyeiy riyi ryjs oo(l>ias (to envy one on account of Iiis 
 wisdom). Th. 1, 75. &^loI iir/xey apxns ys ?j ix"!"-^" ro7s"'EXXr]at p.)] otSojs S^av 
 iiri<j>^iyas SiaKe^cr^ai (it is not just that we should be so much envied by the 
 Greeks on account of our sovereignty). So also in poetry, fieyalpu, c. g. Aesoh. 
 Prom. 627. ov pi. ey at pea rovSe ffoi Sapripjiros (I do TWt envy you because of 
 this gift). Attributive, e. g. <t>^iyos ru/6s (envy on account of something). X. Cy. 
 2.3,21. rovroy oZy b KD/70f ayaff&ely r7\s re 'jrpa6r7jros Kai ttjs SiSotr- 
 Ka\las KcH rTJs ^iti^eKelaSf iK&Ketre koX radrriy r^y rd^iy inl rh Seiiryoy triiy 
 Ti}j To4tdpx<p (having admired him on account of his gentleness, education, etc.). 
 Symp. 4, 45. fijAS ire rov irXoirov (I envy you on account of your wealth). 
 PI. Symp. 194, e. Sokowti Trdyres rohs ay^pdoirous evSaifioyl^ety ray &ya- 
 &&y, Sy 6 dehs aiiroTs air los (to consider men happy on account of the good things, 
 which, etc.). Ion. 530, b. troWdias ye i('l]Ka>aa vfms rols ^aifi^Sois rrjs 
 Ttxviis. Dem. Cor. 296, 204. ■^Isohxtai kydaairo ray aySpuv iKelyue 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
390 SYNTAX. I? 274 
 
 TTJs ipeT^j; {who would not admire the valor of tJiose men?). Lys. Simon, 10(^ 
 44. ^au/idCa iiaMffTo, Toirov ttjs SldUolas {I admire his purpose). Id, 
 Eratosth. 124,41. €daiii.a(ra ttjs T<i\/U7;s twv \eyivraiv. So with ad- 
 jectives, e. g. PI. Phaedon. 58, e. evSaiiitny fioi 6 av^p 4ipa,lveT0 Ka! toS 
 p6'irov Kal Tuy \6yuy, &s &5€&s Ka\ yeyyaius ireKeira {the man seemed to 
 be happy on account of his habits and remarks). 
 
 Kemakk 1. Tlie Gen. with the above verbs is often governed by preposi- 
 tions, especially jrep/, e. g. ^m;ncAer<r&oi, tppovTlCfiu mpi rims. Some vei'bs 
 which denote a state or an affection of the mind, do not govern the Gen. ; thus 
 vo^eTv (to long for, to feel the want of), always governs the Ace, and so 
 (l>i\eTi', ayairav, (rripyeiv {to love) ; the last two also in the sense of to i« 
 contented with, take the Dat, ( = Lat. Abl.). Several of the above verbs have also 
 different constructions ; then they commoily express different ideas, e. g. 
 tppoyri^eiy tlvos or irepi rtvos, X. C 1. 1, 11. 4. 7, 6. to be anxioils for 
 r-omething, but ippovriQeiv Tt, scrutari, investigare ; — irpovoelv, irpoopav 
 r I (to perceive beforehand, to consider beforehand) ; vir ^ po pay r i and rivos, 
 despicere, in the same sense. In poetry, /leKit sometimes takes for its subject 
 a noun denoting a thing, in the Nom. ; but in prose, it takes only a Neut. 
 pronoun in the Nom. The verb is then used personally : MeX^iroi/iri;' 8" 
 ifiol Itttvoi, 11.1^,481. TaDra fiev oiv de^ /t e \ ^ <r e i, PI. Phaedr. 238, d. 
 
 Rem. 2. The verbs ^avp.dC^tv and Syao-S-ai have the following con- 
 structions: {a.) the Ace, of the person or the Ace. of the thing alone, when the 
 wonder or admiration extends to the whole person or thing, or to the whole 
 nature of a person or thing, e. g. ftau/uafa rhv <rrpa,Trry6v {I admire the general) ; 
 Srauiid^a rijv aotfiav {I admire the wisdom) ; — (b) the Gen. of the person and the 
 Ace. of the thing, when one admires something in a person (Bern. 20), e. g. 
 SaujucJfw iaKpdrovs r^y (ro(l>lav (Z admire the wisdom in S crates, or the wisdom of 
 Socrates) ; — (c) the Ace. of Hie person and the Gen. of the thing, when dne admires 
 a person on account of some quality, e. g. ^miiAQa SoncpiTri t^s <rotl>las {I admire 
 Socrates on account of his wisdom), see 1, (f ) ; — (d) seldom Gen. of the thing and 
 the Gen. of the person depending upon it, when I wonder at the quality of a per- 
 son, or admire the quality of a person, e. g. SraviAia 'S.mKpa.Tovs ttis aoipias (i 
 admire the wisdom of Socrates), see 1, (f ) ; — (e) the Ace. of the person, and in- 
 stead of the Gen. of the thing, a preposition, commonly ^vi with the Dat., e. g. 
 &avfidCu Saicpdrri M Ty trofli} {I admire Socrates for, on account of his wisdom). 
 
 2. With verbs signifying to requite, to revenge, to accuse and 
 condemn. The Gen. represents the guilt or crime as the cause 
 of the requital, revenge, etc. Thus with npMp^la-^^ai (with the 
 Ace. of tlie person and the Gen. of the thing), also with judicial 
 verbs of accusing and condemning, e. g. alriaaSai, iiraitiSxr.^ai, Sim- 
 Kiiv, ekdyetv, vrrayav, ypd<ji€cr^ai, TrposKaXcia-^at (all vnth the Acc. of 
 the person and the Gen. of the thing), ht^idvai, eyKoXeiv, i-KKridpt- 
 reo-5ai (all three %mth the Bat. of the person and the Gen. of the 
 thing) ; ^(.{r^av {to be accused) ; ZiKoiav, KpCveiv, aipeiv, to convict 
 (all three with the Acc. of the person and the Gen. of the thing), 
 aud dXSvat, to be convicted. 
 
 Iler. 3, 145. to\>s iirmoipovs t tfiap^iro/iai Trif iyStdSi iwl^ios {will pun- 
 ish the allies on accountofthe invasion of this land). (Seldom Ti;Uiapfiv rivi 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 274.] GENITIVE CASE. 39l 
 
 rtyoSf as X. Cy. 4. 6,8. t ifiwp-fiffctv cot rod ':raiShs vwiffxyovfiaij I avenge 
 youjbr [the murder of] your son.) 'EiraiTiaffAai two, <t>6vov (to accuse one of 
 murder). Her. 6, 104. (MiAxiiSeo) o'l ix^pol iSla^av TvpavylSos rris 4f 
 XepiToirfi<ra (prosecuted Miltiades for tyranny). 'Kiri^tiyai twX tj>6yov (to pros- 
 ecute onefor murder), rpd^ea&al rwa Trapav6iiuv (to indict one fir illegal 
 measures), ^eiyeiv KKOirrjs, ^6vov, aff ePdas (tobe accused of theft, etc.), 
 Kpiyea&ai aa-efielas. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. Ilepa-eu SiKd^ov&i Kal ^y/tM^/ao' 
 TO J, o5 eyexa ty^panroi fuirauiri fiey i,?Oi.ii\0vs /idKuiTa, Sixd^oyTai Se f/KiiTTo, 
 iX^oKTrias (condemn as a crime, ingratitude). C. 1. 2,49. kotA yi/ioy (e|e<rTi) 
 ITttpavolas k\6vT I /col rhy irAripa, S^crai (it is lawful for one coniiicting his 
 father of madness). Dem. Aphob. 846. iirkditfiiTTeff^oii riyi rSy i//cuSo* 
 fiaprvpiSty (to prosecute one for false witness). 861, 58. ipeiyeiy (J/fuSo' 
 uapTvpiav vir6 twos. 'KX&vat K\oir^s (to he convicted of theft). 
 
 Kem. 3. Also the punisliment for guilt is prtt In the Gren., but this Gen. is to 
 be considered as the Gen. of price U 275, 3), e. g. drayifou Kplveiy, Kpiyea-^aif 
 itdiKeiy (to sentence, be sentenced to deaih}. Sometimes the prepositions ir^pi and 
 eVcku are joined with the verb, e. g. Siiiicfiy rii/i ircpi <p6y<iv ; and ayA with 
 rifiupsTir^ai. 'EyKaKeif besides the abore, has the following constructions : (a) 
 the Dat. of person and Ace. of thing, to charge Something upon some one ; — « 
 (b) the Dat. of person followed by a clause with 8ri or by the Inf. j-^ (c) the 
 Dat. of person alone, to accuse [§ 284, 3. (6)] j— (d) the Ace. of thing alone, 
 to bring as a charge. Karriyopeiy, to accuse, is construed : (a) with Gen. of per- 
 son, sometimes with Kari and Gen. ; — (b) with Gen. of person, and Ace. of 
 thingyto lay something to one's charge; — (c) with Gen. both of person and of thing, 
 sometimes with vepl and Gen. of thing ; ^ (d) with Ace. of thing alone. 
 
 3. Filially the Gen. of cause is also used in the following 
 instances : 
 
 (a) "With rou li'fi and the infinitive. See § 308, 2, (b). 
 
 (b) "With the adverbs ei, xaXas, nerplas, and the lilte, also with iis, 
 ttSj, iTTus, ^, Sttti, oStws, SSe, SssaiTas, connected with the verbs 
 exeif and fJKeiy, sometimes also With efyoi and other intransitive verbs, the 
 object by which a condition is caused or occasioned, is put in the Gen. KaKSs 
 iX" "■oSSv (lam uldlin respect to my feet). Her. 6, 116. 'A^yatoi, us iro- 
 Saij' £?xoy, Tcix'o'To ifiaii^eoy is rh Sittu (as tJiey were able with respect to their 
 feet, i.e. as guicHi) as their feet would carry them). 5,62. xpTip-irav el rinov- 
 res (well off for, to have a plenty of, means). So «8, KaA.»j, iierpias exetv filou, 
 (ppeySy, yivovs, Svyi/iems (to be well off as to the means of living). 01 "EAXTjcej 
 ouras elxoy ifiovoias irphs a\K^\ovs> X. Cy. 7. 5, 56. ovro> Tp6irov 
 ?X ^ ' * (^'"' "''^ ''"" '" '■^/'«<^' '" circumstances, you are in such circumstances). H. 
 4.5, 15. iy rix""^ eraWTos elx^" (."^ ^^i was able in respect to swiftness, a$ 
 ^iddy as each was able), 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
392 SYNTAX. [^ 273 
 
 } 275. (c) Genitive denoting r.p.ttain Mutual 
 Relations. 
 
 The third division of the causal Gen., inckides the Gen. bj 
 which certain mutual relations are expressed, e. g. the relation 
 of the ruler to the sVibject. As a ruler necessarily supposes a 
 subject, and a subject a ruler, an inferior, a superior, etc., the 
 one may, in a measure, be considered the cause or occasion of 
 the other. Hence the Gen. is used : 
 
 1. With verbs of ruling, superiority, excelling, surpassing, sub- 
 jection, inferiority: ap)(eiv, KpareXv, Sea-iro^eiv, rvpawuv, TvpaweveiVi 
 crTpaTrjy^LV, hrLTpoireveiv, hruTraTUV, PaaiXevav, ^ep-oveveiv, f[yii<Tdai, 
 etc.; with the adjectives cy/cpar^s, dKpaT-i;s ; — - also Avith irpoex^iv, 
 av£)(eLV, TTipieivaL, TrepiylyvecrS^ai, TrpocTTareiVj VTrtpPoXKav, iirepijiipuV) 
 irpoyrevav, Trpecr/ievuv, irpoKpivuv, ifpoTifrnv, ■trXf.ovtKTUv, etc.; — ■^rra- 
 a-&ai, vtmpuv, vtmpit^av, iXaTTOvcrSai, fiuovcrSai, ji,€lov£ktuv, vcrrepov 
 eTvai, ^TTOva, elvai, etc. 
 
 Her. 7, 97. rov yavTixo.v edTpari^yeov o'lSe (these had the command of 
 the naval forces). 3,15. iirirp oTreisiy Alyiirrov {to be the governor of 
 Egypt). Th. 1, 69. b\6yos row epyov iKpdrei [the report exceeded the 
 thing itself). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. &pxovT(S ii4p eltrt k&I oJ Povic6\oi t&v 0ouy, 
 Kol oi linroipop^oX tuv ^ttttuv, koX TrdvTss Se oi Ka\ovfievoi yofteTs, &i/ ttv iirtff- 
 TaTuffL ^diuiv elK6Tus &y &pxoVTfs rovTuv yofii^otvTO {all those called 
 herdsmen might properly be considered the commanders of those animals of vihicli they 
 have the ride). 1. 2, 8. {ot Xlcptrat roils iraiSas) SiSi(ritovtriy iyxparstt chat 
 ycKTTphs Kal iroToS {teach them to be masters of their belly, etc., temperate in 
 eating and drinking). 4.1, 14. ifjiol Si SokeT t^s picyiar-qs T]Sovr,s vo\i 
 ndXitTTa ffVfitpepety 4yKpaT7J ctyai [to be master of, able to control the greatest pleas- 
 ure). 5.1,14. rit /iox^pa av^pilntia vatrSy, otptM, rSv iirtAviiiav aKparri 
 iari {depraved men are subject to, not able to control all their passions). Her. 6, 61. 
 KaWKTTfiaei rh raiSloy Trotrt'oiy T&y ^v STniprp yvvaiKuv {mil surpass 
 all the Spartan women in beauty). Th. 1, 81. tois SvXots avray /cal t^ jrA^3-6i 
 Sirep<p4poii.ev {are superior to them in arms, etc.). X. Ag. 5,2. 'Ayqa-Ums 
 iiycko &PXOVTI vposiiKciv ov piaKaKlif, &^Ak Kaprepiif ray ISiaruv irepieTyai 
 {thai the commander ought to excel the privates, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 19. rdx^'' ^f «' 
 oieyiyov avTov {you excelled him in despatch). PI. Gorg. 475, b. (rKe\fiiip.e^a, 
 Spa \inrri iirepfidWei -ri aSiKcTy tov i.S ik el (rStai, Kai iKyoiJffi //.cAXoy ot 
 aSiKovyres, tj ot HtKoififvot (the Ace. is more usual with iTrepfid\Keiv). L. 752, 
 e. irpeffpeieiv ray iroWiiy iroKtay {to take the preceaence of many 
 cities). So also iyixcT^al riyos usually with a participle, to endure,pei~ 
 mit, properly to hold one's self up over one). PI. Apol. 31, b. ay^x^"-^ -a. -rSiv 
 oiKeluv if.fis\ovn4yay {to permit dome^ic affairs to be neglected). \\r 5A4.a 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t 275.] GENITIVE CASE. 393 
 
 o6k af^x^TiXt ToO &\>M \4yovTos. 'HTTa<r&oi tUv dxi^iuuv {to be sub' 
 ject to one^s desires). Dem. Cor. 308, 244. ovSaiiov fiTrri^els lnrri\dov tm» 
 Kaph ^tXliTTTov irptcr $iaiv {being overcome by or yielding to the envoys). X. C, 
 1.3,3. ^coKptiTTjs ^vtrlas ^^ay fjiiKpits aTrb fiiKpuv ouSev ^yetro ne lovff^at r&» 
 &»r!) imWSiv Kitt ii,eyi\<»v iraWa Kol fityiKa ftuovT w v (did not tlunJs that he was 
 mferior to those maldng many great saaifices, etc.). Hier. 4, 1. /ite7(£A.ou 07a- 
 &oD fie 10 veKT€i {comes short of a great good). 'TcTepeiy r'qs /iiixvs {to come 
 after the battle). "TiTTepl^eiv ray Katpay {to be behind opportunities, to fail 
 totisethem). "t<rr epl^eiy T&y ^pyay. X. Hior. 1, 18. Toiirp xp tu^poffliiT) t^s 
 dKirtSos fieiove KT ovff t ripavyot ray iSiaiTwy. 2, 1. fxetoyeKTovyras 
 Hal alray KaX iroray Kol i-^ay {comir^ short of food, etc.). 
 
 Kemase 1. 'Hyefioveisiv and ^■yeiir&oi in the sense of to go before, 
 to show the way, with. iS6v expressed or understood, goTem the Dat. ; KpaT€tvm 
 the sense of to conquer, regularly governs the Ace., but in the sense of to be 
 master of, potiri, to Tule,]ume the command of, the Gen., e. g. Kparity <robs iro- 
 \efiiovs (vincere) *, KpaTely ttis x^P^^s "t^s tv6\eats, ray iyayTiaty, tup 
 eiriSirviitay, T ov ^povs (all in Xen.). 
 
 Kem. 2. That in which one excels another, in prose, is usually put in the 
 Dat., but is often expressed by prepositions, e. g. ty rivi, eTs ti, Kari. ti, iiri 
 Tiyi. — "With rirraaSiat inrS is often joined with the Gen., e. g. Th. 1, 62. rh 
 vrpaT^treSay 7]trffaro vTrh T&y 'A^Tjydiwy. 
 
 2. The Comparative and adjectives in the positive with the 
 force of the Comparative, e. g.- numerals in -ao-ios and -n-Xovs ; 
 Sevrepos, TreptTTos, etc., take the object by which the comparison 
 is expressed in the Gen. Genitive of Comparison. 
 
 X. An. 7. 7,41. ovSfy yo/il^a avSpl KaWloy etyai KTTJim ouSe \aiiirp6Tcpor 
 &peT^s KOI SiKaiotriyits Koi yeyvai6T7jT0s (I do not think that man has 
 any possession more beautiful than virtue, etc.). X. Cy. 7. 5, 83. ou S^ttou rhv 
 SpYoiTa Tuv apxofi^ yioy ttovtj pdre poy wpos'fiKei etyai {it does not become a 
 commander to be more base than his subjects). Eur. Med. 965. xp'x'^i'^ Se Kpel(r- 
 aay nvplay \6yay /SpoTois (is better than a myriad of words). Her. 7, 48. 
 Ti 'EKKrjyuchy (TTpdrevfia ipaiverai •KoWattXiia toy iffcffdai toS fiiie-rfpou 
 (that the army will be much more numerous than ours). 8.137. SiirXiiaios eytvero 
 mrrhs kavTov {he was twice as great as before). 6, 120. Strreooi cmtKOfi^yoi 
 TTJs a-vfiPo\fis l/ietpovTO iiXMS ^elt(rturS)iu robs M^Sovs {though they came later 
 than the battle, after the battle). OuSeyhs Seirepos {second to, inferior to no one). 
 OiSeyhs Sffrepos. lav apKoiyray irepiTTh, KriiaiurSnu {to acquire more 
 than enough). 
 
 Rem. 3. Sometimes the object of comparison is denoted, like a space-rela- 
 tion, by vpi and avH with the Gen., or by napi. and ■irp6s with the Ace. See 
 prepositions. 
 
 3. With verbs of buying and selling, e. g. oxvila-^ai, Ayopa-^ttv, 
 vpia.<7&ai, KTOo'Sai, TrapaXa/ijSaretv ; iroiXeiv, airoBiSocr^at, mptStOocrJiu, 
 SiSovaL ; — also with verbs of exchanging and bartering, e. g 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
394 SYNTAX. [i 273 
 
 aWdTTCLV, aXkaTfea^ai, Sia/xetySeo-^at, Xveir, etc. ; — with verbs of 
 valuing, e. g. rt/xSv, nixJifrSai, irouZcrStau,, aiiovv, a^iova^OLi^ aild with 
 the adjective a^tos. Genitive of price. 
 
 Her. 5, 6. (oi Op^iVej) wyeoyTai rhs yvvauKas vapii, rSiv yoviuv xpvf-'i''''' 
 fi. ey a \a>vibm/ their wives at a great price), X. C.2. 1,20. t Sv vivay ttuKov- 
 (TLV fjfuv Trivra TwyiSr' ol ^eoi (sdl all good things to us for toils). C7. 3. 1, 36 
 rrt) Se, S Tiypavri, \4^ou /not, iriaov ttv it pi a to, Sste riip yvvama cmoMPeh 
 {what would you pay to regain your wife). 'Eyii fiy, ^(jyTj, d> Kvps, k&c Trjs ijivxiji 
 w piaifiT]!', fiSsTe jUi'jiroTe AarpevfTai Toir-qy {I would buy her at ike expense of my 
 life). H. (, 236. Teix^' SineiiSey, XP'"^^" X"^"^'""' fKo'rilJ.^oi ivneapolay {ieaa 
 exchanging arms, golden for brazen, etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 37. koI iri S4, S> 'Ap/Uvif, 
 airdyov Tfjv re yvvaiKa Kot avrobs ircuSas ffrjdey auTwy Kara^ets {nulla re pre 
 iis deposita, having paid nothing for them). OlayaSraX ovSeybs iy xipSovs r^v 
 TTJs ■"arplSos 4XevAeplay ityraWd^aivTo (the good Would exchati§e the freedoin 
 of their country for no gain). 11. A, 514. iTjrphs yh.p av^p iroX'Xwy avT^^ios 
 &Way {is worth as much as many others). Her. 3, 53. & AvK6(^pay oOSe aya- 
 Kplfftos ii^taoe rhy (j>epoyra rriy ayyeXli)V {thought the one who brought Hie 
 message not worthy of an examination). 6,112. i/iaxoyro a^ias \6yov (worthy 
 of praise), 'h^iovp tlvh Tigris (to consider worthy of honor). X. Cy.2.2,17. 
 ^■y wye ouSev avio^epoy yofjLi^ot ruy iy ay^pwtrois eJyat rov t wy iff ay T6y t€ 
 KUKhy Kot iiyd^hy a^iovff^at. Tt/jtuy riyi riyos Stiid nyd nyos, e.g. Seica to- 
 Kdyraiy, rov ^avdrov (to fn^ one ten talents, to Sentence one to death, to con-, 
 sider one worthy of punishment). So the Mid., used of the accuser : riuaa^ttl 
 Tiyi apyvpiov, ^avdrov, to impose a fine, or penalty of death upon one; com- 
 monly, however, SUnv is here supplied. 
 
 Rem. 4. With verbs denoting to barter, to exchange, the relation is usually 
 considered like a relation of space, and is denoted by oj/W with the Gen. 
 
 Kem. 5. The Gen. with substantives (attributive Gen. § 262, b.) expresses a 
 much greater variety of relations, than the Gen. with verbs. For where two 
 objects are immediately connected with each other, there is always a mutual 
 relation between the ideas they express ; the one depends upon the other, seems 
 united with it, to proceed from it or in some way to belong to it. Hence the 
 rule : When two substantives are connected with each other, the substantive which 
 completes the idea of the other and defines it more fully, is put in the Gen. As ad- 
 jectives or participles are, in their nature, nearly related to the substantive, 
 many adjectives also govern the Gen., when the verbs from which they are 
 derived, take the Ace, e. g. Kpariorov irarphs 'EKX-fiyuy t pa<peis {sprung froin, 
 like naius alicujus), S. Ph. 3. 
 
 Rem. 6. The attributive genitive is called the Subjective, the Objective, 
 or Passive genitive, according to the mode in which it originates in the sen- 
 tence : 
 
 (a) It is called the Subjective Gen. when it originates from the subject of 
 I lie sentence or from a Gen. depending on e^yai and ylyyeo^tu. It always de- 
 notes something active (instead of passive), the cause, author, hence also the 
 possessor, the whole in relation to its parts, e. g. 01 rov SevSpov KUpirol (arising 
 from rh S4ySpoy (pepsi HapTrois), the fruits of the tree, the fruits which the tree 
 IHvdiices. Th ttjs trotl>ias KdWos (arising from rj ao(pia irapexei kcJaAos Or 
 i) ao(pla. KaKii iffriy or xiWos iarl t^s ffo<plas),the beatOy of wisdom, the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
M 276, 277.^ AccuBATivE case. 395 
 
 beauti/ which wisdom causes. Tct -rod 'O/i'fipov iroi-fiiiara. 'O rod 0atTi\iut 
 vi6s. 'H ToC i,rSphs iper'fi. 
 
 (b) It is called the ObjectiTe or Causative Gen., when it originates from the 
 object of the sentence, i. c. when it takes the place of the object of an intransi- 
 tive verb, e. g. ^ rrjs iroijilas iiridvnia,the desire fir wisdom {iwi^v/ia rrji 
 iro^/os, the iro^fttj being the cause of the ^Tri&v/tra); 5 Tfjs apeTTJs ^pws, vir- 
 tutis amor, the love bf or firr virtue (ip& t^s ^pef^j.) ; eCyoiiJ rivos, good-will 
 towards one {eSvovs elfii rivt) ; iirifLcAeia ran Trt\e/iiKiir ^pyuv, cura rerum 
 bdlicamm [^vi^Kovfiai tuv tioKeiXiKtov Mpywy), 'H ruv TlXaTaieuv iiriffrpa' 
 rela instead of vpis rohs H., the expedition against the Plataeans. Th. 1, 108. 
 li/ aTTojSoffei rijs yijs instead of iirl t^s yrjs, in disemtmrhing on the land. 
 
 (c) It is called the Passive Gen., when it originates from the passive object 
 of transitive verbs in the Ace, i. e. when it takes the place of the object of a 
 transitive verb, and So denotes the thing affected or caused by the transitive 
 action, e.g.^ ttjs ir o A. e w s irrfffis {from. KTi(eiTiivir6\iv), the city being that which 
 is possessed. 'O rijs iiriffToKris ypcupeis (from ypd<l)ei ^iritrroXiji'), the imv- 
 ToA^ being the object acted upon. 'H tuv kuK&v ipyuv irpSJij. 
 
 Bem. 7. . Sometimes one substantive governs two genitives expressing dif- 
 ferent relations. Her. 6, 2. 'IcrTiaios tiitiSvve tuv 'Uvuv t V riyeinoviiiv too 
 Vfbs AapiTov TroAc/ian the command of the lonians in the war against Darius. 
 
 ^276. (2) Accusative. 
 
 The Ace. is the Whither -case, and hence denotes : (a) in the 
 local relation, the goal, limit, or point to which the action of the 
 srerb is directed, e. g. aorv /xoXctv, to go to the city; — (b) in the 
 causal relation, the effect, consequence, object produced; also 
 the object put by the action 'va.^ passive condition, i. e. the object 
 on which the action is performed. 
 
 §277. A. Local Kelation. 
 
 The Ace. in its local relation (Ace. of local termination), denotes the local 
 limit, place, or object towards which the subject moves. Hence this Ace. is 
 used with verbs of median, going, coming, etc. j yet this usage is found only in 
 the poets, especially in Homer. Od. y, 162. oi /i.^i' hrotrrpfifiavTes l0av vita 
 i,/i<fii€\l<r<Tas (th&/ went to the ships). II. a, 317. Kyltrari S' oipaviy txe [arose to 
 heaven). Od. a, 176. iroWol Xatui i,v4pes T)fi,iTtpov 55 (came to our house). S. 0. T. 
 35. SffTU KaSiitiov fioKuy. Eur. Med. 7. M^Seia iripyovs yijs eirXeua-' 'la\Kias. 
 
 Kbmaek. In prose, and usually also in poetry, a preposition is joined with 
 the Ace, which defines still more definitely the relation indicated by the Ace, 
 e. g. CIS, in, into, uis, to, Kard, downwards, avd, upwards, virip, over, iiri, upon, vepi 
 and i^i^l, around, rourtd about, lierd, into the midst, after, irpos, to, into the presence 
 of, Ttapa, near to, im6, under, e. g. Uviu is t^v Tr6Kiv, voo€\deTv as -riv ^affiKea, 
 w€p( or in^l T^iv irSKiy fiaiveiv — inl riy dp6vov avaPalveiv — l^^lv i^era TpSas 
 — ("A VI Vapa Pao i\4a — ieVai trphs 'OXuftioy — Umt invh yiuav. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
396 SYNTAX. 1§ 27&. 
 
 B. Caus.vl Relation. 
 } 278. (a) Accusative denoting Effect. 
 l.The Accusative denoting effect is used as in other lan- 
 guages e. g. ypdxfiB} ima-ToX-qv. The original and simplest Ibrm 
 of the Ace. of effect (of the object produced), is where a verb, 
 either transitive or iatransive, takes the Ace. of an abstract 
 substantive, which is either from the same stem as the verb, or 
 has a kindred signification. An attributive adjective or pro- 
 noun or" an attributive clause commonly belongs to the Ace. 
 This is often called the Cognate Accusative. 
 
 PI. Symp. 181, b. 0vt6s iariv (6 cpais), %y oi ^m\oi J&v av^pdnrav ipacit 
 (wfiich bad men love). PI. L. 680, e. PatriAilav tim Siv SiRouyriTifv ffain- 
 \€v6 fie vol {ruling a kingdom). Prot. 325, c ivi^ieKovvrai irdtray efftjtte- 
 \€iav {the^ care Jbr with all care, bestow all care upon). Dem. Aph. 845,4 
 Seofiat vfitjov SiKaiav ^4i}(rLV. X. An. 1. 3, 15. 0t paTTiytiffovTo. e'jut 
 ToiiTjji/ tV ffTparriyiav {to be general of this command, army). 6.3,6. eirv- 
 Xtjtyav Tovro rh evrvxVH-'^ [were fortunate in this good fortune, obtained this 
 advantage). Id. H. 7. 1, 5. irXsiarovs koI fieyiffrovs &yicpas ^yoiviffji4vQi 
 Harci ^dXaTTaif i\<ixt(rTa fjLeif aTroTervx'flKaTe, irAeTcTa 5e Karap^^Kars {having 
 contended in the greatest contests). Andoc. Myst. 5y 31. apaaijievoi rets /ieylff- 
 Tas a pits vfjuv. So KaK^sirpd^etsirpdrTeiy j epyd^etr^eu epyovKa\6v; ipxeivitKalav 
 afiX'^y'i alffxp^v SovKeiav 5ovKe{i€ii/ \ fieyay irSXefioy TroKefieiv j xoXeir^v cffffoy j/otrei;/. 
 'E/cS^^tious trr parelas i^yecrav (like e^odov ^^Uvai). Th. 1, 112. AaK€Baifi6- 
 yioi rhp Uphy Ka\o6fievoy Tr6\efiov ia-Tpirev ffav (like ffrpartiav arpanieir)^ 
 So SpKOvs ofiviivai, aff^eyetv v6trov, ^v ^ioy, X. Hier. 6, 7. Tro7ov Sdriya iirvov 
 4x01 /Ma. If the idea of the verb permits, the passive construction also can 
 be used, e. g. 'O oiKelos iifuv irSKefios oStws ^5ro\6|U^&7) {our intestine war 
 was so warred, so managed), PI. Menex. 243, c. KoAoi Tpd^as 7rp({TTo;'Toi. 
 So also with adjectives, o. g. KaKo\ Tratrav Kaxlav, PI. Up. 490, d. In certain 
 phrases, such as (puKaxas ffyvXtirreiv, excubias agere, tpSpoy {<p6povs) tpepeiy, tribu- 
 turn solvere, iro/i.Triiy ■wi/meiy, pompam ducere, the substantive can stand without 
 mi adjective, because here the substantive is used in a, special and pregnant 
 sense. 
 
 2. In place of the substantive from the same stem as the 
 verb, or of a similar signification with it, an attribute of such 
 cognate substantive, can also be used ; in tliis case, the verb 
 frequently has a pregnant sense, suice it contains, at the same 
 time, an additional idea. 
 
 Ni/tSv p-ixv = vIktiv iJ-ixvs {to conquer a battle, i. c. to win a baitle)^ so 
 O A if /u. TT 1 a ( = '0\vfi.TTlay vlKt\y) viKav (to conquer in the Olympic games), Th. 1 , 
 26 NiK«y vaviiaxias = viicQv yavfutxiay {to gain a naval victory), 7,66 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 27s.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 397 
 
 DlKuv ypdnTjr, sententiam vincere, vtKav Slic-nr {to mi-ry one's opinion, one's 
 suit, triumpltantly); like ^/xa nielli is: to ivivlxia {Upaor Stifiora), eiiayye- 
 \ia, Sia^aTipia, yeye&kia, ri Aixaia, yi/xous S)6eiv {to offer a 
 sacrifice on account (tf victory, u. festive offering, etc., i. e. to celebrate tlie victory, etc. 
 ly a sacrifice); rh nepo-i/c!)!/ upx^Tro {danced the Persian dance), X. An. 
 6. 1, 10; ToSra (o-uc&^fiaTo) <rv i> de/ievoi {having made these agreements) ; 
 rttSra {= HpKovs Toirai') o/ida-avres {Jiaving taken these oaths) ; TapirTeit 
 iriK^Hoii = rdpayfut iroXijiov {to stir up war, turbando bellum concitare, as it is 
 said, bdtum miscere), PI. Ep. 567. n. Passively, TrtSAe/uoi itphs robs "A/upKro-ers 
 fTapdx^V, Dcm. Cor. 277, 151. 
 
 3. The following constructions, likewise, mostly contined to 
 poetry, deserve special notice ; in these, also, instead of the 
 substantive from the same stem as the verb or with a kindred 
 signification, the attributive of such kindred substantive is put 
 in the Accusative : 
 
 (a) Verbs Signifying to shine, to bum, to flow, to pour, to slwet or spring forth, 
 6. g. affTpivTeiv yopyanrhv ad\as = auTpair^v yop. triKaos {to lighten u 
 
 fsarfuUy bright light, i, c. casting a bright and terrific light), Aescli. Pr. 356 ; 
 ^dWeir fiio" {9^''ninating,proiJitcing the Tneans of, life), Fers. 617. 'Epe/i- 
 vhv oTju' tSeuira {Ipouredout black blood), S. Aj. 376. 'Xri^stv Sdicpva, 
 oTjua, hdjjLtreiy treKas, ^^Iv ydXa, (all confined to poetry). 
 
 (b) Verba which express sound, laughter, panting, and smelling ; here, instead of 
 the substantive, commonly an adjective merely, or even a pronoun is used, 
 e. g. tp^4yyeiT^ai dcr^ej'es, TaireiytJy = <^oyyhv aff^ivri, etc. (to sound 
 
 feeble, etc.) ; ifib {= rfibv yeXana) yi\ap {to laugh heartily) ; ifiv iniitv {to 
 breathe sweetly) ; fidyea irvetovTes 'Axsuol breatldng spii-it) ; "Apea irpctp 
 {Maitem spirare) ; S^ety ijSi: ^epiv&v re Kal \iyvphv virTJX^"^ (^ T6Tros)g^ 
 Tlf rSiv rerrlyav x^PV {resounds summer, etc., with a summer-like and shrill 
 sound, comp. Lat. aestivum sonat, vox hominem [= sonum hominis] sonat) 
 PI. Phaedr. 230, c.'Ave Kdyx'"re re fui\a ffapS6yiov {burst into a sardonii 
 laugfi), Rp. 337, a. 
 (a) Verbs signifying to see, to look. Od. r, 446. avs nvp {= Sepyiia inip6s) op 
 jd-oX/Aoitrt SeSopKds {looking flre, flashing flre). So ^Keireiy, SepKe 
 tr&oi "Aprfv = jSAe/ijUa "Apeos {to look UMr, terror) ; ipav akK'/jv {to look 
 courage or boldness) ; SepKetr^ai Seivoi/, fffLepBdKeov, rcucepd {to look terri- 
 bly, etc.); (I)60oy fiKeireiy {to look fury). II. o, 105. «££«' offaifiems 
 {looking evil, with a threatening look, comp. Eng. looking daggers). ;3, 269. 
 ixp^Tov ISdy, looking foolish. PI. Ion. 535, e. K^aiovris re khI Seivhr 
 f/jL^Keiro vras.' • 
 
 Beuabk 1. By this use of the Ace. numerous adverbial expressions can ba 
 explained, the place of the Ace. with its accompanying adjective being sup- 
 plied either by a pronoun alone {rovro, r6Se, ravra, raSe, rX, ri, oiiSev, /47j8eV, 
 I, S, etc.), or by a neuter adjective, e. g. Tout i hviretcrSym koX rairi. xoipf 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
398 SYNTAX. [^ 279 
 
 roij voWois [to gneve at the same things, and to rejoice at the same), Dem. Cor 
 323, 292. Oou/ttoo-Tcb iKv\-l]TToVTai (are wonderfully astonished), PI. Symp. 
 192, c. Th Kpir io-ra ^i/^ricrai/ {were most/lourishing), Th.l, 19. So /j-aKpht 
 K\aiW; TrdvTa eiSaifioyeij' ; a$e\eii>, fi\&wTelv, fyfuovy ueydKa, fi.tKpa 
 ibipyiTely Th i^eyia-Ta, TiSit jeKaif, fiiya ov fi^ydKa ippovltv, afiapTdveUf, 
 Seiff^M, Siafepsiv n, etc. 
 
 Rem. 2. Here also belong such adverbial expressions as : x'^" (gratia, fit 
 the sake of), x^P'" ^mVi "'V (mea, tua, gratia), Scepfdv (gratis), Surlvriv, jrpatKa, 
 udrnv (incassum). So also toBto, toCto (therefore), rl (why), S (therefore). Eur. 
 Hec. 13. vedraTos S' ^v XlpiafuSav 4 Kai ^e 7^j fiireleVefiif'rtc PI. Prot. 310, e, 
 iw' avrit, raVra vvv tjkw irapht (Te (on this very account). 
 
 4. The Acc. denotes also the eifect merely aifv,ed at, the de- 
 sign of the action ; yet almost always with neuter pronouns oi 
 adjectives merely, whereas with substantives a preposition, as 
 tk, Trpo's, im, is commonly used. The following verbs, in partic- 
 ular, belong here : 
 
 Xprjcr^ai Tivl n (originating itoia xpri<T^a.l rivi xp<'a'')> to use something 
 for something; wti^etv (originating from Trei^eiy riy^ iveiffiv), iiraip^Lv, 
 iiroTpivf Ly, 'irpoKa\ei(r^ai, avayKd^e ty r tvd r t, etc. Ou/c exai, o Tt 
 Xpijiroixai aiiT^. T£5r> xP't"^!''^^'' 'roira; (far what purpose shall we use 
 him,'what use shall loe ■make of him?). T^ Kp^j/jj tA irXeiffTov it|fa expS^TO 
 (ad res maximi momenti), Th. 2, 15. TlciaSirivai t^v avax<ipV^''> *> '"' 
 persuaded to a retreat (instead of the usual construction els r. ivaxtip-), ib- 21. 
 Tavrd ffe eieoT pivot (I excite you io this). 'Air^pxofJLat, irply {nrh ffou ti fie'i- 
 (ov avayKa<Td7Jya,i (before I am compelled by you to anything more severe), 71. 
 Phaedr. 242, a. ToSto ovk 67r€t&€ tous iaKcufas (did not persuade the Pho- 
 caeans of this). Her. 1, 163 ; but ticoTpiyeiv els fidxW' 
 
 Ebm. 3. The Acc. of design or purpose, is transferred to the manner according 
 *to or in which something takes place. Here the fundamental idea is that of 
 striving for an object. Thus tpSttov, tovtov riv rp6irov (hunc in niodum, in this 
 iimnner), Trdvra rpSirov, rlva TpSirov, SIktiv (in morem, according to the manner of, 
 like), iinoia (in like manner), iirmjSes (consulto), rdxos and ka-rii t&x"^ (cderiter). 
 Commonly, however, prepositions are used with such adverbial expressions. 
 
 i 279. (b) Accusative of the suffering Object, i.e. the 
 Object upon which the Action is performed. 
 
 Only those verbs will be mentioned here, wliich, in Latin, 
 take some other Case than the Acc, or are constnicted with 
 prepositions. 
 
 1. The verbs oK^tXtiv, ovivavcu,, 6vCvaa-&ai, /SXaTrreiv, aSiKSLV, ivox' 
 
 \eLV (commonly with Dat.), vl3pl£,uv, hifiaiveo-Sai, Xtafiaa-Sai, o-i- 
 
 vecrSai, XotSopeiv (to chide) ; euo-e/Sciv, aue^av ; Xo)(S.v, iveSpeveiv ; n- 
 
 fiuipela-Sai ; &tpaTreveiv, Sopviftopttv, tirirpon-eueiv (to provide tvith fl 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 279.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 399 
 
 gtiardum) ', KoXaKevtiv, Sunreveiv (^SdtTrruv Poet.), irpo'SKrn'iiv ; Tret 
 Sew; a[i.dp€<T^ai (Poet, respondere), remuneran ; ^vkaTTiorSai, 
 EiAa^cttr.5at ; /upaicr^ai, t.TjXo'Hv {to emulate). 
 
 X. C. 1.2, 64. (Sbk/icJttjs) (paveiihs iiv ^epaTreiuv robs Seois [eviderUhj 
 worshipped the gods). Aesch. Ctes. 618. ris iv etV) iTiiiayayis toiovtos, 3jtis rhp 
 H^if irifiov ^uTreutrai SvpaiTOy robs 8e Kaipo^s, iy oTs ?iv (rc^^^tr^at 7^y ir6\iy, 
 ar6SotTO; [asvxnildbeabkiojlatterthepeople). Tlet^eiv rh irA.^&os {topersuade 
 themuhiiude). X. Hier. 4, 3. oi iroATroi S opv(J>opov(Ti fieu &A\^Aous &veu fiia^ov 
 [heep guard over each other). R.L. 12, ^.p-sroffTparoTveSe-dovTal ye [ol haK^iaifxdvioi) 
 fi^v 'TrvKvii Koi Tov ffitfitr^at rovs ttoX ejufet s eVe/ca, Kal rov oj (peKetv Tohs 
 ^l\ovs [for the sake of injuring tJieir enemies, ar^ assisting their Jiiends). C. 4. 3, 
 1 5. ^K€iyo 5e a^vfiw, Srt fioi BoKU t ct s ruy ^euy eb epyecrias ou5' &y efs ttotc &y- 
 &ptiTci!va^laisx^P"r'y i.f-^'P^o'^ct. IIer.6, 138.eAi<X1'''"'' rlls Tav'A^vaiut 
 jvva.'iKas. Th. 1, 32. UKsiar apxov, rhr AewvlSou, ivra fia(ri\4a Koi 
 v4ov fTi, ivfTpSircvev {6 Tlavtravias). X. H. 5. 1, 17. t( 5JSioy, ^ jUTjSe'y n 
 ay^ptiiraiv Ko\aKeietv fifire °E\\r]ya, fiijTe $dp$apov, eivixa luff&ov; — 
 XIposKvveiy Pairi\4a. PI. Rp. 334, b. oKpeXely filv roiis (j>l\ovs (So/cfj) 
 ^ SiKaio(rivTi, p\dirreiv Si robs ix^P"''^- 'ASixeTy robs (pi\ovs, 
 iPpl^ety Tobs TraiSay. XIoWdKis KoJ Sov\oi r i/iupovyTai robs iS/- 
 Kovs SeirTr6Tas {take vengeance on their unjust masters). X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. oi 
 (jiiXaKe's 4\oiS6povv airoy (but the Deponent \oi5opcii7&a{ tivi, to rcproac/i) 
 
 Eemabk: 1. Some of the above verbs take a Dative or a preposition witli 
 its Case: (a) SupeKsTy riyt but very seldom, and then in tlife poets; (p) 
 aSiieeXv «y, vp6s, and ircpl nya.; (7) oiTE^eTi' fij and irep/ riyo; cuo-e- 
 Pitv eft Tifo, TCflf, Trpifs Tiva; (S) \viiiaiye<r&ai nvi frequently; (e) \a$a- 
 tr^ai Tiw sometimes ; {0 ifipi'C^iy rfs tii/o often ; (tj) limpoveinv riySs 
 somewhat frequently (§ 275, 1 ). 'ApeffKeiy takes the Ace. only in the sense 
 of to satisfy, but the Dat. in the sense of to please. 
 
 Rem. 2. AapeTa-^al riyi ti {donare alicui aliquid, to present somethHi'g to 
 some one), is the construction in Attic prose, not Supeiff^ai rivd rivi {donare 
 aiiquem aliqua re, to present one with something). 
 
 2. Verbs signifying to do good or evil to any one, by word or 
 deed, e. g. eiepyereiv, KaKovpyeiv, KaKOTTOiuv; evkoytLV) KaKoXcyeiv: 
 €v, /caXSs, KttKccs Xiyeiv, fl-Trdv, mrayopeveiv. 
 
 S. Aj. 1154. Hy^pavi, t^il Spa robs re^VTiK6Tas k a K u s {do nm injure llie 
 dead). X. Cy. 1. 6, 29. KaKovpyelv robs ^iKovs {to harm one's friends). 
 Eiepyerelv ri/y warpiS a {to do good to one's country). X. C. 2. 3, 8. iraij !" 
 kr iyii hviTnarijixav eivv aSe\<pf XP^<r»ai, iiruTrdiifyis ye KoX e S \4y€iy rhy d 
 Kiyoyra, koL eS iroieiy rbv eS irotovyra; rbv /ieyroi Kai \6y(p Koi ipya 
 mpiilievoy i fii avtay oiK UySvyaif>.riy otr' e'i \4yiiy, oSr' ed ir oi^lv (know- 
 ing how to speak weU of me who speaks well of me, and to do good to one who does well 
 to me ; but I should not be able to speak well of or to do good to one who, etc.) In- 
 Btead'of the adverbs eZ and KoKwi with TroieTy, etc., the Greek uses also the cop 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
iOO SYNTAX. § 279. 
 
 responding adjectives ; hence ica\tt, Kaich, iroii7v, \4ytiy -riva [to do gooa 
 or evil to one, to say good or evil of one). See § 280. 
 
 3. Verbs signifying to persevere, to await, to wait for, and the 
 contrary, e. g. fi,ivuv (like manere), ■Trepijj.ivav, S^appeXv, naprepuv :, 
 <l>evyuv, airo^eoyuv, aTToZihpauKuv, Spairtrevav. 
 
 Mil <l>€vys rhi/KlySuyop {donotjieefromdanger). @a^^e7Te AdvaToy {Jidenli 
 animo expectate mortem). X, An. 3. 2, 20. t i s /tej/ fi^x^s ^a^ ^sTts (bravely 
 stand or endure the battles). Cy. 5. 5, 42. t? riyh tre rifjuctrLv, avrcurtrdCov ital evtiip^ej 
 avTovs, "vcL (re koX ^ap^-^ffoctriy (that they may confide in you, ut fiducia te 
 complectantur). 'O SouKos aireS pa rhy h e tr ir 6 r t} y (ran away from his master). 
 PI. Symp. 216, b. SpcLireniu o?y avrhy icai <peiya> (I run iway from him, 
 etc.). Dem. I. Phil. 50, 37. ol ray TzpayiJiATaiy Katpol oh ^iiyova i r^y ^^fr^- 
 Day ^paSvTTJTa (do not wait for your slot! fulness). 
 
 Eem. 3. After the analogy of (pciyeiy, other verbs also, vf hich contain 
 the idea of feeing, e. g. those signifying to turn back from, to retreat from, to 
 abhor, are constructed with the Ace, though but seldom, e.g. virox'^p^tv rhy 
 ox^oy (to retire from the crowd) ; eKOTTiyai Klyivvoy (to shrink from, shun fear) ; 
 ilcTpeireaSrat, vTT^Krp^tnff^ai, vTE^epx^tr^ai, airo ffT pf (petr^ai. 
 ©o^^eiy Tin signifies to have confidence in something (fidere aliqua re). 
 
 4. Verbs of concealing and being concealed: Xav^avav, Kpmr- 
 T€iv (celare), KpvTTTea-^ai; — also the verbs <j>&a.v£tv (antevertere), 
 XetTTciv, cTriXetTretv (fleficere) ; — verbs or particles of mtJeorzw^, 
 the person or tiling by which one swears being in the Ace. 
 
 PI. Up. 365, d. Siiovs offre \a,v&i.y^LV, oi/Tt ^idaatrStai SuyarSy (to escape 
 tlie notice of , be concealed from the gods). Kpiirreiy Tiyd ti (to conceal any- 
 thing from any one), see 4 280. Her. 6, 115. irepieirKaay :Soiywy PovK6iisyot 
 tjt&fiyai Tobs 'A^riyaious cmM6p.eyoi is rb fitrru (wishing to anticipate the 
 Athenians). 'EiriKft-n-ei fie 6 xf ^yos, tj Ti/iepa (fails me). X. An. 1. 5, 6. ri 
 STpdrevixa 6 triTOs 6?rE\iirE. "Ofiyvfii vdyras &eowr (I swear by all the 
 gods). Hence fid, ou p.d, vol /id, vJ) A (a. 
 
 E,EM. 4. Also the two impersonal verbs Sei and XP'(> '" "i^ sense of to 
 need, are constructed with the Ace. of the person and the Gen. of the thing or peison, 
 of which or whom one is in need ; this constniction, however, belongs only to 
 poetry, e. g. Od. B, 124. ^.v^aeai, '6TTe6 <re XP^ (you. will tell of what you are 
 in need). Aesch. Pr. 86. aiirhy ydp ire Sei npo^Tjaewi (you yourself need 
 Prometheus). Aei with the Dat. of the person belongs to prose and poetry, e. g. 
 1 1. Menon. 79, b. S c i oiy a o t t^s aiTrjs ipar^a-eas (you need the same inquiry). 
 In the sense of necesse est, opus est, with an infinitive, the Ace. of the person is 
 common with both verbs, e. g. Sei (xpii) (re ravra miuy ; the Dat. is much more 
 rare, and with xp<) seldom even in poetiy. X.C.3.3, 10. e? <ro£ Seat SiSdirKeiy. 
 Comp, X. 0. 7, 20. S. Ant. 736. &K\,f yiip ^ '^ol XP^ 7^ rrjsS' ipx^ii' 
 X,^oy6s. 
 
 5. Many verbs denoting a feeling or an afection of the mind, 
 e. g. (^o/Jeto-^ai, Seio-at, rpeiy ; aXKT-)!yvf.a^ai (revereri), aiSeio-^at ; Sus- 
 XpaCvciv ; iKwX-^TTea-^ai, KaTairXi^TTea-^ai ; 6Xo<f>vpea-&ai (niiserari). 
 
 Digitized l)y Microsoft® 
 
?~79] ACOUSATl £ CASE. 401 
 
 X. Cy. 8.1,28. iin^Xov robs aiSovfievovs aidovyr a i twv hufaiSuy o 
 &vdpimoi (respect the respectful). An. 1. 9, 6. Ktipos &dktoi irore iirtipipo- 
 lidyqy ouic iTpea-ei/ {was not afraid of a bear). Cy. 3. 3, 18. {ol ^^o^eV"") 
 p.aK\oi/ rifias (pofiijirovTai, Srav aKoiaaaw, 5't( oix "* ipojSouuej/oi irrljiriro- 
 ft€v avTohs oIkoi Ka^/ievoi [will fear us, hearing that we shall not .crouch with 
 fear on account of them), hlax^vonai rhv S>s6v (I fed ashamed before the 
 god). R. L. 2, 11. oiSero-ftai tous Apxayras. Cy. 1. 3, 5. (cal <re, 2 
 iri^Trire, livtrar t 6/jt,eyov ravra ra ^ptifiara 6pa {I see that you are dis- 
 gusted vnih, loathe this food). PI. Symp. 173, c. rotis tTalpovs ^\ea. Dem. 
 Cor. 290, 185. icarairKayTJyat rhv ^i\nr-irov [to be panic-stricken bt/ 
 Philip). In poetry this use of the Ace. is much more extensive. 
 
 Kem. 5. Verbs which express the idea of motion, sometimes take (as transi- 
 tive verbs) the Ace. of the thing put in motion by them, as a passive object ; 
 tliis construction is used in poetry, seldom in prose. ^Tlie following 
 verbs especially belong here, palyciv, atacrekv, irepay, vKetv ji^wciv, 
 (TTreiBeiv, etc. S. Ant. 1158. tiSx'? Kar a^^eirei rhv evrvxovvra 
 {fortune sinks the fortunate man). 'EK$aive iv, iTraia-ffe ly irdSo (to put out 
 the foot, move the foot quickly); aiaanv x^P" (furiously to set or move the 
 hand to); piirtv, iriiSo irepSv, all poetic. Th. 6, 39.. ica/cik aireiSeiv (ac- 
 celerare). In this way, verbs expressing sound, in the pregnant sense of putting 
 an object in motion and causing it to sound, are sometimes constructed with the 
 Ace. II. X, 160. ?7nrot Keiy' ox^ti Kpor dKi^ov ayh irroXe^oia ys^ipas (rattle 
 the chariots, hurry off the chariots with a rattling sound). Her. 6, 58. \4$7iTa 
 Kporiovai (rattle the kettle, strike it again and again). So also in a pregnant 
 sense, the poets say, ^ehy x^P^^^^^t ^Kla-ffeiy (deum chords, saltando cele- 
 brare). Comp. Larger Grammar, Pai-t II. § 552. 
 
 6. With verbs of motion, the space or way passed over is put 
 ill the Ace, these being the objects on which the action of the 
 verb is performed; so also the time during which an action 
 takes place (in answer to the question, How longl), is put in 
 the Ace, as being the object measured by the action; so too 
 measure and weight (in an.swer to the question. How much?), 
 are put in the Ace, these also being the objects on which the 
 action of the verb is performed. 
 
 Balvdv, irepay, '4pvf IV, iropcii eir&af SS6y (to go the M-ay, etc., comp. 
 itque reditque viam). Eur. Med. 1067. oX\' elpLi yhp Sii TA7)jno>'e<rT(^T7)j> 
 6S6y (wilt go the uxiy). X. Cy. 2. 4, 27. /t^T£ ri Sisfiara iropeiov, aX\ii 
 K4\fv4 (rot rails Tiy€p.6vas rijv ^^ffrriv (6S6v) fiyeTcr^ai (do not march over 
 the difficult places, but command your guides to lead over the easiest road). An. 4. 4, 
 1. ivopei^riirav 5ii t^s 'Apjiepias ireSiov amav Roi Keiovs yn\6(l>ovs 
 {marched over a plain, etc.). K. Equ. 8, 10. fjv S itty ipeiyii iirl rovlTrwov rrav 
 rata xwpfo (per varia loca). Cy. 1.6, 43. S7ciy (irrpariay) ^ (rrevas J) 
 irKareias idois. Dem. I. Phil. 49, 34. &-y<iy Kai ipipup rovs irXioyras &({- 
 \arrav (sailing through thesea). Xpoyoy, rhy x ?<>'""'>/'>'' "■ '""^) (different 
 from xP^'ft "'•''' XP^'"f^ "*i % '™^i gradually), vWra, TifUpay (during the night, day). 
 Her. 6, 127. fi Xipapis iJKtiaCe roVrov rhy XP^""" M'i'^"^™ (was flourishing 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
102 SYNTAX. [i 279 
 
 duimg c/iis time). X. An. 4. 5, 24. KaToKa/ifidvei T^y Avyarefa tov Kajxipxat 
 ivv^Tflv 7]fiepav ^eyafi-q/j.evTjj' {wJw had been rfiarried nine days). Cy. 6. 3, 1 L 
 Ktti xSx^s ^e Koi Tpirriv T]fj.€pav rh avrh tovto ^irpaTTOir. Dem. Phil. 3. 116, 2^ 
 iirx^fffii' 5^ Tt rcdi ®7]$a7oi t ovs r e\^vTaiovs rovT oval xP'^^'ous jUerA tV 
 if \eikTpols fcixv {during these last times). Her. 1, 31. irTaSlous irivts koL 
 T etrireptiKoyra diaKo^itravres ciirikovTO is rh lp6v {having passed (mer forty-Jivi 
 ttades). 6, 119. airexe'" Se'kb koi SiTj/coirious (TTtiSiouj {to be distant two 
 hundred and ten stades). 6, 135. MiA.Tic£5^s aire7rA.ee Hoipoy iroXiopK'furas re e{ 
 Kal elf/cotri Tjfiepas. "KcpEcroy awex^i airh "^dpBeojy rpluy rj/jLepai/ 656v. X. C. 
 3. 6, 1. ouSc'ttdj eXKoaiv eri; yeyoye^j (like vigintl annos natus, twenty years old). 
 Here belongs the Ace. with Sivaa-^ai, to be worth. Her. 3, 89. Ti Bii/3i;\(iMo» 
 rdkavTov Siyarai ZbpotSas e/3 So/i^ icoyra uveas {the Bah/Ionian talent 
 is worth [weighs as much as, amounts to] seventy Evboean minae). 
 
 Kem. 6. In poetry, the Ace. of the loeal object is sometimes used even with 
 verbs denoting rest, e. g. kuct^cu, cttivoi, ^ff^at, ^citrtreij/, Ka^l^ety, etc. (instead 
 of iy with the Dat., as in prose). Here also the Ace. represents the space as 
 the object acted vipon, or taken possession of, e. g. S. Phil. 145. {t6ttov vposiSeiv 
 iA4\eis) ivTiva KcTrai {quemjacens occHpatum tenet). Comp. Lirger Gram. 
 Part II. <j 554, Hem. 3. 
 
 Hem. 7. The following prepositions are joined with the Ace. to define more 
 fully the extension in space and time, viz., avdffrom a lower to a higher place, 
 e. g. avh. iroraf.Lhy irKeiy, av^ yiiKTa ; — Kardjjrom a higher to a lower place, e. g. 
 Kara irorafihy "n-Kuy, Karb. rhy ^ioy ; — apLcpi and Trep^ round about, e. g. ^aty^iv 
 a/j.(pl (or irepl) T^y tt6\iv, ajxip). Thy x^*/*wi/a, irepX ri MijSi/ccE J — inr6, under, ii^ 
 7}A(0j/, vTrh yvKTa, sub noctem ; — - uirep, over ; — Trapd, near by, along, by the sid6 of, 
 e. g. irapb, rhy irorafj-hy 7ropei5etr&a:, Trap* bKoy rhy ^iov ; — eTrf, upon, e. g. iiri vwra 
 ^a.\d(ra7]S ir\eiy, inl -KoXhy xpfij/ov j — Siii, through, e. g. Sia SZuara fiuiyety, Si^ 
 v^KTa ; — jtiet^ Taura, postea ; — xpbs eCTre'pat', towards evening. 
 
 Eem. 8. From this use of the Ace. to denote space, time, and quantity, 
 very many adverbial expressions have originated : (a) tV raxlimiv {6S6y), 
 cderrime ; r^y Trptirriv, primum ; r^y evSruay, recte, straightforward ; fiaKpdy,far ; 
 ^XXiji/ Kal &K\7iy, som^tinies here, som£tiffi£s there, etc. II. i//, 116. voWct S' &ydv- 
 Ta, Kdrayra, irdpavrd re, 5(ixM*^ t ^\^ov {they passed over many up hills, 
 down htlls, straight and cross ways ; — ( b ) o'^/tepoi', to-day ; aiptoy, to-morrow ; apxh^t 
 T^y apx'fiy, properly, at first, omnino ; tcAos, rh reAeuraVoz', finoMy ; ysoy, lately j 
 vpSrepoy, TvpwTov, rh -npSnov, rh irpiy, tJ) aur^/ca, Tavvv, rh 7rd\al, t5 iraKaiov, Tb 
 Kom6y, etc.; — (e) iroWd, saepe; t4 iroAAa, plerumgue ; iroKv, piiya, iieyd\a, /ic- 
 yltrra, oXiyoP, fiiKpoy, p.tKpd, (Tvxvd, paiKpd, Xifov, rotrovro, •ndvra, etc. So also 
 plTJKQS, ir\rj^QS. 
 
 7. Finally the Ace. is used with intransitive or passive verbs 
 and intransitive adjectives of every Idnd, to explain and define 
 their meaning more fully. Here, also, the Ace. represents the 
 object as acted upon or suffering, since it denotes the object to 
 which the intransitive action of the verb or adjective, refers 
 or is directed. This Ace. is used most frequently in specifica- 
 tions relating to the body and the mind. This is called the Ace. 
 of more definite limitation, sometimes the Ace. of synecdoche. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 280.] DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 
 
 Her. 2, 111. Kifivem -robs o^^aXfLo^s [to be painedinor in respect to the 
 eyes). 3, 33. tAj ipptvas vyialveii' {to bt sound in mind). X. C. 1. 6, 6. i\7E7f 
 Toils Tr6Sas (to have pain in the Jeet). 4,1,2. ipav^phs iy ^UKpirris oi rSiii to 
 irdnaTa rphs Upon, i,XKa Twy ras ^vX'i'S trphs dpcxV «S ■iritpvK6Tav ipie/ievos 
 (that he was not desirous of those weU-constitufed in body for beauty, but of those well- 
 adapted in mind, etc.). PI. Kp. 453, b. S'Hip.epei yvv^ aySphs t^v t^ia-fv [woman 
 differs from man in respect to her mtun). 462, 4. i ^vApawos -rbv HktvXov 
 dXyer (is p(iined as to, has a pain in, Ms finger), liq^is iari tA o/h/ioto (it 
 beautiful as to, his eyes, )jas beautiful ey^). K(fKif ^a-rt t it v \J! v x'l] "■ So i.ya^6s. 
 iro^is, (ppivifios, xpiliniios, xpiiOTis, SIkiuos, etc., wjth the Aco. 'Ayo&bs t « x •") x 
 Tivi. Her. 3, 4. ^ivris Koi yvd/iriv 'Mav6s, K»l to tro^epiia Sa.ki,uos ?K. X. 
 Cy 2. 3, 7. hieaTii iepai\as rh <rwfia oiit i4>vhs^ Kiii t^iv ^vxilV oiie ayewti 
 iivSpl ioiKiis. 8.4,18. Sewhs tijutiic riin Te'x('i7if. So ^aviuttrrhs rh fif- 
 7€&os, ri KiWos (wonderful far his size cmd beaufy, of iponderful size cmd 
 beauty). The English coininouly uses preppsitipns to express the force of this 
 Ace, viz. in, in respect to, of; or -sfhen it stands with an adjective, the English 
 sometimes changes the Ace. of the thing, into a personal substanfive, and 
 makes the adjective as an attributive agree with it, e. g. kyc&is Tfxvvy, " good 
 artist, comp. Eng. Tie is a good shot, i. e. ijiarisntar} ; or tlie prepositions of or with 
 are placed before the substantive denotipg the thing, and the attribijtive ad- 
 jective is made to agree with that substantive, e. g. yeapias (coAis rriy tj'ux'flf, of 
 or with a lovely spirit, 
 
 Kem. 9. Sometimes the prepositions els, Tp6s, Kori. are joined with the Ace, 
 in which case the relation is analogous to an Ace. of space, denoting direction, 
 as Siaff>ep£tv sh ri, e. g. els aperiiv. X. C. 3. 5, 1. ivSo^orepa 7] ttoKis flsT^ 
 voXe/uKii ^a-Tcu. Soi^is irpoj ri. — On the Dat. see § 285, (3), (b). 
 
 Rem. 10. Erom this use of the Ace, many adverbial expressions have orig- 
 mated. Thus the expressions of measure : eSpos, S^os, lieye^os, pJAos, iniKos, 
 trKrtbos, apt^ftSy, also yeyos, ^uofia, fJ.epos, rh o-hy fj.epos, •Kp6(^affiv, under pretence, 
 Th &\7j^es, yy^fiTjy ipiiiv. Her, 6, 83. KKetivZpos yeyos idiy ^iya\eiis aif 'Ap- 
 KaSir]s (being a Phigajian by birth). 7, 109. XlfiVT] iovira rvyxdyei iisei rpiiiKOVTa 
 (TTaSlar T7)i/ Tteploiov (in circumference). X. An. 2. 5, 1. per* toStb aipi- 
 KovTo ^ttI Thv Za^aToy irora^hy rh eZpos rerrdpuy irXe^pwy (four plethra in 
 Tvidth). 4. 2, 2. ot ^iey iiropeiovro rh ttKtj^os us Sisxl^^oi (two thousand in 
 number). — Moreover Tobvavriov, ravavrla, on the contrary ; tSaAo, ra respect to 
 other things ; rb '6\ov, omniTpo ; 6.^^6Tepa, touto {ravra) ixiv — toSto (lavTo.) Se ; 
 oifSey, in no respect; t1, in some respect; iroXXd, irdyTa, etc. — Ti itr efii, tovv^ 
 4 fie, Tovwi <re, ri els i/ie, quantum ad me (to), as far as it relates to me, etc. 
 
 } 280. Double Accusative. 
 
 In the following instances the Greek puts two objects in the 
 Ace. with one verb : t— 
 
 1. When, in the construction given under ^ 278, 1, the verb 
 has a transitive sense, as <l>iXiav ^iXav, then the idea of activity 
 consisting of the verb and a cognate substantive (with whic> 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
404 SYNTAX. [i 280 
 
 an adjective usually agrees), being blended into one, may al 
 the same, time be extended to' a personal object, e. g. ^iXS 
 
 fiie.yaXir]V t^iKiav (= (piXui) tov TraiSa. 
 
 Her. 3, 88. ydfiovs roiis ir p^rovs 4yd^ee d Aape7os Kvpou 5i>t» ^vyw 
 Tepas, "ATOfTcrdy re Kal 'ApTvffr dtvTiv {contracted very h(morable marriages 
 withthe two daughters of Cyrus). 154. euvrhy \a0aTai K^^Tiv av^Ketr- 
 T !< (maims himself with an incurable maiming, maims himself incurably). Th. 8, 
 75. &pKQj(Tay to us ffTpaTit&ras robs fieylo'Tovs S pKovs {made the aol- 
 diers take the most solemn oaths). X. Cy. 8. 3, 37. ijie 6 irariip t^v tux walSup 
 vaid^iav ^TToiSei/ex {educated me in tlie education of boys). PI. Apol. 19, a. 
 MeXr^Tifs fie iypd^aro r^y ypa(jji]y ravrtjy. 36, c. e Kaffr o y eilepye- 
 Te7y rijv p.eyiaTr)y evepyecrlav. Her. 1, 129. Seiiryoy t6 (=S) fiiy 
 l^oiyt<re. Th. 1, 32. ri/v yavfiax'"iy air fair d/ie^a Kopiy&lous (like 
 vlxriy vmav), we repelled the Corintiiaiis in the naval battle. PI. Gorg. 522, 
 a. TToWct Koi TiSea Kal ■travroStnrat evdxouv itfias. Especially with 
 verbs of naming, after the analogy of iyofia oyofid^fiv rwd: X. 0. 7, 3. KaXou- 
 0-1 ^6 toBto rh ovofia {they called me this name, by this name). Pl.Rp.471, 
 i. ay aKaXovyr es TauTo rh 6y 6 fiar a eavrois. 
 
 Remaek 1. Instead of the substantive denoting the thing effected, the Ace. 
 of a pronoun is frequently used. X. Cy. 1. 3, 10. raWa fuiioiiieyos rhv 
 'Hxav. An. 5. 7, 6. tovto i/ias f^aTraTrjaai. This is especially the case with 
 verbs of praise and blame, of benejit and injury, after the analogy of iyitiifuoy 
 iyKUfudCuv Tivd and the like. PI. Symp. 221, c. iroWh. fih oiy &y tls koa. &\Ka 
 IX"' SaiKpdrny iiraiyiffai (one could praise Socrates for many other things). 
 Rp. 363, d. TauTa 5i] Kal &KKa Totavra ey KOi pudQov tr t SlKaunritvTiv. 
 yieyd\a, p-iKpd, TrXefw, iiii^u ii(j>e\eTy, PKdirreiy, aSl/ceic Tlya. 
 
 2. Expressions o£ saying or ^■M5-5-ooi^orez)27(wliichgenera:lly 
 contain an Ace, or its equivalent in an adverb, of the timig said 
 or done), take the object to wliich the good or evil is done, in 
 the Aoc, e. g. dya.3a, KaXd, KaKa troiilv, irpamtv, ipyd^t- 
 a-&ai, Xeyeii/, etTretv, etc. Tiva. (to do good, etc., to sonie one). 
 
 X. 0. 5, 12. ^ Y^ Tous SpuTTa Repair eiovT as avT^y .Tr\fT a-ra iyaAa 
 aj/Tiiroie? (returns the greatest advantages to those who cultivate it best). Her. 8, 
 61. Tiire Sii 6 0e/ua-TOK\er]s Ke7y6y re /tal Toi/s KopiyStiovs iroWtl 
 Te Koi KaKo. l\eye (said much evilofhim and the Corinthians). X. Cy. 3. 2, 15. 
 ouS€Td;!roT€ iiraiovTo TToXXk KaKa jj/ias Troiovyns (never ceased to do much 
 injury to us). 
 
 _ Eem. 2. Instead of the Ace. of the object acted upon or suifering, the Dat. 
 13 sometimes used, which is considered as the Dat. of advantage or disadvan- 
 tage (Z>atoi« commorfi or incommodi). Dem. Aphob. 855, 37. t1 o-oi woii,r,c<ri> 
 0, fidpTvp€s;_ (quid tui iibi prosint testes?) X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. ^po(rK6wu, rl „oi 
 woiTimvoiy o, Apxdyeyoi (consider what your subjects will do for you) : on the con- 
 traiy with_fft (what they will do ro you). An. 4. 2, 23. ^iyra i^olna-ay roU 
 aTToSravavffiv (showed all honors to the dead). Cy. 7. 2 27 ?jv radrd uoi 
 Trm^o-ns & \4yeis (if mu perform for me what you promise). So also in the sense 
 Of, to do something with some one, as PI. Charm. 157, c. oSk tiy %xoiniy, S n 7,0m- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 280.J DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE. 403 
 
 lUv (TO I. But the Dat. often depends upon the adjective, e. g. Dem. Cor. 243 
 5o. 5:3TcX« T-pdTTuv Kal\4ya,v Tk fieKriaTa t^ Simif (continue to do ana 
 my what is best for the people). 
 
 3. With verbs : (a) of entreating, beseeching, desiring, inquir- 
 ing, asking: almv, ctTratTctv, Trpdrreiv {to demand), ei^pdrreiv, 
 vpdma-Sai ; Iporrdv, ipioSai, iierd^av, 'urropeXv, dvia-Topw ; — (b) of 
 teaching and reminding: StSdo-Kciv, TraiSiveiv, dvoui/tv^cr/cctv, inro- 
 lt.t.p.v^o-Kav (with both of these the Gen. of the thing is more 
 usual) ; — (o) of dividing and cutting into parts : Saiea-Sat, Suu- 
 piiv, riixvav, Stave/ictv, Karavqitai/ ; — (d) of depriving and taking 
 away: o-repiiv, aTroarepeiv; orepia-KeLV, crvXav, dfJMipeLcrSai, ; — (e) of 
 concealing or hiding from : Kpvtrrav (KcvSav Poet.) ; — (f ) o[ put- 
 ting on and of, clothing and unclothing, surrminding with : h>- 
 Suetv, CKSveiv, afi^ieyyvvai, irepij3dX\£aSai, 
 
 "H-er. 3, 1. Trefiil/as Kafi^vffiqs is AXyvTTTov K-fjpma atr es "Afxaci). Hvyarepa 
 (asked Amasis for his daughter). 58. airoiis l/coric TdKavTa erpri^av 
 (demanded of them a hundred talents). X. C. 1. 2, 60. obSiya irdmoTe iiia^hv 
 Tris awoixrlas iirpd^aro Saucpdrris {neaer demanded a reward of any one for 
 his instruction). H. 4.1,21. 'KpnnriSas alrei rhv 'AyrifftXaov dirKlras 
 T€ es Stsxt^iovs Kal Tre\ra(TTas &Wovs Toffoirov s (asks of Agesilaus 
 about two thousand hopUtes, etc.). Cy. 6. 2, 35. rit els rpo(piiv ScoyTa i^eri- 
 Cere rovs vp' v/uv (inquire of those under you respecting the things necessary for 
 food). Eur. Hipp. 254. iroW^SiStScrK ei ydp fjC & iroXvs $Iotos (teaches me 
 much). Antiph. 5. 131, 14. 6 xptij/os Kal 7i ifiireipia r& )U^ koXus exo»'Ta 
 ixSiSdcTKei Tovs ay^pciTTovs (teach menwhatis not proper). Her. 1. 136. 
 Kat^evovff I Tohs 7r«?Sas rpia fxovva (they teach boys three things only). 6, 
 138. yKwffffdv re r^v ArriKJiv Kcd rpSirovs rZv ^A^vaiav iSiSatTKOv 
 Tov s iraiSas. X. An. 3.2, 11. ava/jLv^fru vfxa s Kal robs KiySuj/ov s(l wiU 
 remind you of the dangers). Hier. 1, 3. vire fivqods fie rh kv t^j ISiaiTiKa 0^. 
 Her. 7, 121. rpets jioipas 6 "Eep^yis Sacrdfieyos Trdvra rby ire^iy trr pa- 
 t6p (having divided all the land army into three divisions). Ttfiyeiv, StaipeTy tl 
 liepri, ixoipas (to cut, to divide something into parts). X. Cy. 7. 5, 13. 6 Kvpjs rh 
 ffT pdrev/jia Kareye t/ie StiSeKa fiepri (divided the atiny into twelve parts). 
 PI. Polit. 283, d. die\ciifiey ai/TTjy (rijy fierprjTiKTjy) Svo fiepTj. X. Cy. 4. 
 6,4. rhy fiSyoy fwt koi tpiKoy ira7Sa a(pei\ero r^v ^j/vx-fiy (deprived my 
 only thild of life). Eur. Hec. 285. rhv trdyra S' HxPov ^iJtap ey pi afcl- 
 \eto. Dem. Aphoh. 839,13. rijy Ti/ii)y aroffrepeT pie (robs me of honor). 
 Phil. 54, 50. T^ Tj fieT e pa tj /xas airoo'Te pe7 (6 ^iMiriros). Kpiinrw c e rh 
 h-rixTiiia (I conceal the misfortune from you). Eur. Hipp. 912. ou /iiiy <pi\ov5 
 ye, Kiirt fjLa?\J^ov ^ <pl\ovs, Kp^irreiy SiKaioy ff ds, iraTep, ^vsir p a^ias. X 
 Cy. 1. 3, 17. irtus fieyas fitKphy exwy x*^'^*'"» erepoy iralSa p.iKp6v, /ley ay 
 ^X^v^^ X^^^^^* etc Si eras avT6y, rhy fiey eavTov ^k etv ov Tifj.'pietre,r)tvZk 
 iKfiyov airhs eveSv (a large boy stripped another S7nall boy of kis large tunic and put 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
406 SYNTAX. L^ 28f. 
 
 his oion tunic on him)- Her. 1, 163. reTxos irepiPaK^aSfai T^f TrrJAtj/ {^ 
 surround the city with a wall). 
 
 Rem. 3. Several of the above verbs are sometimes otherwise constnicted, 
 commonly, however, with some difference in the sense expressed ; thus, a i t e ?» 
 Ti Trapd Tivos; iparav Tiv a irepi riyos; with verbs of dividing and cut- 
 ting into parts, not infrequently the preposition us, sometimes also , icari, 
 is joined with the Ace, e. g. Tohs TroX^ray els e j fiolpas St^7\oj/ ; or the word ftipos, 
 etc., is governed directly by the verb, and the object to be divided is put in the 
 Gen., depending on litpos, etc., e. g. Sua noipas Ai/Smy iriij'Tmv SieiAev {ie divided all 
 the Lydians into two parts), Her. 1, 94 ; passively, SiSfKa llepaSiv ipv\aX ti-gp-qi/Tiu 
 [the Persians are divided into twelve tribes), X. Cy. 1. 2, 5. Verbs of depriving 
 and taking away, have the following constructions : 
 
 (n) airotTTepfTv and a^iaipeTffSiai with the Ace. of the thing alone, e. g 
 Uas tiy ouTos 4^e\oL rk aWSrpLa airofrrepeTt/ ; {how'could he'bewiUin/j to 
 take away the things of others?),^^Ag. 4^, 1. X^Xcc^ai ri Ka\ws lyi/MiS' 
 fi4j/a iprovisa) koX ireiroLTj/j.ev a a<^aipouyTiii {take ay;qy, 4esiroy 
 the provisions), O. 5, 18 ; the Ace. of the person alone is tut rarely found; 
 thus with a,(j>atpcT(T^ai {to rob, take from), e. g. Aaioc. 4. 32, 27. rois 
 iroXirais ovK 4^ iaov xPVti^, oA\^ Taj's fi^y atpaipqiiievos, roi/s Se 
 rinrTcav ovdevhs a^lav rijy STjfioKpaTLay aTro<[}aivei. 
 
 (b) (rrepeiv, avoo'Tepetv, (TTeoiaKetv, a(f>aip€7(r^al Tivd riysry 
 often. 
 
 (c) (rTepeTv, iiiroare peTv rivd tivos, like spoliare aliquera aliqva re,to 
 deprive one of something, see ^ 271,2; but a<^aip£7iri9riii very seldoni 
 has this construction, and indeed only in the sense of to restrain, to pre- 
 vent. Ol o^i^Ofieyot apaipovvrai Tas fihv Kivas Tov evpelv ihv Xayw, 
 aiJT oh s Se t^s oxffeKeias, X. Ven. 6, 4. 
 
 {i\) a(fjatpe7fr^at, aTroffre pi7y with the Gen. of the person and the Ace. 
 of the thing ; they then signify to take something from some one, to withdraw 
 something from some one. This is a more mre construction. 01 irKtovmTai 
 rSiv iWcav a^aipov^ev 1 xp^M'*'ra kaoTovs So/coSfri irKovri^uv 
 (taking their propeiiy from others, seem to enrich themselves), X. C. 1. 5, 3. 
 ^vfifiax^as a<patpovfji.eyoy ttjs TrSXeus {= rwv voXiruv) Dem. 
 Cor. 232, 22. "EX ti ^ovXovtol iniTTfBevstu koXuv, ovSevhs air o ff T'f p ft 
 (ret Kuvrj^effiojjX. Ven. 12, 8. "OsTtSifiTj £Waiv eavThv airoaTcpui', 
 acr<l>a\eias SeiTctt (properly, aliis se subducens, i. e. ab aliis desciscens; kounhv 
 is here to be considered as the Ace. of the thing), Th. 1, 40. 
 
 Hem. 4. On the double Accusative with the verbs ireO-eii/, lirorpiveiv, lw<d- 
 peiv, irpoKoKeTa^ai, iLvaytcd^^ty, see § 278, 4. 
 
 4. An Accusative of the object acted upon, and an Accusa- 
 tive of the predicate (which is often an adjective), is used with 
 the verbs mentioned under § 240, 2, when they are changed 
 from the passive to the active ; hence two Accusatives stand 
 with verbs signifying to make, to constitute, e. g. ttoluv, TiSevai, 
 redder e; to choose, to appoint, e. g. alpiia-^ai, creare, etc.; to consider ^ 
 represent, and regard as something, to declare, to know, e. g. vo/ii- 
 ^€iv, ry^ua-Bai, etc. ; to say, to name, to praise, to chide, e. g. Xe'yciv. 
 6vop.d£fiiv, KoXuv ; to give, to take, to receive, e. g. irapaXa.puv Se- 
 \t<T!iai, etc.; to jnoduce, to increase, to form, to teach, to educate. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 281.] ACCUSATIVE CASE. 407 
 
 KSpos Toils <j>i\ovs 4iroiTi<re nKov<rlovs (made his friends rich). IIoi- 
 Zeieiv Tiva (ro<j>ov (to educate one wise, i. k. make wise ly education). No/il- 
 (fty,riyi7(r^al riva SySpo cty a^ 6 v {to think,regard,oonsid^ one a goodman). 
 Dem. Cor. 5,43. ot QcttoXoI kuI &iifitt!oi (piKov, ebepyiri\v, <raTrjpa rhp 
 tlKiTTTTov TiyoSv TO. 'O v lid (( I V Ttvb, aoipiaTiiv (to call one a sophist). 
 Alpeio'^ai Tica aTpaTiiy6v (to choose one a commtinder). X. Cy. 5. 2,14. 
 rbj* Tafipiav aivSeiirvov itapi\afiey. Dem. Chers. 106, 66.Tii\Eus ^yuyt 
 ■•\o5toc riyovytai ffvufidx""^) ■"iaTtv, dvoiav. Andoc. 3. 24, 7. ^ 
 tlpi/yri rbv S^/ioy Tuv'A^valan' v<jni\hy ?ipi koX KareffTifo'ey la'X'>p6y. 
 
 Ebm. 5. On the use of the Inf. eTvat with the Ace., see § 269, Eem. 1. 
 
 i 281. Remarks on the use of the Accusative with the 
 
 Passive. 
 
 1 As tha Greek considers thepassive as a reflexive (§ 251, 1), it follows that, 
 on the change of the Act. to the Pass., the Ace. may remain with every transitive 
 verb which in the Act. takes an Ace. of a thing as the olgect acted upon, e. g. 
 (miirrouo-i rii iihana), K6'irT ovrai Ttt jUeTouro, which may mean, either (Aa* 
 they strike themselves on theforeh&xd, they strike their forehead, or they Jet their forehead 
 he struck, they are struck on the forehead; Her. 7, 69. 'Apd^ioi (eipas vircQair- 
 tiiv 1 ^ tray, Al^loves Se TrapSaXeas re /col Keovreas iyafi fi4pot (the Arabians 
 were girt viith the zeira, but the Ethiopians were clothed with leopard and lion-sJans). 
 
 2. Hence, when the verbs mentioned under § 280, 1 and 3, which in the Act. 
 govern two accusatives, are changed into the Pass., the Ace. of the/)erson or of 
 the object acted upon, is changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing, or ths 
 e^ect remains, (a) Ovtos fievrol 6 eiratySs iari KaX6s, h y ah yvy iiraiyei mr 
 iySpSy a^lay Trurreiea^ai (this is honorable praise by which you are now praised), 
 PI. Lach. 181,b. Tpavftariff^els to wd (sc. rpaifiara), (wounded with many 
 wounds), Th. 4, 12. "Oyofta rh fiev irpSroy ZdyK^ii ^y inrh Tuy'SmiXay k\7\- 
 dei(ra (ti 'StKe\la), 6, i (was called by its first name). 'H Kpltrts, i/y iKpi^r) 
 (to which he was condemned), Lys. Agor. 134, 50. To iieyiara Tip.7i^rjyai, 
 S. O.K. 1203. Aea-p.hv Svs e^-liyv crroy sAKerai Se^eis, Eur. Hipp. 1237. 
 So a(ps\ei(rdai, fij/uoSir&ai /ifydXa, p\dirTe(r^ai TroWd. — (b) Moi/tri/c))!' imh 
 AdjxTvpov iraiZ tv^ eis, prj r o p ikt] y Se fiir' AvTitpStyTos (having been educated 
 in music and r/irforic), PI. Meiiex. 236, a; so SiSax&^i'aiTexi'l'' li*i "rivas 
 (to be taught an art by soine one) ; ipairriS'rjyai T^y yydfiTiv !m6 riyos (to be 
 asked an opinion), rf; koX oiniiaets rh, oAtb iiipii Siayep.rid'tiTai (be di- 
 vided into the same parts), PI. L. 737, e. "Tirh fiaaiKius ■neTrpayp.fVos robs 
 <p6pous (having demanded the tribute), Th.8,5. "A^aipe&ijyai, atroaTepn- 
 ^rjyai r\y ICjixh" vt6 Tiyos. Kpv<pSrT)yai ti (celari aliquid). HeKrdrjyai 
 T^y ocoxtupijiriy (§ 278,4). 'AjitpUyyvaStai xi'ruyaoaca.'[aoTi\j-withi\\& ra&axi- 
 :ng to put a garment on one's self, hnt not I let myself be clothed by another, tlie garment 
 was put on me by another; but iySv^yai x'™™ (to be clothed with a tonic) is in use, 
 
 3 As the Greek may form a personal Pass. (\ 251, 4), of every intransitiva 
 
 fcrb. wliic6, has its object in the Gen. or Dat., e. g. aiicf>.ovfmi, i)ii.e\f\^y, ipdoy 
 
 18 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
408 SYNTAX. [{§ 282, 283, 
 
 ov/iai, i^ovit^v ; so may it also with such transitiTe verbs as have, together 
 ■with the Ace. of the thing, a Dat. of the person, the Dat. of the person being 
 changed into the Nom., but the Ace. of the thing remaining. Th. 1. 1, 26. oi 
 rSiv 'AStrji/aluv iir irer pa/i.ii'oi ri]y <pv\aKi]V (guibus eustodia dernandata 
 erat, those of the Athenians who had been enlrusted ivith the guard, from ivirpeira Tivl 
 rijv ^v\afciiy). 5, 37. ot Kopiv^ioi toSto iTre iTTa\/i.i vai ayex^po"" 
 (having been commanded these things) ; 1, 140. ci ^vyxcp^l^'^Te, koI &K\ art fie7- 
 (ov ev^i/s iirnax^'h''^''^^ (jO" ""^^ ^ commanded something greater). X. 
 An. 2. 6, 1. ol tTrpartiyoi aTroTfnj^4vTGS ris ice^aActs ^TeXei^TTjCow. 
 
 J 282. (3) Dative. 
 
 1. The Dat. is the WTiere-case, and hence denotes : (a) in a 
 local relation, the place at or in which the action of the subject 
 occurs ; — (b) in a causal relation, the object upon, which the 
 action of the subject shows itself or becomes visible — the ob- 
 ject which shares in or is concerned in an action. — This object 
 is : (a) a person, or a thing considered as a person, e. g. /3oj;5S 
 Tots TroAiTats Or T17 TrdXet; (y8) a thing, or an object considered as 
 a thing, e. g. ayaXXo/iat rg vikt). In this way the Dat. may be 
 treated under three divisions. In the first, the Dat. is regarded 
 as a local object, in the second, as a personal object; in the 
 third, the object is a thing, and is called the Dat. of the thing or 
 instrumental Dat. 
 
 ^283. A. Local Dative. 
 
 1. The Dat., as a local object, designates the place in (by, 
 near, at) which an action occurs. This use of the Dat. is al- 
 most exclusively poetical ; in prose, prepositions are commonly 
 joined with the Dative. 
 
 II. I, 663. avrap *A^iW€iis eSSe fivxv K^ttrl-ris euTr^KTou [slept in the comer of 
 the tent), ir, 595. "EwiSi olKia vaimv (dwelling in houses in Hellas). P, 210. 
 KV[ia TToXv^KoLff^oio ^a\(i(r(T7]S alyia\(^ fisydXw ^pe^erai (roars upon the 
 shore). S. Trach. 171. (e^v) tV ■^a^aihv tpriylv avZriaai ivoTe A mSSyi (that the 
 beech tree once, uttered an orach at Dodona). Here belong the Locative forms very 
 common in prose, viz., mapaSrHvi, "EXem'in, Xlvbot, 'Icra/ioT, olmi, 'A^i/ritn, 
 liXaTDLoa-i, etc. (at Marathon, etc.) : also, rairri, Tp5e, here, f, where. So also, 
 Od. i>, 227. TlvXioitT L p.4y e^oxa Sti/iara vaiuj/. 
 
 2. Hence the Dat. is used also with the attributive pronoun 
 ouTos, to express the idea of together imth. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 284.J DATIVE CASE. 409 
 
 Her. 6, 32. t4s ir6\ias iveiri/iirpairav avToTai Toiirt Ipoiori (iliey burned 
 the cities together imih the temples — cities, temples and all). X. H. 6. 2, 3.5. at 
 airb SupaKouirwi' vijes airacrai iiXairav outois ivSpifftv {iheships were taken 
 together with the men). 
 
 3. The local relation is transferred to the time in which some- 
 thing happens, and then from the time to the circumstances 
 zmder which something happens. Hence the Dat. denotes the 
 time (definite) and circumstcmces of an action 
 
 In prose with fin^pa, vvkt'i, ivnvl, ^rei, ivimirif, &pcf and the like, in conaection 
 with attributive demonstratives, ordinals, and adjectives, as trpSrcpos, So-repoi, 
 imiv, irape^iiy and the like. The Dat. therefore usually expresses definite 
 time. TjSe rp vvktI, ToiirTj rp rifiipi}, ixelvri r-g f)ii.4pif, tj; ourp 
 yvKrlj TToKKois ^rect, Tplru firivl, rp aurp &pi}, t^ ^niivTi %ret, 
 iKeii/cp T^ eT€i, T(p iffTiptp eT€f, Toirif T (p 4ytavT^, etc. X. An. 
 4. 8, 1. ry v pi Tig ^ficpoi atpiKovro iirX t)>v ■K0Taii.6D (the first day or on the first 
 day). Also &pa xeiiiavos [in time of vnnter), yov^Tji/la {at the time of new Tnoon) ; 
 likewise, Vlaya^paiois, Atovvcriois, Tpaya>3o7s KaivoTs, at the time of the Panathenaea, 
 etc. The preposition iv is joined with the Dat. : (a) when the substantive 
 stands without an attributive, e. g. iv riiiipi}, iv vvktI, In &cpei ; often also when 
 a, demonstrative stands with it, e. g. iv toutw t^ ivrnvr^ ; (b) usually, when a 
 space of time is to be indicated ; hence with substantives in connection with, 
 cardinals and the adjectives o\iyos, fipax^s, iuKp6s, iroxis, etc., e. g. 81^7070* 
 iv TpiaXv Tiiiipais (in three days, in the space of three days), 'X. An. 4. S,S 
 Od. f, 253. i-jr\4ofiey Bopey afiixa aKpae'i Ka\^ (with a good wind). H. a, 
 418. Tiji 0-6 KaKTJ alirri tckov iy /leydpouriv (under an evil destiny). Her. 6, 139. 
 iircav fioftri aye/iip avTrifiephv tnivs i^aviffy ix riji u/iCTep»)i ^j rijv rjiifTepniv, 
 Tiire TrapaitiKTopify (when a ship shall come with a north wind). 
 
 § 284. B. The Dative as a Personal Object. 
 
 1. Both the Dat. of the person and of the. thing denote an 
 object, upon or in which the action of the subject shows itself 
 or becomes visible ; both denote an object which participates 
 in, or is concerned in, the action of the subject ; accordingly^ 
 tho language regards the Dat. of the person and of the thing 
 an the same. The distinction is merely this, that the former is 
 a personal object, or is considered as such, and consequently 
 has the power of will ; the latter is a mere thing, or is consid- 
 ered as such, and of course without wiU. As the idea denoted 
 by the term where, is intermediate to that denoted by ivhence 
 and whither, so the Dat. (the Where-case), when it is a person. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
410 SYNTAX. 
 
 [5 284 
 
 stands in contrast with the Ace. {the Whither-caae) ; when it 
 is a thing, in contrast with the Gen. (the Wheiice-case). 
 
 2. The Ace. denotes an object effected, accomplished by the 
 action of the subject, or the object acted upon; the Dat. of the 
 person, on the contrary, denotes an object merely aimed at by 
 the action of the subject and sharing in it; the action of the 
 subject is indeed employed on the object and becomes mani- 
 fest in it, yet it does not make it a passive object, but the ob- 
 ject itself appears in distinction from the subject as active; 
 between the subject and the object a reciprocal action takes 
 place. The Gen. denotes the immediate cause ; the Dat. of the 
 thing, on the contrary, a mediate, indirect cause (the ground, 
 the means, the instrument) ; the Gen. denotes an object as 
 calling forth and producing the action of the subject; the Dat. 
 of the tiling, only such an object as exliibits in or upon itself 
 the action of the subject. 
 
 Remakk 1. In poetry a local limit or o6y«cJ is very often considered as a 
 person, and is indicated by the Dat. ; this sometimes occurs, though but seldom, 
 in prose. II. o, 369. irStri Sr^oXcriv X"?" ayla-xovres (raisiny up the hands to 
 all the gods). So atpeff^ai, iiralpeirdM Sopu Tivi. II. t, 709. Alfiyy KSK^ijii- 
 yos K'f]<j>i<riSi {dwelling at the Cephisian lake}, t], 218. irpoKoXiffaaTO x^PI'^V (^' 
 cliallenged to the contest). Th. 1, 13. 'Ajueij/oK\ijs 2a/i^ois ^Adey. 3,5. avrois 
 MeXeas AAkwv a.(piKyetTaL. 
 
 Rem. 2. Erom this use of the Dat., the fact may be explained, why many 
 verbs of motion compounded with the prepositions eij, irp6s, M, etc, take 
 their object in the Dat. ; also why most adverbs with the Dat. (or Locative) in- 
 flection [5 101, 2, (b)], may express both the relation of rest (local Dat.) and 
 the direction whitlier (personal Dat.), e. g. xoM^'i humi, humum; so, likewise, the 
 adverbs in -)i, e. g. Sw?; those in -m, e. g. iya, k(£tm, etc. ; those in -o i, e. g. 
 tteSoi, humi, kumum; iirm^S!, hue and hie (but of, oVoi, voT, always denote the 
 direction whitlier). 
 
 3. Most verbs, which take the personal Dat., as the objec' 
 sJiuring or participating m the action, express the idea of associa- 
 tion and union, e. g. SiSwat, Trapi^eiv, iiricr^eto-^at, apnr6,t,iiv ti nvi. 
 The following classes of words, therefore, govern the Dative: — 
 
 (1) Verbs expressing mutual intercourse, associating with, min- 
 ing idth, participation. — Dative of communion, e. g. o/iiXciv, 
 luyvmai, p-iyvvfT^ai, kolvovv, KOLvovcr&aL, Kowuivelv, 8i-, KaraXXaTTaV 
 (to reconcile), St-, KaTaXXimcrS-ai (to reconcile one's self to), ^cvoC- 
 tr^ai, cnrci'Secr^at or cr?rov8as iroiao'^at, trpdrTCLV (agere cum aliguo)', 
 iiTreiV, Xeytir, hiaXiyta^ai, eup^eo-^ai, KarapaaSai, etc. ; also adj ec- 
 lives and adverbs, sometimes even substantives which express 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 284. 
 
 DATIVE CASE 411 
 
 a Similar idea, e. g. koivo's, a-6vTpo<j>oi, (rvficfxavoi, cruyyeirq';, /ieramos ; 
 many other words of a similar signification, compounded with 
 aw and /icm, also ■\vith iv, Trpos, and Trapd. 
 
 'O/ilKei roTs &ya^ots av&pdivois (associate with good men). Her. 3, 
 131. i AenoidiSris noKvKpdreX &iil\Tiae. 6,21. ■ir6\ies aSrat fiAKuTTo. ah- 
 K'tlKrifft 4^e iyil)^ri<rav (cultivated hospitality with each other). — ESxojuoi 
 Tois aco?j (Z pray to the gods). X.H:.2.2, 19. <rir4vSe<r^ai 'A^ijvalois (to 
 make a treaty with the Athenians). 3.2,20. a\\i\\ots a-irovScts iirofliirav- 
 To (ihey^made treaties with each other). Isocr, Paneg. 42. 9. ai irpd^ets alirpayi- 
 7ei/rjfteVai KoivaX iraaiv Tfiilv KaTiAslib^a-av (common to tts all). On the 
 Gon. with Koii/i{j, see 5 273, 3, (b). 
 
 (2) Verbs of contending, litigating, vying with, e. g. ipi^ew, 
 ua,)(€<T3ai, TToXc/jLtiv, ayuvL^eaSai (usually Trpos nva), Si/ca^ecr^ai, a/i- 
 tjmPyfrav, (rrouTidt,av, etc. ; also of going against, encountering, 
 meeting and approaching, and the contrary, as those of yield- 
 ing, e. g. VTTOJ Tfivai and v<^icrTa.<x^ai ; airavrav, vwavrav, vTravnd^av, 
 wXi^o-ta^etv, Trekii^eiv, f.yylXf.iv, etc. ; Akuv, wrcocav, ytapeiv, Trapa^wptiv, 
 etc. ; the adjectives and adverbs TrXijo-tos, ivavrio's, 7re'\as, etc. 
 (seldom eyy^s). 
 
 OfEWrives aySpelus to7s ne'p<raij i fiax^cravT o (fought bravely with t/ie 
 Persians). Mii liKere tois iroXe/iiois (do not yield to the enemy). Xpij 
 TO is ex^poTs TTJs TjfieTepas (x^pas) irapaxwp^ (To i, Isocr. Ai'chid. 118, 13. On 
 the Gen., see § 271,2. 'Tiro<rTrjvai aiiToTs (Uepffais) 'A^yoToi. toA^^- 
 irafTes, ivliaiffca' airois (having dared to encounter them), X. An. 3. 2, 1 1 . 'Ttpla- 
 Tac^at ^vfL(j>opais, Th. 2, 61. "Ofioioy S/jioia aei ireKii^Gi (like always 
 draws to like), PI. Symp. 195, b. "IQovto ayrlot ro'uri AaKfSai/jjiyloKri (encamped 
 opposite the Lacedaemonians), Her. 6, 77. Tvpavvos anas ix^P^^ iXev^epia /col 
 v6p.ois ivavTlos. On the Gen., see § 273, Eem. 9. 
 
 (3) Verbs o£ commanding, entreating, counselling, inciting, en- 
 couraging; oi foUovjing, accompanying, serving, obeying and diso- 
 beying, trusting and distrusting, e. g. ■Kpovra.Trf.w, imrdTTtiv, Trapat- 
 veiv, irapaKeXcveaSai, etc. (but KcXeveiv with Acc. and Inf.) ; hrecrSai, 
 aKoXov^ilv, SLa.Si)(€aSai (to succeed to, take the "place of) ; irei^ea- 
 &ai; vTraKoveiv, airei/^CLV, Tricrreveiv, ireTroo^ivai, etc.; the adjectives 
 and adverbs aKokovSo?, aKoXov&w;, «ro/ief<os, StaSop^os, e^s, i<j>e^s. 
 
 X. Cy. 8. 6, 13. TovTuf S>v (instead of h) vvu vp.iv TrapaKeXevopai oudev 
 ro7s dovKois irposTdTTw (I enjoin upon the slaves none of these things whick 
 Z now command you). Her. 3, 88. 'Apd$tot ovSap-a KaT-fiKovffay iirl Sotj\o(Titrri 
 n. 4 pari IT I (never obeyed, were never subject to the Persians). 6,14. ivavpuix^ov 
 kfrjKovcrrifTayTes Toifft irrpaTTjyoTfft (they fougltt in disobedience to their 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
412 SYNTAX. [i 284 
 
 commanders). X. Cy. 1. 1,2. rks ayeXas rairas iSoKoviiin 6pa.f lioWov. i^eXovaai 
 ireJ&eo-aai Tois vofisva-iv, ^ Toiis aiSipti-n-ovs toTs &pxov<ri {more unlling 
 to obey their shepherds, than men their rulers). 8.6,18. t$ rmepiv^ ayye\a 
 {<t>a<ri) rhv vvKTepivhy SiaSex^'r^ai {that the night messenger succeeds the one fit 
 the day). PL Rp. 400, d. eiiKoyla &pa kcu eiiapiioa-Tia Kol eiffxwoa-viiri Kol evpvSt- 
 u.ia ein&eia, aKoKov^et Eur. Andr. 803. KaKhv kkk^j SidSoxov. PI. 
 Phaed. 100, c. o-jcijTrei Sii ret 4|5j ^ksIuois {consider the things next in ordei 
 to those). 
 
 (4) Expressions of similarity and dissimilarity, of likeness 
 and unlikertess, of agreem,ent and disagreement, e. g. ioiKtvai, 
 
 OfJLOLOVV, o/JiOiOvor^aL, o/J.OLO'i, o/iotms, icros, lerajs, £y«.<^£pijs and 7rpos<^e/)iJS 
 (similar) , TrapanX-qiTio'Sy iTa.paTr\-r)(rui>^, o avro'S (idem), a/xa; Sia^opos 
 (discordant, hostile), Sia.<j><ovo';; and very many words compounded 
 with 6/AoB, (rWj /JLerd, e. g. o/iovoeiVj 6/j.oyX(i>rTOs, o/juiw/jio^, (jvjj,(f}Wiiiv, 
 crvjjLfjxiivo's, crwoiSos. 
 
 Her. 1, 123. rcfcy TrciS-as r^s Ki5pou T^tri IgjOtoD 6 fio to6 fxeyos {likening, com- 
 paring the sufferings of Cyrus with his own). 6,23. & 'Vtiylov -ripavm Sid<popos 
 {?iv) To?(n ZayKKaioiffi {was hostile to the Zanclean^). X. Cy. 7. 1, 2. wtt- 
 Kiff/jLeyot Trdi/res ^(raf oi irepl Thtf Kvpof ro7s avTo7s r^ Kupat SirAoiS {were 
 furnished with the same arms as Cyrus). 5. 1,4. d^olav r a,1s ZovKais etx^ 
 rijj/ i(r^ra {lldy^eta). 7. 5, 65. 6 (Tidripos avitrol tovs ao-^ej/els toTj iffx^' 
 po7s iv Tip ■woXejjup {makes the weak equal to the strong). Isocr. Paneg. 43, 13 
 XaX^T^ov i(TTiv fcrous rohs \6yovs Tip fj.ey^^ei tu>v epyuv 4^evps7i/. Th. 1, 49. 
 7] vavjiax^o. ^eC^/^^X^? irpocrfpepTjs (^i'). 
 
 Kem. 3. On the Comparatio compendiaria with expressions of likeness and 
 similarity, see § 323, Kem, 6. On the Gen. with iyyis, TrKijcrlov, 5 273, Eem. 9. 
 The coordinate copulative particle xal, is not seldom employed with adjectives 
 of lilccness and similarity instead of tlie Dative. Her. 1, 94. AvSol vS^wuri p^r 
 Trapa.Tr\ri(rloi<rt XP^'™"''''" "al "EWrjKes (^"EAAtjo'i or toij "EfjJivuv), the 
 Lydians and Greeks have similar laws, instead of the Lydians have laws dmilar to 
 the Greeks. So 4v X<T{p, iffa, d/xolois, ajsavrtlis, kot^ tout^ nat, etc. PI. Ion. 500, 
 d. ovx ipiolais TreiroiiiKcun k a \ "Op-ripos. Comp. similis ac, atque. There also 
 occur, particularly in Attic prose, the particles of comparison, ij, Sjirep with 
 foot, 6 aiT6s. Dem. Phil. 3. 119, 33. t by air bv rpdirav, Ssirep, k. ,. \. 
 
 (5) Expressions signifying to be becoming, suitable, pting, 
 to please, and the contrary, e. g. irpi-Kov, ap/j-oTreiv, Trpo^Keiv (with 
 an Inf. following), TrpcTrovrws, aTrpeirZ^, €iKos icmv, eiKoTwi, opitTKav 
 (avSaveiv Ion.). 
 
 PI. Apol. 36, d. Hody irpeTrei avSpl irevtiTt; {what then is becoming a poor 
 man?). Her. 6, 129. eavr^ apea-Tas opxcero {he danced pleasing himself ). 
 X. Cy. 3. 3, 39. &petrKeiy {ip.tv ireipapTat {they endeavor to please you). 
 
 (6) Verbs signifying to agree with, to assent to, to reproach, to 
 be angry, to envy, e. g. bp.o\oyuv, etc. ; /if/i^eo-^at (to reproach, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 284. 
 
 DATIVE CASE. 41'J 
 
 liilLtftarBoL TLva means to blamie), XoiSopeurSaL (to reproach), imn- 
 fiSv, eyKoXav (rivi ri), imKakeXv (jivi ri), lmir\r[rTav, ovaSi^av, evox^eiv 
 (more seldom with the Ace), etc. ; Sv^iom^ai, fipiixova-Sai, xaA,e- 
 Tratr/etj/, etc.; ff>&ovetv (rivi tivos, i 274, 1, more Seldom nvi n), 
 ^acrKoIvav (to envy; PcuTKaivav rivd, to slander). The Ace. of 
 the thing very often stands with the Dat of the person. 
 
 Her. 3, 142. ^7^; rk (= &) -rif veKas ivnrX'ti(r(ra, abrhs tcarii Siiiaiuv ou 
 sroi^o-o) (what I rebuke in my neighbor I mil not do myself). Th. 4, 61. o!i to7s 
 SpX^'" 0ov\oiievois iiiii^oiLatfiOOJa.To'is fmaKoitiv kToinoT4pois olaiv 
 {Ido not reproach those xmshing to rule, but, etc.). Deni. 01. 2. 30, 5. iivdx^^^ 
 Tlfiiv S *£\nnros {gave tremble to us). X. An. 2. 5, 13. KiyvTrrious, oXs liiKurra 
 u/tSs vVy ywiiaKoa Tedufiai/Urnvs, KO\a(re<r&e {mth whom I know you are angry). 
 Cy. 1.4, 9. & ^etos aiiT^ iKotS opetro, T^jf ^paff^Tiyra 6p^v (reproached him), 
 4. 5, 9, Kva^iipris ifiptfiovro Tiy Kip^ /caJ Toij M^Sois t^ KaTaMTr6vTas 
 airhv iprijioy ofxso'S'o' (was wroth with Cyrus, etc.). 
 
 (7) Verbs of lielpmg, averting, and being useful, e. g. apr^exv, 
 afivveiv, aXiieiv, nf/Mpeiv, ^arjSelv, iinKovpeLV, mroXoyeicrSai, Xvo-ltc- 
 Xeiv, ivapKtiv, y^awfiuv and the like (but ovivavoL and &<peX€iv 
 with Ace. { 279, 1.') ; also several verbs compounded with 
 (T&v, e. g. avu^ip^w (conducere), oaifwrpaTTetv, cruvcpyiiv, etc., and 
 many adjectives of the same and similar significations, and 
 the contrary, e. g. xp^a-ip-os, jSAaySepos (but fiXdurrav with Ace. 
 i 279, 1.), </>tXos, ix^pos, TToXquios, etc 
 
 X. R. Jj. 4, 5. ap^^ovtri t^ irAKei tuvtI a^eifei (they assist the city with all 
 their strength). Cy. 3. 3, 67. (at yvyaiKes) iKereiouffi irdvTas ft^ tpeiyeiv KaTa\nr6j/' 
 Tas, oAA.* &fivyai /foi aiiTaiS, Ktd TeKvois, /coi ctpitTtv avrois (to de- 
 fend them, their children and themselves). 4. 3, 2. Toirois ydp tpmnv avdyiaiv 
 ejyat irpo^ptas &A. e'| e 1 c (they say it is necessary to defend these). Eur. Or. 922. 
 {'OpeffTTjs) ^(^eAijtre t ifjiwpe^v irarpi, kom^v yuycuKa K&^eov KaraxTavtov 
 (unshed to help his father). PI. Ap. 28, u. ei Ttiimpiiafis llaTp6K\w t$ 
 cTaiptp rhv <p6vov (if you shall avenge the murder of your friend Patrodus, i. e. 
 if you shall avenge for him). 
 
 Hem. 4, The words <j)t\os, 4x^f^^' '"oXe inos axe also used as sub- 
 stantives, and govern the Gen. X. An. 3. 2, 5. Toij ixelvov 4x^i(rTovs 
 {his bitterest enemies). Hence the Dative stands, in general, with verbs and ad- 
 jectives of all kinds, when the action takes place for tha advantage, favor, honor, 
 harm, disadvantage of a person, or an object considered as a person (Dativus 
 commodi et inammodi), where the English uses the prepositions to or for. Here 
 belong particularly the rites performed in honor of a divinity, e. g. opxe7(r&<u 
 ro7s ftcois (to dance in honor of the gods) ; <rTe(pamv<rSiai fte^ (to crown one's self in 
 honor of the gods). Her. 6, 138. 'Apre/j-iSt iprijy iyeiv (to keep a feast in honor 
 of Diana). The Dative with K\oeu' (Poet., especially Epic), is also to here' 
 garded in the same way : kKv^I pm, listen to me favorably. Here belongs, also, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
114 SYNTAX. [i 284 
 
 the phrase, mostly poetic, Sexea-^al ti nvi, to receive something from some one, 
 since it involves the additional idea that the reception of the thing will he re- 
 garded as a relief, as agreeable, etc. to the person. Od. ir, 40. S>s &pa <pavi]ffas o 1 
 eSeJaro x'i^Ke'"' eVx"* {received from Mm [as a favor to him] the brazen spoar). 
 See Larger Gramm. Part. II. § 597, Rem. 3. 
 
 (8) Verbs of observing, finding, meeting with something in a 
 person. 
 
 "TvoKafj.pdi'ety Seitijj toiovto:, Sti eu/j&j)S Tts &i>dp<»Tros (sell. eo'Tij'), PI. 
 Rp. 598. d. "Erepa 8^, cos iome, tois <\> iKa^iv eipi\ Ka/i-ev, 421, e. ©apiroCiri 
 tiiiMara, iroKefiioi, ^Tav to7s evavriois irpdyfiara Koi a(rxo?^tas irvv^dvayrai 
 (when they perceive troubles and hindrances in those opposed to them), X. Hipp. 5. 8. 
 
 (9) The Dative stands with €(ttl{v) and eio-t(j'), to denote 
 the person, or tiring considered as a person, that has or possesses 
 something. The thing possessed stands as the subject in the 
 Nom., but the verb is translated by the English have, etc., and 
 the Dat. as the Nom. So also with yCyvea-^ai and inrdp^^etv (to 
 he, exist), also with l^m^ and oAAorptos. 
 
 Kvptp ?iv ii€yd\7i PaaiXeta ( Cyrus had a great Mngdom ). — ToTj irXovaiais 
 TToAA-dj Trapafiv^id (l>acrLy eJyai, PI. Up. 329, e. "^Hffaif Kpoltr^ S6o iraiSes, 
 Tier. 1, 44. When the above verbs are connected with a predicative abstract 
 substantive, they may be translated to prove, to serve. Xaipufiai' i/iol (ri/ita 
 uaWov, ^ oKpeXeid i(niv, X. C. 2. 3, 6. ( Ch. mihi detrimento potius est, qnam 
 emolumento, is an injury, proves an injury rather than a benefit). 
 
 Rem. 5. The possessive Dat., or the Dat. of the possessor, is to be distin- 
 guished from the Gen. of the possessor (4 273, 2). The Dative is used, when 
 it is asked, what the possession is (what has one ?), and the possession desig- 
 nated is contrasted with other possessions, e. g. Kip a ?iv yueyoAij fiariKsia, 
 Cyrus had (among other things also) a great kingdom ; the Gen. is used, when it 
 is aslied who the possessor is (whose is this 1), and the possessor is contrasted 
 with other possessors, e. g.Kipov ^f /leydKi) 0a<rt\cla, to Cyrus [and not to 
 another) belonged a great hingdcrm. The Dative describes the person as one to 
 whom the possejsion has been imparted, divided, given, and under whose con- 
 trol it now is ; the Genitive, as one who has gained possession, from whom the 
 possession has proceeded. 
 
 (10) The Dat. is usod universally when an action takes place 
 in reference to a person, or a thing considered as a person, so that 
 the person in some way shares or participates in it. Here be- 
 long the following instances : — 
 
 (a) In certain formulas, the Dative designates the person to whoso judgment, 
 consideration, or estimate, an idea is referred, and thus it first gains a definite 
 Buthority or value ; i. e. the assertion is made in view of the judgment, etc. of 
 llie person to whom the matter had been submitted. This Dat. therefore shows 
 v>hcn and under what circumstances the assertion is true, e. g. Her. 1, 14. o^TiSe'i 5S 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 284.] DATIVE CASE. 413 
 
 X6yai xpeaixivlf 06 Koplvhiav tov S'r)fw<rlav io-rly i &7i&avpis {recte aestin lanti hie 
 thesaurus mm est Corirdhiacus, in the judgment of one estimating the matter correcdy^ 
 it is not the Corinthian treasury). Th. 2, 49. rb ^Iw&ec cnrronevai auim oix &yav 
 ^€pfihv ^v {the external part of the tody, when one touched it, in the view of one touching 
 itf was not very hot). Here belong especially the Datives ehfiivri, 4^i6i/Ti, avapivTi, 
 iiff p$dvTt and the like, with local specifications. Her. 6, 33. oirb 'luviris cira\ha<t<r6- 
 ftei/os 6 yavi-iKhs (TTpoT^STcl iir^ api&repa isTrXiovtt tov*'E,Wi]STr6iiTov alpee irdyra 
 {the naval fhrce subjugated all parts of tlie Hellespont, upon the left as one sails into it^ 
 orivith respect to one sailing into it). X. Cy. 8. 6, 20. (KSpor) \4yeT<u KarcurTpiil/cur^cu 
 riirraT&, eft;/?), Strct ivplav elsPdyri oIksT fiexP^ 4pvdpus SraXdaai]! [which dwell as 
 one enters Syria [from the entrance ofS.] to the Red Sea) Also the expression ij 
 avy€\6i'Ti clireiv, to speak briefly, to say in a Word, p.-Dperly to say it when one 
 has brought the whole together into a small compass, has comprehended the whole, e. g. 
 "Avev ipx^yrui/ ovShv ttv oiSre KdKiif, oUre aya^hu y4voiTO, i)S fikv <rvve\6yTt 
 iVrreXv, oi/StmaVj X. An. 3. 1, 38. 
 
 (b) So also the Dat. of the person often stands ia connection with Sis, in 
 order to show that the thought which is expressed, is not a general one, but 
 has its value only according to the opinion of the person named. X. C. 4. 6, 4. 
 5 Tct nepl roils ^eoits fS^ifia eiSas op^us hy Tip.7v eita'efi^s wptff^ifos ejfjj (nos- 
 tro judicio, in our opinion). S. 0. C. 20. fioKp^y ydp, us y4poifrt, Tpoi/ffrdKTjS 
 iS6y [you went forward a great way, for an old man, as an old man viould view it) 
 Ant. 1161. Kpeojv yhp ^v ^ijAairds, iis ifJ-oi, wore {in my opinion). PI. Soph. 
 226, c. Toxetoy, Sis iptoi, irKei^iy iirvrdmis. Her. 3, 88. ydpiovs roiis irpiirovs 
 iyd/iee Tiiparfai d Aapelos {matrimonia ex Persarum judicio nobilissima, con- 
 tracted very honorable marriages, in the judgment of the Persians). Altogether 
 usual in the phrase i^Us el/ii tiv6s tivi, or oven without the Gen., fijtiis 
 elpti Tivi (I am of value in the estimation of some one). X. C. 1.2, 62. Ifiol ii,\p 
 6il SaiKpdTijs toiovtos bv iSSxei. rifi^s Sfio j eTyai t^ ir((Aei /iaWoy, fj Siavdrov 
 {rather merits honor than death, in the estimation, in the view of the city). PI. Symp. 
 185, b. o'St6s iariv i rris Oipavias fteoS epois Rol oipdvios /col iroK\ou Sfioj Koi 
 TTtfAei Kal i^idtraLS. 
 
 (c) Here belongs the use of the Dat. of a person with BovAo/ieycf, rfioij.ivu, 
 luriiei'tf, 4\iroiifvif, axSr-jpLivcf, irposiex^ii-htp and the like, in connection with 
 verbs, most frequently with efvoi and ylyv^a^ai. Such a participle gives 
 dofiniteness to an otherwise indefinite assertion. ^Iravrd a 01 fiovKonevcp 
 iarlj/ {if this is to you wishing it, if this is your wish). Out6s p. 01 rjSop.4t/a 
 airiiVTrjacv {he met me to my joy). Her. 9, 16. fjSopLivota-iv riiJ.~iv ol\6yoiye- 
 yiiiaai. Th. 6, 46. rip Ni/cf? TTpasaiX'>l'-^'"f ^^ ''^ '^^P' ''"'' '^y^o-ralay 
 (were as Nicias expected). PI, Kp. 358, d. aAA' Bpa, et irot fiovKoneya, (sc. 
 iffrtr), S \iya, whether what I say pleases you). 
 
 (d) The Dat. of the personal pronouns, first and second persons, is often 
 nsed, not because they are really necessary for the general sense, but to show 
 that the statement is made in a familiar, humorous, and pleasant manner. This 
 IS called the Ethical Dat. {Dativiis ethicus). X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. 6pav 5J) rhy it6<riui» 
 for Trdirvov, ilifiKeTruy avT^, e\eyey {6 Kvpos)- ^n MTep, us KoAcJs p.01 i vdit 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
tl6 SYNTAX. [i 284 
 
 Tor (0 mother, htM beautiful grandfather is, in my eyes). 15. ^k S4 fie KaTaKiirrii 
 iy^liSsi Ktd fid^u tTrireieiv, Jirav /lev ii/ Ilepaats &i oTfjtai or o l iKeifovs Tohs aya^oht 
 ri ir6^iK& ^(jSlcis vixiifffiv (to enATiFY Tou, / think I shall easily surpass those 
 skilled in foot eterciees). 
 
 (11) The Dative often stands with the Perf. Pass, (rarely 
 \vitli other tenses of the Pass.), to denote the active person or 
 agent. The Pass., in this case, expresses a state or condition, 
 and the Dat. represents the author of this condition at the same 
 time as the person for whom this condition exists, while by wd 
 virith the Gen., the author merely is expressed. 
 
 Her 6, 123. 3j /tot irpSrepov 5eS^\ftfTai {as Itas beenhefore shown by me). 
 t)ein. Aphob. 844, 1. fte? Slijyfiicrcar^ai rk Toiroo ir eitpayflipo. ttepi ^jx&v [it is 
 necessary to describe what has been done by him). 01. 1. 26, 27. rl ir eirpaXTat 
 toTs S\Aoii; (whoa has been done by others ?). In this way a Perf. Act., which 
 is wanting, may be supplied, e. g. toSt^ /loi KtKeK-tai {I have said this). 
 
 (12) So also the active person or agent stands regularly in 
 the Dative with verbal adjectives in -tqs and -reos, [§234, 1, (i)], 
 both when they are used, like the Latia verbal iu -dum, im- 
 personally in the Neut. Sing. : -t6v, -riov, or PI. -to, -tot (§ 24 1, 
 3.), or when they are used personally, like the Latin participle 
 in ^dus ; those d3rived from transitive verbs, i. e. such as govern 
 the Ace, admit both the Impers, and the Pers. construction ; 
 but those deri-s'sd from intransitive verbs, admit only the ini' 
 personal. The impersonal verbal Adj., in addition to the Dat. 
 of the agent, governs the same Case as the verb from which 
 it is derived. 
 
 Tb aTpirevfui eifirtSfeToy ^v ivTau^a f ot s roKepiioiS (could be easillj 
 attacked by the enem^j),'K, An. 3. 4,20. 'Aa-KriTeov (or -ff'a) iffri <roi t^u 
 ap^TTiv (you must practise virtue oi iHrtue must be practised by you). 'Eiridvffii- 
 riov etrrl Tots av^pc^irois ttjs apeTTJs (there must be a desiring by men,men 
 must desire virtue). 'tTnx^^pfl'reop iffti aoi t^ ipycp (you miMf attempt the • 
 work). ^Tjfii Sij fioTj^rjreoy elfot Tois irpdyfi-ao-iy vfi'tt/ (I say that you must 
 render assistance), Dem. 01. 1. 14, 17. KoXaa-reoy iarl aoi rhv ii/^otmoe 
 (you must punish the man). 'Ao-ktiteb ia-rl o-ot •^ aper^. 'a(pe\-riTea ffoi ri 
 iriKis iariv, X. C. 3. 6, 3. So the Deponents (§ 197), e. g. /iiiiTjreop eVrlx 
 ^/ttc robs ayadois (from nifieTlt^al Tira) or fii/HTir eo i eMv Ttfi-'v ot iyoAot 
 (you must imitate the good). 
 
 Kem. 6. The verbal adjectives of those Verbs whose middle form has a Pass, 
 as well as a reflexive or intransitive sense, have, lilcewise, in the impersonal 
 Neut. form with Io-tI, a two-fold signification ; and when an object is joined 
 isfith them, a two-fold construction, e. g. Treio-r 4ov ia-rlv ^tiic avT6v I've must 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 285.] DATIVE CASE. 417 
 
 txmvince him) from Trel^torw^] and ireurr fov itrrly i]fuv rots v6fj.ois {we must 
 ebey the laws, obtemperandum est a nobis legibus) from Trei^ofmi riyi, obtempero 
 tdicui ; lnra\haKT4ov 4(ttIv iifuv airhv rod KaKov {we must rid him of tJie evil) 
 iroJOL airaWiTTetv TLV^ Tov KaKOv j and airaWaKTeov iffrlv Tjfuf tov av^pdnrov 
 {we must get rid of the man) from cmaKKdrTeffAai nms {to get rid of something). 
 
 Eem. 7. Not unfrequeutly, however, the verbal adjectives in - t e <( j, among 
 the Attic writers, take the active person or agent in the Ace. also, as these ver- 
 bals have the force of the impersonal verb 5 e 7 with the Inf , e. g. PI. Gorg. 
 507. d. rhv ^ov\6fjiet/oy evSaiiJ.oi/a dfai ffutppoffiuriv Siukt4ov koI atTK?)- 
 Teov {whoever wishes to be happy must seek and practise sobriety). Often, also, 
 the construction of verbal adjectives is changed into the Inf ; in this case the 
 agent mast necessarily stand in the Ace. X. C. 1. 5, 5. i/iol fj.ei> Soicei.. .i\ev- 
 &4ptj} itj/Spl evKrhy eJvai ju)/ Tvx^'iv SoiXov toiovtov SovKcdoyra Sc . . ■ 
 ixcT eieiv Tabs ^eois K. t. A. 
 
 5 285. C The Dative of the thing {Instrumental 
 Dative). 
 
 i. The Dative of the thing expresses relations which ia 
 Latin are denoted by the Ablative, The relations expressed 
 by tins Dat. are : 
 
 (1) The gronmd, reason, or cause, e. g. i^oySu amjX&ov^ tivauf, 
 'SlSiklo, 4t6j3<a, v^peL ttouiv ri; especially with verbs denoting the 
 state of the feelings, e. g. ^alpav, ^SecrSai, ayaXXea-Scu., CTratpeo-- 
 ^at, XmreicrS^ai, avtao-^ot, aXyelv, Ik-, KaraTrX-qTrecrSai; S^avfJ-d^etv ; 
 iXm^eiv ; aripyeiv and ayearav, apia-KeaSai, apKeia-^ai (all four : to 
 be content, to be pleased with something) ; ayavanrdiv, Susxejaou'cu', 
 j^oXerSs, papeios ^epeiv, a^'^ea-^ai ; aAxr)(yve(r^<u, etc. 
 
 X. C. 1.3, 1. ot &€ol TOiS rapk ray eva-ifiarTdTuv Tt/iats /uiXurra xe^P"''- 
 w 1 V {are especiaUy pleased with the lumars from the most devout). Her. 478. Sial- 
 wri ovSaiius i)pi<rKeTo ^KvStiK^ {ivas by no means pleased with the Scythian 
 mode of life). Th. 4, 85. StavindQu rp airoK Aefcrei fiov tSc thiKuv {1 am 
 ■surprised at the shutting of the gates against me). 3, 97. iKirlCeiv rfi -rixv 
 ■{to hepe infortune). ^repya rois irapoda-iy {I am content with the present 
 things). 'Ayava toIs vTrdpxovff ly aya^ois. XoXeirSs ^4ou -rati 
 Trapovai irpAyiJ.aa-1 {lam troubled by the present state of affairs), X. An. 1.3,3. 
 Aurx^""!'''" ToJs ■Kiirpayii.ivois {I am ashamed on ayiount of what has been done), 
 C. 2. 1,31. Pl.Hipp.maj.285. e. aK6Tas aoi xaioavffiy oi AaKeSoi/uicioi, Stc 
 iroXAi elS6Ti. 'AydKKonai ry viKij. TloWoi ayavaKTOvai t^ &o- 
 vdrco. AuJX^P"^'"" ■^"'^ ^''T"'^' Dem. 01. 3, 13, 14. aTmr^troj toTj 
 ■ire7rpo7/t6i'ois VxX'""' '^X^"'^'- 'ItrxiJEtc '"ofs iri^MOo-i, X. C.2. 7, 7. So 
 also with adjectives, e. g. iffx^p^s X^p<riy, raxi" Troaiv, etc. 
 
 Remark; 1. The preposition iTri, on account of, at, is very often joined witli 
 the Dat; thus commonly, xo^ctSs ((lepeiv ivl twi, Sravp-i-Cay e'iri Tiw ; 5us^6- 
 palyti usually with the Ace, § 27'9, 5 ; wo also find dynirw, wTepyw, Bap^m 
 ifiahenSis <^ep« ti. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
418 SYNTAX. tj 285 
 
 (2) The means and instrument, by which an action is accom- 
 pHshed. Hence the Dat. also stands with xpijo--*"' («««') and 
 its compounds, and with vo/it'^etv (to be accustomed to). 
 
 'adWeiv KlStois (to throw with stones = to throw stones). 'AkovtICuv alxfi-a7s 
 {to hurl with spears = to hurl spears). X. Cy. 4. 3, 21. & filv Iwnoic^rraupos 
 5uoi» ocpSfa.KiJ.o7v irpoeaparo Kal Svo7v Uroty iJKOvev • 4yi) Se Terrapo 
 (lev oipSta\iJ.o7s TiKimpovfiai, Terrapai 5e aaX irpoaurSrlia-oiiai- iroAAj 
 yip (pain Kal '/inroc av^pdiirois ro7s oipSraK/iois vpoopwvTa 5t\Kovv, iroWh Si 
 To7s a a- 1 vpoaKoiovra a-71/j.alveiv {tlie centaur saw with two eyes, and heard will 
 two ears; but I sludl see with four eyes, etc.). 18. irpovoiiv iiAv ye cfa ttovt. 
 rfi af^pwirivn yfiinri. Tail 5e x^P"'^" lnr\o(popi\iTai, Ziii^ojmi 5e t^ %ir- 
 va, T'bv S' ivavriov avarpe^a Ti? toB 'ftnrou pi Itr). X. C. 4. 2, 9. oi rm 
 avbw a.vZpav yva/xai aper^ irhovTi^ovin Totis KexriiijUvovs (enrich with virtut 
 those who possess them). Her. 3, 117. outoi S>v, o'Cnep eiimpoadiv i&deaeai 
 XpaaSrai Tip BSari, ovk ix""'''^^ a\ir$ xP"'''^'">'''"f"?"'PP M^T"^^!! ^'" 
 aYj)e(o</Tai (iAose who before were accustomed to use the water, not being able to 
 use it, experienced a great inconvenience). Dem. Cor. 277, 150. icey^ vpotpdffei 
 Tavrri Karaxp^- But Karaxp^ cS' o' and Siaxpv<^^ai in the sense of 
 cansumere, to hill, as transitive, govern the Ace. Comp. Her. 6, 135 ; Antiph. 1. 
 113, 23. With xp'^l"^"'^ a second Dat. often stands, by means of attraction, 
 or els with the Ace. or the Ace. of a pronoun or neuter adjective (§ 278, 4), 
 to express the design or purpose, c. g. xP'^l^al aoi viirr^ (plKa, as in the 
 Lat. utor te fdo amico, I have thee far a true friend). X. An. 1. 4, 15. ipLiv 
 iriffTOTdrois xp'h^^ erai Kd^ els (ppovpia /cat els Koxayias (u)ill emploif 
 you as the most faithful both for guards and commanders). Her. 4, 117. <puvy ol 
 'Savpopi.&Tai voiii(ovtrt S/cu&iicp (are accustomed to use the Scythian language). 
 Th. 2, 38. aycDfft Kal ^va-iais SLeTijaiois vofil^ovo't. 
 
 Eem. 2. The Dat. is very often used without iriv in military expressions, 
 with reference to a retinue or force, in order to represent this as the means by 
 which something takes place ; this usage is found particularly with verbs of 
 going and coming. Such Datives are o-TpaTip, aT6K(o, irXii^ei, vavffi[v), liriTois, 
 (rrparitiTats, etc. (In Latin the Abl. without cum, as magna exerdtu venire, to 
 come with a large army). Her. 5, 99. ol ^A^vatoi airiKeaTo elKotri vrjvffi {came 
 withtwenty ships). Th. 1, 102. 'AArivaTot ?i\Aov TrA^&ei ovk oKiycp {vnthnot 
 a small number). 4. 39. ol TleKoTrovviiinot ayex^pvo'av r^ o't par^ eK ttjs niJ\oi*. 
 X. Cy. 1. 4, 17. avrbs to7s 'Iwirois TrposeXdaas nphs to tcSj' Tf/l-fiSwv <ppo6pta Kore- 
 jxcaiev {having rode up with the cavalry). An. 7. 6, 29. ^a^pa\eas rj/juv eipelnoino 
 ol TToKefitot Kal lirir ik^ Ka\ ireKTaffT i K ^, 
 
 (3) The following relations also may be considered as the 
 tTieans, and are expressed by the Dat. : (a) the material of 
 which (= tvith which) anything is made ; — (b) the rule or 
 standard, according to which anytliing is measured, judged of, 
 or done; hence the Dat. stands particularly with ver])s of 
 tneasuring, judging, inferring, e. g. oTaS/Aao-^ai, yiyvwaKeiv, iUd 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 285.] DATIVE CASE. 419 
 
 fav, Kpiviw, TeKtuxCpea-'^ai ; also in general, to express a more defi. 
 nite limitation, to denote in wliat respect a word is to be taken ; 
 thus, for example, with verbs signifying to be distinguished, to 
 excel, to be strong and powerful, and the contrary ; also with very 
 many adjectives (instead of the Ace. of more definite limita- 
 tion, } 279,7); — (c) the measure, by, according to which an 
 action is defined or limited, especially vdth comparatives and 
 superlatives, as well as with other expressions, which include 
 the idea of comparison, in order to denote the degree of 
 difference between the objects compared; — finally, (d) the 
 way and manner in which anything is done (^Hbw ?). 
 
 "3.61.3,57. 71 Styopij Kalrh irpvTav^Toy Hap I a Kl^Cjt iiffK7]fi4ya{^v) [were decoror 
 ted with Parian marble). On the Gen. of the material, see § 273, 5. Her. 2, 2. 
 Totoirtf aTa^iJ.r]ai,ii.evoi irp-tiy/iaTi {ex tali re judicantes, having judged 
 from or by such a drcumstance). 7, 16. rp crp iir^riri reKit.aLp6ii.evoy (ex 
 tua veste judicium faciens). X. Cy. 1. 3, 5. tIhi 8); o-i rsKfi-aipSfieyos, S> 
 Ttdu, toStb \4yeis; [judging hj what rule, do you say this?). 3. 3, 19. at /lix"^ 
 KplvovT ai naXXov Ta7s Tpvxa'ts, ^ rats ray (TWfidraty pd^ais [are decided 
 more by courage, than strength of body). H. 7. 3, 6. oSroi irdyras avApdntovs 
 Snrep^e^\i)Kaai r6\)i.ri re Kal iiiaplif {have surpassed all men in daritig 
 and brutality). C. 2. 7, 7. j(rx"e'<' rois ffdifiaai {to be strong in body). Cy. 
 2. 3, 6. iyii oi/T6 Tvoalv elpit Tox>5r, oire x^P"''" iirX"?'*^- Hence t$ 
 ivTi, T5 oAijacf?, t4) Ti-iytp, Tij) ipy(f {according to the nature of, etc.) ; also yv^ixy 
 ffipakriyai, ^evaSnivai {to be deceived in opinion), Th. 4, 18, Her. 7, 9. -Her. 1, 184. 
 ^e/dpofus yeye^ai irfyre irpdrepov iydyero Trjs Nir^Kpias {was before 
 Nitocris by Jive generations). So Tto\\$, 6\lyif, iuKp§, roaoirtp, Sa-if /ieiCay 
 {greater by much, by little, by so much = much greater, a little greater, so much greater, 
 etc.). Her. 6, 89. varipKrav r]p.epri liiij ttjs (rvyKei/iiyTis {a day later than 
 u-as fixed upon, later by a day, etc.). 106. v6\i KayiiAr/ ri '^?Atts yeyoyc i.a- 
 devcffr epv {has become weaker by [the loss of] a distinguished city). So with 
 jrpii with the Gen., and METtJ (o/ier) with the Ace, e.g. Ae'/ca erea-i wphTTJsly 
 ^oKaiiiyi yavfiaxlas {before the battle of Salamis by ten years, 1. e. ten years before, 
 etc.). 'EfijKoo-T^i ^T€i /i6Ti 'lAi'ou a\a(riv {sixtieth year after the sack of 
 Tray). Here belong, also, fri/nioSc Tiya x'A^o's lpaxi'-ats,SiavdT<f {to 
 fine one [with] a thousand drachmas, etc.), and the like. Her. 6, 136. 6 5riiM,s i fn - 
 liimire {rhy miKriaSea) Kari. tV aSiKi-qv -neyriiKovTa TaKavToiiri [Jmed 
 kimffiy talents). Th. 4, 73. t$ ^eXriaTm toD (STrAm/coS PKa<pSrriyai {jactu- 
 ram faeere, to suffer defeat by [the loss of] the best portion of the heavy armed force). 
 n. 7, 2. T/jScs liky K\ayyv -r' ivoir^ t Iffav, opvi^es lis {advanced with a noise and 
 a cry). X. Cy. 1. 2, 2. {oi yS/wi) rpoa-TdTTOvffi nh Ph «" "''"''"' irapteVoi {forbid 
 to enter a house by force). So »opi0i!>, Kpavyfj, fio^ a-iyv mie^y ri {la do something 
 with a noise, etc.) ; S'lKr,, iirifie^elcf, Sr]iw(ri<f (sc. dS$), iSi'? {SS^), ^Hv (^^r)> i«»yn 
 , in common, t^ rpSTta Toi^Se ; /to^iSp, properly with care, hence, entirely, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
420 SYNTAX. fJ 286 
 
 juite; (TirfluSJ, witn pains, aegre, scarcely, Imrdly ; iKKri, tai-rri, SixVt dupiici trwda 
 EiVp, fnistra. Comp. § 101, 2, (b). 
 
 ? 286. 11. Substantive Object with Prepositions, ot 
 the Construction of Prepositions, 
 
 1. As the Cases denote the local relations whence,, whitX' 
 er, where, and the causal relations, which were originally 
 considered as local relations, so the prepositions express 
 another local relation, viz., the extension or position of 
 things in space, — the juxtaposition of things (6y the side 
 of, over, around, with), or the local opposites above and 
 below, within and without, before and behind. Prepositions 
 therefore denote the relative position of the things described 
 by the substantives which they connect ; and the relation 
 expressed by them may be called the relation of position. 
 
 2. The Cases connected with the prepositions, show in 
 which of the local relations, whence, whither, where, the 
 preposition is to be understood. 
 
 Remake 1. Thus, for example, the preposition trap a. denotes merely the 
 local relation of near, by the side of, iy ; but in connection with the Gen., e. g. 
 ^A.&€ Trap it Tov fiacriXetos, in addition to the idea of nearness, it denotes, 
 at the same time, the direction whence {he came from near the king, de chez k 
 roi); in connection with the Ace, e. g. ij 6 1 vapk rhv /Sao-iAe'a, at the same 
 time, the direction whither {he Went into the ticinity or presence of the 
 king) ; and in connection with the Dat. e. g., cittt) vapk t§ 8 airiAei, it de- 
 notes simply tlie place Where {he stood near the king). 
 
 3. Prepositions are divided according to their construction : 
 
 (a) into prepositions which govern the Gen.: ii/ri-, before (ante), ajri,from 
 {ab, a), 4 k, out of {ex), vpo, before (pro) ; 
 
 (b) into those Which govern the Dat.: in, in {in with abl.) and triv, milli 
 
 (cum). 
 
 {c) into those which govern the Ace. : avd, up, els, into {in with ace), &s, 
 to ; 
 
 (d) into those which govern the Gen, and Ace. : Sici, through, Kari, doum 
 
 from {de), i-jr4p, over (super), //.frd, with; 
 
 U) into those which govern the Gen., Dat., and Ace: i/iif){, ratenf, iiri, 
 
 upon, T-apd, by, trepi, arotmd (circa), irpis, before, and liiri, wukr 
 
 {sub). 
 
 4. Prepositions are divided according to the relations of posi- 
 tion which they denote ; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
» 287.] Prepositions. — 'Avrl, ifp6. 421 
 
 (a) into such as indicate a juxtajposition : napd and afi^il, near, ivl, at 
 
 aaiupon, iTiv and /terii, with; 
 'b) into such as express local opposites : ^tti, upon, A.pd, up, iirep, over, 
 
 and iiti, under, Kardt doum (under), Trp6, np6s and ivrl, before, m 
 
 front of, and the improper prepositions oivio-^ev, after, lehind; iv oaA. 
 
 els, in, within, and ix, ^|, from, out of; Sid, through, and itepi, around, 
 
 outside; i>s, to, up to, and iiri!, from, away from. 
 
 6. The relation of position expressed by prepositions is trans- 
 ferred to the relations of time and causality, e. g. Ot ttoX^hoi 
 &,iro T^s -TToXews airi^vyov. Airo vvktos d.fl-^X^oi' (^from 
 night, immediately after the beginning of night). 'Airb fu/i- 
 aa^iai; airofojuot (hnf {from, by virtue of the alliance). 
 
 6. Each preposition has a fundamental meaning, wliich it 
 everywhere retains', even Vi^hen it is connected with two or 
 three Cases ; but it receives various modifications according to 
 the different Cases with which it is connected, because the 
 local relation varies with each Case. Comp. Eem. 1. The 
 fundamental meaning of prepositions is most evident, when 
 they express local relations ; it is generally quite evident in those 
 of time also ; but in the causal relations, it is often very obscure. 
 
 Kem. 2. Originally all the prepositions wore merely adverbs of place. See 
 \ 300, 1. The prepositions enumerated in No. 3, may be called Proper prepo- 
 sitions, inasmuch as during the cultivated period of the .language, they either 
 were not used at all, or but very seldom, as adverbs of place, without a sub' 
 stantive ; accordingly, they have the regular functions of prepositions ; they 
 differ from the Improper prepositions : of these latter, the following classes 
 may be named : (a) both adverbs of place and other adverbs, which, though 
 they regularly have the functions of adverbs, are sometimes, in connection 
 with a substantive, used as prepositions, e. g. 4ir(Jirpo&ey, Hvev, Six", a/ia; — (b) 
 substantives in connection with the Gen., e. g. SIkiiv, instar, x<^^y, gratia, ivexa, 
 on account of. 
 
 1. Prepositions with the Genitive onlt. 
 
 § 287. (1) 'AvtC and srpd, before. 
 
 1. 'AvTt (Lat. ante, before, in the face of, opposite, etc.), orig- 
 inal signification: in the face of (before, over against) (1) in 
 a local sense (in prose seldom) ; (2) in a causal or figurative 
 sense : (a) in adjurations, instead of the common word Trpos 
 with the Gen.; — (b) With expressions denoting comparison 
 (e. g. with the comparative), valuing, weighing, requital; hence 
 with words of buying, selling, bartering, vahie^ worth, likeness o\ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
422 SYNTAX. [i 2S7 
 
 unlikeness, preference ; — (c) of the cause or ground, when ii 
 expresses the idea of making compensation, as in dv-J' ov, avS-' Siv, 
 for what ? wherrfore ? — (d) of substitution, giving an eguiva 
 lent, etcr 
 
 (1) (Tb x^pf"" ^''^'''') '""''' "''''''"''' 5ia\ewouiroiS fiEyiiMis, hvSt' &v l<rTTiic6Ttl 
 HvSpcs ri ttv irdffxoi^v % Inri rav (pepo/xipay \l^liii, ^ irrh ray KvKlvSovufvaiV ; (6e- 
 hind which, since the trees stood before the soldiers), X. An. 4. 7, 6. (2) (a) 
 'Aj-tI TralSuy TuySe ... iKeTeiofiey, sc. a4 {for the sake of, as it were standing 
 5^re), S. 0. C. 1326. (b) (AuKoCpyoj KoTfipycio-aTo) iy r^ iroKei atpsTdrepoy 
 ftvai Thy Kohby &dyaToy oyrl al<rxpov 0lov {is better than, is preferable to a 
 disgracefullife),'S^'R.Xi.9, 1. TV TEAeuTV ItyTl rrjs t&v (dyray trarriplas 
 ijKKd^ayTo {exchanged death for the safety of the living), PI. Menex. 237, a. IIoT^p 
 vliy iyri ndyray rav SWtoy x P '! J"" 'r ""' ■"poTiy.^, So alpeur^al ti ayrl 
 TiTOj, instead of the common tiv((s. Tiiy iKev^eplay e\oiii,iiy t,y ayrl uy ?x" 
 TrdyTay {in place of all which I have), X. An. 1. 7, 3. (d) AovXos ayrl Setr- 
 vStov {a slave instead of a despot). 'Ayrl rifiipas yu| iy4yero,Ser.T,3l. 
 'Ayrl rod iidxe(TStai irel^ea^ai iAe\ii,-'X. Cj. 3. I, 18. 'Ayrl is never nsed 
 of time. 
 
 2. IIpo, original signification: on the foresidc (^pro, prae, be- 
 fore, figuratively, in behalf of), (1) local; — (2) of time; (3) 
 causal and figurative : (a) in behalf of (for the good, for the 
 weal) ; with expressions denoting comparison (hence with the 
 Com. degree), valuing, estimation, like ovt'l, but always with the 
 accompanying idea of standing before, preference ; hence it is 
 used to express preference in general; — (b) of an inward, 
 mental cause, occasion, inducement (only Poet.) : on account of, 
 prae, e. g. II. p, 667. irpo (fjo^oio (prae metu, for fear, on account 
 of fear). 
 
 (1) MiytSo^ vjjtros Kefrai Trpi MeYap we, Th. 3, 51. f2) Ilpi ri liepas airiiX- 
 day. (3 ) niyrss a^i(i(rav(rl ai irph air ay fiovKeietr^au {desire you to consult for 
 them), X. Cy. 1. 6, 42. Wdx^a-^ai, airo^ayeiy vph ttjs TrarptSos, SuMiySv 
 yeieiy irji $airi\4tis {for, in behalf of, one's country), X. Cy. 8. 8, 4. AiKaiO' 
 Tepop afiTiy Kol KahXtay elyal rph toO ipeiy^iy re Kol anoS iS pair Ke ly Inre- 
 Xety TiJ ir(J\6i SU-riy i'lyriy hy rar-p {I thought it more just inpreference tofledng, etc.), 
 PI. Phaed. 99, a. Xlph iroKKov Tvo^a-mrAai ti {to esteem before or above much, 
 1. u. very highly), nph ttoWup xpifit^Toiy TifiriaarrSiai ti {to valuebefore much 
 wealth). (ToCtoi') ivph vdyray xi-Vfti'Taiy koI Tr6vay irpialfiriv tty ^iKoy 
 not clrai, X. C. 2. 5, 3. Tlpi ToiTov TeSwiyai h.y imWov e\otTo {for him), PI. 
 Symp. 179, a. 'ZTraiys7y Trph SiKaioiriyTis oSikIhv {to praise injustice before, 
 •ather than, in preference to justice), Ep. 361, e. 
 
 Remark. The reason that the prepositions avTi and irpi arc not con- 
 nected with the Dat, like prepositions of the same meaning in other langaagea, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 288.] PUErosiTioNS. — 'Atto, Ik. 423 
 
 but v/itU the genitive, is owing to the fact, that the Greek language regards the 
 relation denoted by before, in front of, not merely as local, but implying action, 
 a relation of dependence. The like holds of the prepositions iirep, irprfj, 
 Siti, i, flip I, ire pi, 4irt, vtto with the Gen., since the Gen. represents the 
 place as the cause or occasion of the action, and hence likewise, a relation of 
 .■iependence. See § 273, 4. 
 
 {288. (2) 'Atto, from, and ii, Ik, out of. 
 
 Pkeliminabt Remark. Those two prepositions denote an outgoing, a re- 
 hioved, departure, but a t d denotes a removal from the exterior of an object, while 
 ix (^1), always implies a going out from within a place or object ; and in the 
 causal relation, the former denotes a remoter cause, the latter, one more direct. 
 
 1. 'Airo (ab), from, denotes: (1) in a local relation: (a) re- 
 Tnoval £ioia a place or object with verbs of motion, also oi free- 
 ing, and the like, e. g. X-iav, iXeuSepovv, also of missing Q 271, 2), 
 hence, ciTro o-kottov ; then it is transferred to mental failures, as 
 in oTT iXmScov, aTTo yuuift-q:;, aliter ac sperabam, 'putaham (as if 
 aherrans ah exsrpectatione, ab opinione) ; (b) distance from a 
 place or object \vith verbs of rest; — (2) of time, going out 
 from a point of \ixa&: from, after ; — (3) causal or figurative: 
 (a) of origin, as with eivat, ylyvvj^aj. ; (b) of the whole in rela- 
 tion to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it ; (c) of the 
 author with Pass, verbs instead of viro {\ 251, Eem. 4), but al- 
 ways with the accompanying idea of on the part of; (d) of the 
 occasion or cause ; (e) of the material; (f ) of the means and 
 instrument; (g) of cmiformity. 
 
 (1) (a) 'Air^ TTjs •ir6Kitas airetpvyov oi iroAe/xiOf. (b) 'O \6yos ovK airh 
 rov (TKoiroS ^5o|e;/ cip^trS XI, X. S. 2, 10. (Ai ttoAoioI ir($Aeij) airh ftaXoirffus 
 ficiWor ^xla-^a-av {at a distance from the sea), Th.l, 7. (2) 'A-n-h TaiTi\s ttjs 
 1] fie pas, airh vvkt6s, atp' etrire pas', airh ruv tr'niav (after the meal), 'S.. H 
 L..5,8. (3) (a.)'Axh'A\Kfiatmyos Kal adrisMeyaK^eos iyemyro Koi xdpra 
 \afivpot (very distinguished men spruj^ from). Her. 6, 125. (b) Tas rpiipeis, 
 al-Kep ^(Tav avTif airh ray KaraKe itp^e iiray (which he had of those that uiere 
 left), Th. 4, 9. Ti airh rijs Setprjs (ornaments for the neck, necklaces). Her. 
 1, 51. So 01 47rb Pov\ijs (qui sunt a consiliis, those who belong to the council) ; 
 01 iiri n\(iTuyos (the pupils of Plato, the Platonics) ; oi airh rrji 'AkoStj- 
 u'.as, etc. (c) "^irpix^V "*" "■"ray oiSey epyoy a^i6\oyoy (was done by 
 them,on the part of ), Th.l, 17. (d) 'Airh S txaioffiyris (by, on account of). 
 Her. 7, 164. T$ airh ray iroXefiluy f^fitp (metu ab kostibus, fear of, from the 
 enemy), X. Cy. 3. 3, 53. 'Af kavrov (from his own impulse), (c) Tperjiety tI 
 vavTiKhy airh irpos65ay (by revenues), Th. 1, 81. (f) 'Airi -rmy biueripun 
 iiuy Tro\eiJte! (ii\miros) aviinixay (sociorum vestrorum ope), ]>em. Ph. 1. 4i). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J24 SYNTAX. \i 288 
 
 34 ; hence many adverbial phrases, e. g. airh (rTOfiaros, airh y\tiTTris iiiruv (bg 
 heart, b)/ word of mouth); airh ir-irouS^s {zealously), (g) 'Att' OuAi'uirou oSpe- 
 OS KoXioi/rai. OuA.UiUttitjj'oi (are called from, derive their name from mount Oli/mpus), 
 Her. 7, 74. 'A-n-h (vfifiax^i'S avrdm/ioi (by virtue of), Th. 7, 57. 
 
 2. 'E^, 6K (ea;), out of (opposite of Iv, in), denotes (1) in a 
 local relation : (a) removal either from within a place or object, 
 or from immediate participation or connection with a place or 
 object, with verbs of motion ; hence an immediate succession 
 of one object after another; (b) distance with verbs of rest: 
 without, beyond (Epic), e. g. Ik ^eXemv, extra telorum jactum ; — 
 (2) of time, immediate outgoing from a point of time; then 
 especially the immediate development' of one thing from anoth- 
 er, an immediate succession of two actions ; — (3) in a causal 
 and figurative sense : (a) of origin ; (b) of the whole in relation 
 to its parts, or in relation to what belongs to it, often with the 
 accompanying idea of choice and distinction ; (c) of the author 
 with passive or intransitive verbs, instead of mo, almost ex- 
 clusively Ionic, used particularly by Herodotus, seldom in Attic 
 prose; (d) to denote the occasion or cause; (e) of the material, 
 (f ) of the means and instrument ; (g) of conformity : according 
 to, in consequence of, hy virtue of, after. 
 
 (1) 'Ek t^s TtiK^as airr\\S>ov, 4k rij s fiixvs i(piiyov (out from the dty, 
 out from the battle, while clttS would merely signify away from) ; e/c 7^5 ^I'au- 
 IMXVO'av (out from the land). PI. Polit. 289, c. oi Se irSKiy ix w6Keus a\Xtir- 
 TOVTes Karh &d\aTTav /col ire^ (changing from city to city). Apol. 37, d. Kakhs ttn 
 fxoi 6 fiios e^T} fiAAiji- i| &Wris v6\ews afiei^ofievto (comp. ex alio loco in aliuni 
 migranti). (2) 'Ef ri^epas (ex quo dies illuxit, as soon as it was day) ; 4k tov- 
 Tou (sc. xp^""") imiaediatdy after this; 4k vvKris or 4k z'uktwi'; 4k iroi- 
 ioav (from very childhood); 4^ uirrepou (subsequently); 4k toS \onrov. 
 Her. 9, 8. 4^ riiiepris 4s nii-epriv ava^aWofieiioi (ex die in diem, delaying from 
 day to day, day after day). 1,87. 4k 8e aldplr\s ts icif! vr]Vflil.T}s iTWfSpa- 
 nev 4^airlvris vi(pea. (immediately after fair weather, etc.). Th. 1, 120. 4k p.h 
 (Ipiivris TToKe/xiti/, 4k Se iroXiiiov iraXiv ^v/ifirivai (to go to war after peace, 
 etc.). X. Cy. 3. 1, 17. S ahs irarijp 4v rgSe rfi /at^ ^juep? « J &<f>povos ffdKppom 
 ytyevvrai. (3) (a) ETyai, yiyveaSiat €k tivos (to be descended from some one, 
 4k indicating more direct descent, while oiro may be used of one more remote), 
 (b) 'Ef 'ASriiiialwv 01 Spio-roi (thebestof). (c) Her. 3, 62. -rh 4yreTa\fi4m 4k 
 Tov Myov (the things commanded by Magus). Ih.-irpaSMa-Srat 4k npTjIao-irtoj (to 
 be betrayed by), (d) 6, 67. e<pevys Arj/topijTos 4k Strdprris 4k toioCSc ovei- 
 Seoj (on account of ). So 4k 7ra;/Ti>s toS yov (with all theheart); 4k fflai 
 and'theliko Her. 2, 152. 4k rijs Si^ios toS oveipov (in consequence of )■ (g) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 259.J PHEPosiTioNS. — 'Ei-j crw. 425 
 
 i*i. Criton. 48, b. 4k rav &^oKoy ovfieviav rovTo ff/cexreoy {in accordanci 
 with lohat has been admitted). So omix&^ta^ai %k tivos (to he named after or for 
 feme one, like virtus ex tiko appellata est, is called or takes its name from vik). 
 Sk toS : why ? 
 
 Remake. The adverbs which, in the character of improper prepositions, take 
 the Gen., have been already considered, in treating of the Gen. Besides these 
 adverbs, the following substantives, as improper prepositions, take the Gen.; 
 &.SIki]v {S 4 lias. Poet.), instar ; — b. x^P'"! gratia, for the sake of, commonly 
 placed after the Gen., seldom before it. Instead of the Gen. of the personal 
 pronouns i/iov, a-ov, etc., the possessive pronoun, as an attributive adjective, is 
 regularly used with x"^?'") *. g. ^/i-^y, crVx^P'"! mea,tva gratia; — civexa 
 (UviKiv even before consonants, as &6ko even before vowels in the Attic writers, 
 i'lvfKa and c'lvcKev, Ionic, but not wholly foreign to the Attic dialect, oSyt/ca In 
 poetry), causa, gratia. The Gen.more frequently stands before than aifter e'ceica. 
 It very frequently signifies, tvitli respect to, concerning, in regard to. Her. 3, 85. 
 bdpoee r ovTov eXpcKi, with respect to this, be of good courage. It often denotes 
 a remote reason, e. g. by virtue of, by reason of. PI. Kp. 329, b. ei yip fiv -rovr' 
 aXrioy, k&p iySa to. aina ravra iiretrSv^ eyeKd ye yrj pa s, i. e.by reason of old 
 age; — d. eKjjTi (poetic only), by or according to the will of (a god), Aiis e'ktjti, 
 Homer and Hesiod. In other poets it has the signification of eveita. 
 
 i 289. 2. Prepositions with the Dative only. 'Ev 
 AXD crvv (^vi/). 
 
 1. 'Ev {hi Poet., €Lv and dvi Epic) denotes that one thing is 
 in, upon, by or near another. In general, it indicates an actual 
 union or contact with an object, and hence is the opposite of 
 «K. It denotes ( 1 ) in a local relation ; (a) the being in, inclosed 
 in, encircled, surrounded by ; used with reference to place, cloth- 
 ing, persons : in, among, in the midst of, and with verbs of speak- 
 ing, before, in the presence of (cwam) ; then it is transferred to 
 the external and internal state or condition in which one is taken, 
 or is found, by wliich he is, as it were, surrounded ; — also to the 
 business in which he is engaged, to persons, in whose hands oi 
 power something is placed ; it also denotes (b) the being upon 
 something, and (c) the being near a tiling, particularly of cities, 
 near which (in the territory of which) something took place, 
 especiaUy a battle ; — (2) of time (§ 283, 3) ; — (3) in a causal 
 and figurative relation: (a) of the meatis B.n&. instrument ; (b) 
 of the manner ; (c) to denote conformity : according to, in con- 
 formity with. 
 
 (I) (a) 'Ey TT? triXei, ev rp fijiraj, ev :SwipTri rodro iyevero. PI. L. 
 625, h'. aviiirav\ai iv TO ts ui^Ji^ois SevSpeoiv ela-i ffKiapai. 'Zv '6ir\ois, 
 iv t6^ois SiayaviCe(rS^ai; iv i<rS>riTi, iv tTTeipdvoLS {crowned); iv r»"j 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
12G 
 
 r^ 289 
 
 SYNTAX. L' ""^ 
 
 4.30.5.0.5 Imter). Dem. Chers. 108, 74. T.t.6S>e6s ^or .Kuyos i. v^,u .^■ 
 uvy6pv<r.. {in our p-esenoe). 'E. ^oX4^., iu ipyf, iv Ba.r,, iv ./.o^^, ii> 
 hayri eT™<. PL Crito. 43, c. Kcl SxXo: i^ roiaira^s e«^</>opa.J «\:<r- 
 «L;. (are tofe« m, "^roZred in such calamities). Phileb. 45, c. .V ro,o«To.i 
 voT^fia^r.. 6X<;,«.o,. Goi-g. 523, b. iy ^d^r, eiSa.^""'? o'""" (f '"'«'» 
 the enjoyment of all prosperity). Her. 2, 82. oZ eV ,ro<li<r.. y.y6,...m [those who 
 have been in 'poetry = poets). Th. 3,38. oJ ^. ■Kpiyt.a,yi (those engaged m 
 state affairs = the ministers). X. Cy. 4. 3, 23. of ^i,' S), iv roiTois To'is Ki- 
 yois ^am (were engaged in these discourses). PI. Phaed. 59, a. iv <pi\o<ro<plif 
 thai. Oi 4v ysc^pylais; iv t4x^V f'"'"- Hence Tarious adverbial ex- 
 pressions hare originated, e. g. J v Xato elrai (to he equal) ; iv vSovri not i<TTw(il 
 is pleasing tome); so also witll ^x^iv and iroieTffaoi, e.g. ^y diiola,iy i\a4>p$ 
 ■roie7aStat (to esteem equally,to esteem lightly). 'Zp ifioi, iv <r o t itrrl rt {penes me, 
 te, it is in my power, etc.) ; hence the phrase ev kavrif thai (to be in one's senses, 
 sui compotem esse) ; (h) ev Speirtv, evXirTrois, ev Stp6vais; (c) 'H ^;'Ma.'- 
 Tivelc} fiixn ('*« 'a"^« near). — {2)'Ev -rovTip t$ xpi'"f\ ^v $ (while, 
 during); iv wevre fifiepais (during, in the space of). — (3) 'Opav, dpacrdai, 
 iv 6(l>Sta\fj.o7s, Poet, (to see, be seen with the eyes) ; then in other connections 
 among the poets, iv irupl koUiv, iv Setr/i^ S^o-ai, iv x^P"'^ Xct^erc, Horn, 
 (to burn with fire, etc.). In prose, especially in Xenophon, iv is used tp denote 
 the means, in the expressions tnXovv, SnXov elvai, artfmlvtiv iv rtvi. X. Cy. I. 
 6, 2. i^Tl fxiv, 5 irat, ol &eoi o-e 'iK^to re Ka\ evfieveis triuirova-t, Kol iv i€po7s S^- 
 Kov Kcti iv ovpavlois a-rifietois (is evident both by the sacrijices and the signs 
 from heaven). 8. 7, 3. ia-rni-fivare /ioi Kol iv ItpoTs koI iv oipaviois 
 o-i7iiieioij Kol iv olavo7s Kal iv (fi^inais, 3 t' ixpriv -n-oiiTv koI & oix ixPV'- 
 'Ec Slicri, iv (TiwTrj). Th. 1, 77. iv ro7s Sfiolois vofiois Tas Kpi(r€is 
 Toietv (according to the same laws). So iv ftfpti {according to his part, in turn). 
 'Ev ifiol, iv aoi, iv iicelvcji (Poet.), ex (according to) meo, tuo, illius judicio. 
 
 2. 2w (^vmostly old Attic) corresponds almost entirely with the 
 Latin cum, and the English ivith ; it always expresses the idea of 
 union, participation and accompaniment : ( 1 ) in a local relation 
 often of an accompaniinent which implies help or assistance ; — 
 (2) in a causal sense to denote : (a) the means and instrument ; 
 (b) the manner ; (c) the measure or rule, by which the action 
 of the verb is measured, as it were, or defined ; (d) conformity. 
 
 (1) 'O ffTpaTT]yos (rhv to7s ctt par Ltjorais avextapTjaev. — ^bv i&e^ (with 
 the help of God). 2 i v rivi elvai or yiyveff^at (to be on the side of one, of oneU 
 party). 2 tJ y r lv i fji.ix^'^^^h to fight in company with one, to aid one in fighting 
 (2) (a) X. Cy. 8. 7, 13. tj kttjo-is ahrav (sc. ttkttuv ^t\a]v) iffrtv oifSafi&s ah* 
 T ^ 0lf, o\A& fiaWov aiv ry siiepyealf (not by violence, but ratlier kindness) 
 'h) TlooUvat a-vv Kpavyy, iTvv yi\ciiTi iX^eTp {with a shout, etc.). X. Cy 
 S. 1, 15. irSrepa 5' Tiyf, S> Kvpe, &fietvov etvai, (rhv t^ c^ aya^^ ras Tt/MUpiaS 
 iroicitr&ai, ^ a'bv rij <ry (jujilti; (ivith, for your advantage, or for tjpur injury) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ *90.] PREPOSITIONS. — 'Ava, £ts, &. 427 
 
 ) 1. 3, 17. (rbv r$ v6ii.u oiv IxeKevev ciei rhv SiKcurriji/ rijv \(.TJ<jiov T/3E(r&oi 
 to vote with, in accordance with the law). (d)5i'v Tip v6jitp rijv \jiTiipaii rfyetr^e, 
 2iy T^ SiKata. 
 
 Kemajik. Of tlie adverbs used as improper prepositions, there belong here 
 ilia {una cum), and several which are constnicted also with the Gen., as has 
 been seen, in treating of the Gen. and Dat. 
 
 ♦ 290. 3. Peepositions -with the Acc. okly: 'Avd, cis 
 
 AND US. 
 
 1. 'Avd {on, up, upon) signifies from a lower to a liiglier place, 
 and is directly opposite to Kara witli the Acc, which, signifies 
 from a higher to a lower place ; the use of dva is more frequent 
 in poetry than in prose. It is used (1) in a local relation : (a) 
 to denote a direction towards a higher object; (b) to denote the 
 extension from a lower to a higher point, from bottom to top : 
 ihroughout, through, both with verbs of motion and rest; — (2) 
 in a temporal relation, to denote continuance or & period of time : 
 per (seldom) ; — (3) in a causal sense to denote manner; then 
 particularly in a distributive sense with numerals. 
 
 (1) (a) Od. X) 132. S tpiKot, ovk itf 5t] rts h.v Apa-o^vp-qy aj^afialij {up to 
 the lofty gate). This use is rare and only poetic ; in prose only in the phrases 
 ictk rhv IT T a fi 6 v, aya ^6ov irKeTy, up the stream (the opposite of (cari 
 TroTa/i6t/, down the stream); (b) H.v, 547. {(pXeip) ayci if tor a ^4ov<ra, Sta^trepes 
 {ab infima dorsi parte usque ad cervicem) ; so avk Saim, avi. arpardv, avh. niixwj 
 ava HfitXov, avct &arrv, aya ^ifiop {through the lunise, through the army, etc.), 
 all in Homer; Her. 6, 131. koX ovrto 'AKKfiaiaiviSai efit^tr^ffav ay^ rijy 'EX 
 'KdSa {throughout Greece).- X. Vect. 5, 10. avh naa'ay yrjy Kal ^dKaTT ay 
 elpiiyri itrrai. Hier. 7, 9. avk (rrd/ia ^x^'" C" ^""^ cmtinually in the mouth). 
 (2) Her. 8, 123. ava rhv ■7r6\eiiov roiroy {throughout). So oci iraffay 
 t5)v riiiipay, per totum diem (the substantive must here have the article; 
 without the article dva Tratray Tjftepay, signifies daily, day by day, ayh iray eros, 
 every year, yearly, see No. (3) and § 246, 6), ava yixja {per noctem, all night 
 through). 7, 10. i.ylt xP^'oy i^eipoi tls &y {in the time). (3) 'Ayct Kpdros {with 
 all one's might) ; Seek fiipos {by turns) ; aya iray eroj {quotannis). X.An.4,6, 
 i.^EWijyes hrop^^Ticray inr^ (rra^fjiobs aya it eyre ivapaffdyyas ttjs fjficpas 
 {Jive parasangs daily). 
 
 Remark 1. In the Epic and Lyric languages, ayd is constructed with the 
 Dat. also ; instead of it 4y is elsewhere used, e. g. &y& aici]irTpa, &ii(f, Tafrydpif 
 iLKptp in Homer. So evSei S' ay^ CKdwrat Aths aUros, Find. 
 
 2. El's (is Ionic, Doric, and old Attic) is only a modified form 
 of iv, and denotes the same relations of position as are ex- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
428 SYNTAX. [5 290, 
 
 pressed By iv, but always m the direction lohdher; hence it is 
 used of motion into tlu. interior of an object, up to, into the im- 
 mediate presence of; in general to denote the reaching a definite 
 limit. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote a heal limit; (b) a 
 limit in quantity: about, up to; (c) extension; (d) in the sense 
 of before, m the presence of, coram, but with the idea of the di- 
 rection whither; — (2) of time, to denote a temporal limit: till, 
 towards; (3) in a causal sense : (a) of a mental aim, object or 
 2}urpose ; (b) of the ynanner ; with numerals either in the sense 
 of about or in a distributive sense ; (c) in general to express a 
 reference to something : in respect to. 
 
 (1) (a) 'leW i\s T^v Trl)\iv; so also of persons with the accompanyiu"- 
 idea of their habitation or country. PI. Apol. 17, c. tij xnias tXsihm, i.e. 
 eir ri SiKoiTT'fipiov elsUyai. X. An. 4. 7, 1. eiropei^irav €ij Ta6xovs (went 
 into the country of the Taochoi). Among the Attic writers, also in a hostile 
 sense: contra, in. Th. 3, 1. ia-rpdrevscLv is ri)v 'Attik^i/ (into, agmist At- 
 tica). Witli the verbs avWiyeiv, ffwayeipeiy, a.\tCeiv and the like, the Greeks 
 use els, where we say, to assemble at or in a place. Comp. § 300, 3. (b). Th. 
 2, 13, Tail/ UtXoTrovv7iai(t>v ^vWeyofihuv re 4s rhy 'I<r^/xhy Kol iv 6Sf oyToip. 
 Comp. 4, 91. 8,'93. So the Latins say: congregari, convenire, etc., in urbein. 
 (b)Th.l,74. yaSs is ras tct paicotrias. {c)'Ek &a\(l<r(r7is ils S^d\aa■(ral/. 
 Fl. GoTg. 526, h. eh Kol Trdvv i\\6yiii.os yeyopeveis robs &.\Kovs°EK\r)vas, 
 'ApitrrdSris (among), (d) AoV"? iroieTo-aai els rhv S^/iov (to speak before, in 
 the presence of the people). PI. Monex. 239, a. ol irarepis iroMi Sii <cal koXA epya 
 a.iTe(piivavro els irdvras ay^ptiirous (before all men). (2) 'E s rie\iov xa- 
 raSvPTa (till sunset), Homer; hence els eairepaii (towards, till evening, -pTO-pax- 
 ly to evening as a boundary); so in prose, els r^v 6 arrepai a p (till the following 
 <iay,on the following day); els Tpir-riv Tip.i pav (till,on). (3) (a) 'Expijo-aTO toZs. 
 Xpiip-atriv els r^v v6kii> (forthecitij). Els ti; (forwiiat?); els xepSosTt 
 Spav (to do someihingfor gain), (b) Els KaXhv^Keis (opportune); els rixos 
 ( quickly );els SivaiJ.iv, according to one's abilitij ; els e k ar 6 v (about a hundred 
 or by hundreds, centeni], especially in the arrangement of soldiers, e.g. els Sio 
 (two deep, two by two), (c) @aup.J.(eiv, iiraivew Tiva el s r , (to admire, praise one 
 with respect to, on account of something) ; so Sia<p4peiv twos els iiper-fiv, <l>p6vip.os, 
 eiSiKi/xos e^s Ti, els irdvTa, in every respect; ^K^mtv, i.wa$\4-,reiv tls tA 
 jrpdyiiaTa, like irp6s. 
 
 3. 'Os (ad), to, does not like the other prepositions, denote the 
 relation of position, but only the direction whither; it is used 
 only of persons or of the names of cities, when they stand for 
 the inhabitants. 
 
 Th.4,79. Bpa^lUs h^lKeTo i,s Ti epSixi^xv koI eis rhv Xa\K,S,K'/,v (came to 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 291.] PREPOSITIONS. — A«£. 429 
 
 Perdiecas). Dem. Phil. 1. 54, 48. irpifffieis ireiroiKpey Sis Paai\4a. Th. 8, 
 36. ^KovTos &s rijv Mihr/Toy (ad MUesios). 
 
 Bem. 2. This i>s is to be distinguished from that which stands with as, hr(, 
 and irpiJj with the Ace. (its eis, is ^ir^, is irp6s Ttva). This latter Sis is not a 
 preposition, but it expresses a supposition, just as when it is joined with the par- 
 ticiple, and docs not denote an actual direction to a place, but only one sup- 
 posed, and hence intended. X. An. 1. 2, 1. vApolCn Sis 4vl tovtovs ri 
 arpdrevim (qttasi his helium illaturus, he collects as if against these). Hence this 
 Ils also stands with the prepositions governing other Cases, e. g. Th. 3, 4. 
 UienXovy hroiiiffavro ruv veav Sis eirl v avyLax^i} {as if for the purpose of Jight- 
 ing a vaval battle). 1, 134. of 5^ iroi7j(rd/Mevot x'^'^ovs avSpidvTas'Sio Sis ai/il 
 Uavffaviov aymeacw (quasi essent Pausaniae loco, as if tn the place of Pau- 
 sanias). 
 
 4. Pkepositioks with the Genitive and Accusa- 
 tive: Sta, Kara, inrep, p-erd. 
 
 i 291. (1) Aia, through. 
 
 1. "With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (2) to denote a mo- 
 tion extending through a space or object and again coming out : 
 through and out again, out of (Homer expresses tliis relation 
 still more distinctly, by imiting the preposition ck or ivpo with 
 Sia, e. g. Od. p, 460. Stex p.eyapoio avaxcapeiv) ; (b) to denote ex- 
 tension through something, but without the accompanying rela- 
 tion stated under (a) of coming out of the object; on the Gen., 
 see 5 287, Rem.; — (2) of time, to denote the expiration or 
 lapse of a period: after, properly to the end of a period, ilirough 
 and out; — (3) in a causal sense, to denote oi-igin (rare) and the 
 author (very frequent) ; (b) to denote quality (possessive Gen.) 
 in connection with cTrnt and yiyvea-^oj. ; (c) the means, both of 
 persons and things; (d) manner; (e) worth (rare); (f) com- 
 parison (rare). 
 
 (1) (a) Her. 7, 8. ^eXAoJ e'Aay arpaThv Sia rris Ei ptiirris iirl ttii/ 'El\jU^a. 
 2, 26. SicJeXftii' 5i4 -irdcnts Ziipdivris. 7, 105. i^iilMwe -rhv arparhv 
 liii rrjs epriiKVS M tV 'EUXdSa. 3, 145. Suucinfias Sii. rrjs yopyipvs 
 (having crept out through the prison), (b) Od. m, 335. 5ii vliirov Idiv, 5<i ire- 
 iiov (per eampum). X. Hicr. 2, 8. Sia iroAe/ii'as mpei^aAai (to march through 
 the enemy's country). Figuratively in the phrases, 8ii SiKaioaivrts Uvai (to 
 go in the vxiy of justice, to go through justice, i. e. to be Just) ; Silt rod Sticalov 
 ropii^irStai; S,h .pSfiov %px^<rS)ai (to fear), :Ear. Or. 747. A.i <t>i\tas Uvai 
 rwi (to be friendly to one), X. An. 3. 2, 8. (2) A i" ^t o u s (through, far a year) ; 
 5<a ■KoWoi, pLa.Kpov, hKiyov xp'i>'0" (through, for a long, a short time) ; 
 also 5i' o\iyov, Sia ttoWov without xP^mv, or 5i& XP^""" ^^^ (*« 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
130 SYNTAX. [4 292, 
 
 came after a long time) \ Sii, Travrhs tov xp^""" ToiaSra obk i-yivti i (dunn§ 
 the whole time); Sih Ti/i^pas, Si a vvkt6s {through, throughout the day, etc.). 
 So also of an action repeated at stated intervals, e.g. Sii rplrov crovi 
 irvy^eirav [eKery third year, ierlio guogue anno, always after three years, through 
 and out again); 5ii viiXTrrov crovs, Sick ireVrc iTwv (every fifth year, 
 etc., quinto guoque anno) ; Sik rplriis Tfinepas. (3) (a) Aih PturtKiav ire^vicii 
 idescending from a continued line of Icings, owing on^s birth to kings), X. Cj. 7. 2, 
 24. ndyra SC iavTuv irpaTTfaSmi (to accomplish everything by themselves); 
 hi eauTov KTTjffaar^ai rt. (b) Atoi <\>6^ov etvou,Si^ ex^pt'is yiyyea-^ai twi, 
 Si ipioos, opyrjs, aaij>a\€la.s elvai or ylyveir&ai (to be in fear, to be hostile, 
 lo be angry vnth,to be safe), (c) A:' o ipSraKiiuv Spav (to see viith the eyes). 
 PI. Theaet. 184, c. ^ic6Trei, airiKpiiris iroTipa op^orepa, ^ 6p&fj.ev, touto elvai Ofjj^aX^ 
 ftovs, T] S i' ov SpwfjLey, /cal ^ ajcSvofiey, &Ta,^ Si* ov aKo^io/xfy, {The Dat. denotes 
 the means userf, Si(£ with the Gen. the aci/ue means.) "Exii" nva Si' opyijs (to 
 be angry with) ; Sio x^'P''" ^X^^" ('" """"^ upon, to be engaged in, to handle) , 
 also of persons, e. g. 'Eirpa^av ravra 5i Evpvfiiixov, Th. 2, 2. (d) Aiek 
 (TvovSrjs, Sick Tdx""' Troieiv ti (with earnestness, earnestly, etc.). (e) S. 0. C. 
 584. 5i' ouSEi/tis TroieiffStai (to consider of no value), (f) Her. 1, 25. der]s ii^iov 
 Sia vivTiav rav avaSt-iiiJidTaiv (in comparison with, among). 
 
 II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation to denote extension 
 through a place or object : through, throughout (only poetic) ; — 
 (2) of time to denote extension through a period of time, 
 throughout ; — (3) in a causal sense : (a) to denote the reason, 
 mediation : on account of, oh, propter, by ; (b) of the person hy 
 whose means something is effected. 
 
 (1) (a) Eur. Hipp. 762. Sih irSyriov /cu/xa iiropevcras ifi^i/ &i'aiTaav 
 (through the wave of the sea). (2) Aia pixra. (3) X. An. 1. 7,6. ecrri /les 
 ^/ily j] &pxh V T^arpcpa nphs fikv fieffrifi^piav fi-^XP^^ t)5 S l a Kavfia ov Si/yoyrai 
 oltcup &v^puiroi (on account of the heat). 4. 5,15. Sia ris roiairas oZv 
 avdyKas v'ire\iiTrovr6 T'.ves ruv (TTpuTiuTuv, (b) An. 7. 7, 7. Si* ^juas avv 
 S>€o7s txcr^ rfii/Se T^y X"?"" i^V y<""" means, mediation). KaKo\ SoKoD/ief elcai 
 Sii rovT^v (hujus adpd). 
 
 5 292. (2) Kara, from above, down. 
 
 I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) of motion Aoin 
 a higher to a lower place (desvper, deorsum) ; (b) of a direction 
 towards a place or object situated belo7v : douni to, domn upon, 
 down under (on the Gen., see h 287, Rem.) ; (c) seldom of rest 
 in, upon or at a place or object 0^ 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in a causal 
 and figurative sense, to denote the cause or occasion. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'■292.] PREPOSITIONS. — Kara.. 431 
 
 (1) (a) II. a, 44. ^g Si itar' ObKiparoio Kap^var {down from the heights). 
 Her. 8, 53. ippiwrfov iuvrohs Korek toD relx^os Kira. (b) Her. 7, 6. lupa- 
 WfflT&oi Kark T?s Aa\dir<rris {to disappear doum under the sea). 235. Kara- 
 SeSvKemi (cot4 t?s SiaXiviriis. X. An. 7. 1, 30. eSxoiuu pajpias 4iie ye 
 It OT 4 7^5 opTi/iis yeyeff&at {to be sunk vender the earth). So figuratively of a 
 direction to a lower object, as ro^eUiv Kari'Tivos, itaiea) Hard tivos, to 
 shoot at something, to strike at something (the preposition denoting the direction 
 towards the mark, viz., down); riixTeii/ koto; K6f^ris, on the head (§ 273, 
 Hem. 8) ; (c) Her. 1, 9. (tori vdrou yei/dadai {to come behind, to be behind). 
 Th. 4, 32. KOTtk vc^Tou ftyai {in the rear). 33. xarit vdirov KoAeffrriKdvai. 
 (2) Atyiiv Kurd rivos{dicere de aUqua re) ; in this connection, the idea of hos- 
 tility especially is expressed by the preposition, e. g. \4yeir, AiJ^os kot<£ tivos 
 {against one). X. Apol. 13. ifieiSeaS'tu Karii, rod &eoS {to say anything fatsdy 
 of or against the God) ; but also in an opposite relation, Dem. Phil., 2. 68, 9. i /c<u 
 liiyiaTiv i<rri xaSf' i/iLav iyxdiitov {in honor of you). Aeschin. Ctes. 60. 
 ol Karek Aiinoadivovs ^iraivoi. 'SKonteiv Kard Tiros {secundum, in respect 
 to). Plat. Phaed. 70, d. fi^ /car" avApiiiruv iTKSirci ftimv toBto, aWli koI 
 /caret (liai' itdvTav Kol <)>vrav. So also in Attic adjurations and oaths, 
 e. g. eSxeir^ai, iiLvivai Kard r 1 1/ o s, for example, { e p <3 v TeA.e^u)i'{Th.5,47), 
 to swear by unblemished victims (as it were holding the hands over them) ; so 
 also EJ^xcirdai KoSr' kKari/ifiiris, Kari 0o6s. 
 
 II. In a local and temporal relation, Kara, with the Ace. is 
 directly opposite to dvo, in respect to the point from whence 
 the motion of the action begins ; but it agrees with avd in de- 
 noting the direction to an object and the extension over it. 
 The use of dra is more confined to poetry, but Kard has no such 
 limitation. (IJt In a local relation : (a) to denote the direction 
 of the action to a lower object; (b) to denote extension /roin 
 above to below, from a higher to a lower object: thrcfughout, 
 through, over ; (c) in the historians in the sense of e regione, 
 over against, opposite to ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
 or duration; — (3) in a causal sense: (a) to denote ^zwjoose and 
 design ; (b) conformity, and the respect in which anything is con- 
 sidered, and hence also a reason: on account of; (c) an indefinite 
 measure {about) ; (d) the manner ; hence also with the distribu- 
 tive specifications of number. 
 
 (I) (a) BiKKeiv kot4 yaarepa (to strike on the abdomen), and the like in 
 Homer. Her. 3, 14. TrapTJurav al irapSrivot Kara robs irarepas {to the fathers 
 bitting) ; then of the course of a stream, Karh ji6ov, down the stream (see avd). 
 Her. 4, 44. (Scylax cum suis) evKeoi/ Karli irorainhv Tpbs ria te Kni ^A^ow ava- 
 To\is is ^dKacnrav. (b) Her. 3, 109. oi eX'^""" Kara iraffav rijV yrfv c'uri. 
 Karik yriv, Kara &d\a<rcrav ■Kopeiea&ai {through, over,by). (c) Th. 2,30 
 IQ 
 " Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
432 SYNTAX. [i 293. 
 
 KciToi 7) K.e<l>aWrivla Kuril 'kKapvaviav {opposite to). (2) Kot4 Thii av- 
 •rhv XP^"""' Kara rhy rrporepor v6XefiOi' (during the same fe'me, etc.); 
 01 Kard riva (contemporaries of any one). (3) (a) Her. 2, 152. uarck \i]iTiv 
 iKirXdaavras (having set sail for the purpose of plunder). Th. (caret Aiav ^iceip 
 (spectatum vemsse). Kari r I ; why? wherefore? <b) Kori vi/iov, Karci 
 7i6yov (ad raiionem, pro ratione,in conformity with, according to) :, Karh, yvtlt- 
 liriv tJji' ijiiiv. Her. 2, 3. Kara rijv Tpo(piiv rSiv valStcv roffavra iXeyov 
 (in respect to nourishing the lays). Her. 1, 85. Kara rhv Kprirripa offraj eirxe. 
 KaTe{ ri (in some respect, quodammodo) ', Kar' oi/Sey, Karatravra (in no, 
 every respect) \ Kara rovro (hoc respectu, hance propter hoc) ; Th. 1, 60. Karh 
 ipt\iay airrov I ir\e7(rroi iK Koplv^ov ffrparturat ^fteAoyral ^vveffTroyro (on ac- 
 count of his friendship). Dem. Chers. 90, 2. ots Kara robs vdjiovs i<l>' i/uy 
 icrriv, Sray PovKriff^e, Ko\i(eiV (to punish according to thelaws). Kar i, <j>ia-iy 
 (secundum naturam) ; Karci Siva/iiv (according to one's aiility, to tJie best of one's 
 ability); Karh Kpdros (with all one's might), (c) Kara e^'f^Koyra srt} 
 (about sixty years); Karh f4.iKp6y (gradually); Kar' oKlyov, KarhTTo\6f 
 Karh iroWd (by far), (d) KaSr' riirvx^ay (quietly) ; Karh rdxos (quickly); 
 ffvvrvx^av (casu, by chance); Kara rh Iffxvpoy (per vim, violently); 
 Karh fi^pos (in order, in turn). Her. 6, 79. &Troivd iari Sio iiyeai Kar &vSpa 
 (viritim, for each man) ; Kara Kiifias (vicatim, by villages) ; Karh iirjya (sin- 
 gulis mensibus, every month, monthly); KaSr' tj fie pay, ty koA' ty (one after the 
 other, one by one, i. e. singly) ; ku^' sirrd, septeni. 
 
 Remakk. Very many verbs compounded with Kard, are constructed with the 
 Gen. to denote the person who caused the action, and towards whom it is directed, 
 e. g. KoradiKdCai, KararyvyydnTKw, KaraKpivu, Karwprt<j>i^ofjLai rivos, to give judgment, 
 bring a charge, pass a vote against any one ; Kara^evSo/jMi rtyos, to lie against any 
 • one; KarayeAw rivos, to laugh at, to deride one ; Karacppoyat riyos, despicio aliquem. 
 An Aec. very frequently stands with these, e. g. KaTtiyopeiv ri rivos, to accuse 
 one of something, KarayiyvtiiffK^iv ri (as &voiav, kKqit^v) rivos, KaraKpiveiv rivhs 
 bdyaroy, Kara^iKd^nv rivhs ^dvarov, Kara^(pl^ea-^ai rivos Sei?day. 
 
 i 293. (3) 'Yirip, super, over. 
 
 I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote resting, 
 abiding over or above a place or object (J 287, Rem.) ; — (2) in 
 a cansal sense : (a) for, for the good of; (b) to denote an inter- 
 nal, mental cause, instead of the more usual irro with the Gen. ; 
 (c) with verbs of entreating, imploring : for the sake of so?ne 
 cne; (d) to denote cawse ; in connection with rov and the Inf. 
 to denote purpose, which by the language is considered as the 
 cause; (e) in general to denote in respect to, instead of the 
 more usual rr^pi with the Gen. 
 
 II. With the Ace. : over, above and beyond, used in relation 
 to space and time, and also to measure and number. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 294.J PEEPosiTioNS. — Mem. 435 
 
 I. (1) X. C. 3.8,9. S jjXioiToB d4povs iirip Tifiuv Kal tbc trTfySiii xopev 
 i/itvos OKikv airap irapexei (passing over us arid the houses). Her. 7. 69. 'Apafi'mp 
 Kol Ai^imravTuv iwep Alyiirrov oiKtiiUvaiv %pxe 'Aptrifitis (who dwell dbov6 
 ■%ypO- "t-irip ^a\ii(nrijs oiKiitv (properly to dwell beyond the sea, i. e. an, by 
 thesea). (2) (a) nix^a-^oi iirip Tijs irarplSos (to figlvt in defence of some- 
 thing, as if standing over it); i virep t^j 'EAXifSoi davmos (death in behalf 
 of , for Greece); iro\iTeie(r^ai, arpariiyuv iirip tivos (in alicujus gi-at!am) ; 
 iirip rav irpay/iir wv <rirovSdCeir,SeSoiKfi>ai iircp rivos(timerealicui). (b) 
 iirip irtv&ovs (for, because of grief ). (c) II. a, 466. xal /uv iirip irarphs 
 Koi fayrcpos iivKS/io to \liriTeo Koi rtKeos (entreat him for the sake of his 
 father, etc. (d) PI. Symp. 208, d. iirip iperris i^ayirou koI Toiairiit 
 S6^iis fiK\eods vdmes irdina irotovirtv (on account of , for the scike of imper- 
 ishable distinction, etc.). Dem. Phil. 1. 52,43. iirip to5 h^ ira&ttn kokus 
 iirh tt\lirirov (for the purpose of not suffering evil, etc.). — II. Hei'. 4, 188. ^nrre- 
 ov<ri iirip rhv iipLov (over the house). Seldom of mere extension, as toIs 
 ®P?{' ToIs iirip 'EW'lisirovTov olxovin (the Thradans dwelling beyond the 
 Hellespont, i. e. on the Hellespont); iirip riiy iiKiKlav (beyond one's years, 
 age); iirip Siva/iiy (beyond one's power); iirip iv^pairov (beyond man, 
 i. e. beyond what could be expected of him). Her. 5, 64. iirip to Teaaepi. 
 KOI/TO iri) (beyond, more than, forty years). 
 
 k 294. (4) McTa, with. 
 
 I. Met a, allied to /meVos (in tlie iniddle, between) denotes the 
 being in the midst of, being among persons or things. With the 
 Gen., fjLera. denotes an intimate connection, a participation, a 
 sharing in (comp. fierexeiv) ; the Gen. denotes the whole, of 
 which the subject of the sentence constitutes a part; it conse- 
 quently differs from avv with the Dat., which merely denotes 
 the connection (association) of one object with another, with- 
 out the one being considered a part of the other (comp. (Twe^^eti/). 
 It is used (1) in a local relation: in the midst, among ; then to 
 denote an active participation in aid of some one : vdth ; — (2) 
 in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote the means or 
 manner; (b) conformity. 
 
 (1) Eur. Hec. 209. fierci vexpav Kelroiiai (to lie among the dead, and one's 
 telf to hedead). PI. Kp. 359, e. Ko^tr&cu /nTh tuv 6,\Kav. Werd tivos 
 udx^irSrai (to fight in active participation unth one). Dem. Phil. 3. 117, 24. fierh 
 TUV ii5 iKij fi4v uv iroKefietv (to participate in carrying on war with those who had 
 been injured). EIj/iu, ffTijytu fierd rivos (to be on the side of one) PI. Kp. 467. 
 e. ffcc^OovTaL,' fi e T ^ ir petr ^vt 4 pay i]y e fj.iiy uy iirififyot (they follow the 
 older leaders, and as it were, hold fast to them ; -wholly different from firetrSai 
 uerd Tiya and irw Ttyi). (2) (a) Th. 1, 18. /tcTct xii'Siyiii/ ras iieXerat 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
434 SYNTAX. [i 294 
 
 Kotoiftevoi (i. e. surrounded by, in the midst of dangers). X. C. 3. 5, 8. /iei' 
 4p er? s irjKrrciav (as it were in an intimate connection with virtue). Bern. PhiL 
 3. 130, 74. iiuv 01 irpdyofot tovto rh yipas iKTiiuanTO Kal KaTcMtrov fierh troK- 
 \!iv KoJ fLeyaKav KivSiyay. (b) Isocr. Archid. 129, 66. roiis v6fiovs, /teSr' 
 Sk oiKovrres eiiSaifioveirTaToi rav '^10\.4ivav ^laav (agreeably to which, tuv viiuon 
 iX^/ieroi, legibus quasi adhmrentes). PI. Ap. 32, c. ^eri tov v6fi.ov Kcd toi 
 SaiKalov ^M" f"^"'" /"* '"" S'ttKivSvyeieiv, t) /ieSr' ifiiSiv yeviffdai /ii) Slxaia 
 fiovKevofiivicv {in confiyrmity with law and justice). 
 
 II. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) (Poet.) to de- 
 note a direction or motion into the midst of something, a striv- 
 ing to be united with a person or thing, in a friendly or hostile 
 relation, and generally to denote a succession in space ; (b) to 
 denote a local extension between two objects, in the prose 
 phrase /lero. x«'P«s l^av n, to have something in hand; — (2) 
 (prose and Poet.) to denote succession in time and in order: 
 after, next to, next in order; — (3) in a causal sense (only Poet.), 
 to denote purpose and conformity. 
 
 (1) 'iKiO-^ai /neri Tpaas Ka.1 'Axatois (to come into the midst of the Tr 
 and Gr.). II. p, 460. cctffirav &st alyvrrihs fie to. xV""'^ (among the geese). 
 Seldom used of things. U. /8, 376. 3s/i€ ^hct" airp^KTovs ^ptSas KcHveiKta 
 jSiiAXci (tnto the midst of contention). B^i'ai /»etJi NeVropo (to go to Nestor, 
 properly into a connection with him) ; j8^ 5e /ler' 'ISoiievrja, (to go to Idomen. 
 to _/6BoM! q/Jer Am, properly to go into the engagement or battle with him), H. 
 //, 297. 11. y, 492. ?imoI ewov^^, &s€i Te jU€t& kt'iKov etrireTO /i^\a {behind the 
 ram). (2) Merck rhv tov vaiSbs SrivaTon, X. (after the death). M€t4 
 Tavra (after) ; the Ace. often iias a participle agreeing with it, e. g. Her. 1, 34. 
 Herh ^6Ka>ya olx^f^^^ov (after file departure of Solon). Me^' jjfiepap 
 (interdiu, in the day time, properly after the break of day), X. An. 4. 6, 12. 
 Kluce7vos ^\a0€ fier' e/ie Seircpos (second after me), Cy. 2. 2, 4. n<iAii' (eXx'"] 
 tV irXovffiuTirnv in Tj? 'A<rfif ;H€t4 Ba/3u\uva (the richest next to Babylon), 7. 2, 
 11. (3) Od. o, 184. ■KXitv pL^rh x^^i^^V (ad aes jjetendum). Eur. Ale. 07. 
 Eupuff&EMS Tre/ufiavTos iTmeioy ^eri SxiJ"" (.^''i after a chariot). H. o, 52. 
 r^ K6 TloiretSiwy ye . . . a1\pa jtieTOffTpe\|/ete v6ov jwer^ (rhv Koi ipihv Krjpf 
 (agreeably to, according to, your desire and mine). 
 
 Remark. MertJ is constructed with the Dat. only in poetry, particularly m 
 the Epic, to denote merely local union or association in place ; in prose, iv and 
 avv are used instead of it. It commonly stands with the plural, or with the 
 singular of collective nouns ; the words with which it stands may denote per- 
 sons, or things considered as such, and the parts or members of animate things, 
 e. g. fier oAcu/iTOis, with, among; fieTci irrpaT$; fieri x^fU'^'X'', yewai, yapifnf 
 hxus (in tlie midst of), between, fierh <ppe<rty, in the mind, iierii v^ivirl, Kifuurt ; /uetJi 
 wvoipr etyiuoio, Homer. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 295.' PREPOSITIONS. — 'Afi.'j>L, TrepC. 43S 
 
 6. Prepositions with the Genitive Dative, and 
 Accusative: afntfn, ircpl, iiri, jrapo, Trpojs, vtto. 
 
 } 295. (1) 'AfifjiC and lap!.. 
 
 \. The prepositions a.fitj>i and irepC express nearly the same 
 relations of position: around, about; a.p.<^i, onhoth sides, Trepi, 
 on all sides; they also agree in their use, though the use of 
 ajxtfii is rarer, and is more Ionic and poetic than Trcpi, which ex- 
 presses a far greater variety of relations and has a more gen- 
 eral application. 
 
 2. 'A/A(^t denotes in general the surrounding of something 
 (on both sides), the being near and cbsc to something. 
 
 I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote re- 
 moval from that which surrounds (Poet.) ; (b) to denote dwell- 
 ing or rest arouiid something {h 287, Rem.), though but seldom; 
 — (2) in a causal sense, to denote the occasimi or cause : about, 
 for, on account of, though but seldom in prose, irtpi with the 
 Gen. being generally used instead of it. 
 
 II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation (Poet, only), to de- 
 note rest around, at, near, among ; — (2) in a causal sense (very 
 seldom in prose, indeed not at all in Attic prose) : (a) to denote 
 the cause or occasion, as with the Gen., with this difference, 
 however, that with the Dat., the relation of causality is con- 
 sidered as wholly local ; (b) to denote an internal and mentai 
 reason (Poet.). 
 
 III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation, to denote local 
 extension : about, around, on; — (2) to denote time and number 
 approximately or indefinitely ; — (3) in a causal and figurative 
 sense, to denote a mental dwelling upon an object, taking pains, 
 and being employed about it. 
 
 I. fl) (a)Kur. Or. 1460. o;n<(>J iroptpvpean tt 4 ir K ai y ^l4>ria-7nlffavTes{ from the 
 gartnents which were around the sword), (b) Her. 8, 104. a/*<(>!TaiJT7(j omeoviri 
 Trjs ■ir6\ios {dwell around this city). (2) M^x^irS-ai an4>i Tivos {for, on account 
 of some one, or something). X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. eij Kaiphv ^Keis, Hiras t^j Bi'ktjj okou- 
 trris waftnv t^j o/t<^I toC irarpis {about, relating to your father). 11. (1) Te- 
 Kaaiiv aii-cpl ffTri^e<rinv {around the breast), II. P, 388. 'Aii<p\ KKdSois efeiraai 
 {to be surrounded by branches, to sit among). (2) (a) II. ir, 565. oi/t(/>l vinvi 
 KOTaTe*vn«Ti fuix^irdat {about, on account of a dead body). II. 7, 157. a/itpl 
 vuj/aiKi ii\7eo Trdox^'".- H«''- ^> ^^S- <"' /ivvrrvpfs epiv dxov a/iipl liovffiKf. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
436 SYNTAX. • [i 29a 
 
 62. ipoPri^els a/i^l rg yvvatKi [respecting). 3. 32. a/n^l t$ ^ai/irif 
 auT^s Si|ij AeVeToi A({7oj. (b) 'A;u^l ^(i)3^ (pme metu, for, on account of); 
 a/iipl ^v/i^ (pae ira). III. (1) X. Cy. 6. 2, 11. (iruAXe'yeTai) ri ffTpdrev/ia 
 a/itpl rhv rioKTwAiv voraiiiv. 2. 4, 16. r^iipaica aiKpX to, 'Apia 
 (around, on the borders) Hence also of the persons around any one, as in ol 
 aii<t>l Tiva., see 5 263, d. (2) '\\i.i^\ rhv x^'j"^'"' [about winter); afjiipX 
 Sfi\T\v [sub vesperam, about twilight); aiJ.(pX Tohs fivpiovs (circiier). (3) 
 'Exe'" a.ij.(pl Ti [to be employed about something), c. g. a^fl Se7wmy, afitp' ittttous, 
 Sipfiara. 
 
 3. He pi signifies ail round, round, in a circle. 
 
 I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling or 
 rest around an object. This use of it is confined to poetry, and 
 even here is very rare ; comp. k 287, Rem. — (2) in a causal and 
 figurative sense : (a) to denote the cause or occasion, a respect, 
 in a great variety of connections : about, concerning, for, on ac- 
 count of, in respect to ; — (b) to denote a mental cause : for, from, 
 on account ofprae, though but seldom ; (c) to denote the rela- 
 tion of a person or thing to that which belongs to them, which, 
 as it were, surrounds them and refers to them (Gen. of the 
 possessor) ; (d) to denote worth and superionty. 
 
 (1) ,0d. e, 68. avrov TerdvuffTO irepl (nreiovs y\a<pvpo7o r}fjLepis [thert 
 the vine VMS stretched around the cave). Vi(i. t})p ijl\v ^yibv i<rd(affa. irepl TpAirios 
 fie^aara. (2) (a) KixcirStai, anodavew irepl r^y irarpiSos (for, on account 
 of) ; with verbs denoting a physical or mental perception, i,Koiety, clSevat, etc., 
 mth verbs of saying and asking, e. g. \eyeiv vspi Tims, \6yos vepi rtvos, with verbs 
 of anxiety, fear, and such as express all otlier affections, c. g. tpopcta^ia repl 
 ■TrarplSos, ^TrijutAtifl-ftai, iTrip.e\(ia, Trepl Tivos [to fear for one's country). Dem. Phil. 
 1,52,43. 71 h.px^ Tov TToKefwv y^y^vij'^at Trepl rod r i^iapiiffatr^at ^iXnrirov 
 (mith respect to taking vengeance on Philip), (b) ITepl opyris (prae ira, on ac- 
 count of, because of anger), Th. 4, 130. (c) Tk irt pi tivos [the affairs, fortune, 
 circumstances of any one, etc.); ot we pi tivos [those belonging to any one, asso- 
 ciated with him, and as it were sun-ounding him). Dem. Phil. 1. 50, 36. ec toIs 
 irepl TOO TToXe fiov Kal Tp toutou vapaffKevij &raKTa aTravra (sc. itTTiy) (in 
 matters pertaining to the war), (d) In the Common language, irepl ttoAXow, rep] 
 irKeioyos, irtpi TrAeftTTou, irepl o?dyov, nepl iKdrTovos, Trepl ^KaxifTTov, Trepl ovBsvhs 
 roiiladm or iiyua&ai ti [to value high, higher, etc.) ; so also Trepl TroAAoi! 4<rTtt 
 rifuv (of great value). 
 
 II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelHng 
 or rest around or near something, with the idea of surrounding 
 or encircUng it (seldom in Attic prose) ; (2) in a causal sense : 
 (a) like d/x<^t with the Dat., but much more frequently; (b) te 
 denote an external or itiiernal reason or cause (Poet.), 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 296.] PEEPOsiTioNS. — "Etti. 437 
 
 (1) Her. 7, 61. irepl rpiri Ke^«Ap<ri sJxov ridpas. PI. Up. 359, d. vepl 
 "^V X^'P' XP"'"''''' ioKriXtov ^ipfw. (2) (a) yidxfabcu vepi riyt {for some- 
 thing, some one), (Poet.), in prose especially with verbs of fearing: Th. 1, 60. 
 deSidres ircpl t^ x"P^V (fearing for the town). 4, 70. ieiaas wepl IleAo- 
 Trovv7i(Tlois. 6,9. irepl t^ i/iavroS aiiiiaTi o^paSu. PI. Phaed. 114. d. 
 ^afipe7v wepl rivt (to be of good courage about something), (b) (Poet.) Ilepl 
 xipfMTi, (p6fiai, a&evei, oiipri (prae, far joy, fear, atc~, as it were surrounded by 
 
 III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation: around, (^a) to de- 
 note motion round about something, irUo the circle or vicinity of 
 an object (Poet.) ; (b) extension around, in or at, throvgh some- 
 thing, with verbs of rei3t ; - — (2) of time and number stated in- 
 definitely or approximately ; — (3) in a cansal or figurative sense, 
 to denote a mental dwelling about an object, taking pains with 
 it, being employed about it ; also in respect to. 
 
 (1) (a) n. K, 139. irepl ^pivai 'i\a^' mil, the clamor came round his mind; 
 (b) Her. 3, 61. KapL^vtrr) XP'^^K°^'^^ irept Aiyvirro v itrai/ia'TeaTal &ydpes Mt£- 
 yot {round in Egypt). 7,131. 6 fiev irepl Tliepiriv dierpt^e 7]fi4pas ffvxvd.s. 
 Th. 6, 2. ^Kow ^oiviKss irep\ ■jrao'av rijf ^iKeKiav &Kpas t€ iirl Trj ^ohdirtTTi 
 aTro\afi6vrss Ka\ t4 firmet/ieva yriff'.Sia {in Sicily around on all the coasts). 
 Hence of irepi t i y a {those around any one, connected or associated with him) ; ol 
 
 fpl n\i.Tava (§ 263, d). Comp. apLipi. (2) Th. 3, 89. Trcpl Toirovs 
 ovsxP^^'^^^ {about). Ilepl fivplovs (about). (3) Ol irepl fioutrtK^p 
 &f7€S, ol ire pi TTjy yeiofierpiav SiaTpifioyres, o'lrov^d^eiy irept rt (those oc- 
 cupied about, with music, etc.). 'A/ieXas ^x^'" Tep/ tivo. X. An. S. 2, 20. 
 iia/iapTdveiv vepl riva. (with respect to). 1. 6, 8. iSmos Trepi -riva. C. 1. 1, 
 20. aoi^poviiv irepl Tois fteouj. Ai irepl rh (rwp.a rjdoyai; -rh irepl t^» 
 apeTi\v (the essence of virtue, what paiains to it). 
 
 § 296. (2) 'Eirt, upon. 
 
 With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote rest upon 
 a place or object, bordering on a place, the place being regarded 
 as the point of support, that on which the action leans, hence : 
 upon, at, near to {k 287, Kem.) ; (b) a direction to a place (} 273, 
 Rem. 8) ; — (2) in a temporal relation to denote the time in or 
 during which something takes place (4 273, Rem. 12) ; — (3) in 
 a causal and figurative sense : (a) with verbs of saying, swear- 
 ing and affirming before any one (as it were leaning or resting 
 on some one) ; (b) to denote the occasion or author, especially 
 in the phrase, to be named aftersome one or some thing; (c) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
438 SYNTAX. [i 296 
 
 i^-mformity, with verbs signifying to examine, to jvdge, to con- 
 sider, to say, and to show; (d) dependence or resting on some 
 thing, a steadfast abiding by (on) something ; (e) the manner ■ 
 (f ) the purpose, which is then considered by the language, as 
 the cause, with the verb Ta^Srfvai, and the hke, to be set over 
 something, and in certain phrases. 
 
 (1) (a) PI. Menex. 246, d. oW ^-irl -yris, olSf fnri 7^5. Her. 7, 111. rb 
 uavriilov toCto iffn ^ttI tup ovpitap T&v v^TjKoTiirojp, 6, 129. 4trl 
 TTJs rpatr4^Tis opxh'^o.ro [danced ujpon the table). 2, 35. to ^x^^^ ''* M^»' 
 &vSpes iirl twv KetpaKeay tpopeovtrt, at 5e yvpcuKes iirt rwv ^fitav. X. 
 An. 4. 3, 28. "aevo^Stv Trdfi'^as &yye\oj/ KeKevet [atnobs) aiiTov fietpat cTri tov 
 iroTo/ioB {at, near the river), (b) Th. 1, 116. irAeiV iirl ^dfiov {to sail Jbr 
 Samos). X. Cy. 7. 2, 1. 4irl ^SipSfoiy (peiyeiy. Dem. Phil. 3. 123, 48. am- 
 Xopetv ir' oIkov (to return homewards). (2) Her. 6,98. Iirl Aapciov iyb- 
 6T0 irXcM KoK^ TT? 'EWaBi {in the time of, during the reign of Darius). X Cy. 1 
 6, 31. ^irl tS)V 1] fierepcav •7rpoy6y(ov. So iir ^fiov, ^^' Tjfiwy, 4ip' 
 lifiay {mea, nostra, vestra memoria, in, within my memory, etc.). The Gen. often 
 stands in connection -with a participle, but always with the present ; hence M 
 often denotes the duration of time, c. g. iir\ Kvpov $aoi\ciovTos {during 
 the reign of Cyrus). (3) (a) A6'7eii' iv\ SiKacrrav, iirl itapTvpay {iefore, 
 in the presence of, properly, resting or leaning upon). Dem. Cor. hrmn6ircaira 
 €irl T&v ffrpaTTjySiv {took an oath in the presence of the generals). Similar to 
 the preceding is. Her 9, 11. etirav iir' SpKov {said on oath, quasi substrata vel 
 supposito jwrejuranda, janing or resting onthe oath), (b) KaXsia^ai 4iri riyos 
 (to be called afler one). Her. 7, 40. J^unuoi KaXiovTcu. ftnroi iirX ToCSe {far this 
 reason), 74. ^irl AuSoi! toC "Atuoj %(txov rijv irami/itTjy. TV ^Trayvfiiap 
 ■jroteicr^ai eiri Tiyos (to be called, to take a surname f-om one). ^E^* eaurov (of 
 one's own accord, sua sponte) ; iirl irpoipiaeas (simuhtione, under pretext). Aeyeir 
 iirl Tiyos (dicere de aliqua re). PI. Charm. 155, d. iirl tov Ka\ov \4yup 
 7rat5(fs. (c) ZyyTciy Tt 4irl tivos, Kpiynv n iiri tivos, ffKoirety tl eirl Ti- 
 yos, KfyeiyTi 4vi Tiyos, €iri56i|oJ ti M ticos, etc. (to judge something accord- 
 ing to a thing or person, as it were resting upon). PI. Rp. 597, b. /SoiAei oly, etj^iy, 
 4 if aiiT&y T air ay rhy lu/iriTiiy tovtov ^iTfioaiuv, tIs ttot' iariy ; (visne, aa 
 fuiec ipsa imitatorem istum exigamus?) (d)'i(^' IoutoS, eavray, riiiav ai- 
 T&y, eouT^y (by one's self, separately, of one's own accord, properly, resting or 
 depending on one's self, independent of others). X. An. 2. 4. 10. oi'EAAijra 
 i^payTis Tohs Papfiapovs avToX i <p' kavTuv ix^P""" ^^t^'a^ ^X<"^^^ ('"'"TcheA 
 by themselves). Her. 5, 98. oiKeoyras rfys ^pvyins x^P^v " koJ kiHihtiv ^ir' lau- 
 Twy (by themselves). 4, 114. oiKia/iey t'lr' riii4av avTuy. Here seems to 
 belong the phrase so frequently found in the Attic historians: '£<(>■ ev6s, 
 eirl TpiSiy, TeTTdpay TeTdx^cu, <rTT\yai, one, two, three men deep or in fie, 
 properly to be placed or utand on one, the row resting or leaning on one, 
 etc.). Dem. Phil. 1.42, 7. ty Kid i^6?s ^tI t^j To,a«T„j ^^eWite y,y 
 {■edtti yyii/iris (firmiter adhaerere huic rationi). 9. (*,'a.i^os) oix oti- t' i,rriv. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{ 5i96.] PREPOSITIONS. — E#t'. 43J 
 
 ^X""* & KaTtaTpawrai, /jeVeic ^irl Toiraiy {cannot remain mtli, satinfied with, 
 those things which he has conquered). Phil. 2. 66, 3. ttahitraiT' ttv iKetmv irpdr' 
 Tftv ToSra, i<l>' £i' icrri yw {quibtis nunc studet). So ii4veiv 4ir\ avoias, (e) 
 Dem. Cor. 230, 17. offre tiKsias, oSt' iif ik\7)i&efas obteiiias eipr)ii4y» 
 {stated neither With justice nor in adherence to the truths as it were, resting on 
 truth), (f ) Her. 3, 109. ^ir" o 5 itAx^l^'^'' (""»' rei proe/eeti sumus). Dem. Cor. 
 266, 118. iwl roS ^eapiKoS KaTa^To^els {placed over the theatre-money). 
 Hence at 4iri tuv irpayfuiTatf {those pkieed over business, those at the head of 
 affairs). 
 
 II. With the Dat., (1) in a local relation: (a) to denote the 
 tarrying or resting upon, or (b) more frequently, at, by or near a 
 place or object ; — (2) of time (mostly' only poetic) ; — (3) in a 
 causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote dependence : penes, 
 in the power of; -^ (b) a condition under wlHch something takes 
 place ; (c) the purpose, design, or determination ; (d) the goal or 
 limit ; (e) the reason, with verbs expressing an affection of the 
 mind (i 285, Rem. 1). 
 
 (1) (a) Th. 1, 56. (rioTiSoiSTai) OMOvtiv in\ T^ 't(rS'ii$ -tTJi tIaJiMi'il'. ^' 
 An. 7. 4, 4. Oi 0pf Kfj Tcks i\<inrficiSas iir\ rtiTs Kt^aXais (popoBiri koI to?* 
 &itI, Kal (eipiis n€XP^ ™'' 'fotSv M ruv linrav lx<"">'"'> Wear fox-skin caps on 
 their heads and ears, and have cloaks reaching to their feet when upon their horsea 
 {firi with the Dat. purely local, but ^*1 r&v lititur, inasmuch as the horses are 
 considered as active), (b) Her. 7,89. oi ioivuces rh *d\aAr oixfov iiri t^ 
 'EpvSrpy S^aKia-ffri {upon, by). So also where one thing is said to be along 
 With another, or in addition to it, e. g. icr^Uiv iir\ r$ (tItw &^ou {to eat the 
 Stj/ov uiith bread) ; 4it\ r$ alti^ itivdv {to drink with one^s food); ivX rp Ki' 
 XiKt ^Scij' {to sing over on^s cups). Hence, (itX roitoii {upon,in addition 
 to this, i. e. besides) ; finally it is also used to denote a succession of things in 
 time and space. Od. tj, 120. Syxvv e*' Syxi'V ynpiffxa {pear m pear). %. 
 Cy. 2. 3, 7. iveffTT) iif abtif *epo(J\os {after him). 9ims 4irl <f>6vif (murder 
 upon murdtr), Eur. (2) "EttI vvktI (D. &, 529), in, during the night, comp. 
 ^ 283, 3, (b). (3) (a) Dem. Chers, 90, 2. i(l>' vfiiv ^irn {roifout) Ko\d(eu> 
 {penes vob, it is in your power, etc.). (b) 'Eirl roirij), iv' oiSeyl {hac,nuUa 
 conditione, reulhpacto, on this condition, etc.). Her. 3, 83. ^irl ToiTip vTre^iarif 
 fiaL rrjs apxfjlt, i'f' $f^ i'"' ovSevhs ifieav &p^ofmi. Hence ol price, e. g. ivl 
 fiiffAv (*" condition of, for, a reward); iirl neyiXois t6kois tavflQelrAia, 
 (to borrow on high interest); ^irl ir6ffa (at what price). (c)Her. 1,68. ^ttI kok# 
 i,v&pJnr()i) fiStlpos tkwiipijToi (in pemiciem hominis). So IttI roir^ (hoc con- 
 Mio, far this purpose, with this design). X. S. 1,5. OpanaySp^ woKb Itpyipum 
 SeSaxas ivl ffo(pi({ (ad discendam sapientiam). PI. Ap. 20, e. ^peiSeral rt 
 K«l ivl 810/80X3 '■5 ^/*5 Ae'7ei. Hence 01 iir\ raTs ^7)x»'"'?J (thost 
 placed over the mjzchines) ; oi ^#2 tojs t p Ay h a (Ti (those intrusted with busines*)^ 
 lirl rf S f <r 3 1 K y tiv (charged with the money fir the public shows). Dem. Cor 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
440 SYNTAX. U 297. 
 
 264, Its. (d) Aeyeu/ i*l rivi (to pronounce u. eulogy on one), vS/mivs Si4<r&a. 
 iltl TiDt ifor). Ani so opoudCe'v or Ka\e7i/ ti ^ir( rtvi (nomen alicui impiy 
 rtere, to call a person or thing something). PI. Ep. 470, h. iirl ii.i ;> rg rod oiKetov 
 ?X*P? (rrda-is Kdxhritai, iirl Se TJJ tov aKKorptov irSKefios [to hostility at home, 
 the name insurrection was given, i. e. hostility at home was called insurrection, thai 
 abroad, tear). Also, against, in a hostile sense. Her. 6, 88. rh irav HTjxavtiffa- 
 ir3ai ^ir" Alyiv'liTriiTi {against the Aeginetans). Th. 1, 102. tV yevoix.im\r 
 i«\ Tip M^Sij) IVfifiaxlaf- (e) Tehav, /ifja ippoviiv, fiaivev^ai, ayocaKTEjc, etc. 
 ivi Tivi (to laugh at, begreatly elaiedat, etc.). 
 
 III. With the Ace, (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
 heal limit, the direction or motion to or upon a place or object ; 
 (b) extension over an object: over, upon;-^ (2) of time : (a) to 
 denote the temporal limit {up to, till), also the limit of quantity 
 {about) ; (b) extension over a period of time {during) ; — (3) in 
 a causal and figurative sense: (a) to denote purpose, design; 
 (b) conformity, manner ; (c) in respect to. 
 
 (I) (a) 'Avapaifeiv i<p' linrov, eirl S>p6vov. PI. Crit. 112, e. (ol 'AAtimoi) 
 ilr\ ira.&o.v Ev pd)7r7jv itai 'Atr^ac Kara re ffcafi^Tcay KtiWtj Koi Karct riji/ tuv 
 yf/vxaii iravToiav apcriiv iWiyi/ioi ^ffar (over all Europe, etc.). 'fiirl Se^ia, en' 
 ipimpd (upon the right, left, to the right,left). (2) (a) ■E<^' kairepav (until 
 e3)ening) ; (h) ^irl voWas 7ifi4pas, i<l>' ijfiepay. Th. 4, 1. rb 'f^yiov iir\ 
 TToXhtf x?^^^^ ia-TotrlaCe (for along time). 94. oi tir?^Tai 4ic\ oKTcb rraif rh 
 irrpoTiJireSor ird^avTO (by eights, eight in file). 'Eirl fidya, TroXi, irAfOC, liftboy, 
 ftoWoy, n!Mp6v, eVl t6<tov, i<p' ttrov (greatly, especially, much rather, etc.). TcTifx- 
 ^ai lir\ woWois (many in file). (3) (a) Her. 1.37. iirl d-fipav Uvai (venatum 
 ire). 3, 14. litl SSap Uvai (aguatum ire). Hence eTri ri; whereforef In a 
 hostile sense, e. g. aTpaTeiea^at ^irl Aviois (upon, against the Lydians) ; iXai- 
 yeiv iwl Hepa'as; (b) iir' laa (equally, in the same way). Her. 3, 71. tV 
 stttX^lpTjtrtv Tavri]V fiij aura ffwrdx^v^ a^ou\(os, aXV i-jrl rh triacppoviffTepov 
 aaniiv Xd/iPave (more according to reflection, more considerately), (c) PI. Kp. 370, 
 b. Sfo^epuj' iit\ "Tpa^iv. Thiir^ ifi4 (qmd ad me attinet) , 
 
 ^297. (3) UapA, by, near. 
 
 YLapa. denotes nearness to something: by the side of, by, near. 
 
 I. "With the Gen..(l) in a local relation with verbs of going 
 and coming, to denote a removal from near a person (Poet, 
 also from near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal sense, to denote the 
 author. 
 
 { I ) 'E\3-e7>' Trap* rivos, like the French de chez quelqii'un (from near som 
 am, from some one). (2) (a) yet almost purely local: Her. 8. 140. ayyiKl-q irm 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 297.] PEEPOSITIONS. Uapd. 
 
 441 
 
 irapk PaariKfjos '{comes from the king, with the accompanying idea that it was 
 done by his direction). So irapd is regularly used of ambassadors, e. g. &yye\oi, 
 wpeV^ejs 7ropx2 Tivos, i.yy4\\eiv irapi. tivos, tH irapi tivos (the commis- 
 sion, command, etc, from any one) ; (b) with passive verbs (see § 251, Bern. 4) ; 
 (c) ynth verbs of learning and hearing, e. g. iiai'Sti.mv irapi tivos, &Koieiv vapd 
 Tjvoj; (d) nap' eavToS, kavrHv {sua sponte, of one's own accord) ; (e) with 
 verbs of giving and the like, e. g. ir o p" 4 o u t o S SiS6mi {from himself, i. e. from 
 his own resources). 
 
 II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote dwelling 
 or rest neax a person (Poet, also near a thing) ; — (2) in a causal 
 or figurative sense, to denote the possessor; then also in relation 
 to the judgment or opinion of a person, 
 
 (1) "Eo-Tj) trapit t$ 0airi\eT. (2) IIoAXA XP^/"""" 'ropct t$ jSoiriAn 
 ?>>. Her. 3, 160. ira^A Aapeiif Kpiry (judice Dam, in the opinion of). 1, 
 32. Trap' ijioi (meojudicio, in my opinion). 86. Tohs rapa aipiffi avroTiri 
 SoKeovras oXptovs. Dem, Ol. 1. 18, 3. roffaira ^avfMirT6Tepos irapi, va<rt vo- 
 lilCeTcu {6 ^IXmrros). 
 
 III. "With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a 
 direction or motion to a person so as to come beside or near 
 (Poet, also of a thing) ; (b) a direction or mation near a place 
 and by or beyond it: along, along by, by, beyond; (c) extension 
 near a place or object {along, per), generally to denote indefi- 
 nite nearness (%) ; — (2) of time, to denote its extension 
 (duri^) ; — (3) in a causal and figurative sense : (a) to denote 
 dependence, the possessor {penes) ; (b) a comparison and estim,a- 
 tion ; h«nce {c) conformity, with verbs of considering, showing, 
 and the like ; (d) a reason or cause (wholly like propter, by vir- 
 tue of, on account of) 
 
 (1) (a) Her. 1, 36. 2(JA.ttv is Alyvirroi/ ^ffi/ceTo irapk "A/iaffiv Kal S)/ Kal es 
 ^dp^ts Traph KpoTcov [b) Ilap^ t^v BajSuA-wva irapUvai {along, near, 
 by Bahyhn). From this /lave originated various ethical expressions, e. g. iruph 
 fioTpav {near fate and by it, i. e. against, contrary to fate) ; imph So'Jov {praeter opin- 
 ionem, contrary to expectation) ; Trap* sKiriSa, irapct tpvaiy, irapot ri BlKcuoy, wapet rohs 
 SpKovs, iTttpa Sivafav. (It is the opposite of Kard, e. g. (cori pLoipav, Siva/uv, ac- 
 cording to.) Hence it has also the signification o{ besides, praeter, e. g. ir a p li 
 r avT a {praeter haec); (c) Her. 9, 15. irapii rhv 'AaanrSi/ {along the Asopus). 
 Dem. 01. 1. 24, 22. rfrixn ■taph irdvi' iarX rh, Tav ov&pi^Traiy irpdyuaTa 
 {per omnes res dominatw). Her. 4, 87. outos KareKelep^ irapa rhy vrjip 
 (near). ' Sr^yoi irapd riva (and irapd Tivi). (2) Ilap' ri/iepav, iraplt 
 rhy It 6Ke 11.0 y (during) ; irapli ri/y ■7r6aiy (inter potandum, while drifiMng) 
 So also of single points of time, during which something takes place, e. g 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
442 SYNTAX. [i 298 
 
 irofl' avThf rhy k'ivSvvov (in ipso discriminis tempore, in the very moment of 
 danger). (3) (a) Isocr. Archid. 126. iiii.o\oysiro irapk rovroy yevea^ai rijt 
 aoTTipiaii auToTs {constaiat, in hoc iis positam esse salutem, that their safety depended 
 on him). Her. 8, 140. irw^dvecrS't tJ)V vvy Trap' ifii iov(ray Siya/uv (isinmy 
 power, with me), (b) Her. 7, 20. Sste /u^te rhv Aapelov {(rT6\oy) -rhy M iici^s 
 Trap it TovTov {sc. rhy ardAoy) fiTjdey ffiaiyefr^ai {in comparison with this). So 
 Trap' oXtyoy iroie«r&oi Tt {to make of little account). Tlap' o\lyov, irapii, 
 p.iKp6v, fipaxv, nearly, almost, Trap^ ttoXu, by far. Trap' ovSey ri^eir^at, 
 {to make no account of) ; after comparatiTes and expressions implying compari- 
 son, as &Wos, eVepos, Sidtpopos, Th. 1, 23. TjKiov eKKei^j/eis irvKy^T epai Traph 
 '^a 4k tov TrpXv xp^yov fiyrffwyevSfieya {more frequent in comparison with those men' 
 tioned in former times). PI. Phaed. 93, a. ou5e /i^y iroieiy ti, oiSe tj Tniax^'y &Wo 
 Trap ^ tiy sKeiya ^ TToi^ ^ Tria-xp. Hence of alternations: Tjfiepa ttoj}' ijfiepav 
 (one day in distinction from another, day by day, every other day, aUernis diebus, also 
 Trap' ri/iepay alone). Often witli the accompanying idea of preference, prae, 
 jyraeter. X. C 1. 4, 14. Trapa to 6.\Ka, Qua, lisirep ^eoi, oi &y^panrot fiioni- 
 oviri {in comparison with, beyond, other animals), (c) 'OpH, ffKorru ri Trap' &Wo 
 T ( (to consider something in conformity with another thing, in comparison with it, 
 ^no^erlj, holding it near to something). Dem. Aph. 1.824,34. Trapa rhy \6- 
 yoy,%y cmo(pepovaiv, iirtSil^a (in conformity with, properly, holding an object near 
 toanother.) (d) Dem. 1.43, 14. ov^k ^iMTTTros Traph. rijy avTov ^t^nTjy ro&ov' 
 Toy iTrei^TjTat, Sa'oy irap& r^y TifieTcpay afi^Ke tay (on account of his own 
 strength). So Traph. touto, propterea, Trap S, quapropter. 
 
 ^298. (4) Hpo's, before. 
 
 lip 9 (formed from Trpo'), denotes before, in tJie presence oj. 
 
 I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation, to denote a direction 
 or motion from the presence of an object, especially from the 
 situation of a place ; — (2) in a causal relation, to denote an 
 active person, as it were an outgoing from the presence of a 
 person exercising power, or of an object considered as a person, 
 (a) of derivation ; (b) of a person or thing to whom or which 
 someiliing bebngs {quality, peculiariiy) [J 273, 2, (c) (a)] ; (c) 
 of thi i author or cause. 
 
 (1) Her. 3, 101. oWoiwi irphs yirov ayefiov (toward tlie south, properly 
 from the south). Comp. a meridie instfrnd of ad meridim. 107. Trphs neffiipL- 
 &plT]s 'Apaplri liTTi (lies towards the south). X. An. 2. 2, 4. eVetr&eT^ riyovne- 
 yoi, rifiiy forofiJyio exorrej Trphs ToD irora/toD (towards, on). (2) (a) Trphs 
 iraTp6s,Trphs iA,rir p6 s (on the father's or mother's side), (b) Uphs yvvaiicii 
 iaTi (it is the manner of women) ; Trpis Hktis iarly (it is conformable to Justice). 
 X. An. 1. 2, 11. oiK^jy Trphs rod Kipov rp6Trov, ixovra p.h 'aTroSMyai (was 
 tot in accordance with the custom of Cyrus). Antiph. 2. 121, 2. ^ jnj« 8<«Jo t«a 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 298 ] PEEposiTioNS. — llpo's. 443 
 
 irpax^^vrav irphs t&v \4yeiy ivvaiiipav iarh, ri Si i,Ki]deui uphs -rut 
 iiKCiia Ktit, iaia irpa<nr6vrav. Also, cTcai itpis rivos (to stand orbeon the 
 side of one). Th. 4, 92. xph ■"Kfrtiaavras r^ dt$ irpis rifiuv cacar^ai, in6<rf 
 Xaprjcai toij iroXe/ufois {trusting in God that he will be on our side). Hence PI. 
 Hipp. 1,285, b. ioKtts lioi Tby \6yov irphs inov A4ytiv {for my advantage). 
 (c) to receive, to have something fiom some one, then with passive verbs {§ 251, 
 Eem. 4), intransitive (§ 249, 3), and in phrases of a passive sense. Her. 2, 139. 
 Kcuciv Tt vphs ^eav % itpis av^ptiwav \aii^veiv. X. An. 7. 6, 33. tx"" 
 tmuvov vo\h> Tcphs v/iiiy lifireiropevSunv {having much praise fiom you). Her. 
 1, 61. i,Ttiui^fa&ai irphs Tleiir icrrpdr ov. X. An. 1. 9, 20. tl)i\ovs iiio\oyelTiu 
 Kvpos irphs iTiivTuv KpATitrros 8^ yevea^ai ^epaire^etv {is admitted by all), Occ. 
 4, 2. at ^cafauffiKoL Ka\o6fievai a^o^ovmcu irphs ruv ir6\ewy {are held in no esteem 
 by the cities)^ Her. 1, 73. rauTo irphs Kva^dpea iradimis {fiom Cyaxeres). 7, 
 5. trTpa7ii\iiTee M ris 'AStiivas, Xva \6yos « fXV I'P^s av^pdiruv iyo&ifj 
 {ut lauderis db hominibus, as it were, in the presence of mm). With forms of swear- 
 ing and protestation, c. g. irpbs deuv {per deos, properly, before the gods). 
 
 II. "With the Dat, to denote dwelling or rest near or by an 
 object; also of being busily engaged in or vnth a thing; finally, 
 in the sense of besides, in addition to (jpraeter). 
 
 Th. 2, 79. is liAxnv KC&iaTaVTai ol 'A^yatoi irphs aiiT-p ry ir6\et. Zhai, 
 ylyvfa^ai irphs irpAynam Tlphs Toirip, irpis Toirois (praeter ea). 
 
 III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) of the situation 
 of a place : towards [where the Gen. also maybe used, see No. I, 
 (1)] ; (b) of the direction to persons, or things considered as 
 persons, sometimes also to places, both in a friendly and in 
 hostile relation ; (c) of extension ; — (2) to denote time indefi- 
 nitely ; — (3) causal and figurative : (a) to denote the purpose 
 or object; (b) conformity; hence (c) the reason or cause {prop- 
 ter) ; (d.) a cqm/parison, for the most part with the accompanying 
 idea ol superiority or preference {prae, praeter); (e) in respect to. 
 
 (1) (a) Tlphs \>.i<x-i\v.^pitxv, irphs effirepa" {towards). Th. 2, 55. {ri yv) 
 ■nphs neKoirivvnffov 6p^. (b) X. An. 5. 7, 20. tpxovTtu irphs ii/ias {lo 
 us, properly, come before us). 7. 6, 6. i/ias irpal iloirn/ irpis auTovs. 5. 4, 5. 
 Statradiivai Pov\6iieda irphs riiv 'E W dS a {i. e.rphs robs "EAArjj'or, to go in safety 
 to Greece). Aeyew, ayopeifiv, i^erdCeiv tj irpas riva {to speak before, to one) \ 
 moMs, ffvii/iaxlav iroisia^ai irp6s Tiva {with one); pAx^aSrat, iroXiixtiv irp6s 
 Ttva {against one). These phrases everywhere imply the meaning to come 
 into the presence of, before the face of any one ; also, Koyi(e(T^a:, (r/ce'ij'oir&oi, ffiui- 
 niiv, ifStviifttr^ai irphs i<xwiv {secum reputare) ; likewise, {iuKpdrns fii>) 
 wphs x«'f"''« Kol fte'/joj Kttl irdvTas ir6vovs KapTeptKiiTUTOs {against), 
 X.C. 1. 2, 1. (c) 2»K()cJt7)S ye k«1 irphs rots iWovs av^pdiroos K6iruof 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
iU SYNTAX. [{ 299 
 
 rfj TTiJAei r-apiixe {among other men, etc. the preposition hew extending the idea)j 
 ibid. 61. (2) llphs iiixipav [towards daybreak). (3) (a) Dcm. Phil. 2. 71, 
 23. iraitroSairiL evprj/iejfa TOiS vSKeiri IT phs (f>v\aK^y Kal ffarrjpiav {for a guard 
 elc.) J (b) Her. 1, 38. vpbs T^y i^iv rairt]v rhv ydfiov tovtov ^irevtra {in 
 accordance vnih this view). So KpiveLv rt irpSs ri^ \4yfiv wphs x'^P^^t nphs 
 rb riSi, rphs rh &ya&6v. Also, irphs ptay {violerdly, against the will), 
 Trphs avdyxTiv, vphs riSovfiv, irphs ixpifietay {accurately, in conformity 
 loith accuracy, etc.). (c) nphs ravra (properly, tn accordance with tAis, hence 
 fir this reason, there/ore). (d)X. 3. 5, 4. ^ ruv^A^vaitav S6^a {TeTaireiyaiTat) 
 irphs robs Boiktovs {in comparison with the renoum of the Boeotians). So 
 also to denote an exchange, e. g. PI. Phaed. 69, a. TjSofhs irphs jjSovas koI 
 hvTras Trphs \i5iras Kal <p60ov •jr phs tft6fiov KaTaXA<iTre(r^at, Kol fjiel^to wphs 
 4kdTTW, lisrep yofLliriiaTa {to exchange pleasures for pleasures, etc.^ (e) 2ko- 
 ireiy, fiXfimv ir pis ti {to consider with respect to something); Sicupepety Trphs 
 iperiiF, Ka\hs rpis Sp6iiav, vphs fftJA.^i', re'l^eos vphs oper^c. 
 
 ? 299. (5) "Ytto, sub, under. 
 
 I. With the Gen. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote a mo- 
 lion out from a lower place : firrth from under, away from under 
 (more obvious in the Horn, wre/c with Gen.) ; (b) to denote a 
 quiet rest under an object (§ 287, Eem.) ; — (2) in a causal and 
 figurative sense : (a) to denote the auilmr with passive and in- 
 transitive verbs (^ 254, Kem. 4) ; (b) an outward or inward 
 {mental) occasion, influence; (c) a mere instrumental cause, 
 means, manner. 
 
 (1) (a) Od. 1, 140. BUT^ M Kparhs At^ne'ros p4eL a,y\ahv vSap, Kpiim) vwh 
 ffireiovs {from under the grotto), t], 5. inrh a-KrivTis Xieiv ^ttttous {from under 
 the chariot). X. An. 6.4,25. (Hej/o^wj/) Xa^iiiv ^ovv virh ajua|7}s ir(l>ayiaffiiiJL- 
 ^vos €$ori&ei. (b) II. &, 13. eKtiy fuv pl-^m is Taprapoy . . . ^X' fid^'iTTOv iirh 
 XSiov6s eo-Ti fiepe^poy {under the earth). "Tirh yrj s oheTy. (2) (a) Kreiyeff- 
 ^ai v-ir6 Tiyo!, airo^aveTv inri rtyos {to be slain by one), (b) X. An. 5. 1, 
 15. A^^iTTnos cnre^ayev virh NiKdydpov. 7. 7, 23. fieya fioi SoKCt eS OKOveii/ 
 iTrb av^pdTruy {to hear himself well spoken of by men). 3. 4, 11. oTrtS^eirac 
 T^/y a.pxt)v virh HGp<rwv M^Soi {lost the government by the Persians = spoliati 
 sunt imperio a P.). 7. 2, 22. alriay tx^ vir6 t tyos (= accusor ah aliquo). Her. 
 .3, 104. inrh too Kaiiiaros oi fiipfiriK^s acpayess ylyovrat {mh yrjy {under the in- 
 fluence of the heat,on account of the heat). Th. 2, 85. iirh avcjiuy Kol virh 
 OTTAoias iySUrpff/fy oliK oXlyoy XP^""^ ("" account of (tie winds, etc.). "Ct^ 
 ay dyKrfs {from necessity), "tirh fi.4drj s iialyf(rAat,Pl. "JCirh plyovs. Her. 
 I, 85. Sirh Ssovs Ka\ KaKov (paviiv e/J^7)fe {spoke from fear and grief ). So 
 virh xotp«s> <l>^ovod, opyTJs, aireipias, <r ax^p o<rivT)s, aif>poiTivi\s, eta 
 (c) Her. 7, 21. UpvtriToy inrh fiaa-Tlyav {dug under the ZosA, tliat being tho 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
ioDd.] PREPOSITIONS. — "Ytto. 445 
 
 means); also of persons: 9, 98. iwi, xipvKos vporiySptve {under Urn help of the 
 herald, i. o. praeconis voce) ; particularly of the accompaniment of musical in- 
 struments, e. g. Her. 1, 17. iarpaTeieTo {mi aa\irlyyuv. So fijr' ahhov 
 Xopeietv, iiri <j>opfiiyyap, iith Tnjnirivav^ etc. 
 
 II. With the Dat. (1) in a local relation, to denote a quiet 
 rest under an object ;— (2) causal and figurative : (a) to denote 
 the author (almost exclusively poetic, see § 251, Rem. 4) ; (b) 
 to denote the means, as with the Gen., but only Poet. ; (c) to 
 
 denote subjection. 
 
 • 
 
 (1) 'Tiri yfi 6l»/ai; With mountains, al the foot o/j e. g. fiiri T/j-tiKo) [cU the 
 foot of Tmolus]. 'Ttt^ T^ 'Tiiitaa^. (2) (a) Aafir^Val iir6 Tii/t, iriTrreix 
 fiirif Tivi (to be Conquered by one, etc.), Horn, (b) 'r-irh ^apBlrm xopiveii', 
 {tt" avK$, etc. (to dance to or by the music of the lyre), [c) Xloiein ti inrd rivi 
 (lo subject sometliing to one), s.ni TOi€i(r^al n uij>' laur^ (to subject something to 
 one^s self sibi subjicere). Her. 7, 157. tV 'EAA.o5o iir' iavT$ voiiiaatrdm. Til, 
 1, no. AifTT/TTTOj virh fia(ri\f'! lyhero (was under the power of the Mng). X. 
 Cy. 8. 8) 1. Kipos robs v<p' eauT^ &sir^p eavTou TraiSas iripM (those si^ject to 
 him). 
 
 III. With the Ace. (1) in a local relation : (a) to denote the 
 air>i, direction or motion towards and under ; (b) extension under 
 an object; — (2) of time: (a) in an indefinite specification of 
 time (approach to a point of time) ; (b) extension in time 
 (during) \ — (3) causal, to denote subjection. 
 
 (1) (a) 'le'c*. uirb yriv (to go under). X. An. 1. 10, 14. uirh avrby (rhr 
 \6<poy) (TT'^itroj rb tfTp&T^vpLa irefnrei ^{iKtoy. (b) Her. 2, 127. viccari olK-fifiaTa 
 iiri yriv (are under the earth). 5. 10. -rh ivb -r^v &pKToy aolxTTa SoKfti 
 ilvai (the parts beneath the north pole). X. An. 7. 4, 5. iv rais vTrb rb ipos k£i- 
 luus. (2) (a) 'Tirb »i5ttTo (sub noctem, towards); iirb tJjv irpdriiv iirtX- 
 ^ovffay viiKTa', so also im6 ti (aliquafenus, in some measure), (b) Her. 9, 51. 
 oirh t)iv viKTO, (during). (3) X. Cy. 1. S, 3. (i 'Acravpiuv fiaaiXebs) SicaripL- 
 Tret irpos re robs u^* eavrbf iravras, Kal irpb^ KpoTtrop. 6. 2. 11. d oriWoyos 
 Tu> vvb ^afflXia ^apfiapuy. 
 
 i 300. Remarks on Peculiarities in the use of the 
 Prepositions. 
 
 1. The proper prepositions were originally (except »r, to) adverbs of place 
 (§ 286, Kem. 2), i. e. they denote the local relation of an action ; in this way 
 nearly all are very often used in the Homeric language. This use is also fre- 
 quent in Herodotus, b'it in good Attic prose, only irpiw 5e', koI irp6s, praeterea 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
446 SYNTAX. [i 300. 
 
 Od. f, 40. voMAv yhp airh vKvml tun v6\rios. i, 116 — 118. vrj<ros — Terd- 
 vvaTu v\iiea<r', iv S 0T76S hreipintu yeyiairiv &ypiat. Also in Her., e. g. 3, 39. 
 e V Sh S^ ical Aiir$ious eT\e {among them, i. e. in its). II. <r, 562. ii4\avsS S"' ayi 
 B6Tpves ^ctav {grapes were thereon). Od. 1, 184. irepl S' aliKii i\li7i\h S4S/iriT0 uro- 
 rapvxi^cai \&ouTw. a, 66. 8s ir f p 1 p-iv vdov ^ittI PpoTSf {he is beyond, i. e. eminent 
 above). St, 44. t^ yip ^a Stebs itepX SSxev ItotS^y {in a special mannei; espeeiaUy), 
 II. <r, 529. KTeifov S' iirl foiKofimripas {in addition, besides). Also not rare in 
 Her., iirXSe {thereupon, turn); /iter 4 Se {postea), Her.; jrpcis ye, it pis Si 
 very common from Homer downward, also in Attic poetry and prose. 
 
 Rkmass: 1. Sometimes two prepositions stand togetlier in poetry, most fre- 
 quently in Epic, the first of wliich always has an adverbial meaning, but the sec- 
 ond may be connected as a preposition with the Case of a substantive. A 1 a irpi 
 {through audi out) : 11. p, 393. TivvTai Se re m(Ta {^oelri) 5i4 irprf. 'A/Kpl trtpi^ 
 {round aiout). Od. A, 608. a,ii(pl irepl arii^effaiv. 11. <^, 10. oxaot 5" 4/i^l 
 ifepl neyiK' iaxov- j8, 305. ap.(p\ *cpl Kpiivriv. Tlapeic (with the Gen. near 
 to, with the Ace. near by, along by), e. g. Od. 1, 116. iraphx \iijl4vos. ft, 276. 
 &,\\k 7rap€| T^y yTJtrov iKaiuere vrja Hf\awav. Hdpe^ (as a Paroxytone) often 
 in Her. with the meaning ieatf^es, e. g. 3, 91. iropE| roS hpyvplov, TitiK. 
 {from under, out from under), in Homer; also Her. 3, 116. \iyitai. vit^K tap 
 ypvKuv apnd^etv 'Api/xa(TXo6s (sc. rhy XP^^^^)' '^''^ oirph fepeiy, II. tt, 669, 679 
 Ilepl irph. II. K, 180. Trcpl irpb yip eyx^' ^vev {around ani before) . 
 
 Eem. 2. Also the improper prepositions ^cewa and x«(f"'i though vei-y 
 seldom, are connected with the proper prepositions, as in Eng. on account of, for 
 the sake of, oTri fioris fpexa {for the cry^s sake). Lys. Evandr. 793. irepl -ruv 
 iv o\iyapx^4 ap^dyraiv eye Key. 
 
 2. Since prepositions in composition retain their original meaning as ad- 
 verbs of place, and as the older language habitually uses the prepositions as 
 adverbs of place, it follows of course, that the ancient language often employs 
 the simples, and separates the preposition as an adverb from the verb, where 
 the Attic writers regularly use the compounds. The two following instances 
 
 must be distinguished : — 
 
 * 
 
 (a) Those instarices where the preposition is separated from the verb. 11.7,34. 
 {>ir6 Te Tp6iMS ^A.Aaj8e "yuta. y, 135. irapii S' eyxea yLoxph. ireTrriyey. S, 
 63. e*l 5' i\lioyral fteol &\Koi. S, 161. ex re Kai d\jie Tehe7. &, 108. oSs 
 {Xineovs) TTOT* St.Tr Alyelay e'K6^\7iy {e\e(fba,t, riyd 'Ti, H. tt, 56). 
 
 Eem. 3. Here belongs, especially, an abridged mode of expression, where 
 several sentences follow each other, which consists in using the compound, 
 which should stand in each sentence, only in the first, while in the others 
 the preposition merely is repeated, e. g. H. jJ/, 799. k o t 4 iiiy SoKixi^Ktoy eyx"' 
 S/rjK' is &ymytt (pepay, Kari S" od-TTiSa Kal rpv<piXeiav. Often also in Her,, 
 e. g. 8, 33. KOTi /ley eKavirav Apvphv ■ir6\iv, kot4 Si XapdSpriv (where, how- 
 ever, the first may be taken as Tmesis. See Rem. 4). 
 
 Bem. 4. In the later periods of the language, and particularly in the Attic 
 writers, the prepositions are so closely connected with the veros, that both 
 mingle and form one whole. It is only from this time that there is what may 
 be properly called Tmesis, i. e. the separation of a verb, by means of one or 
 more intervening words, from tlie preposition in connection with which it forms 
 one whole or one idea. The Tmesis of compound verbs is fotmd somewhat 
 often in Her. ; also in Pindar, and in other poets, seldom in the Attic poets in 
 the lyric choral songs, and still more seldom in the dialogue ; but when it does 
 occur, only a particle comes between the two parts of a word, so that the unity 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 300.] PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PKEPOS TIONS. 447 
 
 of the Idea is not destroyed. Her. 7, 15. H^pfrjs &yd r, rSpa^s iit rtjs Koinn 
 Kal veforei S.yyc\ov. 8, 89. diri lih fihave 6 arparnyis. Eur. Iph. Aul. 1365 
 5i &p oK<i\anei>. The Attic prose remains free from this license, with a few 
 specif exceptions, e. g. Th.3, 13. /^^ ^by kukHs woieTv aWohs Mex 'ASmvcduv, 
 a\)iA iwe\evdepodi> (so^ as to make the contrast emphatic). PI. Gorg. 520, e 
 oyr" eB vote7» and. et fi Toii\<ras Talnrp) ■r'ttv mpytaiav avr' e5 iredrcToi. 
 i"!. Phaedr. 237, a. (ift /aoi Kipeirde tov fii^ov (take part). 
 
 , (b) Those instances where the preposition is separated from the Case, of its sub- 
 stantive. Here also, throughout Homer, the preposition exhibits its original 
 adverbial meaning, and belongs to the verb ; the verb and the adverbial prepo- 
 sition together, form one verbal idea, and this, not the preposition alone, gov- 
 erns the Case. 11. t, 292. toO S' airh /ih yXaaaav rifie (Gen. of separation). 
 1, 382. irAewrro S<!/ioi s iv Krlifutra Keirai {lies within the house), o, 266. afKJtl 
 SJ X""""' Uliois aiatroyrat, on the shoulders about (heal Dative), v, 291. iv 
 yhp UirpoKXas <p60oi/ ^xev iirairii', he cast fear into all (Dat. of limit or aim, 
 § 284, Rem. 1). So the Ace. denoting local aim or object (§ 277). II. S-, 115. 
 ri S' fis aiJ.<poTepa Am/i^Scos ap/iara iS^TTjv (entered the chariot). Ace. of the 
 object receiving an action (§ 279): 11.(8, 156. 'A^Tji/o/r/y "Hpij wphs nvdov 
 tcnrey (addressed, spoke to Athene). 
 
 Rem. 5. In the second case (b), a Tmesis is admitted only when mere par 
 tides, like fiiiv, Be, re, (li, yip, &p', B" &pa, come between the preposition and the 
 Case of the substantive, — a very frequent usage of the post-Homeric period, 
 and even in the Attic wiiters. Comp. Rem. i. 
 
 3. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, particularly of the Homeric language, 
 that it often connects prepositions followed by the Dat., with verbs which ex- 
 press the direction whither ; and, on the other hand, prepositions followed by 
 the Ace, with verbs whose signification presupposes a quiet resting in a place 
 or object. This construction arises from a blending of two ideas, since the 
 speaker either conceives and expresses, along with the moment of motion, the 
 moment of the rest which succeeds ; or along with the moment of rest, the moment 
 of motion which precedes. Hence this may be called the pregnant Construction. 
 
 (a) The 3w6 oj motion involves the idea of ike rest which succeeds, when preposi- 
 tions with the Dat. stand instead of prepositions with the Ace. The moment of 
 rest (the relation to the continuing result of the action) must then be regarded 
 as the predominant one. The principle above stated holds with the following 
 prepositions : — 
 
 With 4 V, particularly in the Epic language. II. f, 370. ^ S' e v 7 o li j- a <r i 
 wtirre AiiivT]S S^ 'AtppoSirr} (she fdl on her knees, and then lap on her knees). Od- 
 a, 200. iyi) /.tavreiirofiai, &s ivl ^vfi^ add,vaT0i fidWauffu II. \, 743. 
 ijpnre S" iv Koviriaiv (fell into the dust and lay there). In prose, Ti&eVoi 
 iv xepir^y like the Latin, ponere et collocare in manibus. X. H. 4. 5, 5. first: 
 is Sh rh "Kpatov Karitpvyov, and then ot 5* iv t ^ 'Kpaiai KaTaTretl)€vy6T e s 
 i^'j/jcffav (those who had fled and were then in the Heraeum). PI. Euthyd. 293. e. 
 iv rairri rp a'iropt<f ivfimrTiiKav. (Caes. B. G. 5, 10. naves in littore 
 ejectas esse. Sail. Jug. 5. in amicitia receptus). — Also with afiifil and irepi 
 with the Dat. instead of the Ace. II. A, 17. KvriiiTSas iicv irpSro ircpl Kvii/ip- 
 ff I V ^^Kev (he put the greaves around his legs, so that then they set fast to them), 
 Od. &, 434. cc(U0l TTVpl iTTrjaai rplnoSa. With itri: II. a, 55. t^ 'vAo 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
448 SYNTAX. [^ 300 
 
 €7rl ,J)peir! aiiKe ^ea KevK^Kipas "Hot (like 4i' <pp^(r\ Sretmi). "With -irpds- 
 Od. (, 284. C€'o ^eV /ioi KoTc'oJe rioo-EiSdwi/ ^i/oo-^x^an', irpis ireTp^tri ^aA*i'. 
 
 ttotI 70^71. — With iirii, in prose, in the phrases, 4 iro tii'i yiyvsaSiai (tD 
 came under the power of ani/ one, and continue under his power); TroieTc ri fiird 
 TivL {alicui aliquid subjicere); irotfia^ai 4iJ>' tavr^ [sibi subjicere, § 299,11, 
 (2) (c)]. 
 
 Eem. 6. In the following and like examples from Homer, the Dat., without 
 doubt, expresses the relation of aim or object: x^V'"^ iti?^etf iirl ffirw, riKat ^e\os 
 iiri Tlj/i, irejW^oi Syeipov ^iri Tiyi, 4\aiy€ty 'lirwovs M vrivaiv, Tnaiviirdai t(!Jo eVi 
 TU/i, &XKf(TS>ai iiri rivi, fidx^c^at M rm, iriTeaSrai i-n' &vAeinv. See § 284, 
 Rem. 1. 
 
 (b) 2'Ae verb expressing rest involves the idea of the motion which precedes, when 
 the preposition c I s stands with the Ace, instead of the preposition i v with the Dat. 
 The moment of the preceding motion must then be regarded as predominant. 
 
 II. 0, 275. i^avTj Kls els SSoy {came into the road and appeared). Her. 4, 
 14. s^oyiji/ai 4s UpoKSyvqaov. Eur. Iph. T. 620. aW' els a.va.yKr)v Kel- 
 /le^a {to come into and to be in). Tier. 3, 62. TrpoTiy6psve (Tt&j es iietrov tA 
 ivTiToXiifva {placing himself in the midst and there standing). Very frequent in 
 prose is Trapetvai els rairov riya. {to have come to a place,and to be present 
 there) ; comp. " he is in church, in town, or on the land," in which the idea of 
 previous motion is necessarily supposed. X. An. 1. 2, 2. vapija-ay els Sip- 
 Sets {came to Sardis and werethere). Her. 8, 60. 4s Tjjy SaKa/iiya iweic- 
 KeLTai vfiiy reicva re kcli ywcuKes {to carry to Salamis and leave there in safety). 
 PI. Ep. 468, a. rhy Cayra els roiis Tro\e filovs aKiyra, i. e. els tovs 
 Tro\ep.iovs treirSyra a\wyai. 
 
 (c) Verbs signifying to hang, to attach to, to suspend, etc., as Kpep.ayy6yat, avap- 
 ray, 4k-, Kara-, ava^eTy, avdirTeiy, atfapeiffhaif are connected with the prepositions 
 air 6 and ^k (as in Lat. with ab and er), in order to express, together with 
 the idea of suspending anything to a place, the idea of lumging down from or 
 depending from a place. 
 
 Od. &, 67. Ka5 S' 4h it a(T(ra\6(pi Kpe fiatrey (f>6pfiiyya \iyetav {he hung the 
 lyre on the peg, so thai. It then hung down from it). X. H. 4. 4, 10. narl/iaxos 
 KaTaSii(Tas aTrh SeySpwy rovs 'iiriTovs fieTa tSiv 4he\oyTwv ijet 4yayrioy toTs 
 'Apryelois {having fastened the horses to the trees). X. C. 3. 10, 13. ^ipaxes 4k 
 Tuy &p,aiy Kpe fii/ie yo i {hanging upon the shoulders and depending from them). 
 So ou/aprai' Tt %K twos. Her. 4. 10. 4k ruy QaffT^poiv ipopety ^id\as {on tlis 
 girdles, so that the bowls hung down). In poetry, this usage is very widely 
 extended. See Larger Grammar, II. § 622, (c). 
 
 Kem. 7. Adverbs of place, as well as prepositions, are sometimes used in a 
 pregnant sense : (a) adverbs denoting rest instead of those denoting the direc- 
 tion whither. S. Trach. 40. KeTyos S' Sirou (instead of ^ttoi, quo) fiefiiiKev, 
 ovSe)s olSe {no one knows where \whither\ he has gone). X. H. 7.1,25. Sirou 
 Bov\Ti&eiey i^eK^eiy. — (b) adverbs expressing the direction loAetAcr, instead 
 of adverbs expressing the relation where. Eur. II F. 74. ttoT rariip kireo-r. 
 yris; 1157. ttoX KaKuy 4prip.lay eSpa ; {quo me vertam, ut requiem inveniamf). 
 Arist. Av. 9. 3 IT 1 yijs 4<rii.ev ; {whither \where\ are we7). Dem. Chers. 102, 50. 
 iroi ayaSvifieSra; {quo nos vertamus, ut pemiciem vitemus?). Phil. 1. 51, 40. 
 6 TT\rry€ls ael Tijs 5rA.-i)77)s ex*''''"i «&" erepaire Traralj; Tis, iKeitre elcrty at X"P^^- 
 
 (4) A second peculiarity in the construction of prepositions is, when the 
 trticle (alone or with a substantive) in connection with a preposition and itf 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 300,} PECULIARITIES IJM THE USE OP PKEPOSITIONS. 449 
 
 Case, has a substantive idea, and wlien tlie preposition in, which expresses the 
 relation where only in the most general manner, shonld be used, this preposition 
 is changed either into iTrii and ^k or into els, attracted, as it were, hj the 
 verb, expressed or understood, which denotes cither the direction whence or 
 whither. This construction pay be called the attraction of prepositions : — 
 
 (a) 'ti.Tr 6 and ix instead of ^y, or Trap (£ with the Gen. instead of Trap li 
 with the Dat. Of 4k tijs ayopas &v^pamot airetpvyov (instead of of 4p 
 T5 ayop^ iv^prnvoiaweipvyov ix ttjs ayopas (thoseis tile agora Jled from it). 
 X. H. 4. 6, 4. TTtitn-cs oi iK rSiv aypuv 'AKapvaves ^(pvyov is to, &(rTTj {in- 
 stead of Trdyres oi iv rots ay po7s e^vyov iK rap aypuv is 7 a &(TT7]). Th. 
 I, 18. at iK T^s &KK7JS *KWtiSos {r^pavvot) dnh AaKeSaifiovluv KaTe\i- 
 &T]<rav. 3.22. po-ftoyro oi ix rav Tripyav (jiiKaxcs {the guards VFON the 
 towers perceived it fkom the towers). 7, 70. ol 4ir!) ray KaTaa-rpafidTiay 
 To?f aKovTlois ixP''"'''" {those UPON the decks used their darts FKOM the decks). 
 PI. Apol. 32, b. vfifts Toi/s Sexa trTpartjyoi/s Tohs ovk ave\ofi4vovs Tohs ix 
 T^s yavfiax'ias i0ov\ea-^e &^p6ovs xpivetv {you wished to condemn all at once 
 the ten cmnmanders in the naval battle, who did not carry off the dead from it). 
 Phaed. 109, e. oi iK ttjs &a\oTT7)s Ix^^^s avaKiTrroyres (the Jish IN 
 the sea coming up out of it). Dem. Phil. 3. 114, IS.toJs ix 'Si^plov ni- 
 Xovs irrpaTiiras i^efiaXev. X. An. 1. 1, 5. 8stij 8" a^iKi/oTro -rav Traph 
 fiatTt\eus irphs oi'TtJi' (instead of tuv 7rap& ^acriK^'i Svtuv iropefc fiafftXeas 
 
 hplKVo'lTo), 
 
 Rem. 8. The same principle of attraction holds, also, with adverbs of 
 place, e. g. ixu^ev and HvSo^ev instead of ixf! and tvSov. Dem. 01. 3. 13, 15. 
 ayvoiLThv ixei^ey TrSKefioy Sevpo ^^oyra. X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. 'lya ^iraov ri oXxa^t 
 TToSrolr). See Larger Grammar, II. ^ 622, Rem. 2. 
 
 (b) Ely instead of ^y (far more seldom), iler. 2, \hO. %Keyov ot iirixiipioi, 
 ws is r^v 'Xiprtv t^v is At^iri v i kSiSo'i ri \ip.vri aSrtj vnh yrji/ {empties into 
 the Syrtis which is in Lybia). X. H. 1. 7, 29. 'ZpatririSris {ixeKcvcv) iTrX rohs is 
 MiTv\-{\vT)V TToKefiious TTjv TUxitTTTjif Tr\e7y aTravras {against the enemies in 
 Mitylene). 
 
 5. On tbe repetition and omission of prepositions, the following things are 
 to be noted : — 
 
 (a) In a series of coordinate substantives, the preposition is either repeated 
 before each single substantive, when each single idea is to be considered sep- 
 arately and is to be made emphatic, or when the contrast or difference between 
 the ideas is to be denoted, e. g. PI. Tim. 18, c. xard re TrSxefioy xal xar^ t5)j» 
 SaXtjk iiairav ; or the preposition is placed only before the first substantive, and 
 omitted with the others, when the ideas are meant to express one whole, 
 whether they are of the same kind or different, e. g. X. C. 1. 4, 17. tt epl t5> 
 iy^iSe Kol Trepl ray iy AiyiTTTa xaX iv 2iKcA.fct {ppoyriCciv (instead of 
 xal irepi ray iy 3Me\ti{). 2. 1, 6. hyvfiyiaTas ex"" ^pis tc ^ixv ""' 
 ddXTrn. X. H. 1. 1, 3. oirif re ray yeay xal ttjs 7^1. PI. Phaed. 99, 
 n. fj Trepl Vleyapa fl BoiwTo^s. 
 
 (b) When a substantive connected with a preposition, is followed by a rela- 
 ative pronoun standing in the same relation with the substantive, the preposition 
 in prose is often repeated before the relative, but more frequently omitted : 
 51. Symp. 213, '.. a-T ixfivov rou ypovov, CKp' ov tovtov iipda^y, X. Hier. 1, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^(50 SYNTAX. [} 300 
 
 1 1 . 01 iSiSrai (cives) ipxovriu els ■7r6\eis, ft s &y fiav\a>irr(u, ^ea/iaTuy '4veiia. X 
 S. 4, 1. ec T<f xp6va, $ v/iSii' vucoia. (Comp. in Latin Cic. rin.4, 20. Zeno negat 
 Platoiiem, si sapiens non sit, eadem esse in causa, qua tyrannum Dionysium). 
 
 (c) Tlie preposition is very often omitted in questions and answers, e. g. PL 
 Soph. 243, d. Trepi Se toS fiiylffrov re Kal i,pxi\y°^ vpdiTov vvv trKeirrimi, 
 Theact. tivos S)) Keyeis; X. S. 5, 5. oJ(r^a oZp, ffri, o^&oAfiSc riyos Ive/ta 
 Be(>/ie^a/ ArjKoy, e(l>7], otl tov tpav* • 
 
 (d) Tlie preposition is commonly omitted ivitli a word in apposition. X 
 An. 5. 5, 3. oi "EAAjji €s aipiKovro els Korvupa, 'K6\tv 'EWtj if iS a. Comp. 4. 
 8, 22. 5. 3, 2. 6. 2, 1. But when a greater emphasis rests upon the word in ap- 
 position, as is particularly the case, when it is used to explain a preceding 
 pronoun, then the preposition is regularly repeated. X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. {<pi\lap 
 Kti^ots hf) trap" eKeiviav, olfial, eiplj, irap^ tuv fiTj^eirore Tro\efj.tuv yeyePTifie' 
 vojv [you might acquire friendsMp from those who have never been enemies). PI. 
 Prot. 358, b. at eirX To6rov irpd^eis aiTa<Tai, ^nl tov oK^nrojs ^riv Kal tjSsus, 
 ap ov Ka\at ; {all the actions pertaining to this, viz., the living witJiout grief, are they 
 not praiseworthy ?) ; also in clauses expressing comparison, subjoined by as, 
 lisTTip, the preposition may be either omitted or repeated. PI. Ep. 330, c, 
 Trepl Tct xP'hf^'^'^^ a"irou5d^ova-ij/, &s epyoy eaVTwv, PI. Trap' Tilxas ^otT^s, 
 us irapi, (plKovs. But when the member expressing the comparison pre- 
 cedes the other, the preposition stands with the first member only, if the parti- 
 cle of comparison is &s ; but the preposition is repeated, if it is Snr ep. Ph 
 Rp. 1. 4, 14, e. 5e? us Trepl fXTjTphs Kal Tpo<pod TTJS X^P^^ afiiupeiv {i. e. trepl 
 TTJs x^P«y)' X. Cy. 1. 6, 4. iis Trphs <l>l\ovs 6jnas fiat robs ^eobs oSru 
 Siixfiimi. — PI. Phaed. 82, e. {ri 'f'uxh avayKd^frai) &svep Si' ctpy/iou Siii 
 rod irt&fxaros <jiio'Kei(r^at to, ^vTa. 
 
 6. The natural position for prepositions is directly before their substantive, 
 or before the attributive belonging to a substantive, e. g. irpis rhv &vSpa, vphs 
 rhv cro(j>hv ivSpa. But this position is often changed in the folloiving instances :— 
 
 (a) When a particle follows the substantive, as yd, jueV, 7ap, /lev yap, Se, oh, 
 also fjiir oZv, a5, koX, etiam, roivvv, laas, also olfiai used as an adverb ; these 
 small words often come between the preposition and the substantive, e. g. €» 
 liiy elpiivri, iy fi^v yctp elp-iivrj. 
 
 (b) The preposition IT p <i s in oaths and exclamations is separated from its 
 substantive. Soph. 0. C. 1333. irpdr yiv tre Kpnvav, irohs &eS>i/ iiioyviat 
 oiTw TTiaeVS-oi. So in Latin, per te deos oro. 
 
 (c) The preposition sometimes follows its substantive, though it then is sub- 
 ject to anastrophe ; in Attic prose, this takes place only with irepi when con- 
 nected with the Gen., but hero it is very frequent. PI. Rp. 469, b. vpurov lui 
 dySpoTToSiir/ioB TTEpi; it is also separated by other words. Her. 6, 101 
 TOV TOV (Tipi l^teXc IT e'p 1. PI. Apol. 19, u. Svjyi, ovSiy oSre ueya o^e iruw 
 aiv Trepi iirata. See •, 31, IV. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 301,302.] PRONOUNS. 
 
 45J 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 §301. The- Pronoun as Subject, Predicate, At- 
 tribute, and Object. 
 
 The subject, predicate, attribute, and object are expressed 
 by pronouns, when these members of a sentence are not 
 designed to represent objects or qualities themselves, but 
 when it is to be denoted merely, that an object refers either 
 to the speaker himself, or to the person addressed, or to 
 another person or thing. 
 
 2. All the rules which have been given on the substan- 
 tive and adjective, apply also to substantive and adjective 
 pronouns; still, some remarks are here subjoined on the 
 use of the pronouns. 
 
 § 302. I. Personal Pronouns. 
 
 The substantive personal pronouns, as the subject (in the 
 Norn.) : eyw, oTJ, fifiELi, etc., and also the adjective (posses- 
 sive) pronouns, as attributives, e. g. e/tos irarrip, are used in 
 Greek, as in Latin, only when they are specially emphatic ; 
 hence particularly in antitheses, but also, for the sake of per- 
 spicuity, e. g. Kai (TV ravra eTrpa^ai. Kat 6 cros Trarrjp airiSavev, 
 'Eyoj /xev a.ireiij,i, trv Sk /acvc. But where this is not the case 
 they are omitted, and the substantive pronouns are expressed 
 by the endings of the verb, and the adjective (possessive) pro- 
 nouns, by the article prefixed, to the substantive, e. g. Tpa.<f>ia, 
 ypdcfteK. 'H ixriT-rfp fhri /wi {my mother). 01 yoms crrepyovat 
 TO. TCKva {their children). 
 
 Eemakk 1. The distinction between the accented and the encKtic forms of 
 the personal pronouns, e. g. e^oS and i^av, etc. (4 87), lies in the greater or less 
 emphasis with which they are pronounced in discourse. Thus, the accented 
 forms are always employed, for example, in antitheses, e. g. e/toB ^tkv Kwreye- 
 }ixur€, ire Se 4injvc<rev. — The personal pronouns are often used instead of the 
 reflexive (No. 2). On the use of the Gen. of the substantive instead of the 
 adjective (possessive) pronouns, see Eem. 4. On an appositive in the Gen. 
 joined with a possessive pronoun, e. g. ri/ierfpos avTwv iroT^p, see § 266, 2. 
 
 Eem. 2. The adjective personal pronouns more commonly have a subjective or 
 ficUw sense, e.g. ^fi^ fiovKii {my counsel, i. e. one which I originate, not one which 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
452 SYNTAX. [i 302 
 
 relates to me) but sometimes they take the place of the objective Gen. and then 
 hare an objective or passive sense. Od. X, 201. ahs v6^os, a desire fob thet 
 (like Ter. Heaut. II. 3, 66. desiderio ino instead of tui). X. Cy. 3. 1, 28. 
 tvyo((} Kol (piKlcf Tj 4ix^ (benevolentia et amore MEi, from good will and love to me). 
 
 2. The reflexive pronouns always refer to something already 
 named, to the Subject or Object, since the person or thing to 
 which the reflexive refers, stands in contrast with itself as an 
 object or attribute : — 
 
 (a) In relation to the subject : *0 (ro(phs eavTov Kparei, ^b treavr^ &/>/<»'• 
 Kets. *0 traTs cavrhv iiratve?. Ot yov^ts oLyanuffi Tobs I a u t w k vatSas, 
 Ti/u^i treavrS y, Outqs & avijp irdvra St' eavrou ficiid^Kev. 'O ffTparTjyhs 
 wrh Tuv eavTOv ffTpariojTwy hnri^aviv. 
 
 (b) In relation to an object of the sentence : X. Cy.' 1. 1, 4. KCpos Siiii/eyKi 
 rwy &Way fiatr tK^wy^ ruv apx^s 5t* eavTwy KTTjtTaiieyuy. Ar. Nub. 384. 
 anh (Tavrov iyJa fft SiScJ^o) {per te ipsum). 
 
 (3) The reflexive pronouns may also be used in Greek, as in 
 Latin, in the construction of the Accusative with the Infinitive 
 and of the Participle ; also in such subordinate clauses as stand 
 in a close relation to the principal clause, particularly in clauses 
 expressing design, and in dependent interrogative clauses, as 
 well as in all other subordinate clauses which do not contain 
 the sentiment of the speaker, but the sentiment of the subject 
 of the principal sentence. Also in this case the reflexive 
 refers either to the subject or to an object. When the subject 
 of the principal clause and the subject of the subordinate 
 clause (or of the In£), are different, the reflexive may refer 
 either to the former or to the latter, its particular reference 
 being determined only from the context. Li the ca.ses men- 
 tioned under this rule, the Enghsh often uses the personal 
 pronouns him, her, it, etc. instead of the reflexive. 
 
 'O ripayyos vofd^ii tovs TroXiras iwnpsTe7y eauTip. X. Cy. 1. 1, 5. Till' 
 l&yav Toirav ^p^ey (Kvpos) oS^' lauTiy &fi,oy\<l>TTav Syrcov, oStc oA.A.^\oij. 
 C. 1. 2, 8. iirla-reve (Swicp i£t7js) ruy ^uii6yTay eavT$ rois aTToSe^apieyovs, 
 imp ourkj iSoKt/iaCey, els rhy iriyra $loy eavrif re Kol aW'/jKois ij>t\ovs ayaAoiis 
 HaiirSmi. 52. 6 Kar-ljyopos fifni riy ScaKpdTity ayairet^oyra robs viovs, uis avihs 
 elri ao(l>JnaTOs t€ ico! Saaous iKaviiTaras Tvoiijirai aoipois, oStoi StaTiSicvai Tabs 
 ia.vT!f avyiyTtLS, Ssre )x.ifi(x\i.ov irap' airoh robs &\\ous eha.1 irphs iavriy {in 
 wnparison with him). Th. 2, 92. t^ yavdyia, 8<ra ■-rphs rfj UvrHy {yg) ^y, iyti- 
 wyro {= T^yaviyia Ta irpbs rfi iavrSy yfj Syra). Her. 8, 24 Scrot <^o5 o-rpoToi 
 roC eouToC ^(Tay ycKpol ?&ai(-e. Corap. the examples iu Rem 3. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
* 302] PEONOONS. 453 
 
 4. On the contrary, the oblique Cases of the pronoun oiro?, 
 •T^, -o: VIZ., aiiTov, -rji, avrS, -y, avTov, i^v, -6, avrwv, or even 
 those of a demonstrative .pronoun, are universally employed, 
 when an object does not stand in contrast with itself, but 
 with another object, e. g. o -n-arrip "^tm (to him, the son) eSmKt 
 TO ^i^kiav. "SiTcpym airov (him). 'Air«;^b/xai air ov (from him). 
 The pronoun airov, etc. is merely the personal pronoun of the 
 third person, but is much weaker than the demonstrative 
 ouTos ; wherefore, it does not, like ovto's, usually stand first in a 
 sentence. 
 
 Kem. 3. The personal pronoun 5, oT, etc. has commonly a reflexive sense 
 in the Attic writers (but, in the Ion. writers and in the poets, also the meaning 
 of the personal pronoun). But it is regularly employed, only when the reflex- 
 ive relation has respect, not to the nearest subject, but to the remoter one. It 
 is in general mucli more freely used than the compound reflexive, since it is 
 also employed where the connection with the principal clause is much looser, e. g. 
 'O T^pavvos pofil^et Tois woXiras vmjpiTeiv ol (but not & Tipavvos x^K^"^^*- w)* 
 X. An. 7. 5, 9. *Hpa/c\6f5ijs elsayay^v rohs &Wovs trrpaTTlyoits irphs ^Kei^v Xeyetp 
 iKeKeveif auroi/Sj bri ovSsv hv ^rrav tr^e'is hy&yoisv T^vffTpaTi&v,% 'BevoijiSiy 
 (SE ducluros esse). Th. 5, 73. oi 'AaTjcoioi o?s e^iKKinv (6 'A-yis) hih a(f>!iv 
 Th trTpdrevfia, KaS-* TjfTvxiav effda^ffav. 6, 32. ^i;ye7r€i5;^oyTO Kol b 2t\Aof , 1ipX\0Sf 
 r&v T6 iroKirwv koL tt tls &\\os eiSyovs vapTjv ffcpitri. Even after ydp, e. g. X. H. 
 1.7, 5. at ffTparrjyol fipax^a ckouttos aireXoyiiaraTa ' ou y&p irpoi/Te^ a^itri \6yos 
 Karh rhv rifiov. But Thucydides and some later writers use it, also, in relation 
 to the nearest subject, c. g. Th. 7, 5. 6 TiXLiriros irelxiC^ rots \&ots xP^^iUfos, 
 o&s ol 'A^Tjva'iot wpovape^dKovro ff^itrtv. The forms ol, trtpiffi and ffipas 
 have sometimes also the meaning of personal pronouns : of, him, her (e. g. X. 
 Cy. 3. 2, 26); (ripiiri, to them (e. g. X. H. 6.5,35) ; <rtpas, them, e.g. Th. 5,49), 
 when the object to which they refer, is more important in respect to the sense, 
 than the subject of the sentence. Still, it is to be remarked in relation to the 
 use of this pronoun, that in place of it with a reflexive sense, the compound 
 reflexive eavrou, -fjs, etc. is commonly employed; and in place of it with 
 the sense of the Pers. pronoun third person, the corresponding forms ot avris 
 arc used by tlie Attic wi-iters. The form oS (ou) is used in, prose only in PI. 
 Symp. 174, d. Ep. 617, b. 617, e.; ? (I) 327, b. 617, e. Symp. 175, a. c. 233, 
 b. ; 01 occurs far oftener (seldom accented ol), andcr^ejj, a^av, a<p'tat, 
 ff^as, somewhat often. 
 
 5. In the instances mentioned under No. 3, the correspond- 
 ing forms of avTO's are very frequently used instead of the 
 reflexive pronoun ; this is always the case where a member of a 
 sentence or a suborinate clause is not the expression or senti- 
 ment of the person to whom the pronoun refers, but the senti- 
 nent of the speaker (writer). 
 
 X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. (or iroAi/uot) evSriis aipijaoviTl tV Ae^a", eVelSij/ JStoJi Ttms eV 
 airoJis ^KaivovTos (contra se). C. 4. 7, 1. Ttjv kamov yvd>\a\v a,we(paiveTo Sax- 
 edriis jrpis robs S/uKovuras aur^. Apol. 33. (SaiKO^Trjj) e7;'tij rod irt f^i/ tI 
 re^viivat aiirv Kpetrroy elt/at. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
454 SYNTAX. f} 302, 
 
 6. Li compound reflexive pronouns, the pronoun avros eithej 
 retains its exclusive force, or loses it, i. e. it is sometimes em 
 phatic, and sometimes not 
 
 (a) Xsocr. Panath. 16, 242. SixaiS:/ iari (l>l\ovs /leK jroie«r&iu rohs ifnoims afi- 
 To7' TE (or o'ipiiri re ouTOir) ««! toIs &\\ois XP*'!^^'""'^! <po0eT<r^at Be Ka) 
 SeBUvat Tohs trphs fftjtas juev aiiTovs (or eavTohs) oiKetSraTa Sicucetfieyous^ 
 irphs 5e robs &\\ovs St?iKorpltos {se ipsis and se ipsos). Th. 4, 102. iiroiKO'is 
 (T^uy re aurav koL tuv &KKav rhv ^ovXofievov ir4fvpavres. 1, &0. KefjiTrovtru 
 kavTwv Te i^e\ovTh.s K(^ twv &KKav nGKoiropjfTjfTluv fiuT^^ TreitravTes, 8, 8. ^<^* 
 eavruv SieyoovjTo &W(p (tt6Ku irXetv [soli perse). The Nom. ourifs is some- 
 times added to strengthen this exclusive or emphatic force (comp. in Lat. Ciilo 
 SE IPSE interemit), e. g. PI. Phaed. 94, e. otre yip hv 'Op,iipu i/i,o\oyo7fx,ei', oUre 
 awTol TifiTy aiiTois. — (b) Oi ffTpariuTtu irapeixov eavroi/s (or c^as 
 airobs) avSpeioTd70vs (se). Th. 7, 82. TrapfSoffav ot irivres ir<l>as avroii (or 
 lauToiJs) (se). 
 
 Kem. 4. The reflexive possessives are either tssd alone, e. g. Dem. c. Nicostr. 
 4, 1250. TWK XPIM'^T^'' o'ot Tuv ifiuv Kixptj/^' c. Nausim. 11, 993. BiK(u6Tepov 
 5-ijwou Tck yjfierepa Tjfms itrny ex^iV) ^ tovtovs. c. Boeot. 2, 1010. 6fie7s aTrav- 
 res rohs vfterepovs iratSas ayairare. Ot iroAtTat tA ff<p€Te pa ffd)^eLV iirupuv- 
 To; or with the addition of the Gen. of air 6s according to § 266, 2; or in- 
 stead of the possessives, the Gen. of the compound substantive-reflexive is 
 used; indeed in Prose, this is uniformly the case with the Sing. {mine,ihine,!us, 
 thus 6 ifiauT oVf (TeavroVf kavrov woW/p, and not & 4fii)s avrov, & trhs avrov 
 iraT^p, which last mode of expression is found only in poetry), and with the 
 third Pers. PI., it is more frequent than the possessive : but the possessives are 
 commonly used when the pronoun is plural {our, your), except in the third 
 Person. Hence as follows : — 
 
 S.rhy ifiaVTOv (treavrov, eavTOv) ■jraTepa not rhv e/jihv {irhv) avrov ir, 
 
 T^y ifiavTov {(TeavTov, eavTov) fi7]Tepa not t^c ifi}]j/ {a-Tjv) aiiTov fu 
 
 ro7s ifiavTov {tTeavTov, eavrov) \6yois not ro7s 4^7s {(ro7s) uitTov \, 
 
 P. rhy TjfjieTepoy avruv Trarepa very rare rii' i^uv avrwv t, 
 
 T^ vfierepay avruy firiTepa very rare r^y v/iay avrwy fi, 
 
 tA Tjfierepa avTuv a/xapT'fiiJ.aTa very rare to Tjfiuy aiiruy a. 
 
 rhy ff<l>4Tepoy avrw/ traTipa more frequent rby kavrSav irarepa, but never 
 
 rhv atjiay a^Tuy tt. 
 
 Here also the Pronoun avT 6s either retains its exclusive or emphatic force, or 
 loses it: (a) 'O irais ii^pi^ei rhy $avTov warepa (suuM ipsius patrem). 'Tjucts 
 iPpiCere robs b/jieTspovs avray irarepas (VESTEOS IPSOKUM patres). Oi 
 TToiSes ^jBpiCov(ri rovs e avruy irarepas {suos ipsorum p). X. Hier. 3, 8. ttoWovs 
 5e Kat vm yyvaiKZy ruy kavrav Tvpdyyovs SietpSfapfieyovs {^{ip'fitreis) {a SUIS IP- 
 SOKUM conjngibus). X. An. 6. 1, 29. (yo/il^u) Ssris iv voKe/up tiy o-Toffuiffi vphs 
 &pXoyTa, TovToy irpbs rijy eavrou attmipiav ffTosria^eiy {contra SUAM ipsius 
 salutem). In order to strengthen the exclusive or emphatic force, the Pronoun 
 avT6s is frequently added ; avrhs rhv ifiavrov, etc. ; aMs is also sometimes 
 placed between the article and the reflexive of the third Pers., e. g. Aeschin. 
 Ctes. 85, 87. KaTahshvKe r^v avrbs ahrov 5vya(rTeiay. — (b) Th. 2 101. 
 STpaToy'iKriy, Tiiy IoutoB aSehtjyfiy, SlSuiri 2clii^ (suAM sororem). Aeschin. 
 fals. leg. 30, 40. Trphs t V i8ou\V "r^" aSe\(phv rhy ^ fi a u t o C koI rhv aSeXcptSovf 
 Ktd rhy iarphy i-nep-^a. Th. 6, 21. iroXb atrh T7\s TjficTepas auTwj/ ueWeuet 
 »\f?i' (a nostra patria), Lysias. riyovyTai ovk4ti toTs aipiTepois airay afiav 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 302.] PRONOUNS. 456 
 
 riifiairt rhv vow i/ias wape^ctv. Her. 5, 87. {\4yova'tv) elpaTaf kxivTriv aliTtut 
 (tuv ywaiKuv), 8/n) cfi; i iaSTris i,vi)p (ubi suns inV esset). X. H. 4. 4, 1 7. <)i 
 iiwceSatiidfiot 7uy iavTuy ffvfifuixuv KaTe(l)p6vow, 
 
 Rem. 5. It is very rare in good classical authors, that the Gen. of Pers. Pro- 
 nouns refers to the nearest subject, e.g. PI. Lach. 1 ''9 u. ahtdfie^a robs Ttare- 
 pas Tffiuv, St( ^jUar fihv eJuy Tpv^ai' (instead of robs ij/xtTtpovs vwrcpas or 
 Tof>s TiiiCTtpovs t^avir.). Antiph. 1, 1\4. iyi> ^ iiias inrfp rod Trarpis nov 
 Te^veuTos euTov/uu (instead of iirip toS ifiav tov ■iraTp6s). Th. 4,8. M ris 
 ^y rp KepKvpt^ vavs fftpuy evefv^ay (instead of ^nl tcls iy t. K a^ercpaf 
 aiiTuv V, or rks kavr&v v,), 
 
 Eem. 6. The pronoun abrbs with a reflexive meaning, regularly stands after 
 lioth the substantive and adjective (possessive) personal pronouns, whether its 
 exclusive power be retained or lost, c. g. Tjfmy ain&y, iipXv ainoTs, a^as oArois, d 
 vfimpos cuniay Traiiip, etc. In the Attic writers the exceptions to this position 
 are extremely few, e. g. X. Cy. 6. 2, 25. yvy -rii imriiSem (Tifnas) SeT tls riiy 
 &5hv <rvaK€vd^€a^at airo7s re vfity, Kal Sir^aois rerp^iroffi -xpupL^a, But in 
 other writers, also, such exceptions are quite rare, c. g. Her. 5, 91. avyitylxrico- 
 IJLey avrotai fiftiy oi Troiiiacuri opdas. This position is never found with the 
 third Pers. PL, consequently never avrobs ir^Sj instead of <r0Ss mirois. 
 But when the Pers. pronouns are used without their reflexive force, then aln-Ss, 
 in its exclusive or emphatic sense, may either precede or follow the personal pro- 
 noun: (a) avTov ^^ou (n^ov), airfi i/iol (/loi), aiirhy ifii (fie), avrobs iifitts, etc., 
 e. g. PI. Phaed. 91, a. ouT(ij ifiol Sri fidKurra S6(ei ovruis eX""- Symp. 220, 
 c. avySJtruire koI rii Sir\a koI airhy i/it. X. C. 2. 9, 2. ^Scois y' i,y (sc. ^pi- 
 \fiaiiu rhy &i/Spa), ?<(>i), ci jtt)| ipoffoiirny, Siras /tj) ii^ ahroy )ic rpixoiro,— (b) 
 ifiov abrou, i/iol ainif, ch avriy, Tjiiav airuy, etc., e. g. Dem. 01. 3, 36. ir6dey 
 ^Kho^ey IffX^P^^ yeyoyey fl vap* Tjfiuy abruy *(Aiinros; X. C 3. 8, 9. rod 
 bipovs 6 T^Xios iirep rifiZv avruv Koiray arfr/uy iropevSfteyos (tki&k nap^et. 
 Cy. 5. 5, 20. ai /ley airby lup^Ka. 6. 1, li. ariyai f/nlv airo7s tlaiv. PI. 
 Apol. 41, a. eiiotyt Ktd air^ dav/uurrii hy ttif t) Starpifiii aM^i. 
 
 7. The reflexive pronoun is very often used instead of the 
 reciprocal pronoun, in all the persons. 
 
 Dem. C. Olympiod. 116a riSr riii7y outoTi Sta\ci6p£&a. PI. Ep. 621, i-.. 
 Sucaio<r6yriy liercKtipoyfiireas TravrX rpiviii iireniSii<roney,'iya, Ka\ riiiiy avroTs 
 (filKoi &p.ey, Kal ro7s Aeots. Lys. 114. iiriiSi.y i/uy iyi) firivla^a, irphs i/ias o A - 
 TO ill rpi^eaSie K&ireira KoSr' eVo cKoaroy viity airois aTrex^<rc<r&E. X. C. 
 3. 5, 16. <l>^ovov<riv lauTois /laWoy, fl toU &\\ois hidp&nois. 
 
 Rem. 7. Both the reciprocal and reflexive pronoun is used when the action 
 refers to an object that has been named. Both consequently express a reflexive 
 idea, and are related like the species and genus ; since now the genus includes 
 the species, so the reflexive may take the place of the reciprocal, in cases 
 where it is readily perceived that several persons so perform anjrthing together 
 that the action appears as reciprocal. But when the reciprocal is antithetic to 
 iauriy (Kao'ros, but the reflexive used for the reciprocal, to Swouj, itis 
 clear that the reciprocal must then necessarily stand, where the antithesis 
 kaurhy exaffros is either expressed or implied, e. g. Isocr. Paneg. ftoAAoi' 
 Xaipavaiv. iiA rois i.\\ii\uv Kano'is, ^ Tori air ay ISiois ayadots (i. e. ^ cVl 
 Tois ouToD cKaaros hya^oTs), they rather rejoice in each other's^ evils, tlum in their 
 own good, i. e. than each one in his aim. 'Pl. Phaedr. 263, a. aii(t>is0riTovp.ev oX- 
 \^|Kols re Kal iifiiy aiirois. On the contrary, it is natural that the reflex- 
 ive should be regularly used, where other persons (&Wovs), either expressly or 
 by implication, are contrasted with the reflexive, e. g. Isocr. Aepn """7. t^^ 
 
 20 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
456 SYNTAX. [§ 303. 
 
 itKeavos riiias a b T o h s riyoi/ie^a, t) rohs ttSiX^ois (we think more of oursdvet 
 than of \others\imrbraiker»). dePac. oifiiv (0eTTa\ol) fftploti' aiiTois TroXe/iov- 
 ffiv [inter se, non contra exteros hostes). With the ' Nom. avroi added, e. g. X. H. 
 1. 5, 9. (Se*) ffKOTrslv iiras rwi/ "E.\\-i\viov jxTiSsves itrxvpoi Siffiy, a\A& Trdvres atr&e- 
 ve7s, ai/Tol if eauToTs OTcurni^ovTes^ So d/M}\oyeia'^ai, a^is^yireiff^oL, Si' 
 evex^vah ivavrlov ilvai and irpiiTTeiv ffipiffiv ahro'ts or tavTols. But 
 when neither the one nor the other antithesis exists, then the reflexive and the 
 reciprocal are used without distinction, often in the same sentence, merely for 
 the sake of variety, e. g. X. C 2. 6, 20. tp^ovovvres e au to vs luaovaiv o A. \ ^ - 
 Xovf. 7, \% avTl v^optaiiivijav kavras T]5eus a\\'fj\as edpat/, 
 
 8. The reflexive pronoun of the third Pars, often takes the 
 place of the reflexive of the first and second Person. The re- 
 flexive then denotes not a definite person, but only confines the 
 reflexive force to the subject; hence it has often merely the 
 meaning of tStos ; the particular person, to ■whom it refers, must 
 be clearly denoted by the construction of the sentence. 
 
 X, C. 1.4, 9. ou5^ y&p r^p eavrov [= oeavrov] o6 ye ^vx^^ ^P§' {^** ^"^ soui; 
 treavTov is a false reading). 2. 1, SI.tou 6e irdurtay yjSiarov axoCirfiaTits iTraivov 
 (OvrTJs [= aavTTJs], airtiKoos el [self praise). Andoc. de myst. vdiris, likv avrhii 
 awiiWvov (inptead of ifjuivT6v), Fl. Prot. 312, a. irh 5^ ovk ttv ai0';^i(roio els roiis 
 "EWTjvas avi hv ooipiffT^v irapexw J Isocr. Paneg. SLereXeffaftev aoTcurfacrroi Tphs 
 ff^as auTovs. X. H. 1. 7, 19. evp-fioere otpas avTobs TjfiapTrjK6ras ret /t€- 
 yiffra is ft£0,''S. 
 
 Bem. 8. In the Epic language, this usage occurs also with irtpioi and 3j 
 (suus). II. K, 39S. -bi^iv PovKeiotre fierii oipiaiv (instead of /leSl" i/ui/). 
 Od. i, 28. 0^01 ey'^'ve tjs yaitis Svvafiai yKvKeptWepov &\Ao tSecr^ai. 
 
 {303. IT. The remaining Pronouns. 
 
 1. OStos, ourus, TotouTos, too^ovto^, and oSc, tSSe, toi- 
 osSc, Toa-o'iZe, are commonly used with this distinction, that 
 the first four refer to what immediately precedes, the others, to 
 what immediately follows. 
 
 Her. 6, 53. toStb (the foregoing) fuv AaKeSaiii6vtot \eyoun — TiiSe (the 
 following) Se — ^7^ ypafa, Th. 1, 53. 01 /ih Si) {Koplv&toi) toioEto etmv 
 — ot Se 'A^yaiot to tdSe OLTreKptvavTO, 
 
 Remakk 1. Still, not seldom oEtoj, toioVtos, to/toStos, oStmj 
 refer to what follows ; far more seldom 35 1, TotosSe, TooisSe, &3e refer 
 to what goes before. X. C. 1.2, 61. Alxas oi/o^ao-riis eV! ToiiTtp yeyove (by 
 what follows). Th. 2, 34. 5Se liiv SxIttoviti (in reference to what precedes). 
 But often gSe.SSe, etc., are so used that they represent an object as present, as 
 it were before our eyes, e. g. X, Cy. 3. 3, 35. iyi, S'e V fiev vapcuvHv, irolovs 
 ■nvks xph e^yai iv T<f Toi^Se, atoxwolM" &v (= m praesenti renwn sMu). 
 Regularly, however, oStoj precedes the relative clause, e. g. alTis iimv, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
< 303.] PRONOUNS. 457 
 
 tv eTSes iuipa. — When oStoj and Ixftvos are used in opposition to each other, 
 the latter refers to what is more remote, the fr>nner, to what ia nearer, though 
 the reverse is sometimes the ease, as with the Latin hie and iUe. 
 
 2. The adjective demonstratives are often used in poetry, 
 especially in Epic, and sometimes in prose, instead of the 
 adverbs here, there, according to § 264, 3. 
 
 Od. a, 76. i\\' S^eft', riiuis oTSe irepi0(iaf<U/»€fto irdvTes {let us herb deliber- 
 ite). 185. >T)Bs S4 HOI ^ S" earriiKer eV aypov v6<ripi iri!A.7jos (stood there in the field.). 
 Od.ir, 239.&S vvv''\pos ixftvos iif cu>\fii[iaibipriaiv ?iaTtu (there). Th.l,53.Tifms 
 ToisSe irptiravs \afi6mes xP'h'""r^f a>s iroKtiiiois (nos, qui HIC sumus). PI. Rp. 
 327, b. iip6ij.7iv,&irav eiij, Outoj, f<pii, STrur&ey irposepxeTai (usSis he comes be- 
 hind thee). Hence in the Attic poets iyJip SSe instead of iy<i, e. g. S. 0. T. 
 1464, and oStoj in prose instead of <ri, e. g. PI. Gorg. 489, b. ovroirl aviip 
 oil iravffercu ip\vapSii/ ; instead of o■^ oh iro^crp ; 
 
 Bem. 2. In the Epic language, where two sentences, whose subject is not 
 doubtful, follow each other, the subject is often repeated in the second hy Syt 
 with a certain emphasis, in order to bring out prominently the identity of the 
 subject for both sentences, e. g. II. ;8, 664. oS/'a Sh vJjas ^injff, iroXiii' S' 874 
 (idemque) Xaby ayelpas ^ ^eiyav iirl vdvrov* II. o, 586. 'AyrfXo^os 8' ob fiuve, 
 ^o6s irep ii!i> TroXtHUTTiis, iM.' Sy' ip' irptire. So also in the Epic language and • 
 particularly in Her., far rarer in the Attic writers, when a series of actions fol- 
 low each other, i ti is used with reference to the same subject, where we may 
 translate i Se by, on the contrary, then, etc. Her. 6, 3. t^v /uck yevoiievT]v auTouri 
 alrlTir ob ptiKa i^fipaivc, i Be i\ey4 <r<^t (on the contrary). X. An. 4. 2, 6. oi Si 
 . . . ivTav^a fftsvov, us KaTexovrss rh &Kpov • o I S* KareTxoy (iidemgue). This 
 usage very often occurs in Hom. and Her. in disjunctive clauses : ti — J Syt, 
 Od. jS, 327. ij Ticoj ix TIi\ov S{« iiiivropas. . ., t) iye koI Siriprri^ei'. Her. 
 2, \73.1\.d&oi &|/ ^ Tox pLavels, tj '6ye iitOTrKtiieros yet/opLCPos. 
 
 3. The use of the pronoun ovtos is as follows : — 
 
 (1) AvTos properly means av tos, again he, and then self, ipse, 
 e. g. o vios auTos or avTos 6 vl6s, the son himself. It can also 
 refer to the person implied in the predicate, e. g. avros airier]. 
 So avTo TovTo or TovT avTo, hoc yjsum, this itself (not another) 
 When used with ?Kao-Tos, auros always precedes. Her. 7, 
 
 i9. S^eXxov a^Tos cKao'TOi to, irpoKti/ieva BUpa Xa^elv. 
 
 (2) In the oblique Cases, it is used for the third person of 
 r.lie personal pronouns ({ 302, 4). 
 
 (3) In connection with the article (o e^vros), it means the 
 same, idem (§ 246, 3). On the position of the article with 
 a^Tos in connection with a substantive, see ^ 246, 3. 
 
 Eem. 3. Horn, and Her. often use alt 6s in the place of the reflexive pro- 
 nouns of the three persons. Od. 5, 247. S\A^ S' airiv (instead of lovrto) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
458 SYNTAX. [^ 303 
 
 <]}oitI KaTafcpiinTuv '^iffKiv. C> 27. aoi 5e yd^ios ax^^^^ iiTTty, lia xph Ka\h fiep 
 aiiriiv (instead of iravriiv) fwuffi^oi. Her. 7. 10, 1. rh Si avro'iirt tvean 
 ieiySyj c/xe ffoi SiKaiSv itrrt (ppd^eiv {quid autem in NOBIS tlmendum insit). 
 
 Eem. 4. From the exclusive or emphaiic force of this pronoun, the following 
 Epeeific significations arise : (a) sd/ in contrast with another, hence alone, solus 
 {ipse, non alius) ; fi6yos, oa the contrary, in contrast with several. X. An. 4. 7, H. 
 &k\ov ouSeW (iroDOKoAeVos) X^P" air 6 s {goes alone); (b) even and self, like ipse, e. g. 
 Ai rhs i SuKpaTt); iSi.KpvaiV (even Socrates, Socrates himself) ; so xal air is, 
 oii^ ait T OS, velipse,ne ipse quidem; (c) 56//'in contrast with foreign aid, o/'^2m5£^ 
 ttc, sponle,\\\!X ipse ; (d) in Homer especially, auTiSs often forms a contrast with 
 another object, expressed or understood, this object being different from that de- 
 noted by auTiJi, as the soul in distinction from the body, or the body in distinction 
 from the soul, e. g. II. o, 4. a u t o ii s 5* kKdtpia reiJxc K^tfetrtrtv {made them [their 
 ladies, not their souls] a prey), or a man in distinction from his affairs, or asso- 
 ciates, etc. Hence ai>Tos is sometimes used of a hrd, master, e. g. ouri j %^ ; 
 so also avr6, id ipsum, often in connection with a following adjective-clause ; 
 (e) it is used with a proper name and an ordinal from rpiros upwards, to de- 
 note the number of official associates with the person named, who is generally 
 the principal one, e.g. Th. 1, 46. KopiyAtav ffTparriyis ^r afvoicKetSris xe/iVTos 
 aiiTos {Xenoclides was the commander of the Corinthians with Jour associates). 
 
 4. The indefinite pronoun rts when joined with adjectives, 
 indefinite numerals, and adverbs, is used Jike the Latin quidam, 
 to bring out distinctly the idea expressed by these words, some- 
 times making them more, sometimes less emphatic, according 
 to the meaning of the word or the connection of the discourse; 
 but with pronouns and cardinal numbers, it corresponds to the 
 Latin fere (almost, about, somewluU). 
 
 Vliyas tis airlip (somegreat man), fUKp6s tij, irSi t«, cKoa'Tds Tis, oiSets ris, oXlyoi 
 rivis, TToXis tis, ttiJo-os tis, Ppaxi ti, iyyus ti, (rxfSiv rt, ■/raw ri, vavTivatrl ti, Troki 
 Tl, ovSev Tt, TrdXat rt, StatpepSirrus ri, Ae tvftv t tya \4yeis Sivafuy Tris apeTrjs 
 (hat {incredibilem qtjandam vim, u kind of incredible power). X. C. 1. 1, 1. ri 
 ypaipii Kar* outoC {"SuKparovs) roioiSe tis ^i' {haec fere, was nearly, was for 
 substance this). 3. 6, 5. \4^oi>, iriJirai tike's ciVi (sc. at irpisoSot tJ) iriKet), tell 
 me about how much the revenues are. So ovtu rt, or orha, uSe vws (sic, fere, 
 nearly thus) ; rpets rii/es (about three, some three or so). 
 
 Beu. 5. The regular position of the pronoun t 1 s, as an enclitic, is after the 
 word to which it belongs, e. g. avl\p tis, kiA6s tis h>i)p. But sometimes, in con- 
 nected discourse, it precedes, e. g. tart rolmv r i s tw^Sijs \iyos. On the rela- 
 tive and interrogative pronouns, see under adjective and interrogative sentences. 
 
 Kbm. 6. The indefinite pronoun one, any one, is usually expressed in Greek . 
 
 (a) by tIs, e. g. Oi/c Si/ tis fipot ivSpa aoipiirepov (one would not find, etc.) , 
 
 (b) by the second Pers. Sing. Opt. with fii/, and the Ind. of a historical tense 
 with &y, when it is intended to represent the subject as indefinite, e. g. tpairis 
 tv (dicas, one may, can say); vofii^ots &v (credas.one might suppose), elSfi 
 iy (videres, one might have seen); rtyi\<r<i' S-v ( putares, etc.). The English, 
 however, frequently translates the second Pers. by you, e. g. you may, can my. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
n 304- 305.] PRONOUNS. 
 
 459 
 
 4 304. Prospective and Retrospective Use of the 
 Pronoun. 
 
 1. The personal pronoun oS, oT, e, fiiy, and the demonstrative 6, fj, r6, are fre- 
 quently used in Homer to direct the attention to a following substantive, and 
 as it were to prepare for it. 11. v, 321. oWra t# pii/ Inttra Kar o4>dtt\fi&r 
 Xfff hx^iv, nijAefJjj "AxiAiii. II. <^, 249. fra ixiv iraiaue itSmio, Siov 
 
 2. In the same way, the Neut. of n demonstrative is used to prepare for a 
 following substantive, or a; following Inf. or entire sentence. PI. Apol. 37, it. 
 Toirou Tifmiuu, iv irpvTayflip a it i) at as (lam deemed worthy of this, y'iz., u. 
 maintenance in the Pryianeum). X. Cy. 8. 7, 25. tJ to^tou ixoKoptiTepov, toC 
 7p /nixft-Sya'y (what can be more blessed than this, to mix with the earth 1) ; Fl. 
 Gorg. 515, e. iXKh, T(iSe iu>i flirt inX roirif, el Xiyovrai 'AaTjcaioi 8(4 
 TlepiK\4a PcKriovs yfyoi/fvai. Dem. Phil. 1. 41, 5. oTSev . . . toCto 
 koKSs infivos, Sti tuBtK jue'i/ iartv airai/ra Tck x<<'/>'<' Si^Aa rot iro 
 \4fiov Kfl/ifva iv p-iirif. Comp. ^ 266, Bern. 3. 
 
 3. On the contraiy, a demonstrative pronoun; particularly ouriij, is fre- 
 quently put in the same sentence after a preceding substantive or pronoun, 
 partly for the sake of perspicuity, k. g. when between the Case and the verb 
 which governs it, there is an unusually long intermediate clause, and partly for 
 the sake of rhetorical emphasis. Such a pronoun again resumes the preceding 
 substantive or pronoun, and either recalls it to the memory, or fixes the attcn 
 tion particularly upon it. Her. 3, 63. i S4 /jloi Niyos, rlv ( = Jy) Ka;u/3iicri;s 
 iirirpoTrov twv oIkIuv aireSe^e, oStoj ToSra iueretKaro {Maffos, whom Cambyses 
 appointed steward of his domestic affairs, he gave me these commands). Th. 6, 69. 
 at olxlat rod vpoairrelov irdx^eis \afjiPdvovirca, aZrat vvrjpxov epu/io. So 
 also with the personal pronouns, in which case the pronoun which resumes a 
 preceding one, is regularly an enclitic form. Eur. Fhoen. 507. i/iol/xfy, el Kai ^^ 
 KaSt' 'EWiivav x^^va re^pafifuSr' (educati sumus), dA\' oZv ivveri, n o i SoKcis At'yf iv. 
 
 CHAPTEE V. 
 
 The Infinitive and the Participle as an Object 
 and Attribute. 
 
 i 305. A. The Infinitive. 
 
 The Infinitive represents the idea of the verb as an abstract 
 substantive idea, but diiTers from the substantive in the fol- 
 lowing respects : 
 
 (1) The Inf without the article can be used only as a Nom. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
460 SYNTAX. r^ "^^^ 
 
 (either as a subject, or in connection with caTi(i/) as a predicate), 
 and as an object in the Accusative ; 
 
 Sal)ject;"ETr€Tai tJ aper^ fftS f e o-fto t eij rhu vXdai xpovov imKKop, t) tJ Ka/t/} 
 yio be preserved for a longer time results rather from, bravery titan cowardice), X. R, 
 L. 9, 1. Predicate: Ti> Sixriv SiSiivoi irdrepop irdtrxf^" t/ ifrru', 1j iroiel" 
 PI. Gorg. 464, d. Object: Bo(SA.o;«ai ypiipfiv. See § 306. 
 
 (2) Yet it so far retains the nature of the verb, as 
 
 (a) It denotes, by different forms, the different circumstances 
 of the action: duration, completion, futurity, and has active, 
 middle, and passive forms. 
 
 Tpiipiw, scribere, ■yeypa/pevax, scripsisse, ypAjicu, scripsisse or scribere (§ 257), 
 ypdtfiuv, scripturum esse; PovXeieffdcu, to deliberate or he advised, fiePov\iv(r^ai,' 
 to have deliberated or liave been advised, fiouKtia-atrAai, to have deliberated or to de- 
 liberate, ^SouAeua^rai, to have been advised or to be advised, etc. 
 
 (b) It retains the government of the verb, i. e. it governs the 
 same Case as its verb, e. g. Tpa.<\)€iv iiria-ToXT^v, iTri&vf^av Trj<; 
 a.peTTJ's, i^a.)(ecr&ai rots iroXc/itots; 
 
 (c) It has an adverb for its attributive expletive, and not, as 
 in the case of an actual substantive, an adjective, e. g. KoASs. 
 (iTro^amv (on the contrary, xaXos Advaroi). 
 
 The Inf will first be considered without the article, and then 
 with it. 
 
 §306. 1. The Infinitive, as an Object, without the 
 Article. 
 
 1. The Inf is used, as the complementary' object in the 
 Ace, to express something aimed at or effected: — 
 
 (a) With verbs oi wiMing and the contrary (verba voluntatis), 
 e. g. PaiXofiax, ISSiw, /xcWo), CTrt^VjUu, d^iu), Sikoliu), t,riTl!>, Trpo&vfiov- 
 fiai, Trpd^/ios el/JLL, tiri^apu), Treipu/iai, /JovXciJO/iai, irapa.a'Kfva.Lpp.aj., 
 p,r)^avu>iiiai, toX/jm, VTrop-efia, e'oiJa, etc. — Seo/iai (to entreat), iKcreuu), 
 Trapaivu), iiriTiWo), Trapoivvui, iraBw, tru/AjSotiXevo), vov^erui, KiXivui, 
 TrporraTTU), etc. — cS, <rvy)(<apC), d/ieXu, etc. — ScSoiko, ^oySoCfiai, 
 
 ' The verbs which take an Infinitive after them, are usually such as do noi 
 express a complete idea of themselves, bnt require an Inf. or some other con 
 Btruction, to complete the idea. The Inf., therefore, is the complement oi the 
 verb on which it depends. Other verbs take a Participle for their complement 
 Bee i 309. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 306.] INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE AUTICLE. 461 
 
 <^euy<i), dva/SaWoiMU, okvZ, etc. — airayopeiu), KaT£}(ia, kcoXvw, eti\ ; — 
 rja-V)^tav, irpdy/iaTO, dtrxoXtay, oxh>v Trap€x<a Tivi, iiouo-iav StSoWt, and 
 the like. 
 
 SaiXofiai ypitpfii/. 'EttiS-u/hS TopeieaAai, ToA/to5 {iTo/ievetp 
 rhi/ KivSvfoi/. nttpaivZ (Toi ypaipeiv. 'Ava^ikKo /ial ffoi i,TroKplyea-&at. 
 PI. Gorg. 457, e. 0o/3oC/tai Ste\4jxf' te. Phaed. 98, d. aficAw rctj is 
 a\Ti^us cuTias Ae'^ciy. Dem. 01.3.16, 25. tis tw ahrhv %ti KiaKia^L SeVpa 
 0aSl(€iy; X Ag. 1, 7. 'Ayii<rl\aos fereVrTi oo-xo^foi' ouTip (t^ PiuriKe!) 
 Top e J Ely o-T/)oT6i«y M to6s "EAXrjrar. Dem. Chers. 102, 53. fiirvxiip 
 iroiov<riv ixelvif irpirTeiv, 8 n Poi\eTai. 
 
 Remakk 1. On the difference between the Inf. and the Part, with aiirxi- 
 veu-^at, aiSear^at, irepiopay, &pxe(T^eu, ra^eiy, iravroTov yiyvea^cu, iraptuTKevd^etr' 
 &ai, iriipav^ai, see § 311. Verbs oC preventing and hindering, and the like, have 
 the following constructions: (a) (not very frequent) Elpyai <re airifnai. Oli 
 KaKia as atriivai. (b) (usually) EXpya <T( fiii airiivai according to 4 318, 
 7; and after a preceding negation: 'Affrviyris, Sn S4otTo avTov d Kvpos, ouSev 
 4d6vaTO avTexeiv fiTj ov x^P^C^^^^^h ^' Cy. 1. 4, 2. a-ccording to § 318, 9. 
 (c) Tov Spavereitiv iot Setrvorai robs OiK^ras) Sefffiois air€ipyov<ri, X. C. 
 2. 1, 16. (d) Has curias Sio &i/^pas e^ei rov fi^ KaTaSvvaij X.. An. 3. 5, 11 
 (ej (seldom) M^J^o/xey ravrovs etpyety^ Sisre p.^ Bvvatr^at fiXdirTeiv 7]pns, 
 ib. 3. 3, 16. (f ) T&v TrAeib-TOC B/uKoy rav ^iXav cJp'yov rh p.^ ra iyyhs rrjs 
 irihfas KaKovpyeTy, Th. 3, 1. according to § 308, Rem. 1. (g) very fre- 
 quently after a preceding negation : OilK awftxovTO oiiS a-irh Tar <pl\wv ri 
 p.^ oix^ ^K^oyeKTeiy nap ainSov netpaff^aiy X. Cy. 1. 6, 32. according to 
 § 318, 9. 
 
 Hem. 2. The verb velvety, to persuade, regularly takes for its object a sub- 
 stantive-sentence, expressed by the conjunction an and a finite verb ; it takes 
 the Inf. (Ace. with the In£) more seldom. X. C. 1. 1, 1. TroWdKts iStaipuura, 
 Titri TTOTe Aoyus 'A^vaiom exeitray ot ypte^dpcyot ^fijKpdrijv-y &s &^tos eti] 
 
 Beu. 3. In order to express more definitely the idea of something which 
 is to be done, effected, etc., the Greeks sometimes join the conjunction S s t e 
 with the Inf. governed by verbs of this class. Her. 7, 6. ayeirfiirc Ee'pfea, 
 SsTe iroje'etv Toirra (to do this). Sometimes, also, in order to make the pur- 
 pose or object more emphatic, Sir as. Sis with the Subj., Opt. or Fut. Ind., is 
 used. So in Attic prose, the verbs •npohvpeiff^ai, StavoeuT^ai, p.Tixayaff^aij wapa- 
 Ke\e{ieiT^at, SuuceKeieir^aif ■jrapcurKevd^strdcu, are connected with Situs and the 
 Put. Ind. 
 
 (b) With verbs of thinking, supposing, saying, and the con- 
 trary (verba cogitandi, p^tandi, et dicendi), e. g. Xoyi^ecr&ou, 
 mda-Bai, voju^av, iXTri^av, ^vx^crSai, SoKetv, KLvSvveveiv, etc. — XeyeLV, 
 
 <j}a.vaL, etc. — apvtioSai {to deny), ATTLo-Tflv, etc. 
 
 Nojiiffccj afiapreTy {I think {to have erred] that I have erred). 'EKTrl^a 
 ehrvx'l]<f^'-'' (I^P^^^^^PPy)- AStt) ^ S(!|b ko\£s SoKCi exo'. Th. 3 
 74. 71 116X15 ixivSiyeva-e Ttacra Sia(p^ei.privai. A4ya> elSdvai raura (I 
 my [to hnovi\ that 1 know (his). 
 
 Eem. 4. On" the difference between the Inf. and PaH. after the verb» 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
4G2 SYNTAX. [} 306. 
 
 sLKO^etVf ctSeVat, iitlffTaff^ai, fiavbdveiy, yiyv^tXKUv, fiiiiv^aKea^ai, irvv^dyeiT^at, 
 tutr^dveiT^aij SsiKifvyatf awoipaiveiv, S7]\ovyj oTyeAAcii', ipalvea^atj ioiKefot, see 
 §311. 
 
 Bem. 5. It will be seen (§ 329), that, after the verbs above mentioned, the 
 object may be expressed also by a complete substantive-sentence with &s or 3ti. 
 
 (c) After expressions denoting ability, cause, power, capacity, 
 ot fitness (verba facultatis), e. g. Svvafuii, Swaros, aSvvaros, oTos t 
 ixfiL, |i((o, (^possum) — tcTTiv, irdpeanv, iieariv, eyeariv (ficet) — ttoim, 
 SiaTTpoTTO/jLai KaTepyd^o/xai, KaTCUTKfvd^u), etc. — Sewo's (powerful, 
 capable, fiC), iKavos, tn-ir^Sctos, koxos, ■^tt(ov, airios el/xi, etc. ; — after 
 verbs of choosing, appointing, naming, educating, teaching. 
 
 A^vafiai TToieTy toOto. Her. 2, 20. ot iTijffiai &veixol elfft at not ir\ii- 
 ^v€Lv rhv TtorafUp, 7. 129. avwv{tiiovs robs &Wovs cT-Jat -jroieei. 5, 97. 
 arpaTTjyhi/ a-jroSe^avT^s ahrSov elvai MeAcij'^ioy. Ot6s t* et/t! iroi^'iv 
 TouTO. X. Cy. 1. 4, 12. T(y fee ffov ye tKavtloTepos Trutrca i S, 18. Seiy6- 
 Tcpos SiSdffKetv. Xlotu tre ye\av. AiSdffKot ae ypdtpe tv. 
 
 Rem. 6. On Ttoieiv with the Part., see § 310, 4 (b). 
 
 Rem. 7. The relation of the result, the thing to be effected, which is expressed 
 by the Inf. with these verbs, is sometimes stated more definitely by adding the 
 conjunction &sre. PI. Prot. 348, c. adivarov £ju7i/, &st€ npuTay6pov 
 rovte aofp^ep6v Tiva e Ketr^at. So often in Plat. iK-avhs ffisTC. X. Ag. 1, 
 37. ^irolTjtrev (sc. Agesilaus), &st^ &vev tpvyrjs Kctl ^avdrav rhs TriKeis Sto- 
 re A e (T a i* 
 
 (d) The Inf. is also used after the verb ■7re(j>vKevai, after the 
 impersonal verbs and phrases Trpos^Kci, irpen-a, avp-jiaivii, Sti, ;^^, 
 avayKaiov, Sixaiov, ixftiXxjiMv iariv and the like ; after verbs of 
 giving, taking, going, sending, and many others ; after adjectives 
 of various significations, e. g. ofios, Sikcuos (worthy, worth), ijSws, 
 poSios, ;:^aA.e7ros and many others ; after abstract substantives, es- 
 pecially in connection with ttvai and yCyvea-Aai, as avdyKr], cXttis, 
 o-^oX^, w/Do iariv, to express a purpose or determination, a result 
 or effect. 
 
 Th. 4, 61. ireipvKe t5 av^pdTr^iov Sia iramhs &pxe^y f^^v tov itKovros, ^v 
 Kd(T(retr^ai 5^ rh i-Kt6v (men are so constituted as always to rule those who yield, 
 but to guard against those who assail). "H/coftey /jLav^dve iv {ad discendum), 
 Th. 2, 27, To7s Alytj^rais ol AaKeSeufASviot iSoaay Qvp4av olxeTy Kotriiv yipf 
 pfft€0'^ai. PI. Apol. 33, b. ifxoiais koI ir\ov<rlat Kol veirqTt irap^x^ enavrhv 
 iparav. X. An. 5. 2, 1. t!) TjjuHru toD a-Tparev/iaTos Kare\twe Sem^Siv 
 •pvKdTTciv rb aTpaT&TTfiov. 'A^iis iari dav/idCfa-^at. Her. 4, 53. 
 Bopvir^eims irlveadai 5)8iirT((y iaTi (dulcissimus ad bihendum). 6, 112. Teas 
 ^ii> ToTo-i "EA,\7)(ri /col Tb oBi/o^o ri IVHiSaii' <p6gos i.Kovaai (a terror to hear). 
 
 Rem. 8. Homer makes the Inf depend on adjectives also,"to express the 
 same relation as is denoted by the Ace. of more definite limitation (§ 279, 7). II. ici 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
306.J INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 463 
 
 *37;^e(e<i' 8' i.v4iiourii/ S/ioTot (ftriroi) {equal to the winds in speed). In a 
 Bilnilai- manner, the Inf. cTtoi in the phrase kxliiv eXvat, must probably bo 
 explained {willinfi so far as it depends on my being or nature, as far as depends on 
 me, i. e. actually uniting). Her. 7, 104. ix^v re tXvat oiiS' ttv fiowo/iaxio.fu 
 {could I have my own choice, or so far as concerns me, I would not fight even in 
 tingle combat). PI. Phaedr. 252, a. a^ei/ SJ, iKoCtra civat oix km^fUeTat ri 
 ^"Xfl- This phrase is used but seldom ia affirmative sentences. 
 
 Bem. 9. As the poets sajr dav/ia iSeVftoi (o uxmder to see), so also in prose, 
 the complementary Infinitive ipai/, elsopav and iSeii>, are sometimes 
 joined with verbs of appearing and showing one's self. X. Cy. 5. 4, 11. o-J iirava- 
 ^fatrofAfvos ^a, &'iro'i6s ris ^nipr) iSf7y 6 roiairrjy '^I'xV ^X^^ {^ came to see 
 wimt sort of a looking person you are, you, who, have such a soul). 
 
 Rem. 10. It is a peculiarity of the Greek, ;hat, instead of the Pass. Inf., it 
 commonly uses the Inf. Act. or Mid., with the adjectives mentioned under (c) 
 and (d), e. g. Sufardj, S|ios, etc., and with substantives e. g. doSfio, <l>6$os, and 
 with verbs of giving, etc. Such Infinitives, the English translates both actively 
 and passively, e. g. Tairra ^(^Sid iari /la^eTv {these things are easy to learn or be 
 learned). Kal\.6s iartii IStir ( pulcher est visu, he is beautiful to see or to be seen), 
 Th. 1, 38. Sfioj ^avfidirai, PI. Phaed. Xoyos Sunarhs KaTavorjirai {capable 
 of being understood). The active subject of the Inf. is easily supplied, in all 
 examples of this kind, e. g. he is beautiful roK us to see. A Dat. is often ex- 
 pressed with such an Inf., e. g. PI. Up. 599, a. ^^Sio iroieTc liiiir eiSoti T^jy 
 iKil^eiay. So 3aKpinis irSiri iropcrxf iavrhv iparav {he yielded himself to 
 all to question, i. e. he permitted all to question him). 
 
 Rem. 11. Prom the use of the Inf. after verbs of willing, wishing, entreati-ig, 
 and imploring and the like, the following peculiarities in the use of the Inf. t/re 
 to be explained : 
 
 a. The Inf. is very frequently used in the Epic writers instead of the second 
 person Imperative, sometimes also instead of the third person ; instead of the 
 second person, not seldom also in other poets, and even likewise in Herodotus 
 and in the Attic prose-writers. Thp Inf. must then be considered as the object 
 depending on the Imp. of a verb of willing, which is to be supplied, e. g. ldf\e. 
 Hence when predicative expletives are joined with the Inf., these, inasmuch as 
 they refer to the subject av contained in the omitted Imp., are put in the Nom. 
 The Imp. is also often interchanged with the Inf. Od. a, 290, sqq. voarii- 
 ffaj 5^ ?ir«To ^i\r)i' ^s warpiSa yaTav trjjiid re ot x* ■'«'> >"■' ^f' KTepeu ktc- 
 pEi{at ...Ko! hvepi iiifTepa iovvai (and then having returned to your dear father- 
 land, heap up a mound,eic.). II. ;3, 75. ificts ^ iXKo^ev &KKos Ipr^rietv iirceaaiv. 
 II. Q, 89-92. ^ Sc . . of|a<ra kXt)i3( dipas Upoto i6p.oio, vev\oy . . dcTvai 'A^- 
 yalr/s iiA yaivaaiv tivkS/iolo. Her. 6, 86. <r6 B^ fioi xal rci xpi\paTa Sc|ai, ical Ti{Se 
 t4 <rifi$o\a irafe Kafi^v is 5" ii/ ex*" toSto kircuTe-g, Toirip iiroSoSvai {ei 
 redde). Th. 5, 9. iri 8e, KAcopi'Sa, ai(pyiSi<iis Tcks Tri\as avoi^as ^irEKftcic 
 Kol iirelyfa^ai &s TiJx"'"''o iujU/xfJoi. 
 
 b. When the Inf. refers to the third Pers^, its subject as well as the nccom- 
 p.anying expletives of the predicate, are commonly in the Ace. This Ace. 
 with the Inf. is to be considered as the object of a verb of willing, which is to 
 lie supplied, e. g. eSxoiuu, S6s, iroUt, or of a verb denoting what ought to be, must 
 be, e. g. xp^> *"; so with wishes, entreaties, precepts and compacts. H. ti, 179, sq. 
 SSe Se Tti rfiTEffKEy, iSiiv els aipmhy eipii>' ZeD Tidrtp, fi Aiavra Xax^^i'jfl 
 TuSeos vi6y, ^ alnhv j8o<r«\flo wo\vxpi<roio WvKiiinis I {grant or cause thai 
 either Ajax may obtain it by lot, etc.). Aesch. Suppl. ftEol iroXnai, pjh >»e SovXelas 
 rvxelr. X. Ven. 6, 11. rhi/ Se Kvvriyirrtv exoyra l^iivai i\ivpfmi 
 iff^TJTa iirl rh Kvyriyefftov, rhy Si apKvaphy eveff^ai. 
 
 c. Hence the Inf is sometimes used in reference to the first and second Pers , 
 in questions denoting indignation. Her. 1, 88. S fiaffiXiv, K6repor > iytiy itplii 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
464 SYNTAX. [5 307. 
 
 <rj t4 voiuvtiyx^""^ ^ (riyav iv t^ 'irttpe6vTt -xpSi/a; (sliall I speak or be si- 
 tentf). Od. If, 431. S SeiXoi jr(!ir' l/ify; rl Kaxiv ijuefptTe Toiruy; {whither (« 
 go, i. e. whither are you ta go ?). 
 
 d. Finally, the Inf. is used instead of the Opt., with at yiji, e0f) as the ex- 
 pression of a wish. Od. oj, 375, sq. ot yip. Zed re xiirtp . . , Toior ^iSi' Toi 
 
 KfSpas fu"ti(TTrjpas, (instead of i^tarralriv k. ijiii/oifu). 
 
 i 307. Nom., Gen., Dat., and Ace. loith the Infinitive. 
 
 i . Most verbs which take the Inf. have, in addition to this 
 object, also a personal object, which is pat in the Case that the 
 verb reqviires, e. g. Aeofiai aov S^iiv. 'Xv /ji, ^ovXivm croi 
 ifuKJipoveiv. EiTTOTp'vvo) (re fjA)(t<T9ai, 
 
 KemarK 1. So also KeKeiety, which signifies to impel, to w^c, lience to 
 command {jubere), in Attic prose, is always constructed with the Ace. and tlie 
 Inf., c. g. KcAciiu <re ypitpem (jvheo te scribere). 
 
 . 2. When predicative expktives, consisting of adjectives or sub- 
 stantives, and referring to the personal object of the govern- 
 ing verb, are joined with the Infinitive, they are either put by 
 attraction in the same- case as the personal object, or in the 
 AcciKOtive vcithout attraction. 
 
 (a) Gen. with Inf. A^o/ial crov Trpo^ifiov elvai (I beg you to be zeahus). 
 Acofuu arov vp6Avp.ov eXvai. X. H. 1. 5, 2. Kipoi 
 4i4ovro &iS TTpo^v/iOTdTov irphs rhy viKefioy yeiea^ai 
 {begged C.tobe as zealous as possible in the war). Her. 6, 
 100. ^A^tiyaiuv iSerj^ffav irtpliTi ^oij^obs yipiff&ai 
 (requested the Athenians to aid them). If the Gten. is fol- 
 lowed by the Inf. accompanied by a more definite ex- 
 pletive, this expletive is always put in the Ace., e. g. 
 Lys. 118. iiojuu, iiiSiv KaTcafinipiffcur&iu @eoiurl)aTov, eV- 
 dviiovfiivovs, Zaos fiat d hyiv liTTiv {I pray you to 
 condemn Th., considering, etc.). Tli. 1, \i0.hvipav ftyu 
 Auv irrtv, iSiKov/u^cou; l{ up{iri\s iroKenuv (it istht 
 characteristic of brave men, when injured, to exchange peact 
 for war). 
 
 (d) Vat. with Inf. iun$ou\citii aoi TrpaStinai ftycu {ladvise youto be zeal- 
 ous). 'Svfi.fiovKeia (Toi ■irp6StviJL0v flvai. X. An.2. 1,2. 
 ISofe Tori rav '^wiftav aTparifyots irvirKtvaircip.- 
 4yois & eTxoy Koi i ^oir\itraiJ.evois irpoUvai. X 
 Hipparch. 7, 1. vavrl irpos^K« &pxovrt <ppovip.if 
 ehat (it becomes every ruler to be prudent). X. An. 1. 2, 1 
 Sevlf 7i«ic Trapiiyyu\i Aa$6vTa -robs &ySoas {coi» 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 307.] NOM., GEN., DAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 4G3 
 
 thanded Xenias to come, having taken men). 7. 1, 21. nSy 
 <TOL e|effTiy aySpl •yey^tr&ai (you can show yourself a man). 
 X. Cy. 2, 1, 15. i^iartv i/iti' el pov\e<r&e, \afi6vrai 
 iirKa «s xivivvov inpalvav 
 (c) AncwM. Inf. '^iroTpivu <7e ir p6dvit.ov thmi. KeAeioj cr e ■itf6&u- 
 fjioy etvcu, 
 
 Kem. 2. The Ace in the examples undet (a) and (b), may be explained by 
 considering the object of the goTerning verb, c. g. Sfopuu ifiSiir, as being at the 
 eame time the subject of the in/1, i. c. this object stands in a two-fold relation, 
 being both the object of the governing verb, and the subject of the Inf. (see 
 Eem.3),e.g. Ae'o^oi u/nSy [Sftas] /Soij&ois yei/i<TSiiu (I beg you that you will aid). 
 
 Rem. 3. Verbs which take the simple substantive object, in the Gen. or 
 Dat., sometimes take, in the construction with the Inf., this (jbject in the Ace, 
 the object of the governing verb and the subject of the Inf. being united in 
 one. This constraction is used when the wltole action of a person and not the 
 person himself, is made specially prominent. Lys, Fragm. S. 3, p. 144. S<o- 
 fjLai oSy i/stas cuyyv&fnji/ ex^iv {I beg therefore thai i/ou would pardon). Th. 4, 
 97. irpoayopevw avrovs ^K rov lepou airiivTas airotpepetr^al rd trcf^repa 
 avrav (instead of ouTorr airiavo'u' airoip.), I give orders that they, going -out of the tem- 
 ple, should carry their effects with them. So vapayy4\Xa, oiroyyeXAo;, irposTJiTTa, 
 SiaKeKeio/jiai ire ametfou X, C 4. 7, l.'SaKp&Tris avripKeis iv rtus irposTiKoi- 
 ■^ais vpd^ea'iv ai/Tohs {rohs diAiKovvras cdiT^) eTyai ^Trefte\e7To. So al?o 
 the verbs eiTreTu, \4yeii', ippA^eiv, ^avetvin the sense of jubere, are con- 
 structed with the Ace. and the Inf^ in the Attic poets. S. Ph. 101. \iyoi a' 4yi: 
 d6\tp ^tKoKT^TTfV Kafieiu. Also irpoS'fjKei, irpe-Tret, e^eart, trvfi^aivet, 
 (ifi^opoy icrrt with Dat. or Ace. with Inf., Set, xp'h (h 279, Rem. 4). The 
 Ace. is necessary, when the statement in the sentence does not refer to a 
 definite person, but is altogether general in its nature. PI. Ion. 539, e. otix Uv 
 irpeiroi ye ^iriK^jfffioua elvai ^a^^tp^hv &y5pa {it would not be Jitting that 
 "» rhapsodist should be forgetful). 
 
 3. Besides the case already mentioned, the Aoc. with Hie 
 Inf. is used in Greek, as in Latin, in the following case also. 
 When a subject with its predicate, as 'O aya^o^ a.vr]p evSaifiLova:, 
 is made the object of our thought or will, the subject is put in 
 the Ace. (rov aya^bv avBpa) and the predicate in the Inf. (eiSai- 
 fi,ov€LV, e. g. No/At^M Tov d-ya^ov avSpa ciSai/iovet v {^I believe 
 that the good man is hetppy). If the predicate is an adjective, 
 participle, or substantive with cimi yiyvta-Sai, etc. (i 240, 2), as 
 'O dyo-Jos avrip evSatfjiMv icrriv, then these words also are put in 
 the Acc.^ e. g, No/itfu rov aya^bv avSpa fiSatfiova elvai. 
 
 4. But when the subject of the governing verb is at the same 
 time the subject of the Inf. also, the subject of the Inf. is not 
 expressed in Greek, as it is in Latin, by the Ace. of a personal 
 pronoun, but is wholly omitted ; and when adjectives or sub- 
 stantives stand with the Inf as expletives of the predicate, 
 they are put, by attraction, in the Nom. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
46? SYNTAX. [i 307 
 
 Oloiiot tt/iapTfiv {I believe I have erred, or that I have erred, credo me errasse) 
 Ofei ofiopreTi' (you think that you have erred). Olferoi ajuapTuv. OUfK^a aiiapreiv 
 Oloiuu eiSaliiwy tivat {I think lam happy, or that I am happy, credo me beatim 
 esse). Oftt iiSaiiiap iiixu. OUtiu eiSatptay thai. OlS/xe^a iiiSalfiovd 
 
 Bem. 4. If, however, where the subject of the governing verb and of the Inf 
 is the same, the subject of the Inf. is to be made emphatic, which is particnlarlj 
 the case in antitheses, then the Ace. with the Inf. is used, as in Xiatin, e. g. Her. 
 '2, 2. ol AlyiTTTwt ivifXL^ot/ e wiiToi/s irpdarovs yeveff^ca vdi/ruu av^pt&vtoy [se, non 
 alios homines). 1, 34. Kpoitro; ivi^u^e etcvrhv elycu iravrtav oX^uloTarov. But 
 instead of Iouti!;', where there is a contrast between persons, avr 6s (=se 
 ipsum) is likewise used, by attraction. Her. 7, 136. Heplijs om €^ 6iiunos etretrdcu 
 /iaKedalfiovtoiiTi' Keipovs fihy y^ ffvyxeal rk irdvray &v^pciwojv vi/itfiaj kteoK- 
 Teivavtas KTipOxas, airhs [ipsum instead o{ se ipsiim) S^ toCto ou iroiVf "'• 
 Th. 4, 28. K\4aiv ovK l<pri avTos, aW' ixeivoy (Niki'bi') ffrpcariyeiv. So also by 
 means of attraction the personal pronouns iy^, iri, Tlft^ts, vpttis, tripeis, are 
 joined with the Inf. 'Ktro^viut aoi . . ^ fx^iv iy&t 0oi\e(T^at fee fterh irov (otto- 
 dtweTf), I swear to you that I would rather, etc., X. Cy. 6. 4, 6. Ei oU(r&e Xa\KtS- 
 4as t))*' *EAAaSa ff^ffew, u/jlc^s d^ atrodpiiiTetT^au rit irpdyfiara, ovk op^as otea^e. 
 Dem. Ph. 3, 4 74 {if you think that the Chalcidians will save Greece, and that 
 you will escape the trouMe of it, etc.). (Oi ^i' 2aju^ t^turav) •niXw ff^iatv inripxfiv 
 "SAi^ov OVK atr^eyrj . . /cal Svyarterepot eJyai ffipcTs . . Tfopl^ea^at rit ivtriiSeia 
 ray eV t^ jr6\ei, Th. 8, 76. — Sometimes the enclitic pronouns are used without 
 any special emphasis. PI. Rp. 400, b. diiml fi e arniKofvai. — When the governing 
 verb has an object, and this object is at the same time the subject of the Inf. also, 
 then the Inf. merely (without the Ace.) is used, but the predicative expletives 
 are put in the same case as this object. OuS" fey roirots itrltrTtvoy lii- 
 u6yois €(r6(r&ai, X. Cy. 3. 3, 55 (/ would not even trust these that they wHl be 
 steadfast). OvSevl av^p^-rraty inpsifiijv hv oUre ^eXrtoy oS&* ^Stoi' ifiov ^e- 
 $noK e vol, X. 0. 4. 8, 6 {to no one would I grant that he had lived better, etc.). 
 When the object of the governing verb is also the object of the Inf., this also is 
 used only in the first place, but is omitted in the second. ^aKpiriis, ?^ 4 
 Kariyyopos, to^s irarepas irpoTnjXaKl^eiy iBlSatTKe, irei^wy fiey robs ffvvovraa 
 avT^ <ro(l>aTfpovs woieTv TtSi/ TroTf'pai', X. C. 1.2, 49 { persuadens discipulis suis, se 
 EOS sapientiores reddere patribus). 
 
 5. When the governing word is an oblique Case of a parti- 
 ciple, the predicative expletives which are connected with the 
 Inf., are put, by attraction, in the same Case as that participle. 
 
 PI. Apol. 21, b. ?jXAoy ivi rtya ray 5 oKovyruy troi^wy elyat {veuiebam ad 
 aliquem eorum, qui se sapientes esse opinabantur). Her. 1, 176. rHy ySy Amlat 
 ipaii€vaiy Say^iwy ehiu oi iroWoi eiVi iirfiAvSes {eorum Lycibrum, qui SE 
 Xanthios esse dicebant). X. Cy. 6. 1, 34. (KSpor hyey^Katny) ivl ra Kpclro- 
 ri ToO ejjMToj ipdiTKoyTt ejyat {at the one affirming that he tvas above the injia- 
 ence of love. 
 
 6. The Ace. with the Inf., like the Inf. alone, is used after the 
 following classes oi verbs and expressions : (a) of wUling and 
 the contrary [^ 306, 1, (a)] ; (b) of thinking, believing, saying 
 [♦ 306, 1, (b)]; (c) of causing, choosing, anointing, naming 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 307.] NOM., GEN , PAT., AND ACC. WITH INFINITIVE. 467 
 
 [} 30G, J, (c)] ; (d) after impersonal verbs and expressions sig- 
 nifying must, ought, should, it happens, e. g. Set, irpos^Kei, npiirti, 
 cfcoTir, tTTtetKc's, KaXov, KaKov (etc.) iariv, (rv/i^aCvd. 
 
 'AffTudyris fiov\6fi,eyos rhv naiSa &s ^SiCTo SetTTyeTv vpos'fiyvyev aiir^ 
 iravToiairii fipifucra, X. Cy. 1. 3, 4. Noiii(a i/jias ifiol eTvai kbI irarptSa Kol 
 (plKous Kol irviJLudxovs, m. An. 1.3,6. 'E\iri(a iKflvous i\^e7v irpis ai 
 HaKKov, ti wphs iiji.4, X. Cy. 2. 4, 15. T^e ^nr&iv fiiriirx>'c<To aliTois 6\(- 
 ■yav iiiifpSiv iRirKiaiv irapiatadat, X. An. 7, 5,9. Tiv jucc Ka\ic Ko- 
 7adb;' SvSpa tiiaiiiova dyal 4*^/" t^i/ Ksl irovijpii' ii^A.ia r, PI. 
 Gorg. 407, e. KpeiTToi' (sc. ^ffrf) irl'i' iroAAoTs oi/covi/ra ao'^oAcD; apKoO;/Ta 
 ?X«"'> ^ liivov SiatTiiiievov rli tuv woAnuv imKivSivas wii/ra KfKTTJir- 
 &OI, X. C. 2. 3. 2. 
 
 Beu. 5. With the impersonal verbs and expressions above mentioned, the 
 Ace. with the Inf. is not to be regarded as the grammatical object, but as the 
 grammatieal subject of the sentence ; but hgicaUa, i. e. in respect to the sense, 
 the Ace. with the Inf. must even here be regarded as the object, and the im- 
 personal expressions as transitive verbs, e.g. AotceT /loi (= KO/uifw) Kipov 
 aot^irarov yevia^at. Thus it can also be explained why the Greeks and Lat- 
 ins in quoting a phrase, e. g. ibialpLova ehai, felicem esse, fiaaiKia eTcsi, regent 
 esse, use this construction. 
 
 Bem. 6. The Gi'eeks are fond of changing the impersonal construction into 
 the personal, by elevating the object into a subject, making the impersonal 
 expression personal, and referring it to the person of the subject. By this 
 construction, the subject is rendered jprominent ; while in the construction of 
 this Ace. with the Inf. the whole idea of the sentence is made the principal 
 thing. This is the case; (a) with \4yerat,a,yy4\\frai, SiioXoyctTat 
 and the like; (b) with Sokci, it seems; (c) with ffv/iPatvei, accidit; where 
 this last verb is used personally, the subject stands before it, while with the 
 Ace. and the Inf., it follows the verb; (d) in the phrases Sikoioi', a^iov, 
 iviSo^ov, Svvariy, ofi^xoj'oy, x'^^^'"^" ^fTii', etc.; (e) in the phrase 
 TOKroirov Sew with the Inf. followed by Hsre with the Inf. or Ind. [tantum 
 abest, ut — ut) so far is it from, and iroWoC Siu with the Inf. 
 
 Ae7€Toi rhv Paffi\ea oiro^vycii' and A cycrai 6 fiatriKebs ajrotpvyeiy. 
 X. Cy. 5. 3, 30. 6 'Affiripios flsrijv x^P"^ ifipdweij/ ayyeWerat. Her. 
 3, 124. iSixei ot rhv varipa \oviTdai /ihv virh toB Ai({s, xP'f"^*''' 5e ftjr4 toD 
 HA(fiu. X.An.3. 1, 21. \e\v(r&ai HOI SoKf'i Ka\ ii ixeivav v0pis Koiii Tj/ifrfpa 
 ino^^la. ^\.Fhaed.7'i, SL.?tp^ ody ou Karcttrdi/Ta ravTa ffvfifialyei rijy ayd- 
 fLvriffiv clvat iitv cup' dfLoiay KTh. 67, c. Kd^apiris flyai oh tovto iv/iffalyei. 
 ■^AlKttt6s fifii rovTo irpdrreiy instead of SiKcu6y eVrl /te tovto Trpdrrety, A i - 
 Kaids eifjti ejyat iXei^epos. Her. 6, 12. ^ir(5o|oi Tuvrh tovto Teeitretr^ai eltri. 
 X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. &^tol yt iafiey tov yfy^yrifieyov Trpdy^aros to^tov a.iro?Mvffal ti 
 kyaStov. Isocr. Paneg. 76, 168. ToaoiTov Seovo'iy 4\etTy, £stc /cal ftaWoy 
 Xalpovaty M toTs iwiiKay KaKo7s {so far are they from pitying, that they rather 
 rejoiee even, etc.). 
 
 Beh. 7. The personal consti'uction with the verbs SoKcTy, iomiyai, XiycaSrcu 
 and the like, extends also to clauses with in s, expressing comparison, as is the 
 case in Latin with ut videor, ut videris, etc., instead of ut videtur. PI. Bp. 426, b 
 ovK iiraiytTTis el, H^i\y ey6, us ioiKas, tS>v Toioiray aySpay {you do not praise, as 
 it seems [instead of as you seeml such men). X. An. 1. 10, 18. ^a-ay S" aSxoi, 6 j 
 i\4yoyTo, TeTpcucao'iai a/ioiai {these chariots were four hundred, as it was said). 
 S. 3, 25. 01 Tro\4iiUoi if, &s y' ri/uy iS6Kovy, tovto Se'urarres OTr5\3o;'- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
468 SYNTAX. [§ 308. 
 
 RisBr. 8. On the Ac.c. with the Inf. in exclamations, see ^ 308, Kem. 2. Ob 
 Bt 1 and ii I after yerba sentiendi and dicendi, see § 329. 
 
 j 308. II. Infinitive with the Article. 
 
 1. The Inf. with the article is treated in all respects like a 
 substantive, and, indeed, is such, smce, by means of the article, 
 it can be declined through all the Cases, and is capable of ex- 
 pressing all the relations, which are indicated by the Cases of 
 the substantive with and without prepositions. On the contrary, 
 it here also, as in the Inf without the article [J 305, (2)], re- 
 tains the nature of a verb. 
 
 (a) Ti ypS-^Eiv^ ri y^^at, r)> y^ypaj^ivaif ri ypi^Hv* (b) T^ eiriiTTo- 
 K^v ypAtpfiif, rh TTJs apeTTJs e-m^vflHP, rb rots -TroK^filois fldx^f^^ou 
 (c) Tb Ra\as ypifeiy, rh Ka\Sis OTo&oi'eU' (honorable death). Yet pronouns 
 in the Neut. Sing., as attributive adjectives, are joined with the Inf., c. g. Plat. 
 alirh ri a,TroMi<rKeiv, By prefixing the article, whole sentences can lie 
 represented as one extended substantive-idea, 
 
 2. When the Inf, whether as a subject or object, has a sub- 
 ject of its own and predicative expletives, both the subject and 
 expletives, as in the case of the Inf. without the article, are put 
 in the Ace, because the Inf, even as a subject, is considered 
 dependent (§ 307, Rem. 5). Wlien, however, the subject of the 
 Inf is not diiferent from the principal subject of the sentence, 
 it is not expressed, and the predicative expletives are put, by 
 attraction, in the same Case as the principal subject of the 
 sentence, i. e. in the Nom, 
 
 (a) Nominative (subject). X. Cy. 5. 4, 19. rb aitapripciv av^piirovs 
 SvTas ovd4;/, olfiotj ^avfiouTTSf {that men constituted as they are should err, is not 
 Strange) ; here rh anaprireiv which is the subject of ^t(, has ii/dpoSTows for its 
 own subject, and opras as its predicative expletive. 7. 5, 82. ou rh /lii \a- 
 
 m)p6ir. 
 
 (b) Genitive : («) as the object of verbs and adjectives or as an attributive 
 of a substantive. X. An. 1. 3, 2. KKeapxos /UKphv 4^4i^iiye toS ftj) /caTairer- 
 ptua^cai {just escaped being stoned to death). Cy. 1. 4, 4. oij Se vporjyfy 6 
 Xpipos airiv {rhv Kiipov) iriiv rip Hfy4&u ^s Spav toC ■irp4sTi$oi' yeyeirAai 
 {as time advanced him to the period of [becoming a man] manhood) ; here the Inf 
 ytyta^tti, which is used as an object in the Gen., has its predicative explettvo 
 'rj)rfii)^M' in the.4.ec. 1.5, 13. t£ odv iariv ij toC a\4^aB-S>at SiKai6T€povi,t 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{ y08.] INFINITIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 469 
 
 -nC rots <l>lKots ip^yefc KdWwv; C. 1. 2, 55. Xtmcpdrris irapeKaXet iiriiteK- 
 titr^at roC as (jtpoi/i/x ti^Taroy sXvai. Koi utpeKiixdraTOf^ Very frc* 
 quently rod, tod ftii is used to deliote a purpose^ object t in order that, in order 
 that not [§ 274, 3, (a)], since by the language, as is frequently the case, that 
 which calls forth the action, is substituted for that which is to be done, or for 
 the result. Th. 1, 4. M/xois ri Ajjo-Ti/tbi/ KaSifpti Ik t^j daKivaiii to5 toi 
 irposcSSovr /<SAAai' iiyai air § (in order that his revenues might come in bet^ 
 ter). X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. olray '^a(ri\4(ov olvox^oi els t^v ApcffTepij/ {oiyov) iyx^^t*-*' 
 VOL KaTa^^o<f>ov(Ti, Tov S^, el tpApfiaKa iyx^oiev, fi)) Kvir iTeKelv abrots {in 
 order that it may not be loell/or them, if they mingle poison viith it). 6, 40. to C juij 
 S La^eiyeiv rhv \iyuy sk Tuy SiKriuu ffKoiroits ko^Iitttjs. (^) With prepo- 
 sitions, e. g. ivT {, instead of, or in the sense of the Latin tantum abest, tit — u(, 
 tKffrom, in consequence of neri, in connection with, vp6, for, ire pi, in order that, 
 ;speclally tytxa and iif^p in connection with /lii, in order that not, in order 
 not; also &y(u and X'^P^^t without, fi4xp'{^)t until, Th. 1, 69. ivrl toC 
 4Tre\&eTy {invadere) airol a/iiveirdtti $oiKe<r^e naWoy iTtt6yras, X. H. 3. 
 4, 12. & *Ay7i(ri\aos dvTl tov ^irl Kapiay levat, ev^i/s Tdtyayrla iiTrotrTpei^as 
 inl ^pvylas i-ffoptiero, Hier. 4, 3. dopvipopovffiy itrl robs KaKovpyovs 6irhp rod 
 fiyjSeya rSiv iroKiriJov ^iai<p ^avircp kir o^yiiffKety, 
 
 (c) Dative : (o) As the object of single verbs and adjectives, e. g. kiriaTS, 
 iriffreuM, eoi/fo, iptoios, kytanlos, very often as the instrumental Dat. X Ap. 14. 
 dirio-ToBirt Tif ip.'k TfTiju^craai fmh Saiidviay (do not believe in my having been 
 honored, that I have been honored). Pl.Phaed. 71,c.ti? f^v iarirt iyavrloy, Sstrep 
 Tip 4ypriyop4vai rb Ko^eiSeiv i (is there something opposite to living, as sleeping 
 is to waking). X. Hier. 7, 3. Sokei roira SLo^epctv iyiip Tay &\Ka>v (dmy, t$ 
 riptris hpeyea^ai (seems to differ from, other animals in this, that). (j3 ) With 
 prepositions: Iv, in,ivl, on the condition that, in order that, because, irp6s, 
 besides. PI. Gorg. 456, e. irapiiotrav lirl Tiji SiKalas XP?"'**' Toiroii 
 (to7s 'iir\ais) vpbs robs TroKe/ilous (they put them [arms] into their hands in order 
 that they might use them aright). S. Aj. 554. iv t$ 4>poyeTy — 5JS«rTos plos. 
 
 (d) Accusative : (a) Sometimes as the object of transitive verbs. PI. Gorg. 
 522, e. abrh rh i.Trodyi\(rKeiy oiSeis (jyoPeirat (no one fears death itself). 
 (/3) With prepositions: 4tI, eh, irpis, in order that, in order to, in rdation to, 
 KA!ri.,in rdation to,irapi, in comparison, espBcMlj Sii,on account of, because 
 that X. C. 1. 2, 1. :iaKpiTris vpbs rh /ierplav Se iff A at TrevaiSevfteyos (?iy) 
 (was trained to have moderate desires). Cy. 8. 1,3. pi4yurTov hya^by rb miSapxeif 
 ipalverai els rb KarairpirTeiv rii ayad^d. With attraction : X. Ten. 12, 
 21. 71 Aperii irayraxoS irdpeiTTi Si4 rb- elyat i^dvaros (on account of its 
 bej'nj iKimortal, because it is immortal) ; here a^dvaros is attracted into the 
 iase of olptT^, instead of being in the Aco. Cy. 1 . 4, 3. d KCpoi 5 1 4 t i ^ i A o ■ 
 aad^s etvai iroAAo robs irapSyras avrip^Ta, koX oaa, mnbs W i.KKay (se. avt)- 
 owToTo), 8(4 Tb kyxiro^s elyai Tox* 4ireKp£«To (because he was fond of 
 kaming). 
 
 Kemark 1. Many verbs and verbal expressions, which are commonly con- 
 Itmcted TTith an Inf merely, sometimes take also the Inf. with the article ti. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
470 SYNTAX. [i 309 
 
 even when they would have their object, if a substantive, in the Gen. The 
 addition of the article gives greater emphasis to what is expressed by the Inf. 
 X. C. 3. 6, 6. rh irXovo-iwrepav Triv ir6Kiv Troii7v aj/a^a\ov fie^a. Th. 3, 1. 
 rhy irKfiarov oixiXoi/ tud \lit\iiv itpyov rh fij) t4 iypis rrii viheais Kaicoyp- 
 •yeTv {ftpyew Tini rims}. But wlien a preposition precedes an Inf., the article 
 can never be omitted, because then the Inf. becomes an actual verbal substaii 
 tive. 
 
 Eem. 2. As the Ace. of a substantive, so also the Inf. with the Ace. of tJi6 
 article^ is used in exclamations and questions implying indignation. In poetry, 
 however, the article is sometimes omitted with the Inf. X. Cy. 2. 2, 3. iKufos 
 navb iviadus (lire irpis lauTiii'' Ttjs Titxir, ri ifih vvv KAij&ei'To SfCpo 
 Tuxfii'! (that I have just now been called hither J), Without the article: Aesch. 
 !Eum. 835. ^)ue ira^cilf rdSe, ^et), i/le •jra\aio(ppova Karcb yav oiKcIv, arU- 
 ToVf <p€v, fiitros \ 
 
 TLmi. 3. There are many phrases, used as adverbial expressions, in which 
 the article T<f is placed before the Inf. ihai which stands in connection with an 
 adverb or a preposition and its Case. These must be regarded as adverbial 
 Accusatives. See § 279, Bem. 10. The Inf. elyoi denotes a state or condition, 
 6. g. ri vvv etfat, the presetft state, condition, and as an adverbial expression, 
 with respect to, or according to the present state of affairs, pro praesenti temparii 
 conditione; rh riiiiepov ciyai, pro hodierni diei conditione. X. An. 1. 6. 9. 
 T> Kari TovTov cival (so far as he is concerned). H. 3. 5, 9 ■^h nin iir 
 4Keii/ois elvat aKo\<i\aTe (so far as it depends on them). 
 
 §309B. The Participle. 
 
 1. The Participle represents the idea of the verb as an adjective 
 idea, and is like the adjective, both in its form and in its attrib- 
 utive use ; for it has three genders, and the same declension as 
 the adjective, and cannot, more than the adjective, be used in- 
 dependently, but must always depend upon a substantive, and 
 hence agrees with it in Gender, Number, and Case. The Par- 
 ticiple denotes either an active or passive condition, but the 
 adjective, a quality. 
 
 2. On the contrary, the participle differs from the adjective, 
 in retaining, like the Inf , the following properties of the \eir> : 
 
 (a) The participle has different forms to denote the different 
 circumstances of the action : duration, completion, and futurity, 
 e. g. ypa.(f>o)v, loriting, yeypa<j)U)';, ■ypaxj/a's, one who has written, ypa»fi- 
 iDv, one who will xvrite (§ 257, Rem. 3) ; 
 
 (b) The participle has Act., Mid., and Pass, forms, e. g. ypdi^- 
 as, ypcufrap.ei'o^, ypa(jieCs. 
 
 (c) The active and middle (deponent) participle governs the 
 same Case as its verb, e- g. •ypa^mv iiria-To\-^v, eiriSvu,roi' rrji 
 aptTTJ';, pM)(op.cvo'S Tois TToXe/Aiois. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{310.] 
 
 THE PARTICIPLE. 471 
 
 3. The participle is used as follows : — 
 
 (a) Either as an immediate attributive qualification of a sub- 
 stantive, e. g. o ypd.<l>mv wats or o irais o ypd<j><ov, the 'writing 
 hoy; or in connection with etv<u, as a predicate (i 238, Rem. 5), 
 e. g. TO poSov av9ovv IcTTiv [the rose is blooming). 
 
 (b) As the complement of the verb, e. g. 'OpS, rbv TratSa 
 Tpi)(OVTa. 
 
 (c) To denote such an attributive quahfication of the sub- 
 stantive as is expressed in EngUsh by placing the participle 
 after the substantive, or by the relative who, which, and the 
 verb, e. g. Vw^ tk opviv clxe ko^' kKocmjv -q/iipav iibv airy tiktov- 
 a-av (a hen laying, or which laid an egg daily). 
 
 (d) To denote, adverbially, subordinate qualifications of the 
 principal action, e. g. KCpos yeXGv ewrei' {said laughing, or 
 laughingly). 
 
 Hemake. As the use of the participle, mentioned under 3, (a), is explained 
 in H 264, 1. and 238, Bern. 7, and as No. (c) has no further difficulty, only the 
 usage mentioned under 3, (b) and (d) now remains to be considered. 
 
 • 
 
 {310.1. rAe Participle as the complement of the verb. 
 
 1. As the participle is an attributive, and consequently ex- 
 presses an action as already attached or belonging to an object, 
 only those verbs can take a participle for their complement 
 which require, as a complement, an action, in the character of 
 an attribute, so attached or belonging to an object, that this 
 object appears in some action or state. The action or state de- 
 noted by the participle is, therefore, usually pi'ior to that denoted 
 by the verb vdth which it is connected, sometimes coincident. 
 
 2. Tlie construction is here evident. The Participle agrees 
 in Case with the substantive-object of the principal verb, 
 this object being in the Case which the principal verb re- 
 quires. 'Akovio ^taKparovs and ijKOV(Ta, ircrt ^(oKparovi Trepl 
 (f>iXoiv SiaXeyofiivov. X.iup<a aroi and yalpay o-oi kX&ovTi. 
 Opu) av&pwirov and opu) avSpwTTOv rpixovra. 
 
 3. But when the subject of the principal verb is at the same 
 time its object also, as OtSa (eyu>) i/iavrbv BvrfTov ovra, then the per- 
 sonal pronoun, which would denote the object, is omitted, and 
 the participle is put, by means of attraction, in the same Case 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
472 SYNTAX. [§ 310. 
 
 as the subject of the principal verb, i. e. in the Nora. (Comp. 
 § 307, 4), e. g. otSa ^vTjTos <oi'. For more examples, see No. 4. 
 
 Remark 1. Yet the Ace. of the personal pronoun and participle, as the 
 object of the principal verb, is expressed, when the subject as an object is to be 
 made emphatic. Comp. § 307, Rem. 4. X. Cy. 1. 4, 4. ovx, & KpelrTiov jfSei Hv, 
 Tavra vpouKa\e7TO roiis ffvv6ifTaSf dXA.' ciircp eS^Set kaurhv ^TTOva Syr a, Tavra 
 ^ivPX^' ^1 \0. irepteidov avTovs yriptf aSvydrovs y^vofiivovs {they permiitea 
 them&elves to become enfeebled by old age). 
 
 Rem. 2. With ff{ivoi^a, trvyyiyv&tFKtit ifiavr^f the participle can 
 either refer to the subject contained in the verb, or to the reflexive pronoun 
 which stands with the verb ; if the participle refers to the subject, it is put in 
 the Nom., if to the pronoun, in the Dat^ e. g. (rimiSa, (o-vyytyytiaKa) iiaavr^ fS 
 TToiija-as or <riyoiSa ifrnvrif e5 iroiiiffaini (lam conscious that I have done well), PI. 
 Apol. 21, b. ^7^1) ^{tvoiZa ifiavrt^ tr o (ph s &y {I am conscious that I am wise). 
 22, d. ifittVT^ ^vvTjSitv ovSsv iiriff'T afieyo). But when the subject is , 
 not at the same time the object, but is different from the object, then the object 
 with its participle is either put in the Dat., e. g. tiivaiSi trot eS Troiijcavrt, — 
 X. S. 4, 62. tI fioi a-iyotc^a toiovtov elpyatrfieyat; {quid me tale commisisse 
 scis ?), or (though more seldom) the substantive is put in the Dat., but the partici- 
 ple in the Ace, e. g. ^ydl (Toi trivotSa ei voi^irayTtt. X..0.3,7. iy;i <roi ai- 
 voi^a cirl p.\v Ktafu^Zwy ^4ay Rai irayv vpat ay ttrTaiievov^ Koi ir6,vv iUKpa.y itfitv 
 ^a^i^oyra Kal ^fih ayaTrel^oyra irpo^iiKcs cvy^earr^cu. Also kaiddvu 
 enavrhy iroiay n (I conceal mysdf doing something, i. e. / do something secretly). 
 X. An. 6. 3, 22 (ot fTnreFs) eXa^oy aiiTobs ivl r^ \6(l>a> yey^jxevot {readied 
 the height unobserved). — With 4oiKeyai, to appear, to seem, to be like,^sLnd. 
 S/ioioy ilyai, the participle in relation to the subject, sometimes stands in 
 the Nom., though more frequently in the Dat., and with o/ioioy eJrat, in the Dat. 
 almost without an exception. X. H. 6. 3, 8. eolKare rvpavyitrt fjMWoy ^ iro- 
 \iTtlats T]S6fjLevot. An. 3. 5, 13. ifioiot ^trav ^avfid^oyres. Fi. Menon. 
 97, a. Sfioiol itr/iey oiiK opdSis iiiJ.oKoyi\K6<rt. Rp. 414, c. ioiKois, e<f7|, 
 okyovvTL \eyety. See § 311, 9. 
 
 4. The verbs and expressions, with which the participle is 
 used as a complement, are the following: — 
 
 (a) Verba sentiendi, i. e. such as denote a perception by the 
 senses or by the mind, e. g. opav, aKovav, eiSCT-at (to know), hruT' 
 TacrSai (to know), /iav^aveii' (to perceive), yiyviia-Kuv {to know), hi- 
 Sv/jLeia-^aL (to consider), Truv^avecrSai (to perceive), aurS^dvea-Aai, 
 IxilxvrjarKftT^OLi,, lTrika.vda.vvj^ai, etc. 
 
 Th. 1, 32. Tjfiets aSv varoi ipafiey 6yT€s neptyeveff^cu {we see that we 
 arc unaftfe, etc.). 'Opa at rpexoi'To. 'Aicoiieij' with the Gen. when one 
 hears with his own senses, or with the Ace. when one learns by hearsay. 
 X. C. 2. 4, 1. iJKavtra ^ZuKpirous irepl ^l\a>y S laKeyo licyov {I heard 
 Socrates discoursing concerning friends). H. 4. 8, 29. ^kovite Tiv OpoinJ- 
 $ou\oy irposiivra {he heard that Thrasybulus was coming). Cy. 1. 4, 2.">. 
 Kafi.$v(Tris iJKOva-fy avSphs ijSri Ipya Siax^ iptCili-^v oy rhy Kvpof. 
 OlSa ftj/rjrbs Hy (I know that I am mortal). OlSo iv^panroy dyjirii 
 SvTa. Her, 3, 1. S /3a(riAeE, Sia.^eP\riii4yos iith 'AfiJta-ios ou fiav^AveiS 
 {do you not see that you have been deceived?). 40. fjSb Trvy^iivf<r^at &yfpr 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t 310.] THE PAETICIPLE AS A COMPLEMENT OF THE VERB. 473 
 
 <l>i\ov Koi ie7vov tS Trp^iaa-oi/ra. X.Cy.l.\,2.&i>^pavot iir' oliSeyas flaJOiOt 
 a-vviaraPTat, fi M toutovs, otis itv at<rdavTat ipxetv aurSiv iirixeipouvrai 
 {u-hom lliei/ know are endeavoring to rule them). With the Gen. [§ 27.3, 5, (e)l. 
 4. 4, II. fjffdriirai o5c irdvare fiov tfievSojiapTvpovyTos ^ <rvKa<pav- 
 
 T UVV7 OS. 
 
 (b) Verba dcdarandi, i. e. verbs which signify to declare, to 
 shoio, to make clear, and the like, e. g. Sciki/wm {to show, to ex- 
 hibit), ZrjKovv, SiJXoi' TTOiuv, <f>aLv€iv (to show), tfyalvicrSai (to slww 
 one's self, apparere), h^Xov and (jiavepbv eiyai, iXeyxeiv, iieXeyx^'-^' 
 (to prove, to convict), dkuTKea-Bat (to be convicted), Troielv (to rep- 
 resent), ivpLo-Kciv (to find), etc. 
 
 I'l. Phacd. 101, c. 1) ifiux^ hSthiaros <t>aiveTai oZaa {the soul appears to be 
 immortal). Her. 6, 21. ^A^tivoiol StjKov ^tt oirjaay iirepax^^tr^eyres rij 
 MiX^/Tow oAdifTct {made it evident tluxt they were exceedinglif grieved on account of the 
 capture of Miletus). Isocr. Evag. 1 90, d. toIs ironjToij roiis Aeovs oUv t" iaiX 
 iroi^iToi kal Sia\eyoii,ivovs Kol trvvayavi^o/x.eyavs, oTs hv ySouXTjaS- 
 <riv {the poets can represent the gods both conversing, ete.). Dem. Aph. 1. 819, 20. 
 pijSlus iKeyx^'h'^^rai \fievS6fievos (tvill easlli/ be convicted [t/tat he falsijies] 
 o/ falsehood, or if he falgifes). 
 
 Bem. 3. Instead of the impersonal phrases S^Kov Ian, ipai/epov iaji, (jmivcrai, 
 apparel, the Greek uses the pei'sonal construction (comp. § 307, llom. 6), e. g. 
 iTi\6s ii" t, <paifep6s elfii, tpalvofiat r^v iraTpiSa ed iroiiitras {I am evi- 
 dent having done well,- i. c. it is evident that I have done well for my country). X. 
 An. 2, 6, 23. trr ipyiav tpavephs fihv ijvovSeya, STtp Se tftairi t]>i\os final, tovtu 
 eySijKas dyiyt^ero iTfi^ovKduv {he was evident loving-.Tto one, i. e. it was 
 evident that he loved, etc.). I'l. Apol. 23, d. KardSriKoi yiyvovTat itpos- 
 troiovfiivoi jiei/ elBeyou, elB6T€s Se oiiSeV. 
 
 (c) Verba affectinmi, i. e. verbs which denote an affection or 
 stale of the mind, e. g. ^aipeiv, ^Secr^at, aydXXccr&ai, ayaTtav (to be 
 content), a)(SeaSai, ayavaKTciv, alSilaSai, and alarxuvecrSai (to be 
 ashamed), nerafiiXiia^Sai, [ieTafi.tX.et, 6pyLt,ecr^(U, ^apvvecr&cu, paSio)';, 
 ^(aXemai <f>€peLv, etc. 
 
 X. II. 6. 4, 23. d ^ehs TroWaKis ;^aipet Toi/s fi^v fimpohs nsydKovs ttoiuv, 
 Tous 5e iityoKovs luxpois (rejoicesto make the small great). IIier.8,4. Sia\ey6ii- 
 efoi re ayaW6i.ie^a rois TrpoTerifnjfjievots fioKXoy, ^ rois ix rovXffov ri/uv 
 oiffi (ice are proud to converse with those preferred in honor, etc.). Th. 1, 77. o Si- 
 Koifieyoi ot ^vApatrai fiaWov opyi^ovTai, fj $ia^6fieyot {men are more 
 indignant when they are injured tlum when they suffer violence). 4, 27 (oi 'A&jjyaToi) 
 utTejueXo^TO tAs uTiov^as oh S e^dfiepot, 5. 35. robs ix rris vfitrou SetT' 
 uwTos neTeiieKofTo oiroSeSwKcJTer. Eur. Hipp. 8. t ip.<ifievoi. x"'- 
 povffiv (ot fttol) avApiivay iiri {rejoice to he honored). Xalpu (rot ^XftiJcTi 
 (/ rejoice t/uit you Imve come). PI. Rp.475, h. iirb <rii.KpoT4puv Kai (pavKoripal 
 Ttfiwfieyot ayairaaty. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
474 SYNTAX. [i 310 
 
 {(1) Vetbs signifying to be satisfied with, to he -phased with, to 
 enjoi/, to be full of, e. g. TepTrecrS^ai, ifimTrXaa-Sai, /xearbv eii/ai, and 
 the like. 
 
 0(1. o, 369. vvv n'ev Satvi/ieyoi repirtiiJieda {let vs deliglit ourselves in 
 feasting). II. a, 633. iirti Tapvrjffav is aW^iKovs ipSavres (when thei/ were 
 satisfied at looking at each other). S. 0. C. 768. /uEcrris f/jv dv/xovfievos. 
 Eur. Ion. 924. oi» roi ahv ^Ke-jrup ifnrlir\aftai vpSswiroy, Her. 7, 146. 
 ^Tre&c TouTo ^ljeifjL(VOt etacri trKrjpees, 
 
 (e) Verbs signifying to overlook, to permit, to endure, to per- 
 severe, to continue, also to be weary, to be exhausted, e. g. Trcpi- 
 KO^- €is- €<j>opa.v, -TrpoUa-S-at (to neglect, to pei'tnit), a.vix'^aSai KafiTi- 
 pm>, viTop.ivew, \nrapilv (perseverare), Kixii,vav, airuiriiv, etc. 
 
 Her. 7, 168. ov irtptotrT ejj itrrl rj 'EWcis airoWufjLeyT] {Hellas is not to be 
 permitted to he destroT/ed). iO\. ef^EWTjves v-jrofieveouirt x^tp^s ejuoI BfToet- 
 piiaeyoi (mil venture to withstand me). 9,45. \nrapetre fi4vovTfS {con- 
 tinue to remain). 3, 65 (v/jTv ivuTK-fprrw) fi^ ircpiiSeiy r^v Tjyefiaviriv 
 oStij is M^Souj irfpifK^odffav (not to permit the hegemony to return again to 
 tlic Medes). Isocr. Archid. 125, 47. aTreiirotfiev tiv aKoiovres Te koI 
 \4yovTes, el viaas t&s -roiairas Tpi^fts i^sTd^oiiifv {we should be weary 
 of hearing and speaking). An. 5. 1, 2. aTrtipTiKa J(Srj o'va-Kcva^iiitvas 
 «oi PaSl^av Kol Tpix"" ""^ Tck SirAo ^iptev Kot i» ri^a li>v Kci. ipvXoKas 
 <\>v\iTtav Kal fiaxoiifvos (I am weary of packing up, walking, running, e\x.)_ 
 Th. 1, 86. Tofir |i;ji*;ii(£x»"s oi 5r€pioi((0;UE&a aiiKovfiivov s (will not 
 permit tile allies to be injured). 2. 73. 'AftTifoioJ ^amv, iv ovifvX Tip. as irpotV- 
 bai aiiKoupiiVovs. PI. Gorg. 470, e. n^ Kdfiris ^iKov &vSpa. evepyerup 
 (do not be weary of doing good to a friend). For avexf^ai with the Gen., 
 see § 275, 1. 
 
 (f) Verbs signifying to begin and cease, cause to ce»se, to omit, 
 io be remiss, e. g. ap^ff'S^ii, inrapxuv; iraijiiv, Travta-^ai, Xijycii', 
 SiaXXoLTTdv, aTraXXaTTEcr^ot ; p.i&U<T&ai, XeiveirSai, cicXeiTeiv, liriXet- 
 Treir, etc. 
 
 Her. 6, 75. KKeo/xivijs irapaXa^Sav rhv atSripov, &pxeTo ix Tap Kprip-iav 
 iavrhp Kotfiti/jiepos (began to mutilate himself). Tlava ff€ aStKoSvra (1 
 cause you to cease doing wrong). Tlaioinal ae aSiKap (I cease to do wrong tc 
 1/Ou). X. 0. 1, 23. (at iiri^vfilat) aiKi^o^tpai Tck tyiifxara Tap 6,p^pti^up Kol 
 Tas ifiux'^s "o' "^o^s oIkovs oifirore \^yovirtp, esT iv ipxanrip aur&p (never cease to 
 torment). Kal &\\a ye 5^ fivpla itri\ein(o Keyap (to omit in speaking). 'O 
 aya^hs ouK iWelveTat eZ tro lup robs eiiepyeTovpras eavrSp (does not fail to 
 do good to his benefactors). PI. Phileb. 26, b. 186, b. fip|o^ai oirb ttjs ioTpiK^5 
 \eyap. Menex. 249, b. robs reAevrriiTttPTas Ti^wcra otiSeirore iKKetiret 
 SA Tr6Kis). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
310. J THE PARTICirLE AS A COMPLEMENT OP THE VERB. 475 
 
 (g) Verbs signifying to be fortunate, to distinguish one's self, 
 to excel, to be inferior, to do well, to err, e. g. ivrvxitv, vikov, xpa- 
 TUV, r/TTOLcrSai, cv ^^otet^', a/jLapraveiv, dSiKEtv, etc. 
 
 Her. 5, 24. eS ivolria as airiKiiicvos {you did wdl in coming, that you 
 came). Th. 1, SS.aSiKciTt jro\iiiov ipxo'''''^^ koI ffiroyStts \ioyTes {you do 
 wrong in beginning war, etc.). 2, 71. oii Sixata iroitire 4s 7?v tV IIAaTaicW 
 arpariiovTes. 'Anaprviyits toSto ir o t a v {you are in fault in doing this). 
 PI. Fhacd. 60, 0. ei •/ iirolii<ras ava/iviiiTas /tc {you did wellin reminding 
 me). X. Hier. 11, 14 sq. vivras {rohs tftixovs) vetpu viKav e3 votuv iitv 
 yip Tobs (fiiXovs Kpar^s fZ voiuv^ oO fvff aoi ^ivutnw, hvrex^^^ <*^ noXffuoi {to 
 endeavor to excel all in doing good). An. 2. 3, 23. o6x vrrriaine^a cS 
 votov vTe s {we will not be inferior in acts of kindness). 
 
 (li) The verbs ■^reipa.crSai, (especially ia Herodotus), to try 
 or attempt something, irapaa-Kevd^ecr&ai (usually with is and 
 the Fut. Part.), and the Ionic phrases ttoXXos eifii, cyKet/^at, 
 yiyvo/jiai, to be urgent about, to lay it to Iteart, to consider im- 
 portant. 
 
 Her. 7, 9. iiretp-fi^ijy iireKaiv oiv iTr\ rohs &v5pas Toirovs {T attempted to 
 march against). J?l. Phileb. 21 , n. if a'ol vetp^fie^a ^affavi^ovres ravra 
 {let us try to examine tliese). Th. 2, 7. ol ^A^i/aioi ■trapeffKevdCoi'TO us 
 voKeiffiffovres {tvere preparing to wage uxir). Without wj: 18 (oi Tle\(moi>- 
 irljffioi) vposfioXas irapeffKcuofovTO 5roii|(r<i/ie>'oi. X. H. 4. 1, i\.irapeir- 
 Keva^eT o iropfvff6fji€Vos. Her. 7, 1.58. & ViKav iroWhs iveKcno 
 \4yav (spoke urgently). 9,91. iroWhs ^v Ktaaoiievos i Jcrwj {entreated 
 earnestly, was all entreaties). 1, 98. Ani6icris ^y iroWis inrh iracris iivSphs 
 aiife^fxevos {was much praised). 7. 10, 3. Trai/rotoi iytvovro "ZKidat, 
 SeSiifvot 'Idyai)' \vaat rhy Tripov {earnestly entreated the lonians to breaJc down 
 the bridge). 
 
 (i) Certain expressions, mostly impersonal, e. g. it is fit, use- 
 ful, profvtahle, good, agreeable, shameful, it is to my mind, and 
 the like. 
 
 Uptiret /loi aya^Q iyn and li.yaA$ ttvca {it is proper for metohe godH). 
 Th. 1, 118. iTtiipilnav rby ^c6y, el (sc. airols) vq\efioviriv &fieivov iarai 
 {whether it will he belter for them to engage in war). PI. Alcib. 1, 113, d. itkottoD- 
 mv, iitoripa avvoiaei vpiiafftv. After these expressions, however, the 
 Inf. is more frequent, since the action of the dependent verb is not considered 
 as ah-cady attached or belonging to the person, but as first resulting from the 
 action implied in the above impersonal expressions. 
 
 (k) The verb tx^tv, in the sense of to he in a condition or state, 
 has an active, middle, or deponent participle joined with it, ir 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
476 SYNTAX. U 310 
 
 order lo express the continued condition of the action (sihillai 
 to the Latin aliquid pertractatum habere). 
 
 Her. 3, 65. S6\<f ex"'"'' outV (tV riyf/ioiiiriy) KT'naiii.ivoi (properly, 
 they have themselves as those who have acquired the hegemony, i. e. they have acguirea 
 and still possess, comp. principatum pabtum habent). X. An. 1. 3, 14. iroXAi 
 XP^/iara exoftev av7}pwaK6res {we have plundered much property and still 
 have it), 4. 7, 1. x^P^" 4"'""' IfX"?^ "' '^ioxoi, iv oTs Kai Tti iirniiSem iriinn 
 elxoc avaKeKofiiffftevoi ( into which having conveyed all their provisions they 
 had them there, or, as this idiom is more commonly expressed in English, into 
 which they had conveyed their provisions). Dem. Phil. 3. 113, 12. koL iepas vp^p 
 as (j>l\05 fls OeTToAfoi' 4\diiv «X^' KaraKaPiiy. (On the contrary, ex" 
 \eyetv, lean say), 
 
 (1) Finally, the participle is used as a complement with the 
 following verbs; (a) rvyxa-vio, to happen; (fi) XavS^dvo, to be 
 concealed; (y) SiareXSi, Siaytyvo/xai, Staytu, to continue; 
 (8) (jiS^dvw, to come before, to anticipate; (e) oixo/iai, to go 
 away, to depart. In English, most of these verbs are often ren- 
 dered by an adverb, and the participle connected with them, 
 inasmuch as it contains the principal thought, by a finite verb. 
 
 Her. 1, 44. d KpoTiroy (pov4a rod iratS}}s iKaif^ave ^iffxav [Croesus nowr- 
 is^ed tAe mMr&rer q/" Ais son UNWITTINGLY, WITHOUT KNOWING it), ^liyu, 
 SiareXu, Stayifvoiini KoKa iroiav (I ALWAYS, CONTINUALLY do what is 
 honorable), 1, 157. ^x^'''" <t>fiyfy (he fled away), 6. olxo/iai <f>4pai> (1 
 carry away), Th. 4, 113. irvxov ^irArroi 4v tjJ ayop^ Ka^fidovres us 
 ■KivriiKovTa (about fifty hoplites were THEN, JUST THEN sleeping in the agora, hap- 
 ■pened to be, were by chance, sleeping), tvyx^"" is always used, where an event 
 has not taken place by our intention or design, but by the accidental coopera- 
 tion of external circumstances, or by the natural course of things. In English 
 it can sometimes be translated by just, just now, just then, by chance ; often it 
 cannot be translated at all. X. Cy. 1. 3, 12. x"^^'"^" f' ^l^or (p&avat roina 
 iroi^o-ai'To (it ivas difficult ifor another to dothisbefi>re him, or to anticipate him 
 indoing it). Her. 4, 136. ^tp^Tjtrav iroW^ ol ^Kv^at tovs Ilepiras ivl rVyf- 
 il>Oaav iTrtK6jifi'oi (anticipated the Persians much in coming to the bridge, came 
 to the bridge long befi>re the Persians), Also the conjunction irply ¥i (or if alone) 
 with the Inf can follow ipSr6.v€w, e. g. Her. 6, 116. %^Stri<rav avixdiiefoi, 
 irplv 4) TOVS PapPdpous riKeiv (they arrived before the barbarians came), 04 
 ipdJivnv followed by ko(, ko! eiiS)is, may be translated by scarcely — when, nc 
 sooner — than, e. g, Isocr. I'ancg. 58, 86 (oi AaKeSoijUcfwoi) ouk i<p^r]<rayirv 
 ^6iJ,evol Tiy irepl tV '-A-TTi/tV v6\e/iOtt, k al TiivTav tuv SAAbi' kiieXiiaavres 
 TIKov Sjiui/ afivmSvTes (the Lacedaemonians no sooner heard qftlie war in Attica,tlmn 
 they left everything to come to our defence, or they scarcely heard when, etc.). So in 
 the phrase, ovk i.v ^'Srivois tvoiSv ti (you should do nothing quicker,], e. 
 Ifou cannot do it too quickly, or do it quickly), X. C. 2. 3, 11. qvk hv (factcois 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
f 311.] INTERCHANGE OP THE PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 477 
 
 \4yay; {you could not be too quick in speaking = speak quicldy). ,"5. 11, 1. al/K 
 hv (pAivoii', ?<()i), &KoAodovvT fs; {will you not follow imviiediatdy 1 = 
 follow immediately). oiiK tiv (p^dvots irepaiyui/; (= statim reliqua conclude). 
 
 Kem. 4. With Xar&dveiv and ip&dve,/ the relation is sometimes re- 
 versed, the participles of these verbs being used as the complement of the 
 governing verb. X. Cy. 3. 3, 1|, tjj^dyoPTfs IjSri Sriovufv rijv iKelvav ynv 
 {we ravage their country, anticipating them = we anticipate them in ravaging their 
 country). 6.4, 10. ^ Sc \adovira ourbv avv€<l>ciireTO {she followed unknown 
 to him). 
 
 Rem. 5. The Part, of the verb cTvai, connected with adjectives or snb- 
 stantives, with several of the above named verbs, is sometimes omitted, even 
 when clvai is an esseMial word ; thus after Verba seniiendi and didarandi, e. ft 
 Dem. Ph. 1. 45, 18. e ISiis eirpeirfls iiius {knowing that you are ready). 64, 41. 
 iiy ii> Xefifittviiaif ir i A i) <r A ( iiMirirov {sc. Svra, if you should learn that Philip 
 is in, etc.); very often with <l>aivofiat, not seldom also with rvyxdva. 
 
 } 311. Remarks on the interchange of the Participle 
 and Infinitive. 
 
 Some verbs of the classes above mentioned are also constructed with the 
 Inf., yot with a different meaning. 
 
 \.'Kko{iciv with a Part., implies both a direct perception by one's own senses, 
 and an indirect one, though certain and well-grounded ; with the Inf , it im- 
 plies only an indirect perception obtained by hearsay, e.g. 'Axoia oAtoS 
 StaXeyoiieyov (i. e. ejus sermones aurihus meis percipio). Kai^^iffTis 
 IjKovif € rhv Kvpov ay^phs ^Stj ^ypa dLaxeipi^6nevbi: See §310, 
 4, (a). But X. Cy. 1.3,1. ISiiv iirt^/iei 6 'Aarvdyris "rhv Kvpov, 8t< ^ k o u c 
 {ex (diis audiverat) Ka\hv Kaya^hv avrhv elvai, 
 
 2. EiSeyai and 4irltrTatr&ai with the Part., to know; with the Inf. tc 
 know how to do something, to be able. OlBa {ivi(rTa^ai) deaiis o-eiSoV- 
 eyos {I know that! honor the gods) ; but Eur. Hipp. 1009. iiriaTaii,ai 
 deois (fe^eiv {I know how to honor the gods, lean honor the gods). S. Aj. 
 666. eiVi/ueT&a f'" ^^o7s ^iLKeiv. — Also voiiiCfi" in the sense of 
 to be assured, to know (ciScvoi), has a participle connected with it ; still this 
 occurs very rarely. X. An. 6. 6, 24. v(f/iife S", iiiv i/ii vvv hroKTtlvijs . . 
 itiSpa LyaSihii i,iroKrelvav [be assured that, if you slay me, you slay a good 
 man). 
 
 S.Wavddveiv with the Part., to perceive ; with the Inf to learn. Mav^d- 
 va <ro<l>hs &v {I perceive that I am ujise); a^ocphs elvat {I learn to be 
 vtise). X. Cy. 4. 1, 18. iiaA^taovrai ivavr lova-dat {roTs ■7ro\efilois). 
 
 4.riyv tiiTKfii' with the Part, to know, to perceive ; with the Inf. to learn, to 
 judge, to determine. TiyvAaKa ay a^ oils ivras Tots a-rpaTi^ats to lis 
 ayaras (/ know, I perceive that the prize-fights are Mse/i(/, but ayaAovs 
 elvai, I judge that, etc.). X. Ajjpl. 33 (2(o/cp^T7)j) iyvui toS €ti ^i/ t4 
 Te&vdvai ainip Kpetaffov elvai {judged that it was better for him to die 
 than to live longer). Isocr. Trap. 361, d. iyvuaav Tlaaiuva ^fiol irafaSovvai 
 ■tin vaTSa {they concluded to give uj>, etc.). 
 
 6. AtiT^dveo 
 with the 
 Bturt\€i 5u 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
478 SYNTAX. [J 311 
 
 Tfa. 6, 59. al<r^av6fJtfVos aurovs fifya trap^ Pu(ri\€7 J^ctpeiu Svyatr^ai 
 5, 4. oiiKeTi iirl Tohs fiXAoi/s epx^TCtt, aitr^ifieyos oiiK fev Trei^efy aiiToii 
 (opiNANS, se lis non esse persuasarum). 
 
 S.Huvbivecr&at with a Part, to liear, to perceive ; with au Inf. it is used 
 with the same difference of meaning as in the ease of ixoieiv. 11 uvdi- 
 yofial ac Keyoyra {I hear you saying). Lys. Nicom. 184, 17, irvy^i- 
 yofiai T€ aiirby \eyetyf ,i)s aac^u KaraKvuy ras bvaias (ex ALUS 
 atidivi), X. H. 1. 4, 11. iiy^x^ ^^^ KaraO'Koir^ rwy rpiiipuy, its 4\vyddyf- 
 To AaKeBatfioyiaus aiird^t TrapatrKeva^eiy. Til. 5, 55. TTifd-o^c- 
 yot Toits AaKeSatfioyiovs 4^€ffTpaTevtr^ai. 
 
 7. Vlfiiy^ffSyat with a Part, to be mindful, to remember ; with the Inf. to con 
 template doing something, to intend, to endeavor. Mefiyqfuu eS voiTiffas 
 
 • Tobs 5ro\/Tos (/ remember to have done good) ; cS voii)trai (/ strive, wish, to 
 do good). X. An. 3. 2, 39. ncnyiiaSra ayijp ayaAis ttyai (remember, 
 strive, to be a man). Cy. 8. 6, 6 (oi iraTpiTrcu) 8 ti &v iy rrj yp exivTri Ka\hy 
 ii aya^by p, iiefjiyfttroyr at xal Sevpo iivovefnrety. S. 4, 20. fie fiy^trp 
 Siaxpi^riyai irtpl tou koAAovx (thou wilt prepare to contend with me). 
 
 8. * a I v £ (T a a ( with a Part, to appear, apparere, to show r.ie's self; with an Inf. 
 to seem, vid^i. 'Etftaiy ero K\alwv [it vxis evident that he wept, or in 
 English we often use the adverb, evidently: he evidently wept; i(j>alyero 
 K\aiety {he seemed to weep). X. S. 1, 15. koI ojua \4yiay ravra aitep.6TreT6 
 T6 {5 y^KunoTroibs) /col Tp tpwv^ fftvjyus KKaieiy itpaivcTO (heseemedto 
 weep, but did not weep). 
 
 ). 'EoiKeVai with a Part, in the Nom. to op/)ear ; with a Part, in the Dat. to 
 belike (§ 310, Rem. 2) ; with the Inf. to seem; 'EotxaTe Tvpayy'uri fiaWoy, 
 ^ iroXiTeiais TtS6fievot (you appear to enjoy, you evidently enjoy, etc.) (comp. 
 No. 8). PI. Rp. 444, c. eotKas OKVovvTt \4yeiy (you are like one in doubt 
 in speaking = ^ou seemto speak like one in doubt). X Hier. 7. 1. eoiKCi' 
 e<l>ri, liiya ti cixoi ^ Ti/u^ (honor seems to be something important). Cy. 1. 4, 
 9. vo^Ei, Sttws jSouAci * trb yap yvy ys TipMv toiKas ^atrtX^bs elyat, 
 
 10 'A77eAA.€i» with a Part, is used of the annunciation of ortuoZ events; 
 with an Inf. of the annunciation of things still uncertain, merely assumed. 
 Dem. 01. 2. (3). 29, 4. airnyyf\^ii ilXtmros ipuy iy Qp^itJI rpiroy ^ re- 
 TopToy iros roinX 'KpuToy reixos iroKiopKuy (a settled fact). X. Cy. 1. 
 o, 30. 6' Atra^pios els t^ X^P*^ ifi^dWety ayyeWerat {whether ho 
 had made an actual irruption or not, is uncertain). 
 
 11. AeiKyvyai and airofpaiyeiv with a Part, (o sAow, to point out; with an 
 Inf.to teach. *'£SEi|a ffe aSiK-fiffayr a (1 showed that you had done wrong), 
 X. An. 2. 3, 14. acjjiKoyro els Kt&fias, ^^ey aveSei^av ol Tjyefjiiyes KafiPi- 
 veiy T& iirtrfi^eta (where they pointed out to tlkem tliat they might obtain pro- 
 visions), Dem. Cor. 271, 135. (^ /3ou\}; Alaxlyv") "ol irpoSiriiy cTvai 
 Ka\ KaK6yovv vfiiy aveipatyey (docuit). But the Inf. is likewise use(3 
 with SetKuyai, when the object of this verb is not to be represented as 
 something perceived, but only as something possible, c. g. X. C. 2. 3, 17. 
 KtySvye/io-eiS 4iriS eT^ai, (rb fiev xPV^'ro. re Kcd tpi\dSe\(jiOS eJvai, iKiiyos 
 Sf <pav\6s T6 Ka\ ouK &^ios evepyetrlas. 
 
 12. An\ovv with a Part, to make evident, to show; with an Inf. to say, to an- 
 nounce, to command. Aii\a <r € aSLKovyra (I make it evident or show that 
 you do wrong). X. A". 1,33. K^l^iynaTi ^S^Aou, Tabs /iiy i\cv&eplas 
 SiOjxivovs iis npbs ffv/ipaxoy airhv rape'ivat (edixit, ut adessent). 
 
 13. noieii/ with a Part, to represent [5 310, 4, fb)] ; with an Inf (a) to cause, 
 (b) to suppose, to assume. TloiSi ere ye\S>yra (1 represent you laughing). 
 Hoiu 0-e ye\uv (I cause you to laugh). PI. Symp. 174, e. &K\riTO> 
 iroiriarey ('Oi-nipos) 4\d6yTa rby MeyeAemy iirl r^jy Stoiniv (j-epresentt 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 311.] JNTERCHANGE OF THE PA3.TICIPLE AND INFINITIVE. 479 
 
 Menelaus coming unhidden to the feast). X. An. 5. 7, 9. iroiu 8' u/uits 
 d^avaTTi^e t/Tas Kol KarayoTjT ev^4vras ^* ^juoO ?iKfip els Yaffil 
 {1 wiU suppose, 1 will put the case, will assume, that you having been deceived 
 come to Phasis). 
 
 H. Alfrxi^f^"' and aiSct(Tdai with a Part, to fee as/iamcd on accountqf 
 something which one does ; with an Inf. to be ashamed or a/raid to do something, 
 to abstain fiom doing something through fear or shame, to be prevented from doing 
 something by shame. Aiirx^yoiiai kokcI; TrpirTairriv^iKoy {lamashamed 
 of doing evil, or that I do evU to a friend); atcrxivoiiai kokA irpiTrtiv 
 t4» ipixov {I am prevented by shame from doing evil, etc.). X. Cy. 5. 1, 21. 
 rovTO /lev [sc. a'jro5iS6v(u X^P''' fi-finw fie SivcuT^at) ovk aio'x^f'o/^ai \e- 
 yuv rh S4' '^y fievrire wop* ifjuil airoStiirw, tovto, eiX<rre,&Ti attrxvvof^^j v 
 it.v ehrelv. S. Aj. 506. afSccrat fihv irarepa rhv irhv iv Kvypip yfipif vpo- 
 KeiiTwv. X. S. 8, 33. roirous 7^ ttv ^tprj oUtr^ai /jtdXtfrra aiSeitr^at 
 aWilKovs SL-TToKelireLv. 35. aiSovj/Tai tovs vapiitnas BLvoKel-Treiv. 
 ^. Xi. 9, 4. iras &v Tts aitrxw^eii] rhv Kouchy ffi(rK7ivov Trapa\afieiv. 
 
 I5.n6fiiapai' [4 310, 4, (e)] is sometimes, though seldom, constructed with 
 an Inf. also, without any marked difference, as avyxapeiv, iav, e. g. Th. 4,48. 
 ov8* eXsievai Sipaffav Korbi Sivofitv irepi6^e(T^at ovSeva {they said they 
 would not permit any one to enter). '%Trir peireiv, to permit, is commonly 
 connected with an Inf., rarely with a Part. X. An. 1.2, 19. ralmir rijy 
 X<^pav iveTpe^e SiapTr^irai ro'is*'ZWTiffiv { permitted the Greeks to plun- 
 der). Isocr. Pac. ij ir6\ts avrots ovk ivtrpe^et ■napa&aivovffi rhv 
 v6iuiv. The verbs actxeo'i^oi and iirofieveiv with the meaning of 
 audere,Siie constructed with the Inf. Her. 7, 139. KaTa/telvayres &ve<r- 
 XOVTO rhv itn6pTa M t^v X'^PV Se^aadai {dared to withstand the enemy 
 making an incursion into their country). 
 
 le.'Apx^"''^'" "^^^ a Part., when it has the meaning to be in the beginning of 
 an action (in contrast with the middle or end of an action), or also when 
 the viay and manner, in which the beginning of an action takes place, is to be 
 stated ; with an Inf , to begin to do something, to commence (sojn^thing intended, 
 aimed at), "H p^avTO ritrelxv oiKoSo'fiovyres and oiicoSofieTv. Th. 
 
 1, 107. ijp^avTO Koi Tck lioKphi Telxv 'A^valoi olxoSofieiv. X. Cy. 8. 8, 
 
 2. ipio/iat SiSatTKav ix tuv delav. C.3.\,5.ir6Aev ¥ip^aT6 ire 5i- 
 tdiTKeiv T^v ffrpaTJtyiav. 5, 22. &Tc6Te va?Mieiv ijp^u fiav^iveiv. 6,3. 
 fhtov Tlfjtiu, ^tc Tivos ^p^V 'r^v ■n6\iv evepyereTy. 5, 15. 'A^vcuot ani 
 rSiy vaTepav &pxoyTai Karatppovety tuv yepanepoay. 
 
 17. IloiJeiy with the meaning to hinder, is constructed with an Inf , e. g. PI. 
 Rp. 416, c. Toy otK^ireis Kol r^y SAAt^i/ ovirlav roiaiiTTfv aiiroTs TrapeffKeviJur^at 
 (5«), {JTij /jciire Tobs (piAojcas &S kplarovs elyai iraiiroi carrovs kt\. 
 
 18. Xlftpaff^ai with a Part., to make trial of anything, to practise [§ 310, 4, 
 (h)] ; still this construction is rare ; with the Inf. to attempt to do something ; 
 TrapaSKevi^eaAat is very often also connected with the Inf The 
 Ionic phrase irayTo^ov yiyyeffSrai, is constructed with the Ace. and 
 Inf Her. 3, 124. xai'Toiij iyeyero jur; oiroSij/n^irai rhv IIoXvKpa- 
 Tco {she used every expedient, etc.). 
 
 Eemakk. By comparing § 306 with § 310, it will be seen that the Inf, as a 
 complement of the verb, denotes something aimed at, intended, something ef- 
 fected, while the participle, inasmuch as the idea expressed by it is prior to, or 
 coincident with that of the verb with which it is connected, implies the actual 
 existence of the idea designated by it. The participle, therefore, implies thai 
 the action denoted by it actually takes place, while the Inf does not. 
 
 21 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
480 SYNTAX. f{ 312, 
 
 § 3ia. The Participle used to express Adverbial cr 
 Circumstantial Relations. 
 
 1. In the second place, the Part, is used to denote such an 
 attributive qualification of a substantive, as will, at the same 
 time, define the predicate of the sentence more exactly. In 
 this case, the Part, expresses the adverbial relations of time, 
 cause, motive or purpose, condition and concession, manner. 
 
 The English often uses a Part, in this case, e. g. he said laughing (7 e A £ i/) ; 
 the city, hesieged by the enemy, suffered much distress {trSXis vtrh rav voXefiiuv ir 
 \ 1 pK u/n e'cij). Instead of the Part., the English often uses either a subor 
 dinate clause with the conjunctions when, after, while, since, lecause, as, inasmuch 
 as, in order to, if, although, or a substantive with a preposition, e. g. "Kipos tV 
 ir6\iv c\div li,i^?iAev {after Cyrus had taken the city, he returned, or after taking 
 the city, etc.). 
 
 2. In Enghsh we often translate the participle by a verb, 
 connecting it with its own clause by one of the above-named 
 conjunctions, using as a subject either the word with which the 
 participle agrees, or a pronoun referring to it. 
 
 Ot 7P0\e/eioi ^vyovres inrh rSiv iroKsfiiuv eBuix^^f^ (when the enemy fled, 
 THEY jvere pursued by the enemy, or the enemy fled and were pursued). To is 
 n4p aais els t^v yrjv €ts0 a\ovirii' ol ^'EWrives ^vafTtd^ffav (when ilie 
 Persians made an irruption into the country, the Greeks went out against iltem). 
 
 3. In the examples given under No. 2, the participle always 
 agrees with a substantive or pronoun which is connected with 
 the principal verb, either as subject or in some other relation, and 
 may then be called the dependent participle. But very often the 
 substantive with which the participle agrees has no connection 
 with any verb, but stands alone in the Genitive. This is called 
 the Genitive absolute or independent, because it has no gram- 
 matical connection with any other word in the sentence. 
 
 X. 0. 4, 2. tSjv ffafiiiTwi' ^7]\vvofie(cv, Kal at ^vxal •iro\h &.dbu(rT6T€pat 
 yiyi/oyrai [when the bodies are exhausted, the animal spirits become weaker). 
 
 Bemabk 1 . The Genitive absolute can never be used when the action refers 
 to the subject ; in this case the participle must always be made to agree with 
 tlie subject. It is otherwise in Latin, on account of there being no active par 
 ticiples in the past tense ; the Latin must, therefore, use the Abl. Absolute, 
 even when the action refers to the subject, e. g. oi o-TpaTiuTai tjji/ iroXiv xa^f 
 ?\.6vTis €is Th OTpnTSTreSov avex'^PVav {milites, VRBE diruta, in castra se re- 
 ceperunt, after the soldiers had taken the city, they returned to the camp). In this 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 312.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PAETICIPLE. 4S1 
 
 example, the actions denoted by the participle and the verb, both refer to 
 iTTpaTiwTai, and therefore the Gen. Absol. could not bo used. 
 
 Rem. 2. The reason why the Greeks chose the Gen. absolute, has been 
 seen in treating of the Gen., § 273, Kcra. 11. Subordinate clausee also may bo 
 used instead ot tlie participial construction, either for the sake of greater em- 
 phasis, or for perspicuity. 
 
 4. The Participle as described under 2 and 3, is used to 
 denote : — 
 
 (a) A specification of time, where the English uses subordi- 
 nate clauses, with the conjunctions when, while, during, after, 
 stnce, or a substantive with a preposition. 
 
 X. C. 1. 2, 22. 5ro^\ol ri xpiiiMTa avaKiiaavTes, Si* ■itp6&dai attelxai'to 
 KepBuv, aXffxp^ vo/A^oiires elvai, i-oinaHf otiK onr^xoyTat {after masting their money, 
 ct/ier, when t7i&/ had toasted). An.*AKo6ffaffi ravra rots (rrpaTTjyoTs rh iv^ifitjfia 
 X'^pif iSoKcT [when the generals heard this, on hearing this, after hearing this, they 
 thought the device ingeniiSua). So the frequent circumlocution with voiijiras 
 in the sense of thereupon. Her. 6, 96. iyeirprja-av koI tA, ipii. Kid ■r)iv'Tr6\iv • ravra 
 t\ voti] iravTe s ivl tcis &\\as vi]aovs avdyovTo {TTi^'R^wo^ they, set sail^far 
 the other islands) ; or with the repetition of the Part, of the preceding word. 
 Her. 7, 60. TTfii^ras toiStaj T^ rpSntp i^Tjpi^^tjirav iipi^ fi-ijtr avres Se Kuril 
 H^i'ea SUrturaov {in this way they numbered all; theeeupon they arranged the 
 army by nations). Gen. absolute, X. H. 5. 1, 9. favfiax'i-as wphs rijy ae\'fiyrii> 
 yevop.4vi)S, rerrapas rpi-fipfis Xafipvaifi Tapywvas {a naval battle having been 
 fought by Tnoonligltt). 4.58. vitoi^aiv ovtos rov ^pos, 'AyTjffiKaos K\ivoire- 
 riis ^v {when the spring appeared). II. a, 88. oStis incv faivToy ko} ^irl x^""^ 
 SepKOfievoto a-oi iidl\ys irapiL VTjv&l ^apeias x^V*^ ivoltret {while I live, as long 
 as Ilix and look upon the earth). 
 
 Hlk. 3. The following participles, which may be sometimes translated in 
 English by adverbs, also belong here: (o) i,pxil>.^''os,in the beginning, origi- 
 nally. Th. 4, 64. kirep Koi apxafifvos ehrov. (This is to be distinguished 
 from api&iifvo'S oird rivos, which may be translated, especially, befitre all. 
 The Part, ip^d/teyos agrees, for the most part, in Number, Gender, Case, with 
 the substantive which is more exactly defined, e. g. PI. Bp. 600, e. oukoSii rtda- 
 uec airh *Oix4ipov ap^a^4vov^ ■jtavras robs votijriKobs fufirjras eiSefi- 
 \ay apcrtjs ctyai {that all the poets, particularly Homer, etc.). Sometimes, how- 
 ever, the Part, ap^dnems agrees with the subject of the sentence. PI. Symp. 
 173, d. SoKeis fioiArexySis vivras av^pdiirovs cid\lovs fiye7(r&ai ■nK^v'SaiKpirovs, 
 ivh <Tov B,pi(ifievos,you seem to me to think all men unhappy except Socrates, 
 particularly yourself). — (j3) Te\evrav, properly ending, finally, at last. PJ. 
 
 ip. 362, a. reKevrS^v irdyra Karh, na^&ty iyaa'KtvSuKev^fferau X. An. 6. 3, 8. 
 TfKevrapres Kal ctjrb rov SSaros etpyoy {robs "EAA^jyas) oi Qp^Kes {at last the 
 Tliracians kept the Greeks from the water). — (7) Aio\(7riy xP^"""' "fi^ 
 some time, after a tahile, subsequently, or Sia\, Tro\vt/, oKiyov xp.» ^t itrx^*' voKvy 
 Xpivov, iuKp6v. PI. Phaed. 59, e. ov ■iro\bii olv XP^'""' eTrtcrx^" ^Kf- 
 
 Rem. 4. The Part, in the Gen. sometimes stands without a subject, wlicn 
 the subject can bo readily-supplied from what goes before, or w!ien tlie sulijoct 
 is indeiinite, where a demonstrative pronoun, or the words tvpiyixnTa xp'hf-'^ra, 
 bStpuiroi, etc., used in a ggiei^l^^gse^aj^b^nderstood. Th. 1,116. V.epi- 
 
482 SYNTAX. [} 312, 
 
 kXtjs ^X^"^^ '^^'^^ '^^X'^^ ^''^^ KalSyou Kol Kapias, isayyeK^eyTuyfOTi^OLyuro'cu 
 VTJes iiT avToi/s Tr\4ovtrty {it hiving been announced that Phoenician ships were sailing 
 ai/ainst them). X. Cy. 1.4, 18. a ^fiav^ 4vt w v Se ry 'AffTutiyei, Srt Tro\4^ioi 
 funv in T^ X^Pf ^f&oiiSiei Kol airhs irphs ra 8pi« [it having been signified to 
 Astyages). 3. 1, 38. Staff KtjvoivTuy S^ (sc. owtwv) ficra rh S^T-jrvoy, iirlipera 
 6 Kvpos, Also in the Sing. Tli. 1, 74. ffcupas S7}\u^4vtos, Sti iv rats vava] 
 T&y 'EAA^f av ra Trpdyfiara iyeyero ( it having been made very evident that). Coicp, 
 the Latin cognito, edicto, petito, etc., instead of postquam cognitum est, etc. 
 
 Eem. 5. In order to define the time more exactly, the preposition iiri ia 
 frequently connected with the Gen., yet only when the Part, is in the Pres, 
 tense, e. g. 'EttI Kipov Pafft\eioyTos (while Cyrus was Jang). See ^ 296, 
 I, (2). The relation of past time is sometimes made more definite by the prep- 
 osition fi^erd, after, with the Ace. e. g. Her. 6. 132. /lera Se 4y Mapa&iin 
 Tpufia yeyifieyoy VLiKtioStjs ai^ero (after the slaughter made at Marathon), 
 See ^ 294, II, (2). The relation of indefinite time expressed hy about, nearly, 
 is indicated by fiirii with the Ace., e. g. iirh r^v irpiTtiv iirc\doviTav 
 vvKra [§ 299, III, (2)], the coincidence or contemporaneousness of one thing with 
 another, is expressed by a/ua with the Dat., e. g. o/t' fifiepif S tatpuffKoitni 
 (as soon as daybreak) ; afia r$ al-rcp iKpid^ovri (simulac frumentum adul- 
 turn est). 
 
 Eem. 6. In order to determine more exactly the relation of time, temporal 
 adverbs are often used with the dependent participle and the Gen. absolute : 
 avTlxa, fi&is, ilal(pV7)s, futra^i, o/ta. PI. Ep. 328, c. ei^bs oiy ue 
 ihdiv b K4<pa\os ^ffTni^erd Ts Kal elr^y (simul ut me conspexit). Xys. 207, a. d 
 Vleye^eyos 4k ttjs av\7is fiera^if Trai^wy eis4pxfrat (while he played). Phaed. 
 77, b. Sttws fii) a/ia air o^yitff Koyros rod ay^p^irov SiaffKeSilyyvTat t] 
 rf/vxv (as soon as man dies). Her. 9, 57. Kol Sjita KaTa\a$6yTes trposeKearo 
 irij)i (as soon as they had come up with the enemy, they pursued them closely). Th 
 Z, 91. iTTOL^yiiiy re a/ia ■ir\4oyTfs (inter navigandum, while sailing). 
 
 Kem. 7. In order to denote more clearly and emphatically the succession of 
 time and a consequence or result, the following adverbs are very often appended 
 to the predicate of a sentence: 4yrav&a, o8Ta?(;), outw 8^, £5e. X. C. 
 3. 10, 2. 4k iroWuy ffvydyoyres rh, 4^ kKaffrov ndWiffra, ovrtas o\a Ta 
 ff^fiara KoAct iro(6?T6 ipodyeff^at (collecting from many the most beautiful features of 
 each, IN THIS way you make the entire forms appear beautiful). 
 
 (b) A caitse or reason, where the English often uses subor- 
 dinate clauses with since, because, as, inasmuch as, or a substan- 
 tive with a preposition. 
 
 X. C. 1. 2, 22. iroWol T&, XP^/wra cLvoKdffavres, Sov Trp6ffhey aTreixoyro Kfpi&y, 
 alffxp^ yofilCoyr e$ elvat, Toiruy ovk airdxoyrat (many having squandered their 
 estates, did not abstain frem those gains from which they before abstained, becahse 
 they accounted them ioj.} . Ti ^irir^Scio tx"'^" ^^ ''^^ X^P'^t ToWris Kci ayaArii 
 iff IIS (tliey might obtain supplies from the place, since, because, inasmuch as, it wai 
 extensive and fertile). 
 
 (c) A motive, pwpose, or object, where the English uses the 
 Inf. with to, in orVier to, or a finite verb with that, in order that, 
 so that. Generally, only the Fut. Act. Part, is used to deuoto 
 this relation; sometimes also the Pres. Act., (} 2.'i.'), Rem 3) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 31^.] THE DEPENDENT AND ABSOLUTE PAETICIPIE. 482 
 
 This usage occurs most frequently with verbs of going, coming 
 sending. 
 
 Her. 3, 6. TouTO epxof^f i^piawv [Ihave come to say this). 6,10. h Ae\ 
 (pohs xpifip^^yos ''V XeV'^Vph iropeierai {he goes to Delphito consult tin 
 oracle, in order to, that he may consult, etc.). X. C. 3. 7, 5. ore ■ye SiSi^wt 
 Sipfiriiiat. TlenTra <re Xe^ovTa (I send you that you may, to, m order to, say), 
 
 (cl) A condition, where the English often uses a subordinate 
 clause with if; or a concession, where the English uses a sub- 
 ordinate clause with although, though. 
 
 X. Cy. 8, 7, 28. Toi»5 ^[\<nis ev epyerovvTes «ol robs ix^P'^^^ ivtrt}ffe(r^e ko~ 
 hdCeiv {if you confer benejits on friends, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 41, 2. rav a&\7i- 
 Ttav Sis roffa^TTjv ^^fLTjv \a^6vT0)v, ovShv hv trjUoy yevoiro tois &Wois, evhs 
 de civBphs eZ tj> pov^ a'avro s, &navres tiv avoXaitreiow ol fiou\6fiei/oi Koivuve'tv t^$ 
 4Keti/ov Siavolas. X, Cy. 3. 2, 15. &s oKlya Bv i/dfievoi vpoopav iv^pawoi wept. 
 Tov fieWovTos iroAAct iirtxeipovfiev irpirreiv {altltough men can foresee Utile, yet, 
 etc.). 
 
 Rem. 8. When the Part, expresses a concession, the particles Kal (neg. oiSe, 
 fiijSe), Koiirep, Kal toBto, are commonly joined with it. X. An. 1. 6, 10. 
 ■nposeKivr\aav ('Op6vritv) Halve p elS6Tes,STi M davdru iryoiTo {although the« 
 saw, that). Eur. Ph. 1618. oIik tiv irpoSo'iTiv oiSeirep irpiaauv koxus. PI. 
 Rp. 404, b. "O/iripos 4v rah rav ripdav earidfretriv oSre lx^i<r'v airroiis ecrxi^, k a I 
 Tavra M daKd.T'rri iv 'EWnsv6vTa Syras {and that too, thoughthey were, etc.). TaCro 
 in such connections, may often be governed by the verb iroi^ai : and he did this, 
 although they were, etc. The words Snas, elra, kSto, ^ttcito, K&Tretra, 
 arc often added to the predicate of the sentence. Her. 6, 120. Sffrepoi Be oti- 
 K 6 lie vol T^s <ri;/«/3oAflr iixelpoPTO ii /i a s de'liaaadai Toiis MiiSovs {although they 
 came after the battle, still they desired to see the Medes). PI. Charraid. 163, a. ivo- 
 ^efjievos auippoainir\v fli/ai rh ti, eavroS irpirTftv, ?irciTo oliSev tpriffi Ka\ieiv 
 Koi Totis ri Twi/ &\K(iiv wpirTovTas aiiippoveiv. "Ofius is often in poetry 
 joined to a Part., e. g. Aesch. S. 712. irei^ou 7ai'oi|l Kulwep ov arepr/uv Sjiais, 
 or (what also sometimes occurs in prose) is placed before the Part., e. g. PI. 
 Pliaed. 91, c. 2i/i/iio$ tpoPeiTai, p.ii fi ^livxh Stilus Kal dedjepoy Kal Ri\\iov %v 
 TOV aiiMTO! Trpoano\KiriT(u {that the soul, though more god-like and beautiful than 
 the body, will nevertheless perish). 4 
 
 (e) The manner and means, where the English sometimes 
 
 uses a participial noun with a preposition. 
 
 TeKwv elirev {he spoke laughing). X. Cy. 3. 2, 25. Aijtf (ijaeyoi (Hirui 
 {rajitu vivunt, they live by plundering). C. 3. 5, 16. wpoaipouinai p-ahXav oSra 
 KepSalreiv ott' a\\-fl\wi', 1l auvaipeKovvi es ainois (prefer to gain some advan- 
 tage Jrom each other, rather than by assisting themselves). Isocr. Panath. 241, tt 
 Toiis"E\Xij>'ar iSiSa^av, iv rpSirov SioiKoSpres ras airrSiv TrarplSas Kal irpis o6i 
 iro\efiOvi/Tes ii.eyi\r)v r)iv 'E WiiSo Troiiiaetav, So of ten x f <^ M ^ " " ' with the 
 Dat, where the English may use the preposition with, e. g. troWj Te'xi'p 
 Xpdiii.epos Tohs iroKe fiious ivlKT\aev (conquered the enemy with great tact) . 
 
 iCBJi. 9. Hero belongs the jihraso Kripe7s ex^Vi ov in a question, t1 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
484 SYNTAX. L*3ia 
 
 \iipeis ix"" 1 '• ". you keep trifling so, or why do you keep trifling so ?, tx" I'^w 
 expressing the idea of duration. PL Gorg. 490, e. iroTo {nroS^iMTa (l>\vapeTs 
 £ X " '' • ( s"^' shoes are you always prating so much about?). Here belong also the 
 Part. <ptp6i>.evos, and (pepav ase(lmtrimsitive\y, surnmo stiulio, maximo impetu, 
 dedita opera, with verbs of motion. Her. 8, 91. Sremr Se Ttves Tohs 'A^yatous 
 Sia(l}vyoteif, <t>€p6ixevoi (cum impetu delati) iseimrrov is Tobs AlytvfjTas (as often 
 as they escaped the Athenians, rushing on violently they fill into the hands of the 
 Aeginetae). 8,87. (i/avs)SiwKO/Mej/Tj {nrbT^s'ATTiKT^s (pepovffa iy4^a\e y7ji(l}i\ly 
 {cum impetu aggressa est amicam navem, being pursued by the Attic ship, made a 
 violent attack on a friendly ship). Aeschin. Ctes. 82. is tovto tpeptay ireptetmiffe 
 ri wpiy/mTa (he designedly brought things to this state). Comp. ib. 90 and 146. 
 
 Kem. 10. In like manner the Greels employs the participles ex"", fiTaiy, 
 <t>epwv, KaPiv, where the English may use the preposition with; exuy is 
 used both of animate and inanimate objects, which may be in the possession of 
 any one, &yu)v of animate objects, tpdpuv of inanimate, \aficiv of both, e. g. X. 
 Cy. I. 3, 1. epx^Toi T] VlavSit/Tj vphs rhv traripa koL rhv Kvpov rbv vibv exouffa 
 (with Iter son Cyrus, etc.). So & Kvpos ^iipos ^iptav irpos-tiKaffftr, Ittttov &yuv 
 ^A^ec, iVn-eas Xafi&v rohs troh.efjdovs KaTeSiw^ey. The Homeric and Poetic 
 language often connects the participles fx""' ^^P"", Ka^div, and nyaii' with verbs 
 of giving, placing, etc., in order to present the idea of the action that preceded 
 the giving and placing, graphically, as it were, before the eyes of the hearer. 
 II. t;,' 305. 9wKe ^ifpos apyvpStjXoy cvv Ko\e$ re ^eptav koX iv^itrrtp reKafiSsvi 
 (bringing he gave, he brought and gave a sword studded with silver). 
 
 5. Instead of the Gen. absolute, the Accusative is also used, 
 but for the most part only when the Part, has no definite sub- 
 ject, consequently where the verb from which the participle 
 comes, is impersonal, e. g. e$6v (from cleort, licet), qwum liceat, 
 liceret, while, when, since it is or was allowed; or with impersonal 
 phrases, e. g. ato-xpov ov (quum turpe sit, esset, while, because, 
 since it is or was shamefid.) The idea of extension in time, which 
 is expressed by the Ace. (§ 279, 6), is, in this construction, trans- 
 ferred to the state or condition of an object; the conjim^ctions 
 while, when, express this corresponding relation. 
 
 (a) Accusative absolute. PI. Menex. 246, d. t)iuv i^hy (Tjy ju5) KoXSr, koXSj 
 alpovfieWa fiSAAov TeA.€UTav (since it is not in our power to live honorably), Protag. 
 358, d. oray ayayKatr^ Svo7y KaKotv rh erepoy atputr^ai, ouSels rh fiet^ov alp^ffi' 
 rai, e^hy rh iKarrov (atpcTu^nt), no one will choose the greater, when it is in his 
 power to choose the less. Her. 1, 129. "Apiro7oj, irapeiv avT^ P(uri\4a yey((rdai, 
 ^Wtp irepUbriKe rb KpdTos (when it was in his power to become a king). 5, 49. 
 vapexo" iquum liceat) ttjs Atriris irdaris ipxay e-VeTeaa, &\\o ti alprireffde ; 
 Th. 5. 14. (ol 'A.^y!uoi iJ.eT€fi4\oyTo, in fieri to iy Xli\tp (yevSp^ya), koJms ira- 
 >oii'x^»', oil ^vyiPi)<rav {when a favorable opportuni'y presented itself ). Soiirdp- 
 Xoy, quvm liceat, liceret ; Hoy, quum opus (necess") sit, esset ; S d | o r auroTs (quum 
 iis visum sit or esset, when it phased them, when they had decreed) ; SoKovy {quum 
 videatur, videretur); irpvsvxoy (quum deceat, deceret). Passive participles 
 Th. 1 125 5iSoyp.4yoy Se avTois, fv^bs jxiy oSwaTO ijc iirix^ipfiv airapaa- 
 iceiioi oiffiv (and though they had determined, it was not possible fir them, etei). E t <n • 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
*'312.] THE PARTICIPLE. 485 
 
 fifvoir (quum dictum, sit, essei). Adjectives with 6y, e.g. S^\oy ii/ (quum 
 appnreat, apjiareret) ; SSgAoc Sy, Swariv Sv, aSivaroy Sy. Also some- 
 times withaut iy,e.g. SfjKov, ayayxa^oy. 
 
 (b) Accusatives absolute. Though the participles of impersonal verbs usu- 
 jilly have no subject joined with them in the Ace. Absol., yet a neuter pronoun, 
 not a substantive, may' be joined with them as their subject. Her. 2, 66 
 TaCra yiyS/iera, irey^ea fieydha robs Alyuirriovs KaTa\aix$iyei (when this 
 is done, the Egyptians are filed with great grief). Th. 4, 125. ^S>) &it(l>0T4pois 
 liiy {oKovy ayax^peiy, Kvpa^ey 5e ovSey {scd quum nihil decretum esset), 4x(i- 
 pouy iir' oiKov. X.H.3. 2, 19. So^ayra Se ravra KaX v epay& eyra, rh, fiiy 
 irrpaTevfiaTa StirriT^^y {wjien these things had been agreed upon and accomplished), 
 
 Kem. 11. The Genitives aisoZMte, however, are more frequent than the Acc.,when 
 a neuter pronoun is joined with the impersonal verb. X. H. 1. 1, 36. 8ii|a»Tos 
 r oirav 4x^'^'' (^"^ ™ decrtta., this having beat agreed to, when this had been, etc.). 
 7, 30 and 5. 2, 24. So^dvTuy toutwj/. Cy. 4. 5, 53. r oirov ffvyh okovv- 
 Tos (ace. to the best MSS.). 4.5,53. toiStou oStus ^x""'''"!. Also 5(!|- 
 av TavTa (from 6So|6 Tavra) occurs. X. An. 4. 1, 13. S<i|ai? ravra, licii- 
 pvtfiv oSru TTotety {when this was approved, they gave orders by the herald to do ac- 
 cordingly). With such impersonal verbs as contain the subject in a measure 
 in themselves, the Gen, is used, e. g. Soyras, troK-jriioyros [ij 238, 5. (b)]. 
 Elsewhere the Gen. but very seldom occurs with impersonal verbs and phrases, 
 e. g. X. Uipp. 4, 2. uSiiXov ivTos, el iiT?\^ 
 
 6. The particle of comparison us, is connected both with the 
 dependent Part. (J 312, 3), and also with the Gen. and Ace. 
 absolute, ■when the idea expressed by the Part, is to be in- 
 dicated as a representation, as a subjective view, opinion, m 
 ptirpose of the actor or speaker. This ra s has the same signifi- 
 cation as a Part, of a verb of thinking or sayi'ng, followed by 
 an Inf., or Ace. with an Iiif The English can express this ws 
 by the expressions thinking, intending, tvith live intention of, ■ 
 sayimgy or by as though, as if, under tlie pretence tliat, because. 
 
 (a) Simple Participle. X.. Cy. 1. 1, 1. olrvpayy€y imxeipiirai'Tes, Khv &iro- 
 aovovv XP^""" Spx""^" SiaytyuvTai, davfia^ayrat, & s trmpai re Ktd eirvx^is ye- 
 yey-riiievoi {■properly, as those are admired, who are wise men = vafit(6/i.eyoi 
 iroipol re icd eirvxea yeytyfiirdai, thought or reputed to be wise). PI. Rp. 329, a. 
 ayavaKTOviriv, &s pLeyiKav riyuv airea-r epnueyoi {i.e. fiyoi/ieyoi /ley, r, 
 o7re<rTepf;<raoi {as if they had been deprived, thinking they had been deprived). X. 
 An. 1. 1,. 11. TKe/i.evtre {UpS^evev) hafiivra, aySpas 8ti ifKeto-Tous rrapayeyeaSiai, 
 Sis hVtewtSas $av\&fie-yas irrpareieeSxa {pretending that, under the pretence 
 that, saying that, he wished to march against the Pisidians). 'a s is very often 
 connected with the Fut. Act. Part., when a purpose in the mind of another 
 is expressed. X. An. 1. 1, 3.'ApTaiepivs <rvKXaii$dyei Kipav ces dvoKreyiiy 
 {■arrests Cyrus far the purpose of putting him to death). The writer here states the 
 mew or purpose as it existed in the mind of Artaxerxes, and not his own viev 
 of the matter. So also very often with irafaaKevdiea^at, § 310, 4, (h). 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
486 SYNTAX. 
 
 [U12 
 
 (b) Genitives absolute. X. H. 7. 5, 20. ■irap^yy^i\ev abrois irapaffKfvdCta^M, 
 S,s ixixns Uo^Livv (i- e- f^h'-'v 1^X0" ?<rea-&«') {^c commanded them to pre- 
 pare themselves, because, as he said, or saying that, there was to he a battle). 5. 4, 9. 
 iirhpmTov i^Uvai rdvras @v$aiovs, &s tuv rvpdyyuiv t ^^ye^Toiy (quia tyranm 
 martui essent, because, as lie said, the tyrants were dead). Th. 1, 2. is 'lavtav vffre- 
 OOP, as oux txai/TJ! oi<rt]s ttjs 'Attik^j, hromias ^feire/ii^oi' (i. c. voiil^ovTfs 
 ovx 'Kovriy eTrai) {afterward sent colonies to lonta, thinking that Attica was not large 
 enough). 
 
 (c) Accusative absolute. X. An. 5. 2, 12. i Se toTj ireXToo-Tnrs mai irofirf 
 76\\e SinyKv\uii.4mvs Uvai, i> s, iirirav arj/i'livj}, liKovTiCeiv SeTJffov {he com- 
 manded all the peltasts to adimnce, ready to shoot, saying, that it would be necessary 
 far them to hurl their javelins, etc.). PI. Ep. 425, .a. toTi ruieripois traiaiv iv 
 miiOTtpov eiiAlis iroiSiSs ne^eKriov, Si s, vapaviiiov yiyvoii.4inis ouT^j, ivvoiiovs re 
 itaL ffTTovSatovs dySpas av^dvear^at aSivarov Sy. So us i^6v, &s 1rap6y, etc. 
 
 (d) Accusatives absolute. X. C. 1. 2, 20. Sib ko2 rois vU's at irarepej airi 
 Twy troyTjpuy ay^p^aiv elpyovaiy, £> s rijy fiev ray XRV^"^^^ 6 pi t\ lay &a'Krja'ip 
 oZffav TT)S aper^y, T^y 5^ rSiy TToyytpwy RardKviTiy {assured that, knowing that, 
 the intercourse ivith good men leads them to practise virtue). 3, 2. eUx^^o 2w/c 
 pdTTjs irphs Tohs ^eohs cLirXSos rayo^A diSoyai, lo s rovs ^eoiis KdhPutrra 
 f ISAras {thinking that, convinced that, the gods Icnew what was best). This con- 
 struction is very common, and is not limited to a pronominal subject, like the 
 one mentioned in No. 5, (b). Perhaps this construction is not absolute, but 
 depends upon a verb of perception to be supplied, indicated by its. 
 
 Rem. 12. A peculiar use of the Gen. absolute, in connection with is, oc- 
 curs "witli the verbs eiZevai, Siria-Tatr^ai, voeiy, ^x**'' yv^t^fiv^ Sio- 
 'ceiir^ai t^i/ yv6p.7tv, (f) poyrlC^ tv, also sometimes with Aeyeiy, and the 
 like verbs, with which, instead of the Gen. absolute, the Ace. of the substan- 
 tive with a Part, or the Ace. with an Inf., would stand as the object. The 
 consequence resulting from the action of the Gen. is commonly denoted by 
 . oBt<o(s) joined to the predicate. X. An. 1. 3, 6. &s 4iJ.oS oSi/ Hvtos, imj &» 
 Kal vp.€7s, oii TO) t^v yyd^vTjy €XCT6 {as if then I shall go, etc., seeing then tliat 
 I shall go, so form your opinion, i. e. be assured that I shall go wherever you go, me 
 ilurum esse, quocunque etiam vos, statuite) . Cy. 2. 3, 15. iis oZv i/iov ye kcH 
 ayayiouiJ.4yov Koi, iiroibj &y ris Si, kotiS tV a^iav fie TtpMy a^iitrovras, 
 ovTois, ^(pri, Si Kvpe, yiypfuaKe. PI. Cratyl. 439, c. Sioco j/AcrTei iis 
 l6vTwv T€ tmdvruv ael Kai pc6yruy {reputantes, omnia semper ire et fiuere). 
 
 Rem. 13. Instead of is, Sjirep {qvasi) is sometimes joined with the Part. 
 In order to bring out emphatically an objective {actually existing) ground or 
 icason, the particles fire (Si-e S^), seldom oTa, oTov (in the Ionic writers, 
 also, S ST6), in the sense of inasmuch as, because, quippe, are connected with the 
 participle. Her. 6, 59. are ttvkvov i6vTos roi &\(reos, oiix Sipay ol ivrhs 
 Tobs IktI': {because the grove was thick). X. An. 4.8, 27. Sre ^eaifienny 
 ray kraipZy, voW^ (pihoyeiicta iyiyvero {because the hetaerae were looking on, 
 Ihere^ was much rivalry). 5. 2, 1. at KoAx"', ot€ ^KireirTBK<!T6y [eV] tSc 
 olmay, woWol ^arcw aStp6oi koJ inrepeKdSniVTo iirX Toiy &kpoiv (inasmuch as they had 
 been driven out^ of their houses, etc.). Th. 2, 5. ^tray /ta! &yStpamoi kot4 robs aypois, 
 Ota airposSoielirou kokoS iy elp^vri yeyo/ieyov. PL Charm. 153, a. otoy SA 
 Xpovov a<l)iyp.4yos aopieyus ^a M Tois ivvfi^as StarpiPas. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
§ 313.] tECULIARmES IN THE USE OP THE tAllTlCirtE. 487 
 
 { 313. Special peculiafities in the Participial, con- 
 struction. 
 
 1. The Kom. of a Paft. often refers to a preceding substantive in the Dat, 
 Ace, or Gen., when the Dat., Ace, or Gen. in the preceding clause denotes tho 
 object in a grammatical point of view, but the subject in a logical respect, e. g, 
 in SoKei iioi = iyii Tiyaifiat, I think. This is a species of Auacoluthon 
 (§ 347, 5). 
 
 (a) Dative. Th. 3, 36. ^So^ev airoTs (i. e. iift7](l>i(ravT0, voted) ov robs irct- 
 fivTttS lidmv' inolCTewai, iwii itid robs airayras Mtrv\1lvaiovS, iviKa\ovvTft 
 riiv StWriv i.v6aT<ura k. t. \. (as Sallust. Jug. 102. populo Romano melius visum = 
 rati). 6, 24. Upas iy^veiTe iraaiv (^iite^fiovv vdyres) S/iolas iKTKfvirai- 
 TOis ^ev vpeff $VT epots &s . . KaTa(TTp€ipOfi4yois i<p' & iir\eoy, . . Tois 5* iv 
 TiKiKiif . . ei4\viSes o i> t e s ira^aeadai. — (b) Accusative. Eur. Hec. 970. 
 atSws /A* ^X'^ (= '^''^^^i^^O ^*' T'^Se ir6ifjLa> rvyxdiy ovtr^ 'ij^ ei/A uvy. — "»(c)- Geni- 
 tive. Her. 4, 132. Aapelov 7} yv(^iJtij etjif {= iyiyvucTKey) eiKd^uy, Th.4, 
 23. Tc^ ^Eol nuAoz' iv iifi<l>or epuv Kari^ KpirOs iiroKefietro (= rit irepl n. 
 ifupiTepoi iiro\4fu>vv), 'A^riva7ot )i\v . . tV yritrov irtp^vXcovrfs . ., nc\- 
 OTTovySiffioi Se iy ry 'Hireipt^ trrpaToirsdevSfieyoi (comp. § 266, 3). — 
 Sometimes also the Ace. and Dat. of the Part, is constructed according to the 
 sense of the preceding phrase or clause, and not according to its grammatical 
 form, e. g. S. El. 479, sq. SireiTTi fioi Srpiaos aSmyiav KXiovaay iprtas 
 iyeipiToiv (instead of ^piiros pi' ?x^' icf^iov(rav). Th. 1, 62. ?iy yy^/ii) 
 Tov ^Apio'Teas (= ^5o|€ t$ ^Apurrei) rh juey jitey eauTov ffrpaT^veSpy 
 ^Xo^'T* ^y '^V 'Iff^/*^ iTriT7ipe7y toiis *A^yalous, 
 
 Eemakk I . On the Nom. of the participle in the partitive apposition, seo 
 i 266, 3. — The Nom. of the Part, sometimes stands in a sentence alone, with- 
 out a finite verb, so that the Part, apparently, but only apparently, takes the 
 place of the finite verb. The finite verb must then be supplied from the pre- 
 ceding or following sentence. Her. 1, 82. tuuceSaipidyioi ri ivayrla Tovrav 
 i^iVTO y 6 flay ov yhp KOiz&yres irph rovrov a7r& Toirou KopiMV (sc. yipLoy 
 eieyro). So also conjunctions stand without a finite verb, e. g. ei, ^ay, Stoi/, 
 etc. X. C. 2. 1, 23. jpu ae omopovyra, votay 6Shv eVl rhv Moy TpiTry iky oZy 
 ipe (pl\riy tto ii\<ri,fi.evos (scil. tV ^""i Tiv $loy bSbv rpiirri). In very many 
 passages, however, the Part, may be explained by inserting diii. 
 
 2, The genitives absolute sometimes occur where the subject of the participle 
 is not different from the subject of the predicate or an object of the predicate ; here 
 it is to be noted, that the subject of the participle is often Wanting, since it can 
 be easily supplied (§ 312, Rem. 4). The reason of this peculiar construction 
 is commonly found in the effort to express the member of the sentence with 
 greater emphasis. 
 
 instead of the Nominative. Th. 3, 13. $ori^ria'iyTay vp.ay irpo^pues 
 vi\iy irposK^iijieir^e {you aiding, you mil more readily, etc.). 70. koI is K6yinis 
 KaTaffrivTuy [Kipxvpttiuy) i\firi(l>l<ravTo KepKvpaToi {the Corcyraeans having 
 had a conversation, determined). iX. Cy. 1. 4, 20. ravra sliriyTos auroS ?So{e 
 Ti (sc. ouTo's) \iyciy rip 'ASTviya. Instead of the Accusative. Her. 9, 99. of 
 ScC/iuoi, iiriKOfieywy 'A&nyaiay aixi/^"^'^'''"'' • ■ tovtovs KvaAfievoi iriy- 
 ras hroTripuirouai . . is rhs 'AA^yas {when the Athenian captives had come, the Sami- 
 ans having ransomed them, sind all back to Athens). Instead of the Dative. Th. 
 1, 114. Kol is outV S(a/3ei87)K({TOS ^Sjj HepiKKfOVS . .iiyyi?^ auT$ 
 (nepiic\ei) {when Pericles had crossed over into it, it was announced to him). 
 
 Eem. 2. These examples must be distinguished from those in Homer, where 
 the Gen. of a Part, follows a Dat. of a pronoun, or the Dat. of a Part, follows 
 a Gen. ; then instead of the possessive Gen., Homer sometimes uses the Dat 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
488 SYNTAX. [}i 314, 313 
 
 Od. I, 257 
 
 . Tinii' S' oStc KOT6K\(i(r*5) <pl\ov ?iTop S e i(rd i/T av (t>d6yyov re fiapjjt 
 aiiTov T€ ireAapov {=riiJ.wv ^rop). 458, sq. Tij! (ce oi ^7KE0aA<fs ye Sii irircot 
 iWvSis SAAp S)etyoii4yau paiono irphs oSSei. II. f, liO-'ArpelSri, viv S-fiwou 
 'Ax'A\rjos o\ohii Krjp yfi^ti eVJ ariiAcirai <p6voi' Kol if ufoy 'Axaiwc SspKOfiivif. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 f314. The Adverbial Objective. 
 
 The objective construction, finally, is expressed by adverbs 
 Adverbs denote the relation of place, time, manner, the quantity 
 of a predicate or attribute, or of another adverb, e. g. iyyvSev 
 ijXSev,. X'^'S dire/3i7, icaXios aTriS^avey, iroAXaKts ■^XSfv', adverbs 
 are to be viewed in a measure as resembling the Cases of sub- 
 stantives, suice by these also, as has been seen, the relations 
 just mentioned are expressed. Hence it is evident why most 
 adverbs have a definite Case-inflexion, e. g. oil, where, avui, Kdrw, 
 oT, o'koi, irfi, airq, etc. (^ 101, 2). 
 
 Remark. In addition to the above adverts, the language has other adverbs, 
 which do not, like those mentioned, define the predicate more exactly, but ex- 
 press the relation of the predicate to the subject. These are called Modal 
 Adverbs. They denote the certainty or uncertainty, the extension or limita- 
 tion, the affirmation or negation of the proposition ; or they exhibit the propo- 
 sition interrogatively. Several of them have been changed from adverbs to 
 mere suffixes, and hence always depend on a particular word, which by them 
 is made emphatic. The interrogative adverbs will be treated under the sub- 
 ject of in ;errogative sentences. Of the other adverbs alluded to, the following 
 deserve a more particular consideration. 
 
 § 315. A. Ai}, S^Ta, ^rfv, ^^ev, hrprov^ev, Sal. 
 
 1. A^ is the abridged form of ^Sij, being conformed to it in usage ; but it 
 can never, like ^Stj, stand as the first word in a sentence (except in the Epic 
 8)) r6Tt, turn vera, 8j) yip, jamenim), but is used only as a mere suffix (§ 314, 
 Rem.). It denotes in general that which is certain, sure, settled, a reference to 
 something known {already, now, even, precisely, exactly) ; it is not used of a par- 
 ticular time exclusively, but may refer to any time. It is very often employed, 
 in order to denote a consequence which follows of itself, nothing further being 
 taken into the account. ToCto, & vSy 8 5) \4yeis (just now, at this very time) ; & 
 ruv SJj eAeyes {just now, just then). X. Cy. 4. 1,483. vvv Sj) oh SijAiSiteis, ci 
 a\ij^ iXeyts {now certainly). OiiSej' H) kuk^v ■tretriv^aiJLev (nihil jam or nihil 
 dum, thus far, as yet, up to this time). OiSey Sii Kaxhv treurofie^a (nihil jam = 
 furtlier). With an Imp. or hortative Subj., it signifies, now, then, now then, I pray. 
 X. C. 1. 2, 41. SfSa|or S^ Ttpis tuv ^tSiv {now then teach, teach then, I pray) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
) 315.] At;, SJJTa, ^iji/, Srj3£y, ^Trov^ev, Saf. 48» 
 
 'loj/jEV Si} (noiw *Aen Zet us go, come now). After relatives, it often denotes a ref- 
 erence to a thing which is known. X. Hier. H, 8. kkI Trparou ij.ev fi&ijs Kareif 
 yafffievos hv eft;? rh (^iAe?(r3at uir4 t&v i.pxofidj/a>Vf oZ 55? tri* iiri^frnv rvyxAv^is 
 (quod, aJi salis constat, expetis). Hence iir eiSi) (since now, quoniam, i. e. quum 
 jam), beeause now, jmisqm, iij respect to something conceded, known ; &s H, 
 teeing tlua, qmmhqmdem, «' S^, «j jam, if now. In a series of sentences con- 
 nected by Kai, S^ is placed after the word which is to be made emphatic. PI. 
 Men. 87t e. vyUia, ^ajiiv, Kol iirxi'S Kol niWos /cat irAoBros Si/. So Koi Ti 
 2 j) /ityBTTor ; further, i\Kos re — /col Si) xai. Her. 1 , 30. eij AXyvvTov nirf/ccTO 
 iropi "AittdflTii', /col S)| /col es SiipSis xapck Kporffoi/ (and even also, and moreover 
 eho to Sardis). — Ti oSw S^,- liwhy therefore, I pray ?) Ilus oZv S^f/, (how now 
 then, how, I pray ?), 
 
 8. In general, S ^ is very often used in order to render emphatic and define 
 more exactly, the word after which it stands : precisely, exactly/, even (in English 
 often indicated only by the tone of voice). X. Cy. 2, 3, 13. p4ya ^povovaw, 
 tin ircTrafSEWTot Z^' Ktu, irphs Kifihv /col irpis hi^av kcA irphs ^^yos KopTepeiy (just 
 fiecause tkeg have been taught, because they have been taught, forsooth). PI. Prot. 
 320, a. SeSictis vepX ouToy, pi)} 5ia<p^ap^ S ^ ^n 'A\Ki0iii5ov {lest he should be cor- 
 rupted, Jbrsoeltk). With adjectives and nnmerals, it has cither a limiting or en- 
 larging sense, according to the natore of the adjective or numeral, e. g. /iivos 
 S^ (quite alone), Iv Ppax^' 5^ (in a very sJiort time), mr^eviif S-fi (very weaJc), 
 roAAot 5^, woWo/cii 51), Kpiruiroi S^ (the very best, confessedly the best). With 
 a pronoun, it expresses the distinction, importance, prominence of a person oi 
 thing as known, e. g. Ixtivos Si^ tJmt (weM-known) man, o-u 5)( ravra Mi^/aiaas , » 
 (didyouespecia!iy.youefail'Othersdareihis?) ; oStcdS^, ^vraCao 5^; so with other 
 interi'ogativepronouus,X. 0.4.4, 10. /col iraios Ziiaot, ei(n(, <^os & \6yos iaTiv ^ 
 {what kind of reasfming, I ask, I pray 1). Eur. Med. 1012. t f 5 5) KarritpeTs <j/i/«« 
 icol 5o/cpi>^.?oe« ,• SoTi »fi wore; {■who, (hen in all the world?). Tis Sk olv; 
 (s/AoMcn rmw, who I pray?). With an indefinite pronoun, it increases the m- 
 definiteness, c. g. &Woi S^ (others, whoever they may be), &a-os Sii, &v6(ros S^, iiiTis 
 e< (some one or other, any one whatever, nescio quis), fV iTr6oov SJj xp<^mi/ (I kaew 
 not bow kng^. With conjunctions and other particles, it signifies:: (a) even, 
 precisely, e. g. &s Sii, Im Sii, indeed, just exactly. Just even ; (b) truly, assuredly, 
 when a thought is to be expressed with assurance and decision, e. g. ^ Sij, ^ 
 juiXo S^, /cal S'fi, S'tt Tov, certainly indeed, assuredly, oh S'jj irou, yet surely 
 not at all, certainly not, yhp S'fi, for surely- 
 
 3. AiJTo, which is formed from SI), serves like Si),, only in a higher degree, 
 to render prominent, and more exactly define the word, which stands before it. 
 It may be jpined with all the parts of speech, in order to define them, whether 
 it be to extend or restrict them. It is very often used after interrogatives, e. g. H 
 B^t", iireiSii' ravro yhttrai; (qmdtumdemum dicetis, quum hoc factum erit?). It 
 is also qwjte frequently empteyed in answers (even so, precisely so, certainly so). 
 Also, ^ S ? T«, yes, forsooth, ob 5 ^ r o (minime vero, no, by no means), p.^ 5 ^ t a 
 Ymf,donot),e.s.A S'l^o S^tiffps toBto ; /col S?to (and forsooth, and trdy)- 
 
 4. The enclitic »<]v is a Doric particle, but it fJso appears in the Epic lap 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
490 SYNTAX. [f 31& 
 
 gnage. In Homer, diiv has always an ironical sense, like the Attic Siiwov, 
 without doubt, certainly. II. $, 276, ov ^■fiv luv vi\iy adris avi\<Tei Stv/ihs ayfivaf 
 vetKeielv ^afftKTias weiSeiots iTreetrffiy, 
 
 5. A^^ej/ (from S^ and a^y) almost always expresses scorn, irony {scilicet, 
 truly, indeed) ; it is very seldom used as a mere explanatory particle. X. Cy. 4. 
 6, 3. aiKirfii^aiaiv (riy vl6v), fieya (ppovZv, Sri S^&f rris' PaaiXeas dvyarphi 
 otfioifiiiv Tin ifihv vlhv yaixeTriy {because, forsooth, I should see my son the husband of 
 the king's daughter). 
 
 6. A^TTou&ec (from S^ttou and d^v), I hope so indeed, I suppose, certainly 
 (nempe, ironically). X. Cy. 4. 3, 20. iyis S', ^x iiTTrtiiiv fii^u, Stw likv iirl toS 
 Hirnou yeptofxai, T^ Tov tmroKsi'Taipov S^irou^ey Stairpd^ofiot {I shall, as I hope, 
 act the part of a centaur). 
 
 7. A ai is a lengthened form of 5^ (as vai of i^). It is nsed only in the 
 phrases tI Sal; irus Sal; it expresses the idea of surprise, wonder {wliat then'} 
 how so ? ain' tu ? itane 1 itane vera ?). 
 
 {316. B. Gonfirinative Adverbs. 
 
 1. M^y (Dor. and Bp. /lufy) expresses, like vero, confirmation, assurance, as- 
 severation, truly ; often also, like vero, it is used adversativdy : still, bat. But it 
 cannot stand as the first word in a sentence, as it commonly depends on another 
 word, and that the most important in the sentence, particularly on particles. 
 ' Its use with particles is as follows : (a) 'H fi ^ y, surely, certainly, hence used 
 particularly with oaths, asseyerations, or solemn promises. X. Cy. 4. 2, 8. t4 
 wttrrit SlSatriv avro7s, ^ fi^y us tptXois Kol irurro'is xp^^€*r&*** avTois {that he as- 
 suredly would treat them as friends). — (b) Ou /i^y, fiii /i^y, truly, assuredly 
 not. — (c) Kal fji'fir, and indeed, yea surely, naif more. PI. Phaed. 58, e. xal 
 fi^y eyttfye ^au/juitria eiroS-oy irapayevSfievos. Kal fiT]r is often used, when a 
 new assertion is adduced to strengthen or corroborate the meaning. Od. \, 
 582. Kal niif TdvroKoy ehelSoy ; so, often in the dramatic writers when atten- 
 tion is to be directed to the entrance of a new person : and see ! and lo ! Also 
 Ka\ fjL^v Kai, et vero etiam, and indeed too ; Kal fi^v ohSe, and indeed not even. 
 — (d) 'A\X& A^^y, at, sed vero, but indeed, but assuredly. In a, question, Ti 
 fi^y; xws fi^y; quid vero ? quid quaeso f what indeed ? uihat I ask ? 
 
 Kemake. Instead of /i ^ y, the Ionic writers employ the shorter form ft 4 y, 
 which, as well as fiiiv and fidv, is found in Horn. also. Even in the Attic dia- 
 lect, liiv is sometimes used instead of ju^y, e. g. in an answer. X. C. 1. 4, 4. 
 iroTepa yvditATjS epya Kplycts ; Ilpeirei ftey rcc ^-Jr' utpeKeitf. yiyv6ixeva yydfirjs fpyu 
 ehat. This confirmatiye /t 4 v, instead of /i-riv, occurs in the following con- 
 nections: (a) Me'yToi expresses confirmation, surely ; very often in antitheses, 
 like vero, to denote a limitation; thus, Kal ii4vToi, ov fievrot, &\Xc^ u4y- 
 Toi. — (b) Mtyouy or fiey oSy, sane quidem, quite certainly, yea indeed, is 
 used, for the most part, only in replies, e. g. viyv /ity o S y ; very often when 
 some correction is made. X. C. 2. 7, 5. of irapek ool tovtuv oiSiy 4irl<rTa»Tat 
 TToiuy; ndyra /iiy o8y {but do tliose with you know nothing of these things? 
 yes, everything, immo vero omnia). So oior/ij) jueyoOy, immo non. — (c) 
 •t«yS^ or t^hy Sri, quite certainly, yea indeed; always in the phrases ij ueyS^i, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
*317.J EMPHATIC suprixES Trip, yl, roi. ' 491 
 
 it ''n^^i.A'"^^ ''•"'^' «'«' ""S^. 7^ fi^y-Si, instead of ^ ^i,y JA, 
 etc. On the concessive n^y, see § 322, 3. ' 
 
 2.''H expresses confirmation (profeeto). In order to strengthen it, ^L■l,v ia 
 often joined with it. 'H n-ou, sureity jWcerf, often ironically. The Epic ^toi 
 like tJ, expresses assurance : surely, certainly. 
 
 3. N i! in Epic, expresses also an asseveration, but generally in an ironical or 
 ncomful manner (like the Attic S'tivav), indeed, forsooth, certainly, nempe. 
 
 4, N^, the Lat. noe, expresses an assevei-ation, hat only in affirmative sen- 
 tences, e. g. vii rhv Ala, in truth, surely. — From v^ is formed the lengthened v a I 
 
 (as Stti from S^), which has the same meaning, and is often used with /ii. 
 
 M(£ likewise denotes an asseveration; in affirmative sentences: yol /tct rhv 
 Aia ; in negative : ov lili rbv Ma. But where /itt Ala stands without a nega- 
 tion, then a negative clause precedes or follows, or it is clear from the context 
 and from an accompanying adversative particle, that the sentence is to be ud 
 derstood as negative, like X. C. 3. 13, 3. 
 
 § 317. C. Emphatic suffixes irip, ye, rot, 
 
 1. Uip is the enclitic, and hence the abridged form of the adverb Wp*, 
 though and through (Lat. per). The radical meaning of irep is through ana 
 through [throughout). Tlep agrees with yi in that, like the latter, it gives empha- 
 sis to the word with which it is joined, but it differs from y4, in making the 
 emphasis extensive (consequently denoting the measure, size, the extent of the 
 idea) ; ye, on the contrary, makes the emphasis intensive (consequently de- 
 noting degree, the inward strength or force of the idea). In the Common 
 Language, irep is not used alone, but in relation to another thought. Hence it 
 is often connected with conjunctions and relatives, e. g. Ssrep, throughout, en- 
 tirety, the very sami who, S<rosirep, altogether as great as, precisely as great, ot6s irep, 
 entirely, exactly of such a character as, etc., Srrou vep, just where, wherever, 8&ec 
 TTcp, just whence, whence soever, eas irep, up to the very time, as far as, until, irei vep, 
 since, iiretS^ ircp, forasmuch, seeing that, whereas, ttircp, if indeed, if even. In Eng. 
 the meaning of both particles is often given by merely emphasizing the word 
 to which they belong. 
 
 2. r e denotes intension, an inward force, certainty, assurance, and thus ren- 
 ders an idea emphatic and distinguishes it from others ; it may be used either lo 
 augment or restrict the force of a word, e. g. ^71^ ye {I indeed, I for my part, 
 however it may be with others), ai ye, ourifj ye, iroWd ye, 6\Cya ye, etc. It 
 depends, like the enclitics, on the word whose meaning it renders emphatic. 
 In connection with relatives and conjunctions, it serves to confirm or complete 
 the preceding statement. Thus, osye, whc or which indeed, who certainly, qui 
 quidem; Hsxep y e, just as indeed ; el ye, if indeed, if however, siquidem ; after 
 adversative conjunctions: kuItoi ye, awi ye, etc., and yet indeed (like 
 quamquam quidem, verum quidem), ye makes an antithesis prominent, since it 
 defines more exactly, limits or con-ects what precedes. X. C. 1. 2, 3. k a It 01 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
492 ' SYNTAX. [^ 318 
 
 ve ou5e7rt5iroT6 iv4ttX^ro SidiiffKohos tluai roirou (OEMAINLY Socrates made hit 
 pupils iisefd men, although, etc.). Te' is veiy often used in replies and ansmrs, 
 in order to indicate that they either confirm, augment, complete, limit, or 
 correct, the thought contained in the preceding question. 
 
 3. Tol (enclitic) means sureli), certainly^ cote, and serves also to render an 
 object marked and prominent. It is often connected with pronouns, e. g. iyi 
 Toi, iymyirai, I surely, I most certainly, rineU t»i, ravrd toi. It is particulariy 
 employed in quoting general propositions and proverbs, since by it an assertion 
 is referred to a general truth and thereby confirmed. Theogn. 74. Trmpol toi 
 noKK&v Ttienhii exavai v6ov. With adversative particles, c. g. k air at, tamen, 
 qmrnquam (properly and surely), nivroi, tamen (5 316, Rem.), arip toi, 
 iwi TOI, b«t certainly. Also, oSroi (/t^Toi), certainly not, yip toi, far 
 indeed,for certainly, ^rot — ^, still stronger ^toi ye — ^, either indeed — or. 
 
 ^ 318. D. Negative Particles ovk and fi-^. 
 
 1. oil (like its compounds, e. g. ouSt, eSre, o uSef r, etc.) is an objective 
 negative ; p. ■fi subjective, i. e. o d is used when something is denied absolutely, 
 independently, by itself {objectively) ; iiij (and its- compounds), on the contary, 
 when something is denied m reference to the conception, view, or Kill of the 
 speaker or of some other person (subjectively). Both are commonly placed beforo 
 the words to which the negation is to be applied. On the position after tho 
 word to be negatived, see § 15, 4. 
 
 2. Hence ovk stands : (a) in all sentences containing a direct assertion, wheth- 
 er these are expressed by the Indicative or Optative ; hence also (b) in subor- 
 dinate clauses with 8ti and lis [that); (c) in simple interrogative clauses,, 
 both direct and indirect ; (d) in subordinate clauses denoting time, with ot€, 
 iireiS^i, etc.; (e) the ground or reason, with Sti, 5i(!ti, iirtl, etc.; (f) the 
 consequence, with Hsre either with the Ind. or Opt.; (g) in adjective clauses, 
 with if J, 3 s T 1 J, etc., which denote a concrete, objective attributive explanation ; 
 (h) when an absolute negative meaning is to be given to a single word in a 
 sentence, e. g. oiix SiyaStSs, ov KaKws; in this case ov sometimes changes the 
 idea of the word to an opposite sense. 
 
 (a) TouTo oil yi-yveroi, oijK ^y^ji^ro, ov ysii^frerai, Tavra oiiK tin ylyvoiro, > 
 — (b) Ol5a, 8ti TaijTo o4k iyifero. "^Xeyev, 8ri toSto ohx oBtbs e?x^v. — ■ 
 (c) T(j oix atvxivtTm (or ov k hi a,i<TX'l"'oiTo) /caKck \iy(sv Tiv aya^v a.vZpa.; 
 — 'Ap ov SmvpAZets -riv 'S.aKpiri) ; — Ou Spoo-eis toCto ; — O ii vcpifLevits (§255, 
 4). — *>)S, ?| oS; or ^tJs,^ ov i^jj'j;, — AiSpv, ci (whether) ovx ?ipapTes ravrn 
 .\e|ai. On the dependent double question, see No. 3. — (d) "Ore ovk i5\»o» 
 01 ToAefUot, 01 "EAAijires Ti(rvxa(oy. ^- (e) "On of fiip^mpoi ovx ^TT^3i)(roi', oj 
 'EWtives tS Spri ov KotTeAiiroj'. — (f) X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. raxii tA ^pia ainiKiiKU 
 (KBpos), SsT€ S 'Aa-Tvdyns ovKtr' eTxey aiiT^ a-v\\4-vcui ^pla. — (g) 'Airfip, 
 til oil K eiSf s. 'Avlip, ft v J K i,y ^avp,i^ois. 
 
 3. M^ on the contrary, stands : (a) with commands, warnings; heuce with the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
< 318.1 NEGATIVE PAKTICLES oliK AND fiij. 493 
 
 imp. and with the impercaive Subj,; (b) with uns/jes and exhortations; (c) ia 
 deliberative questions [^ 209, 1. (b)] ; (d) in clauses denoting purpose, with 'tva, 
 etc. (also with Stus and tlie Indie. JFut.) ; (e) in conditional clau.ses, with ei with 
 the ludic. or Opt., idv, Stuv, ^iric, ear &y with tlie Subj., Jre yt — siqui' 
 dem ; so also ia subordinate clatlses which denote a repetition, whether they are 
 iatroduced by a temporal conjunction, or by «', liv, or by the relative, etc. ; 
 (f)in clauses denoting consequence or resaZ«, with Ssre and an Inf.; (g) in 
 adjective clauses with 'is, S i x i s, etc., which imply a condition or purpose, in 
 general when a subordinate clause contains an idea which is expressed only as a 
 conception, supposition ; hence when the idea of a class or species as such is more 
 precisely defined, and the sentence may be resolved by is, qui with the subjunctive 
 {=ita covtparatus, ui) \ (h) in the second member of a dependent disjunctive 
 question (whether — or not), ov as well as /ffi is used. PI. Phaed. 70, d. (r/cefd- 
 juri&a, c!t' dtpa er &Sou elorlv al yj/vxat reA^uTTjjrtivrtav tQv kp^p^ntov, efTe Kal uS, 
 Crit. 48, b. ffKeffreoK, vSTefiou SiKanoy ifjt^ 4i'^4ifde .•Keipcitr^ai ^|*eVot, fi^ kipievruv 
 'AAiimlmi>, t^ oi Slxaioy. PI. lip. 339, a. ei a\i)dcs (& \4y€is), ^ ju^, ireipiaofjuu 
 fia^eitf^ Phil. 21, b. toCt* aSrtJ, et ^ x^^^^i ^ /^^ X"^P^'*> avdyxT} S^ov at 
 iiyj/Of'ty., Kev6v 76 tvra. ircEffTjy tppoy^tF^tas* Isae. 5, 14. oh iei {ifias ^K t&v tov Ka- 
 riyyipov \6yuv Tohs \6yous Karafiay^iif/etj/, et KaXats vfiii/ Ke7vrat, ft fi^, oAV iit 
 ruu viixwv Tohs tov icaTtjySpou K6yovs, ct ip^Sis £^a; SiSd^oviri Th vpayfia, fi oij* 
 But in those dependent questions, in which there is merely a distinction between what 
 is, and what is not, pel\ is used, when the predicate of the first member is not repeated, 
 but must be supplied ; but o A as well as n ■li, when it is repeated. Dem. Cept. § 142. 
 Koyitrafi'^e Tpbs v/ms afirolJs, rl re (TujttjS^treTai Ka7e^^iffp,ivots {ifiiy tou i/6/jlov Kal ri 
 fnif. X. C. 3. 6, 10. oXa^a, Sviirai re (^uAaicai iirlKaipol ehi Kal &v6aai it'll, Kal Sviffai 
 T6 (^povpol tKavol elfft /col STT6(roi /k^j elffu Aescb. 1, 27. 6 vofxobiTTis Sta^^iiStjv 
 inriSet^fV, ois XP^ Srnitiyopuv Ka\ ois ov Set \cyciv eV rip S^/np. — M^ is also used 
 in direct and indirect interrogative sentences, which express fear, anxiety on the 
 part of the inquirer, and hence require a negative answer ; (i) in forms of 
 swmring, and not seldom when one swears that something shall not happen, but 
 sometimes also, when one swears that something has not luxppened; in the latter 
 case, the feeling by which the denial or abhorrence is expressed, is denoted 
 by u.% 
 
 (a) M5) TfpiEiJie, It.'h ypifris (^ 259, 5). — (b) EK&e ii.}i ypipoisi — M^ toSto 
 yivoiTo ! — M 7( fojuev ! — M 5; ypi(pa>iiev ! — (c) PI. Symp. 213, a. aWd /wi Ae- 
 vere, ehtu, ?) HI'S; ffvpmleir^e, 1^ oH; Ep. 337, b. -irSs Xeyeis; /t^ artoKpivaiuu i 
 (shaU I not answer thee?). — (d) Aeym, tva /tJ) votp, — (e) Ei ;ttJ; \4yeis.— 
 'Eiv n^ \4yris. — 'Otav -ravra /iii yenrirai. PI. Prot. 345, e. is tiV fiii kokA 
 iroip exdy, roiray ^rjo-li/ ivaiveriis etvat {as often as oncdoes not willingly do evil, 
 etc.). X. Cy. 2. 3, 20. ei (Sre) ft-h SAAo T( (rvovZai6repov vpirToiev, Tainri tt) 
 iraiSi^ eXP&vTo (as often as, whenever, they were not engaged in more important busi- 
 ness).' — (f) PI. Phaed. 66, d. T^ (tS/us dittos eiorA'^TTei Site ft)).S&air*iu«Jr' ouroO 
 Ka^opav TiATj&ei. — (g) PI. Ap. 21. & /«)) oTSo, ouSc oS>;iioi ciSeVai (= ef tito ^)l 
 oUa). Hence on /i'^,«nfes,ms8 (properly oMeritTifi^, then generally instead of 
 ei M^), 3iroi ftii, except those who not. Her. 1, 32. iv Tf puutp^ XP^"'? '"AAA fiev iffti 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
194 SYNTAX. [i 318 
 
 lS4ew, Ta ( = &) /i'^ Tis i^e\ei {multa, quae ita aunt comparata, ut, one can see manj 
 things of such a nature that he would not wish to see). Andoc. 3, 41. '^i)tpiea.<rd 
 toioDto, ^f Sk fiTiSeTOTc ifuv iKTaneXijaei. — (h) Mri T^fti/Tj/cty i irar^p 
 (my father is not dead, is he? = is it not to he feared that my father is dead f) 
 ioPovfUu, /nil 6 TTariip re^i/riKey 1 {I fear that my father is dead, I am anxious to 
 know whether my father is dead). M^ Spicreis roOrd; (you will not do this,wiU 
 yoM?). Mij StiXoX lff6fie^a ! (we shall not he cowards, shall we? shall we he cow- 
 ards?). Mj) voaus ;''kpa fiii vovets ,■ (you are not sick, are you f). — (i) Ar. 
 Eccl. 999. lih. tJjk 'A^poSirriv . . juJl 'yd a' irpiiira (I wiU not let you go, the thing 
 sJiall not be). Aor. 194. ^& 7^1'.. 11 ii 'yii v6rifia KO/ufiSrepov Ijxowd iru, Beware! 
 1 have not listened. M^ is not unusual with the Inf. X. An. 7. 6, IS. onvia 
 dfuv ^eohs &iravras Koi irdffas fiijZe k ifiol iSla {nr4ff-j(zT0 2e^&7;s ex^**'' 
 
 Remaek 1. In all the instances above given, except (a) (b) (g), oO is used 
 when a single word in the sentence is to be made negative, e. g. O u t^iwiuev ; 
 negemus? Isocr. Paneg. 71, 6. \ap6ines 4(aKisX'^iovs rav 'EW'tlvap, of iv rais 
 avTwv obx oTot t' ijtrav (^v (nequirent) ; hence in the combinations oiSely 
 SsTis ov; oiStvhs '6tov ov, etc. (^ 332, Bern. 12); so also in ovk Itrd' 
 S iroj I oil-, for these expressions are, as it were, blended in a single word, like 
 nidlus non. Ei ov Sdiaei (recusahil). Dera. Cor. 320, 283, &st' oi /itiivfiir- 
 dai (= ohlivisci). Moreover ei can stand with 06, when the clause takes the 
 place of a causal sentence. 
 
 Rem. 2. On o«/c fev Xe'7011 touto, instead of fiii \eye, see § 260, 2. (4) (b) ; 
 on oil SpiiFeis toDto (instead of ^^7 Spdffits) and oil Spdtreis tovto] (^ do this 
 indeed), see § 255, 4. ' 
 
 4. M^ is regularly used with the Inf. But after verbs of thinking : ofo^ai, vo- 
 ui^oj, 6Tro\afi$dv(o, SokSj, as well as after (^77/xf and cucoita, ov is commonly used, 
 since the Infinitive (Ace. with Inf.) in this case has the force of an afBrma- 
 tion ; much more seldom after other verha putandi et dicendi. When, however, 
 these verbs are in the imperative, or in the imperative Subj., or in another con- 
 struction which requires /lii, then /i^ follows. 
 
 PI. Theat. 152, b. elichs tro^hv ifSpa fj.^ KTjpetv. X. C. 2. 1, 3. rh fxij ipeiyav 
 Tohs irSvovi. 1. 1, 20 davp.dC<a, Uttus ttot^ iv e Itr^T] tray 'A^vaioi ^uKpdrTfP 
 irepl Toiis ^eous fii] ., xippoveTy. An. 7. 6, 18. optfiiw vfuvy /jltjS' &. 4^1 iS(f 
 uffesx^TO 2e(J^y ex^iv. X. C. 1. 1, 19. (01 voWol) oXoyrat tovs ^eoiis rk fJtev 
 el54vat, ret 5' ovk elSevat. 2. 4. Tavrijv rijv e^tv (vivendi rationem) rijv ttjs ^^vxv^ 
 iwtfi^Keiav ovK ifJiirodl^ettf e<p7]. 1. 15. iriffTcvay j^eoTs trus ovk eJvcu deohs 
 iro/jLi^ev; X. C. 4. 8. 2. 6 ixo\oye'iTai ovS4pa ira tuv fivTifiovevofievotv dr- 
 dpdmav KaKKtov ddvarov iyeyKe7v. More frequently /jtii, as: Isocr. Phil. 109. 
 wfio\4yovy fiij^evhs ir<6iroTe rotroirov irpdyixaTos BiafiapreTy. Id. Dcm. 22. 
 voiXL^e /MTj^ey elycu rwy av^pu-nivuv fi4^atoy. 
 
 Hem. 3. When an abstract substantive or substantive adjective stands in- 
 stead of the Inf , then either oiiK or /» 17 may be used, according to the natni* 
 of the clause into which the substantive or the substantive adjective may ba 
 resolved, e. g. Ar. Eccl. 115. Seu-bv S' iarlv ^ p), l/jiirfipla (= « jc^ t(s 4a- 
 Ti» ?/*ireipos). Th. 1, 137. ypd\pa.s r^v ruy ytfvpZp oil Std\v<rtv (=8x1 ol 
 its [l/iat^ ui y4(t>vpcu ov SieAwijtrai'). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'"^'^■] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND flrj. 4.96 
 
 Eem 4. With some verbs, e. g. ,J,^,„,, ot,<r^a,, a|.oS^. {^..rv.'.ro- 
 l"-.'' *\ "fP'i^S; which properly refers to the Inf., is usually joined with the 
 finite verb, thus oC .^,^,, like nego, I dmy, refuse. X. An. 1. 3, 1. „Z arpar.l 
 TM ovKjAaa-av ,emi toS vp6(ru (negaverunt se Hums esse). Th. 2 89 fuyeiaih- 
 fffa{v^s), OVK a|,a;y t4 ^j, Seiri iv dfijiaSl^ ^x^iu {desiring that you should 
 not fear what IS not to.be feared). rr . a \ y j, » »«ociiu 
 
 5. With the participle or adjective, ;i.^ is used only when these can be re- 
 solved by a conditional clause, or when they stand in a connection which 
 requires ^ ; in all other cases, o 4 is used. O 6 SwtJjuei'os, one who cannot, or is 
 mable, ov 0ov\6iievos, nolens, o6k wayKaTov, unnecessary, ri o4 icoXi $ov\fi. 
 mra, turpia consilia ; 6 oli mareiuv (one who does not believe, is qui non credit, or 
 gmm (since) non credit, or quia non credit) ; d r i <pi\o(rofav (is qui non philoso- 
 phatur) ; S nil mimiaiv (if one does not believe, si quis non credit). X. An. 4. 4, 
 15. oh-osy&p 4S6Kfi koI Trp6Tcpoi' ToXKh ijSii oX7j»eD(roi ToiaOra, to &to re is 
 iivTO, Kalri /tj; Svra &s oIik Sptu (if anything was not, he represented it as not 
 being). So 'H iro(pla rav iuvav Kci ht] Seii/Sy avipcia itTTW, PI. OlSd at raSro 
 oh ■Kod\aavra. 'lAyytiKt tV W^ii' oh iroKiopKtihiiaav. Protag. 360, d. used 
 in philosophical definitions of an ideid assumption ; on the contrary rh oh Seivi 
 objective, used of actual dangers. X. Cy. 1. 2, 7. tv tti> yyQffi Swaiitvov jikv xdp'y 
 mroSiSiircu, /i ^ hroSiSivra Si, KO\i(ou(n rovrov laxvpas ( = iiv riya kt\. ) (whoever 
 they knew capable of repaying a kindness, if he did not repay it, they, etc.). 3. 1 , 1 6. 
 t/ yhp &v . . xpVo't' if Tts lirxvp$ 5 avSpda /ii/ ai^povi (= el fti/ irdippuv fl-q). 
 
 6. When a negative sentence contains indefinite pronouns or adverbs, e. g. any 
 one, any how, any where, at any time, ever,, etc., these are all expressed negativdy 
 These negative expressions neither destroy nor strengthen each other, as they 
 do not stand in an opposite relation, but each of them is to be considered inde- 
 pendent. The negatives must be of the same kind, i. e. either compounded 
 of ohtt or iji.il. Double negatives in Latin, English, and the modern languages, 
 destroy each other, but not in Greek. 
 
 PI. Hp. 495, b. (Tjitiicpct ^iffts ohZiv fteya oh54voT e ovSeva oSre ISttirtiv 
 St t ir6\iv Sp^ (a mean nature never does anything noble either for any private 
 individual or for the State). Hipp. Maj. 291, d. (rh KaXiv) h /xiiSsiroTf ala- 
 X9^v II ri S a /ioS pTjSecl <l>av(7Tiu (which never ANTWHEEE seems to ant one 
 displeasing). Lysid. 214, d. & xoKhs offr* aya^^, otfre kukw ovSeirore els 
 a\ri^ (jn^tttv Ipxprai. In like manner the simple negative (oh, /t-li), which in 
 this case must always precede the other negatives, is so connected with its 
 comjtounds that neither lose their force ; hence ohx iariv ohSei/ (there is not 
 anything, there is nothing) ; so also the negative parts are joined with the nega- 
 tive whole, c. g. Oh Sivarai oSt* ed \4yeiv oiSr eS iroieiv roits (pl\ovs, he can 
 neither — rmr ; in like manner also ohS4, firiSe, not even, nc— quidem, are used 
 in a negative sentence, e. g. oh ^vvarat o u 5 e vvv eS irois'iv robs (jiiXovs (he is not 
 ible, not even now, to benefit his friends). 
 
 Rem. 5. If the finite verb is connected with a participle, the negative, when 
 it refers to both, is usually placed with the Part., though only when the Part, 
 precedes the verb. Th. 1, 12. /ierck ri TpwiKck ii 'EWis in fieravio-jaTo koI kot- 
 (itifero, SsTe u^ ^(rux'ta'aira aufiid^^vai (i.e. SsT« fiii fiffvxdirai koI /tj 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
196 
 
 [§318 
 
 «u|j)a?rai). Where the negative is so placed, it must be considered as belong- 
 ing to the whole sentence, and not to a single word. 
 
 7. 06 (14^7 with the Subj. or Fat. Indicative, is elliptical, since with oi<k » 
 verb denoting anxiety or fear, which is sometimes also expressed, must be sup- 
 plied, and /fj) must be referred to this verb. Hence ov nil is used, when tha 
 idea to be expressed is, it is not {oi) to be feared that (fiii) something will happep, 
 e.g. oi ((()Oj3oC/iai) /i?) yv'riTai tovto (non wcreor, ne hoc fiat, .his CERTAINLT 
 will not happen). PI. Crit. 46, c. ed Krai, Sti oi p^ (roi luyx^pV" (*« assured, 
 that I do not fear that I shall make concessions, i. e. he assured, that I certainly shaU 
 not make concessions to you). In a question with the second Pers. of the Put. , 
 Indicative. Ar. Nub. 505. oi jui) \a\-fia-eis, aK\' aKo\oua^o-eir i/iol; I shaU not 
 expect that you will talk = do not talk (5 255, 4), 
 
 8. After verbs and expressions of fear, anxiety, uncertainty, doubt, distrust, — 
 denyiny, hindering, abstaining, — preventing, forbidding, contradicting, the Inf. 
 with the negative ^^ commonly follows instead of the Inf without M> 'ho 
 Greeli repeating with the Inf. the negative idea implied in these words, for the 
 purpose of strengthening the negative view of the sentence. This nse of li-q 
 is sometimes regarded as pleonastic ; but it is entirely in accordance with the 
 frequent usage of the language in employing two negatives for the purpose of 
 increasing the negative force of the sentence ; hence, when a negative was 
 contained in a preceding word, it was not unnatural to join a negative with 
 the Inf that followed. 
 
 KuKia ffe /i)) toCto iroieni (I prevent you from doing this). Her. 3, 128. 
 AapfTos airayopeiei ijutc fiij 5opv^opeeiv*OpoiTea {Darius forbids you to act as 
 abodyguardto Oroetes), 66. i npri|iJo'ir7)s t^apvos tiv p.'ti airaKTeii/ai S/ic/)Su> 
 {denied that he killed Smerdis). Th. 3, 6. t^j juti/ aa\c£(roTjs elpyov nii XP'?"'*'" 
 Tois HiTvKTivaiovs. 5,25. airerxoyTO /»)) M r^v eKCLripav •j^i' <rT/jciTeDiroi 
 {they abstained from mardiing into the country of each other). (But atfl'xii'OA'ai 
 /nil Troieri/ ri signifies, 7 am ashamed NOT to do something, X. An. 6. 5, 4.) 
 
 Rem. 6. When expressions of fear, anxiety, doubt and the like, are followed 
 by jiii witli he Ind. or Subj. (Opt.), nit must be considered as an interrogative, 
 numne, whether not, and may often be translated by that;^ e. g. SeSoiks, nM '"">- 
 &iyri (metm, NE moriatur, I fear whether lie will not die = that he will die) ; eSe- 
 SoiKeif, nv aTTO^im {metuebam, HE moreretur); ScSoiKa, nh riAvTiKsii (nb iMor- 
 tuus sit, I fear whetlier he has not died, is not dead = I fear that he has died, is 
 dead). On the contrary, /ij; oi with the Ind. and Subj. (Opt.), is used after 
 the above expressions, when it is to be indicated that the thing feared will not 
 take place, or has not taken place ; e. g. SeSotxa, jujj ouk avoAoivri (he nou mo- 
 riatur, I fear that he will not die) ; iSfSoiiceiv, |U j) oiic aTro^dvoi (nb non morere- 
 tur, I feared that he would not die) ; ScSoi/ca, ^^ oi r4Ain)iKV (nb non martuus 
 sit, that he is not dead). 
 
 ' In expressions of fear, there is always a double idea in the mind, the fear, 
 that something will take place, and the hope that it will not. This double idea 
 both the Greek and Latin seem to indicate by using a negative after verbs of 
 fear, the negative being referred to a verb of hoping understood ; but as the idea 
 of fear only is expressed in English, the negative is rendered that. Hence Ae'Soi- 
 M, /t^ avoStii'ii [metuo, ne moriatur, I fear thai he will die, but hope Hint he will not] 
 
 • 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
§ 318.] NEGATIVE PARTICLES OVK AND /iT^. 497 
 
 i). Even wnen, instead of the Inf., the conjunctions St(, &s with the iiniti 
 verb follow expressions of doubt and denial, the negation is sometimes repeated 
 m the dependent subordinate clause by oii. 
 
 X. E. Ath . 2, 17 ft^n/eitr&ai to& Swoij, Sti o i vaprjv {to deny to others thai 
 he vms present). PI, Meno. 89, d. 8ti S' oI,k Hariv 4m(rT-fiiJin, <ric^at, liv <roi 
 SoKu eixiTas i,irt<rTt7v (but consider whether I seem to you justly to doubt tluit 
 this is knowledge). Dem. Onet. 871, 14. &sS' oIik ixeims iyedpyfi tjjv jfli>, olin 
 ^Uvm' i.pvi]S>rivai [he could nxit deny that he cultivated the land). Isoc. Archid. 
 ^48. oiSih ttv TO\fiii(retey avTentetv, &s ou r^y liareipiav fia^^OK tSiv &\\av 
 
 Kem. 7. So even after 06 iiaWov (or vphen the clause in which imWov 
 stands, has a negative sense), ou is sometimes used, which in English is pleo- 
 nastic. Comp. the French, w^here after a Comparative qua ne is regularly 
 used, e. g. II donne plus que vous n' avez donn^, for the piirpcae of giving em- 
 phasis to the idea of diversity (consequently a negative idea), which is contained 
 in the Comparative (the gift of one is different fromfnot like that of the other). 
 Her. 4, 118. tJkci & Tliparis ovSiv Ti fiaWov iv' ri/ieas, t) ou /ca) iirl ificas 
 (does not come against us more than against you). X.H. 6.3, 15.t/ odv Se<(= oi Sei) 
 iKiivov riv xp6vov hiafiLevav, eas &« iwi ir\^^ovs Koxav avfiiraip.ev, liaM ov,^oix 
 &s TfJx'o'Ta tV flp^iyri" iroi'ijo-ao'&oi ; in Th. 3,36. the negation is contained in nerd- 
 V016. ris ^ii aitTois (they repented == they no longer approved), n At^i/ o v is some- 
 times used in a similar manner. X. E.L. 15, 6. tSpas irivm !mmi<rTavrM fiaai\eis, 
 wKijv OVK efopoi (all the kings rise from their seat, except the ephori). 
 
 10. M 7) u with the Infinitive is used instead of the Infinitive withovt nega- 
 tion, with the expressions mentioned in No. 8., when the negative 06 or 
 another word which may be considered a negative, precedes fij) ou. M>, ou is 
 here merely equivalent to the simple fi)), and hence is not expressed in English 
 whei-e iiij -ypuld not be (comp. No. 8, above). 
 
 OuScc KwXtJeitre /i.^ oi/K &iro^oweiu (nothing hinders you to die, from 
 dying). X. An. 3. 1, 13.^ el yevria^fie^a inl ^a(rt\ei, ri ifi-TroSiji/ (^ oitBey i^i^ 
 •troBitv) fAii ovxi (^/uSj) vfipi^ofjLeyovs airobaveTy (what hinders us from dying after 
 being treated with insult); Vect. 3, 7. oi SiseKirts cl/it -rh //.ii ovx^ irpohi- 
 uws tiv Tabs rira\tTa5 els t^ rotavra elstpepetv (I am not without hope that the citizens 
 would contribute for such purposes). Cy. 2. 2, 20. aiaxp^v (= ou iwXbv) tr 
 avTtXeyeiv, /t ^ ovxi rhy ir\eiiTTa Kol iroyouvTa Kol uipeKovvTa rh Kotvhy, rovrop 
 KoL jieyiffTuy ci.^iova'^cu. 
 
 KjEM. 8. It is seldom in this case that /iii is used instead of /lij oi with the 
 Inf. With the real negative expressions, u Sivafiai, kSiyaros, oix oX6s 
 T* elfil, oiSe fiia iji.T]X<^*''h i^rt {^ ov iSvyaT6y iffj ty), ai irei^ai, oix 
 oaiiv iffTty, oix elK6s iariv (it is not probable), oil <l>riiJ.i, and the lilie, 
 and also such as &yoia, ciydijTrfj' ^itti, the following Inf. is actually made 
 KfjaftVe by the accompanying /lii oi (sometimes also by /i^ alone), since the 
 above expressions, when separated from the negative connected with them (or 
 the a privative), have no negative force. Ou Svya/iM pt.ii ou iroteiy (non pos- 
 sum non facere, I cannot not do, i. e. I must do). X. Apol. 34. offre ju^ fiefivrjadai 
 Siyafuu auroij, oiire fii.ept,yrip.eyos /iii oiK 4ir(uye7y (I must think of him, and if 1 
 think of him I must praise him). PI. Up. 427, e. oiSev \eyeis ■ ab yap ujreffx"" 
 ifjTiiffeiy, iis oix &<r'iy "oi ty /iii 06 PaT]S)ety SiKaioffvyy els SiyaiMV ttoi'tI 
 Tpdwtp (since it would not be right for i/ou kot to render assistance). Her. 7, 5. v 11 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
498 SYNTAX. [i 319. 
 
 ctii6s iari 'A^yaiovs ipymraiicvovs iroWi ^5r) Kova Tiepiras, fii) ov Sowai Si 
 «as, Tuv (= Sv) iml-naav (it is not right that the Athenians should NOT atone for 
 their injustice). PI. Symp. 218, c. Trim i.v6i\Tov rryoV/ioi elfol <roi /iij oi ko) 
 TovTo xap/feff^oi {non sanum judico tibi hoc NON gratijficari). OH (pitm tovto u j| 
 oStus ^x"" (nego id sic se non habere, I deny that this is not so). — Also after tha 
 expressions Seiphp elvai, aiaxfi", aiax^yi" elvai, alfrxv^f^^h 
 which contain a negative idea, the Inf. follows with fi^ oi, when it is to be 
 made negative. X. An. 2. 3, 11. Sste irao'iv aiVx'i'")'' fTi/at, /iij o&x' 
 (rva-TTovSd^eiv [so that all were ashamed [= none were willing] not to be busy). — 
 Sometimes /i^ oli occurs after negative sentences with participles also, in the 
 sense of if not, except, instead of the usnal ji^. PI. Sys. 212, d. ovk tart (f>i\op 
 tS> (l>i\oSvTt oiSei/ /iii oIik am^iKow (nothing is lovely in the eyes of the lover 
 except that which returns love)^ 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 § 319. A. Coordination. 
 When two or more sentences stand in a close connection 
 with each other, there is a two-fold relation to be distin- 
 guished. They are either so related to one another as to 
 exhibit a unity of thought, though each is, in a measure, 
 independent of the other, e. g. Socrates was very ivise, 
 Plato also was very loise ; or so, that they are wholly uni- 
 ted, the one defining and explaining the other, the one 
 being the dependent member of the other, e. g. when the 
 spring comes the roses bloom. The first kind of connection 
 is called Coordination, the last Subordination, and the sen- 
 tences Coordinate and Subordinate. In coordinate sen- 
 tences, therefore, the members are independent of each 
 other, but in subordinate sentences, one member is dC' 
 pendent on the other. 
 
 I came, I saw, T conquered. — Coordinate. 
 When I came, I conquered. — Subordinate. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 320,321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 499 
 
 Remaek 1. The coordinate as well as the subordinate conjunctions are 
 properly used only to connect whole sentences ; but when several sentences 
 have single members in common, these common members are usually expressed 
 but once. In this way the sentences are either contracted into one sentence, the 
 subject or predicate common to the sentences being expressed but once ; or 
 there Is at least an abbreviation of the sentences, each sentence having its own 
 separate subject, but the predicate common to the sentences being expressed 
 only with the subject of one sentence. O i "E \\ 77 1/ « s toIs TroXe/ilois iw4&ev- 
 T fcol KoK&s ifjLaxitravT 0, 'S,iuKf)jLTi\s Kol nXcErci^i' iro^ol ^ffav. Oi jUci'^'GA- 
 \7iVfS Trapit rht/ iroraiiiy, 01 5e Ilepirat iv Speffiv i(rTpaToTr€SfiffavTo, 
 
 Bedi. 2. In respect to the grammatical form of connection, all coordinate 
 sentences are alike ; they are all treated grammatically as principal sentences ; 
 but in respect to their meaning and logical relations, they may be different. 
 For every thought which forms a complementary member of another thought, 
 can be expressed in a coordinate sentence, as was always the case, in the ear- 
 liest use of language, e. g. Th lap ^>iAe, Ka\ ri, ^6Sa Iw^iT, instead of 8t f t^ 
 lap ^\de, tIi^. i. (the spring came and the roses bloom, instead of when the spring 
 has come the roses bloom). 
 
 } 320. Different forms of Coordination. 
 Coordination consists either in eaipanding, contrasting, or ex- 
 cluding a thought. The first is called copulative coordination, 
 the second adversative, the third disjunctive. Sentences also 
 which stand in a causal relation to each other, may be coordi- 
 nate, and are called caudal coordinate sentences. 
 
 k 321. I. Copulative Coordination. 
 
 I. A copulative coordinate sentence is one in which two or more thoughts 
 which are considered independent, are so united together, that the thought ex- 
 pressed in the coordinate sentence, gives a greater extent to the thought of the 
 preceding sentence. A copulative coordinate sentence is either annexive or 
 enhansive ; in the former, a second thought or clause is merely joined to a pre- 
 ceding one ; in the latter, the statement made in the sentence applies with more 
 force to the second member than to the first. An annexive coordinate sentence 
 is made : — 
 
 (a) By Kal, et, and, more seldom in prose by the enclitic t4, que, and; 
 Kai and re have, in general, the same difference of meaning as et and jue. 
 Kal connects members of a sentence equally important, or those in which the 
 one following is stronger than the one preceding ; hence it often strengthens or 
 mhances the idea of the preceding member or is a more full explanation of it 
 (ac,alque,et quidem); re appends some addition which belongs to the preceding 
 member ; in prose, words are seldom connected by a simple te, but sentences 
 much oftener. — (b) in a more emphatic and definite manner by Kal — Kal, 
 't—et, both — and, not only — hut also, more seldom by t 6 — tc; the difference 
 between the two in this case is, that with the former (ko£ — /ioO the single 
 members appear more independent and forcible, than with the latter (re — r^j; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
50(J SYNTAX. [}321 
 
 hence the former is used, when the members arc of different kinJs or are and 
 thetic; — (e) by ri—Kal, both — and, not only — but also, when it is to be indi- 
 cated that the connected members stand in an intimate connection with each 
 other; by the stronger koi, the secowrf member is emphatically joined to the 
 first ; they often correspond with the Lat. quum — turn, when the discourse pro- 
 ceeds from the general to the particular and more important. 
 
 SaKpirris Kol UXdruy iroipoi Jja-av. PI. Apol. 23, a. fi iv^fumlvi) iroipia oXfyon 
 Tivis Hia IittL KaX oviev6s. So iroWi Ka\ woinipi, 7ro\A4 Kal ii.eyiXu; henca 
 K a 1 toOto, and that too. X. An. 3. 2, 1 6. &veipoi ivres rSc ToKeiilav Tore wK^^os 
 Afierpov lipuvres, ofius iroXfi'fia'aTe Uvai els avrous. PI. Phaedr. 267, a. Tiffiav Se 
 Topyiav r e iiffofio' eSScty ; — 'AvApmroi Kal irya^ol Kal kokoi (but not xal Kwcal 
 Kal iroVTtpoi). K o I TrepTjTes K a 1 wAoufftot. Kal ;cp^^aTo«ol &vSpes, Kal vvp 
 Kal ael. Kal Trpara Kal Sorara. X. C. 1. 2, 4. (2»/tpaT7]j) tqv (ripMTOs 
 avros Te ovk 'iifi4\el, Tois r' aflsXovvras ovk 4-7r^i/et. Ka\6s re Kal aya^os. In 
 antitheses: 'A7oi>i£ te Kal KOKa {the good as well as the evil), xpv'^'rol -re Kal 
 •jrotrqpoi, rd r e ^pya dfioius Kal oi \6yoi. TloWd Te Kal Ka\^ epya airedei^aro. 
 Her. 6, 114. iroWol re Kal thvapLaHToL "AAXoi t6 Kal 'S/aKpaTijS (quum alii, 
 turn, S.). Her. 6, 136. MiAriaSea etrxoi' iv trrdfjutri o? tc &\Koi Kal fidkiara 
 s.dv^nritos. Hence £\Aa)S Te Kai (quum aliter, turn, not only in other respects, 
 hut aha), especially (but &Wus Te without Kof signifies praetereaque, adde 
 quod, i. e. and especially). The connection is expressed still more strongly by 
 Te' — Kol Sii Kal (quum — tum vero etiam). PI. Ep. 357, a. 6 T^aixav afi tc 
 &fSpel6TaT0S t)v Tvyx'^^ei irpbs aTrayra, Kal Sij Kal Ttfre rav Qpatru/xdxov tIJp 
 air6^(>T}<rtv (despej-ationem) ovk a-jre5e|oTo. — It is to be observed that, after ajuo, 
 aSri, oUttoi, ov ijtAdya and the like, a coordinate clause with Kai or te' — Kal often 
 follows, instead of a subordinate clause with ?Te. X. An. 7. 4, 16. ^5j) te Sii 
 Tov op6tl>ov itpaij^ero irvp, Kal ^iXavhs ffTj/ialvei rp ffdhiriyyi (the fire already began 
 to appear through the roof, and [toA«a] Silanus gives notice with his trumpet). Isocr. 
 Paneg. 119 Sjua -Tifisis re ttjs apxvs airEtTTEpotJ^e^a, koI to7s "EAAijffi:/ o.pxh "rutv 
 KaKwv eylyyero. 
 
 Bemaek 1. Koi has this strengthening, intensive force also, when it stands 
 at the beginning of a question, where the inteiTogavo/ takes np, with surprise, 
 the remark of another, and from it draws a conclusion, which shows the nul- 
 lity or absurdity of the other's statement. X. Cy. 4.2, 11. oA\' e&oi tis &i>, 
 hrt TratSes irTes 4fj.dv^ayov ; — Kal TrtJrepa iraiSes etffi <ppoi/ifj.(tiT€pot, Sste fia^e7v tA 
 <l>paCiSixei'a Kal SeiKvii^Ei/a, ?) &iiSpes ; = ac multo minus prudentes sunt. So espe- 
 cially Kal irSj; PI. Ale. 1, 134, c. Sivairo &v tij pieTaSMvai, % pHi %x^'\ — Kol 
 TTws ; =7= ac minime qiiidem. 
 
 Rem. 2. If more than two numbers succeed each other, they are connected 
 in the following manner: (a) with the first member the connective is omitted, 
 
 and the other members are annexed by Ka( repeated; (h) Kai — Kai Kai'i 
 
 etc.; (c)t6 — Te' — te', etc.; (d) te'— Kai — Ka(, etc. X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. SpKToI 
 TE vaWai/s fiS-q TKriaridoavTas SUip^eipav Kal Ae'di-tes Ral Kdwpoi Kal rrapSdKeis- 
 oi 8e ^Aa^Di Kol SopKdSes Kal oi &yptoi uies Kal oi Svoi oi aypioi aaivets eiViv (e) 
 te'— te', etc., Kal (Epic.) Od. y, 413. 'Execjipaiy te STparios Te nepo-eii's t' 
 'Apnrisre Kal avrldeos Qpaav/iiiSTis. (f) te' — te' Ka£ — koi, etc. (seldom) X. 
 C.2. 2, S.yvvii iirodt^aiihri r e <pepei rh (^opriav tovto, Papumfievri t e k a ! Ki«Svi/e/f- 
 ouo-o . . Kal . . K a( ktA.. After Kai two members, considered, as it were, ona 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
? 321. J COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 501 
 
 whole, can follow with ri xal. Her. 7. 1. (lirETofe txiiaToiiri) koI vias re 
 Kal irTroy Kal ■ir\oia. X. An. 4. 4, 2. (ki6mi) /teyi^Ai) te ijc kb! PaalAaiv re 
 tlx^ t^ aaTpirrri, icaX M rats v\ilaTais oiKiais ripirus iirriaav. — But xal — t« 
 are never used as corresponding particles, in Attic Greek ; where they are 
 found in this position, the member introduced by xe, is subjoined only as a mere 
 addition to the preceding one. Th. 1, 54. KopivSnoi iiiv /cpariiiravTes . .leal &v- 
 Spas fxoyrfs BiXfoAfiTous oi/c ixiaaovs Xf^-W, voDi t e (maetermque) Karasi- 
 aavTfs irepl kpSo/iiiKopTa tuTiiirav rpoiraiov. As infrequently, likewise, Is k ai — 
 T i used in the sense of etiamque. 
 
 Rem. 3. As an enclitic, t* must always rest upon a preceding word, and indeed 
 on that word, to which xe specially belongs in the member to be connected. But 
 where the article, the attributive genitive and prepositions are used, re commonly 
 stands between these and the word it connects, e.g.ril re Sapa, ire pi re tipiivris 
 Kal 7ro\EjUou, ^axpiTovs re <ro(pia Kol aperii. If re belongs to the whole 
 sentence, it is usually joined to the first word of the sentence. Her. 6, 123. 
 o'htves ^tpevy6v t e rhi/ viivTa XP^^^^ "^^^^ Tvpdvvovs, 4k fijjx'tv^s t c ttjs tovtuv 
 i^iKnrav oi TieianrTpaTiZva t^iv rvpavvlSa. It is, also, often joined to the predi- 
 cate of the sentence, if that preceded, although it would stand after another 
 word. X. C 3. 5, 3. ^ (gua re) noWol ^iroupdi^vot tr par p 4 ir out a I re Stperris 
 iirifie\eurdai Koi &\kijiu>i yiyfea^ai (instead of aperris re iv.). 
 
 Bem. 4. In the Epic writers (and in imitation of these in the Lyric writers 
 also, though more seldom in the latter, and in the Attic writers in only a few 
 fragments },r4 is very frequently joined with conjunctions and relative pro- 
 nouns, in order to represent, in a more definite manner, the mutual relation 
 and intimate connection between the corresponding members {as well — as, 
 as — so}. This t4 either stands in both of the members, In. which case the first 
 t4 refers to the following member, anticipating it, as it were, and the second 
 refers back to the preceding; or more frequently it stands in only one of the 
 coraesponding members ; thus often et-Trep re — re, or direp — t4; fiey re 
 — S4 re 01 iwd re, as on this side, so on that, or ^eV — Se rt {ifi.\i re); 
 fie'c re — S4 [aKKi); also the whole of the first member can be omitted, and 
 be supplied by the mind, from what precedes; thus S4 re, i,wi re, also 
 often without the corresponding n4v: S4 — r4; r4 — S4; re — airip; then 
 (t a ( re, atgue, yet moreover, when the corresponding member is contained in 
 what precedes (not only — but also). 11. t, 509. rbv Se fji.4y* &VTj(rav, k o t t' ^k\vop 
 eitflnevom. Also Ssre, he, who (not only in the poets, but also sometimes in 
 Herodotus), hsris re, oX6s re, Sffos re {=ro7os, ojosj r6ffo5, Sffoy, of such 
 avature, so great, as much as). Sis re, so as, so that, Sisel re, are,iivre,STra>s 
 re, ire re, then, when, o&i re, "va re,-there, where. In Attic prose, the fol- 
 lowing combinations gtill remain, viz., oT6s r4 el/it with the Inf., signifying 
 laminthe condition, Sisre<(so that), aseire and 4sre (i. e. Ij 8 re), (fiload. 
 Moreover, i ire ire, postquam, as used by Herodotus, should also be mentioned. 
 
 Hem. 5. KaMs originally an adverb, also, even, etiam. But the idea of 
 emphasis which is expressed by k o ^ also, even, necessarily supposes a reference 
 to another clause, e. g. koI d SaKpdTris ravra eKe^ev (sc. oi fi6mv oi SaAoi, or 
 SsTrep Kol ol SWoi). According to the nature of the corresponding member to 
 be supplied, the emphatic /caf may have either a strengthening (even, yet, entirely, 
 etc.) or a weakening force (even only, only even), e.g. Kal KarayeK^s fiou (you 
 even laugh at me.). K o 1 iru ravra eKe^as (even you said this) ; — Kal /laWov (yet 
 
 SoKaf; (what ia only to be expected even?) (=nihil plane expcctandum est) 
 In Homer, after a temporal protasis, this Kal often introduces an apodosi.';, 
 and may then be translated by immediately. II. u, 478, ^ij.os S' fipiyefna 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
502 STNTAX. [i 32. 
 
 <)(£«) ^oSoSaKTi/Xoj 'Hi4j, (cal rir' Srcir' ayayoino /leri a-Tparhv fvpiiv Axat&y. 
 The use of koI in such concluding clauses, shows that the tivo clauses are co- 
 ordinate, and ical may be said to have its usual connective force, though that 
 force cannot well be expressed in English. 
 
 2. If the onneztKe "coordinate sentences are negative, they are connected : — 
 (a) By ou5e (/i))5c), not — nor, when a negative member precedes ; (b) by 
 Kal ol (fcai nil), and not, when an affirmative member precedes; this is the 
 regular form in Attic prose ; but in the Ionic and poetic writers oiSi or unSi 
 can also be used here ; (c) in a more emphatic and definite manner by o Ct e 
 — otfre (^^TE — liiiTf), neque — neqne (neve — neve), neither — nor; (d) by 
 oifTe — Te (seldom Kal), negue-^et, — on the one hand not — and on the other ; 
 vs not — so also. 
 
 X An. 1.4, 8. ovK eyuye avToi/s Zi^^u, o 5 B* 4pu ovBels, its iyif aiiTobs kokus 
 iroiut C. 3. 7, 9. Siarelvov juoXAoi' nphs rh ffavr^ nposexeiy, Kal fi^ afi4\€t ruv 
 TTJs v6\€ws. Dem. Cor. 254, 85. tpaivofjua iyit x^"'^^ '^^'^^'X'l^^^ r6re Kal ov 
 fjt4iJ.^€o>s oiiS^ TitMipias, Th. 3, 14. inafivyare . .Kal ii^ vp6Tnr^e rjfias, PI. 
 Lysid. 207, e. iutrty &pa ce & fiodKet noiuy Kal ovSky iirnrK'lyrToviTiv, ovSi 
 SiaKui\6ovlTl irois7y S>v iiv inl^vfjips, — 0i*T6 ^eol, oiSre av^pwiroi, — X. An. 2. 
 2, 8. &fjLoffay . . fiiiTe vpoddtreiy aX\-i]\ovs aififiaxoi re ^tretr^au 5. 1, 6. oSre 
 ayopti iaTty tKcarfi, ^ re x^P^ vo\€fiia, Th. 1, 118. ot AaKeSaifiSyiot alab6fi- 
 fyoi oSt€ 4K(t)\vov, €1 fii] 4vl fipax^, riar{jxa^6v t e t5 irXeov rov xp^yov. 
 
 Hem. 6, The following connective forms are more rare, and belong mostly 
 to poetry, viz., otfrc — ou, ou — oSte; te ov — te'; oStc — te ov; in the 
 two last forms o v combines with the verb and forms, as it were, one thought. 
 Th. 2, 22. *EKK\7jtrtav re ovk iiroUt . ., r-tiy re v6\iv iffivKaffae (he caUea no 
 issembly and guarded the city); 1, 126. oSte Ixeiyos en Koreyirriae, r6 re 
 
 uayretoy ovK ^S^\au; aire — ovSe, neithei an(2 not, which is found often in 
 
 prose also. 
 
 Bem. 7. OiS^ expresses either an antithesis (but not), or it serves to con- 
 nect a new clause (ana not, not even). When ou5e — o45e follow one another, 
 they are not to be considered correlative particles and translated neither — nor, 
 but are to be translated not even — and not. X. C. 3. 12, 5. «S yap ffffti, Sir 
 ovSe iy &\\tp oiiSevl ayuyi, oiiSe 4y vpd^ei oiiSefXl^ fie7oy e^eis Sick rh fiekrioy 
 rh ffufia TTopeffKevdff^ai, Ovde as a connective in negative sentences, corre- 
 sponds to Kal in positive sentences, mentioned in remark 5, and signifies not 
 even,ne — quidem, e. g. ou5' S Kfi-.rmros iroKfoitrey avrf p,dxe(rAai — ouSe eTs 
 (ne unus quidem), ovS' i>s (ne sic quidem), etc. 
 
 3. An enhansive or emphatic coordinate sentence, as has been seen (Kem. 
 5), is expresssed by the simple Kal, but more definitely by: — 
 
 (a) oil iiivov or ou fiovov 'ort (also ovx Br i fi6yoy) or fa^ Sti — 
 a\X& Kal, not only — but also. (Ovk Sri originates from ov \iya, in, as 
 /i)) 'in from p.^ f^eye, on.) SaKpar-ris ov fi6yoy a-oiphs ijy, aWa Kal aya- 
 d6s. PI. Symp. 179, b. KirepaTroftj/^irKcu' ide\oviny oi ipZyres, ov n6yov on 
 ivSpes, aWk Kol 7ui'ar;tfS. X. C. 2. 9, 8. oux 8ti /loyos S Kplray iy V"x'9 
 ?iy, i.\\a Kal ot <j>l\oi avrov. Cy. 8. 1, 28. p.^] yiip gri &pxoyra, oAAck Kal 
 oBj ov (t>o^ovyrai, paWov Toi/s aiSovfieyovs aldovyrai rwy ayatSay oi &v^pti>not. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 321.] COPULATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES 503 
 
 Eem. 8. Ou ii6voi/ — li\\i without Kal ig used, when the seomd mem- 
 ber includes the first, whether the second is stronger than the first in extent or 
 degree. Isocr. Phil. 5, 146. 06 n6yov M roirai/ avrohs %i tV ■yvi'M'' rairriv 
 fXovras, a\\' ivi irivTav inolas. Panath. 37. oi fiovov tiv tiptdfitiu 
 M toU vw KeYOiiivois rairrfv !lx<>>v riiv tiivoiav, &\K' S/ioius eirlirrfyrwy. 
 A. C. 1. 6, 2; iiuiTun' ^lupUacu oi nivov ipavKov, aWa rh oiri dfpovs t« 
 Kol x^'t"'""'' 
 
 (b) 06x SiriBs — «\A.i xai, not onlg not — but even, or oix i-irus or /ni) 
 iiras — i\K' oiS 4, not only not — butnoteven. COiras = liow, I say not or (Jmp.) 
 my not How, which involves the idea, I say not or my not, that not.) Also /iii in 
 (followed by i\A.' ouSt) is used in the sense of not only not, when both clauses 
 have a common predicate, and this stands in the last clause. Dem. Cor. 271, 1. o i^ 
 8»-«r X'^P'" "■ino'ts (ToTr 'A^iivaiois) ?X"» ^^" iwrdiaas aeavrhr kot4 TovravX 
 iroXireiri. {non modo non — sed etiam). Dem. Phil. 2, 67. (rois ®rifiaiovs iiyeho) 
 o»x Sf"^ airmtpHetv KoL SiaKui\iiraVt hwh, Ka\ avaTpmiiirav. Isocr. 
 Plataic. 586. oiix iiras Tris kow^s i\fvdeplas iierdxoixey, iW oiiSk SovKflas 
 uerplat iiiuidrififv tuxeu' {non modo non — sed ne — guidem). X. Cy. 1.3, 10. 
 <ij) St as opxf^(r^cu iv ^ud/ifi, &\\' ouS' ip^ovtrdat iSiyaa&f {non modo non 
 saltare poteratis, sed ne rectis guidem pedibns stare). Isae. 10, 1. 4yi) /iij Sti 
 irip iWov, IlW' ovSh ivep i/idVroS miTroTe SiKrjf IStcw etpfiica{as in Latin: 
 non modo de alio, sed Tie de me guidem unquam causam dixi, instead of non 
 modo non, the Latin using non modo — sed ne — guidem, instead of rum modo 
 mm — sed ne — guidem, when both the clauses are negative, and the common 
 predicate of both is in the latter clause). 
 
 Eem. 9. When oix ^''■' — aW' oiS4 has the sense of not only — but not 
 even, the predicate of the first member contains a negation, or at least has a 
 negative sense. Th. 2, 97. to^tj; (rp "Sm^ar iVxii<) kSivaTa {sc. iarlv) i^- 
 urovadtu oix ^ti rii iyry ^iptSini, &KK' o i l^ iy t^ 'Affiif edyos. (Scytharum 
 potentiae non modo Europae imperia exaequari non possunt, sed ne Asiae guidem 
 gens). Dem. 702. oix ^"r* "ray ivTiav aTrear ep'fjfiijy &y, &X\' oiS* tv 
 ICnv. (In aireirrcpfinriy is contained the idea: non haberem.) Also /ij) 8rt 
 foUowed by iw' oiSe is used in a similar manner, since a negative precedes yuj) 
 Sti. X. C. 1. 6, 11. ri]y oiKlay tj &Wo ti &y KeKTfitrai, vojii^wv &pyvpiov &^toy flyai; 
 oiSfyl i,y /lii on wpoTxa So/ijr, oXA.' oiS' iXmroy Trjs i^las \a$iiy {you 
 woiSd not only not give your house to any one gratuitously, but not even for a less price, 
 than it is uxMi ; properly you would give to no one, not to say, gratuitously, nay not 
 efen Jbr a less price, etc.). 
 
 (c) Ou(k) — aWck Kat, not — but even; o4(k) — o\A' oiS4, not — nay 
 vot even. Dem. Mid. 24. ou Troyrip6s, aWk xal trim xjm<rris. X. C. 2. 3, 8. 
 riy Koi \6y(p Kal tpya iretpei^yoy ifie aviay oiK Uv Svyaifiriy oiSr' eS \eyety oth^ 
 fi noiuy, aW' ouSe ireipiaoiuu. An. 1. 3, 2. {iapeiKais) \apiiy oix els rk 
 fSioy KaTeAe/aiv i/iot, 4A.V oiSe KO^Swrddriffa, iW' els ipias iSairivuv. 
 
 (d) OiSi — iil)i in, not even — not to say, much less {ne^guidem — nedum). 
 X. Symp. 2, 26. Kol oiSe iyairyuy, /iii in \eyeiy ti SmuiaSficda {we shall bt 
 aWe nU even to breathe, to say nothing of speaking, or much less to speak). 
 
 22 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
504 SYNTAJE. B 322 
 
 §322. II. Adversative Coordinate Sentences. 
 
 1. An adversative coordinate sentence is one in which the clauses that stand 
 in opposition to each other, ate united and form one thought. 
 
 (a) The opposition is of such a nature, that the thought expressed in the 
 coordinate clause either wholly abrogates the thought of the preceding clause, 
 since another thought is substituted for it ; this is done : (a) by placing the 
 conjunction kwi (but) in opposition to a preceding negative; (b) by plaieing 
 the conjunction a A X <£ together with the negative o u in opposition to a pre- 
 ceding affirmative ; in the last case, nAAi£ may be translated and, or be wholly 
 omitted: (a) ovx ot TrKovatot ivSalfioyis elcriv, a\?C ot aya^ol, (b) 'EKeZ&ev, 
 a A\' ovK iv^ij/Se ijpTtiff^ (Ae was seized there, and not here, or not here). 
 
 (/3) Or the opposition is of such a nature that the thought in the coordinate 
 clause merely limits or restricts that in the preceding clause. The limitation is 
 expressed by Se, aWct (but), ardp [avrdpf 'Epic), Kairot, /xevToi, Siius. 
 
 2. A € most generally has an adversative force, and hence can express every 
 kind of contrast or opposition. In respect to its signification, it ranks, like 
 the Lat. autem, between the copulative connectives (tc, icat) and the adversa- 
 tive (aA\i£, etc.), since it contains both a copulative and adversative force, and 
 hence either opposes one thought to another (adversative), or merely contrasts 
 it {copulative). Hence it is very frequently used in Greek, where the English 
 uses and. The new thought being different from the preceding, is placed in 
 contrast with it. 
 
 3. The mutual relation between the concessive and adversative clauses, is 
 commonly expressed by the concessive ii, 4 v, which, as it denotes concession 
 and admission, points forward to the limitation expressed in the second member 
 by S €. As St can denote both a strong and slight contrast, so the signification 
 of ix4v is sometimes stronger and sometimes weaker. 
 
 4. The original signification of /neV (arising from /u^y, § 316, Kem.) is tnili/, 
 in truth ; yet its signification is not always so strong as this ; indeed, in innu- 
 merable places its force is so slight, that it cannot be translated at all into 
 English. Tififv d>if>4\ii>.ov KoKiv, rb 8 e $\a$f phv alaxfiv. Th. 3, 68. Sic'^ei- 
 pav n\a.Tai4av iiev aiiTuy oiiK 4^jiatrous ^iOKoaiwy, 'A^i/aluv Se Trevre Kal 
 
 iiKOfflV. 
 
 5. m4v — 5 6 are especially used in the following cases : — 
 
 (a) With divisions of place, time, number, order, and persons, e. g. ^Ei/rav^a 
 /lev — ixu Se, tn^a /t eV — ^vS)a Se, Tore /idv — Tore 8 e, iroT^ /idy — 
 TToTe Se, at one time, — at another, sometimes — sometimes, itAAore /iey — S\- 
 XoTe S e, £/xa ix4v — ajxa S e, sometimes — sometimes, irpStrov fiey — ^m-.a 
 S4, rh ii4i' — Tb S4, TCI fjiiv — t4 Se and toOto ia.4v — toCto oe, partly, — 
 
 partly, on the one side — on the other, both — and, not only — ^ut also, 6 ixiv i 
 
 if, hie — ille. 
 
 ih) When several predicates belong to the same object, and also when sev- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 322.] ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 506 
 
 eral actions refer to the same object. S. Ph. 239. ^7^1 -yeVos ney «i>i t^i Tip- 
 i^jSi'tTou 3icipov, iT\4ai S' is oIkov, niSa/mi 8 e iroii "AxiA^iuf NeoTTTifAe^or. So 
 also in a principal and subordinate clause. Her. 1, 103. o{ 4s40aKoy /iiv h tJjk 
 'Ao-i))i/, Kiii/ieplous iK0a\6vTes iic Tijs EuptSTrijj, roiroun S J imint6iLemt ipeiyovCL 
 
 c. Where the same or an equivalent word is repeated in two diffei-ent clauses. 
 X. C. 2. 1, 32. iyi> aiveifii ficv deoii, o- i i> ft lit S' ai/^pdrrots to7s aya^ois. 
 1. 1, 2. SojKpcJrijj &i<cy <pavepht J) roWdKts fihv otxat, iroWiicts ie ivl 
 tSk Kotv&v Tfjs ttoKeas Pai/iay, Tet this principle is not always observed. 
 MeV is regularly omitted, when Se Kat follow, c. g 2. 8, 5. xnAEiriy oBtb 
 Ti iroi^o-ai, fisTe jurjBJi/ aiiapruii, xoXeirbi/ Si koI 4io/iapT^T»s t6 wot-liacana 
 (t^ ayift^/jLOyl Kptry ireptTVXetv, 
 
 Remark 1. When ;ueV stands in an adjective or adverbial clause, it is some- 
 times repeated, for the sake of emphasis, in ,iie corresponding demonstrative 
 or -concluding clause. Her. 2, 121. ko! rhu (i. e.tr) iiiv KoKfovtrt depot, 
 TO St 01/ lie IT rposKvi/eovirl ts ko! ed woiovcrt ■ rhi> Se x^'t^''"'"'- t. \. So also, 
 when, instead of the adjective clause, the Part, with the article is used. Isocr. 
 Paneg. 52, 60. t$ iikv intepeveyK6vTt riji/ &vdpti>irlyjii/ (fiitrtv {'HpaK\e7), . . roirff 
 liiy {Euputrdebs) intTdTTav . . dteT4\eire». So also sometimes two preceding 
 lien's correspond with two following He 's ; this always implies a strong emphasis. 
 PI. Apol. 28, e. iyii oiv Setvct ttv ef?) elpr/airiievos, S &vSpes 'Adrivatoi, ei, 8 t e 
 11 ev lie at Apxavres %TaTTOv, otis viieTs et\eaAe tpxeiv liov, /col iv TIOTiSalif Kal iy 
 'Aii<]}tv6\et Kol ^ttI AtiKicji, Tore iiev ov ixeivoi 'srarroti eiievov- — Kol iKtvSivevov 
 KKQ^twetv, T ov 6 e deav TaTTOVTOs, &s iyi> tp-fj^u re Kal inreXa^ov, (pt\0(ro(povvTd 
 lie Seiu 0iv Kal i^erdCovra iitavrhv /cal robs &\\ovSf iuravda 5e tpo^Ji^eU 9l 
 hivarov ^ &\\o &tiovv irpayiia \lwoiiii ri/y rd^u'. Yet this parallelism is but 
 seldom found so regularly carried out. 
 
 Rem. 2. On the position of 11 ey — Se, the following points are to be no- 
 ticed : They are commonly placed after the words, which are opposed to each 
 other; yet they are often to be referred to the predicate or to the whole clause. 
 X. C. 1. 1, 10. Kal ^Keye iiev {^uKpdrTjs) its rh ttoAiS, tqis Sh ^ovXoiievoi? 4^riv 
 &Koieiv, An. 3. 4, 2. ^ira&e /ley ovSey, troWa Be feared iv6iii(re Troi^crai. 
 When a substantive or adjective is connected with the article or a preposition, 
 liey and Se are commonly placed between the article and the preposition, and 
 between the preposition and substantive or adjective, e. g. Trphs iiev robs <j)i- 
 Aous — irphs 8' ix^pois ; yet this conformity is by no means observed iu cor- 
 responding members, e. g. X. C. 1. 1, 12. rh iiev ItvAptiireia vapepres, ri 
 iaiii&via Se ffKimovvTes Ttyovvrai ret irpos^Kovra Trpdrreiv. 2, 24. hik fiev 
 KiWos — Stk SivaiiLv 5e, Or inversely, Isocr. Paneg. 64, 1 14. 4y raTs iroK- 
 ireiais p.ey — 4v Si rats ffvvdi\Ktus. 
 
 Rem. 3. It is evident that any other adversative connective instead of S e, 
 can follow iiev, e. g. kTAi, arip, etc. But in place of the adversative connec- 
 tives, sometimes also the copulatives re, xal, are'used, by a kind of anacoluthon, 
 01 iie construction is entirely changed, no reference being had to the preceding 
 fiey. 
 
 Rem. 4. The adversative connective which would be expected to follow 
 liey, is sometimes omitted, although there is a corresponding adversative mem- 
 ber. This is the case, when the word expressing the contrast is sui;h, as of 
 itself without Se, to make this contrast sufficiently manifest, iis e. g. witl) 
 ^VTttiJaa /lei' — €«€?, and almost always with irpar ov iiev — eireiri. 
 Secondly, even the clause expressing the contrast, can be wholly omitted, in 
 which case, it must bo supplied by the mind (iiev soUtariwn). Her. 3, 3. A«V 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
506 SYNTAX. 
 
 [§ 322. 
 
 INDEED, CERTAINLY, think. 
 
 Eem. 5. On account of its general signification, S4, like autem, frequently 
 connects sentences even, which stand in a causal relation to each other ; then 
 the hearer or reader can gather from the context the particular mode of con- 
 nection. Thus St very often expresses the reason, and is used instead of yap. 
 
 Kkm. 6. In questions, Se has either an adversative force, when the inteno 
 gator gives vivacity, by omitting the concessive member, e. g. X. C. 2. 9, 2. ko. 
 6 2. Ei»^ ^01, €(p7i, S Kphaiv, xivas S e Tpcipeis, ha <roi robs \iKovs oiri rav irpo- 
 Sdrav iirepiKiairi ; (you are unwilling to support a man who could protect you 
 from your enemies, and tbt do you keep dogs ?). Or, 8^ has a copulative force 
 and continues the question which had been interrupted by the answer of the 
 other, e. g. X. C. 3. 5, 2. oSkovv olir^a, iifni, 8ti irA^ftci ptev ovSev fielovs ciVlf 
 'A^vaToi Boiarruc; — 0?Sa ydp, l^")- 2<4;ttaTB Si a7a^& Kol Ka\ck ir<(Ttpav tic 
 Bomrav ofe ir\eia tiv iK\ex^'""t ^ H "Adiji/af, The same principle holds in 
 answers. 
 
 Rem. 7. Ko( — Se (in the Epic writers koI Sc not separated), and, thougl 
 more seldom, the negative oisi — S4, in which connection St has an adver- 
 bial force, can be translated by and on the other hand, and also ; and on the otha 
 hand not. X. H.- 5. 2, 37. o2 re &A\oi irpodifuas t^ Te\fvTitf vmiptTovp, xaX i) 
 tSov Qri&aiav S t ir6?<is npo^^fiws ^vyevefiire kcu dirXircts Ktd iinr4as. An. 1 . 8, 20. 
 Koi ouSee ovSe rovroy va^etv eipatray, o u S' ti\Aof S e r&if 'EAA^j/wi^ iy toiStj; rp* 
 n6.xV t^a<^tf ouSeU ouS4f. 
 
 Rem. 3. In the apodosis, as iu principal clauses, St has a doable force, either 
 adoersative, or merely contrasting (copuhtive). Sometimes /icr stands in the 
 first member. 
 
 a. The adversative Se in the apodosis, denotes the contrast between that and 
 the protasis. It is used : (a) after hypothetical antecedent clauses, though 
 &\Ai£ also is often found instead of Se; (0) after relative antecedent clauses, 
 and such as denote comparison, (a) X Cy. 5. 5, 21. a\fC tl /tijSe toBt', ^ri, 
 ^oi\ei aTTOKpli/off^ai, irh 5e Toitvnv^fi/ \4y€ [say on the contrary). ()S) 8. 5, 12. 
 &S7rep ol &Tr\77ai, ouru 5e /cal ol TreXTa(rTal Kal oi to^Stoi {so on the other hand]. 
 
 (b) After a iemporql protasis, St commonly has a contrasting or merely copu- 
 lative force, thougli sometimes adversative also (very often in the Homeric lan- 
 guage, also in Herodotus, but seldom in the Attic writers) ; this 5e may often 
 be loosely translated by then. Od. A, 387. avrhp iirel ^ux^s M-iv aireinceScKr' Sa- 
 AuSiS iAAj; ayv^ Xlepare^6veia yvvaiKWV ^eAuTepawv, ^A&e S' eirl ^oxh 'Ayoflefivoi/os 
 'ArpefSoo. So $tppa — T(S<^pa Se, birirf — 5e, ews — Se. X. An. 4. 1, 2. iirei 
 Se afp'iKovTO, ey^a 6 phv TiyoTjs voraphs irai/TdTratTtv &Tropos ?jv Sih rh ffd^of Kcd p4' 
 ye^os, TTtipoSos (transitus) 8e oiiK ^v. ., iSoKet Sc rots trrpmiSrais Sick t«c opeai* 
 TTopevTiov elvai {then, or on the contrary). As Se'is used after the protasis, so also 
 in like manner after participles, which supply the place of a protasis. PI. 
 Symp. 220, b. ical Trore ivros triyov o'lou SeivOTdrou, /col triiiiraiv . . iyetKiy- 
 ptvaiv Toiis ir({Sar fir ir/Aous Kol apvuKlSas, oSroj 5' 4y roirois ^£p'« ix"" W''""' 
 . . oXiyTrep Kol Trp6rcpoy elicit ipopeiy. X. C. 3. 7, 8. ^avpAQa aoii, ci fKilyoui j}a- 
 Sims x^'P""!'^^'""' Toiirois 5 e prfiiva Tp6iroy oUi ivyi](rcirdai irposeyex^yai. 
 
 6. 'A AAa (Neut. PI. of SaAoj), but {sed, at), yet, however, generally expresses 
 
 difference and separation. It always stands at the beginninf of the sentence. 
 
 According to the nature of the preceding member, it eitlier abrogates what is 
 
 affirmed in that member (see No. 1), or it resjn'rfs and //m/is it {i/et, however) 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 322.1 
 
 ADVERSATIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES, 507 
 
 He is indeed poor, but Wave— he is not brave, but comardUj ; (here the clause bta 
 irave restricts the one preceding, and but mwardly wholly denies or abrogates 
 the idea of brave). ■Vovro rh irpayiw. i^i\i^y n4v i<ntv, l,W ob Ka\6y. The 
 use of a A\(i is very frequent in objections (= at), also in questions, when the 
 question expresses a contrast, or when an objection is introduced in the form 
 of a question. Dem. Cor. t[ -yip koI &ov\6nevoi jutTEweVireo-d' tip airois, iirl 
 tV eipiinii'; 4AV ivrjpxfv S.ira(rtv. 'AW M -rhv it6Keiwv; &W airol irtpl 
 elp'/irns ^^ouA.ei)6<r»e. Eur. Med. 325. T^ous ava\o7s • ou yitp hv irelffais ttot^. 
 
 ".'A^'*'' Hf>^V h^> KovScv oiScVoi Ktris;" very frequently aA.\' ^ j but 
 
 realhj — ? X. An. 7. 6, 4. /col o'lehon- "AAV jj SrnittyuyeT 6 Lhp robs ivSpas; 
 
 Rem. 9. "AAArf is used in negative, mm-concessive clauses, when by it the gen- 
 eral signification of the preceding negative clause is to be restricted by an excep- 
 tion. Here d\A<£ is the same as tX^ or «' ^^, nisi, and can be translated into 
 English by ixcept, than. In the first meinber, &\\as {erepos) is commonly' 
 placed, e. g. oiSels &\\os, &\\<i, and this &M.os points forward to the following 
 &A\o, corresponding with it. X. An. 6. 4, 2. 4v r^ fUatf &\\t, ^hy Tri\,s oASc- 
 HM oDTf ^lAla, oCxe 'EAAi;i//j, ciAAi Bp^tces Kal Bi^vmi {between there is no other 
 friendly or Grecian city [there are none] except Thracians and Bithynians). 
 
 Eem. 10. In the frequent combination of AAA' ^ after a preceding nega- 
 tive, or after a question implying a negative, or even after the addition of 
 iXKas, erepos to the negative, consequently, ovk, oiStv oAX' ij; oiSiv &\- 
 Ao, oAA' ij; oiiSiv erepov, oAA" tj; ri &\\o, aAA' ij ; SaAo ti (with a pre- 
 ceding interrogative pronoun), iAA' ?, — aAA' seems to be merely «AAo, but 
 on account of its close connection with ^,' it appears to have changed its ac- 
 cent (4AAi ^) and to have lost it (oAA', ij). X. An. 7. 7, 53. apyipiov iiU ovk. 
 txo>, aAA' ^ iUKp6v Ti. 0. 2, 13. offre SAAoj wcliToTf fioi irapeVxe Tck IoutoD 5ioi- 
 «€«/, aAA' 71 ail vvvX iSi4\fis irapexcv. PI. Phaed. 97, d. o65ei' SaAo ffKovut 
 rposiiKiiv i,v^piiTr</>, &A A' ■/) rh ipurrov xal rh 0€\tuttov. 
 
 Rem. 11. Also the following elliptical expressions are to be mentioned, 
 ou ij^y aAAi^ or ou /idfroi aAA<£, yet, veruntamen, ow yiip aAAii, then 
 zertainly. Certainly. These must be completed by joiningiwith the negative the 
 verb 01 the preceding clause, or in place of it, such expressions as Toi>r' iyive- 
 TO, toDt' iariu. X. Cy. 1. 4, 8. A 'Invos irinTft eis y6vaTa, Kal fiiKpov KaKfTvov 
 iferpaxil^urev • ou fiiiv (scil. ^ferpax^Aiirei') iAA' iwe/tfivdr 6 Kvpos Ii6\i9 rus, 
 
 Koi 6 ^TTtroS i^avetTTTJ. 
 
 Rem. 12. 'A\\i is, moreover, used to denote a transition to a different or an 
 opposite thought ; this is the case in exhortations and e.xclamations, in general, 
 when the discourse is suddenly interrupted, and something new is quickly in- 
 troduced, e. g. aAA' fuTuxo'iTis- {well then !) — aAA' &va {well now) — oAA' elai — 
 also when one answers' or replies quickly and decidedly, e. g. oAAct fiov\ofuu, 
 well, I will. 
 
 7. From the adverb a I, an the contrary, again, rursus, and Spa, igitur, have 
 originated the Epic auri'and the prose hrip. They always stand at the 
 beginning t)f the sentence, and have the signification of 5e' or aAAiS, but ; yet, as 
 it seems, with this difference, that, on account of their composition with tpa 
 {igitur)^ they are more closely and intimately connected with what precedes. 
 — Me'cToi has been already treated (§ 316, Eem.). Koiroi, yet, verum, sed 
 tamen.atqui {i 317, 3), is used especiallj', when the speaker wishes to correct 
 eomcthing he had said ; the Latins use quamquam in the same way, c. g. 
 Kglroi tI <piifiii {quamqiuim qifid loquor?, and yet why do I speak?). "O^tti 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
508 SYNTAX. [i 323 
 
 (from 6fi6s, equal, like), nevertheless, yet, however, places the second clause, as an 
 unexpected one, in opposition to the first. Th. 6, 50. ^iirnxos ^v toSto e.Vif 
 ^lius vposeSriTo Ka\ mnls ry 'AKKifitdSou yviiiui. 'AAA' S/ias is still stronger. 
 
 § 323. III. Disjunciiue Coordination. 
 
 1. A disjunctive coordinate sentence is oiic in which tlie clauses composing 
 the entire sentence, are united into one whole, one of which excludes the other; 
 hence the one can be considered to exist only when tlie other does not. This 
 disjunctive relation is denoted by : — 
 
 "H, or, aut, vel, or more emphatically and definitely by ^ — ^, and when the 
 first member is to be made emphatic, ^toi — ?, aut — aut, vel — vd, either — or; 
 fire — iin (with the Ind.) or livTf — iivre or Svre — &vTe (with the 
 Subj.), «ue — sive, whether — or, when the speaker wishes to indicate, that he 
 does not know whether he should decide for the one or the other ; on the mode 
 used in these hypothetical disjunctive clauses, see § 339. 
 
 *0 TTar^p, fi d vlhs aiiTov ane^cwey. — *H 6 Trarlip, ^ 6 vihs aiiTov ane^avey, Th. 
 4, 118. ei Se Ti fi/Jic elfre KiWiov, eire SiKmorepov Toirav SoKeT ftvai, iSines 4s 
 AnKeSai/UDi'a SiSdffKerf. PI. Rp. 493, d. ctr' ivypa^ut^, ctr' ii/ fiovirirp, etrt 
 Sti 4v iroXntK^, Apol. 27, c. eXr^ oZv Kati/d, efre Tra\atJi. 34, e. eir oZp 
 aKij&es, fir" aZv ipevSes. Rp. 453, d. &VTe ris els KoXv^i^bpav /aiKpav efiirdtr^f 
 &VT e eh rh fieyiffrov ireXayos fieffov, ^^tos ye vet ov^ev ^ttov. 
 
 Remark 1. The following forms, also, are sometimes used: el — eirt 
 (si — sive); etre — el Se {sive — si koo), when the second member contains 
 something opposite to the first ; eire — ^; ^ — efre (seldom and only Poet.); 
 eire but once (poetic). 
 
 Rem. 2. The disjuBctive connectives ij — ^, in the Epic writers, very seldom 
 in the Tragedians, are united with jieVandSe: iniev — iiSe. In this case, 
 they do not have a disjunctive, but like koi — Kal, re — re, a copulative force. 
 Instead of iiSe, ISe is also used according to the necessities of the verse. H. e, 
 128. Sfp' cS yiyvisKris iiixev Ae6p, ijSe koX &i>Spa, both — and, not only ^ bid 
 also. 
 
 2. The particle ij is not only used to denote the disjunctive relation, but also 
 .m expressing comparison, in which it does not exclude, or express the opposite 
 of the preceding member, but only expresses separation' or difference. As in its 
 disjunctive relation, one ^ corresponds with another, so here ij stands in rela- 
 tion to a word, which expresses a difference, e. g. &K\os, obSels &>Jms, oKKotos, 
 ivavrlos, ifBios, iia<peptii, etc.; also in relation to comparatives, as well as to all 
 words which have the force of a comparative, e. g. Snr7i.i(ru>s, irply, ^dua, etc 
 PI. Phaed. 64, a. ovSev &\Ko avrol iirtT7]SevoviTiv, fj onro^vTiffKeiv re Kol 
 revival. 
 
 Rem. 3. The comparative ^ is sometimes used after the omitted naXXov or after 
 a positive. This is the case after expressions of willing, choosing, and the like, 
 because these contain the idea of preference ; thus after $ov\e<r^ai i^eXeiv 
 »lpe7(rS>ai, a'lpeaitr Sovvai, 4irtAufie7y, SexEffftai, C7ireiv,\vaire\- 
 f7y { = potius esse). II. a, 117. ffoiKofi' iyii \ahy (r6ov eniievtu, ^ airoAeVdo- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 323.] DISJUNCTIVE COORDINATE SENTENCES. 509 
 
 Lysias de afF. tyr. i. (riTovvi Kfpiatmp, fi f/fias irel&cii/. X. Ag. 4, 5. ('Ayri- 
 irlKaos) rfpeiTO Koi ai/v t^ yevvai($ fieioveKTeTy, ii <riiv r^ aSixta irXeov ^x^"'* 
 Andoc. Myst. 62. TCi&i/iirai vo/ii^ouaa KvaiTeXeTy, ij ^y. 
 
 3. The other member of the comparison is joined to the Comparative by ^, in 
 the same Case as the comparative, and without a verb, when both members have the 
 same verb in tommoin. When this is not the case, the second member must stand 
 as a complete sentence with its subject and predicate ; commonly, however, merely 
 the subject is expressed, but the predicate omitted ; often also after the omitted 
 copula, by attraction the same Case is used as in the first member. Instead of fj 
 the Gen. also can be ^Hsed (^ 275, 2), most frequently for the Afem. amd Ace., 
 often also for the Dat. But the Gen. is avoided, when the use of it would occa- 
 sion ambiguity ; it must be avoided when the time of the two clauses is different. 
 
 Eur. Or. 1148. efi/c ttrTii/ oi/dev npela-ffov, ^ <ju\os ffacp-fis, ov ir\ov;ros^ oh tu- 
 famls. 'O </>iXi!trs<^oj imWov liri^vftfT rijs iTo(ptas % tuv xPW^'"''"'' XapiJ/S/UE&a 
 imWov Tois &ya,bo7s ^ toTs /carcots. ^i\ov[x.sv /iaWov Tohs &.ya^ohs ^ rrfus KUKois, 
 laocr. Pac. cxtr. tois vtaripois xa) /laWov tiKiid^ovmr, f/ E7<j> (sc. aK;uet- 
 Co>),vapatyw, Th. 7, 77. ijSn rtyes Koi ^k 5e tvor^ pay ^ roiofvSe iffS^cay 
 {from a more dangerous situation, than the present is). II. a, 260. ^5ij yip iror' 4yi) 
 «al apelotriv iieirep vpLii/ avSpdiriy &/il\7}(ra {with braver men thpn you 
 are). Her. 7, 10. cb p.4\\ets 4ir' &vSpas tTTpaTeveff^at iro\i} afieivovas, ^ 
 ^Ki^as, Eur. Or. 715. Tno-ris 4y KaKo7s av^p KpsitTtruv ya\'fiyris yau- 
 rlKoiffiy eisopay (instead of fj yc^-fiyti). Th. 6, 16. irpasiiKa futi ^aWoj/ krr4- 
 puy..&pxety (instead of ^ Irepois). 7,63. ravra Teis ■&Tr\lrais oifX VfToov 
 TMV yavTuy TrapaKe\e6ofiat (instead of ^, to7s yairais). Od. t, 27. oStol eyayye 
 §s yainjs S^yafiai yKuKeptire pay &\\o iSitr^at. X. Cy. 2. 3, 12. ifiol SoksI 
 Kvpos, o^sTivas tty dpf ayabovs, (pt\e7y oi/Sev ^ttov kavT o- (instead of ^ eou- 
 t6v). Her. 2, 1.34. MuKcpii/os TTv/ja/itSo aire\£ireTo TToAXiy k"* jLuffw tov ir.aT.p6s 
 (instead of ^ 6 irm-lip, or properly instead of rrjs tov ■iracrp6s). 
 
 Kem. 4. With T\elaiv, iKirTiay, irKeov, e\aTToy, fieToy, when they 
 stand in connection with a numeral, ij is commonly omitted, without change 
 of construction, i. e. the Case is the same as if there was no comparative in the 
 sentence (comp. decern plus or ampHus homines). PI. Apol. 17, d. yvy 4y^ irpu- 
 rov iirl SiKotrr-fjptoy avafff^Ka, Xtt} yeyov^s irXelio e&Sop.'fiKovTa {annos plus 
 septuaginta natus). X. An. 6. 4, 24. o» 'i-mrsis avoKTelvovtri i-wy aySpuv ov fisiop 
 vevToKOtrlovst Th. 6, 95. rj \ela inpd^ TaXivTooy ovk MhaTTOy ireyre Kol cXko- 
 mv. X. Cy. 2. 1, 5. tirtreas likv Sfei ou p.e'iov iur/ivptay. With the Nom. and 
 Ace. T\eov, ^XaTToy, the numeral specification can also stand in the Gen., e. g. 
 'ExM oil vKiov {i\.Krrov) Sexa -raKivTuv. The Greek can oonsequently say : (a) 
 trkiiovs {4\6,TTOvs, fteiovs) ^ Be/co T]p.4paL ; (b) Tr\ttovs Sewa Tifiepuyj (c) nXeoy ^ 
 SfKa Tifiepat ; {i) Tr\4oy Sexa r)ii4pai. It will be observed from several of the 
 above examples that t\4ov, fitioy, etc. stand as mere adverbs in the Ace, with 
 substantives of a different gender and number. 
 
 Sbm. 5. Sometimes, also, the particle ij is found with the Gen. Such exam- 
 ples are to be .explained in a two-fold manner. The Gen. either expresses its 
 own appropriate relation, being wholly independent of the comparative, e. g' 
 PI. L. 765, a. fiii %\a,TToy % TpdKoyra yeyoviis 4tSiv [just as the Greek says 
 '^yvcadai tfn&Kovra 4niy ^ 273, B, '(c>)5 ; or tibe Gen. is a preparati-ve demonstra- 
 tive pronoun, with which the clau"" introduced by ^ may be regarded as as 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
SIO SYNTAX. [i ■j23. 
 
 appositive or explanatory clause. Od. (, 182. ai /livyip riiD^e ift'iaaot 
 Kol itpeioi', ^'ih' bim^foviovrt vtyfifuuiiv oJkov fXtrov ayrjp ^5e yuirfi { = roS Sri 
 
 Rem. 6. (Comparatio compendimia). In comparisons, instead of comparing 
 [he attribute of one object with that of another, the Greeks often compare the 
 attributive of one object with the other object itself to which the attribute 
 would belong. In this case the Gen. is regularly used. X. Cy. 3. 3, 41. x^piai 
 ?XeT6 pbhhv iiTTov Tjfiuy (instead of ttjs ijfieTepas) ^irrifjtoy. Moreover, in ev- 
 ery other comparison, this mode of expression is often employed, e. g. II. p, 51 
 atfiarl oi Sc^orro K6fiai Xaplreffffiv 6fio7at (instead of tow rwy XopiTcn')- 
 Comp. the examples under § 284, 4. This mode of comparison, though not 
 strictly correct, is frequent in English, e. g. he has an expression like his father, 
 instead of like his father's. 
 
 4. When two attributes or predicates (adjectives or adverbs), belonging to 
 the same object, are compared with each other, then both are put in the compai- 
 ative, and the last is annexed by if. 
 
 QiTTaf, i) aoipiirepos, celerior, quam sapientior {more siafl than wise, or 
 not so ivise as swiji). PI. Rp. 409, d. v\&>viias vaintpo'is, ^ Xf)"^™! ivruyxii'iia' 
 aotpiirepos, ^ afia^etrrepos SoKei eJyat auT^ re Kol ^AAois. Her. 3, 65 
 ivoln(r» TBX^''«P«> 5 ffo<p^Tepa (cderius, quam pnidentivs). 
 
 5. The subject is compared with itself, i. e. the subject exhibits at some time 
 a quality in a higher degree than usual. In this case, the Gen. of the reflexive 
 pronouns ^iiavrov, ffewnov, eavrov, is used with the comparative, and the pro 
 noun avrSs with the pronoun of the third person. The other mode of ex- 
 pression by ij is not admitted here. 
 
 BfKrluv cl/i2 iftavrov, BcXrforr el treavrov. SeXriuv iariv av 
 rhs eavrov. Th. 3, 11. SuvoTefirepoi auTol avrav iylyvovTo. In like man- 
 ner, the superlative is used in connection with air 6s and the Gen. of the re- 
 flexive pronouns, when the subject is to be represented, as, at a given time, 
 exhibiting the quality belonging to it, in the highest degree (in a higher degree 
 than at any other time). 'Aptaros avrhs lauToD. 'Apltrrii avr^ iav- 
 Tfjs. X. C. 1.2, 46. «T&e aoi, & niplxKeis, Tcirc aweyevi/niv, Sre Setv6Taros 
 iravTov TauTo ^o-^o ( when you surpassed yourself in these things, when you had the 
 highest distinction in these things, higher than at any other time). 
 
 6. The following is a peculiar mode of comparison : When an object in re- 
 lation to some quality is compared, not with another object, but vnth a whole 
 thought (sentence), this thought is compressed into one substantive idea, and 
 this substantive is put in the Gen. depending on the comparative. Here, also, 
 the other mode of expression by ij, does not occur. 
 
 Her. 2, 148. ■Ijtrav ai irepo^/Sej Kiyov iJi4(oves [oratione majorvs, i. ts. ma- 
 jores,quam «( oratione explicari possit). Th. 2, 50. yeviiievov Hpftaaov \6yov 
 rh elSos TTJs v6irou (the nature of the disease being too severe to be described, severe 
 heijond description). Tlpayiia i\wiSa>v KpeXrrov (too great to he hoped Jar, 
 beyond hope). Instead of substantives, participles are also used, e. g. Seoinos. 
 PI. Kp. 410, d. 01 yviuicurrucy o/tpiiTci) xPW^I'-evoi ayptdrepot toO S^ovTai 
 i.-TroBaiyovtri^. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 324.] CAO&AL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 511 
 
 7. When it is to be indicated, that a predicate or an attribute is in a higliei 
 or lower degree than could be expected, in proportion to another object, then 
 the compaiative is constructed with j) /caret, or {though seldom), ^ Trpo'i 
 with the Ace. (= quam pro)u . 
 
 Th. 7, 75. fiet^a fi Karit Stficpua itiitov^a {I have buffered too nmehfor 
 tears). PI. Kp, 359, d. vexphs fiilCav fl kot' iv^puiro;' {a dead hody greater 
 than in accordance with a human being, greater than cmddbe expected for a human 
 being, too great fir that of a human being). X. H. 3. 3, 1. CA711) trvxe <r tfivo' 
 tipas ^ kot4 &v^panroj> rcapfj}. Comp. Liv. 21, 29. proelium atrocius, 
 quam pro numero pugnantium, editw {mori bloody than could have been expected 
 considering the number). 
 
 8. If the predicate or attribute is represented as being in so high or low 1 
 degree, that another cannot coexist with it, tlien the comparative is used with 
 ^ ffi J T € and the Inf., e. g. Ktuci iJ.el(a ^r, ^ Sjre KXaietv, evils greater 
 than one could weep for). X. An. 1. 2, 4. fiynaiiieyos ehai fl ws M TlttaiSas t^» 
 TapatrKevfiv {having thought that the armament was too great to be [grecUer^ than to 
 be] against the Pisidians). 3. 3, T.Ppaxirepa iiK6im(ov % ij ^{w/ei/raM tuv aipfv 
 iovTiTSiv (threw too short a dUstance to reach the slingers). See § £41. 3, (a). 
 
 Kem. 7. The conlparatire is frequently tised without the second member of the 
 comparison, and can then be translated by giving a strong emphasis to the 
 positive, or more frequently by joining the adverb^ too, pretty, somewhat, a little, 
 right, to the positive. (Comp. English, too sweet, pretty, somewhat, a little warm,} 
 "ihis usage is found when the secohd member is evident from the connection ; 
 but very frequently, also, when such thoughts as, than it was before, titan was 
 before, than was usual, proper, right, becoming, were more or less distinctly before 
 the speaker's mind. Her. 3, 145. Maia;'Si>f^ Sh r$ rvpivvif ?iv i.Se\^eis tiron' 
 apyOTcpos [Hebethria ingenii, very dull of perception, a little crazy). 6,108. 
 illieis cKavTcpa oiKio/iey {tee ctwell too far, very far from you). So particu- 
 larly the neuters S^eicoy, jSeAriow (better than is right), kAKKiov, fia/Aov, X"/""'> 
 litirx'oy, KdKiov; also veirepoy, more seldom Kaivi!TeyKB',( since /cou'^s is used synony- 
 mously with »€<Srepos) and the like, especially with a negative, e. g. o4 Koiwioy, 
 ovK Hnnvop, ov niiaov, ou Kpefrrav, oi x^l">''t *" ^'"' (""' *" ^<'^!ff "* *' seeme)\, etc. 
 Her. 3, 71. voUeiy outJkb;«oi Saice'a Kai nil imfpfidKiirbiu' ov yhp H/Ktvoy {for 
 this would not be better, than if we did it immediately). PI. Phaed. 105, a. ird\ty 
 ti iwaiufiviifrKov • oi ykp x^^po" 'foWiKis &Koi€iy. Finally, also, when antith- 
 eses are compared with each other, e. g. T4 x^^P""" ifo^^oTs Tr\ela ^irrl tup 
 ifieiy6ywy {thf worse is more in number than the better) . 
 
 i 324. IV. Causal Coordinate Sentences. 
 
 1. Finally, those sentences are coordinate, the last of which denotes either the 
 fround, causey or consequence of the preceding sentence, or the conclusion from it. 
 
 2. The Greeks denote the ground or reason by yip, which is never the first 
 word in a sentence, but is commonly placed immediately after the first word. 
 rip is compounded of 7^ and ipa, and hence denotes proof, confirmation, 
 (ye, yes, certainly), and at the same time, an injerence, or conclusion {&pa, igitur, 
 now, therefore). Hence, according as the one or the other meaning prevails, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
il2 SYNTAX. [{ 2-4 
 
 fip may express : {a\ a. ground OT reason, (b) an explanation, (c) a confirrrmtion 
 or assurance; and hence it may be translated- (a) hy for, (b) tliat ie, for ex- 
 ample, (c) indeed, certainly. 
 
 PI. Phaedr. 230, b. v)i tV "Hpav, Ka\ii ye ti Karnyuyli ' fj re 7 (k p irAeiroKoj 
 oSt)( iiaK' afupiXacjylis re Kal ufrjAi^ (yes, certainly =for). Tip has its explana- 
 tory sense, especially after demonstratives and the phrases TtK/iiipiov Se, fnapri- 
 piov S4, arifieToy Se, SrjXov 5e scil. iffri, SetKyufii 5e, iS-{j\uire Se, ffKe^atr^e ffe, and 
 the like. It expresses confirmation or assurance, particularly in rejoinders and 
 replies. X. C 3. 5, 10. apa \eyeis t^k rwy ^€w;' Kpiaiv %v oi irtpX KeKpoTra, Si kpf 
 t^v fKpivav ', — Aeyca yap, yes, certainly. 10, 2. iK iroKKuv ffwiiyofTes Tci 4^ cKflEtr- 
 Tav KtiAAitTTa, oStus SXa ret ff^iiara KdKh TroieiTe ^afi^eir^aij — noioS/xei' T^P> 
 iiffil, QVTws [certainly, we do so). — In addresses, wishes, commands, and ques- 
 tions, the meaning of yip, as denoting inference or conclusion, clearly 
 appears. Arist. Kan. 251. Tourl vap' ifiSv \afi$ii'ii> ; Acira yap vciffi/ie' 
 &o ! {am I so treated by you ? well ! then we shall have hard things to bear !) Ko- 
 KtSj yap ^|(J\oio! may you perish then} So, ei yip, ci&e yio. X. C. 1. 7, 
 2. oTt 6' oKti^tj eXeyev, £Se imaffKev tv^v/Mi/Me^a yip, ftpTJ, eX tls fi^ &v aya- 
 ^hs av\T]T7js SoKety jBoiJAoiTO, ti &c aur^ iroiiyriov etr] 1 (now then let us consider). 1 , 
 4, 14. oh yap iravv (TOi KaTaSrjXoy, tin irapara &?iXa ^wa S>STrep ^eo\ &v^panrol 
 Bioreiovai ; is it not then clear to you f (nonne igitur — ?). II. o-, 1 82. 'Ipi &ei, t i s 
 yip <re SreZv 4iioi &yye\ov ?iKev ; (therefore who then has sentyoa ?}. X. C. 2. 3, 
 17. KoL & XatpeKpiTTjs etirey ^Eciy oZif, 4/xoO Tavra itotovvros, ixeivos ;j,7jSei/ ffeKriap 
 ylyvTjTai ; Tt yh,p i.Wo, %<p7t & 'XuKpirTis, ^ KivSvvevffeis, k. t. \. ; (what else 
 then will happen except that you will run the risk, etc.?) Dem. Ph. 1. 43, 10. 
 yevoiTo yh.p &y Tt Katv6repov, % MukeSci);' av^p *A^vaiovs KaraTro\efiuv ; {why, 
 can there be a greaternovelty?). So,T( yip; quid ergo? KaLTiyip; and how 
 then? nCs yipi and irii&ev yip; as an emphatic negative answer = by no 
 means. Uws y^p oH; {instead of it, ttS^ev Se oS is used with an antithesis) 
 as an emphatic affirmative answer. X. C. 4. 4, 13. oixovv d ft.ei> tA Slxaia Trpir- 
 Ttav SiKatos, 5 Sh ra &StKa iSticos; Ilw s yap oS ; (is he, therefore, who does what 
 is just, just, but he who does what is unjust, unjust ? to be sure, how not ?). 
 
 Remark 1. The explanatory sentence with yip very often precedes the 
 sentence to be explained, particularly in Herodotus, e. g. Her. 6, 102. koI, ^v 
 ykp b Mapa^&iv i-KLTT\Se^aTov x^p'tov t^s 'Attik^s 4vnrT:evffai, 4s tovto crtpt KaTT}- 
 yeero 'linri'/}s (aTid, for Marathon was the most suitable place in Attica for the cav- 
 alry, Sippias led them to this place). So especially with aXAck yip, at enim, but 
 certainly, really, indeed, tiW' 06 yip. PI. Apol. 20, c. rifipvv6in)v kv, el i]TrurTiii.i)v 
 Tama- aW' 06 70^ iiriaTaiuu (I should be proud, if I knew tJiis, but certainly I do 
 not know). 
 
 Rem. 2._ The two sentences, the preceding explanatory one' with yip, and 
 the following one whose meaning is to be confirmed, are often so closely con- 
 
 Ml X(ot) TToiras Kal T&r S\AaS ^viiayay6vTes iPoiXoVTo, etc., instead of 01 
 ASripiaiot — ifioiKovTO, ctuTois yip, k. t. \. 
 
 Rem. 3. Ka' yip commonly means /or also, rarely rfcn™, bnt .sometimei 
 the Koi con'esponds to a following Kal, thus nam et — et. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 524.] CAUSAL COORDINATE SENTENCES. 51^ 
 
 3. The consequence or inference is denoted : — 
 
 (a) By Spa {hence, then), which never stands as the first word in a seutenea, 
 though commonly near the beginning, also sometimes emphatically at the end. 
 It expresses a consequence whieh comes as a matter of eourfe, which is wholly nat- 
 ural. In many passages, it hardly admits of translation into English, since it 
 often impfies only a very slight consequence, and merely refers to something 
 mentioned, to something existing in the context, or only in the conception of 
 the speater, in conformity with which the thing is in the state in which it is 
 iflSrmed to he. Hence it is very often used like the English indeed, as it seems, 
 in such explanatory causes as more exactly define, or distinguish, something 
 before said, or pointed oat. 
 
 Luc. Jnp. trag. 51. ei eiVi jSa/tpf, eifflKol &eol- iwlt /liiy elal Poi/jloC' f'urly &pa 
 Koi^eol {then there are, consequently there are gods also). X. Cy. 7. 3, 6. ravi-a h(oiaas 
 S KS/ws hralfTwro &pa rhv futipor (when he had heard of tht death of his friend, 
 THEN he smote on his thigh, as was natural). It is often connected with an 
 impf, when, in consequence «f a better view ef the subject at present, one is 
 undeceived in regard to a former opinion, e. g.l. 4, 11. S iroiSer, iis ipa 
 i<p\vapovfi.ev, Sre t4 ^j* t$ TrapaSeUrif dripla e^paiiey Sfwiov %iuuyc SoKei 
 elvatf oToinrep e? Tts SeSeffp.4wi ^aja ^ptp^t {now how childish we were then, as I now 
 indeed see). 1. 3, 8. Sf£/rf 5^, ^ivai rhv 'Atrrvdynv, t$ olvoxi<p, if 4yi> fui^tara 
 Viiim, Bviiv SfSois ; 'O Se 'SS.Kas &pa Ka\6s re liv iriyxapc, Kal Ti/iLiiv exf"" "^posi- 
 ytu/ rois •Ses/iecai/i 'A^TuAyovs {now the Sacian happened to be beautiful, tile Sacian 
 was beautiful, as it seems). 9. & Sawa, aTrtJXwAay iK$a\u ffe 4k ttjs TtfiTjS' tA tf. 
 yhp SAAa^ tpd,yaiy trod KdWtoe oivoxo^tra, KaX ovk iKirlo^ai aiirhs rbv otuov- oi 5' 
 &pa Tuv ficuri\4av oivoxioi — KaTo^potpovai. Dem. Cor. 232, 22. Mkiut \4yeiy, 
 lis &pa ^7i -^KfKa\vKi>s ettjv t^v 7r6\iv {t^v eip'/iir/jv) iroi^iroo'&ai {that I indeed, 
 that I, as it seems). Hence the nseof 7i£p and the strengthened form 7'tkf 
 Spa. — Ej fipo and cl jiij &pa correspond to the Latin si forte, nisi forte, if 
 percliance, unless perchance, the inferential force of apa being reduced to a mert 
 conjecture, and are often used ironically. X. C. 1. 2, 8. mis &» o& tomSto. 
 i,v^p Sia^^f Ipoi . Toiff veovsj ci fir] &pa 71 rrjs operas ifrtfieXeia Siatp^opA iirrtv 
 {properly, tliat if such an excellent man can corrupt tlie young, then we must draw 
 the concl^usipn ikat,, etc.). So also,'et apa, num ftrte, whether then, whether per' 
 chance. X. t). 4. 3, 9. VKOiru,' el &pa ri ia'Tt toTs t^eoTs epyov, ij av&pi&Troys &e- 
 paireiiiv (whether perdmnce, forsooth, the gods have any other employment than, etc.). 
 'Apo stands very' often in interrogative sentences. Aesct. S. 91. t£i Spa 
 ^ufferai; tIs S' & p lirapiceffei ^^wv ; { jw{s igrifwr defendet ? quis igitur zxc^hit "i) . 
 
 Bem. 4. "Apo seems to be derived from the verb 'APn, i. e. to be adapted, 
 sutiahle, and hence to express the inward relation, the immediate connection 
 of two thoughts, and in such a manner that one seems, as it were, to be en- 
 tirely fitted to the other, — the one perfectly corresponding to the other 
 {=preeisely, exactly, just). In this sense it is used in Homer, e.g. II. n, 182- 
 iK S' e^ope K\fipos Kuccrjj iv &p' ^fteXoc avrol, precisely the one which, just^ the one 
 which, Tij/ios &pa^ just then, St" & pa, just when, tot & pa, precisely then, ei 
 («)( Spo, ;/ not precisely, i>s &pa, exactly so; ovk — , a\>! &pa, not^^ka 
 fust; ivt'l pa, since just, ydp ^a, for just. Homer uses fipa, in general, i« 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
514 SYNTAX. [i 325 
 
 order to connect thoughts together, which are intimately related, and are do 
 veloped from each other. 
 
 Rem. 5. The lyric, tragic, and comic writers also employ the lengthened 
 form S.pa instead of Spa. Thus ei Spo, efr" Spo, instead of « &pa, ei-' 
 ipa. On the interrogative Spa and on Spa in a question, see § 344. 
 
 (b) oSc (Ion. S)y), which commonly has the second or third place in a sen- 
 tence, means, consequently, hence, therefore {ergo, igitur) ; it appropriately points 
 out the effect of a cavse, the necessary consequence of what precedes, and is, ac- 
 cordingly far stronger than &pa, but is also used in a more general sense. 
 
 Rem. 6. O 5 v is used as a sufSx to pronouns and conjunctions, and in this case 
 also, retains its conclusive sense : iaris ody, Ssirep odv, '6aoi odv, yiv ohi, yovv, S* oZv,' 
 a\K' olv, efr' olv, yhp oZv. It expresses a conclusion, a setting aside of every- 
 thing else, and a persisting in that which is affirmed ; hence it may express also 
 confirmation and assurance. So3<rTis oSv, (fsTrep oiy, whoever he jnay be then, 
 Saot oZv, hou^many so ever then, fihv odv, yes indeed (§ 316, Rem.), yovv, cer- 
 iainh, surely, oixovv, truly, certainly not, 5' oZv, oA,\' oiv, nritp oSy,but 
 surely, cIt^ oSr, be it this or thai, yip o Sr, for surely, el y oiv, if then. 
 
 Rem. 7. Oi/Kou;/, 33 a Paroxytone, means : (a) mm ergo, without interro- 
 gation (consequently ovk in connection with the syllogistic oiv, ergo) ; stUl in 
 this sense it is also written ovk oiv; {h) nuUo modo, nequaquam, by no means, 
 without interrogation (consequently oiix in connection with the emphatic suffix 
 oiv) most frequently iu answers, e. g. X. 0. 1, 9. oSkovv inoiye Soxe!, — Ou- 
 Kovv, as a Perispomenou : (a) in a question : nonne igitur ? nonne ergo ? X. C. 
 2. 2, 12. ovKovv, t<pTt 6 2., KaX T(p yehovi fioi\et orb apeoKeiv; — "Eyuye, H^. 
 Also in this case it is written ovk oiv,B,s well asotKovv; the latter has been 
 adopted in modem times, yet it is to be limited to such questions as involve a 
 special emphasis in the negative, and so oSkovv is equivalent to nonne certe ; 
 like S. Aj. 79. oiKow yi\as Ifitaros els ex^pofij ye\ay ; (b) without interrogation, 
 ergo, igitur. X. C. 3. 6, 6. ov kov v, ^<pT), Th fiev TrKovtrttcT^pav rijv ir6Xxv Trotetv 
 di/ajSaXot^jUE^a. This last arises from its use as an interrogative, and ovkovv is 
 in this case properly nonne igitur ? The frequent use of this interrogative form 
 has caused a gradual weakening in the interrogative tone, and thus its sense 
 has become obscure, e. g. ts it not true therefore yie shall put off? (== conse- 
 quently we shall put off). 
 
 (c) loivvv, which never stands as the first word in a sentence, is derived 
 from the Epic t $, therefore, and the slightly inferential or deductive viv, now, 
 which is derived from the temporal adverb vvv ; it is used : (a) to make 
 a transition; thus especially, koI roivvv, and now, In Toiyvv, moreover 
 then; (b) to mark a conclusion, tlierefore now, so tlien. Tolyap (from the Epic t^, 
 therefore, and yip) corresponds to the Latin 0770, therefore, but is poetic ; still 
 stronger is ToiyipToi, just on this account, precisely so, ani roiyapovv, on tliia 
 account then. They commonly stand as the first word in a sentence. 
 
 } 325. Asyndeton. 
 
 1. In certain cases sentences are connected without any conjunction (amy- 
 Uras), Only some of the more prominent instances will be mentioned : 
 
 (a) In pathetic and impassioned discourse, e. g. II. x, 295. (of Hector) ot^ 
 ii KaTaip{i<ras, 06S' «X\' ex« t^i'^U'ov hxos- Aj)t(()oj3oc S" iK<i\et \fVK<iamSa, luuc- 
 fbv hdom ^T € t luv S6pv iiaKp6v. — (b) Asyndeton is very common in explana 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
{ 326.] PRINCIPAL AND SUBORDINAl'E SENIENCES. 513 
 
 tory clauses, which are elsewhere connected by &pa [therefore, then, that is) and. 
 yip. The second clanse gives a more exact explanation of what was stated 
 only in a general, indefinite, indistinct manner in the first. So particularly 
 when there stands in the first clause a preparative demonstrative, e. g. toDto, ro'Se, 
 oStus, &9e, etc. X. An. 3. 2, 1 9. I v 2 fi6i/tp Trpaexowriy ^fjias oi IwirfTs ' ^fityeiv avrois 
 i<rtf>aK4<rrep6v iariv, ij iifCtv. — (c) Belated to the above is the asyndeton in the 
 beginning of a discourse or new paragraph, which is intended to strengthen a pre- 
 ceding thought. PI. Phaed. 91, c. 'AAV Iriov, lipri. XlpuT6v />« inrafuiiiaaTt 
 i i\iyere, iay /lij ^aiya/iai fitfivTiiifyos. — (d) The connecting particle is often 
 wanting, hut is, in a measure, involved in another word. This is the case es- 
 pecially with demonstratives, c. g. oSrius, T6<ros, roTos, etc., as in Latin with sic, 
 talis, tcmtus, etc. — (c) Before ri rotaOra, cetera, Ii\Aa, oi &\\oi in the 
 enumeration of several objects. Kid is very ccmmonly omitted, as et before ce- 
 teri, aiUi, religui, in Latin, when these words have a collective sense, i. e. when 
 one woold include in these expressions all which is still to be named in addi- 
 tion to what has been already mentioned. PI. Gorg. 503, e. oW el $oi\a ISuv 
 rohs ^wypdtffovs, robs oIko96ijiovs, robs vavmjyo^s, rohs &Wovs Trdvras dTjfiiovp' 
 yois. — (f ) In antitheses, which are to be represented as taking place equally, 
 and without distinction, the conjunctions are omitted. PI. Prot. 319, d. o-u/j- 
 0Qv\e^et vepl rodrav dfioltcs fi^v reuTav, diioias Se x^^'ccJ'S trnvrorSfios tpjropos 
 vaiKKiipos, trXoiaios ire'j^j, yevvtuos ayewiis. In poetry, particularly in Epic, 
 two or foiu: adjectives, belonging to one substantive (of which each two 
 form a whole), or even three, are often placed together, without a connec- 
 tive, if they are merely ornate epithets which, as it were, paint and vividly 
 describe the object. II. ir, 140 and 802. ?7X« PptSii, hh'^t a'riPapSy, Ktxopu- 
 ^/tcVov. Od. o, 96. Ko\ct ire'SiXo, iiifip6<rta, xp^ffeio. 
 
 CHAPTER Vm. 
 B Subordination. « 
 } 326. Principal and Subordinate Sentences. 
 
 1. When clauses, which together present one united thought, 
 are so related, as to their import, that the one is a dependent 
 and merely complementarj- or limiting member of the other, 
 then their connection may be expressed either by coordinate 
 conjunctions, as koI, Se, yap, apa, etc., e. g. to lap rjXSe, TO. S« poSa 
 &v3ta (the spring came, and the roses b^om) ; or in such a man- 
 ner, that the clause, which merely completes or limits the 
 other, is manifestly in its outward form, a dependent, or a sim- 
 ply com,pleting or limiting member of the other, e. g. ort to 
 
 , Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 16 SYNTAX. I? "26 
 
 iap ^X9e, rh ^6Sa ivM. This mode of connection is called 
 Subordination, and the clauses or sentences Subordinate. 
 
 2. The clause to which the other as a complementary ol 
 limiting member belongs, is called the principal clause ; the 
 complementary or limiting clause, the subordinate clause, and 
 the two together, a compound sentence. Thus, for example, in 
 the compound sentence,''Or£ to tap rjX^e, ra poSa Av^iet, the clause 
 on TO tap ^\3e, is the subordinate clause, the other the principal 
 clause. 
 
 3. Subordinate clauses stand in the place of a substantive 
 (substantive subject or object), or of an attributive adjective, 
 uf of an adverb, and hence must be regarded as substantives, 
 adjectives, or adverbs, expanded into a sentence ; accord- 
 ingly, there are three classes of subordinate clauses : sub- 
 Uantive, adjective, and adverbial clauses. 
 
 Thus, for example, in the sentence, " The victory of Cyras over the enemy 
 was announced," the subject may be expanded into a subordinate clause, 
 viz., " That Cyrus had conquered the enemy, was announced ; " further, in tha 
 sentence, " Sing to me, Muse, the far-wandering man," the attributive Jitr- 
 yxindering, may be expanded into a subordinate clause, " 6,v5pa fwt '^yyewe, 
 HoCffa, TraKvTfmov, %s ndKa woWi ir^iyx^V^' (u^ho has vxindered far). 
 Comp., " He announced the victory of Cyrus over tlie enemy ,^' with " He an- 
 nounced, that Cyrus had conquered the enemy ; " " In the Spring the roses bloom," 
 with, " when the Spring is come, the roses bloom." 
 
 Remark 1. The use of subordinate clauses in Greek is not so common 
 as in English, since the Greelc makes a much more frequent use of Participles 
 than the English. Comp. " when the enemy had come," with rav ttoKiixIuv 
 ^AAoi/TrnK ; " when he had done this, he went nvray," with totto irptijos airePri ; 
 " Cyrus, who had conquered the enemy, came back to the camp," with Kvpos 
 Tohs TToKe/iiovs i/iic-tjiras *(S rh crr^aroiredoy ac^A^e?. 
 
 Kem. 2. To substantive clauses bclotig als9 dependent or indirect inter- 
 rogative clauses ; for these form the object of the governing verb, e. g. " He 
 asked mc whether my father had returned, i. e. concerning, or in regard to, the return 
 of wji father ; "He showed, wlio had plotted the conspiracy, i. e. he showed the 
 author of the conspiracy : '" " He wrote mc, when he should depart, i. e. the time 
 of his departure," etc. Still, as the laws relating to dependent and to direct 
 interrogative clauses, are often blended together, both will bo treated in a 
 special section in the sequel. 
 
 IIem. 3. The subordinate re^tion of the dependent to the principal clause, 
 is indicated in Greek by conjunctions, and also by the relative pronoun, which' in 
 an adjective clause has the meaning of an adjective. The conjunctions are 
 correlatives, i. e. relatives which stand in a reciprocal relation to demonstra- 
 tives in principal clauses, e. g. O 5 j- ^ s ((rriv i a-viip, h v efSer. T i bilav, % hvhsi h 
 Tw K^TTif, Kii.K\urT6v iffTW. "EAsJe toBto, 8ti 6 &v^pamos a^ivixTis iffrur, 
 "'aio'S — oTos; S<r(t> — too-o^tisi. 'fls e\e£ii, o S t ti s cy4j'(To. OSTti) kb- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
' 327.] SBQBENCE OP TENSES. 5] 7 
 
 \»s irivra iTcpt^ef, Sste imtmu lieyltrrov Sfiot ^y. "Ort 6 KCpoi ^\at, 
 riJTe TTocTes ^570^101 ixdpwa"- 'Entire ;iiE'xpi to 1)701/, oS 6 ;8air,A€fcs ivv\- 
 b(v. A substahtive may also stand instead of a demonstrative correlative 
 e, g. iy Toii<t? T^xpiov^ ^^^ (instead of rSti, Stu). Still, when the reciprocal 
 relation is not to be brought out emphatically, the demonstrative is commonly 
 not expressed, e.g. 'EK^^y, 8ti 6 &vStpwTos 4S<£«t<!s itniy. Ka\as ireJi/™ 
 lirpalei'.^SjTe kt\. "Ore 6 KCpos ^K^c, Trivres ifieydKas ix^V<rav. 'E/ieiw, 
 lifXP' ou i fiam\eis 4irfi\Srcv, etc. Even bolli proliouns may, in certain cases, 
 be omitted, e. g. 'Efieiff, //.expi i 0a<ri\ebs iirrjA^fv, 
 
 Kbm.4. The foi-m of the demonstrative, in the principal clause, either 
 actually expressed or understood, determines the nature of the subordinate 
 clause. The substantive demonstrative denotes a substantive clause ; the ad- 
 jective, an adjective clause ; the adverbial, an adverbial clause. But tne 
 subordii^ate, clauses themselves have special characteristics by which they 
 may be distinguished from each other, viz., the introductory conjunctions antl 
 the constructions conrieoted with these. 
 
 fSS?", Sequfice of the Subjunctive Trnsei in Sub- 
 ordinate Sentences. 
 
 1. For the use of tenses in subjunctive subordinate ..lauses,t]3.e 
 following general rale applies in Greek, as in Latin : — 
 
 The tenses of the subjunctive subordinate clause correspond 
 to those of the principal clause ; i. e. a principal tense (Present, 
 Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect) in the principal clause, is fol- 
 lowed by the subjunctive in the subordinate clause, and an his- 
 torical tense (Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Aorist) in the principal 
 clause is followed in the subordinate clause, by the Optative, 
 i. e. the Subjunctive of the historical tenses. 
 
 ToDto XiytCf rovrS fioi XeXe/crai, touto A.e|&j, Tea yiyvtitrKTj s [yv^t), 
 hoc dico, dixi (Perfectum praesens), dicam, ut cognoscas% Tovro sK(yov, toStc! 
 ^01 iKiXsKT 0, TovTO e\e^a,'iva yiyv&tTKots (yco (rjs), hoc dicebam^ dix- 
 eram, dixi {Terfect. Tlistor.),nt cognosceres. Ovk ^X"! ^iroi Tptirwfiai (rp& 
 iTB^uai), non Aaieo, quo me Bertam. Ouk elx""! ^"^ Tpivoipiriii (rpairol- 
 tt?) y), non Aa6c6am, quo me certcrem. Oi iroKepLioi irivras, Stoi fee 4 y r i x" o^ h 
 KTelvovtriy. Ol Tro\4iMOt iravTaSt HTxp ^vT^x^^^^t %kt etv6v, 
 
 2. 13ut it is to be observed that the Greek confines itself less 
 regularly to the above rule, than the Latin, but has much 
 greater freedom. Very often in lively nan-ation, the Greeks 
 refer the predicate of a subordinate clause directly to the 
 present time of the speaker, without any regard to the principal 
 clause, so that, therefore, an historical tense in the principal clause 
 is followed by the same mode ( Subj.) and the same tenses which 
 Digitized by Microsoft® » 
 
618 SYNTAX. [5 327. 
 
 accompany the principal tenses. The dependent clause or dis- 
 course then assumes the character of independent or direct dis- 
 course (an objective mode of expression) ; the speaker, in hia 
 lively conceptions, brings the past into present view ; the pasi 
 becomes present to him. See } 345, 5. 
 
 5 327''. Use of Modes in Subordinate Clauses. 
 
 The use of modes in the diiferent kinds of subordinate 
 clauses, will be considered in treating these clauses each by 
 itself Here, only those characteristics will be noticed which 
 ar^ common to several kinds of subordinate clauses. 
 
 1. There is very often an attraction of the mode, a subordi- 
 nate clause which forms an intermediate member of another 
 clause, taking the mode of this clause. 
 
 (a) This occurs with the Indie, of the historical tenses in those subordinate 
 clauses, which form an intermediate or accessory member of a hypothetical 
 proposition with el and a preterite Indie, in the Protasis, and a preterite Indie. 
 with Kc in the Apodosis [§ 339, 2, I. (b)]. X. C. 1. 4, 14. (&vApanros) oSts $ohs 
 ttv %x^^ ^^h^f ^^^P^"^^^ ^^ y^^t^"^^^ iSifvar^ iiv vpirr^iv, i. ifioi\€TO (as in 
 liat. e&cere posset, quae vellet). 3. 5; 8. ei iPov\6fie&a xpTtixiruv S>v ol itWoi 
 e ?X »' iLi/rnroie7iTbai [si vellemus expetere opes, qmxs alii haberent). Isocr. Paneg. 
 1 9. ^ X P ^ ** {"Tohs piiropas) ^-ii irporepov wepl ruv 6p.o\oyouiJi,4yuv trupL^ovKe^eiy, irplp 
 Trepl ruv afi<pis^7]rovp.€vuj/ ^jttas iSlSa^av {oportebat . .priusquarn . . docuissent). 
 PI. Gorg. 506, 6. TjSeas &*' KoXAtKXc* toiitu €T1 SieAeytJjUT^y, ttos ain^ . . 
 ciireSuKa (usque dum reddidissem). Prom this maybe explained tlie use of 
 the ludic. Imperfect or Aorist in iinal clauses after an Indie, of an historical 
 tense with or without &v. See § 330, 5. 
 
 (b) Very often with those subordinate clauses which are intermediate or ac- 
 cessory members of optative clauses, i. e. clauses expressing a wish ; hence with 
 adjective, adverbial, or final clauses, as members of a clause expressing a ictsA, 
 or as intermediate members of an optative proposition expressed conditionally, 
 II. p, 640. efrj 8" SsTts eroijooy lf7rayycl\cie tcJ^'Tb IlijXcfSp (0 tlmt there 
 were a friend to announce as quick as possible). Ar. Vesp. 1431. epSoi tis, tin 
 sKafTTOs eidclr] t4xvw. PI. Phaedr. 279, u. rh xpv(rov ■7r\TJ^os etrt itot, Stray 
 fi^Te (pfptiv, /h'^t' &yitii Sivatr' &Wos, ij i cii<ppaii. II. »-, 464, sqq. ot yip 
 /uv dcwdroio Svsrix^os SSe Svvalinir v6a<t>ty awoKpif ai, Stc /uv liSpos alvh. 
 iKivoi. — X. S. 8, 17. T(j/ii<r€i)' Si fair' Uv, 40' oS ciSci'i) Ka\6s re Koi iiya- 
 dis yoiii^ojiems. C. 4. 6, 7. irws yhp &v tis, S. ye piii ^TrdrroiTo, ravra (rofhs 
 ttrj; PI. Phaed. 72, c. ei cnro^yiia-Koi fiev irivra, i<ra roO ^v /i6T-aX<£j3oi, 
 i-reiS^ 5e airoA <ivo t, (if vol iv ToiTip r$ ax'lltiaTi t4 Te^veSra kcH /x^ inUii 
 kyaPiii(rKoiTo,Sp'ov iroWi) iviyKV Tt\fVT&yTa wiyra Tf^drat xal ptriSh Cv" 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t J97.] MODES IN SUBORDINATE CLAUSES 519 
 
 X. \J. 1, 13. eliTis xPV'"' '■'? ^Py^p'^ft S jTe kAkiov rh (rmjui %x°h "■*' &" ^'^ 
 ri 4p7v,iiov oirij) uxpeKi/wv eft) ; S. Ph. 325. Av/ihy yivono x^V' TAT^pSirol 
 iroTc, y^" o 'nuK^i'oi yyotec . ., oTi x^ SftCpos Si/Spwr iAKfftaiK^^TTip l(^u. Eur. 
 Troad. 698. laiSo T(<»'Sc iroiSis iK&p4\jiats AvyTpoiaa iiLeyurrov ii^iKittC,'li^ oJ 
 TTOTC iK (Tov ^ cvSfievot TTcuSes '^l\iov TrilXtv KUToiKiae lay Kcd ir6\is yevotr' iri. 
 X. An. 2. 4 3. oJ/c iTruTTijieSta, 8ti |3a(n\ci>s ^|u5s iiroA^irai nepi iravTbs &v 
 ■KOfliiraiTO, <va Kol tois ttWois ''£\\i)(ri <(>(!;3or tiri M fiaaiKia lieyav trroaTiv 
 (w (accordinj, (o the best MSS.). Comp. 3, 1, 18. X. Cy. 2. 4, 17. « Sj) jrei- 
 ir a 1 s ftroiyeo' i f iroAXolJs, 8 ir a j !(j|av X (i i3 o t s, &pTi ^IrproniKii efTj j Si*. Comp. 
 2. 4, 17. But uince the Optative in a clause expressing » wn'sA as well as the 
 Optative in hyjiothetical propositions, has a present signification (§ 259, 3), ac- 
 cording to § 3&0, 2 the Subj. must properly follow after the Jinal conjunction^, 
 as is frequently the case. PI. Apoi 28, d. ainlKa re^yalrfy, ?vo fiij iv- 
 ^cfSe fievu KwrayiXMrros. X, An. 3. i, 38. otofxai hv vfuis ficya ovritTat rh ffrpd- 
 reviia, et iTrifi€\7]^ti7iref Hvas oirl ruv &,iro\u>\6Twy us T£ix*<TO tTTpaTtjyol 
 ivTiKaTaiTTaduiriv. Cy. 3. 2, 28. xMa""'0 irposytvit Hai ?t£ hv 0ov\oi- 
 ftijy fi/juv, biras fX" /^'C^^" a^^6vas SiSiyai. Also with /iij [whether not = 
 that). An. 1.3, 17. ^7<ii okvoIiiv fi^y ttv eU to v^oia ififfaiycLy, h riixiv Soiri,. n J) 
 ^fixis avTcus reus Tpiiipetrt Karabiffrif tpo^oliiriv 8* %v t^ yjye^vt ^ Solri eirfff- 
 dai, fi^ Tjfjtas ayd.yig, li^ey obx oT6u re eirrcu i^e?^eiy. 
 
 Remark. But in substantive-clauses with 3ti or &s, that (§ 329), and in 
 dependent interrogative clauses, after a conditioning or conditioned Ind. of 
 the historical tenses, the Ind. of the principal tenses remains ; also after an 
 optative principal clause, since these clauses have but a loose connection with 
 the principal clause, and hence they readily assume the form of direct discourse. 
 X. An. 5. 1, 10. 61 fi^v ^irtffrdfie^a ira<p&s, ^rt ifi^et Xeiptirotpos, oiiSev ttp 
 ?!« Sy/iEjkAoi Xf7eiy. (So in the best and most of the MSS. instead of 7)|oi.) 
 Dem. 19, 40. iypa^ov ttv Sia^^^Tjv, ^Aiko dfjtas ed iroi'fia'u, el eS ^Sety Ka\ 
 r7]v ffvfxpLax^o-y fioi yevTjffo^eyify. — Dem. 16, 4. ou8* tiv cTs Styreiiroi, &s oii 
 avfuffxpei r^ Tr6\€i, Kcd ^cuceSaifiovlovs cur^eyeis elycu Kol ®Tj0aiovs. X- -^^* 3- 
 2, 36. «' TOK IciroSeix^f^Vt rlya xph iyeiir&ai (ducere) rov uKauriov, . , ouk 
 tiv . . $ov\eieff^ai Tjfjias i4ot. 
 
 2. The Subj. and Opt. are used in subordinate clauses to de- 
 note mdefinite frequency or repetition ; the Subj., when the prin- 
 cipal clause contains a principal tense (Pres. or Fut.), the Opt., 
 when the principal clause contains an historical tense (usually 
 the Irapf.). This relation in Greek is regarded as a conception, 
 inasmuch as the idea of repetition arises from bringing single 
 actions together in conception. The conjunction or relative of 
 the subordinate clause is translated by as often as. 
 
 n. /S, 391. hy Se k' iyiiy hrdyev^e fiAxV^ id4\oyra vo4\aui iu/ivd(eiv ■napa 
 OTjuirl Kopuvlaiv, oS oi citeito &pxioy iaaeiTot ipvyhiv xiyas ^5' ommis {as often as 
 I sliall observe). X. Gy. 3. 3, 26. dirirav [at pdpPapoi j3oo-i\e?s) o-rpaTowt- 
 ttitayrat, rdippov irepi^Womai einrfTws 5ia r^v TroKvxetptay. C. 3. 1, 1. o ti 
 liir [Satcpdrns) ainhs ciSe(t), irdyray irpodu/iiraTa iSlSatrxii , Stou Se ourbj 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
520 SYNTAX. [H 328, 329 
 
 avetfirfpos elfi?, Jrpis Toi/s hvitrTafiivovs ^ey al/rois. An. 6. 1, 7. iir-ore a, 
 'EAAiji/es ToTs iroXefilus evlotey, (nfSliDS atre^evyov. 4. 5, 30. onov aem<pa. 
 vapiot Kt^fiTiv, iTp4ireT0'jrphs Tovs ip rais Ktifiats^ 1.9, 18. et ris ye ri Kvpa vpos- 
 rd^avTi Ka\&s virtj perjiffeteyf oi/dcfl irdiroTe a^dpttTToy etaire T^v Tvpo^vfuaym 
 
 § 328. I. Substantive-Clauses. 
 
 Substantive-clauses are substantives or infinitives expand- 
 ed into a sentence, i. e. they have the force of a substantive, 
 and stand as the subject, as well as the attribute or object of 
 a sentence. Comp. § 326, 3. 
 
 } 329. A, Substantive-Clauses introduce d by on ot 
 a>s, that. 
 
 1. Substantive-clauses introduced by ort and is, t/iat, 
 
 express the object of verba sentiendi and declarandi, e. g. opav, 
 
 aKovav, voelv, fjuivi^dveiv, yiyvuxTKUv, etc. ; Xeyciv, ZrjXovv, SeiKvvvai, 
 
 ayyiXXeiv, etc., [} 306, 1, (b)] ; in the second place, subordinate 
 
 clauses introduced by ort, express the object of verba affectuum, 
 
 e. g. ^av/ia^eiv, a^^ea-^ai, oiyavaKTetv, ahr^^vvia^ai, iJt,ifjL<f>e(T9ai, etc. ; 
 
 on is also used to introduce a subordinate clause, which con 
 
 tains an explanation of the principal clause, or of a single w^ord 
 
 in it. 
 
 Remakk 1. 'flj, properly, iow, differs from Sti, in expressing the thought 
 more indefinitely and undecidedly, than 8ti ; hence Ids is used particularly after 
 verbs of believing, thinJting, and after negative verba sentiendi and declarandi. 
 — After verbs of believing, thinking., judging, hoping, promising, sweai'ing, denying, 
 the Inf. or the Ace. with the Inf. usually follows, very seldom ort or S) s', after 
 verbs of saying, mentioning, and the like, both constructions occiar with equal 
 frequency; after verbs of knowing, showing, and the like, either on or &s 
 follows, or a participle, or, under certain conditions, the Ace. with the Inf. See 
 4 311. Sometimes, also, 3 7 u s and the Poet, o 8 v € k a, also AdoivfKa iathe 
 Tragedians, are used nearly in the same sense with Sti, that. 
 
 Rem. 2. When a subordinate clause refers to a Pass, verb or to an imper- 
 sonal phrase with ^o-tIv-, e. g. 55)\oy, SeicoV, alaxpi" ^ctic, and the like, it stands 
 as the grammatical subject. 
 
 2. The predicate of this substantive-clause may be ex- 
 pressed : (a) by the Ind., (b) by the Opt., (c) by the Opt. with 
 av, (d) by the Ind. of Hist, tenses with av. 
 
 3. The Ind. of all the tenses is used, when the statement is 
 to be represented as a fact, something certain or actual. Pai- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
5 329. 1 SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES, 521 
 
 ticularly is the Ind. used regularly, when the verb of the priii- 
 eipal clause is a principal tense (Pres., Perf., or Fut.). 
 
 4. The Opt., on the contrary, is used, when the statement is 
 to be represented as a conception or supposition, therefore, par- 
 ticularly, w^hen what is stated as the (ynnion of another ii to be 
 indicated as suck (} 345, 4). "When the Ind. interchanges with 
 the Opt., then one thought is represented as a fact, the other, 
 as a mere thought or conception, something uncertain. 
 
 X. Cy. 1. 4, 7. ol 5' i\fyov, Sti &pKTOi iro^Xohs ijSjj nKiifridtravTas Sic^&ei- 
 pav. Th. 1, 114. ^77€'A&i), ffrt Vleyapa a,p4arriKe, /cal nE\a7rwi'^(rioi /itA- 
 hoviriv isPiWeiv is rijv ■Attik^k, Her. 3, 140. Truvdaverai (Hist. Pres.) 5 2u- 
 \OfTuv, i>s T} 0oun\Trji7j Trep te\7i\i^o t h tovtoi/ rhv &i'Spa, X. An. 1. 1, 3. 
 Tiffffa^ipt/T/js iia0d?^et (Hist. Pres.) Thy Kvpov irphs rhy aSe\<p6y, &s iiri^ov' 
 \€tio( ouT^, Cy. 1. 1, 3. fire fiey Brj Tcuha iye&u^oiS/Ac^o, o^us iytyy^ffKOfiey 
 irepl auray, & s av^pdvip ne^vK6Ti iriyray ruv ^Wav ^^oy eXif C'^^y ^ av^pdj* 
 iruy &px^ty* An. 2. 1, 3. oZroi ^\eyoy, Brt Kvpos /ihy Te^vrjKev, 'Apttuos 8c 
 ireipsvy^s ettj ffol Keyoi, iSti TaiiTTjy r^v Tjfiepay repineiveiey hv avTois, 
 
 Rem. 3. When the Ind. Imp/, instead of the Opt. follows an historical tense 
 in the principal clause, the mode of expression resembles the form of direct 
 discourse, since the Ind. of direct discourse remains, e. g. acvofSy ^Keycy, 2 t i 
 opAus ^Tiwyjo Kol avrh rh ^pyoy avTois fiapTvpoi-rj, X. A. 3. 3, 11. [oratio recta: 
 op^us aiTiayTai). See § 345, Rem. 5. But when the Ind. of the principal 
 tenses follows an historical tense in the principal clause, then the subordinate 
 clause assumes wholly the coloring of direct discourse (§ 345, 5). Hence it 
 sometimes happens, that the form of the oblique discourse is either partially 
 or wholly changed into that of the direct. X. Cy. 1. 4, 28. iyrav^a S^ rhy 
 Kvpov yekdffai t6 ^k ray vp6(r^€y SoKpiwy kaI clireiy avr^ kiri6yTa ^a^^tty, Uti 
 IT ap4 (TTai aiiTots o\iyou ")(jp6yov' ffisre bpav trot i^effTat ntLy ^ovXy cuTKap- 
 SafivKTel. Hence 8t£ maybe used, when the exact words of another are quoted 
 in the same form in which they were spoken by him, when in Eng., a colon or 
 marks of quotation are used, e. g. X. Cy. 3. 1, 8. iTirf S', Sri- Els Kiuphv fiKeis 
 £01), he said: "you have come at the right time." An. 2. 4, 16. Upo^eyos 
 tlv^v, 8 T 1 • Auto's elp.t, t>y Ci)Tf«. It is used even before the Imp., e. g. PI. Criton. 
 50, c. Xaas ty ^itoiey (oi yi/iuu), Sri-Tl Sd/cpoTfj, /iii dai/ia^e ri, Ktyi/icya. 
 
 6. Tlie Opt. with av is used, when the statement is to be 
 represented as a conditional supposition, assumption, conjecture, 
 or as an undetermined possibility [} 260, 2, 4, (a)]. 
 
 • X. An. 1. 6, 2. KaraXKayAs Se ouros K.ip<f, they, el oury So It) lirweas X'^' 
 evs, on Tois TrpoKaroKolovTas 'nrweas ti KaraKivoi i.y iyeSpeiffas, J) (ayrai 
 woWoiis ttVTuy c\ot, kcA KioKiaete tov Katav inUvras. Cy. 1. 6, 3. /ie/iyirifuu 
 liicoiaas irori aov, 8 t i ciko'tws & v (col irapk beSiy TrpaKTixdrepos eXi), Sisirep Ktu 
 Traph aydpiiruy, 'isTis fi-ti, iTr6Te iy atiipois etij, tote KoKcucsioi, &M.' 3t€ to &purra 
 irpoTTOi, T<iTE niKufTO. ruv SnSiv iie/iy^TO {Ssrts ji-li ktK. instead of rf tk ^^ 
 <tA.). Dem. Aphob. 851, 22. oISo. l-i vavris iy 6 fioKoyliiTaiTe. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
fi'Z2 SYNTAX. [i 329 
 
 6. The Ind. of the Hist, tenses with av is used, when the 
 affirmation is to be represented as a condition, whose actual 
 tixistence or possibility is denied [) 260, 2, (2) (a)]. 
 
 Dem. Aphob. 830, 55. e i /iki' S irarjip ^ tt i <r t e ( tovtois, Sri\oy, St i otr a v 
 laXKa. iiTfTpeTrev, otjr^ hv Tav^* out(o KoToAiirij/ avTo7s i^pa^ev, IjTS. c. 
 Agor. 137, 75. ouSeVore TTfiVeii oiSeVa hv^pdmav. Ins ipivixov mroKTtlvas hipti- 
 ^rts fi y, ei ^^ ^eyd\a rhv ^r^iov rap 'A^valav koI vtv^KetTTa kuk^ etpyiiffa. 1 1. 
 lip. 1. 330. ®€^nrTOK\i]S aireKpivaTOf Hrt ohr* tw avrhs %epl<lia>5 t)V oyo^affrhs 
 i y e y e T Of otr' ixeiyos 'A^yaios {&y)' 
 
 Rem. 4. Impersonal forms of expressions are often changed into those which 
 are personal, the subject of the substantive-clause being transfen-ed to the 
 principal clause and the impersonal egression becoming its predicate. 
 Corap. §§ 307, Rem. 6, and 310, Rem. 3. Th. 1, 93. koI S^Ajj ti ol/coSo/ti'a 
 Iti ko! vvv iariv, Sti Karb. ffirouSV iyivero, X. C. 4. 2, 21. ifioKiib ToioiJtos) 
 S^Xoi vjl Af elva,\, Sti 6, i^eto tlSevai ovk olSev. X. O. 1, 19. Sti Troyripir- 
 aToi €10*1, oiiBe ire Kav^dyovtriy, 
 
 Rem. 5. In the place of a enbstantive-clanse introduced by Srt or &s, the 
 Inf. (Ace. with the Inf.) or the Part, may stand after verba declarandi and sen- 
 iiendi. That there is a difference of meaning between the construction with 
 the Inf and that with the Part., has been seen in § 311 ; but the difference be- 
 tween the construction with a Part, and that with Sti or &s, is only in form. 
 The difference between the construction with in and us with the finite verb 
 and that of the Inf. (Ace. with Inf) is, that in the former, the aifirmation is 
 more objective and definite (as a, fact) ; in the latter, on the contrary, subjective 
 and indefinite (as an assumption). Hence verbs which express a merely sub- 
 jective meaning, as, oliabat, SoiceTy, 4kTi(eiv, and also ipivai (i.e. 
 verbs which denote such a subjective view), are constructed almost exclusively 
 with the Inf. (Ace. with the Inf), very seldom with 8ti or ij. That the distinc- 
 tion between the three modes of construction is very often unessential, is clearly 
 seen from the fact, that examples are found in which the same thought is ex- 
 pressed by the same writer in different places in each of the three forms, e. g. 
 Her. D, "63. ^^ayyeWsty ihs oi Trais yeyoye. 65. 3t6 ol 4^-liyyet\e & oiKerits 
 iratSa yeyoyeyai. 69. Sre auT§? ffl ijyyeK^Tjs yeysyrifiGyos. 
 
 Rem. 6. The verbs /le'/u "IMo'i oTSo, aKoia and others of similar mean- 
 ing, are not unfrequently followed by an adverbial clause, introduced by Sre, 
 instead of a substantive-clause introduced by Sti or iis. This construction 
 secmsto have arisen from an ellipsis, as toG xpoyov, e. g. ficjiyTiiiJua (toD xp^yov), 
 Sre TauTa ^Kc^as, as in Eng. / remember very wdl when the war broke out. X. 
 Cy. 1. 6, 8. fitfiyTjfiai koL tovto, Ste, (tov \4yoyToSy (rvvehoKet koJ i/iol {nreofi^y- 
 fdes ehai ipyoy rh Ka\us &pxf'y. Dem. 01. 2(3), 29, 4. jae^uyrjiraf, St' iniy- 
 7€Adij *(\i7r7ros irepiopKuv. Comp. memini, gwim darera ; vidi, guum prodiret , 
 audivi eum, guum diceret. 
 
 Rem. 7. Verbs expressing emotion (No. 1 ), instead of being followed by a sub- 
 stantive-clause introduced by Sri or is, are often followed by a subordinate clause 
 introduced by a conditional or interrogative ei, if, whether, when the object of 
 admiration, etc., is not to be represented as actually existing, but as merely pos- 
 sible, or as still a matter in question, e. g. &ou|Uofa?, Sti toiVo yiyyirai and u 
 toEto ylyyfTai. Attic politeness, which often blends in its language a coloring 
 of doubt and a certain indeterminate manner of expression, frequently employs 
 this form even in settled and undoubted facts ; in this case ei has the force of 
 Sti. Aeschin. Ctcs. o6k ayair^, ei ju^ Si/nji/ ISmkcv {he is not satisfied, that). 
 Fl. Lach- 194, a. iyayaicTW ei oliruxrl ft vow fij) etos t" ei/il eiireiy. Rp. 34& 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
K330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 523 
 
 e. Ti(8« i^aifiatra, el iv &peT7Js Kul iroiplca tIAt)s n4pei r^v iSi/cfoc, rijv Si Si- 
 Kiuaaiviiv iv ■fois ivavrlois. Dem. Mid. 30, 548. ouk ^irxii>^v> «> roiovra 
 KMchv iirdyn ra (that he brings smh a calamity upon one). 
 
 Rem. 8. Instead of 8t» oSrais, the relative iis,ihat, is often used, and 
 instead of 8ti toioCtos or Srt rSiros, the relatives otos, Saos. PI. 
 Phaed. 58, e. eitaiimv noi 5 aviip iipalvero, &s iSeas kal ycvvaius iTeKeira {that 
 he died so fiarkisly, eic). Her. 1, Sl.al'Ap^cTiu inamipifov r^v infrfpa, olaw 
 TCKvui' ixip^ae (that she is possessed of such children). 
 
 ♦ 330. B. Final Substantive -Clauses, denoting pur- 
 pose and result, introduced by is, 'vol, etc' 
 
 1. The second class of substantive-clauses are those which 
 denote a purpose, object, or a result. These clauses are intro- 
 duced by the conjunctions Tvo, <us, ottws (o^pa. Poet.), Iva 
 fi^, As /;ti7j oiro)S fly}. 
 
 2. The mode in ^nal clauses is commonly the subjunctive 
 or optative, since the purpose or object is something^ merely 
 imagined or conceived. When the verb of the principal clause 
 is a principal tense : Pres., Perf , Fut., or an Aorist with the sig- 
 nification of the present [J 257, 1, (a) and (b)], then the final 
 conjunction, i. e. the conjunction expressing the purpose, etc., 
 is followed by the Subj. ; but when the verb of the principal 
 clause is an historical tense : Impf , Plup., Aor., then the final 
 conjunction is followed by the optative (but never by an Opt. 
 Fut). 
 
 Tofra ypiipa, y4ypa<pa, ypd^f/u, tv' l\dy s [ut venids, that you may 
 come). A^loc (with the sense of the Pres.), &' eiSS (die, ut sciam,ihat I 
 may haom). ToDra typa^ov, iyeypa^etr, lypw^a, 'Cy' e\&ois (at ve- 
 nires, ihatyou might come). II. A, 289, sq. oWl' lAiis iKaivere iidiiivxas linrovs 
 i^inuv AttvaZv, tif Imcprepov eZxos ipriff^e (ut gRriam vobis paretis) ; but, 
 B. E, 1 — 3. ?»a' 8? TvSelSri AtoiiiiSet TIaWhs'AMvTi 5m kc /idms koX Adpros, Up 
 fKJhi\os fierii iraffiv *Apy€loi(Ti yivono, iSe kK^os i(T^\hif &potTo (ut clarus 
 Jieret et gloriara sibi pararet). t, 347. Jupiter said to Minerva, &AA' JSi oi vixrap 
 Te kbJ an^poal-nv ipareiv^v iTTii^ov (with the sense of the Pres.) ii>l ar-fi^sa-a' , 
 Ua nil fiiv M/jhs XKTirai. (ut ne fames eum occupa) ; but, 352, r) 8" 'AxiA-^iVeK- 
 Tap M (TT^iAcaffi Kot anPpotrSyiv ipwraviiy ari^, Iva )t.i\ fuv \tfths iTEpir^s yoi- 
 vaSr' Xkoito (ut ne occuparet). Dem. Cor. 239, 39. yiypa(\ia fifiv, 'iva /iii 
 ftrl Tr\e!ov ivox^Vir^e Tepl rovTuv. X. Cy. 2. 1, 4. rl odv, iiprn * Kvpos, oil 
 ita! ■rijv iiva/uv iKe^is uoi [=\4iov fioi, § 256, 4, (e)], STras — 0ov\ev<i 
 
 ' For practical reasons both kinds of subordinate clauses are brought together 
 tore although they properly belong to adverbial clauses denoting purpose. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
624 srNTAX. [^ 330 
 
 Kt&o, Hnas tw Apurra. iyuviColiie^a; 1. 2, 3. {iK ttjs tZv TlepTmi' jKevh^pas ceyo- 
 oas KoKovufinis) rh iiff Hyia Kol oi ayopatoi &iti\{i\avrai els SXKov t6vov, u>i 
 rt^ /ityvvriTai fi tovtoiv Tup;3i) rp tuv veiratSev/ieycuv eliKofffiif. 15. iva oJ 
 (TttiptffTfpov 8 7) \ to ftp irSo-a ^ Xlepffay 'n-o\ireia, litKphv iirdveiiit {paucis repe- 
 tam). 4, 25. KafiPiarii rhv KOpof oTr£Ko\6i, Sirui ri ^v Tl4p<rais iinx<ip"l 
 iwtTeKolri. PI. Apol. 28, d.ouWica Ttavofiji' (with the sense of the Pres.), 
 Jva ix^ iv^dSe /xevat KaTayehaaros, 
 
 Eemark 1. The Subj. often follows an historical tense : (a) in vivid nar 
 ration, where past actions are regarded as present (objective manner of repre- 
 sentation, ^ 327, Eem. 2) ; (b) when the purpose or effect is to he repre- 
 sented as continuing in the present time of the speaker, (a) Her. 1, 29. 'S,6\<i>v 
 i.irtS'fiiiTifff eTca Sexa, 'Iva S)) nil Tiva, tuv v6iJmv kvayKaa^^ Kvaai rS>i> 
 (= Sy) eftfTo (Solon was absent ten years, in order that he might not be compelled, 
 etc.). 7, 8. o-^AXoyov Tlfpaeuv ruv apiffrwv ^Troieero, tvayvdifias re vv^ii' 
 Tai aipiiov Kot avr))! Iv traai eiirr] ri de\ei. Th. 4, 1. koJ i sf 0(PK'iiKe(rai> 
 aua is rijv ^PTiyivuv oi AaKfSaifiovtoi, Iva pt,^ (oVVriyivoi) 4tri^oTj^ufft toIs 
 
 ir6\eis aVTUv irap^priTaL Koi rerpapxias KareaTTjiTev, Iva fii] pl6vov Karh ir6- 
 Keis, aWh Kol Karit l^ri Sov\eia(Tiy. PI. Crit. 43, b. iirlTitSes <re ou/r e^f i- 
 pov, 'Iva is^SiCTa Sidyris. 
 
 Rem. 2. On the contrary, a preceding principal tense, or an Aor. with Pres. 
 sense, is sometimes folloiycd by an Opt. : (a) when the present of the principal 
 clause is an historical present, or when, in the use df the Pres., the speaker has 
 lit the same time contemplated a past action ; Eur. Hec. 10. ttokIv 5e aiiv ifiol 
 Xpvffhv iKTre p.ir e t \^pa var'fip, Xv', eXiror 'l\lou retxv ireiroi, to7s ^uatv eXri 
 iraitrl p.ii trTrdvts ^iov. X. An. 4. 6, 1. toStov 5* 'Eiric^eyei . . it a p o 5 i 5 w <r * <^u- 
 XdrreLv, Sir us, et Ka\as ^■y^ffoiTo, ex^^v Kal Tovrav aTciot, Ar. Kan. 24. auros 
 j3oSifw Kal TTOVW, Tovrov 5' ox^, 'iva ju^ t aXairanrKpolro, iJ.r]d* &x^os 
 ipepot {I let this one ride on an ass = I placed him on an ass, in order that he 
 might not suffer hardship), (b) when the speaker adduces the intention or pur- 
 pose which a person entertains, not as coming from his own, i. e. the speaker's 
 mind, but from that of the person himself, so that the intention is indicated as 
 one that had a previous existence ; PI. Rp. 410, b. op' oSy, ?iv S' 4yti, Si TKai- 
 Kuv, Kai ol Kod'tindvTes jiovtriK^ Kal yv^vatrriK^ TraiS^xtfiv ovx ov 'evexd rtves otov- 
 rat Ka^ KTTaiT tv, Xva rij fiev rb a^p-a Repair evotvr o, rij 5e t^v ^ux'fivj 
 (the view of the lawgiver, i. e. his purpose). X. An. 2. 4, 4. fo-tus Se irou (^a- 
 ffiKehs) ^ airoffKdiTTii tl fj airoTeixiC^i, oiS diropos eti) ti 6S6s (the view of the 
 king), (c) when in the principal clause, the Opt. stands with or without &v 
 [§§ 259, 3, (a) and 260, 2, (4), (a)], then an Opt. commonly follows, for the con- 
 ceptions in the principal and subordinate clause are represented as separated 
 trum the present time of the speaker (5 259, 3) ; still, a Subj. may follow by 
 attraction of the mode, since the present sense of the Opt. is assumed. See 
 5 3271', 1. (b). Theogn. 881. eip^vij Kal tKovtos ^X"' "'"iAii', Sippa /ler' &\\av 
 KijnrdQoifjii, Soph. Aj. 1217, sq. ycvoiiii.av,1vi\aev fireim ir6vT0u ■irp6ff- 
 KTjp.' a\lK\vtrTQV — , Tas iepScs 'Situs -k pos clno ifiev 'A^^vas, 
 
 3. When two or more final clauses follow each other, the 
 Subj. sometimes interchanges with the Opt. The two clauses 
 are then placed in a kind of antithesis to each other, the formei 
 representing the result of the purpose or aim as certain 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 330.] FINAL SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES. 523 
 
 the latter, without this accessory idea, and consequentJy aa 
 uncertain, undetermined, or only derived from what precedes. 
 
 II. 0, 597, sq.'E/cTopi yip ol ^v/ihs ifioiXero kvSos opc'loi npiajiifSjj, iva ynwl 
 KopavWi aeo-iriSaes TrBp i/ipiKy lucdnaTOD, QeriSos 8" ^{afiriai/ apV Tratrcw iiri- 
 Kfiivete. Her. 9, 51. is rovrov 8^ rhv x^pov iPovXciiravTo /uenwrrflxai, 'Iva 
 Ka\ SSan ixairt xpS(r&Bi hip&Sva, koJ oi fmrees (rij)4a$ /lii artyolaTO. 8,76 
 r&rSf 8e rfi/t/cEy oc^yoi' (oi Tlepffcu) rir v^ar, ?!/« St) toTo-i °E^A1)0■l |U»)Si (puydeu- 
 iii 4AA' niroXo/i^eWej ^c tJ SoXo/irci Sorci/ riaiv rS>v in' 'hprentaitf. 
 
 4. The modal adverb av, referring to a conditioning clause 
 (generally not expressed), is sometimes joined with tlie final 
 conjunctions ws and ottws (more seldom Iva). 
 
 Od. «, 167, sq. irc|Ui)(ai 8e' toi oSpoi' iiruTSiev, &s xe fui\' ao-ff^STjs (tV fOTpfSc 
 7iu<ii' i^Kiiai, af ice fteof y' iAiKaai. ft, 20, sq. Koi /uv imKpiTepoi> Kol iri£(r 
 (Tofa dq/ce (S^trd'ai, lis KfV iaii\KeaiIi if>i>j>s iiivTeaai ycvotro {sc. el irpis ropi 
 iairiKas a^lxoiTo). Her. 3, 44. iSeii^, 8k as &y Kol irop" laiiric iri/MJ/as is 2* 
 /uoy Seoito arpaTov («*,«' opt« esse*, exercitum a se peteret). X. Cy. 5. 2, 2i. 
 Siir^jiriis xi'P''^ ^Icis ^^inr) STrair ftj/ eiSS/tev, ore Set (piKia Kal iroKifiio 
 voixi^eiv (in order that, when we set our foot on the land, we Jimy know, etc.). H. 4 
 8,16. iSaKe xp^f^'To- "Ai/toAkW^, 3irws i.v, vKiipw^ivTos yavTiKov 5wt 
 AaKeSatfioyiwy, o'l re 'A^vouot Koi ol avti/iaxoi wnav fioXKoy ttjs tlp^yrji 
 vposSeoivTO. 
 
 5. The final conjunctions Iva and is (more seldom ottok), 
 are connected wiMi the Ind. of the historical tenses, when it is 
 to be indicated that the intended purpose is not accomplished, 
 or is not to be accomplished. In this case, in the principal 
 clause, the Ind. of an historical tense stands both with and 
 without S.V. See i 227^, 1. (a). 
 
 Ar. Pac. 135. ovkow ixPV " "^ Uriydirou feSloi irrepSv, Sirus ii^aivov ro7s 
 heo7s rpayiK^Tcpos, PI. Cri'ton..44, d. el yctp &(pe\ov oXoi re elvai ol voWoX rk 
 lieyuTTtt KOKtk i^epyi(e<r&ai, Kva otol re ^ffav ad /col aya^oL ri /leynrra, ko) 
 KoKm ir eTxe. Lys. Simon. 98, 21. iffov\6firiv S" &v ^ifiava tV aurV 
 yv^fiTjv, ifiol ^x^^^)"^^^ afMporepcai' Ti/jLuv aKoiaavres raKyj^ ^^Siws eyvtare rh 
 SiKtua, 
 
 6. Verbs which express care, anxiety, considering, endeavor- 
 ing or striving, effecting, and inciting, e. g. hn)ie\acrBai, <f>povn- 
 ^av, SeBUvai, (jivXarrav, a-KOTreLV, aKiij/atrSui, fiavXtvecrSai, opav, irnteTv, 
 irparrew (curare), iJi,rjxci.vour&ai, TrapaKoXeiv, ■KapayyeXX.uv, irpoeL-Trecv, 
 alTiia-Sai, aiiovv, aye {up then), and the like, are followed by the 
 3onjunctions ottco? (oTrtos firi), sometimes also by ws, either 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
626 SYNTAX. [i 33L 
 
 (according to No. 2) with the Subj. and Opt., or with the Put 
 Ind., when the acooniphshment of the purpose is to be repre- 
 sented as something definitely occurring and continuing. 
 
 'X. Cy. 1.2,3. 01 XlepcriKol vituii. iirififKovTai, Strus tV «PXV A*^ roiou- 
 Toi iaoirai oi to^itiu, oSm (:= &src) itovnpov ii alirxpov ipyov iipUa^ai. 3. 2, 
 13. 6t 8e KoKus ?{e« Ttti/tfrfpa, i)i> ifilKot yivria^t, ejnoJ /ie\^<rei. Dem. 01. 
 1. 21, 12. irK0ircr<rae toCto, S £i>SpES 'AStivoToi, Sjraii fij; kiyous ipouirt 
 u.6vov oi Trap* viiwp irpiafiets, &AA& Kol ep^or ti 5«Kf^ii' 'i^ovtriv. PI. Ion. 530, 
 b. S7C 84 8 IT 6) J Kol Ti noraa^j/oio viKi]<roij.fv. The Fut. Ind. also stands 
 very often after an historical tense, according to f 327, Rem. 2 : far more rare 
 in this case is the use of the Fut. Opt. X Cy. 8. 1, 43. ^ir€;tt«A.ciTO 8" 8ir»i 
 aiyre &triTot, fvfiTe i-noroi irore etrotVTO. 
 
 Eem. 3. Sometimes 3 ir » j S v is connected wit'r the Fut. Ind., and is then 
 to be referred to an implied condition. Her. 3, 104. 01 'IxSol rp6ma rotoira) 
 (to! (ei^ft xP^'^f'^o' i^aivouffi M rhv XP""'^" ^f^oyurtuiias, Skus tuf Kaifurrar 
 rioy depp^ararav Hmwv t a out at iv t^ apnay^ (L e. Stov koujiuxto &ep/*^aTa ^). 
 
 Bem. 4. "Oirar or Situs fi'fi with the Fut. Ind., sometimes refers to a 
 word to be supplied, viz. 8 pa, ipare, vide,videte. X. An. 1.7,3. Sir us oir 
 itretr^e AvSpes &^iot rrjs f\euAfpiasi (see) then that ye aremen worthy of liberty. 
 PI. Menon, 77, a. etW' Snus fi^ ovx otos t* itrofiai iroXAo Toiavra \4yetv. A 
 similar ellipsis occurs in the phrase, 8 tl it' (sc. aK0TreTi>) Sttu s in the Attic poets. 
 Soph. Aj. 556. 8erir' Svus trarphs 8ti'f ei j 4v tx^pots, otos 4^ o^ov \pd^s. 
 
 Rem. 5. Verbs expressing care, anxiety, are very often followed by St us 
 (sometimes also by i f) iy with the Opt., in order to express the idea of anx- 
 iety, solicitude how something might happen [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. In this case, 
 Situs and iis are clearly adverbs {hoie). X. Cy. 2. 1,4. ^ovKcxiiriiie^a, 
 oTTus Uv ipiffra ((.yayi^olfie^a. * 
 
 5 331. II. Adjective-Clauses. 
 
 Adjective-clauses are adjectives or participles expanded into 
 >\ sentence, and, like adjectives, serve to define a substantive 
 or substantive pronoun more definitely. They are intro- 
 duceO by the relative pronouns os, ^, o, ostis, ^tis, o ti, 
 otos, etc. 
 
 oi TroK^p.ioi, 0% airetpvyov [^ oi air o<pvy6vr ss voKifiioi). Ti irpdyfictra, ft 
 *A\e^avBpos ^npa^fv (ret 6wh ^A\e^dvSpov irpax^^vra irpdyfiara or ri-ToD 'AAef- 
 &ySpov npiiyfuiTa). 'H ■tr6\ts, 4v § 6 TleKrltTTpaTOs ripayyos ^y {=^ inrh rov 
 HfurKTrpdrov Tvpav vev^sTtra ir<JXis). 
 
 Remaek 1. Homer often uses the pronoun Sj ina demonstrative sense, 
 n. 0, 198. aWa Kol ts SeiSoiKf Aihs iifyd\oto Kcpavy6y. So also, ot — oi, these, 
 those, the one, the other. In the Attic writers, as well as in Ionic prose, this usage 
 is confined to the following instances: (a) kuI Ss. koI 5, instead of koI 
 oEtoj, Koi oStij. X. Cy. 5. 4, 4. K a! is ^{airaTijdcU 8ii<iKci ayii Kpdros. 4. 5, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
^ 331.] ADJECTIVE CLAUSES. 527 
 
 52. Kol o{ yeKiiravTes ttirav. Antiph. 1.113, 16. xal % 6K4iTxeTo. In the olv 
 hque Cases the article (^ 247, 3), is used instead of it, e. g. xal tSv, el mm. — 
 (b)$s^6i/ — ftjS^in Demosthenes, yet very seldom, often in later writers, 
 and earlier in Doric Writers, as well as in Hippocrates ; and it occurs not only 
 in the Nom., but also in all the Cases of the Sine, and Plural. Dem. Cor. 
 
 248. ir((\€is 'EA\r)WSor ts ftsv ii'Mp&v, fls &s Sh robs (pfiyiSas KoriyaP. (c) 
 
 &s Kal 8 J, this and tltat, it not being determined who, any one that you please 
 (very seldom). Her. 4, 68. rits Pa<rt\ntas laHas iiriipKtiae %s Kal os, exclu- 
 sively in the Nom. (in the Aet.rhv koX t&v, rb ko! t<!, see § 247, 3). — (d) in the 
 phrase ^8" 8 s, ? S' i), said he, she. 
 
 Ebm. 2. The reciprocal relation in which the substantive stands to an ad- 
 jective-clause, and an adjective-clause to a substantive, is expressed thus : a 
 demonstrative adjective pronoun or the article a ^ t^ standing in a principal 
 clause, refers to a relative adjective pronoun standing in a subordinate clause, 
 and the latter, on the other hand, refers back to the former, e. g. ovtos 6 
 hiiip, iv flSesi xi ^(<5oi/, 6 ivdeT. So also, toioStos, oTos, too-oStoj, 
 iaos (§ 326, Bern. 3). But when the object, to which the relative refers, is to 
 be represented as a general one, then the article is omitted, and the relative 
 refers immediately to the substantive, e. g. arlip, is xaKds iarlv (= iviip ku- 
 A(!r). When the relative refers to a personal pronoun, then the relative takes tlie 
 place of the demonstrative, e. g. ^718, Ss — iri, 8j, etc. When the personal pro- 
 nouns have no special emphasis, they are omitted, and the relative refers to 
 the person indicated by the inflection of the verb, e. g. Ka\as iwotriiras, is rmna 
 levpa^as. 
 
 Bem. 3. The demonstrative, to which , the relative refers, is often omitted, 
 and not only when the Cases are the same, but when they are unlike, if the 
 pronoun has no special emphasis ; hence especially when the omitted demon- 
 strative denotes some indefinite object, and is equivalent to tIs, some one, or 
 wlien the relative Ss, Ssris, may be resolved into siguis. Eur. Or. 591, 3. yinoi 
 3* SfTots /jiiv ed TriiTTOvffiv fipoTwv, {roiTots sc.) puaeapioS' wiv ' ols Sh fi^ niirrou- 
 rui c5, (oSrot ac.) rd t' luSov f'url -rd re dipa^e SusrvxtTs. Th. 2, 41. ouScv 
 vposieS/jLevoi otfre 'OpL^pou iiraiveroVf othe {rivhs SC.) Ssrts eweiri fikf rh ainlKa 
 f(p\fiti kt\. 
 
 Bem. 4. Wlien the relative is used substantively, i. e. when it refers to a sub- 
 iitantive pronoun, either expressed or understood, then the adjective-clanse, 
 like the adjective standing without a substantive, has the meaning of a sub- 
 slantim, e. g. ''HK&oy oi ipiffroi ^aav = ^A&oi/ 01 ipurroi (sc. iiiSpfs). — 
 Here belongs also, the formula eo-riy, o'l, Sy, oTs, oSs, S. This formula has be- 
 come so fixed, that commonly neither the number of the relative has any 
 effect on the verb eo-n, nor does the tense undergo any change, when the dis- 
 course relates to past or future time ; thus it has assumed entirely the charac- 
 ter of a substantive-pronoun (efioi), and also, since f<my may be connected 
 with every Case of the relative, has a full inflexion, e. g. 
 
 Nam. iartvot (=itiiot) axdipvyov 
 Gen. tartv &v (=^vi{ov) aTretrx^fo 
 Dat. efTTti/ oTs {=^ 4viois) oifx o^ats eSo^ey 
 
 Ace. itTTlV oSs {=iylovs) OKfKTeLViV. 
 
 TheNom. iartv o?is rare,forexampIe,X. Cy.2.3, 18; inplaceof it, commonly 
 fiirXr o'l. Th.2,26.K\elTroinros^TJSTrapa&aKa(riTtou fo-riv & iSjicDa-e. So in the 
 question, eiTT IK oirtves; X.flf 1.4,2. ^(rTiK oSsTtvas cwdp^TrayTedaiiuuttts 
 M iro<l>itf; in Xenophon ^v also occurs. An. 1. 5, 7. 'Hv Seroirav tUv ittvA- 
 imii oSs irdiiv imxpohs IjXauvev {and some of these marches which he made, wet a 
 very long, or lie made some of these marches very long). H. 7. 5, 17. imv iioKeiiiav 
 ir oSs uwo<nrSySous iireBoffoi' {there was some of the enemy which they restored by 
 Iruee, or thej^ restored some of the enemy by truce), 
 
 33 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
528 SYNTAX. [i 332. 
 
 Kem. 5. In like manner, the following phrases, formed with iariv, are 
 used wholly as adverbs with reference to all relations of time- 
 
 effT IV Sre = iyiSre, est quando, i. e. interdum, c. g. etrriy ore eKe^ei/ J 
 
 %ffT IV 'iva or Sttou, est uhi^ i. e. aliguando ; 
 
 ^ariv ov or ^v,^a, est ubi,' somewhere^ in many places ; 
 
 ovK f<T^' Sirov, nunquam; 
 
 fo-Tiv p or Sirjj, guodammodo, ir many places; 
 
 OVK effTiv Sttus, nulla Tiwdoj oiiK iffTiv Swus ov, e&iainJy. 
 
 fOTTiv Sir as; in the question, Is it possible, that? 
 
 ^332. Agreement of tiie Relative Pronoun. 
 
 1. The relative agrees in Gender and Number with the sub- 
 stantive or substantive pronoun (in the principal clause) to 
 which it refers ; the Case of the relative, however, depends on 
 the construction of the subordinate clause, and hence is deter- 
 mined either by the predicate, c Dy sorCc other word in the 
 subordinate clause, or it stands as the subject in the Norn. 
 
 'O av^p, & V eTSes, <j)i\os fwi ecTty, 'H aper-fj, tJ s irdvres ol aya^ol iTTi^fLov- 
 ffiv, fieya aya^Av itrnv. Ol aTpariSaral oTs ifiax^o'dfie^a, avSpeiAraroi ^trav. 
 &avfid^o/j.fV 'XuKpdrtj, ov tj (Totpta fieyiffTrj ^v, ^'Evt^v[iOVfiev ttjs apeT^s, 9j 
 Tnjyri iari trdvTwv tuv kolKSiv. 
 
 2. The person of the verb in the adjective-clause is deter- 
 mined by the substantive or substantive pronoun (expressed or 
 implied) to which the relative refers. When the relative is 
 connected with the first or second person, then the English uses 
 the form, I am the one who, I who. Thou who, etc. 
 
 *E7(i, tt s ypd<t>Qj, trx), % s ypdipus, 6 aviip or ^Ke7vos, t/s ypdipei, Th. 2, 60. 
 4fj.ol TOLoirtp avZpX opyl^etr^e, i}S ovSevhs otofiai T^ffo'tov elvai. Isocr. Paneg. 
 irSis OVK ^Stj SlKai6v iffTiv Tjfias 4iralV€iv, oirives T^v apx^v KaToffX^ty 
 ^S vvfi^Tj/ievj X. Cy. 5. 2, 15. koL oIkIu ye ttoKv fiei^uv tj v fi e t 4 p a Trjs iiiijs, 
 o'l ye oiKic} XPV*^^^ yy re Kal ovpav^. Hence after the Voc, the second per- 
 son is regularly used, c. g. &v^ptatre, hs t]ijms Toiavra Kcucii iirolr] ff as. 
 
 3. When the relative refers to two or more objects, it is in 
 the plural, and agrees in Gender with the substantives, when 
 they are of the same Gender; often, however, it is in the neu- 
 ter, when the subs*Bntives denote inanimate objects. Comp 
 § 242, 1, (a), (13). 
 
 Th. 3, 97. v fidxtl, Sid^eis re Kal tiTayayai, 4v oTs afaipoTepois ^irtrovs ?taali ol 
 'AdrivaToi. X. Cy. 1. 3, 2. (KEpos) dpuv {rhv -rrdwirov) KeKOa-ii.-qii.evov (col o(p&a\iiliv 
 moypaipfi, Koi XP<"A«iTOS ivrpt\f/el K(tl KQ/^fls ■jr^.q^^ejois, & 5?) vi/una ^v iv M^Sois. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J.332.J AGREEMENT OF THE RELATIVE PEONOUN. 529 
 
 Isocr. Panath. 278, b. toSto eTwov, o4 irpis ri/v tba^wv, obSh wpis t^v Smaiaai- 
 iiriv, oiiSh Trphs rijv ipp6i^(riy airojSAe'foj, & ah Si5A,a-ej. 
 
 4. If the substantives are of different gender, then the rela- 
 tive, when persons are spoken of, agrees in gender with the 
 Masc. rather than the Fern., etc. (§ 242, 1) ; but when things 
 are spoken of, it is usually in the neuter. 
 
 Od. ft 284. bivaTov Kai Kfipa ii4\<uvav, ts S^i <T<tii axMv iari. lsocr.de 
 Pac. 159, a. ^ko/kv iKKX-iiaii^ovTis irepi ts iroXefiou Kal elpiii/iis, ft /xiylarriv ?X" 
 iivaiuv iy t$ fiiip tuv hvhpJncav. Dem. Cor. 317, 273. IXTriiuv Kid f^\ou (to! 
 Ti/iiv, & Triin-a Tposr)!' Toij rdre itpaTTo/tevois Inr' inov. PI. Apol. 18, a. ir iKfiy^ 
 if <t>o>yV " Kol rf rpivif iv otswep ire^piiiiuiv. Sometimes, also, the rela- 
 tive takes the gender of the last substantive, e. g. Isocr. 1. d. 163, a b. V 5^ tV 
 elptiiniii troaiadii.e&a, /ifrii iroKKTJs ii(r<l>a\eias riiv troKiy olxiiaoiuv, awaWayiVTts 
 TtoXinav Kol Kiviiivuv Kol t o p a X ? J> «'! % v vvv irphs aAA^\ous KaTeartitiey. 
 
 5. The following exceptions occur to the rule stated under 
 No. 1, respecting the agreement of the relative :- 
 
 (a) Constructio Kara a-vvicriv (? 241, 1), not often in prose 
 with the names of persons, but frequently with collective nouns, 
 or substantives which are to be considered as such. 
 
 Her. 8, 128. ireptdSpafie SfilKos — , oJ aiirlKa rh ri^evfut Xa^Svres — ^(jiepov 
 iirl Toiis (TTparriyois. Th. 3, 4. t& twv 'A^valav vaurixiy, o{ Sipjiovv iv rp 
 MoAe'^. pi. Phaedr. 260, a. irA.^&ei, olirep SiKiffovn. 
 
 Eemakk 1 . The following cases belong here : — 
 
 (a) The substantive to which the relative refers, is in the Sing., but the rela- 
 tive in the PI, when it does not refer to a definite individual of the class, but 
 to the whole class, and in this way talces the signification of oTos. This usage, 
 however, is more frequent in poetry, than in prose. Od. /i, 97. KrJTos, & livpla 
 ^(XTKCi Strydtrrovos 'AfjufttrpiTTj. PI. Rp. 554, a. avx/ijipSs ye tis &y Kal airh vavrig 
 irepiQvtriav iroioifjLsyos, ^{raupoTToiits ayijp, ots Sij {cujusmadi homines) KaliTratyel 
 
 (b) On the contrary, a relative in the singular refers to a PI. substantive, 
 when the relative has a collective signification, e. g. Ssris, is &v witlj the Subj., 
 quisijuis, quicunque. II. A, 367. vSy aS robs &\\ovs iinelironai (persequar), 
 iv Ke KiXfitO' So in particular, vdyres, UsTis or ts &v (never vdyres oXrives, but 
 always virrfs Scroi or Sstis), e. g. Th. 7, 29. irivras l{fls, Srip iyrixoiev, Kal 
 TalSas Kal ^vytuKas Kreiyoyrss, PI. Rp. 566, d. affniiCeTai irdyTas, ^ blv 
 repnvyxdyri. 
 
 Rem. 2. The relative is put in the Neut. without reference to the gender 
 of its substantive, when the idea contained in the substantive is not to be con- 
 sidered as a particular one, but as general (§ 241, 2), or when the relative is not 
 so much to be referred to the substantive alone, as to the whole sentence. S. 
 0. T. 542. ap* ovxl ^iupoy iffri rovyxeipijfid trov, &vev re irX-fi^ovs Kai tj}(\ay r v ■ 
 fiavviZa ^pay, S XP^I^°^^^ ^' aKiaKerai. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
630 SYNTAX. [} 332 
 
 (b) Connection of the Dual with the Phiral (i 241, 5). 
 
 Tw -X^il p e, as o Sebs iirl to crvXKa.ix.pd.veiv oXk-qXaiv iTTOLrjcrev, X 
 C. 2. 3, 18. 
 
 (c) When a predicative substantive, in. the adjective-clause, 
 IB in the Nom. (§ 240, 2) or in the Ace. (J 280, 4), the relative, 
 instead of agreeing in Gender and Number with its substan- 
 tive, by a kind of attraction often takes the Gender and Num- 
 ber of the predicative substantive, which is'considered the more 
 important. 
 
 Her. 2, 7, 7t 65is irpbs ^« Tpdveroa, rh (= &) KoAeerat TiTjKoia'top 
 ardiiLa. 5, 108. t J);' &Kpriv, ot Ko^eOyroi < AjjtScj Tjjj Kivpov. 7, 54. 
 riepfriK^i/ ^i<fioSy rhy {=iy) &.KivdKt]v KKKiovffi, PI. Fhaedr. 255, c. v 
 Tov ^evjuaros iKeivov •jnjytj, f>j/ 1pt,epov Zths Tavv^iiSovs ipuy ^vSfioffs, Phileb. 
 40, a. xSyoi elffty 4y ^Katrrois Tjfiwy, &s iKviSas oyofid^ofjiey, 
 
 Beu. 3. So also, when the relative does not follow its own substantive im- 
 mediately, but a predicative substantive, it sometimes agrees by means of at- 
 traction with the latter, as being the more important, instead of agi-eeing with 
 the former. PL L. 937, d. koI BIkti iy avbp^ots vus oit Ka\6v,h vdyra t^U- 
 puKe ra ay^pdirtva ', Gorg. 4G0, e. ovSeiror* tty ftrj ri ^TfTopiKij &StKoy trpay- 
 ft. a, i y* ael vepi itKaioff^yrts Toi/s \6yovs vokitoi. 
 
 6. When the relative would be in the Ace, and refers to a 
 substantive in the Gen. or Dat., then, when the adjective-clause 
 has almost entirely the force of an attributive adjective, the 
 relative commonly assumes the form of its substantive, i. e. the 
 relative takes the same Case as its substantive. This con- 
 struction is called attraction. Attraction also takes place, w^hen 
 instead of the substantive, a substantive demonstrative (§ 331, 
 Rem.), is used. The demonstrative, however, is omitted, when 
 it contains no special emphasis. By means of attraction, the 
 substantive is frequently transposed and stands in the adjective- 
 clause. See No. 8. 
 
 Th. 7, 21. &yccv airh tSiv viKcoiv &y eTreure {= Twy "Tcettr^eitray) ffTparidy, 
 X. Cy. 3. 1, S3, (rby to7s ^TitravpoTs oTs 6 irariip KaTeKiirev (:= Toir fiirb toS 
 varphs KaTa\enp^6t<riy). 2. 4, 17. iiroTc ov irpo€\7j\v^ot7is airy p ex***^ SvyaL/xct^ 
 S. 1, 34. iyi) inaxvavti-ai, ilv d Snhs fd SiS$, icySr' Sy hy ipuil Siwe/ctj)* SWo irM'w 
 vos fifia evepycT'liireiy (instead of ayrl ToiST<i)i>,a). PI. Gorg. 519, a. Sray ri do- 
 Xa7a irposairoXXv(o(ri vphs oTs iKT-fitravro (instead o£ Trphs roirots, &), Phaed. 70, 
 %. (v 'i"'Xh) ^Tni\\ayiJ.4vTj roiruy ray KaKuv S>v ah ydy 5Jj SiijAS^cs. Isocr. 
 Paneg. 46, 29. S>y ^\a^ey cLnaaiy fieTeSaKev (instead of toiStojc a). Evag. 198. 
 ToiouTois e&eo-iy oXois T,vay6pas jiiy elxec Th. 5,87. eV ray vapiyra* 
 icoi S V dpuTe (instead of na) ix roiray, & ipoTc). Tlio preposition is frequently 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 332.] ATTRACTION OP THE RELATIVE IRONOUN. 53l 
 
 repeated, c. g. Dem. Chors. 96, 26. &0' Sy ityelpei koI vposaiTeT kcH Bwe/fcrm, 
 airb Tovrav dtiiyei (instead of dir^ roiruv Sidytt &v ayeipet or ad>* Si 
 kyeipet — iidyei without airi toutw*'). 
 
 Rem. 4. By attraction, the adjective-clause acquires enturcly the nature of 
 an adjective or participle, which combines with its substantive to form a singlo 
 idea, and which also agrees with it in form, e. g. xo/poi rais iirtaroXa'ti 
 ats typaifias (= xaip<v Tms imh (rod ypafeiffais iTiaToXaTs). The blending of 
 the adjective-clause with its substantive by attraction, is still more clear and 
 beautiful, When the adjective-clause is transposed and stands in the place of the 
 substantive, e. g. Xofp"" of^ lyprnf/as iiri<rTo\aTs. 
 
 Kem. 5. When predicative substances or adjectives belong to an attract- 
 ed relative, these also must be attracted. Dem. Cor. 325, 298. ifii oSre Kcuphs 
 irposTjydyeTo Sap ^Kpiva SiKaluy Kol ffvp^^e povT av rp TtaTpiii ov^\y vpo^ov- 
 vox (instead of & ixptva Sticaia koI (rvn^pfpovra). Ph. 2. 70, 17. ois oirty v/icr- 
 ipofs (*iAtiriros), roirovs i(r^oA«s /C€ktijtoi. 
 
 Rem. 6. The Nom. and Dat. of the relative very seldom suffer attraction. 
 Th. 7, 67. '^oAAal {vries}, ^^arai ^s rh p\AirTe(r^ai &ip* &v ijfiiv ■jrapeffKevao'jai 
 (instead of awb Toirav, &). X. Cy. 5. 4, 39. ^yero 5e koX ruy tavrov ruv re 
 viffTuy, oh ^5eTo, /coi ay (for iiceiytav, ots) iiiriorret iro\Aoi5s (i. e. secum duxit 
 mvltos suorum, et jidorum, quibus delectabatur, et coram, quibus diffidebat). 
 
 Rem. 7. Adverbs of place, also, sometimes suffer attraction, the relative 
 adverb taking the form of the demonstrative adverb, or, when instead of the 
 demonstrative adverb a substantive precedes the form which expresses the 
 direction denoted by the substantive. Th. 1, 89. SicKoiii^ovTo evAbs (sc. iyrev- 
 dfy) S^fy (instead of ou, tibi) iire^eAeyro TcuSas. S. Fh. 431. f/iPa\oS /i Sttt) 
 ^eKets iytov, is avT\iaVy is irpupay, is trpufiyTjy Hirot (instead of o5, 
 tibi) ^KtffTa fieWot robs vap6yTas kXyvy^'iy. 
 
 7. The relatives oTos, oo-os, osrtsoDi-, rjXiKO's, are attracted 
 not only in the Ace. bat also in the Nom., virlien the verb eivaj 
 and a subject formally expressed are in the relative clause, 
 e. g. oios <xv £1, oios E/ceiTOs or o %faKpa.Trp IcttL (such OS ycni are, such 
 as fte or Socrates is). This attraction is made in the following 
 manner. .The demonstrative in the Gen., Dat., or Ace, to vi^hich 
 the relation refers, is omitted, but the relative is put in the Case 
 of the preceding substantive or (omitted) substantive demon- 
 strative, and the verb dvai of the adjecdve-clause is also omit- 
 ted, and the subject of the relative clause is put in the Case 
 of the relative. Such a blended or attracted adjective-clause 
 has, in all respects, the force of an inflected adjective ; the 
 connection of the adjective-clause with its substantive is still 
 more complete and intimate, when the substantive is placed in 
 the adjective-clause; for example, in the full and natural form 
 of tlie sentence ^^apL^o/juu avSpl rotovra, oloi a-ii CI, by omitting the 
 demonstrative tolovtw, to which the relative oTos refers, by at- 
 tracting oIos into the Case of the preceding substantive avSpi, 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
532 SYNTAX. [^ 332. 
 
 and by omitting €1 of the adjective-clause and attracting the 
 subject o-v into the Case of the relative, we have the common 
 form x'^P^^ofiat avBpl otw trot, or, by transposition, xapt^o/Aai otw o-ol 
 avBpL In Enghsh the above relatives may be translated by as 
 or such as. 
 
 epu otov trov 
 XO-piCofitat o'ltp iTol 
 ivaiyw otov tre 
 ipS) ottav vficoy 
 XapiCofiat o'lots ^filv 
 ivaivoa o'iovs {ffias. 
 
 Gen ipSi o^ov trov ctu^p6s 
 
 Dat. xapi^ofjiai o'ltft a-ol avBpl 
 
 Ace. iiraiva oToy ae &v5pa 
 
 Gen. 4pw o'luy vfxwv avBp&y 
 
 Dat. x°-pK°H-^^ o'iois {ffiTp b.v^pd.(r iv 
 
 Ace. iiraivSi o%ovs vfxas &yBpa5 
 
 Th. 7, 21. irphs &u^pas roXfiTjpohs o'iovs Koi ^A^Tjyalovs (instead of oTat 
 'A&T/carof. €iffii/). Lucian. Toxar. c. 11. ov <l>av?ioy ih epyoy, avBpl o'itp troX troK- 
 ffxiffT^ fj.oyofjiaxv'^at- 1*I- Soph. 237, u. o'l^ ye ifiol iravTairaaiy &iropo» 
 (sc. iffTif instead. of t^ roiour^f oT6s ye iydo eifii, &Trgp6y ^trriy). Her. 1, 160. 
 i-irl fiitr^ifi c( IT Qj Slj {mercedej quantuhcunque est). PI. Bp. 335, b, ^imy &pa Sticaiov 
 aySphs ^K6.irreiv Kal 6vt ivovy aySfp^Trwu {instead of ay&pt&ircoy /col AsTtsovv 
 effTtc). X. An. 6, 5, 8. i(TTti<rav aicexovres '6{tov TreyreKaiSeKa aTaSlovs 
 (instead of roaovTOj '6<roy elal tt. CTcESiot). 
 
 Rem. 8. Attraction also takes place, when oXos or oXos re, is used in- 
 stead of 0&ST6, and is constructed with the Inf., signifying, / am of such a na* 
 ture^ character, that (is sum gwz with the Subj.), hence I can, am accustomed, am 
 ready (§ 341, Rem. 2). Dem. 01. 1. 23, 19. {irepl avrhy ^iKtinros eX") toio ^- 
 Tovs ctv^p^irovs o'iovs fie^va-^evT as opx^to'^o.i. Luc. Hermot. c. 76. 
 XTOJiKip Toio^Too o'i<o ju^Te \vK^7<rhai pA\T opyiC^or^at. The demon- 
 strative is commonly omitted. X. C. 1. 4, 12. fxSvrjv r^y rSoy ay^p^ircop 
 {yKwTTay) iwolTia'av [oi i&eol) o'lay ap^povy tc tV ^o>v^y, k. -i. X. 
 
 Rem. 9. When the adjective-clause has the signification of a substantive 
 (§331, Rem. 4), the article is sometimes placed before the attracted oXos, 
 TjKiKos, and in this way, the adjective substantive- clause acquires entirely 
 the force of an inflected substantive, e. g. 
 
 Nom. b otos (rh aviip 
 
 Gen. rov olov (Tov a.yZp6^ 
 
 Dat. T<^ oi'o) ffoX avBpi 
 
 Ace. Thy oiov cre &yhpa 
 
 X. Cy. 6. 2, 2. oi oTol irep ^jxels 6.ySpes iroWaKis koi tb ^ov\ev6[jieya Kara.' 
 uav^avovaty [men like you). H. 2. 3, 25. yySyres rots oXois TjfiTv re Kal 
 vfj,7v X'^^'^^h^ iroMTciay elvat btjfioKpaTiav {such men as we and you), Ar. 
 "EiCcl. 4Q5. iKuyo Seiyhv ro^aiv T)\lKot<Ti y^y (instead of rT]\iK0VT0is, iihlieoi 
 vtp ifffiey). 
 
 Rem. 10. A similar kind of attraction occurs also in such modes of ex- 
 pression as ^avikaiTrhy '6 (Toy irpovx^p^o^^ = ^avfiaa-rSy ifrriy Saov irpovx^- 
 pTjae {miruvi quantum proeessit, instead of mirum est, quantum processerit). 
 Kven in PI. Rp. 351, d. fxerk Idpuros ^ avfj.a(rT ov Zaov (instead of davfitarrSv 
 ia-Tiv ft6&' otrou), Hipp. M. 282, c. xP'hp^^-'^^ ^AajSe ^avpLaarh. hcra (instead 
 of ^au/ittCTTfJi' 4<TTiy, 'oaa). Her. 4, 194. ol 8e (sc. -n-f^Tjffot) (r<pi ^(p^ov'oi '6<roi 
 iy To7s oUpiiTi ylvovrai. Also in the adverbs ^av/j.ao'T iios as, ^av fMatriwa 
 u s, etc., e.g.^avfiairlfas ws &^Kios yeyoye (instead of ^avpL6.a-i6v 4ariy, as £dAios 
 yeyove). PI. Phaed. 66, a. vvepipvus ojs ahrj^jj \eyets, Symp. 173, C 
 i/r tp^v&s C0S x'^^P'^1 instead of inrep^u4s icTiy, &}s ytiSpta. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 oi oTot 6fjLe7s ^y^pes 
 rwv o'itav vfiwv ay^pwy 
 To7s o'lois v(x7y avdpdtrty 
 Tobs o'iovs vfias &vSpas. 
 
§ 332.] INVEETED ATTRACTION OP THE IIELATIVE. 533 
 
 Rem. U. Sometimes an attraction takes place in the adjective-clattse di- 
 rectly the opposite of that mentioned under No. 6, the substantive being 
 attracted into the Case of the relative which refers to it, instead of the 
 relative into the Case of the 'substantive. This is called inverted aUrac- 
 turn (Attractio inversa). This attraction occurs most frequently, when the 
 substantive of the principal clause attracted by the relative, would stanc 
 in the Nom. or Ace. S. Tr. 283. risS' .(instead of a?S') fisTrep eisopSi, ^ 
 ih&'uev it^7)\0K eipovaai fiiov, %icouin irphs a-4. Lysias pro bon. Arist. 649. 7-J)» 
 oiiiriav (instead of ^ omrla) iivKareKiiTe t^ vWi, oii irKfioms a^ta iinli/. X. H 
 1.4, 2. lA«7»y, in AmceSmi^vtoi Trivruv Si/ SUvrai trfirpay6T£s ehy rapi j8«. 
 ci\4us. Sometimes the demonstrative pronoun is found in the principal 
 clause, to supply the Case of the substantive which is attracted into the Case 
 and into the clause of the relative. PL Men. 96, c. i!i|U«A.07^«ca/i6v, vpiiyij.a- 
 
 Rem. 12. This inverted attraction is very common with oi'Sels gsrij 
 ov after an omitted iarlv. PI. Prot. 317, c. obSevhs 8tou ov irai/Tav &» 
 ifiuv ica^' Ti\utlav irariip rfTjc (there is no one of you all w/wse father I miyht not be, 
 considering my age). Phaed. 117, d. kWwj' ical oyoi'o/cTai' o68f j/o iimva ob 
 KaTeK\av<re rav itapivruv. Dem. Cor. 295, 200. irepl Zy ovS4va KivSvyoy 
 ivTiv oix 6ve/ieivay oi irpoyoDot. In this way the phrase oiSels Ssrts ov 
 appears as a pronominal substantive (nemo non), which can be declined through 
 ail the Cases, e. g. 
 
 Nom. 
 Gen. 
 Dat. 
 Ace. 
 
 ouSels ZsTis ovK Uv Tavra TcotinTeiev 
 oii^cvhs Stow oh Karey^Kaaey 
 ovS fvl '6t(o ov k aveKpivaTO 
 
 ob^sva. Hyrtya Qv KaTeKAavaey. 
 
 Rem. 13. The inverted attraction is also found sometimes with adverbs of 
 place, the demonstrative adverb talcing the form of the relative. S. 0. C. 
 1227. Prjyat KeT^fy S^ey wfp 5JKfi (instead of Ke7<r€, SAey). PI. Crit. 45, b. 
 ToWaxov 7&/> Koil &,KKo(re Sir'ot ^v ii(f>iKri, ayairi^aovffl ae (instead of hWaxov 
 Hiroi). 
 
 8. The adjective-clause very frequently stands before the 
 principal clause ; then, when the relative refers to a substan- 
 tive, the substantive is transferred from the principal to the 
 adjective-clause (though it is not generally placed immediately 
 after the relative), and is governed by the verb in the adjective- 
 clause. This change of the substantive into the adjective- 
 clause is called transposition. When the attributive relation 
 expressed by the adjective-claxise, is to be made emphatic, a 
 demonstrative, referring back to the substantive which is joined 
 with the relative, is supplied in the principal clause ; this 
 demonstrative, however, is often used for perspicuity also. 
 The substantive can also be ti-ansposed, when the demonstra- 
 tive stands before the adjective-clause. 
 
 *0 s rifms iroAXi ayoAit, iiroiriaey, o S t o r airebayiy, or S s Tj/ias TroWa aya^h 
 kroixtaai, taredaviv, or ovtos awidayey, %s TjfiMS kt\,, or hri^avey, %s ktK. — • 
 'Oi' ftSes &ySpa, ovt6s iariy, or oStSj iirny, %y elSes &ySpa. PI. Lys. 
 222, d. iri\iy ipa, ots rh irpuTvv > ■<i/ous i.TrePa\6iJ,e^a jrepl (piXias, els to:!' 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
534 SYNTAX. [§ 333 
 
 rovs flmeimiKansy. Eur. Or. 63, sq. 5j v yip /car' oXkovs l\up', St" 4s Tpo(o> 
 lTr\€i, Trdpdtvoy . . rairri y4yri^e. 
 
 Eem. 14. When attributive adjectives belong to the substantive, they are 
 frequently separated from their substantive in the principal clause, and intro- 
 duced into the adjective-clause, when they serve at the same time to explain 
 more fully the adjective-clause or are to be made emphatic. Or the substantive 
 together with the attributives is introduced into the adjective-clause. Some- 
 times also the attributive adjective remains, while the substantive with which 
 it agrees, is transferred to the adjective-clause ; then the attributive is emphat- 
 ic. Eur. Or. 842. irdrvC 'HKfirrpa, \6yovs (ucoixrov, o8s aoi Susri/x^'^ 'i*'" 
 (S>4pa}v [hear the wards which I bring to you as sad, i. e. the sad words, etc.). Th. 6, 
 30. roTs 37rAoiy Acal HffTj &\\ti irapaffKev^ ^weivero, irpirepov eXprira kt\, 
 (instead of koI rp &\\ji irapcuTKiv^, Scrri), Eur. H. F. 1164r^fni) {ire £a.A.oi^, 
 oi Trap' 'Atrc^nov fiois fi4i/ov(rti/ evoirKot yjjs ^A^yaiav Kopot. Ar. Kan. 889. 
 f repot yip eliriv, oXtxiv efSx^t*^^ Riots', 
 
 Rem. 15. A word in apposition with the substantive to which the relative 
 clause refers, is sometimes attracted into the subordinate clause, and depends 
 upon that clause for its government. In this case also, the transposed apposi- 
 tive serves to explain more fully the adjective-clause. Od. a, 69. Ki^kAutos 
 Kex6\tiaraty tv o^^dkfwv aKiwffev aurl^eov JloXv^ijfAC y (whom Ulysses 
 blinded, although he was the god-like Polyphemus). PI. Hipp. Maj. 281, c. tI irore 
 Th alTioj/, 8ti ot iraKatoi iKi'ipoi, tav ov6nara /icytiXa Xeyerat ini trotplif, 
 TlnraK ov Koi Hiavros, tpaiyovTtu aTrex^f^^yoi ruv ■jro\iTiKuy "Trpd^ewv 'j 
 
 9. When the adjective-clanse has another clause subordinate 
 to itself (or a participle used instead of such clause), the two 
 are commonly united, the relative, instead of taking the con- 
 struction of its own adjective-clause, taking that of the subor- 
 dinate clause, i. e. the relative has the construction which the 
 omitted demonstrative of the subordinate clause would have 
 had ; in such cases there is no relative connected with the ad- 
 jective-clause. 
 
 Isocr. de Pace p. 16, 168. liv^pdirovs alpoifitAa Toij ixiv a-rrS\iSas, rohs S" airro- 
 ii6\ovs, ots 6v6tay tis vKeiova fjLtff^hv SiS^, juer' ixttyuy itp* tj^ms 
 tt.KoXov^'ilffovffiv {instead of o?, AirdTaf tis avrols StSy, aKoXov^trouaiv), 
 PI. Rp. 466, a. St* Tohs ^{iKtutas ovk th^aSp.ovas iroto'ipLci'^ oXs i^hv tcdvra 
 ?Xf '" 'tA tSj' iroXirwv, ouSej/ exoi^v, (instead of o1, 4^hi> auTo7s — , ouSev 
 EX"'"')' Dem. Phil. 3, 128, 68. iroWa hv elireiy ex"'*" 'OAucftioi ySv, & t6t' el 
 irpoelSovTo, oiit tiv lmii\ot>To (instead of o'/, el toCto r6te irpoelS., ovk ttv inr.). 
 
 ? 3$3. Modes in Adjective- Clauses. 
 
 1. 'riie Indicative is used, when the attributive relation ex- 
 pressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as actual 
 ar real, e. g. r/ ttoXk, rj Kri^erox, § iKrurSij, ^ KrurS^a-erai. The Fut 
 hid. is very frequently used (even after an historical tense, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 333.] MODES IN ADJECTIVE CLAUSES • 53^ 
 
 § 327, Rem. 2), to denote what should be done or the purpose 
 (5 255, 3), e. g. orpa-rtjyovs; aipovvrai, ot rto ^tXiTnr(f iroXc/t-^trou- 
 (Tiv (they choose generak loho should carry on war, or to carry on 
 war). Also after negatives, the Greek employs the Ind., where 
 the Latin has the Subj., e. g. imp i/xol ovSeis, osrts ixi) Ikwos 
 coTtv ta-a irouiv i/ioi [nemo, qui non possit), 
 
 2. The lud. is also used, as in Latin, in such adjective- 
 clauses, as are introduced by the indefinite or generalizing rela- 
 tives, e. g. osns, quisquis, oorts 8?;, quicunque, ocfn'; S-q irore, ocros 
 S'^, ocros o^v, quantuscunque, oirocroi, oTotrosoBi', etc. 
 
 Her. 6, 12. Sov\i(triv vTo/ictvat, tit is iarai, qualiscanque erit. X. An. 6. 5, 
 d. edairroy, dir6<rovs iit eKd/iPavev rjiTTpafid. Here Die idea, ot indeftnite- 
 ness is denoted by the relative ; but it is otherwise, when this idea is contained 
 In the predicate, see No. 3, and 4. 
 
 Remaek 1. The Fut. Ind. with k4 (only Epic) is used, when it is to be 
 denoted, that isoiliething \j;iU talce place in the future under some condition 
 H 260, 2. (1)]. II. I, 155. ^j* S' ivSpes vaiovai rroXi^^VfS, jroKvPovrat o? k4 i 
 iurlinia-i dehir ffis r i/ifivoviriv {who will honor him, I'F HE SHALL COME TO 
 them). 
 
 3. The relative with av, e. g. os av, ^ Sv, o ay, osrts 3.v, etc., is 
 followed by the Subj., when the verb of the principal clause is 
 a principal tense (Pres., Perf , or Ptxt), if the attributive rela- 
 tion expressed by the adjective-clause, is to be represented as 
 one merely conceived or assumed. Hence it is also used in in- 
 definite specifications of quality or size, and also to denote 
 indefinite frequency {as often as, 5 227'', 2). The adjective- 
 clause can commonly be considered as a conditional clause, i. e. 
 as one which expresses the condition under which the action 
 of the principal clause will take place ; and the relative with 
 av can be resolved into the conjunction iiv with rts or any other 
 pronoun followed by the Subj. 
 
 X. Cy. 3. 1, 20. 6 s ft c ( = liy nvas) fieKrlovs rivh iauray fiyli(ravTai, Tairoa 
 mWdKis kbI iveu hviyn-ns IStihovai TrtiA«r&ai. 1.1,2. &vdf>uiroi eV oiSivas /loAAoc 
 o-uWirToiToi,^ MroiiTovr, o6i ttv (= iivrtms) at&»avTai AfX^tv mrrSv iTrix- 
 cipoucToi. 7. 5, 85. 6 s tv Spmrii. KoKh (col AyaStSi imriiSeiovfas, roinovs niilf 
 iroj. 8. 8, 5. iiiotoi rives ykp hv ot irpoffTiria &/ri, Toiovtoi mil ol fiir' airobs 
 &s M ri va\h yiyvovrax. Her. 6, 139. t) TlvStk <rip4as [xeKeiei) 'ASttii/dourt SUas 
 Uiirai -raiTas, Ttki {= &s) kv aJroJ 'A^rimtoi Siicd(ru<ri (quaSCUNQUE — 
 mstiiuaint). II. ;8, 391. tv Se k' iylnv attdvevSii fidxn^ i»4\mna vaiiau 
 fUUvdCeiv iraphi vrtvaX Kopaviaiv, oS ot ^ireira &pKiOv iaaeirai ipvyUtv kiras ^ff 
 
 ^«.<J, (AS OFTEN ^^I P^5^%^SJ^'fJjfJrtlik, 
 
636 • SYNTAX. r^ 333 
 
 Rem. 2. The Snbj. is also used, when the adjective-clause forms a membei 
 of a comparison, viz. when the attributive idea expressed by the adjective-clause 
 is the condition or assumption, under which the object to which the adjective- 
 clause refers, belongs to the comparison. In this case, the principal clause 
 may have either a principal or historical tense. II. v, 179. 6 5' air' eireffiv, 
 ueXiti &s, ij T* 6peos Kopu<p^ . . x^f^V rafjLvdfiemj rep^va x^opX i^iJxXa tt e\aff afj* 
 p, 110. fisTe ?Cis -iivyiviioSi '6v pa Kitves re koI &vZpis hrti aTa^pio'io hioivrai. 
 
 Rem. 3. The modal adverb S v is so closely united with the relative, as to 
 form with it one word, as in c(tov, IttAv, etc., § 260, 2. (3) (d), and hence should 
 be separated from the relative only by Smaller words, such as hi. This &v is 
 very frequently omitted in the Homeric language, often also in the Tragedians, 
 and sometimes in Herodotus, seldom in the Attic prose-writers. 
 
 4. The relative (without S-v) is connected with the Opt, in 
 the first place, with the same signification as when followed 
 by the m/ and the Subj. (No. 3), but referring to an historiccu 
 tense in the principal clause. Hence it is used in general and 
 indefinite statements ; also in expressing indefinite frequencrj 
 (^ 227*, 2),— in which case the verb of the principal clause is 
 usually in the Imp/, or in the Iterative Aor. Here, also, the 
 adjective-clause may be resolved by tl with the Opt, 
 
 Th. 7, 29. irdvras i^TJs ^rip {= ei riyt) ivrvxoiev, koL vaiSas Kcd yOvaiKai 
 KTeivomes. Il.i8,188. ivtiva (= itrtva) (Av PaviKria Kol i^oxov ivipa (tixe '') 
 rttv Z^ hytafots inieaffiv ^ptiriffaffKe 'n-apatrrds. 198. hy S* o5 S'fifiov 7^ &v5pA 
 XSoi, ^oScavrd t* i^e^poi, rhv ffK-fi-TTTpcp i\dffaiT k e. Th. 2, 67^ -n dm as yhf 
 5)j KOtT* apx^-s Tov iroK^fjiou ot AoKeBatfiaytot, S ff o u s { == elf rivas) \d^o ley iv 
 T^ ^oKaairp, ws troXe/jdovs Sie^&eipoj/. X. Cy. 3. 3, 67. i/c eretlouo-i (Hist, 
 Pres.), ifr^i ivrvyx^voiev, fii) (pevyeiv. 
 
 5. In the second place, the Opt. (without av) is used without 
 reference to the tense of the principal clause, when the attrib- 
 utive relation expressed by the adjective-clause is to be repre- 
 sented as a mere supposition, conjecture, or assumption. Then, 
 the adjective-clause is to be considered as an unc&i-tain, doubt' 
 ful condition [§ 259, 3, (a)]. 
 
 X, Cy. 1. 6, 19. Tou /*€!/ airhy X4yeiv, & p.)} carats elSeli}, ^eiSea-^ai Set {ha 
 must beware of saying anything, which he does not know, or if he does not hnoU> it). 
 For examples of Optatives used by means of an attraction of the mode, see 
 5 3271>, 1. Ar. Vesp. 1431. cpSo'i tis, t/v tKotrros ftSelri t4xvt\v (any one can 
 practise the art with which he is acquainted (= tf he is acquainted with it). 
 
 6. The Opt. ivith av is iised, when the attributive relation ex- 
 pressed by the adjective-clause is to be represented as a condi- 
 tional supposition, conjecture, assumption, or undeterm.ined possi- 
 bility R 260. 2, (4) (aVl. 
 
 ^ ^ ' V / \ tigitized by Microsoft® 
 
t 334.] ADJECTIVE AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 537 
 
 X. C. 1. 2, 6. 2MKp^Tj;r robs \aiJiPivBVTas rris ipuKlas fuirdhp 4j/Spairo8i<r7-ij eavrSit 
 ^Tf KoAfi, Sii rh hvarfKoiov airots ftvai Sui\4yc<r^ai, trap' Sy hv \dPoiev ihv 
 Hi<T&6y (from whm. tliey might or could receive a reward). PI. Phaed. 89, d. ovx 
 ^OTTiv S Ti iir Tis /neifoi' Toirev Kaxhy viStot (there is ma evil which any one could 
 experience greater than this). 
 
 7. The lad. of the historical tenses is used with iv, when it 
 is to be indicated that the attributive idea denoted by the ad- 
 jective-clause could exist only under a certain condition, but 
 did not exist, because the condition was not fulfilled [§ 260. 2 
 (2), (a)]. 
 
 Od. t, 39, sq. ir<!\A.' So' tip ouSe'iroTf TpofTjs i^-tipar '05ucr<r€is, elirep airfi- 
 pw ?\fte, \uxi>v dirb \7jfSos alvmi. Eur. Med. 1339. ou/c eirnv ^t is tout" 
 &</ 'EWijylj yvv^ erXi) (quae sustinuisset hoc). PI. Apol. 38, d. of j iy (AiJyois) 
 lireiffo, El ^/Jijj' Sfic airarra iroieiy /col \iyeiv. On the Ind. of the historical 
 tenses in intermediate clauses of a conditional proposition, see § 327b, l. ,(a). 
 
 Ekm, 2. On the Inf. in adjective-clauses, in the oraHo obliqua, see § 345, d. 
 
 } 334. Connection of several Adjective- Clauses, — Interchange oj 
 the Subordinate Clause with tlie Adjective- Clause. — Relative 
 instead of tlie Demonstrative. 
 
 1. When two or more adjective-clauses follow each other, which either have 
 the same verb in common, or different vetts with the same government, the 
 relative is commonly used but once, and thus the two adjective-clauses are 
 united in one, e. g. h.vi\p, %s iroAXi fuv ar/aSii, robs iplhovs, iroWit 5e koko robs 
 voXefilovs i-jrpd^cv — aviip,^s Trap' Tifiii/ ?iv Ktu (ts) inrh irdvTtcv i^iKeiTO — aviiPt 
 %v idauiiJi(oixfv Kid (hv) irivres iip'iAovv. But when the adjective-clauses have 
 different verbs governing different cases, generally, the Greek either omits the 
 relative in the second adjective-clause, or introduces, in the place of the rela- 
 tive, a demonstrative pronoun (mostly oWs), or a personal pronoun; in this 
 way the relative clause is changed into a demonstrative one, and acquires the 
 nature of a principal clause, (a) Od. i, 110. HfiireKoi, a'ire ^epowiv olvov ipia- 
 ri.^v\ov Kai (sc. Sls) a'ij>iv (KuKX^ireairi) Aihs 6fj.0p9s ae|«i. Isocr. Fan^th. Thv 
 \6yoVf h V oXlycjf fi^v vpSrepov fie^' ^Sojnjs Si^Ai^oc, fiii^^ 5" Vtrrepov ^jueWe p.e 
 Aiw^iTEW (and which was to grieve me). Lys. Dardan. 166. oTs i/ieTs x'^P'^'o'^^ 
 fcol (sc. o&s) vpo^fioTepovs •7roff}trere. Dem. Cor. 252, 82. avruif, ots ij /m^j/ 
 Tr6\is Sis ix^pobs . . OTr^Aatre, tro\ Si ^irac (pi\oi (sc. o'l). X. An. 3. 2, 5. 'ApiaTos 
 Be, hp Tjfieis ^^eKo/iev ^affi\4a KoSuffT^val /col (sc. ^^ iSi^Ka/iey /col (sc. wap' o S) 
 iKd^ofiey vurrd , . ,Tjfia'TobsK.ipovtJ>i\ovsKaKusirQtuvireipa.Tai, — (b) Pl.Rp, 505, 
 e. ft 5^ Sii^Kei ficv fiiroo'a "^vx^i /col rovTov eVe/co ttiJi/to Trpdrrci. Dem. Phil. 3 
 123, 47. tM«ciatn6vioi, oi ^aKdrrris fiky ^pxop icaX yrjs cnrdirTis, PaaiKea Se a-infia- 
 XOP E^X"*'* b(l>i(rTaTo 5* ouSey avTois (instead of ous ouSev vipiffTaTo, guibus nihil nor* 
 eessit). X. Cy. 3. 1, 38. irov 4Ke7v6s iffrtv d a-v^p, ^s truye^pa rj/uy /col tr{ uot 
 ucEao iSSxets ^avfjidCsiv avriy. 
 
 2. The adjective-clause frequently ta'kes the place of other subordinate 
 clauses, e. g. QavfiaiTThy iroieis, is fi/uv jiiy oiSiv SiSwj (iN that or BECAUSE 
 you give us nothing),^. C. 2. 7, 13. The adjective-clause is very frequently used 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
53S SYNTAX. [« 335, 33f> 
 
 instead of a hypothetical adverbial clause (comp. § 33J, 3) ; so also instead of 
 ttn adverbial clause introduced by Sire; the last case occurs : — 
 
 (a) after oSt us or 58 e. Dem. Chers. 100, 44. oft yip oSra y' (t4^s latU 
 ifiaf oiScts, i s vwo\aii.pdvft (neither is there any one of yoa so simple, AS W 
 suppose). X. Cy. 6. 1, 14. ris oSrus i<rx"P^^> ^' A(|UQ) «o1 plyei Sii'tuT' &» 
 flax^t^^vos (TTpaTevetr^at ; 
 
 (b) after toioBtoj, tijAikoDtoj, toitoBtoj. In most instances, these 
 demonstratives are followed by the corresponding relatives oTos, Stros, 
 which, like the adverbial clause introduced by fore, usually have an Inf 
 depending upon them. X. An. 4. 8, 12. aWd not Sok^T roirovTov x"?^' 
 •V KaTOffxeii/ (sc. Tjfjias), Sffoy ^fw Toi/s itrxArous x6xovs yev4 ff&ai Tu* 
 iroKffjilav Kipdrav {it seems to me best that we should occupy so much ground, 
 as that, etc.). PI. Apol. iyii rvyxdj/u &i/ TotovTos, olo$ vnh tow ^iov 
 Tp n6\£i Sed^ff^at. 
 
 3. The relative pronoun serves not only to connect subordinate clauses with 
 the principal one, but it is also used to connect clauses generally, inasmuch as 
 it takes the place of a demonstrative which would refer to a word of the pre- 
 ceding clause. This mode of connecting sentences belongs to the Latin as 
 well as to the Greek, thoagh it occurs very rarely in the latter compared with 
 the former. Thus in Greek, e. g. it is altogether common for clauses to begin 
 with TOWTo 5e eiirdyres, ravra Bi OKo^ffaVTCs, jucreb 5e Tavra, iK roinov 5e, ws 5J 
 ■^bBtb iyeycTo, etc., where the Latin generally uses the relative gui. 
 
 i 335. III. Adverbial Clauses. 
 
 Adverbial clauses are adverbs, or participles used adverbially 
 (§ 326, 3), expanded into a sentence, and, like adverbs, express 
 an adverbial object, i. e. an object which, does not complete the 
 idea of the predicate, but merely defines it, e. g. ore to eap ^XJc, 
 (t6t€) to, avSrj SdWei. iis t\e|as, (ovTcus) eirpa^as. 
 
 i 336. A. Adverbial Clauses of Place. 
 
 Adverbial clauses denoting place, are introduced by the 
 relative adverbs of place, ov, y, ottti, oirav, h9a (ubi) ; o^ev, a/Sev 
 (unde) ; oi, ottoi, g, ottj; (ffud), and, Uke adverbs of place, express 
 the three local relations, where, whence, and whither. The use 
 of the Modes in these clauses, is in all respects like that in 
 adjective-clauses (§ 333). 
 
 Her. 3, 39. 8k»u JftiJo-cie irrpardtxr^tu, iriirn oi ^x<^« flnvxiies (indefi- 
 nite frequency). Th. 2,11. eirecrfte (iKciae), 'iiroi i,v ris riy^jTat. X. An. 
 4. 2, 24. imxil^voi ii oi iro\E/tioi Kcd, 8 iri) tftj arevhi' x^P^ov, irpoKmaKa^fiivov 
 T€S iKtiKvov Tcks Trap6iovs (Opt on accoimt of ixdiXvov), Cy. 3. 3, 5. ^ft^pa 
 Snovirep iir irvyxivo lev dniplois {wJierevei). PI. Apol. 28, d. oil &v tu 
 iaurhi/ Tt£|p, ivrav^a Set fieyovTa KtvSweiftf. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 337.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OP TIME. 539 
 
 § 337. B. Adverbial Clauses op Time. 
 
 1. Adverbial clauses denoting time, are introduced by the 
 conjunctions oTt, onore, us, ■^vixa (when), h &, Iuk {while) ; «7r4 
 tirB&J (postguam), cTrmS^ raxuTTa {irp&rov), or ws rdxiara (as soon 
 as), it ov, ft oTov, also it «!>v, ex quo, and d^' oC {since) ; trpCv, trplv 
 ^ (ptiusquam), 2(os, l<os ov, ets 5, ?sre, /xixpi or apjpt oi!, /i^;</)i otov, 
 lifXpt Qi^h until). 
 
 2. On the use of the modes, the following points are to be 
 observed : — 
 
 3. The Ind. is used, when the statement is to be represented 
 as Sijact; hence in speaking of actual events vr facts. 
 
 Her. 7, 7. ij hveyvi<r^-n Ecp|i)s iTTpareieadiu M r^jy 'EKKiiSa, iif^aSra 
 tTpKnjtqy itoiktoj (when Xerxes was persuaded, etc.). 1, 11. is fjfiffni TtJxiiTTa 
 iytyivei (guum pHntum, as soon as). X. H. 1. 1, 3. ijidxavTo, n4xpis ol 
 'Adrivatoi lLy4v\tvirai'. An. 1.3, 11. ical ?«j ncyofiey aln-aS, (TKeirreoy ftoi 
 Soke? thai, Sirws iis lur<litt\i<TTara iieyov/iev. 
 
 4. The conjunction Jms {till), is followed by the Ind. of the 
 historical tenses, when an object is to be represented as unat- 
 tained or not to be realized. Comp. § 327'', 1, (a). 
 
 PI. Gorg. 506, b. T]d4as tty KaWiKKei toiJtqj ?ti B Le\ey6fjL7jy, eus aina 
 lixeSaiKa (Qsqne dum reddidissem). 
 
 5. The Subj. is used, when the statement is to be indicated 
 as a conception or representaiion, and must be referred to the 
 predicate of the principal clause, the verb of which is in one 
 of the principal tenses. In the Common Language, the con- 
 junctions take the modal adverb av, e. g. orav, bvoTav, yvW av, 
 
 €7rav (€7njv), CTTCtoav, €V w av, irpiv av, co>s av, fi^XP^ ^^> *5t av [^ ^oO, 
 2, (3). (d)]. 
 
 6. Accordingly*the Subj. is used with the above conjunctions 
 from orav to Trplv av, when the statement of time is also to 
 be represented, at the same time, as the condition under which 
 the predicate of the principal clause will take place. But with 
 the conjunctions which signify untU, the Subj. expresses a limit 
 eoopected and aimed at. The Subj. is also very frequently used, 
 tp denote indefinite frequency {<) 333, 3). 
 
 PI. Prot. 335, b. ^ireiSic ah $oi\ji SioX^yeffftoi, is ^7<ii iiytt/iai rreer&tu 
 rirt <roi Sia\^|o^oi (whenever you wish to, if at any time you wish to disamrte. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
S40 SYNTAX. [i 337 
 
 etc.). Th. 1,21. 01 &vS>pa!Troi, iv $ hy iroA€;iiS<r i, -rhv Tap6yTa ■iti\tiuiv «'. 
 lifyuTTov Kplvomnv^ X. Cy. 3. 1, 18. vS\ty oHwu i&pakas ftxrtToTTo/ieVr)* 
 irpis v6\iy Mpay, JJtis, ^irtiSiy ^TTJi&p, irapaxpvi" TouTp avri toO /io- 
 Xec&ot irelbeffSiat ide\et. 3. 3, 26. iirSrav (ol fiip$apot Ba&tKeh) ftp arc 
 TfEBeiSiiii'TttJ, rippoy ■ircp ifiiWovr'ai eimt&s Sia ri/y ito\vxe'piaV {as often 
 as). Dem. Ph. 3. 128, 69. eas hy adiCifrat rh <nci(po!, rSre XP^ i"^ rairii* 
 Kol KvPfpv4\TT\y irpe^funis ttyiu (dwrn servari possit). 
 
 Remark 1. The-Sulg. is also used in the Epic language, when the adver- 
 bial clause forms a member of a comparison, since a case is then supposed 
 (comp. § 333, Rem. 2). II. {, 16. iis S" Sre irop(pipri ireAnyos . . «5s i ytftov 
 &pfuuye, o, 624. ey 5' eiretr*, us Sre Kufjixi &op ^i' njt" ircfTpffii'* 
 
 Rem. 2. On the Subj. after an historical tense instead of the Opt., and on 
 iray, iiriv, irply &y, etc. with the Opt. in the oratio obligua, see § 345, 
 Rem. 4. 
 
 Rem. 3. The mode of connection by Sre, Swire, irplv, etc. without &v with 
 the Subj., occurs only in the Epic language frequently, sometimes also in 
 Ionic prose, and not seldom in the Attic writers With jufXP' ^"^ "'?"'• 
 
 7. The Opt. is used with conjunctions of time, without av, just 
 as the Subj. is, but referring to an historical tense of the princi- 
 pal clause. When the Opt. is used to denote indefinite fre- 
 quency (§ 327'', 2), an Impf or an Iterative Aor. usually stands 
 in the principal clause, and the conjunctions ore, itrd, etc. (ex- 
 cept those which signify before and until), are translated by as 
 often as. 
 
 II. K, 14. avTap 8t* is yiids re ?Soi Kol' \ai}v 'Axiiuwv, troWks 4ic Ke(l>a\rjs trpit 
 di\v^vov\ 'e\KeTO xa^Tos (as o/ycn as). Her. 6, 61. Hkojs (= Sre) ivciKeie 
 ^ Tpo(phs (rb Tai5£oy), trpSs Te T&yaKfia 'liFTa KaX iKifftrcTO r^v ^ehv airoA- 
 Kd^at T^s St/jjUQ/i^Tjs rh tratSiey {as-ojlen as). X. An. 6. 1, 7. i ttotc pi^EWTiy^t 
 rois TToXe/ilois '4irloiey, ^i^Siics itr4<pevyov [as often as the Greeks made an at- 
 tach, whenever they made an attach). Od. e, 385. Siptre ^ ivl Kpatiryhy Bop4riu, trph SJ 
 xifiaT Itt^fy, ?tt>s S76 *oi^)Ke(r<r( ipt\np4TiJ.ot(ri /i 17 c 17; (but Spyviri liop4ii\v koJ 
 &yyufri KtJjuata, tas ftv . . pay^).' PI. Phaed. 59, d. ifepiepi4vopLfV Ittcio'ToTe, ewi 
 ayo tx^ei'Tj rfe SeffpiaTijptoy. 
 
 Rem. 4. On Sr in the principal clause, see ^ 260, 2. (2), (/8). 
 
 8. Moreover, the Opt. without av is used with conjunctions 
 of time, without reference to the time of the principal clause, 
 when the statement of time is to be represented as an uncer- 
 iain and doubtful condition, as a mere supposition, conjecture, or 
 assumption ; also, generally, when the subordinate clause forms 
 a part of a principal clause expressing a wish. 
 
 PI. Am at. 133, a. 6ir6Te ri pi\oiro(j>e!y alaxp^" vyit" al/iny clvai ouS" he 
 tv^pavov vop.lo'aip.i ifiavrhy eTvai {when I shall assume, if I sliaU ever ■assume). X. 
 Gy. 3. 1, 16. iras Uv Tin vX^Urrov S{ioi yiyvoivr' 01 ivStpairoi, ■Sirire aSifcoSi^ 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'S37.| ADVERBIAL CLAUSES OP TIME. 34J 
 
 res aKla-Kaivro [when tliey are, if they are, convicted of acting unjustlij) ; IL 
 
 »-, 465. at yip luv ^avifoio Svsiixtis SSe iuPaliiyiu v6(t^lv offOKpriif'ai, 8te fu* 
 uopes tufht ttciiyou 
 
 9> The conjunction vpiv {Trporspov ^), besides the construc- 
 tions aheady mentioned, is also followed by the Inf. The dif 
 fereut constructions of vpiv are to be distinguished as follows : 
 
 (a) When a past event, one that has actually occurred, is spoken of, the Ind 
 of an historical tense is used (No. 3). The principal clause is negative ; yet i; 
 is sometimes also affirmative, when wply signifies until; thus often in the Tra- 
 gedians and Thucydides (in the latter vplv Sti and wpty ye Sii). 
 
 (b) When a future, merely conceived action is spoken of, which can be con- 
 sidered as the condition of the principal clause, the Subj. is used, when the sub- 
 ordinate clause refers to a Pres. Perf. or Fat. in the principal clause ; but the 
 Opt., when the subordinate clause refers to an historical tense in the principal 
 clause (No. 5 and 7) ; yet only when the principal clause is negative, Cf ^jonfaina 
 A question implying a negative. 
 
 (c) But when tie action is to be represented otily as a conception, a conceived 
 limit, not as an independent occurrence, but only as a subordinate matter, and a 
 casual or incidental designation of time, the Inf. is nsed{=irp6 with the Gen.). 
 Hence the Inf. can stand both for the Ind. of an historical tense, and for the 
 Subj. or Opt, both after an affirmative and a negative principal clause, when it 
 does not serve to define more fully the subordinate clause. 
 
 Isocr. de Big. 348, b-. ob irpirepoy iwaiaavroy irply t6v tc irarepa Ik Tot 
 frpaTOTTihov j[XeTeir6/xi|»fti>Td, K&l rG>v <pl\av axitou rohs pXv i/irikTeivaP^ 
 roils 5' ix TTjs 7r(fA.€ws i^4$a\ov. X. An. 6. 1, 27. ou irpSa&ev ivaitravro 
 TtoKsfiovvTes, trp\v itroliiffav iraXrav f^v ttSkip &/io\oyfTy AaKeSat/jtovtovs 
 «al avTuv 7}yefji6yas eiyai. — Eur. Med. 279. oitK &iT€ifii irphs S6^ov5 Tii\ty, 
 trp\v &y (Te 70^05 Tepii6v(av e|cy &d\a (= ikv fi)} Trp67^p6v ffe iK$ti\w), 
 X. An. 5. 7, 12. ftij asre'AS-jjre, vplv tiv ciKoiariTe. II. <^, 580. 'Aylivup 
 OVK ^^eXey tpeiyeiVf irpiy ire ipTjiraiT^ *AxiA^oj (= et /jl^ Trp6repoy ireip^- 
 (raiTo). X. An. 7. 7, 57. 01 cViT^jSeioi iv t^ arparrmlStp (oJtoC) iSeovTo fi^ 
 aircA^eTc, vplv avaydyoi rh ffrpdrevfjia Kol Qi^pcavi vapa^oirj. — Her. 6, 
 119. AapsToSf vply fihy alxi^o-X^TOvs yeyetr^ai roi/s 'Eperptfas, iye7xe (r(pi 
 Setyhy x^^oy. 7, 2. sffav Aapsitoy koX wpSrepoy 1) 0a(ri\€V(rat, yeyovores 
 Tpeis irotSfj. X. An. 1. 8, 19. irply rrSfeujua i^ixyetirbai, 4icK\iyov&iy oi 
 ^dpffapot KcH tpevyoutri. 10, 19. irpXy Kar aXvff ai rh ffrp6.revp.avphs ^purrov^ 
 ^aaiXies iipivr}. 4. 1,7, 4irl t6 &itpoy i,ya$aly€i Xeipl&ofos, irply riya oiV- 
 &e'<r&ai ray iroheiiiay. Cy. 7. 1, 4. T-pXy ipav rovs iroXf/ilovs, els rph 
 kyeirma-e rh aTpireviia. 2. 2, 10. viAavol oSras elffl nyes, SisTe irpXv elSeyanh 
 irposraaffSfieyoy, vpSrepoy vel&oyrai. With attraction (§ 307. 4) ; ib. 5. 2, 9. 
 
 {iroWol &y^pa>woi) tivo^y^ffKoviri vpirepoy, irpXy ZriXoi yeyea^at, oTot ^tray, 
 « 
 Ebm. 5. The Homeric vdpos, when it is rot used as a mere adverb, is al- 
 ways coEstnicted with the Inf. 11. i, 245. is S' ayopV ay^poyo, Tripos Siprou 
 ^eSeaAai. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
642 SYNTAX. [}} 338, 33ft 
 
 C. Causai. Advekbial Clauses. 
 
 j 338. I. Adverbial Clauses denoting Ground, Cause. 
 
 1. Such adverbial clauses as express the ground or cause in 
 the form of temporal adverbial clauses by the temporal 
 conjunctions ot€, oTrore, is, iirei, quoniam, puisque, because, 
 since, iirei&^, quoniam, and oirov, quandoquidem. In these adver- 
 bial clauses, the Ind. is the prevailing Mode ; but the Opt. with 
 a.v may be used according to } 260, 2, (4) (a), and also the Ind. 
 of the historical tenses with av, according to § 260, 2, (2) (a). 
 
 H. 1^, 95. /u^ jKf KTciv, iirel oix Sftoydirrpios"EicTop6s cJ/ii {quoniam sum). 
 X. An. 3.2,2. x"^^'^*^ '^^ vapovra, b-jrire &ySpay CTpaTTjyav Toioiruy ffre- 
 pS/if^a Ko! hoxaySii/ Kol ffTpanarwv (since we are deprived of such generals, etc.). 
 Dem. 01. 1, in. 8Te toIvw -ravSi' ovrus Hx^', TpositHU Trpodi/tas l&4Kfir &Koifiy, 
 X. C. 1. 4, 19. 'XtoKpoLTfis ob fji6j/ot/ robs ffvv6vras ^S6k€i iroteip, ^Trrfre Oirh tup 
 iy^piiTrav ip$mo ^ir^x^ffdiu tup ipoirlap re Kal oSIkuv, hKKh, Kol &7r6re ip Ipnifiiif 
 (Up, iirelTrep riy^iraiPTo itriSip &p vore Sp irpdrrotep Aeobs StaKaAetp, — PI. 
 l^rot. 335, d. Scofiai oSp orov •7rapaiJtf7pai Tjfiip, &s iy&i ovS* hp iphs iiStop a/cou- 
 irai/ii tl <roD, — H. o, 228. irrr6ei((v X"?"^ ^t"^h ^Te! oB Kfp ipiSpurl y' ire\- 
 6 (t^t; {since, if he had not escaped, the thing would not have been accomplished with' 
 out effort). 
 
 Eemakk. 'Zitel also introduces interrogative and imperative clauses, 
 where we must then translate it by for. Tor the explanation of this use. see 
 >) 341, Rem. 4. 
 
 2. Such adveibial clauses as express the ground or caiose in 
 the form of substantive clauses by the conjunctions on and 
 SioTt (arising from Sta tovto, oti) and the Poet, ovve/ca (arising 
 from TovTov lve.Ka, o) or oSovv€Ka (instead of otov IviKo, o). 
 The Ind is here, also, the prevailing mode, when the statement 
 is not conditional. 
 
 Pl.Euthyphr. 9, e. Spo rb Siriof, Sti oiti6p eo-Ti, ipiXfiTiu vrrb rav df&P, ij, irt 
 
 (plKctTat, S(Tt6p 4lTTl ; 
 
 {339. II. Conditional Adverbial Clauses. 
 
 1. The second kind of adverbial clauses are the conditional 
 clauses, which are introduced by the conjunctions si and lav 
 (^v, av, which must not be confounded with the modal adverb 
 av). The principal clause expresses what is conditioned by the 
 subordinate clause, or the consequence and effect of the snb- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 339.J CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 
 
 543 
 
 ordinate clause. As the conditioning clause precedes the con. 
 ditioned, the cause, the effect, the subordinate clause is callea 
 the introductory clame or Protasis, and the principal clause, the 
 conclusion or the Apodosis. 
 
 2. The Greek has the following modes of expressing condi- 
 tionality : — 
 
 I. In the first place, the condition is expressed as a realitr/ or 
 fact, as something certain, and hence by the Indicative. Two 
 cases are here to be distinguished : — 
 
 (a) The Protasis has ci with Uie Ind., and the Apodosis, 
 likewise the Ind. Then both tie condition and conclusion 
 are considered by the speaker as a reality or fact, and hence 
 as certain, whether the thing be so objectively or not. The 
 result is very frequently a necessary one. If the Apodosis 
 contains a command, the Imp. is used, and when this command 
 is negative, the Subj. also (J 259, 5). 
 
 El toDto \ifiis, a/iapTdveis. — £i Af6s iffri, iroipis Iittiv. — X. Cy. 
 1. 5, 13. eJ TauTtt ^i \4yu irepL vfiuv &\Ka ytyyt^trxtoy, ifiavrhj/ i^airarw 
 (here something is spoken of, wliich in his heart the speaker wholly denies). — 
 E ( Ti ^x^ts, S6s. — E< Tovro ntvoiriKas, liraiviiabai SJios e ?. Her. 3, 62. S SeV- 
 Toro, ovK ioTi tcBto aXiibia, Skus (= 3t<) Kori (rot S/tcpSis iSsKipibs i ais iicavia- 
 TtiKe • iyi) yiip abrhs ^^aifid /up x^P"^ '■?"'' ^liewBroB • e i /iev vuv ofTe^vearcs ivetr- 
 TeafftfirposSfKci Toi KoL'AirTviyfaThv MrjSov iirai'aaTriaeir&cu- 6 J 8' %aTi,lis- 
 «p vpOToS, ou n^i tI TOf Ik yf ixdvou vnSmpov i,vafi\vuni\aa (here in the first con- 
 ditional clause, something is spoken of, the opposite of which the speaker is per- 
 suaded is tme). — Elf Ti eTx^iKai iSiSov, — Ei toBto iTrtwoffiKfis, Cvf^^"' 
 i^tos ^ff&a, — El iPp6vT7jff€, Koi IjffTpailiey, Ei touto Xc|eis, itfiap- 
 T^arj, X. Cy. 2. 1, 8. elf ri irfiffovTai M^Sot, is Hfpiras ri Seivhv ^|€i. 7. 
 1, 19. £1 (p^dirofiep Tolis troXefiiovs Ka.T(UcTav6vres, ouSels itii&v airo^ayei- 
 Tai. 
 
 (b) The Protasis has el with the Ind. of the historical 
 tenses, and the Apodosis, also, the Ind. of an historical tense 
 with av; then the reality, both of the condition and con- 
 clusion is to be denied. This form is used only of the past, 
 or where there is a reference to the past; here it is afBrmed 
 that something could take place under a certain condition, 
 but did not, because the condition was not fulfilled. The 
 use of the tenses is the same as in simple sentences. 
 See i 256. 
 
 Here the negation of the reality is not contained in the form of exprcs.sioa 
 • Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
644 SYNTAX. [{ 'J33 
 
 itself, for the Ind, of the historical tenses necessarily always denotes a past 
 occurrence or Jact ; the negation is merely an inferred one, that is to say, it con- 
 sists in this, that a conclusion or inference is drawn from the past and applied 
 to the present, and a reality in the past is opposed to what is not a reality in 
 the present. The past reality expressed in the conditional clause stands in 
 opposition to another present reality (either expressed or to be supplied from 
 the context), which contains precisely the opposite of that past reality, e. g. 
 if the enemy came, we were destroyed, i. c. if the enemy had come, we should have 
 been destroyed, bvt now the enemy has not come; fi'om this contrast it 
 is now inferred, that the assumed fact if the enemy came, did not take place. 
 
 El TovTo eKeyes, Tifidpraves &v (si hoc dixisses, errares, if you said this 
 you erred, or if you had said this, you would fuive erred ; but you have not said it 
 consequently you have not erred). PI. Apol. 20, b, c ris, -fiv 5" iydi, ku iroSa- 
 srtfs ^ KaX vStrov SiSntr/ccz ; KUtivos, i(p7], S ^liKpares, nipios, Trcyre ftveov, Kal iyai 
 rhi/ EiSfiPov 4fj.cacdptiTa, et us aXrj^us exet Tavrriy r^v r4xvyi^ KoJ ovTias ififie\id^ 
 diSdlTKff iyij yovif Kal aitrhs 4KaKKvv6}niv re Kai 7i^pvy6/xr]v &i/, ei 
 J/ :r Iff rill 11 V ravra- i,\K' oh ykp ittlcTaiiat, 5 ivipti 'A^vaioi (here also 
 something past is spoken of, as is evident from ifiojcdpura). 31, d. tj ^7^ 
 ini\at ^irexe'p'jo'ii Trpomfiv to iroAtTiiti irpiyjuna, iriXai tiv airo\tiKTi Koi 
 o{it' %v i/ias uipeK'fiKii, otr' tiv i/iavrSv. Th.l, 9. ovK iy oiy viiffap ixpire 1 
 {'Ayafi€/xvap), ft fi^ rt /col vaurtKhv eTx^v (he would not have ruled over the 
 islands unless he had a fleet ; but he had a fleet, consequently he could also rule 
 over the islands). PI. Gorg. 516, e. ci liaav ifSpes ayaAol, oJk &i> irore ravra 
 e-Kaffxo" Wil>ey — Cimon, Themistocles, and Miltiades — had been good men, 
 they would never have experienced this injustice). X. Cy. 1. 2, 16. ravra ovk hv 
 iSivavTo (olUepirat) irotur, flfiriKal SioIttj /ierpltf ^xpSivTO. 3.3,17. ei 
 (lEC fielCuv ris KtvSvvos l/ieWcv r/iuv tivai ^xeT (sc. 4v rf iroAc^i'ii), i) iv^aSe (sc. 
 iy rrj ipi\t(f), itras rh OfftpaKeffTaTov ^v ttv atptT^ov yof Beiffot /*ey ^Ketvot [o'l 
 kIvSvvoi) effovrat, Hiv re ivdaSe {mopLfvaiiifv, ijf re eis tiiy ixeivav (r&v TO\fiila>p) 
 UvTcs {nravTuiiev aoToTj (here also a past action is spoken of: as long as we were 
 unarmed, and therefore were in greater danger in a hostile than in a friendly 
 country, it was necessary for us to remain here ; but now, since we are armeu, 
 the danger here and there will be equal). 8. 3, 44. a\riSnj, %^, xiyen- tl yip 
 Toi Th ix^iv oStus, Ssirep ri Xajifiivfiv, ijih ^v, TroKh tv SUtfiepov €u5ai/ioi/(^ 
 01 Tr\oiffioi rSiv irey^TOM/ (in reference to the preceding conversation). An. 7. 6, 
 9. riiLeis iicv. Si AoKeSaiyuoVioi, Kol iri\ai av ^ ;n e c to/)' iiiiv, e i /tj) Sfvo<pan> Seupo 
 riixas weiaas airiiyayey. Lys. defens. Call. lOS, 1. el n^ xfpl SaAoi; rivis tl 
 ToS <ri6/.aT0j Ka\\las iiyaytC^TO, 1^ pfcel Sv /.oi Kol t& lopck Tuy &\\ay 
 elpvuiya • vvy Sf /lot Sok^T ttiaxp>>y ^toi nh 0o7iS>^ffai Ka?^l<f t4 SUaia. Purg. 
 sacril. 109, 15. e J ii'^y aurxp^" ^y fwyoy rh rpay/ia, Iffas &y Vis Tuy trapiovrm- 
 llli^Knae- yr.y Sioivepl al^x^yris, dXAi repl Trjs iieytffTT,! Cwlas ixtySiyeuoy. 
 
 Remakk J On tlic omission of &y in the Apodosis, see ^ 260, Eem 3 Or 
 i 327" J (a) ■ '™'''^ '" ""* '"""■"""^'^*® <=1'''^^<' of such a prop-jsition, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
?339. 1 CONDITIONAL ADVERBIAL CLAUSES. 54.5 
 
 II. The condition is expressed, in the second place, as a 
 conception or representation. The Greek has two different fo -ms 
 to denote this relation : — 
 
 (a) The Protasis has tl with the Opt., and the Apodosis, the 
 Opt. with av. (The Fut.. Opt. is here not used.) By this form, 
 both the condition and the conclusion are represented as a 
 presmt or future uncertainty, as an undetermined possibility, a 
 mere conjecture, assumption, or supposition, without any refer- 
 ence to the thing supposed being real or not real, possible or 
 impossible. 
 
 El; Ti ^X"'*! 80(771 &v (si quid hales des,ifyou had anything, you would 
 give it ; here it is neither assumed nor denied that you have anything, but is 
 merely a supposition. Ei tovto \4yots, a/ittpTdvots i,v [if you should say 
 this, then you would err). — PI. Symp. 175, d. eS hv ix<>h «' toioOto// fit) 4 
 (TOipia, Sit' ^k toS irKripea^Tepov els riy Kcy^repov peTii riiiSiv, ihv awrd/ie^a iKK'fi 
 Xav • el yhp oStoij exet Kol t) (Taipla, voWaS Tifiu^ai rijy jrapa <rol KKrixKuriv 
 Lysid. 206, c. elf fioi i&e\i\aais airbv irairicrai els \6yovs i\^e7y, 1<nis tiv Sv 
 vatiiniv (Toi ^iriS6?|ai, & xph airif SmKeyea&ai. Menex. 236, a. koI ri ttp 
 ?X<"* ciircrx, 61 Sfoi ae \4yetvi Hipp. Maj. 282, d. el yhp eiSeiris iirov 
 hpy^piop etpyaff/jLot, ^avfidirats &y. Ion. 537, e. ei <re ipoi^i^v, el (whether) 
 Ty oirp Texv^ yiyvdaxo/iev Tp ipi^ia]TiK^ ri abrh iyii re Ka\ tri, t) &Wri, tpatiis 
 tv SijTTOv Ty ainy. 5. 6, 9. Kal 5 Hap^evios Stfiaros • i^' hv e\^oiT€ &v, el rhv 
 "AKuf Siafiainre. 6.2,21. et KaTa\nr6m'es ret ffKevt] 4y t^ ipv/xv^ X^pi:^ 
 $)S els pdxV vapea-KevaiTfievot Xoifiev, Xtrots Uv ra lepa juaAA.oi' w po xtopoltj 
 ipjy, (Of the assumption of something past, in Herodotus [5 260, (4) (a)] 7, 
 214. elSel-rj Siv koX ^iy fi^ MtiMeits Ta^Tijf r^y arpatrhy *Oyf}TT]S, el t^ X'^PV 
 ro?i\li afLiKrixiis etri, Oneles might have known this way, if he had been very 
 familiar with the country). 
 
 (b) The Protasis has eav (-ijv, av) with the Subj., and the 
 Apodosis also, the Ind. of a principal tense, commonly the Fu- 
 ture (also the Imperative). By this form, the condition is rep- 
 resented sis a conception or supposition, the accomplishment of 
 which, however, is expected by the speaker, and is regarded as 
 possible. The conclusion resulting from the" subordinate clause, 
 is represented as certain (necessary). 
 
 Rem. 2. As the Greek Subj. always refers to the future, fiv with the Suhj. 
 almost wholly corresponds to e j with the Fut. Ind. ; the only distinction is, 
 that by e I with the Fut. Ind., the form of the condition implies that the action 
 will actually take place in future ; but by iiv with the Subj., the form of the 
 condition implies that the actual occurrence of the action is merely assumed 
 or expected by the speaker. The reason for the use of the Subj. is not to be 
 found in the conditioned relation i'self which it is necessary to express, but iv 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
046 SYNTAX. [i 339 
 
 the fact, that, aside from this relation, it is used to denote a concession expected 
 bi/ the speaker (5 259, Rem. 4). 
 
 'Eii' toDto \fyris, afiapriiffri, if you say this, shall say it, you mill' err. 
 (Whether you will actually say this, I do not yet know; hut I expect, I as- 
 sume that you will say it, and then it is a necessary consequence that you err.) 
 — 'Eiy TOVTo Kf^ris, afiapr'/jfrri (si hoc dixeris, errabis). Dem. 2, 14. oiroi 
 K6yos, ttv &Trp ret vpdyfiara, fidrcufiv 'ri tpatverat Kal.Kev6v, PI. Kp. 473, A, ia« 
 fiil ^ oi ^iXSaoffiot fiaatKeiffuff tv iv rats v4\e(riVf ^ oi $aaiKTis re yvy Keyofi^ 
 evot Kal dufdffTcu <pl\offo<p-i)frojffL yvTjtTias re Kal tKca^ws, Kat tovto els ravrhv 
 f UjUirco"?;, Svvafiis re iroMriK^ Kol fpi\otTo(pia, ovk etrri Kaic&i/ irauKa to7s irdAe- 
 ai. Lysid. 210, c. ^eiv fiev &pa ffo<l>hs yeyp, 2> Trot, vdvTes troi ipt\ot koI irAvres 
 ffoi OLKeToi iaovTai. X. An. 1. 8, 12. Kav tovto, ^(pij, viKtafiev Tn^c^* riiiip 
 
 TTeTToiTJTat, 
 
 Bem. 3. 'E ci c with the Subj. and e i with tlie Opt. are also used to denote 
 indejinite frequency. Comp. ^ 3271), 2. In the place of ^tJi" with the Subj. el 
 with the Opt. occurs, when the conditional clause is made to depend on »n 
 Hist, tense. Still, sec 5 345,4. On 4di' with the Opt. and el with the Inf. 
 in orat. obliq., see § 34.5, Kern. 4, and No. 6. 
 
 3. Besides the common forms of the Apodosis ahready- men- 
 tioned, which correspond to those of the Protasis, the Apodosis 
 is very often found in a form that does not correspond to the 
 Protasis. This interchange of forms gives great delicacy of 
 expression. The following cases occur : — 
 
 (a) The Opt. with Sv in the Apodosis, veiy often follows el with the Ind. 
 and iiv with the Subj., when the conclusion as uncertain, doubtful, an undeter- 
 mined possibility, is to be contrasted with a condition which is certain, or which 
 is expected or assumed as certain. But the Greek, particularly the Attic dialect, 
 Tery often employs this form of the Apodosis with a degree of ciyility, even 
 when speaking of settled convictions [§ 260, 2, (4), (a)]. 
 
 (a) El toSto \eyeis, aiiaprdyois &v {if you assert this, you would err). 
 PI. 30, b. c ( fiey oZv Ttuna. Xeytav S latp^e Ipa rohs veovs, toSt* h.y eiri ^Ka^epd^ 
 Ale. II. 149, e. Kol 7a^ & J/ Zeivbv eXri, elvphs TaZupKRu^Ths ^irias airojSXeir- 
 ovtriv Tjfiwv oi &€of, aWa fiij irphs t^v ^v)ci\v, &v tls ooios koI S^koios iiv Tvy- 
 X^^V' X.C.I. 2, 28. el ^WKparjis ata^otiSav ^ler eKei, irus ttv SiKoius r^s 
 oifK iyoiffijs alrr^ kok as alriav ^ X o * 5 Til. 6, 92. el iroXifiiSs ye &v <r^69oa 
 e^Kwrroy, Kol & y tpihas &y iKoyus w^eXoiiiy. 
 
 {j8) X. Apol. 6. I^y Be alo^dva/iai x^^P^*^ ytyySfieyos icol Karafiefi- 
 ipaiiat ifiauT6y, irus tiy iyii tiv iiSeas Ptoreioi lit; PI. Menex. 239, c. 4i» 
 aZy iiiLeis ^•'txeipufiev rii avTci x6yif ^jiA^ Koa^e^y, rdx' &y Seirepoi (paivol- 
 /iefta {then we shouldbe inferior). 
 
 (y) E I with the Ind. of the historical tenses is used in speaking of the 
 denial of a fact, and in the Apodosis, the Opt. with Sv is used in speaking of 
 the past, instead of the usual Ind. of the Hist, tenses with iy. This use is not 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 340.] . ELLIPSES OF THE PROTASIS. 547 
 
 frequent, and is found only in Homer [5 260, (4), (a)]. II. ft 80. el lUv t« 
 rhv iviipov 'Axalay il\Aos ^VKTirec, tfievS6s Key (paTnev Kol votr^l^oiiit 
 &a fioKKov vvv S" XSev, %s /ley' &pur.Tos 'Axaiciv fSxerai ehai {if another hcut 
 told the dream, we should pronounce it false, and not believe it). II. t, 311. xof vi 
 Kev ivSr' i.ir6\oiTO S(/a| acSpsv Alvelas, el /»J> £p' o{{i v6ii(re A(4s Avyariip 
 'A<ppoSh7i {and ^neas would certainly liave perished there, if Aphrodite had not 
 observed it). Comp. ^ 388. p, 70. [On «' with the Opt. in tha Protasis and the 
 Opt. -with &/ in the Apodosis, in speaking of something pas<, in Herodotus, see 
 No. II. (a) at the end.] 
 
 (b) On the contraiy, the Ind. in the Apodosis sometimes follows e t with the 
 Opt. X. C. 1. 5, 2. ei 8" iirl reXevrfi toC $iou yevifiepoi PovKol/iedi Tip 
 impe^M 5 TTotSas &^pevas vai^evaai, ^ hvyaTepus irapAifovs Siai/iu\c(fai, ^ XP^ 
 uoTo Suururai, op' a^i6TTurrov eh ravra ijyijiriJ/ie&o rhy ifcpar^ ; 
 
 (c) The Ind. of the historical tenses with Sv in the Apodosis follows: — 
 
 (o) sometimes e I with the Ind. of a principal tense, if the condition is re- 
 garded as a fact or something actually existing, while the conclusion is consid- 
 ered as not real or actual. X. Hier. 1,9. e i yiip oBto; Tai>r' ex * '> ™r ' " "■<•*•■ 
 Koi iikv ivedi/iovv ivpcwvetv . . , irSr 8i Trivres iC'^^ovv bv robs rvpivvous ; 
 {if this is really so, why should many strive after sovereignty, and all esteem tyrants 
 as happy f) Eur. Or. 565, sq. el yh.p yvvcuKts is nSS" ^^oviriv dpiaavs, &y- 
 ipns fpoyeiew, Karatpvyas Trotoifievat is TeKpa, . . , irap oi/Sey auTcus ^y tiv oWvycu 
 ir6ireis ; 
 
 (;8) rarely 4dy with the Snbj. (PL Phaedr. 256, c), but very often el with 
 the Opt., when, in the Apodosis, an action is to be represented as repeated in 
 past time [see § 260, 2, (2), {$)], but seldom when the reality of the conclusion 
 is to be denied, e. g. X. Cy. 2. 1, 9. ei ex"'/"! i>s rdxurT' hy SirAa i-roioi- 
 fn\v vairi Xlepa'ats ro7s irposiovaiy., PI. Ale. I. 11.1, e. el PovKit^eLitinev eiSe- 
 ycu fi)j fiivov, -TTOioi &y^puirol elffiv, aKK diroioi byietyoi, ^ yoerciSets, dipa ixayol & v 
 ^tray SiSdaKoKat ol iroWoi ; 
 
 (d) The Ind. of a principal tense in the Apodosis, is sometimes contrasted 
 with the Ind. of an historical tense in the Protasis : (a) afflrmatiyely: Dem. 
 Cor. 293, 195. el neri ray &r]Paia>y ri/uy ayayi^ofiiyois aSras el/iapro {fato 
 constitutum erat) vpa^ai, >tI XP^ irposSoKav; — (3) negatively: Th. 3, 65. el 
 liev yap 7ifie7s ahroi Trp6s Te rijy Tr6?iiv i\^6mes ijiax^P^^^^ {pugnavissemus) 
 Kcu r)iv yijy iS-povftey (devastassemus) ws iioKefuot, i.S IKovfiey el Se &ySpes 
 ifuiv 01 vparoi . . iireKoXeffavTO {advocaverunt), tI oStKovney. 
 
 i 340. Remarlcs. 
 
 1. Ellipsis of the Protasis. The Opt. with &y often stands without the 
 conditional Protasis ; yet this is contained in an adjective-clause, or in a par- 
 ticiple, or, in general, in a word of the sentence which may be expanded into a 
 conditional Protasis, c. g. in the adverb oSrar, in a preposition, or it is indicar 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
848 SYNTAX. [{ 340 
 
 ted in what precedes or follows. "Os ravra Ke-yoi (=rf tis -raSra hiyoi), 
 afLaprivoi &y (whoever shotdd say this, if any one shmdi say this, he would err). 
 Tatha, Xi^as (^ ei <ri Ae'lois) afiaprdvois Sy. Ovra •/ (^ ei oBra ye 
 iroiTjirats) ttv afiaproiyois. Very often, however, the Protasis is actually 
 wanting ; particularly, general Protases are almost always omitted, since they 
 can be easily supplied by such phrases as : if one wishes, if it is aUowed, if 1 
 can, if circumstances should favor, e. g.BovXot/iiiy &v (scil. el Svvaliniv)) velim 
 'HSeoj; ttv aKoiaaiiii; often also, the conditioned Apodosis must be supplied, 
 as the conditioning Protasis, e.g. Her. 9, 71. a\Act rai't /ity icol ip&6iiif cip 
 eiirotev (sc. el eliroiev). Comp. § 260, 2, (4), (a). So also, the Ind. of 
 the historical tenses with &v is often used without a conditional Protasis, 
 e. g. TavTo. \e^as ^ fiapre s &y, "A.uev ff etirfiov ouk ti.y tovto O'vve^rj. 
 'EffovXifuriv S;* or ^/SouA.^&tji' fij/ (sc. ei iSwifi-riv), vduissem, veHem (diifer- 
 ent from PovXalfiiiv av, as vellem from vdim). 'Ev&o 5J) eyvas &v (sc. ei 
 jrapiiir^a), turn vera videres. See § 260, Bem. 2. 
 
 2. Ellipsis of the Apodosis. On the contra;ry, the Apodosis may be omitted 
 in certain cases : — 
 
 (a) In the expression of a wish, e. g. el^e rovro yepoiro (sc. evrvxh' tt" 
 eltiv), that this might be! elf&E tovto iyevero (sc. eirrvx^sttv ^v), that 
 this had been! Comp. § 259, 3, (b), and Bern. 6. 
 
 (b) Often in excited, impassioned discourse {Aposiopesis). II. o, 340, sq. eSrore 
 5' a5T€ XP^*^ ifieio yeinfiTat aeiKea \oiyhv afivvat to7s &\\ots — . 
 
 (c) When the Apodosis may be easily supplied from the context. This oc- 
 curs in Homer in the phrase el S' e&eXets with or without an Inf. II. ip, 
 487. el S' 4^e\ets iroXf/xoio Switfieyat (sc. &ye, fidxov ifioi)' Stpp* eii elS^s, 
 Very often also in Attic writers, where two conditional clauses are placed in 
 contrast by el [iav) fiey — el (Ihy) Se /i'^; in the first the Apodosis is 
 omitted, since it contains a thought which can be easily supplied, and the dis- 
 course hastens on to the following more important thought. PI. Prot. 325, d. 
 KoL eay [iky eK^v irei^Toi (sc. koAws exei} ' el he fi-f], — ei/^iivouaty aireiXaLS Kai 
 irXTjyais. 
 
 3. A partial ellipsis of the Protasis occurs in the Homeric phrase ei 8' ^76, 
 i. e. ei Se fio6\ei, &ye, II. a, 524. ei S' &y e rot KeipaKy KaToveuffofiai. Also 
 when e 1 S E or el S' &ye is used as an antithesis, where a verb must be sup- 
 plied from the context. II. a, 302 ; t, 46. aXX &X\oi fieveovtri KapTjK0[i6wi'Tes 
 'Axaioi, els^Ke irep TpoiTjy diairepffofiev • el 5e Kol avToi (sc. ;t^ neveova't), <l>evy4y 
 ruy ai/y vTjval tpiXTjy 4s iraTplSa yaiay. 
 
 4. Ei Se instead of ei Se ^^ and ei SJ /fli instead of el 5e. When twc 
 nypothetical clauses are contrasted with each other, e i S e is often used instead 
 of 61 Se fi-^, since the opposed or contrasted member of itself abrogates 
 the first member. PI. Prot. S^ a. icki' /iiy fioiXri en ipan-ay, eToi/i(f j el/ii <roi 
 irapexeiy (sc. i/ie) aTroKpty6fi.eyos • ■ 4 a v Se $oi\Ti, ah i/iol irapiirxe {if you wish to 
 propose further questions, lam ready to reply, but if you do not wish, etc.). On the 
 contrary, a negative clause is followed by el S e fi^, instead of ei Se tliis fomi 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 341.] ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 549 
 
 being very common in abrogating or expressing the opposite of the preceding 
 clause. X. Cy. 3. 1, 35. vphs tuv deiii/, fii, o'ira \4yf ■ tl S e fi-l] {otherwise), oft 
 
 5. When ci ^^ has the meaning of except, another d is sometimes sub- 
 joined, thus 6 1 ju ^ el, like nisi si, except if, unless, the predicate of « ^^ being 
 omitted. PI. Symp. 205, e. oii yap ri iavrop, oT/tai, ckoo-toi lunriiomai, el fiii 
 tf ra rh fji^y iyaAhv olxeToy Ktt\eT, 
 
 6. 'Av in the Protasis with el arid the Opt. or the Ind. of the historical 
 tenses. Sometimes &i/ is found, also, in the Protasis; so that it contains a con- 
 dition for the Apodosis, but it is itself dependent on another condition, com- 
 monly not expressed, but implied, k. g. el ravra f^eyots &v means : If you should 
 say this undeb ciecumstances (= in case circumstances require, in case an oppor- 
 imiiy should present, in case one should ask you), etc. X. Cy. 3. 3, 55. raiis 8" 
 iarwSeirovs Tiatniiraaiv operas davfui^oin' if, el riirKeov hv axp.e K'li <r e i e \i- 
 yos KoKcis ^ijS-els els apifarfc&iav, ^ rolis hraiSelrrovs iu>u<riKijs ^o-jUa na\tt koAmj 
 ^den els iwvaMTiv. PI. Prot. 329, b. iyii elirep &KK^ tij) tui&pjmuv Treidot 
 liiji) &v, (cal a-ol vel^ofuu (si uUi alii, si id mihi affirmet, fidem habeam ). 
 
 7. When Koi is connected with el (Hv), the hypothetical Protasis contains a 
 concessive meaning, and the Apodosis, an adversative meaning: the Protasis 
 denotes a concession ; the Apodosis, often in connection with 2/i oi ;, tamen, 
 denies the expected consequence, and places another consequence in opposi- 
 tion to that expectation. Koi either follows el, — el xai or precedes it, — k a 1 
 e I — . In the first case, koI means also, and refers not merely to el, but to the 
 entire concessive clause, and et Ka{ means although. In the last case, Kcd 
 means even {enhansive), and refers only to the condition, and xal el means 
 even if,e.g. el Kal dvriT6s el/u, although 1 am mortal (conceding what is actu- 
 ally the case, Kol el oAdvaTos ?iv, even if I were immortal (conceding what is 
 not the case). S. 0. B. 302. ■7r6\iv /ley, el Kal fiii p\eireis, ^povets S' ipms, aSf 
 viaif ^iveOTui, etsi (quamquam) caecus es, vides tamen, quo in mala versetur civitas. 
 Aesch. Choeph. 296. Kel n^i ireiroida, roipyov iar' iypatrreov, etiamai non fdo, 
 perpetrandum facinus est. To the el (^iv) Kai, the negative el (ihv) ii.ii Si 
 corresponds; to the Kal ti (iiv), oiS" (miS") «' (^*'')- 
 
 Remakk. Concessive clauses are far oftener expressed in an abridged foi-m 
 by the participle, either alone, or in connection with Koi, Koiirep, etc., § 312, 4, 
 (d) and Hem. 8. 
 
 > 341. III. Adverbial Clauses denoting Consequence 
 or Effect. 
 
 1. Adverbial clauses, denoting consequence or efTect, are 
 adverbs of manner expanded into a sentence, and are intro- 
 duced by the conjunction wsre (more seldom ws), wliich refers 
 to the demonstrative adverb ovTa)(s), either expressed or under- 
 stood, in the principal clause, e. g. ovtus koAos laTiv, ws-rc 3<iv- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
550 SYNTAX. [J 341 
 
 lj.d^ea-3ai (=5ov/iao-t<i)s KaXo's eoriv). Yet these clauses often 
 have also the meaning of a substantive or Inf. in the Ace. and 
 denoting an eject,'a.nd. must then be considered as substantive- 
 clauses. In this last case, the relative <SsTe of the subordinate 
 clause corresponds to a demonstrative substantive-pronoun, 
 either expressed or to be supplied, e. g, tovto, in the principal 
 clause, e. g. 'Aviinia-e 'aepiea tovto, oIstc noiiiev Tavra (Her.). 
 
 2. The Ind. is used in these clauses, when the consequence 
 or effect, is to be indicated as a fact, something real and actital. 
 The negative is in this case (or, { 318, 2). 
 
 Her. 6, S3,'^Apyos afSpwy ^XVP^^ oStw, &st€ oi SovAoi avTetcv ^ffx^^ 
 vivra to vpfiy^ra. X. Cy. 1. 4, 5. Kvpos rax^ KoJ tA jc T^ irapaSei^i^ ^pfa 
 ain]\^icei, *&st€ i^Airrvdyris ovKer' eJx^^ oury <ri;\Ae^ eii' ^plti* 15. oSms 
 IjirSij Tp r6re diipif {S 'Acrrviyris), Sstc ail, iir6Tt ot6r re tfij, (Ti/Kelpei Tip 
 Kipto, Koi &Woi/y Te voWous irapeKdfJifiave, 
 
 3. The Inf , on the contrary, is used, virhen the consequence 
 or effect is to be represented as merely a conceived or svpposed 
 one, inferred from the inward relation of things, or assumed as 
 possible. (On attraction with the Lif.j see § 307, 4, and on the 
 negative, 5 318, 2.) The particular cases where the Inf. is used, 
 are the following : — 
 
 (a) When an effect or consequence is specified, which results from or has its 
 gronnd in the nature or condition of an object. X. C. 1. 2, 1. in Se -nphs rh iier- 
 piav Sercr^ai 76iraiS£Vjuej/af ^v '3,UKp&n)s oirrus, Sasre vdfu fiucpk KeKnjfievos irdvu 
 ^tfSius ^x^^^ apKovvTO^ Cj. 1. 1, 5. eSuydir^ Kvpos iirAvfilay ififiaX-uy Toaav- 
 ryjv rov irdvTas a&Tip x"P^C'f*^^"'» Sstg ael Trj avTov yvdifiri a^tovy Kv0epvAff- 
 i&oi. 2, 1. (t>iipal d Kvpos \4yeTal ^iKoTip.6TaTos, Si sre trdyra [lev irbvov avoT- 
 X^i/at, irhna. 8e kIvBuuov uirofieTvai rod 4-tratveta^cu ^veKcu "For the same 
 reason, 1) asre {guam ut) is used with the Inf., after a comparative. Her. 3, 
 14. S iroT Kipov, Tck fiiv oiK^ia ^v /if (a Kcuci, t) &srf ayaKKaleiv (greater than 
 that any one can bewail^ i. e. too great far one to bewail). X. C. 3. 5, 17. tpofiovfjuu 
 ael, /i-li Ti p.f'!(ov ^ SsTe <f>e'pEiK Siva<r&ai Koxhy tj irifAei av/iPij, Hence 
 CsTc witli an Inf may also be nsed to explain a preceding clause, e. g. Tb. 4, 
 23. XleXoTroyyrjffioi Iv TTJ ^-jretpcp ffrpaTOTreSevffdfieyoi, Kcd irposfioKas •Jroiov/j.evol Ttp 
 Tftx^i, (TKOwovvTes Katpov, ft rts TTapaTTciroi, Ost£ Tois &ySpas aaaai (watdi- 
 mg for an opportunity, if any should occur, by which their fellow-citizens could be 
 saved), X. C. 1. 3, 6. S tois irXcfo-Tois ipyaieaTwrSv iariv, Sst€ ^vXi^atrSnurh 
 &Tep rip Kaiphv ifnritr\aa-^al, t'-^to ^^Siois irdpv ^otKpdrTjS ifpvXdrreTO. 
 
 (b) When the consequence is to be represented as one merely possible. X. 
 An. 2. 2, 17. Kpavy^v iroW^p ivoiovp KoKouvres dAA^Aous, fisre koI robs no\etii' 
 •vt iKoieiv {ut etiam hostes audire possest), Sisre oi p.iv iyyirara r&v xoXefit 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
} 341.J ADVERBIAL CLAUSES DENOTING CONSEQUENCE. 551 
 
 av Kal iipuyoy (a fact). 1.4, 8. o»Te lnroiTe<piiya<ru> ■ tx" t^P rpiiipar, & s t t 
 
 (c) When the consequence or effect includes, at the same time, the idea of 
 purpose or aim. Th. 2, 75. irpo)caMiw«To ilxt 8e^^e« koJ Si<l>»4pas, ffiire to6s 
 ^pvofo/i/wus Koi T^JiiAo n-!iTe jrvp^iSpois Harois PJlWfirAai, iv iur<),dKei<f re 
 elyoi (so iAoi those at work and the wood might not be hit, etc.). Dem. Cor. § 81. 
 «AAA /lie &»- XP^uara ISuKe iiMffrlSna, Sst' ^x*'" '0(>«'<' («/ obtineret 
 
 (d) When the consequence is to be indicated at the same time as a condition of 
 the statement in the principal clause (under the condvtim,thai, or it is presupposed, 
 that). Dem. Ph. 2. 68, 11. i^hv aiiroTs tSk XoHrSi/ &px€iy 'E\Kiiv<ev, Hist' airoxis 
 iraxoieiv $curi\u (quum possent ceteris Graecis ita. imperitare, VT ipsi dido 
 audienies bssbnt regi, since they could rule the rest of the Greeks, provided they 
 themselves obeyed the king). X. Cy. 3. 2, 16. koI tovto Mara, iifn,, & Ktpe, 3ti 
 iy^, SjTe ItveKiffat Xa\Saiovs airh Toirav rav &Kpav, iro7\3MirXiam t.v iiaxa 
 Xp^fUtTa, &y ffii vw ^x^'^ ^"P* ^/^oS, 
 
 (e) When instead of an Inf. alone, the Inf. with Sste is used for the sake 
 of emphasis. Th. 1, 119. (iSeiiAriaav) kKotrTuv IS'uf, Sire ^ticplaaff^ai 
 ihi ir6\fiJiOV. 2,\0\.h,vaitelSrerai {nrh'Sd^ov. ., Sst' i» rixu aTeX^eTy. 
 6, 88. Kot olKopiv&iot ev^iis i'^i]^liTavT o mnoX irpOroi, Hsre viar) wpodufitif 
 aiiiyetv ktA. X. H. 6. 1, 9. Kol 'A^vaioi Se itdvra iroffi<ratey &y, &sTe 
 ffipiMXOi V/ui/ yeyetr^at. 
 
 (f ) In genera], when the speaker, without respect to the objective relation 
 of things, apprehends, in his mind, solely the causal connection between the cause 
 and the effect. In this way, a consequence actually existing may be expressed 
 by SjTf with an Inf. X. An. 1. 5, 13. I^JMWtv iirX roiis liivavos (arpaTiiras), 
 Sjt' ixeiyovs iKireirKiJx^'H /to! airhy Miyaya Kal Tpcxctc M ri SirAo. 
 
 (g) In oblique discourse. X. Cy. 1. 3, 9. {rhy Kvpoy) etiirx'ni^yo's tms irpose- 
 ytyKuy koI iviovycu r^y tpitiKtiy r^ iriiTnrqi, Sssre rp firjTpl /roi r^ 'Atrrvdyet iroKhy 
 
 Bem. 1. When the Inf. connected with Ssre depends on a condition, the 
 modal adverb &v is subjoined to the Inf. [§ 260, 2, (5), (a)]. Th. 2, 49. rh ivrhs 
 ofhus ixaieTQ, &STe ?iSi(rTatty is SSup ^livxphu 0*^0$ ainovs ^ivreiy. X. An. 
 G. I, 31. Koi fioi 01 ^eol oSras iy To7s lepo7s ia-fifiTjuay, Sjsre Kci iSi(&T7}y tty yvu- 
 vai, Sri to^-jjs t^s p.oyapxii.s oirexeff&af /4e 5ei (i. e. Ka2 ef rir tSuiri); efij). 
 
 Rem. 2. Instead of Sjre with the Inf. or Ace. with Inf., a relative, particu- 
 larly olos. Sir OS, is very often used in connection with the Ace. with Inf., 
 this relative corresponding to a demonstrative, particular^ toioCtoj, Toaovros, 
 either standing in the principal clause or to be supplied. PI. Crit.46, b. iyi> — 
 ToiovTos (sc. 6t^(), otos Twy i/iwy fiTiSeyl &\?\M Trei^eir^ai, fi r^ \6yai. X. 
 Oj. I. 2,3. ollleptriKol y6fioi i'jrifjteKovTou, Siras t^v apx^y l^h toiovtoi ^trovrtu 
 01 TToAirai, oTo I troyjipov Tiyos fi cuffxpov epyov itpieo'^ai. X. H. 6. 5, 7.To(ou- 
 T s i ^Tcuriirvos ^y, olos fi^ Po6\eff^ai iroAAoifs airoKTiyyiycu ruy Tro\tTuy, 
 l^h. 3, i9.7j fiev ^(fidcure roffovToy, tiiroy Tldxv^a ayeyytoKeyai rh yj/ijipiffua. 
 \. 2. ytnifievot rk avr&y eKcurroi, Stray airo^rjy (so far that thm could live on 
 ). On the attraction in this mode of expression, see § 332, Eem. 8. 
 
 Rem 3. Special mention must be made here of apparently independent 
 
 24 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
552 syHTAX. [i 341. 
 
 parenthetic clauses, which often occur, and which are introdaced by &s (seldona 
 Site) with the Inf. In this way the Inf., particularly of verbs of saying, think- 
 ing, judging, hearing, is used with is for the purpose of expressing restriction or 
 limitation. That, of which such a subordinate clause expresses the consequence 
 or effect, must be supplied, e. g. Toiointp rpSirtp. Th. 4, 3&. us fuKphv fjt€y£\^ 
 eixdir at {lo compare small with great). So is tiroi eiireiv (especially with 
 iras SLnd oifSets), ut ita dicam, propemodum dixerim, us trvveXdvri eiire7i/, ut 
 paucis nbsolvam, us ye fioi SoKf7v, tit mihi guidem videtur, properly tali modo 
 ut mihi videalur, &s i/i-i tS fif/xvijiTdai {as Jar as I weU remember). &s yt 
 ovTuirl axovirai {so Jar as we hear). Such clauses are rery often expressed in 
 an abridged form without w s, e. g. o 6 T w (T 1 aKovtrai, 5oks7v ifiol, ov tto\- 
 A^ \6yii) clireiv, especially 6\iyov, fiiKpoS Se~iv, ita ut paulum absit, and 
 in the still shorter form, i\iyov, prope, paene. — According to the same analogy, 
 iaor, iaa, 'i ti connected with an Inf., are used instead of a? s. (Hem. 2), e.g. 
 Bffov ye ft eldevai, as Jar as I know, quantum sciam (properly pro tanto, 
 quantum scire possim), if ti fi eiSevai. In like manner, is with the Inf. is 
 used in Herod, in sentences which express a limitation. 2, 8. rh &y Si) oirb 
 "iMovK^Kms oifKeTi Tra^-Khi/ x"^^'^' ^* tTvat Alyivrov (ut in Aegypto, Jor 
 Egypt, i. c. considering its whole extent). 
 
 4. The Opt. with S.v is nsed when the conseqiience or effect 
 is to be represented as a conditioned supposition or presumption 
 [J 260, 2, (4), (a)] ; finally the Ind. of the historical tenses is 
 used with av, when it is to be stated, that the consequence 
 would take place under a certain condition p 260, 2, (2), (a)]. 
 
 Isocr. Archid. 130, 67. eh TOffairrpf ofit^icw i\7j\v^a(riVf Ss t' ot fjiey KCKTTj/te- 
 yot T^s ov(rias i^Siov &v eis riif <&££\aTTai' t& (T<peTep' airruv ^^jSaWoiej^, ^ to?s 
 Seofievois eirapKeffeiav. PI. Menex. 236, d. <Toi ye Se? x^P^C^^^^'i Sstc 
 Kay oKiyov, eX fxe Ke\e{tots a-TroSivra hpx^iraff^ai, x^P^'^^M^'' ^*'- — Symp 
 197, a. fiavTiK^v ^AtrSWw avevpev, ^Eiri^filas Kal^Epwros riyejioveiffavTOS, & sre 
 Ka\ ovros ''EpaiTos tty 6^97 fia^riTiis. — Dem. Cor. 236, 30. ovk ttv iipKl^oftey 
 ^i\nftrov, ill sre Trjs elp^vTjs hv Z if] iiaprriKei Ka\ ovk & v afj.<ft6Tepa elxe, Kol 
 T^v elpiiirqv, Kol tA x^P^^- ■^' -^o- ■^i ^^- "^aa/Tes voXefilKh. SttAo KareffKeiaCoy, 
 &sre T^v ■jr6\iy SvTus ti.y Tiy-fitru troKefiou epya(rT'fipioy elyou, 
 
 Kem. 4. The Opt. unthout &y is used only in the case mentioned in § 227b, 
 1, (b). When Ssre is connected with the Imp., or the imperative Subj. [§ 269, 
 1, (a)], the dependent discourse is suddenly changed, with rhetorical emphasis, 
 into the Oratio recta. Dem. Phil. 3. 129, 70. ypa(puZe, Si sre, ttv fioi\-ii<r^f, 
 X.eipoTovi\aaTe (I ask that you, would decree, ij you wish, properly : decree, if 
 you wish). So, likewise, Sisre can be connected with a question. Dem. Aphob. 
 858. 47. et i irar^p ^irlffTei ro6rois, SijKoy Srt oSt tty ToAXa hrerpeiiey, oUr* &» 
 iKuy Q^Toi Kara\nrti3v avrols eippa^ev, &sre tr6^ey TcracFtj/; [ergo unde scie- 
 nmtl) Comp. \ 344, Hem. 6. 
 
 Rem. 5. Instead of usre with the meaning ita or ea conditione, ut, the post- 
 Homeric language also uses 4(t>' ^re (more seldom e<p' ^), which refers to 
 the demonstrative ^irl toutijj in the principal clause, either expressed or im- 
 plied ; either the Fut. Ind., or the Inf. are here used, e.g. Her. 3, 83. ^irl 
 ro-iiTtp Se vne^iffTajAat t^s apxvs, ^tt' ^re vv' ovSevhs vfieuy 2ip|o/zai. X. 
 H. 2. 2, 20. iiroiovyTo eipT)i'i)>', ^1^' ^ rd re fiaiiph Tcixi Kit riy Tleipaia KoAeXSy 
 Tas AeuceSaijUoi/iois eirecr^ai. 4, 38. 01 5e 6t^A.\a|oi', ^{^* ^re elpijvriv ^vfij/. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
342.| COMPARATIVE ADVERBIAI, CLAUSES OF MANNER. 563 
 
 D. Adverbial Clauses denoting Manner and 
 Quantity. 
 
 i 342. I. Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 
 
 Manner, 
 
 1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting qiioMiy and man,' 
 ner, compare the predicate of the principal clauscj in respect to 
 quality and manner, with the predicate expressed in the adver- 
 bial clauses. They are introduced by the relative adverbs, cos, 
 oisT«, wsirep; o-iruii, ■which refer to a demonstrative adverb, e. g, 
 ovTeus, in the principal clause, either expressed or understood. 
 
 2. The use of the modes in these adverbial clauses corre- 
 sponds with that in adjective clauses {k 333), e. g. Aeyns ovtcos, 
 <as ^/)ov«ts {you speak as you think). Zeus SiSoxni', ottws «■*€- 
 Xtt or oTr<ii<s av i^iky (§ 333, 3), eKarmg (gives to each, as he 
 vnshes). Very often lus av or ms-irep av is used with the Opt. 
 
 (5 333, 6). PI. Phaed. 87, b. e/toi yap Soxet o/.ioi<os \iyi(r3al 
 ravra, &iirtp av rts vepl av^pwirov i<j>d.vTcv -irpea-fivTOV airO'^avoVTOi 
 Xcyoi -fovTov rbv X,6yov. 
 
 Hemake I. In comparisons, either the Present tense is tised, since the com- 
 pared object is placed in present view, or the Aor. [§ 256, 4, (c)]. In respect 
 to the Modes, it k to be noted, that in Homer, the adverbs of coifiparison di s, 
 Sis re, 4iiTt, are connected either with the Pres. or Aor. ludij when the com- 
 parison is stated as an actual fact, or with the Pres. Subj., or commonly with 
 the Aor. Snbj. (§ 333, Bem. 2. ; the Aor. Snbj. often retains the appearance of 
 the Fat. by the shortening of the mode-vowel). H. k, 183. us Si idves irepl 
 ju^\a Svsap'fiO'ovTai iv av\p — , &s Ttav vijSvfjios Dtti'OS otiri 0\eipdpouv d\c^Aei. 
 p, 434. & s t e .a-t'tiS.lj liirei iniriiov, jJt' M rifn^a iwepos l(rt^«ei. «. 489, sq. 
 its ie \iuu it^Koiaif a&Tifiivtouriv i-Kt>^ii>v tdyiatv^ htstrfft itaRk ippovtav ivo' 
 poiay i>s pxv Qp^iixas &vSpas ivi^X^^i^ TuSe'os vi6s (as it may happen that a lion, 
 etc.). 
 
 Rem. 2. OSras (&s) — Sis are used in wishes or asseverations, the clause of 
 comparison, introduced by Sis, expressing the asseveration or protestation. 
 Thus in Latin, ita me dii ament, UT ego nunc laetor, may the gods love me, as 
 I rejoice, = may the gods not love me, if 1 do not rejoice, or as sure as I wish the 
 gods to love me, so sure I now rejoice. II. v, 825. ei yhp iySiii oSru ye ^ihs irais 
 alyi6xoio eiTilf ^ ., us vvy ijfiepjj ^Se icaKhy tp4pet 'Apyeioiffi irafft /i({\a {ivould that 
 J were the son of Zeus as truly as this day brings evil to all the Greeks). 
 
 Kem. 3. In clauses introduced by Sis, Hsvep, Ssre, an attraction of the 
 ("ase sometimes occurs, particularly in the Ace. Lys. Accus. Agor. 492, ISf). 
 oiSs/toB fOTif 'KyipaTov 'ASrTjvcuoy ehat a strep @pa<ri$ov\ov {should be 
 iiuh as Thrasybulus is). But the Nom. is often found, for which a verb must bo 
 ■applied from the content. Dera. Mid. 363. ixi^V" "Vf^i' tA "y^" amKlcncovra 
 Srrrtp 4y^, oSra iiiv &<paipe7(rSfcu tJjk vlxriv. 
 
 Eem 4. An iippo.sitive is often used with iis denoting compaiison, as in 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
554 SYNTAX. [i 343. 
 
 Latin with ut, for the purpose of explaining the predicate of the principal 
 clause. This as, m<, expresses either comparieon or limitation, ani in the first 
 case is to be translated by as, in the latter by for ; the former occurs, when it 
 is presupposed that the object connected with <ii s possesses in a high degree 
 the thing afBrmed in the predicate of the sentence ; the latter, when it is pre- 
 supposed that the object possesses only in a small degree what is affirmed by 
 the predicate of the sentence, S. O. B. U18. Aofoi; yhp ?iv, tHep ris ijAXos, iruf 
 ris, iis vo/ietis Itffip {ut pastor, as a shepherd ; the fidelity of shepherds be- 
 ing presupposed). But Th. 4, 84. ^k Se suSJ iSvyaros, as AaKfSaip.6j/ios, 
 ciireiv (ut Lacedaemonius, for a Lacedemonian ; it being presupposed of Lacede- 
 monians as a thing known, that they were not great orators). 
 
 f 343. IL Comparative Adverbial Clauses denoting 
 Quantity. 
 
 1. Comparative adverbial clauses denoting quantity, compare 
 the predicate of the principal clause, in respect to quantity or 
 degree, with its predicate. The compared predicates are con- 
 trasted either as egrtal or unequal to each other. 
 
 2. The equality of the predicates is expressed in the follow- 
 ing manner : — 
 
 (a) The adverbial clause is introduced by the relative oai^ 
 (oo-ov)^which refers to the demonstrative ToirovTia (toctov- 
 Tov)y in the principal clause. 
 
 X. Cy. 8. 1, 4. TOffovrov diatpepeiv fi/MS SeiTuv SovKav, ^trov ot Hfif SovKoi 
 &KovT€s ToTs Se<rir6rais virripeTovffiv {it becomes us to excel slaves as much as slaves 
 unwillingly serve their masters). 
 
 (b) The adverbial clause is likewise introduced by oo-oi 
 (oo-ov), which refers to the demonstrative roa-ovrta (too-ovtov), 
 in the principal clause ; the predicate of both clauses, however, 
 stands either in the comparative or superlative. 
 
 X. An. 1. 5, 9. {Kvpos) vopiC^v, htra fiev tLV ^arrov eA^oi TotroiTw 
 airapaaKivaiTTOTiptp J3a<ri\ci iiAxf<r^iu (quo \(pianto'\ celerius — eo [tanto] 
 imparatior, thinldng that the quicker he came, the more unprepared he wovM, find 
 the king to fight) . 0. 7,42. 8iry &k koI ipLoX koivuv6s, koI iraiffly oUou tpiKa^ 
 ifidroiy yieri, roaoiTif koI Ti/itoiTEpa iv t$ olxtf ?(nj {quo [quanta] mdior 
 — eo [ianio] honoratior, the — so much the). Hier. 1, 19. Sir^j tti> irhela t.i iro- 
 pa^^Tai Tct TrepiTrk tuv iKavav, r oiToira ^aatrop Kopos iforlirret ttjs iSajdTJs. 
 Th. 8, 84. Hffti} fiaKttrra Kal ^Kev^epoi ^aau vavrai, rotrovrt^ koL ^patri- 
 7 ar a TrpasTTtaivTfs thv fuaSrbv aTr^row. The Superlative may also stand io 
 the first member, the Comp., in the last. Dera. 01. 1. 21, 12. 8(r^ yko Itoi- 
 uirar' ouT^ {t^ \6ya) SoKoviiev XPW^'^', roaoiTtf juSx\ov aTrio-ToSffi 
 wivTts auTy. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
t 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 55^ 
 
 Eemaek 1. Sometimes to o-o lir a, is omitted, especially -nrhon the relative 
 member of the eompanson follows. PI. Gorg. 458, a. ^ Jfo^ ^ip ^mTI 
 
 yiff^ov f, liwov oToW^<£{ai. Also after the omission of 8 <r a — t o o- o ir « both 
 clauses may be blended into one, e. g. X. C. 4. 1, 3. al ipurrai SoKoDo-kl eW 
 iiiKrtis liaKiara vatSelas oeovrai. 
 
 Eem. 2. A comparative clause, introduced by &s, Snas, S (as), iaov, and 
 expressing a poesibilily, often serves to strengthen a superlative X C 2 2 6 
 imiieKowitti ot yovih ■nivra 7roio0«-«, iwu>s oi iraiSfj abroh yipoivrai ' i,s s'vja- 
 Tiv ^eKTtffTot las goad as possible, quam fieri potest optimi). Cy 7 1 9 5 
 iv ivvu,y.a.i Tdx'_<rra {as quick as possible). For the like purpose, also 
 oUs, Sri are used in connection with ,Tyai. X. C. 4. 8, 11. iSi/u roiodrol 
 that, oUs &<- eU &piaT6s y^ ai^p eiiai^oviararos. Tlie following 
 elliptical expressions originate from the omission of the verb: iis Spio-ra 
 oXav x<'>^f'<iraTor, Sri ^i.\iara, etc. (§ 239, Rem. 2). In the same 
 manner, the expressions i,s a\-nS>us, in fad, really, i>s irexfUs, utterly, &s vdm, ii 
 «V2 Ti Tro\i, plerumque, are to be explained ; also it e/caffToi, i. c. g/caoroi, is 
 
 3. The inequality of the predicates compared, is expressed 
 by appending to the Comparative a coordinate clause with the 
 comparative particle rj. See § 323. 
 
 Bem. 3. The relation of quantity is expressed by comparing the predicate 
 of the principal clause, in respect to its magnitude or degree, with the conse- 
 quence or effect of that clause, the consequence being expressed by a subordi- 
 nate clause with S jtc and the Inf. If the degree of the predicate in the prin- 
 cipal clause stands in an equal relation with its eflFect, then the predicate of the 
 principal clause is in the positive, e. g. oStms ai/Spt't6s 4<rTiv, Sjre &oi;- 
 /nifcir*oi. But if the relation is unequal, i. e. if the predicate of the princi- 
 pal clause is represented as one which exists in a higher degree than another 
 standing with it, then the Comparative is used with ^ Sst e and the Inf., e. g. 
 TiKa/fi nel(a iariv, ^ Sire dvoK\aieic (greater than that one, i. e. too great 
 to be bewailed). See § 341, 3, (a). 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 §344. I. Intekrogativb Sentences. 
 
 1. Questions are either independent of a preceding sentence 
 or dependent upon it, e. g. Has the friend come 1 and / do not 
 know whether the friend lias come. The first is called a direct 
 question, the last, indirect. Both may consist either of one 
 member, or of two or more members, e. g. Has the friend come, 
 or Has he not yet come ? Do you not know whether he is come or 
 whether he is not coming 1 According as the question refers to 
 an object (person or thing) or to a predicate, the questions are 
 divided into nominal and into predicative questions, e. g. who 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
366 SYNTAX. [^ 344. 
 
 has done this 7 (nominal question), and hast thou loritten the 
 letter ? (predicative question). 
 
 2. The nominal questions, i. e. those questions, in which the 
 inquirer wishes to receive an answer on a single word in the 
 sentence (subject, attributive, or object), are introduced by the 
 substantive, adjective, or adverbial .interrogative pronouns, tis, 
 jroio?, Trdcros, Trorcpos, ttGs, irq, ttqv, tto^i, rroSev, irocre, etc, • If the 
 nominal questions are indirect, then they are introduced by the 
 interrogative pronouns Q 93, Rem. 1.) compounded with a 
 
 relative : osris, oirotos, 67roo"oSj owotc/joSj ottms, OTrr), &7rov, mto&tv, 
 OTTOtre, etc. 
 
 Tis ^A^er; — Ti iroiets; — Tlotiv <re tnos tpiyiv cpKos o56vTav \ — Jlus \4- 
 yfts ; — Tl6<re tpcityeTe ; — Ou/c olSa, 3 s t i s iffriv. — Ou/c diZa, Snats tovto tJ 
 rpay/ia ^irpa^ev. 
 
 Eemakk 1. Often, however, the indirect question takes the character of 
 the direct, and then the direct interrogative pronouns are used instead of the 
 indirect. Sometimes, indeed, in clauses that immediately follow each other, 
 the first clause takes the indirect interrogative, the last more seldom, the direct. 
 OvK oTSa, tIs Tavra ^irpa^ev. X. C. 4. 6, 2. c??re )Uoi — iroiiv ri vofd^tis eiffe^ 
 Peuw cTyai; yet there follows immediately, tx^'* o^" f<'^e"'i iTro76s ns S evtre- 
 piis larw ; Comp. Rem. 2. PI. Crit. 48, a. ou/c &pa Tiiiiv oSra ippovrurTeov, t i 
 ipovatv 01 iroWol ri/ias, aW' S ti i iiraiav Trepi tuv SiKouav KaX aS'tKuv, X. C. 4. 
 4, 13. ov yhp cuiT^dya^ ffou, SwoTov v6nip.0Vy % iroTov SiKaiov Key f is, — In 
 indirect questions, the simple relative is sometimes used, instead of the indirect 
 interrogative, e. g. Ss instead of Sstis, otes instead of Sirotos, etc. 
 
 Rem. 3. The adverb ttots, like the Latin tandem, is sometimes appended 
 to the interrogative, in order to express the impatience or desire of the inquirer 
 for an answer, or to denote wonder, or emotion in general. X. C. 1. 1, 2. 
 no la IT or' ^XP^"'"'"''' TeKfi7)pla! ; {what proof, I pray, did they bring?) 1. iroK- 
 \aKis i^avfiaa'a, rlffi iroT^ \6yots *A^yaiovs ^iretaav oi ypaij/dfiei/oi ^wKpdTitv, 
 &)s &^ios €5f7j ^avdrov rf Tr6\ei. R. L., 1, 1. i^aifioura, Srtp irore rpoiri^ rovT* 
 iyeysTo. 
 
 Rem. 3. The article is prefixed to the inteiTOgative, when one of the speak- 
 ers has mentioned an object or quality, in order to define it more exactly, while 
 the other does not expect this more exact definition, but interrupts the dis- 
 course, and, by means of the article referring to that general definition, asks 
 " what that means." PI. Phaedr. 277, a. 2wKp. Nuc SJ; ^(ceTvo jJSt;, £ *oT5pe, 
 Svviiie^a Kpivfiv, tovtuv &>no\oyT)ii.ivmv. *. Ti vo'ia; (in reference to the 
 preceding iKc'iva). 279, a. Soj/tp. Ne'os ^ti, & *a!Spe, 'hroKpiiTiis- 6 jiteVroi ^ov- 
 Tfiofiai tot' auToC, \4yeiv iA4\a, *. Th iroToy S4) ; So T^ iroio TouTa 
 \iyeis 1 Prom this mode of expression, that is to be distinguished, in which a 
 substantive with the article or a demonstrative foltows an interrogative with- 
 out an article. In this case, the inquiry relates to the nature or quality of an 
 object already existing. II. x, 440. Troroi- riv fii^ov hmes; which the 
 Eng. translates by means of two sentences, " What is that word, that thou 
 hast spoken 1 " The word is already spoken, and the other now asks what it 
 means.^ Her. 7, 48. Sai/xiij-ic avSpSiv, Koia (= Trom) toSto Xe'-yeu cTrat 5iJo /ioi 
 TToXE/uiiTOTa; (what are these two_ things which you say are most hostile to me?] 
 PI. Gor^. 521, a. ^^irl iroTspay olv jue TrapoKoAeis t}ji/ Sttpdirfim t^s viKeus 
 ( = voTeptt itrTly ri depdireia, i(p' ijy /le irapaKaKeTs ; 1 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 344.] INTERK.OGATIVE SENTENCES. 55/ 
 
 Bejm. 4. In order to make the subject matter of the question emphatic, when 
 there is an antithesis, or a transition in the discourse, the words which denote thi." 
 subject matter are often taken from their own sentence and placed first with t i 
 B i, and then the predicate of the proper interrogative clause is commonly placed 
 with a second interrogative. PI. Ep. 341, d. n' Se Ku$€pirliTi]s ; d opS^Zs icu- 
 fiepiri/TiP vavTar ApX"' i'rf'v, ^ vaimis i Gorg. 502, a. t ( S e 6 irar^p amov MeXiji , 
 ^ irpis rh ^tXTiffrov j8\e7rwv HSku (rot Ki^aptpSeiif ; 
 
 Rem. 5. The expressions, ri iiad&v, ri ira^tiv, cur? why? always ex- 
 press disapprobation or censure of that respecting which the question is asked. 
 The former implies thnt the thing censured was done designedly ; the latter that 
 it was done accidentallt/, e.g. Ti fLti^iir tovto iirofj^os,' {what has come into 
 
 fourmindtodo this, with what object in view didyoudo this?) Ti irabiiv toCto 
 volii<rasi (quid experttis hoc fecisti ? what happened to you that you did this?) PI. 
 Apol. 36, b. tI &^ios ei/il va^eTtfj fl ajroTiffat, St* fxa^&y iv rip filtp oi/x Tjtrvxiav 
 ^ov ! (what punishment do I deserve, that 1 purposely have had no rest in mg life?). 
 
 Kem. 6. A rhetorical turn of the Greek language, of frequent recurrence, 
 consists in suddenly changing a subordinate clause, introduced by a conjunc- 
 tion, into a direct interrogative Clause, yet in such a way that the earlier con- 
 struction remains unaltered. In such a case, the Eng. changes the subordinate 
 clause into the principal, and the principal into the subordinate. X. C. 1. 4, 
 14. irit Se apL<poTfpav r&v vXeiiTTOv a^ttoj/ Tervxv^^^ ovk oUi ffov ^eobs iwifneXetiT- 
 dat, &?JC iratf ri ir o ff] a uff t, vofiteis mnohs ffov fppovri^^iv ; (but what must the 
 gods do, to make you believe that they care for thee ?). Dem. Phil. 1. 43, 10. virt 
 J ;^p^ irpctfETE ; i'jreiiiiv t( ytyriTat; (but what mtist take place if you are to 
 do your duty?). Hence the ^elliptical expressions, 'Iva ti; us ri; (scyevri- 
 rai) to what purpose, J»r what object? Sri rl; (scytyveTot), on wliat ground? 
 So also in the adjective-clause, e. g. PI. Phaed. 105, b. « ykp lpoi6 fie, ^ hv r t 
 iv T$ tr^fiart iyyeyiirai, fytpp-hv ^trrou, ov T^y a.(T(pa\7J ffoi ipu aiT6Kpiffiy (if 
 you ii-ould ask in what condition of body he must be, so that it might be warm ?) So 
 also T J o u is inserted in the midst of clauses without change of construction 
 (nihil non). Dem. Cor. 241, 47. i^pi^op.iva>v koI tI Kaxhy ovx^ nairxivTuv 
 rtaaa $ otKOvfieyrj fieiTT^ yeyoye irpoioray. 
 
 Rem. 7. The Greek may place two, or even more interrogatives, without 
 «o/, under one common predicate, e. g. Tlas ri &p 6c S.yiavi(olfieda ,- (how and 
 lahat ?). [Comp. Eng. " what and what manner of time," rim ^ ttoiov Kaipiv, 1 
 Pet. 1:11.] PI. Rp. 400, a. vola 5' iirolov /Siou iupi,iip.aTa, ovk ex" ^cV"' 
 (what imitations and of what life?). Dem. Cor. t»s rivos airtSs iari; So 
 also with the relative. Isocr. Archid. 124, 42. rls ovk oTSiy, e'J oiuc ^vp,(fiopav 
 €is '6ffi]v evdaifioyiav KaT4(mja'av. 
 
 Rem. 8. Both the relatives and interrogatives in Greek are very often con- 
 nected with a participle. Thus a great brevity in expression is effected ; the 
 Eng. in this case changes the Part, together with the interrogative or relative 
 belonging to it, into a principal clause, and the finite verb into a subordinate 
 clause. X. C. 3. 7, 3. tV 5e ip-iiy Sivapuv, i<\n) i> XapfitSris, iv vaiip ipyip Ka- 
 Tuiitt^in' raSra /mu KaTayiyviiaxiis ; (by what loork hast thou learned my ability, 
 so that thou coddst pass such a sentence about me ?). The Greek may also insert 
 an interrogative clause between the article and the participle belonging to it, 
 and in this way blend the two questions into one. X C. 2. 2, 1. Karap-eiui^Kas 
 eSi/ Toij tI irxovPTcis -rh Smfia rovro mroKoKovai ; instead of KaTap-epA^Kas, 
 •tlvas ih ivopm toOto airoKoKovaiv, koX ri irotowiv oWoi, ois ri Smpa rovro airoK- 
 aXovatv ; 
 
 3. Predicative questions, i. e. those where the inquirer de- 
 mes only an affirmation or denial to his inquiry, are expressed 
 in English merely by placing the finite -verb first and by the 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
d58 syntax. [§ 344 
 
 accentuation, e. g. Art thou sick ? Host thou seen thy friend . 
 lu Greek, also, the predicative question is indicated, in the first 
 place, merely by the tone of the question and the position of 
 the words, the word on which the stress of the question lies, 
 being placed first in the sentence ; still this mode of expression 
 is not very common ; it is used most frequently, when the ques- 
 tion involves a certain degree of emotion. 
 
 Od. e, 204. oStqi 5^ oIkovBc tl>iK7jv is trarplSa yaiav avrUa vvv i^e\€is ceVai, 
 This is found very often with negatives, c. g. Ouk 4&e\fis Uyai; 
 
 4. In the second place, the predicative question is introduced 
 by certain interrogatives ; this is the more common usage. In 
 indirect questions, these interrogatives are translated by whether. 
 When the predicative question consists of more than one mem- 
 ber, and of such a nature that one member is excluded by the 
 other (disjunction, i 323), then one of the interrogatives stands 
 in the first member, while ij, or {an), stands in the second and 
 following members. 
 
 5. The interrogatives in the predicative questions are the 
 following : — 
 
 (a)''H implies an asseveration (§ 316, 2), and hence is used when it is sup- 
 posed that that which forms the subject of the question actually exists. X. Cy. 
 1 . 4, 1 9. ^ oStoi, & TTcJitTTE, 7ro\E/uio{ tliTiv, ol i^peariiKeuTt rots iiptiia ; IIoXc/uoi fitr- 
 Tot, e<l)7i. Fl. Kp. 341, c. ^ op^ws ffoL Sorcu, ^tpiiv, ^ etireii/ o&rai \eyav, 1i oS ; 
 'Opbus, ei(>7/. Very often used in connection with other particles, e. g. ft^» 
 (§ 316, 1), 8^, S^ mv (§ 315, 1, 2), S^to (^ 315, 3), &pa, yip [§ 324, 2, 3, (a)], 
 Kaf, iroi (§ 316, 2), Toii ipa. X. O. 4, 23. tI Xiyeis, & Kvpe; }j yhp iri 
 Tats iraTs x^P"^ ToiiTiev ti i^irevaas ; (Now did you ACTUArxT plant any of these 
 with your ownhandsf). ''H yap; {is it not true?). Fl. Hipp. Min. 363, c. ^ ^cip, 
 Si 'lintia,idv Ti ipuratre :iaKpiTiis, iiroKpivfl ;''H irov; {surety? surely indeed?). 
 Fl. Lysid. 207, d. ^ irov, 9iv 5' iy^, S AiJai, aipoSpa (fitKei ffe & var^p koI ^ fi'finip ; 
 Udvv ye, ?i S" is. Still, ^ ir o u is also used when the inquirer would express 
 doubt whether the actual existence of a thing is to be admitted or questioned. 
 Eur. Med. 695.^ irou TtT6\p.i)ii tpyov i&rx'irTav riSt {has Jason INDEED, 
 HCTUALLT dared this thing ?). 
 
 (b) ■'Apo (only post-Homeric) originates from the inferential &pa, igitur 
 [<j 324, 3, (a)], and hence implies the idea of consequence, effect; by frequent 
 use, however, the appropriate meaning {igitur), becomes weakened and ob- 
 scured; hence the inferential particles Spa, oZv are sometimes added to a 
 question introduced by Spa. '^Apa leaves it undecided, whether the inquirer 
 expects an affirmative or negative answer. Hence, when it is to be definitely 
 'tdicated, that either an affirmative or a negative answer is expected, then ic 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 344.] INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 359 
 
 Jho flfst case, Sp oi (noime), is used ; in the last case, gpa M^ {mm, whether f 
 is it no( f ) ; ;t 4 always expresses solicitude, feat. X. C. 3. 6, 4. 3 p' ?0n b SeoKpdTTjj, 
 Ssireps 0£Aou oTkoi' ei oul^iroi Pai\ou>, TrKovtuirepov abrhv iitixfipolils hv Troirjffai 
 nivv iiiv odv, t^. 10, 1. Spo, iifiri, 3 na^pinn, ypaipiKii iariv fi flKsurio 
 Tm}/6paii4ya!Vi^''AKii^rj \4yeis, i<^r\. 2. 6; 16. Sp' oJr olo-ftii Tiraj, ol i.va- 
 <lie\us ivres &<l>t\iiiOVs Sii>amai<l>i\ms iroielttStai ! Ma Af oi 8^t' ?</>?;. 3.1.1, 
 3. 2 p' aiv, iipTi, Kol oIk4t<u aov ixhovrai irivovris re alirh Kttl \ov6ii,evoi air^ , 
 Ma Til/ Af , e^T) {profectb non aegre ferunt). 4. 2, 22. 5p' odi/ SA Tijv to5 X"'*-" 
 Keiiiv anadltti/ toC iyi^/iaTas Toiroi; Tvyxiivoviriv ; Oi S^ra. 1.5,4. Spt{ 70 
 " " XP^ irdj^TH Si/Spa, Tiyriffiiifvov TJjx iyKpareiav aperris tlvcu KpTjTriSa, rairrii/ 
 TrpaToy if f^ ^VXV KaTaffKfvdiraadai , (nonne certe). 2.6,34. Spa ju^ SiaffdK- 
 headiu Si^cts in' e'/uoD i 4. 3, 10. rf 8^ 5)j /JavXci/uera; di^o^Iii yeydir^ai, i(jn], S> Eu- 
 diSiiiif, autAeyeis Tck ypijiiuera ; — 'A pa. p.^ laroos ; ?0r| • — Kol i Eli&iSriiJios • 
 JHh Af, 1^5), ouK ?7«i)7e. 0. 4, i. dipa p.^ ah\vv&uiify '^hy Uepiruv flafl•l^e'a 
 pipiltrmrdai ! Doable question : PI. Euthyphr. 9, c. Spa ih iaiov, in S<ri6y iari, 
 (piXeiTM inrh tuv ^eSsv, ij, 8ti (piXeirai, im6v iart ; (is then that which is holy loved 
 by the gods beaause it is holy, or is it holy because it is loved f) 
 
 (c) Mail' (probably originating from p.'fi and the confirmative ody, § 316, 
 Rem.), corresponds entirely to the Latin num, is it not ? is it so ? whether f and 
 hence always leads one to expect a negative answer. For the sake of perspi- 
 cuity, the particles oZy and /i^ are often added, e. g. jiur oSv, ptay /i ^, But 
 if the negative oi is added to nay, then the question is affirmative (nonne). PI. 
 Lysid. 208, c. aW* Spxei rls aov; "OSe irotBo7«7iJs, e^?7. Mclji' dovKos &y 1 {bid 
 not a slave, is he?) Eur. Hec. 754. tI xPVI'^'^ puiiTTeioura ; fiZy iKeidepoy aiava 
 diff^ai ; pdSioy ydp iffrl trot. Hecuba answered : Oii S^ra * rabs Kcucobs S^ TtpM- 
 povpevT] aJuva rhy ^ip.TravTa SovKevtrou ^eKot. Eur. An dr. 82. ptuy oiv Sokus 
 trot (ppovriiTou rlt^ ayyeKSiv ; PI. Phaed. 84, c. W, e^, v^uv rh, \ex^4yTa s fi&y 
 u^ JSoKit iySsas \eyftr^aLt ; — 'Ey oTs rl XPV'' ''^oie7y ipe ; ptay ovx Sivep-iirolovy; 
 [nonne, quod Jaciebam ?) 
 
 (d) There is the same difference between o4 and pi^i when used without 
 ipa, as when used with it, see (b) : i. e. ob is used in affirmative questions, ^^ in 
 negative. Oix i&eKeis Uyat; (non oinonne yis ire 1 •do you not wish to go ?) PI. 
 Fret. 309, a. av o'ii ^^croi 'O/i^pou iiraiyiTnis eTj {are you not in fact an eulogist f 
 on juej/Toi, see § 316, Bern.). On oiKovy {nonne igitur) and oixouy (nonne 
 certe) in a question, see § 324, Bern. 7. X. C. 4. 2, 10. oAa4 /tJ| apx'TeKTuv 
 poi\et yfveadcu; Ouk oZv tyarf, lipri. 'AWk pii yeapirpTis iiridvpeis, ^ijni, 
 yeyca-^ai aya&is; OuSe yeteair pi\s, efri kt\. 2, 12. p.^ oSy, i<p7i 6 EuAi/Sij/iKj, 
 ov Svyupat iyiit reL ttjs SiKaioffi/vi}s tpya i^Tjyfiffaff^ai ; (shall I not be unable, etc. "i 
 the negative oi belongs to the single word Siywpai). This interrogative ;it^ is 
 used very often in an indirect question, after expressions of considering, ash- 
 ing, inquiring, of solicitude and fear. It appropriately means, whether not, bnt m 
 Eng. can be often translated by that. X. C. 4. 2, 39. ippoyrl^u, pii KpirurToy 
 fl ^t (riySii {lam anxious wliether it is not best). For more examples of ju^ and 
 «lso for the construction, see § 318, Rem. 6. 
 
 (e) E f T a and e ir e 1 t o, and more emphatically kxtu, icSirfiTo, introdiira 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
560 ■ SYNTAX. [§ 344 
 
 questions of astonishment, indignation, and irony. They express antithesis o) 
 contrast, and yet, since they show that an unexpected conclusion has beet 
 drawn from a previous thought (§ 312, Eem. 8}. X. C. 1. 4, 11. et ia^i, c<tni, 
 Kti, el po/iifoi/ui &eois av&f&iruv ri <ppovrl(tiy, oIik tv tc/ieAof?)!' airiv. 3. 'E it f 1 1* 
 6UK o'iei fpfiovri^eiv ; ot irpurov fi^v i^vov rati/ 0^(ur iv^poinoi/ op^hy aveffrritTav K7K 
 {and yet do younol think tliM they da care jbe men?). Cy, 2. 2, 31. /cfiireiTt 
 
 TQlOUTOJf OVTO, OU <l>l\€ts avTOV 1 
 
 (f) 'n6Tfpoii (Trdrepa) — J? (Homer JJ — if) is used Hko the Latin ufram — 
 on, in direct and indirect double questions. Xlinpav is sometimes omitted ic 
 the first member. X. C. 2. 3, 6. Koi 6 XuKptirTis tfp^' Hot e pa 54, & XatpeKpa' 
 T«, oiSeA ipdvai Simrcu Xaipeipuv, i) fffny oTs Koi irtiyu apinKfii Cy. 3. 1, 12, 
 ri 8e, V xpill'arci iroKKii fXV' ^?* irKovreiy, fj virura Tants; C. 1. 4, 6. ravro 
 bvru TrpoyoTjTiK&s ireirpayfiiya, avopets., v ire pa r{txv^y ^ yy^fiTfS Upya iorrilfs 
 
 (g) 'A \ A T 1 ij (arising from iWo ri i<rri or yiyyerat, $ or yeyour' &y, ij) and 
 &Wo r tjhas the same signification as nonne. X. An. 4.7,5. &\\o ri f) ovSh 
 Kai\iei irapUyai ; {does anything else than nothing hinder = does anything hinder ?) 
 Fl. Hipparch. 236, e. &Wo ri oZv olye <pi\OKepSeTs ^iXoSiri t& KepSoss 
 
 (h) "H, like the Lat. an, is properly used only in the second member of the 
 question ; but often the first member is not expressed in form, but is contained 
 in what precedes or may be easily supplied from it. 'H can then be translated 
 by perchance. X. C. 2. 3, 14. Ttiyr' &ptt (ri ye rit iv iw^piiirois (ptKrpa iiriffrdfie' 
 yes Ti\at kmeKphrrov ^ oKvets, i^, &p^ai, fL^ alirxphs <payfs, t'ctc TpSrepos r)>v 
 ideKtl^y eS votys ; {=« ^ &pa — aTFeKpinrov, ^ oKveTs — ;) 
 
 (i) El and idy [with the Subj., comp. § 339, 2, U, (b)], whether, is used only 
 in indirect questions, and, indeed, properly only in doable questions, and de- 
 notes a wavering or doubting between two possibilities ; but often only one 
 member is expressed, while the other is present in the mind of the speaker. 
 Hence el and My are especially used after verbs of reelecting, deliberating, inquir- 
 ing, asking, trying, knowing, and saying. The connection must determine whether 
 the interrogative sentence has an aiBrmative sense {whether — not), or a nega- 
 tive one {whether). X. An. 7. 3, 37. ave^ai, et S "EfA'fiywy yrf/jos KiWtoy lx"> 
 
 {wheth^. net). C. 1. 1, 8. oSre r$ trrparriytK^ Sri\oy, el {whether) vviupepet 
 
 ffrpariiyeiy • oUre r^ ttoMtik^ S^Aoy, el {whether) miupepei rris iriXeas 
 wpoffraretv aire rS koAV yfifiavTi, 1y' elKppalyTirai, SriKoy, el {whet/ier — 
 not) 8ia rairriv ivida-eTat, oSt« Tip Suyarobs iy ry TrrfAei /cTjSfirTis \aP6yri Sfi\oy, 
 el {whether — not) SA roirovs (rrepiiffeTai ttjs v6\em. C. 4. 4, 12. o-ke'i^oi, eix 
 ToSe (To! liaWoy hpesKxi. PI. Apol. 18, a. Seonai ipiSiv roirm rhv vovy irpose- 
 Xety, « Siicata Keya, fj ivf). — On el after verba affectuum, see § 329, Rem. 7. 
 
 Rem. 9. Very frequently, especially in Homer, verbs which express some 
 action, are constructed with this deliberative idy with the Subj. and el with 
 the Opt. (Epic elf ice, at ne), in which case a verb like aimireTy, ireipaiTAat, 
 IS to be sup^hed by the mind. Th. 1, 58. noTiSmSToi ^e,»i^«K fi^ koI Trop' 
 A^nvttlovs irpeirPeis, et irus ireltreiay {having sent envoys to the Atheniam \to see, 
 to ascertain] whether they could persuade them). H. „, n2.y\avKi6ay 5" l^sdiepe- 
 rai fieyei, ijy Tiya ire (py 11 aySpuy. 
 
 (k) EXre — eire are used in indirect questions like ei — ^, except that 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 344.) INTEEUOGATIVE SENTENCES. 561 
 
 by eTre— elTc the indecision and hesitation of the speaker between two posai. 
 bilities, are made more prominent. S. Ant. 38. ko! 5e/|«s rdxa, elr ei-ycyj,! 
 wi^vxas, etr" iaS)\av Ko/f^. The poets also say etre — ^, or « — eirt, or they 
 omit the first dfre altogether. 
 
 6. On the use of Modes in interrogative sentences, the fol- 
 lowing points axe to be noted : The Ind. is used in direct and 
 indirect questions ; it is also used after jx-q in indirect questions, 
 when the interrogator wishes to express his conviction, that 
 that which is the object of his anxiety or feax actuaJly exists. 
 The Subj. and Opt. are used in deliberative questions [{ 259, 1, 
 (b), and 2] ; but the Opt also (after an Hist, tense), when the 
 question is to be represented as the sentiment of another {k 345, 
 4), and also when the question depends on a clause expressing 
 a wish ({333, 5). The Opt. with av and the Ind. of the histor- 
 ical tenses with av, are used as in principal clauses, h 200, 2, 
 (2>and(4). 
 
 Tf A.e7efjj (Also in questions expressing wonder or astonishment, the 
 Greeks use the Ind., e. g. irSs oISo; (how could I know?) — Etiri, Sri \4 
 yen; Th. 3, 53. <pe^elifie&a, /<}) Hfi^arepiuv inxapT-l\KaiJLtv. X. Cy. 3. 1,27. 
 ^f^a, jU,^ ilc^i']/9vs ad Se'^.'8'e* <pe trtotppovi^eti^ ^Tt fmKXev, ^ iipMs vvy ^Se^tr&r^ Tt 
 elrtaiify; (wh<U can we say, wliat are we tosayf) — Ouk oTSa, ii ti dTrafiei 
 {I know not what we can, sludl say). Od. c, 473. SeiSoi, it jj ^petrni' 'e\ap jcol 
 K^p^ia yivafiat {that I shall become). X. C. 4. 2, 39. tppovTiCcc, /i^ Kp&Titrrov 
 ^ pjt)i-ffiy5.y {wh^her itis n&thest). Ouk^Tx^v, Uttoi rpairoiiJLtjv, Pl.Rp.614, 
 Id. am^atoiis i\ey€P, & 4Kei tSoi ( what he liad seen there) . ^hpi iioi l^eKifais 
 h;y eifiretf '^so. eX tre ipaTt^7}v) ^--X. Ah. 6. 1-, 28. exetpo evyoa, /j.^ \iay hy raxv 
 KTwippoyiff^ei'QV. C 4. 2, 30. vphs ce a3roj3^67r(u, eX itov iSfeKiiffais hy 
 ^JJT^ffaffi&ffi "(sc. €* ^e^Xeio), — '^A.ppi tr^ %irei(ra. &y (sc. eif ffoi raura €\e^a) ; 
 (persuasissemne tibifij X. Apol. 28. cii 54, & ^fArare 'AiroAXdSftjpe, jwaAAoc ity 
 iPai\ou /iiipSy Siicdtas, ^ rSIkus hro^y/icTKovTa. ; (vellesne?) Ovk oIS fiat 
 
 Rem. 10. On /a^ {whoheir—nlit) with the Opt. after a principal tense, see 
 S 345, Rem. 2. On the Ind. of the principal tenses, and also on the Sahj. af- 
 ter an historical tense, see § 345, 5. When the Subj. is followed by an Opt., tlien 
 the latter, as in final clauses {§ 330, 3), expresses the more remote thought. H. 
 IT, 650, sq. ^pijfeiro ai»;ii# . . ncpfiVpiCi^y, fl ^Bt; kbI Kemqv. "Ektw/i xoAk^ Snejo-j 
 iTT6 r' .Hiiuy Tfix^' eAijrof, ^ en koI ir^rjoyeVo'ij' o^eA.A.eiej' viyoy cumy. 
 
 1. The answer made to predicative questitms by yes, is com- 
 monly expressed by repeating the word which contains the sub- 
 stance of the question. The answer made by no, is usually 
 expressed by prefixing ov to the word which contains the sub- 
 Itajjce of the question. Yes is also expressed by val, vrj: rbi 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
662 SYNTAX. Ji 345 
 
 Ato, iravv, Kapra, eS and the like, <lir]f).L, fj>VI^' *7<^3 ^7" with- 
 out <f>ii]iJLL; and mo, by ov, ov ^rjixl., ovk iyd. Commonly also 
 strengthening adverbs are joined with the words which answer 
 a question: yi Q 317, 2), e. g. ?yu)yc, ovk lycoyc; yap 324, 2), 
 Tot (* 317, 3), /le'vToi Q 316, Eem.), oSi/ [} 324, 3, (b)], fiev- 
 ovv (§ 316, Eem.). The answer to nominal questions is made 
 jy naming the object respecting which the inquiry is made. 
 
 Ear. Hipp. 1395, sq. Spas fit, Sea-irotii' , as ex") '^^'' &&A.>o<',- — 'Opa. lb. 90, 
 scj. ojtr^'' oZv, ^poToTffiv hs Kt^eaTriKev v6fios ; — Ovk oJSa. X. C 4. 6, 14 
 (pi^s ail afiedfa iroKlrTiy 6?^a(, tf trh i'TraiveTSf fj hj/ ^y(& ; — ^tjftl yhp o5y. 
 
 §345. n. Oblique or Ikbikect DiscotJKSE. 
 
 1. When the words or thoughts of a person, whether the 
 second or third person or the speaker himself, are again re- 
 peated, unaltered, in precisely the same form as they were 
 stffted by us or another person, then the discourse or thought 
 quoted, being independent of any view or representation 
 of the narrator, is called direct discourse (oratio recta), e. g. 1 
 thought: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED. Tlie messenger an- 
 nounced: PEACE HAS BEEN CONCLUDED, — Or without a preced- 
 ing verb : peace has been concluded. 
 
 2. When the words are not repeated in the precise form in 
 which they were first spoken, but are referred to the rep- 
 resentation of the narrator, and thus are made to depend 
 upon a verb of perception or communication (verbum sen- 
 tiendi or declarandi), standing in the principal clause, the 
 discourse is called indirect (oratio obliqua), e. g. We believed, 
 THAT PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. 27*6 messenger announced, that 
 
 PEACE WAS CONCLUDED. 
 
 3. The principal clauses of direct discourse, to which also 
 belong clauses introduced by coordinate conjunctions, e. g. 
 KM, 8c, yap, ovv, koltoi, etc., are expressed in oblique discourse, 
 when they contain a simple affirmation or an opinion, and de- 
 note something which happens, has happened, or wiE happen : 
 (a) either by the Ace. with the Inf (§ 307, 6), or by on and 
 IBS with the finite verb (J 329), or even by the participle [§ 310, 
 
 1, (a)], e. g. 'EirijyyeiXe Tovs ttoXe/aiovs aTTO^uyeij' — OTI o\ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
• 345.] OBLIQUE OR INBIRECT DISCOURSE. 563 
 
 mX.eiu.old7ro<f>vyoiev — Tovs 7roX«/xtovs aTroc^uyovTas; when 
 they express a command, wish, or desire : (b) by the Inf. and 
 in continued oratio obliqua by deXv. y(prjucu with the Inf., more 
 seldom by the^ Inf. alone., (§ 306), e. g. "EXcfe roZs arparuirm, 
 eTTi^eo-^at rots TroXe/tiots {prcvtid recta^ iTri^ea-&e). 
 
 Remark 1. Tntermed!ate clauses of the oratio obliqua, and particularly such 
 as are connected with the preceding hy yip, although they are grammaticallv 
 principal clauses, frequently stand in oblique discourse in the Opt. without anv 
 conjunction to introduce them ;. commonly a sentence expressed by 3ti or 4s 
 with the Opt. or by the Ace. with the Inf. precedes. X. An. 7. 3, 13. i\Lov ito\\o\ 
 KM-a rmni, in jnu/xis S«m \iyoi SeiJa^s • xe'/ai" 7 4 P « If »;, KoJ o»Te ofKaSe kirmK^h 
 Ttf PovKo/ievtf SmaToy tin, K. r. \. H. 3. 2, 23. i.i,0Kpivanhuv Si tuv "lUeW, 
 3n ou loi^fftiai' touto- hrtXtftSas ylip ^xo'^y TiLSTr6\tts- (hpoSpav iimvm ol 
 f^opoi. 
 
 4. The subordinate clauses of direct discc arse, undergo no 
 change in indirect discourse, except that, after an historical 
 tense in the principal clause, they take the Opt. in the place of 
 the Ind. and Subj., when the indirect discourse is to be repre- 
 sented as such, i. e. when the statement contained in the sub- 
 ordinate clause, is to be viewed as the opinion or sentiment of 
 the person spoken of, and not that of the narrator. 'Av, which 
 is joined with the Opt. and Ind. of the historical tenses, still 
 remains in indirect discourse. 
 
 X. An. 7. 1-, 33. {KoipaTaSrjs) ^\eytv, Sri croifios etri ^curi^ai avroii , ., eyfta 
 ttoMo Kal oyoAtk \'fi'fioivTO {oratio recta : %Totn6s el/u . . , ivba A^^eo-fte). Ag. 1, 
 
 10. TuraatpipvTis Hixoaev 'A7TjiriA,aiji, el irireiffaiTO, eas f\&oiev, ots ire;*- 
 ijifie vphs 0affi\4a iryyeKovs, Simrpd^ea^at ouT# itjiediiyai avroyi/ious rhs iy t§ 
 'Atrl(f TT6\eis 'EWjivtSas (oratio recta : lav ffvela^, eas tiy e}\Aa(riv, obs itfiafia . . 
 Stanpd^Of^cu). 
 
 Rem. 2. When, however, the subordinate clauses of direct discourse would 
 be expressed by the Ind. of an historical tense, the Ind. remains even in indi- 
 rect discourse, because the Opt. would leave it undetermined, whether in direct 
 discourse the Ind. of a principal tense, or the Ind. of an historical tense had 
 been used. X. An. 7. 7, 55. at ffTpaTiarai ^Keyoy, us Uevotpuv oXxotro vphs Sfi/- 
 ^v olicfiiruv Kol & iTteaxeTo oury a-iroXriifiiiifvos (oratio recta: S. oJxeTo vpis 
 2. & hviffx^To hiroXit^o^vos), X. C. 2. 6, 13. iJKovira, iirt UepiKXris iroWiii 
 (inui^s) iirlffTcuTo, As iv^Scov Tp v6\€t iirolei avrijv tpt\e7v aiiTSf (oratio recta; 
 
 11. iirlaraTai, &r . . iiroiei). But subordinate clauses with Srt (quod, quia) fol- 
 low the principal rule (No. 4). X. H. 7. 1, 34. etxe (TlfKoiriSas) \iyeu>, iis Aok«- 
 Satfiiyioi 5ti toOto Tro\efi-fttr€MV mrrois (To7s&r]fiaioL5), Sti ouk i^eh-fttratev 
 u£t' 'AyijtriKiov iXAely ^t' airiy (rhv Pa<ri\ea), oratio recta : A. Sii tovto iwo- 
 \fia\ir(w, iri ovK ii^e\Tiiray. The reason why the Greek avoids the Subj. in 
 indirect discourse after a principal tense, is, that it always uses its Subj. only 
 with reference to the Future [§ 257, 1, (a)]. But the use of the Opt. after a 
 principal tense is inappropriate, because this, as being the Subj. of the histor- 
 ical tenses, always accompanies the historical tenses. There are, however, a 
 few single examples, ia which the Opt. follows a principal tense. But then ■ 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
S6i SYNTAX. ' 1^} 343 
 
 thought is quoted as the sentiment of another, who, at the moment uf quota- 
 tion, is to be represented as one no longer present. Her. 7, 103. 9 pa, fii] fiATifl 
 rci/xiros i \6yes i aft^jiires e?7) (ivkether the statement made was not idle boasting) 
 X.Gy.2.4, n. in ris ^Kuae i\afyflKTg S^is iyit fiovKot/iriy fueyiKipi SH)- 
 fav 7roii)*m (if any one annmmces there, that I intended). C. 1. 2, 34. el fiif 
 *Yiip-{T^V Ttev Myuv Text^w) ^^^ "^ots ip^Sas (Aeyaju^vots flvai vo^i^avres RTrex^cr&ai 
 K6A.ei}eTe), Sri\av in axjKKTtav ei'i) TOi! s/idus \^yav {if you mean that philosophf 
 is not to be used in reasoning right, it is evident that it was your view, that we 
 must abstain from reasoning right). Hence if the Greek, after a principal tense, 
 wishes to represent a statement as the sentiment of another person, it must use 
 iho Ace. with the Inf. instead of Sti will* the Sabj. Thus, e. g. the English 
 phrase, Se says that we are immortal, is not to be expressed in Greek by Kfyei, 
 oTi Ttpt^is dt^avaroi ^fter, or Srt ^, ^« €?/*€!', but by Ae-yei ^)uas k^av^^ 
 rovs ilfaiu — In hypothetical Protases with ei and the Ind., the Ind. remains^ 
 
 Rem. 3. The oblique discourse is sometimes used even in t!w sBbordinate 
 clauses of direct discourse, when the speaker wishes to bring fonvard an ex- 
 pression or thought, not in Ms own person, but as the sentiment of another. Her. 
 7^ 2. ^Taxria^ov (oi iroTSes), 6 /ikv ^Aprafia^Jijnjs, Kanirt 5r/»e<rj8i;T«rrfs t€ efij ttui/^ 
 rhs Tov y^ov, Ktti Stc KQfjLi^6fiLei/a eij] vphs irdi/rwv av^p^eay, rhy •jrpea&vraTaP 
 T^iv cLpx^y ^x^^' Uep^Tts 8«, US 'ArSff^iis re ttbus etiiy /«d Srt Ki/pof et^ i KT^irdfx^ 
 ^vos To'itn JJepoTiffi t}]v i?Lev^piTiy, 
 
 Kem. 4. When the Opt. of oblique discourse is used instead of the Subj. of 
 «5irect discourse, all the corynnctions may be connected with &y. Th. 8, 54. koJ 
 i\l/7jtpiirayT0 ir\€6vayTa T^y Vleioayipay koI ScKa &v5pas fier' avTOV vpilir^eiy, 3ir^ 
 cly avTots SoKoilj &piara e^eiy. X. H. 2. 4, 18. ^ ^djyris va{rftyy€l\ey aiirots, fi^i 
 ^pSrepoy iviTl^etr^at, irpXv Uv Tuy xr^T4p(ay ^ irivoi ris, 7J Tpw^eiTj. 5. 4, 
 47. iK^Keve irpoKaraK-a^^w re ^Kpoy /fol ipvK^TTeiy, eas tty avths lAj^Of. 
 
 5. Very often, however, ia Greek the oblique discourse takes 
 the form of the direct, since even after an historical tense in 
 the principal clause, the predicate of the subordinate clause is 
 expressed by the Ind. of the principal tenses and by the Subj., 
 as in direct discourse. The actions and representations be- 
 longing to the past, are thus transferred to the present time of 
 the speaker, and assume a more direct and definite character 
 than if they were stated in the form of indii-ect discourse 
 327, Rem. 2). 
 
 X. Cy. 2. 2, 1 . &ei pixv edy eirepLeAero 6 Kupos^ ^Trdre a-v^iciiyiHev^ e «■ w s cvX"P*^* 
 rSraroi \iyoi iiiPKii&^irevTttt. Comp. § 327, Bern. 2. H. 2. 3,, 2. tSofe ti? 
 ^ilfia TptAKOvra c\e<r^ai, ot rohs Tarptovs y6fju>vs ^vyy p<L^^ ova' t, ko^ oijs iro- 
 Kit evffov<rt. Her. 1, 1(33. ^k e A€if 6 rrjs eavrov x^PV^ oiKetv, Bkov ^od\oy- 
 rat. Th. 2, 4. oi nAaT«H^ i^ovKeioyr o, etre kblt aKavtrov<rty^ Zslrep 
 4xova-iy^ ^Ti^ewfres ri of/cij^ua, eire ti JcAAa xp^'O'oyrau 1, 107. eSo^e S' 
 ■aitToTs iTKexliaff^ai, 'draj Tp6Trqj Sta-tpt^etrTara S la-Kopei^troyTat^. Her. 1, 29. 
 ipKlouri /j.eyd\oi^i icarelxoyro 'ASnjyatoi, Seko ercn xp^'^^'f ^o' ydfiouri, rohs &t 
 o-(/>( StJAoiy d'TJTaj. X. Cy. 4^ &, 36. Toi»s iinreas iKeKevffe tpvKirTety T<nis ina,- 
 y6yTas, eas &v ris ffiiiiAyrf. H. 2. 1, 25. hvaavSpos ^ riis raxiartis tHiv yeaf 
 iKeKev<rev eV€(r3at rots 'A^TjyalotS' iveid&y Be iK^ttitri, Kari^^i-ras S rt 
 vroiaSaiy-, avewKeiy. On Sri, i>s (that), see § 329, 4 and Rem. 3. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 346.] ELLIPSIS. — bhacuylogy. 663 
 
 Bbm. 5. The Imperfect (seldom the Plupf.) Indicative, rofemng to the his- 
 torical tense of the principal clause, is sometimes used instead of the Pres. 
 (Perf.), in a subordinate clause which is associated with other subordinate 
 clauses in the Opt. X. An. 1 . 2, 2. KSpoi rods (bvyiSas ixiKeme aiiir avT$ arpa- 
 revetr^at, {/Trotrxofi^yos airoTs, el Ka\u5 Karatrpa^eLei', i(p'' tt itTTpareieT o, /i^ 
 jrp6ff^€ineai<raa^aty irple cuirobs Ka/rayJryoi oiteaSe. (Oratio recta : ikv Kevran-pd^at, 
 i<l>^ k (TTpareiofUU, av vp, iraiaofuu, irpiv tv ifias Karayiyai). But the Ind. is also 
 used in the snbordmate clauses of oblique discourse, when the narrator intro- 
 duces his own remarks and explanations into the statement or thought of 
 another, or when the thoughts in the subordinate clause do indeed belong to 
 the statement or idea of another, but are to be exhibited as definite facts or as 
 general truths, or when the thoughts of the other are to be represented, at the 
 same time, as those of the narrator. In oblique discourse, the Ind. and Subj. 
 are often interchanged with the Opt. Then there is a mingling of the direct 
 and indirect discourse in order to foi-m a contrast between the certainty, realiti/, 
 fact, and directness expressed by the two former, and the uncertaini^, possihUii^, 
 mere conception, and indirectness denoted by the latter. X. An. 2. 3, 6. ^^€701' 
 8ti eiie^Ta SoKoiev \4yiui^aiiri\ei^ Ka\ ^JKOiev 7)yett6vas ^x"*""') "' aiiTois, 
 ihv at irirovSal yevavrai^ ii^oviriv, ev^ev efouirt ri itriTij^eia. 3. 5, 13. 
 ^HOioi -^ffav davuii^ovres, 5irot Trork rp4}p avTm ol "EWrjves, Kal H iy v4 
 
 6. The Greek ean also use the Ace. with the Inf. instead of 
 Ihe finite verb, in every kind of subordinElte clauses. 
 
 Her. 6, 117. duSpa oi So/ceW 6T\lTriv ayTt<TT%vat /i^yav, tov (instead of oS) 
 rh yiveiov t))v 4inr£5« Taray (rKid^ity. 6, 84. ZkI/^u (so. <pa(rl) Tois yo/iiSaSi 
 (irel re (r(j>i Aapeiav 4sPa\ety is riiv x^PVi li^ri Tavra lie/wyeyea /uy riacur^ 
 &ai {postqtiam inv€isisset). Th. 4, 98. ofAArivauH t^axray, ei /jw intirKeay Suyr)- 
 &?yoi TJJs ixelvay KparniTai, tout' &j/ ex^iv (SI ampliorem iUaram agri partem in 
 suam potestatem redigere possent se earn retenturos). See Larger Grammar, 
 Part II, § 849. 
 
 Eem. 6. The spirited mode of representation among the Greeks, and the 
 teire to make past events appear as present, often changes the indirect dis- 
 course into direct, or the direct into the indirect. In the first case, there is of- 
 ten an interchange of person, oomp. ^ 329, Rem. 3. X. Cy^l. 4, 28. 4vTav^a 
 5j) rhy KSpov ye\ia:ai re ix Toty ■:rp6aSicv Saxpiiay Kol eliruy abrf i,m6vTa dmfi^ea', 
 Sti iropeWai avToa oKlyoy xp^yov Ss-re dpay <roi ilicma, xtty fioiXn, afrmp- 
 SofiuKTeL On the contrary, An. 7. 1, 39. ihAiiv Se K\eaK5pos • MoAa fiiMs, eipfih 
 Sunrpulipieyos T^Kio ■ \4yeiy yif 'Aya^t^toy, Sti ovk iiriT^eiay etij, k. r. \. 
 
 in. Special PKCtrLiAiiiTrES in the coNSTRCCTroN ot 
 
 WORDS AND SENTEN-CES. 
 
 f346. Ellipsis. Brachylogy {Zeugma). Contraction. 
 Pleonasm. 
 1. Ellipsis is the omission of a sentence or a part of a sen- 
 tence which is logically subordinate, and hence of less impor- 
 tance, but viewed grammatically, must necessarily be supplied 
 in order to express an idea or thought. The idea of the omit- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
j66 syntax. [} 34ft 
 
 ted woid can only be of a very general and inde&iite nature, 
 and is frequently contained in the idea of the quahfying word, 
 as, e. g. 01 SvqTOL (sc. avSpmroi), fj avpiov (sc. ■^/j.epa), or is evident 
 from the context or frequent usage, as e. g. in ets SiSao-KoXou 
 iivai. In like manner, the omitted sentence must express a 
 general idea, and hence one which may be readily supplied, or 
 one which is indicated by the context. The single instances 
 of Ellipsis have been noticed in the course of the Grammar. 
 See Index under EUipsis. 
 
 2. Elhpsis is to be distinguished from brevity of expression 
 or Brachylogy. In Ellipsis, there is an actual omission of an 
 element, grammatically necessary to express an idea or thought; 
 but in Brachylogy, there is not a real, but only apparent omis- 
 sion of such an element, that element being in some way in- 
 volved in the sentence or in a member of it. The simplest 
 instances of brevity of expression have already been presented 
 (i 319, Kem. 1). The following additional instances may here 
 be mentioned : — 
 
 (a) One form of a verb must often be borrowed from another. Th. 2, U. 
 {a^tovat) r^v rmy iriKas [yriv) SpoSy ^ t^v kavrSiv d ftav (sc. S7jovfi4y7iv ), 
 
 (b) In antitheses, one member must often be supplied from the other. Dem. 
 01. 3. 30, 17. inpd^afiev Tip-eis (sc. Irphs ixeivovs) koL 4Ks7vot vphs Tinas elp^tnjv. 
 
 (c) From a negative word, an affirmative one must often be borrowed ; this 
 takes place most frequently, when an antithetic clause is introduced by an ad- 
 versative conjunction. Her. 7, 104. 6 v6iios hvdrfa rairi dei, ovk iS>v tpeiyeu' 
 oiiBev ttXtj^os av^pcCtrwy iK fidxv^ aWii (sc. av^uv) fiivovras 4y rp rd^ei iiriKpa' 
 Teeiv, 9i ctTrrfAAuff^oi. PI. Apol. 36, b. cLfieK-fiff as, Siv ol "jroWoi (sc. iirtfjieKovv- 
 Ttti). So from oiSels the idea of ets or ckoo-tos is to be borrowed, as in the fol- 
 lowing sentenee,from ouS' iTs, the subject of the first clause, eTs or iKoa-Tos is to 
 be borrowed as the subject of the second clause. PI. Symp. 192, e. radra okou 
 eras oSy ttv eXs ^^apyji^el-rif oAA' arexvas oJfoiT' fey hcriKoevat k. t. \, 
 
 (d) From a following verb with a specific meaning, a verb with a general 
 meaning must be borrowed, e. g. noieiy, ipya^tff^ai, ylyveirdai, (hai, avptPaiiietv ; 
 This is the case in the expressions, ri &\Ko ij, — oiiStv SWo Ij — &\\o 
 T I 1j, instead of rl &\Ko ttokT or foriv or the like, t) Urt. Th. 3, 39. t ( tWo 
 •vTot, ^ 4vefio6\€WTay \ 4, 14. oi AaKeiatfiSviot &\Ko ouS^y fj 4k yTJs ^faujud- 
 Xovv. 
 
 (e) When two verbs connected together have a common object, even if they 
 govern diiferent Cases, the Greek usually expresses the o'-j^ot but once, and 
 makes this depend on the nearest verb. Indeed, the ohj'ca of a clause is not 
 nnfrequently transferred and made the subject of thfl ioilowing clause, without 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
J 346.] ELLIPSIS. BRACHYLOGT. ZEUGMA. 567 
 
 its place being supplied by a pronoun. X. 0. 4, 8. roirois ft^v x<t>pay ■rh" 5^- 
 Knv vposTl^Tiiri Kal S^pots Ko<rfif7 (sc. airois). PI. Gorg. 460, c. oii Sei 
 Tois 7roi5oTp/;3ais 4yicii\e7i> ouS' ixpiWety {scavTois) 4k Tavn<j\fui', 
 Kp. 465, a. irpfir^uTeptf veiorepav vivrav Apx^'" fe koJ Kohi^etv (sc. 
 airrois) irposTeTd^ercu. ■ Th. 5, 54. {'Apyuoi) is4pa\ov 4s riiv 'ETrttaupiay 
 Koi itTgovv (sc. ouT^c). This case occurs most frequently where a partici- 
 ple is connected with a, finite verb. Th. 1, 20, ry 'Imrapxv T^vHavadT]' 
 ¥iuKfyi woiiviiv SiaKoffiioSvTi airfKTeiPttv (sc. ouTiii') {while Sipparchus 
 was arranging Hie Panathenaic procession, they hilled him). lb. 144. Toirois 
 i'TroKpiviiifVoi airoirc'/i;(r»/iei/ {sc. airois). But sometimes the Case is 
 made to depend on the more remote finite verb. Th. 2, 65. go-ov xp"'""" 
 wpottrrri {TlepiK\^s) ttjs m\fa>s . ., a(r<f>a\u$ Sieil>i\a^ev oir^i', /col 4y4vtro 
 (sc. miHi) ^t" 4Kelvou fteyiiTTi). X. An. 2. 5, 24. TaCra (Ti(j-(ro(()fp>'7(s) eiVii' eSofe 
 T^ KKeipxV K^l^') A.Eyeii', Kol erirex (sc. i KXcapx"?)- 
 
 3. Aa important figure of Brachylogy is Zeugma, i. e. a con- 
 struction in which a verb, that in sense belongs only to one 
 subject or object, is connected with several subjects or objects. 
 The verb, however, must always be of such a nature as to ex- 
 press an idea which may be taken in a wider or more limited 
 sense. 
 
 11. y, 326. ^X^ ^"'^"'''V f*"""' aepiriiroSes Kol ToixiKa reixe ?iceiTo (to lie, as 
 well as generally to 6c in a p&Kie, to beinstore). Her. 4, 106. ^(rS-jjTB Se ^opi- 
 ouffi Trrj ^KvdiKy ijuoiTji/, y?M<r<rav Sh tSiTiu {they WEAR garments like the Scythi- 
 ans but HATE or SPEAK u language of their own). A compound verb is often 
 used in a pregnant sense, since along with the signification of the compound, 
 the signification of the simple is at the same time to be included. Th. 1, 44. 
 oi'ASrji'aroj inriyvaaav KepKupatois (v/jL/jiaxtav nil iroiiiffairdai {insteaA of fi€- 
 riymtrmi KoJ pfvaaav) CHANGED theik minds and determined not to form an 
 alliance with the Corcyraeans. 
 
 4. Contraction in coordinate clauses has aheady been spoken 
 of (} 319, Kem. 1) ; this is more seldom in subordinate clauses, 
 though frequent with those introduced by osircp, wsircp. 
 
 Eur. Med. 1153. ())iAous vo/iliova' oSsTccp tw ^6(^5 ffeden {sc. vo/i.l(if). H.L. 
 710, d. ircirro ffxeSii' aveipyatrtai rf deip awtp {sc. aTrcpyd(erai) 'dTov Pov 
 \7l^ SiaipepSvTus el irpo{o£ Tiva v6My. So also el or rfirep Tis or &Was tis Of 
 tir«p irow, elwep irore, etc. Her. 9, 27. Vfuf effTi iroWui re Kol e? eX""", (I re'oi- 
 ri Hal iWouri 'EWTivuf. 
 
 5., pleonasm is the use of a word, which, in a grammatical 
 point of view, is superfluous, the idea conveyed by it having 
 been already expressed in what precedes, either by the same 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Ot>8 toYNTAX. [5 347 
 
 or by another word. The desire of perspkaity or emphasis i* 
 commonly the cause of Pleonasm. 
 
 X. Cy. 1. 4, 19. otf %v eir iKeiyovs ^^6?? iXavvayfiev, viroTefiovvraL Tifias ^Kei- 
 vol. 3, 15. ireipdffofiai t^ Trdnirtp aya^uiv iirKitcv Kpariaros &v itrnehs cv^ifia.' 
 X^'tv air ^, 
 
 Remark. Grammatical Pleonasm is to be distinguished from the rk^mxxd, 
 which consists in the use of two or even more words of a similar signification 
 to strengthen an idea or make it more palpable (o) A verb with an abstract 
 substantive, as /xixo" fidxff^ai, irS^fnov iroAe/iu ; — (0) A verb with a partici- 
 ple, as' <t>eiya>i' i<pvye, fltrov \fya)v ; — (7) An adjective with an abstract substan- 
 tive in the instramental Dat, as /ie7eaei i>.fyas, irhit&ei iroWol ; — (S) An adjec- 
 tive or adverb with an adverb (mostly poetic) as olSAfv ailos {wholly atone) ; — 
 (e) Synonymous adverbs, as ei/SiTis -jrapaxpTif^^i Tra^uv a^bis. oei ffvfexws; — (0 
 The part is very often joined with the whole by Kal or ri, for the purpose of 
 making the part prominent, as "ExTopi fixv nal Tpaxri (Horn.) j ZeS (ca! &eoi; 
 'Adnvtuai Kai 'l<piKpdTris ; (ij) For the sake of emphasis, the same thought is 
 often expressed twice, once positively and then negatively, or the reverse, as 
 ■\€|{i) Trphs (ifms Kod ouk kiroKp{n^opiai (Dem.) ; II. o. 416. itrei rot altra filvvy^d vep, 
 oSti iii\a Miv {since your life is short, and not very hmg). See Larger Grammar, 
 Part II. § 858. 
 
 f 347. Contraction and Blending of Sentences. 
 Anacoluthon. 
 
 1. In the contraction of a compound sentence, sometimes 
 the verb wliich is common to the principal and subordinate 
 clauses, is placed in the subordinate clause and made to 
 agree with the subject of that clause ; in this way the two 
 clauses are much more closely united, than in the common 
 mode of contraction (§ 319, Rem. 1). 
 
 X. Cy. 4. 1, 3. ffiwrAs oTSo, ofos ^v ra pkv ykp &XKa (sci!. iirolfi} Sa-anep, oT/uu, 
 
 KoX Tr^,VTes iificis 4n teire. 
 
 2. When a participle stands in a sentence with the finite 
 verb, the parts of the sentence are frequently blended with 
 each other, by making the substantive wliich would be gov- 
 erned by the participle, depend upon the finite verb, as the 
 more important part of the sentence. Comp. Larger Grammar, 
 Tart n. ^ 856, b. p. 609— 611. 
 
 Soph. El. 47. SryeXAf S' SpKO) ■jrposTibils, instead of a77eXA.e voosrAeis Spxov. 
 X. Cy. 1. 6, 33. Swais aiv TOiouTaj iStei iSiurbhres irp(f6Tepci TroXTrai yefour-' 
 to; eAfi is here governed by o-w and connected with -yeVoivTo, instead of bein" 
 in the Dat. depending on ^^KraeWfr, which would have been the natural con- 
 ftruction. X Cy. 7. 1, 40. o5tm Se i-ireiSi) TiwoDovyTo, iciicXtf TrJano^tv voiif 
 Digitized by Microsoft® • 
 
J 347.] CONTRACTION OF SENTENCES. 569 
 
 ri/ievot, Sjtc ipmr^tu tb Sir\a, ivh rius aaTiaiv ixd^riyTO (instead of <iH\ai/ 
 iroiWM"">i iKd^irro). 2. 3, 17. to7s S" Irepois elwev, 8ti /SiiAAEii/ Se^croi livai- 
 povfie vovs Tats fiti\ois, 
 
 3. A very common mode of blending the principal with the 
 subordinate clause, in the manner of attraction, and one which 
 belongs to almost aU kinds of subordinate clauses, consists in 
 transferring the subject of the subordinate into the principal 
 clause, and making it the object of the principal clause. 
 (Comp. nosti MarceUum, quam tardus sit, instead of quam 
 tardus sit Marcellus). 
 
 Her. 3, 68. outos irpuTos iTr6TrTev<re rhv Mdyoy, &s obx etrj i Kipov S/iip- 
 Si! {he first suspected the Magian, that he was not Smerdis the son of Cyrus = sus- 
 pected that the Magian was not, etc.), 80. eifSerc t^v Ka/ifiia-fa Sffpiv, iv' 
 oaae ^ireJ^A&e (see th& insolence of Cambi/ses what a pitch it reached = see what 
 a pitch the insolence, etc.). 6,48. aireireipaTO twv 'EW^yav, i n if yy 
 IX"""- Th. 1, 72. T^v a^erepav ir6Kiv ifioiXavro mmaiyeu/, '6<n] At) Siva- 
 par. X. Cy. 5. 3, 40. oj S,pxovTcs outmv iirtii.e\fl'(rd<t>v, Sttow avaKevaaiUvai 
 Sffi TiifTo. In the same way also, when the subordinate clause forms the ob- 
 ject of a substantive in the principal clause, the subject of the subordinate 
 clause is frequently transferred to the principal clause, and is put in the Gen., 
 as the object of that substantive. Tb. 1, 61. ?t>Ae Se nai toTs 'A^vdois ei^bs 
 71 kyyf\ia t&v irdAewc, Hti h^effTaffi [the report immediately reached ilte 
 Athenians respecting the cities, that tliey had revolted = the report reached the Athe- 
 nians, that the cities had revolted). Sl.afia 8^ Kol rris apxvf av6Sft^iv ^x" 
 T?s T«i' 'Adrivaiar, iy ot(p rpoTrip KoriaTi). So also a substantive on which an 
 Inf. depends is often attracted by the verb or substantive which governs the Inf 
 Th. 3, 6. Tqs ^a\6.(r ffiis eJpyoy ii^ XP^*^^^ '''o^^ l^LTvKTjvaiovs. 5, 25. 
 ivi&vnia TtSy avSpav rSiv Ik r^s vhirov Konlaaa^cu. PI. Crit. 52, b. au5' 
 iiri^vy,ia <rf SA.A.5(S vi\eas, ovS' &Wav vifiuv fKa^ev — eiStvoi. 
 
 4. The principal clause is frequently blended with the sub- 
 ordinate clause, by making the former, as a substantive- 
 clau^se introduced by ore or is, or still more frequently, as a 
 substantive-clause expressed by the Ace. with the Inf., depen- 
 dent on the subordinate clause. 
 
 X. An. 6. 4, 18. tos yiip iyi> ^KOutrJi rivos, 'in KXiavipos iie Bv^unlou ap- 
 lioa-riis (liKKei jjfed' (instead of is iJKOvira, K\. ficWei ifj^eui), for as I heard 
 from some one, that Cleandros is about to come, etc. =^for Cleandros is about to 
 come, as I heard from some one. Her.l, 65, u j S' avrol AaKcSai/jJvtoi \4you(ri 
 {iVHOvpyop iiriT poTveiaavT a iK Kp-fiTTjs ayayeo^at Tavra, 3. 14. is 
 5« Kiyerai for' AlyvrfTluv, SaKpieiy fiev Kpotffov. 4. 5. its Se Sfcvdai 
 Kiytviri, vedirarov aTrdmaty i^vew'^ elyat rh irtpeTepoy. 
 ' Digitized byJJIicrosoft® 
 
t)7U SYNTAX. [i 348 
 
 5. Anacoluthon (from a privative and aKoXou^os, -ov, following) 
 is a figure used to denote a change in the constmction. It 
 iakes place when the construction with which the sentence 
 begins, is not continued through it, but changed into another, 
 which grammatically does not correspond with the former, but 
 logically, i. e. in relation to the signification and meaning, :s 
 like or similar to it. The cause of Anacoluthon may be attrib 
 uted to the vivacity of representation among the Greeks, or to 
 their desire of perspicuity, brevity, strength, or concinnity (pro- 
 priety or keeping) of discourse. There are two kinds of Ana- 
 coluthon: (a) grammatical, (b) rhetorical. There are also in- 
 stances where it evidently originates from carelessness and in- 
 attention. The grammatical Anacoluthon, w^hich is, for the 
 most part, caused by attraction, has been treated in several 
 places in the course of the grammar. Only two instances of 
 the rhetorical Anacoluthon, need now be mentioned : — 
 
 (a) A very natural and frequent instance of Anacoluthon is, where the word 
 <fhich gave rise to the whole thought of the sentence, is placed as the logical 
 subject in the Nom. at the beginning of the sentence, but after the interruption 
 of the sentence by an intermediate clause, is made the grammatical object of 
 the verb of the sentence. X. Hier. 4, 6. Ssirep oi o&XTjral oix> Stok JSio)t£j/ 
 y4ptov7ai KpeirToveSf tovto avToiis euippaiveL, aXA' OTcy ruy avrayuvtffTajf jittovs, 
 TovT* avTobs aifi^ (instead of toutw eiftppaiyoyTat — aviavTai), as the athletes, when 
 they are superior to common men, this does not elate them, hut when they are inferior to 
 their competitors, this gives them pain = as the athletes are not elated when, etc. 
 
 (b) In order to make the contrasted ideas in a sentence prominent or em- 
 phatic, they are often placed in the same form at the beginning of their respec- 
 tive sentences, although the natural construction of each would necessarily be 
 different. PI. Phaedr. 233, b. roiaSha 6 tpoos iviSeiKvurai ' Svstvxovvt as 
 uey, h IJL^ X^nrqv TOis &WoiS Trap4xet, aviap^ iroiet vofii^clit, th.rvxovvrai 5e 
 KoX Tit iiAi fiSotirjs S{ia Trap' ^Keifoiv ivaivov ayayKa^ci Tir)'x«>'f"' (instead of trap 
 evTUXoimuv Se ko! ri /x)) ^8o>^s SJm iTralpov avayiediei rvyxiveiy, or tirvxovvTiis 
 •e Kol Tct fi)} ^5. i\, ^traivuv avayKa^ei), 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 * 348. Position of Words and Sentences. 
 
 1. The intimate relation between the members of a sentence 
 >»nd between one sentence and another, and the connection of 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 348.] POSITION OP WORDS AND SENTENCES. 571 
 
 these SO as to form one thought or idea, are expressed as has 
 been seen, partly by inflection, or by formal words {k 38, 4) 
 which supply the place of inflection, partly by the accent and 
 position of the members of a sentence and of the sentences 
 themselves. As the accent can be made prominent only in 
 living discourse, and commonly agrees wijth the position, only 
 the position needs to be treated. 
 
 Kemakk. The position of particular parts of speech, as the pronouns, 
 prepositions, etc., has already been stated, in the sections where these are 
 treated. See the Index under Position. 
 
 2. There are two kinds of position : the usual or grammati- 
 cal, and the rhetorical or inverted. The first denotes the 
 logical and grammatical relation of the members of a sentence, 
 and of the sentences themselves to each other, and the union 
 of these in expressing a single thought or idea ; the second 
 makes one member of a sentence, which is specially important, 
 more prominent than the other members, by giving to it a posi- 
 tion different from the usual or grammatical order of the words. 
 
 3. The usual or grammatical position of the words in Greek 
 is the following : — 
 
 The subject stands first in the sentence, the predicate last; 
 the copula ti/tt stands after the predicative adjective or sub- 
 stantive-; but the attributive follows its substantive ; the object 
 is placed before the predicate ; the objectives, i. e. the qualify- 
 ing statements or circumstances, are so arranged, that the most 
 important one is placed immediately before the predicate, and 
 the other objectives precede this, following each other in such 
 order as they would naturally be joined to the first objective, 
 the one suggesting itself last to the mind being placed before 
 or.e already existing ; or in other words, the broader limitation 
 usually precedes the narrower, the less necessary, the more 
 
 9ay. IlaTs fiiyas — av)]p aya^Ss — 6 ttois 6 fieya^ — 6 iviip S aya^os — 6 ncus d 
 ToD Kipau — 6 vSKciios i irpis robs Tlipatt!. But the Inf. or the Ace. with the 
 Inf. and the Part, follow the governing word. See the examples under §§ 306, 
 307, 310. Oi "ElOLrives Tobs Tlepffas ivUriffiui. Oi "EKK-itves ly ViapaAHvi touj 
 Uipaai ii/'ucrffftw. Ol"Eh\Tiyes Toiirp Tj} V«'p? ^'' MapaftcSM robs Hspirus iAxriaav. 
 In this way, the adverb of place and time commonly precedes the causal ob- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
572 SYNTAX. [} 348. 
 
 ject (riire or rairp rp ii/iepif Tobs II. Mmiirm), the personal object precedes 
 that denoting a thing, so the Dat. the Ace. (rhu vaiSa tV ypap-l'-aTiKii'' SiSoo-wai 
 
 r^ ToiSl rh gi^hlov Si'Soi^ui), the adverb of time the adverb of place (tot« of 
 
 TowTi) rii riiifpa iv MopoaSi'i Tohs n. IvUriiriw). The adverb of manner, even 
 when another word is the principal objective, usually stands immediately be- 
 fore the predicate, e. g. ol "EAAijyes toiJti) tj ^fiipn iv Mapa&uvt -robs tltpaas 
 
 4. The position of subordinate clauses corresponds with the 
 position of the words (substantive, adjective, adverb) whose 
 place they take in the sentence, i. e. the adjective-clause, for 
 example, occupies the place which the adjective would take ; 
 and so of the others. • 
 
 Pi. Phaed. 50, e. 6 dupup6s, Ssirep eid^cL vvAKoietyf eTirs Trepi^4vetp4 
 X. Cy. 3. 2, 3. & 5e Kvpos, Iv ^ ffvve\4yovT o, i^Oero' ^vel 5e icaAct ^y 
 tA lepii aiiTcp, (rvi'€KA\e<re ro6s Tf Tuv llepauv 7jyefi6yas Kal robs ruy M^Scavt 
 'Eirel Si iiiov ^aav, e\e^€ ToidSe. Yct the substantive-clauses, even when 
 they express the grammatical subject, stand after the governing verb. Ibid. 1 
 i,7.alS'l\eyoy, 8ti ipxroi iroWobs ijSe ■7r\ri<ridirayTas Si^^d'ci 
 oat/, 
 
 5. In the rhetorical or inverted^ position of words, the predi- 
 cate is placed before the subject, the attributive before the sub- 
 stantive to be defined, but the objective, particularly the adverb, 
 is placed after the predicate. 
 
 'A.-fabbs S aviip. 'O 0airi\€bs Kvpos. 'O irphs robs n^pcroj irifAffio*. 
 'E)iax^(ravTO KaKuis. Th. 2, 6i. (pepeiy Te XP^ ''''^ '^^ Stuii6yia ctvayxalus, rii 
 Te airh ray Tro\€ft.io>v aySpeiws, 
 
 6. When the subject is to be specially distinguished, it is 
 placed at the end of the sentence ; and when two words in the 
 same sentence are to be made emphatic by their position, one 
 is placed at the beginning, the other at the end of the sen- 
 tence, e. g. llao-Zv aperav rjyefji.<!)v Icttiv rj cicri^eia. Gener- 
 ally, both the first and the last place in a sentence is considered 
 emphatic, when words stand there, which, according to the 
 usual arrangement, -would have a different position. 
 
 7. Inversion is still more frequent in subordinate clauses 
 than in the case of ihe words whose place they take, perspi- 
 cuity often rendering such an inversion necessary. Substan- 
 
 ' This inverted position is a species of Hyperbaton, a construction by whicft 
 the natural order of words and sentences is inverted. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
1348.] POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES. 573 
 
 tive-clauses with on, us (thai), and fiaal substantive-clauses, 
 are placed before the governing verb, when the ideas they 
 express are to be brought out prominently. 
 
 "Oti fiiyas ix /uKpov S ^iKnriros 7;{!|i)toi, 7rapa\e^i(«ii). — °lm iro^tVTepoi/ JijAaiS^ 
 irSffa 71 Iltpa-air voKnela, /u«pii> ijrdyetfti. The inversion of adjective-clauses 
 {iv etSes ivSpa, oZt6s ianv) has been already treated, § 332, 8. Inversion i.? 
 not u.sed in adverbial clauses of time and condition, since these, according to 
 the common position, usually precede the principal sentence. 
 
 8. When a word in a subordinate clause is to be made more 
 prominent than the others, it is sometimes placed before the 
 connective word (relative, etc.) which introduces the ckuse, 
 e, g. TOiavr' io'Ti kcu, tSXKix, Trepl i/xov a ol ttoXXoi Xeymicnv. 
 
 9. A means of rendering a word specially emphatic by posi- 
 tion, is the separation (Hyperbaton) of two words which would 
 be naturally connected together, as forming one thought, bv 
 introducing one or more less important words between them 
 By this separation, only one of the two words is commonly 
 made emphatic, though often both even, especially when both 
 stand in an emphatic part of the sentence. 
 
 X)em. Phil. 3, 110. TroWiiv, Si &vBp€s 'A^ycuoi, "K&yav yvyvoiiiv<av. X. S. 1, 
 4. o?]uai oSv n- A i* Uv t^v KaTaffKevfiv uot ?M/jiirporepay (jiat^vai (instead of 9roAt> 
 hjiiarpvripav.) This separation (Hyperbaton) very often takes place even in sen- 
 tences as well as in case of words. This consists in placing the principal 
 clause, as the one less important, within the subordinate clause, and thereby, in a 
 logical point of view, making it secondary to the subordinate clause. PI. Prot. 
 331,d. ri^Ap Aei/Kbi/ r^ ^4\avl ifTTiy iirg 7r/}o;£oiKfi (instead of ^ffriy ykp Hnrf 
 tI MuKiv, etc.). X. C. 3. II, 10. <l>t\fiv ye liiiP eS oW in MaTaai^ (instead of 
 eZ oI5* St* tpiXeiv, etc.). Isocr. Paneg. 53. &sts irepl juev t^s ^v To7s"^W7]iri Suva- 
 ffTfias oinc ol^ oirus &y ris tra^^ffTepov €7ri5er|ai Swrj^elt]. Dem. Phil- oZroi fily 
 yhp &'pxopTes ov iro\i/s xp^^os i^ oV . , ^A^ov. 
 
 10. Ideas that are alike or similar, or especially such as are 
 antithetic or opposite, are made emphatic in their position, by 
 being placed near each other. 
 
 Thus ahrhs avtov, etc. e. g. ^ ir6\is avr^i vap' avTTJs SiKT^y A^i/zetcu. 
 X. Hier. 6, 2. ^mijy lity 7i\iKuiTius TjS6fievos riSoiiivots Ifioi. PI. L. 934, d. 
 liotyoyrcu iroWol to Wo is Tp6irovs. Hence, SWoj iWo, alius aliud. 
 &\\os fiAXo&i, alius alibi, & Wo s &Woae, alius alio, S\Aos HWo^ey, 
 alius aliunde, &Wos &Wy, alius olid (sc. vid), etc., of which the English 
 makes two sentences, the one did this, the other that, etc, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
APPENDIX A 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 } 349. Rhythm, Metre, Arsis and Thesis. 
 
 1. Rhythm (pv^/ios) is the harmony produced by the alternation of 
 long and short syllables, accompanied by the recurrence of an emphasis 
 at intervals ; when the emphasis occurs at fixed interrals, the rhythm be- 
 comes meter, each one of the intervals forming a metre or measure. 
 
 _2. The emphasis with which particular parts of a verse are pro- 
 nounced, is called the Arsis, and the corresponding weaker tone with 
 which the other parts are pronounced, the Thesis. The former implies 
 an elevation of the voice with an accompanying stress (§ 29. 1.), the latter, 
 a depression of the voice. The terms Arsis and Thesis are also trans- 
 ferred to the particular syllable or syllables on which they rest, and 
 hence the syllable on which the emphasis falls is called the Arsis. The 
 Arsis is often called the metrical ictus, or merely the ictus. 
 
 3. The Arsis is naturally on the long syllable of a foot ; consequently 
 in the spondee ( — ) and the tribrach ("""), the place of the Arsis can 
 be determined only by the kind of verse in which they are found. In 
 every verse, the original foot determines the place of the Arsis in all the 
 other feet which are substituted for it Hence, as the second syllable of 
 an iambus is long, and as the Arsis naturally falls on the long syllable, 
 the spondee in iambic verse would have the Arsis on the second syllable, 
 thus - -' ; so also in anapaestic vei-se. But as the first syllable of the 
 foot is long in the trochee and dactyl, the spondee in trochaic and dac- 
 tylic verse takes the Arsis on the first syllable, thus -'- . Again, as a 
 short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, and as in a long 
 syllable the emphasis or ictus necessarily falls on the first of the two 
 anits composing this long, it is evident that, in iambic verse, the tribrach 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 35((.J 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 575 
 
 would take the Arsis on the second syUable, thus "y-; and in trochaic 
 verse on the first. So where the dactyl takes the place of the spondee 
 with the Arsis on the last syUable, the arsis «?f the dactyl is on the first 
 
 short, thus ; but where the anapaest stands for the spondee (-'-), its 
 
 Arsis is on the first short, thu? "" -. 
 
 § 350. Metrical Feet. 
 
 I. The portions into which every verse is divided, are caUed feet. 
 
 The feet are composed of a certain member of syllables, either all 
 long, all short, or long and short together. 
 
 A short syllable is assumed as the unit in measuring time, every short 
 syllable being one mora or time, and every long one two morae. 
 
 The feet used in poetry may be divided, according to the number of 
 syllables, into four of two syllables, eight of three, and sixteen of four 
 syllables. 
 
 The dissyllabic feet are four : 
 
 ' " Pyrrhieh l (rvirov) 
 
 - Spondee (tujttco) 
 
 - -Iamb (ru^uiy): 
 
 - " Trochee (TUTire) 
 
 ' DekivaIion OF NAMES OP FEET. — Pttrrhich. This was so called from 
 the celebrated war-dance (irv^/Sfx^), in which it was used, as being rapid and 
 energetic. — Iamb. Froni i'^tt^, to abuse; because Arcbilochus the inventor 
 used it in violent invectives. — Trochee. From Tp4x<', to run ; because of its 
 running, saltatory style. — Tribrach. Tph 0paxis, because consisting of three 
 sjiort syllables. — Sjvndee. So called, because it was used iv reus airovSvus, iu 
 sacred rites, from its slow, solemn sound. — Dactyl. 'Airk toB toKrijuj^f ; because 
 it is, like the finger, comppsed of one long joint and two short ones. — 4w- 
 jmest. From hvairiua, to strike back ; because the Ictus was contrary to that of 
 the Dactylf — Amphibrach. 'Afupl Ppaxis; because the short syllables are on 
 each side of the long one, (i,n^i) — Cretic. Because much used by the Cretans. 
 — Bacchl^ls. Used in the Dithyrambic Games in honor of Bacchus. — Antibac- 
 chlus. The converse (avrl) of the former. — Procehusmatic. From KiKevafm, the 
 boatswain's call or command ; because rapidly uttered, — r Paeons. Because 
 used in the Paeonic Hymns. — Choriamb. Trochee or Choree + Iamb. — An- 
 itipaatus. 'Ayrttriria, to draw to the opposite side ; because, beirfg converse of 
 the former, it appears to draw the Trochee to the other side of the Iamb. — 
 loniciis a majore, lonicus a minore. Feet much in use with the lonians ; a jnajare, 
 when beginning with the long syllables ; a minore, when beginning with the 
 short ones. — Epitrite. Most probably from iirl and rpTros ; because, in addition 
 do {iirl) the 3d syllable, it has a short one over. ^- The ZJiunnft is an Iambic 
 (jvEygy, admitting the Spondee in the first place. — The Ditrochee is a Trochaic 
 gy^ygy'^ admitting the Spondee in the second place. 
 
 25 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
676 vERSincATioN. f* 35l». 
 
 The trisyllabic are eight : 
 
 >••'•' Tribrach (emrov) 
 
 Molossus (rvTmo/jLai) 
 
 ■' — Anapaest (Tcru^riis) 
 
 — " ^ Dactyl (jmrreri) 
 
 — - Amphibrach (ervrrov) 
 -"— Cretic (tvjttoijloj.) 
 
 « Bacchius (nnr^<o) 
 
 Falimbacchius (rmTrfrt) 
 
 The teJwsyllabic are sixteen : 
 
 >' " - "Proeeleusmatic (ctvjtct-o' 
 Dispondee (Ttx^^a'^njv) 
 
 — — >- — Diiamb (i-nnrroiiLypf) 
 
 — " — - Ditrochee ^TUTrreroxrav) 
 " — " Antispast (,iTvc(>Srjrov) 
 — "- - — Choriamb (rmrTO/JLevov) 
 
 — ~ — lonicus a minori (f.TfTVfi.ft.iiv) 
 
 — " "lonicus a majori (rvij/aiiJxSa) 
 
 — - >- " first Paeon (TinrTO/u:€vos) 
 
 — —•' •^ second Paeon (crvTrTere) 
 
 — - - - third Paeon (eTervi/'o) 
 
 — " - — fourth Paeon (ctvtto/x.iji') 
 first Epitrite (^irvij/dfrSrjv) 
 
 — - — second Epitrite (5 nnrowai) 
 
 — - — third Epitrite (Tu<^5-^o-o/j.ai) 
 " fourth Epitrite (Tv<j>S€Liij(j-av) 
 
 2. Simple metres are formed by the repetition of simple feet; com* 
 pound, by combining the simple feet with each other. 
 
 Simple feet consist of but one Arsis, and one Thesis, e. g. •'", •"' ", 
 
 *""'", -",-'■', etc. 
 
 Compound feet consist of two Arses and Theses, of which one Arsis 
 and Thesis, taken together, is considered as a single Arsis or Thesis, e. g. 
 
 ' ^ / \ f \ f y / ^ 
 
 Of the simple feet, only those which have a long syllable in the Arsis 
 and a short one in the Thesis, give natural variety, e. g. -", —-•',- —^ 
 -"-. Hence the trochee and dactyl, the iamb and anapaest, are consid- 
 ered as the fundamental feet of all rhvthm. The other feet may be 
 
 Digitized by Microsdfm •' 
 
i 351.] 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 577 
 
 combined with these by reaolving a long into two short syllables, or by 
 contracting two short into one long syllable. 
 
 4. lamhk, Trochaic, and Anapaestic verses are not measured by single 
 feet, but by dipodies, or pairs of feet, two feet being necessary to make 
 an independent metre or dipody. Hence, four iambs make an Iambic 
 dimeter, and six an Iambic trimeter. Dactylic verse, on the contrary, 
 !s measured by the single feet ; six dactyls, therefore, form an hexameter, 
 and five a pentameter. 
 
 } 351. Caesura. 
 
 Caesura (a cutting) is the separation, by the ending of a word, of syl- 
 lables metrically connected, — or the cutting of a metre bv the ending 
 of a word, before the metre is completed. 
 
 Beuabe 1. The design of the Caesura is to give variety and harmony to 
 the verse ; for if each metre or foot terminated with the end of a word, there 
 would be only a constantly recurring monotony. But the Caesura, by pre- 
 venting a nnijorm coincidence between the ending of the metre or foot, and the 
 ending of a word, promotes the variety, beauty, and harmony of the verse. It 
 is not inconsistent, however, with the rhythm of the verse that the ending of 
 the foot and the word should sometimes coincide ; this coincidence is called 
 metrical Diaeresis. The principal Diaereses are after the first, second, third, 
 and fourth foot. 
 
 ijar^tov'' I avrhp 6 | roiaiv o^eiKtro \ yStrrtfioy | ^^p. 
 
 There are three kinds of Caesura ; 
 
 1. Caesura of the foot. 
 
 2. Caesura of the rhythm. 
 
 3. Caesura of the verse. 
 
 (1) Caesura of the foot is where the word ends before a ifaot is com- 
 pleted. 
 
 NiKi} I o-as £^£ I Xil (TTvye I p^i' £/i€ I oiKttS' I aycrr-'^.-« 
 In this line there is a Caesura of the foot after each of the syllables o-a?, 
 \et, prjv, and koB'. Only two cases of this Caesura can occur in a dac- 
 t)l ; for the word either ends after the Arsis, - 1 " -, and forms the mas- 
 ixline Caesura, or in the Thesis, — " | ", and forms the feminine or trochaic 
 Caesura. Thus the Caesuras after era's, A.et and p-qv are masculine, that 
 after oiKaS* is feminine or trochaic. 
 
 (2) The Caesura of the rhythm is where the Arsis falls on the last 
 syllable of a word, and thus separates the Arsis from the Thesis. In the 
 line above quoted, the Caesura of the rhythm occurs after the syllables 
 <ras, XiL and prjv, the Arsis falling on each of these and being separa 
 
 * Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
578 VEnsiFicATioN. [i 352 
 
 from the following Thesis by the Caesura. This Caesura can take plac« 
 only in such feet as have the Arsis on the first syllable. 
 
 (3) The Caesura of the verse is a pause introduced to render the re- 
 citation more easy. This is also called the CaeswaJ, pause, and divides 
 the verse into two parts. 
 
 In several kinds of verse this Caesura has a fixed place ; this is the 
 case in the Trochaic, lambk, and Anapaestic tetrameter, which ha^e their 
 natural Caesura at the end of the fourth foot. See under these verses 
 below. Other kinds of verse may have more than one Caesura, the 
 place of which is not fixed. In Hexameter verse, however, the Caesura 
 of the verse more usually occurs after the Arsis of the third foot. Thus, 
 
 KiAXaj/ T€ ^aSirjv, 1 1 TiviSoio re I^i aviixcreK, 
 or in the Thesis of the third foot, thus, 
 
 Kot t6t€ Srj Sdp(rrjo-f, || koX rjvSa /xairts a/j.vijum'. 
 
 Eem. 2. The three kinds of Caesura often occur together ; for example, 
 after the syllable riir of faAeij;', thei'e is the Caesura of the foot, of the rhythm, 
 and of the verse. 
 
 { 352. Different kinds of Verse, 
 
 1. A verse is often named from its predominant foot. Thus Dactylic 
 verse is so called, because the dactyl is the predominant foot, and Iambic 
 verse, because the iamb is the predominant foot ; so Trochaic, Anapaestic, 
 etc. Verses are also named from their inventors, as the Sapphic, from 
 Sappho, Alcaic, from Alcaeus, etc. ; likewise from the kind of composi- 
 tion in which they are used, as the Heroic, used in describing the 
 achievements of heroes, also from the number of measures, as monometer, 
 dimeter, trimeter, hexameter, etc. 
 
 2. A verse is called acatalectic, when it has its full number of feet or 
 syllables, as trimeter iambics, - — ^ — [-—"-l- — -—. A verse is called 
 catalectic, when one or' two syllables are wanting to complete the verse, 
 as the trimeter, - — -_|-->-_|- — -. In dactyUc verse, if the last foot 
 wants one syllable, the verses are called catalectic on two syllables, e. g. 
 
 — ->• — ' , if two syllables are wanting, catalectic on one syllable, e. g. 
 
 ""-. Verses in which the lastdipody (a pair of feet) wants an 
 
 entire foot, are called brachycatalectic, e. g. - — "-I" — — I"--. Verses 
 which have one or two syllables more than enough, are called hypercata- 
 lectic, e. g. — - — I- — - — |- — - — -. 
 
 Kemaek. When the regular rhythm ot a verse is preceded by an uneiB 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
'' ^^"^ 355.] VERSIFICATION. 579 
 
 pUatie Introductory syllabic, such syllable is eafled an Anacrusis, an vpward or 
 back beat; when there are two such syllables, forming an introductory foot. 
 they are called a Baie. The anacrusis and base belong to lyiie rerse. 
 
 § 353. View of the different hinds of Verse. 
 
 The most usual kinds of verse are those -which consist of the repeti- 
 tion of the same foot Of these the most frequent are the Dactylic, Iam- 
 bic, Trochaic, and Anapaestic. 
 
 k 354. Dactylic Verse. 
 
 The fundamental foot in tliis verse is the dactyl, the place of which 
 may be supplied by a spondee. 
 
 § 355. Hexameter. 
 
 The Hexameter was employed by the Greeks at an early period, and 
 is the metre of Epic or Heroic and Pastoral poetry. 
 
 The Hejameter consists of six feet ; the fundamental foot is the dac- 
 tyl, the verse being formed by five repetitions of the dactyl with a dis- 
 syllabic catalectus. The sixth foot is usually called a spondee ; but when 
 the last syllable is short, it may be considered a irechee. 
 
 In each of the first four feet, a spondee may take the place of the dac- 
 tyl. The fifth foot is regularly a dactyl ; but sometimes it is a spondee, 
 and the line is then called a spondaic line, as 
 
 Ou yap eyo) Tpwui' iviK ^Xv^ov ai^iyroMV. 
 
 The principal Caesura in Hexameter verse occurs after the Arsis or in 
 the Thesis of the third foot, and is called the Penthemim ; sometimes also a 
 Caesura occurs after the Arsis of the fourth part, which is called the 
 Hephthemim. This Caesura in the fourth foot is commonly preceded by- 
 one in the second foot, which is called the Triemim. The Caesura oc- 
 curring at the end of the fourth foot is called the Bucolic Caesura, from 
 its use in pastoral poetry 
 
 'AA.A.' o fihi Al&LOira'; \ \ ji^TeKia^f. Ty]\63r^ eovras 
 "AvSpa jttoi ivve-n-e, MoBcra, 1 1 woXiJrpoTrov os ftaXa voWa 
 ■ *H Aias 1 1 ^ 'iSo/Aevcus 1 1 ^ Stos 'OSutro-evs 
 'H-ye/toi/uv, 1 1 ooris ol aprpr 1 1 Irdpounv ap.wai 
 Mt/*i"ifeiv Trapa V7]val Kopuyvwnv, \\ ov oi eiretra. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
580 VERSIFICATION. [H 366, 357 
 
 The beauty of Hexameter verse is promoted by varying the feet by 
 an interchange of dactyls and spondees, and by introducing these in dif- 
 ferent places in different verses. For the same reason it is desirable that 
 the Caesuras should occur in different places in different lines. 
 
 §356. Pentameter. 
 
 This verse is divided into two parts, each of which consists of two 
 dactyls and a catalectic syllable, thus, 
 
 MijSe Svpa^e KiXev \\ ovk e^cXovr Uvai. 
 Spondees may take the place of the dactyls in the first half, but not in 
 the second, because the numbers at their conclusion should run more 
 freely, instead of being retarded by the slow movement of the spondees. 
 The long syllable at the end of the second half can be short. The 
 Caesura is here the same as in the Hexameter, except that there must be 
 a division, by the ending of the word, in the middle of the verse. When 
 the word, however, has more than two syllables. Elision may take place. 
 
 This kind of verse is commonly found only in connection with Hex- 
 ameter, a Hexameter and Pentameter following each other alternately. 
 A poem composed of these two measures is called Elegiac, being at first 
 devoted to pljuntive melodies. 
 
 ApTL /ie ■yevoju.evov Z[a)as Ppi<j>o's ^/Mracc Aaijuwv Hexam. 
 
 Ovk oTS" tlr dya^Hv \ \ airios, etre KaKtov, Pentam. 
 
 'ATrXiJpcuT 'Atoa, ti /*« v^iov ^pjracras a^fyvta ; Hexam. 
 
 Ti oTTEuSeis ; ov (Toi 1 1 iravres o^ct\o/Ae5a ; Pentam. 
 
 § 357. Dactylic Tetrameter. 
 
 The dactylic tetrameter catelectic on one syllable consists of three feet 
 and a syllable. 
 
 HoXXa jSpoTuiv 8ia/x£i|3ouEi'a. 
 - -\--\--\'. 
 The dactylic tetrameter catalectic on two syllables conasts of three feet 
 and two syllables, which may form a spondee or trochee. 
 d>(Xtvou€VOV KaKOV ot*<a8* ayccr^at. 
 
 -'- "I- "I --I - - 
 The dactylic tetrameter acatalectic consists of four feet ; instead of a 
 dactyl, in the last a cretic is admissible. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
♦ 358 361.] VEBSipicATioN. 581 
 
 Yttv dSufas d8ai;s, wrve 8' aXyiw. 
 
 .-'Vl -'-l^-'-l- --. 
 
 Munr, aye KoXXtoTra Svyarep Aios. 
 
 § 358. Dactylic Trimeter. 
 
 The dactylic trimeter cataiectio on one syllable consists of two feet 
 and a syllable. 
 
 Ev^ev defojtici'oi'. 
 
 The dactylic trimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of two feet 
 and two syllables, which may form either a spondee or trochee. 
 EupE'i Kv/juiTa irovTU), 
 
 ? 359. Dactylic Dimeter. 
 
 The daiiylic dimeter catalectic on two syllables consists of a dactyl 
 and a spondee or trochee. 
 
 ^dxT/juiTa (7Tpcyu&Zv 
 TotcrS" o/jtocjitovov. 
 
 The dactylic acatalectic dimeter consists of two dactyls, and usually 
 stands ia oonneclion with tetrameters. 
 
 06s VTTO T€l)^€Cn. 
 
 §360. Trochaic, Iambic and Anapaestic Verse. 
 
 It has been already observed (§ 350, 4.) that Trochaic, Iambic, and 
 Anapaestic verse is measured by dipodies, i. e. by pairs of feet Henco 
 verses of two feet, are called monometer, of four, dimeter, of six, trime- 
 ter, of eight, tetrameter. The Latins named these according to the 
 aumber of feet, and not by dipodies. Thus a verse of four feet wai 
 called qualemitis, of six, senarius, of eight, octonarius. 
 
 i 361. Trochaic Verse. 
 
 The Trochee is the predominant foot in this verse. The last syllable 
 of each dipody may be doubtful ; hence the last foot of each dipody may 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
582 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 [H 352, S63 
 
 be a spondee. Therefore, a epondee is admissible in every even place 
 (2, 4, 6, 8). The Arsis or long syllable oif every foot can be resdv.ed 
 into two short ones, and hence, a tribrach can stand in every place ; a 
 dactyl and anapaest can stand in the even places, instead of the spondee. 
 A dactyl is not admitted, however, except in a proper name, and then 
 may stand in all the places but the fourth and seventh. 
 
 A trdchaic tetrameter acatalectic -vrould then present the following 
 scheme : 
 
 t r r I ' t r r 
 
 , t r / 
 
 It til I 
 
 III I 
 
 Bemabk. Trochaic verse has a rapid saltatory metre, and is used especially 
 in the choral parts of Comic Poetry, when the Poet wishes to infuse more than 
 ordinary wit and spirit into the colloquy, to arrest the spectator's attention and 
 vary the grave monotony of the Iambic' 
 
 { 362. Trochaic Manometer . 
 
 The trochaic manometer acatalectic consists of two feet. It is genei« 
 ■lly found in systems of trochEtic trimeters. 
 SivSapt^etVj 
 
 § 363. "trochaic Dimeter. 
 
 The trochaic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet 
 feoXviSos T€ yas li/oiKoi. 
 
 The trochaic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable 
 It is usually found among acatalectic dimeters. 
 
 Kot 'S^Kv^^ oiJuXo<i, 'o* yas (acatalectic). 
 E<T)(aTov TOTTov afifftl Mai- (catalectic). 
 Srriv tvovo-i Xi/xvav. 
 
 ' See Manual of Greek Prosody, by L. P. Mercier. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 364, 365.:] 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 683 
 
 } 364. Trochaic Tetrameter Cata2ectic. 
 The trochaic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a syllable 
 (two dimeters, the second catalectic). Its Caesura is at the end of the 
 second dipo4y, and is often omitted by comedians, but rarely ever by 
 tragedians. 
 
 T^8« was Ittov, Stiuice 1 1 koX tov 3.vSpa irvv^dvao 
 'At Ttves rripovftev xl/juiq |;| i^v yap g tis IfoSos. 
 
 Eemahk. The Trochaic tdtraraeter acatalectic, "srhich consists of two tro- 
 chaic dimeters acatalectic, and the trochaic pentameter, which consists of nine 
 feet and a syllable, are very 'rarely used by the 'Greek poets. 
 Elf Tij h/ipar tinuxhaeus i) lAvtSSi^ois '&4S\ois, 
 Sic fteiji yip rot tpvrevdeh S\fit>s '&v^p>im}itTi Trapnoirdrepos, 
 
 § 365. Iambic Verse., 
 
 The fundamental foot in ibis verse is the iamb. Instead of the first 
 iamb, every dlpo^ may have a spondee. Hence a spondee is admis- 
 sible in the odd places (1, '3, 5, 7). 
 
 Again, as the long syllable of every iamb may be resolved into two 
 short sylla"bles, a tribrach may stand in eveiy place, except the last ; and 
 as the last syllable is common, a pyrphic is admissible. In the odd places 
 a daoiyl or anapaest may standinstead of a spondee. 
 
 Hence the iambic trimeter or senarius, would present the following 
 scheme : 
 
 f r f 
 
 It t t I 
 
 t I 
 
 ( ' f 
 
 Ebmaek 1. The dactyl, however, is most frequent in the first "place ; it occurs 
 in the third place 'only when the first syllable of the foot is followed by the 
 peniAemtmeroi Caesura, or when theVford is a monosyllable. The dactyl oc- 
 curs iu the fifth place only in Comedy, whereit is admitted in all the uneven 
 places. 
 
 Eem. 2. The anapaest iB admitted only In the first foot, except in Comedy 
 and in proper names ; iu these cases it is admissible in all the feet except the 
 last. The anapaest in the firstfoot must he included in One word, except in 
 case of the articleor preposition and its Case. The anapaest in proper name* 
 must not be divided between two words. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
584 vEKSiFicATioN. [§} 366 — 363 
 
 Kem. 3. The Iambic is the opposite of the Trochaic, being a steady, grave, 
 but easy metre, and was applied to the stage as best adapted to the language 
 of ordinary life.' 
 
 §366. Iambic Manometer. 
 
 Iambic monometer consists of two feet. Ita use is very rare, and it 
 occurs mostly in systems of dimeters, 
 
 Kat Toii KoXoLs 
 
 § 367. Iambic Dimeter. 
 
 Iambic dimeter acataleetic consists of four feet. 
 "OSev SoiwKTi TOis e/Aois 
 
 'I'M '1 ' 
 
 Iambic dimeter catalectic consists of three feet and a syllable. 
 ®eA.o) Xiyeiv 'ArpetSas, 
 XaipotTc Xoiirov vijuv 
 
 I ' ! 1 
 
 ' '1 '1 
 
 This verse is commonly found in systems of acataleetic din-otcrs. 
 
 } 368. Iambic Trimeter Acataleetic, commonly called 
 Senarius. 
 
 This is the most noted of the Iambic verses. It consists of six feet 
 O TiKva, ^aS/iov Tov TroXot vea rpotfiT], 
 'iKTrjpioi'S KXdSouTiv efeoTcp.juci'ot; 
 "AW&iv anoveiv, avros tuS" l\rjXvSa 
 
 The tragedians admit a dax;tyl only in the first and third foot ; they ad- 
 mit an anapaest chiefly in the first foot, but in proper names, in any foot 
 except the last 
 
 Mev^Xus 'EXo^i' 8e KXurat/Av^crrpas Xei^os, 
 IXora/Moi/ re irrfyal, irovTiW re (cu/taToiv 
 OvK apiS/j^v oXXojs aXX, xfirepTaTovi 9pvySiv 
 
 ' See Mercier. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
H 369, 370.1 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 585 
 
 The most frequent Caesura here is in the third foot (Penthemim). 
 This Caesura, howeyer, is often neglected, others being used, or some- 
 times, none. 
 
 'E)(Sp(i>v oScopa II SSpa kovk ov^o'ifia. 
 The Caesura is often found in the middle of the fourth foot (Hepthe- 
 mim). 
 
 Ettci iTarr)p oItos <t6% | | ov Sprjvti's det. 
 The Caesura at the end of the third foot is less frequent. 
 
 §369. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. 
 
 The iambic tetrameter is very much used by the comedians. It con- 
 asts of seven feet and a syllable. The Caesura is usually at the end of 
 the fourth foot, but is sometimes omitted. The scheme is nearly the 
 same as the trimeter iambic. The anapaest occurs in the seventh foot 
 only in case of a proper name. 
 
 II I I I I I 
 
 III 
 
 III 
 
 II I I f f * 
 
 Ov dyntri vpnvat rows veous 1 1 do-Kcti' • cyu) 81 dnuc, 
 
 --' h- ll--h-ll--l;-'lh-h- 
 
 The iambic tetrameter acatalectic is but little used by the Greek poets. 
 
 § 370. Anapaestic Verse. 
 
 1. The anapaest is the predominant foot in this verse. But by uniting 
 the two short syllables in one long, the spondee may be substituted for 
 the anapaest. Again, the second long syllable of the spondee may be 
 resolved into two short syllables, and hence a dactyl take the place of a 
 spondee. 
 
 2. In Anapaestie verse the most, usual system is the dimeter, consist- 
 ing of a greater or less number of perfect dipodies, followed by a 
 pjur of dipodies, the second of which is catalectic. This catalectic dime- 
 ter, conasdng of three feet and a syllable, is called paroemiac (wopot- 
 fiCai) from its use in proverbs. The anapaestic verse is, therefore, al- 
 ways terminated by a catalectic dipody, and also by a long syllable ; i. e, 
 if the final syllable is not long by itself, it is made long by its position 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
586 
 
 VEKSIFICATION. 
 
 [^ 371— SV3 
 
 ■with respecit to the next line, the scanning being contiatfous, and an an 
 apaestic series being constructed as if there were but One verse. The 
 following is the scheme for aa anapaestic tetrameter catalectic. 
 
 ' ' ^J WW WW wlww 
 
 ' ' ' ' 'I ' I . ' 
 
 / / / / /I 
 
 Kemakk. An anapaest does not follow a dactyl in the same dipodj ; gen- 
 erally a dactyl does not follow an anapaest or spondee in the same dipody. 
 The third foot of the paroemiac is usually an anapaest ; but a spondee is some- 
 times found. The dactyl does not occur in the sixth and seventh feet. The 
 Anapaestic metre was the fayorite one for martial music. 
 
 §371. Anapaestic Monometer Acaialectic. 
 
 The anapaestic monometer acatalectic consists of two feet. 
 &vyd.Trjp, <us )(p7^, 
 
 §372. Anapaestic Dimeter Acaialectic. 
 
 The anapaestic dimeter acatalectic consists of four feet. The legiti< 
 mate Caesura occurs after the second Ar»s, at the end of the second foot. 
 But the Caesura is often found after the short syllable which follows the 
 Arsis. 
 
 ATToXets /i , aTToXeis. | [ ov Karafyv^tK 
 Uporript] ju.avca. 1 1 Tts 6 mjS^o'a?, 
 IlTepvywv ipeT/J-otcnv 1 1 fpt<r(ToiJi.€vij. 
 
 ' « W _' WW ' 
 
 / / / / 
 
 ' WW ' ww' WW-' 
 
 §373. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic. 
 
 The anapaestic dimeter catalectic (^paroemiac) consists of three feei 
 acd a syHaMe, and has no Caesura, thfe Caesnra not being used in the 
 paivemaic. 
 
 EtXtTO )^<opas l<j)op€vav 
 
 Ala TOV (70V irptOKTOV 6(j>Xrj<T€l- 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
i 374.] 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 597 
 
 §374. Anapaestic Tetrameter Catalectic. 
 The anapaestic tetrameter catalectic consists of seven feet and a sylla- 
 ble, "being formed by adding the anapaestic dimeter catalectic (paroemiac) 
 to the anapaestic dimeter acatalectic. This verse is also called Aris- 
 tophanic, from its use by Aristophanes, though not invented by him. 
 The spondaic paroemiac, which sometimes occurs in the regular system, 
 is not admissible in the tetrameter. 
 
 The Caesura is at the end of the fourth foot, sometimes, though rarely, 
 after the short syllable immediately following. There is generally also 
 an incisure at the end of the second foot. 
 
 QpocjOEi. Tts aet tZv opviBwf 1 1 ixavrevofi-ei/a irepi toC ttXov \ 
 115s S i^Uiav Swcrotio- avrois. || ovcrOv iraph. touri &eoicnv; 
 TSiv apyypiwv • oJtoi yhp urauri. || Acyoucrt Se rot raSe irarres. 
 
 '' ' / f r 
 
 t I t f , , t 
 
 Anapaestic tetrameter acatedectic does not seem to have been used i>y 
 the Greek poets. 
 
 APPENDIX B. 
 
 ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 1. For the convenience of those who may wish to read sdtne of the 
 earlier editions of the Greek writers, the following table, contaiiung old 
 forms of some of the letters, and also abbreviations of certain words 
 or parts of words, is subjoined. 
 
 2. No. I. contains certain single letters or elements, which are of con- 
 stant occurrence in the compound characters, and are found nowhere else. 
 No. n. contains chai-acters, the elements of which ■would not at once be 
 obvious, and fi>r this reason alone they are not placed alphalbetically in 
 columins HI — VI. Indeed, -the characters in Nos. I. and IL might all 
 have been arranged alphabetically in columns HI — ^VL The characters 
 in coluilins IE — ^VI. are arranged alphabetically ; the initial letter of 
 these dhKracters, by the aid of those in No. L, will be readily known.* 
 
 ' See Kobinsou's Buttmann, p. 466. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
688 
 
 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 a 
 
 r 
 7 
 
 I 
 
 c 
 
 I. 
 
 e X 
 II. 
 
 V 
 
 
 sy 
 
 3 ^' ^ <{ <f 5 Zk, cff ^ 
 
 ~ ov yap yap et ei eA tfv ov rm 
 
 III. 
 
 2^5i ad-i 
 
 <^ aX 
 ^ aU 
 ^ av. 
 
 cm/6 avxo 
 
 ?^' yiverai 
 
 5^!^ (Tew 
 <5it f^ttt 
 
 V. 
 fjul^ [Kav 
 
 c&ve ovTog 
 'B^^napa 
 tt^ Tiep 
 TT nepl 
 f^ no 
 
 o5C a&ai 
 
 G ""» 
 
 cur an 
 
 OS oa 
 
 (p am 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 IV. 
 
 e u tivai 
 c/> av 
 Qwi ineidrj 
 'nvj insv 
 oyn tni 
 
 iu9i' inl 
 (fp ep 
 4j ev 
 
 ^ 
 
 xara 
 
 
 fj^ /laTcav 
 
 ju. fiev 
 
 i\ , 
 
 f^ (lev 
 
 p^ fiev 
 
 jjSm [lev 
 
 /y fievog 
 
 e 2t 
 
 d^ xal H 
 
 VI. 
 
 ^^ ravd-a 
 
 TTfV 
 TJJS 
 
 TO 
 
 Toy 
 
 TOW 
 
 r 
 
 ^ TOW 
 
 rev ™i'S' 
 ? ^P 
 
 ^" -^^ 
 7^ Tffly 
 
 T TMI' 
 
 uy w 
 '\xrv7i 
 
 c5 «r 
 
I. INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 N. B. The figures refer to sections. R. is used for remark. 
 
 Abbreviations, Appendix B. p. 588. 
 
 Ablative expressed by Dat. 285, 1. 
 
 Absolute, Case Absolute, see Cases. 
 
 Airog(Uion of clauses by akla 322, 6. 
 
 Abstracts 39, in PI. 243, 8, (3). 
 
 Absorption of Diphth. in Crasis, 10, 
 4,5. 
 
 Acatalectie verse 352, 2. 
 
 Accentuation 29 ; change and re- 
 moval of the accent by Inflec, 
 Compos, and Contract. 30 ; in 
 connected discourse (Grave in- 
 stead of the Acute), in Crasis, 
 Elision, Anastrophe 31. Accent, 
 of first Dec. 45 ; second Dec. 49 ; 
 third Dec. 65 ; adjectives and 
 participles 75 ; words ending in 
 vs, sta, V 76, il; mj, mv 78. K. 
 7, and 29, K. 5 ; wv, ov 78, K. 9, 
 and 65, 5 ; »j?, tg 78, R. 11 ; verb 
 118. 
 
 Accusative 276 sq. ; local relation, 
 limit, aim 277 ; of the object pro- 
 duced with a verb of the same 
 stem or one of a cognate signifi- 
 cation (jiaxrtv [taxta^ai ; S^v ^lov) 
 278, 1 and 2 ; with verbs denot- 
 ing to shine, to flow, etc. 278, 3 ; 
 object, design 278, 4; manner 
 278, R. 3 ; of the object on which 
 the action is performed or the 
 
 sufiering object 279 ; with verbs 
 signifying to profit, to hurt, etc. 
 279, 1 ; of doing good or evil to 
 anyone, etc. 279, 2; to persevere, 
 to wait for, etc. 279, 3 ; to turn 
 back, flee from, etc. 279, R. 3 ; to 
 conceal, to be concealed, to swear, 
 and with q>&avsiv, knnsiv 279, 4 ; 
 with dii, XQV 279, R. 4 ; ^alveiv, 
 nXslv, etc., which denote motion, 
 etc., with verbs of sacrificing or 
 dancing in honor of any one 279, 
 R. 5 ; denoting • an affection of 
 the mind 279, 5 ; of space, time, 
 quantity 279, R. 8; (xaXbg tw 
 o/ifiata, akyel xr)V xeqittXr^v) 279, 
 7 ; double accusative : (pUiu 
 (ftUav at, etc. 280, 1 ; nahi, 
 xaxa noioj, kiyoi- (ts 280, 2 ; with 
 verbs of beseeching, asking, teach- 
 ing, reminding, dividing, depriv- 
 ing, concealing, clothing and un- 
 clothing, surrounding, etc. 280, 
 3 ; with verbs of appointing, 
 choosing, educating, naming, etc. 
 280, 4 ; in the (txvfioi xa^ okov 
 X. fiigo? 266, R. 4 ; Ace. in 
 adverbial expressionsj e. g. fta- 
 xgbv xXaiuv, iiiya xi»^§^tv 278, 
 R. 1 ; xaQiv, diogsdr, toito, 
 therefore, 278, R. 2 ; tovtov to*' 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
590 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 TQonov, dlxijv, o/AOia 278, R. 3 ; 
 tijv taxlaiTiV ; uqxV^i 6te ; noXi.a, 
 eappe, oXlyov, etc. 279, R. 8 ; 
 tvqog, titfiog, tbAAk, etc. 279, K. 
 10 ; with Pass, verbs 281 ; with 
 verbal Adjectives in tso? 284, 
 R. 7. 
 
 Accusative with Inf. 307 ; instead of 
 Norn, with Inf. 307, R. 4 ; instead 
 of Gen. or Dat with Inf. 307, R. 
 2 ; as a subject after liynai, So- 
 xst, etc. 307, R. 5 ; with the Art. 
 see Inf. ; with exclamations 308, 
 R. 2 ; in the subordinate clauses 
 of the oratio dbliqua 345, 6. 
 
 Accusative with the Part. 310, 2 ; 
 absolute 312, 5 ; with ws 812, 6 ; 
 Ado. of Part, instead of another 
 Case 813, 1. 
 
 Active verbs 102, '248, 249. Comp. 
 Transitive '■; with the meaning to 
 cause to do 249, R. 3. 
 
 Acute accent 29, 4 (a). 
 
 Addition of consonants 24. 
 
 Adjective (and Part.) 74 sq. ; Dial. 
 215, Accent. 75 ; of three end- 
 ings 76, 77 ; of two endings 78, 
 75^ of one ending 80; Com- 
 parison of 81 ; used as a Subs. 
 263, a ; Attributive 264 ; as Subs. 
 with the Gen. (^ jrotoj t?]? yjjs 
 instead of to noJi^i t^g y%) 264, 
 R. 5 ; instead of the Adv. 264, 3. 
 
 Aije'cti\}6s Verbal, see Verbal Ad- 
 jectives. 
 
 Adjeethjes Numeral 96, 2. 
 
 Adjective Substantive Clause 331, 
 R. 4. 
 
 Adjective pronoun used as a Subs. 
 263, a. 
 
 ■Adjective clauses 331 ; several con- 
 nected together 334, 1 ; inter- 
 changed with other subordinate 
 clauses 334, 2. 
 
 Adverb 100 ; formation 101 ; com- 
 parison 85 ; expressed by an ad- 
 jective 264, 8, as expressing an 
 
 objective relation 314 sq. ; tisetl 
 as adjectives 262, d ; as substan. 
 tives (o4 vvv) 263, c ; in a preg 
 nant sense (onoi yf,g ia/isv, etc.) 
 300, R. 7; (o ixit&tv nolsfiog 
 SevQO 7jj£t instead of o ixii ;i.) 
 300 R. 8 ; adverbs of place at- 
 tracted 332, R. 7 ; inverse at- 
 traction of Adv. of place 332 
 R. 13. 
 
 Adverbial correlatives 94, 3. 
 
 Adverbial clauses 335 sq. ; of place 
 336; time 337; cause 338 ; con- 
 dition 339; concession 340, 7; 
 consequence or effect 341 ; way 
 and manner 342 ; quantity with 
 o(TO), oaov S43. 
 
 Adversative coordinate clauses ex> 
 pressed by Si, aAXa, 'etc. 322; 
 negative a£dverisa!tive coordinate 
 clauses 821, 2. 
 
 Agreement 240 sq. ; of the Attrib. 
 Adj. 264, 1 ; of the Rel. Pron. 
 in Gend. and Numb. 332 ; in 
 Case 332, 6. 
 
 Alphabet, history Of, 'i\ 
 
 Andcoluthon 847, 5 ; in the Part. 
 construction 313, 1, (a). 
 
 Anacrusis 352. R, 
 
 Anapaestic dimeter acatalectic 372. 
 
 Anapaestic dimeter catalectic 873. 
 
 Anapaestic monometer acatalectic 
 371. 
 
 Anapaestic tetrameter acatalectic 
 374. 
 
 Anapaekic verse 370. 
 
 Anastrophe 31, IV. 
 
 Anomalous substantives third Dec. 
 67 sq.; Dial. 214 ; -ferbs 157 sq. 
 
 Answer Yes or no 344, 7. 
 
 Aorist 103 ; Aor. Pass. Vfithic 131 ; 
 first Aor. Act. without o- 154, 7 ; 
 second Aor. with o- 154, 8 ; sec- 
 ond Aor. Act. and Mid. accord- 
 ing to analogy of Terbs in fii 191 
 sq.; Aor. of some veits with 
 both a Mid. and Pass, from 197, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
INDEX OP SUBJECTS. 
 
 591 
 
 K. 1 ; Aor. of some Mid. verbs, 
 whose Fut. has a Pass, from 197, 
 B. 3 ; second Aor. Act. -with In- 
 trans. meaning and first Aor. Act 
 with Trans, meaning 141j 4. — 
 ISj^ntax 256 ; iterative meaning 
 256, 4, (b) i itt coinparisons 256, 
 4, (e) ; instead of th6 Pres. 256, 
 4, (d) ; Aor. -with -tl ovp ov 
 266, 4, (e) ; instead of the Fut. 
 256, 4, (f) ; to denote the com- 
 ing into a condition 256, 4 (g) ; 
 signification of the Aor. Subj., 
 Opt, Imp., Inf. and Part. 257. 
 
 Aorist, first and ^cond Mid. always 
 
 reflexive (or Intrans.) 251, 3 ; 
 
 Ao)c. Subj. iii subordinate clauses 
 
 instead of the Put. Perf. as used 
 
 'in Lat 256, R. 9. 
 
 Aphaeresis 14, 5. 
 
 Apodosis 339, 1. 
 
 Apocope 207, 7k 
 
 Aposiopesis 340, 2, (b). 
 
 Apostrophe 13, R. 1. 
 
 Apposition 266 ; in Gen. with Poss. 
 Pron. (iftlts Toil a&Uov /St«j) 266, 
 2; Distrib. or Partitive apposi- 
 tion 266, 3. 
 
 Arsis and Thesis 349, 2 ; plaee (rf 
 349, 3. 
 
 Article 91 ; 244 sq. ; demons, and rel- 
 ative 247 ; as proper article 244 ; 
 with common nouns 244, 2^5 ; 
 with abstracts, nouns of material, 
 proper names 244, 6 and 7 ; with 
 the Adjective and Part used as 
 substantives 244, 8, 9 ; with ad- 
 verbs of time and place, used as 
 adjectives 244, 10 ; with pro- 
 liouns and nusaerals 246 ; (ra 
 rf/g it6le<i)g, ol ntQi Tivot, ol yiV 
 'av9'Qam<H) 244^ 10. 263 ; with 
 every word or part of Speech 
 244, 11 ; position 246 ; with jiaj, 
 oios 246, 6 ; With cardinal num- 
 bers 246, 9. 
 Artidii omitted with common nouns 
 
 244, K. 8 ; with abstracts S!44, R. 4 ; 
 with proper names 244,7; with Adj. 
 and participles 244, R. 8 ; with 
 demonstrative pronouns 246, R. 1. 
 
 Article with the subject and predi- 
 cate 244, R. 1. 
 
 Article in apposition 244, R. 6. 
 
 Article repeated 245, 2. 
 
 Article in place of the Poss. pro- 
 ^ noun (o nanr^q instead of ifils 
 re.) 244, 4. 
 
 Asper, see Spiritusi 
 
 Aspirate before another aspirate 
 changed to a smooth 17, 4 ; 21, 3. 
 
 Aspirates 5, \»). 
 
 Asyndeton 326. 
 
 Atonies 32. 
 
 Attic second Dec. 48 ; Attic Redup. 
 see Redup. 
 
 Attraction of Gend. 240, 3 ; Numb. 
 241, 6; with Prep, and Adv. 300, 
 4, comp.300,3; with the In£307, 
 4. 308, 2; with w^it, 341,3; with 
 the Part 310, 2; of Modes 327'' ; 
 of the relative 332, 6 ; of olo?, 
 'otro;, ijUim?, 332, 7 ; inverted 
 attraction 332, R. 12 ; with ovStis 
 o^($ oi/; with adverbs of place 
 332, R. 13; attraction of the 
 relative in portion 332, 8; at- 
 traction of the relative m a 
 clause subordinate to the adjec- 
 tive clause 332, 9 ; attraction of 
 the Case in comparative sen- 
 tences introduced by iag, mgntQ, 
 iigre 342, R. 3., comp. 344, R. 7. 
 and 324, R. 2. 
 
 AUriSule 239, 2. 
 
 Attrihvitive relation of sentences 
 262, sq. 
 
 Augment, 108, 3 ; 119 sq. and 219 ; 
 in ccanpounds 125 and 215, sq. 
 
 Blending of two or more interrcga- 
 tive sentences into one (ilq liyof ' 
 aiTiog s/sj'Eio) 344, R. 7. 
 
 Brachylogy 346, 2. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
592 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 Barytones 29, R. 7, (f). 
 Bucolic Caesura 355. 
 
 Caesura 351. 
 
 Cardinals 96, sq. 
 
 Cases 41 ; Synt. 268, sq. ; Case 
 Absolute: G«n. Abs. 312, 3 ; 
 Ace. Abs. 312, 5. 
 
 Catalectic verse 352, 2. 
 
 Characteristic of the verb 108, 5 ; 
 of the tenses 110 ; pure and im- 
 pure 142, 2; of verbs in [ii 170. 
 
 Circumflex accent 29, 4. 
 
 Classes of verbs 102. 248. 
 
 Clauses, principal and subordinate 
 326 ; substantive clauses 328 sq.; 
 adjective clauses 331 ; adverbial 
 clause 335. 
 
 Comparatio compendiaria 323, R. 6. 
 
 Comparison of adjectives 81 sq. ; 
 Dialects 216; of substantives 84, 
 R. 4. 216, R. 2; of adverbs 85. 
 
 Comparative degree 239; strength- 
 ened and more definitely stated 
 239 ; use of i) and of the Gen. 
 with the comparative 323, 2 sq. 
 
 Comparative without a second mem- 
 ber rfthe comparison 323, R. 7.; 
 apparently used instead of the 
 positive 323, R. 7. 
 
 Compar-ative i] and the compar. 
 G«n. 323 sq. ; compendious com- 
 parison 323, R. 6. 
 
 Comparative subordinate clauses 
 342, 343. 
 
 Composition of words 236. 
 
 Compound words 236 sq. 
 
 Concessive clauses 340, 7. 
 
 Concretes 39. 
 
 Conditional sentences, see cl in the 
 Greek Index. 
 
 Conjugation 107 sq. ; in to 115 sq. ; 
 in ^t 168 sq., in the Dialects : 
 in (o 219, in [it 224. 
 ■ Conjunctions 199, 319. 
 
 Consequence, clauses denoting, with 
 uQtt, ovv, toivvv, etc. 323, 3. 
 
 Consonants 3, 2 ; division 5 ; mova- 
 ble at the end of a word 1 5 ; chan- 
 ges 17 sq.; metathesis 22 ; doub- 
 ling 23 ; strengthening of and ad- 
 dition 24 ; expulsion 25, 3 ^ omis- 
 sion 25 ; final consonant of a 
 pure Greek word 25, 5 ; inter- 
 change of consonants in the dia- 
 lects 202 — 204 ; changes . of in 
 the dialects, 208; 
 
 Coordinate attributive adjectives 
 264, 2. 
 
 Coordinate sentences 319 sq. ; cop- 
 ulat. coordinate sentences (te — 
 xai) 321, 1, a; negative (oi'rt, 
 ovde) 321, 2; (^ovfiorov — aXXa xai, 
 etc.) 321, 3. adversative coordi- 
 nate sentences, Qiiv — di) 322, 1 
 — 5; (aXla) 322, 6 ; disjunctive 
 (7j — »;', etc.) 323 ; reason, cause 
 (ydg) 324, 2 ; consequence or 
 inference («'po, toivvv) 324, 3. 
 
 Copula sivtti 238, R. 6. 
 
 Copulative coordinate sentences 321. 
 
 Coronis 10, R. 1. 
 
 Correlative pronouns and adverbs 94. 
 
 Crasis 10 sq.; in the Dialects 206 ; 
 in relation to the accent 31, 11. 
 
 Customary., wont, 256, 4 (b). 
 
 Dative 282 sq. 
 
 Dative local (where ?) 283, 1 ; («) 
 avToig tdiq "nnoiq 283, 2. ((S) 
 (nqaTta, arolm, nh'i&ti, vaval, 
 etc. 285, R. 2 ; of time (when f) 
 ■tQiTtj fifiiga ; of the condition 
 under which anything happens, 
 283, 3. 
 
 Dative as a personal object 284 ; in 
 a local relation (whither^ with 
 verbs of motion (otvixeiv z^Q^i 
 ovQUv'ai') 284, R. 1 ; Dat. of com- 
 munion 284, 3 ; with verbs ex- 
 pressing mutual intercourse, as- 
 sociating with, participaliou 284, 
 3, (1) ; with verbs of contend- 
 ing, approaching, yielding ; with 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
INDEX or SUBJECTS. 
 
 693 
 
 Jlie adjectives and adverbs, jriij- 
 aiog, eravtlog, niXag (f/yig) etc. 
 2S4, 3, (2) ; with verbs of com- 
 manding, entreating, counselling, 
 inciting, following, serving, obey- 
 ing, accompanying, trusting, with 
 the adjectives and adverbs, axo- 
 lov&og, diddoxog, i^ijg, etc. 284, 
 3, (3) ; with expressions of like- 
 uess and unlikeness 284, 3, (4) ; 
 with expressions denoting to be 
 becoming, suitable, pleasing 284, 
 3, (5) ; of agreeing with, blam- 
 ing, reproaching, being angry 
 with, envying 284, 3, (6); of 
 helping, averting and being use- 
 ful 284,, 8, (7) ; with all verbs 
 and adjectives when the action 
 takes place for the honor, advan- 
 tage or disadvantage, etc. of a 
 person (Dativus commodi et in- 
 commodi) 284, 3, E. 4; with 
 verbs of observing, finding, meet- 
 ing with something in a person 
 284, 3, (8) ; Dat of possession 
 with sivai and ylyvea&ai 284, 3, 
 (9) ; instead of Lat. Dat (ali- 
 quid mihi est honori) 284, 3, (9) ; 
 when an action takes place in 
 reference to a person 284, 3, 
 (10) ; ethical Dat. 284, 3, (10), 
 (d) ; with Pass, verbs 284, 3, 
 (11) ; with verbal adjectives in 
 to; and jsog instead of ino with 
 the Gen. 284, 3, (12). 
 
 Dative of the thing, or instrumental 
 Dat. 285 ; of the ground or rest- 
 son with verbs denoting the state 
 of the feelings 285, 1, (1); of 
 the means and instrument with 
 Xqrja&ai and voiiiZuv 285, 1, 
 (2) ; manner, material, standard, 
 rule and measure 285, 1, (3). 
 
 Daiivc with the Inf. 3C7, 2, (b). 
 
 Dative with the Part. 310, 2. 
 
 Dative of participle instead of anoth- 
 er Case 313, 1, (a). 
 
 Declension of the substantive 41, 3 : 
 first Dec. 42 — 44 ; quantity and 
 accent 45 ; Dialects 211 ; second 
 Dec. 46 — 48 ; accent 49 ; gen- 
 der 50; Dialects 212; third Deo. 
 51 — 69 ; quantity 64 ; accent 65 ; 
 gender 66 ; Dia,lects 213 ; anoma- 
 lous nouns 67 sq. 214; defective 
 nouns 69. 214, R. 2. 
 
 Declension of adjectives and partici- 
 ples 74— 79, see adjectives. 
 
 Declension of pronouns 87 sq. 
 
 Declension of numerals 99, 5. 
 
 Defectives of the third Deo. 69, 73, 
 2. 214, R. 2. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns, see Pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 Denominative verbs 232, 1, 
 
 Deponents 102, 3 ; Passive Depo- 
 nents 197, Syn. 252. 
 
 Derivation of words 232 sq., of ten- 
 ses 128. 
 
 Derivatives 231, 2, 4, (b). 
 
 Desiderative verbs 232, Rem. 3. 
 
 Diaeresis 4, R. 6 ; in the Dialects 
 205, 6 ; metrical diaeresis 351 R. 
 
 Dialects page 13 ; 202 sq. 
 
 Diastole 37, 2. 
 
 Digamma 5, 2, (a) ; 25, 2 ; 200. 
 
 Dimeter 360. 
 
 Diminutives 233, 2, (c). 
 
 Dipody 350, 4. 
 
 Diphthongs 4, 3. 
 
 Disjunctive coordinate sentence* 
 323. 
 
 Distributive apposition 266, 3. 
 
 Division of syllables 36. 
 
 Double consonants 5, 4. 
 
 Deviling of consonants 208, 4. 
 
 Dual number 41 ; 106 ; with a PI 
 verb 241, 5 ; interchanged with 
 the PI. 241, R. 8; Dual verb 
 with a PI. Subj. 241, R. 9 ; Dual 
 of the Fern, with the Masc. QioV' 
 Toj T« je'xva) 241, R. 10, (b). 
 
 Elision 13 sq. ; in the Dialects 206, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
694 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 6 ; elision in respect to the ac- 
 cent 31, ni. 
 
 Ellipsis 346, !■; of the subject and 
 especially of the Subs. 238, 5 ; 
 of the copula Eirai 238, R. 6 
 and 7 ; of the Subs, to which 
 the attribute belongs 263 ; of uV 
 260, K. 3. e, 7 ; of the Protasis 
 and Apodosis 340. 
 
 Emphasis in sentences 321, 3. 
 
 Enclitics 33 sq. ; iaccented 35. 
 
 Enhansive sentences expressed by 
 »«(, pv [lovov, alXa xai 321, 3. 
 
 Epicenes 40, R. 5. 
 
 Essential words 238, 1. 38, 4. 
 
 Elpnology 13. 
 
 Euphonic Prothesis 16, 10. 
 
 Expulsion of consonants 25. 
 
 Factitive verbs 232, R. 1 and (c). 
 
 Feminine PI. with Sing, verb 241, 
 R. 6 ; with the neuter («£ jista- 
 ^olttl Ivnri^oT') 241, 2 ; with a 
 Neut. (to yweiixiol' tart wajl^) 
 241, 2, sq. ; Fem. Dual with the 
 Masc. (tovTia T« TBxva) 241, R. 10. 
 
 Final clauses 330. 
 
 Frequentative verbs 232, R. 2. 
 
 Formal words 238, 1. 38, 3. 
 
 Formation of words 231 sq. 
 
 Future tense 103 ; Attic 117 >, Doric 
 in aovfiai, 154, 3; without <t 154, 
 4 ; in ovfiai with mute verbs 154, 
 6 ; Mid. instead of Act. (axovm, 
 UMOvaoftai, instead of uKovaai) 
 154, 1, and 198 ; Synt. 255, 3, 
 4 ; Fut Inf. after verbs of think- 
 ing, hoping, etc. 257, R. 2. 
 
 Future Peif. 103 ; in Act. form 
 154, 6 ; Synt. 255, 5 ; instead 
 of the simple Fut. 355, R. 8 ; 
 the Lat. Fut. Perf., how ex- 
 pressed in Greek 255, R. 9. 
 
 Gender of the substantive 40 ; first 
 Dec. 42 ; second Dec. 50 ; third 
 Dec. C6 ; of Adj. and Part. 74. 
 
 Gender of the adjective, etc. in tht 
 const, xara avreaiv 241 ; in gen* 
 eral statements 241, 2 ; with sev- 
 eral subjects 242; of the Super!, 
 with Part. Gen. 241, 7 ; of the 
 relative pronoun 332. 
 
 Genitive, attributive 265 ; used tl- 
 liptically 263, (b). 
 
 Genitive in the objective relation 
 270. 
 
 Genitive, separative, with verbs of 
 removal, separation, loosing, de- 
 sisting, freeing, missing, depriv- 
 ing, differing from 271, 2, 3 ; 
 with verbs of be^nning 271, 4. 
 
 Genitive of origin and author, with 
 verbs of originating, being pro- 
 duced from 273, 1. 
 
 Genitive, possessive, (a) with tlvai, 
 yiyvttr^tti, (/J) iStoi oixtiog, etc. 
 273, 2. 
 
 Genitive of quality 273, 3, (c). 
 
 Genitive, partitive, with tirai and 
 fiyvecr&ai ; ri&ivai, non'uj&ai, 
 fjyiTa&nt 273, 3, (a) ; in attribu- 
 tive relation with substantives, 
 substantive adjectives, substan- 
 tive pronouns, numerals and ad- 
 verbs 273, R. 4 ; with words 
 which express the idea of parti- 
 cipation, sharing in ; with verbs 
 signifying to touch, be in connec- 
 tion with; of acquiring and at- 
 taining ; of physical and intellec- 
 tual contact, oif laying hold of; 
 of hasty motion, striving at\:er an 
 object 273, 3, (b), and R. 7 ; with 
 verbs of entreating and suppli- 
 cating 273, R. fi ; with the ad- 
 verbs tv&v, l&v, fii/Qi ; with 
 verbs of meeting and approach- 
 ing 273, 3, R. 9; Part. Gen. in 
 poetry 273, R. 7. 
 
 Genitive of place 273, 4, (a). 
 
 Genitive of time 273, 4, (b). 
 
 Genitive of material 273, 5 ; with 
 ■yerbs of making, forming 273, 5, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
INDKX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 595 
 
 (a) ; of fulness and want (b) ; of 
 eating, drinking, tasting, enjoy- 
 ing, having the enjoyment of 
 something intellectually, etc. (c) ; 
 of smelling (d) ; of remembei> 
 ing and forgetting j with expres- 
 sions of being acquainted and 
 unacquainted with, of experience 
 and inexperience, ability, dex- 
 terity, of making trial of, with 
 verbal adjectives in -txog, etc. ex- 
 pressing the idea of dexterity 
 (e) ; with words of sensation and 
 perception, (axoviiv, axQoua&ai, 
 alir&axia&ai,, aa(fQMvta&ai (f) 
 and R. 19,; with verbs of hear- 
 ing 273, E. 18; with verbs of 
 speing, hearing, experiencing, 
 learning, considering, knowing, 
 judging, examining, saying, ad- 
 miring, prabing, blaming 273, R. 
 20. 
 9entiiv$ of cause 274 ; with verbs 
 denoting a desire, longing for 
 (a) ; care, concern for (b) ; pain, 
 grief, pity, with adjectives having 
 a similar meaning, particularly in 
 exclamations, with interjections 
 (c) ; with verbs expressing an- 
 ger, indignation, envy, admirar 
 tion, praise and blame (d), (e), 
 (f ) ; with verbs expressing re- 
 quital, revenge, accusing and 
 condemning 274, 2 ; tou with 
 the Inf. 274, 3, (a) ; with the 
 adverbs sw, xalms, /itrglias, wc, 
 amg, ojiiag, ovimg, etc. connected 
 with 'd^sip, i'lKEir, sivtxi 274, 3, 
 
 Genitive with verbs of ruling, supe- 
 riority, and inferiority, subjuga- 
 tion, mth the adjectives iyxQaxi^g, 
 axguTTig 275, 1. 
 
 Genitive after the comparative 275, 
 2; use of the Gen. and ij with 
 the comparative 323, 2 sq. 
 
 Genitive of price 275, 3. 
 
 Genitive with substantives and ad- 
 jectives 275, R. 5. 
 
 Genitive, double, governed hy one 
 substantive 275, R. 7. 
 
 Genitive with the Inf. 307, 2, (a). 
 
 Genitive with the Part, 510, 2. 
 
 Genitive absolute 312, 3 ; when the 
 subject is the same as that Qf the 
 predicate 313, 2 ; with wg after 
 lidivtti, voiiv, etc. 312, R. 12. 
 
 Gentile nouns 233, 2, (a). 
 
 Grave accent 29 ; instead of the 
 acute 31. 
 
 HeteroclUes 59, R. 2; 67, (b); 71. 
 Heterogeneous substantives 70, B. 
 Hexameter verse 355. 
 Hepthemim 355. 
 Hiatus 8 ; 206, 7. 
 Historical tenses 103, 2 ; 254, 3. 
 Hypercalakctio verse 352, 2. 
 Hypadiastole 37. 
 Hypothetical sentences, see u, 
 
 lamhic dimeter 367. 
 
 Iambic monometer 366. 
 
 Iambic trimeter acatalectic 368. 
 
 Iambic tetrameter catalectic 369. 
 
 Iambic verse 365. 
 
 Imitative verbs 232, 1, (a). 
 
 Imperative 104, III; Synt. 25S, 1, 
 (c) ; use of the Imp. 259, 4 ; 
 third Pers. Sing. Perf. Mid. or 
 Pass. 255, R. 6. 
 
 Imperfect tense 103 ; analogous to 
 verbs in (ii 196 ; Synt. 256, 2 — i. 
 
 Impersonal construction, see per- 
 sonal construction.' 
 
 Impersonal verbs 238, R. 2, 
 
 Inclination, see Enclitic. 
 
 Indeclinable nouns 73, 1. 
 
 Indicative 104, 1 ; Synt. 258, (a) ; 
 Fut. with «V 260, 2, (1) ; 
 Impf., Plup. and Aor. with bV 
 260, 2, (2) ; difference between 
 the Impf,, Aor. and Plup. 256 ; 
 Fut. instead of the Imp. 255, 4 ; 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
C96 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 ■mth 01/, e.g. ov jrawij Xeyav ib.; 
 Ind. of the Hist, tenses with words 
 expressing a wish 259, R. 6; Ind. 
 in subordinate sentences, see the 
 separate conjunctions ; Ind. in 
 oral, obliq. 344, 6. 
 Indirect form of discourse, see ob- 
 lique form. 
 InfinUive 105, (a) ; Synt., the 
 Pres. and Aor. Inf. 257, 1, (e) ; 
 Aor. Pres. and Put. after verbs 
 of thinking, etc. 257, E. 2 ; with 
 «V 260, 2, (5). 
 Infinitive 305 ; without the .Art. 306 ; 
 with verbs of willing and the 
 contra"ry, etc. 306, 1. (a) ; with 
 verbs of thinking, supposing, 
 saying 306, 1, (b) ; after expres- 
 sions denoting ability, cause, 
 power, capacity 306, 1, (c) ; with 
 adjectives and substantives, with 
 tivai, neq)vy.ivai and ylyvca&ai 
 with a substantive) after av[i^ai- 
 *£/, diX, jiQi] and the like, afler 
 substantives, adjectives, demon- 
 strative pronouns, after verbs of 
 giving, sending, etc. 306, 1, (d). 
 Infinitive, or Ace. with Inf. differ- 
 ent from Part. 311 ; Inf, or Ace. 
 with Inf., dififerent from otj, ws, 
 that 329, R. 5 ; in forms express- 
 ing command or wish 306, R. 11 ; 
 in forms expressing indignation 
 306, R. 11, c ; with al yiig, 
 il'&e 306, R. 11, (d). 
 Infinitive with Nom., Gen., Dat. 
 
 and Aoc. 307. 
 Infinitive with the Art. instead of 
 the Inf. without the Art. 308, R. 1. ; 
 in Nom., Gen., Dat and Ace. 
 308, 2 ; in exclamations and 
 questions implying indignation 
 308, R. 2 ; as an adverbial ex- 
 pression (to rvv tirai and the 
 like) 308, R. 3. 
 Infinitive Act. instead of the Pass. 
 306, R. 10. 
 
 Digitized by 
 
 Inflection 38.. 
 
 in/?ecfe"on-endings of the verb lOS 
 sq.; Remarks on 116 ; of verbl 
 in ixi 171, 172. 
 
 Intensive verbs 232, R. 2. 
 
 Interchange of vowels 201 ; conso- 
 nants 202—204. 
 
 Interpunciion-iaaxks 37. 
 
 Interrogative pronouns, see Pro 
 nouns. 
 
 Interrogative sentences 344 ; modes 
 in 344, 6 ; connection with a 
 relative sentence 344, R. 3 ; 
 change of a subordinate sentence 
 into a direct interrogative sen- 
 tence (oTBV tl itoiriaaiai) 344, 
 R. 6 ; blending of two or more 
 interrogative sentences into one 
 (t/j tlvog airiog iazi) 344, R. 7. 
 
 Intransitive verbs 248, (1) (/3) ; as 
 Trans, with the Ace. 249, R. 2 ; 
 instead of the Pass. 249, 3 ; in 
 the Pass. 251, 4, and R. 6. 
 
 Interrogative sentence with the Art. 
 344, R. 3. 
 
 Inversion 348, 5. 
 
 Iota subscript 4, R. 4. 
 
 Iterative form in axoT 221. 
 
 Lengthening of the vowels 16, 3. 207 
 
 Lenis Spiritus 6. 
 
 Letters, sounds of 2-'. 
 
 Limitation of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 
 
 Litotes 239, R. 3. 
 
 Local substantives 233, 2, (d). 
 
 Masculine PI. with Sing, verb 241, 
 R. 6 ; connected with the Neut 
 (oi itoXlol Savor) 241, 2; Masc. 
 with a Neut. (^(laqamov tan xa- 
 Xos) 241, 1 ; Masc. PI. withFem. 
 241, R. 11. 
 
 Metaplasm 67, (c). 72. 214, R. 1. 
 
 Metathesis of the liquids 22. 208, 
 3; of the aspirates 21, 3; verb 
 156. 
 
 Middle form 102; Synt. 248, (2) j 
 Microsoft® 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 597 
 
 with reflex, sense 250 ; with the 
 meaning to cause to do 2S0, B. 
 2; when an action is performed 
 to the advantage or disadvantage 
 of the subject 250, B. 3 ; with a 
 reflex Pron. 250, B. 3; with a 
 subjective meaning, figuratively 
 250, B.4 ; with a pass, sense 251. 
 
 Modes 104 ; Synt. 258 sq. ; in subor- 
 dinate clauses 327>>, 1 ; attraction 
 of 327'' ; comp. the separate con- 
 junctions, in Greek Index. 
 
 Mode vowels 111 ; summary of 112 ; 
 of verbs in fit 171; in the Dial. 
 220. 
 
 Movable final consonants 15. 
 
 Midtiplicatives 96, 1, (d). 
 
 Negatives, ov, /xri 318; accumula- 
 tion of negatives 318, G ; appa- 
 rent Pleonasm of 318, 6—9. 
 
 Neuter of names of persons con- 
 nected with Masc. or Fem. 241, 2, 
 K. 3 ; PL instead of the Sing, with 
 verb, adjectives 241, 3 ; PI. of 
 pronouns 243, 4 ; Fl. with Sing, 
 verb 241, 4. 
 
 Nominal question 344, 2. 
 
 Nominative with the change of the 
 Act construction of the verb 
 with the Gen. or Dat. into the 
 Pass., e. g. TtiaTEVOfiai 251, 4. 
 
 Nominative Case 2G9 ; with ovofia 
 iaxl HOI, orofia £^(b, with verbs 
 of naming 269f R. 3 ; Nom. of 
 an abstract instead of a Lat. Dat. 
 (mihi est honori) 269, K. 2 ; Nom. 
 instead of the Voc. 269, 2 ; in 
 ax^/ioi xaif oXoy xal jiigog 266, 
 3, B. 4. 
 
 Nominative with the Inf. 307 ; in- 
 stead of the Ace. with the Inf. 
 307, 4. 
 
 Nominative with a Part. 310, 3 ; in- 
 stead of another Case 313 ; with- 
 out a finite verb 313, B. 1. 
 
 Numerals 96 sq. 218. 
 
 Digitized by 
 
 Number 41. 106 ; Synt. 243 ; in the 
 const. xaTct avvcaiv 241 ; with 
 • verb, adjectives in to'j tc'os 241, 
 3 ; the number of adjectives 
 when they are connected with 
 several subjects 242, 1 ; number 
 of verb with several subjects 242, 
 2 ; with several subjects disjunc- 
 tively connected 242, E. 3 ; num- 
 ber of the BeL Pron. 332. 
 
 Object in a sentence 239, 2. 
 
 Objective construction of sentences 
 267 sq. 
 
 Oblique discourse 345 sq. 
 
 Omission of consonants 25.- 
 
 Optative mode 104, 11. see the Subj. 
 Synt. ; nature of the Opt. 258, 1, 
 (b). 259 ; with av 260, 2, (4) ; 
 without av 260, B. 7; in exhor- 
 tations 259, B. 1 ; Opti Delib. 
 259, 2 ; to express frequent rep- 
 etition (as often as) 327", 2 ; to 
 express a supposition, uncertain- 
 ty, possibility, presumption, ad- 
 mission 259, 3, (a) ; wish 259, 3, 
 (b) ; instead of the Imp. 259, 3, 
 (c) ; desire, wish, inclination 259, 
 3, (d) ; in direct questions 259, 3, 
 (e) ; Opt. without av instead of 
 with av 260, K. 7 ; Opt. in sub- 
 ordinate clauses, see the separate 
 conjunctions ; in watio obliqua 
 345, 4. 
 
 Oratio obliqua 345. 
 
 Ordinals 96 sq. 
 
 Organs of speech 3. 
 
 Participle 74 sq. 105, (b); Synt. 
 309 sq. 
 
 Participle as the complement of the 
 verb 310 ; Nom., Gen., Dat, Ace. 
 of the Part 310, 2; after verba 
 sentiendi 310, 4, (a) ; verba de- 
 clarandi 310, 4, (b) ; verbs de- 
 noting an affection of the mind 
 (verba afiectuum) 310, 4, (e) ; to 
 
 Microsoft® 
 
«98 
 
 INDEX OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 be satisfied with, to enjoy, be full 
 310, 4, (d) ; overlooking, permit- 
 ting, enduring, persevering, 310, 
 4, (e) ; beginning and ceasing 
 310, 4, (f) ; to be fortunate, to 
 excel, to be inferior, to do well 
 or ill 310, 4>(g); after n(tQ,&[iai, 
 ira^tiaiisviiSoitttt, etc. 310, 4, (h); 
 after the phrases it is Jit, useful, 
 etc. 310, 4, (i) ; after ex^iv, to he 
 in a condition, or state, e. g. l/w 
 Kjriauiiaiog 310, 4, (k) ; with 
 tvy;iava>, Xav&dvto, Siareko), 8id- 
 yio, <fd-dr(o, oi;ioftai 310, 4, (1). 
 
 Participle different from Inf. after 
 several classes of verbs Sll, and 
 R. 
 
 Participle ?is the expression of ad- 
 verbial subordinate relation? 312. 
 
 Participle with «5s 312, 6 ; with 
 a'igzs, ojgneg, Hxe, ola, oiav 312, 6, 
 R. 13. 
 
 Participle with ftV«t, instead of a 
 simple verb 238, R. 5. 
 
 Participle with «V 260, 2, (5). 
 
 ParticipiaU 105 ; see Inf. and Part 
 
 Participial construction 3Q9 ; ana- 
 coluthon 313, 1. 
 
 Particles 38, R. 
 
 Particles expressing purpose, design 
 330. 
 
 Paris of Speech 38. 
 
 Passive verb 102; Synt. 248, (3). 
 251. 
 
 Patronymics 233, 2, (b). 
 
 Pentameter verse 356. 
 
 Perfect tense 103 ; with o- 131 ; ni- 
 nvafiai, etc. 223, 14 ; Subj. and 
 Opt. Perf. or Plup. Mid. or Pass, 
 formed without the aid of an aux- 
 iliary verb 154, 9 ; Perf. and 
 Plupf of verbs in fit with short- 
 ened form 193; Perf and Plup. 
 analogous to verbs in /ii 193 — 
 195 ; second Perf. with Intrans. 
 meaning 141, 4. 249, 2 ; Synt. 
 8.'>5, 2; in the third Pers. Sing. 
 
 Digitized by 
 
 Imp. Mid. or Pass. 253, 4, G 
 with the signif. of the Prw, 255, 
 R. 5; instead of the Fut. 255, 
 R. 7. 
 
 Person of the verb 106 ; with sev- 
 eral subjects ?42 ; in adjecdre- 
 clauses 832, 2. 
 
 Persons, interchange of in the orat. 
 obliq. 345, R. 6. 
 
 Personal construction, instead of 
 the Impers. with I^f 307, R. 6 
 and 7; with Part 310, R. 3; 
 with oTt, ag 329, R, 7. 
 
 Personal endings 111 ;|_-riew of 113 ; 
 difference between endings in 
 the principal and subordinate 
 tenses 114 ; of verbs in fii 172 ; 
 Dialects 220. 
 
 Personal pronouns 87 — 90. 
 
 Plural number 41 ; with the sub- 
 stantive in the Gen. 241, R. 2 ; 
 PI. subst with Dual verb 241, R. 
 9 ; PI. of subst. in proper names, 
 names of materials, and abstracts 
 243, 3 ; change to the Sing. 241, 
 R. 12 ; in an address to one per- 
 son 241, R. 13 ; the first Pers. 
 PI. instead of the Sing. 241, R. 
 12 ; Neut PI. in verbal adjec- 
 tives instead of the Sing. 241, 3 ; 
 PI. of verbs with collective nouns 
 in the Sing. 241, 1 ; with sub- 
 stantives in the Dual 241, 6 ; 
 lavTa, jdSe, exfiva used of one 
 idea 241, R. 3p PI. interchanged 
 with the Dual 241, R. 8. 
 
 Pluralia tantum 73, 2. 
 
 Pluperfect 103. Comp. Perf Synt 
 256, 2. 
 
 Position of words 348. 
 
 Position of uV 261 ; article o, fi, to 
 245 ; prepositions 300, 6 ; pro- 
 nouns, see the separate pronouns. 
 Adverbs and particles, see the 
 separate adverbs and particles ; 
 of xe 321, R. 3 ; fiev and di 322, 
 R. 2. 
 
 Microsoft® 
 
INDEX OP SUBJE0T8. 
 
 599 
 
 Positive degraj, see Comparative. 
 
 Possessive pronouns 90. 
 
 Predicate 238, 2. 
 
 Predicative relation of sentences 238. 
 
 Pregnant construction 300, 3. 
 
 Preposiiions 199 ; Synt. 286 sq. ; as 
 adverbs of place 300 ; Tmesis 
 300, K. 4 ; in const. Praeg. nm- 
 Tsiv iv yovvaav) 300, 4 ; ■with 
 the Art, attracted (ol ix r^g ayo- 
 gag av^Qoinoi sipvyov) 300, 4 ; 
 repeated and omitted 300, 5 ; po- 
 ^ sition 300, 6. 
 
 Present tense 103 ; Pres. andlmpf. 
 analogous to verbs in jut 196 ; 
 Synt. 255, 1 ; Hist. Pres. 255, 1 ; 
 instead of the Perf. 255, K. 1 ; 
 instead of the Put. 255, R. 3. 
 
 Primitives 231, 2. 
 
 Principal clauses 326. 
 
 Principal tenses 103, 2. 254, 2. 
 
 Proclitics 32. 
 
 Pronouns 86; Dialects 217; De- 
 clension 87 sq.; Synt. 301 — 304. 
 
 Pronoun, correlative 94 ; demon- 
 strative, Decl. 91; Dialects 217, 
 4. 303, 1 and 2 ; avzog 303, 3 ; 
 prospective and retrospective 
 304 ; omitted before a relative 
 331, R. 3. 
 
 Pronoun indefinite rig tI Decl. 93. 
 303, 4 ; position 303, R. 5. 
 
 Pronoun interrogative, t/'s Decl. 93 ; 
 see Interrog. sentences ; with Art. 
 prefixed 344, R. 3. 
 -Pronoun personal Decl. 87. 302; 
 third Pers. prospective 304; re- 
 trospective 304, 3. 
 
 Pronoun possessive 90 ; Dialects 
 217, 3. 
 
 Pronoun reciprocal Decl. 89. 
 
 Pronoun reflexive Decl. 88. 302, 2 ; 
 third Pers. instead of the first 
 and second 302, 8 ; instead of 
 the reciprocal 302, R. 7. 
 
 Pronunciation 29, 36 ; of letters 3. 
 
 Purpose, particles denoting 3g0, 1. 
 
 Proportionals 96, 1, (e). 
 Protasis 339. 
 
 Prothesis Euphonic 16, 10. 207, 8. 
 Punctuation-uia,rks 37. 
 
 Quantity 27 sq. ; in Dialects 209, 
 first Dec. 45, (a) ; third Dec. 64 
 
 Redundant nouns 70. 
 
 Reduplication 108, 4. 123, 219 ; in 
 sec. Aor. 219, 7 ; Att. in Perf. 
 and Plup. 124 ; second Aor. 124; 
 R. 2; in compound words 125 
 sq. ; as strengthening of the stem 
 163. 
 
 Reflexive verbs 102 ; Synt. 248, (2). 
 
 Reflexive pronouns 88. 
 
 Relation of the Attrib. Adj. 264, 2. 
 
 Relative construction changed to the 
 Demonstrative 334, 1. 
 
 Relative pronoun Decl. 92; Synt. 
 331 sq. ; instead of the demons. 
 331, R. 1; agreement of gender 
 and number 332 ; Case (attrac- 
 tion) 332, 6 ; attraction with 
 o'log, oaog, tjXixog 332, 7 ; inverse 
 attraction 332, R. 11 ; with ovdslg 
 ogiig ov 332, R. 12 ; with ad- 
 verbs of place 332, R. 13 ; at- 
 traction in position 332, 8 ; rela- 
 tive pronoun of an intermediate 
 clause attracted 332, 9 ; construc- 
 tion of the relative pronoun 333 ; 
 rel. pron. changed to a demons, 
 or pers. 334, 1 ; rel. pron. in- 
 stead of a demonstrative 334, 3. 
 
 Relative clause, see adjective clause. 
 
 Reciprocal pronouns 89. 
 
 Reciprocal verbs 248, R. 1. 
 
 Resolution of contract verbs 222. 
 
 Restriction of sentences 322, 1 — 5. 
 
 Rhythm 349. 
 
 Roots 231, 2. 
 
 Scheme, see axii/id in Grreek Index 
 
 Sentences 238, 1. 
 
 Sentences denoting efieet or rc- 
 
 26 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
600 
 
 INDEX OP StrBJECTS. 
 
 suit ■with agtt, ovv, toivvv, etc. 
 
 iu, 3. 
 
 Sequence of tenses 327^. 
 
 Shortening of the vowels 16, 4. 
 207, 4. 
 
 Singular verb witli Masc. or Fern. 
 PI. 241, R. 6 ; Tvith Neut. PI. 241, 
 4 ; with several common nouns 
 in PI. 242, K. 2. 
 
 Singular of substantives 243, 1 ; 
 changed to the PI. 241, R. 12 ; 
 Sing. Imp. e. g. sins in an ad- 
 dress to several 241, R. 13. 
 
 Spiritus Len. and Asp. 6. 
 
 Stem of the verb 108, 1 ; pure and 
 impure 138 ; strengthening the 
 consonant and prolonging the 
 stem-vowel 139. 
 
 Stems 231, 4, (a). 
 
 Strengthening of the vowels 16, 1 ; 
 consonants 24 ; stem of impure 
 verbs 139. 
 
 Subject 238, 2 ; change of the ac- 
 tive construct, into the Pass., e. g. 
 majsvofiai from ntaTsvco rtvl 
 251, 4 ; ellipses of 238, 5. 
 
 Subjunctive Mode 104, II. Perf. 
 and Pip. Mid. or Pass, without 
 an auxiliary verb 154, 9 ; Subj. 
 and Opt. Act. and Mid. of verbs 
 in Vfii, without auxiliary verb 
 176, 5. Synt 258, 1, (b). 259 ; 
 Subj. Aor. instead of Fut Perf. 
 of Latin 255, R. 9. 
 
 Subjunctive with av 260, 2, (3) ; 
 (with and without av) instead of 
 the Fut. Ind. 259, R. 4; Subj. 
 hortative 259, 1 (a) ; delibera- 
 tive 259, 1, (b). 260, 2, 3, (b) ; 
 Svbj. to den. indefinite frequen- 
 cy (as often as) 327\ 2, 333, 3 ; in 
 comparisons 333, R. 2 ; with [irj 
 instead of the Imp. 259, 5 ; in 
 subordinate clauses, see the sep- 
 arate conjunctions ; in Or. obliq. 
 345, 5. 
 
 iSuftordmaie sentences 326 sq.; class- 
 Digitized by 
 
 es 326, 3; characteristics 326, R. 
 4 ; subordinate sentences changed 
 into direct interrogative senten- , 
 ces 344, R. 6. ] 
 
 Substantive 39 sq. ; Gen. 40 ; Numb., 
 Case and Dec. 41 ; Dec. I. 42 
 sq. ; Dec. 11. 46 sq. ; Dec. IH. 
 51 sq. 
 
 Substantive 39 sq. ; nimiber 242. i 
 
 Substantive instead of adjective 264, 
 R. 3. 
 
 Substantive clauses expressing <Ze«!jrn, 
 aim, with (og, oTioig, 'iva, etc. 
 330. 
 
 Substantive clauses with OTt, ug, that 
 329. 
 
 SuperlativeSl sq. Synt. 239 ; strength- 
 ening and more exact definition 
 of, 239, R. 2; Gend. with the 
 Part Gen 241, 7. 
 
 Syllables, division of 36. 
 
 Synizesis 12. Dialects 206, 4. 
 
 Syncope 16, 8. 207, 6 ; in substan- 
 tives 55, 2 ; in verbs 155. 
 
 Syntax 238 sq. 
 
 Tenses of the verb 1 03 ; of the sub- 
 ordinate modes 257 ; derivation 
 128 ; formation of the secondary 
 tenses, use of the same in con- 
 nection with the primary 141 ; 
 Tenses primary and Sec. 103, R. 
 141. 
 
 Tenses, Syntax 254 ; sequence of 
 in subordinate clauses 327". 
 
 rense-formation of verbs in a 127 ; 
 pure verbs 129 ; mute 142 sq. ; 
 liquid 149 ; verbs in fii, 173 ; in 
 Dialects 223. 
 
 Tbnse-characteristic, see character- 
 istic. 
 
 Tense-endings 110. 
 
 Tense-stem 110, 2. 
 
 Theme of the verb 138, 3. 
 
 Thesis and Arsis 349. 
 
 Time, difference between Gen. and 
 Dat. of time, 273, R. 13. 
 Microsoft® 
 
INDEX OF SUBJECTS, 
 
 60 i 
 
 Thicsis of Prepositions 300, K. 4. 
 Transitive verbs 248, (a) (a) ; -with 
 
 Intrans. or Reflex, signif. (t^sjiw 
 
 instead of jQiuofiui) 249, 1, 2 ; 
 
 ■with (he sense to cause to do 249, 
 
 R. 8. 
 Transition from direct discourse to 
 
 indirect and vice versa 345, K. 6. 
 Transposition of the attributive 
 ' adjective and Subs. (oJ xqijutoI 
 
 wv av&Qiinwv instead of oi jjfgjj- 
 
 atol iiv&Qianoi) 264, E. 5. 
 TViemim 355. 
 rrocAaic verse 361. 
 Trochaic monometer 362. 
 Trochaic dimeter 363. 
 Trochaic tetrameter catalectic 364. 
 
 Variable vowels 16, 6 ; in the stem 
 of impure verbs 140 ; change of 
 » into 01 140, 4 ; of £ into o 
 231, 6. • 
 
 Verb 102 sq. 219 sq. ; division of 
 verbs in w according to thn char- 
 acteiistic 127; barytones 127, 
 E.; pure verbs (and contract) 
 129 — 137; Perispomena 127, E; 
 impure 127. 138 — 141 ; mute 
 127. 142—148; liquid 127. 149 
 — 153 ; special peculiarities of 
 
 verbs (punj and impure) 154 ; 
 anomalous in m 157 sq. ; in fii 168 
 sq. ; in w which in certain tenses 
 are analogous to verbs in fti : sec- 
 ond Aor. Act. and Mid. 1 9 1 sq. ; in 
 Dialects 227; Perf. and Plup. 
 193—195 ; in Dialects 228 ; 
 Pres. and Impf. 196 ; verbs De- 
 nom.. Frequent., Imitat., Intens., 
 Fact, Desid. 232. 
 
 Verbs active, with Mid. Put 198 ; 
 those which have both an active 
 and middle form for the Put. 
 198, E. 
 
 Verb Act. Trans., Eeflex., Kecip., 
 Pass., Intrans., Mid. 248 — 251. 
 
 Verb finitum and infinitum 105, E. 
 
 Verbal adjectives in tos and rt'os 
 234. 1, (i) ; PI. instead of Sing. 
 241, 3 ; Construction 284, 3, (12). 
 
 Verb characteristic 108, 5. 
 
 Versification 349. 
 
 Vowels 4 ; change 8 — 16 ; weaken- 
 ing or attenuation of 16, 2 ; in- 
 terchange in the Dialects 201; 
 change in the Dialects 205 — 207 
 
 Weakening of vowels 16, 2. 
 
 Zeugma 346, 3. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
II. GREEK INDEX. 
 
 Abbke VIATIONS. Adr. adverb ; adj. adjective ; Comp. compare ; comp. com- 
 pared ; c. a. with the accusative ; c. d. with the dative ; c. g. with the genitiue ; c 
 ml. with the infinitive ; c. part, with the participle ; coll. collective ; con. cimstruction ; 
 Dec. declension ; dec. declined ; euph. euphonic ; ins. iTistead of; int. intensive ; 
 intr. intransitive ; pers. personai ; prep, preposition ; priy. privative ; E. remark ; 
 trans, transitive. 
 
 K pure 43, 1, (a) ; a priv., 
 coll., int. 236,E.3, (b); 
 a euph. 16, 10. 
 
 hya^os comp. 84, 1. 
 
 ayiXXtahai c. dat. 285, 
 1, (1); c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 ayavoKTciv c. d. 285, 1, 
 (1); c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
 
 iyaTrfij' c. a. and d. 274, 
 R. 1; c. d. 285,1, (1); 
 c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
 
 Hyaff^ai c. gen. and ace. 
 
 273, E. 20; Tu^ii twos 
 
 274, 1, and E. 2. 
 ayyeWetv c. Inf. and part. 
 
 311, 10. 
 a-yyeAAcTat pers. ins. c. a. 
 
 and inf. 307, E. 6. 
 Syc referring to several 
 
 persons 241, E. 13. 
 aymuv c. part. 310, 4, (a). 
 ayoptiCety c. g. 275, 3. 
 ayuievs dec. 57, E. 2. 
 SyX' <=. g. 273, E. 9. 
 &yc»v, with, 312, E. 10. 
 ayaii/lCecr&aiC.i.2Si,3 (2). 
 aSalis c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
 aSe\(t>6s c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 aSiKeTv c. a. 279, 1 ; c. two 
 
 ace. 280, 2 ; c. part. 310, 
 
 4, (g)- 
 arjSdi;/ dec. 55, E. 2. 
 'Aftiims dec. 212, 7. 
 Ri see et ; at ytip c. inf. 
 
 306, E. 11, (d). 
 aiSeTa^at c. a. 279, 5; c. 
 
 part, and inf. 311, 14. 
 aiSolos comp. 82, 1, (d). 
 »i5(is dec. 60, (b). 
 
 aXp^ij/ Tiva iiiyav etc., 
 
 280, 4. 
 alp^tv. c. g. 274, 2. 
 alpeiffbai c. two a. 280, 4. 
 ala-^dm/iat ins. the perf. 
 
 255, E. 1. 
 aiV^d^'Eo'i&ai c. g. and a. 
 
 273, 5, E. 19; c. part. 
 
 310, 4, (a). 1 
 
 ataaetp c. a. 279, E. 5. 
 aiaxpis comp. 83, II. 
 ai(Txi5*'€(7S'ai c. a. 279, 5 ; 
 
 c.d. 285,1. (1); c.part. 
 
 and inf 311, 14. 
 airetv c. two a. 280, 3. 
 aiTiao-Sai c. g. 274, 2. 
 aXrws fl/JLi c. inf 306,1, (c). 
 aK6\ov^os, •^'if, -MSf -^Ti- 
 
 Kos c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
 aKovTi^ein c. g. 273, E. 7. 
 aKoietv, audivisse, 255, 
 
 E. 1. 
 aKoiety c. g. and a. 273, 5, 
 
 (f) and E. 19; to obey, 
 
 c. g. and d. 273, E. 18; 
 
 c. inf, and part. 311, 1. 
 oKcpoT^- c. g. 275, 1. 
 &KpaTos 82, I, (e). 
 oKpoSffS-ai c. g. 273, 5, (f ) 
 
 and R. 19. 
 a.Kyui' c. d. 285, 1, (1). 
 a\yiiv6s comp. 84. i. 
 aKe^eivc. d. 284, 3, (7). 
 aMeis dec. 57, E. 2. 
 aA-is c. g. 273, 5, (b), 
 aA.((rK:e(rS-aic.p.310,4, (b). 
 aWd 322, 6; in a ques- 
 tion ib. ; aAAa yap 324, 
 
 E. 1. 
 ^\/Va, £a\o(, ot isAAo(,witli- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 out Kttl in a series 325, 
 
 (e) ; oAA' ij {oiiK, ovSkv 
 
 oAA' ij ; ouSev ^Ao, dAA' 
 
 ^ ; t£ SaAo, aAA' ^ ; ££aAo 
 
 Ti, aAA' ^) 322, E. 10. 
 aAAc^TTeiy, -ea-^at c. g. 
 
 275, 3. 
 oAA'^Awi' dec. 89 ; use of 
 
 302, E. 7. 
 SaAo or SaAo ti ^ ellipti- 
 cal 346, 2, (d). 
 aAAoios c. g.'271, 3. 
 ^AAos &\Kov (SaAos SAAo- 
 
 Aev) with another Nom. 
 
 266, 3. 
 SAAo ti ij and SaAo ti in 
 
 a question: nonne 344, 
 
 5, (g). 
 aAAoVpios c. g. 271. 3. 
 oAs dec. 54, (a) and E. 1. 
 oAavcu c. g. 274, 2. 
 oAeoj/ dec. 56, E. 1. 
 SAms dec. 48, E. 1. 70, A, 
 
 (a).72, (b). 
 o/io c. d. 289, E.; with 
 
 part. 312, E. 6; c. d. 
 
 and part. 312, E. 5. 
 afiaprdvciv c. g. 271, 2 ; c 
 
 part. 310, 4, (g). 
 afielPeiv, -effS-ai c. g. 275 
 
 3; c. a. 279, 1. 
 afisti/av 84, 1. 
 a/ieAeii/ c. g. 274, 1 ; c 
 
 inf 306, 1, (a). 
 ajU^;^ay(Js et/ii c. inf. ins, 
 
 a^'flXavSv iiTTL c. a. et 
 
 inf. 307, E. 6. 
 S^oipos c. g. 273, 3. (b). 
 a;tiu>'€i>' c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
 a^^iprep. 295, 1, (2); c. 
 
GKEEK INDEX. 
 
 603 
 
 i. in a pregnant signif. 
 
 ins. c. a. 300, 3, (a). 
 Vfi irepl 300, R. 1. 
 ifuftemvyat c. two a. 
 
 280, 3. 
 liupis^-rrritv o.d. 284,3, (2). 
 ttivpa dec, 99, R. 
 kv- priv. 236, E. 3, (b). 
 &v 260; c. ind. fut. 260, 
 
 2, (1) ; ind. impf.,plup. 
 
 and aor. 260, (2) and 
 
 333, 7 jc.subj. 260,(3); 
 
 c. opt. 260, (4) ; c. inf. 
 
 and part. 260, (5) ; po- 
 sition and repetition of 
 
 &v 261. [2, (3), (d). 
 &v with eonjunctions 260, 
 S^/Kf 261, K. 3. 
 S;* with the relative 333, 3. 
 av in Protasis 340, 6. 
 in omitted witli the Opt. 
 
 260, E. 7; with Pret. 
 
 Ind. omitted 260, R. 3 
 
 and 6. 
 &y ins. iiv, which see. 
 iva TOC. 53, R. 4. 
 iva inst. of hviiTTriSti 31, 
 
 E. 3. 
 hi prep. 290, 1. 
 amfii\\i<rSiai c. inf. 306, 
 , 1, (a). 
 
 iLvayiciQitv Tivi. ti 278, 4. 
 ij'aKayyiifeii' c. a. 278, 3. 
 avafiifivtiffKeiv c. two a. 
 
 280, 3. 
 &i/a^ dec. 54, (c). 
 mSdveiv c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
 otveTrtiTT-fifuoj' c. g. 273, 5, 
 
 (e). 
 Scei; c. g. 271, 3. 
 ifex^ff^ai c. g. 275, 1. 
 avfxfcrAai c. inf. 311, 15; 
 
 c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
 S««{s) 25, 4, (c). 
 au'lip dec. 55, 2 ; to denote 
 
 employment {avlip, lidf- 
 
 Tis) 264, R. 3. 
 avmirdiiii c. d. 285, 1. 
 avuTTopflv c. two a. 280, 3. 
 avTex^ffSiai c. g. 273, 3, 
 
 (b). 
 MiTi prep. 287, 1. 
 hvTiiC^iv c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
 aPTi\an$aj'eadiU e. g. 273, 
 
 3, (b); 
 
 AvTiOS and avrioy c. g. 273, 
 
 E. 9. 
 ivTiT<Merffai«c.g.273,3,(b). 
 
 aydoyeuv dec. 48. 
 
 Sii6s ei/u c. inf. 307, R. 6 
 
 &^t6s, a^ius, Si^iovyf -oCtr- 
 
 Siai c. g. 275, 3 ; &^i6s 
 
 Tw6s elui Tici 284, 3, 
 
 (10) (b). 
 ofioDv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 kivayopeieiv (eS, Kaxus) c. 
 
 a. 279, 2; c. inf. 306, 1, 
 
 (a). 
 OTTaiSeuToj c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
 oiroiTEri' c. two a. 280, 3. 
 iTroAAdTTeii' c. g. 271, "2; 
 
 -etr&ai c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 (f). 
 hravTaii c- g. 273, R. 9 ; 
 
 e.d. 284, 3, (1). 
 ItTtsiSiriv c. g. 273, R. 19 ; 
 
 c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
 AiTEiireu' c. part. 310, 4, (e). 
 &ireipos e.g. 273, 5, (e). 
 aTreipas ^x^'" ''■ g- ^^3, 5, 
 
 aizex^iv, ctirex^iTi^at c. g- 
 271, 2. 
 
 hrurT^v e. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
 
 ottAoCs, -^, -oCy dec. 77. 
 
 anKovs comp. 82, I, (b). 
 
 airii prep. 288, 1 ; with 
 pregnant sense ins. tv 
 c. d. 300, 3, (c) ; (o7r<i 
 with the art. ins. Iv 
 {ol airh TTis &yopas 
 &l/^panroi aKe(pvyoi')300f 
 
 4, (a). 
 
 awh — EVe/ra 300, R. 2. 
 aTroSe'xEO'c^i" c. g. 273, 
 
 E. 20. 
 anoSlSoa-Srai c. g. 275, 3. 
 aiTo^i^pda'Keii' e. a, 379, 3. 
 B7roA.oileiy c. g. 273,5, (c). 
 oiroXoyeJir&ai c. d. 284, 3, 
 
 (7). 
 'AiroWav dec. '53, 4, 1, 
 
 (a); 56, E. 1. 
 aTTOTreipofr^at c. g. 273, 
 
 5, (g). 
 Imowpd 300, E, 1. 
 imopsiv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 airoarepiiv c. g. 271, 2; 
 
 Tira 280, 3, and E. 3. 
 aTTiKTTlX^uv c.g.273,E.16. 
 a,iroffTp4(pe(r^ai c. g. 279, 
 
 E. 3. 
 awo<l>aiveti' c. part, and inf. 
 
 311, 11. 
 airocftsiryety c. a. 279, 3. 
 
 oirpeirSs c. d. 284, 3, (5). 
 HirTca^M c. g. 273, 3, (b) 
 &pa 324, 3. 
 
 apa ins. fipa 324, E. 5. 
 Spo interrogative 344, 5, 
 
 apiaKiUi Tiyti 279, 1 ; ip- 
 isKiaSiai e. d. 284. 3, 
 (5); c. dat. of the in- 
 strument 285, 1, (1). 
 
 kpityuv e. d. 284, 3, (7). 
 
 "ApTjj dec. 59, E. 2. 
 
 i.piaTos 84, 1. 
 
 'ApuTTOcfidyiris dec. 59, E. 2. 
 
 apKelcr^ai c. d. 285, 1,(1). 
 
 apii6TT(iv c, d. 284, 3, (5). 
 
 opyeio-S-oi c. inf. 306, l,(b). 
 
 api'ijf 55, E. 3. 
 
 oLp^dfieyos Rirrf tlj/os, par- 
 timlarly 312, E. 3. 
 
 fipXEU'i io begin, c. g. 271, 
 4 ; io rufe, c. g. 275, 1. 
 
 &pXetrAai c. g. 271, 4 ; c. 
 part. 310,4, (f); c.part. 
 and inf. 311, 16. 
 
 apxi^^vos, in the herjin- 
 ning, originaUi/, 312, 
 E, 3. 
 
 affiffiiti c. a. 279. 1. 
 
 fKTKOV, affK6fi7]lf 221. 
 
 fiff/iej/oj comp. 82, E. 6. 
 
 &(r(ra, acrtra 93. 
 
 affT^p dec. 55, E. 3. 
 
 c(.(TTpdirTeiv c. a. 278, 3. 
 
 KiTTu dec. 63. 
 
 oral ins. yrat 144, E. 1. 
 
 ardp 322, 7. 
 
 Ste c. part. 312, E. 13. 
 
 oTEpor 10, E. 2. 
 
 "AtAo Voc. 53, E. 2. 
 
 KTo ins. yro 144, E. 1. 
 
 arpefiais) 25, 4, (c). 
 
 &TTa and ctrra 93. 
 
 a5, avrdp 322, 7. 
 
 aftrfica with part. 312., E.6. 
 
 am6s dec. 91 ; Dial. 207, 
 
 4, (c). 
 aliT6s use 302, 4; 303, 
 
 3 ; with the art. 246, 
 
 3, 8. 
 avrSs in aiiTo7s 'linrois, to- 
 gether with the horses etc. 
 
 283, 2, (a) ; 6 a\n6s c. 
 
 d. 284, 3, (4). 
 auToD dec. 88 ; use 302, 2. 
 h.'^aip^ui^a.i c. two a. and 
 
 Tivd riyos, Tty6s ti 280^ 
 
 3, and E. 3. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
604 
 
 GKEEK INDEX. 
 
 HfSroi/os comp. 82, E. 6. 
 i.<pUvai, -UaSrai c. g. 271 , 2. 
 &(pva{s) 25,4, (c). 
 Sxfte<r&t" c. d.285, 1, (1) ; 
 c. part. 310, 4, (c). 
 
 B euph. 24, 2. 
 
 paivew iroSa and the like 
 
 279, K. 5. 
 
 Capites (pepeiv C. d. 285, 
 (1) ; eiri Ti« and c. a. 
 285, R. 1. [(e). 
 
 0apive<r&ai c. part. 310, 4. 
 
 8a(n\ei€tv c. g. 275, 1 . 
 
 BairiKeis dec. 57, 2. 
 
 BaCKatvety e. d. and a. 
 284, 3, (b). 
 
 BoTTcai 212, 3, 
 
 Bo5 97, 2. 
 
 /SeAraTos 84, 1. 
 
 pi^Tepos 84, 1. 
 
 PeKTtffTOS, ^eKritav 84, 1. 
 
 fiKiiTTUv c. a. 279, 1. 
 
 ^At^TTTefj/ /ieyc^Aa, etc. c. a. 
 
 280, R. 1. 
 PAe'ireiv c. a. 278, 3. 
 PorjafTvc. d. 284, 3, (7). 
 fio^jias Dec. 44, E. 2. 
 fii/iiAei e. subj. 259, 1, (b), 
 jSoiiAeiraaic. inf. 306,1, (a). 
 gouAeiieo-aoi c. inf. 306, 1, 
 
 (a) ; e. Sttwj and ind. 
 
 fut. 330, 6. 
 Bovs dec. 57, 2. 
 Operas dec. 61, R. 1. 
 /3p»6<»' c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 BpijiomStai c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
 
 ri£Aa dec. 54, (c). 
 yiXais dec. 212, 7. 
 7i{/) 324, 2 ; in an ansivpr 
 
 344, 7. 
 ytwT^p.dec. 55, 2. 
 76 317. 2 ; in an answer 
 
 344, '7. 
 7€Aaj/ c. a. 278, 3. 
 7e'Attis dec. 71, B, (c). 
 yin^iv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 761'vav, parentem esse 255, 
 
 R. 1. 
 7^ros dec. 61 (b). 
 yepaios comp. 82, I, (c). 
 yipas dec. 54, R. 4. 
 yiveiVt yevea^at c. g. 273, 
 
 5, (c). 
 ySp«s dec. 54, R. 4. 
 ytyvetrdai syncopated, 
 
 155, 2 ; with the sense 
 
 of the Pros. 255, R. 1 ; 
 
 c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. g. 
 
 posses. 273, 2 ; c. g. 
 
 partit. 273, 3, (a) ; o.d. 
 
 284, 3, (9). 
 yiyyerai fiol rt BovKofievta, 
 
 iKirofjidvif 284, 3,10, (e) ; 
 
 yiyv^rai and an abstract 
 
 substantive with an inf. 
 
 306, 1, (d). 
 yiyviiaKeiv c. g. 273, R. 20. 
 
 7: TIM 285, 1, (3) ; c 
 
 part. 310, 4, (a) ; c. inf 
 
 and part. 311, 4. 
 ytyvtjKTKta c. uis and gen. 
 
 abs. 312, R. 12. 
 ytyvtittTKw ins. %yv(aKa 255. 
 
 R. 1. 
 ■yX-ltX''"' dec. 56, E. 1. 
 yXixeaStai c. g.273. 3, (b). 
 y6pv dec. 54, (c) ; 68, 1. 
 ypavs dec. 57, 2. 
 ypi^sa-Stat c. g. 274, 2. 
 yviji.v6s c. g. 271, 3. 
 yvvii dec. 68, 2. 
 
 A enphon. 24, 2. 
 
 Sd.€p Voc. 53,4, (1) (a).' 
 
 Ba(315, 7. 
 
 SaU<TS!ai c. two ace. 280, 3. 
 
 Sinpv and idxpuov 70 B. 
 
 Sa<rvs e. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 
 Se 322, in a question R. 6. 
 
 Se suffix 235, 3 and R. 3 ; 
 
 after a demons. 95, (c). 
 5'SoiKeVai e. inf 306, l,(a). 
 U7c. g.273, 5, (b); c. ace. 
 
 and dat. 279, R. 4 ; c. 
 
 inf 306, 1, (d) ; c. d. 
 
 and ace. e. inf. 307, 
 
 K. 3. 
 »€? 0-' Sttus 330, R. 4. 
 SeiKvivai c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 (b) ; e'. part, and inf. 
 
 311, 11.' 
 SeTi/a dec. 93, R. 2. 
 Seiv6s c. inf. 306, 1 (c). 
 SeTiroi c. a. 279, 5. 
 Sero-Soi e. g. 273, 5, (b) ; 
 
 c. inf 306, 1, (a). 
 Sefias e. g. 208, R. 
 SfvSpos dec. 72, (a). 
 Sciras dec. 61, (a). 
 Sdpxea-^ai c. a. 278, 3. 
 Seo-irtf^Eij' c. g. 275, (1). 
 d^^Tr6r7js dee. 45, 6. 
 Seiici;- c. a. 278. 2. 
 Sii^epos c. g. 275, 2. 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 Sex^a-^at e. two ace. 280, 
 
 4 ; TiW Ti 284, R 4. 
 S^i 95, (b); 315, 1.2. 
 S^a€y315, 5. 
 SrjXoy elycUt iroiett' with 
 part. 310, 4, (b) ; 5i;A<if 
 el/u ttotup T( 310, R. 3. 
 Sfi\6s ei/ii Hti 329, E. 4. 
 StjAoCc c. g. and a. 273, 
 E. 20 ; c. part. 310, 4, 
 (b) ; c. inf. and part. 
 311, 12. 
 AriiiiiTiip dec. 55, 2. 
 Ari/ioaAftiris dec. 59, E. 2. 
 Sii-irore 95, (b). 
 Sifirov&ev 315, 6. 
 Sfira 315, 3. 
 Sio Prep. 291. 
 5ia 7rpi( 300, R. 1. 
 Sidysw e. part. 310, 4, (1 ). 
 Siaylyviirdaj. c. fart. 310, 
 
 4,/l). 
 
 fiiaSexctr^ai, 5i(iSoxof, 5i- 
 
 oSox^ c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
 
 SiaSiUvtu c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 
 SiiSoxos e. g. and d. 273, 
 
 3, (b); 284,3,(3). 
 Simpeiv c. two aec. 280, 3. 
 BtaKeio-^ai T^iv yj/da/lftr 
 
 with as and gen. abs. 
 312, R. 12. 
 dm\4yecr^ai c. d. 284, 3, 
 
 (1). 
 BiaKiTT^u Xpovov 312, E.. 3. 
 StaWoTTety c. part. 310, 
 
 4, (f ). 
 StoAAaTTeij/, -oTTec^at C. 
 
 d. 284, 3, (1). 
 SiafjLelBea-^ai c. g. 275, 3. 
 Siavfiaetv c. two aec. 280, 3. 
 diavo^^a^ai c. Sirois <:. ind- 
 
 fut. 330, 6 ; c. air and 
 
 g. abs. 312, E. 12. 
 SiairpaTTfadcu c. inf 306, 
 
 1, (c). 
 SioTcAeu' c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 (b). 
 Sia<p4pftv c. g. 271, 2. 
 Stiipopos c. g. 271, 3 ; c. d. 
 
 284, 3, (4). 
 Sid<t>avos c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
 SiaxpTJo'^at c. d. and ace 
 
 285, 1, (2). 
 SiSaiTKcii' c. two ace. 280, 
 
 3; e. inf 306, 1, (c). 
 SiSoi/ai e. g. partit. 273 
 3, (b) ; c. g. price, 275^ 
 3. 
 
CREEK INDEX 
 
 60a 
 
 leiv c. g. 271, 2. 
 
 Ifeii/ c. g. 274, 2; 5i- 
 
 ofE<rS'aic.d.284,3, (2). 
 
 u Js et/u c. inf.,personal 
 
 IS. SlKaiSv iiTTL c. a. 
 
 nd inf. 307, R. 6. 
 
 uovy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
 (c 0. g. 288, E. 
 
 (^€0/ c. g. 271, 2. 
 
 ■I see 8ti. 
 
 ic. g. 271, 3. 
 
 1 and Sii^os 70, B. 
 
 ^» c. g. 274, 1. 
 
 ceiv c. g. 274, 2. 
 
 Er» c. inf. 306, 1, ,(b)^ 
 
 Med, pers. 307, R. 7. 
 
 / dec. 54, (c) and 68, 3. 
 
 Kpopeii/ c. a. 279, 1. 
 
 TCTeiiEU' c. a. 279, 3. 
 
 rT60-S-at c. g. 273, 3, 
 
 b). 
 
 lo-aat e. it. 279, 6 ; c. 
 
 if. 306, 1, (c). 
 
 it6s el/u c. inf. 306, 1, 
 
 e) ; personal ins. Sui/o- 
 
 6if eVri c. ace. and inf. 
 
 07, E. 6. 
 
 dec. 99, 5^ with the 
 lubst. in the PI. 241, 
 1. 10. 
 
 in composition, 236, 
 I. 3, (b), (;3). 
 (epaiveiv c. a. 279, 5 ; 
 .d. 285, 1, (1). 
 eav, gratis 278, K. 2. 
 uiT^ttl Tivi Ti and rivd 
 m 279, K. 2. 
 MEus dec. 57, E. 2. 
 
 / c. inf. 306, 1, (a), 
 cons. 339, 2, II, (b) ; 
 Aether, an 344, 4 ; iliv 
 E ins. iay 8e f4^ 340. 4 ; 
 j;>' Ko/ ib. 7. 
 TE — «i/te323, I. 
 dee. 56, E. 2. 
 
 Xi, EttTO ins. tlVTal, 7]V- 
 
 0, ovro 220, 13. 
 
 row dec. 88 ; use 302,2. 
 
 r 215, E. 
 
 ICiiy eg. 273, E. 9; 
 
 . d. 284, 3, (2). 
 
 is c. g. 273, E. 9 ; c. 
 
 . 284, 3, (2). 
 
 lAEii/cg. 274, 2;c.d. 
 
 84, 3, (6). 
 
 mriis c. g. 275, 1. 
 
 (Kvs dec. 63, E. 5. 
 
 4yii dec. 87; use, 302, 1. 
 
 e7ai7E 95, (a). 
 
 ^^os fiDm 4iis 215, R. 
 
 i^e\ew c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
 El ins. ri aug. 122, 3, 
 
 El ins. i-edup. 123, 3. 
 
 61 II. Pers. ins. p 116, 11. 
 
 El cons. 339. 
 
 «i concessive 340, 7 ; in 
 
 wishes 259, 3, (b). 
 El an, whether 344, 5, (i). 
 ei7«ip259, 3, (b). 
 EI 5' &yf 340, 3. 
 El 5e' ellipt^ 340, 3 ; e* Se 
 
 ins. El Se nil and ei Se 
 
 fvn ins. El Se' 340, 4. 
 El Kal 340, 7. 
 Elf (cE see iiv, 
 ei lii] iron. 324, 3, (a) ; ei 
 
 iJl except^ 340, 5 ; ei yii^ 
 
 ei, nisi, si, ib. 
 Eia, Ei«, EiE, Eiav opt. ins. 
 
 oifii and etc. 116, 9. 
 eiSeVai c. g. 273, R. 20 ; c. 
 
 partic. 310, 4, (a); dif- 
 ference between inf. 
 
 and part. 311,2; c. dir 
 ■ and g. abs. 312, E. 12. 
 E0E in wishes 259, 3, (b| 
 
 and E.3, 6.;c.inf.386, 
 
 E. 11. 
 eiiciiCeiv tI tij/i 285, 1, (3). 
 ErKEiy c. g. 271, 2; c. d. 
 
 284, 3, 2. 
 eiK6s, eiKOTcos c. dat. 284, 
 
 3, (5). 
 eiKciv dec. 55, E. 2. 
 e'i/j.ev, eiTE, EiEy ins. eiPi)- 
 
 fiEy, etc 116, 7. 
 Eiyai as copula 238, 6 ; as 
 
 an essential word (to be, 
 
 to exist, etc.) 238, E. 4 ; 
 
 with adv. 340, E. 4; 
 
 (Ivai with a part. ins. 
 
 of a simple verb 238, 
 
 E.5; omitted 238, E.6,7. 
 elyai apparently unneces- 
 sary with oeofM^ety, 
 
 -Efl-aai 269, E. 1. 
 eIcoi c. g. orig. 273, 1 ; c. 
 
 g. possess. 273, 2; c.g. 
 
 partit. 273, 3, (a) ; c.d. 
 
 284, 3, (9) ; eTj-oi and a 
 
 subs. c. inf. 306, 1, (d). 
 EiVe' referring to several 
 
 persons 241, E. 13, (a). 
 Eiireii' eS, kokus riva 279, 
 
 2 ; Koiai, KcAd c. a. 2S0, 2. 
 
 EHrei)' c. d. 284, 3, (Ij; c. 
 d. and a. c. inf.307, E. 3. 
 
 etpyeiv, -(tSku c. g. 271, 2. 
 
 El's [is) Prep. 290, 2 ; in 
 pregnant sense ins. ir 
 c. d. 300, 3, (b) ; with 
 the ar^t. ins. 4v (^ \lii.ini 
 ixSiSoi is Tr)i/ ^ipriv 
 JsAtfiiriv) 300,4, (b). 
 
 Eiy, ;iiia, eV dec. 99, 5. 
 
 Eli with Superl. 239, R. 2. 
 
 Ei'siiyEU' c. g. 274, 2. 
 
 eurav ins. eaav iu plup. 
 116,6. 
 
 eisopav, to permit o. part. 
 _ 310, 4, (e). [3. 
 
 eisTrpdrTeiv c. two.aoc.280, 
 
 elTct with Part. 312, R.8; 
 eIto iu a quest. 344, 5, 
 (e). 
 
 eTte— e^T-E 323, E. 1 ; ei— 
 Eire, ^iT6 — £1 5e' etc. 323, 
 E. 1 ; in an indirect 
 question 344, 5, (k). 
 
 eiaSrivai c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
 iK, ii 15, 3; Prep. 288,2; 
 in Preg. sense ins. iy 
 c. d. 300, 3, (c) ; iie 
 with the Art. ins. 4y 
 (oi iK TTjs ayopas 
 &v^pwTrot SiTTetpvyov) 
 300, 4, (a). 
 
 ixds c. g. 271, 3. 
 
 e/cacTToj with the Art. 246, 
 6. 
 
 iKSiiiv c. two ace. 280, 3. 
 
 ixe^dey with the Art. ins. 
 ^Kei (5 iKe'i^e y Tr6\e- 
 fj.as Sevpo rijel) 300,E. 8. 
 
 iKcTyos dec. 91 ; Dial.217, 
 4, (d); use 303, 2; with 
 the Art. 246, 3. 
 
 iKeiyoa-l{y) 15, 1. (e). 
 
 iKfiae in Preg. sense ins 
 ^(cEi300, E. 7. 
 
 EK7|T1 c. g. 288, E. 
 
 iKXetireiy c. part. 310, 4 
 
 (f); 
 iKi!MiTT€<rSttt.i c. a. 279, 5 ; 
 
 c. d. 285, 1. 
 iKdTTiviu c. a. 279, E. 3. 
 cKTpeireaS'tu c. a. 279,E.3. 
 eK^iiv eJvat 306, E. 8. 
 ^KaTTov without ^ 323, 
 
 R. 4. 
 lAaTToDirftoi c. g. 27.5, 1. 
 ihiTTiov 84, 6. 
 ihAx^cros 84, 6. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
606 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 iXeyXeiv c. part.310,4,{b). 
 i\4yxtfTTOs 84, R. 4. 
 e\eeri/ c. g. 274, I, (c) ; 
 
 c. a. 279, 5. 
 i\eii^epoSf iKev^epovv c. 
 
 g. 271, 2, 3. 
 eAiVireii/ ^e6v 279, IJ. 5. 
 f'A.^H's dec. 54, (e). 
 e'Airifeu' c. d. 285, 1 (1) ; 
 
 c. inf. 306, 1, (b). 
 ifiavTou dec. 88 ; use 
 
 302. 2. 
 
 t/t(is ins. fiov, 302, R. 2. 
 f;.7ra(j) 25, 4, (c). 
 iiareipos c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
 e;UTr6\ci^6tr^ai c. g. 273, R. 
 
 9; c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
 ipm'nrXaiTdai c. part. 310 
 
 4, (d). 
 euTrpaa-^fP c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 ip.<l>epris c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
 fv ins. Tjo'ai' 220, 14. 
 If Prep. 289, 1 ; in Preg. 
 
 sense ins. eh 300, 3, 
 
 (a)_; c. g. 263, (b). 
 iif ToTs, 4y rats c. Superl. 
 
 (e.g. -irpSiToi) 239, R. 2. 
 ivavTiov, -ios c. g. and d. 
 
 373, R. 9 and 284, 3,(2). 
 ivnei\s c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 tySoSiev with the Art. ins. 
 
 iviov (t)/c evSoS-ev Tpii- 
 
 TTEfax <()Ept) 300, R. 8. 
 h^iew c. two ace. 280, 3. 
 cyeBpevetp c. a. 279, 1. 
 EVe/ca, eVekei/, E'/fE/fa, eV- 
 
 veKeVfOiifeKa C. g. 288, R. 
 EJ-Eo-Tiv c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
 EVS^UjUEriT^oi c.g.273,R.20; 
 
 c. part. 310, 4 (a). 
 ?i/i ins. E;'E(rTi 31, R. 3. 
 ^wo£?>' c. g. 273, R. 20. 
 iyox>M e. a. 279, 1 ; c. d. 
 
 284.3, (6). 
 
 (iiTavS>ii with Part. 312, 
 
 R. 7. 
 ivrpiirfaStai 273, 3, (b). 
 ii, Prep. 288, 2 ; see eV. 
 i|o(<))i/7|j with Part. 312, 
 
 R. 6. 
 i^dpX^iv c. g. 271, 4. 
 e'|e\e'7yeiv c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 (b). 
 riEo-Tii/ c. inf. 306, 1, (c); 
 
 c. d. and a. c. inf. 307, 
 
 R. 3. 
 ifsTofEiv c. g, 373, R. 20; 
 
 c. two ace. 280, 3. 
 
 E^s c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; c. 
 
 d. 284, 3, (3). 
 IliVroo-aoi c. g. 271, 2. 
 i^opKOvv c. a. 279, 4. 
 E^w c. g. 271, 3. 
 iomevat c. d. 284, 3, (4) ; 
 
 c. inf. 307, R. 7.; c. 
 
 part. 310, R. 2 ; c. inf. 
 
 and part. 311, (9). 
 Usins.ip.6s, o-((y302,R.8. 
 Effoirai' c. g. and a. 273, 
 
 R.20; TtvdTivos 21i,\. 
 iiraipeiv Tiv6. Tt 278, 4. 
 ETToipEir&ai c. d. 285,1, (1 ). 
 iTTotaaeiv c. g. 273, R. 7. 
 iTraiTiaffSnu c. g. 274, 2. 
 eVcSaIeis dec. 213, 19. 
 ETTiii' see irav under 2te. 
 eirapKciv c. g. 273, 3, (b) ; 
 
 c.d. 284, 3, (7). 
 ^TTEi see 3te ; in interrog. 
 
 and imp. clauses 341, 
 
 R.4. [(b). 
 
 eVe£7eo-»oi c. g. 273, R. 7, 
 ^TTEiSav see" Stoj" under 
 
 gTE. 
 
 iiretS-rj see Ste. 
 
 ETTEiTa in a question 344', 
 
 5, (e). 
 Eir£iTawithpart.312,R. 8. 
 iirclUvm c. g. 274, 2. 
 EirEo-aai c. d. 284, 3, (3). 
 iiritv see ^Trav. 
 Eiri ins. ETTEO-Ti 31, R. 3. 
 eVi Prep. 296 ; c. dat. in 
 
 Preg. sense ins. c. a. 
 
 300, 3, (a) ; c. g. and 
 
 part. 312, K. 5. 
 4m$i\Ke(r^ai c. g.273,R.7. 
 E'jriSofiSs EiVi c. inf. 307, 
 
 R. 6. 
 EiriduyitEu' c. g. 274, (1); 
 
 c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 eVikoAeTi' c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
 4TriKovpe7v c. d. 284, 3, (7). 
 iiriXap.pipe<rdai C. gen. 
 
 273, 3, (b). 
 em\ay^dvca-^at c. g. 273, 
 
 5,(e);c.part.310,4,(c). 
 iwiXelireii/ c. a. 279, 4 ; c. 
 
 part. 310, 4, (f). 
 iwtpiaUa-dm c. g.273,R. 7. 
 iTTip.eKea'^at, -eTa&ai c. g. 
 
 274, 1 ; c. oirois c. ind. 
 fut. 330, 6. 
 
 iivlireSos comp. 82, R. 6. 
 iirLTrk7ia-(r€iv c. d. and ace. 
 284,3,(6). 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 ^TTiffKiiTrTeo bai c. g. 27 
 iiriffrdn^vos c. g,273,5 
 iTr'uTTairSicu. c. g. 273,1 
 
 c. panic. 310, 4, (a^ 
 
 part, and inf. 311, ! 
 
 &)s and gen. abs. '< 
 
 R. 12. 
 iiTKTTaTuv c. g. 275, I 
 iirnrTii/iav c. g. 273, 5, 
 iiri(rxi!v Xpivov 312, 1 
 ivLTdTTeiy c. d. 284, 3, 
 iiriTeWeii/ c.inf.306,1, 
 iiririiSeiosc. inf. 306, 1, 
 iniTiimvc. d. 284, 3, (i 
 iniTpeTTetv c. inf. and p 
 
 311, 15. 
 iTTiTpinreiety c. g. 275, 
 
 c. a. 279, 1. 
 iiTi(p^6y(as StcuceTff^cu c 
 
 274, 1_, (e). 
 intxeipety c.inf. 306, 1, 
 iirixiip'os c. g. 273, 3, ( 
 cTTOfieyas c. d. 284, 3, (i 
 iiroipiveiv Ttvd ri 278, 
 ^pSy, ipaaSrai c.g.274, : 
 4pydCetr^GU Ka\d, Kotfd 
 
 a. 280, 2. 
 epeV&oi c. two ace. 28C 
 ipeeivfiy c.two acc. 28C 
 eprjfios, ipijfiovv c. g 
 
 271, 2, 3. 
 ipTirieiv c. g. 271, 2. 
 ^pffEW c. d. 284, 3, (2) 
 miap.4vos comp. 82, 1, 
 iparav c. two acc. 28C 
 ipanrnZs ^x^^^ *^* S- 2^' 
 iaSrUiv c. g. and a. 27! 
 
 (c) and R. 15. 
 
 EO'KOI', EffKtfjttT^I/ 221. 
 
 EST* Sc see Ews. 
 
 EST6 see Ews. 
 
 E(rTi jUo£ Ti jSouAojuevQj S 
 
 3, (10) (c). 
 ?<rTi(Kce()c. inf. 306,1, 
 ^o-W with the PI. 241, 1 
 Eo-Tiv or, Si/ etc. 341, B 
 
 ^tTTlV 3t6, OTTOU, SttTJjSt 
 
 o5,r>'o,ly»o,j331,I 
 ^(TXaTos with the j 
 
 245, R. 5. 
 ETEpor in Crasis 10, B 
 
 c. g. 271, 3. < 
 
 in with the Comp. ; 
 
 R. 1. 
 ETi iroWf with the Co 
 
 239, R. 1. 
 Eu and e5 in the Aug. 
 
 R. ; 125, 2 
 
GJXEKK INDEX. 
 
 607 
 
 /etv, voiiTt/, etc. c. a. 
 ',2. 
 
 eiv c.part.310,4i(g). 
 6s dec. 57, R. 2. 
 '.ovl^sLy, evdaifioty c, 
 !74,l,(f) 
 comp. 82, I, |i\ 
 ETfiv c. a. 279, 2. 
 as comp. 82, R. 6. 
 :. g. 273, R. 9. 
 withPart.312, R. 6. 
 ieiff&ai c. a. 279, 1. 
 eT)/ c. a. 279, 2. 
 £?;/ c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 KIP, -ecr&at u. pai't. 
 I, 4, (b). 
 iei;/ c. a. 279, 1. 
 •eiy c. part.310,4,(g). 
 ■aai c. d. 284, 3, (ij; 
 nf. 306, 1, (b). 
 ■:(r&aic.g.273,5,(c). 
 s c. g. and d. 273, 3, 
 ;284, 3, (3). 
 aoi c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 elo-aai c. g. 273, 3, 
 I. 
 
 ivc. part. 310,4, (e). 
 , Itf §Te c. ind. fut. 
 inf. fut. 341, R. 5. 
 c. inf. 306,1, (c) ; o. 
 rt. ■iroii]iras exf 310, 
 
 H- . , 
 
 eft, KdKas, etc. c. g. 
 
 '■ (^)- . . 
 
 yvili-iiv 0. ws and g. 
 
 5. 312, R. 12. 
 
 >a( c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 h comp. 83, II. 
 •possum, c. inf. 306, 1 , 
 
 \. 
 
 \-iipits, ((lAuapeiS 312, 
 
 9; %xav, with, 312, 
 
 10. 
 
 Ice. 48. R. 1. 
 
 onstruction 337. 
 
 riav 213, 14. 
 
 ffix 235, R. 3. 
 
 dec. 68, 4. 
 
 ;</ c. g. 274, 1 ; c. a. 
 
 9,1. 
 
 </c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
 :andfu7.<«'70,A,(b). 
 
 a,) ^ alteniativum, or, 
 J, 2; in a question 
 
 t, 5, (h)i-(b) a 
 
 iiparativum 323, 2 ; 
 
 after tlie omis.sion of 
 ^nSwoc 323) R. 3 ; omit- 
 ted with irxiov, irKetoi, 
 ^AofTO!/ in connection 
 with the numeral 323, 
 R. 4; with the Gen. 
 after a comparative 
 323, R. 5. 
 
 V ins. ti;* in PIup. 116, 6. 
 
 T) union vowel 237, R. 1. 
 
 ^ Kard or j^ irpiJj c, a. 
 323, 7. 
 
 ^ SsTe c. inf 341, 3, (a). 
 
 ^ 316, 2. 
 
 ^ fiV 316, 2. 
 
 ^ TTou 316, 2. 
 
 ^ with Sup. 343, R. 2. 
 
 ^ interrogative 344, 5. 
 
 i5 S"8j331,R. 1. 
 
 ^7frff&oi c. g. 273, 3, (a) ; 
 c. g. and d. 275, 1, and 
 R. 1 ; c. two a. 280, 4 ; 
 c. inf 306, 1, (b). 
 
 7]yefioveveiy c. g. and d. 
 275, I, andR. 1. 
 
 ^Se, and, 323, R. 2. 
 
 5i5eir&oi c. d. 285, 1, (1); 
 c. part. 310, 4, (cj. 
 
 ^Svfios comp. 82, R. 6. 
 
 ^SiJj comp. 83, 1. 
 
 ^KCiv ei, Ka\as etc. c. g. 
 274, 3, (b). 
 
 ^KltTTOS 216, 2. 
 
 ^Km, veni, 255, R. 2. 
 7l\Uos attracted 332, 7. 
 fljUeV— JiSe 323, R. 2. 
 ^/ii in compos. 236, R. 3, 
 
 V'"', W'" 87, R. 4. 
 ij/iiirus dee. 76, R. 2; rj 
 
 ^lufcrria t^j yTJs and tlie 
 
 like 264, R. 5, c. 
 5ifiojy 87, R. 4. 
 ^1/ see ^eJi/. 
 riviKa, when, see 8tc. 
 ^ipeV« comp 84, R. 3. 
 lipais dec. 60, (a), 
 ^ff&oi c. a. 279, R. 6. 
 TJffiraiv, Attic ^ittidv 84. 
 TJffO'wj' €i^t c. inf. 306, 1, 
 
 (c). 
 ijo-uxos comp. 82, I, (d). 
 ^TOi316, 2; iJTOi—ilSye 
 
 303, R. 2. 
 TITTaff^ai c. g. and iSirrf 
 
 Tims 275, ] , R. 2. 
 VTair&ai with the sense 
 
 of the Perf 255, R. 1. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 ^TTarf^ai c. part. 310, 4 
 
 (g). 
 ilXii dec. 60, (b). 
 ijiis dec. 60, (b). 
 
 0a\iji dec. 71, A. (a). 
 di/Aeii' c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
 dapjiitv c. a. and d. 279, 3, 
 
 and R. 3. 
 Stiaasiv c. a. 279, R. 6. 
 Sriaaaiv 83, 1. 
 ^firepo, etc. 10, R. 2. 
 ^aviid^eiy c. g. and a. 273, 
 
 R. 20; Ttvd Ticor 274, 
 
 1, (f) and R. 2 ; c. d. 
 
 285, 11); M Tin 285, 
 
 E. 1. 
 iavfjiaarhii iaov 332, R. 
 
 10. 
 ^iaaSrai c. g. 273, R. 20. 
 ^iKeiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 Stljus 73, 1, (c). 
 Stiv sufiSx 235, 3, and R. 
 
 1 and 2. 
 ftepoTreiJeu' c. a. 279, 1. 
 ^spdvuv dec. 68, 5. 
 »^>'315,4. i^Vf // (2, 
 Sti suffix 235,'3. ' ' 
 SfiyydveLv c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 ^viiaiceiv ins. Perf. 255, 
 
 R. I ; {m6 rivos 249, 3. 
 Srpiaffu 17, E. 4. 
 ap(f dec. 54, (c). 
 S>vydri]p dec. 55, 2. 
 i^uEij' iirtvlKia, yeye^KiUt 
 
 yd/JLOVs 278, 2. 
 &ii|UoO(r&ai c. g. 274, 1 ; 
 
 c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
 ^uireiieiv, ^t^TCTeiv t. a, 
 
 279, 1. 
 Sr^s dec. 60, (a). 
 
 I union- vowel 237, 1, and 
 
 R. 2. 
 iSe, referring to several 
 
 persons, 241, E. 13, (a), 
 iSios comp. 82, 1, (d). 
 iSios 0. g. 273, 2. 
 iSit^TT).! c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
 iSpis dec. 213, 7. 
 i€TO<, eTitti with the mean 
 
 ing of the Fut. 255 
 
 R. 3. 
 lepis c. g. 273, 2. 
 i'&.i(s) c. g. 273, E. 9. 
 i/cai/ifs c. inf. 306, 1, (c). 
 tKeTtveiv c. g. 273, R. 6 
 
 c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
508 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 iicyfiff^ttt c. g. 273, E. 6. 
 ^va, that, in order that 330. 
 'Im tI 344, E. 6. 
 tffos comp. 82, 1, (d). 
 liros c. g. and d. 273, 3, 
 
 (t), and 284, 3, (4). 
 iVropeo' c. two a. 280, 3. 
 tx^is dec. 62. 
 i;^iiD ins. ('x^pa 213, 11. 
 
 K movable 15, 4. 
 KoSrapos c. g. 271, 3. 
 KoSyiietv e. a. 279, E. 6. 
 KaAiTTdiiai c. two a. 
 
 280, 4. 
 Ko^opav, to permit, c. part. 
 
 310, 4, (e). 
 Kai 321, 1 ; with Sup.239, 
 
 R. S; witli part. 312, 
 
 E. 8;ito( ins. ore 321,1. 
 Kol yip 324, E. 1 and 3. 
 KoL idv, Kal €t 340, 7. 
 «a! /i^XiiTTii with Sup. 
 
 239. R. 2. 
 icai Ss ins. Kal oStos 331, 
 
 E. 1. 
 Ka) ou, fcai fi'fi 321, 2. 
 KoJ ToSra witli part. 312, 
 
 E. 8. 
 Koivep with part. 312,E.8. 
 Kalroi 322, 7 f with part. 
 
 312, E. 8. 
 KixuTTOs, Kimiwv, 84, 2. 
 KOKoXoye?;/, KaKOiroiuif c. 
 
 a. 279, 2. 
 Kami; comp. 84, 2. 
 KaK(!s fi|Uic.inf.306,l,(c). 
 KaKovpyeij/ C. a^ 279, 2. 
 vawws Aeycti', TTOiety, Spay 
 
 etc. c. a. 279, 2. 
 (ca\e7i» c. two a. 280, 4. 
 KoAAio'TeiJeH' c. g. 275, 1. 
 KcfWHTTOS, koAAW 84, 3. 
 Kcx\6s comp. 84, 3. 
 KuKoviiei/os, so called 264, 
 
 E. 1. 
 Kd\as dec. 48 ; 70, A, (a). 
 Kd/iiieivc. part. 310, 4,(e). 
 icSTreiTo with part. 312, 
 
 E. 8. 
 *ipa dec. 68, 6. 
 KapTepuv c.part.310,4,(e). 
 KaTii Prep. 292 ; Kori in 
 
 composition, construc- 
 _tion with 292, E. 
 t^To with part. 312, E. 8. 
 <aTaKO\>eiv, to obey, c. g. 
 
 273, B. 18 and 19. 
 
 KaraWiiTTeiv, -drTeff^ai, 
 
 c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
 Korafefjieti/ c. two a. 280,.3. 
 KaraTrK-fiTTetr^ai V. a. 279, 
 
 5; c. d. 285, i). 
 Karapair^cu c. d.284, 3,(1 ). 
 Kardpxeiv C. g. 271, 4. 
 KoTaxp^tr^ai c. d. and a. 
 
 285, 1, (2). 
 Karcfavrloi' c. g. 273, E. 9. 
 Karepyd^etrAai c. inf. 306, 
 
 1, (c). 
 Korexeiy c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 Karl]Koos c. g. and d. 273, 
 
 E. 18. 
 /C6, Key, see iv, 
 Ksivos see sKiivos. 
 KtiaStai c. a. 279, K. 6. 
 KeKiieiv e. inf. 306, 1, (a) ; 
 
 c. a. et inf. 307, E. 1. 
 Kev6s c. g. 271, 3. 
 Kepansovs 76, 1. 
 Kspas dec. 54, R. 4. 
 KfpUav 216, E. 2. 
 KeiSteiv c. two a. 280, 3. 
 K^5e<r&ai c. g. 274, 1. 
 K71V0S see ^Ketvos^ 
 kivSwevsiv c. inf. 306, 1, 
 
 (b). 
 kIs dec. 62. 
 K\eis dec. 68, 7. 
 KAe'os dec. 61, (b). 
 K\iiTT7is comp. 82, II. 
 K\7ipoyofAe7i/ c. g. 273, 3, 
 
 KXiieiJ' c. d. 284, E. 4. 
 Kvitpas dec. 61, R. 1. 
 Koivos^ Koivov(r^ai u. g. 
 273, 3. (b). 
 
 K0lv6Sf KOlJ'oCj'j.-Ouff^ai c. 
 
 d.284, 3, (1). 
 Kowavitv c. g. 273,3, (b) ; 
 
 u. d.284, 3, (1). 
 Koivuv6s dec. 72, (a). 
 Ko\a.Keieiv c. a. 279, 1. 
 KopEVfva-^ai c. g. 273, 5, 
 
 (c). 
 K6a!S dec. 212, 7. 
 KpareTv c. g. and a. 275, 1, 
 
 and R. 1. 
 KpareTv c. part.310, 4, (g). 
 
 KpaTltTTOS 84, 1. 
 
 Kpe'ns dec. 54, R. 4. 
 
 Kp^iffcrtev, KpiilTav 84, 1. 
 
 tcptpety c. g. 273, S. 2 and 
 20 ; KplyeffSrat c. g, 274, 
 2 ; Kpiviiv tI Ttvi 285, 1 , 
 (3), 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 Kp'ipov dec. 72, a). 
 Kpoltrew 212, 3 
 KpoTa\'L^€iv c. a. 279, 
 KpoTciy c. a. 279, R. 
 Kpxnrrftv -eff^at c. a 
 
 4 ; c. two a. 280, 
 KpiKpa c. g. 273, 5, (( 
 KTao-ftoi c. g. 275, 3. 
 KvSpds comp. 83, II. 
 KVKeH 56, R. 1. 213, 
 KvvTepos 216, E. 2. 
 Kvpios c. g. 273, 2. 
 k6uv dec. 68, 8. 
 iccDas dec. 61, R. 1. 
 KdiKveiv c. g. 271, : 
 
 inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
 ASj dec. 72, (a). 
 ^jiPiiv, mill, 312, R. 
 Kayxif^o' c. g. 273, S 
 Kiyas dec. 48, R. 1 
 
 A, (a). 
 \d^pa, Ka^palofs c. g 
 
 5, (e). 
 Ao&iiy, sea-elly 310, J 
 \ii\oj comp. 82, I, (I 
 KafiPiviV^al C. g. % 
 
 (b). 
 Xipmeiv c. a. 278, 3. 
 Aoyfttiveiy c. a. 279, i 
 Kav^iv^a&ai c. g. 2' 
 
 (e) 
 A.a}'d-a;/€(i' u. part. 3 
 
 Ao(is and X^dis 70, A 
 AeYEiv c. g. 273, R. 2 
 Ae'7civ c. two a. 280, 
 
 d. 284, 3, (1); c 
 
 306, 1, (b) ; c. d. a 
 
 and inf. 307, E. 3, 
 Kiyexv c. us and g. 
 
 312, R. 12. 
 \4yeiy eZ, KaKws c. a, 
 
 2 j Ka\ii, KoKti, et< 
 
 280, 2. 
 \4yerai c. ii. et inf 
 
 R. 6. 
 \ey6fjLevos 264, E. 1. 
 \fiTreiv c. a; 279, 4. 
 Kelweadat c. part. 3 
 
 (f)- 
 \'tiyeiy e. part. 310, ^ 
 \ripe!s ^x"" 323, R. 
 A(7r' i\ala 68, 9. 
 XiTTopeTf c. part. 31 
 
 (e). 
 Afs dec. 214, R. 2. 
 AiVcrecrS w c. g. 273, 
 
)'fC«/aaic.inf.306,l,(b). 
 iSopeic c. a. 279, 1. 
 SopeuT&ai Tivi 284, 3, 
 
 re). 
 
 iEffSm c. g. 273, R. 16. 
 Xflv c. a. 279, 1. 
 iiy eg. Sep. 271, 2j c 
 ;. (f price 275, 3, 
 xdvfa^iu c. a. 279, 1 ; 
 3. d. 279, E,. 1. 
 wila^M c. d. 285, (1). 
 UTf\uv c.d. 284,3, (7). 
 6aaSmi c. a. 279, 1 \ c. 
 i. 279, K. 1. 
 (TToy 84, 1, 
 a»> 84, 1. 
 
 ;316, 4; /jai Afa 279, 4. 
 
 cf6s coir.p. 84, 5. 
 
 <:pij> with Com. and 
 
 3up. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
 
 \.WT« with Sup. 239, 
 
 B. 2. 
 
 Uov with Com. 239, 
 
 R. 1. 
 
 Uoi' fi ov 318, R. 7. 
 
 '516, 1. 
 
 •^ivav with sense of 
 
 he Perf. 255, K. 1. 
 
 'divfw c g. and a. 273, 
 
 1. 20; c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 aj; c. part., and inf. 
 
 Ill, 3. 
 
 Tus dec. 68, 10. 
 
 rauv 84, 5. 
 
 ■7)1', incassum 278, R. 2. 
 
 :Eir3a« c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
 
 a with Cora, and Sup. 
 
 139, R. 1 and 2. 
 
 nlpeiv c. g. 274, 1. 
 
 OS dec. 77 ; comp. 84, 8. 
 
 KTTov with Sup. 239, 
 
 1:2. 
 
 Utr&ta u. part. 310, 
 
 , (f). 
 "wv 84, 8. 
 
 Ua-area-^M c. g. 273, 
 I. 16: 
 
 1/ without ij 323, E. 4. 
 214, 4. 
 
 veKTcip c. g. 275, 1. 
 Sff&at c. g. 275, 1. 
 >;'84. 
 
 =1 noi TO/OS and ti 274, 
 , and K. 1. 
 
 Kfivc. inf. 306, 1, (a), 
 VT^jUat Stc ins. '6ti 329, 
 ,.6. 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 Itt/iipeaSmt c. g. and a. 273, 
 R. 20; Tivi Tivos 274, 
 l,<f ); c. d. and a. 284, 
 
 3, (6). 
 Iiivvas. nVSie, R. 
 McV — 8e322, 5. 
 M^ySij 316, R. 
 Hivav c. a. 279, 3. 
 Hevovv 316, R. 
 HeVtoi 316, R. 322, 7. 
 )i,iaiiyi(s) 25, 4, (c). 
 jUE<ros comp. 82, 1, (d) and 
 
 R. 5 ; with the Art. 245, 
 E. 5. 
 luarhv ehai c. part. 310, 
 
 4, (d). 
 
 /»«7Toj c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 ^eT({ Prep. 294 ; fipra ins. 
 
 fiereiTTi 31, R. 3. 
 lieTaSiSivai c. g. 273, 3, 
 
 /«cTa^6\Ei /io( Tivos and tx 
 
 274, 1, (b) andR. 1. 
 lieTo,}jieKii c. part. 310, 4. 
 
 (c). 
 li.eTaij,e\e7ff^at c.part. 310, 
 
 4, (c). 
 liera^i c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 /iETofr) with part. 312. 
 
 R. 6. 
 )Lt6TetrT^ /Aol Tij/os 273, 3, 
 
 (b). 
 Iierdxety c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 ;«EXP'(s) 25, 4, (b). 
 At6xp"(r) c. g. 273, R. 9 ; 
 
 fjt.expt(s) &jfy see 6«s. 
 
 ^^ c. imp. and subj. 259, 5. 
 
 frfl 318; fif; pleonastic, 
 after expressions signi- 
 fying to fear, to doubt, 
 etc. 318, 8. 
 
 li-l) interrog. 344, 5, (A). 
 
 y^l Hrif .fj.il Httus — aAAcfc 
 KOI (aWoi) 321, 3. 
 
 IJ.il oil 318, 10. 
 
 jUTjSe' 321, 2, (a). 
 
 HTlSels dec. 99, R. 
 
 fJ.'fjKlffTOS 84. 
 
 At^y 316, 1. 
 fiTivUiy c. g. 274, 1. 
 /t^i'is dec. 63, R. 5. 
 
 ^^JTE— /li)T6 321, 2, (c). 
 
 /i^T77fi dec. 55, 2. 
 Ifhrpus dec. 71, B, (c). 
 lj.ilXava(rAai c. inf. 306, 
 
 1, (a) ; cSirais and and. 
 
 fnt. 330, 6. 
 
 60TI 
 
 luyyivat, uiymaSmi c. d, 
 
 284,3, (.). 
 IJ,iKp6i comp. S4, 6. 
 fj-ifietd^at c. a. 279, 1 . 
 luii.vii<TKiiv -effftcu c. e 
 
 273, 5, (e). 
 m/ivfiirKea-^at c. part. 310 
 
 4, (a) ; c. part, and inf. 
 
 311,2. 
 MWsdec. 71, C. 
 fjol, ethical t>ai. 284, 3, 
 
 (10) (d). 
 IJOuos with the Art. 245, 
 
 R. 6; differeut from 
 
 tiimv 264, R. 7. 
 (HiJi'or c. g. 271, 3. 
 fjjivoipdyos comp. 82, 1, (f ). 
 (Uoi;, fiol, pU use 87, R. 1. 
 HvKTis dec. 71, A, (a). 
 /jva-drTeffSrai c. a. 279, 5. 
 uSc 344, 5, (c). 
 
 N 4(pf\Kv(mK6i/ 15, 1 and 
 
 R. ; in the Dialects 
 
 206, 6. 
 yal 316, 4; yal /xi Ala 
 
 279, 4. 
 yiK^s and mis 70, A. (a). 
 ycjiri; and vdiros 70, B. 
 >ii(Tirfw c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 coSrdec. 68, 11.214, 5. 
 yearos 82, R. 5. 
 yciij and va6s 70, A, (a). 
 y^316, 4; y^ A(a 279, 4. 
 ciJTT) from yc'os 82, R. 5. 
 viKau 'O^tJjUTTfa, yvtifi-qv 
 
 278, 2. 
 cikSj' with sense of the 
 
 Perf. 2h5, R. 1. 
 yiKBy c. part. 310, 4, (g). 
 ylv {viy] ins. avro6s or 
 
 auTcts 87, R. 3. 
 voeTi> c. pai't. 312, R. 12. 
 vofii^ew c. two a. 280, 4 ; 
 
 c. d. (uti) 285, (2) ; c. 
 
 inf. 306, 1, (b); c.part. 
 
 311,2. 
 voaiplieiv c. g. 271, 2. 
 vov&srciv c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 >'ii316, 3. 
 j/wTos and yuToy 70, A, 
 
 (W- 
 
 HefoCirSMi c. d. 284, 3, (1 ). 
 ^Evws ^x^^ *-■ S- 273, 5j 
 
 '^''- . . , 
 
 ^v/j.<l>opui' EffTi c. (1. and 8- 
 
 c. inf. 307, R. .'t. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
GIO 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 ^iD Prep. 2S9, 2. 
 
 O union-vowel 237, 2. 
 ^— in dnoTosy &ir6<ros, etc. 
 
 93, R. 1. 
 ri, 7], t6 dec. 91 ; relat., 
 
 (lemons., as a prop. Art. 
 
 see under Article. 
 6 tiXIkos attract. 332, R, 9. 
 6 oTos attract. 332, R. 9. 
 S76 use 303, R. 2. 
 ii56, 5)56, To8e dee. 91 ; 
 
 Dialects 217, 4, (b) ; 
 
 use 303, 1 ; with the 
 
 Art. 246, 3. 
 dSi 95, (e). 
 Sfeiy e.g. 273, 5, (d); c. 
 
 a. 278, 3, (b). 
 dAaiyexa ins. 3ti 329, R. 
 
 1 ; because 338, 2. 
 oiafi<f}l (irepO Tiva263,(d). 
 oTa c. part. 312, R. 13. 
 OiSiwovt dec. 71, B, (b). 
 oiKtioj c. g. 273, 2. 
 OMTeipety c. g. 274, 1, (c). 
 olKTp6s comp. 83, n. 
 oTov c.part. 312, R. 13. 
 oTos with Sup. 239, R. 2 ; 
 
 oToy, oftfy t' ei/*/ c. inf. 
 
 306, 1, (c). 
 
 olos ins. (fxi ToiovTos 329, 
 
 R. 8. 
 oloi attracted 332, 7 ; c. 
 
 inf. 332, R. 8. 
 oTos ins. lisre 341, R. 2. 
 oI(T^' H ZpduTOV, ojff^* 01s 
 
 ■sroi-qaov 259, R. 10. 
 otxofiatf abii, 255, 1^. 2. 
 olxo/Mi e. pj;.t. 310, 4, (I). 
 oKfeiv c. inf. 306, 1, (a.) 
 0^.(701 comp. 84, 7. 
 o\iyci!j oKiyof with Coni- 
 
 pa'r. 239, R. 1. 
 o\iyapeiy c. g. 274, 1, (b). 
 o\o<pvpetT^ai c. g. 274, 1, 
 
 (c); c. a. 279, 5. 
 ipuXe'w c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
 ofivvi/ai c. a.. 279, 4. 
 8/»oia Tois c. Sup. 239, 
 
 R. 2. 
 ifioiov crvoi c. partic. 310, 
 
 R. 2. 
 'ilioios c. g. 273, 3, (b); 
 
 onoios, dfioioWy -ovff&oi, 
 
 dliolas C. d. 284, 3, 4. 
 ilioKoyelv c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
 luoXoyeiTai c. a. and inf. 
 
 307. R. 6. 
 
 S/ucs 322, 7 ; with a part'.. 
 312, R. 8. 
 
 oraSifeir c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
 
 oyfipos dec. 72, (a). 
 
 oyivdvaif -atr^ou c. a. 279,1. 
 
 ovofjid iffri HOI and the 
 like 266, R. 1. 
 
 om/idCeii' c. two a. 280, 4. 
 
 ovTuv ins. eraixrav 116, 12. 
 
 STrurS-ei- c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 
 oTToi in pregnant sense 
 ins. gn-ou 300, R. 7. 
 
 (Sttoto*' see Sra;/ under 3t6. 
 
 iSTTOTe see Sre. 
 
 Sttou in pregnant sense 
 ins. giroi 300, R. 7 ; 
 Sttou, quandoqtiidem see 
 »Te. 
 
 Sjtwj with Sup. 239, R. 2. 
 
 Sirtos ins. 3ti329, R. 1. 
 
 SirtoF, tAaf, in order that, 
 330 ; Sirmj and Sttmf fi<; 
 c. ind. fut. ellip. 330, 
 R.4. 
 
 '6TTtos, when, see ore. 
 
 ilTraj, as 342. ' 
 
 ipS;/ c. g. 273, R.20 ; ipciv 
 iXxitv 278,3, (c) ; with 
 verbs of appearing, 
 showing 306, R. 9 ; e. 
 part. 310, 4, (a). 
 
 hpyiQeaSrai c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 
 part. 310, 4, (e). 
 
 hpiyeaStai c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 
 ipStpios comp. 82, I, (d). 
 
 dpfjLoa-^aL c. g. 273, R. 7, 
 (b). 
 
 opvt^od-fipas dec. 44, R. 2. 
 
 Spms dee.54,(c) and 68,12. 
 
 hp(pav6s c. g. 271, 3. 
 
 Ss, 5i, 3 dec. 92 ; use 331, 
 sq. ; agreement in gen. 
 and num. 332, sq.; Case 
 (attraction) 332, 6; 
 Attractio inversa 332, 
 R. 11 ; attraction in 
 position 332, 8 ; 8s, 
 I), 8 before inteiinedi- 
 atc clauses, attracted 
 332, 9 ; modes 333 ; gj 
 changed into a demons. 
 334, 1 ; is ins. the de- 
 mons. 334, 3; is ins. 
 irt, since, because, ins. 
 W, ut (after oStws, 
 
 SSe, TOIOVTOS, T7l\lK0V- 
 
 Tos, rotrovTos) fisre, ins. 
 €(4y or €1 334, 2. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 is, J}, 3 ; &s fj.ev- -hs 
 
 &j Ka! 8y demons. ', 
 
 R. 1. 
 8(roi' (offaj) — TooouToy 
 
 ao^Tcp) 343. 
 Siroy, iatf with Co 
 
 and Sup. 239, R. 1 ; 
 
 2 ; i(Toy, offa c. inf. 
 
 ■g. Stroy y CjU* €i5i 
 
 341, R. 3. 
 oVoy ins. on t6o-os c 
 
 R. 8. 
 8(ros attracted 332, 7. 
 8(roj ins. Srre 341, R. 
 oaTeoy = otTTOul' dec.4 
 SsTij dec. 93. 
 oac^paiyeadai C. g. 273 
 
 (f ), and R. 19. 
 8(ra) — Totjoinip 343, 2, ( 
 iTay see Sre. ■ 
 Sre and Srai/ const. 33 
 Ste fundamental me 
 
 ing 338, 1. 
 8t( with Sup. 239, R. : 
 »Ti, that, const. 329 ; i 
 
 ference between Sti. 
 
 c. inf. and part. 339, 
 
 5 ; in citing the woi 
 
 of another 329, R. 3 
 8ti, since, because, coi 
 
 338, 2. 
 8ti Ti 344, R. 6. 
 »«(«) 15, 4. 17, R. 2; 
 
 at the end of a si 
 
 tence 15, 4. 
 oi 318 ; ou pleonastic, 
 
 ter expressions den 
 
 ing doubt, denial, af 
 
 Comp. and Sup. 1 
 
 pressions 318, 8, a 
 
 R.7. 
 ou yi.p oAA.ii322, R. 11 
 ou interrog. 344, 5, (dj 
 ou with Sup. :negat 
 
 adjectives 239, R. 3. 
 ov pLeyroi aWd 322, R. 
 oil fi-fi 318, 7. 
 ou /iri c. second pers. i: 
 
 fut. interrog. (ou 
 
 tp\vap'{]a'€ts ', ins. 
 
 fp\vdpet) 255, 4. 
 ou /iiiv aTAd 322, R. 11 
 ou [i6voy — a\A& Kai 32] 
 ou pron. dec. 87 ; 1 
 
 302, R. 3. 
 oSSos dec. 61, R. 1, 
 ouSe 321, 2. 
 ovdils dec. 99, B. 
 
GBEEK INDEX. 
 
 ♦ 611 
 
 s i'jTis ov attracted 
 2, R. 12. 
 
 'rrriv Sttou, Svus 331, 
 ,5. 
 
 3v and oticovv 324, 
 , 7. 
 
 3ufBx 95, (b); con- 
 i.sive 324, 3, (b) ; in 
 1 answer 344, 7. 
 ro c. g. 288, R. ; oB 
 lo ins. Sti 329, R. 1 ; 
 ice, because 338. 2. 
 lee. 54, R. 4. 
 — otTi\ otire — Te 
 1,2. 
 
 r dee. 91 ; Dialects 
 7,4, (e); use 303, 1; 
 th the Art. 246, 3. 
 t, heus! 269, 2, (a). 
 ri 95, (e). 
 (j) 15, 2. 
 
 s, (i)S in wishes 342. 
 2. 
 
 s with part.312, K.7. 
 Sirais (8ti), oix 3ti, 
 &,Wk Kai ; oi/x otov 
 iX\i 321, 3. 
 , that^ so that, 330. 
 , until^ see etu;, 
 ■ comp. 82, 1, (d). 
 iyos comp. 82,1, (f ). 
 
 Voe. 53, 4, (1), (C). 
 ■miv c. two a. 280, 3. 
 i6s comp. 82, 1, (c). 
 oiov elvai, yiyyecr^ai 
 Part. 310, 4, (h) ; c. 
 
 c. inf. 311, 18. 
 Prep. 297 ; Trapi c. 
 
 ins. c. d. 300, 4, (a). 
 
 ins. irdpetm 31, R. 3. 
 
 u/eii/ c. d. 284, 3, (3) ; 
 
 inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
 iceXeiftr^ai c. d. 284, 
 
 (3). 
 
 \aii$dvi.;^ c. g. 275, 
 
 c. two a. 280, 4. 
 wK'ljaios c. g. 273, R. 
 
 C.d. 284,3, (4). 
 TKevdC^ir^cu 306, 1, 
 ) ; c. Hntos c. ind. fut. 
 S, 6 ; c. part, and c. 
 
 andpart.310,4, (h). 
 Xapuv c. g. 271, 2 ; 
 
 d. 284, 3, (2). 
 
 c, TTopef, irtipel, 300, 
 1. 
 mycinf 306,1, (c). 
 
 Trapa^iveiv cinf. 306, 1, (a) 
 TOj with the Art. 246, 5. 
 iraj Tis with the second 
 
 pers. imp. 241, R. 13, (C). 
 Tritratav 216, 2. 
 •nd^TX^iv inrd tivos 249, 3. 
 varrip dec. 55, 2. 
 TTiiTptM dec. 71, B. (c). 
 iraieiv, -ftr^ai c. g. 271,2; 
 
 c. part. 310, 4, (f) ; c 
 
 part, and inf. 311, 17. 
 iraxis comp. 216, 2. 
 Trel^siv T(fo£ Ti 278, 4 ; c. 
 
 a. 279, 1; c. inf. 306, 1, 
 
 (a) ; c. air 306, R. 2 
 ireteeir&oi c. g. 273, R. 18 ; 
 
 c. d. 284, a, (3). 
 TTeivijc c. g. 274, 1. 
 Tteipatcis dec. 57, R. 2, 
 ireipSo-aoi c. g. 273, 5, (e); 
 
 c. inf 306, 1, (a); c. 
 
 part, and inf. 311, 18. 
 ircXd^eLV, 7ri\as C. g. 273, 
 
 R.9; c. d. 284, 3, (2). 
 ireVeir&oi, irej^r C. g. 273, 
 
 5, (b). 
 
 1, (c). 
 TTeirepi dec. 63, R. 1. 
 iremi^emi c. d. 284, 3, (3), 
 TTc'ira?!/ comp. 84, 11. 
 TTtp 95, d; Synt. 317, 1. 
 Tvepatos comp. 82, I, (c). 
 Iripiw C. g. 271,3. 
 vepm c. a. 279, R. 5. 
 xefp/ Prep. 295, 1 and 3. 
 iTEpf — eVcraSOO, R. 2. 
 jrepf c. d. in pregnant 
 
 sense ins. of the ace. 
 
 300, 3, (a). 
 irepi ins. irepUtm 31, R. 3. 
 irepiPdWeiv C.tWO a. 280,3. 
 ■jrepLyiyvecT^ai c. g. 275, 1. 
 ■TrepiSiSoa-^ai c. g. 275, 3. 
 irepieTlfai c. g. 275, 1. 
 Trepie'xeirS-ai c. g. 273, 3, 
 
 (b)._ 
 ireptiSeij/ sec Trepiopay, 
 nepiKKrjs dec. 59, 2. 
 irepifiej/eiv c. a. 279, 3. 
 •jreptopay c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 (e) ; c. part, and inf. 
 
 311, 15. 
 irepiopatrSrai c. g. 274, 1. 
 irepl irpo 300, K 1. 
 ITEpiTTlfj c. g. 275, 2. 
 irefu/cei/ai c. inf. 306, 1 (d). 
 
 irtctpa 78, R. 8. 
 TTl/nr\niii c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 irli/eiv c. g. and a. 27,1, 5, 
 
 (c) and R. 15 
 iriTTTeii/ {m6 tivos 249, 3. 
 ■nuTTeidv c. d, 284, 3. (3). 
 irlav comp. 84, 12 
 T^eu/ e. a. 279, R. 5. 
 ■xKeiffTov with Sup. i3l>, 
 
 R. 2. 
 irA.eloj' without ^ 323, R i 
 7rXc/wi/, irAcHTTos 81, 9. 
 irXeV ins. ir\euf 78, R. 5 
 ir,\eoy without ^ 323, R. 4. 
 TTAeoz/eKTerc c. g. 275, 1. 
 5rA.E(!j c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 jrAe'eos dec. 78, R. 5. 
 v\i\Sta c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 irA^jKC. g. 271, 3. 
 n\iipris, ■ir\i]p6a c. g. 273, 
 
 5, (b). 
 irKfifftaQ^lVf v\i)(rlov C. g. 
 
 273,R.9;c.d.284,3,(2). 
 ■ir\TiiTlov comp. 84. 
 irKdos = •jr\ovs dee. 47. 
 ir\oi(Tias c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 Trye?y c. g. 273, 5, (d); c. 
 
 a. 278, 3, (b). 
 irvil dec. 68, 13. 
 noSretv c. a. 274, R. 1. 
 iroi in Preg. sense ins. sroB 
 
 (ubi) 300, R. 7. 
 TToierv c. g. of material 
 
 273, 5, (a) ; u. two a. 
 
 280, 4. 
 iroieiv ed, KaKuts c. part. 
 
 310, 4, (g);c. a.279,2i 
 
 a7ad'(£, Koxd etc. c. a. 
 
 280,2; c. inf. 306, l,(c). 
 TToiely c. part. 310, 4, (b) ; 
 
 c. part, and inf. 311, 
 
 13. 
 ■!roiu<rdu c. g. 273, 2 and 
 
 3, (a) ; c. g. of pricj 
 
 275,3. 
 TTOios with the Art. 344 
 
 K. 3. 
 ToA.Eytieo' c. d. 2,<4, 3, (2). 
 irSXts dec. 63. 
 Trohhhi' eXvaij 4yKe7ff^ai, 
 
 yiyviaSrai c. part. 310, 
 
 iroWov Sew u. mf. 307, 
 
 R. 6. 
 iroAA^ with comp. and 
 
 superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
 troxi with Gomp. and 
 
 Superl. 239, R. 1 and 2. 
 
 Digitized by Micrbsoft® 
 
h\2 
 
 GKEEK INDEX. 
 
 iro\vs dec. 77. 
 
 rioo-eiSSy dec. 53, 4, (1) 
 
 (d) ; 56, R. 1 
 iroT€, ris TTOTe etc. 344, 
 R. 2. 
 
 Tidrepo, irdrepoy — ^ in a 
 direct and indirect 
 question 344, 5, (f ). 
 
 trpaos dec. 76, XIV. 
 
 rpdTTciv eS, kokus c. a. 
 279, 2; signification of 
 tlie first and second 
 Perf. 249, 2; aya^i, 
 Kuxi etc. c. a. 280, 2 ; 
 ^pdrreuff -etr^ai, to de- 
 mand^ c. two ace. 280, 
 3; c. d. 284, 3, (1). 
 
 rrpez-eiy, Trpe-7r6vT(os C. d. 
 284, 3, (5) ; c. inf. 306, 
 1, (d) ; c. d. and a. e. 
 inf. 307, R. 3. 
 
 irpeVet c. part. 310, 4, (i). 
 
 npeff^eis, irpeir^vr'iis, iTp4- 
 a-ffvs 70, B. 
 
 irpetrPeieii/ c. g. 275, 1. 
 
 irpeV^Sio-Tos 83, R. 2. 
 
 rplaff^ttt c. g. 275, 3. 
 
 wpivy irplv &v, irply ij const. 
 337. 
 
 irp6 Prep. 287, 2. 
 
 trpoexfiy c. g. 275, 1. 
 
 irpo^upAlf elfatj wpo^ujUHO"- 
 aoi c. inf 306, 1, (a) ; 
 c 3irws c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 
 
 vpoiKa 278, R. 2. 
 
 Trpo/foAerffi^-ai Ttyd rl 278, 
 4. 
 
 irpoKplveiv c. g. 275, 1 . 
 
 •npopoiiv c. g. 274, 1. 
 
 Trpaoip.iov 17, R. 4. 
 
 npoopav c. g. 274, 1 . 
 
 Trpijj Prep. 298 ; c. d. in 
 Preg -icnse ins. c. a. 
 300,3, ,a). 
 
 irposPaWsiv c. g. 273, 5, 
 (d). 
 
 trposSiScJi/oi c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 
 TrpasijKetvc.d. 284,3,(5); 
 c. inf. 306, 1, (d); c.d. 
 and a. c. inf. 307, R. 3. 
 
 rfoos'tiKei fioi c. g. 273, 3, 
 (b). 
 
 trp6sStei' c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 
 irposKaKeiV^ul C. g. 274, 2. 
 
 irposKvyeiv c. a. 279, 1. 
 
 irpoiTTaT^^f C. g. 275, 1. 
 
 rposrirTfiv c. d. 284, 3, 
 (3); c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 
 Trpofftjyepiis c. d. 284, 3, (4). 
 irpoTijjMv c. g. 275, 1. 
 irpovpytsdrepos 84, R. 3. 
 Trpa(p4petv c. g. 275, 1. 
 Trpoxovs dec. 71, B, (b). 
 irpti'ios comp. 82, 1, (dj. 
 irpiaTsvelv C. g. 275, 1. 
 irpaTos and vpuray 264, 
 
 R. 7. 
 Trr-fiaffeiv c. a. 279, 5. 
 ■irTuxis comp. 82, 1, (f ). 
 irvy^dyta^ai with the sig- 
 
 nif. of Perf. 255, R. 1. 
 rmSxivecrdu 0. g. 273, R. 
 
 20 ; c. part, 310, 4, (a); 
 
 c. part, and inf. 311, 6. 
 jTtoXeTy c. g. 275, 3. 
 iras &y c. opt. 260, 2, (4) 
 
 (d). 
 
 'PaSlas (pipeiy c. part. 310, 
 
 4, (c). 
 pt^vy, p^ffTO^ 84, 10 
 p6?v c. a. 278, 3, (a). 
 pewety c. a. 279, K. 5. 
 povs dec. 47. 
 
 2 omitted 25, 1 ; mova- 
 ble at the end of a 
 word 15; in the for- 
 mation of tenses of 
 pure verbs 131, and 
 133 ; euphonic or con- 
 necting letter 237, 1 
 and R. 2. 
 
 iriTTetv c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 
 (TauTov or (TiauTov dec. 
 88 ; use 302, 2. 
 
 ir€ Suffix 235, 3 and R. 3. 
 
 o-eAoj dec. 61, (a}. 
 
 ffiis dec. 68, 14. 
 
 (tS^ in inflex. changed to 
 a 25, 3. 
 
 (ran inflex. 116, 2. 
 
 a^ay ins. a-daa-ay 116, 12. 
 
 ai union syllable 237, 1. 
 
 iriyatrt dec. 63. 
 
 (riVe(r&ai c. «. 279, 1. 
 
 (TKOVf <7K6p.TJV 221, 
 
 a-Ko-n-ely c. g. and a. 273, 
 
 R. 20 and 21. • 
 (TK^p dec. 68, 15. 
 trol ethical Dot. 284, 3,(10) 
 
 <t6s ms. <ro5 302, R. 2. 
 o-TToi'ffEU' c. g. 273, 5, (b). 
 (nreVSeo-aai c. d- 284, 3, 
 
 (1)- 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 airivdeiy c, a. 279, E. 
 ffirovSiiCeiy c. inf. 306 
 ffTTovSaios comp. 82, 
 a-riC^y c. a. 278, 3, ( 
 iTTa^ftafr^al ri nyt 21 
 
 (3). 
 iTTeap dec. 68, 16. 
 a-Teyd^etv c. d. 285, 1, 
 ffrepyeiy c. a. and d. 
 
 R. 1 ; c. d. 285, (1 
 iXTipiiy c. g. 271, 2 
 
 two ace., rivd riyos 
 
 3 and R. 3. 
 a-TTJyat c. a. 279, R. 6 
 2x7 see BaS 97, 1. 
 a-ToxdCeor^ai c. g. 27 
 
 (b). 
 ffTpaTTjyety c, g. 275, ] 
 trii dec. 87 ; use 3Ci, 
 
 part. 310, R. 2. 
 (Tvy^yiiiiuey e.g. 273, 5, 
 <rui -itopeTi' c. inf. 306, 1 , 
 avKay c. two ace. 280, 
 trvfLpttlvei-v c. inf. 306 
 
 (d) ; c. d. and a. c. 
 
 307, R. 3 ; personal : 
 
 R. 6. 
 cvfiffovkeieiy c. inf. . 
 
 1, (a). 
 (rvfj.irpaTTeu/ c. d. 28^ 
 
 (7). 
 trviJL<pepeiy c. d. 284, 3, 
 
 trufjupipei c. part. 311 
 
 cvfj,(j)op6y 4art c. d. 
 
 ace. c. inf. 307, R. t 
 a-iy, ^iy Prep. 289, 2. 
 irvyalpetr^cu e. g. 273 
 
 (b). 
 a-uvt\iyTi 284, 3, 10, ( 
 (Tvyitr^ff^ai C. g. 273, 3, 
 a-iyepyos C. g. 273, 3, 1 
 euyUyai c. g. and c. g. 
 
 a. 273, 5, (f) andR 
 
 310, R. 2. 
 iru>'T6/i(ij'Ti 284, 3, 10, 
 <rvs dec. 62. 
 <rlf^JA\€d•&o^ c. g. 271, 
 <r<f>i(riy ins. ujuij/ 302, 1 
 axeSoy c. g. 273, E. 9. 
 
 with the Nom. 266 
 with the Ace. 266, 1 
 (rxoAoios comp. 82, I 
 2a)Kp(£T7)s dec. 59, 2 
 E. 2. 
 
GREEK INDKX. 
 
 613 
 
 ace. 78, R. 6. 
 ■ep Voc. 53,4, (I J (a). 
 
 ToiavTa without Kal 
 3Uowing325, 1, (e). 
 iTTfiv T6\efiov 278, 2. 
 ra referring to one 
 liouglit 241, E. 3. 
 ■is comp. 83, 1. 
 ij dee. 72, (b). 
 J21, 1 ; Tf — Kal, lb. 
 yeiv c. a. 278, 3. 
 ftaipid^ai tl Twi 285, 
 
 > (3). ■ 
 
 vovVfparenteiH esse 255, 
 
 1.1. 
 
 eioi c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
 
 fuTwf, finally, lastly 
 
 12, R. 3. 
 
 veiv e. two ace. 280, 3. 
 
 as dec. 54, E. 4. 
 
 irerraai c. part. 310, 4, 
 
 d). 
 
 rapes dec. 99, 5. 
 
 .i/coDtos dec. 91, 
 
 ie' 344, E. 4. 
 
 UKl^cii', t£ ra^dv 344, 
 
 1.5. 
 
 u, Tl oil/ ou 256, 4, (e). 
 
 eVoi, -effSoi c. g. 273, 
 
 ,(a); c. two ace. 280,4. 
 
 rem, parentem esse 255, 
 
 H. 
 
 w, T</t5(r&oi c. g. 275, 3. 
 
 operi/ c. d. 284, 3, (7); 
 
 t/uupenrS-a! Twa Tiyos 
 
 74, 2 ; c. a. 279, 7. 
 
 and Tij dec. 93. 
 
 or iras tij with the II. 
 
 ers. Imp. 241, E. 13. 
 
 use - 303, 4 ; t!j 
 mitted 238, 5, (e). 
 ins. 8sTij in indirect 
 uestion 344, E. 1. 
 ToB, T$ c. inf. or c. a. 
 , inf. 308 ; t6 c. inf. or 
 a. c. inf. in exclam. 
 ad question 308, E. 2. 
 Kai t6, rhv Kot ■r6v 
 
 n, 3. 
 
 •wv chat, -rh i-kf-^pov 
 
 'vai, rb KttTct rovrov 
 
 vai 308, E. 3. 
 
 317, 3; in answers 
 
 14, 7. 
 
 op, Totyapovv 324, 3, 
 
 ')• 
 
 dproi 324, 3, (c). 
 
 folvuv 324, 3 (c). 
 TowjJTOs dec. 91 ; toioC- 
 
 Tiis eljii c. inf. 341, E. 2. 
 TOisSeo-( 217, 4. 
 roKiiav c. inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 To|eu€i>' c. g. 273, R, 7. 
 ToaovTov — bffoy \ Totrovrot 
 
 —'iaif 343, 2, (b). 
 ToirouTo -ovTip witn Com. 
 
 and Sup. 229, E. 1 
 
 and 2. 
 ToffovTos dec. 91. 
 TotrojjTou Jew c. inf. and 
 
 SiSTi c. inf. 307, E. 6. 
 ToS or Tov p.ii c.iiif. 274. 3, 
 
 (b). 
 Tpatjieis Ttvos 275, E. 5. 
 Tpeiy c. a. 279, 5. 
 Tpers dec. 99, 5. 
 rpi^av c. g. 273, 5, (e). 
 rpi-fjpTis dec. 59, 2. 
 Tuyxiii/eiv c. g. 273,3, (b); 
 
 c. part. 310,4, (1). 
 rvpavveiv, -viiiiv c. g. 
 
 275, 1. 
 Tuifiij dec. 72, (b). [(e). 
 TwuTi! ins. t6 out^ 217, 4, 
 
 "CPpiCeiv c. a. 279, 1. 
 ii^pundrepos 82, II. 
 »5wpdec. 68, IS. 
 vl6s dec. 72, (a). 
 iiuav, iSfiiv, Zftiv 87, E. 4. 
 uTTcJ^eii/ c. g. 274, 2. 
 uiraKoiJety c. g. 273, E. 1 8 ; 
 
 c.d. 284,3, (3). 
 iirafla-Taa-^ai c. g. 271, 2. 
 vTraVTav, vnavTid^eiv c. g. 
 
 273, E. 9 ; c. d. 284, 
 
 3, (2). 
 ivd.pxeii' c. g. 271, 4; c.d. 
 
 284, 3, (9) ; c. part. 
 
 310, 4, (f.) 
 uir£iK€ii/ c. g. 271, 2 ; c. d. 
 
 284, 3, (2). 
 fiire/c 300, E. 1. 
 vxeKTpeirea^ai u. a. 279, 
 
 E. 3. [R. 3. 
 
 ime^epxeff^ai c. a. 279, 
 {nrip 293. 
 vTrepPiWeii' c. g. and a. 
 
 275, 1. 
 ^TTepex^ty c. g. 275, 1. 
 iirepopav c. g. 274, 1 . 
 iveppepeiv c. g. 275, 1. 
 MiKoos c. g. and d. 273, 
 
 E. 18. 
 uTTtJXeu' c. a. 278, 3, (b). - 
 
 fririf Prep. 299 ; o. d. in 
 
 Preg. sense ins. c. a 
 
 300, 3, (a) ; c. a. and 
 
 part. 312, E. 5. 
 ilwo ins. SiTEffTi 31, E. 3. 
 uTo,u6i'«c c. inf. 306, 1, (a) 
 
 311, 15: c. part. 310 
 . 4, (e). 
 iTToiuiiyficTKetv c. two ace 
 
 280, 3. 
 movoilv c. g. 273, E. 20 
 uTroo-Tijyoi c. d. 284, 3, (2, 
 vTroxi^peii/ e. g. 271, 2. 
 
 c. a. 279, E. 3. 
 xumpetv, varepov ili/ai, 
 
 ia-Tepi^fiv c. g. 275, 1. 
 vij>i<rTaa-&at o. d. 284, 3, 
 
 (2). 
 Bi/ziffTos 216, E. 2. 
 
 ^ayeiv c. g. and a. 273, 5. 
 
 (c) and B. 15. 
 ^aii/eti/, (palyeff^at c part 
 
 310, 4, (b); tpaiyofiai 
 TToiuy Tl ib. E. 3. 
 
 faiveaAai c. inf. and part 
 
 311, 8. 
 
 tl>dvai c. inf 506, 1, (b.) 
 ipavep6s elfjLi iroi&y Tt 310 
 
 E.3. 
 (l>e(Se<rStai c. g. 274, 1, (b). 
 ipepe, referring to several 
 
 persons 241, E. 13, (a). 
 tpep6fieyos, (pepojv, maxivio 
 
 studio 312, E. 9 ; ijilpuv. 
 
 with ib. E. 10. 
 (pepraTos 84, 1. 
 tpdprepos, tpepKTTOs 84, 1. 
 <j>€vyeiy with signif. of 
 
 Perf. 255, E. 1 ; (pev 
 
 yeiy c. g. e. g. K\o-jryi 
 
 274,2 ; uiroTij/os 249,3. 
 (peiyfiy c. a. 279, 3 ; c. inf. 
 
 306, 1, (a). 
 (p&ifieyos,. ^3<£j, quiclly 
 
 310,4, (e). 
 (pStiveiy c, a. 279, 4; c. 
 
 part, followed bj fi, 
 
 irpXy f, 31U, 4, (1) 
 tpSriyyeaSrai c. a. 278, 3. 
 (pS)6yyos oMl (p^oyyi) 70, 
 
 B. 
 (l>St6is dec. 68, 17. 
 tj>Srove7y c. g. 274, 1, (l); 
 
 c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
 ^l\os comp. 82, K. 4. 
 <pi\as c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 <;>((i') suffix 210. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
314 
 
 GREEK INDEX. 
 
 }n)|8erir3-<!( c. a. 279, 5 ; u. 
 
 inf. 306, 1, (a). 
 ^oiw/:oCs 76, R. 3. 
 ipoveia with signif. of 
 
 Perf. 255, R. 1. 
 ippti(ftp c. d. and a- u. inf. 
 
 307, R. 3. 
 ippeap dec. 6S, 16. 
 ibpoifitov 1 7, R. 4. 
 <ppovTi(fiv e. g. and a. 274, 
 
 1 and R. I ; c. i>s and 
 
 g. abs. SI 2, R. 12: c. 
 
 girws c. ind. fut. 330, 6. 
 ^pouSos 17, R. 4. 
 ^iJeii/ ; <pvyai c. g. 273, 1. 
 (t>v\d.TT€adai 0. a. 279, 1. 
 
 Xatpftv c. d. 285, (1) ; c 
 
 part. 310, 4, (c). 
 XaheTraii/etv c. g. 274, 1 5 
 
 c. d. 284, 3, (6). 
 Xa\eTr6s cifii c. inf. ins. 
 
 XaKewSv itTTi with ace. 
 
 e. inf. 307, R. 6. 
 Xa\eTr(os (pepsiy e. g. 274, 
 
 l,d; c. d. 285, (1); e. 
 
 4irl Tivi and c. a. 285, R. 
 
 1 ; c. part. 310, 4 (e). 
 Xciprjs dec. 71, A, (a). 
 Xop"' 278, E. 2 ; c. g. 288, 
 
 R. ; X'^P'" ^/"^"i ''■^'' ''^ 
 Xe'p dec. 55, R. 1 . 
 X^tpuTTos^ X^ipov 84, 2. 
 XeAiStSy doe. 55, R. 2. 
 XTlpoiv c. g. 271, 2. 
 X»'o5s dec. 47. 
 yocis dec. 57 and 68, 18. 
 
 Xi!>.o5(r&oi c. g. 274, 1 ; c. 
 
 d. 284, 3, (6). 
 Xop^veiy ^e6i' 279, R. 5. 
 Xovs dec. 68, 18. 
 XpaiaficTv c. d. 284, 3, ("}. 
 Xpeiiy 73, 1, (c). 
 Xptws dec. 69. 
 XP^ c. g. 273, 5, (b) ; c. a. 
 
 and d. 279, R. 4, c. inf. 
 
 306, 1, (d); XP^ c. d. 
 
 and a. c. inf. 307, 6, 
 
 and R. 3. 
 Xp^ffi^of Tipl Ti 278, 4 ; c. 
 
 d. 285, (2). 
 Xpds dec. 68, 19. 
 Xapetv c. d. 284, 3, [2). 
 Xt'pK^iv c. g. 271, 2. 
 X<"p£jc.g.271, 3. 
 xS>pos and x^P^- ^^) ^■ 
 
 Taiieij/ c. g. 273, 3, (b). 
 y^iyeiv c. g. and a. 273, 
 
 R. 20. 
 ;|/6iJSe(raai c. g. 271, 2. 
 ;(/euS^s comp. 82, 11. 
 ii/iA.((s e.g. 271, 3. 
 
 •^nSe with Part. 312, R. 7. 
 
 Scol, Syo 53, R. 4. 
 
 wviL(r^aL c. g. 275, 3. 
 
 iis Prep. 290, 3 and R. 2. 
 
 dis iAaf, see St*. 
 
 ojs «i, {n vJishes [uiinam) 
 259, 3, (b). 
 
 lis, as, so as, const. 342 ; 
 ovTas ( Sis) — as in wish- 
 es and asseverations 
 
 242, R. 2; ms wlt 
 
 Snbs. (as might be 
 
 pected, &s Aa/ceSa 
 
 cioj, Mf Laced, for a 
 
 cedaemonian) 342, li 
 iis with Superl. 239, 1 
 us c. d., as ; us yep6 
 
 i>s i/iol, meo judicio 
 
 €;apSo'f7) 284,3, (10) 
 ws c. part, and case 1 
 
 312, 6 i c. part. fut. i 
 
 6, (a). 
 ws ins. 8ti oBtow 329, T 
 aj, <AaJ, so that 330 ; 5s 
 
 c. opt. utinam 260, 1 
 Sis, wnen, see Sre. 
 ws ins. Ssre, so iAaJ, 
 
 fiSsre. 
 us elireiy and ois eiros 
 
 ve7v 341, K. 3. 
 ws eiS, cirl, irptJs C. a., 
 
 inl c. d. 290, R. 2. 
 is t( 344, E. 6. 
 ws SxpeXov, -es, -6 c. 
 
 259, E. 6. 
 Sswip, as, const. 342 ; w 
 
 Pait. 312,E. 13. 
 SsTc c. inf. ins. of a s 
 
 pie inf. 306, E. 3. 
 SsTE c. part. 312, E. li 
 Ssre, so that, const. 34 
 SsTE, as, so as, const, i 
 uIt6s ins. 6 avT6s 217 
 
 (e). 
 wfAuv c. a. 279, 1 : 
 
 two a. 280, R. 1 ; c 
 
 279, R. 1. 
 
 III. INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF THE VERBS. 
 
 Abbreviations. A.Aorist; A. J. first Am: ; A. 11. second Aor. ; Aug. .^ 
 ment ; Char. Characteristic ; Comp. Compare ; Dial. Dialect ; F. Future ; 
 Passive; Pf. Perfect; Pf. M. Perfect Middle; Plup. Pluperfect; R. Bema 
 Red. Iiedupli9ttion. 
 
 f^iu 230. 
 kyaloiiai 230. 
 iyapMi 179, 1. 
 hyiiopuii, &.yaiofjLat 230. 
 iyilpa Pf. with Att. Eed. 
 124, 2, (6). Dial. 230. 
 
 b.yvo4w 230. 
 
 i.yvviu 187. l.Dial. 230. 
 
 S7(i>,A.I. ^|a, S|ai in Thu. 
 and Xen. ; A. II. 124, 
 E. 2; Pf.I.Act. 124,2; 
 Pf. M. JiyfiM. Dial. 230. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 ^5w (Poet. lulSu), P. i 
 juai {aiiffo/iai), j 
 (adau, dira non-A 
 Aug. 122, 1. DJTl. : 
 
 ailpu 230. 
 
 aijSifoyuai Aug. 122, 1. 
 
INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VEEBS. 
 
 613 
 
 m. as 3. 
 
 a Char. 143, 6. 
 afuu, atSo/uu 166, 1. 
 •ial. 230. 
 
 B, formation of ten- 
 !S 130, (d), 2. 
 ^ai 230. 
 
 »167, 1. Dial. 230. 
 see &ftpa 230. 
 rtiyofuu 160, 1. 
 •0) Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 
 50. 
 
 Aug. 122, 1. Dial. 230, 
 (.ICa 230. 
 Cftfpos 230. 
 
 Hai, formation of 
 nses 130, (d), 1. 
 ifn) 230. 
 
 'u, Pf. with Att. Red. 
 J4, 2 ; F. aKoitrofiai. 
 ass. with 0- 131, 2. 
 (fo/uoi, F. -itroncu 129, 
 .1. 
 
 icifoi, Char. 143, 6. 
 i^ai 230. 
 ri^u 223, 5. 
 ha 230. 
 
 *«, Pf.with Att. Eed. 
 !4,2. 
 
 M 166, 2. Dial. 230. 
 ^cu or d\cl!a/uii 230. 
 i, formation of tenses 
 0, (d), 1. 
 ]ffKa, -diiTKm 230. 
 vofiaL 161, 1. 
 ilva 230. 
 
 *eiy, see aXefo) 162. 
 irffw, Char. 7. 143, 1. 
 A. I. and II. P. 141, 
 
 /uai, a in format. 149, 
 2. Dial. 230. 
 i), F. -ao-a. 129, R.l. 
 TEM 230. 
 KM 230. 
 fi/u, -^iw 230. 
 rdva 160, 2. Dial 
 
 a. 
 
 l(rKa 161, 2. 
 
 ^0) 159, 4. 
 
 aK((r/cw 230. 
 
 I), oLfiiya^ov 162. 
 
 woe'o), Aug. 126, 1 
 
 13. 
 
 vyufii 184, 1. 
 
 iSt/tco), Aug. 126, 2. 
 
 ^ffKOfiai 161, 3. 
 
 ir/tai 161,4. 
 
 OKStJcM 230. 
 
 'ANESn 230. 
 
 avexo/iat Aug. 1 2f>, 1 . 
 
 ii'^i'oaa (Ep.) 230. 
 
 avoiyvvfu, avoiya 187, 6. 
 
 i,i'apSt6a>, Aug. 126, 1. 
 
 cti/Tiiw 230. 
 
 hvirin, avia formation of 
 tenses 130, (b), l.Dial. 
 230. 
 
 &vuya 230. 
 
 kiravpiti) 230. 
 
 aircupiffKa 230. 
 
 a7rei\e&i 230. 
 
 wirex^dvoixm 160, 3. 
 
 ir6ep<re 230. 
 
 Im6xpv 177, 3, contrac- 
 tion 137, 3. 
 
 aTToxpafiai 230. 
 
 'APAa230. 
 
 apeaKu 161, 5. 
 
 apKfiD, formation of ten- 
 ses 130, (d), 1. 
 o/jjU({TTa, -fw, Char. 143, 3. 
 ipw/iat 188, 1. Comp.230. 
 ap6a, formation of tenses 
 
 130, (e). 
 apird^ai. Char. 143, 7. 
 &puTu, apute, formation 
 
 of tenses 130, (b), 1. 
 'APn, apapitrxai 230. 
 ^(Tcra, atiraa 230. 
 aialvai, Aug. 122, 1. 
 'ATAAZOMAI, Char. 143, 
 
 6. 
 'ATPAn, see anavpaw, 
 
 Comp. 230. 
 av^dtftti, af^lci;, 160, 4. 
 'ATPI2K0MAI, ^iraup.230. 
 atpiKPeoficti 159, 2. 
 a<il>u<r(RD, Char. 143, 4. 
 'A4>n, airtt(j)i<ri{a 230. 
 ^X^^i^A' 166,4. 
 'AXn, nKaxfC" 230. 
 'An, (Ep.) 230. 
 &aipTO {aeipa) 230. 
 
 Bi(a, Char. 143, 6. 
 Paha 158, 1. Dial. 230. 
 j8i£\Xffl 156,2. Comp.230. 
 Pdirra, Char. (f. 143, 1. 
 0ap4m 230. 
 
 jSao-Tcifii!, Char. 143, 7. 
 BAH, see Valval, 
 fieiofuu, Peoiuu 230. 
 ffidoiiot 230. 
 
 Si/3<£f<» 163, 1. Comp. 
 0all>a! 230. 
 
 Pt^piffKia ICl, 6 Oial 
 
 230. 
 j8ii{ia 192, 10. 
 PiiicrKofiai 161, 3. 
 /SArfirTO), Char. /3, 143, I 
 
 Eed. 123, 2. 
 fiKcurrdva 160, 5. 
 P\mT(prifi4a, Eed. 123, 2, 
 /SAe'iTB, A. II. P. 140 K. 1 
 0\Ittu Char. 143, 3. 
 $\<i(rKa 230. 
 Poda 230. 
 jSfio-Ka) 166, 5. 
 PoiKoiiai 166, 6. Dial. 230. 
 0pd(rffa, Char. 143, 3. 
 ;8pEX" A. II. P. 140, 2. 
 ;3fiffffl, Char. 143, 6. 
 Ppvxiofiai 230. 
 3w6tii, iSiiyOjuai, iSiJai 1 59, 1 . 
 
 rafie'o) 165, 1. Comp. 23a 
 
 7ii7u/4iii 230. 
 
 TAH, see ^fyyoiucu. Comp. 
 230. 
 
 yeyayiiTKU 161, 7. Comp 
 yeytwi'a 230. 
 
 yeimntti 230. 
 
 76\iia), formation of ten- 
 ses 130 (c). 
 
 yevTO 230. 
 
 TENJl, see ylyvoiuu. 
 
 ycva, A. P. with a 131, 3 
 
 yri^ea 165, 2. 
 
 yripda'KO}, yqpdta 161, 8. 
 Dial. 230. 
 
 yiyyoficUf yh/ofxai 163, 2. 
 
 yiyviloffKtafylvtiKTKa 161,9 
 
 yoda 230. 
 
 ypijyopewi see iyeipoi, 
 
 Aai-^o) 143, 6. 223, 5. 
 
 Saira^i 230. 
 
 Safu 230. 
 
 SdKvu 158, 9. 
 
 Sa/ic£w, 5ajLu:£^w 156, 2. 
 
 tafivdia 230. 
 
 Snpftctro) 160, 6. Dial. 230. 
 
 dareofiai 230. 
 
 AAA 230. 
 
 Seoto 230. 
 
 Sei 166,7. * 
 
 SiiSar, Pf. Sc'Sio 193. 
 
 Comp. 230. 
 8e//£TO/iil75, 187, 2. Dial, 
 
 230. 
 Se?;', see 5eT. 
 
 AEKO, see SeiKyu/u and 
 •5exo/itw, 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
616 
 
 INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Se/iin, foiTnation of ten- 
 ses 156, 2. 
 
 Seo/iai contract. 137, 2. 
 
 SepKOfiai, Ff. SeSopKa with 
 the meaning of the 
 Pres. 140, 4. Dial. 230. 
 
 S€'pi»,A.II. P. andPf.A. 
 140, 2 and 4. 
 
 Sexofisu 230. 
 
 Seia 230. 
 
 Seoj, formation of tenses 
 
 130, (d), 2, contraction 
 137, 2. 
 
 8e(v, see Set. 
 SiaiTow, Aug. 126, 2. 
 StoKoyea, Aug. 126, 2. 
 SiaAe70i"<«) Aug. 123, B. 2. 
 SiSacTKcij 161, R. 
 AIAHMI 230. 
 SiSpdfTKQi 161, 10. 
 SiSuiJii 175. 
 5if7)/iai 180, B. 3. Dial. 
 
 230. 
 AIHMI 180, B. 3. Dial. 
 
 230. 
 SurrdCa, Char. 143, 7. 
 5ii^<£cii, contracted 137, 3. 
 Siai 230. 
 
 Siiixa. iSiixaStov 162. 
 Soaa-aaro 230. 
 5oK€w 165, 3. 
 5ouire« 230. 
 5^(E<», formation of tenses 
 
 131, 3. 
 APEMG see Tpexf- 
 SivoLfjiai 179, 2. Accent 
 
 176, 1. Dial. 230. 
 Sui/a>, Sia 158, 2. Dial. 
 230. 
 
 'Eacfftl) see SiTTM 230. 
 
 ^ciw, Aug. 122, 3. For- 
 mation of tenses 129, 
 B. 1. 
 
 eyeipa Pf. with Att. E«d. 
 124, 2, (b) ; Pf II. with 
 variable vowel 140, 4. 
 Aor. II. M. 155, 1. 
 Dial. 230. 
 
 'ZTKa, see <p4pu. 
 
 iyxeip^c, Aug. 126, 5. 
 
 ejw, see itrita. 
 
 e^o^uai, see Ko^i^ft). 
 
 lSr€\a> 166, 8 
 
 ^a.'Ca, Aug. 122, 3. 
 
 E0n Aug.l22,3,Dial.230. 
 
 "EIAXl, see dpio!. 
 Ixoiw, Aug. 121, B. • 
 
 'EIKO, Ff roiKo, Flup. 
 
 icpKvv 140, B. 3 ; Aug. 
 
 122, 5. Inflection of 
 
 foiKa 1 95, 2. Dial. 230. 
 ef/co), ^KC&ov 162. 
 fiXeotf elXeUj efA\cu and 
 
 e'/AXa, see €!fA.ai. 
 eSXiiai 230. 
 £?Aaj 166, 9. 
 elfii 181 and 225. 
 c?/u 181 and 226. 
 e'iyvfitf see &fi<pi€yvvfju, 
 'Einn, see ^THJ-l. 
 elpyvvfii 187, 3. 
 rfpYw 187, 3. Comp. 230. 
 'EIPOMAI 166,11. Comp. 
 
 230. 
 'EIPTMI, see Ipia 230. 
 eip'LKo, see ^pio). 
 fipo) 230. 
 efo-o, Aug. 122, 3, Dial. 
 
 230. 
 eZw^a, see eM(ct>. 
 e\a.iva 158, 3. Dial. 230. 
 iK6Mf see iKaivia. 
 iKiyXu, Pf-with Att.Eed. 
 
 124, 2. 
 iKe\iC<i, Char. 143, 6. 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 'EAET0Q, see ^pxopmi. 
 k\ia<rai, Aug. 122, 3.— Pf. 
 
 with Att. Bed. 124, 2. 
 'EAKTil, see e\Ku. 
 cAkoj 166, 10. 
 eAiroi, Pf. eoXira, Plup. 
 
 M\ir«j/ 140, E. 3. Aug. 
 
 122, 5. 
 'EAn, see aipea. 
 ifiLia, formation of tenses 
 
 130, (d), 1. 
 lljLpii 225. 
 
 ^/ivflfjLVKe, see iifiua. 
 ^fiirlTrXtjfii 177, 5. 
 ivapi(a, Char. 143, 6. 
 ^vaum, Pass, with o- 131,2. 
 ■ENE0Q, see ivi\voAa. 
 'ENEKXl, see tpepai. 
 iv^Trta, see ^prifjii. Comp. 
 
 230. 
 iirltvoAa 230. 
 eviiTTu 230. 
 eVj/ETTw, see (^T7iuf. Comp. 
 
 230. 
 evyufjii, see &iJL<l>i€yyvfA.t, 
 
 Comp. 230. 
 Ivoxf^^^i Aug. 126, 1. 
 Fouca, see 'EIKH. Comp. 
 
 230. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 eopya, see 'EPril. 
 
 koprd^ca, Aug. 122, S 
 
 ^irafo! 230. 
 
 ivavpiaKw 230. 
 
 iveiyofiM 197, B. 2. 
 
 iiriStiJix.4a, Aug. 126, 
 
 iTriaraiMi 179, 3. ! 
 230. 
 
 cTTiB, Aug. 122, 3. O 
 230. 
 
 epafiat 179, 4. 
 
 ^f>(£(k; see epafiou, 
 
 ipydCoiuu, Aug. 122, 
 
 €p7iu 230. 
 
 'EPrn, pJip. itipyuv 
 5. — ^Perf. witli vari 
 vowel 140, K. 3. 
 epSoj see 'EPrn. C< 
 
 230. 
 epeiSai, perf. witli 
 
 Bed. 124, 2. Dial. 
 Ipeiirca 230. 
 ^pfVo-w 143, 3. 
 iptSaiyu 230. 
 tpifai 230. 
 'EPOMAI see 'EIP. 
 epirv^cOj epTTtUj Aug. 12 
 mia 166, 12. Dial. 2c 
 4pvyydv(t> 160, 13. 
 ipvSialva 230. 
 ^piiKw 230. 
 spvfjuu see ^pu« 230. 
 cpuco, foimation of te 
 223, 1. Comp. 230. 
 %pXopittA 167, 2. Cc 
 
 230. 
 eo-afo), eo-aa 167, 3. 
 €<rTioio, Aug. 122, 3. 
 ci^aSe see avSivie. Cc 
 
 230. 
 €u5tu see KcAevZto. 
 eiipicTKo: 161, 11. 
 ei/XOfoi Aug. 121, B. 
 4xAdvop,ai see aTrex^- 
 eXM 166, 14. Comp. 
 £^co 166, 15. 
 
 Zda, contract. 137 
 
 Comp. $i6<D. 
 ^hvviu 184, 2. Comp. 
 ^fvyvvm 187, 4. 
 ^e'w, formation of te 
 
 130, (1), d. 
 ^ttii/vvfj.1 186, 1. 
 
 riPaSKa, rjPda, 161, ] 
 rryepf^oimi see 47 
 Comp. 230. 
 
INDEX FOR THE FORMS OP VERBS. 
 
 617 
 
 ioficu soo aXpa. Comp. 
 10. 
 
 190. Dial. 230. 
 toToy see a/j-aprdyaj. 
 178, R. 3. 
 I 230. 
 
 rw, Char. <p 143, 1. 
 ) see 4&4\a. 
 luu. 230. 
 
 154, 2; contract. 137 
 Comp. Tpi-xfio, 
 'a 230. 
 in 230. 
 dvba 160, 14. 
 », formation of tenses 
 0, (c). 
 
 ■Ku 161,13.Comp.230. 
 Tw from Tapc^TTw 156, 
 
 0) Pass, with <r 131,3. 
 KiCio, Char. 223, 5. 
 TW, Char. <(> 143, 1. 
 ■Ku 161, 14. 156, 2. 
 ial. 230. 
 
 and S-ua 158, 4. 
 
 formation of tenses 
 0, (b) 2. 
 
 », contract. 137, 11. 
 Dial. 230. . 
 
 I see K<i&l(a. 
 ee KoSri^ta. 
 180. Dial. 230. 
 
 «ai, Iko) 159, 2. See 
 iKveo/iai. Comp. 230. 
 iOfjLtti 161, 15. 
 MI 230. 
 see ii\u, 
 rm, Char. 143, 3. 
 230. 
 
 II 175. 
 
 dva, a, in format.149, 
 
 2. 
 
 fofioi and tfrxofMi 
 
 ; viritrxv^o^iit' 
 
 IQ €£)ui. 
 
 , KAIA-, see Kai- 
 
 Ml. 
 
 oiiat, Aug. 126, 3. 
 
 ov/iDu 154, 5. 
 
 S» 166, 13. 
 
 uu, Aug. 126, 3. 
 
 iuu see /cad'/^'^. 
 
 iBi 230. 
 
 Kia 154, 2. Dial. 
 
 Ka\ea, fonnation of ten- 
 ses 130, (d) 2: Opt. 
 Plup. M. or. P. i54, 8; 
 metath. in Pf. 156, 2. 
 
 Kdfivu 149, 5, and 158, 10. 
 Dial. 230. 
 
 Kd/iwTa Pf. M. or P. 144, 
 E. 2. 
 
 Karriyapea, Aug. 126, 5. 
 
 KcEw see Kola. 
 
 KeT^ai 189. Dial. 230. 
 
 Ketpa 230. 
 
 KEIfl see Ke7fiai. 
 
 kcAevw, Pass, with (T, 
 131,2. 
 
 K4K\a 230. 
 
 K4\oij.at 230. 
 
 KEKTEOI 230. 
 
 Kcpivvviii 183, 1. Dial. 
 
 230. 
 KepSaiya, a in format.149, 
 R. 2. Pf. I. Act. 149, 6. 
 Comp. 230. 
 KeiAa 230. 
 
 K^5a> 166, 17. Dial. 230. 
 KlSya/ial 230. 
 Kiyvfuu 230. 
 Kipydui 230. 
 Kt^dvo}, -of/,at 230. 
 kIxpvI" 177, 1. 
 k/» 230. 
 
 Khayydyw 160, 8. 
 K\i^fw, Char. 77 143, 8. 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 KAo/ai 154, 2 and 166, 18. 
 KKdm formation of tenses 
 
 130, (c). 
 KKeiai Pass, with cr 131,3. 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 kXcttib, Char, tt 143, 1. 
 TP. M., A. II. P. 140, 2. 
 Pf. I. and Pf. M. or P. 
 140, 5. 
 K\ea 230. 
 K\7jfft), kXt/w sec K\eiai 
 
 230. 
 ic\(yu, Pf. A. and M. or 
 P. and A. I. P. 149, 7. 
 and E. 4. 
 /tAt5(i) 230. 
 
 Kvaia Pass, with o- 131, 2. 
 Ky(^w Pass, with (T 131, 2. 
 
 contract. 137, 3. 
 Kvtia-ffce, Char. 143, 3. 
 Koi^, Char. 143, 6. 
 Koi\aiva, a in fonn. 149, 
 
 E. 2. 
 KO\(ii!a,Pass.with <r 131, 3. 
 
 KiiTTu, Char. IT, 143, 1 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 Kdiiyyvfu 182. Dial. 230. 
 Koriu 230. 
 KpdCa, Char. 7 143, 6; 
 
 Perf. 194, E. Comp 
 
 230. 
 Kpaivta 230. 
 Kpe/Mfuu 179, 5. 
 Kpcfidyyvfu 183, 2. 
 Kpiya Pf. A. and M. or 
 
 P. and A. I. P. 149, 7, 
 
 and B. 4. 
 Kpoia, Pass.with a- 131,3. 
 
 KpilTTTU 143, 1. 
 
 Kpii(a!, Char. 143, 6. 
 KrdoiJM, Red. 123, R. 1 ; 
 
 Subj. Pf. and Opt. 
 
 Plup. 154, 8. 
 uretyviu 188, 2. 
 KTfiyo), F. KTeya. A. I. eic- 
 
 Tciyaj (A 11. ^Krayov 
 
 doubtful in prose) ; Pf. 
 
 A. cKTora 141, 4; Pf. 
 
 P. eKTafjLcu and Aor. 
 
 P. ixTOdriv (iKTdyb-riv 
 
 in later writers) 149, 
 
 E. 3. Poet, and Dial 
 
 230. 
 Kriyyvfii sec icreivviii, 
 KTVirdto 165, 4. 
 ki/aA», Pass with o- 131, 2 
 Kvyew 159, 3. 
 KupeUf k6pu 230. 
 
 Aa7xi^i«» 160, 15. Dial. 
 230. 
 
 AAZTMAI 230. 
 
 Xaii^dyai 160, 16. Dial. 
 230. 
 
 \avSidva 160, 17. Dial. 
 230. 
 
 KdffKa 230. 
 
 \67a), (a) to say, without 
 Pf. A.; Pf. M. K4Kcr 
 fiai. A. P. iK^x^y. — 
 (b) to collect, and in 
 compounds Pf. eiKoxtit 
 M. or P. et\eynai 140, 
 5 ; Aug. 123, 3 ; A. II. 
 P. i\eyriv and A. I. P. 
 140,E.l. Comp.AEXQ. 
 
 \elTra, A. iKiirov, Pf. IL 
 \i\onm 140, 4. A. II 
 A. and P. 141, 3. cor- 
 responding form 160, 
 18. 
 
 XeVdi, A. II.-P. 14C, B.I 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
616 
 
 INDEX FOR THE FOKMS OF VERBS. 
 
 Af uKafytOifi in for.149, K. 2. 
 Ksixraai, Cliar. 143, 3. 
 Kciai, Pass, with o- 131,2. 
 AEXn 230. 
 KifiTTavot see XeiVw. 
 MfidiTTa, Char, t 143, 3. 
 KWaoinai, Char. 143, 3. 
 Aoi;a), contract. 137, 5. 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 Kvimivoiidi Pf. M. or P. 
 
 149, 8. 
 \i!eD, formation of tenses 
 
 130, (b) 2. Dial. 230, 
 
 Mati/Oyuai 230. 
 fjLalof/.aL 230. 
 
 ^ai'aaj/«160,19. Dial.230. 
 fj-apva/^al 230. 
 fjiaprvpeto 165, 5. 
 ^idffffu. Char. 7 143, 1. 
 ittoo-T/fw, Char. 143, 6. 
 fidxa/ML 166, 19. Dial. 
 
 230. 
 MAD 230. 
 fie^itTKat 161, 16. 
 fxeipofjiai 230. 
 
 fttVi 166,21. Dial.230. 
 HeA\(» 166, 20. 
 ficAu see /i€'A€(. Comp. 
 
 230. 
 iAivotvdo) 230. 
 /ieVu 149, 5; 166, R. 2. 
 
 Comp. MAO. 
 pL€Taix4Kei, fji.eTaixi\o/jtat, 
 
 166,21. 
 Ii€pfiiipi(a, Char. 223, 5. 
 HTlK6ofj.at 230. 
 ^iiaii/lOy filrjvaij puayal 149, 
 
 R. 2. Pf. Act. iJ.ep.layKa 
 
 149, 6. Pf. M. or P. 
 
 Ii.efjiiatiii.ai. 149, 8. Dial. 
 
 230. 
 p-lyvvpii 187, 5. Dial. 230. 
 /ai/iv^o-KM Subj. Pf. and 
 
 Opt. Plpf. M. 154, 8; 
 
 161, 17. 
 fiiffyai see fiiyj/vfii. 
 fio\odpuu see ^KiaffKK. 
 lioXiya Pf. M. or P.149, 1. 
 liiCca, to suck, 166, 22. 
 fiiCa, to groan, 143, 7. 
 fiVKiiofiat 230. 
 fiiJo;, formation of tenses 
 
 130, (b) 1. 
 
 Nofoi 230. 
 yiaaai 143, 4, 
 veiKCb 230. 
 
 ve((r(rofiai see vla-a-o/Mi. 
 
 yefjLO} 166, R. 2. 
 
 ye'iu 154, 2. 
 
 j/EM (j-^aai). Pass, with 
 
 o- 131,3. 
 ce'iB, Pf. M. or P. with 
 
 and without o- 131, 3. 
 viaaopuu, Char. 143, 3. 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 voea contract. 205, 5. 
 vvffTi^ai 143, 7. 
 
 Hew, formation of tenses 
 
 130, (d) 1. 
 i,-qpaivoi Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 
 |i5pew 165, 6. 
 \va. Pass, with tr, 131, 2. 
 
 'OStffm, Char. 143, 6. 
 oSva-aiT&ai see 'OATS- 
 
 20MAI 230. 
 oCa .*6, 23. 
 olaxlCu Aug. 122, 1. 
 otyyvfii, otyta see avoiy, 
 oTSa see jpciiu. Comp. 
 
 230. 
 oi5aij/w, oiSdyw, olStiu 
 
 160, 9. 
 olKovp^u 122, 2. 
 o?jLtai see oiojxai. 
 olpLaa 122, 2. 
 ot/X(£^w 143, 6. 
 oiVifai 122, 2. 
 oivoxoew 219, 5. 
 oiVliM, Aug. 122, 2. 
 o"o;nail66,24. Comp. 230. 
 ot6u, ol<iti^Tjv 122, 1. 
 oiVrpe'ia 122, 2. 
 otxop.ai 166, 25. 
 olfo) see otofiai and ^eoo;. 
 oAio-Aoj/o) 160, 10. 
 iKKviJ.1 182, B. 
 6\o\i(ai, Char. 143, 6. 
 6fiapT4u, Epic d/xapT'fiTTjv 
 
 222, R. 1. 
 oficuni 182, B. 
 6p.oKKdoi, Epic dfj.oKKeoi' 
 
 222, I. A, (2). 
 ofi6pyyvfii 187, 7. 
 'OMOfl see ofivvfu. 
 oyetpc^TTw 143, 3. 
 oylif7]fjLt 177, 4. 
 Sfuuai 230. 
 'OnTfl see 6p({ai. 
 apoai 167, 4. 230. 
 op^ofyw, d in form. 149. 
 
 R. 2. 
 'OPErNTMI 230. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 opeyw 230. 
 Spyv/u 230. 
 opiaaa, Cliar. y H. 
 
 Pf withAtt.Red.l: 
 b(r<j>paiyofj.ai 160, 11. 1 
 
 230. 
 oatppcia'^at see otrtpp. 
 
 ^ai. 
 oipeio, Aug. 122, 4. 
 oiTdai 230. 
 o^eiAM 166, 26. D 
 
 230. 
 ofeWa 230. 
 oipXuTKdya IGO, 12. 
 
 na/fcB, Char. 143, 7. 
 irafo 166, 27. 
 TraXala Pass.with a 13 
 iroAAo) 230. 
 Tapayofieoj, Aug. 126, 
 irapoiysa, Aug. 126, 1 
 TTapo^ivu Pf. M. or 
 
 149, 8. 
 irdiraa. Char. 143, 3. 
 Troo-xo) 161, 18. Dial.: 
 iraTeofiou 230. 
 Ta^to, A. P. with tr 13 
 jToxiivw Pf- M.or P. 14 
 TTsi^u, Pf. II. wem 
 
 140, 4. Dial. 230. 
 ireii/aoj, contract. 137, 
 w6KT6W,7reKTftj,Tre/Kft> 14 
 Tre\d(a 230. 
 5r6\€fiffw, Char. 223, ! 
 iripmiii, Pf I. and Pf. 
 
 or P. 140, 5. 
 XIENSQ, see irdaxto. 
 'KeKoXva, 6. in the fon 
 
 149, R. 2. 
 irepaiyto, d in fonn.149 
 
 2; Pf M. or P. 14C 
 Ttpda, formation of 1 
 
 ses 130, (c). 
 Ttipia 166, 28. 
 irepSra 230. 
 TreTayyvpLi 183, 3. 
 TTiTopiai syncopated i 
 
 inT6pi.r]y 155 j 166, 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 ITETXl see irl-XTO}. 
 TT^ii^ofj.ai, see iruy^dyo 
 Treipyoy, Hve<i>vov 230. 
 ■n-fiyvufii 187, 8. Dial.: 
 ir/Aj/a/xai 230. 
 Tr//i5rAi7fii 177, 5. Dial.; 
 TrifiirpTjfii 177, 6. 
 ir/;/ft) 158, 5. 
 TrnriffKQi 161, 19. 
 
INDEX FOR THE FORMS OF VERBS. 
 
 619 
 
 rKm 161, 20. 
 163, 3. Dial. 230. 
 i)230. 
 
 I, Chai-. 77 143, 8. 
 
 0, see TreKti^te, 
 r«, Char. 143, 3. 
 
 I A n. P. 140, K. 1. 
 formation of ten- 
 154, 2 ; contract. 
 
 ,1. 
 
 r», Char, y 143, 1 ; 
 
 II. P. 140, E. 2. 
 
 ., Pf. A. and M. or 
 
 1. P. 149, 7 andB.4. 
 230. 
 
 formation of ten- 
 154, 2; contract. 
 
 ', 1- 
 
 I, format, of tenses 
 
 I, (d), 2. 
 
 i^a. Char. 223, 5. 
 
 ', format, of tenses 
 
 I, (d), 2. [143, 1. 
 
 r«, vptiTTUf Char. 7 
 
 »ai 179, 6. 
 
 Pass, with a 131,2. 
 
 ilioviiM, Aug. 126,5. 
 
 , Pass, with <r 131,2. 
 
 rw 230. 
 
 ■a 143, 3. 
 
 130, (b), 1. 
 
 'lya/uu 160, 20. 
 
 ,PfM. orP.149,8; 
 il. 230. 
 
 1, Char. <p 143, 1. 
 Char. 143, 6. 
 see ^pSu 230. 
 bnnation of tenses 
 I, 2 and 192, 7. 
 see (^77)uf. 
 )iii 187, 9. 
 230. 
 
 , contract. 137, 3. 
 , Char. <p 143, 1. 
 I, Ked. 219, 6. 
 ;f(i), Char. 143, 5, 
 ^i 186, 2. 
 
 [fa, Char. 77 143, 8 
 
 230. 
 
 v/JLi 184, 4. 
 
 Pass, with 0- 131, 2. 
 
 230. 
 
 140, R. 2. 
 
 va, 9) and d in for- 
 
 t. 149, 11.2; Pf M. 
 
 >, 8. 
 
 <TK&irTa, Char. (^ 143, 1. 
 dKiSii/wiu 182, and 183,4. 
 (r/ccAAa, ffK^Kea 166, 30. 
 cr/cfSf^a/ial 230. 
 eriiJm, contract. 137, 3. 
 ffovrai, ffovtro {trou), see 
 
 fTelJa. 
 (nri^cii, format, of tenses 
 
 130, (c). 
 aTrelpa, Pf. ^trircpa 140, 4. 
 ffireySo) 144, R. 1. 
 iTTiifa, Char. 143, 6. 
 irTo\(iC». Char. 143, 6. 
 OTiKKa, A. II. P. 140, 2. 
 (TTcycifa, Char. 143, 6. 
 aripyu, Pf. II. eaTopya 
 
 140, 4. 
 arepiiTKU, trrepeu) 161, 21. 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 <rT6p(fa>, Char. 143, 6. 
 (TTifio, Char. 143, 6. 
 (TTopEwyfiiiO'Tifpi'u/iu 184,5. 
 <rTpe(|)M A. II. P. 140, 2. 
 
 Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
 a-Tpcivmiii 182 and 186, 3. 
 trrvyew 230. 
 iruKia, Ep. auXir-nv 222, 
 
 R. 1. 
 ffvpi^oi {(rvpiTTu)y Cliar. 
 
 143, 6. 
 a-(jiii(a, ai^iTTa, Char. 7 
 
 143, 1 and 6. 
 a-^iyya, Char. 144, R. 2. 
 a-ifiiCoi, Char. 143, 6. 
 (TXi^M, format, of tenses 
 
 130, (c). 
 (rx"C"> Char. 143, 5. 
 crii^a, see ffa6a 230. 
 
 TArn 230. 
 
 TAAAQ 230. 
 
 Tociia, format, of tenses 
 
 223, 1. Comp. 230. 
 Tapdffffa, dpoLTTOi 156, R. 
 
 Dial. 230. 
 rdffffai, rdTTio, Char. 7 
 
 143, 1. 
 Teivw 149, R. 3. 
 Te\€'a, format, of tenses 
 
 130, (d), 1. 
 Tsiil/ai 158, 11. 
 TEMQ 230. 
 Tepirto 230. 
 rerfwy, see TEMfl. 
 TCTpa/va 163, 4. 
 TeiJxw 230. 
 T^KM 140, R. 2. 
 TIEn 230. 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
 rlSmiiu 175. 
 
 t/ktm 143, 2. 
 
 tIvvviu 185 ; Comp, 230 
 
 rft/a) 158, 6. 
 
 TIT pace 163, 4, 
 
 riTpiaioi) 161, 22 
 
 Tto 158, 6. 
 
 TAAil, 194, 4. 
 
 tA^j/oi 177, 7. 
 
 Tli.iiym 230. 
 
 Tpaxiyu Pf.M. or P. 149,8. 
 
 Toe'irw, variable vowel in 
 A. n. Act. M. P. 140, 
 2; A.I.Act.M.P.141, 
 3: Pf. I. Act. and Pf. 
 M. or P. 140, 5, 6. 
 Verb. Adj. rpeirrSs and 
 with middle sense 
 rpainjTeos* 
 
 rpeipa, Pf. rerpofa 140, 
 4. Pf. M. or P. 140, 6. 
 A. L P. i^p4<p^y, ra- 
 rer than A. II. P. irpd- 
 (priv 140, 2. Dial. 230. 
 verb Adj. &pcirT6s. 
 
 rp4xa> 167, 5. 
 
 Tpiu, format, of tenses 
 130, (d), 1. 
 
 Tp(fw, Char. 7 143, 6. 
 
 Tu7xa^a 160, 21. 
 
 TlJlTTW 166, 31. 
 
 'TirefivlinuKe see ^/luu 230. 
 viriffxv^oiuu 159, 4. 
 uTT^/i^TTW, Char. 143, 3. 
 Sm, formation of tenses 
 with a- 131, 2. 
 
 *Arn see €<rMa.» 
 ^aivu, Pf. M. or P. 149, 8. 
 
 Pf. II. iriifniva 149, 9. 
 
 151. Dial. 236. 
 ^dsKoi 161, 23. 
 (pelSoiuu 230. t 
 
 *ENn see Trecpyov 230. 
 i^e'pa 167, 6. comp. 230 
 tpeiym see ^ir/7<£>'ii). coiup. 
 
 230. 
 ijynfii 167, 7, 178. 
 d>S)dya 158, 7. Dial. 230. 
 cpStilpo,, A. II. P. 140, 2. 
 
 Pf.II.140,4. comp.230. 
 i/>&fcw 158, 8. Dial. 230. 
 <f>i\eB 135. Dial. 230. 
 .(>AeV.A. n.P.140,R. 1. 
 ^\v(a> Char. 143, 6. 
 Ipondai, Ep. tponifT'riv 222; 
 
 R. 1. 
 
620 
 
 INDEX FOR THE FORMS OP VERBS. 
 
 tipiyvvfu 187, 10. 
 ippdQa 148. Dial. 230. 
 <t>pd<r{ra. Char, y 143, 1. 
 ippea, formatioti of ten- 
 ses, 131, 2. 
 ippliTcra, Char. it. 143, 1. 
 fvyydtfa ((^eiJytu) 160, 23. 
 ipvpu 230. 
 ipia 192, 11. .comp. 230. 
 
 KiCo/iai 230. 
 
 Xaipa 166, 32. comp. 230. 
 
 Xa\i£u, formation of ten- 
 ses 130, (c). 
 
 XevSiyu 160, 23. comp. 
 230. 
 
 xdiTKU 161, 24. 
 
 X^Ca,, Char. S 143, 5 ; Pf. 
 ir; Ke'xoSa 140, 4. S"ut. 
 Xeo'ovfiai 154, 3. A. II. 
 Act. according to the 
 analogy of A. 1. 154, 8. 
 
 Xe", formation of tenses 
 154, R 1. 230. 
 
 X^f, Pass, with a- 131, 2. 
 
 Xpdoiiai, formation of 
 tenses 129, E. 2.; A.P. 
 with o- 131, 4; con- 
 tract. 137, 3. 
 
 Xpdii formation of ten- 
 ses 129, B. 2 ; contract. 
 137, 3. 
 
 Xpil 177, 2. 
 
 Xpl", formation of I 
 
 130, (a). 
 Xp^fyv/u 186, 4. 
 
 'Vaia, Pass, with <r ] 
 TJ/ioi, Pass, with <r l; 
 
 contract. 137, 3. 
 ii4ya, A. II. P. 140, 
 iixa,A.U.F. 141, 
 
 w»e'w 165, 7. 
 oiyeofuu, Aug. 
 comp. ToWdsi. 
 
 12: 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
D. APPLETON ilh CO:S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 Harkness's Elements of Latin Grammar. 
 
 This work is intended especially for those who do not contemplate 
 a collegiate course, but it may be successfully used in any school where, 
 for special reasons, a small grammar is deemed desirable. The beginner 
 needs to store his mind at^the outset with the laws of the language in 
 such forms of statement as he can carry -with him throughout his whole 
 course of study. The convenience and interest of the student in this 
 regard have been carefully consulted in the preparation of this manual 
 All the paradigms, rules, and discussions, have been introduced in the 
 exact language of the author's Grammar, by which it may at any time 
 be supplemented. While, therefore, in many schools this work will be 
 found a sufficient Latin Grammar, it may be used in others, either as 
 preparatory to the larger Grammar, or in connection with it. 
 
 No separate references to this volume will ever be needed in editions 
 of Latin authors, as the numberuag of the articles is the' same as in the 
 larger Grammar. 
 
 Fr&m Pres. Coblkigu, Tennessee Wesley- 
 an "" ' 
 
 "This work is very timely. I regard 
 It as indispensable in manv schools in the 
 South." 
 
 From Prof. tP". II. Tottng, Ohio Utvl' 
 
 " I most heartily commend this work. 
 I have for some time felt its need. It 
 seems to make your Latin course com- 
 plete." 
 
 Ffom Prof. C. G. Hudson, Genesee Wes- 
 l&ymi Sem,i/nwry^ Lima, JN'. Y. 
 
 " I can heartily recommend it. I think 
 that it is superior to all rivals.'' 
 
 ^om Prof. H. D. "Walkee, Orangemille 
 Acadmiyy Pa. 
 
 "In my opinion, no work of Professor 
 HarknesB will be more widely used, or 
 more valuable than this. It supplies a 
 want long felt by teachers. It is clear, 
 thorough, and sufficiently extended for 
 ordinary students." 
 
 From Prof. S. H. Manlet, ComeU Col- 
 lege, Iowa. 
 
 **I think it one of the finest eompendi- 
 ums of grammar I- have ever seen. It 
 must prove of great service as a prepara- 
 tory drill-book." 
 
 From Prof. L. P. Pabker, Iowa 
 
 "I feel under personal obligation foi 
 this new incentive and aid to classical 
 study." 
 
 From H. F. Lane, IligJi School^ Temple- 
 ton, Mass. 
 
 "It is &mctl/i/ adapted to our wants. 
 "We use all of Harkness's books — Gram- 
 mar, Eeader, and Composition. We con- 
 sider them emphatically ' the best.' " 
 
 From Prof. J. A. Kellee, 
 College, Ohio. 
 
 " I was surprised to find so ftiU an out- 
 hne of Latin Grammar compi-ised mthin 
 such narrow limits." 
 
 From Prof. M. B. Beown, Hfotre Da/m^ 
 
 "In my opinion, it is just the book 
 which has long been needed. It is a book 
 to be learned entvre, and is complete as far 
 as it goes. Prof. Harkness deserves the 
 thanks both of students and teachers." 
 
 FV'om Eev. B. 6. NoETnaop, 
 
 of Board of Fducation, Corm,. 
 
 " I am highly pleased with Harkness's 
 Elements of Latin Grammar. Its brevity 
 commends it for beginners and for all 
 contemplatiog a partM Latin coursd of 
 study.'* 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
n. APPLETOir & CO? S PUBLICATIONS. 
 
 Harkness's Csesar. 
 
 This edition of Csesar's Commentaries, intended to follow the Latin 
 Reader, aims to introduce the student to an appreciative study of Latin 
 authors. The text is the result of a careful collation of the several edi- 
 tions most approved by European scholars. The notes are intended to 
 guide the faithful efforts of the learner, and*to furnish him such collateral 
 information as will enable him to understand the stirring events recorded 
 in the Commentaries, and such special aid as will enable him to surmount 
 real difficulties of construction and idiom. They will thus, it is hoped, 
 render an acceptable service both to the instructor and the learner, by 
 lightening the burden of the one, and by promoting the progress of the 
 other. The dictionary has been prepared with special reference to the 
 wants of the student. 
 
 The Life of Csesar, the Map of Gaul, and the diagrams and illustra- 
 tions which ac'company the notes, will greatly add to the value of the 
 work. 
 
 From Pres. Aikin, JJnion CoUtge^ N, Y. 
 
 " This edition of the Commentaries is 
 admirably suited, not merely to give the 
 student an acquaintance with his immedi- 
 ate text-book, but also to develop those 
 habits of investigation, that thoughtfulness 
 in regard to the scope of the whole subject, 
 and that style of vigorous, tasteful, and 
 idiomatic rendering, which are among the 
 rarest, as they are certainly among the 
 most important, results of classical study." 
 
 From B. H. Tatior, LL.D., 
 
 " The notes are prepared with a judici- 
 ous appreciation of the wants of the pupil. 
 They show the hajid of the finished schomr, 
 as well as of the experienced teacher." 
 
 From Prof. TV". A. Packakd, PHnceton 
 
 " The notes are models of what the be- 
 ginner needs to interest and guide him. 
 The text is furnished with the best illus- 
 trations in the way of maps and plans." 
 
 From Prof. "W. T. JoirasoN, J^otre Dame 
 Vivi/versiij/, Tnd. 
 "This is certainly an excellent text- 
 book — superior to any other edition of the 
 Commenfeiries now in use." 
 
 From Pres. McEldowwet, Albion Col- 
 lege, Miclt. 
 "This is the moat valuable edition of 
 Ciesar with which I am acquainted." 
 
 From Prof. H. "W. Hatnes, Um-versity of 
 Vermont. 
 
 "Never before have I seen such a lucid 
 and simple explanation of Csesar''s bridge 
 across the Ehine." 
 
 From Prof. C. 8. Hakkieigton, Wealeyan 
 Um/c&rsiti/, Ot 
 
 "The student who uses this edition 
 must read Csesar with a lively relish." 
 
 From Prof. "W. A. Stevens, Denison Vhv 
 'versity^ OMo. 
 
 " The notes are gotten up on the righ^ 
 principle, and are greatly superior to those 
 of similar works in England." 
 
 From Prof. J. E. Gintker, Ott&rhevn Um- 
 'veraity^ OMo. 
 
 " This is the only edition of Caesar rec- 
 ommended to om* classes." 
 
 From, A. D. Sandboen, Wilton Seminary, 
 Iowa. 
 "I know of no work of the kind in 
 which the not«s so iully meet the wants 
 of both teacher and pupil. I am delighted 
 with the Life of Csesar." 
 
 From Prof. S. Hassell, State Fform^ 
 Un/i/versity, I>el. 
 
 "This edition of Csesar is superior to 
 all others published in this country. Tha 
 biographical sketch of the Eoman com' 
 mander is a splendid production." 
 
 Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft® 
 
Digitized by Microsoft®